---
title: "Middle Discourses · Majjhima Nikāya"
author: "The Buddha"
translator: "Bhikkhu Sujato"
languages: [pi, en]
shelf: "Pali Canon"
url: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/
cite: "The Buddha, tr. Bhikkhu Sujato, Middle Discourses · Majjhima Nikāya. Scriptura (scriptura.si), https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/"
---
# Middle Discourses · Majjhima Nikāya
*The Buddha, tr. Bhikkhu Sujato*
The 152 middle-length discourses: the simile of the saw, the snake and the raft, mindfulness of breathing, Aṅgulimāla, and the Buddha’s own account of his awakening.
> Pali: the Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka (Buddha Jayanti edition, 2500), from SuttaCentral’s bilara-data, dedicated to the public domain (CC0).
> English: Bhikkhu Sujato, from SuttaCentral’s bilara-data, dedicated to the public domain (CC0). Notes are not included.
> Rows follow the segment numbers the two texts share, gathered into paragraphs; verse keeps its lines.
## Contents
1. [MN 1 · The Root of All Things](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/1.md)
2. [MN 2 · All the Defilements](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/2.md)
3. [MN 3 · Heirs in the Teaching](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/3.md)
4. [MN 4 · Fear and Dread](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/4.md)
5. [MN 5 · Unblemished](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/5.md)
6. [MN 6 · One Might Wish](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/6.md)
7. [MN 7 · The Simile of the Cloth](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/7.md)
8. [MN 8 · Self-Effacement](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/8.md)
9. [MN 9 · Right View](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/9.md)
10. [MN 10 · Mindfulness Meditation](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/10.md)
11. [MN 11 · The Shorter Discourse on the Lion’s Roar](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/11.md)
12. [MN 12 · The Longer Discourse on the Lion’s Roar · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/12.md)
13. [MN 12 · The Longer Discourse on the Lion’s Roar · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/13.md)
14. [MN 13 · The Longer Discourse on the Mass of Suffering](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/14.md)
15. [MN 14 · The Shorter Discourse on the Mass of Suffering](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/15.md)
16. [MN 16 · Hard-heartedness](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/16.md)
17. [MN 17 · Jungle Thickets](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/17.md)
18. [MN 18 · The Honey-Cake](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/18.md)
19. [MN 19 · Two Kinds of Thought](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/19.md)
20. [MN 20 · How to Stop Thinking](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/20.md)
21. [MN 21 · The Simile of the Saw](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/21.md)
22. [MN 22 · The Simile of the Cobra · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/22.md)
23. [MN 22 · The Simile of the Cobra · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/23.md)
24. [MN 23 · The Termite Mound](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/24.md)
25. [MN 24 · Chariots at the Ready](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/25.md)
26. [MN 25 · Sowing](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/26.md)
27. [MN 26 · The Noble Quest · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/27.md)
28. [MN 26 · The Noble Quest · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/28.md)
29. [MN 27 · The Shorter Simile of the Elephant’s Footprint](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/29.md)
30. [MN 28 · The Longer Simile of the Elephant’s Footprint](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/30.md)
31. [MN 29 · The Longer Simile of the Heartwood](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/31.md)
32. [MN 30 · The Shorter Simile of the Heartwood](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/32.md)
33. [MN 31 · The Shorter Discourse at Gosiṅga](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/33.md)
34. [MN 32 · The Longer Discourse at Gosiṅga](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/34.md)
35. [MN 33 · The Longer Discourse on the Cowherd](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/35.md)
36. [MN 34 · The Shorter Discourse on the Cowherd](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/36.md)
37. [MN 35 · The Shorter Discourse With Saccaka](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/37.md)
38. [MN 36 · The Longer Discourse With Saccaka · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/38.md)
39. [MN 36 · The Longer Discourse With Saccaka · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/39.md)
40. [MN 37 · The Shorter Discourse on the Ending of Craving](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/40.md)
41. [MN 38 · The Longer Discourse on the Ending of Craving · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/41.md)
42. [MN 38 · The Longer Discourse on the Ending of Craving · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/42.md)
43. [MN 39 · The Longer Discourse at Assapura](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/43.md)
44. [MN 40 · The Shorter Discourse at Assapura](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/44.md)
45. [MN 41 · The People of Sālā](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/45.md)
46. [MN 43 · The Great Elaboration](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/46.md)
47. [MN 44 · The Shorter Elaboration](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/47.md)
48. [MN 45 · The Shorter Discourse on Taking Up Practices](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/48.md)
49. [MN 46 · The Great Discourse on Taking Up Practices](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/49.md)
50. [MN 47 · The Inquirer](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/50.md)
51. [MN 48 · The Mendicants of Kosambī](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/51.md)
52. [MN 49 · On the Invitation of Divinity](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/52.md)
53. [MN 50 · The Warning to Māra](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/53.md)
54. [MN 51 · With Kandaraka](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/54.md)
55. [MN 52 · The Wealthy Citizen](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/55.md)
56. [MN 53 · A Trainee](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/56.md)
57. [MN 54 · With Potaliya the Householder](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/57.md)
58. [MN 55 · With Jīvaka](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/58.md)
59. [MN 56 · With Upāli · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/59.md)
60. [MN 56 · With Upāli · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/60.md)
61. [MN 57 · The Ascetic Who Behaved Like a Dog](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/61.md)
62. [MN 58 · With Prince Abhaya](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/62.md)
63. [MN 59 · The Many Kinds of Feeling](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/63.md)
64. [MN 60 · A Sure Bet · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/64.md)
65. [MN 60 · A Sure Bet · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/65.md)
66. [MN 61 · Advice to Rāhula at Ambalaṭṭhika](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/66.md)
67. [MN 62 · The Longer Advice to Rāhula](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/67.md)
68. [MN 63 · The Shorter Discourse With Māluṅkyaputta](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/68.md)
69. [MN 64 · The Longer Discourse With Māluṅkya](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/69.md)
70. [MN 65 · With Bhaddāli](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/70.md)
71. [MN 66 · The Simile of the Quail](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/71.md)
72. [MN 67 · At Cātumā](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/72.md)
73. [MN 68 · At Naḷakapāna](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/73.md)
74. [MN 69 · With Gulissāni](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/74.md)
75. [MN 70 · At Kīṭāgiri](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/75.md)
76. [MN 71 · To Vacchagotta on the Three Knowledges](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/76.md)
77. [MN 72 · With Vacchagotta on Fire](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/77.md)
78. [MN 73 · The Longer Discourse With Vacchagotta](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/78.md)
79. [MN 74 · With Dīghanakha](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/79.md)
80. [MN 75 · With Māgaṇḍiya](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/80.md)
81. [MN 76 · With Sandaka · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/81.md)
82. [MN 76 · With Sandaka · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/82.md)
83. [MN 77 · The Longer Discourse with Sakuludāyī · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/83.md)
84. [MN 77 · The Longer Discourse with Sakuludāyī · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/84.md)
85. [MN 78 · With Uggāhamāna Samaṇamaṇḍikāputta](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/85.md)
86. [MN 79 · The Shorter Discourse With Sakuludāyī](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/86.md)
87. [MN 80 · With Vekhanasa](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/87.md)
88. [MN 81 · With Ghaṭīkāra](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/88.md)
89. [MN 82 · With Raṭṭhapāla · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/89.md)
90. [MN 82 · With Raṭṭhapāla · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/90.md)
91. [MN 83 · About King Maghadeva](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/91.md)
92. [MN 84 · At Madhurā](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/92.md)
93. [MN 85 · With Prince Bodhi · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/93.md)
94. [MN 85 · With Prince Bodhi · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/94.md)
95. [MN 86 · With Aṅgulimāla](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/95.md)
96. [MN 87 · Born From the Beloved](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/96.md)
97. [MN 88 · The Foreign Cloth](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/97.md)
98. [MN 89 · Shrines to the Teaching](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/98.md)
99. [MN 90 · At Kaṇṇakatthala](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/99.md)
100. [MN 91 · With Brahmāyu](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/100.md)
101. [MN 92 · With Sela](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/101.md)
102. [MN 93 · With Assalāyana](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/102.md)
103. [MN 94 · With Ghoṭamukha](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/103.md)
104. [MN 95 · With Caṅkī](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/104.md)
105. [MN 96 · With Esukārī](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/105.md)
106. [MN 97 · With Dhanañjāni](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/106.md)
107. [MN 98 · With Vāseṭṭha](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/107.md)
108. [MN 99 · With Subha](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/108.md)
109. [MN 100 · With Saṅgārava · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/109.md)
110. [MN 100 · With Saṅgārava · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/110.md)
111. [MN 101 · At Devadaha · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/111.md)
112. [MN 101 · At Devadaha · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/112.md)
113. [MN 102 · The Five and Three](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/113.md)
114. [MN 103 · Is This What You Think Of Me?](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/114.md)
115. [MN 104 · At Sāmagāma](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/115.md)
116. [MN 105 · With Sunakkhatta](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/116.md)
117. [MN 106 · Conducive to the Imperturbable](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/117.md)
118. [MN 107 · With Moggallāna the Accountant](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/118.md)
119. [MN 108 · With Moggallāna the Guardian](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/119.md)
120. [MN 109 · The Longer Discourse on the Full-Moon Night](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/120.md)
121. [MN 110 · The Shorter Discourse on the Full-Moon Night](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/121.md)
122. [MN 111 · One by One](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/122.md)
123. [MN 112 · The Sixfold Purification](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/123.md)
124. [MN 113 · A True Person](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/124.md)
125. [MN 114 · What Should and Should Not Be Cultivated · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/125.md)
126. [MN 114 · What Should and Should Not Be Cultivated · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/126.md)
127. [MN 115 · Many Elements](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/127.md)
128. [MN 116 · At Isigili](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/128.md)
129. [MN 117 · The Great Forty](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/129.md)
130. [MN 118 · Mindfulness of Breathing](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/130.md)
131. [MN 119 · Mindfulness of the Body](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/131.md)
132. [MN 120 · Rebirth by Choice](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/132.md)
133. [MN 121 · The Shorter Discourse on Emptiness](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/133.md)
134. [MN 122 · The Longer Discourse on Emptiness](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/134.md)
135. [MN 123 · Incredible and Amazing](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/135.md)
136. [MN 124 · With Bakkula](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/136.md)
137. [MN 125 · The Level of the Tamed](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/137.md)
138. [MN 126 · With Bhūmija](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/138.md)
139. [MN 127 · With Anuruddha](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/139.md)
140. [MN 128 · Corruptions](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/140.md)
141. [MN 129 · The Foolish and the Astute · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/141.md)
142. [MN 129 · The Foolish and the Astute · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/142.md)
143. [MN 130 · Messengers of the Gods](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/143.md)
144. [MN 131 · One Fine Night](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/144.md)
145. [MN 132 · Ānanda and One Fine Night](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/145.md)
146. [MN 133 · Mahākaccāna and One Fine Night](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/146.md)
147. [MN 134 · Lomasakaṅgiya and One Fine Night](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/147.md)
148. [MN 135 · The Shorter Analysis of Deeds](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/148.md)
149. [MN 136 · The Longer Analysis of Deeds](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/149.md)
150. [MN 137 · The Analysis of the Six Sense Fields](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/150.md)
151. [MN 138 · A Summary Recital and its Analysis](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/151.md)
152. [MN 139 · The Analysis of No Strife](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/152.md)
153. [MN 140 · The Analysis of the Elements](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/153.md)
154. [MN 141 · The Analysis of the Truths](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/154.md)
155. [MN 142 · The Analysis of Religious Donations](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/155.md)
156. [MN 143 · Advice to Anāthapiṇḍika](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/156.md)
157. [MN 144 · Advice to Channa](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/157.md)
158. [MN 145 · Advice to Puṇṇa](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/158.md)
159. [MN 146 · Advice from Nandaka](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/159.md)
160. [MN 147 · The Shorter Advice to Rāhula](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/160.md)
161. [MN 148 · Six By Six](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/161.md)
162. [MN 149 · The Great Discourse on What Relates to the Six Sense Fields](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/162.md)
163. [MN 150 · With the People of Nagaravinda](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/163.md)
164. [MN 151 · The Purification of Alms](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/164.md)
165. [MN 152 · The Development of the Faculties](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/165.md)
## 1. MN 1 · The Root of All Things
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/1/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/1/#p-N
[¶0] MN 1 · The Root of All Things
> Pali: MN 1 · Mūlapariyāyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Ukkaṭṭhā in the Subhaga Forest at the root of a magnificent sal tree. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā ukkaṭṭhāyaṁ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I will teach you the explanation of the root of all things. Listen and apply your minds well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Take an unlearned ordinary person who has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They perceive earth as earth. Having perceived earth as earth, they conceive it to be earth, they conceive it in earth, they conceive it as earth, they conceive that ‘earth is mine’, they approve earth. Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto, sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto— pathaviṁ pathavito sañjānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito saññatvā pathaviṁ maññati, pathaviyā maññati, pathavito maññati, pathaviṁ meti maññati, pathaviṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶6] They perceive water as water. Having perceived water as water, they conceive it to be water … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Āpaṁ āpato sañjānāti; āpaṁ āpato saññatvā āpaṁ maññati, āpasmiṁ maññati, āpato maññati, āpaṁ meti maññati, āpaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶7] They perceive fire as fire. Having perceived fire as fire, they conceive it to be fire … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Tejaṁ tejato sañjānāti; tejaṁ tejato saññatvā tejaṁ maññati, tejasmiṁ maññati, tejato maññati, tejaṁ meti maññati, tejaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶8] They perceive air as air. Having perceived air as air, they conceive it to be air … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Vāyaṁ vāyato sañjānāti; vāyaṁ vāyato saññatvā vāyaṁ maññati, vāyasmiṁ maññati, vāyato maññati, vāyaṁ meti maññati, vāyaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶9] They perceive creatures as creatures. Having perceived creatures as creatures, they conceive them to be creatures … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Bhūte bhūtato sañjānāti; bhūte bhūtato saññatvā bhūte maññati, bhūtesu maññati, bhūtato maññati, bhūte meti maññati, bhūte abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶10] They perceive gods as gods. Having perceived gods as gods, they conceive them to be gods … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Deve devato sañjānāti; deve devato saññatvā deve maññati, devesu maññati, devato maññati, deve meti maññati, deve abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶11] They perceive the Progenitor as the Progenitor. Having perceived the Progenitor as the Progenitor, they conceive him to be the Progenitor … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Pajāpatiṁ pajāpatito sañjānāti; pajāpatiṁ pajāpatito saññatvā pajāpatiṁ maññati, pajāpatismiṁ maññati, pajāpatito maññati, pajāpatiṁ meti maññati, pajāpatiṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶12] They perceive the Divinity as the Divinity. Having perceived the Divinity as the Divinity, they conceive him to be the Divinity … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Brahmaṁ brahmato sañjānāti; brahmaṁ brahmato saññatvā brahmaṁ maññati, brahmasmiṁ maññati, brahmato maññati, brahmaṁ meti maññati, brahmaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶13] They perceive those of sublime luminosity as those of sublime luminosity. Having perceived those of sublime luminosity as those of sublime luminosity, they conceive them to be those of sublime luminosity … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Ābhassare ābhassarato sañjānāti; ābhassare ābhassarato saññatvā ābhassare maññati, ābhassaresu maññati, ābhassarato maññati, ābhassare meti maññati, ābhassare abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶14] They perceive those of universal beauty as those of universal beauty. But then they conceive them to be those of universal beauty … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Subhakiṇhe subhakiṇhato sañjānāti; subhakiṇhe subhakiṇhato saññatvā subhakiṇhe maññati, subhakiṇhesu maññati, subhakiṇhato maññati, subhakiṇhe meti maññati, subhakiṇhe abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶15] They perceive those of abundant fruit as those of abundant fruit. Having perceived those of abundant fruit as those of abundant fruit, they conceive them to be those of abundant fruit … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Vehapphale vehapphalato sañjānāti; vehapphale vehapphalato saññatvā vehapphale maññati, vehapphalesu maññati, vehapphalato maññati, vehapphale meti maññati, vehapphale abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶16] They perceive the Vanquisher as the Vanquisher. Having perceived the Vanquisher as the Vanquisher, they conceive him to be the Vanquisher … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Abhibhuṁ abhibhuto sañjānāti; abhibhuṁ abhibhuto saññatvā abhibhuṁ maññati, abhibhusmiṁ maññati, abhibhuto maññati, abhibhuṁ meti maññati, abhibhuṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶17] They perceive the dimension of infinite space as the dimension of infinite space. Having perceived the dimension of infinite space as the dimension of infinite space, they conceive it to be the dimension of infinite space … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ ākāsānañcāyatanato sañjānāti; ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ ākāsānañcāyatanato saññatvā ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ maññati, ākāsānañcāyatanasmiṁ maññati, ākāsānañcāyatanato maññati, ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ meti maññati, ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶18] They perceive the dimension of infinite consciousness as the dimension of infinite consciousness. Having perceived the dimension of infinite consciousness as the dimension of infinite consciousness, they conceive it to be the dimension of infinite consciousness … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ viññāṇañcāyatanato sañjānāti; viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ viññāṇañcāyatanato saññatvā viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ maññati, viññāṇañcāyatanasmiṁ maññati, viññāṇañcāyatanato maññati, viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ meti maññati, viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶19] They perceive the dimension of nothingness as the dimension of nothingness. Having perceived the dimension of nothingness as the dimension of nothingness, they conceive it to be the dimension of nothingness … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ ākiñcaññāyatanato sañjānāti; ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ ākiñcaññāyatanato saññatvā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ maññati, ākiñcaññāyatanasmiṁ maññati, ākiñcaññāyatanato maññati, ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ meti maññati, ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶20] They perceive the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception as the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Having perceived the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception as the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they conceive it to be the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanato sañjānāti; nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanato saññatvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ maññati, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasmiṁ maññati, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanato maññati, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ meti maññati, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶21] They perceive the seen as the seen. Having perceived the seen as the seen, they conceive it to be the seen … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Diṭṭhaṁ diṭṭhato sañjānāti; diṭṭhaṁ diṭṭhato saññatvā diṭṭhaṁ maññati, diṭṭhasmiṁ maññati, diṭṭhato maññati, diṭṭhaṁ meti maññati, diṭṭhaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶22] They perceive the heard as the heard. Having perceived the heard as the heard, they conceive it to be the heard … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Sutaṁ sutato sañjānāti; sutaṁ sutato saññatvā sutaṁ maññati, sutasmiṁ maññati, sutato maññati, sutaṁ meti maññati, sutaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶23] They perceive the thought as the thought. Having perceived the thought as the thought, they conceive it to be the thought … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Mutaṁ mutato sañjānāti; mutaṁ mutato saññatvā mutaṁ maññati, mutasmiṁ maññati, mutato maññati, mutaṁ meti maññati, mutaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶24] They perceive the known as the known. Having perceived the known as the known, they conceive it to be the known … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Viññātaṁ viññātato sañjānāti; viññātaṁ viññātato saññatvā viññātaṁ maññati, viññātasmiṁ maññati, viññātato maññati, viññātaṁ meti maññati, viññātaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶25] They perceive oneness as oneness. Having perceived oneness as oneness, they conceive it to be oneness … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Ekattaṁ ekattato sañjānāti; ekattaṁ ekattato saññatvā ekattaṁ maññati, ekattasmiṁ maññati, ekattato maññati, ekattaṁ meti maññati, ekattaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶26] They perceive diversity as diversity. Having perceived diversity as diversity, they conceive it to be diversity … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Nānattaṁ nānattato sañjānāti; nānattaṁ nānattato saññatvā nānattaṁ maññati, nānattasmiṁ maññati, nānattato maññati, nānattaṁ meti maññati, nānattaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶27] They perceive all as all. Having perceived all as all, they conceive it to be all … Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Sabbaṁ sabbato sañjānāti; sabbaṁ sabbato saññatvā sabbaṁ maññati, sabbasmiṁ maññati, sabbato maññati, sabbaṁ meti maññati, sabbaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶28] They perceive extinguishment as extinguishment. Having perceived extinguishment as extinguishment, they conceive it to be extinguishment, they conceive it in extinguishment, they conceive it as extinguishment, they conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, they approve extinguishment. Why is that? Because they haven’t completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Nibbānaṁ nibbānato sañjānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato saññatvā nibbānaṁ maññati, nibbānasmiṁ maññati, nibbānato maññati, nibbānaṁ meti maññati, nibbānaṁ abhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Apariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶29] > Pali: Puthujjanavasena paṭhamanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶30] A mendicant who is a trainee, who hasn’t achieved their heart’s desire, but lives aspiring to the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, directly knows earth as earth. Having directly known earth as earth, let them not conceive it to be earth, let them not conceive it in earth, let them not conceive it as earth, let them not conceive that ‘earth is mine’, let them not approve earth. Why is that? So that they may completely understand it, I say.
> Pali: Yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekkho appattamānaso anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ patthayamāno viharati, sopi pathaviṁ pathavito abhijānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito abhiññāya pathaviṁ mā maññi, pathaviyā mā maññi, pathavito mā maññi, pathaviṁ meti mā maññi, pathaviṁ mābhinandi. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Pariññeyyaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶31] They directly know water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … those of sublime luminosity … those replete with glory … those of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … the seen … the heard … the thought … the known … oneness … diversity … all … They directly know extinguishment as extinguishment. Having directly known extinguishment as extinguishment, let them not conceive it to be extinguishment, let them not conceive it in extinguishment, let them not conceive it as extinguishment, let them not conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, let them not approve extinguishment. Why is that? So that they may completely understand it, I say.
> Pali: Āpaṁ …pe… tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ … ābhassare … subhakiṇhe … vehapphale … abhibhuṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ … diṭṭhaṁ … sutaṁ … mutaṁ … viññātaṁ … ekattaṁ … nānattaṁ … sabbaṁ … nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhijānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhiññāya nibbānaṁ mā maññi, nibbānasmiṁ mā maññi, nibbānato mā maññi, nibbānaṁ meti mā maññi, nibbānaṁ mābhinandi. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Pariññeyyaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶32] > Pali: Sekkhavasena dutiyanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶33] A mendicant who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—directly knows earth as earth. Having directly known earth as earth, they do not conceive it to be earth, they do not conceive it in earth, they do not conceive it as earth, they do not conceive that ‘earth is mine’, they do not approve earth. Why is that? Because they have completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, sopi pathaviṁ pathavito abhijānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito abhiññāya pathaviṁ na maññati, pathaviyā na maññati, pathavito na maññati, pathaviṁ meti na maññati, pathaviṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Pariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶34] They directly know water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … those of sublime luminosity … those replete with glory … those of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … the seen … the heard … the thought … the known … oneness … diversity … all … They directly know extinguishment as extinguishment. Having directly known extinguishment as extinguishment, they do not conceive it to be extinguishment, they do not conceive it in extinguishment, they do not conceive it as extinguishment, they do not conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, they do not approve extinguishment. Why is that? Because they have completely understood it, I say.
> Pali: Āpaṁ …pe… tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ … ābhassare … subhakiṇhe … vehapphale … abhibhuṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ … diṭṭhaṁ … sutaṁ … mutaṁ … viññātaṁ … ekattaṁ … nānattaṁ … sabbaṁ … nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhijānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhiññāya nibbānaṁ na maññati, nibbānasmiṁ na maññati, nibbānato na maññati, nibbānaṁ meti na maññati, nibbānaṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Pariññātaṁ tassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶35] > Pali: Khīṇāsavavasena tatiyanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶36] A mendicant who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—directly knows earth as earth. Having directly known earth as earth, they do not conceive it to be earth, they do not conceive it in earth, they do not conceive it as earth, they do not conceive that ‘earth is mine’, they do not approve earth. Why is that? Because they’re free of greed due to the ending of greed.
> Pali: Yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññā vimutto, sopi pathaviṁ pathavito abhijānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito abhiññāya pathaviṁ na maññati, pathaviyā na maññati, pathavito na maññati, pathaviṁ meti na maññati, pathaviṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Khayā rāgassa, vītarāgattā.
[¶37] They directly know water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … those of sublime luminosity … those replete with glory … those of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … the seen … the heard … the thought … the known … oneness … diversity … all … They directly know extinguishment as extinguishment. Having directly known extinguishment as extinguishment, they do not conceive it to be extinguishment, they do not conceive it in extinguishment, they do not conceive it as extinguishment, they do not conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, they do not approve extinguishment. Why is that? Because they’re free of greed due to the ending of greed.
> Pali: Āpaṁ …pe… tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ … ābhassare … subhakiṇhe … vehapphale … abhibhuṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ … diṭṭhaṁ … sutaṁ … mutaṁ … viññātaṁ … ekattaṁ … nānattaṁ … sabbaṁ … nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhijānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhiññāya nibbānaṁ na maññati, nibbānasmiṁ na maññati, nibbānato na maññati, nibbānaṁ meti na maññati, nibbānaṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Khayā rāgassa, vītarāgattā.
[¶38] > Pali: Khīṇāsavavasena catutthanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶39] A mendicant who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—directly knows earth as earth. Having directly known earth as earth, they do not conceive it to be earth, they do not conceive it in earth, they do not conceive it as earth, they do not conceive that ‘earth is mine’, they do not approve earth. Why is that? Because they’re free of hate due to the ending of hate.
> Pali: Yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, sopi pathaviṁ pathavito abhijānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito abhiññāya pathaviṁ na maññati, pathaviyā na maññati, pathavito na maññati, pathaviṁ meti na maññati, pathaviṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Khayā dosassa, vītadosattā.
[¶40] They directly know water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … those of sublime luminosity … those replete with glory … those of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … the seen … the heard … the thought … the known … oneness … diversity … all … They directly know extinguishment as extinguishment. Having directly known extinguishment as extinguishment, they do not conceive it to be extinguishment, they do not conceive it in extinguishment, they do not conceive it as extinguishment, they do not conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, they do not approve extinguishment. Why is that? Because they’re free of hate due to the ending of hate.
> Pali: Āpaṁ …pe… tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ … ābhassare … subhakiṇhe … vehapphale … abhibhuṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ … diṭṭhaṁ … sutaṁ … mutaṁ … viññātaṁ … ekattaṁ … nānattaṁ … sabbaṁ … nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhijānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhiññāya nibbānaṁ na maññati, nibbānasmiṁ na maññati, nibbānato na maññati, nibbānaṁ meti na maññati, nibbānaṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Khayā dosassa, vītadosattā.
[¶41] > Pali: Khīṇāsavavasena pañcamanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶42] A mendicant who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—directly knows earth as earth. Having directly known earth as earth, they do not conceive it to be earth, they do not conceive it in earth, they do not conceive it as earth, they do not conceive that ‘earth is mine’, they do not approve earth. Why is that? Because they’re free of delusion due to the ending of delusion.
> Pali: Yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, sopi pathaviṁ pathavito abhijānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito abhiññāya pathaviṁ na maññati, pathaviyā na maññati, pathavito na maññati, pathaviṁ meti na maññati, pathaviṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Khayā mohassa, vītamohattā.
[¶43] They directly know water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … those of sublime luminosity … those replete with glory … those of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … the seen … the heard … the thought … the known … oneness … diversity … all … They directly know extinguishment as extinguishment. Having directly known extinguishment as extinguishment, they do not conceive it to be extinguishment, they do not conceive it in extinguishment, they do not conceive it as extinguishment, they do not conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, they do not approve extinguishment. Why is that? Because they’re free of delusion due to the ending of delusion.
> Pali: Āpaṁ …pe… tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ … ābhassare … subhakiṇhe … vehapphale … abhibhuṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ … diṭṭhaṁ … sutaṁ … mutaṁ … viññātaṁ … ekattaṁ … nānattaṁ … sabbaṁ … nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhijānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhiññāya nibbānaṁ na maññati, nibbānasmiṁ na maññati, nibbānato na maññati, nibbānaṁ meti na maññati, nibbānaṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Khayā mohassa, vītamohattā.
[¶44] > Pali: Khīṇāsavavasena chaṭṭhanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶45] The Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha directly knows earth as earth. Having directly known earth as earth, he does not conceive it to be earth, he does not conceive it in earth, he does not conceive it as earth, he does not conceive that ‘earth is mine’, he does not approve earth. Why is that? Because the Realized One has completely understood it to the end, I say.
> Pali: Tathāgatopi, bhikkhave, arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pathaviṁ pathavito abhijānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito abhiññāya pathaviṁ na maññati, pathaviyā na maññati, pathavito na maññati, pathaviṁ meti na maññati, pathaviṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Pariññātantaṁ tathāgatassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶46] He directly knows water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … those of sublime luminosity … those replete with glory … those of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … the seen … the heard … the thought … the known … oneness … diversity … all … He directly knows extinguishment as extinguishment. Having directly known extinguishment as extinguishment, he does not conceive it to be extinguishment, he does not conceive it in extinguishment, he does not conceive it as extinguishment, he does not conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, he does not approve extinguishment. Why is that? Because the Realized One has completely understood it to the end, I say.
> Pali: Āpaṁ …pe… tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ … ābhassare … subhakiṇhe … vehapphale … abhibhuṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ … diṭṭhaṁ … sutaṁ … mutaṁ … viññātaṁ … ekattaṁ … nānattaṁ … sabbaṁ … nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhijānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhiññāya nibbānaṁ na maññati, nibbānasmiṁ na maññati, nibbānato na maññati, nibbānaṁ meti na maññati, nibbānaṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Pariññātantaṁ tathāgatassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶47] > Pali: Tathāgatavasena sattamanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶48] The Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha directly knows earth as earth. Having directly known earth as earth, he does not conceive it to be earth, he does not conceive it in earth, he does not conceive it as earth, he does not conceive that ‘earth is mine’, he does not approve earth. Why is that? Because he has understood that approval is the root of suffering, and that rebirth comes from continued existence; whoever has come to be gets old and dies. That’s why the Realized One—with the ending, fading away, cessation, giving up, and letting go of all cravings—has awakened to the supreme perfect awakening, I say.
> Pali: Tathāgatopi, bhikkhave, arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pathaviṁ pathavito abhijānāti; pathaviṁ pathavito abhiññāya pathaviṁ na maññati, pathaviyā na maññati, pathavito na maññati, pathaviṁ meti na maññati, pathaviṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Nandī dukkhassa mūlan’ti— iti viditvā ‘bhavā jāti bhūtassa jarāmaraṇan’ti. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ‘tathāgato sabbaso taṇhānaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’ti vadāmi.
[¶49] He directly knows water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … those of sublime luminosity … those replete with glory … those of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception … the seen … the heard … the thought … the known … oneness … diversity … all … He directly knows extinguishment as extinguishment. Having directly known extinguishment as extinguishment, he does not conceive it to be extinguishment, he does not conceive it in extinguishment, he does not conceive it as extinguishment, he does not conceive that ‘extinguishment is mine’, he does not approve extinguishment. Why is that? Because he has understood that approval is the root of suffering, and that rebirth comes from continued existence; whoever has come to be gets old and dies. That’s why the Realized One—with the ending, fading away, cessation, giving up, and letting go of all cravings—has awakened to the supreme perfect Awakening, I say.”
> Pali: Āpaṁ …pe… tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ … ābhassare … subhakiṇhe … vehapphale … abhibhuṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ … diṭṭhaṁ … sutaṁ … mutaṁ … viññātaṁ … ekattaṁ … nānattaṁ … sabbaṁ … nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhijānāti; nibbānaṁ nibbānato abhiññāya nibbānaṁ na maññati, nibbānasmiṁ na maññati, nibbānato na maññati, nibbānaṁ meti na maññati, nibbānaṁ nābhinandati. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Nandī dukkhassa mūlan’ti— iti viditvā ‘bhavā jāti bhūtassa jarāmaraṇan’ti. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ‘tathāgato sabbaso taṇhānaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’ti vadāmī”ti.
[¶50] > Pali: Tathāgatavasena aṭṭhamanayabhūmiparicchedo niṭṭhito.
[¶51] That is what the Buddha said. But the mendicants did not approve what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Na te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶52] > Pali: Mūlapariyāyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 2. MN 2 · All the Defilements
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/2/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/2/#p-N
[¶0] MN 2 · All the Defilements
> Pali: MN 2 · Sabbāsavasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I will teach you the explanation of the restraint of all defilements. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “sabbāsavasaṁvarapariyāyaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Mendicants, I say that the ending of defilements is for one who knows and sees, not for one who does not know or see. For one who knows and sees what? Rational application of mind and irrational application of mind. When you apply the mind irrationally, defilements arise, and once arisen they grow. When you apply the mind rationally, defilements don’t arise, and those that have already arisen are given up.
> Pali: “Jānato ahaṁ, bhikkhave, passato āsavānaṁ khayaṁ vadāmi, no ajānato no apassato. Kiñca, bhikkhave, jānato kiñca passato āsavānaṁ khayaṁ vadāmi? Yoniso ca manasikāraṁ ayoniso ca manasikāraṁ. Ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pavaḍḍhanti; yoniso ca kho, bhikkhave, manasikaroto anuppannā ceva āsavā na uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pahīyanti.
[¶6] Some defilements should be given up by seeing, some by restraint, some by using, some by enduring, some by avoiding, some by dispelling, and some by developing.
> Pali: Atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā saṁvarā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā adhivāsanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā parivajjanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā vinodanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā bhāvanā pahātabbā.
[¶7] 1. Defilements Given Up by Seeing
> Pali: 1. Dassanāpahātabbaāsava
[¶8] And what are the defilements that should be given up by seeing? Take an unlearned ordinary person who has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They don’t understand to which things they should apply the mind and to which things they should not apply the mind. So they apply the mind to things they shouldn’t and don’t apply the mind to things they should.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto, sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto— manasikaraṇīye dhamme nappajānāti, amanasikaraṇīye dhamme nappajānāti. So manasikaraṇīye dhamme appajānanto amanasikaraṇīye dhamme appajānanto, ye dhammā na manasikaraṇīyā, te dhamme manasi karoti, ye dhammā manasikaraṇīyā te dhamme na manasi karoti.
[¶9] And what are the things to which they apply the mind but should not? They are the things that, when the mind is applied to them, give rise to unarisen defilements and make arisen defilements grow: the defilements of sensual desire, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. These are the things to which they apply the mind but should not.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā na manasikaraṇīyā ye dhamme manasi karoti? Yassa, bhikkhave, dhamme manasikaroto anuppanno vā kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā kāmāsavo pavaḍḍhati; anuppanno vā bhavāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā bhavāsavo pavaḍḍhati; anuppanno vā avijjāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā avijjāsavo pavaḍḍhati— ime dhammā na manasikaraṇīyā ye dhamme manasi karoti.
[¶10] And what are the things to which they do not apply the mind but should? They are the things that, when the mind is applied to them, do not give rise to unarisen defilements and give up arisen defilements: the defilements of sensual desire, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. These are the things to which they do not apply the mind but should.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā manasikaraṇīyā ye dhamme na manasi karoti? Yassa, bhikkhave, dhamme manasikaroto anuppanno vā kāmāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno vā kāmāsavo pahīyati; anuppanno vā bhavāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno vā bhavāsavo pahīyati; anuppanno vā avijjāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno vā avijjāsavo pahīyati— ime dhammā manasikaraṇīyā ye dhamme na manasi karoti.
[¶11] Because of applying the mind to what they should not and not applying the mind to what they should, unarisen defilements arise and arisen defilements grow.
> Pali: Tassa amanasikaraṇīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ manasikārā manasikaraṇīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ amanasikārā anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjanti uppannā ca āsavā pavaḍḍhanti.
[¶12] This is how they apply the mind irrationally: ‘Did I exist in the past? Did I not exist in the past? What was I in the past? How was I in the past? After being what, what did I become in the past? Will I exist in the future? Will I not exist in the future? What will I be in the future? How will I be in the future? After being what, what will I become in the future?’ Or they are undecided about the present thus: ‘Am I? Am I not? What am I? How am I? This sentient being—where did it come from? And where will it go?’
> Pali: So evaṁ ayoniso manasi karoti: ‘ahosiṁ nu kho ahaṁ atītamaddhānaṁ? Na nu kho ahosiṁ atītamaddhānaṁ? Kiṁ nu kho ahosiṁ atītamaddhānaṁ? Kathaṁ nu kho ahosiṁ atītamaddhānaṁ? Kiṁ hutvā kiṁ ahosiṁ nu kho ahaṁ atītamaddhānaṁ? Bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ? Na nu kho bhavissāmi anāgatamaddhānaṁ? Kiṁ nu kho bhavissāmi anāgatamaddhānaṁ? Kathaṁ nu kho bhavissāmi anāgatamaddhānaṁ? Kiṁ hutvā kiṁ bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṁ anāgatamaddhānan’ti? Etarahi vā paccuppannamaddhānaṁ ajjhattaṁ kathaṅkathī hoti: ‘ahaṁ nu khosmi? No nu khosmi? Kiṁ nu khosmi? Kathaṁ nu khosmi? Ayaṁ nu kho satto kuto āgato? So kuhiṁ gāmī bhavissatī’ti?
[¶13] When they apply the mind irrationally in this way, one of the following six views arises in them and is taken as a genuine fact. The view: ‘My self survives.’ The view: ‘My self does not survive.’ The view: ‘I perceive the self with the self.’ The view: ‘I perceive what is not-self with the self.’ The view: ‘I perceive the self with what is not-self.’ Or they have such a view: ‘This self of mine is he, the one who speaks, the one who knows, who experiences the results of good and bad deeds in all the different realms. This self is permanent, everlasting, eternal, and imperishable, and will last forever and ever.’ This is called a misconception, the thicket of views, the desert of views, the twist of views, the dodge of views, the fetter of views. An unlearned ordinary person who is fettered by views is not freed from rebirth, old age, and death, from sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. They’re not freed from suffering, I say.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ ayoniso manasikaroto channaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati. ‘Atthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati; ‘natthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati; ‘attanāva attānaṁ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati; ‘attanāva anattānaṁ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati; ‘anattanāva attānaṁ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati; atha vā panassa evaṁ diṭṭhi hoti: ‘yo me ayaṁ attā vado vedeyyo tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṁ kammānaṁ vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti so kho pana me ayaṁ attā nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassatī’ti. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, diṭṭhigataṁ diṭṭhigahanaṁ diṭṭhikantāraṁ diṭṭhivisūkaṁ diṭṭhivipphanditaṁ diṭṭhisaṁyojanaṁ. Diṭṭhisaṁyojanasaṁyutto, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano na parimuccati jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi; ‘na parimuccati dukkhasmā’ti vadāmi.
[¶14] But take a learned noble disciple who has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. They understand to which things they should apply the mind and to which things they should not apply the mind. So they apply the mind to things they should and don’t apply the mind to things they shouldn’t.
> Pali: Sutavā ca kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako— ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto, sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto— manasikaraṇīye dhamme pajānāti amanasikaraṇīye dhamme pajānāti. So manasikaraṇīye dhamme pajānanto amanasikaraṇīye dhamme pajānanto ye dhammā na manasikaraṇīyā te dhamme na manasi karoti, ye dhammā manasikaraṇīyā te dhamme manasi karoti.
[¶15] And what are the things to which they don’t apply the mind and should not? They are the things that, when the mind is applied to them, give rise to unarisen defilements and make arisen defilements grow: the defilements of sensual desire, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. These are the things to which they don’t apply the mind and should not.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā na manasikaraṇīyā ye dhamme na manasi karoti? Yassa, bhikkhave, dhamme manasikaroto anuppanno vā kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā kāmāsavo pavaḍḍhati; anuppanno vā bhavāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā bhavāsavo pavaḍḍhati; anuppanno vā avijjāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā avijjāsavo pavaḍḍhati— ime dhammā na manasikaraṇīyā, ye dhamme na manasi karoti.
[¶16] And what are the things to which they do apply the mind and should? They are the things that, when the mind is applied to them, do not give rise to unarisen defilements and give up arisen defilements: the defilements of sensual desire, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. These are the things to which they do apply the mind and should.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā manasikaraṇīyā ye dhamme manasi karoti? Yassa, bhikkhave, dhamme manasikaroto anuppanno vā kāmāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno vā kāmāsavo pahīyati; anuppanno vā bhavāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno vā bhavāsavo pahīyati; anuppanno vā avijjāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno vā avijjāsavo pahīyati— ime dhammā manasikaraṇīyā ye dhamme manasi karoti.
[¶17] Because of not applying the mind to what they should not and applying the mind to what they should, unarisen defilements don’t arise and arisen defilements are given up.
> Pali: Tassa amanasikaraṇīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ amanasikārā manasikaraṇīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ manasikārā anuppannā ceva āsavā na uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pahīyanti.
[¶18] They rationally apply the mind: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. And as they do so, they give up three fetters: substantialist view, doubt, and misapprehension of precepts and observances. These are called the defilements that should be given up by seeing.
> Pali: So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yoniso manasi karoti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yoniso manasi karoti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yoniso manasi karoti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yoniso manasi karoti. Tassa evaṁ yoniso manasikaroto tīṇi saṁyojanāni pahīyanti— sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāso. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā.
[¶19] 2. Defilements Given Up by Restraint
> Pali: 2. Saṁvarāpahātabbaāsava
[¶20] And what are the defilements that should be given up by restraint? Take a mendicant who, reflecting rationally, lives restraining the eye faculty. For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without restraint of the eye faculty do not arise when there is such restraint. Reflecting rationally, they live restraining the ear faculty … the nose faculty … the tongue faculty … the body faculty … the mind faculty. For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without restraint of the mind faculty do not arise when there is such restraint.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā saṁvarā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cakkhundriyasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati. Yañhissa, bhikkhave, cakkhundriyasaṁvaraṁ asaṁvutassa viharato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, cakkhundriyasaṁvaraṁ saṁvutassa viharato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti. Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso sotindriyasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati …pe… ghānindriyasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati …pe… jivhindriyasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati …pe… kāyindriyasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati …pe… manindriyasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati. Yañhissa, bhikkhave, manindriyasaṁvaraṁ asaṁvutassa viharato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, manindriyasaṁvaraṁ saṁvutassa viharato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti.
[¶21] For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without restraint do not arise when there is such restraint. These are called the defilements that should be given up by restraint.
> Pali: Yañhissa, bhikkhave, saṁvaraṁ asaṁvutassa viharato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, saṁvaraṁ saṁvutassa viharato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā saṁvarā pahātabbā.
[¶22] 3. Defilements Given Up by Using
> Pali: 3. Paṭisevanāpahātabbaāsava
[¶23] And what are the defilements that should be given up by using? Take a mendicant who, reflecting rationally, makes use of robes: ‘Only for the sake of warding off cold and heat; for warding off the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles; and for covering up the private parts.’
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṁ paṭisevati: ‘yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāya, uṇhassa paṭighātāya, ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassānaṁ paṭighātāya, yāvadeva hirikopīnappaṭicchādanatthaṁ’.
[¶24] Reflecting rationally, they make use of almsfood: ‘Not for fun, indulgence, adornment, or decoration, but only to sustain this body, to avoid harm, and to support spiritual practice. In this way, I shall put an end to old discomfort and not give rise to new discomfort, and I will have the means to keep going, blamelessness, and a comfortable abiding.’
> Pali: Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso piṇḍapātaṁ paṭisevati: ‘neva davāya, na madāya, na maṇḍanāya, na vibhūsanāya, yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya, vihiṁsūparatiyā, brahmacariyānuggahāya, iti purāṇañca vedanaṁ paṭihaṅkhāmi navañca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro ca’.
[¶25] Reflecting rationally, they make use of lodgings: ‘Only for the sake of warding off cold and heat; for warding off the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles; to shelter from harsh weather and to enjoy retreat.’
> Pali: Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso senāsanaṁ paṭisevati: ‘yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāya, uṇhassa paṭighātāya, ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassānaṁ paṭighātāya, yāvadeva utuparissayavinodanapaṭisallānārāmatthaṁ’.
[¶26] Reflecting rationally, they make use of medicines and supplies for the sick: ‘Only for the sake of warding off the pains of illness and to promote good health.’
> Pali: Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṁ paṭisevati: ‘yāvadeva uppannānaṁ veyyābādhikānaṁ vedanānaṁ paṭighātāya, abyābajjhaparamatāya’.
[¶27] For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without using these things do not arise when they are used. These are called the defilements that should be given up by using.
> Pali: Yañhissa, bhikkhave, appaṭisevato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, paṭisevato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā.
[¶28] 4. Defilements Given Up by Enduring
> Pali: 4. Adhivāsanāpahātabbaāsava
[¶29] And what are the defilements that should be given up by enduring? Take a mendicant who, reflecting rationally, endures cold, heat, hunger, and thirst. They endure the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles. They endure rude and unwelcome criticism. And they put up with physical pain—sharp, severe, acute, unpleasant, disagreeable, and life-threatening.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā adhivāsanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa, jighacchāya pipāsāya. Ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassānaṁ, duruttānaṁ durāgatānaṁ vacanapathānaṁ, uppannānaṁ sārīrikānaṁ vedanānaṁ dukkhānaṁ tibbānaṁ kharānaṁ kaṭukānaṁ asātānaṁ amanāpānaṁ pāṇaharānaṁ adhivāsakajātiko hoti.
[¶30] For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without enduring these things do not arise when they are endured. These are called the defilements that should be given up by enduring.
> Pali: Yañhissa, bhikkhave, anadhivāsayato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, adhivāsayato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā adhivāsanā pahātabbā.
[¶31] 5. Defilements Given Up by Avoiding
> Pali: 5. Parivajjanāpahātabbaāsava
[¶32] And what are the defilements that should be given up by avoiding? Take a mendicant who, reflecting rationally, avoids a wild elephant, a wild horse, a wild ox, a wild dog, a snake, a stump, thorny ground, a pit, a cliff, a swamp, and a sewer. Reflecting rationally, they avoid sitting on inappropriate seats, walking in inappropriate neighborhoods, and mixing with bad friends—whatever sensible spiritual companions would believe to be a bad setting.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā parivajjanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso caṇḍaṁ hatthiṁ parivajjeti, caṇḍaṁ assaṁ parivajjeti, caṇḍaṁ goṇaṁ parivajjeti, caṇḍaṁ kukkuraṁ parivajjeti, ahiṁ khāṇuṁ kaṇṭakaṭṭhānaṁ sobbhaṁ papātaṁ candanikaṁ oḷigallaṁ. Yathārūpe anāsane nisinnaṁ yathārūpe agocare carantaṁ yathārūpe pāpake mitte bhajantaṁ viññū sabrahmacārī pāpakesu ṭhānesu okappeyyuṁ, so tañca anāsanaṁ tañca agocaraṁ te ca pāpake mitte paṭisaṅkhā yoniso parivajjeti.
[¶33] For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without avoiding these things do not arise when they are avoided. These are called the defilements that should be given up by avoiding.
> Pali: Yañhissa, bhikkhave, aparivajjayato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, parivajjayato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā parivajjanā pahātabbā.
[¶34] 6. Defilements Given Up by Dispelling
> Pali: 6. Vinodanāpahātabbaāsava
[¶35] And what are the defilements that should be given up by dispelling? Take a mendicant who, reflecting rationally, doesn’t tolerate a sensual, malicious, or cruel thought that has arisen, but gives it up, dispels it, eliminates it, and obliterates it. They don’t tolerate any bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen, but give them up, dispel them, eliminate them, and obliterate them.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā vinodanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso uppannaṁ kāmavitakkaṁ nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantīkaroti anabhāvaṁ gameti, uppannaṁ byāpādavitakkaṁ …pe… uppannaṁ vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ …pe… uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantīkaroti anabhāvaṁ gameti.
[¶36] For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without dispelling these things do not arise when they are dispelled. These are called the defilements that should be given up by dispelling.
> Pali: Yañhissa, bhikkhave, avinodayato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, vinodayato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā vinodanā pahātabbā.
[¶37] 7. Defilements Given Up by Developing
> Pali: 7. Bhāvanāpahātabbaāsava
[¶38] And what are the defilements that should be given up by developing? Take a mendicant who, reflecting rationally, develops the awakening factors of mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity, which rely on seclusion, fading away, and cessation, and ripen as letting go.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā bhāvanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ; paṭisaṅkhā yoniso dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …pe… vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ.
[¶39] For the distressing and feverish defilements that might arise in someone who lives without developing these things do not arise when they are developed. These are called the defilements that should be given up by developing.
> Pali: Yañhissa, bhikkhave, abhāvayato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, bhāvayato evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā bhāvanā pahātabbā.
[¶40] Now, take a mendicant who, by seeing, has given up the defilements that should be given up by seeing. By restraint, they’ve given up the defilements that should be given up by restraint. By using, they’ve given up the defilements that should be given up by using. By enduring, they’ve given up the defilements that should be given up by enduring. By avoiding, they’ve given up the defilements that should be given up by avoiding. By dispelling, they’ve given up the defilements that should be given up by dispelling. By developing, they’ve given up the defilements that should be given up by developing. They’re called a mendicant who lives having restrained all defilements, who has cut off craving, cast off the fetters, and by rightly comprehending conceit has made an end of suffering.”
> Pali: Yato kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ye āsavā dassanā pahātabbā te dassanā pahīnā honti, ye āsavā saṁvarā pahātabbā te saṁvarā pahīnā honti, ye āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā te paṭisevanā pahīnā honti, ye āsavā adhivāsanā pahātabbā te adhivāsanā pahīnā honti, ye āsavā parivajjanā pahātabbā te parivajjanā pahīnā honti, ye āsavā vinodanā pahātabbā te vinodanā pahīnā honti, ye āsavā bhāvanā pahātabbā te bhāvanā pahīnā honti; ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave: ‘bhikkhu sabbāsavasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati, acchecchi taṇhaṁ, vivattayi saṁyojanaṁ, sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’”ti.
[¶41] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶42] > Pali: Sabbāsavasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 3. MN 3 · Heirs in the Teaching
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/3/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/3/#p-N
[¶0] MN 3 · Heirs in the Teaching
> Pali: MN 3 · Dhammadāyādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, be my heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh. Out of sympathy for you, I think, ‘How can my disciples become heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh?’
> Pali: “Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā. Atthi me tumhesu anukampā: ‘kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṁ, no āmisadāyādā’ti.
[¶4] If you become heirs in things of the flesh, not in the teaching, that will make you liable to the accusation: ‘The Teacher’s disciples live as heirs in things of the flesh, not in the teaching.’ And it will make me liable to the accusation: ‘The Teacher’s disciples live as heirs in things of the flesh, not in the teaching.’
> Pali: Tumhe ca me, bhikkhave, āmisadāyādā bhaveyyātha no dhammadāyādā, tumhepi tena ādiyā bhaveyyātha: ‘āmisadāyādā satthusāvakā viharanti, no dhammadāyādā’ti; ahampi tena ādiyo bhaveyyaṁ: ‘āmisadāyādā satthusāvakā viharanti, no dhammadāyādā’ti.
[¶5] If you become heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh, that will make you not liable to the accusation: ‘The Teacher’s disciples live as heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh.’ And it will make me not liable to the accusation: ‘The Teacher’s disciples live as heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh.’
> Pali: Tumhe ca me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhaveyyātha, no āmisadāyādā, tumhepi tena na ādiyā bhaveyyātha: ‘dhammadāyādā satthusāvakā viharanti, no āmisadāyādā’ti; ahampi tena na ādiyo bhaveyyaṁ: ‘dhammadāyādā satthusāvakā viharanti, no āmisadāyādā’ti.
[¶6] So, mendicants, be my heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh. Out of sympathy for you, I think, ‘How can my disciples become heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh?’
> Pali: Tasmātiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā. Atthi me tumhesu anukampā: ‘kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṁ, no āmisadāyādā’ti.
[¶7] Suppose that I had eaten and refused more food, being replete, and having had as much as I needed. And there was some extra almsfood that was going to be thrown away. Then two mendicants were to come who were weak with hunger. I’d say to them, ‘Mendicants, I have eaten and refused more food, being replete, and having had as much as I need. And there is this extra almsfood that’s going to be thrown away. Eat it if you like. Otherwise I’ll throw it out where there is little that grows, or drop it into water that has no living creatures.’
> Pali: Idhāhaṁ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṁ pavārito paripuṇṇo pariyosito suhito yāvadattho; siyā ca me piṇḍapāto atirekadhammo chaḍḍanīyadhammo. Atha dve bhikkhū āgaccheyyuṁ jighacchādubbalyaparetā. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadeyyaṁ: ‘ahaṁ khomhi, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī pavārito paripuṇṇo pariyosito suhito yāvadattho; atthi ca me ayaṁ piṇḍapāto atirekadhammo chaḍḍanīyadhammo. Sace ākaṅkhatha, bhuñjatha, no ce tumhe bhuñjissatha, idānāhaṁ appaharite vā chaḍḍessāmi, appāṇake vā udake opilāpessāmī’ti.
[¶8] Then one of those mendicants thought, ‘The Buddha has eaten and refused more food. And he has some extra almsfood that’s going to be thrown away. If we don’t eat it he’ll throw it away. But the Buddha has also said: “Be my heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh.” And almsfood is one of the things of the flesh. Instead of eating this almsfood, why don’t I spend this day and night weak with hunger?’ And that’s what they did.
> Pali: Tatrekassa bhikkhuno evamassa: ‘bhagavā kho bhuttāvī pavārito paripuṇṇo pariyosito suhito yāvadattho; atthi cāyaṁ bhagavato piṇḍapāto atirekadhammo chaḍḍanīyadhammo. Sace mayaṁ na bhuñjissāma, idāni bhagavā appaharite vā chaḍḍessati, appāṇake vā udake opilāpessati. Vuttaṁ kho panetaṁ bhagavatā: “dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā”ti. Āmisaññataraṁ kho panetaṁ, yadidaṁ piṇḍapāto. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ abhuñjitvā imināva jighacchādubbalyena evaṁ imaṁ rattindivaṁ vītināmeyyan’ti. So taṁ piṇḍapātaṁ abhuñjitvā teneva jighacchādubbalyena evaṁ taṁ rattindivaṁ vītināmeyya.
[¶9] Then the second of those mendicants thought, ‘The Buddha has eaten and refused more food. And he has some extra almsfood that’s going to be thrown away. If we don’t eat it he’ll throw it away. Why don’t I eat this almsfood, then spend the day and night having dispelled my hunger and weakness?’ And that’s what they did.
> Pali: Atha dutiyassa bhikkhuno evamassa: ‘bhagavā kho bhuttāvī pavārito paripuṇṇo pariyosito suhito yāvadattho; atthi cāyaṁ bhagavato piṇḍapāto atirekadhammo chaḍḍanīyadhammo. Sace mayaṁ na bhuñjissāma, idāni bhagavā appaharite vā chaḍḍessati, appāṇake vā udake opilāpessati. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjitvā jighacchādubbalyaṁ paṭivinodetvā evaṁ imaṁ rattindivaṁ vītināmeyyan’ti. So taṁ piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjitvā jighacchādubbalyaṁ paṭivinodetvā evaṁ taṁ rattindivaṁ vītināmeyya.
[¶10] Even though that mendicant, after eating the almsfood, spent the day and night having dispelled hunger and weakness, it is the former mendicant who is more worthy of respect and praise. Why is that? Because for a long time that will conduce to that mendicant being of few wishes, content, self-effacing, unburdensome, and energetic.
> Pali: Kiñcāpi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu taṁ piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjitvā jighacchādubbalyaṁ paṭivinodetvā evaṁ taṁ rattindivaṁ vītināmeyya, atha kho asuyeva me purimo bhikkhu pujjataro ca pāsaṁsataro ca. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tañhi tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno dīgharattaṁ appicchatāya santuṭṭhiyā sallekhāya subharatāya vīriyārambhāya saṁvattissati.
[¶11] So, mendicants, be my heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh. Out of sympathy for you, I think, ‘How can my disciples become heirs in the teaching, not in things of the flesh?’”
> Pali: Tasmātiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā. Atthi me tumhesu anukampā: ‘kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṁ, no āmisadāyādā’”ti.
[¶12] That is what the Buddha said. When he had spoken, the Holy One rose from his seat and entered his dwelling.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.
[¶13] Then, not long after the Buddha left, Venerable Sāriputta said to the mendicants, “Reverends, mendicants!”
> Pali: Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto acirapakkantassa bhagavato bhikkhū āmantesi: “āvuso bhikkhave”ti.
[¶14] “Reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Āvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶15] “Reverends, how do the disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion not train in seclusion? And how do they train in seclusion?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṁ nānusikkhanti, kittāvatā ca pana satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekamanusikkhantī”ti?
[¶16] “Reverend, we would travel a long way to learn the meaning of this statement in the presence of Venerable Sāriputta. May Venerable Sāriputta himself please clarify the meaning of this. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Dūratopi kho mayaṁ, āvuso, āgacchāma āyasmato sāriputtassa santike etassa bhāsitassa atthamaññātuṁ. Sādhu vatāyasmantaṁyeva sāriputtaṁ paṭibhātu etassa bhāsitassa attho; āyasmato sāriputtassa sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶17] “Well then, reverends, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶18] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶19] “Reverends, how do the disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion not train in seclusion? The disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion do not train in seclusion. They don’t give up what the Teacher tells them to give up. They’re indulgent and slack, leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion. In this case, the senior mendicants should be criticized on three grounds. ‘The disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion do not train in seclusion.’ This is the first ground. ‘They don’t give up what the Teacher tells them to give up.’ This is the second ground. ‘They’re indulgent and slack, leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion.’ This is the third ground. The senior mendicants should be criticized on these three grounds. In this case, the middle mendicants and the junior mendicants should be criticized on the same three grounds. This is how the disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion do not train in seclusion.
> Pali: “Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṁ nānusikkhanti? Idhāvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṁ nānusikkhanti, yesañca dhammānaṁ satthā pahānamāha, te ca dhamme nappajahanti, bāhulikā ca honti, sāthalikā, okkamane pubbaṅgamā, paviveke nikkhittadhurā. Tatrāvuso, therā bhikkhū tīhi ṭhānehi gārayhā bhavanti. ‘Satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṁ nānusikkhantī’ti— iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū gārayhā bhavanti. ‘Yesañca dhammānaṁ satthā pahānamāha te ca dhamme nappajahantī’ti— iminā dutiyena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū gārayhā bhavanti. ‘Bāhulikā ca, sāthalikā, okkamane pubbaṅgamā, paviveke nikkhittadhurā’ti— iminā tatiyena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū gārayhā bhavanti. Therā, āvuso, bhikkhū imehi tīhi ṭhānehi gārayhā bhavanti. Tatrāvuso, majjhimā bhikkhū …pe… navā bhikkhū tīhi ṭhānehi gārayhā bhavanti. ‘Satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṁ nānusikkhantī’ti— iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena navā bhikkhū gārayhā bhavanti. ‘Yesañca dhammānaṁ satthā pahānamāha te ca dhamme nappajahantī’ti— iminā dutiyena ṭhānena navā bhikkhū gārayhā bhavanti. ‘Bāhulikā ca honti, sāthalikā, okkamane pubbaṅgamā, paviveke nikkhittadhurā’ti— iminā tatiyena ṭhānena navā bhikkhū gārayhā bhavanti. Navā, āvuso, bhikkhū imehi tīhi ṭhānehi gārayhā bhavanti. Ettāvatā kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṁ nānusikkhanti.
[¶20] And how do the disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion train in seclusion? The disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion train in seclusion. They give up what the Teacher tells them to give up. They’re not indulgent and slack, leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion. In this case, the senior mendicants should be praised on three grounds. ‘The disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion train in seclusion.’ This is the first ground. ‘They give up what the Teacher tells them to give up.’ This is the second ground. ‘They’re not indulgent and slack, leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion.’ This is the third ground. The senior mendicants should be praised on these three grounds. In this case, the middle mendicants and the junior mendicants should be praised on the same three grounds. This is how the disciples of a Teacher who lives in seclusion train in seclusion.
> Pali: Kittāvatā ca panāvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekamanusikkhanti? Idhāvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekamanusikkhanti— yesañca dhammānaṁ satthā pahānamāha te ca dhamme pajahanti; na ca bāhulikā honti, na sāthalikā okkamane nikkhittadhurā paviveke pubbaṅgamā. Tatrāvuso, therā bhikkhū tīhi ṭhānehi pāsaṁsā bhavanti. ‘Satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekamanusikkhantī’ti— iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū pāsaṁsā bhavanti. ‘Yesañca dhammānaṁ satthā pahānamāha te ca dhamme pajahantī’ti— iminā dutiyena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū pāsaṁsā bhavanti. ‘Na ca bāhulikā, na sāthalikā okkamane nikkhittadhurā paviveke pubbaṅgamā’ti— iminā tatiyena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū pāsaṁsā bhavanti. Therā, āvuso, bhikkhū imehi tīhi ṭhānehi pāsaṁsā bhavanti. Tatrāvuso, majjhimā bhikkhū …pe… navā bhikkhū tīhi ṭhānehi pāsaṁsā bhavanti. ‘Satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekamanusikkhantī’ti— iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena navā bhikkhū pāsaṁsā bhavanti. ‘Yesañca dhammānaṁ satthā pahānamāha te ca dhamme pajahantī’ti— iminā dutiyena ṭhānena navā bhikkhū pāsaṁsā bhavanti. ‘Na ca bāhulikā, na sāthalikā okkamane nikkhittadhurā paviveke pubbaṅgamā’ti— iminā tatiyena ṭhānena navā bhikkhū pāsaṁsā bhavanti. Navā, āvuso, bhikkhū imehi tīhi ṭhānehi pāsaṁsā bhavanti. Ettāvatā kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekamanusikkhanti.
[¶21] The bad thing here is greed and hate. There is a middle way of practice for giving up greed and hate. It gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment. And what is that middle way of practice? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. This is that middle way of practice, which gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment.
> Pali: Tatrāvuso, lobho ca pāpako doso ca pāpako. Lobhassa ca pahānāya dosassa ca pahānāya atthi majjhimā paṭipadā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati. Katamā ca sā, āvuso, majjhimā paṭipadā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi. Ayaṁ kho sā, āvuso, majjhimā paṭipadā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati.
[¶22] The bad thing here is anger and acrimony. … disdain and contempt … jealousy and stinginess … deceit and deviousness … obstinacy and aggression … conceit and arrogance … vanity and negligence. There is a middle way of practice for giving up vanity and negligence. It gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment. And what is that middle way of practice? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. This is that middle way of practice, which gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment.”
> Pali: Tatrāvuso, kodho ca pāpako upanāho ca pāpako …pe… makkho ca pāpako paḷāso ca pāpako, issā ca pāpikā maccherañca pāpakaṁ, māyā ca pāpikā sāṭheyyañca pāpakaṁ, thambho ca pāpako sārambho ca pāpako, māno ca pāpako atimāno ca pāpako, mado ca pāpako pamādo ca pāpako. Madassa ca pahānāya pamādassa ca pahānāya atthi majjhimā paṭipadā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati. Katamā ca sā, āvuso, majjhimā paṭipadā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi. Ayaṁ kho sā, āvuso, majjhimā paṭipadā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattatī”ti.
[¶23] That is what Venerable Sāriputta said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what Sāriputta said.
> Pali: Idamavocāyasmā sāriputto. Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶24] > Pali: Dhammadāyādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 4. MN 4 · Fear and Dread
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/4/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/4/#p-N
[¶0] MN 4 · Fear and Dread
> Pali: MN 4 · Bhayabheravasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the brahmin Jānussoṇi went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Worthy Gotama, those gentlemen who, out of faith in you, have gone forth from the lay life to homelessness have you to lead the way, help them out, and give them encouragement. And those people follow the worthy Gotama’s example.”
> Pali: “yeme, bho gotama, kulaputtā bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ uddissa saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, bhavaṁ tesaṁ gotamo pubbaṅgamo, bhavaṁ tesaṁ gotamo bahukāro, bhavaṁ tesaṁ gotamo samādapetā; bhoto ca pana gotamassa sā janatā diṭṭhānugatiṁ āpajjatī”ti.
[¶4] “That’s so true, brahmin! Everything you say is true, brahmin!”
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa. Ye te, brāhmaṇa, kulaputtā mamaṁ uddissa saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, ahaṁ tesaṁ pubbaṅgamo, ahaṁ tesaṁ bahukāro, ahaṁ tesaṁ samādapetā; mama ca pana sā janatā diṭṭhānugatiṁ āpajjatī”ti.
[¶5] “But worthy Gotama, remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest are challenging. It’s hard to maintain seclusion and hard to find joy in solitude. The forests seem to rob the mind of a mendicant who isn’t immersed in samādhi.”
> Pali: “Durabhisambhavāni hi kho, bho gotama, araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni, dukkaraṁ pavivekaṁ, durabhiramaṁ ekatte, haranti maññe mano vanāni samādhiṁ alabhamānassa bhikkhuno”ti.
[¶6] “That’s so true, brahmin! Everything you say is true, brahmin!
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa. Durabhisambhavāni hi kho, brāhmaṇa, araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni, dukkaraṁ pavivekaṁ, durabhiramaṁ ekatte, haranti maññe mano vanāni samādhiṁ alabhamānassa bhikkhuno.
[¶7] Before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I too thought, ‘Remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest are challenging. It’s hard to maintain seclusion and hard to find joy in solitude. The forests seem to rob the mind of a mendicant who isn’t immersed in samādhi.’
> Pali: Mayhampi kho, brāhmaṇa, pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato etadahosi: ‘durabhisambhavāni hi kho araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni, dukkaraṁ pavivekaṁ, durabhiramaṁ ekatte, haranti maññe mano vanāni samādhiṁ alabhamānassa bhikkhuno’ti.
[¶8] Then I thought, ‘There are ascetics and brahmins with unpurified conduct of body, speech, and mind who frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest. Those ascetics and brahmins summon unskillful fear and dread because of these defects in their conduct. But I don’t frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest with unpurified conduct of body, speech, and mind. My conduct is purified. I am one of those noble ones who frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest with purified conduct of body, speech, and mind.’ Seeing this purity of conduct in myself I felt even more unruffled about staying in the forest.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā aparisuddhakāyakammantā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, aparisuddhakāyakammantasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ aparisuddhakāyakammanto araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; parisuddhakāyakammantohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, parisuddhakāyakammataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶9] Then I thought, ‘There are ascetics and brahmins with unpurified livelihood who frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest. Those ascetics and brahmins summon unskillful fear and dread because of these defects in their livelihood. But I don’t frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest with unpurified livelihood. My livelihood is purified. I am one of those noble ones who frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest with purified livelihood.’ Seeing this purity of livelihood in myself I felt even more unruffled about staying in the forest.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā aparisuddhavacīkammantā …pe… aparisuddhamanokammantā …pe… aparisuddhājīvā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, aparisuddhājīvasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ aparisuddhājīvo araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; parisuddhājīvohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhājīvā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, parisuddhājīvataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶10] Then I thought, ‘There are ascetics and brahmins full of desire for sensual pleasures, with acute lust … I am not full of desire …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā abhijjhālū kāmesu tibbasārāgā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, abhijjhālukāmesutibbasārāgasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; anabhijjhālūhamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā anabhijjhālū araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, anabhijjhālutaṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶11] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins full of ill will, with malicious intentions … I have a heart full of love …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā byāpannacittā paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, byāpannacittapaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; mettacittohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā mettacittā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, mettacittataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶12] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins overcome with dullness and drowsiness … I am rid of dullness and drowsiness …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhānasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhito araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; vigatathinamiddhohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā vigatathinamiddhā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, vigatathinamiddhataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶13] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are restless, with minds unsettled … My mind is settled …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā uddhatā avūpasantacittā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, uddhataavūpasantacittasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ uddhato avūpasantacitto araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; vūpasantacittohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā vūpasantacittā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, vūpasantacittataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶14] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are doubting and uncertain … I’ve gone beyond doubt …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kaṅkhī vicikicchī araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, kaṅkhivicikicchisandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ kaṅkhī vicikicchī araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; tiṇṇavicikicchohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā tiṇṇavicikicchā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, tiṇṇavicikicchataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶15] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who glorify themselves and put others down … I don’t glorify myself and put others down …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā attukkaṁsakā paravambhī araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, attukkaṁsanaparavambhanasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ attukkaṁsako paravambhī araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; anattukkaṁsako aparavambhīhamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā anattukkaṁsakā aparavambhī araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, anattukkaṁsakataṁ aparavambhitaṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶16] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are cowardly and craven … I don’t get startled …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā chambhī bhīrukajātikā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, chambhibhīrukajātikasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ chambhī bhīrukajātiko araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; vigatalomahaṁsohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā vigatalomahaṁsā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, vigatalomahaṁsataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶17] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who enjoy possessions, honor, and popularity … I have few wishes …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ nikāmayamānā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, lābhasakkārasilokanikāmanasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ lābhasakkārasilokaṁ nikāmayamāno araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; appicchohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā appicchā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, appicchataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶18] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are lazy and lack energy … I am energetic …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kusītā hīnavīriyā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, kusītahīnavīriyasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ kusīto hīnavīriyo araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; āraddhavīriyohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā āraddhavīriyā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, āraddhavīriyataṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶19] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are unmindful and lack situational awareness … I am mindful …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā muṭṭhassatī asampajānā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, muṭṭhassatiasampajānasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ muṭṭhassati asampajāno araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; upaṭṭhitassatihamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā upaṭṭhitassatī araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, upaṭṭhitassatitaṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶20] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who lack immersion, with straying minds … I am accomplished in immersion …’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā asamāhitā vibbhantacittā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, asamāhitavibbhantacittasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ asamāhito vibbhantacitto araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; samādhisampannohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā samādhisampannā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, samādhisampadaṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶21] ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are witless and idiotic who frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest. Those ascetics and brahmins summon unskillful fear and dread because of the defects of witlessness and stupidity. But I don’t frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest witless and idiotic. I am accomplished in wisdom. I am one of those noble ones who frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest accomplished in wisdom.’ Seeing this accomplishment of wisdom in myself I felt even more unruffled about staying in the forest.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā duppaññā eḷamūgā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, duppaññaeḷamūgasandosahetu have te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalaṁ bhayabheravaṁ avhāyanti. Na kho panāhaṁ duppañño eḷamūgo araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi; paññāsampannohamasmi. Ye hi vo ariyā paññāsampannā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti tesamahaṁ aññataro’ti. Etamahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, paññāsampadaṁ attani sampassamāno bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṁ araññe vihārāya.
[¶22] > Pali: Soḷasapariyāyaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶23] Then I thought, ‘There are certain nights that are recognized as specially portentous: the fourteenth, fifteenth, and eighth of the fortnight. On such nights, why don’t I stay in awe-inspiring and hair-raising shrines in parks, forests, and trees? In such lodgings, hopefully I might see that fear and dread.’ Some time later, that’s what I did. As I was staying there a deer came by, or a peacock snapped a twig, or the wind rustled the leaves. Then I thought, ‘Is this that fear and dread coming?’ Then I thought, ‘Why do I always meditate expecting that fear to come? Why don’t I get rid of that fear and dread just as it comes, while remaining just as I am?’ Then that fear and dread came upon me as I was walking. I didn’t stand still or sit down or lie down until I had got rid of that fear and dread while walking. Then that fear and dread came upon me as I was standing. I didn’t walk or sit down or lie down until I had got rid of that fear and dread while standing. Then that fear and dread came upon me as I was sitting. I didn’t lie down or stand still or walk until I had got rid of that fear and dread while sitting. Then that fear and dread came upon me as I was lying down. I didn’t sit up or stand still or walk until I had got rid of that fear and dread while lying down.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ yā tā rattiyo abhiññātā abhilakkhitā— cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa— tathārūpāsu rattīsu yāni tāni ārāmacetiyāni vanacetiyāni rukkhacetiyāni bhiṁsanakāni salomahaṁsāni tathārūpesu senāsanesu vihareyyaṁ appeva nāmāhaṁ bhayabheravaṁ passeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, aparena samayena yā tā rattiyo abhiññātā abhilakkhitā— cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa— tathārūpāsu rattīsu yāni tāni ārāmacetiyāni vanacetiyāni rukkhacetiyāni bhiṁsanakāni salomahaṁsāni tathārūpesu senāsanesu viharāmi. Tattha ca me, brāhmaṇa, viharato mago vā āgacchati, moro vā kaṭṭhaṁ pāteti, vāto vā paṇṇakasaṭaṁ ereti; tassa mayhaṁ brāhmaṇa etadahosi: ‘etaṁ nūna taṁ bhayabheravaṁ āgacchatī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etadahosi: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ aññadatthu bhayapaṭikaṅkhī viharāmi? Yannūnāhaṁ yathābhūtaṁ yathābhūtassa me taṁ bhayabheravaṁ āgacchati, tathābhūtaṁ tathābhūtova taṁ bhayabheravaṁ paṭivineyyan’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, caṅkamantassa taṁ bhayabheravaṁ āgacchati. So kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, neva tāva tiṭṭhāmi na nisīdāmi na nipajjāmi, yāva caṅkamantova taṁ bhayabheravaṁ paṭivinemi. Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ṭhitassa taṁ bhayabheravaṁ āgacchati. So kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, neva tāva caṅkamāmi na nisīdāmi na nipajjāmi. Yāva ṭhitova taṁ bhayabheravaṁ paṭivinemi. Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, nisinnassa taṁ bhayabheravaṁ āgacchati. So kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, neva tāva nipajjāmi na tiṭṭhāmi na caṅkamāmi, yāva nisinnova taṁ bhayabheravaṁ paṭivinemi. Tassa mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, nipannassa taṁ bhayabheravaṁ āgacchati. So kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, neva tāva nisīdāmi na tiṭṭhāmi na caṅkamāmi, yāva nipannova taṁ bhayabheravaṁ paṭivinemi.
[¶24] There are some ascetics and brahmins who perceive that it’s day when in fact it’s night, or perceive that it’s night when in fact it’s day. This meditation of theirs is delusional, I say. I perceive that it’s night when in fact it is night, and perceive that it’s day when in fact it is day. And if there’s anyone of whom it may be rightly said that a being not liable to delusion has arisen in the world for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans, it’s of me that this should be said.
> Pali: Santi kho pana, brāhmaṇa, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā rattiṁyeva samānaṁ divāti sañjānanti, divāyeva samānaṁ rattīti sañjānanti. Idamahaṁ tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ sammohavihārasmiṁ vadāmi. Ahaṁ kho pana, brāhmaṇa, rattiṁyeva samānaṁ rattīti sañjānāmi, divāyeva samānaṁ divāti sañjānāmi. Yaṁ kho taṁ, brāhmaṇa, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘asammohadhammo satto loke uppanno bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti, mameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘asammohadhammo satto loke uppanno bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.
[¶25] My energy was roused up and unflagging, my mindfulness was established and lucid, my body was tranquil and undisturbed, and my mind was immersed and unified in samādhi. Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected were stilled, I entered and remained in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, I entered and remained in the third absorption, where I meditated with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain, and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, I entered and remained in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, brāhmaṇa, vīriyaṁ ahosi asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, passaddho kāyo asāraddho, samāhitaṁ cittaṁ ekaggaṁ. So kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca vihāsiṁ, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedesiṁ; yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶26] When my mind had become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward recollection of past lives. I recollected many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. I remembered: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so I recollected my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
[¶27] This was the first knowledge, which I achieved in the first watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, rattiyā paṭhame yāme paṭhamā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato āloko uppanno, yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶28] When my mind had become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I saw sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understood how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I saw sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understood how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā; te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā; te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi.
[¶29] This was the second knowledge, which I achieved in the middle watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, rattiyā majjhime yāme dutiyā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato āloko uppanno, yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶30] When my mind had become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. I truly understood: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. I truly understood: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ. ‘Ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶31] Knowing and seeing like this, my mind was freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When it was freed, I knew it was freed.
> Pali: Tassa me evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ ahosi.
[¶32] I understood: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶33] This was the third knowledge, which I achieved in the final watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, rattiyā pacchime yāme tatiyā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato āloko uppanno, yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶34] Brahmin, you might think: ‘Perhaps the ascetic Gotama is not free of greed, hate, and delusion even today, and that is why he still frequents remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest.’ But you should not see it like this. I see two reasons to frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest. I see happiness for myself in this life, and I have sympathy for future generations.”
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, brāhmaṇa, evamassa: ‘ajjāpi nūna samaṇo gotamo avītarāgo avītadoso avītamoho, tasmā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevatī’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Dve kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, atthavase sampassamāno araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevāmi— attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ sampassamāno, pacchimañca janataṁ anukampamāno”ti.
[¶35] “Indeed, worthy Gotama has sympathy for future generations, since he is a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha. Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent, worthy Gotama! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: “Anukampitarūpā vatāyaṁ bhotā gotamena pacchimā janatā, yathā taṁ arahatā sammāsambuddhena. Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶36] > Pali: Bhayabheravasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 5. MN 5 · Unblemished
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/5/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/5/#p-N
[¶0] MN 5 · Unblemished
> Pali: MN 5 · Anaṅgaṇasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There Sāriputta addressed the mendicants: “Reverends, mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū āmantesi: “āvuso bhikkhave”ti.
[¶2] “Reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Āvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶3] “Reverends, these four individuals are found in the world. What four? One individual with a blemish doesn’t truly understand: ‘There is a blemish in me.’ But another individual with a blemish does truly understand: ‘There is a blemish in me.’ One individual without a blemish doesn’t truly understand: ‘There is no blemish in me.’ But another individual without a blemish does truly understand: ‘There is no blemish in me.’ In this case, of the two individuals with a blemish, the one who doesn’t understand is said to be worse, while the one who does understand is better. And of the two individuals without a blemish, the one who doesn’t understand is said to be worse, while the one who does understand is better.”
> Pali: “Cattārome, āvuso, puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ. Katame cattāro? Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Idha panāvuso, ekacco puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Idha panāvuso, ekacco puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, ayaṁ imesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ sāṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ hīnapuriso akkhāyati. Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ imesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ sāṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ seṭṭhapuriso akkhāyati. Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, ayaṁ imesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ anaṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ hīnapuriso akkhāyati. Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ imesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ anaṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ seṭṭhapuriso akkhāyatī”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna said to him:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā mahāmoggallāno āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca:
[¶5] “What is the cause, Reverend Sāriputta, what is the reason why, of the two individuals with a blemish, one is said to be worse and one better? And what is the cause, what is the reason why, of the two individuals without a blemish, one is said to be worse and one better?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, āvuso sāriputta, hetu ko paccayo yenimesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ sāṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ eko hīnapuriso akkhāyati, eko seṭṭhapuriso akkhāyati? Ko panāvuso sāriputta, hetu ko paccayo yenimesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ anaṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ eko hīnapuriso akkhāyati, eko seṭṭhapuriso akkhāyatī”ti?
[¶6] “Reverends, take the case of the individual who has a blemish and does not understand it. You can expect that they won’t generate enthusiasm, make an effort, or rouse up energy to give up that blemish. And they will die with greed, hate, and delusion, blemished, with a corrupted mind. Suppose a bronze cup was brought from a shop or smithy enveloped with dirt or stains. And the owners neither used it or had it cleaned, but kept it in a dirty place. Over time, wouldn’t that bronze cup get even dirtier and more stained?”
> Pali: “Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—na chandaṁ janessati na vāyamissati na vīriyaṁ ārabhissati tassaṅgaṇassa pahānāya; so sarāgo sadoso samoho sāṅgaṇo saṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, kaṁsapāti ābhatā āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vā rajena ca malena ca pariyonaddhā. Tamenaṁ sāmikā na ceva paribhuñjeyyuṁ na ca pariyodapeyyuṁ, rajāpathe ca naṁ nikkhipeyyuṁ. Evañhi sā, āvuso, kaṁsapāti aparena samayena saṅkiliṭṭhatarā assa malaggahitā”ti?
[¶7] “Yes, reverend.”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti.
[¶8] “In the same way, take the case of the individual who has a blemish and does not understand it. You can expect that … they will die with a corrupted mind.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, āvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—na chandaṁ janessati na vāyamissati na vīriyaṁ ārabhissati tassaṅgaṇassa pahānāya; so sarāgo sadoso samoho sāṅgaṇo saṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati.
[¶9] Take the case of the individual who has a blemish and does understand it. You can expect that they will generate enthusiasm, make an effort, and rouse up energy to give up that blemish. And they will die without greed, hate, and delusion, unblemished, with an uncorrupted mind. Suppose a bronze cup was brought from a shop or smithy enveloped with dirt or stains. But the owners used it and had it cleaned, and didn’t keep it in a dirty place. Over time, wouldn’t that bronze cup get cleaner and brighter?”
> Pali: Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—chandaṁ janessati vāyamissati vīriyaṁ ārabhissati tassaṅgaṇassa pahānāya; so arāgo adoso amoho anaṅgaṇo asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, kaṁsapāti ābhatā āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vā rajena ca malena ca pariyonaddhā. Tamenaṁ sāmikā paribhuñjeyyuñceva pariyodapeyyuñca, na ca naṁ rajāpathe nikkhipeyyuṁ. Evañhi sā, āvuso, kaṁsapāti aparena samayena parisuddhatarā assa pariyodātā”ti?
[¶10] “Yes, reverend.”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti.
[¶11] “In the same way, take the case of the individual who has a blemish and does understand it. You can expect that … they will die with an uncorrupted mind.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, āvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo sāṅgaṇova samāno ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—chandaṁ janessati vāyamissati vīriyaṁ ārabhissati tassaṅgaṇassa pahānāya; so arāgo adoso amoho anaṅgaṇo asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati.
[¶12] Take the case of the individual who doesn’t have a blemish but does not understand it. You can expect that they will focus on the feature of beauty, and because of that, lust will infect their mind. And they will die with greed, hate, and delusion, blemished, with a corrupted mind. Suppose a bronze cup was brought from a shop or smithy clean and bright. And the owners neither used it or had it cleaned, but kept it in a dirty place. Over time, wouldn’t that bronze cup get dirtier and more stained?”
> Pali: Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—subhanimittaṁ manasi karissati, tassa subhanimittassa manasikārā rāgo cittaṁ anuddhaṁsessati; so sarāgo sadoso samoho sāṅgaṇo saṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, kaṁsapāti ābhatā āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vā parisuddhā pariyodātā. Tamenaṁ sāmikā na ceva paribhuñjeyyuṁ na ca pariyodapeyyuṁ, rajāpathe ca naṁ nikkhipeyyuṁ. Evañhi sā, āvuso, kaṁsapāti aparena samayena saṅkiliṭṭhatarā assa malaggahitā”ti?
[¶13] “Yes, reverend.”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti.
[¶14] “In the same way, take the case of the individual who has no blemish and does not understand it. You can expect that … they will die with a corrupted mind.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, āvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—subhanimittaṁ manasi karissati, tassa subhanimittassa manasikārā rāgo cittaṁ anuddhaṁsessati; so sarāgo sadoso samoho sāṅgaṇo saṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati.
[¶15] Take the case of the individual who doesn’t have a blemish and does understand it. You can expect that they won’t focus on the feature of beauty, and because of that, lust won’t infect their mind. And they will die without greed, hate, and delusion, unblemished, with an uncorrupted mind. Suppose a bronze cup was brought from a shop or smithy clean and bright. And the owners used it and had it cleaned, and didn’t keep it in a dirty place. Over time, wouldn’t that bronze cup get cleaner and brighter?”
> Pali: Tatrāvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—subhanimittaṁ na manasi karissati, tassa subhanimittassa amanasikārā rāgo cittaṁ nānuddhaṁsessati; so arāgo adoso amoho anaṅgaṇo asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, kaṁsapāti ābhatā āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vā parisuddhā pariyodātā. Tamenaṁ sāmikā paribhuñjeyyuñceva pariyodapeyyuñca, na ca naṁ rajāpathe nikkhipeyyuṁ. Evañhi sā, āvuso, kaṁsapāti aparena samayena parisuddhatarā assa pariyodātā”ti?
[¶16] “Yes, reverend.”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti.
[¶17] “In the same way, take the case of the individual who doesn’t have a blemish and does understand it. You can expect that … they will die with an uncorrupted mind.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, āvuso, yvāyaṁ puggalo anaṅgaṇova samāno ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ aṅgaṇan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, tassetaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—subhanimittaṁ na manasi karissati, tassa subhanimittassa amanasikārā rāgo cittaṁ nānuddhaṁsessati; so arāgo adoso amoho anaṅgaṇo asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṁ karissati.
[¶18] This is the cause, this is the reason why, of the two individuals with a blemish, one is said to be worse and one better. And this is the cause, this is the reason why, of the two individuals without a blemish, one is said to be worse and one better.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, āvuso moggallāna, hetu ayaṁ paccayo yenimesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ sāṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ eko hīnapuriso akkhāyati, eko seṭṭhapuriso akkhāyati. Ayaṁ panāvuso moggallāna, hetu ayaṁ paccayo yenimesaṁ dvinnaṁ puggalānaṁ anaṅgaṇānaṁyeva sataṁ eko hīnapuriso akkhāyati, eko seṭṭhapuriso akkhāyatī”ti.
[¶19] “Reverend, the word ‘blemish’ is spoken of. But what is ‘blemish’ a term for?”
> Pali: “Aṅgaṇaṁ aṅgaṇanti, āvuso, vuccati. Kissa nu kho etaṁ, āvuso, adhivacanaṁ yadidaṁ aṅgaṇan”ti?
[¶20] “Reverend, ‘blemish’ is a term for the spheres of bad, unskillful wishes.
> Pali: “Pāpakānaṁ kho etaṁ, āvuso, akusalānaṁ icchāvacarānaṁ adhivacanaṁ, yadidaṁ aṅgaṇan”ti.
[¶21] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘If I commit an offense, I hope the mendicants don’t find out!’ But it’s possible that the mendicants do find out that that mendicant has committed an offense. Thinking, ‘The mendicants have found out about my offense,’ they get angry and bitter. And that anger and that bitterness are both blemishes.
> Pali: “Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘āpattiñca vata āpanno assaṁ, na ca maṁ bhikkhū jāneyyuṁ āpattiṁ āpanno’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ taṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū jāneyyuṁ: ‘āpattiṁ āpanno’ti. ‘Jānanti maṁ bhikkhū āpattiṁ āpanno’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶22] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘If I commit an offense, I hope the mendicants accuse me in private, not in the middle of the Saṅgha.’ But it’s possible that the mendicants do accuse that mendicant in the middle of the Saṅgha …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘āpattiñca vata āpanno assaṁ, anuraho maṁ bhikkhū codeyyuṁ, no saṅghamajjhe’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ taṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū saṅghamajjhe codeyyuṁ, no anuraho. ‘Saṅghamajjhe maṁ bhikkhū codenti, no anuraho’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶23] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘If I commit an offense, I hope I’m accused by a peer, not by someone who is not a peer.’ But it’s possible that someone who is not a peer accuses that mendicant …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘āpattiñca vata āpanno assaṁ, sappaṭipuggalo maṁ codeyya, no appaṭipuggalo’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ taṁ bhikkhuṁ appaṭipuggalo codeyya, no sappaṭipuggalo. ‘Appaṭipuggalo maṁ codeti, no sappaṭipuggalo’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶24] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘Oh, I hope the Teacher will teach the mendicants by repeatedly questioning me alone, not some other mendicant.’ But it’s possible that the Teacher will teach the mendicants by repeatedly questioning some other mendicant …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata mameva satthā paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyya, na aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ satthā paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyā’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ satthā paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyya, na taṁ bhikkhuṁ satthā paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyya. ‘Aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ satthā paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseti, na maṁ satthā paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ desetī’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶25] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘Oh, I hope the mendicants will enter the village for the meal putting me at the very front, not some other mendicant.’ But it’s possible that the mendicants will enter the village for the meal putting some other mendicant at the very front …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata mameva bhikkhū purakkhatvā purakkhatvā gāmaṁ bhattāya paviseyyuṁ, na aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū purakkhatvā purakkhatvā gāmaṁ bhattāya paviseyyun’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū purakkhatvā purakkhatvā gāmaṁ bhattāya paviseyyuṁ, na taṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū purakkhatvā purakkhatvā gāmaṁ bhattāya paviseyyuṁ. ‘Aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū purakkhatvā purakkhatvā gāmaṁ bhattāya pavisanti, na maṁ bhikkhū purakkhatvā purakkhatvā gāmaṁ bhattāya pavisantī’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶26] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘Oh, I hope that I alone get the best seat, the best drink, and the best almsfood in the refectory, not some other mendicant.’ But it’s possible that some other mendicant gets the best seat, the best drink, and the best almsfood in the refectory …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata ahameva labheyyaṁ bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ, na añño bhikkhu labheyya bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍan’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ añño bhikkhu labheyya bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ, na so bhikkhu labheyya bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ. ‘Añño bhikkhu labhati bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ, nāhaṁ labhāmi bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍan’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶27] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘I hope that I alone give the verses of appreciation after eating in the refectory, not some other mendicant.’ But it’s possible that some other mendicant gives the verses of appreciation after eating in the refectory …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata ahameva bhattagge bhuttāvī anumodeyyaṁ, na añño bhikkhu bhattagge bhuttāvī anumodeyyā’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ añño bhikkhu bhattagge bhuttāvī anumodeyya, na so bhikkhu bhattagge bhuttāvī anumodeyya. ‘Añño bhikkhu bhattagge bhuttāvī anumodati, nāhaṁ bhattagge bhuttāvī anumodāmī’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶28] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘Oh, I hope that I might teach the Dhamma to the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen in the monastery, not some other mendicant.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata ahameva ārāmagatānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, na añño bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyā’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ añño bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyya, na so bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyya. ‘Añño bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ deseti, nāhaṁ ārāmagatānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammaṁ desemī’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶29] But it’s possible that some other mendicant teaches the Dhamma …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata ahameva ārāmagatānaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ …pe… upāsakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ …pe… upāsikānaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, na añño bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ upāsikānaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyā’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ añño bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ upāsikānaṁ dhammaṁ deseyya, na so bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ upāsikānaṁ dhammaṁ deseyya. ‘Añño bhikkhu ārāmagatānaṁ upāsikānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti, nāhaṁ ārāmagatānaṁ upāsikānaṁ dhammaṁ desemī’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶30] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘Oh, I hope that the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen will honor, respect, revere, and venerate me alone, not some other mendicant.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata mameva bhikkhū sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, na aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyun’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, na taṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ. ‘Aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhikkhū sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, na maṁ bhikkhū sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjentī’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶31] But it’s possible that some other mendicant is honored, respected, revered, and venerated …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata mameva bhikkhuniyo …pe… upāsakā …pe… upāsikā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, na aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ upāsikā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyun’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ upāsikā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, na taṁ bhikkhuṁ upāsikā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ. ‘Aññaṁ bhikkhuṁ upāsikā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, na maṁ upāsikā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjentī’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶32] It’s possible that some mendicant might wish: ‘I hope I get the nicest robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick, not some other mendicant.’ But it’s possible that some other mendicant gets the nicest robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick …
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata ahameva lābhī assaṁ paṇītānaṁ cīvarānaṁ, na añño bhikkhu lābhī assa paṇītānaṁ cīvarānan’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ añño bhikkhu lābhī assa paṇītānaṁ cīvarānaṁ, na so bhikkhu lābhī assa paṇītānaṁ cīvarānaṁ. ‘Añño bhikkhu lābhī paṇītānaṁ cīvarānaṁ, nāhaṁ lābhī paṇītānaṁ cīvarānan’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶33] Thinking, ‘Some other mendicant has got the nicest robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick’, they get angry and bitter. And that anger and that bitterness are both blemishes.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vata ahameva lābhī assaṁ paṇītānaṁ piṇḍapātānaṁ …pe… paṇītānaṁ senāsanānaṁ …pe… paṇītānaṁ gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṁ, na añño bhikkhu lābhī assa paṇītānaṁ gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānan’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ añño bhikkhu lābhī assa paṇītānaṁ gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṁ, na so bhikkhu lābhī assa paṇītānaṁ gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṁ. ‘Añño bhikkhu lābhī paṇītānaṁ gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṁ, nāhaṁ lābhī paṇītānaṁ gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānan’ti— iti so kupito hoti appatīto. Yo ceva kho, āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo— ubhayametaṁ aṅgaṇaṁ.
[¶34] ‘Blemish’ is a term for these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes.
> Pali: Imesaṁ kho etaṁ, āvuso, pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ icchāvacarānaṁ adhivacanaṁ, yadidaṁ aṅgaṇanti.
[¶35] Suppose these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be not given up by a mendicant. Even though they dwell in the wilderness, in remote lodgings, eat only almsfood, wander indiscriminately for almsfood, wear rag robes, and wear shabby robes, their spiritual companions don’t honor, respect, revere, and venerate them. Why is that? It’s because these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be not given up by that venerable. Suppose a bronze cup was brought from a shop or smithy clean and bright. The owners were to prepare it with the carcass of a snake, a dog, or a human, cover it with a bronze lid, and parade it through the market-place. When people saw it they’d say: ‘Oh my, what is it that you’re carrying like a precious treasure?’ So they’d open up the lid for people to look inside. But as soon as they saw it they were filled with loathing, revulsion, and disgust. Not even those who were hungry wanted to eat it, let alone those who were replete.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, āvuso, bhikkhuno ime pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā appahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca, kiñcāpi so hoti āraññiko pantasenāsano piṇḍapātiko sapadānacārī paṁsukūliko lūkhacīvaradharo, atha kho naṁ sabrahmacārī na ceva sakkaronti na garuṁ karonti na mānenti na pūjenti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Te hi tassa āyasmato pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā appahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, kaṁsapāti ābhatā āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vā parisuddhā pariyodātā. Tamenaṁ sāmikā ahikuṇapaṁ vā kukkurakuṇapaṁ vā manussakuṇapaṁ vā racayitvā aññissā kaṁsapātiyā paṭikujjitvā antarāpaṇaṁ paṭipajjeyyuṁ. Tamenaṁ jano disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ambho, kimevidaṁ harīyati jaññajaññaṁ viyā’ti? Tamenaṁ uṭṭhahitvā apāpuritvā olokeyya. Tassa sahadassanena amanāpatā ca saṇṭhaheyya, pāṭikulyatā ca saṇṭhaheyya, jegucchatā ca saṇṭhaheyya; jighacchitānampi na bhottukamyatā assa, pageva suhitānaṁ.
[¶36] In the same way, when these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be not given up by a mendicant … their spiritual companions don’t honor, respect, revere, and venerate them. Why is that? It’s because these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be not given up by that venerable.
> Pali: Evameva kho, āvuso, yassa kassaci bhikkhuno ime pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā appahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca, kiñcāpi so hoti āraññiko pantasenāsano piṇḍapātiko sapadānacārī paṁsukūliko lūkhacīvaradharo, atha kho naṁ sabrahmacārī na ceva sakkaronti na garuṁ karonti na mānenti na pūjenti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Te hi tassa āyasmato pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā appahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca.
[¶37] Suppose these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be given up by a mendicant. Even though they dwell within a village, accept invitations to a meal, and wear robes offered by householders, their spiritual companions honor, respect, revere, and venerate them. Why is that? It’s because these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be given up by that venerable. Suppose a bronze cup was brought from a shop or smithy clean and bright. The owners were to prepare it with boiled fine rice with the dark grains picked out and served with many soups and sauces, cover it with a bronze lid, and parade it through the market-place. When people saw it they’d say: ‘Oh my, what is it that you’re carrying like a precious treasure?’ So they’d open up the lid for people to look inside. And as soon as they saw it they were filled with liking, attraction, and relish. Even those who were replete wanted to eat it, let alone those who were hungry.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, āvuso, bhikkhuno ime pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā pahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca, kiñcāpi so hoti gāmantavihārī nemantaniko gahapaticīvaradharo, atha kho naṁ sabrahmacārī sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Te hi tassa āyasmato pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā pahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, kaṁsapāti ābhatā āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vā parisuddhā pariyodātā. Tamenaṁ sāmikā sālīnaṁ odanaṁ vicitakāḷakaṁ anekasūpaṁ anekabyañjanaṁ racayitvā aññissā kaṁsapātiyā paṭikujjitvā antarāpaṇaṁ paṭipajjeyyuṁ. Tamenaṁ jano disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ambho, kimevidaṁ harīyati jaññajaññaṁ viyā’ti? Tamenaṁ uṭṭhahitvā apāpuritvā olokeyya. Tassa saha dassanena manāpatā ca saṇṭhaheyya, appāṭikulyatā ca saṇṭhaheyya, ajegucchatā ca saṇṭhaheyya; suhitānampi bhottukamyatā assa, pageva jighacchitānaṁ.
[¶38] In the same way, when these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be given up by a mendicant … their spiritual companions honor, respect, revere, and venerate them. Why is that? It’s because these spheres of bad, unskillful wishes are seen and heard to be given up by that venerable.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, āvuso, yassa kassaci bhikkhuno ime pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā pahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca, kiñcāpi so hoti gāmantavihārī nemantaniko gahapaticīvaradharo, atha kho naṁ sabrahmacārī sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Te hi tassa āyasmato pāpakā akusalā icchāvacarā pahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti cā”ti.
[¶39] When he said this, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna said to him, “Reverend Sāriputta, a simile strikes me.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā mahāmoggallāno āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “upamā maṁ, āvuso sāriputta, paṭibhātī”ti.
[¶40] “Then speak as you feel inspired,” said Sāriputta.
> Pali: “Paṭibhātu taṁ, āvuso moggallānā”ti.
[¶41] “Reverend, this one time I was staying right here in Rājagaha, the Mountainfold. Then I robed up in the morning and, taking my bowl and robe, entered Rājagaha for alms. Now at that time Samīti of the wainwrights was planing the rim of a chariot wheel. The Ājīvaka ascetic Paṇḍuputta, who was formerly of the wainwrights, was standing by, and this thought came to his mind: ‘Oh, I hope Samīti the wainwright planes out the crooks, bends, and flaws in this rim. Then the rim will be rid of crooks, bends, and flaws, pure, and consolidated in the core.’ And Samīti planed out the flaws in the rim just as Paṇḍuputta thought. Then Paṇḍuputta expressed his gladness: ‘He planes like he knows my heart with his heart!’
> Pali: “Ekamidāhaṁ, āvuso, samayaṁ rājagahe viharāmi giribbaje. Atha khvāhaṁ, āvuso, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ. Tena kho pana samayena samīti yānakāraputto rathassa nemiṁ tacchati. Tamenaṁ paṇḍuputto ājīvako purāṇayānakāraputto paccupaṭṭhito hoti. Atha kho, āvuso, paṇḍuputtassa ājīvakassa purāṇayānakāraputtassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘aho vatāyaṁ samīti yānakāraputto imissā nemiyā imañca vaṅkaṁ imañca jimhaṁ imañca dosaṁ taccheyya, evāyaṁ nemi apagatavaṅkā apagatajimhā apagatadosā suddhā assa sāre patiṭṭhitā’ti. Yathā yathā kho, āvuso, paṇḍuputtassa ājīvakassa purāṇayānakāraputtassa cetaso parivitakko hoti tathā tathā samīti yānakāraputto tassā nemiyā tañca vaṅkaṁ tañca jimhaṁ tañca dosaṁ tacchati. Atha kho, āvuso, paṇḍuputto ājīvako purāṇayānakāraputto attamano attamanavācaṁ nicchāresi: ‘hadayā hadayaṁ maññe aññāya tacchatī’ti.
[¶42] In the same way, there are those faithless individuals who went forth from the lay life to homelessness not out of faith but to earn a livelihood. They’re devious, deceitful, and sneaky. They’re haughty, insolent, fickle, scurrilous, and loose-tongued. They do not guard their sense doors or eat in moderation, and they are not dedicated to wakefulness. They don’t care about the ascetic life, and don’t keenly respect the training. They’re indulgent and slack, leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion, lazy, and lacking energy. They’re unmindful, lacking situational awareness and immersion, with straying minds, witless and idiotic. Venerable Sāriputta planes their faults with this exposition of the teaching as if he knows my heart with his heart!
> Pali: Evameva kho, āvuso, ye te puggalā assaddhā, jīvikatthā na saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, saṭhā māyāvino ketabino uddhatā unnaḷā capalā mukharā vikiṇṇavācā, indriyesu aguttadvārā, bhojane amattaññuno, jāgariyaṁ ananuyuttā, sāmaññe anapekkhavanto, sikkhāya na tibbagāravā, bāhulikā sāthalikā, okkamane pubbaṅgamā, paviveke nikkhittadhurā, kusītā hīnavīriyā muṭṭhassatī asampajānā asamāhitā vibbhantacittā duppaññā eḷamūgā, tesaṁ āyasmā sāriputto iminā dhammapariyāyena hadayā hadayaṁ maññe aññāya tacchati.
[¶43] But there are those gentlemen who went forth from the lay life to homelessness out of faith. They’re not devious, deceitful, and sneaky. They’re not haughty, insolent, fickle, scurrilous, and loose-tongued. They guard their sense doors and eat in moderation, and they are dedicated to wakefulness. They care about the ascetic life, and keenly respect the training. They’re not indulgent or slack, nor are they leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion. They’re energetic and determined. They’re mindful, with situational awareness, immersion, and unified minds; wise and clever. Hearing this exposition of the teaching from Venerable Sāriputta, they drink it up and devour it, as it were. And in speech and thought they say: ‘It’s good, sir, that he draws his spiritual companions away from the unskillful and establishes them in the skillful.’
> Pali: Ye pana te kulaputtā saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, asaṭhā amāyāvino aketabino anuddhatā anunnaḷā acapalā amukharā avikiṇṇavācā, indriyesu guttadvārā, bhojane mattaññuno, jāgariyaṁ anuyuttā, sāmaññe apekkhavanto, sikkhāya tibbagāravā, na bāhulikā na sāthalikā, okkamane nikkhittadhurā, paviveke pubbaṅgamā, āraddhavīriyā pahitattā upaṭṭhitassatī sampajānā samāhitā ekaggacittā paññavanto aneḷamūgā, te āyasmato sāriputtassa imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ sutvā pivanti maññe, ghasanti maññe vacasā ceva manasā ca: ‘sādhu vata, bho, sabrahmacārī akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetī’ti.
[¶44] Suppose there was a woman or man who was young, youthful, and fond of adornments, and had bathed their head. Presented with a garland of lotuses, jasmine, or liana flowers, they would take them in both hands and place them on the crown of the head. In the same way, those gentlemen who went forth from the lay life to homelessness out of faith … say: ‘It’s good, sir, that he draws his spiritual companions away from the unskillful and establishes them in the skillful.’” And so these two spiritual giants agreed with each other’s fine words.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, āvuso, itthī vā puriso vā daharo yuvā maṇḍanakajātiko sīsaṁnhāto uppalamālaṁ vā vassikamālaṁ vā atimuttakamālaṁ vā labhitvā ubhohi hatthehi paṭiggahetvā uttamaṅge sirasmiṁ patiṭṭhapeyya; evameva kho, āvuso, ye te kulaputtā saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, asaṭhā amāyāvino aketabino anuddhatā anunnaḷā acapalā amukharā avikiṇṇavācā, indriyesu guttadvārā, bhojane mattaññuno, jāgariyaṁ anuyuttā, sāmaññe apekkhavanto, sikkhāya tibbagāravā, na bāhulikā na sāthalikā, okkamane nikkhittadhurā, paviveke pubbaṅgamā, āraddhavīriyā pahitattā upaṭṭhitassatī sampajānā samāhitā ekaggacittā paññavanto aneḷamūgā, te āyasmato sāriputtassa imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ sutvā pivanti maññe, ghasanti maññe vacasā ceva manasā ca: ‘sādhu vata, bho, sabrahmacārī akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetī’”ti. Itiha te ubho mahānāgā aññamaññassa subhāsitaṁ samanumodiṁsūti.
[¶45] > Pali: Anaṅgaṇasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 6. MN 6 · One Might Wish
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/6/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/6/#p-N
[¶0] MN 6 · One Might Wish
> Pali: MN 6 · Ākaṅkheyyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, live by the ethical precepts and the monastic code. Live restrained in the monastic code, conducting yourselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, keep the rules you’ve undertaken.
> Pali: “Sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharatha sampannapātimokkhā; pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvutā viharatha ācāragocarasampannā aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvino; samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesu.
[¶4] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I be liked and approved by my spiritual companions, respected and admired.’ So let them fulfill their precepts, be committed to inner serenity of the heart, not neglect absorption, be endowed with discernment, and frequent empty huts.
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘sabrahmacārīnaṁ piyo ca assaṁ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶5] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I receive robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick.’ So let them fulfill their precepts, be committed to inner serenity of the heart, not neglect absorption, be endowed with discernment, and frequent empty huts.
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘lābhī assaṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶6] A mendicant might wish: ‘May the services of those whose robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick I enjoy be very fruitful and beneficial for them.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘yesāhaṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṁ paribhuñjāmi tesaṁ te kārā mahapphalā assu mahānisaṁsā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶7] A mendicant might wish: ‘When deceased family and relatives who have passed away recollect me with a confident mind, may this be very fruitful and beneficial for them.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘ye maṁ ñātī sālohitā petā kālaṅkatā pasannacittā anussaranti tesaṁ taṁ mahapphalaṁ assa mahānisaṁsan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶8] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I prevail over desire and discontent, and may desire and discontent not prevail over me. May I live having mastered desire and discontent whenever they arose.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘aratiratisaho assaṁ, na ca maṁ arati saheyya, uppannaṁ aratiṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶9] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I prevail over fear and dread, and may fear and dread not prevail over me. May I live having mastered fear and dread whenever they arose.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘bhayabheravasaho assaṁ, na ca maṁ bhayabheravaṁ saheyya, uppannaṁ bhayabheravaṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶10] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I get the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when I want, without trouble or difficulty.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī assaṁ akicchalābhī akasiralābhī’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶11] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I have direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā, te kāyena phusitvā vihareyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶12] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I, with the ending of three fetters, become a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpanno assaṁ avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶13] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, become a once-returner, coming back to this world once only, then making an end of suffering.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī assaṁ sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ kareyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶14] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I, with the ending of the five lower fetters, be reborn spontaneously and become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko assaṁ tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶15] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying myself and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhaveyyaṁ—ekopi hutvā bahudhā assaṁ, bahudhāpi hutvā eko assaṁ; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gaccheyyaṁ, seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ kareyyaṁ, seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gaccheyyaṁ, seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kameyyaṁ, seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmaseyyaṁ parimajjeyyaṁ; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶16] A mendicant might wish: ‘With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, may I hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇeyyaṁ—dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶17] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with my mind. May I understand mind with greed as “mind with greed”, and mind without greed as “mind without greed”; mind with hate as “mind with hate”, and mind without hate as “mind without hate”; mind with delusion as “mind with delusion”, and mind without delusion as “mind without delusion”; constricted mind as “constricted mind”, and scattered mind as “scattered mind”; expansive mind as “expansive mind”, and unexpansive mind as “unexpansive mind”; mind that is not supreme as “mind that is not supreme”, and mind that is supreme as “mind that is supreme”; mind immersed in samādhi as “mind immersed in samādhi”, and mind not immersed in samādhi as “mind not immersed in samādhi”; freed mind as “freed mind”, and unfreed mind as “unfreed mind”.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajāneyyaṁ— sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ sarāgaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ vītarāgaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ sadosaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ vītadosaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; samohaṁ vā cittaṁ samohaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ vītamohaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ saṅkhittaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ vikkhittaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ mahaggataṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ amahaggataṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ sauttaraṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ anuttaraṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ samāhitaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ asamāhitaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ avimuttaṁ cittanti pajāneyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶18] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I recollect many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. May I remember: “There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.” May I thus recollect my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussareyyaṁ, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jāti satasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe—amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapannoti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussareyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī …pe… brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶19] A mendicant might wish: ‘With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, may I see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place—and understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: “These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.” And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, may I see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. And may I understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.’ So let them fulfill their precepts …
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passeyyaṁ cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajāneyyaṁ—ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā; ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannāti, iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passeyyaṁ cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajāneyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶20] A mendicant might wish: ‘May I realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with my own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.’ So let them fulfill their precepts, be committed to inner serenity of the heart, not neglect absorption, be endowed with discernment, and frequent empty huts.
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyan’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ.
[¶21] ‘Mendicants, live by the ethical precepts and the monastic code. Live restrained in the monastic code, conducting yourselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, keep the rules you’ve undertaken.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.”
> Pali: ‘Sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharatha sampannapātimokkhā; pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvutā viharatha ācāragocarasampannā aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvino; samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesū’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttan”ti.
[¶22] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶23] > Pali: Ākaṅkheyyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 7. MN 7 · The Simile of the Cloth
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/7/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/7/#p-N
[¶0] MN 7 · The Simile of the Cloth
> Pali: MN 7 · Vatthasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Suppose, mendicants, there was a cloth that was dirty and soiled. No matter what dye the dyer applied—whether blue or yellow or red or magenta—it would look poorly dyed and impure in color. Why is that? Because of the impurity of the cloth.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vatthaṁ saṅkiliṭṭhaṁ malaggahitaṁ; tamenaṁ rajako yasmiṁ yasmiṁ raṅgajāte upasaṁhareyya—yadi nīlakāya yadi pītakāya yadi lohitakāya yadi mañjiṭṭhakāya durattavaṇṇamevassa aparisuddhavaṇṇamevassa. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aparisuddhattā, bhikkhave, vatthassa.
[¶4] In the same way, when the mind is corrupt, a bad destiny is to be expected. Suppose there was a cloth that was pure and clean. No matter what dye the dyer applied—whether blue or yellow or red or magenta—it would look well dyed and pure in color. Why is that? Because of the purity of the cloth.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, citte saṅkiliṭṭhe, duggati pāṭikaṅkhā. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vatthaṁ parisuddhaṁ pariyodātaṁ; tamenaṁ rajako yasmiṁ yasmiṁ raṅgajāte upasaṁhareyya—yadi nīlakāya yadi pītakāya yadi lohitakāya yadi mañjiṭṭhakāya—surattavaṇṇamevassa parisuddhavaṇṇamevassa. Taṁ kissa hetu? Parisuddhattā, bhikkhave, vatthassa.
[¶5] In the same way, when the mind isn’t corrupt, a good destiny is to be expected.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, citte asaṅkiliṭṭhe, sugati pāṭikaṅkhā.
[¶6] And what are the corruptions of the mind? Covetousness and immoral greed, ill will, anger, acrimony, disdain, contempt, jealousy, stinginess, deceit, deviousness, obstinacy, aggression, conceit, arrogance, vanity, and negligence are corruptions of the mind.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, cittassa upakkilesā? Abhijjhāvisamalobho cittassa upakkileso, byāpādo cittassa upakkileso, kodho cittassa upakkileso, upanāho cittassa upakkileso, makkho cittassa upakkileso, paḷāso cittassa upakkileso, issā cittassa upakkileso, macchariyaṁ cittassa upakkileso, māyā cittassa upakkileso, sāṭheyyaṁ cittassa upakkileso, thambho cittassa upakkileso, sārambho cittassa upakkileso, māno cittassa upakkileso, atimāno cittassa upakkileso, mado cittassa upakkileso, pamādo cittassa upakkileso.
[¶7] A mendicant who understands that covetousness and immoral greed are corruptions of the mind gives them up. A mendicant who understands that ill will … negligence is a corruption of the mind gives it up.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘abhijjhāvisamalobho cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā abhijjhāvisamalobhaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘byāpādo cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā byāpādaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘kodho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā kodhaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘upanāho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā upanāhaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘makkho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā makkhaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘paḷāso cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā paḷāsaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘issā cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā issaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘macchariyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā macchariyaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘māyā cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā māyaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘sāṭheyyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā sāṭheyyaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘thambho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā thambhaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘sārambho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā sārambhaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘māno cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā mānaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘atimāno cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā atimānaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘mado cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā madaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati; ‘pamādo cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā pamādaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahati.
[¶8] When they have understood these corruptions of the mind for what they are, and have given them up, they have experiential confidence in the Buddha: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’
> Pali: Yato kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘abhijjhāvisamalobho cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā abhijjhāvisamalobho cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti, ‘byāpādo cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā byāpādo cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘kodho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā kodho cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘upanāho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā upanāho cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘makkho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā makkho cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘paḷāso cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā paḷāso cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘issā cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā issā cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘macchariyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā macchariyaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘māyā cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā māyā cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘sāṭheyyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā sāṭheyyaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘thambho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā thambho cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘sārambho cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā sārambho cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘māno cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā māno cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘atimāno cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā atimāno cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘mado cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā mado cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti; ‘pamādo cittassa upakkileso’ti— iti viditvā pamādo cittassa upakkileso pahīno hoti. So buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti;
[¶9] They have experiential confidence in the teaching: ‘The teaching is well explained by the Buddha—apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves.’
> Pali: dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhī’ti;
[¶10] They have experiential confidence in the Saṅgha: ‘The Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples is practicing the way that’s good, direct, systematic, and proper. It consists of the four pairs, the eight individual persons. This is the Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples that is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of greeting with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world.’
> Pali: saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ujuppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ñāyappaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, sāmīcippaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, yadidaṁ cattāri purisayugāni, aṭṭha purisapuggalā. Esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho āhuneyyo pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo, anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassā’ti.
[¶11] When a mendicant has discarded, eliminated, released, given up, and relinquished to this extent, thinking, ‘I have experiential confidence in the Buddha … the teaching … the Saṅgha,’ they find inspiration in the meaning and the teaching, and find joy connected with the teaching. Thinking: ‘I have discarded, eliminated, released, given up, and relinquished to this extent,’ they find inspiration in the meaning and the teaching, and find joy connected with the teaching. When they’re joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when they’re blissful, the mind becomes immersed in samādhi.
> Pali: Yathodhi kho panassa cattaṁ hoti vantaṁ muttaṁ pahīnaṁ paṭinissaṭṭhaṁ, so ‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’ti labhati atthavedaṁ, labhati dhammavedaṁ, labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ. Pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati; ‘dhamme …pe… saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’ti labhati atthavedaṁ, labhati dhammavedaṁ, labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ; pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. ‘Yathodhi kho pana me cattaṁ vantaṁ muttaṁ pahīnaṁ paṭinissaṭṭhan’ti labhati atthavedaṁ, labhati dhammavedaṁ, labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ; pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.
[¶12] When a mendicant of such ethics, such qualities, and such wisdom eats boiled fine rice with the dark grains picked out and served with many soups and sauces, that is no obstacle for them. Compare with cloth that is dirty and soiled; it can be made pure and clean by pure water. Or native gold, which can be made pure and bright by a forge. In the same way, when a mendicant of such ethics, such qualities, and such wisdom eats boiled fine rice with the dark grains picked out and served with many soups and sauces, that is no obstacle for them.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁsīlo evaṁdhammo evaṁpañño sālīnañcepi piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjati vicitakāḷakaṁ anekasūpaṁ anekabyañjanaṁ, nevassa taṁ hoti antarāyāya. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vatthaṁ saṅkiliṭṭhaṁ malaggahitaṁ acchodakaṁ āgamma parisuddhaṁ hoti pariyodātaṁ, ukkāmukhaṁ vā panāgamma jātarūpaṁ parisuddhaṁ hoti pariyodātaṁ; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁsīlo evaṁdhammo evaṁpañño sālīnañcepi piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjati vicitakāḷakaṁ anekasūpaṁ anekabyañjanaṁ, nevassa taṁ hoti antarāyāya.
[¶13] They meditate spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of compassion to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of rejoicing to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati; karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.
[¶14] They understand: ‘There is this, there is what is worse than this, there is what is better than this, and there is an escape beyond the scope of perception.’
> Pali: So ‘atthi idaṁ, atthi hīnaṁ, atthi paṇītaṁ, atthi imassa saññāgatassa uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti.
[¶15] Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶16] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ This is called a mendicant who is bathed with the inner bathing.”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave: ‘bhikkhu sināto antarena sinānenā’”ti.
[¶17] Now at that time the brahmin Bhāradvāja of Sundarikā was sitting not far from the Buddha. He said to the Buddha, “But does Worthy Gotama go to the Bāhukā River to bathe?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sundarikabhāradvājo brāhmaṇo bhagavato avidūre nisinno hoti. Atha kho sundarikabhāradvājo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “gacchati pana bhavaṁ gotamo bāhukaṁ nadiṁ sināyitun”ti?
[¶18] “Brahmin, why go to the Bāhukā River? What can the Bāhukā River do?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ, brāhmaṇa, bāhukāya nadiyā? Kiṁ bāhukā nadī karissatī”ti?
[¶19] “Many people deem that the Bāhukā River leads to a heavenly world and bestows merit. And many people rinse off their bad deeds in the Bāhukā River.”
> Pali: “Lokkhasammatā hi, bho gotama, bāhukā nadī bahujanassa, puññasammatā hi, bho gotama, bāhukā nadī bahujanassa, bāhukāya pana nadiyā bahujano pāpakammaṁ kataṁ pavāhetī”ti.
[¶20] Then the Buddha addressed Bhāradvāja of Sundarikā in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sundarikabhāradvājaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶21] “The Bāhukā and the Adhikakkā,
at Gayā and the Sundarikā too,
Sarasvatī and Payāga,
and the Bāhumatī River:
a fool can constantly plunge into them
but it won’t purify their dark deeds.
> Pali: “Bāhukaṁ adhikakkañca,
gayaṁ sundarikaṁ mapi;
Sarassatiṁ payāgañca,
atho bāhumatiṁ nadiṁ;
Niccampi bālo pakkhando,
kaṇhakammo na sujjhati.
[¶22] What can the Sundarikā do?
What the Payāga or the Bāhukā?
They can’t cleanse a cruel person, a sinner
from their bad deeds.
> Pali: Kiṁ sundarikā karissati,
Kiṁ payāgā kiṁ bāhukā nadī;
Veriṁ katakibbisaṁ naraṁ,
Na hi naṁ sodhaye pāpakamminaṁ.
[¶23] For the pure in heart it’s always
the spring festival or the sabbath.
For the pure in heart and clean of deed,
their vows will always be fulfilled.
It’s here alone that you should bathe, brahmin,
making yourself a sanctuary for all creatures.
> Pali: Suddhassa ve sadā phaggu,
Suddhassuposatho sadā;
Suddhassa sucikammassa,
Sadā sampajjate vataṁ;
Idheva sināhi brāhmaṇa,
Sabbabhūtesu karohi khemataṁ.
[¶24] And if you speak no lies,
nor harm any living creature,
nor steal anything not given,
and you’re faithful and not stingy:
what’s the point of going to Gayā?
For any well may be your Gayā!”
> Pali: Sace musā na bhaṇasi,
sace pāṇaṁ na hiṁsasi;
Sace adinnaṁ nādiyasi,
saddahāno amaccharī;
Kiṁ kāhasi gayaṁ gantvā,
udapānopi te gayā”ti.
[¶25] When he had spoken, the brahmin Bhāradvāja of Sundarikā said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. May I receive the going forth, the ordination in the worthy Gotama’s presence?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sundarikabhāradvājo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya—cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantīti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ bhoto gotamassa santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶26] And the brahmin Bhāradvāja of Sundarikā received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence. Not long after his ordination, Venerable Bhāradvāja, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Alattha kho sundarikabhāradvājo brāhmaṇo bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ. Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā bhāradvājo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶27] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Bhāradvāja became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā bhāradvājo arahataṁ ahosīti.
[¶28] > Pali: Vatthasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 8. MN 8 · Self-Effacement
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/8/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/8/#p-N
[¶0] MN 8 · Self-Effacement
> Pali: MN 8 · Sallekhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then in the late afternoon, Venerable Mahācunda came out of retreat and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down to one side, and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahācundo sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā mahācundo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Sir, there are many different views that arise in the world connected with theories of self or with theories of the cosmos. How does a mendicant who is focusing on the starting point give up and let go of these views?”
> Pali: “yā imā, bhante, anekavihitā diṭṭhiyo loke uppajjanti— attavādapaṭisaṁyuttā vā lokavādapaṭisaṁyuttā vā— ādimeva nu kho, bhante, bhikkhuno manasikaroto evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ paṭinissaggo hotī”ti?
[¶4] “Cunda, there are many different views that arise in the world connected with theories of self or with theories of the cosmos. A mendicant gives up and lets go of these views by truly seeing with right wisdom where they arise, where they settle in, and where they operate as: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’
> Pali: “Yā imā, cunda, anekavihitā diṭṭhiyo loke uppajjanti— attavādapaṭisaṁyuttā vā lokavādapaṭisaṁyuttā vā— yattha cetā diṭṭhiyo uppajjanti yattha ca anusenti yattha ca samudācaranti taṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na me so attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññā passato evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ paṭinissaggo hoti.
[¶5] It’s possible that a certain mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, might enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘blissful meditations in this life’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶6] It’s possible that some mendicant, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, might enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘blissful meditations in this life’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶7] It’s possible that some mendicant, with the fading away of rapture, might enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘blissful meditations in this life’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca vihareyya, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeyya, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶8] It’s possible that some mendicant, with the giving up of pleasure and pain, and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, might enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘blissful meditations in this life’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶9] It’s possible that some mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, might enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘peaceful meditations’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā, paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā, nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā, ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Santā ete vihārā ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶10] It’s possible that some mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, might enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘peaceful meditations’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Santā ete vihārā ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶11] It’s possible that some mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, might enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘peaceful meditations’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Santā ete vihārā ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶12] It’s possible that some mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, might enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. They might think they’re practicing self-effacement. But in the training of the Noble One these are not called ‘self-effacement’; they’re called ‘peaceful meditations’.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco bhikkhu sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja vihareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘sallekhena viharāmī’ti. Na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti. Santā ete vihārā ariyassa vinaye vuccanti.
[¶13] 1. The Exposition of Self-Effacement
> Pali: 1. Sallekhapariyāya
[¶14] Now in this regard, Cunda, you should work on self-effacement in each of the following ways.
> Pali: Idha kho pana vo, cunda, sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶15] ‘Others will be cruel, but here we will not be cruel.’
> Pali: ‘Pare vihiṁsakā bhavissanti, mayamettha avihiṁsakā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶16] ‘Others will kill living creatures, but here we will not kill living creatures.’
> Pali: ‘Pare pāṇātipātī bhavissanti, mayamettha pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶17] ‘Others will steal, but here we will not steal.’
> Pali: ‘Pare adinnādāyī bhavissanti, mayamettha adinnādānā paṭiviratā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶18] ‘Others will be unchaste, but here we will not be unchaste.’
> Pali: ‘Pare abrahmacārī bhavissanti, mayamettha brahmacārī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶19] ‘Others will lie, but here we will not lie.’
> Pali: ‘Pare musāvādī bhavissanti, mayamettha musāvādā paṭiviratā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶20] ‘Others will backbite, but here we will not backbite.’
> Pali: ‘Pare pisuṇavācā bhavissanti, mayamettha pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶21] ‘Others will speak harshly, but here we will not speak harshly.’
> Pali: ‘Pare pharusavācā bhavissanti, mayamettha pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶22] ‘Others will talk nonsense, but here we will not talk nonsense.’
> Pali: ‘Pare samphappalāpī bhavissanti, mayamettha samphappalāpā paṭiviratā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶23] ‘Others will be covetous, but here we will not be covetous.’
> Pali: ‘Pare abhijjhālū bhavissanti, mayamettha anabhijjhālū bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶24] ‘Others will have ill will, but here we will not have ill will.’
> Pali: ‘Pare byāpannacittā bhavissanti, mayamettha abyāpannacittā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶25] ‘Others will have wrong view, but here we will have right view.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchādiṭṭhī bhavissanti, mayamettha sammādiṭṭhī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶26] ‘Others will have wrong purpose, but here we will have right purpose.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāsaṅkappā bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāsaṅkappā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶27] ‘Others will have wrong speech, but here we will have right speech.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāvācā bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāvācā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶28] ‘Others will have wrong action, but here we will have right action.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchākammantā bhavissanti, mayamettha sammākammantā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶29] ‘Others will have wrong livelihood, but here we will have right livelihood.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāājīvā bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāājīvā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶30] ‘Others will have wrong effort, but here we will have right effort.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāvāyāmā bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāvāyāmā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶31] ‘Others will have wrong mindfulness, but here we will have right mindfulness.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāsatī bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāsatī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶32] ‘Others will have wrong immersion, but here we will have right immersion.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāsamādhi bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāsamādhī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶33] ‘Others will have wrong knowledge, but here we will have right knowledge.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāñāṇī bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāñāṇī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶34] ‘Others will have wrong freedom, but here we will have right freedom.’
> Pali: ‘Pare micchāvimuttī bhavissanti, mayamettha sammāvimuttī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶35] ‘Others will be overcome with dullness and drowsiness, but here we will be rid of dullness and drowsiness.’
> Pali: ‘Pare thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitā bhavissanti, mayamettha vigatathinamiddhā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶36] ‘Others will be restless, but here we will not be restless.’
> Pali: ‘Pare uddhatā bhavissanti, mayamettha anuddhatā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶37] ‘Others will have doubts, but here we will have gone beyond doubt.’
> Pali: ‘Pare vicikicchī bhavissanti, mayamettha tiṇṇavicikicchā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶38] ‘Others will be irritable, but here we will be without anger.’
> Pali: ‘Pare kodhanā bhavissanti, mayamettha akkodhanā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶39] ‘Others will be acrimonious, but here we will be without acrimony.’
> Pali: ‘Pare upanāhī bhavissanti, mayamettha anupanāhī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶40] ‘Others will be offensive, but here we will be inoffensive.’
> Pali: ‘Pare makkhī bhavissanti, mayamettha amakkhī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶41] ‘Others will be contemptuous, but here we will be without contempt.’
> Pali: ‘Pare paḷāsī bhavissanti, mayamettha apaḷāsī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶42] ‘Others will be jealous, but here we will be without jealousy.’
> Pali: ‘Pare issukī bhavissanti, mayamettha anissukī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶43] ‘Others will be stingy, but here we will be without stinginess.’
> Pali: ‘Pare maccharī bhavissanti, mayamettha amaccharī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶44] ‘Others will be devious, but here we will not be devious.’
> Pali: ‘Pare saṭhā bhavissanti, mayamettha asaṭhā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶45] ‘Others will be deceitful, but here we will not be deceitful.’
> Pali: ‘Pare māyāvī bhavissanti, mayamettha amāyāvī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶46] ‘Others will be pompous, but here we will not be pompous.’
> Pali: ‘Pare thaddhā bhavissanti, mayamettha atthaddhā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶47] ‘Others will be arrogant, but here we will not be arrogant.’
> Pali: ‘Pare atimānī bhavissanti, mayamettha anatimānī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶48] ‘Others will be hard to admonish, but here we will not be hard to admonish.’
> Pali: ‘Pare dubbacā bhavissanti, mayamettha suvacā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶49] ‘Others will have bad friends, but here we will have good friends.’
> Pali: ‘Pare pāpamittā bhavissanti, mayamettha kalyāṇamittā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶50] ‘Others will be negligent, but here we will be diligent.’
> Pali: ‘Pare pamattā bhavissanti, mayamettha appamattā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶51] ‘Others will be faithless, but here we will have faith.’
> Pali: ‘Pare assaddhā bhavissanti, mayamettha saddhā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶52] ‘Others will be conscienceless, but here we will have a sense of conscience.’
> Pali: ‘Pare ahirikā bhavissanti, mayamettha hirimanā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶53] ‘Others will be imprudent, but here we will be prudent.’
> Pali: ‘Pare anottāpī bhavissanti, mayamettha ottāpī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶54] ‘Others will be unlearned, but here we will be well learned.’
> Pali: ‘Pare appassutā bhavissanti, mayamettha bahussutā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶55] ‘Others will be lazy, but here we will be energetic.’
> Pali: ‘Pare kusītā bhavissanti, mayamettha āraddhavīriyā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶56] ‘Others will be unmindful, but here we will be mindful.’
> Pali: ‘Pare muṭṭhassatī bhavissanti, mayamettha upaṭṭhitassatī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶57] ‘Others will be witless, but here we will be accomplished in wisdom.’
> Pali: ‘Pare duppaññā bhavissanti, mayamettha paññāsampannā bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶58] ‘Others will be attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go, but here we will not be attached to our own views, not holding them tight, but will let them go easily.’
> Pali: ‘Pare sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī bhavissanti, mayamettha asandiṭṭhiparāmāsī anādhānaggāhī suppaṭinissaggī bhavissāmā’ti sallekho karaṇīyo.
[¶59] 2. Giving Rise to the Thought
> Pali: 2. Cittupapādapariyāya
[¶60] Cunda, I say that even giving rise to the thought of skillful qualities is very helpful, let alone following that path in body and speech. That’s why you should give rise to the following thoughts. ‘Others will be cruel, but here we will not be cruel.’ ‘Others will kill living creatures, but here we will not kill living creatures.’ … ‘Others will be attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go, but here we will not be attached to our own views, not holding them tight, but will let them go easily.’
> Pali: Cittuppādampi kho ahaṁ, cunda, kusalesu dhammesu bahukāraṁ vadāmi, ko pana vādo kāyena vācāya anuvidhīyanāsu. Tasmātiha, cunda, ‘pare vihiṁsakā bhavissanti, mayamettha avihiṁsakā bhavissāmā’ti cittaṁ uppādetabbaṁ. ‘Pare pāṇātipātī bhavissanti, mayamettha pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā bhavissāmā’ti cittaṁ uppādetabbaṁ …pe… ‘pare sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī bhavissanti, mayamettha asandiṭṭhiparāmāsī anādhānaggāhī suppaṭinissaggī bhavissāmā’ti cittaṁ uppādetabbaṁ.
[¶61] 3. Bypassing
> Pali: 3. Parikkamanapariyāya
[¶62] Cunda, suppose there was a rough path and another smooth path to get around it. Or suppose there was a rough ford and another smooth ford to get around it. In the same way, a cruel individual bypasses it by not being cruel. An individual who kills bypasses it by not killing. …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, cunda, visamo maggo assa, tassa añño samo maggo parikkamanāya; seyyathā vā pana, cunda, visamaṁ titthaṁ assa, tassa aññaṁ samaṁ titthaṁ parikkamanāya; evameva kho, cunda, vihiṁsakassa purisapuggalassa avihiṁsā hoti parikkamanāya, pāṇātipātissa purisapuggalassa pāṇātipātā veramaṇī hoti parikkamanāya, adinnādāyissa purisapuggalassa adinnādānā veramaṇī hoti parikkamanāya, abrahmacārissa purisapuggalassa abrahmacariyā veramaṇī hoti parikkamanāya, musāvādissa purisapuggalassa musāvādā veramaṇī hoti parikkamanāya, pisuṇavācassa purisapuggalassa pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī hoti parikkamanāya, pharusavācassa purisapuggalassa pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī hoti parikkamanāya, samphappalāpissa purisapuggalassa samphappalāpā veramaṇī hoti parikkamanāya, abhijjhālussa purisapuggalassa anabhijjhā hoti parikkamanāya, byāpannacittassa purisapuggalassa abyāpādo hoti parikkamanāya.
[¶63] > Pali: Micchādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa sammādiṭṭhi hoti parikkamanāya, micchāsaṅkappassa purisapuggalassa sammāsaṅkappo hoti parikkamanāya, micchāvācassa purisapuggalassa sammāvācā hoti parikkamanāya, micchākammantassa purisapuggalassa sammākammanto hoti parikkamanāya, micchāājīvassa purisapuggalassa sammāājīvo hoti parikkamanāya, micchāvāyāmassa purisapuggalassa sammāvāyāmo hoti parikkamanāya, micchāsatissa purisapuggalassa sammāsati hoti parikkamanāya, micchāsamādhissa purisapuggalassa sammāsamādhi hoti parikkamanāya, micchāñāṇissa purisapuggalassa sammāñāṇaṁ hoti parikkamanāya, micchāvimuttissa purisapuggalassa sammāvimutti hoti parikkamanāya.
[¶64] An individual who is attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go, gets around it by not being attached to their own views, not holding them tight, but letting them go easily.
> Pali: Thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitassa purisapuggalassa vigatathinamiddhatā hoti parikkamanāya, uddhatassa purisapuggalassa anuddhaccaṁ hoti parikkamanāya, vicikicchissa purisapuggalassa tiṇṇavicikicchatā hoti parikkamanāya, kodhanassa purisapuggalassa akkodho hoti parikkamanāya, upanāhissa purisapuggalassa anupanāho hoti parikkamanāya, makkhissa purisapuggalassa amakkho hoti parikkamanāya, paḷāsissa purisapuggalassa apaḷāso hoti parikkamanāya, issukissa purisapuggalassa anissukitā hoti parikkamanāya, maccharissa purisapuggalassa amacchariyaṁ hoti parikkamanāya, saṭhassa purisapuggalassa asāṭheyyaṁ hoti parikkamanāya, māyāvissa purisapuggalassa amāyā hoti parikkamanāya, thaddhassa purisapuggalassa atthaddhiyaṁ hoti parikkamanāya, atimānissa purisapuggalassa anatimāno hoti parikkamanāya, dubbacassa purisapuggalassa sovacassatā hoti parikkamanāya, pāpamittassa purisapuggalassa kalyāṇamittatā hoti parikkamanāya, pamattassa purisapuggalassa appamādo hoti parikkamanāya, assaddhassa purisapuggalassa saddhā hoti parikkamanāya, ahirikassa purisapuggalassa hirī hoti parikkamanāya, anottāpissa purisapuggalassa ottappaṁ hoti parikkamanāya, appassutassa purisapuggalassa bāhusaccaṁ hoti parikkamanāya, kusītassa purisapuggalassa vīriyārambho hoti parikkamanāya, muṭṭhassatissa purisapuggalassa upaṭṭhitassatitā hoti parikkamanāya, duppaññassa purisapuggalassa paññāsampadā hoti parikkamanāya, sandiṭṭhiparāmāsiādhānaggāhiduppaṭinissaggissa purisapuggalassa asandiṭṭhiparāmāsianādhānaggāhisuppaṭinissaggitā hoti parikkamanāya.
[¶65] 4. Going Up
> Pali: 4. Uparibhāgapariyāya
[¶66] Cunda, all unskillful qualities lead downwards, while all skillful qualities lead upwards. In the same way, a cruel individual is led upwards by not being cruel. An individual who kills is led upwards by not killing … An individual who is attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go, is led upwards by not being attached to their own views, not holding them tight, but letting them go easily.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, cunda, ye keci akusalā dhammā sabbe te adhobhāgaṅgamanīyā, ye keci kusalā dhammā sabbe te uparibhāgaṅgamanīyā; evameva kho, cunda, vihiṁsakassa purisapuggalassa avihiṁsā hoti uparibhāgāya, pāṇātipātissa purisapuggalassa pāṇātipātā veramaṇī hoti uparibhāgāya …pe… sandiṭṭhiparāmāsiādhānaggāhiduppaṭinissaggissa purisapuggalassa asandiṭṭhiparāmāsianādhānaggāhisuppaṭinissaggitā hoti uparibhāgāya.
[¶67] 5. The Exposition by Extinguishment
> Pali: 5. Parinibbānapariyāya
[¶68] If you’re sinking in the mud yourself, Cunda, it is quite impossible for you to pull out someone else who is sinking in the mud. But if you’re not sinking in the mud yourself, it is quite possible for you to pull out someone else who is sinking in the mud. If you’re not tamed, trained, and quenched yourself, it is quite impossible for you to help tame, train, and extinguish someone else. But if you are tamed, trained, and quenched yourself, it is quite possible for you to help tame, train, and extinguish someone else.
> Pali: So vata, cunda, attanā palipapalipanno paraṁ palipapalipannaṁ uddharissatīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. So vata, cunda, attanā apalipapalipanno paraṁ palipapalipannaṁ uddharissatīti ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. So vata, cunda, attanā adanto avinīto aparinibbuto paraṁ damessati vinessati parinibbāpessatīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. So vata, cunda, attanā danto vinīto parinibbuto paraṁ damessati vinessati parinibbāpessatīti ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶69] In the same way, a cruel individual extinguishes it by not being cruel. An individual who kills extinguishes it by not killing. …
> Pali: Evameva kho, cunda, vihiṁsakassa purisapuggalassa avihiṁsā hoti parinibbānāya, pāṇātipātissa purisapuggalassa pāṇātipātā veramaṇī hoti parinibbānāya. Adinnādāyissa purisapuggalassa adinnādānā veramaṇī hoti parinibbānāya. Abrahmacārissa purisapuggalassa abrahmacariyā veramaṇī hoti parinibbānāya. Musāvādissa purisapuggalassa musāvādā veramaṇī hoti parinibbānāya. Pisuṇavācassa purisapuggalassa pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī hoti parinibbānāya. Pharusavācassa purisapuggalassa pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī hoti parinibbānāya. Samphappalāpissa purisapuggalassa samphappalāpā veramaṇī hoti parinibbānāya. Abhijjhālussa purisapuggalassa anabhijjhā hoti parinibbānāya. Byāpannacittassa purisapuggalassa abyāpādo hoti parinibbānāya.
[¶70] > Pali: Micchādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa sammādiṭṭhi hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāsaṅkappassa purisapuggalassa sammāsaṅkappo hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāvācassa purisapuggalassa sammāvācā hoti parinibbānāya. Micchākammantassa purisapuggalassa sammākammanto hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāājīvassa purisapuggalassa sammāājīvo hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāvāyāmassa purisapuggalassa sammāvāyāmo hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāsatissa purisapuggalassa sammāsati hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāsamādhissa purisapuggalassa sammāsamādhi hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāñāṇissa purisapuggalassa sammāñāṇaṁ hoti parinibbānāya. Micchāvimuttissa purisapuggalassa sammāvimutti hoti parinibbānāya.
[¶71] An individual who is attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go, extinguishes it by not being attached to their own views, not holding them tight, but letting them go easily.
> Pali: Thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitassa purisapuggalassa vigatathinamiddhatā hoti parinibbānāya. Uddhatassa purisapuggalassa anuddhaccaṁ hoti parinibbānāya. Vicikicchissa purisapuggalassa tiṇṇavicikicchatā hoti parinibbānāya. Kodhanassa purisapuggalassa akkodho hoti parinibbānāya. Upanāhissa purisapuggalassa anupanāho hoti parinibbānāya. Makkhissa purisapuggalassa amakkho hoti parinibbānāya. Paḷāsissa purisapuggalassa apaḷāso hoti parinibbānāya. Issukissa purisapuggalassa anissukitā hoti parinibbānāya. Maccharissa purisapuggalassa amacchariyaṁ hoti parinibbānāya. Saṭhassa purisapuggalassa asāṭheyyaṁ hoti parinibbānāya. Māyāvissa purisapuggalassa amāyā hoti parinibbānāya. Thaddhassa purisapuggalassa atthaddhiyaṁ hoti parinibbānāya. Atimānissa purisapuggalassa anatimāno hoti parinibbānāya. Dubbacassa purisapuggalassa sovacassatā hoti parinibbānāya. Pāpamittassa purisapuggalassa kalyāṇamittatā hoti parinibbānāya. Pamattassa purisapuggalassa appamādo hoti parinibbānāya. Assaddhassa purisapuggalassa saddhā hoti parinibbānāya. Ahirikassa purisapuggalassa hirī hoti parinibbānāya. Anottāpissa purisapuggalassa ottappaṁ hoti parinibbānāya. Appassutassa purisapuggalassa bāhusaccaṁ hoti parinibbānāya. Kusītassa purisapuggalassa vīriyārambho hoti parinibbānāya. Muṭṭhassatissa purisapuggalassa upaṭṭhitassatitā hoti parinibbānāya. Duppaññassa purisapuggalassa paññāsampadā hoti parinibbānāya. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsiādhānaggāhiduppaṭinissaggissa purisapuggalassa asandiṭṭhiparāmāsianādhānaggāhisuppaṭinissaggitā hoti parinibbānāya.
[¶72] So, Cunda, I’ve taught the expositions by way of self-effacement, arising of thought, bypassing, going up, and extinguishing. Out of sympathy, I’ve done what a teacher should do who wants what’s best for their disciples. Here are these roots of trees, and here are these empty huts. Practice absorption, Cunda! Don’t be negligent! Don’t regret it later! This is my instruction.”
> Pali: Iti kho, cunda, desito mayā sallekhapariyāyo, desito cittuppādapariyāyo, desito parikkamanapariyāyo, desito uparibhāgapariyāyo, desito parinibbānapariyāyo. Yaṁ kho, cunda, satthārā karaṇīyaṁ sāvakānaṁ hitesinā anukampakena anukampaṁ upādāya, kataṁ vo taṁ mayā. Etāni, cunda, rukkhamūlāni, etāni suññāgārāni, jhāyatha, cunda, mā pamādattha, mā pacchāvippaṭisārino ahuvattha—ayaṁ kho amhākaṁ anusāsanī”ti.
[¶73] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Mahācunda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā mahācundo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶74] Forty-four items have been stated,
organized into five sections.
“Effacement” is the name of this discourse,
which is deep as the ocean.
> Pali: Catuttālīsapadā vuttā,
sandhayo pañca desitā;
Sallekho nāma suttanto,
gambhīro sāgarūpamoti.
[¶75] > Pali: Sallekhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 9. MN 9 · Right View
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/9/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/9/#p-N
[¶0] MN 9 · Right View
> Pali: MN 9 · Sammādiṭṭhisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There Sāriputta addressed the mendicants: “Reverends, mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū āmantesi: “āvuso bhikkhave”ti.
[¶2] “Reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Āvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶3] “Reverends, they speak of this thing called ‘right view’. How do you define a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching?”
> Pali: “‘Sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhī’ti, āvuso, vuccati. Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti?
[¶4] “Reverend, we would travel a long way to learn the meaning of this statement in the presence of Venerable Sāriputta. May Venerable Sāriputta himself please clarify the meaning of this. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Dūratopi kho mayaṁ, āvuso, āgaccheyyāma āyasmato sāriputtassa santike etassa bhāsitassa atthamaññātuṁ. Sādhu vatāyasmantaṁyeva sāriputtaṁ paṭibhātu etassa bhāsitassa attho. Āyasmato sāriputtassa sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶5] “Well then, reverends, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, āvuso, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶7] “A noble disciple understands the unskillful and its root, and the skillful and its root. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching.
> Pali: “Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako akusalañca pajānāti, akusalamūlañca pajānāti, kusalañca pajānāti, kusalamūlañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ.
[¶8] But what is the unskillful and what is its root? And what is the skillful and what is its root? Killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical; covetousness, ill will, and wrong view. This is called the unskillful.
> Pali: Katamaṁ panāvuso, akusalaṁ, katamaṁ akusalamūlaṁ, katamaṁ kusalaṁ, katamaṁ kusalamūlaṁ? Pāṇātipāto kho, āvuso, akusalaṁ, adinnādānaṁ akusalaṁ, kāmesumicchācāro akusalaṁ, musāvādo akusalaṁ, pisuṇā vācā akusalaṁ, pharusā vācā akusalaṁ, samphappalāpo akusalaṁ, abhijjhā akusalaṁ, byāpādo akusalaṁ, micchādiṭṭhi akusalaṁ— idaṁ vuccatāvuso akusalaṁ.
[¶9] And what is the root of the unskillful? Greed, hate, and delusion. This is called the root of the unskillful.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, akusalamūlaṁ? Lobho akusalamūlaṁ, doso akusalamūlaṁ, moho akusalamūlaṁ— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, akusalamūlaṁ.
[¶10] And what is the skillful? Refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; refraining from speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical; contentment, good will, and right view. This is called the skillful.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, kusalaṁ? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī kusalaṁ, adinnādānā veramaṇī kusalaṁ, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī kusalaṁ, musāvādā veramaṇī kusalaṁ, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī kusalaṁ, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī kusalaṁ, samphappalāpā veramaṇī kusalaṁ, anabhijjhā kusalaṁ, abyāpādo kusalaṁ, sammādiṭṭhi kusalaṁ— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, kusalaṁ.
[¶11] And what is the root of the skillful? Contentment, love, and understanding. This is called the root of the skillful.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, kusalamūlaṁ? Alobho kusalamūlaṁ, adoso kusalamūlaṁ, amoho kusalamūlaṁ— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, kusalamūlaṁ.
[¶12] A noble disciple understands in this way the unskillful and its root, and the skillful and its root. They’ve completely given up the underlying tendency to greed, dispelled the underlying tendency to aversion, and eradicated the underlying tendency to the view and conceit ‘I am’. They’ve given up ignorance and given rise to knowledge, and make an end of suffering in this very life. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching.”
> Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ akusalaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ akusalamūlaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ kusalaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ kusalamūlaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya, paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā, ‘asmī’ti diṭṭhimānānusayaṁ samūhanitvā, avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā, diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶13] Saying “Good, reverend,” those mendicants approved and agreed with what Sāriputta said. Then they asked another question: “But reverend, might there be another way to describe a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchuṁ: “siyā panāvuso, aññopi pariyāyo yathā ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti?
[¶14] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands fuel, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching.
> Pali: “Siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako āhārañca pajānāti, āhārasamudayañca pajānāti, āhāranirodhañca pajānāti, āhāranirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ.
[¶15] But what is fuel? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? These four fuels maintain sentient beings that have been born and help those about to be born. What four? Edible food, whether solid or subtle; contact is the second, mental intention the third, and consciousness the fourth. Fuel originates from craving. Fuel ceases when craving ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of fuel is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Katamo panāvuso, āhāro, katamo āhārasamudayo, katamo āhāranirodho, katamā āhāranirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Cattārome, āvuso, āhārā bhūtānaṁ vā sattānaṁ ṭhitiyā, sambhavesīnaṁ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro? Kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṁ catutthaṁ. Taṇhāsamudayā āhārasamudayo, taṇhānirodhā āhāranirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo āhāranirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto, sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi.
[¶16] A noble disciple understands in this way fuel, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. They’ve completely given up the underlying tendency to greed, dispelled the underlying tendency to aversion, and eradicated the underlying tendency to the view and conceit ‘I am’. They’ve given up ignorance and given rise to knowledge, and make an end of suffering in this very life. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching.”
> Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ āhāraṁ pajānāti, evaṁ āhārasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ āhāranirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ āhāranirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya, paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā, ‘asmī’ti diṭṭhimānānusayaṁ samūhanitvā, avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā, diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶17] Saying “Good, reverend,” those mendicants … asked another question: “But reverend, might there be another way to describe a noble disciple who … has come to the true teaching?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchuṁ: “siyā panāvuso, aññopi pariyāyo yathā ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti?
[¶18] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who … has come to the true teaching. But what is suffering? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? Rebirth is suffering; old age is suffering; death is suffering; sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress are suffering; being coupled with the disliked is suffering; separation from the liked is suffering; not getting what you wish for is suffering. In brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering. This is called suffering. And what is the origin of suffering? It’s the craving that leads to future lives, mixed up with relishing and greed, taking pleasure there wherever it alights. That is, craving for sensual pleasures, craving for continued existence, and craving for nonexistence. This is called the origin of suffering. And what is the cessation of suffering? It’s the fading away and cessation of that very same craving with no residue left behind; giving it away, letting it go, releasing it, and not clinging to it. This is called the cessation of suffering. And what is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view … right immersion. This is called the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: “Siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako dukkhañca pajānāti, dukkhasamudayañca pajānāti, dukkhanirodhañca pajānāti, dukkhanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamaṁ panāvuso, dukkhaṁ, katamo dukkhasamudayo, katamo dukkhanirodho, katamā dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Jātipi dukkhā, jarāpi dukkhā, maraṇampi dukkhaṁ, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā, appiyehi sampayogopi dukkho, piyehi vippayogopi dukkho, yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ, saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, dukkhaṁ. Katamo cāvuso, dukkhasamudayo? Yāyaṁ taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, seyyathidaṁ— kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, dukkhasamudayo. Katamo cāvuso, dukkhanirodho? Yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, dukkhanirodho. Katamā cāvuso, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā.
[¶19] A noble disciple understands in this way suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. They’ve completely given up the underlying tendency to greed, dispelled the underlying tendency to aversion, and eradicated the underlying tendency to the view and conceit ‘I am’. They’ve given up ignorance and given rise to knowledge, and make an end of suffering in this very life. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching.”
> Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ dukkhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ dukkhasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ dukkhanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya, paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā, ‘asmī’ti diṭṭhimānānusayaṁ samūhanitvā, avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā, diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶20] Saying “Good, reverend,” those mendicants … asked another question: “But reverend, might there be another way to describe a noble disciple who … has come to the true teaching?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchuṁ: “siyā panāvuso, aññopi pariyāyo yathā ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti?
[¶21] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands old age and death, their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation … But what are old age and death? What is their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation? The old age, decrepitude, broken teeth, gray hair, wrinkly skin, diminished vitality, and failing faculties of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called old age. And what is death? The passing away, perishing, disintegration, demise, mortality, death, decease, breaking up of the aggregates, laying to rest of the corpse, and cutting off of the life faculty of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called death. Such is old age, and such is death. This is called old age and death. Old age and death originate from rebirth. Old age and death cease when rebirth ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of old age and death is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “Siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako jarāmaraṇañca pajānāti, jarāmaraṇasamudayañca pajānāti, jarāmaraṇanirodhañca pajānāti, jarāmaraṇanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamaṁ panāvuso, jarāmaraṇaṁ, katamo jarāmaraṇasamudayo, katamo jarāmaraṇanirodho, katamā jarāmaraṇanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṁ pāliccaṁ valittacatā āyuno saṁhāni indriyānaṁ paripāko— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, jarā. Katamañcāvuso, maraṇaṁ? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhā tamhā sattanikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṁ maccu maraṇaṁ kālaṅkiriyā khandhānaṁ bhedo, kaḷevarassa nikkhepo, jīvitindriyassupacchedo— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, maraṇaṁ. Iti ayañca jarā idañca maraṇaṁ— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, jarāmaraṇaṁ. Jātisamudayā jarāmaraṇasamudayo, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo jarāmaraṇanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶22] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ jarāmaraṇaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ jarāmaraṇasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ jarāmaraṇanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ jarāmaraṇanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶23] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶24] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands rebirth, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation … But what is rebirth? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? The rebirth, inception, conception, regeneration, manifestation of the aggregates, and acquisition of the sense fields of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called rebirth. Rebirth originates from continued existence. Rebirth ceases when continued existence ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of rebirth is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako jātiñca pajānāti, jātisamudayañca pajānāti, jātinirodhañca pajānāti, jātinirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamā panāvuso, jāti, katamo jātisamudayo, katamo jātinirodho, katamā jātinirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo, āyatanānaṁ paṭilābho— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, jāti. Bhavasamudayā jātisamudayo, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo jātinirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶25] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ jātiṁ pajānāti, evaṁ jātisamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ jātinirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ jātinirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶26] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶27] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands continued existence, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. But what is continued existence? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? There are these three states of continued existence. Existence in the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm. Continued existence originates from grasping. Continued existence ceases when grasping ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of continued existence is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako bhavañca pajānāti, bhavasamudayañca pajānāti, bhavanirodhañca pajānāti, bhavanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamo panāvuso, bhavo, katamo bhavasamudayo, katamo bhavanirodho, katamā bhavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Tayome, āvuso, bhavā— kāmabhavo, rūpabhavo, arūpabhavo. Upādānasamudayā bhavasamudayo, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶28] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ bhavaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ bhavasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ bhavanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ bhavanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶29] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶30] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands grasping, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation … But what is grasping? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? There are these four kinds of grasping. Grasping at sensual pleasures, views, precepts and observances, and theories of a self. Grasping originates from craving. Grasping ceases when craving ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of grasping is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako upādānañca pajānāti, upādānasamudayañca pajānāti, upādānanirodhañca pajānāti, upādānanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamaṁ panāvuso, upādānaṁ, katamo upādānasamudayo, katamo upādānanirodho, katamā upādānanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Cattārimāni, āvuso, upādānāni— kāmupādānaṁ, diṭṭhupādānaṁ, sīlabbatupādānaṁ, attavādupādānaṁ. Taṇhāsamudayā upādānasamudayo, taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upādānanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶31] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ upādānaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ upādānasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ upādānanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ upādānanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶32] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶33] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands craving, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation … But what is craving? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? There are these six classes of craving. Craving for sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. Craving originates from feeling. Craving ceases when feeling ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of craving is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako taṇhañca pajānāti, taṇhāsamudayañca pajānāti, taṇhānirodhañca pajānāti, taṇhānirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamā panāvuso, taṇhā, katamo taṇhāsamudayo, katamo taṇhānirodho, katamā taṇhānirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Chayime, āvuso, taṇhākāyā— rūpataṇhā, saddataṇhā, gandhataṇhā, rasataṇhā, phoṭṭhabbataṇhā, dhammataṇhā. Vedanāsamudayā taṇhāsamudayo, vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo taṇhānirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶34] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ taṇhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ taṇhāsamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ taṇhānirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ taṇhānirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶35] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶36] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands feeling, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation … But what is feeling? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? There are these six classes of feeling. Feeling born of contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. Feeling originates from contact. Feeling ceases when contact ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of feeling is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako vedanañca pajānāti, vedanāsamudayañca pajānāti, vedanānirodhañca pajānāti, vedanānirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamā panāvuso, vedanā, katamo vedanāsamudayo, katamo vedanānirodho, katamā vedanānirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Chayime, āvuso, vedanākāyā— cakkhusamphassajā vedanā, sotasamphassajā vedanā, ghānasamphassajā vedanā, jivhāsamphassajā vedanā, kāyasamphassajā vedanā, manosamphassajā vedanā. Phassasamudayā vedanāsamudayo, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo vedanānirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶37] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ vedanaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ vedanāsamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ vedanānirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ vedanānirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶38] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶39] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands contact, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation … But what is contact? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? There are these six classes of contact. Contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. Contact originates from the six sense fields. Contact ceases when the six sense fields cease. The practice that leads to the cessation of contact is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako phassañca pajānāti, phassasamudayañca pajānāti, phassanirodhañca pajānāti, phassanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamo panāvuso, phasso, katamo phassasamudayo, katamo phassanirodho, katamā phassanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Chayime, āvuso, phassakāyā— cakkhusamphasso, sotasamphasso, ghānasamphasso, jivhāsamphasso, kāyasamphasso, manosamphasso. Saḷāyatanasamudayā phassasamudayo, saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo phassanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶40] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ phassaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ phassasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ phassanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ phassanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶41] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶42] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands the six sense fields, their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation … But what are the six sense fields? What is their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation? There are these six sense fields. The sense fields of the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. The six sense fields originate from name and form. The six sense fields cease when name and form cease. The practice that leads to the cessation of the six sense fields is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako saḷāyatanañca pajānāti, saḷāyatanasamudayañca pajānāti, saḷāyatananirodhañca pajānāti, saḷāyatananirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamaṁ panāvuso, saḷāyatanaṁ, katamo saḷāyatanasamudayo, katamo saḷāyatananirodho, katamā saḷāyatananirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Chayimāni, āvuso, āyatanāni— cakkhāyatanaṁ, sotāyatanaṁ, ghānāyatanaṁ, jivhāyatanaṁ, kāyāyatanaṁ, manāyatanaṁ. Nāmarūpasamudayā saḷāyatanasamudayo, nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saḷāyatananirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶43] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ saḷāyatanaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ saḷāyatanasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ saḷāyatananirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ saḷāyatananirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶44] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶45] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands name and form, their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation … But what are name and form? What is their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation? Feeling, perception, intention, contact, and application of mind— this is called name. The four principal states, and form derived from the four principal states— this is called form. Such is name and such is form. This is called name and form. Name and form originate from consciousness. Name and form cease when consciousness ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of name and form is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako nāmarūpañca pajānāti, nāmarūpasamudayañca pajānāti, nāmarūpanirodhañca pajānāti, nāmarūpanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamaṁ panāvuso, nāmarūpaṁ, katamo nāmarūpasamudayo, katamo nāmarūpanirodho, katamā nāmarūpanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Vedanā, saññā, cetanā, phasso, manasikāro— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, nāmaṁ; cattāri ca mahābhūtāni, catunnañca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāyarūpaṁ— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, rūpaṁ. Iti idañca nāmaṁ idañca rūpaṁ— idaṁ vuccatāvuso, nāmarūpaṁ. Viññāṇasamudayā nāmarūpasamudayo, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo nāmarūpanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶46] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ nāmarūpaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ nāmarūpasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ nāmarūpanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ nāmarūpanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶47] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶48] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands consciousness, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation … But what is consciousness? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? There are these six classes of consciousness. Eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind consciousness. Consciousness originates from choices. Consciousness ceases when choices cease. The practice that leads to the cessation of consciousness is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako viññāṇañca pajānāti, viññāṇasamudayañca pajānāti, viññāṇanirodhañca pajānāti, viññāṇanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamaṁ panāvuso, viññāṇaṁ, katamo viññāṇasamudayo, katamo viññāṇanirodho, katamā viññāṇanirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Chayime, āvuso, viññāṇakāyā— cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, sotaviññāṇaṁ, ghānaviññāṇaṁ, jivhāviññāṇaṁ, kāyaviññāṇaṁ, manoviññāṇaṁ. Saṅkhārasamudayā viññāṇasamudayo, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo viññāṇanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶49] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ viññāṇaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ viññāṇasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ viññāṇanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ viññāṇanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya …pe… dukkhassantakaro hoti—
[¶50] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti. “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶51] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands choices, their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation … But what are choices? What is their origin, their cessation, and the practice that leads to their cessation? There are these three kinds of choice. Choices by way of body, speech, and mind. Choices originate from ignorance. Choices cease when ignorance ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of choices is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako saṅkhāre ca pajānāti, saṅkhārasamudayañca pajānāti, saṅkhāranirodhañca pajānāti, saṅkhāranirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katame panāvuso, saṅkhārā, katamo saṅkhārasamudayo, katamo saṅkhāranirodho, katamā saṅkhāranirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Tayome, āvuso, saṅkhārā— kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīsaṅkhāro, cittasaṅkhāro. Avijjāsamudayā saṅkhārasamudayo, avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅkhāranirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶52] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ saṅkhāre pajānāti, evaṁ saṅkhārasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ saṅkhāranirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ saṅkhāranirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya, paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā, ‘asmī’ti diṭṭhimānānusayaṁ samūhanitvā, avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā, diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶53] “Might there be another way to describe a noble disciple?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho …pe… apucchuṁ— siyā panāvuso …pe…
[¶54] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands ignorance, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation … But what is ignorance? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? Not knowing about suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering. This is called ignorance. Ignorance originates from defilement. Ignorance ceases when defilement ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of ignorance is simply this noble eightfold path …”
> Pali: “siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako avijjañca pajānāti, avijjāsamudayañca pajānāti, avijjānirodhañca pajānāti, avijjānirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ. Katamā panāvuso, avijjā, katamo avijjāsamudayo, katamo avijjānirodho, katamā avijjānirodhagāminī paṭipadā? Yaṁ kho, āvuso, dukkhe aññāṇaṁ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇaṁ— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, avijjā. Āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo, āsavanirodhā avijjānirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo avijjānirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶55] > Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ avijjaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ avijjāsamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ avijjānirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ avijjānirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya, paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā, ‘asmī’ti diṭṭhimānānusayaṁ samūhanitvā, avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā, diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶56] Saying “Good, reverend,” those mendicants approved and agreed with what Sāriputta said. Then they asked another question: “But reverend, might there be another way to describe a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching?”
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchuṁ: “siyā panāvuso, aññopi pariyāyo yathā ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti?
[¶57] “There might, reverends. A noble disciple understands defilement, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching.
> Pali: “Siyā, āvuso. Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako āsavañca pajānāti, āsavasamudayañca pajānāti, āsavanirodhañca pajānāti, āsavanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadañca pajānāti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ.
[¶58] But what is defilement? What is its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation? There are these three defilements. The defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. Defilement originates from ignorance. Defilement ceases when ignorance ceases. The practice that leads to the cessation of defilement is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Katamo panāvuso, āsavo, katamo āsavasamudayo, katamo āsavanirodho, katamā āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti? Tayome, āvuso, āsavā— kāmāsavo, bhavāsavo, avijjāsavo. Avijjāsamudayā āsavasamudayo, avijjānirodhā āsavanirodho, ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi …pe… sammāsamādhi.
[¶59] A noble disciple understands in this way defilement, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. They’ve completely given up the underlying tendency to greed, dispelled the underlying tendency to aversion, and eradicated the underlying tendency to the view and conceit ‘I am’. They’ve given up ignorance and given rise to knowledge, and make an end of suffering in this very life. When they’ve done this, they’re defined as a noble disciple who has right view, whose view is correct, who has experiential confidence in the teaching, and has come to the true teaching.”
> Pali: Yato kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako evaṁ āsavaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ āsavasamudayaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ āsavanirodhaṁ pajānāti, evaṁ āsavanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ pajānāti, so sabbaso rāgānusayaṁ pahāya, paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā, ‘asmī’ti diṭṭhimānānusayaṁ samūhanitvā, avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā, diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti— ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ujugatāssa diṭṭhi, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, āgato imaṁ saddhamman”ti.
[¶60] That is what Venerable Sāriputta said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what Sāriputta said.
> Pali: Idamavocāyasmā sāriputto. Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶61] > Pali: Sammādiṭṭhisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 10. MN 10 · Mindfulness Meditation
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/10/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/10/#p-N
[¶0] MN 10 · Mindfulness Meditation
> Pali: MN 10 · Satipaṭṭhānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Kurus, near the Kuru town named Kammāsadamma. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kurūsu viharati kammāsadhammaṁ nāma kurūnaṁ nigamo. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, the four kinds of mindfulness meditation are the path to convergence. They are in order to purify sentient beings, to get past sorrow and crying, to make an end of pain and sadness, to discover the system, and to realize extinguishment.
> Pali: “Ekāyano ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā, sokaparidevānaṁ samatikkamāya, dukkhadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamāya, ñāyassa adhigamāya, nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṁ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā.
[¶4] What four? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of the mind—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; citte cittānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶5] > Pali: Uddeso niṭṭhito.
[¶6] 1. Observing the Body
> Pali: 1. Kāyānupassanā
[¶7] 1.1. Mindfulness of Breathing
> Pali: 1.1. Kāyānupassanāānāpānapabba
[¶8] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of the body?
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati?
[¶9] It’s when a mendicant—gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut—sits down cross-legged, sets their body straight, and brings mindfulness to the present. Just mindful, they breathe in. Mindful, they breathe out.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati, pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So satova assasati, satova passasati.
[¶10] Breathing in heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing in heavily.’ Breathing out heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing out heavily.’
> Pali: Dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti,
[¶11] Breathing in lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing in lightly.’ Breathing out lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing out lightly.’
> Pali: rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶12] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the whole body.’
> Pali: ‘Sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶13] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in stilling the physical process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out stilling the physical process.’
> Pali: ‘Passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶14] It’s like a deft lathe-turner or lathe-turner’s apprentice. When drawing a long pull they know: ‘I’m drawing a long pull,’ and when drawing a short pull they know: ‘I’m drawing a short pull.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho bhamakāro vā bhamakārantevāsī vā dīghaṁ vā añchanto ‘dīghaṁ añchāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā añchanto ‘rassaṁ añchāmī’ti pajānāti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶15] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing, with respect to the body, the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the body exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi kāyo’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶16] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶17] > Pali: Ānāpānapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶18] 1.2. The Postures
> Pali: 1.2. Kāyānupassanāiriyāpathapabba
[¶19] Furthermore, when a mendicant is walking they know: ‘I am walking.’ When standing they know: ‘I am standing.’ When sitting they know: ‘I am sitting.’ And when lying down they know: ‘I am lying down.’ Whatever posture their body is in, they know it.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gacchanto vā ‘gacchāmī’ti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ‘ṭhitomhī’ti pajānāti, nisinno vā ‘nisinnomhī’ti pajānāti, sayāno vā ‘sayānomhī’ti pajānāti. Yathā yathā vā panassa kāyo paṇihito hoti tathā tathā naṁ pajānāti.
[¶20] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to the body, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the body exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi kāyo’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶21] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶22] > Pali: Iriyāpathapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶23] 1.3. Situational Awareness
> Pali: 1.3. Kāyānupassanāsampajānapabba
[¶24] Furthermore, a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.
[¶25] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati …pe…
[¶26] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶27] > Pali: Sampajānapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶28] 1.4. Focusing on the Repulsive
> Pali: 1.4. Kāyānupassanāpaṭikūlamanasikārapabba
[¶29] Furthermore, a mendicant examines their own body, up from the soles of the feet and down from the tips of the hairs, wrapped in skin and full of many kinds of filth. ‘In this body there is head hair, body hair, nails, teeth, skin, flesh, sinews, bones, bone marrow, kidneys, heart, liver, diaphragm, spleen, lungs, intestines, mesentery, undigested food, feces, bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat, tears, grease, saliva, snot, synovial fluid, urine.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā, adho kesamatthakā, tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttan’ti.
[¶30] It’s as if there were a bag with openings at both ends, filled with various kinds of grains, such as fine rice, wheat, mung beans, peas, sesame, and ordinary rice. And a person with clear eyes were to open it and examine the contents: ‘These grains are fine rice, these are wheat, these are mung beans, these are peas, these are sesame, and these are ordinary rice.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ubhatomukhā putoḷi pūrā nānāvihitassa dhaññassa, seyyathidaṁ—sālīnaṁ vīhīnaṁ muggānaṁ māsānaṁ tilānaṁ taṇḍulānaṁ. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso muñcitvā paccavekkheyya: ‘ime sālī ime vīhī ime muggā ime māsā ime tilā ime taṇḍulā’ti.
[¶31] > Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā, adho kesamatthakā, tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā …pe… muttan’ti.
[¶32] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati …pe…
[¶33] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶34] > Pali: Paṭikūlamanasikārapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶35] 1.5. Focusing on the Elements
> Pali: 1.5. Kāyānupassanādhātumanasikārapabba
[¶36] Furthermore, a mendicant examines their own body, whatever its placement or posture, according to the elements: ‘In this body there is the earth element, the water element, the fire element, and the air element.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ yathāṭhitaṁ yathāpaṇihitaṁ dhātuso paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti.
[¶37] It’s as if a deft butcher or butcher’s apprentice were to kill a cow and sit down at the crossroads with the meat cut into chops.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā gāviṁ vadhitvā catumahāpathe bilaso vibhajitvā nisinno assa.
[¶38] > Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ yathāṭhitaṁ yathāpaṇihitaṁ dhātuso paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti.
[¶39] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati …pe…
[¶40] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶41] > Pali: Dhātumanasikārapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶42] 1.6. The Charnel Ground Contemplations
> Pali: 1.6. Kāyānupassanānavasivathikapabba
[¶43] Furthermore, suppose a mendicant were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground. And it had been dead for one, two, or three days, bloated, livid, and festering. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ ekāhamataṁ vā dvīhamataṁ vā tīhamataṁ vā uddhumātakaṁ vinīlakaṁ vipubbakajātaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati …pe…
[¶44] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶45] Furthermore, suppose they were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground being devoured by crows, hawks, vultures, herons, hounds, tigers, leopards, jackals, and many kinds of little creatures. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ kākehi vā khajjamānaṁ kulalehi vā khajjamānaṁ gijjhehi vā khajjamānaṁ kaṅkehi vā khajjamānaṁ sunakhehi vā khajjamānaṁ byagghehi vā khajjamānaṁ dīpīhi vā khajjamānaṁ siṅgālehi vā khajjamānaṁ vividhehi vā pāṇakajātehi khajjamānaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati …pe…
[¶46] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶47] Furthermore, suppose they were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground, a skeleton with flesh and blood, held together by sinews …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ samaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe…
[¶48] A skeleton without flesh but smeared with blood, and held together by sinews …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ nimaṁsalohitamakkhitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe…
[¶49] A skeleton rid of flesh and blood, held together by sinews …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ apagatamaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe…
[¶50] Bones rid of sinews scattered in every direction. Here a hand-bone, there a foot-bone, here an ankle bone, there a shin-bone, here a thigh-bone, there a hip-bone, here a rib-bone, there a back-bone, here an arm-bone, there a neck-bone, here a jaw-bone, there a tooth, here the skull. …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikāni apagatasambandhāni disā vidisā vikkhittāni, aññena hatthaṭṭhikaṁ aññena pādaṭṭhikaṁ aññena gopphakaṭṭhikaṁ aññena jaṅghaṭṭhikaṁ aññena ūruṭṭhikaṁ aññena kaṭiṭṭhikaṁ aññena phāsukaṭṭhikaṁ aññena piṭṭhiṭṭhikaṁ aññena khandhaṭṭhikaṁ aññena gīvaṭṭhikaṁ aññena hanukaṭṭhikaṁ aññena dantaṭṭhikaṁ aññena sīsakaṭāhaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati …pe… evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶51] White bones, the color of shells …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ, aṭṭhikāni setāni saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgāni …pe…
[¶52] Decrepit bones, heaped in a pile …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikāni puñjakitāni terovassikāni …pe…
[¶53] Bones rotted and crumbled to powder. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’
> Pali: Aṭṭhikāni pūtīni cuṇṇakajātāni. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti.
[¶54] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to the body, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the body exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi kāyo’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶55] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶56] > Pali: Navasivathikapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶57] > Pali: Cuddasakāyānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶58] 2. Observing the Feelings
> Pali: 2. Vedanānupassanā
[¶59] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of feelings?
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati?
[¶60] It’s when a mendicant who feels a pleasant feeling knows: ‘I feel a pleasant feeling.’
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhaṁ vā vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶61] When they feel a painful feeling, they know: ‘I feel a painful feeling.’
> Pali: Dukkhaṁ vā vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶62] When they feel a neutral feeling, they know: ‘I feel a neutral feeling.’
> Pali: Adukkhamasukhaṁ vā vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶63] When they feel a pleasant feeling of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a pleasant feeling of the flesh.’
> Pali: Sāmisaṁ vā sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sāmisaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶64] When they feel a pleasant feeling not of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a pleasant feeling not of the flesh.’
> Pali: Nirāmisaṁ vā sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶65] When they feel a painful feeling of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a painful feeling of the flesh.’
> Pali: Sāmisaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sāmisaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶66] When they feel a painful feeling not of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a painful feeling not of the flesh.’
> Pali: Nirāmisaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶67] When they feel a neutral feeling of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a neutral feeling of the flesh.’
> Pali: Sāmisaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sāmisaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶68] When they feel a neutral feeling not of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a neutral feeling not of the flesh.’
> Pali: Nirāmisaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶69] And so they meditate observing an aspect of feelings internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to feelings, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that feelings exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati. ‘Atthi vedanā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶70] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of feelings.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati.
[¶71] > Pali: Vedanānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶72] 3. Observing the Mind
> Pali: 3. Cittānupassanā
[¶73] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of the mind?
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu citte cittānupassī viharati?
[¶74] It’s when a mendicant understands mind with greed as ‘mind with greed,’ and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed.’ They understand mind with hate as ‘mind with hate,’ and mind without hate as ‘mind without hate.’ They understand mind with delusion as ‘mind with delusion,’ and mind without delusion as ‘mind without delusion.’ They know constricted mind as ‘constricted mind,’ and scattered mind as ‘scattered mind.’ They know expansive mind as ‘expansive mind,’ and unexpansive mind as ‘unexpansive mind.’ They know mind that is not supreme as ‘mind that is not supreme,’ and mind that is supreme as ‘mind that is supreme.’ They know mind immersed in samādhi as ‘mind immersed in samādhi,’ and mind not immersed in samādhi as ‘mind not immersed in samādhi.’ They know freed mind as ‘freed mind,’ and unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind.’
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.
[¶75] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the mind internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to the mind, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the mind exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā citte cittānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā citte cittānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā citte cittānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā cittasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā cittasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā cittasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi cittan’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶76] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the mind.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu citte cittānupassī viharati.
[¶77] > Pali: Cittānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶78] 4. Observing Principles
> Pali: 4. Dhammānupassanā
[¶79] 4.1. The Hindrances
> Pali: 4.1. Dhammānupassanānīvaraṇapabba
[¶80] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles?
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati?
[¶81] It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five hindrances. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five hindrances?
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu nīvaraṇesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu nīvaraṇesu?
[¶82] It’s when a mendicant who has sensual desire in them understands: ‘I have sensual desire in me.’ When they don’t have sensual desire in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have sensual desire in me.’ They understand how sensual desire arises; how, when it’s already arisen, it’s given up; and how, once it’s given up, it doesn’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ kāmacchandaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ kāmacchando’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ kāmacchandaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ kāmacchando’ti pajānāti; yathā ca anuppannassa kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa kāmacchandassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa kāmacchandassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶83] When they have ill will in them, they understand: ‘I have ill will in me.’ When they don’t have ill will in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have ill will in me.’ They understand how ill will arises; how, when it’s already arisen, it’s given up; and how, once it’s given up, it doesn’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ byāpādaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ byāpādo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ byāpādaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ byāpādo’ti pajānāti; yathā ca anuppannassa byāpādassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa byāpādassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa byāpādassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶84] When they have dullness and drowsiness in them, they understand: ‘I have dullness and drowsiness in me.’ When they don’t have dullness and drowsiness in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have dullness and drowsiness in me.’ They understand how dullness and drowsiness arise; how, when they’ve already arisen, they’re given up; and how, once they’re given up, they don’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhan’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhan’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa thinamiddhassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa thinamiddhassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa thinamiddhassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶85] When they have restlessness and remorse in them, they understand: ‘I have restlessness and remorse in me.’ When they don’t have restlessness and remorse in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have restlessness and remorse in me.’ They understand how restlessness and remorse arise; how, when they’ve already arisen, they’re given up; and how, once they’re given up, they don’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccan’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccan’ti pajānāti; yathā ca anuppannassa uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa uddhaccakukkuccassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶86] When they have doubt in them, they understand: ‘I have doubt in me.’ When they don’t have doubt in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have doubt in me.’ They understand how doubt arises; how, when it’s already arisen, it’s given up; and how, once it’s given up, it doesn’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vicikicchaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ vicikicchā’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vicikicchaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ vicikicchā’ti pajānāti; yathā ca anuppannāya vicikicchāya uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannāya vicikicchāya pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnāya vicikicchāya āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶87] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing, with respect to the principles, the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that principles exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶88] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five hindrances.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu nīvaraṇesu.
[¶89] > Pali: Nīvaraṇapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶90] 4.2. The Aggregates
> Pali: 4.2. Dhammānupassanākhandhapabba
[¶91] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five grasping aggregates. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five grasping aggregates? It’s when a mendicant contemplates: ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form. Such is feeling, such is the origin of feeling, such is the disappearance of feeling. Such is perception, such is the origin of perception, such is the disappearance of perception. Such are choices, such is the origin of choices, such is the disappearance of choices. Such is consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘iti rūpaṁ, iti rūpassa samudayo, iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo; iti vedanā, iti vedanāya samudayo, iti vedanāya atthaṅgamo; iti saññā, iti saññāya samudayo, iti saññāya atthaṅgamo; iti saṅkhārā, iti saṅkhārānaṁ samudayo, iti saṅkhārānaṁ atthaṅgamo; iti viññāṇaṁ, iti viññāṇassa samudayo, iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo’ti;
[¶92] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally …
> Pali: iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶93] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five grasping aggregates.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu.
[¶94] > Pali: Khandhapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶95] 4.3. The Sense Fields
> Pali: 4.3. Dhammānupassanāāyatanapabba
[¶96] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the six interior and exterior sense fields. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the six interior and exterior sense fields?
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu?
[¶97] It’s when a mendicant understands the eye, sights, and the fetter that arises dependent on both of these. They understand how the fetter that has not arisen comes to arise; how the arisen fetter comes to be abandoned; and how the abandoned fetter comes to not rise again in the future.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhuñca pajānāti, rūpe ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶98] They understand the ear, sounds, and the fetter …
> Pali: Sotañca pajānāti, sadde ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶99] They understand the nose, smells, and the fetter …
> Pali: Ghānañca pajānāti, gandhe ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶100] They understand the tongue, tastes, and the fetter …
> Pali: Jivhañca pajānāti, rase ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶101] They understand the body, touches, and the fetter …
> Pali: Kāyañca pajānāti, phoṭṭhabbe ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶102] They understand the mind, ideas, and the fetter that arises dependent on both of these. They understand how the fetter that has not arisen comes to arise; how the arisen fetter comes to be abandoned; and how the abandoned fetter comes to not rise again in the future.
> Pali: Manañca pajānāti, dhamme ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶103] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶104] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the six interior and exterior sense fields.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu.
[¶105] > Pali: Āyatanapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶106] 4.4. The Awakening Factors
> Pali: 4.4. Dhammānupassanābojjhaṅgapabba
[¶107] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the seven awakening factors. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the seven awakening factors?
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati sattasu bojjhaṅgesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati sattasu bojjhaṅgesu?
[¶108] It’s when a mendicant who has the awakening factor of mindfulness in them understands: ‘I have the awakening factor of mindfulness in me.’ When they don’t have the awakening factor of mindfulness in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have the awakening factor of mindfulness in me.’ They understand how the awakening factor of mindfulness that has not arisen comes to arise; and how the awakening factor of mindfulness that has arisen becomes fully developed.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa satisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶109] When they have the awakening factor of investigation of principles … energy … rapture … tranquility … immersion … equanimity in them, they understand: ‘I have the awakening factor of equanimity in me.’ When they don’t have the awakening factor of equanimity in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have the awakening factor of equanimity in me.’ They understand how the awakening factor of equanimity that has not arisen comes to arise; and how the awakening factor of equanimity that has arisen becomes fully developed.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶110] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing, with respect to the principles, the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that principles exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶111] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the seven awakening factors.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati sattasu bojjhaṅgesu.
[¶112] > Pali: Bojjhaṅgapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶113] 4.5. The Truths
> Pali: 4.5. Dhammānupassanāsaccapabba
[¶114] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the four noble truths.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati catūsu ariyasaccesu.
[¶115] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the four noble truths? It’s when a mendicant truly understands: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’
> Pali: Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati catūsu ariyasaccesu? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶116] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing, with respect to the principles, the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that principles exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati; samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶117] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the four noble truths.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati catūsu ariyasaccesu.
[¶118] > Pali: Saccapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶119] > Pali: Dhammānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶120] Anyone who develops these four kinds of mindfulness meditation in this way for seven years can expect one of two results: enlightenment in this very life, or if there’s residue left behind, non-return.
> Pali: Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya satta vassāni, tassa dvinnaṁ phalānaṁ aññataraṁ phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme aññā; sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā.
[¶121] Let alone seven years, anyone who develops these four kinds of mindfulness meditation in this way for six years … five years … four years … three years … two years … one year … seven months … six months … five months … four months … three months … two months … one month … a fortnight … Let alone a fortnight, anyone who develops these four kinds of mindfulness meditation in this way for seven days can expect one of two results: enlightenment in this very life, or if there’s residue left behind, non-return.
> Pali: Tiṭṭhantu, bhikkhave, satta vassāni. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya cha vassāni …pe… pañca vassāni … cattāri vassāni … tīṇi vassāni … dve vassāni … ekaṁ vassaṁ … tiṭṭhatu, bhikkhave, ekaṁ vassaṁ. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya satta māsāni, tassa dvinnaṁ phalānaṁ aññataraṁ phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme aññā; sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā. Tiṭṭhantu, bhikkhave, satta māsāni. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya cha māsāni …pe… pañca māsāni … cattāri māsāni … tīṇi māsāni … dve māsāni … ekaṁ māsaṁ … aḍḍhamāsaṁ … tiṭṭhatu, bhikkhave, aḍḍhamāso. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya sattāhaṁ, tassa dvinnaṁ phalānaṁ aññataraṁ phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme aññā sati vā upādisese anāgāmitāti.
[¶122] ‘The four kinds of mindfulness meditation are the path to convergence. They are in order to purify sentient beings, to get past sorrow and crying, to make an end of pain and sadness, to discover the system, and to realize extinguishment.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.”
> Pali: ‘Ekāyano ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā sokaparidevānaṁ samatikkamāya dukkhadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya yadidaṁ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’ti. Iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttan”ti.
[¶123] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶124] > Pali: Satipaṭṭhānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶125] > Pali: Mūlapariyāyavaggo niṭṭhito paṭhamo.
[¶126] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶127] > Pali: Mūlasusaṁvaradhammadāyādā,
Bheravānaṅgaṇākaṅkheyyavatthaṁ;
Sallekhasammādiṭṭhisatipaṭṭhaṁ,
Vaggavaro asamo susamatto.
## 11. MN 11 · The Shorter Discourse on the Lion’s Roar
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/11/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/11/#p-N
[¶0] MN 11 · The Shorter Discourse on the Lion’s Roar
> Pali: MN 11 · Cūḷasīhanādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “‘Only here is there a true ascetic, here a second ascetic, here a third ascetic, and here a fourth ascetic. Other sects are empty of ascetics.’ This, mendicants, is how you should rightly roar your lion’s roar.
> Pali: “Idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo, idha tatiyo samaṇo, idha catuttho samaṇo; suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehīti. Evametaṁ, bhikkhave, sammā sīhanādaṁ nadatha.
[¶4] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say: ‘But what is the source of the venerables’ certainty and forcefulness that they say this?’ You should say to them: ‘There are four things explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. Seeing these things in ourselves we say that:
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ko panāyasmantānaṁ assāso, kiṁ balaṁ, yena tumhe āyasmanto evaṁ vadetha— idheva samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo, idha tatiyo samaṇo, idha catuttho samaṇo; suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’ti? Evaṁvādino, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘atthi kho no, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammā akkhātā ye mayaṁ attani sampassamānā evaṁ vadema—
[¶5] “Only here is there a true ascetic, here a second ascetic, here a third ascetic, and here a fourth ascetic. Other sects are empty of ascetics.” What four? We have confidence in the Teacher, we have confidence in the teaching, and we have fulfilled the precepts. And we have love and affection for those who share our path, both laypeople and renunciates. These are the four things.’
> Pali: idheva samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo, idha tatiyo samaṇo, idha catuttho samaṇo; suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehīti. Katame cattāro? Atthi kho no, āvuso, satthari pasādo, atthi dhamme pasādo, atthi sīlesu paripūrakāritā; sahadhammikā kho pana piyā manāpā— gahaṭṭhā ceva pabbajitā ca. Ime kho no, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammā akkhātā ye mayaṁ attani sampassamānā evaṁ vadema— idheva samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo, idha tatiyo samaṇo, idha catuttho samaṇo; suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’ti.
[¶6] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say: ‘We too have confidence in the Teacher—our Teacher; we have confidence in the teaching—our teaching; and we have fulfilled the precepts—our precepts. And we have love and affection for those who share our path, both laypeople and renunciates. What, then, is the difference between you and us?’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘amhākampi kho, āvuso, atthi satthari pasādo yo amhākaṁ satthā, amhākampi atthi dhamme pasādo yo amhākaṁ dhammo, mayampi sīlesu paripūrakārino yāni amhākaṁ sīlāni, amhākampi sahadhammikā piyā manāpā— gahaṭṭhā ceva pabbajitā ca. Idha no, āvuso, ko viseso ko adhippayāso kiṁ nānākaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ tumhākañceva amhākañcā’ti?
[¶7] You should say to them: ‘Well, reverends, is the goal one or many?’ Answering rightly, the wanderers would say: ‘The goal is one, reverends, not many.’
> Pali: Evaṁvādino, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘kiṁ panāvuso, ekā niṭṭhā, udāhu puthu niṭṭhā’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘ekāvuso, niṭṭhā, na puthu niṭṭhā’ti.
[¶8] ‘But is that goal for the greedy or for those free of greed?’ Answering rightly, the wanderers would say: ‘That goal is for those free of greed, not for the greedy.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā sarāgassa udāhu vītarāgassā’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘vītarāgassāvuso, sā niṭṭhā, na sā niṭṭhā sarāgassā’ti.
[¶9] ‘Is it for the hateful or those free of hate?’ ‘It’s for those free of hate.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā sadosassa udāhu vītadosassā’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘vītadosassāvuso, sā niṭṭhā, na sā niṭṭhā sadosassā’ti.
[¶10] ‘Is it for the delusional or those free of delusion?’ ‘It’s for those free of delusion.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā samohassa udāhu vītamohassā’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘vītamohassāvuso, sā niṭṭhā, na sā niṭṭhā samohassā’ti.
[¶11] ‘Is it for those who crave or those rid of craving?’ ‘It’s for those rid of craving.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā sataṇhassa udāhu vītataṇhassā’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘vītataṇhassāvuso, sā niṭṭhā, na sā niṭṭhā sataṇhassā’ti.
[¶12] ‘Is it for those who have fuel for grasping or those who do not?’ ‘It’s for those who do not have fuel for grasping.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā saupādānassa udāhu anupādānassā’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘anupādānassāvuso, sā niṭṭhā, na sā niṭṭhā saupādānassā’ti.
[¶13] ‘Is it for the knowledgeable or the ignorant?’ ‘It’s for the knowledgeable.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā viddasuno udāhu aviddasuno’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘viddasuno, āvuso, sā niṭṭhā, na sā niṭṭhā aviddasuno’ti.
[¶14] ‘Is it for those who favor and oppose or for those who don’t favor and oppose?’ ‘It’s for those who don’t favor and oppose.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā anuruddhappaṭiviruddhassa udāhu ananuruddhaappaṭiviruddhassā’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘ananuruddhaappaṭiviruddhassāvuso, sā niṭṭhā, na sā niṭṭhā anuruddhappaṭiviruddhassā’ti.
[¶15] ‘But is that goal for those who enjoy proliferation or for those who enjoy non-proliferation?’ Answering rightly, the wanderers would say: ‘It’s for those who enjoy non-proliferation, not for those who enjoy proliferation.’
> Pali: ‘Sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā papañcārāmassa papañcaratino udāhu nippapañcārāmassa nippapañcaratino’ti? Sammā byākaramānā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ byākareyyuṁ: ‘nippapañcārāmassāvuso, sā niṭṭhā nippapañcaratino, na sā niṭṭhā papañcārāmassa papañcaratino’ti.
[¶16] Mendicants, there are these two views: views favoring existence and views favoring nonexistence. Any ascetics or brahmins who resort to, draw near to, and cling to a view favoring existence will oppose a view favoring nonexistence. Any ascetics or brahmins who resort to, draw near to, and cling to a view favoring nonexistence will oppose a view favoring existence.
> Pali: Dvemā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiyo— bhavadiṭṭhi ca vibhavadiṭṭhi ca. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā bhavadiṭṭhiṁ allīnā bhavadiṭṭhiṁ upagatā bhavadiṭṭhiṁ ajjhositā, vibhavadiṭṭhiyā te paṭiviruddhā. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā vibhavadiṭṭhiṁ allīnā vibhavadiṭṭhiṁ upagatā vibhavadiṭṭhiṁ ajjhositā, bhavadiṭṭhiyā te paṭiviruddhā.
[¶17] There are some ascetics and brahmins who don’t truly understand these two views’ origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape. They’re greedy, hateful, delusional, craving, grasping, and ignorant. They favor and oppose, and they enjoy proliferation. They’re not freed from rebirth, old age, and death, from sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. They’re not freed from suffering, I say.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā imāsaṁ dvinnaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ nappajānanti, te sarāgā te sadosā te samohā te sataṇhā te saupādānā te aviddasuno te anuruddhappaṭiviruddhā te papañcārāmā papañcaratino; te na parimuccanti jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi; ‘na parimuccanti dukkhasmā’ti vadāmi.
[¶18] There are some ascetics and brahmins who do truly understand these two views’ origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape. They’re rid of greed, hate, delusion, craving, grasping, and ignorance. They don’t favor and oppose, and they enjoy non-proliferation. They’re freed from rebirth, old age, and death, from sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. They’re freed from suffering, I say.
> Pali: Ye ca kho keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā imāsaṁ dvinnaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ pajānanti, te vītarāgā te vītadosā te vītamohā te vītataṇhā te anupādānā te viddasuno te ananuruddhaappaṭiviruddhā te nippapañcārāmā nippapañcaratino; te parimuccanti jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi; ‘parimuccanti dukkhasmā’ti vadāmi.
[¶19] There are these four kinds of grasping. What four? Grasping at sensual pleasures, views, precepts and observances, and theories of a self.
> Pali: Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, upādānāni. Katamāni cattāri? Kāmupādānaṁ, diṭṭhupādānaṁ, sīlabbatupādānaṁ, attavādupādānaṁ.
[¶20] There are some ascetics and brahmins who claim to propound the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping. But they don’t correctly describe the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping. They describe the complete understanding of grasping at sensual pleasures, but not views, precepts and observances, and theories of a self. Why is that? Because those gentlemen don’t truly understand these three things. That’s why they claim to propound the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping, but they don’t really.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sabbupādānapariññāvādā paṭijānamānā. Te na sammā sabbupādānapariññaṁ paññapenti— kāmupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na attavādupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Imāni hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā tīṇi ṭhānāni yathābhūtaṁ nappajānanti. Tasmā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sabbupādānapariññāvādā paṭijānamānā; te na sammā sabbupādānapariññaṁ paññapenti— kāmupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na attavādupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti.
[¶21] There are some other ascetics and brahmins who claim to propound the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping, but they don’t really. They describe the complete understanding of grasping at sensual pleasures and views, but not precepts and observances, and theories of a self. Why is that? Because those gentlemen don’t truly understand these two things. That’s why they claim to propound the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping, but they don’t really.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sabbupādānapariññāvādā paṭijānamānā. Te na sammā sabbupādānapariññaṁ paññapenti— kāmupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na attavādupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Imāni hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dve ṭhānāni yathābhūtaṁ nappajānanti. Tasmā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sabbupādānapariññāvādā paṭijānamānā; te na sammā sabbupādānapariññaṁ paññapenti— kāmupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na attavādupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti.
[¶22] There are some other ascetics and brahmins who claim to propound the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping, but they don’t really. They describe the complete understanding of grasping at sensual pleasures, views, and precepts and observances, but not theories of a self. Why is that? Because those gentlemen don’t truly understand this one thing. That’s why they claim to propound the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping, but they don’t really.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sabbupādānapariññāvādā paṭijānamānā. Te na sammā sabbupādānapariññaṁ paññapenti— kāmupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na attavādupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Imañhi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaṁ ṭhānaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānanti. Tasmā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sabbupādānapariññāvādā paṭijānamānā; te na sammā sabbupādānapariññaṁ paññapenti— kāmupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti, na attavādupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapenti.
[¶23] In such a teaching and training, confidence in the Teacher is said to be not rightly placed. Likewise, confidence in the teaching, fulfillment of the precepts, and love and affection for those sharing the same path are said to be not rightly placed. Why is that? It’s because that teaching and training is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Evarūpe kho, bhikkhave, dhammavinaye yo satthari pasādo so na sammaggato akkhāyati; yo dhamme pasādo so na sammaggato akkhāyati; yā sīlesu paripūrakāritā sā na sammaggatā akkhāyati; yā sahadhammikesu piyamanāpatā sā na sammaggatā akkhāyati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite.
[¶24] The Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha claims to propound the complete understanding of all kinds of grasping. He describes the complete understanding of grasping at sensual pleasures, views, precepts and observances, and theories of a self.
> Pali: Tathāgato ca kho, bhikkhave, arahaṁ sammāsambuddho sabbupādānapariññāvādo paṭijānamāno sammā sabbupādānapariññaṁ paññapeti— kāmupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapeti, diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapeti, sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapeti, attavādupādānassa pariññaṁ paññapeti.
[¶25] In such a teaching and training, confidence in the Teacher is said to be rightly placed. Likewise, confidence in the teaching, fulfillment of the precepts, and love and affection for those sharing the same path are said to be rightly placed. Why is that? It’s because that teaching and training is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Evarūpe kho, bhikkhave, dhammavinaye yo satthari pasādo so sammaggato akkhāyati; yo dhamme pasādo so sammaggato akkhāyati; yā sīlesu paripūrakāritā sā sammaggatā akkhāyati; yā sahadhammikesu piyamanāpatā sā sammaggatā akkhāyati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye suppavedite niyyānike upasamasaṁvattanike sammāsambuddhappavedite.
[¶26] What is the source, origin, birthplace, and inception of these four kinds of grasping? Craving. And what is the source, origin, birthplace, and inception of craving? Feeling. And what is the source of feeling? Contact. And what is the source of contact? The six sense fields. And what is the source of the six sense fields? Name and form. And what is the source of name and form? Consciousness. And what is the source of consciousness? Choices. And what is the source of choices? Ignorance.
> Pali: Ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro upādānā. Kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Ime cattāro upādānā taṇhānidānā taṇhāsamudayā taṇhājātikā taṇhāpabhavā. Taṇhā cāyaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Taṇhā vedanānidānā vedanāsamudayā vedanājātikā vedanāpabhavā. Vedanā cāyaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Vedanā phassanidānā phassasamudayā phassajātikā phassapabhavā. Phasso cāyaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidāno kiṁsamudayo kiṁjātiko kiṁpabhavo? Phasso saḷāyatananidāno saḷāyatanasamudayo saḷāyatanajātiko saḷāyatanapabhavo. Saḷāyatanañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ? Saḷāyatanaṁ nāmarūpanidānaṁ nāmarūpasamudayaṁ nāmarūpajātikaṁ nāmarūpapabhavaṁ. Nāmarūpañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ? Nāmarūpaṁ viññāṇanidānaṁ viññāṇasamudayaṁ viññāṇajātikaṁ viññāṇapabhavaṁ. Viññāṇañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ? Viññāṇaṁ saṅkhāranidānaṁ saṅkhārasamudayaṁ saṅkhārajātikaṁ saṅkhārapabhavaṁ. Saṅkhārā cime, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Saṅkhārā avijjānidānā avijjāsamudayā avijjājātikā avijjāpabhavā.
[¶27] When that mendicant has given up ignorance and given rise to knowledge, with the fading away of ignorance and the arising of knowledge they don’t grasp at sensual pleasures, views, precepts and observances, or theories of a self. Not grasping, they’re not anxious. Not being anxious, they personally become extinguished.
> Pali: Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno avijjā pahīnā hoti vijjā uppannā, so avijjāvirāgā vijjuppādā neva kāmupādānaṁ upādiyati, na diṭṭhupādānaṁ upādiyati, na sīlabbatupādānaṁ upādiyati, na attavādupādānaṁ upādiyati. Anupādiyaṁ na paritassati, aparitassaṁ paccattaññeva parinibbāyati.
[¶28] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī”ti.
[¶29] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶30] > Pali: Cūḷasīhanādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 12. MN 12 · The Longer Discourse on the Lion’s Roar · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/12/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/12/#p-N
[¶0] MN 12 · The Longer Discourse on the Lion’s Roar
> Pali: MN 12 · Mahāsīhanādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying outside the city of Vesālī in a woodland grove west of the town.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati bahinagare aparapure vanasaṇḍe.
[¶2] Now at that time Sunakkhatta the Licchavi had recently left this teaching and training. He was telling a crowd in Vesālī:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sunakkhatto licchaviputto acirapakkanto hoti imasmā dhammavinayā. So vesāliyaṁ parisati evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati:
[¶3] “The ascetic Gotama has no superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. He teaches what he’s worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing his own perspective. Regardless of his goal in teaching the Dhamma, it delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering.”
> Pali: “natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ. Yassa ca khvāssa atthāya dhammo desito so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā”ti.
[¶4] Then Venerable Sāriputta robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Vesālī for alms. He heard what Sunakkhatta was saying.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Assosi kho āyasmā sāriputto sunakkhattassa licchaviputtassa vesāliyaṁ parisati evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsamānassa: “natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ. Yassa ca khvāssa atthāya dhammo desito so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā”ti.
[¶5] Then he wandered for alms in Vesālī. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sunakkhatto, bhante, licchaviputto acirapakkanto imasmā dhammavinayā. So vesāliyaṁ parisati evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati: ‘natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ. Yassa ca khvāssa atthāya dhammo desito so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’”ti.
[¶6] “Sāriputta, Sunakkhatta, that futile man, is angry. His words are spoken out of anger. Thinking he criticizes the Realized One, in fact he just praises him. For it is praise of the Realized One to say: ‘Regardless of his goal in teaching the Dhamma, it delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering.’
> Pali: “Kodhano heso, sāriputta, sunakkhatto moghapuriso. Kodhā ca panassa esā vācā bhāsitā. ‘Avaṇṇaṁ bhāsissāmī’ti kho, sāriputta, sunakkhatto moghapuriso vaṇṇaṁyeva tathāgatassa bhāsati. Vaṇṇo heso, sāriputta, tathāgatassa yo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yassa ca khvāssa atthāya dhammo desito so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti.
[¶7] But there’s no way Sunakkhatta will infer about me from the teaching: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’
> Pali: Ayampi hi nāma, sāriputta, sunakkhattassa moghapurisassa mayi dhammanvayo na bhavissati: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi, satthā devamanussānaṁ, buddho bhagavā’ti.
[¶8] And there’s no way Sunakkhatta will infer about me from the teaching: ‘That Blessed One wields the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying himself and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity.’
> Pali: Ayampi hi nāma, sāriputta, sunakkhattassa moghapurisassa mayi dhammanvayo na bhavissati: ‘itipi so bhagavā anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ, tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati, seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti, seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati, seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati, seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parimasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vattetī’ti.
[¶9] And there’s no way Sunakkhatta will infer about me from the teaching: ‘That Blessed One, with clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, hears both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far.’
> Pali: Ayampi hi nāma, sāriputta, sunakkhattassa moghapurisassa mayi dhammanvayo na bhavissati: ‘itipi so bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti—dibbe ca mānuse ca, ye dūre santike cā’ti.
[¶10] And there’s no way Sunakkhatta will infer about me from the teaching: ‘That Blessed One understands the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with his own mind. He understands mind with greed as “mind with greed,” and mind without greed as “mind without greed.” He understands mind with hate … mind without hate … mind with delusion … mind without delusion … constricted mind … scattered mind … expansive mind … unexpansive mind … mind that is supreme … mind that is not supreme … mind immersed in samādhi … mind not immersed in samādhi … freed mind as “freed mind,” and unfreed mind as “unfreed mind.”’
> Pali: Ayampi hi nāma, sāriputta, sunakkhattassa moghapurisassa mayi dhammanvayo na bhavissati: ‘itipi so bhagavā parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti— sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ sarāgaṁ cittanti pajānāti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ vītarāgaṁ cittanti pajānāti; sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ sadosaṁ cittanti pajānāti, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ vītadosaṁ cittanti pajānāti; samohaṁ vā cittaṁ samohaṁ cittanti pajānāti, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ vītamohaṁ cittanti pajānāti; saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ saṅkhittaṁ cittanti pajānāti, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ vikkhittaṁ cittanti pajānāti; mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ mahaggataṁ cittanti pajānāti, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ amahaggataṁ cittanti pajānāti; sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ sauttaraṁ cittanti pajānāti, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ anuttaraṁ cittanti pajānāti; samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ samāhitaṁ cittanti pajānāti, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ asamāhitaṁ cittanti pajānāti; vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ cittanti pajānāti, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ avimuttaṁ cittanti pajānātī’ti.
[¶11] There are these ten powers of a Realized One that the Realized One possesses. With these he claims the bull’s place, roars his lion’s roar in the assemblies, and turns the divine wheel. What ten?
> Pali: Dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalāni yehi balehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti. Katamāni dasa?
[¶12] Firstly, the Realized One truly understands the possible as possible, and the impossible as impossible. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. Relying on this he claims the bull’s place, roars his lion’s roar in the assemblies, and turns the divine wheel.
> Pali: Idha, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶13] Furthermore, the Realized One truly understands the result of deeds undertaken in the past, future, and present in terms of grounds and causes. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṁ kammasamādānānaṁ ṭhānaso hetuso vipākaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṁ kammasamādānānaṁ ṭhānaso hetuso vipākaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶14] Furthermore, the Realized One truly understands where all paths of practice lead. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato sabbatthagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato sabbatthagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶15] Furthermore, the Realized One truly understands the world with its many and diverse elements. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekadhātunānādhātulokaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato anekadhātunānādhātulokaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶16] Furthermore, the Realized One truly understands the diverse convictions of sentient beings. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato sattānaṁ nānādhimuttikataṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato sattānaṁ nānādhimuttikataṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶17] Furthermore, the Realized One truly understands the faculties of other sentient beings and other individuals after encompassing them with his mind. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ indriyaparopariyattaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ indriyaparopariyattaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶18] Furthermore, the Realized One truly understands corruption, cleansing, and emergence regarding the absorptions, liberations, immersions, and attainments. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ vuṭṭhānaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ vuṭṭhānaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶19] Furthermore, the Realized One recollects many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. He remembers: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so he recollects his many kinds of past lives, with features and details. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶20] Furthermore, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, the Realized One sees sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. He understands how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, he sees sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. He understands how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶21] Furthermore, the Realized One has realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and lives having realized it with his own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. Since he truly understands this, this is a power of the Realized One. Relying on this he claims the bull’s place, roars his lion’s roar in the assemblies, and turns the divine wheel.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, tathāgato āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati, idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṁ hoti yaṁ balaṁ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶22] A Realized One possesses these ten powers of a Realized One. With these he claims the bull’s place, roars his lion’s roar in the assemblies, and turns the divine wheel.
> Pali: Imāni kho, sāriputta, dasa tathāgatassa tathāgatabalāni yehi balehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶23] When I know and see in this way, suppose someone were to say this: ‘The ascetic Gotama has no superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. He teaches what he’s worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing his own perspective.’ Unless they give up that speech and that thought, and let go of that view, they will be placed in hell as if delivered there. Just as a mendicant accomplished in ethics, immersion, and wisdom would reach enlightenment in this very life, such is the consequence, I say. Unless they give up that speech and that thought, and let go of that view, they will be placed in hell as if delivered there.
> Pali: Yo kho maṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ jānantaṁ evaṁ passantaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso; takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānan’ti, taṁ, sāriputta, vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṁ ārādheyya, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ, sāriputta, vadāmi. Taṁ vācaṁ appahāya, taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye.
[¶24] Sāriputta, a Realized One has four kinds of self-assurance. With these he claims the bull’s place, roars his lion’s roar in the assemblies, and turns the divine wheel. What four?
> Pali: Cattārimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa vesārajjāni yehi vesārajjehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti. Katamāni cattāri?
[¶25] I see no reason for anyone—whether ascetic, brahmin, god, Māra, or the Divinity, or anyone else in the world—to legitimately scold me, saying: ‘You claim to be a fully awakened Buddha, but you don’t understand these things.’ Since I see no such reason, I live secure, fearless, and self-assured.
> Pali: ‘Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’ti. Tatra vata maṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṁ sahadhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṁ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṁ, sāriputta, nimittaṁ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi.
[¶26] I see no reason for anyone—whether ascetic, brahmin, god, Māra, or the Divinity, or anyone else in the world—to legitimately scold me, saying: ‘You claim to have ended all defilements, but you still have these defilements.’ Since I see no such reason, I live secure, fearless, and self-assured.
> Pali: ‘Khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ime āsavā aparikkhīṇā’ti. Tatra vata maṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṁ sahadhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṁ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṁ, sāriputta, nimittaṁ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi.
[¶27] I see no reason for anyone—whether ascetic, brahmin, god, Māra, or the Divinity, or anyone else in the world—to legitimately scold me, saying: ‘The acts that you say are obstructions are not really obstructions for the one who performs them.’ Since I see no such reason, I live secure, fearless, and self-assured.
> Pali: ‘Ye kho pana te antarāyikā dhammā vuttā, te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’ti. Tatra vata maṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṁ sahadhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṁ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṁ, sāriputta, nimittaṁ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi.
[¶28] I see no reason for anyone—whether ascetic, brahmin, god, Māra, or the Divinity, or anyone else in the world—to legitimately scold me, saying: ‘Regardless of your goal in teaching the Dhamma, it does not deliver one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering.’ Since I see no such reason, I live secure, fearless, and self-assured.
> Pali: ‘Yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desito, so na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti. Tatra vata maṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṁ sahadhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṁ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṁ, sāriputta, nimittaṁ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi.
[¶29] A Realized One possesses these four kinds of self-assurance. With these he claims the bull’s place, roars his lion’s roar in the assemblies, and turns the divine wheel.
> Pali: Imāni kho, sāriputta, cattāri tathāgatassa vesārajjāni yehi vesārajjehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṁ ṭhānaṁ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṁ nadati, brahmacakkaṁ pavatteti.
[¶30] When I know and see in this way, suppose someone were to say this: ‘The ascetic Gotama has no superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones …’ Unless they give up that speech and that thought, and let go of that view, they will be placed in hell as if delivered there.
> Pali: Yo kho maṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ jānantaṁ evaṁ passantaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso, takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānan’ti, taṁ, sāriputta, vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṁ ārādheyya, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ, sāriputta, vadāmi. Taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye.
[¶31] Sāriputta, there are these eight assemblies. What eight? The assemblies of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and ascetics. An assembly of the gods of the four great kings. An assembly of the gods of the thirty-three. An assembly of Māras. An assembly of divinities. These are the eight assemblies. Possessing these four kinds of self-assurance, the Realized One approaches and enters right into these eight assemblies. I recall having approached an assembly of hundreds of aristocrats. There I used to sit with them, converse, and engage in discussion. But I don’t see any reason to feel afraid or insecure. Since I see no such reason, I live secure, fearless, and self-assured.
> Pali: Aṭṭha kho imā, sāriputta, parisā. Katamā aṭṭha? Khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇaparisā, gahapatiparisā, samaṇaparisā, cātumahārājikaparisā, tāvatiṁsaparisā, māraparisā, brahmaparisā— imā kho, sāriputta, aṭṭha parisā. Imehi kho, sāriputta, catūhi vesārajjehi samannāgato tathāgato imā aṭṭha parisā upasaṅkamati ajjhogāhati. Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, sāriputta, anekasataṁ khattiyaparisaṁ upasaṅkamitā. Tatrapi mayā sannisinnapubbañceva, sallapitapubbañca, sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā. Tatra vata maṁ bhayaṁ vā sārajjaṁ vā okkamissatīti nimittametaṁ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṁ, sāriputta, nimittaṁ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi.
[¶32] I recall having approached an assembly of hundreds of brahmins … householders … ascetics … the gods of the four great kings … the gods of the thirty-three … Māras … divinities. There too I used to sit with them, converse, and engage in discussion. But I don’t see any reason to feel afraid or insecure. Since I see no such reason, I live secure, fearless, and self-assured.
> Pali: Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, sāriputta, anekasataṁ brāhmaṇaparisaṁ …pe… gahapatiparisaṁ … samaṇaparisaṁ … cātumahārājikaparisaṁ … tāvatiṁsaparisaṁ … māraparisaṁ … brahmaparisaṁ upasaṅkamitā. Tatrapi mayā sannisinnapubbañceva, sallapitapubbañca, sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā. Tatra vata maṁ bhayaṁ vā sārajjaṁ vā okkamissatīti nimittametaṁ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṁ, sāriputta, nimittaṁ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi.
[¶33] When I know and see in this way, suppose someone were to say this: ‘The ascetic Gotama has no superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones …’ Unless they give up that speech and that thought, and let go of that view, they will be placed in hell as if delivered there.
> Pali: Yo kho maṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ jānantaṁ evaṁ passantaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso, takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānan’ti, taṁ, sāriputta, vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṁ ārādheyya, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ, sāriputta, vadāmi. Taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye.
[¶34] Sāriputta, there are these four kinds of reproduction. What four? Reproduction for creatures born from an egg, from a womb, from moisture, or spontaneously.
> Pali: Catasso kho imā, sāriputta, yoniyo. Katamā catasso? Aṇḍajā yoni, jalābujā yoni, saṁsedajā yoni, opapātikā yoni.
[¶35] And what is reproduction from an egg? There are beings who are born by breaking out of an eggshell. This is called reproduction from an egg. And what is reproduction from a womb? There are beings who are born by breaking out of the amniotic sac. This is called reproduction from a womb. And what is reproduction from moisture? There are beings who are born in a rotten fish, a rotten carcass, rotten porridge, a cesspool, or a sump. This is called reproduction from moisture. And what is spontaneous reproduction? Gods, hell-beings, certain humans, and certain beings in the lower realms. This is called spontaneous reproduction. These are the four kinds of reproduction.
> Pali: Katamā ca, sāriputta, aṇḍajā yoni? Ye kho te, sāriputta, sattā aṇḍakosaṁ abhinibbhijja jāyanti— ayaṁ vuccati, sāriputta, aṇḍajā yoni. Katamā ca, sāriputta, jalābujā yoni? Ye kho te, sāriputta, sattā vatthikosaṁ abhinibbhijja jāyanti— ayaṁ vuccati, sāriputta, jalābujā yoni. Katamā ca, sāriputta, saṁsedajā yoni? Ye kho te, sāriputta, sattā pūtimacche vā jāyanti pūtikuṇape vā pūtikummāse vā candanikāye vā oḷigalle vā jāyanti— ayaṁ vuccati, sāriputta, saṁsedajā yoni. Katamā ca, sāriputta, opapātikā yoni? Devā, nerayikā, ekacce ca manussā, ekacce ca vinipātikā— ayaṁ vuccati, sāriputta, opapātikā yoni. Imā kho, sāriputta, catasso yoniyo.
[¶36] When I know and see in this way, suppose someone were to say this: ‘The ascetic Gotama has no superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones …’ Unless they give up that speech and that thought, and let go of that view, they will be placed in hell as if delivered there.
> Pali: Yo kho maṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ jānantaṁ evaṁ passantaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso, takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānan’ti, taṁ, sāriputta, vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṁ ārādheyya, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ, sāriputta, vadāmi. Taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye.
[¶37] There are these five destinations. What five? Hell, the animal realm, the ghost realm, humanity, and the gods.
> Pali: Pañca kho imā, sāriputta, gatiyo. Katamā pañca? Nirayo, tiracchānayoni, pettivisayo, manussā, devā.
[¶38] I understand hell, and the path and practice that leads to hell. And I understand how someone practicing that way, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. I understand the animal realm … the ghost realm … humanity … gods, and the path and practice that leads to the world of the gods. And I understand how someone practicing that way, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. And I understand extinguishment, and the path and practice that leads to extinguishment. And I understand how someone practicing that way realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and lives having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Nirayañcāhaṁ, sāriputta, pajānāmi, nirayagāmiñca maggaṁ, nirayagāminiñca paṭipadaṁ; yathā paṭipanno ca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati tañca pajānāmi. Tiracchānayoniñcāhaṁ, sāriputta, pajānāmi, tiracchānayonigāmiñca maggaṁ, tiracchānayonigāminiñca paṭipadaṁ; yathā paṭipanno ca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tiracchānayoniṁ upapajjati tañca pajānāmi. Pettivisayañcāhaṁ, sāriputta, pajānāmi, pettivisayagāmiñca maggaṁ, pettivisayagāminiñca paṭipadaṁ; yathā paṭipanno ca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā pettivisayaṁ upapajjati tañca pajānāmi. Manusse cāhaṁ, sāriputta, pajānāmi, manussalokagāmiñca maggaṁ, manussalokagāminiñca paṭipadaṁ; yathā paṭipanno ca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā manussesu upapajjati tañca pajānāmi. Deve cāhaṁ, sāriputta, pajānāmi, devalokagāmiñca maggaṁ, devalokagāminiñca paṭipadaṁ; yathā paṭipanno ca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati tañca pajānāmi. Nibbānañcāhaṁ, sāriputta, pajānāmi, nibbānagāmiñca maggaṁ, nibbānagāminiñca paṭipadaṁ; yathā paṭipanno ca āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati tañca pajānāmi.
[¶39] When I’ve comprehended the mind of a certain individual, I understand: ‘This individual is practicing in such a way and is riding upon such a path that when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.’ Some time later I see that they have indeed been reborn in hell, where they experience absolutely painful feelings, sharp and severe. Suppose there was a pit of glowing coals deeper than a man’s height, full of glowing coals that neither flamed nor smoked. Then along comes a person struggling in the oppressive heat, weary, thirsty, and parched. And they have set out on a path that meets with that same pit of coals. If a person with clear eyes saw them, they’d say: ‘This person is proceeding in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will arrive at that very pit of coals.’ Some time later they see that they have indeed fallen into that pit of coals, where they experience absolutely painful feelings, sharp and severe. …
> Pali: Idhāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannaṁ, ekantadukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vedayamānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, aṅgārakāsu sādhikaporisā pūrā aṅgārānaṁ vītaccikānaṁ vītadhūmānaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipāsito ekāyanena maggena tameva aṅgārakāsuṁ paṇidhāya. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā imaṁyeva aṅgārakāsuṁ āgamissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passeyya aparena samayena tassā aṅgārakāsuyā patitaṁ, ekantadukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶40] > Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, idhekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannaṁ, ekantadukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶41] When I’ve comprehended the mind of a certain individual, I understand: ‘This individual … will be reborn in the animal realm.’ Some time later I see that they have indeed been reborn in the animal realm, where they suffer painful feelings, sharp and severe. Suppose there was a sewer deeper than a man’s height, full to the brim with feces. Then along comes a person struggling in the oppressive heat, weary, thirsty, and parched. And they have set out on a path that meets with that same sewer. If a person with clear eyes saw them, they’d say: ‘This person is proceeding in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will arrive at that very sewer.’ Some time later they see that they have indeed fallen into that sewer, where they suffer painful feelings, sharp and severe. …
> Pali: Idha panāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tiracchānayoniṁ upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tiracchānayoniṁ upapannaṁ, dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vedayamānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, gūthakūpo sādhikaporiso, pūro gūthassa. Atha puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipāsito ekāyanena maggena tameva gūthakūpaṁ paṇidhāya. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho yathā imaṁyeva gūthakūpaṁ āgamissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passeyya aparena samayena tasmiṁ gūthakūpe patitaṁ, dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
## 13. MN 12 · The Longer Discourse on the Lion’s Roar · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/13/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/13/#p-N
[¶0] > Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, idhekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tiracchānayoniṁ upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tiracchānayoniṁ upapannaṁ, dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶1] When I’ve comprehended the mind of a certain individual, I understand: ‘This individual … will be reborn in the ghost realm.’ Some time later I see that they have indeed been reborn in the ghost realm, where they experience mostly painful feelings. Suppose there was a tree growing on rugged ground, with thin foliage casting dappled shade. Then along comes a person struggling in the oppressive heat, weary, thirsty, and parched. And they have set out on a path that meets with that same tree. If a person with clear eyes saw them, they’d say: ‘This person is proceeding in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will arrive at that very tree.’ Some time later they see them sitting or lying under that tree, where they experience mostly painful feelings. …
> Pali: Idha panāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā pettivisayaṁ upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā pettivisayaṁ upapannaṁ, dukkhabahulā vedanā vedayamānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, rukkho visame bhūmibhāge jāto tanupattapalāso kabaracchāyo. Atha puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipāsito ekāyanena maggena tameva rukkhaṁ paṇidhāya. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā imaṁyeva rukkhaṁ āgamissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passeyya, aparena samayena tassa rukkhassa chāyāya nisinnaṁ vā nipannaṁ vā dukkhabahulā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶2] > Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, idhekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā pettivisayaṁ upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā pettivisayaṁ upapannaṁ, dukkhabahulā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶3] When I’ve comprehended the mind of a certain individual, I understand: ‘This individual … will be reborn among human beings.’ Some time later I see that they have indeed been reborn among human beings, where they experience mostly pleasant feelings. Suppose there was a tree growing on smooth ground, with abundant foliage casting dense shade. Then along comes a person struggling in the oppressive heat, weary, thirsty, and parched. And they have set out on a path that meets with that same tree. If a person with clear eyes saw them, they’d say: ‘This person is proceeding in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will arrive at that very tree.’ Some time later they see them sitting or lying under that tree, where they experience mostly pleasant feelings. …
> Pali: Idha panāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā manussesu upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā manussesu upapannaṁ, sukhabahulā vedanā vedayamānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, rukkho same bhūmibhāge jāto bahalapattapalāso sandacchāyo. Atha puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipāsito ekāyanena maggena tameva rukkhaṁ paṇidhāya. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā imameva rukkhaṁ āgamissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passeyya aparena samayena tassa rukkhassa chāyāya nisinnaṁ vā nipannaṁ vā sukhabahulā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶4] > Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, idhekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā manussesu upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā manussesu upapannaṁ, sukhabahulā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶5] When I’ve comprehended the mind of a certain individual, I understand: ‘This individual … will be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ Some time later I see that they have indeed been reborn in a heavenly realm, where they experience feelings of absolute happiness. Suppose there was a stilt longhouse with a peaked roof, plastered inside and out, draft-free, with door fastened and window shuttered. And it had a couch spread with woolen covers—shag-piled, pure white, or embroidered with flowers—and spread with a fine deer hide, with a canopy above and red pillows at both ends. Then along comes a person struggling in the oppressive heat, weary, thirsty, and parched. And they have set out on a path that meets with that same stilt longhouse. If a person with clear eyes saw them, they’d say: ‘This person is proceeding in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will arrive at that very stilt longhouse.’ Some time later they see them sitting or lying in that stilt longhouse, where they experience feelings of absolute happiness. …
> Pali: Idha panāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi: ‘tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ, ekantasukhā vedanā vedayamānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, pāsādo, tatrāssa kūṭāgāraṁ ullittāvalittaṁ nivātaṁ phusitaggaḷaṁ pihitavātapānaṁ. Tatrāssa pallaṅko gonakatthato paṭikatthato paṭalikatthato kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇo sauttaracchado ubhatolohitakūpadhāno. Atha puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipāsito ekāyanena maggena tameva pāsādaṁ paṇidhāya. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā imaṁyeva pāsādaṁ āgamissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passeyya aparena samayena tasmiṁ pāsāde tasmiṁ kūṭāgāre tasmiṁ pallaṅke nisinnaṁ vā nipannaṁ vā ekantasukhā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶6] > Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, idhekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho yathā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ, ekantasukhā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶7] When I’ve comprehended the mind of a certain individual, I understand: ‘This individual is practicing in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.’ Some time later I see that they have indeed realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements, experiencing feelings of absolute happiness. Suppose there was a lotus pond with clear, sweet, cool water, clean, with smooth banks, delightful. Nearby was a dense forest grove. Then along comes a person struggling in the oppressive heat, weary, thirsty, and parched. And they have set out on a path that meets with that same lotus pond. If a person with clear eyes saw them, they’d say: ‘This person is proceeding in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will arrive at that very lotus pond.’ Some time later they would see that person after they had plunged into that lotus pond, bathed and drunk. When all their stress, weariness, and heat exhaustion had faded away, they emerged and sat or lay down in that woodland thicket, where they experienced feelings of absolute happiness.
> Pali: Idha panāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaccaṁ puggalaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi— tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissatīti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharantaṁ, ekantasukhā vedanā vedayamānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, pokkharaṇī acchodakā sātodakā sītodakā setakā supatitthā ramaṇīyā. Avidūre cassā tibbo vanasaṇḍo. Atha puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipāsito ekāyanena maggena tameva pokkharaṇiṁ paṇidhāya. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathā bhavaṁ puriso paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā imaṁyeva pokkharaṇiṁ āgamissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passeyya aparena samayena taṁ pokkharaṇiṁ ogāhetvā nhāyitvā ca pivitvā ca sabbadarathakilamathapariḷāhaṁ paṭippassambhetvā paccuttaritvā tasmiṁ vanasaṇḍe nisinnaṁ vā nipannaṁ vā, ekantasukhā vedanā vedayamānaṁ.
[¶8] In the same way, when I’ve comprehended the mind of an individual, I understand: ‘This individual is practicing in such a way and is riding upon such a path that they will realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.’ Some time later I see that they have indeed realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements, experiencing feelings of absolute happiness. These are the five destinations.
> Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, idhekaccaṁ puggalaṁ evaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi: ‘tathāyaṁ puggalo paṭipanno tathā ca iriyati tañca maggaṁ samārūḷho, yathā āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissatī’ti. Tamenaṁ passāmi aparena samayena āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharantaṁ, ekantasukhā vedanā vedayamānaṁ. Imā kho, sāriputta, pañca gatiyo.
[¶9] When I know and see in this way, suppose someone were to say this: ‘The ascetic Gotama has no superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. He teaches what he’s worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing his own perspective.’ Unless they give up that speech and that thought, and let go of that view, they will be placed in hell as if delivered there. Just as a mendicant accomplished in ethics, immersion, and wisdom would reach enlightenment in this very life, such is the consequence, I say. Unless they give up that speech and that thought, and let go of that view, they will be placed in hell as if delivered there.
> Pali: Yo kho maṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ jānantaṁ evaṁ passantaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso; takkapariyāhataṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānan’ti taṁ, sāriputta, vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṁ ārādheyya; evaṁ sampadamidaṁ, sāriputta, vadāmi taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṁ nikkhitto evaṁ niraye.
[¶10] Sāriputta, I recall having practiced a spiritual path consisting of four factors. I used to be a fervent mortifier, the ultimate fervent mortifier. I used to live rough, the ultimate rough-liver. I used to live in disgust of sin, the ultimate one living in disgust of sin. I used to be secluded, in ultimate seclusion.
> Pali: Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, sāriputta, caturaṅgasamannāgataṁ brahmacariyaṁ caritā— tapassī sudaṁ homi paramatapassī, lūkho sudaṁ homi paramalūkho, jegucchī sudaṁ homi paramajegucchī, pavivitto sudaṁ homi paramapavivitto.
[¶11] And this is what my fervent mortification was like. I went naked, ignoring conventions. I licked my hands, and didn’t come or stop when asked. I didn’t consent to food brought to me, or food prepared specially for me, or an invitation for a meal. I didn’t receive anything from a pot or bowl; or from someone who keeps sheep, or who has a weapon or a shovel in their home; or where a couple is eating; or where there is a woman who is pregnant, breastfeeding, or who lives with a man; or where food for distribution is advertised; or where there’s a hound waiting or flies buzzing. I accepted no fish or meat or beer or wine, and drank no fermented gruel. I went to just one house for alms, taking just one mouthful, or two houses and two mouthfuls, up to seven houses and seven mouthfuls. I fed on one saucer a day, two saucers a day, up to seven saucers a day. I ate once a day, once every second day, up to once a week, and so on, even up to once a fortnight. I lived committed to the practice of eating food at set intervals.
> Pali: Tatrāssu me idaṁ, sāriputta, tapassitāya hoti—acelako homi muttācāro hatthāpalekhano, naehibhaddantiko natiṭṭhabhaddantiko; nābhihaṭaṁ na uddissakataṁ na nimantanaṁ sādiyāmi. So na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhāmi, na kaḷopimukhā paṭiggaṇhāmi, na eḷakamantaraṁ, na daṇḍamantaraṁ, na musalamantaraṁ, na dvinnaṁ bhuñjamānānaṁ, na gabbhiniyā, na pāyamānāya, na purisantaragatāya, na saṅkittīsu, na yattha sā upaṭṭhito hoti, na yattha makkhikā saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī; na macchaṁ na maṁsaṁ na suraṁ na merayaṁ na thusodakaṁ pivāmi; so ekāgāriko vā homi ekālopiko, dvāgāriko vā homi dvālopiko …pe… sattāgāriko vā homi sattālopiko; ekissāpi dattiyā yāpemi, dvīhipi dattīhi yāpemi …pe… sattahipi dattīhi yāpemi; ekāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāremi, dvīhikampi āhāraṁ āhāremi …pe… sattāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāremi; iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharāmi.
[¶12] I ate herbs, millet, wild rice, poor rice, water lettuce, rice bran, scum from boiling rice, sesame flour, grass, or cow dung. I survived on forest roots and fruits, or eating fallen fruit.
> Pali: So sākabhakkho vā homi, sāmākabhakkho vā homi, nīvārabhakkho vā homi, daddulabhakkho vā homi, haṭabhakkho vā homi, kaṇabhakkho vā homi, ācāmabhakkho vā homi, piññākabhakkho vā homi, tiṇabhakkho vā homi, gomayabhakkho vā homi, vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpemi pavattaphalabhojī.
[¶13] I wore robes of sunn hemp, mixed hemp, corpse-wrapping cloth, rags, lodh tree bark, antelope hide (whole or in strips), kusa grass, bark, wood-chips, human hair, horse-tail hair, or owls’ wings. I tore out hair and beard, committed to this practice. I constantly stood, turning down seats. I squatted, committed to the endeavor of squatting. I lay on a mat of thorns, making a mat of thorns my bed. I was devoted to ritual bathing three times a day, including at dusk. And so I lived committed to practicing these various ways of mortifying and tormenting the body. Such was my practice of fervent mortification.
> Pali: So sāṇānipi dhāremi, masāṇānipi dhāremi, chavadussānipi dhāremi, paṁsukūlānipi dhāremi, tirīṭānipi dhāremi, ajinampi dhāremi, ajinakkhipampi dhāremi, kusacīrampi dhāremi, vākacīrampi dhāremi, phalakacīrampi dhāremi, kesakambalampi dhāremi, vāḷakambalampi dhāremi, ulūkapakkhampi dhāremi; kesamassulocakopi homi kesamassulocanānuyogamanuyutto; ubbhaṭṭhakopi homi āsanapaṭikkhitto; ukkuṭikopi homi ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyutto; kaṇṭakāpassayikopi homi kaṇṭakāpassaye seyyaṁ kappemi; sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharāmi— iti evarūpaṁ anekavihitaṁ kāyassa ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto viharāmi. Idaṁsu me, sāriputta, tapassitāya hoti.
[¶14] And this is what my rough living was like. The dust and dirt built up on my body over many years until it started flaking off. It’s like the trunk of a pale-moon ebony tree, which builds up bark over many years until it starts flaking off. But it didn’t occur to me: ‘Oh, this dust and dirt must be rubbed off by my hand or another’s.’ That didn’t occur to me. Such was my rough living.
> Pali: Tatrāssu me idaṁ, sāriputta, lūkhasmiṁ hoti— nekavassagaṇikaṁ rajojallaṁ kāye sannicitaṁ hoti papaṭikajātaṁ. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, tindukakhāṇu nekavassagaṇiko sannicito hoti papaṭikajāto, evamevāssu me, sāriputta, nekavassagaṇikaṁ rajojallaṁ kāye sannicitaṁ hoti papaṭikajātaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, sāriputta, na evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ imaṁ rajojallaṁ pāṇinā parimajjeyyaṁ, aññe vā pana me imaṁ rajojallaṁ pāṇinā parimajjeyyun’ti. Evampi me, sāriputta, na hoti. Idaṁsu me, sāriputta, lūkhasmiṁ hoti.
[¶15] And this is what my living in disgust of sin was like. I’d step forward or back ever so mindfully, so I was full of pity regarding even a drop of water, thinking: ‘May I not injure any little creatures on unclear ground.’ Such was my living in disgust of sin.
> Pali: Tatrāssu me idaṁ, sāriputta, jegucchismiṁ hoti— so kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, satova abhikkamāmi, satova paṭikkamāmi, yāva udakabindumhipi me dayā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti: ‘māhaṁ khuddake pāṇe visamagate saṅghātaṁ āpādesin’ti. Idaṁsu me, sāriputta, jegucchismiṁ hoti.
[¶16] And this is what my seclusion was like. I would plunge deep into a wilderness region and stay there. When I saw a cowherd or a shepherd, or someone gathering grass or sticks, or a lumberjack, I’d flee from forest to forest, from thicket to thicket, from valley to valley, from uplands to uplands. Why is that? So that I wouldn’t see them, nor they me. I fled like a wild deer seeing a human being. Such was my practice of seclusion.
> Pali: Tatrāssu me idaṁ, sāriputta, pavivittasmiṁ hoti— so kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, aññataraṁ araññāyatanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā viharāmi. Yadā passāmi gopālakaṁ vā pasupālakaṁ vā tiṇahārakaṁ vā kaṭṭhahārakaṁ vā vanakammikaṁ vā, vanena vanaṁ gahanena gahanaṁ ninnena ninnaṁ thalena thalaṁ sampatāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mā maṁ te addasaṁsu ahañca mā te addasanti. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, āraññako mago manusse disvā vanena vanaṁ gahanena gahanaṁ ninnena ninnaṁ thalena thalaṁ sampatati; evameva kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, yadā passāmi gopālakaṁ vā pasupālakaṁ vā tiṇahārakaṁ vā kaṭṭhahārakaṁ vā vanakammikaṁ vā vanena vanaṁ gahanena gahanaṁ ninnena ninnaṁ thalena thalaṁ sampatāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mā maṁ te addasaṁsu ahañca mā te addasanti. Idaṁsu me, sāriputta, pavivittasmiṁ hoti.
[¶17] I would go on all fours into the cow-pens after the cattle had left and eat the dung of the young suckling calves. As long as my own urine and excrement lasted, I would even eat that. Such was my eating of most unnatural things.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, ye te goṭṭhā paṭṭhitagāvo apagatagopālakā, tattha catukkuṇḍiko upasaṅkamitvā yāni tāni vacchakānaṁ taruṇakānaṁ dhenupakānaṁ gomayāni tāni sudaṁ āhāremi. Yāvakīvañca me, sāriputta, sakaṁ muttakarīsaṁ apariyādinnaṁ hoti, sakaṁyeva sudaṁ muttakarīsaṁ āhāremi. Idaṁsu me, sāriputta, mahāvikaṭabhojanasmiṁ hoti.
[¶18] I would plunge deep into an awe-inspiring forest grove and stay there. It was so awe-inspiring that normally it would make your hair stand on end if you weren’t free of greed. And on days such as the cold spell when the snow falls in the January winter, I stayed in the open by night and in the forest by day. But in the last month of summer I’d stay in the open by day and in the forest by night. And then these verses, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, occurred to me:
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, aññataraṁ bhiṁsanakaṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā viharāmi. Tatrāssudaṁ, sāriputta, bhiṁsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṁsanakatasmiṁ hoti— yo koci avītarāgo taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ pavisati, yebhuyyena lomāni haṁsanti. So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, yā tā rattiyo sītā hemantikā antaraṭṭhakā himapātasamayā tathārūpāsu rattīsu rattiṁ abbhokāse viharāmi, divā vanasaṇḍe; gimhānaṁ pacchime māse divā abbhokāse viharāmi, rattiṁ vanasaṇḍe. Apissu maṁ, sāriputta, ayaṁ anacchariyagāthā paṭibhāsi pubbe assutapubbā:
[¶19] ‘Scorched and frozen,
alone in the awe-inspiring forest.
nude, no fire to sit beside,
the sage still pursues his quest.’
> Pali: ‘Sotatto sosinno ceva,
eko bhiṁsanake vane;
Naggo na caggimāsīno,
esanāpasuto munī’ti.
[¶20] I would make my bed in a charnel ground, with the bones of the dead for a pillow. Then village louts would come up to me. They’d spit and piss on me, throw mud on me, even poke twigs in my ears. But I don’t recall ever having a bad thought about them. Such was my abiding in equanimity.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, susāne seyyaṁ kappemi chavaṭṭhikāni upadhāya. Apissu maṁ, sāriputta, gāmaṇḍalā upasaṅkamitvā oṭṭhubhantipi, omuttentipi, paṁsukenapi okiranti, kaṇṇasotesupi salākaṁ pavesenti. Na kho panāhaṁ, sāriputta, abhijānāmi tesu pāpakaṁ cittaṁ uppādetā. Idaṁsu me, sāriputta, upekkhāvihārasmiṁ hoti.
[¶21] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Purity comes from food.’ They say: ‘Let’s live on jujubes.’ So they eat jujubes and jujube powder, and drink jujube juice. And they enjoy many jujube concoctions. I recall eating just a single jujube. You might think that at that time the jujubes must have been very big. But you should not see it like this. The jujubes then were at most the same size as today. Eating so very little, my body became severely emaciated. Due to eating so little, my major and minor limbs became like the joints of an eighty-year-old or a dying man, my bottom became like a camel’s hoof, my vertebrae stuck out like beads on a string, and my ribs were as gaunt as the broken-down rafters on an old barn. Due to eating so little, the gleam of my eyes sank deep in their sockets, like the gleam of water sunk deep down a well. Due to eating so little, my scalp shriveled and withered like a green bitter-gourd in the wind and sun. Due to eating so little, the skin of my belly stuck to my backbone, so that when I tried to rub the skin of my belly I grabbed my backbone, and when I tried to rub my backbone I rubbed the skin of my belly. Due to eating so little, when I tried to urinate or defecate I fell face down right there. Due to eating so little, when I tried to relieve my body by rubbing my limbs with my hands, the hair, rotted at its roots, fell out.
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘āhārena suddhī’ti. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kolehi yāpemā’ti. Te kolampi khādanti, kolacuṇṇampi khādanti, kolodakampi pivanti— anekavihitampi kolavikatiṁ paribhuñjanti. Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaṁyeva kolaṁ āhāraṁ āhāritā. Siyā kho pana te, sāriputta, evamassa: ‘mahā nūna tena samayena kolo ahosī’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Tadāpi etaparamoyeva kolo ahosi seyyathāpi etarahi. Tassa mayhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaṁyeva kolaṁ āhāraṁ āhārayato adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma āsītikapabbāni vā kāḷapabbāni vā; evamevassu me aṅgapaccaṅgāni bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma oṭṭhapadaṁ; evamevassu me ānisadaṁ hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma vaṭṭanāvaḷī; evamevassu me piṭṭhikaṇṭako unnatāvanato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma jarasālāya gopānasiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti; evamevassu me phāsuḷiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma gambhīre udapāne udakatārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti; evamevassu me akkhikūpesu akkhitārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma tittakālābu āmakacchinno vātātapena samphuṭito hoti sammilāto; evamevassu me sīsacchavi samphuṭitā hoti sammilātā tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, ‘udaracchaviṁ parimasissāmī’ti piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi, ‘piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ parimasissāmī’ti udaracchaviṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi, yāvassu me, sāriputta, udaracchavi piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ allīnā hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, ‘vaccaṁ vā muttaṁ vā karissāmī’ti tattheva avakujjo papatāmi tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, tameva kāyaṁ assāsento pāṇinā gattāni anomajjāmi. Tassa mayhaṁ, sāriputta, pāṇinā gattāni anomajjato pūtimūlāni lomāni kāyasmā patanti tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶22] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Purity comes from food.’ They say: ‘Let’s live on mung beans.’ … ‘Let’s live on sesame.’ … ‘Let’s live on ordinary rice.’ … Due to eating so little, when I tried to relieve my body by rubbing my limbs with my hands, the hair, rotted at its roots, fell out.
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘āhārena suddhī’ti. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘muggehi yāpema …pe… tilehi yāpema …pe… taṇḍulehi yāpemā’ti. Te taṇḍulampi khādanti, taṇḍulacuṇṇampi khādanti, taṇḍulodakampi pivanti— anekavihitampi taṇḍulavikatiṁ paribhuñjanti. Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaṁyeva taṇḍulaṁ āhāraṁ āhāritā. Siyā kho pana te, sāriputta, evamassa: ‘mahā nūna tena samayena taṇḍulo ahosī’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Tadāpi etaparamoyeva taṇḍulo ahosi, seyyathāpi etarahi. Tassa mayhaṁ, sāriputta, ekaṁyeva taṇḍulaṁ āhāraṁ āhārayato adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma āsītikapabbāni vā kāḷapabbāni vā; evamevassu me aṅgapaccaṅgāni bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma oṭṭhapadaṁ; evamevassu me ānisadaṁ hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma vaṭṭanāvaḷī; evamevassu me piṭṭhikaṇṭako unnatāvanato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma jarasālāya gopānasiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti; evamevassu me phāsuḷiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma gambhīre udapāne udakatārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti; evamevassu me akkhikūpesu akkhitārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma tittakālābu āmakacchinno vātātapena samphuṭito hoti sammilāto; evamevassu me sīsacchavi samphuṭitā hoti sammilātā tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, ‘udaracchaviṁ parimasissāmī’ti piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi, ‘piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ parimasissāmī’ti udaracchaviṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi. Yāvassu me, sāriputta, udaracchavi piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ allīnā hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, ‘vaccaṁ vā muttaṁ vā karissāmī’ti tattheva avakujjo papatāmi tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, tameva kāyaṁ assāsento pāṇinā gattāni anomajjāmi. Tassa mayhaṁ, sāriputta, pāṇinā gattāni anomajjato pūtimūlāni lomāni kāyasmā patanti tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶23] But Sāriputta, I did not achieve any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones by that conduct, that practice, that grueling work. Why is that? Because I didn’t achieve that noble wisdom that’s noble and emancipating, and which delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering.
> Pali: Tāyapi kho ahaṁ, sāriputta, iriyāya tāya paṭipadāya tāya dukkarakārikāya nājjhagamaṁ uttariṁ manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Imissāyeva ariyāya paññāya anadhigamā, yāyaṁ ariyā paññā adhigatā ariyā niyyānikā, niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya.
[¶24] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Purity comes from transmigration.’ But it’s not easy to find a realm that I haven’t previously transmigrated to in all this long time, except the gods of the pure abodes. For if I had transmigrated to the gods of the pure abodes I would not have returned to this realm again.
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘saṁsārena suddhī’ti. Na kho pana so, sāriputta, saṁsāro sulabharūpo yo mayā asaṁsaritapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā, aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehi. Suddhāvāse cāhaṁ, sāriputta, deve saṁsareyyaṁ, nayimaṁ lokaṁ punarāgaccheyyaṁ.
[¶25] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Purity comes from rebirth.’ But it’s not easy to find any rebirth that I haven’t previously been reborn in …
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘upapattiyā suddhī’ti. Na kho pana sā, sāriputta, upapatti sulabharūpā yā mayā anupapannapubbā iminā dīghena addhunā, aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehi. Suddhāvāse cāhaṁ, sāriputta, deve upapajjeyyaṁ, nayimaṁ lokaṁ punarāgaccheyyaṁ.
[¶26] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Purity comes from abode of rebirth.’ But it’s not easy to find an abode where I haven’t previously abided …
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘āvāsena suddhī’ti. Na kho pana so, sāriputta, āvāso sulabharūpo yo mayā anāvuṭṭhapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā, aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehi. Suddhāvāse cāhaṁ, sāriputta, deve āvaseyyaṁ, nayimaṁ lokaṁ punarāgaccheyyaṁ.
[¶27] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Purity comes from sacrifice.’ But it’s not easy to find a sacrifice that I haven’t previously offered in all this long time, when I was an anointed aristocratic king or a well-to-do brahmin.
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘yaññena suddhī’ti. Na kho pana so, sāriputta, yañño sulabharūpo yo mayā ayiṭṭhapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā, tañca kho raññā vā satā khattiyena muddhāvasittena brāhmaṇena vā mahāsālena.
[¶28] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Purity comes from serving the sacred flame.’ But it’s not easy to find a fire that I haven’t previously served in all this long time, when I was an anointed aristocratic king or a well-to-do brahmin.
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘aggiparicariyāya suddhī’ti. Na kho pana so, sāriputta, aggi sulabharūpo yo mayā apariciṇṇapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā, tañca kho raññā vā satā khattiyena muddhāvasittena brāhmaṇena vā mahāsālena.
[¶29] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘So long as this gentleman is youthful, young, with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life he will be endowed with perfect lucidity of wisdom. But when he’s old, elderly, and senior, advanced in years, and has reached the final stage of life—eighty, ninety, or a hundred years old—he will lose his lucidity of wisdom.’ But you should not see it like this. For now I am old, elderly, and senior, I’m advanced in years, and have reached the final stage of life. I am eighty years old. Suppose I had four disciples with a lifespan of a hundred years. And they each were perfect in memory, rememberance, retention, and perfect lucidity of wisdom. Imagine how easily a well-trained expert archer with a strong bow would shoot a light arrow across the shadow of a palm tree. That’s how extraordinary they were in memory, rememberance, retention, and perfect lucidity of wisdom. They’d bring up questions about the four kinds of mindfulness meditation again and again, and I would answer each question. They’d remember the answers and not ask the same question twice. And they’d pause only to eat and drink, go to the toilet, and sleep to dispel weariness. But the Realized One would not run out of Dhamma teachings, words and phrases of the teachings, or spontaneous answers. And at the end of a hundred years my four disciples would pass away. Even if you have to carry me around on a stretcher, there will never be any deterioration in the Realized One’s lucidity of wisdom.
> Pali: Santi kho pana, sāriputta, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘yāvadevāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso daharo hoti yuvā susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā tāvadeva paramena paññāveyyattiyena samannāgato hoti. Yato ca kho ayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso jiṇṇo hoti vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, āsītiko vā nāvutiko vā vassasatiko vā jātiyā, atha tamhā paññāveyyattiyā, parihāyatī’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Ahaṁ kho pana, sāriputta, etarahi jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, āsītiko me vayo vattati. Idha me assu, sāriputta, cattāro sāvakā vassasatāyukā vassasatajīvino, paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgatā paramena ca paññāveyyattiyena. Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, daḷhadhammā dhanuggaho sikkhito katahattho katūpāsano lahukena asanena appakasireneva tiriyaṁ tālacchāyaṁ atipāteyya, evaṁ adhimattasatimanto evaṁ adhimattagatimanto evaṁ adhimattadhitimanto evaṁ paramena paññāveyyattiyena samannāgatā. Te maṁ catunnaṁ satipaṭṭhānānaṁ upādāyupādāya pañhaṁ puccheyyuṁ, puṭṭho puṭṭho cāhaṁ tesaṁ byākareyyaṁ, byākatañca me byākatato dhāreyyuṁ, na ca maṁ dutiyakaṁ uttari paṭipuccheyyuṁ. Aññatra asitapītakhāyitasāyitā aññatra uccārapassāvakammā, aññatra niddākilamathapaṭivinodanā apariyādinnāyevassa, sāriputta, tathāgatassa dhammadesanā, apariyādinnaṁyevassa tathāgatassa dhammapadabyañjanaṁ, apariyādinnaṁyevassa tathāgatassa pañhapaṭibhānaṁ. Atha me te cattāro sāvakā vassasatāyukā vassasatajīvino vassasatassa accayena kālaṁ kareyyuṁ. Mañcakena cepi maṁ, sāriputta, pariharissatha, nevatthi tathāgatassa paññāveyyattiyassa aññathattaṁ.
[¶30] And if there’s anyone of whom it may be rightly said that a being not liable to delusion has arisen in the world for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans, it’s of me that this should be said.”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho taṁ, sāriputta, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘asammohadhammo satto loke uppanno bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti, mameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya ‘asammohadhammo satto loke uppanno bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’”ti.
[¶31] Now at that time Venerable Nāgasamāla was standing behind the Buddha fanning him. Then he said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā nāgasamālo bhagavato piṭṭhito ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ bījayamāno. Atha kho āyasmā nāgasamālo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶32] “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! While I was listening to this exposition of the teaching my hair stood up! What is the name of this exposition of the teaching?”
> Pali: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Api hi me, bhante, imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ sutvā lomāni haṭṭhāni. Konāmo ayaṁ, bhante, dhammapariyāyo”ti?
[¶33] “Well then, Nāgasamāla, you may remember this exposition of the teaching as ‘The Hair-raising Discourse’.”
> Pali: “Tasmātiha tvaṁ, nāgasamāla, imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ lomahaṁsanapariyāyotveva naṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶34] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Nāgasamāla approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā nāgasamālo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶35] > Pali: Mahāsīhanādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 14. MN 13 · The Longer Discourse on the Mass of Suffering
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/14/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/14/#p-N
[¶0] MN 13 · The Longer Discourse on the Mass of Suffering
> Pali: MN 13 · Mahādukkhakkhandhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then several mendicants robed up in the morning and, taking their bowls and robes, entered Sāvatthī for alms. Then it occurred to them, “It’s too early to wander for alms in Sāvatthī. Why don’t we visit the monastery for the wanderers of other religions?” Then they went to the monastery for the wanderers of other religions and exchanged greetings with the wanderers there. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side. The wanderers said to them:
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁsu. Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi: “atippago kho tāva sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya carituṁ, yaṁ nūna mayaṁ yena aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ ārāmo tenupasaṅkameyyāmā”ti. Atha kho te bhikkhū yena aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ ārāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā tehi aññatitthiyehi paribbājakehi saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu; sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te bhikkhū te aññatitthiyā paribbājakā etadavocuṁ:
[¶3] “Reverends, the ascetic Gotama advocates the complete understanding of sensual pleasures, and so do we. The ascetic Gotama advocates the complete understanding of forms, and so do we. The ascetic Gotama advocates the complete understanding of feelings, and so do we. What, then, is the difference between the ascetic Gotama’s teaching and instruction and ours?”
> Pali: “samaṇo, āvuso, gotamo kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapeti, mayampi kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapema; samaṇo, āvuso, gotamo rūpānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapeti, mayampi rūpānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapema; samaṇo, āvuso, gotamo vedanānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapeti, mayampi vedanānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapema; idha no, āvuso, ko viseso, ko adhippayāso, kiṁ nānākaraṇaṁ samaṇassa vā gotamassa amhākaṁ vā— yadidaṁ dhammadesanāya vā dhammadesanaṁ, anusāsaniyā vā anusāsanin”ti?
[¶4] Those mendicants neither approved nor rejected that statement of the wanderers of other religions. They rose from their seats, thinking, “We will learn the meaning of this statement from the Buddha himself.”
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandiṁsu, nappaṭikkosiṁsu; anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁsu: “bhagavato santike etassa bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānissāmā”ti.
[¶5] Then, after the meal, when they returned from almsround, they went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened. The Buddha said:
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idha mayaṁ, bhante, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisimha. Tesaṁ no, bhante, amhākaṁ etadahosi: ‘atippago kho tāva sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya carituṁ, yaṁ nūna mayaṁ yena aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ ārāmo tenupasaṅkameyyāmā’ti. Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, yena aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ ārāmo tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā tehi aññatitthiyehi paribbājakehi saddhiṁ sammodimha; sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdimha. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho amhe, bhante, te aññatitthiyā paribbājakā etadavocuṁ: ‘samaṇo, āvuso, gotamo kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapeti, mayampi kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapema. Samaṇo, āvuso, gotamo rūpānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapeti, mayampi rūpānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapema. Samaṇo, āvuso, gotamo vedanānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapeti, mayampi vedanānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapema. Idha no, āvuso, ko viseso, ko adhippayāso, kiṁ nānākaraṇaṁ samaṇassa vā gotamassa amhākaṁ vā, yadidaṁ dhammadesanāya vā dhammadesanaṁ anusāsaniyā vā anusāsanin’ti. Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandimha, nappaṭikkosimha; anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamimha: ‘bhagavato santike etassa bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānissāmā’”ti.
[¶6] “Mendicants, when wanderers of other religions say this, you should say to them: ‘But reverends, what’s the gratification, the drawback, and the escape when it comes to sensual pleasures? What’s the gratification, the drawback, and the escape when it comes to forms? What’s the gratification, the drawback, and the escape when it comes to feelings?’ Questioned like this, the wanderers of other religions would be stumped, and, in addition, would get frustrated. Why is that? Because they’re out of their element. I don’t see anyone in this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, its gods and humans—who could provide a satisfying answer to these questions except the Realized One or his disciple or someone who has heard it from them.
> Pali: “Evaṁvādino, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘ko panāvuso, kāmānaṁ assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Ko rūpānaṁ assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Ko vedanānaṁ assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇan’ti? Evaṁ puṭṭhā, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā na ceva sampāyissanti, uttariñca vighātaṁ āpajjissanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yathā taṁ, bhikkhave, avisayasmiṁ. Nāhaṁ taṁ, bhikkhave, passāmi sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya yo imesaṁ pañhānaṁ veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheyya, aññatra tathāgatena vā tathāgatasāvakena vā, ito vā pana sutvā.
[¶7] And what is the gratification of sensual pleasures? There are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation. The pleasure and happiness that arise from these five kinds of sensual stimulation: this is the gratification of sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Ko ca, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ assādo? Pañcime, bhikkhave, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca kāmaguṇā. Yaṁ kho, bhikkhave, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ—ayaṁ kāmānaṁ assādo.
[¶8] And what is the drawback of sensual pleasures? It’s when a gentleman earns a living by means such as arithmetic, accounting, calculating, farming, trade, raising cattle, archery, government service, or one of the professions. But they must face cold and heat, being hurt by the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles, and risking death from hunger and thirst. This is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Ko ca, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo? Idha, bhikkhave, kulaputto yena sippaṭṭhānena jīvikaṁ kappeti— yadi muddāya yadi gaṇanāya yadi saṅkhānena yadi kasiyā yadi vaṇijjāya yadi gorakkhena yadi issatthena yadi rājaporisena yadi sippaññatarena— sītassa purakkhato uṇhassa purakkhato ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassehi rissamāno khuppipāsāya mīyamāno; ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶9] That gentleman might try hard, strive, and make an effort, but fail to accrue riches. If this happens, they sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion, saying: ‘Oh, my hard work is wasted. My efforts are fruitless!’ This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Tassa ce, bhikkhave, kulaputtassa evaṁ uṭṭhahato ghaṭato vāyamato te bhogā nābhinipphajjanti. So socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati, sammohaṁ āpajjati: ‘moghaṁ vata me uṭṭhānaṁ, aphalo vata me vāyāmo’ti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶10] That gentleman might try hard, strive, and make an effort, and succeed in accruing riches. But they experience pain and sadness when they try to protect it, thinking: ‘How can I prevent my wealth from being taken by rulers or bandits, consumed by fire, swept away by flood, or taken by unloved heirs?’ And even though they protect it and ward it, rulers or bandits take it, or fire consumes it, or flood sweeps it away, or unloved heirs take it. They sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion: ‘What once was mine is gone.’ This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Tassa ce, bhikkhave, kulaputtassa evaṁ uṭṭhahato ghaṭato vāyamato te bhogā abhinipphajjanti. So tesaṁ bhogānaṁ ārakkhādhikaraṇaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti: ‘kinti me bhoge neva rājāno hareyyuṁ, na corā hareyyuṁ, na aggi daheyya, na udakaṁ vaheyya, na appiyā dāyādā hareyyun’ti. Tassa evaṁ ārakkhato gopayato te bhoge rājāno vā haranti, corā vā haranti, aggi vā dahati, udakaṁ vā vahati, appiyā vā dāyādā haranti. So socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati, sammohaṁ āpajjati: ‘yampi me ahosi tampi no natthī’ti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶11] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures kings fight with kings, aristocrats fight with aristocrats, brahmins fight with brahmins, and householders fight with householders. A mother fights with her child, child with mother, father with child, and child with father. Brother fights with brother, brother with sister, sister with brother, and friend fights with friend. Once they’ve started quarreling, arguing, and disputing, they attack each other with fists, stones, rods, and swords, resulting in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu rājānopi rājūhi vivadanti, khattiyāpi khattiyehi vivadanti, brāhmaṇāpi brāhmaṇehi vivadanti, gahapatīpi gahapatīhi vivadanti, mātāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi mātarā vivadati, pitāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi pitarā vivadati, bhātāpi bhātarā vivadati, bhātāpi bhaginiyā vivadati, bhaginīpi bhātarā vivadati, sahāyopi sahāyena vivadati. Te tattha kalahaviggahavivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ pāṇīhipi upakkamanti, leḍḍūhipi upakkamanti, daṇḍehipi upakkamanti, satthehipi upakkamanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶12] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures they don their sword and shield, fasten their bow and arrows, and plunge into a battle massed on both sides, with arrows and spears flying and swords flashing. There they are struck with arrows and spears, and their heads are chopped off, resulting in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu asicammaṁ gahetvā, dhanukalāpaṁ sannayhitvā, ubhatobyūḷhaṁ saṅgāmaṁ pakkhandanti usūsupi khippamānesu, sattīsupi khippamānāsu, asīsupi vijjotalantesu. Te tattha usūhipi vijjhanti, sattiyāpi vijjhanti, asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶13] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures they don their sword and shield, fasten their bow and arrows, and charge wetly plastered bastions, with arrows and spears flying and swords flashing. There they are struck with arrows and spears, splashed with dung, crushed by a superior force, and their heads are chopped off, resulting in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu asicammaṁ gahetvā, dhanukalāpaṁ sannayhitvā, addāvalepanā upakāriyo pakkhandanti usūsupi khippamānesu, sattīsupi khippamānāsu, asīsupi vijjotalantesu. Te tattha usūhipi vijjhanti, sattiyāpi vijjhanti, chakaṇakāyapi osiñcanti, abhivaggenapi omaddanti, asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶14] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures they break into houses, plunder wealth, steal from isolated buildings, commit highway robbery, and commit adultery. The rulers would arrest them and subject them to various punishments— whipping, caning, and clubbing; cutting off hands or feet, or both; cutting off ears or nose, or both; the ‘porridge pot’, the ‘shell-shave’, the ‘Rāhu’s mouth’, the ‘garland of fire’, the ‘burning hand’, the ‘bulrush twist’, the ‘bark dress’, the ‘antelope’, the ‘meat hook’, the ‘coins’, the ‘caustic pickle’, the ‘twisting bar’, the ‘straw mat’; being splashed with hot oil, being fed to the hounds, being impaled alive, and being beheaded. These result in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu sandhimpi chindanti, nillopampi haranti, ekāgārikampi karonti, paripanthepi tiṭṭhanti, paradārampi gacchanti. Tamenaṁ rājāno gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti— kasāhipi tāḷenti, vettehipi tāḷenti, aḍḍhadaṇḍakehipi tāḷenti; hatthampi chindanti, pādampi chindanti, hatthapādampi chindanti, kaṇṇampi chindanti, nāsampi chindanti, kaṇṇanāsampi chindanti; bilaṅgathālikampi karonti, saṅkhamuṇḍikampi karonti, rāhumukhampi karonti, jotimālikampi karonti, hatthapajjotikampi karonti, erakavattikampi karonti, cīrakavāsikampi karonti, eṇeyyakampi karonti, baḷisamaṁsikampi karonti, kahāpaṇikampi karonti, khārāpatacchikampi karonti, palighaparivattikampi karonti, palālapīṭhakampi karonti, tattenapi telena osiñcanti, sunakhehipi khādāpenti, jīvantampi sūle uttāsenti, asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶15] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures, they conduct themselves badly by way of body, speech, and mind. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is a drawback of sensual pleasures to do with lives to come, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu kāyena duccaritaṁ caranti, vācāya duccaritaṁ caranti, manasā duccaritaṁ caranti. Te kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā, vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā, manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo samparāyiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶16] And what is the escape from sensual pleasures? Removing and giving up desire and greed for sensual pleasures: this is the escape from sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, kāmānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Yo kho, bhikkhave, kāmesu chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṁ—idaṁ kāmānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶17] There are ascetics and brahmins who don’t truly understand sensual pleasures’ gratification, drawback, and escape in this way for what they are. It’s impossible for them to completely understand sensual pleasures themselves, or to instruct another so that, practicing accordingly, they will completely understand sensual pleasures. There are ascetics and brahmins who do truly understand sensual pleasures’ gratification, drawback, and escape in this way for what they are. It is possible for them to completely understand sensual pleasures themselves, or to instruct another so that, practicing accordingly, they will completely understand sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā evaṁ kāmānaṁ assādañca assādato ādīnavañca ādīnavato nissaraṇañca nissaraṇato yathābhūtaṁ nappajānanti te vata sāmaṁ vā kāme parijānissanti, paraṁ vā tathattāya samādapessanti yathā paṭipanno kāme parijānissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Ye ca kho keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā evaṁ kāmānaṁ assādañca assādato ādīnavañca ādīnavato nissaraṇañca nissaraṇato yathābhūtaṁ pajānanti, te vata sāmaṁ vā kāme parijānissanti paraṁ vā tathattāya samādapessanti yathā paṭipanno kāme parijānissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶18] And what is the gratification of forms? Suppose there was a girl of the brahmins, aristocrats, or householders in her fifteenth or sixteenth year, neither too tall nor too short, neither too thin nor too fat, neither too dark nor too fair. Is she not at the height of her beauty and prettiness?”
> Pali: Ko ca, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ assādo? Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, khattiyakaññā vā brāhmaṇakaññā vā gahapatikaññā vā pannarasavassuddesikā vā soḷasavassuddesikā vā, nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷī nāccodātā paramā sā, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ samaye subhā vaṇṇanibhāti?
[¶19] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante’.
[¶20] “The pleasure and happiness that arise from this beauty and prettiness is the gratification of forms.
> Pali: Yaṁ kho, bhikkhave, subhaṁ vaṇṇanibhaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ— ayaṁ rūpānaṁ assādo.
[¶21] And what is the drawback of forms? Suppose that some time later you were to see that same sister—eighty, ninety, or a hundred years old—bent double, crooked, leaning on a staff, trembling as they walk, ailing, past their prime, with teeth broken, hair grey and scanty or bald, skin wrinkled, and limbs blotchy.
> Pali: Ko ca, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ ādīnavo? Idha, bhikkhave, tameva bhaginiṁ passeyya aparena samayena āsītikaṁ vā nāvutikaṁ vā vassasatikaṁ vā jātiyā, jiṇṇaṁ gopānasivaṅkaṁ bhoggaṁ daṇḍaparāyanaṁ pavedhamānaṁ gacchantiṁ āturaṁ gatayobbanaṁ khaṇḍadantaṁ palitakesaṁ, vilūnaṁ khalitasiraṁ valinaṁ tilakāhatagattaṁ.
[¶22] What do you think, mendicants? Has not that former beauty vanished and the drawback become clear?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā sā antarahitā, ādīnavo pātubhūtoti?
[¶23] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante’.
[¶24] “This is the drawback of forms.
> Pali: Ayampi, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ ādīnavo.
[¶25] Furthermore, suppose that you were to see that same sister sick, suffering, gravely ill, collapsed in her own urine and feces, being picked up by some and put down by others.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, tameva bhaginiṁ passeyya ābādhikaṁ dukkhitaṁ bāḷhagilānaṁ, sake muttakarīse palipannaṁ semānaṁ, aññehi vuṭṭhāpiyamānaṁ, aññehi saṁvesiyamānaṁ.
[¶26] What do you think, mendicants? Has not that former beauty vanished and the drawback become clear?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā sā antarahitā, ādīnavo pātubhūtoti?
[¶27] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante’.
[¶28] “This too is the drawback of forms.
> Pali: Ayampi, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ ādīnavo.
[¶29] Furthermore, suppose that you were to see that same sister as a corpse discarded in a charnel ground. And it had been dead for one, two, or three days, bloated, livid, and festering.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, tameva bhaginiṁ passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ— ekāhamataṁ vā dvīhamataṁ vā tīhamataṁ vā, uddhumātakaṁ vinīlakaṁ vipubbakajātaṁ.
[¶30] What do you think, mendicants? Has not that former beauty vanished and the drawback become clear?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā sā antarahitā, ādīnavo pātubhūtoti?
[¶31] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante’.
[¶32] “This too is the drawback of forms.
> Pali: Ayampi, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ ādīnavo.
[¶33] Furthermore, suppose that you were to see that same sister as a corpse discarded in a charnel ground. And it was being devoured by crows, hawks, vultures, herons, hounds, tigers, leopards, jackals, and many kinds of little creatures …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, tameva bhaginiṁ passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ— kākehi vā khajjamānaṁ, kulalehi vā khajjamānaṁ, gijjhehi vā khajjamānaṁ, kaṅkehi vā khajjamānaṁ, sunakhehi vā khajjamānaṁ, byagghehi vā khajjamānaṁ, dīpīhi vā khajjamānaṁ, siṅgālehi vā khajjamānaṁ, vividhehi vā pāṇakajātehi khajjamānaṁ.
[¶34] > Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā sā antarahitā, ādīnavo pātubhūtoti? ‘Evaṁ, bhante’. Ayampi, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ ādīnavo.
[¶35] Furthermore, suppose that you were to see that same sister as a corpse discarded in a charnel ground. And it had been reduced to a skeleton with flesh and blood, held together by sinews … A skeleton rid of flesh but smeared with blood, and held together by sinews … A skeleton rid of flesh and blood, held together by sinews … Bones rid of sinews scattered in every direction. Here a hand-bone, there a foot-bone, here an ankle bone, there a shin-bone, here a thigh-bone, there a hip-bone, here a rib-bone, there a back-bone, here an arm-bone, there a neck-bone, here a jaw-bone, there a tooth, here the skull. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, tameva bhaginiṁ passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ— aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ samaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ, aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ nimaṁsalohitamakkhitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ, aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ apagatamaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ, aṭṭhikāni apagatasambandhāni disāvidisāvikkhittāni— aññena hatthaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena pādaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena gopphakaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena jaṅghaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena ūruṭṭhikaṁ, aññena kaṭiṭṭhikaṁ, aññena phāsukaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena piṭṭhiṭṭhikaṁ, aññena khandhaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena gīvaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena hanukaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena dantaṭṭhikaṁ, aññena sīsakaṭāhaṁ.
[¶36] > Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā sā antarahitā, ādīnavo pātubhūtoti? ‘Evaṁ, bhante’. Ayampi, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ ādīnavo.
[¶37] Furthermore, suppose that you were to see that same sister as a corpse discarded in a charnel ground. And it had been reduced to white bones, the color of shells … Decrepit bones, heaped in a pile … Bones rotted and crumbled to powder.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, tameva bhaginiṁ passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ— aṭṭhikāni setāni saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgāni, aṭṭhikāni puñjakitāni terovassikāni, aṭṭhikāni pūtīni cuṇṇakajātāni.
[¶38] What do you think, mendicants? Has not that former beauty vanished and the drawback become clear?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā sā antarahitā, ādīnavo pātubhūtoti?
[¶39] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante’.
[¶40] “This too is the drawback of forms.
> Pali: Ayampi, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ ādīnavo.
[¶41] And what is the escape from forms? Removing and giving up desire and greed for forms: this is the escape from forms.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, rūpānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Yo, bhikkhave, rūpesu chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṁ—idaṁ rūpānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶42] There are ascetics and brahmins who don’t truly understand forms’ gratification, drawback, and escape in this way for what they are. It’s impossible for them to completely understand forms themselves, or to instruct another so that, practicing accordingly, they will completely understand forms. There are ascetics and brahmins who do truly understand forms’ gratification, drawback, and escape in this way for what they are. It is possible for them to completely understand forms themselves, or to instruct another so that, practicing accordingly, they will completely understand forms.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā evaṁ rūpānaṁ assādañca assādato ādīnavañca ādīnavato nissaraṇañca nissaraṇato yathābhūtaṁ nappajānanti te vata sāmaṁ vā rūpe parijānissanti, paraṁ vā tathattāya samādapessanti yathā paṭipanno rūpe parijānissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Ye ca kho keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā evaṁ rūpānaṁ assādañca assādato ādīnavañca ādīnavato nissaraṇañca nissaraṇato yathābhūtaṁ pajānanti te vata sāmaṁ vā rūpe parijānissanti paraṁ vā tathattāya samādapessanti yathā paṭipanno rūpe parijānissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶43] And what is the gratification of feelings? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. At that time a mendicant doesn’t intend to hurt themselves, hurt others, or hurt both; they feel only feelings that are not hurtful. Freedom from being hurt is the ultimate gratification of feelings, I say.
> Pali: Ko ca, bhikkhave, vedanānaṁ assādo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, neva tasmiṁ samaye attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, na parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi ceteti; abyābajjhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti. Abyābajjhaparamāhaṁ, bhikkhave, vedanānaṁ assādaṁ vadāmi.
[¶44] Furthermore, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. At that time a mendicant doesn’t intend to hurt themselves, hurt others, or hurt both; they feel only feelings that are not hurtful. Freedom from being hurt is the ultimate gratification of feelings, I say.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā, upekkhako ca viharati, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, neva tasmiṁ samaye attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, na parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi ceteti; abyābajjhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti. Abyābajjhaparamāhaṁ, bhikkhave, vedanānaṁ assādaṁ vadāmi.
[¶45] And what is the drawback of feelings? That feelings are impermanent, suffering, and perishable: this is their drawback.
> Pali: Ko ca, bhikkhave, vedanānaṁ ādīnavo? Yaṁ, bhikkhave, vedanā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā—ayaṁ vedanānaṁ ādīnavo.
[¶46] And what is the escape from feelings? Removing and giving up desire and greed for feelings: this is the escape from feelings.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, vedanānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Yo, bhikkhave, vedanāsu chandarāgavinayo, chandarāgappahānaṁ—idaṁ vedanānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶47] There are ascetics and brahmins who don’t truly understand feelings’ gratification, drawback, and escape in this way for what they are. It’s impossible for them to completely understand feelings themselves, or to instruct another so that, practicing accordingly, they will completely understand feelings. There are ascetics and brahmins who do truly understand feelings’ gratification, drawback, and escape in this way for what they are. It is possible for them to completely understand feelings themselves, or to instruct another so that, practicing accordingly, they will completely understand feelings.”
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā evaṁ vedanānaṁ assādañca assādato ādīnavañca ādīnavato nissaraṇañca nissaraṇato yathābhūtaṁ nappajānanti, te vata sāmaṁ vā vedanaṁ parijānissanti, paraṁ vā tathattāya samādapessanti yathā paṭipanno vedanaṁ parijānissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Ye ca kho keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā evaṁ vedanānaṁ assādañca assādato ādīnavañca ādīnavato nissaraṇañca nissaraṇato yathābhūtaṁ pajānanti te vata sāmaṁ vā vedanaṁ parijānissanti, paraṁ vā tathattāya samādapessanti yathā paṭipanno vedanaṁ parijānissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī”ti.
[¶48] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶49] > Pali: Mahādukkhakkhandhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 15. MN 14 · The Shorter Discourse on the Mass of Suffering
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/15/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/15/#p-N
[¶0] MN 14 · The Shorter Discourse on the Mass of Suffering
> Pali: MN 14 · Cūḷadukkhakkhandhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, near Kapilavatthu in the Banyan Tree Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ nigrodhārāme.
[¶2] Then Mahānāma the Sakyan went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “For a long time, sir, I have understood your teaching like this: ‘Greed, hate, and delusion are corruptions of the mind.’ Despite understanding this, sometimes my mind is occupied by thoughts of greed, hate, and delusion. I wonder what qualities remain in me that I have such thoughts?”
> Pali: Atha kho mahānāmo sakko yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho mahānāmo sakko bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “dīgharattāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi: ‘lobho cittassa upakkileso, doso cittassa upakkileso, moho cittassa upakkileso’ti. Evañcāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi: ‘lobho cittassa upakkileso, doso cittassa upakkileso, moho cittassa upakkileso’ti. Atha ca pana me ekadā lobhadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, dosadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, mohadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘kosu nāma me dhammo ajjhattaṁ appahīno yena me ekadā lobhadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, dosadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, mohadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhantī’”ti.
[¶3] “Mahānāma, there is a quality that remains in you that makes you have such thoughts. For if you had given up that quality you would not still be living at home and enjoying sensual pleasures. But because you haven’t given up that quality you are still living at home and enjoying sensual pleasures.
> Pali: “So eva kho te, mahānāma, dhammo ajjhattaṁ appahīno yena te ekadā lobhadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, dosadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, mohadhammāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. So ca hi te, mahānāma, dhammo ajjhattaṁ pahīno abhavissa, na tvaṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvaseyyāsi, na kāme paribhuñjeyyāsi. Yasmā ca kho te, mahānāma, so eva dhammo ajjhattaṁ appahīno tasmā tvaṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasasi, kāme paribhuñjasi.
[¶4] Sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks. So, Mahānāma, even though a noble disciple has clearly seen this with right wisdom, as long as they do not achieve the rapture and bliss that are apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, or something even more peaceful than that, they can return to sensual pleasures. But when they do achieve that rapture and bliss, or something more peaceful than that, they do not return to sensual pleasures.
> Pali: ‘Appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti— iti cepi, mahānāma, ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ hoti, so ca aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ nādhigacchati, aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ; atha kho so neva tāva anāvaṭṭī kāmesu hoti. Yato ca kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvakassa ‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ hoti, so ca aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ adhigacchati aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ; atha kho so anāvaṭṭī kāmesu hoti.
[¶5] Before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I too clearly saw with right wisdom that: ‘Sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks.’ But so long as I didn’t achieve the rapture and bliss that are apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, or something even more peaceful than that, I didn’t announce that I would not return to sensual pleasures. But when I did achieve that rapture and bliss, or something more peaceful than that, I announced that I would not return to sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Mayhampi kho, mahānāma, pubbeva sambodhā, anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato, ‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ hoti, so ca aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ nājjhagamaṁ, aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ; atha khvāhaṁ neva tāva anāvaṭṭī kāmesu paccaññāsiṁ. Yato ca kho me, mahānāma, ‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ ahosi, so ca aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ ajjhagamaṁ, aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ; athāhaṁ anāvaṭṭī kāmesu paccaññāsiṁ.
[¶6] And what is the gratification of sensual pleasures? There are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation. The pleasure and happiness that arise from these five kinds of sensual stimulation: this is the gratification of sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Ko ca, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ assādo? Pañcime, mahānāma, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā; sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, mahānāma, pañca kāmaguṇā. Yaṁ kho, mahānāma, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ— ayaṁ kāmānaṁ assādo.
[¶7] And what is the drawback of sensual pleasures? It’s when a gentleman earns a living by means such as arithmetic, accounting, calculating, farming, trade, raising cattle, archery, government service, or one of the professions. But they must face cold and heat, being hurt by the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles, and risking death from hunger and thirst. This is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Ko ca, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo? Idha, mahānāma, kulaputto yena sippaṭṭhānena jīvikaṁ kappeti— yadi muddāya yadi gaṇanāya yadi saṅkhānena yadi kasiyā yadi vaṇijjāya yadi gorakkhena yadi issatthena yadi rājaporisena yadi sippaññatarena, sītassa purakkhato uṇhassa purakkhato ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassehi rissamāno khuppipāsāya mīyamāno; ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶8] That gentleman might try hard, strive, and make an effort, but fail to accrue riches. If this happens, they sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion, saying: ‘Oh, my hard work is wasted. My efforts are fruitless!’ This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Tassa ce, mahānāma, kulaputtassa evaṁ uṭṭhahato ghaṭato vāyamato te bhogā nābhinipphajjanti, so socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati ‘moghaṁ vata me uṭṭhānaṁ, aphalo vata me vāyāmo’ti. Ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶9] That gentleman might try hard, strive, and make an effort, and succeed in accruing riches. But they experience pain and sadness when they try to protect it, thinking: ‘How can I prevent my wealth from being taken by rulers or bandits, consumed by fire, swept away by flood, or taken by unloved heirs?’ And even though they protect it and ward it, rulers or bandits take it, or fire consumes it, or flood sweeps it away, or unloved heirs take it. They sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion: ‘What once was mine is gone.’ This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Tassa ce, mahānāma, kulaputtassa evaṁ uṭṭhahato ghaṭato vāyamato te bhogā abhinipphajjanti. So tesaṁ bhogānaṁ ārakkhādhikaraṇaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti: ‘kinti me bhoge neva rājāno hareyyuṁ, na corā hareyyuṁ, na aggi daheyya, na udakaṁ vaheyya, na appiyā vā dāyādā hareyyun’ti. Tassa evaṁ ārakkhato gopayato te bhoge rājāno vā haranti, corā vā haranti, aggi vā dahati, udakaṁ vā vahati, appiyā vā dāyādā haranti. So socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati: ‘yampi me ahosi tampi no natthī’ti. Ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶10] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures kings fight with kings, aristocrats fight with aristocrats, brahmins fight with brahmins, and householders fight with householders. A mother fights with her child, child with mother, father with child, and child with father. Brother fights with brother, brother with sister, sister with brother, and friend fights with friend. Once they’ve started quarreling, arguing, and disputing, they attack each other with fists, stones, rods, and swords, resulting in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahānāma, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu rājānopi rājūhi vivadanti, khattiyāpi khattiyehi vivadanti, brāhmaṇāpi brāhmaṇehi vivadanti, gahapatīpi gahapatīhi vivadanti, mātāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi mātarā vivadati, pitāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi pitarā vivadati, bhātāpi bhātarā vivadati, bhātāpi bhaginiyā vivadati, bhaginīpi bhātarā vivadati, sahāyopi sahāyena vivadati. Te tattha kalahaviggahavivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ pāṇīhipi upakkamanti, leḍḍūhipi upakkamanti, daṇḍehipi upakkamanti, satthehipi upakkamanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶11] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures they don their sword and shield, fasten their bow and arrows, and plunge into a battle massed on both sides, with arrows and spears flying and swords flashing. There they are struck with arrows and spears, and their heads are chopped off, resulting in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahānāma, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu asicammaṁ gahetvā, dhanukalāpaṁ sannayhitvā, ubhatobyūḷhaṁ saṅgāmaṁ pakkhandanti usūsupi khippamānesu, sattīsupi khippamānāsu, asīsupi vijjotalantesu. Te tattha usūhipi vijjhanti, sattiyāpi vijjhanti, asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶12] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures they don their sword and shield, fasten their bow and arrows, and charge wetly plastered bastions, with arrows and spears flying and swords flashing. There they are struck with arrows and spears, splashed with dung, crushed by a superior force, and their heads are chopped off, resulting in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahānāma, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu asicammaṁ gahetvā, dhanukalāpaṁ sannayhitvā, addāvalepanā upakāriyo pakkhandanti usūsupi khippamānesu, sattīsupi khippamānāsu, asīsupi vijjotalantesu. Te tattha usūhipi vijjhanti, sattiyāpi vijjhanti, chakaṇakāyapi osiñcanti, abhivaggenapi omaddanti, asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶13] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures they break into houses, plunder wealth, steal from isolated buildings, commit highway robbery, and commit adultery. The rulers would arrest them and subject them to various punishments— whipping, caning, and clubbing; cutting off hands or feet, or both; cutting off ears or nose, or both; the ‘porridge pot’, the ‘shell-shave’, the ‘Rāhu’s mouth’, the ‘garland of fire’, the ‘burning hand’, the ‘bulrush twist’, the ‘bark dress’, the ‘antelope’, the ‘meat hook’, the ‘coins’, the ‘caustic pickle’, the ‘twisting bar’, the ‘straw mat’; being splashed with hot oil, being fed to the hounds, being impaled alive, and being beheaded. These result in death and deadly pain. This too is a drawback of sensual pleasures apparent in the present life, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahānāma, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu sandhimpi chindanti, nillopampi haranti, ekāgārikampi karonti, paripanthepi tiṭṭhanti, paradārampi gacchanti. Tamenaṁ rājāno gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti— kasāhipi tāḷenti, vettehipi tāḷenti, aḍḍhadaṇḍakehipi tāḷenti; hatthampi chindanti, pādampi chindanti, hatthapādampi chindanti, kaṇṇampi chindanti, nāsampi chindanti, kaṇṇanāsampi chindanti; bilaṅgathālikampi karonti, saṅkhamuṇḍikampi karonti, rāhumukhampi karonti, jotimālikampi karonti, hatthapajjotikampi karonti, erakavattikampi karonti, cīrakavāsikampi karonti, eṇeyyakampi karonti, baḷisamaṁsikampi karonti, kahāpaṇikampi karonti, khārāpatacchikampi karonti, palighaparivattikampi karonti, palālapīṭhakampi karonti, tattenapi telena osiñcanti, sunakhehipi khādāpenti, jīvantampi sūle uttāsenti, asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti. Te tattha maraṇampi nigacchanti, maraṇamattampi dukkhaṁ. Ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶14] Furthermore, for the sake of sensual pleasures, they conduct themselves badly by way of body, speech, and mind. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is a drawback of sensual pleasures to do with lives to come, a mass of suffering caused by sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahānāma, kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu kāyena duccaritaṁ caranti, vācāya duccaritaṁ caranti, manasā duccaritaṁ caranti. Te kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā, vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā, manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti. Ayampi, mahānāma, kāmānaṁ ādīnavo samparāyiko, dukkhakkhandho kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ kāmādhikaraṇaṁ kāmānameva hetu.
[¶15] Mahānāma, this one time I was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain. Now at that time several Jain ascetics on the slopes of Isigili at the Black Rock were constantly standing, turning down seats. And they felt painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, mahānāma, samayaṁ rājagahe viharāmi gijjhakūṭe pabbate. Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā nigaṇṭhā isigilipasse kāḷasilāyaṁ ubbhaṭṭhakā honti āsanapaṭikkhittā, opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti.
[¶16] Then in the late afternoon, I came out of retreat and went to the Black Rock to visit those Jain ascetics. I said to them, ‘Reverends, why are you constantly standing, turning down seats, so that you suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, mahānāma, sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena isigilipasse kāḷasilā yena te nigaṇṭhā tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā te nigaṇṭhe etadavocaṁ: ‘kiṁ nu tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, ubbhaṭṭhakā āsanapaṭikkhittā, opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayathā’ti?
[¶17] When I said this, those Jain ascetics said to me, ‘Reverend, the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan claims to be all-knowing and all-seeing, to know and see everything without exception, thus: “Knowledge and vision are constantly and continually present to me, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, mahānāma, te nigaṇṭhā maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘nigaṇṭho, āvuso, nāṭaputto sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānāti: “carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan”ti.
[¶18] He says, “O Jain ascetics, you have done bad deeds in a past life. Wear them away with these severe and grueling austerities. And when in the present you are restrained in body, speech, and mind, you’re not doing any bad deeds for the future. So, due to eliminating past deeds by fervent mortification, and not doing any new deeds, there’s nothing to come up in the future. With no future consequence, deeds end. With the ending of deeds, suffering ends. With the ending of suffering, feeling ends. And with the ending of feeling, all suffering will have been worn away.” We endorse and accept this, and we are satisfied with it.’
> Pali: So evamāha: “atthi kho vo, nigaṇṭhā, pubbe pāpakammaṁ kataṁ, taṁ imāya kaṭukāya dukkarakārikāya nijjīretha; yaṁ panettha etarahi kāyena saṁvutā vācāya saṁvutā manasā saṁvutā taṁ āyatiṁ pāpassa kammassa akaraṇaṁ; iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantibhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo, kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo, dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo, vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”ti. Tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca, tena camha attamanā’ti.
[¶19] When they said this, I said to them, ‘But reverends, do you know for sure that you existed in the past, and it is not the case that you did not exist?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, mahānāma, te nigaṇṭhe etadavocaṁ: ‘kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— ahuvamheva mayaṁ pubbe na nāhuvamhā’ti?
[¶20] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶21] ‘But reverends, do you know for sure that you did bad deeds in the past?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— akaramheva mayaṁ pubbe pāpakammaṁ na nākaramhā’ti?
[¶22] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶23] ‘But reverends, do you know that you did bad deeds of this type or that?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— evarūpaṁ vā evarūpaṁ vā pāpakammaṁ akaramhā’ti?
[¶24] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶25] ‘But reverends, do you know that so much suffering has already been worn away? Or that so much suffering still remains to be worn away? Or that when so much suffering is worn away all suffering will have been worn away?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ, ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjīretabbaṁ, ettakamhi vā dukkhe nijjiṇṇe sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti?
[¶26] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶27] ‘But reverends, do you know about giving up unskillful qualities in this very life and embracing skillful qualities?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— diṭṭheva dhamme akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadan’ti?
[¶28] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶29] ‘So it seems that you don’t know any of these things. That being so, when those in the world who are violent and bloody-handed and of cruel livelihood are reborn among humans they go forth as Jain ascetics.’
> Pali: ‘Iti kira tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, na jānātha— ahuvamheva mayaṁ pubbe na nāhuvamhāti, na jānātha— akaramheva mayaṁ pubbe pāpakammaṁ na nākaramhāti, na jānātha— evarūpaṁ vā evarūpaṁ vā pāpakammaṁ akaramhāti, na jānātha— ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ, ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjīretabbaṁ, ettakamhi vā dukkhe nijjiṇṇe sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatīti. Na jānātha— diṭṭheva dhamme akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadaṁ. Evaṁ sante, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, ye loke luddā lohitapāṇino kurūrakammantā manussesu paccājātā te nigaṇṭhesu pabbajantī’ti?
[¶30] ‘Reverend Gotama, pleasure is not gained through pleasure; pleasure is gained through pain. For if pleasure were to be gained through pleasure, King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha would gain pleasure, since he lives in greater pleasure than Venerable Gotama.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho, āvuso gotama, sukhena sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ, dukkhena kho sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ; sukhena cāvuso gotama, sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ abhavissa, rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro sukhaṁ adhigaccheyya, rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro sukhavihāritaro āyasmatā gotamenā’ti.
[¶31] ‘Clearly the venerables have spoken rashly, without reflection. Rather, I’m the one who should be asked about who lives in greater pleasure, King Bimbisāra or Venerable Gotama?’
> Pali: ‘Addhāyasmantehi nigaṇṭhehi sahasā appaṭisaṅkhā vācā bhāsitā: “na kho, āvuso gotama, sukhena sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ, dukkhena kho sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ; sukhena cāvuso gotama, sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ abhavissa, rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro sukhaṁ adhigaccheyya, rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro sukhavihāritaro āyasmatā gotamenā”ti. Api ca ahameva tattha paṭipucchitabbo: “ko nu kho āyasmantānaṁ sukhavihāritaro rājā vā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro āyasmā vā gotamo”ti?
[¶32] ‘Clearly we spoke rashly and without reflection. But let that be. Now we ask Venerable Gotama: “Who lives in greater pleasure, King Bimbisāra or Venerable Gotama?”’
> Pali: Addhāvuso gotama, amhehi sahasā appaṭisaṅkhā vācā bhāsitā, na kho, āvuso gotama, sukhena sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ, dukkhena kho sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ; sukhena cāvuso gotama, sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ abhavissa, rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro sukhaṁ adhigaccheyya, rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro sukhavihāritaro āyasmatā gotamenāti. Api ca tiṭṭhatetaṁ, idānipi mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāma: “ko nu kho āyasmantānaṁ sukhavihāritaro rājā vā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro āyasmā vā gotamo”ti?
[¶33] ‘Well then, reverends, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, reverends? Is King Bimbisāra capable of experiencing absolute happiness for seven days and nights without moving his body or speaking?’
> Pali: Tena hāvuso nigaṇṭhā, tumheva tattha paṭipucchissāmi, yathā vo khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyātha. Taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, pahoti rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro, aniñjamāno kāyena, abhāsamāno vācaṁ, satta rattindivāni ekantasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedī viharitun’ti?
[¶34] ‘No he is not, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶35] ‘What do you think, reverends? Is King Bimbisāra capable of experiencing absolute happiness for six days … five days … four days … three days … two days … one day?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, pahoti rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro, aniñjamāno kāyena, abhāsamāno vācaṁ, cha rattindivāni …pe… pañca rattindivāni … cattāri rattindivāni … tīṇi rattindivāni … dve rattindivāni … ekaṁ rattindivaṁ ekantasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedī viharitun’ti?
[¶36] ‘No he is not, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶37] ‘But I am capable of experiencing absolute happiness for one day and night without moving my body or speaking. I am capable of experiencing perfect happiness for two days … three days … four days … five days … six days … seven days. What do you think, reverends? This being so, who lives in greater pleasure, King Bimbisāra or I?’
> Pali: ‘Ahaṁ kho, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, pahomi aniñjamāno kāyena, abhāsamāno vācaṁ, ekaṁ rattindivaṁ ekantasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedī viharituṁ. Ahaṁ kho, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, pahomi aniñjamāno kāyena, abhāsamāno vācaṁ, dve rattindivāni … tīṇi rattindivāni … cattāri rattindivāni … pañca rattindivāni … cha rattindivāni … satta rattindivāni ekantasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedī viharituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, evaṁ sante ko sukhavihāritaro rājā vā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro ahaṁ vā’ti?
[¶38] ‘This being so, Venerable Gotama lives in greater pleasure than King Bimbisāra.’”
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ sante āyasmāva gotamo sukhavihāritaro raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārenā’”ti.
[¶39] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Mahānāma the Sakyan approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano mahānāmo sakko bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶40] > Pali: Cūḷadukkhakkhandhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 16. MN 16 · Hard-heartedness
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/16/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/16/#p-N
[¶0] MN 16 · Hard-heartedness
> Pali: MN 16 · Cetokhilasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, when a mendicant has not given up five kinds of hard-heartedness and severed five shackles of the heart, it’s not possible for them to achieve growth, improvement, or maturity in this teaching and training.
> Pali: “Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pañca cetokhilā appahīnā, pañca cetasovinibandhā asamucchinnā, so vatimasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶4] What are the five kinds of hard-heartedness they haven’t given up? Firstly, a mendicant has doubts about the Teacher. They’re uncertain, undecided, and lacking confidence. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first kind of hard-heartedness they haven’t given up.
> Pali: Katamāssa pañca cetokhilā appahīnā honti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ paṭhamo cetokhilo appahīno hoti.
[¶5] Furthermore, a mendicant has doubts about the teaching … This is the second kind of hard-heartedness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhamme kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati …pe… evamassāyaṁ dutiyo cetokhilo appahīno hoti.
[¶6] They have doubts about the Saṅgha … This is the third kind of hard-heartedness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṅghe kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati …pe… evamassāyaṁ tatiyo cetokhilo appahīno hoti.
[¶7] They have doubts about the training … This is the fourth kind of hard-heartedness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sikkhāya kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sikkhāya kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ catuttho cetokhilo appahīno hoti.
[¶8] Furthermore, a mendicant is angry and upset with their spiritual companions, resentful and closed off. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth kind of hard-heartedness they haven’t given up. These are the five kinds of hard-heartedness they haven’t given up.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ pañcamo cetokhilo appahīno hoti. Imāssa pañca cetokhilā appahīnā honti.
[¶9] What are the five shackles of the heart they haven’t severed? Firstly, a mendicant isn’t free of greed, desire, fondness, thirst, passion, and craving for sensual pleasures. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first shackle of the heart they haven’t severed.
> Pali: Katamāssa pañca cetasovinibandhā asamucchinnā honti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāme avītarāgo hoti avigatacchando avigatapemo avigatapipāso avigatapariḷāho avigatataṇho. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāme avītarāgo hoti avigatacchando avigatapemo avigatapipāso avigatapariḷāho avigatataṇho, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ paṭhamo cetasovinibandho asamucchinno hoti.
[¶10] Furthermore, a mendicant isn’t free of greed for the body … This is the second shackle of the heart.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye avītarāgo hoti …pe… evamassāyaṁ dutiyo cetasovinibandho asamucchinno hoti.
[¶11] Furthermore, a mendicant isn’t free of greed for form … This is the third shackle of the heart.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu rūpe avītarāgo hoti …pe… evamassāyaṁ tatiyo cetasovinibandho asamucchinno hoti.
[¶12] They eat as much as they like until their belly is full, then indulge in the pleasures of sleeping, lying down, and drowsing … This is the fourth heart shackle.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāvadatthaṁ udarāvadehakaṁ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṁ passasukhaṁ middhasukhaṁ anuyutto viharati. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāvadatthaṁ udarāvadehakaṁ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṁ passasukhaṁ middhasukhaṁ anuyutto viharati, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ catuttho cetasovinibandho asamucchinno hoti.
[¶13] They lead the spiritual life hoping to be reborn in one of the orders of gods, thinking: ‘By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice, may I become one of the gods!’ This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth shackle of the heart they haven’t severed. These are the five shackles of the heart they haven’t severed.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ pañcamo cetasovinibandho asamucchinno hoti. Imāssa pañca cetasovinibandhā asamucchinnā honti.
[¶14] When a mendicant has not given up these five kinds of hard-heartedness and severed these five shackles of the heart, it’s not possible for them to achieve growth, improvement, or maturity in this teaching and training.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ime pañca cetokhilā appahīnā, ime pañca cetasovinibandhā asamucchinnā, so vatimasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶15] When a mendicant has given up these five kinds of hard-heartedness and severed these five shackles of the heart, it is possible for them to achieve growth, improvement, and maturity in this teaching and training.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pañca cetokhilā pahīnā, pañca cetasovinibandhā susamucchinnā, so vatimasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶16] What are the five kinds of hard-heartedness they’ve given up? Firstly, a mendicant has no doubts about the Teacher. They’re not uncertain, undecided, or lacking confidence. This being so, their mind inclines toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first kind of hard-heartedness they’ve given up.
> Pali: Katamāssa pañca cetokhilā pahīnā honti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satthari na kaṅkhati na vicikicchati adhimuccati sampasīdati. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satthari na kaṅkhati na vicikicchati adhimuccati sampasīdati, tassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ paṭhamo cetokhilo pahīno hoti.
[¶17] Furthermore, a mendicant has no doubts about the teaching …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhamme na kaṅkhati na vicikicchati adhimuccati sampasīdati …pe… evamassāyaṁ dutiyo cetokhilo pahīno hoti.
[¶18] They have no doubts about the Saṅgha …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṅghe na kaṅkhati na vicikicchati adhimuccati sampasīdati …pe… evamassāyaṁ tatiyo cetokhilo pahīno hoti.
[¶19] They have no doubts about the training …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sikkhāya na kaṅkhati na vicikicchati adhimuccati sampasīdati …pe… evamassāyaṁ catuttho cetokhilo pahīno hoti.
[¶20] They’re not angry and upset with their spiritual companions, not resentful or closed off. This being so, their mind inclines toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth kind of hard-heartedness they’ve given up. These are the five kinds of hard-heartedness they’ve given up.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīsu na kupito hoti na anattamano anāhatacitto akhilajāto. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīsu na kupito hoti na anattamano anāhatacitto akhilajāto, tassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ pañcamo cetokhilo pahīno hoti. Imāssa pañca cetokhilā pahīnā honti.
[¶21] What are the five shackles of the heart they’ve severed? Firstly, a mendicant is rid of greed, desire, fondness, thirst, passion, and craving for sensual pleasures. This being so, their mind inclines toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first shackle of the heart they’ve severed.
> Pali: Katamāssa pañca cetasovinibandhā susamucchinnā honti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāme vītarāgo hoti vigatacchando vigatapemo vigatapipāso vigatapariḷāho vigatataṇho. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāme vītarāgo hoti vigatacchando vigatapemo vigatapipāso vigatapariḷāho vigatataṇho, tassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ paṭhamo cetasovinibandho susamucchinno hoti.
[¶22] Furthermore, a mendicant is rid of greed for the body …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye vītarāgo hoti …pe…
[¶23] They’re rid of greed for form …
> Pali: rūpe vītarāgo hoti …pe…
[¶24] They don’t eat as much as they like until their belly is full, then indulge in the pleasures of sleeping, lying down, and drowsing …
> Pali: na yāvadatthaṁ udarāvadehakaṁ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṁ passasukhaṁ middhasukhaṁ anuyutto viharati. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na yāvadatthaṁ udarāvadehakaṁ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṁ passasukhaṁ middhasukhaṁ anuyutto viharati, tassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ catuttho cetasovinibandho susamucchinno hoti.
[¶25] They don’t lead the spiritual life hoping to be reborn in one of the orders of gods, thinking: ‘By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice, may I become one of the gods!’ This being so, their mind inclines toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth shackle of the heart they’ve severed. These are the five shackles of the heart they’ve severed.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti, tassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, evamassāyaṁ pañcamo cetasovinibandho susamucchinno hoti. Imāssa pañca cetasovinibandhā susamucchinnā honti.
[¶26] When a mendicant has given up these five kinds of hard-heartedness and severed these five shackles of the heart, it is possible for them to achieve growth, improvement, or maturity in this teaching and training.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ime pañca cetokhilā pahīnā, ime pañca cetasovinibandhā susamucchinnā, so vatimasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶27] They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to enthusiasm, and active effort … the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to energy, and active effort … the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to mental development, and active effort … the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to inquiry, and active effort. And the fifth is sheer vigor. A mendicant who possesses these fifteen factors, including vigor, is capable of breaking out, becoming awakened, and reaching the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. Suppose there was a chicken with eight or ten or twelve eggs. And she properly sat on them to keep them warm and incubated. Even if that chicken doesn’t wish: ‘If only my chicks could break out of the eggshell with their claws and beak and hatch safely!’ Still they can break out and hatch safely.
> Pali: So chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, vīriyasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, cittasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, vīmaṁsāsamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, ussoḷhīyeva pañcamī. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, evaṁ ussoḷhipannarasaṅgasamannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo abhinibbidāya, bhabbo sambodhāya, bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, kukkuṭiyā aṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dvādasa vā. Tānassu kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitāni sammā pariseditāni sammā paribhāvitāni. Kiñcāpi tassā kukkuṭiyā na evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vatime kukkuṭapotakā pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṁ padāletvā sotthinā abhinibbhijjeyyun’ti. Atha kho bhabbāva te kukkuṭapotakā pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṁ padāletvā sotthinā abhinibbhijjituṁ.
[¶28] In the same way, a mendicant who possesses these fifteen factors, including vigor, is capable of breaking out, becoming awakened, and reaching the supreme sanctuary from the yoke.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, evaṁ ussoḷhipannarasaṅgasamannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo abhinibbidāya, bhabbo sambodhāya, bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāyā”ti.
[¶29] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶30] > Pali: Cetokhilasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 17. MN 17 · Jungle Thickets
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/17/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/17/#p-N
[¶0] MN 17 · Jungle Thickets
> Pali: MN 17 · Vanapatthasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I will teach you an exposition about jungle thickets. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “vanapatthapariyāyaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Mendicants, take the case of a mendicant who lives close by a jungle thicket. As they do so, their mindfulness does not become established, their mind does not become immersed in samādhi, their defilements do not come to an end, and they do not arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. And the necessities of life that a renunciate requires—robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick—are hard to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘While living close by this jungle thicket, my mindfulness does not become established, my mind does not become immersed in samādhi, my defilements do not come to an end, and I do not arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. And the necessities of life that a renunciate requires—robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick—are hard to come by.’ That mendicant should leave that jungle thicket that very time of night or day; they should not stay there.
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te kasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharāmi, tassa me imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te kasirena samudāgacchantī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā rattibhāgaṁ vā divasabhāgaṁ vā tamhā vanapatthā pakkamitabbaṁ, na vatthabbaṁ.
[¶6] Take another case of a mendicant who lives close by a jungle thicket. Their mindfulness does not become established … But the necessities of life are easy to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘While living close by this jungle thicket, my mindfulness does not become established … But the necessities of life are easy to come by. But I didn’t go forth from the lay life to homelessness for the sake of a robe, almsfood, lodgings, or medicines and supplies for the sick. Moreover, while living close by this jungle thicket, my mindfulness does not become established …’ That mendicant should, after appraisal, leave that jungle thicket; they should not stay there.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te appakasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharāmi. Tassa me imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te appakasirena samudāgacchanti. Na kho panāhaṁ cīvarahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito na piṇḍapātahetu …pe… na senāsanahetu …pe… na gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. Atha ca pana me imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāmī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā saṅkhāpi tamhā vanapatthā pakkamitabbaṁ, na vatthabbaṁ.
[¶7] Take another case of a mendicant who lives close by a jungle thicket. As they do so, their mindfulness becomes established, their mind becomes immersed in samādhi, their defilements come to an end, and they arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. But the necessities of life that a renunciate requires—robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick—are hard to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘While living close by this jungle thicket, my mindfulness becomes established … But the necessities of life are hard to come by. But I didn’t go forth from the lay life to homelessness for the sake of a robe, almsfood, lodgings, or medicines and supplies for the sick. Moreover, while living close by this jungle thicket, my mindfulness becomes established …’ That mendicant should, after appraisal, stay in that jungle thicket; they should not leave.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, te kasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharāmi. Tassa me imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te kasirena samudāgacchanti. Na kho panāhaṁ cīvarahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito, na piṇḍapātahetu …pe… na senāsanahetu …pe… na gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. Atha ca pana me imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāmī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā saṅkhāpi tasmiṁ vanapatthe vatthabbaṁ, na pakkamitabbaṁ.
[¶8] Take another case of a mendicant who lives close by a jungle thicket. Their mindfulness becomes established … And the necessities of life are easy to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘While living close by this jungle thicket, my mindfulness becomes established … And the necessities of life are easy to come by.’ That mendicant should stay in that jungle thicket for the rest of their life; they should not leave.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te appakasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharāmi. Tassa me imaṁ vanapatthaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te appakasirena samudāgacchantī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā yāvajīvampi tasmiṁ vanapatthe vatthabbaṁ, na pakkamitabbaṁ.
[¶9] Take the case of a mendicant who lives supported by a village … town … city … country … an individual. As they do so, their mindfulness does not become established, their mind does not become immersed in samādhi, their defilements do not come to an end, and they do not arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. And the necessities of life that a renunciate requires—robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick—are hard to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘… my mindfulness does not become established … And the necessities of life are hard to come by.’ That mendicant should leave that individual at any time of the day or night, without taking leave; they should not follow them. …
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ gāmaṁ upanissāya viharati …pe… aññataraṁ nigamaṁ upanissāya viharati …pe… aññataraṁ nagaraṁ upanissāya viharati …pe… aññataraṁ janapadaṁ upanissāya viharati …pe… aññataraṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te kasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharāmi. Tassa me imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te kasirena samudāgacchantī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā rattibhāgaṁ vā divasabhāgaṁ vā so puggalo anāpucchā pakkamitabbaṁ, nānubandhitabbo.
[¶10] Take another case of a mendicant who lives supported by an individual. Their mindfulness does not become established … But the necessities of life are easy to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘… my mindfulness does not become established … But the necessities of life are easy to come by.’ … That mendicant should, after appraisal, leave that individual having taken leave; they should not follow them. …
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, te appakasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharāmi. Tassa me imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te appakasirena samudāgacchanti. Na kho panāhaṁ cīvarahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito, na piṇḍapātahetu …pe… na senāsanahetu …pe… na gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. Atha ca pana me imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ na samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā na parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nānupāpuṇāmī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā saṅkhāpi so puggalo āpucchā pakkamitabbaṁ, nānubandhitabbo.
[¶11] Take another case of a mendicant who lives supported by an individual. Their mindfulness becomes established … But the necessities of life are hard to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘… my mindfulness becomes established … But the necessities of life are hard to come by.’ … That mendicant should, after appraisal, follow that individual; they should not leave.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te kasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharāmi. Tassa me imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te kasirena samudāgacchanti. Na kho panāhaṁ cīvarahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito, na piṇḍapātahetu …pe… na senāsanahetu …pe… na gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārahetu agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. Atha ca pana me imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāmī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā saṅkhāpi so puggalo anubandhitabbo, na pakkamitabbaṁ.
[¶12] Take another case of a mendicant who lives supported by an individual. As they do so, their mindfulness becomes established, their mind becomes immersed in samādhi, their defilements come to an end, and they arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. And the necessities of life that a renunciate requires—robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick—are easy to come by. That mendicant should reflect: ‘While living supported by this individual, my mindfulness becomes established … And the necessities of life are easy to come by.’ That mendicant should follow that individual for the rest of their life; they should not leave them, even if driven away.”
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññataraṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharati. Tassa taṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te appakasirena samudāgacchanti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘ahaṁ kho imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharāmi. Tassa me imaṁ puggalaṁ upanissāya viharato anupaṭṭhitā ceva sati upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṁ samādhiyati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāmi. Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā—cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā—te appakasirena samudāgacchantī’ti. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā yāvajīvampi so puggalo anubandhitabbo, na pakkamitabbaṁ, api panujjamānenapī”ti.
[¶13] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶14] > Pali: Vanapatthasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 18. MN 18 · The Honey-Cake
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/18/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/18/#p-N
[¶0] MN 18 · The Honey-Cake
> Pali: MN 18 · Madhupiṇḍikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, near Kapilavatthu in the Banyan Tree Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ nigrodhārāme.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Kapilavatthu for alms. He wandered for alms in Kapilavatthu. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to the Great Wood for the day’s meditation, plunged deep into it, and sat at the root of a young wood-apple tree to meditate.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya kapilavatthuṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Kapilavatthusmiṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena mahāvanaṁ tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Mahāvanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā beluvalaṭṭhikāya mūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.
[¶3] Daṇḍapāṇi the Sakyan, while going for a walk, plunged deep into the Great Wood. He approached the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he stood to one side leaning on his staff, and said to the Buddha, “What is the ascetic’s doctrine? What does he assert?”
> Pali: Daṇḍapāṇipi kho sakko jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena mahāvanaṁ tenupasaṅkami. Mahāvanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā yena beluvalaṭṭhikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā daṇḍamolubbha ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho daṇḍapāṇi sakko bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kiṁvādī samaṇo kimakkhāyī”ti?
[¶4] “Respectable sir, my doctrine is such that one does not argue with anyone in this world with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, its gods and humans. And it is such that perceptions do not underlie the brahmin who lives detached from sensual pleasures, without indecision, stripped of worry, and rid of craving for rebirth in this or that state. That is my doctrine, and that is what I assert.”
> Pali: “Yathāvādī kho, āvuso, sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya na kenaci loke viggayha tiṭṭhati, yathā ca pana kāmehi visaṁyuttaṁ viharantaṁ taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ akathaṅkathiṁ chinnakukkuccaṁ bhavābhave vītataṇhaṁ saññā nānusenti— evaṁvādī kho ahaṁ, āvuso, evamakkhāyī”ti.
[¶5] When he had spoken, Daṇḍapāṇi shook his head, waggled his tongue, raised his eyebrows until his brow puckered in three furrows, and left leaning on his staff.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, daṇḍapāṇi sakko sīsaṁ okampetvā, jivhaṁ nillāḷetvā, tivisākhaṁ nalāṭikaṁ nalāṭe vuṭṭhāpetvā daṇḍamolubbha pakkāmi.
[¶6] Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat and went to the Banyan Tree Monastery, sat down on the seat spread out, and told the mendicants what had happened.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena nigrodhārāmo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “idhāhaṁ, bhikkhave, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya kapilavatthuṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ. Kapilavatthusmiṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena mahāvanaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁ divāvihārāya. Mahāvanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā beluvalaṭṭhikāya mūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdiṁ. Daṇḍapāṇipi kho, bhikkhave, sakko jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena mahāvanaṁ tenupasaṅkami. Mahāvanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā yena beluvalaṭṭhikā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mayā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā daṇḍamolubbha ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, bhikkhave, daṇḍapāṇi sakko maṁ etadavoca: ‘kiṁvādī samaṇo kimakkhāyī’ti?
[¶7] > Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, daṇḍapāṇiṁ sakkaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathāvādī kho, āvuso, sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya na kenaci loke viggayha tiṭṭhati, yathā ca pana kāmehi visaṁyuttaṁ viharantaṁ taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ akathaṅkathiṁ chinnakukkuccaṁ bhavābhave vītataṇhaṁ saññā nānusenti— evaṁvādī kho ahaṁ, āvuso, evamakkhāyī’ti. Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, daṇḍapāṇi sakko sīsaṁ okampetvā, jivhaṁ nillāḷetvā, tivisākhaṁ nalāṭikaṁ nalāṭe vuṭṭhāpetvā daṇḍamolubbha pakkāmī”ti.
[¶8] When he had spoken, one of the mendicants said to him, “But sir, asserting what doctrine does the Buddha not argue with anyone in this world with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, its gods and humans? And how is it that perceptions do not underlie the Buddha, the brahmin who lives detached from sensual pleasures, without indecision, stripped of worry, and rid of craving for rebirth in this or that state?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kiṁvādī pana, bhante, bhagavā sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya na kenaci loke viggayha tiṭṭhati? Kathañca pana, bhante, bhagavantaṁ kāmehi visaṁyuttaṁ viharantaṁ taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ akathaṅkathiṁ chinnakukkuccaṁ bhavābhave vītataṇhaṁ saññā nānusentī”ti?
[¶9] “Mendicant, judgments driven by proliferating perceptions beset a person. If they don’t find anything worth approving, welcoming, or getting attached to in the source from which these arise, just this is the end of the underlying tendencies to desire, aversion, views, doubt, conceit, the desire for continued existence, and ignorance. This is the end of taking up the rod and the sword, the end of quarrels, arguments, and disputes, of accusations, backbiting, and lies. This is where these bad, unskillful qualities cease without remainder.”
> Pali: “Yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ. Esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ, esevanto paṭighānusayānaṁ, esevanto diṭṭhānusayānaṁ, esevanto vicikicchānusayānaṁ, esevanto mānānusayānaṁ, esevanto bhavarāgānusayānaṁ, esevanto avijjānusayānaṁ, esevanto daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādānaṁ. Etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī”ti.
[¶10] That is what the Buddha said. When he had spoken, the Holy One rose from his seat and entered his dwelling.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.
[¶11] Soon after the Buddha left, those mendicants considered, “The Buddha gave this brief summary recital, then entered his dwelling without explaining the meaning in detail. Who can explain in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha?”
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ acirapakkantassa bhagavato etadahosi: “idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā, uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ. Esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ …pe… etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī’ti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyā”ti?
[¶12] Then those mendicants thought, “This Venerable Mahākaccāna is praised by the Buddha and esteemed by his sensible spiritual companions. He is capable of explaining in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha. Let’s go to him, and ask him about this matter.”
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā”ti.
[¶13] Then those mendicants went to Mahākaccāna, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side. They told him what had happened, and said: “May Venerable Mahākaccāna please explain this.”
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā mahākaccānena saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idaṁ kho no, āvuso kaccāna, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ. Esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ …pe… etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī’ti. Tesaṁ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṁ acirapakkantassa bhagavato etadahosi: ‘idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: “yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ. Esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ …pe… etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī”’ti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyāti? Tesaṁ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṁ etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ, pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno”ti.
[¶14] “Reverends, suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But he’d pass over the roots and trunk, imagining that the heartwood should be sought in the branches and leaves. Such is the consequence for the venerables. Though you were face to face with the Buddha, you bypassed him, imagining that you should ask me about this matter. For he is the Buddha, the one who knows and sees. He is vision, he is knowledge, he is the manifestation of principle, he is the manifestation of divinity. He is the preacher, the proclaimer, the elucidator of meaning, the bestower of freedom from death, the lord of truth, the Realized One. That was the time to approach the Buddha and ask about this matter. You should have remembered it in line with the Buddha’s answer.”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, āvuso, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva mūlaṁ, atikkamma khandhaṁ, sākhāpalāse sāraṁ pariyesitabbaṁ maññeyya; evaṁsampadamidaṁ āyasmantānaṁ satthari sammukhībhūte, taṁ bhagavantaṁ atisitvā, amhe etamatthaṁ paṭipucchitabbaṁ maññatha. So hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti, passaṁ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto, vattā pavattā, atthassa ninnetā, amatassa dātā, dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi, yaṁ bhagavantaṁyeva etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha. Yathā vo bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṁ dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶15] “Certainly he is the Buddha, the one who knows and sees. He is vision, he is knowledge, he is the manifestation of principle, he is the manifestation of divinity. He is the preacher, the proclaimer, the elucidator of meaning, the bestower of freedom from death, the lord of truth, the Realized One. That was the time to approach the Buddha and ask about this matter. We should have remembered it in line with the Buddha’s answer. Still, Mahākaccāna is praised by the Buddha and esteemed by his sensible spiritual companions. You are capable of explaining in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha. Please explain this, if it’s no trouble.”
> Pali: “Addhāvuso kaccāna, bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti, passaṁ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto, vattā pavattā, atthassa ninnetā, amatassa dātā, dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi, yaṁ bhagavantaṁyeva etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāma. Yathā no bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṁ dhāreyyāma. Api cāyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ, pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno agaruṁ katvā”ti.
[¶16] “Well then, reverends, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶17] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Venerable Mahākaccāna said this:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā mahākaccāno etadavoca:
[¶18] “Reverends, the Buddha gave this brief summary recital, then entered his dwelling without explaining the meaning in detail: ‘Judgments driven by proliferating perceptions beset a person. If they don’t find anything worth approving, welcoming, or getting attached to in the source from which these arise, just this is the end of the underlying tendencies to desire, repulsion, views, doubt, conceit, the desire to be reborn, and ignorance. This is the end of taking up the rod and the sword, the end of quarrels, arguments, and disputes, of accusations, backbiting, and lies. This is where these bad, unskillful qualities cease without remainder.’ This is how I understand the detailed meaning of this summary recital.
> Pali: “Yaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ, esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ …pe… etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī’ti, imassa kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi—
[¶19] Eye consciousness arises dependent on the eye and sights. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. What you feel, you perceive. What you perceive, you think about. What you think about, you proliferate. What you proliferate is the source from which judgments driven by proliferating perceptions beset a person. This occurs with respect to sights known by the eye in the past, future, and present.
> Pali: Cakkhuñcāvuso, paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, yaṁ vedeti taṁ sañjānāti, yaṁ sañjānāti taṁ vitakketi, yaṁ vitakketi taṁ papañceti, yaṁ papañceti tatonidānaṁ purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti atītānāgatapaccuppannesu cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu.
[¶20] Ear consciousness arises dependent on the ear and sounds. …
> Pali: Sotañcāvuso, paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati sotaviññāṇaṁ …pe…
[¶21] Nose consciousness arises dependent on the nose and smells. …
> Pali: ghānañcāvuso, paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati ghānaviññāṇaṁ …pe…
[¶22] Tongue consciousness arises dependent on the tongue and tastes. …
> Pali: jivhañcāvuso, paṭicca rase ca uppajjati jivhāviññāṇaṁ …pe…
[¶23] Body consciousness arises dependent on the body and touches. …
> Pali: kāyañcāvuso, paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati kāyaviññāṇaṁ …pe…
[¶24] Mind consciousness arises dependent on the mind and ideas. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. What you feel, you perceive. What you perceive, you think about. What you think about, you proliferate. What you proliferate is the source from which judgments driven by proliferating perceptions beset a person. This occurs with respect to ideas known by the mind in the past, future, and present.
> Pali: manañcāvuso, paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, yaṁ vedeti taṁ sañjānāti, yaṁ sañjānāti taṁ vitakketi, yaṁ vitakketi taṁ papañceti, yaṁ papañceti tatonidānaṁ purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti atītānāgatapaccuppannesu manoviññeyyesu dhammesu.
[¶25] Where there is the eye, sights, and eye consciousness, it will be possible to discover evidence of contact. Where there is evidence of contact, it will be possible to discover evidence of feeling. Where there is evidence of feeling, it will be possible to discover evidence of perception. Where there is evidence of perception, it will be possible to discover evidence of thought. Where there is evidence of thought, it will be possible to discover evidence of being beset by judgments driven by proliferating perceptions.
> Pali: So vatāvuso, cakkhusmiṁ sati rūpe sati cakkhuviññāṇe sati phassapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Phassapaññattiyā sati vedanāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Vedanāpaññattiyā sati saññāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Saññāpaññattiyā sati vitakkapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Vitakkapaññattiyā sati papañcasaññāsaṅkhāsamudācaraṇapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶26] Where there is the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, ideas, and mind consciousness, it will be possible to discover evidence of contact. Where there is evidence of contact, it will be possible to discover evidence of feeling. Where there is evidence of feeling, it will be possible to discover evidence of perception. Where there is evidence of perception, it will be possible to discover evidence of thinking. Where there is evidence of thinking, it will be possible to discover evidence of being beset by judgments driven by proliferating perceptions.
> Pali: So vatāvuso, sotasmiṁ sati sadde sati …pe… ghānasmiṁ sati gandhe sati …pe… jivhāya sati rase sati …pe… kāyasmiṁ sati phoṭṭhabbe sati …pe… manasmiṁ sati dhamme sati manoviññāṇe sati phassapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Phassapaññattiyā sati vedanāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Vedanāpaññattiyā sati saññāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Saññāpaññattiyā sati vitakkapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Vitakkapaññattiyā sati papañcasaññāsaṅkhāsamudācaraṇapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶27] Where there is no eye, no sights, and no eye consciousness, it will not be possible to discover evidence of contact. Where there is no evidence of contact, it will not be possible to discover evidence of feeling. Where there is no evidence of feeling, it will not be possible to discover evidence of perception. Where there is no evidence of perception, it will not be possible to discover evidence of thinking. Where there is no evidence of thinking, it will not be possible to discover evidence of being beset by judgments driven by proliferating perceptions.
> Pali: So vatāvuso, cakkhusmiṁ asati rūpe asati cakkhuviññāṇe asati phassapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Phassapaññattiyā asati vedanāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Vedanāpaññattiyā asati saññāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Saññāpaññattiyā asati vitakkapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Vitakkapaññattiyā asati papañcasaññāsaṅkhāsamudācaraṇapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶28] Where there is no ear … no nose … no tongue … no body … no mind, no ideas, and no mind consciousness, it will not be possible to discover evidence of contact. Where there is no evidence of contact, it will not be possible to discover evidence of feeling. Where there is no evidence of feeling, it will not be possible to discover evidence of perception. Where there is no evidence of perception, it will not be possible to discover evidence of thinking. Where there is no evidence of thinking, it will not be possible to discover evidence of being beset by judgments driven by proliferating perceptions.
> Pali: So vatāvuso, sotasmiṁ asati sadde asati …pe… ghānasmiṁ asati gandhe asati …pe… jivhāya asati rase asati …pe… kāyasmiṁ asati phoṭṭhabbe asati …pe… manasmiṁ asati dhamme asati manoviññāṇe asati phassapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Phassapaññattiyā asati vedanāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Vedanāpaññattiyā asati saññāpaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Saññāpaññattiyā asati vitakkapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Vitakkapaññattiyā asati papañcasaññāsaṅkhāsamudācaraṇapaññattiṁ paññāpessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶29] This is how I understand the detailed meaning of that brief summary recital given by the Buddha. If you wish, you may go to the Buddha and ask him about this. You should remember it in line with the Buddha’s answer.”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ …pe… etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī’ti, imassa kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi. Ākaṅkhamānā ca pana tumhe āyasmanto bhagavantaṁyeva upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha. Yathā vo bhagavā byākaroti tathā naṁ dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶30] Then those mendicants, approving and agreeing with what Mahākaccāna said, rose from their seats and went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened, adding: “Mahākaccāna clearly explained the meaning to us in this manner, with these words and phrases.”
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “yaṁ kho no, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ. Esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ …pe… etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī’ti. Tesaṁ no, bhante, amhākaṁ acirapakkantassa bhagavato etadahosi: ‘idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: “yatonidānaṁ, bhikkhu, purisaṁ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbaṁ abhivaditabbaṁ ajjhositabbaṁ. Esevanto rāgānusayānaṁ, esevanto paṭighānusayānaṁ, esevanto diṭṭhānusayānaṁ, esevanto vicikicchānusayānaṁ, esevanto mānānusayānaṁ, esevanto bhavarāgānusayānaṁ, esevanto avijjānusayānaṁ, esevanto daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādānaṁ. Etthete pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantī”ti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyā’ti? Tesaṁ no, bhante, amhākaṁ etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ, pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ, yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti. Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipucchimha. Tesaṁ no, bhante, āyasmatā mahākaccānena imehi ākārehi imehi padehi imehi byañjanehi attho vibhatto”ti.
[¶31] “Mahākaccāna is astute, mendicants, he has great wisdom. If you came to me and asked this question, I would answer it in exactly the same way as Mahākaccāna. That is what it means, and that’s how you should remember it.”
> Pali: “Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno; mahāpañño, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno. Mañcepi tumhe, bhikkhave, etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha, ahampi taṁ evamevaṁ byākareyyaṁ yathā taṁ mahākaccānena byākataṁ. Eso cevetassa attho. Evañca naṁ dhārethā”ti.
[¶32] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Sir, suppose a person who was weak with hunger was to obtain a honey-cake. Wherever they taste it, they would enjoy a sweet, delectable flavor.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “seyyathāpi, bhante, puriso jighacchādubbalyapareto madhupiṇḍikaṁ adhigaccheyya, so yato yato sāyeyya, labhetheva sādurasaṁ asecanakaṁ.
[¶33] In the same way, wherever a sincere, proficient mendicant might examine with wisdom the meaning of this exposition of the teaching they would only gain joy and clarity. Sir, what is the name of this exposition of the teaching?”
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhante, cetaso bhikkhu dabbajātiko, yato yato imassa dhammapariyāyassa paññāya atthaṁ upaparikkheyya, labhetheva attamanataṁ, labhetheva cetaso pasādaṁ. Ko nāmo ayaṁ, bhante, dhammapariyāyo”ti?
[¶34] “Well then, Ānanda, you may remember this exposition of the teaching as ‘The Honey-Cake Discourse’.”
> Pali: “Tasmātiha tvaṁ, ānanda, imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ madhupiṇḍikapariyāyotveva naṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶35] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶36] > Pali: Madhupiṇḍikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 19. MN 19 · Two Kinds of Thought
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/19/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/19/#p-N
[¶0] MN 19 · Two Kinds of Thought
> Pali: MN 19 · Dvedhāvitakkasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I thought: ‘Why don’t I meditate by continually dividing my thoughts into two classes?’ So I assigned sensual, malicious, and cruel thoughts to one class. And I assigned thoughts of renunciation, good will, and harmlessness to the second class.
> Pali: “Pubbeva me, bhikkhave, sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ dvidhā katvā dvidhā katvā vitakke vihareyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, yo cāyaṁ kāmavitakko yo ca byāpādavitakko yo ca vihiṁsāvitakko— imaṁ ekaṁ bhāgamakāsiṁ; yo cāyaṁ nekkhammavitakko yo ca abyāpādavitakko yo ca avihiṁsāvitakko— imaṁ dutiyaṁ bhāgamakāsiṁ.
[¶4] Then, as I meditated—diligent, keen, and resolute—a sensual thought arose. I understood: ‘This sensual thought has arisen in me. It leads to hurting myself, hurting others, and hurting both. It blocks wisdom, it’s on the side of distress, and it doesn’t lead to extinguishment.’ When I reflected that it leads to hurting myself, it went away. When I reflected that it leads to hurting others, it went away. When I reflected that it leads to hurting both, it went away. When I reflected that it blocks wisdom, it’s on the side of distress, and it doesn’t lead to extinguishment, it went away. So I gave up, dispelled, and eliminated any sensual thoughts that arose.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato uppajjati kāmavitakko. So evaṁ pajānāmi: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ kāmavitakko. So ca kho attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, paññānirodhiko vighātapakkhiko anibbānasaṁvattaniko’. ‘Attabyābādhāya saṁvattatī’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati; ‘parabyābādhāya saṁvattatī’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati; ‘ubhayabyābādhāya saṁvattatī’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati; ‘paññānirodhiko vighātapakkhiko anibbānasaṁvattaniko’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, uppannuppannaṁ kāmavitakkaṁ pajahameva vinodameva byantameva naṁ akāsiṁ.
[¶5] Then, as I meditated—diligent, keen, and resolute—a malicious thought arose … a cruel thought arose. I understood: ‘This cruel thought has arisen in me. It leads to hurting myself, hurting others, and hurting both. It blocks wisdom, it’s on the side of distress, and it doesn’t lead to extinguishment.’ When I reflected that it leads to hurting myself … hurting others … hurting both, it went away. When I reflected that it blocks wisdom, it’s on the side of distress, and it doesn’t lead to extinguishment, it went away. So I gave up, dispelled, and eliminated any cruel thoughts that arose.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato uppajjati byāpādavitakko …pe… uppajjati vihiṁsāvitakko. So evaṁ pajānāmi: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ vihiṁsāvitakko. So ca kho attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, paññānirodhiko vighātapakkhiko anibbānasaṁvattaniko’. ‘Attabyābādhāya saṁvattatī’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati; ‘parabyābādhāya saṁvattatī’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati; ‘ubhayabyābādhāya saṁvattatī’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati; ‘paññānirodhiko vighātapakkhiko anibbānasaṁvattaniko’tipi me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato abbhatthaṁ gacchati. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, uppannuppannaṁ vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ pajahameva vinodameva byantameva naṁ akāsiṁ.
[¶6] Whatever a mendicant frequently thinks about and considers becomes their heart’s inclination. If they often think about and consider sensual thoughts, they’ve given up the thought of renunciation to cultivate sensual thought. Their mind inclines to sensual thoughts. If they often think about and consider malicious thoughts … their mind inclines to malicious thoughts. If they often think about and consider cruel thoughts … their mind inclines to cruel thoughts.
> Pali: Yaññadeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bahulamanuvitakketi anuvicāreti, tathā tathā nati hoti cetaso. Kāmavitakkañce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bahulamanuvitakketi anuvicāreti, pahāsi nekkhammavitakkaṁ, kāmavitakkaṁ bahulamakāsi, tassa taṁ kāmavitakkāya cittaṁ namati. Byāpādavitakkañce, bhikkhave …pe… vihiṁsāvitakkañce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bahulamanuvitakketi anuvicāreti, pahāsi avihiṁsāvitakkaṁ, vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ bahulamakāsi, tassa taṁ vihiṁsāvitakkāya cittaṁ namati.
[¶7] Suppose it’s the last month of the rainy season, in autumn, when the crops grow closely together, and a cowherd must take care of the cattle. He’d tap and poke them with his staff on this side and that to keep them in check. Why is that? For he sees that if they wander into the crops he could be executed, imprisoned, fined, or condemned.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye kiṭṭhasambādhe gopālako gāvo rakkheyya. So tā gāvo tato tato daṇḍena ākoṭeyya paṭikoṭeyya sannirundheyya sannivāreyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Passati hi so, bhikkhave, gopālako tatonidānaṁ vadhaṁ vā bandhanaṁ vā jāniṁ vā garahaṁ vā.
[¶8] In the same way, I saw that unskillful qualities have the drawbacks of sordidness and corruption, and that skillful qualities have the benefit and cleansing power of renunciation.
> Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, addasaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ vodānapakkhaṁ.
[¶9] Then, as I meditated—diligent, keen, and resolute—a thought of renunciation arose. I understood: ‘This thought of renunciation has arisen in me. It doesn’t lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It nourishes wisdom, it’s on the side of freedom from distress, and it leads to extinguishment.’ If I were to keep on thinking and considering this all night … all day … all night and day, I see no danger that would come from that. Still, thinking and considering for too long would tire my body. And when the body is tired, the mind is stressed. And when the mind is stressed, it’s far from immersion. So I stilled, settled, unified, and immersed my mind internally. Why is that? So that my mind would not be stressed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato uppajjati nekkhammavitakko. So evaṁ pajānāmi: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ nekkhammavitakko. So ca kho nevattabyābādhāya saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāya saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāya saṁvattati, paññāvuddhiko avighātapakkhiko nibbānasaṁvattaniko’. Rattiñcepi naṁ, bhikkhave, anuvitakkeyyaṁ anuvicāreyyaṁ, neva tatonidānaṁ bhayaṁ samanupassāmi. Divasañcepi naṁ, bhikkhave, anuvitakkeyyaṁ anuvicāreyyaṁ, neva tatonidānaṁ bhayaṁ samanupassāmi. Rattindivañcepi naṁ, bhikkhave, anuvitakkeyyaṁ anuvicāreyyaṁ, neva tatonidānaṁ bhayaṁ samanupassāmi. Api ca kho me aticiraṁ anuvitakkayato anuvicārayato kāyo kilameyya. Kāye kilante cittaṁ ūhaññeyya. Ūhate citte ārā cittaṁ samādhimhāti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, ajjhattameva cittaṁ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṁ karomi samādahāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Mā me cittaṁ ūhaññī’ti.
[¶10] Then, as I meditated—diligent, keen, and resolute—a thought of good will arose … a thought of harmlessness arose. I understood: ‘This thought of harmlessness has arisen in me. It doesn’t lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It nourishes wisdom, it’s on the side of freedom from distress, and it leads to extinguishment.’ If I were to keep on thinking and considering this all night … all day … all night and day, I see no danger that would come from that. Still, thinking and considering for too long would tire my body. And when the body is tired, the mind is stressed. And when the mind is stressed, it’s far from immersion. So I stilled, settled, unified, and immersed my mind internally. Why is that? So that my mind would not be stressed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato uppajjati abyāpādavitakko …pe… uppajjati avihiṁsāvitakko. So evaṁ pajānāmi: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ avihiṁsāvitakko. So ca kho nevattabyābādhāya saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāya saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāya saṁvattati, paññāvuddhiko avighātapakkhiko nibbānasaṁvattaniko’. Rattiñcepi naṁ, bhikkhave, anuvitakkeyyaṁ anuvicāreyyaṁ, neva tatonidānaṁ bhayaṁ samanupassāmi. Divasañcepi naṁ, bhikkhave, anuvitakkeyyaṁ anuvicāreyyaṁ, neva tatonidānaṁ bhayaṁ samanupassāmi. Rattindivañcepi naṁ, bhikkhave, anuvitakkeyyaṁ anuvicāreyyaṁ, neva tatonidānaṁ bhayaṁ samanupassāmi. Api ca kho me aticiraṁ anuvitakkayato anuvicārayato kāyo kilameyya. Kāye kilante cittaṁ ūhaññeyya. Ūhate citte ārā cittaṁ samādhimhāti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, ajjhattameva cittaṁ saṇṭhapemi, sannisādemi, ekodiṁ karomi samādahāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Mā me cittaṁ ūhaññī’ti.
[¶11] Whatever a mendicant frequently thinks about and considers becomes their heart’s inclination. If they often think about and consider thoughts of renunciation, they’ve given up sensual thought to cultivate the thought of renunciation. Their mind inclines to thoughts of renunciation. If they often think about and consider thoughts of good will … their mind inclines to thoughts of good will. If they often think about and consider thoughts of harmlessness … their mind inclines to thoughts of harmlessness.
> Pali: Yaññadeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bahulamanuvitakketi anuvicāreti, tathā tathā nati hoti cetaso. Nekkhammavitakkañce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bahulamanuvitakketi anuvicāreti, pahāsi kāmavitakkaṁ, nekkhammavitakkaṁ bahulamakāsi, tassaṁ taṁ nekkhammavitakkāya cittaṁ namati. Abyāpādavitakkañce, bhikkhave …pe… avihiṁsāvitakkañce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bahulamanuvitakketi anuvicāreti, pahāsi vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ, avihiṁsāvitakkaṁ bahulamakāsi, tassa taṁ avihiṁsāvitakkāya cittaṁ namati.
[¶12] Suppose it’s the last month of summer, when all the crops have been gathered within a village, and a cowherd must take care of the cattle. While at the root of a tree or in the open he need only be mindful that the cattle are there. In the same way I needed only to be mindful that those things were there.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gimhānaṁ pacchime māse sabbasassesu gāmantasambhatesu gopālako gāvo rakkheyya, tassa rukkhamūlagatassa vā abbhokāsagatassa vā satikaraṇīyameva hoti: ‘etā gāvo’ti. Evamevaṁ kho, bhikkhave, satikaraṇīyameva ahosi: ‘ete dhammā’ti.
[¶13] My energy was roused up and unflagging, my mindfulness was established and lucid, my body was tranquil and undisturbed, and my mind was immersed and unified in samādhi.
> Pali: Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, bhikkhave, vīriyaṁ ahosi asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, passaddho kāyo asāraddho, samāhitaṁ cittaṁ ekaggaṁ.
[¶14] Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶15] As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected were stilled, I entered and remained in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected.
> Pali: Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶16] And with the fading away of rapture, I entered and remained in the third absorption, where I meditated with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’
> Pali: Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca vihāsiṁ sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedesiṁ, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶17] With the giving up of pleasure and pain, and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, I entered and remained in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶18] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward recollection of past lives. I recollected many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
[¶19] This was the first knowledge, which I achieved in the first watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, bhikkhave, rattiyā paṭhame yāme paṭhamā vijjā adhigatā; avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶20] When my mind had become immersed in samādhi like this, I extended it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I saw sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understood how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne …pe… ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā …pe… iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi.
[¶21] This was the second knowledge, which I achieved in the middle watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, bhikkhave, rattiyā majjhime yāme dutiyā vijjā adhigatā; avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶22] When my mind had become immersed in samādhi like this, I extended it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. I truly understood: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶23] I truly understood: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements.’ Knowing and seeing like this, my mind was freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. I understood: ‘Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ. Tassa me evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ ahosi: ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶24] This was the third knowledge, which I achieved in the last watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, bhikkhave, rattiyā pacchime yāme tatiyā vijjā adhigatā; avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶25] Suppose that in a forested wilderness there was an expanse of low-lying marshes, and a large herd of deer lived nearby. Then along comes a person who wants to harm, injure, and threaten them. They close off the safe, secure path that leads to happiness, and open the wrong path. There they plant domesticated male and female deer as decoys so that, in due course, that herd of deer would fall to ruin and disaster. Then along comes a person who wants to help keep the herd of deer safe. They open up the safe, secure path that leads to happiness, and close off the wrong path. They get rid of the decoys so that, in due course, that herd of deer would grow, increase, and mature.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, araññe pavane mahantaṁ ninnaṁ pallalaṁ. Tamenaṁ mahāmigasaṅgho upanissāya vihareyya. Tassa kocideva puriso uppajjeyya anatthakāmo ahitakāmo ayogakkhemakāmo. So yvāssa maggo khemo sovatthiko pītigamanīyo taṁ maggaṁ pidaheyya, vivareyya kummaggaṁ, odaheyya okacaraṁ, ṭhapeyya okacārikaṁ. Evañhi so, bhikkhave, mahāmigasaṅgho aparena samayena anayabyasanaṁ āpajjeyya. Tasseva kho pana, bhikkhave, mahato migasaṅghassa kocideva puriso uppajjeyya atthakāmo hitakāmo yogakkhemakāmo. So yvāssa maggo khemo sovatthiko pītigamanīyo taṁ maggaṁ vivareyya, pidaheyya kummaggaṁ, ūhaneyya okacaraṁ, nāseyya okacārikaṁ. Evañhi so, bhikkhave, mahāmigasaṅgho aparena samayena vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjeyya.
[¶26] I’ve made up this simile to make a point. And this is what it means. ‘An expanse of low-lying marshes’ is a term for sensual pleasures. ‘A large herd of deer’ is a term for sentient beings. ‘A person who wants to harm, injure, and threaten them’ is a term for Māra the Wicked. ‘The wrong path’ is a term for the wrong eightfold path, that is, wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion. ‘A domesticated male deer’ is a term for greed and relishing. ‘A domesticated female deer’ is a term for ignorance. ‘A person who wants to help keep the herd of deer safe’ is a term for the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. ‘The safe, secure path that leads to happiness’ is a term for the noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Upamā kho me ayaṁ, bhikkhave, katā atthassa viññāpanāya. Ayaṁ cevettha attho— mahantaṁ ninnaṁ pallalanti kho, bhikkhave, kāmānametaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Mahāmigasaṅghoti kho, bhikkhave, sattānametaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Puriso anatthakāmo ahitakāmo ayogakkhemakāmoti kho, bhikkhave, mārassetaṁ pāpimato adhivacanaṁ. Kummaggoti kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭhaṅgikassetaṁ micchāmaggassa adhivacanaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— micchādiṭṭhiyā micchāsaṅkappassa micchāvācāya micchākammantassa micchāājīvassa micchāvāyāmassa micchāsatiyā micchāsamādhissa. Okacaroti kho, bhikkhave, nandīrāgassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Okacārikāti kho, bhikkhave, avijjāyetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Puriso atthakāmo hitakāmo yogakkhemakāmoti kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa. Khemo maggo sovatthiko pītigamanīyoti kho, bhikkhave, ariyassetaṁ aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa adhivacanaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhiyā sammāsaṅkappassa sammāvācāya sammākammantassa sammāājīvassa sammāvāyāmassa sammāsatiyā sammāsamādhissa.
[¶27] So, mendicants, I have opened up the safe, secure path to happiness and closed off the wrong path. And I have got rid of the male and female decoys.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, vivaṭo mayā khemo maggo sovatthiko pītigamanīyo, pihito kummaggo, ūhato okacaro, nāsitā okacārikā.
[¶28] Out of sympathy, I’ve done what a teacher should do who wants what’s best for their disciples. Here are these roots of trees, and here are these empty huts. Practice absorption, mendicants! Don’t be negligent! Don’t regret it later! This is my instruction to you.”
> Pali: Yaṁ, bhikkhave, satthārā karaṇīyaṁ sāvakānaṁ hitesinā anukampakena anukampaṁ upādāya, kataṁ vo taṁ mayā. Etāni, bhikkhave, rukkhamūlāni, etāni suññāgārāni; jhāyatha, bhikkhave, mā pamādattha; mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha. Ayaṁ vo amhākaṁ anusāsanī”ti.
[¶29] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶30] > Pali: Dvedhāvitakkasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 20. MN 20 · How to Stop Thinking
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/20/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/20/#p-N
[¶0] MN 20 · How to Stop Thinking
> Pali: MN 20 · Vitakkasaṇṭhānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, a mendicant committed to the higher mind should focus on five subjects from time to time. What five?
> Pali: “Adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā pañca nimittāni kālena kālaṁ manasi kātabbāni. Katamāni pañca?
[¶4] Take a mendicant who is focusing on some subject that gives rise to bad, unskillful thoughts connected with desire, hate, and delusion. That mendicant should focus on some other subject connected with the skillful. As they do so, those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. It’s like a deft mason or their apprentice who’d knock out or extract a large peg with a finer peg. In the same way, a mendicant … should focus on some other basis of meditation connected with the skillful …
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno yaṁ nimittaṁ āgamma yaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto uppajjanti pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tamhā nimittā aññaṁ nimittaṁ manasi kātabbaṁ kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ. Tassa tamhā nimittā aññaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho palagaṇḍo vā palagaṇḍantevāsī vā sukhumāya āṇiyā oḷārikaṁ āṇiṁ abhinihaneyya abhinīhareyya abhinivatteyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno yaṁ nimittaṁ āgamma yaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto uppajjanti pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tamhā nimittā aññaṁ nimittaṁ manasi kātabbaṁ kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ. Tassa tamhā nimittā aññaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati.
[¶5] Now, suppose that mendicant is focusing on some other subject connected with the skillful, but bad, unskillful thoughts connected with desire, hate, and delusion keep coming up. They should examine the drawbacks of those thoughts: ‘So these thoughts are unskillful, they’re blameworthy, and they result in suffering.’ As they do so, those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. Suppose there was a woman or man who was young, youthful, and fond of adornments. If the carcass of a snake or a dog or a human were hung around their neck, they’d be horrified, repelled, and disgusted. In the same way, a mendicant … should examine the drawbacks of those thoughts …
> Pali: Tassa ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno tamhā nimittā aññaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ ādīnavo upaparikkhitabbo: ‘itipime vitakkā akusalā, itipime vitakkā sāvajjā, itipime vitakkā dukkhavipākā’ti. Tassa tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ ādīnavaṁ upaparikkhato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, itthī vā puriso vā daharo yuvā maṇḍanakajātiko ahikuṇapena vā kukkurakuṇapena vā manussakuṇapena vā kaṇṭhe āsattena aṭṭiyeyya harāyeyya jiguccheyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, tassa ce bhikkhuno tamhāpi nimittā aññaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ ādīnavo upaparikkhitabbo: ‘itipime vitakkā akusalā, itipime vitakkā sāvajjā, itipime vitakkā dukkhavipākā’ti. Tassa tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ ādīnavaṁ upaparikkhato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati.
[¶6] Now, suppose that mendicant is examining the drawbacks of those thoughts, but bad, unskillful thoughts connected with desire, hate, and delusion keep coming up. They should try to forget and ignore them. As they do so, those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. Suppose there was a person with clear eyes, and some undesirable sights came into their range of vision. They’d just close their eyes or look away. In the same way, a mendicant … those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end …
> Pali: Tassa ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno tesampi vitakkānaṁ ādīnavaṁ upaparikkhato uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ asatiamanasikāro āpajjitabbo. Tassa tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ asatiamanasikāraṁ āpajjato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, cakkhumā puriso āpāthagatānaṁ rūpānaṁ adassanakāmo assa; so nimīleyya vā aññena vā apalokeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, tassa ce bhikkhuno tesampi vitakkānaṁ ādīnavaṁ upaparikkhato uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati.
[¶7] Now, suppose that mendicant is ignoring and forgetting about those thoughts, but bad, unskillful thoughts connected with desire, hate, and delusion keep coming up. They should focus on stopping the formation of those thoughts. As they do so, those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. Suppose there was a person walking quickly. They’d think: ‘Why am I walking so quickly? Why don’t I slow down?’ So they’d slow down. They’d think: ‘Why am I walking slowly? Why don’t I stand still?’ So they’d stand still. They’d think: ‘Why am I standing still? Why don’t I sit down?’ So they’d sit down. They’d think: ‘Why am I sitting? Why don’t I lie down?’ So they’d lie down. And so that person would shun successively coarser postures and adopt more subtle ones.
> Pali: Tassa ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno tesampi vitakkānaṁ asatiamanasikāraṁ āpajjato uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṁ manasikātabbaṁ. Tassa tesaṁ vitakkānaṁ vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṁ manasikaroto ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sīghaṁ gaccheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ sīghaṁ gacchāmi? Yannūnāhaṁ saṇikaṁ gaccheyyan’ti. So saṇikaṁ gaccheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ saṇikaṁ gacchāmi? Yannūnāhaṁ tiṭṭheyyan’ti. So tiṭṭheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ ṭhito? Yannūnāhaṁ nisīdeyyan’ti. So nisīdeyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ nisinno? Yannūnāhaṁ nipajjeyyan’ti. So nipajjeyya. Evañhi so, bhikkhave, puriso oḷārikaṁ oḷārikaṁ iriyāpathaṁ abhinivajjetvā sukhumaṁ sukhumaṁ iriyāpathaṁ kappeyya.
[¶8] In the same way, a mendicant … those thoughts are given up and come to an end …
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, tassa ce bhikkhuno tesampi vitakkānaṁ asatiamanasikāraṁ āpajjato uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati.
[¶9] Now, suppose that mendicant is focusing on stopping the formation of those thoughts, but bad, unskillful thoughts connected with desire, hate, and delusion keep coming up. With teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of the mouth, they should squeeze, squash, and crush mind with mind. As they do so, those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. It’s like a strong man who grabs a weaker man by the head or throat or shoulder and squeezes, squashes, and crushes them. In the same way, a mendicant … with teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of the mouth, should squeeze, squash, and crush mind with mind. As they do so, those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi.
> Pali: Tassa ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno tesampi vitakkānaṁ vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṁ manasikaroto uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā dantebhidantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhitabbaṁ abhinippīḷetabbaṁ abhisantāpetabbaṁ. Tassa dantebhidantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, balavā puriso dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ sīse vā gale vā khandhe vā gahetvā abhiniggaṇheyya abhinippīḷeyya abhisantāpeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, tassa ce bhikkhuno tesampi vitakkānaṁ vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṁ manasikaroto uppajjanteva pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi. Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā dantebhidantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhitabbaṁ abhinippīḷetabbaṁ abhisantāpetabbaṁ. Tassa dantebhidantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati.
[¶10] Now, take the mendicant who is focusing on some subject that gives rise to bad, unskillful thoughts connected with desire, hate, and delusion. They focus on some other subject connected with the skillful … They examine the drawbacks of those thoughts … They try to forget and ignore about those thoughts … They focus on stopping the formation of those thoughts … With teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of the mouth, they squeeze, squash, and crush mind with mind. When they succeed in each of these things, those bad thoughts are given up and come to an end. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. This is called a mendicant who is a master of the ways of thought. They will think what they want to think, and they won’t think what they don’t want to think. They’ve cut off craving, cast off the fetters, and by rightly comprehending conceit have made an end of suffering.”
> Pali: Yato kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno yaṁ nimittaṁ āgamma yaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto uppajjanti pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi, tassa tamhā nimittā aññaṁ nimittaṁ manasikaroto kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Tesampi vitakkānaṁ ādīnavaṁ upaparikkhato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Tesampi vitakkānaṁ asatiamanasikāraṁ āpajjato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Tesampi vitakkānaṁ vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṁ manasikaroto ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Dantebhidantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato ye pāpakā akusalā vitakkā chandūpasaṁhitāpi dosūpasaṁhitāpi mohūpasaṁhitāpi te pahīyanti te abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vasī vitakkapariyāyapathesu. Yaṁ vitakkaṁ ākaṅkhissati taṁ vitakkaṁ vitakkessati, yaṁ vitakkaṁ nākaṅkhissati na taṁ vitakkaṁ vitakkessati. Acchecchi taṇhaṁ, vivattayi saṁyojanaṁ, sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā”ti.
[¶11] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶12] > Pali: Vitakkasaṇṭhānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶13] > Pali: Sīhanādavaggo niṭṭhito dutiyo.
[¶14] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶15] > Pali: Cūḷasīhanādalomahaṁsavaro,
Mahācūḷadukkhakkhandhaanumānikasuttaṁ;
Khilapatthamadhupiṇḍikadvidhāvitakka,
Pañcanimittakathā puna vaggo.
## 21. MN 21 · The Simile of the Saw
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/21/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/21/#p-N
[¶0] MN 21 · The Simile of the Saw
> Pali: MN 21 · Kakacūpamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time, Venerable Phagguna of the Top-Knot was spending too long mixing closely with some nuns. So much so that if any mendicant criticized those nuns in his presence, Phagguna of the Top-Knot got angry and upset, and even instigated disciplinary proceedings. And if any mendicant criticized Phagguna of the Top-Knot in their presence, those nuns got angry and upset, and even instigated disciplinary proceedings. That’s how close Phagguna of the Top-Knot was with those nuns.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā moḷiyaphagguno bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ ativelaṁ saṁsaṭṭho viharati. Evaṁ saṁsaṭṭho āyasmā moḷiyaphagguno bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ viharati— sace koci bhikkhu āyasmato moḷiyaphaggunassa sammukhā tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, tenāyasmā moḷiyaphagguno kupito anattamano adhikaraṇampi karoti. Sace pana koci bhikkhu tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ sammukhā āyasmato moḷiyaphaggunassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, tena tā bhikkhuniyo kupitā anattamanā adhikaraṇampi karonti. Evaṁ saṁsaṭṭho āyasmā moḷiyaphagguno bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ viharati.
[¶3] Then a mendicant went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what was going on.
> Pali: Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “āyasmā, bhante, moḷiyaphagguno bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ ativelaṁ saṁsaṭṭho viharati. Evaṁ saṁsaṭṭho, bhante, āyasmā moḷiyaphagguno bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ viharati— sace koci bhikkhu āyasmato moḷiyaphaggunassa sammukhā tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, tenāyasmā moḷiyaphagguno kupito anattamano adhikaraṇampi karoti. Sace pana koci bhikkhu tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ sammukhā āyasmato moḷiyaphaggunassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, tena tā bhikkhuniyo kupitā anattamanā adhikaraṇampi karonti. Evaṁ saṁsaṭṭho, bhante, āyasmā moḷiyaphagguno bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ viharatī”ti.
[¶4] So the Buddha addressed one of the monks, “Please, monk, in my name tell the mendicant Phagguna of the Top-Knot that the Teacher summons him.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena moḷiyaphaggunaṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantehi: ‘satthā taṁ, āvuso phagguna, āmantetī’”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, sir,” that monk replied. He went to Phagguna of the Top-Knot and said to him, “Reverend Phagguna, the Teacher summons you.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā yenāyasmā moḷiyaphagguno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ moḷiyaphaggunaṁ etadavoca: “satthā taṁ, āvuso phagguna, āmantetī”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, reverend,” Phagguna replied. He went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā moḷiyaphagguno tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ moḷiyaphaggunaṁ bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶7] “Is it really true, Phagguna, that you’ve been spending too long mixing closely with some nuns? So much so that if any mendicant criticizes those nuns in your presence, you get angry and upset, and even instigate disciplinary proceedings? And if any mendicant criticizes you in those nuns’ presence, they get angry and upset, and even instigate disciplinary proceedings? Is that how close you’ve become with those nuns?”
> Pali: “Saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, phagguna, bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ ativelaṁ saṁsaṭṭho viharasi? Evaṁ saṁsaṭṭho kira tvaṁ, phagguna, bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ viharasi— sace koci bhikkhu tuyhaṁ sammukhā tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, tena tvaṁ kupito anattamano adhikaraṇampi karosi. Sace pana koci bhikkhu tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ sammukhā tuyhaṁ avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, tena tā bhikkhuniyo kupitā anattamanā adhikaraṇampi karonti. Evaṁ saṁsaṭṭho kira tvaṁ, phagguna, bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ viharasī”ti?
[¶8] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti.
[¶9] “Phagguna, are you not a gentleman who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness?”
> Pali: “Nanu tvaṁ, phagguna, kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito”ti?
[¶10] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti.
[¶11] “As such, it’s not appropriate for you to mix so closely with those nuns. So if anyone criticizes those nuns in your presence, you should give up any desires or thoughts of domestic life. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘My mind will not degenerate. I will blurt out no bad words. I will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: “Na kho te etaṁ, phagguna, patirūpaṁ kulaputtassa saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitassa, yaṁ tvaṁ bhikkhunīhi saddhiṁ ativelaṁ saṁsaṭṭho vihareyyāsi. Tasmātiha, phagguna, tava cepi koci sammukhā tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyya, tatrāpi tvaṁ, phagguna, ye gehasitā chandā ye gehasitā vitakkā te pajaheyyāsi. Tatrāpi te, phagguna, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na ceva me cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāmi, hitānukampī ca viharissāmi mettacitto, na dosantaro’ti. Evañhi te, phagguna, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶12] So even if someone strikes those nuns with fists, stones, rods, and swords in your presence, you should give up any desires or thoughts of domestic life. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘My mind will not degenerate. I will blurt out no bad words. I will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, phagguna, tava cepi koci sammukhā tāsaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ pāṇinā pahāraṁ dadeyya, leḍḍunā pahāraṁ dadeyya, daṇḍena pahāraṁ dadeyya, satthena pahāraṁ dadeyya. Tatrāpi tvaṁ, phagguna, ye gehasitā chandā ye gehasitā vitakkā te pajaheyyāsi. Tatrāpi te, phagguna, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ ‘na ceva me cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāmi, hitānukampī ca viharissāmi mettacitto, na dosantaro’ti. Evañhi te, phagguna, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶13] So if anyone criticizes you in your presence, you should give up any desires or thoughts of domestic life. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘My mind will not degenerate. I will blurt out no bad words. I will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, phagguna, tava cepi koci sammukhā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyya, tatrāpi tvaṁ, phagguna, ye gehasitā chandā ye gehasitā vitakkā te pajaheyyāsi. Tatrāpi te, phagguna, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ ‘na ceva me cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāmi, hitānukampī ca viharissāmi mettacitto, na dosantaro’ti. Evañhi te, phagguna, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶14] So Phagguna, even if someone strikes you with fists, stones, rods, and swords, you should give up any desires or thoughts of domestic life. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘My mind will not degenerate. I will blurt out no bad words. I will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate.’ That’s how you should train.”
> Pali: Tasmātiha, phagguna, tava cepi koci pāṇinā pahāraṁ dadeyya, leḍḍunā pahāraṁ dadeyya, daṇḍena pahāraṁ dadeyya, satthena pahāraṁ dadeyya, tatrāpi tvaṁ, phagguna, ye gehasitā chandā ye gehasitā vitakkā te pajaheyyāsi. Tatrāpi te, phagguna, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ ‘na ceva me cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāmi, hitānukampī ca viharissāmi mettacitto, na dosantaro’ti. Evañhi te, phagguna, sikkhitabban”ti.
[¶15] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶16] “Mendicants, I used to be satisfied with the mendicants. Once, I addressed them: ‘I eat my food in one sitting per day. Doing so, I find that I’m healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. You too should eat your food in one sitting per day. Doing so, you’ll find that you’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably.’ I didn’t have to keep on instructing those mendicants; I just had to prompt their mindfulness.
> Pali: “ārādhayiṁsu vata me, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ekaṁ samayaṁ cittaṁ. Idhāhaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhū āmantesiṁ— ahaṁ kho, bhikkhave, ekāsanabhojanaṁ bhuñjāmi. Ekāsanabhojanaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhuñjamāno appābādhatañca sañjānāmi appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Etha tumhepi, bhikkhave, ekāsanabhojanaṁ bhuñjatha. Ekāsanabhojanaṁ kho, bhikkhave, tumhepi bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānissatha appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañcāti. Na me, bhikkhave, tesu bhikkhūsu anusāsanī karaṇīyā ahosi; satuppādakaraṇīyameva me, bhikkhave, tesu bhikkhūsu ahosi.
[¶17] Suppose a chariot stood harnessed to thoroughbreds at a level crossroads, with a goad ready. A deft horse trainer, a master charioteer, might mount the chariot, taking the reins in his right hand and goad in the left. He’d drive out and back wherever he wishes, whenever he wishes.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, subhūmiyaṁ catumahāpathe ājaññaratho yutto assa ṭhito odhastapatodo. Tamenaṁ dakkho yoggācariyo assadammasārathi abhiruhitvā, vāmena hatthena rasmiyo gahetvā, dakkhiṇena hatthena patodaṁ gahetvā, yenicchakaṁ yadicchakaṁ sāreyyapi paccāsāreyyapi.
[¶18] In the same way, I didn’t have to keep on instructing those mendicants; I just had to prompt their mindfulness. So, mendicants, you too should give up what’s unskillful and devote yourselves to skillful qualities. In this way you’ll achieve growth, improvement, and maturity in this teaching and training.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, na me tesu bhikkhūsu anusāsanī karaṇīyā ahosi, satuppādakaraṇīyameva me, bhikkhave, tesu bhikkhūsu ahosi. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, tumhepi akusalaṁ pajahatha, kusalesu dhammesu āyogaṁ karotha. Evañhi tumhepi imasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjissatha.
[¶19] Suppose that not far from a town or village there was a large grove of sal trees that was choked with castor-oil weeds. Then along comes a person who wants to help protect and nurture that grove. They’d cut down the crooked sal saplings that were robbing the sap, and throw them out. They’d clean up the interior of the grove, and properly care for the straight, well-formed sal saplings. In this way, in due course, that sal grove would grow, increase, and mature.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre mahantaṁ sālavanaṁ. Tañcassa eḷaṇḍehi sañchannaṁ. Tassa kocideva puriso uppajjeyya atthakāmo hitakāmo yogakkhemakāmo. So yā tā sālalaṭṭhiyo kuṭilā ojāpaharaṇiyo tā chetvā bahiddhā nīhareyya, antovanaṁ suvisodhitaṁ visodheyya. Yā pana tā sālalaṭṭhiyo ujukā sujātā tā sammā parihareyya. Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, sālavanaṁ aparena samayena vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjeyya.
[¶20] In the same way, mendicants, you too should give up what’s unskillful and devote yourselves to skillful qualities. In this way you’ll achieve growth, improvement, and maturity in this teaching and training.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, tumhepi akusalaṁ pajahatha, kusalesu dhammesu āyogaṁ karotha. Evañhi tumhepi imasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjissatha.
[¶21] Once upon a time, mendicants, right here in Sāvatthī there was a housewife named Vedehikā. She had this good reputation: ‘The housewife Vedehikā is gentle, placid, and calm.’ Now, Vedehikā had a bonded maid named Kāḷī who was deft, tireless, and well-organized in her work.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, imissāyeva sāvatthiyā vedehikā nāma gahapatānī ahosi. Vedehikāya, bhikkhave, gahapatāniyā evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘soratā vedehikā gahapatānī, nivātā vedehikā gahapatānī, upasantā vedehikā gahapatānī’ti. Vedehikāya kho pana, bhikkhave, gahapatāniyā kāḷī nāma dāsī ahosi dakkhā analasā susaṁvihitakammantā.
[¶22] Then Kāḷī thought, ‘My mistress has a good reputation as being gentle, placid, and calm. But does she actually have anger in her and just not show it? Or does she have no anger? Or is it just because my work is well-organized that she doesn’t show anger, even though she still has it inside? Why don’t I test my mistress?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, kāḷiyā dāsiyā etadahosi: ‘mayhaṁ kho ayyāya evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: “soratā vedehikā gahapatānī, nivātā vedehikā gahapatānī, upasantā vedehikā gahapatānī”ti. Kiṁ nu kho me ayyā santaṁyeva nu kho ajjhattaṁ kopaṁ na pātukaroti udāhu asantaṁ udāhu mayhamevete kammantā susaṁvihitā yena me ayyā santaṁyeva ajjhattaṁ kopaṁ na pātukaroti, no asantaṁ? Yannūnāhaṁ ayyaṁ vīmaṁseyyan’ti.
[¶23] So Kāḷī got up during the day. Vedehikā said to her, ‘Oi wench, Kāḷī!’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, kāḷī dāsī divā uṭṭhāsi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vedehikā gahapatānī kāḷiṁ dāsiṁ etadavoca: ‘he je kāḷī’ti.
[¶24] ‘What is it, ma’am?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ, ayye’ti?
[¶25] ‘You’re getting up in the day—what’s up with you, wench?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ, je, divā uṭṭhāsī’ti?
[¶26] ‘Nothing, ma’am.’
> Pali: ‘Na khvayye, kiñcī’ti.
[¶27] ‘Oh, so nothing’s up, you naughty maid, but you get up in the day!’ Angry and upset, she scowled.
> Pali: ‘No vata re kiñci, pāpi dāsi, divā uṭṭhāsī’ti kupitā anattamanā bhākuṭiṁ akāsi.
[¶28] Then Kāḷī thought, ‘My mistress actually has anger in her and just doesn’t show it; it’s not that she has no anger. It’s just because my work is well-organized that she doesn’t show anger, even though she still has it inside. Why don’t I test my mistress further?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, kāḷiyā dāsiyā etadahosi: ‘santaṁyeva kho me ayyā ajjhattaṁ kopaṁ na pātukaroti, no asantaṁ; mayhamevete kammantā susaṁvihitā, yena me ayyā santaṁyeva ajjhattaṁ kopaṁ na pātukaroti, no asantaṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ bhiyyoso mattāya ayyaṁ vīmaṁseyyan’ti.
[¶29] So Kāḷī got up later in the day. Vedehikā said to her, ‘Oi wench, Kāḷī!’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, kāḷī dāsī divātaraṁyeva uṭṭhāsi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vedehikā gahapatānī kāḷiṁ dāsiṁ etadavoca: ‘he je kāḷī’ti.
[¶30] ‘What is it, ma’am?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ, ayye’ti?
[¶31] ‘You’re getting up later in the day—what’s up with you, wench?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ, je, divātaraṁ uṭṭhāsī’ti?
[¶32] ‘Nothing, ma’am.’
> Pali: ‘Na khvayye, kiñcī’ti.
[¶33] ‘Oh, so nothing’s up, you naughty maid, but you get up later in the day!’ Angry and upset, she blurted out angry words.
> Pali: ‘No vata re kiñci, pāpi dāsi, divātaraṁ uṭṭhāsī’ti kupitā anattamanā anattamanavācaṁ nicchāresi.
[¶34] Then Kāḷī thought, ‘My mistress actually has anger in her and just doesn’t show it; it’s not that she has no anger. It’s just because my work is well-organized that she doesn’t show anger, even though she still has it inside. Why don’t I test my mistress further?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, kāḷiyā dāsiyā etadahosi: ‘santaṁyeva kho me ayyā ajjhattaṁ kopaṁ na pātukaroti, no asantaṁ. Mayhamevete kammantā susaṁvihitā, yena me ayyā santaṁyeva ajjhattaṁ kopaṁ na pātukaroti, no asantaṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ bhiyyoso mattāya ayyaṁ vīmaṁseyyan’ti.
[¶35] So Kāḷī got up even later in the day. Vedehikā said to her, ‘Oi wench, Kāḷī!’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, kāḷī dāsī divātaraṁyeva uṭṭhāsi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vedehikā gahapatānī kāḷiṁ dāsiṁ etadavoca: ‘he je kāḷī’ti.
[¶36] ‘What is it, ma’am?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ, ayye’ti?
[¶37] ‘You’re getting up even later in the day—what’s up with you, wench?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ, je, divā uṭṭhāsī’ti?
[¶38] ‘Nothing, ma’am.’
> Pali: ‘Na khvayye, kiñcī’ti.
[¶39] ‘Oh, so nothing’s up, you naughty maid, but you get up even later in the day!’ Angry and upset, she grabbed a door-pin and hit Kāḷī on the head, cracking it open.
> Pali: ‘No vata re kiñci, pāpi dāsi, divā uṭṭhāsī’ti kupitā anattamanā aggaḷasūciṁ gahetvā sīse pahāraṁ adāsi, sīsaṁ vobhindi.
[¶40] Then Kāḷī, with blood pouring from her cracked skull, denounced her mistress to the neighbors, ‘See, ladies, what the gentle one did! See what the placid one did! See what the calm one did! How on earth can she grab a door-pin and hit her only maid on the head, cracking it open, just for getting up late?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, kāḷī dāsī bhinnena sīsena lohitena galantena paṭivissakānaṁ ujjhāpesi: ‘passathayye, soratāya kammaṁ; passathayye, nivātāya kammaṁ, passathayye, upasantāya kammaṁ. Kathañhi nāma ekadāsikāya divā uṭṭhāsīti kupitā anattamanā aggaḷasūciṁ gahetvā sīse pahāraṁ dassati, sīsaṁ vobhindissatī’ti.
[¶41] Then after some time the housewife Vedehikā got this bad reputation: ‘The housewife Vedehikā is fierce, ill-tempered, and not calm at all.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vedehikāya gahapatāniyā aparena samayena evaṁ pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchi: ‘caṇḍī vedehikā gahapatānī, anivātā vedehikā gahapatānī, anupasantā vedehikā gahapatānī’ti.
[¶42] In the same way, a mendicant may be the gentlest of the gentle, the most placid of the placid, the calmest of the calm, so long as they don’t encounter any disagreeable criticism. But it’s when they encounter disagreeable criticism that you’ll know whether they’re really gentle, placid, and calm. I don’t say that a mendicant is easy to admonish if they make themselves easy to admonish only for the sake of robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. Why is that? Because when they don’t get robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick, they’re no longer easy to admonish. But when a mendicant is easy to admonish purely because they honor, respect, revere, worship, and venerate the teaching, then I say that they’re easy to admonish. So, mendicants, you should train yourselves: ‘We will be easy to admonish purely because we honor, respect, revere, worship, and venerate the teaching.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco bhikkhu tāvadeva soratasorato hoti nivātanivāto hoti upasantūpasanto hoti yāva na amanāpā vacanapathā phusanti. Yato ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ amanāpā vacanapathā phusanti, atha bhikkhu ‘sorato’ti veditabbo, ‘nivāto’ti veditabbo, ‘upasanto’ti veditabbo. Nāhaṁ taṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ ‘suvaco’ti vadāmi yo cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārahetu suvaco hoti, sovacassataṁ āpajjati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṁ alabhamāno na suvaco hoti, na sovacassataṁ āpajjati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammaṁyeva sakkaronto, dhammaṁ garuṁ karonto, dhammaṁ mānento, dhammaṁ pūjento, dhammaṁ apacāyamāno suvaco hoti, sovacassataṁ āpajjati, tamahaṁ ‘suvaco’ti vadāmi. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ‘dhammaṁyeva sakkarontā, dhammaṁ garuṁ karontā, dhammaṁ mānentā, dhammaṁ pūjentā, dhammaṁ apacāyamānā suvacā bhavissāma, sovacassataṁ āpajjissāmā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶43] Mendicants, there are these five ways in which others might criticize you. Their speech may be timely or untimely, true or false, gentle or harsh, beneficial or harmful, from a heart of love or from secret hate. When others criticize you, they may do so in any of these ways. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘Our minds will not degenerate. We will blurt out no bad words. We will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate. We will meditate spreading a heart of love to that individual. And with them as a basis, we will meditate spreading a heart full of love to everyone in the world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Pañcime, bhikkhave, vacanapathā yehi vo pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ— kālena vā akālena vā; bhūtena vā abhūtena vā; saṇhena vā pharusena vā; atthasaṁhitena vā anatthasaṁhitena vā; mettacittā vā dosantarā vā. Kālena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ akālena vā; bhūtena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ abhūtena vā; saṇhena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ pharusena vā; atthasaṁhitena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ anatthasaṁhitena vā; mettacittā vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ dosantarā vā. Tatrāpi vo, bhikkhave, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na ceva no cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāma, hitānukampī ca viharissāma mettacittā, na dosantarā. Tañca puggalaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā pharitvā viharissāma, tadārammaṇañca sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cittena vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharissāmā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶44] Suppose a person was to come along carrying a spade and basket and say, ‘I shall make this great earth be without earth!’ And they’d dig all over, scatter all over, spit all over, and urinate all over, saying, ‘Be without earth! Be without earth!’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso āgaccheyya kudālapiṭakaṁ ādāya. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ imaṁ mahāpathaviṁ apathaviṁ karissāmī’ti. So tatra tatra vikhaṇeyya, tatra tatra vikireyya, tatra tatra oṭṭhubheyya, tatra tatra omutteyya: ‘apathavī bhavasi, apathavī bhavasī’ti.
[¶45] What do you think, mendicants? Could that person make this great earth be without earth?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso imaṁ mahāpathaviṁ apathaviṁ kareyyā”ti?
[¶46] “No, sir. Why is that? Because this great earth is deep and limitless. It’s not easy to make it be without earth. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Ayañhi, bhante, mahāpathavī gambhīrā appameyyā. Sā na sukarā apathavī kātuṁ; yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶47] “In the same way, there are these five ways in which others might criticize you. Their speech may be timely or untimely, true or false, gentle or harsh, beneficial or harmful, from a heart of love or from secret hate. When others criticize you, they may do so in any of these ways. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘Our minds will not degenerate. We will blurt out no bad words. We will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate. We will meditate spreading a heart of love to that individual. And with them as a basis, we will meditate spreading a heart like the earth to everyone in the world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, pañcime vacanapathā yehi vo pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ— kālena vā akālena vā; bhūtena vā abhūtena vā; saṇhena vā pharusena vā; atthasaṁhitena vā anatthasaṁhitena vā; mettacittā vā dosantarā vā. Kālena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ akālena vā; bhūtena vā bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ abhūtena vā; saṇhena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ pharusena vā; atthasaṁhitena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ anatthasaṁhitena vā; mettacittā vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ dosantarā vā. Tatrāpi vo, bhikkhave, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na ceva no cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāma, hitānukampī ca viharissāma mettacittā na dosantarā. Tañca puggalaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā pharitvā viharissāma, tadārammaṇañca sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ pathavisamena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharissāmā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶48] Suppose a person was to come along with dye such as red lac, turmeric, indigo, or rose madder, and say, ‘I shall draw pictures in space, making pictures appear there.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso āgaccheyya lākhaṁ vā haliddiṁ vā nīlaṁ vā mañjiṭṭhaṁ vā ādāya. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ imasmiṁ ākāse rūpaṁ likhissāmi, rūpapātubhāvaṁ karissāmī’ti.
[¶49] What do you think, mendicants? Could that person draw pictures in space?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso imasmiṁ ākāse rūpaṁ likheyya, rūpapātubhāvaṁ kareyyā”ti?
[¶50] “No, sir. Why is that? Because space has no form or appearance. It’s not easy to draw pictures there. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Ayañhi, bhante, ākāso arūpī anidassano. Tattha na sukaraṁ rūpaṁ likhituṁ, rūpapātubhāvaṁ kātuṁ; yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶51] “In the same way, if others criticize you in any of these five ways … you should train like this: ‘… We will meditate spreading a heart of love to that person. And with them as a basis, we will meditate spreading a heart like space to everyone in the world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, pañcime vacanapathā yehi vo pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ kālena vā akālena vā …pe… tadārammaṇañca sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ ākāsasamena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharissāmā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶52] Suppose a person was to come along carrying a blazing grass torch, and say, ‘I shall burn and scorch the Ganges River with this blazing grass torch.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso āgaccheyya ādittaṁ tiṇukkaṁ ādāya. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ imāya ādittāya tiṇukkāya gaṅgaṁ nadiṁ santāpessāmi samparitāpessāmī’ti.
[¶53] What do you think, mendicants? Could that person burn and scorch the Ganges River with a blazing grass torch?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso ādittāya tiṇukkāya gaṅgaṁ nadiṁ santāpeyya samparitāpeyyā”ti?
[¶54] “No, sir. Why is that? Because the Ganges River is deep and limitless. It’s not easy to burn and scorch it with a blazing grass torch. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Gaṅgā hi, bhante, nadī gambhīrā appameyyā. Sā na sukarā ādittāya tiṇukkāya santāpetuṁ samparitāpetuṁ; yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶55] “In the same way, if others criticize you in any of these five ways … you should train like this: ‘… We will meditate spreading a heart of love to that individual. And with them as a basis, we will meditate spreading a heart like the Ganges to everyone in the world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, pañcime vacanapathā yehi vo pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ kālena vā akālena vā …pe… tadārammaṇañca sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ gaṅgāsamena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharissāmā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶56] Suppose there was a catskin bag that was rubbed, well-rubbed, very well-rubbed, soft, silky, rid of rustling and crackling. Then a person comes along carrying a stick or a stone, and says, ‘I shall make this soft catskin bag rustle and crackle with this stick or stone.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, biḷārabhastā madditā sumadditā suparimadditā, mudukā tūlinī chinnasassarā chinnabhabbharā. Atha puriso āgaccheyya kaṭṭhaṁ vā kathalaṁ vā ādāya. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ imaṁ biḷārabhastaṁ madditaṁ sumadditaṁ suparimadditaṁ, mudukaṁ tūliniṁ, chinnasassaraṁ chinnabhabbharaṁ kaṭṭhena vā kathalena vā sarasaraṁ karissāmi bharabharaṁ karissāmī’ti.
[¶57] What do you think, mendicants? Could that person make that soft catskin bag rustle and crackle with that stick or stone?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso amuṁ biḷārabhastaṁ madditaṁ sumadditaṁ suparimadditaṁ, mudukaṁ tūliniṁ, chinnasassaraṁ chinnabhabbharaṁ kaṭṭhena vā kathalena vā sarasaraṁ kareyya, bharabharaṁ kareyyā”ti?
[¶58] “No, sir. Why is that? Because that catskin bag is rubbed, well-rubbed, very well-rubbed, soft, silky, rid of rustling and crackling. It’s not easy to make it rustle or crackle with a stick or stone. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amu hi, bhante, biḷārabhastā madditā sumadditā suparimadditā, mudukā tūlinī, chinnasassarā chinnabhabbharā. Sā na sukarā kaṭṭhena vā kathalena vā sarasaraṁ kātuṁ bharabharaṁ kātuṁ; yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶59] “In the same way, there are these five ways in which others might criticize you. Their speech may be timely or untimely, true or false, gentle or harsh, beneficial or harmful, from a heart of love or from secret hate. When others criticize you, they may do so in any of these ways. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘Our minds will not degenerate. We will blurt out no bad words. We will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate. We will meditate spreading a heart of love to that individual. And with them as a basis, we will meditate spreading a heart like a catskin bag to everyone in the world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, pañcime vacanapathā yehi vo pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ kālena vā akālena vā; bhūtena vā abhūtena vā; saṇhena vā pharusena vā; atthasaṁhitena vā anatthasaṁhitena vā; mettacittā vā dosantarā vā. Kālena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ akālena vā; bhūtena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ abhūtena vā; saṇhena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ pharusena vā; atthasaṁhitena vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ anatthasaṁhitena vā; mettacittā vā, bhikkhave, pare vadamānā vadeyyuṁ dosantarā vā. Tatrāpi vo, bhikkhave, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na ceva no cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāma hitānukampī ca viharissāma mettacittā na dosantarā. Tañca puggalaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā pharitvā viharissāma, tadārammaṇañca sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ biḷārabhastāsamena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharissāmā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶60] Even if low-down bandits were to sever you limb from limb with a two-handed saw, anyone who had a malevolent thought on that account would not be following my instructions. If that happens, you should train like this: ‘Our minds will not degenerate. We will blurt out no bad words. We will remain full of sympathy, with a heart of love and no secret hate. We will meditate spreading a heart of love to that individual. And with them as a basis, we will meditate spreading a heart full of love to everyone in the world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi, bhikkhave, kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okanteyyuṁ, tatrāpi yo mano padūseyya, na me so tena sāsanakaro. Tatrāpi vo, bhikkhave, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na ceva no cittaṁ vipariṇataṁ bhavissati, na ca pāpikaṁ vācaṁ nicchāressāma, hitānukampī ca viharissāma mettacittā na dosantarā. Tañca puggalaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā pharitvā viharissāma tadārammaṇañca sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharissāmā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶61] If you frequently reflect on this advice on the simile of the saw, do you see any criticism, large or small, that you could not endure?”
> Pali: Imañca tumhe, bhikkhave, kakacūpamaṁ ovādaṁ abhikkhaṇaṁ manasi kareyyātha. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, taṁ vacanapathaṁ, aṇuṁ vā thūlaṁ vā, yaṁ tumhe nādhivāseyyāthā”ti?
[¶62] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶63] “So, mendicants, you should frequently reflect on this advice on the simile of the saw. This will be for your lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: “Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, imaṁ kakacūpamaṁ ovādaṁ abhikkhaṇaṁ manasikarotha. Taṁ vo bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶64] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶65] > Pali: Kakacūpamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 22. MN 22 · The Simile of the Cobra · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/22/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/22/#p-N
[¶0] MN 22 · The Simile of the Cobra
> Pali: MN 22 · Alagaddūpamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time a mendicant named Ariṭṭha, who had previously been a vulture trapper, had the following harmful misconception: “As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, the acts that he says are obstructions are not really obstructions for the one who performs them.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena ariṭṭhassa nāma bhikkhuno gaddhabādhipubbassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ hoti: “tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā”ti.
[¶3] Several mendicants heard this rumour. They went up to Ariṭṭha and said to him, “Is it really true, Reverend Ariṭṭha, that you have such a harmful misconception: ‘As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, the acts that he says are obstructions are not really obstructions for the one who performs them’?”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho sambahulā bhikkhū: “ariṭṭhassa kira nāma bhikkhuno gaddhabādhipubbassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’”ti. Atha kho te bhikkhū yena ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etadavocuṁ: “saccaṁ kira te, āvuso ariṭṭha, evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’”ti.
[¶4] “Indeed, reverends. As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, the acts that he says are obstructions are not really obstructions for the one who performs them.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā”ti.
[¶5] Then, wishing to dissuade Ariṭṭha from his view, the mendicants pursued, pressed, and grilled him, “Don’t say that, Ariṭṭha! Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that. In many ways the Buddha has said that obstructive acts are obstructive, and that they really do obstruct the one who performs them. The Buddha says that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks. With the similes of a skeleton … a scrap of meat … a grass torch … a pit of glowing coals … a dream … borrowed goods … fruit on a tree … a butcher’s knife and chopping board … swords and spears … a cobra’s head, the Buddha says that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks.”
> Pali: Atha kho tepi bhikkhū ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetukāmā samanuyuñjanti samanugāhanti samanubhāsanti: “mā hevaṁ, āvuso ariṭṭha, avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi; na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Anekapariyāyenāvuso ariṭṭha, antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā, alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāya. Appassādā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo. Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … maṁsapesūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … tiṇukkūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … supinakūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … yācitakūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … rukkhaphalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … asisūnūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … sattisūlūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā … sappasirūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo”ti.
[¶6] But even though the mendicants pursued, pressed, and grilled him in this way, Ariṭṭha obstinately stuck to his misconception and insisted on it.
> Pali: Evampi kho ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo tehi bhikkhūhi samanuyuñjiyamāno samanugāhiyamāno samanubhāsiyamāno tadeva pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: “evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā”ti.
[¶7] When they weren’t able to dissuade Ariṭṭha from his view, the mendicants went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Yato kho te bhikkhū nāsakkhiṁsu ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetuṁ, atha kho te bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ariṭṭhassa nāma, bhante, bhikkhuno gaddhabādhipubbassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’ti. Assumha kho mayaṁ, bhante: ‘ariṭṭhassa kira nāma bhikkhuno gaddhabādhipubbassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ— tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’ti.
[¶8] > Pali: Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, yena ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etadavocumha: ‘saccaṁ kira te, āvuso ariṭṭha, evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ— tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’ti?
[¶9] > Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo amhe etadavoca: ‘evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’ti. Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetukāmā samanuyuñjimha samanugāhimha samanubhāsimha: ‘mā hevaṁ, āvuso ariṭṭha, avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi; na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Anekapariyāyenāvuso ariṭṭha, antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā, alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāya. Appassādā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo. Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā …pe… sappasirūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti.
[¶10] > Pali: Evampi kho, bhante, ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo amhehi samanuyuñjiyamāno samanugāhiyamāno samanubhāsiyamāno tadeva pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’ti. Yato kho mayaṁ, bhante, nāsakkhimha ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetuṁ, atha mayaṁ etamatthaṁ bhagavato ārocemā”ti.
[¶11] So the Buddha addressed one of the monks, “Please, monk, in my name tell the mendicant Ariṭṭha, formerly a vulture trapper, that the Teacher summons him.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ āmantehi: ‘satthā taṁ, āvuso ariṭṭha, āmantetī’”ti.
[¶12] “Yes, sir,” that monk replied. He went to Ariṭṭha and said to him, “Reverend Ariṭṭha, the Teacher summons you.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā, yena ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etadavoca: “satthā taṁ, āvuso ariṭṭha, āmantetī”ti.
[¶13] “Yes, reverend,” Ariṭṭha replied. He went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him,
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶14] “Is it really true, Ariṭṭha, that you have such a harmful misconception: ‘As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, the acts that he says are obstructions are not really obstructions for the one who performs them’?”
> Pali: “saccaṁ kira te, ariṭṭha, evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’”ti?
[¶15] “Indeed, sir. As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, the acts that he says are obstructions are not really obstructions for the one who performs them.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi: ‘yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā te paṭisevato nālaṁ antarāyāyā’”ti.
[¶16] “Futile man, who on earth have you ever known me to teach in that way? Haven’t I said in many ways that obstructive acts are obstructive, and that they really do obstruct the one who performs them? I’ve said that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks. With the similes of a skeleton … a scrap of meat … a grass torch … a pit of glowing coals … a dream … borrowed goods … fruit on a tree … a butcher’s knife and chopping board … swords and spears … a cobra’s head, I’ve said that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks. But still you misrepresent me by your wrong grasp, harm yourself, and brim with much wickedness. This will be for your lasting harm and suffering.”
> Pali: “Kassa kho nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, mayā evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāsi? Nanu mayā, moghapurisa, anekapariyāyena antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā? Alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāya. Appassādā kāmā vuttā mayā, bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo. Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … maṁsapesūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … tiṇukkūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … supinakūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … yācitakūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … rukkhaphalūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … asisūnūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … sattisūlūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā … sappasirūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā, bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo. Atha ca pana tvaṁ, moghapurisa, attanā duggahitena amhe ceva abbhācikkhasi, attānañca khanasi, bahuñca apuññaṁ pasavasi. Tañhi te, moghapurisa, bhavissati dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶17] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants, “What do you think, mendicants? Has this mendicant Ariṭṭha kindled even a spark of ardor in this teaching and training?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nāyaṁ ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo usmīkatopi imasmiṁ dhammavinaye”ti?
[¶18] “How could that be, sir? No, sir.” When this was said, Ariṭṭha sat silent, dismayed, shoulders drooping, downcast, depressed, with nothing to say.
> Pali: “Kiñhi siyā, bhante; no hetaṁ, bhante”ti. Evaṁ vutte, ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo tuṇhībhūto maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho pajjhāyanto appaṭibhāno nisīdi.
[¶19] Knowing this, the Buddha said, “Futile man, you will be known by your own harmful misconception. I’ll question the mendicants about this.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ maṅkubhūtaṁ pattakkhandhaṁ adhomukhaṁ pajjhāyantaṁ appaṭibhānaṁ viditvā ariṭṭhaṁ bhikkhuṁ gaddhabādhipubbaṁ etadavoca: “paññāyissasi kho tvaṁ, moghapurisa, etena sakena pāpakena diṭṭhigatena. Idhāhaṁ bhikkhū paṭipucchissāmī”ti.
[¶20] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants, “Mendicants, do you understand my teaching as Ariṭṭha does, when he misrepresents me by his wrong grasp, harms himself, and brims with much wickedness?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “tumhepi me, bhikkhave, evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānātha yathāyaṁ ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo attanā duggahitena amhe ceva abbhācikkhati, attānañca khanati, bahuñca apuññaṁ pasavatī”ti?
[¶21] “No, sir. For in many ways the Buddha has told us that obstructive acts are obstructive, and that they really do obstruct the one who performs them. The Buddha has said that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks. With the similes of a skeleton … a cobra’s head, the Buddha has said that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Anekapariyāyena hi no, bhante, antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā; alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāya. Appassādā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo. Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā …pe… sappasirūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo”ti.
[¶22] “Good, good, mendicants! It’s good that you understand my teaching like this. For in many ways I have said that obstructive acts are obstructive …
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, bhikkhave, sādhu, kho me tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānātha. Anekapariyāyena hi kho, bhikkhave, antarāyikā dhammā vuttā mayā, alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāya.
[¶23] I’ve said that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks. But still this Ariṭṭha misrepresents me by his wrong grasp, harms himself, and brims with much wickedness. This will be for his lasting harm and suffering. Truly, mendicants, it is quite impossible to perform sensual acts without sensual desires, sensual perceptions, and sensual thoughts.
> Pali: Appassādā kāmā vuttā mayā, bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo. Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā …pe… sappasirūpamā kāmā vuttā mayā, bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo. Atha ca panāyaṁ ariṭṭho bhikkhu gaddhabādhipubbo attanā duggahitena amhe ceva abbhācikkhati, attānañca khanati, bahuñca apuññaṁ pasavati. Tañhi tassa moghapurisassa bhavissati dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya. So vata, bhikkhave, aññatreva kāmehi aññatra kāmasaññāya aññatra kāmavitakkehi kāme paṭisevissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶24] Take a futile person who memorizes the teaching— statements, mixed prose & verse, discussions, verses, inspired exclamations, legends, stories of past lives, amazing stories, and elaborations. But they don’t examine the meaning of those teachings with wisdom, and so don’t come to an acceptance of them after deliberation. They memorize the teaching for the sake of finding fault and winning debates. They don’t realize the goal for which they memorized them. Because they’re wrongly grasped, those teachings lead to their lasting harm and suffering. Why is that? Because of their wrong grasp of the teachings.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, ekacce moghapurisā dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti— suttaṁ, geyyaṁ, veyyākaraṇaṁ, gāthaṁ, udānaṁ, itivuttakaṁ, jātakaṁ, abbhutadhammaṁ, vedallaṁ. Te taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇitvā tesaṁ dhammānaṁ paññāya atthaṁ na upaparikkhanti. Tesaṁ te dhammā paññāya atthaṁ anupaparikkhataṁ na nijjhānaṁ khamanti. Te upārambhānisaṁsā ceva dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti itivādappamokkhānisaṁsā ca. Yassa catthāya dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhonti. Tesaṁ te dhammā duggahitā dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya saṁvattanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Duggahitattā, bhikkhave, dhammānaṁ.
[¶25] Suppose there was a person in need of a cobra. And while wandering in search of a cobra they’d see a big cobra, and grasp it by the coil or the tail. But that cobra would twist back and bite them on the hand or the arm or other major or minor limb, resulting in death or deadly pain. Why is that? Because of their wrong grasp of the cobra.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko alagaddagavesī alagaddapariyesanaṁ caramāno. So passeyya mahantaṁ alagaddaṁ. Tamenaṁ bhoge vā naṅguṭṭhe vā gaṇheyya. Tassa so alagaddo paṭiparivattitvā hatthe vā bāhāya vā aññatarasmiṁ vā aṅgapaccaṅge ḍaṁseyya. So tatonidānaṁ maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Duggahitattā, bhikkhave, alagaddassa.
[¶26] In the same way, a futile person memorizes the teaching … and those teachings lead to their lasting harm and suffering. Why is that? Because of their wrong grasp of the teachings.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacce moghapurisā dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti— suttaṁ, geyyaṁ, veyyākaraṇaṁ, gāthaṁ, udānaṁ, itivuttakaṁ, jātakaṁ, abbhutadhammaṁ, vedallaṁ. Te taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇitvā tesaṁ dhammānaṁ paññāya atthaṁ na upaparikkhanti. Tesaṁ te dhammā paññāya atthaṁ anupaparikkhataṁ na nijjhānaṁ khamanti. Te upārambhānisaṁsā ceva dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti itivādappamokkhānisaṁsā ca. Yassa catthāya dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhonti. Tesaṁ te dhammā duggahitā dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya saṁvattanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Duggahitattā, bhikkhave, dhammānaṁ.
[¶27] Now, take a gentleman who memorizes the teaching— statements, mixed prose & verse, discussions, verses, inspired exclamations, legends, stories of past lives, amazing stories, and elaborations. And once he’s memorized them, he examines their meaning with wisdom, and comes to an acceptance of them after deliberation. He doesn’t memorize the teaching for the sake of finding fault and winning debates. He realizes the goal for which he memorized them. Because they’re correctly grasped, those teachings lead to his lasting welfare and happiness. Why is that? Because of his correct grasp of the teachings.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacce kulaputtā dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti— suttaṁ, geyyaṁ, veyyākaraṇaṁ, gāthaṁ, udānaṁ, itivuttakaṁ, jātakaṁ, abbhutadhammaṁ, vedallaṁ. Te taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇitvā tesaṁ dhammānaṁ paññāya atthaṁ upaparikkhanti. Tesaṁ te dhammā paññāya atthaṁ upaparikkhataṁ nijjhānaṁ khamanti. Te na ceva upārambhānisaṁsā dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti na itivādappamokkhānisaṁsā ca. Yassa catthāya dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti tañcassa atthaṁ anubhonti. Tesaṁ te dhammā suggahitā dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya saṁvattanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Suggahitattā bhikkhave dhammānaṁ.
[¶28] Suppose there was a person in need of a cobra. And while wandering in search of a cobra they’d see a big cobra, and hold it down carefully with a cleft stick. Only then would they correctly grasp it by the neck. And even though that cobra might wrap its coils around that person’s hand or arm or some other major or minor limb, that wouldn’t result in death or deadly pain. Why is that? Because of their correct grasp of the cobra.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko alagaddagavesī alagaddapariyesanaṁ caramāno. So passeyya mahantaṁ alagaddaṁ. Tamenaṁ ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṁ niggaṇheyya. Ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṁ niggahitvā, gīvāya suggahitaṁ gaṇheyya. Kiñcāpi so, bhikkhave, alagaddo tassa purisassa hatthaṁ vā bāhaṁ vā aññataraṁ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṁ bhogehi paliveṭheyya, atha kho so neva tatonidānaṁ maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Suggahitattā, bhikkhave, alagaddassa.
[¶29] In the same way, a gentleman memorizes the teaching … and those teachings lead to his lasting welfare and happiness. Why is that? Because of his correct grasp of the teachings.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacce kulaputtā dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti— suttaṁ, geyyaṁ, veyyākaraṇaṁ, gāthaṁ, udānaṁ, itivuttakaṁ, jātakaṁ, abbhutadhammaṁ, vedallaṁ. Te taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇitvā tesaṁ dhammānaṁ paññāya atthaṁ upaparikkhanti. Tesaṁ te dhammā paññāya atthaṁ upaparikkhataṁ nijjhānaṁ khamanti. Te na ceva upārambhānisaṁsā dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti, na itivādappamokkhānisaṁsā ca. Yassa catthāya dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇanti, tañcassa atthaṁ anubhonti. Tesaṁ te dhammā suggahitā dīgharattaṁ atthāya hitāya sukhāya saṁvattanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Suggahitattā, bhikkhave, dhammānaṁ.
[¶30] So, mendicants, when you understand what I’ve said, you should remember it accordingly. But if I’ve said anything that you don’t understand, you should ask me about it, or some competent mendicants.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, yassa me bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājāneyyātha, tathā naṁ dhāreyyātha. Yassa ca pana me bhāsitassa atthaṁ na ājāneyyātha, ahaṁ vo tattha paṭipucchitabbo, ye vā panāssu viyattā bhikkhū.
[¶31] Mendicants, I will teach you a simile of the teaching as a raft: for crossing over, not for holding on. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: Kullūpamaṁ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāya. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶32] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶33] “Suppose there was a person traveling along the road. They’d see a large deluge, whose near shore was dubious and perilous, while the far shore was a sanctuary free of peril. But there was no ferryboat or bridge for crossing over. They’d think, ‘Why don’t I gather grass, sticks, branches, and leaves and make a raft? Riding on the raft, and paddling with my hands and feet, I can safely reach the far shore.’ And so they’d do exactly that. And when they’d crossed over to the far shore, they’d think, ‘This raft has been very helpful to me. Riding on the raft, and paddling with my hands and feet, I have safely crossed over to the far shore. Why don’t I hoist it on my head or pick it up on my shoulder and go wherever I want?’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso addhānamaggappaṭipanno. So passeyya mahantaṁ udakaṇṇavaṁ, orimaṁ tīraṁ sāsaṅkaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ, pārimaṁ tīraṁ khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ; na cassa nāvā santāraṇī uttarasetu vā apārā pāraṁ gamanāya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho mahāudakaṇṇavo, orimaṁ tīraṁ sāsaṅkaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ, pārimaṁ tīraṁ khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ; natthi ca nāvā santāraṇī uttarasetu vā apārā pāraṁ gamanāya. Yannūnāhaṁ tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṁ saṅkaḍḍhitvā, kullaṁ bandhitvā, taṁ kullaṁ nissāya hatthehi ca pādehi ca vāyamamāno sotthinā pāraṁ uttareyyan’ti. Atha kho so, bhikkhave, puriso tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṁ saṅkaḍḍhitvā, kullaṁ bandhitvā taṁ kullaṁ nissāya hatthehi ca pādehi ca vāyamamāno sotthinā pāraṁ uttareyya. Tassa purisassa uttiṇṇassa pāraṅgatassa evamassa: ‘bahukāro kho me ayaṁ kullo; imāhaṁ kullaṁ nissāya hatthehi ca pādehi ca vāyamamāno sotthinā pāraṁ uttiṇṇo. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ kullaṁ sīse vā āropetvā khandhe vā uccāretvā yena kāmaṁ pakkameyyan’ti.
[¶34] What do you think, mendicants? Would that person be doing what should be done with that raft?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso evaṅkārī tasmiṁ kulle kiccakārī assā”ti?
[¶35] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶36] “And what, mendicants, should that person do with the raft? When they’d crossed over they should think, ‘This raft has been very helpful to me. … Why don’t I beach it on dry land or set it adrift on the water and go wherever I want?’ That’s what that person should do with the raft.
> Pali: “Kathaṅkārī ca so, bhikkhave, puriso tasmiṁ kulle kiccakārī assa? Idha, bhikkhave, tassa purisassa uttiṇṇassa pāraṅgatassa evamassa: ‘bahukāro kho me ayaṁ kullo; imāhaṁ kullaṁ nissāya hatthehi ca pādehi ca vāyamamāno sotthinā pāraṁ uttiṇṇo. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ kullaṁ thale vā ussādetvā udake vā opilāpetvā yena kāmaṁ pakkameyyan’ti. Evaṅkārī kho so, bhikkhave, puriso tasmiṁ kulle kiccakārī assa.
## 23. MN 22 · The Simile of the Cobra · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/23/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/23/#p-N
[¶0] In the same way, I have taught a simile of the teaching as a raft: for crossing over, not for holding on. By understanding the simile of the raft, you will even give up the teachings, let alone what is not the teachings.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, kullūpamo mayā dhammo desito nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāya. Kullūpamaṁ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ desitaṁ, ājānantehi dhammāpi vo pahātabbā pageva adhammā.
[¶1] Mendicants, there are these six grounds for views. What six? Take an unlearned ordinary person who has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They regard form as: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self.’ They also regard feeling … perception … choices … whatever is seen, heard, thought, known, attained, sought, and explored by the mind as: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self.’ And as for this ground for views: ‘The cosmos and the self are one and the same. After death I will be that, permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, and will last forever and ever.’ They regard this also as: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self.’
> Pali: Chayimāni, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni. Katamāni cha? Idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto, sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto, rūpaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; vedanaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; saññaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; saṅkhāre ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; yampi taṁ diṭṭhaṁ sutaṁ mutaṁ viññātaṁ pattaṁ pariyesitaṁ, anuvicaritaṁ manasā tampi ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; yampi taṁ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṁ— so loko so attā, so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo, sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassāmīti— tampi ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati.
[¶2] But a learned noble disciple has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. They regard form like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ They also regard feeling … perception … choices … whatever is seen, heard, thought, known, attained, sought, and explored by the mind like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ And the same for this ground for views: ‘The cosmos and the self are one and the same. After death I will be that, permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, and will last forever and ever.’ They also regard like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’
> Pali: Sutavā ca kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto, sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto, rūpaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati; vedanaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati; saññaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati; saṅkhāre ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati; yampi taṁ diṭṭhaṁ sutaṁ mutaṁ viññātaṁ pattaṁ pariyesitaṁ, anuvicaritaṁ manasā, tampi ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati; yampi taṁ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṁ— so loko so attā, so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo, sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassāmīti— tampi ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati.
[¶3] Seeing in this way they’re not anxious about what doesn’t exist.”
> Pali: So evaṁ samanupassanto asati na paritassatī”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, one of the mendicants said to the Buddha, “Sir, can there be anxiety about what doesn’t exist externally?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “siyā nu kho, bhante, bahiddhā asati paritassanā”ti?
[¶5] “There can, mendicant,” said the Buddha. “It’s when someone thinks, ‘Oh, it once was mine but is mine no more. Oh, it could be mine but I do not get it.’ They sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion. That’s how there is anxiety about what doesn’t exist externally.”
> Pali: “Siyā, bhikkhū”ti—bhagavā avoca. “Idha bhikkhu ekaccassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahu vata me, taṁ vata me natthi; siyā vata me, taṁ vatāhaṁ na labhāmī’ti. So socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, bahiddhā asati paritassanā hotī”ti.
[¶6] “But can there be no anxiety about what doesn’t exist externally?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, bahiddhā asati aparitassanā”ti?
[¶7] “There can, mendicant,” said the Buddha. “It’s when someone doesn’t think, ‘Oh, it once was mine but is mine no more. Oh, it could be mine but I do not get it.’ They don’t sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion. That’s how there is no anxiety about what doesn’t exist externally.”
> Pali: “Siyā, bhikkhū”ti—bhagavā avoca. “Idha bhikkhu ekaccassa na evaṁ hoti: ‘ahu vata me, taṁ vata me natthi; siyā vata me, taṁ vatāhaṁ na labhāmī’ti. So na socati na kilamati na paridevati na urattāḷiṁ kandati na sammohaṁ āpajjati. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, bahiddhā asati aparitassanā hotī”ti.
[¶8] “But can there be anxiety about what doesn’t exist internally?”
> Pali: “Siyā nu kho, bhante, ajjhattaṁ asati paritassanā”ti?
[¶9] “There can, mendicant,” said the Buddha. “It’s when someone has such a view: ‘The cosmos and the self are one and the same. After death I will be that, permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, and will last forever and ever.’ They hear the Realized One or their disciple teaching Dhamma for the uprooting of all grounds, fixations, obsessions, insistences, and underlying tendencies regarding views; for the stilling of all activities, the letting go of all attachments, the ending of craving, fading away, cessation, extinguishment. They think, ‘Whoa, I’m going to be annihilated and destroyed! I won’t even exist any more!’ They sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion. That’s how there is anxiety about what doesn’t exist internally.”
> Pali: “Siyā, bhikkhū”ti—bhagavā avoca. “Idha, bhikkhu, ekaccassa evaṁ diṭṭhi hoti: ‘so loko so attā, so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo, sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassāmī’ti. So suṇāti tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā sabbesaṁ diṭṭhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānapariyuṭṭhānābhinivesānusayānaṁ samugghātāya sabbasaṅkhārasamathāya sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggāya taṇhākkhayāya virāgāya nirodhāya nibbānāya dhammaṁ desentassa. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ucchijjissāmi nāmassu, vinassissāmi nāmassu, nassu nāma bhavissāmī’ti. So socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, ajjhattaṁ asati paritassanā hotī”ti.
[¶10] “But can there be no anxiety about what doesn’t exist internally?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, ajjhattaṁ asati aparitassanā”ti?
[¶11] “There can,” said the Buddha. “It’s when someone doesn’t have such a view: ‘The cosmos and the self are one and the same. After death I will be that, permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, and will last forever and ever.’ They hear the Realized One or their disciple teaching Dhamma for the uprooting of all grounds, fixations, obsessions, insistences, and underlying tendencies regarding views; for the stilling of all activities, the letting go of all attachments, the ending of craving, fading away, cessation, extinguishment. They don’t think, ‘Whoa, I’m going to be annihilated and destroyed! I won’t even exist any more!’ They don’t sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion. That’s how there is no anxiety about what doesn’t exist internally.
> Pali: “Siyā, bhikkhū”ti bhagavā avoca. “Idha, bhikkhu, ekaccassa na evaṁ diṭṭhi hoti: ‘so loko so attā, so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo, sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassāmī’ti. So suṇāti tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā sabbesaṁ diṭṭhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānapariyuṭṭhānābhinivesānusayānaṁ samugghātāya sabbasaṅkhārasamathāya sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggāya taṇhākkhayāya virāgāya nirodhāya nibbānāya dhammaṁ desentassa. Tassa na evaṁ hoti: ‘ucchijjissāmi nāmassu, vinassissāmi nāmassu, nassu nāma bhavissāmī’ti. So na socati na kilamati na paridevati na urattāḷiṁ kandati na sammohaṁ āpajjati. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, ajjhattaṁ asati aparitassanā hoti.
[¶12] Mendicants, it would make sense to be possessive about something that’s permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, and will last forever and ever. But do you see any such possession?”
> Pali: Taṁ, bhikkhave, pariggahaṁ pariggaṇheyyātha, yvāssa pariggaho nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo, sassatisamaṁ tatheva tiṭṭheyya. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, taṁ pariggahaṁ yvāssa pariggaho nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo, sassatisamaṁ tatheva tiṭṭheyyā”ti?
[¶13] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶14] “Good, mendicants! I also can’t see any such possession.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave. Ahampi kho taṁ, bhikkhave, pariggahaṁ na samanupassāmi yvāssa pariggaho nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṁ tatheva tiṭṭheyya.
[¶15] It would make sense to grasp at a theory of self that didn’t give rise to sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. But do you see any such theory of self?”
> Pali: Taṁ, bhikkhave, attavādupādānaṁ upādiyetha, yaṁsa attavādupādānaṁ upādiyato na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, taṁ attavādupādānaṁ yaṁsa attavādupādānaṁ upādiyato na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶16] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶17] “Good, mendicants! I also can’t see any such theory of self.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave. Ahampi kho taṁ, bhikkhave, attavādupādānaṁ na samanupassāmi yaṁsa attavādupādānaṁ upādiyato na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā.
[¶18] It would make sense to rely on a view that didn’t give rise to sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. But do you see any such view to rely on?”
> Pali: Taṁ, bhikkhave, diṭṭhinissayaṁ nissayetha yaṁsa diṭṭhinissayaṁ nissayato na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, taṁ diṭṭhinissayaṁ yaṁsa diṭṭhinissayaṁ nissayato na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶19] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶20] “Good, mendicants! I also can’t see any such view to rely on.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave. Ahampi kho taṁ, bhikkhave, diṭṭhinissayaṁ na samanupassāmi yaṁsa diṭṭhinissayaṁ nissayato na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā.
[¶21] Mendicants, were a self to exist, would there be the thought, ‘Belonging to my self’?”
> Pali: Attani vā, bhikkhave, sati ‘attaniyaṁ me’ti assā”ti?
[¶22] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶23] “Were what belongs to a self to exist, would there be the thought, ‘My self’?”
> Pali: “Attaniye vā, bhikkhave, sati ‘attā me’ti assā”ti?
[¶24] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶25] “But since a self and what belongs to a self are not found as a genuine fact, is not the following a totally foolish teaching: ‘The cosmos and the self are one and the same. After death I will be that, permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, and will last forever and ever’?”
> Pali: “Attani ca, bhikkhave, attaniye ca saccato thetato anupalabbhamāne, yampi taṁ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṁ: ‘so loko so attā, so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo, sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassāmī’ti— nanāyaṁ, bhikkhave, kevalo paripūro bāladhammo”ti?
[¶26] “How could it not, sir? It’s a totally foolish teaching.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante, kevalo hi, bhante, paripūro bāladhammo”ti.
[¶27] “What do you think, mendicants? Is form permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶28] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶29] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶30] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶31] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ— etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā”ti?
[¶32] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶33] “What do you think, mendicants? Is feeling … perception … choices … consciousness permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, vedanā …pe… saññā … saṅkhārā … viññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶34] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶35] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶36] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶37] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ— etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā”ti?
[¶38] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶39] “So, mendicants, you should truly see any kind of form at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all form—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ You should truly see any kind of feeling … perception … choices … consciousness at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all consciousness—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’
> Pali: “Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, yaṁ kiñci rūpaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ, ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā, oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā, hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā, yaṁ dūre santike vā, sabbaṁ rūpaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Yā kāci vedanā …pe… yā kāci saññā … ye keci saṅkhārā … yaṁ kiñci viññāṇaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ, ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā, oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā, hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā, yaṁ dūre santike vā, sabbaṁ viññāṇaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ.
[¶40] Seeing this, a learned noble disciple grows disillusioned with form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. Being disillusioned, desire fades away. When desire fades away they’re freed. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Evaṁ passaṁ, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvako rūpasmiṁ nibbindati, vedanāya nibbindati, saññāya nibbindati, saṅkhāresu nibbindati, viññāṇasmiṁ nibbindati, nibbidā virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶41] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶42] Such a mendicant is one who is called ‘one who has lifted the cross-bar’, ‘one who has filled in the moat’, ‘one who has pulled up the pillar’, ‘one who is unimpeded’, and also ‘a noble one with banner lowered and burden dropped, detached’.
> Pali: Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho itipi, saṅkiṇṇaparikkho itipi, abbūḷhesiko itipi, niraggaḷo itipi, ariyo pannaddhajo pannabhāro visaṁyutto itipi.
[¶43] And how has a mendicant raised the cross-bar? It’s when a mendicant has given up ignorance, cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, obliterated it, so it’s unable to arise in the future. That’s how a mendicant has lifted the cross-bar.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno avijjā pahīnā hoti, ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā, āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho hoti.
[¶44] And how has a mendicant filled in the moat? It’s when a mendicant has given up transmigrating through births in future lives, cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, obliterated it, so it’s unable to arise in the future. That’s how a mendicant has filled in the moat.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṅkiṇṇaparikkho hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ponobbhaviko jātisaṁsāro pahīno hoti, ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato, āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṅkiṇṇaparikkho hoti.
[¶45] And how has a mendicant pulled up the pillar? It’s when a mendicant has given up craving, cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, obliterated it, so it’s unable to arise in the future. That’s how a mendicant has pulled up the pillar.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abbūḷhesiko hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṇhā pahīnā hoti, ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā, āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abbūḷhesiko hoti.
[¶46] And how is a mendicant unimpeded? It’s when a mendicant has given up the five lower fetters, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them, so they’re unable to arise in the future. That’s how a mendicant is unimpeded.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu niraggaḷo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pañca orambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni pahīnāni honti, ucchinnamūlāni tālāvatthukatāni anabhāvaṅkatāni, āyatiṁ anuppādadhammāni. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu niraggaḷo hoti.
[¶47] And how is a mendicant a noble one with with banner lowered and burden dropped, detached? It’s when a mendicant has given up the conceit ‘I am’, cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, obliterated it, so it’s unable to arise in the future. That’s how a mendicant is a noble one with banner lowered and burden dropped, detached.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyo pannaddhajo pannabhāro visaṁyutto hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno asmimāno pahīno hoti, ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato, āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyo pannaddhajo pannabhāro visaṁyutto hoti.
[¶48] When a mendicant’s mind was freed like this, the gods together with Indra, the Divinity, and the Progenitor, search as they may, will not discover: ‘This is the basis of that realized one’s consciousness.’ Why is that? Because even in this very life that realized one is not found, I say.
> Pali: Evaṁ vimuttacittaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ saindā devā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā anvesaṁ nādhigacchanti: ‘idaṁ nissitaṁ tathāgatassa viññāṇan’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Diṭṭhevāhaṁ, bhikkhave, dhamme tathāgataṁ ananuvijjoti vadāmi.
[¶49] Though I state and assert this, certain ascetics and brahmins misrepresent me with the incorrect, hollow, false, untruthful claim: ‘The ascetic Gotama is an exterminator. He advocates the annihilation, eradication, and nonexistence of an existing being.’ They misrepresent me as what I am not, and saying what I do not say. In the past, as today, what I describe is suffering and the cessation of suffering. This being so, if others abuse, attack, harass, and trouble the Realized One, he doesn’t get resentful, bitter, and emotionally exasperated.
> Pali: Evaṁvādiṁ kho maṁ, bhikkhave, evamakkhāyiṁ eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā asatā tucchā musā abhūtena abbhācikkhanti: ‘venayiko samaṇo gotamo, sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññāpetī’ti. Yathā cāhaṁ na, bhikkhave, yathā cāhaṁ na vadāmi, tathā maṁ te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asatā tucchā musā abhūtena abbhācikkhanti: ‘venayiko samaṇo gotamo, sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññāpetī’ti. Pubbe cāhaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi ca dukkhañceva paññāpemi, dukkhassa ca nirodhaṁ. Tatra ce, bhikkhave, pare tathāgataṁ akkosanti paribhāsanti rosenti vihesenti, tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa na hoti āghāto na appaccayo na cetaso anabhiraddhi.
[¶50] Or if others honor, respect, revere, or venerate him, he doesn’t get thrilled, elated, and emotionally excited. If they praise him, he just thinks, ‘They do such things for me regarding what in the past was completely understood.’
> Pali: Tatra ce, bhikkhave, pare tathāgataṁ sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa na hoti ānando na somanassaṁ na cetaso uppilāvitattaṁ. Tatra ce, bhikkhave, pare vā tathāgataṁ sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa evaṁ hoti: ‘yaṁ kho idaṁ pubbe pariññātaṁ tattha me evarūpā kārā karīyantī’ti.
[¶51] So, mendicants, if others abuse, attack, harass, and trouble you, don’t make yourselves resentful, bitter, and emotionally exasperated. Or if others honor, respect, revere, or venerate you, don’t make yourselves thrilled, elated, and emotionally excited. If they praise you, just think, ‘They do such things for us regarding what in the past was completely understood.’
> Pali: Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, tumhe cepi pare akkoseyyuṁ paribhāseyyuṁ roseyyuṁ viheseyyuṁ, tatra tumhe hi na āghāto na appaccayo na cetaso anabhiraddhi karaṇīyā. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, tumhe cepi pare sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, tatra tumhehi na ānando na somanassaṁ na cetaso uppilāvitattaṁ karaṇīyaṁ. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, tumhe cepi pare sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, tatra tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘yaṁ kho idaṁ pubbe pariññātaṁ, tattha me evarūpā kārā karīyantī’ti.
[¶52] So, mendicants, give up what isn’t yours. Giving it up will be for your lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, yaṁ na tumhākaṁ taṁ pajahatha; taṁ vo pahīnaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati.
[¶53] And what isn’t yours? Form isn’t yours: give it up. Giving it up will be for your lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ? Rūpaṁ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ, taṁ pajahatha; taṁ vo pahīnaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati.
[¶54] Feeling … perception … choices … consciousness isn’t yours: give it up. Giving it up will be for your lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: Vedanā, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ, taṁ pajahatha; sā vo pahīnā dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati. Saññā, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ, taṁ pajahatha; sā vo pahīnā dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati. Saṅkhārā, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ, te pajahatha; te vo pahīnā dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissanti. Viññāṇaṁ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ, taṁ pajahatha; taṁ vo pahīnaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati.
[¶55] What do you think, mendicants? Suppose a person was to carry off the grass, sticks, branches, and leaves in this Jeta’s Grove, or burn them, or do what they want with them. Would you think, ‘This person is carrying us off, burning us, or doing what they want with us’?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yaṁ imasmiṁ jetavane tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṁ, taṁ jano hareyya vā daheyya vā yathāpaccayaṁ vā kareyya. Api nu tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘amhe jano harati vā dahati vā yathāpaccayaṁ vā karotī’”ti?
[¶56] “No, sir. Why is that? Because to us that’s neither self nor belonging to self.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Na hi no etaṁ, bhante, attā vā attaniyaṁ vā”ti.
[¶57] “In the same way, mendicants, give up what isn’t yours. Giving it up will be for your lasting welfare and happiness. And what isn’t yours? Form … feeling … perception … choices … consciousness isn’t yours: give it up. Giving it up will be for your lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṁ na tumhākaṁ taṁ pajahatha; taṁ vo pahīnaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati. Kiñca, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ? Rūpaṁ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ, taṁ pajahatha; taṁ vo pahīnaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati. Vedanā, bhikkhave …pe… saññā, bhikkhave … saṅkhārā, bhikkhave …pe… viññāṇaṁ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṁ, taṁ pajahatha; taṁ vo pahīnaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya bhavissati.
[¶58] The teaching well-explained thus by me is clarified, revealed, illuminated, and stripped of patchwork. In this teaching thus well-explained, for those mendicants who are perfected, who have ended the defilements, completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and are rightly freed through enlightenment, there is no cycle of rebirths to be found. …
> Pali: Evaṁ svākkhāto, bhikkhave, mayā dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito chinnapilotiko. Evaṁ svākkhāte, bhikkhave, mayā dhamme uttāne vivaṭe pakāsite chinnapilotike ye te bhikkhū arahanto khīṇāsavā vusitavanto katakaraṇīyā ohitabhārā anuppattasadatthā parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanā sammadaññāvimuttā, vaṭṭaṁ tesaṁ natthi paññāpanāya.
[¶59] In this teaching thus well-explained, those mendicants who have given up the five lower fetters are all reborn spontaneously. They are extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world. …
> Pali: Evaṁ svākkhāto, bhikkhave, mayā dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito chinnapilotiko. Evaṁ svākkhāte, bhikkhave, mayā dhamme uttāne vivaṭe pakāsite chinnapilotike yesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni pahīnāni, sabbe te opapātikā, tattha parinibbāyino, anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā.
[¶60] In this teaching thus well-explained, those mendicants who, having given up three fetters, and weakened greed, hate, and delusion, are all once-returners. They come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering. …
> Pali: Evaṁ svākkhāto, bhikkhave, mayā dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito chinnapilotiko. Evaṁ svākkhāte, bhikkhave, mayā dhamme uttāne vivaṭe pakāsite chinnapilotike yesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ tīṇi saṁyojanāni pahīnāni, rāgadosamohā tanubhūtā, sabbe te sakadāgāmino, sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti.
[¶61] In this teaching thus well-explained, those mendicants who have ended three fetters are all stream-enterers, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening. …
> Pali: Evaṁ svākkhāto, bhikkhave, mayā dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito chinnapilotiko. Evaṁ svākkhāte, bhikkhave, mayā dhamme uttāne vivaṭe pakāsite chinnapilotike yesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ tīṇi saṁyojanāni pahīnāni, sabbe te sotāpannā, avinipātadhammā, niyatā sambodhiparāyanā.
[¶62] In this teaching thus well-explained, those mendicants who are followers of teachings or followers by faith are all are assured, destined for awakening.
> Pali: Evaṁ svākkhāto, bhikkhave, mayā dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito chinnapilotiko. Evaṁ svākkhāte, bhikkhave, mayā dhamme uttāne vivaṭe pakāsite chinnapilotike ye te bhikkhū dhammānusārino saddhānusārino sabbe te sambodhiparāyanā.
[¶63] The teaching well-explained thus by me is clarified, revealed, illuminated, and stripped of patchwork. In this teaching thus well-explained, those who have a degree of faith and love for me are all bound for heaven.”
> Pali: Evaṁ svākkhāto, bhikkhave, mayā dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito chinnapilotiko. Evaṁ svākkhāte, bhikkhave, mayā dhamme uttāne vivaṭe pakāsite chinnapilotike yesaṁ mayi saddhāmattaṁ pemamattaṁ sabbe te saggaparāyanā”ti.
[¶64] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶65] > Pali: Alagaddūpamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 24. MN 23 · The Termite Mound
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/24/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/24/#p-N
[¶0] MN 23 · The Termite Mound
> Pali: MN 23 · Vammikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. Now at that time Venerable Kassapa the Prince was staying in the Dark Forest.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā kumārakassapo andhavane viharati.
[¶2] Then, late at night, a glorious deity, lighting up the entire Dark Forest, went up to Kassapa the Prince, stood to one side, and said:
> Pali: Atha kho aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṁ andhavanaṁ obhāsetvā yenāyasmā kumārakassapo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho sā devatā āyasmantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Monk, monk! This termite mound fumes by night and flames by day. The brahmin said, ‘Dig, clever one, having picked up the sword!’
> Pali: “Bhikkhu bhikkhu, ayaṁ vammiko rattiṁ dhūmāyati, divā pajjalati. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶4] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a sticking point: ‘A sticking point, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Throw out the sticking point! Dig, clever one, having picked up the sword!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa laṅgiṁ ‘laṅgī, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘ukkhipa laṅgiṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶5] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a bullfrog: ‘A bullfrog, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Throw out the bullfrog! Dig, clever one, having picked up the sword!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa uddhumāyikaṁ. ‘Uddhumāyikā, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘ukkhipa uddhumāyikaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶6] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a forked path: ‘A forked path, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Throw out the forked path! Dig, clever one, having picked up the sword!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa dvidhāpathaṁ. ‘Dvidhāpatho, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘ukkhipa dvidhāpathaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶7] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a filter of ash: ‘A filter of ash, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Throw out the filter of ash! Dig, clever one, having picked up the sword!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa caṅgavāraṁ. ‘Caṅgavāro, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘ukkhipa caṅgavāraṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶8] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a tortoise: ‘A tortoise, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Throw out the tortoise! Dig, clever one, having taken up the sword!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa kummaṁ. ‘Kummo, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘ukkhipa kummaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶9] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a butcher’s knife and chopping board: ‘A butcher’s knife and chopping board, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Throw out the butcher’s knife and chopping board! Dig, clever one, having picked up the sword!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa asisūnaṁ. ‘Asisūnā, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘ukkhipa asisūnaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶10] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a scrap of meat: ‘A scrap of meat, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Throw out the scrap of meat! Dig, clever one, having picked up the sword!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa maṁsapesiṁ. ‘Maṁsapesi, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘ukkhipa maṁsapesiṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā’ti.
[¶11] Picking up the sword and digging, the clever one saw a king cobra: ‘A king cobra, sir!’ The brahmin said, ‘Leave the king cobra! Do not disturb the cobra! Worship the cobra!’
> Pali: Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya addasa nāgaṁ. ‘Nāgo, bhadante’ti. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘tiṭṭhatu nāgo, mā nāgaṁ ghaṭṭesi; namo karohi nāgassā’ti.
[¶12] Mendicant, go to the Buddha and ask him about this riddle. You should remember it in line with his answer. I don’t see anyone in this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, its gods and humans—who could provide a satisfying answer to this riddle except the Realized One or his disciple or someone who has heard it from them.”
> Pali: Ime kho tvaṁ, bhikkhu, pañhe bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamitvā puccheyyāsi, yathā ca te bhagavā byākaroti tathā naṁ dhāreyyāsi. Nāhaṁ taṁ, bhikkhu, passāmi sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya, yo imesaṁ pañhānaṁ veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheyya aññatra tathāgatena vā, tathāgatasāvakena vā, ito vā pana sutvā”ti—
[¶13] That is what that deity said before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Idamavoca sā devatā. Idaṁ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
[¶14] Then, when the night had passed, Kassapa the Prince went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened. Then he asked:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā kumārakassapo tassā rattiyā accayena yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā kumārakassapo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “imaṁ, bhante, rattiṁ aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṁ andhavanaṁ obhāsetvā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho, bhante, sā devatā maṁ etadavoca: ‘bhikkhu bhikkhu, ayaṁ vammiko rattiṁ dhūmāyati, divā pajjalati. Brāhmaṇo evamāha: “abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyā”ti. Abhikkhaṇanto sumedho satthaṁ ādāya …pe… ito vā pana sutvā’ti.
[¶15] “Sir, what is the termite mound? What is the fuming by night and flaming by day? Who is the brahmin, and who the clever one? What are the sword, the digging, the sticking point, the bullfrog, the forked path, the filter of ash, the tortoise, the butcher’s knife and chopping board, and the scrap of meat? And what is the king cobra?”
> Pali: Idamavoca, bhante, sā devatā. Idaṁ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi. Ko nu kho, bhante, vammiko, kā rattiṁ dhūmāyanā, kā divā pajjalanā, ko brāhmaṇo, ko sumedho, kiṁ satthaṁ, kiṁ abhikkhaṇaṁ, kā laṅgī, kā uddhumāyikā, ko dvidhāpatho, kiṁ caṅgavāraṁ, ko kummo, kā asisūnā, kā maṁsapesi, ko nāgo”ti?
[¶16] “Mendicant, ‘termite mound’ is a term for this body made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction.
> Pali: “‘Vammiko’ti kho, bhikkhu, imassetaṁ cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa adhivacanaṁ, mātāpettikasambhavassa odanakummāsūpacayassa aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammassa.
[¶17] Thinking and considering all night about what you did during the day— this is the fuming at night. The work you apply yourself to during the day by body, speech, and mind after thinking about it all night— this is the flaming by day.
> Pali: Yaṁ kho, bhikkhu, divā kammante ārabbha rattiṁ anuvitakketi anuvicāreti— ayaṁ rattiṁ dhūmāyanā. Yaṁ kho, bhikkhu, rattiṁ anuvitakketvā anuvicāretvā divā kammante payojeti kāyena vācāya manasā— ayaṁ divā pajjalanā.
[¶18] ‘Brahmin’ is a term for the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. ‘Clever one’ is a term for the trainee mendicant.
> Pali: ‘Brāhmaṇo’ti kho, bhikkhu, tathāgatassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa. ‘Sumedho’ti kho, bhikkhu, sekkhassetaṁ bhikkhuno adhivacanaṁ.
[¶19] ‘Sword’ is a term for noble wisdom. ‘Digging’ is a term for rousing energy.
> Pali: ‘Satthan’ti kho, bhikkhu, ariyāyetaṁ paññāya adhivacanaṁ. ‘Abhikkhaṇan’ti kho, bhikkhu, vīriyārambhassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶20] ‘Sticking point’ is a term for ignorance. ‘Throw out the sticking point’ means ‘give up ignorance, dig, clever one, having picked up the sword.’
> Pali: ‘Laṅgī’ti kho, bhikkhu, avijjāyetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Ukkhipa laṅgiṁ, pajaha avijjaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyāti ayametassa attho.
[¶21] ‘Bullfrog’ is a term for anger and distress. ‘Throw out the bullfrog’ means ‘give up anger and distress’ …
> Pali: ‘Uddhumāyikā’ti kho, bhikkhu, kodhūpāyāsassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Ukkhipa uddhumāyikaṁ, pajaha kodhūpāyāsaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyāti ayametassa attho.
[¶22] ‘A forked path’ is a term for doubt. ‘Throw out the forked path’ means ‘give up doubt’ …
> Pali: ‘Dvidhāpatho’ti kho, bhikkhu, vicikicchāyetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Ukkhipa dvidhāpathaṁ, pajaha vicikicchaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyāti ayametassa attho.
[¶23] ‘A filter of ash’ is a term for the five hindrances, that is: the hindrances of sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt. ‘Throw out the filter of ash’ means ‘give up the five hindrances’ …
> Pali: ‘Caṅgavāran’ti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṁ nīvaraṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— kāmacchandanīvaraṇassa, byāpādanīvaraṇassa, thinamiddhanīvaraṇassa, uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇassa, vicikicchānīvaraṇassa. Ukkhipa caṅgavāraṁ, pajaha pañca nīvaraṇe; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyāti ayametassa attho.
[¶24] ‘Tortoise’ is a term for the five grasping aggregates, that is: form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. ‘Throw out the tortoise’ means ‘give up the five grasping aggregates’ …
> Pali: ‘Kummo’ti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṁ upādānakkhandhānaṁ adhivacanaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— rūpupādānakkhandhassa, vedanupādānakkhandhassa, saññupādānakkhandhassa, saṅkhārupādānakkhandhassa, viññāṇupādānakkhandhassa. Ukkhipa kummaṁ, pajaha pañcupādānakkhandhe; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyāti ayametassa attho.
[¶25] ‘Butcher’s knife and chopping board’ is a term for the five kinds of sensual stimulation. Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. ‘Throw out the butcher’s knife and chopping board’ means ‘give up the five kinds of sensual stimulation’ …
> Pali: ‘Asisūnā’ti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ— cakkhuviññeyyānaṁ rūpānaṁ iṭṭhānaṁ kantānaṁ manāpānaṁ piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, sotaviññeyyānaṁ saddānaṁ …pe… ghānaviññeyyānaṁ gandhānaṁ …pe… jivhāviññeyyānaṁ rasānaṁ …pe… kāyaviññeyyānaṁ phoṭṭhabbānaṁ iṭṭhānaṁ kantānaṁ manāpānaṁ piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Ukkhipa asisūnaṁ, pajaha pañca kāmaguṇe; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyāti ayametassa attho.
[¶26] ‘Scrap of meat’ is a term for greed and relishing. ‘Throw out the scrap of meat’ means ‘give up greed and relishing’ …
> Pali: ‘Maṁsapesī’ti kho, bhikkhu, nandīrāgassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Ukkhipa maṁsapesiṁ, pajaha nandīrāgaṁ; abhikkhaṇa, sumedha, satthaṁ ādāyāti ayametassa attho.
[¶27] ‘King cobra’ is a term for a mendicant who has ended the defilements. This is the meaning of: ‘Leave the king cobra! Do not disturb the cobra! Worship the cobra!’”
> Pali: ‘Nāgo’ti kho, bhikkhu, khīṇāsavassetaṁ bhikkhuno adhivacanaṁ. Tiṭṭhatu nāgo, mā nāgaṁ ghaṭṭesi; namo karohi nāgassāti ayametassa attho”ti.
[¶28] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Kassapa the Prince approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā kumārakassapo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶29] > Pali: Vammikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 25. MN 24 · Chariots at the Ready
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/25/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/25/#p-N
[¶0] MN 24 · Chariots at the Ready
> Pali: MN 24 · Rathavinītasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Then several mendicants who had completed the rainy season residence in their native land went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to them:
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulā jātibhūmakā bhikkhū jātibhūmiyaṁ vassaṁvuṭṭhā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te bhikkhū bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “In your native land, mendicants, which of the native mendicants is esteemed in this way: ‘Personally having few wishes, they speak to the mendicants on having few wishes. Personally having contentment, seclusion, aloofness, energy, ethics, immersion, wisdom, freedom, and the knowledge and vision of freedom, they speak to the mendicants on all these things. They’re an adviser and counselor, one who educates, encourages, fires up, and inspires their spiritual companions.’”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhikkhave, jātibhūmiyaṁ jātibhūmakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ evaṁ sambhāvito: ‘attanā ca appiccho appicchakathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca santuṭṭho santuṭṭhikathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca pavivitto pavivekakathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca asaṁsaṭṭho asaṁsaggakathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca āraddhavīriyo vīriyārambhakathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca sīlasampanno sīlasampadākathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca samādhisampanno samādhisampadākathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca paññāsampanno paññāsampadākathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca vimuttisampanno vimuttisampadākathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca vimuttiñāṇadassanasampanno vimuttiñāṇadassanasampadākathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, ovādako viññāpako sandassako samādapako samuttejako sampahaṁsako sabrahmacārīnan’”ti?
[¶4] “Puṇṇa son of Mantāṇī, sir, is esteemed in this way in our native land.”
> Pali: “Puṇṇo nāma, bhante, āyasmā mantāṇiputto jātibhūmiyaṁ jātibhūmakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ evaṁ sambhāvito: ‘attanā ca appiccho appicchakathañca bhikkhūnaṁ kattā, attanā ca santuṭṭho …pe… ovādako viññāpako sandassako samādapako samuttejako sampahaṁsako sabrahmacārīnan’”ti.
[¶5] Now at that time Venerable Sāriputta was sitting not far from the Buddha. Then he thought:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato avidūre nisinno hoti. Atha kho āyasmato sāriputtassa etadahosi:
[¶6] “Puṇṇa son of Mantāṇī is fortunate, so very fortunate, in that his sensible spiritual companions praise him point by point in the presence of the Teacher, and that the Teacher seconds that appreciation. Hopefully, some time or other I’ll get to meet Venerable Puṇṇa, and we can have a discussion.”
> Pali: “lābhā āyasmato puṇṇassa mantāṇiputtassa, suladdhalābhā āyasmato puṇṇassa mantāṇiputtassa, yassa viññū sabrahmacārī satthu sammukhā anumassa anumassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, tañca satthā abbhanumodati. Appeva nāma mayampi kadāci karahaci āyasmatā puṇṇena mantāṇiputtena saddhiṁ samāgaccheyyāma, appeva nāma siyā kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶7] When the Buddha had stayed in Rājagaha as long as he pleased, he set out for Sāvatthī. Traveling stage by stage, he arrived at Sāvatthī, where he stayed in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. Puṇṇa heard that the Buddha had arrived at Sāvatthī.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Assosi kho āyasmā puṇṇo mantāṇiputto: “bhagavā kira sāvatthiṁ anuppatto; sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme”ti.
[¶8] Then he set his lodgings in order and, taking his bowl and robe, set out for Sāvatthī. Eventually he came to Sāvatthī and Jeta’s Grove. He went up to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk. Then, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, Puṇṇa rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right. Then he went to the Dark Forest for the day’s meditation.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo mantāṇiputto senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi jetavanaṁ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ puṇṇaṁ mantāṇiputtaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi. Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo mantāṇiputto bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena andhavanaṁ tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya.
[¶9] Then a certain mendicant went up to Venerable Sāriputta, and said to him, “Reverend Sāriputta, the mendicant named Puṇṇa, of whom you have often spoken so highly, after being inspired by a talk of the Buddha’s, left for the Dark Forest for the day’s meditation.”
> Pali: Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “yassa kho tvaṁ, āvuso sāriputta, puṇṇassa nāma bhikkhuno mantāṇiputtassa abhiṇhaṁ kittayamāno ahosi, so bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena andhavanaṁ tena pakkanto divāvihārāyā”ti.
[¶10] Sāriputta quickly grabbed his sitting cloth and followed behind Puṇṇa, keeping sight of his head. Puṇṇa plunged deep into the Dark Forest and sat at the root of a tree for the day’s meditation. And Sāriputta did likewise.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto taramānarūpo nisīdanaṁ ādāya āyasmantaṁ puṇṇaṁ mantāṇiputtaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi sīsānulokī. Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo mantāṇiputto andhavanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi. Āyasmāpi kho sāriputto andhavanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.
[¶11] Then in the late afternoon, Sāriputta came out of retreat, went to Puṇṇa, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Puṇṇa:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenāyasmā puṇṇo mantāṇiputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā puṇṇena mantāṇiputtena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ puṇṇaṁ mantāṇiputtaṁ etadavoca:
[¶12] “Reverend, is our spiritual life lived under the Buddha?”
> Pali: “Bhagavati no, āvuso, brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶13] “Yes, reverend.”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti.
[¶14] “Is the spiritual life lived under the Buddha for the sake of purification of ethics?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, sīlavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶15] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶16] “Well, is the spiritual life lived under the Buddha for the sake of purification of mind?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso, cittavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶17] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶18] “Is the spiritual life lived under the Buddha for the sake of purification of view?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, diṭṭhivisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶19] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶20] “Well, is the spiritual life lived under the Buddha for the sake of purification by traversing doubt?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶21] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶22] “Is the spiritual life lived under the Buddha for the sake of purification of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶23] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶24] “Well, is the spiritual life lived under the Buddha for the sake of purification of knowledge and vision of the practice?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶25] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶26] “Is the spiritual life lived under the Buddha for the sake of purification of knowledge and vision?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, ñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶27] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶28] “When asked each of these questions, you answered, ‘Certainly not.’ Then what exactly is the goal of leading the spiritual life under the Buddha?”
> Pali: “‘Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, sīlavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘no hidaṁ, āvuso’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ panāvuso, cittavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘no hidaṁ, āvuso’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, diṭṭhivisuddhatthaṁ …pe… kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhatthaṁ …pe… maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṁ …pe… paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṁ …pe… kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, ñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘no hidaṁ āvuso’ti vadesi. Kimatthaṁ carahāvuso, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti?
[¶29] “The goal of leading the spiritual life under the Buddha is complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping.”
> Pali: “Anupādāparinibbānatthaṁ kho, āvuso, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti.
[¶30] “Reverend, is purification of ethics complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, sīlavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶31] “Certainly not, reverend.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶32] “Is purification of mind …
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso, cittavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶33] > Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶34] purification of view …
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, diṭṭhivisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶35] > Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶36] purification by traversing doubt …
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶37] > Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶38] purification of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path …
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶39] > Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶40] purification of knowledge and vision of the practice …
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶41] > Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶42] Is purification of knowledge and vision complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, ñāṇadassanavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶43] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶44] “Then is complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping something apart from these things?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso, aññatra imehi dhammehi anupādāparinibbānan”ti?
[¶45] “Certainly not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, āvuso”.
[¶46] “When asked each of these questions, you answered, ‘Certainly not.’ How then should we see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: “‘Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, sīlavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘no hidaṁ, āvuso’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ panāvuso, cittavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘no hidaṁ, āvuso’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, diṭṭhivisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan’ti …pe… kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi … maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi … paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi … ‘kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, ñāṇadassanavisuddhi anupādāparinibbānan’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘no hidaṁ, āvuso’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ panāvuso, aññatra imehi dhammehi anupādāparinibbānan’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘no hidaṁ, āvuso’ti vadesi. Yathākathaṁ panāvuso, imassa bhāsitassa attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶47] “If the Buddha had asserted purification of ethics to be complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping, he would have asserted that which grasps fuel to be complete extinguishment without grasping fuel. If the Buddha had asserted purification of mind … purification of view … purification by traversing doubt … purification of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path … purification of knowledge and vision of the practice … If the Buddha had asserted purification of knowledge and vision to be complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping, he would have asserted that which grasps fuel to be complete extinguishment without grasping fuel. But if complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping was something apart from these things, an ordinary person would become extinguished. For an ordinary person lacks these things.
> Pali: “Sīlavisuddhiñce, āvuso, bhagavā anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya, saupādānaṁyeva samānaṁ anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya. Cittavisuddhiñce, āvuso, bhagavā anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya, saupādānaṁyeva samānaṁ anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya. Diṭṭhivisuddhiñce, āvuso, bhagavā anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya, saupādānaṁyeva samānaṁ anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiñce, āvuso, bhagavā anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya, saupādānaṁyeva samānaṁ anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya. Maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhiñce, āvuso, bhagavā anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya, saupādānaṁyeva samānaṁ anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya. Paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiñce, āvuso, bhagavā anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya, saupādānaṁyeva samānaṁ anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhiñce, āvuso, bhagavā anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya, saupādānaṁyeva samānaṁ anupādāparinibbānaṁ paññapeyya. Aññatra ce, āvuso, imehi dhammehi anupādāparinibbānaṁ abhavissa, puthujjano parinibbāyeyya. Puthujjano hi, āvuso, aññatra imehi dhammehi.
[¶48] Well then, reverend, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: Tena hāvuso, upamaṁ te karissāmi; upamāyapidhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶49] Suppose that, while staying in Sāvatthī, King Pasenadi of Kosala had some urgent business come up in Sāketa. Now, between Sāvatthī and Sāketa seven chariots were stationed at the ready for him. Then Pasenadi, exiting Sāvatthī, mounted the first chariot at the ready by the gate of the royal compound. The first chariot at the ready would bring him to the second, where he’d dismount and mount the second chariot. The second chariot at the ready would bring him to the third … The third chariot at the ready would bring him to the fourth … The fourth chariot at the ready would bring him to the fifth … The fifth chariot at the ready would bring him to the sixth … The sixth chariot at the ready would bring him to the seventh, where he’d dismount and mount the seventh chariot. The seventh chariot at the ready would bring him to the gate of the royal compound of Sāketa. And when he was at the gate, friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would ask him: ‘Great king, did you come to Sāketa from Sāvatthī by this chariot at the ready?’ If asked this, how should King Pasenadi rightly reply?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, āvuso, rañño pasenadissa kosalassa sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasantassa sākete kiñcideva accāyikaṁ karaṇīyaṁ uppajjeyya. Tassa antarā ca sāvatthiṁ antarā ca sāketaṁ satta rathavinītāni upaṭṭhapeyyuṁ. Atha kho, āvuso, rājā pasenadi kosalo sāvatthiyā nikkhamitvā antepuradvārā paṭhamaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruheyya, paṭhamena rathavinītena dutiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇeyya, paṭhamaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjeyya dutiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruheyya. Dutiyena rathavinītena tatiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇeyya, dutiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjeyya, tatiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruheyya. Tatiyena rathavinītena catutthaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇeyya, tatiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjeyya, catutthaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruheyya. Catutthena rathavinītena pañcamaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇeyya, catutthaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjeyya, pañcamaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruheyya. Pañcamena rathavinītena chaṭṭhaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇeyya, pañcamaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjeyya, chaṭṭhaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruheyya. Chaṭṭhena rathavinītena sattamaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇeyya, chaṭṭhaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjeyya, sattamaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruheyya. Sattamena rathavinītena sāketaṁ anupāpuṇeyya antepuradvāraṁ. Tamenaṁ antepuradvāragataṁ samānaṁ mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘iminā tvaṁ, mahārāja, rathavinītena sāvatthiyā sāketaṁ anuppatto antepuradvāran’ti? Kathaṁ byākaramāno nu kho, āvuso, rājā pasenadi kosalo sammā byākaramāno byākareyyā”ti?
[¶50] “The king should reply: ‘Well, while staying in Sāvatthī, I had some urgent business come up in Sāketa. Now, between Sāvatthī and Sāketa seven chariots were stationed at the ready for me. Then, exiting Sāvatthī, I mounted the first chariot at the ready by the gate of the royal compound. The first chariot at the ready brought me to the second, where I dismounted and mounted the second chariot. … The second chariot brought me to the third … the fourth … the fifth … the sixth … The sixth chariot at the ready brought me to the seventh, where I dismounted and mounted the seventh chariot. The seventh chariot at the ready brought me to the gate of the royal compound of Sāketa.’ That’s how King Pasenadi should rightly reply.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ byākaramāno kho, āvuso, rājā pasenadi kosalo sammā byākaramāno byākareyya: ‘idha me sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasantassa sākete kiñcideva accāyikaṁ karaṇīyaṁ uppajji. Tassa me antarā ca sāvatthiṁ antarā ca sāketaṁ satta rathavinītāni upaṭṭhapesuṁ. Atha khvāhaṁ sāvatthiyā nikkhamitvā antepuradvārā paṭhamaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruhiṁ. Paṭhamena rathavinītena dutiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇiṁ, paṭhamaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjiṁ dutiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruhiṁ. Dutiyena rathavinītena tatiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇiṁ, dutiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjiṁ, tatiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruhiṁ. Tatiyena rathavinītena catutthaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇiṁ, tatiyaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjiṁ, catutthaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruhiṁ. Catutthena rathavinītena pañcamaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇiṁ, catutthaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjiṁ, pañcamaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruhiṁ. Pañcamena rathavinītena chaṭṭhaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇiṁ, pañcamaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjiṁ, chaṭṭhaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruhiṁ. Chaṭṭhena rathavinītena sattamaṁ rathavinītaṁ pāpuṇiṁ, chaṭṭhaṁ rathavinītaṁ vissajjiṁ, sattamaṁ rathavinītaṁ abhiruhiṁ. Sattamena rathavinītena sāketaṁ anuppatto antepuradvāran’ti. Evaṁ byākaramāno kho, āvuso, rājā pasenadi kosalo sammā byākaramāno byākareyyā”ti.
[¶51] “In the same way, reverend, purification of ethics is only for the sake of purification of mind. Purification of mind is only for the sake of purification of view. Purification of view is only for the sake of purification by traversing doubt. Purification by traversing doubt is only for the sake of purification of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path. Purification of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path is only for the sake of purification of knowledge and vision of the practice. Purification of knowledge and vision of the practice is only for the sake of purification of knowledge and vision. Purification of knowledge and vision is only for the sake of extinguishment with no fuel for grasping. The spiritual life is lived under the Buddha for the sake of complete extinguishment with no fuel for grasping.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, āvuso, sīlavisuddhi yāvadeva cittavisuddhatthā, cittavisuddhi yāvadeva diṭṭhivisuddhatthā, diṭṭhivisuddhi yāvadeva kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhatthā, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi yāvadeva maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhatthā, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi yāvadeva paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhatthā, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi yāvadeva ñāṇadassanavisuddhatthā, ñāṇadassanavisuddhi yāvadeva anupādāparinibbānatthā. Anupādāparinibbānatthaṁ kho, āvuso, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ vussatī”ti.
[¶52] When he said this, Sāriputta said to Puṇṇa, “What is the venerable’s name? And how are you known among your spiritual companions?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ puṇṇaṁ mantāṇiputtaṁ etadavoca: “konāmo āyasmā, kathañca panāyasmantaṁ sabrahmacārī jānantī”ti?
[¶53] “Reverend, my name is Puṇṇa. And I am known as ‘son of Mantāṇī’ among my spiritual companions.”
> Pali: “Puṇṇoti kho me, āvuso, nāmaṁ; mantāṇiputtoti ca pana maṁ sabrahmacārī jānantī”ti.
[¶54] “It’s incredible, reverend, it’s amazing! Venerable Puṇṇa son of Mantāṇī has answered each deep question point by point, as a learned disciple who rightly understands the Teacher’s instructions. It is fortunate for his spiritual companions, so very fortunate, that they get to see Venerable Puṇṇa son of Mantāṇī and pay homage to him. Even if they only got to see him and pay respects to him by carrying him around on their heads on a roll of cloth, it would still be very fortunate for them! And it’s fortunate for me, so very fortunate, that I get to see the venerable and pay homage to him.”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso. Yathā taṁ sutavatā sāvakena sammadeva satthusāsanaṁ ājānantena, evameva āyasmatā puṇṇena mantāṇiputtena gambhīrā gambhīrapañhā anumassa anumassa byākatā. Lābhā sabrahmacārīnaṁ, suladdhalābhā sabrahmacārīnaṁ, ye āyasmantaṁ puṇṇaṁ mantāṇiputtaṁ labhanti dassanāya, labhanti payirūpāsanāya. Celaṇḍukena cepi sabrahmacārī āyasmantaṁ puṇṇaṁ mantāṇiputtaṁ muddhanā pariharantā labheyyuṁ dassanāya, labheyyuṁ payirūpāsanāya, tesampi lābhā tesampi suladdhaṁ, amhākampi lābhā amhākampi suladdhaṁ, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ puṇṇaṁ mantāṇiputtaṁ labhāma dassanāya, labhāma payirūpāsanāyā”ti.
[¶55] When he said this, Puṇṇa said to Sāriputta, “What is the venerable’s name? And how are you known among your spiritual companions?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā puṇṇo mantāṇiputto āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “ko nāmo āyasmā, kathañca panāyasmantaṁ sabrahmacārī jānantī”ti?
[¶56] “Reverend, my name is Upatissa. And I am known as Sāriputta among my spiritual companions.”
> Pali: “Upatissoti kho me, āvuso, nāmaṁ; sāriputtoti ca pana maṁ sabrahmacārī jānantī”ti.
[¶57] “Goodness! I had no idea I was consulting with the Venerable Sāriputta, the disciple who is fit to be compared with the Teacher himself! If I’d known, I would not have said so much. It’s incredible, reverend, it’s amazing! Venerable Sāriputta has asked each deep question point by point, as a learned disciple who rightly understands the Teacher’s instructions. It is fortunate for his spiritual companions, so very fortunate, that they get to see Venerable Sāriputta and pay homage to him. Even if they only got to see him and pay respects to him by carrying him around on their heads on a roll of cloth, it would still be very fortunate for them! And it’s fortunate for me, so very fortunate, that I get to see the venerable and pay homage to him.”
> Pali: “Satthukappena vata kira, bho, sāvakena saddhiṁ mantayamānā na jānimha: ‘āyasmā sāriputto’ti. Sace hi mayaṁ jāneyyāma ‘āyasmā sāriputto’ti, ettakampi no nappaṭibhāseyya. Acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso. Yathā taṁ sutavatā sāvakena sammadeva satthusāsanaṁ ājānantena, evameva āyasmatā sāriputtena gambhīrā gambhīrapañhā anumassa anumassa pucchitā. Lābhā sabrahmacārīnaṁ suladdhalābhā sabrahmacārīnaṁ, ye āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ labhanti dassanāya, labhanti payirūpāsanāya. Celaṇḍukena cepi sabrahmacārī āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ muddhanā pariharantā labheyyuṁ dassanāya, labheyyuṁ payirūpāsanāya, tesampi lābhā tesampi suladdhaṁ, amhākampi lābhā amhākampi suladdhaṁ, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ labhāma dassanāya, labhāma payirūpāsanāyā”ti.
[¶58] And so these two spiritual giants agreed with each other’s fine words.
> Pali: Itiha te ubhopi mahānāgā aññamaññassa subhāsitaṁ samanumodiṁsūti.
[¶59] > Pali: Rathavinītasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 26. MN 25 · Sowing
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/26/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/26/#p-N
[¶0] MN 25 · Sowing
> Pali: MN 25 · Nivāpasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, a sower does not sow seed for deer thinking, ‘May the deer, enjoying this seed, be long-lived and beautiful. May they live long and prosper!’ A sower sows seed for deer thinking, ‘When these deer encroach on where I sow the seed, they’ll recklessly enjoy eating it. They’ll become indulgent, then they’ll become negligent, and then I’ll be able to do what I want with them on account of this seed.’
> Pali: “Na, bhikkhave, nevāpiko nivāpaṁ nivapati migajātānaṁ: ‘imaṁ me nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ migajātā paribhuñjantā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ yāpentū’ti. Evañca kho, bhikkhave, nevāpiko nivāpaṁ nivapati migajātānaṁ: ‘imaṁ me nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ migajātā anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjissanti, anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjissanti, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjissanti, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissanti imasmiṁ nivāpe’ti.
[¶4] And indeed, the first herd of deer encroached on where the sower sowed the seed and recklessly enjoyed eating it. They became indulgent, then they became negligent, and then the sower was able to do what he wanted with them on account of that seed. And that’s how the first herd of deer failed to get free from the sower’s power.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, paṭhamā migajātā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu, te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā.
[¶5] So then a second herd of deer thought up a plan, ‘The first herd of deer became indulgent … and failed to get free of the sower’s power. Why don’t we refrain from eating the seed altogether? Refraining from dangerous food, we can venture deep into a wilderness region and live there.’ And that’s just what they did. But when it came to the last month of summer, the grass and water ran out. Their bodies became much too thin, and they lost their strength and energy. So they returned to where the sower had sown the seed. Encroaching, they recklessly enjoyed eating it … And that’s how the second herd of deer failed to get free from the sower’s power.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, dutiyā migajātā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā migajātā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe. Evañhi te paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭivirameyyāma, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā’ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭiviramiṁsu, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihariṁsu. Tesaṁ gimhānaṁ pacchime māse, tiṇodakasaṅkhaye, adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Tesaṁ adhimattakasimānaṁ pattakāyānaṁ balavīriyaṁ parihāyi. Balavīriye parihīne tameva nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa paccāgamiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, dutiyāpi migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā.
[¶6] So then a third herd of deer thought up a plan, ‘The first … and second herds of deer … failed to get free of the sower’s power. Why don’t we set up our lair close by where the sower has sown the seed? Then we can encroach and enjoy eating without being reckless. We won’t become indulgent, then we won’t become negligent, and then the sower won’t be able to do what he wants with us on account of that seed.’ And that’s just what they did.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, tatiyā migajātā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā migajātā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa …pe… evañhi te paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te dutiyā migajātā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: “ye kho te paṭhamā migajātā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa …pe… evañhi te paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭivirameyyāma, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā”ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭiviramiṁsu, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihariṁsu. Tesaṁ gimhānaṁ pacchime māse tiṇodakasaṅkhaye adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Tesaṁ adhimattakasimānaṁ pattakāyānaṁ balavīriyaṁ parihāyi. Balavīriye parihīne tameva nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa paccāgamiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe. Evañhi te dutiyāpi migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa upanissāya āsayaṁ kappeyyāma. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjissāma, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjissāma, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissāma nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe’ti. Te amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa upanissāya āsayaṁ kappayiṁsu. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu, te tattha ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe.
[¶7] So the sower and his helpers thought, ‘Wow, this third herd of deer is so sneaky and devious, they must be some kind of strange spirits with magical abilities! For they eat the seed we’ve sown without us knowing how they come and go. Why don’t we surround the seed on all sides by staking out high nets? Hopefully we might get to see the lair where they go to hide out.’ And that’s just what they did. And they saw the lair where the third herd of deer went to hide out. And that’s how the third herd failed to get free from the sower’s power.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, nevāpikassa ca nevāpikaparisāya ca etadahosi: ‘saṭhāssunāmime tatiyā migajātā ketabino, iddhimantāssunāmime tatiyā migajātā parajanā; imañca nāma nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ paribhuñjanti, na ca nesaṁ jānāma āgatiṁ vā gatiṁ vā. Yannūna mayaṁ imaṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mahatīhi daṇḍavākarāhi samantā sappadesaṁ anuparivāreyyāma, appeva nāma tatiyānaṁ migajātānaṁ āsayaṁ passeyyāma, yattha te gāhaṁ gaccheyyun’ti. Te amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mahatīhi daṇḍavākarāhi samantā sappadesaṁ anuparivāresuṁ. Addasaṁsu kho, bhikkhave, nevāpiko ca nevāpikaparisā ca tatiyānaṁ migajātānaṁ āsayaṁ, yattha te gāhaṁ agamaṁsu. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, tatiyāpi migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā.
[¶8] So then a fourth herd of deer thought up a plan, ‘The first … second … and third herds of deer … failed to get free of the sower’s power. Why don’t we set up our lair somewhere the sower and his helpers can’t go? Then we can intrude on where the sower has sown the seed and enjoy eating it without being reckless. We won’t become indulgent, then we won’t become negligent, and then the sower won’t be able to do with us what he wants on account of that seed.’ And that’s just what they did.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, catutthā migajātā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā migajātā …pe… evañhi te paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te dutiyā migajātā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: “ye kho te paṭhamā migajātā …pe… evañhi te paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭivirameyyāma, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā”ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭiviramiṁsu …pe… evañhi te dutiyāpi migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te tatiyā migajātā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: “ye kho te paṭhamā migajātā …pe… evañhi te paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te dutiyā migajātā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā migajātā …pe… evañhi te paṭhamā migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭivirameyyāma, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā’ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā paṭiviramiṁsu …pe… evañhi te dutiyāpi migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa upanissāya āsayaṁ kappeyyāma, tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjissāma, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjissāma, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissāma nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe”ti. Te amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa upanissāya āsayaṁ kappayiṁsu, tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu, te tattha ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe. Tatra nevāpikassa ca nevāpikaparisāya ca etadahosi: “saṭhāssunāmime tatiyā migajātā ketabino, iddhimantāssunāmime tatiyā migajātā parajanā, imañca nāma nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ paribhuñjanti. Na ca nesaṁ jānāma āgatiṁ vā gatiṁ vā. Yannūna mayaṁ imaṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mahatīhi daṇḍavākarāhi samantā sappadesaṁ anuparivāreyyāma, appeva nāma tatiyānaṁ migajātānaṁ āsayaṁ passeyyāma, yattha te gāhaṁ gaccheyyun”ti. Te amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mahatīhi daṇḍavākarāhi samantā sappadesaṁ anuparivāresuṁ. Addasaṁsu kho nevāpiko ca nevāpikaparisā ca tatiyānaṁ migajātānaṁ āsayaṁ, yattha te gāhaṁ agamaṁsu. Evañhi te tatiyāpi migajātā na parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ yattha agati nevāpikassa ca nevāpikaparisāya ca tatrāsayaṁ kappeyyāma, tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjissāma, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjissāma, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissāma nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe’ti. Te yattha agati nevāpikassa ca nevāpikaparisāya ca tatrāsayaṁ kappayiṁsu. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ nevāpikassa ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu, te tattha ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ nevāpikassa amusmiṁ nivāpe.
[¶9] So the sower and his helpers thought, ‘Wow, this fourth herd of deer is so sneaky and devious, they must be some kind of strange spirits with magical abilities! For they eat the seed we’ve sown without us knowing how they come and go. Why don’t we surround the seed on all sides by staking out high nets? Hopefully we might get to see the lair where they go to hide out.’ And that’s just what they did. But they couldn’t see the lair where the fourth herd of deer went to hide out. So the sower and his helpers thought, ‘If we disturb this fourth herd of deer, they’ll disturb others, who in turn will disturb even more. Then all of the deer will escape this seed we’ve sown. Why don’t we just keep an eye on that fourth herd?’ And that’s just what they did. And that’s how the fourth herd of deer escaped the sower’s power.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, nevāpikassa ca nevāpikaparisāya ca etadahosi: ‘saṭhāssunāmime catutthā migajātā ketabino, iddhimantāssunāmime catutthā migajātā parajanā. Imañca nāma nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ paribhuñjanti, na ca nesaṁ jānāma āgatiṁ vā gatiṁ vā. Yannūna mayaṁ imaṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mahatīhi daṇḍavākarāhi samantā sappadesaṁ anuparivāreyyāma, appeva nāma catutthānaṁ migajātānaṁ āsayaṁ passeyyāma yattha te gāhaṁ gaccheyyun’ti. Te amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mahatīhi daṇḍavākarāhi samantā sappadesaṁ anuparivāresuṁ. Neva kho, bhikkhave, addasaṁsu nevāpiko ca nevāpikaparisā ca catutthānaṁ migajātānaṁ āsayaṁ, yattha te gāhaṁ gaccheyyuṁ. Tatra, bhikkhave, nevāpikassa ca nevāpikaparisāya ca etadahosi: ‘sace kho mayaṁ catutthe migajāte ghaṭṭessāma, te ghaṭṭitā aññe ghaṭṭissanti te ghaṭṭitā aññe ghaṭṭissanti. Evaṁ imaṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ sabbaso migajātā parimuñcissanti. Yannūna mayaṁ catutthe migajāte ajjhupekkheyyāmā’ti. Ajjhupekkhiṁsu kho, bhikkhave, nevāpiko ca nevāpikaparisā ca catutthe migajāte. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, catutthā migajātā parimucciṁsu nevāpikassa iddhānubhāvā.
[¶10] I’ve made up this simile to make a point. And this is what it means.
> Pali: Upamā kho me ayaṁ, bhikkhave, katā atthassa viññāpanāya. Ayaṁ cevettha attho—
[¶11] ‘Seed’ is a term for the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: nivāpoti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶12] ‘Sower’ is a term for Māra the Wicked.
> Pali: Nevāpikoti kho, bhikkhave, mārassetaṁ pāpimato adhivacanaṁ.
[¶13] ‘Sower’s helpers’ is a term for Māra’s assembly.
> Pali: Nevāpikaparisāti kho, bhikkhave, māraparisāyetaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶14] ‘Deer’ is a term for ascetics and brahmins.
> Pali: Migajātāti kho, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇānametaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶15] Now, the first group of ascetics and brahmins encroached on where the seed and the worldly pleasures of the flesh were sown by Māra and recklessly enjoyed eating it. They became indulgent, then they became negligent, and then Māra was able to do what he wanted with them on account of that seed and the worldly pleasures of the flesh. And that’s how the first group of ascetics and brahmins failed to get free from Māra’s power. This first group of ascetics and brahmins is just like the first herd of deer, I say.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Seyyathāpi te, bhikkhave, paṭhamā migajātā tathūpame ahaṁ ime paṭhame samaṇabrāhmaṇe vadāmi.
[¶16] So then a second group of ascetics and brahmins thought up a plan, ‘The first group of ascetics and brahmins became indulgent … and failed to get free of Māra’s power. Why don’t we refrain from eating the seed and the worldly pleasures of the flesh altogether? Refraining from dangerous food, we can venture deep into a wilderness region and live there.’ And that’s just what they did. They ate herbs, millet, wild rice, poor rice, water lettuce, rice bran, scum from boiling rice, sesame flour, grass, or cow dung. They survived on forest roots and fruits, or eating fallen fruit.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, dutiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise. Evañhi te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭivirameyyāma, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā’ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭiviramiṁsu, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmāti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭiviramiṁsu, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihariṁsu. Te tattha sākabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, sāmākabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, nīvārabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, daddulabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, haṭabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, kaṇabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, ācāmabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, piññākabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, tiṇabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, gomayabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ, vanamūlaphalāhārā yāpesuṁ pavattaphalabhojī.
[¶17] But when it came to the last month of summer, the grass and water ran out. Their bodies became much too thin, and they lost their strength and energy. Because of this, they lost their heart’s release, so they went back to where Māra had sown the seed and the worldly pleasures of the flesh. Intruding on that place, they recklessly enjoyed eating them … And that’s how the second group of ascetics and brahmins failed to get free from Māra’s power. This second group of ascetics and brahmins is just like the second herd of deer, I say.
> Pali: Tesaṁ gimhānaṁ pacchime māse, tiṇodakasaṅkhaye, adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Tesaṁ adhimattakasimānaṁ pattakāyānaṁ balavīriyaṁ parihāyi. Balavīriye parihīne cetovimutti parihāyi. Cetovimuttiyā parihīnāya tameva nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa paccāgamiṁsu tāni ca lokāmisāni. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, dutiyāpi samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Seyyathāpi te, bhikkhave, dutiyā migajātā tathūpame ahaṁ ime dutiye samaṇabrāhmaṇe vadāmi.
[¶18] So then a third group of ascetics and brahmins thought up a plan, ‘The first … and second groups of ascetics and brahmins … failed to get free of Māra’s power. Why don’t we set up our lair close by where Māra has sown the seed and those worldly pleasures of the flesh? Then we can encroach on it and enjoy eating without being reckless. We won’t become indulgent, then we won’t become negligent, and then Māra won’t be able to do what he wants with us on account of that seed and those worldly pleasures of the flesh.’
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, tatiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni …pe…. Evañhi te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te dutiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: “ye kho te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni …pe…. Evañhi te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭivirameyyāma, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā”ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭiviramiṁsu. Bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihariṁsu. Te tattha sākabhakkhāpi ahesuṁ …pe… pavattaphalabhojī. Tesaṁ gimhānaṁ pacchime māse tiṇodakasaṅkhaye adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Tesaṁ adhimattakasimānaṁ pattakāyānaṁ balavīriyaṁ parihāyi, balavīriye parihīne cetovimutti parihāyi, cetovimuttiyā parihīnāya tameva nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa paccāgamiṁsu tāni ca lokāmisāni. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha anupakhajja mucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, mattā samānā pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, pamattā samānā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise. Evañhi te dutiyāpi samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni upanissāya āsayaṁ kappeyyāma, tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjissāma, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjissāma, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissāma mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise’ti.
[¶19] And that’s just what they did. Still, they had such views as these: ‘The cosmos is eternal’ or ‘The cosmos is not eternal’; ‘The cosmos is finite’ or ‘The cosmos is infinite’; ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’; or that after death, a realized one still exists, or no longer exists, or both still exists and no longer exists, or neither still exists nor no longer exists. And that’s how the third group of ascetics and brahmins failed to get free from Māra’s power. This third group of ascetics and brahmins is just like the third herd of deer, I say.
> Pali: Te amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni upanissāya āsayaṁ kappayiṁsu. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise. Api ca kho evaṁdiṭṭhikā ahesuṁ— sassato loko itipi, asassato loko itipi; antavā loko itipi, anantavā loko itipi; taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ itipi, aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīraṁ itipi; hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itipi, na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itipi, hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itipi, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itipi. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, tatiyāpi samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Seyyathāpi te, bhikkhave, tatiyā migajātā tathūpame ahaṁ ime tatiye samaṇabrāhmaṇe vadāmi.
[¶20] So then a fourth group of ascetics and brahmins thought up a plan, ‘The first … second … and third groups of ascetics and brahmins … failed to get free of Māra’s power. Why don’t we set up our lair where Māra and his assembly can’t go? Then we can encroach on where Māra has sown the seed and those worldly pleasures of the flesh, and enjoy eating without being reckless. We won’t become indulgent, then we won’t become negligent, and then Māra won’t be able to do what he wants with us on account of that seed and those worldly pleasures of the flesh.’
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, catutthā samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa …pe…. Evañhi te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te dutiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘ye kho te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā …pe…. Evañhi te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭivirameyyāma bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā’ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭiviramiṁsu …pe…. Evañhi te dutiyāpi samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te tatiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁ samacintesuṁ ye kho te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā …pe…. Evañhi te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yepi te dutiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁ samacintesuṁ ye kho te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā …pe…. Evañhi te paṭhamā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭivirameyyāma, bhayabhogā paṭiviratā araññāyatanāni ajjhogāhetvā vihareyyāmā’ti. Te sabbaso nivāpabhojanā lokāmisā paṭiviramiṁsu …pe…. Evañhi te dutiyāpi samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni upanissāya āsayaṁ kappeyyāma. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjissāma, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjissāma, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissāma mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmiseti. Te amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni upanissāya āsayaṁ kappayiṁsu. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu. Te tattha ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjiṁsu. Amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu. Appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise. Api ca kho evaṁdiṭṭhikā ahesuṁ sassato loko itipi …pe… neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itipi. Evañhi te tatiyāpi samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Yannūna mayaṁ yattha agati mārassa ca māraparisāya ca tatrāsayaṁ kappeyyāma. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjissāma, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjissāma, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissāma mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmiseti.
[¶21] And that’s just what they did. And that’s how the fourth group of ascetics and brahmins got free from Māra’s power. This fourth group of ascetics and brahmins is just like the fourth herd of deer, I say.
> Pali: Te yattha agati mārassa ca māraparisāya ca tatrāsayaṁ kappayiṁsu. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā amuṁ nivāpaṁ nivuttaṁ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisāni ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjiṁsu, te tattha ananupakhajja amucchitā bhojanāni bhuñjamānā na madaṁ āpajjiṁsu, amattā samānā na pamādaṁ āpajjiṁsu, appamattā samānā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṁ mārassa amusmiṁ nivāpe amusmiñca lokāmise. Evañhi te, bhikkhave, catutthā samaṇabrāhmaṇā parimucciṁsu mārassa iddhānubhāvā. Seyyathāpi te, bhikkhave, catutthā migajātā tathūpame ahaṁ ime catutthe samaṇabrāhmaṇe vadāmi.
[¶22] And where is it that Māra and his assembly can’t go? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra, put out his eyes without a trace, and gone where the Wicked One cannot see.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, agati mārassa ca māraparisāya ca? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu andhamakāsi māraṁ, apadaṁ vadhitvā māracakkhuṁ adassanaṁ gato pāpimato.
[¶23] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶24] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶25] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶26] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶27] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶28] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶29] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, enters and remains in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶30] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, enters and remains in the cessation of perception and feeling. And, having seen with wisdom, their defilements come to an end. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra, put out his eyes without a trace, and gone where the Wicked One cannot see. And they’ve crossed over clinging to the world.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati. Paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu andhamakāsi māraṁ, apadaṁ vadhitvā māracakkhuṁ adassanaṁ gato pāpimato tiṇṇo loke visattikan”ti.
[¶31] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶32] > Pali: Nivāpasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 27. MN 26 · The Noble Quest · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/27/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/27/#p-N
[¶0] MN 26 · The Noble Quest
> Pali: MN 26 · Pāsarāsisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms. Then several mendicants went up to Venerable Ānanda and said to him, “Reverend, it’s been a long time since we’ve heard a Dhamma talk from the Buddha. It would be good if we got to hear a Dhamma talk from the Buddha.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavocuṁ: “cirassutā no, āvuso ānanda, bhagavato sammukhā dhammī kathā. Sādhu mayaṁ, āvuso ānanda, labheyyāma bhagavato sammukhā dhammiṁ kathaṁ savanāyā”ti.
[¶3] “Well then, reverends, go to the brahmin Rammaka’s hermitage. Hopefully you’ll get to hear a Dhamma talk from the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Tena hāyasmanto yena rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamo tenupasaṅkamatha; appeva nāma labheyyātha bhagavato sammukhā dhammiṁ kathaṁ savanāyā”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, reverend,” they replied.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato ānandassa paccassosuṁ.
[¶5] Then, after the meal, on his return from almsround, the Buddha addressed Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery for the day’s meditation.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena pubbārāmo migāramātupāsādo tenupasaṅkamissāma divāvihārāyā”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. So the Buddha went with Ānanda to the Eastern Monastery for the day’s meditation. In the late afternoon the Buddha came out of retreat and addressed Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the eastern gate to bathe.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ yena pubbārāmo migāramātupāsādo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena pubbakoṭṭhako tenupasaṅkamissāma gattāni parisiñcitun”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶8] So the Buddha went with Ānanda to the eastern gate to bathe. When he had bathed and emerged from the water he stood in one robe drying his limbs. Then Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Sir, the hermitage of the brahmin Rammaka is nearby. It’s so delightful, so lovely. Please visit it out of sympathy.” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ yena pubbakoṭṭhako tenupasaṅkami gattāni parisiñcituṁ. Pubbakoṭṭhake gattāni parisiñcitvā paccuttaritvā ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsi gattāni pubbāpayamāno. Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamo avidūre. Ramaṇīyo, bhante, rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamo; pāsādiko, bhante, rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamo. Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā yena rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamo tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶9] He went to the brahmin Rammaka’s hermitage. Now at that time several mendicants were sitting together in the hermitage talking about the teaching. The Buddha stood outside the door waiting for the talk to end. When he knew the talk had ended he cleared his throat and knocked on the door-panel. The mendicants opened the door for the Buddha, and he entered the hermitage, where he sat down on the seat spread out and addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamo tenupasaṅkami. Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assame dhammiyā kathāya sannisinnā honti. Atha kho bhagavā bahidvārakoṭṭhake aṭṭhāsi kathāpariyosānaṁ āgamayamāno. Atha kho bhagavā kathāpariyosānaṁ viditvā ukkāsitvā aggaḷaṁ ākoṭesi. Vivariṁsu kho te bhikkhū bhagavato dvāraṁ. Atha kho bhagavā rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamaṁ pavisitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā? Kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶10] “Sir, our unfinished discussion on the teaching was about the Buddha himself when the Buddha arrived.”
> Pali: “Bhagavantameva kho no, bhante, ārabbha dhammī kathā vippakatā, atha bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶11] “Good, mendicants! It’s appropriate for gentlemen like you, who have gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, to sit together and talk about the teaching. When you’re sitting together you should do one of two things: discuss the teachings or keep noble silence.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave. Etaṁ kho, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ patirūpaṁ kulaputtānaṁ saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitānaṁ yaṁ tumhe dhammiyā kathāya sannisīdeyyātha. Sannipatitānaṁ vo, bhikkhave, dvayaṁ karaṇīyaṁ— dhammī vā kathā, ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo.
[¶12] Mendicants, there are these two quests: the noble quest and the ignoble quest.
> Pali: Dvemā, bhikkhave, pariyesanā— ariyā ca pariyesanā, anariyā ca pariyesanā.
[¶13] And what is the ignoble quest? It’s when someone who is themselves liable to be reborn seeks what is also liable to be reborn. Themselves liable to grow old, fall sick, die, sorrow, and become corrupted, they seek what is also liable to these things.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, anariyā pariyesanā? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhammaṁyeva pariyesati, attanā jarādhammo samāno jarādhammaṁyeva pariyesati, attanā byādhidhammo samāno byādhidhammaṁyeva pariyesati, attanā maraṇadhammo samāno maraṇadhammaṁyeva pariyesati, attanā sokadhammo samāno sokadhammaṁyeva pariyesati, attanā saṅkilesadhammo samāno saṅkilesadhammaṁyeva pariyesati.
[¶14] And what should be described as liable to be reborn? Partners and children, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants and cattle, and gold and currency are liable to be reborn. These attachments are liable to be reborn. Someone who is tied, infatuated, and attached to such things, themselves liable to being reborn, seeks what is also liable to be reborn.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, jātidhammaṁ vadetha? Puttabhariyaṁ, bhikkhave, jātidhammaṁ, dāsidāsaṁ jātidhammaṁ, ajeḷakaṁ jātidhammaṁ, kukkuṭasūkaraṁ jātidhammaṁ, hatthigavāssavaḷavaṁ jātidhammaṁ, jātarūparajataṁ jātidhammaṁ. Jātidhammā hete, bhikkhave, upadhayo. Etthāyaṁ gathito mucchito ajjhāpanno attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhammaṁyeva pariyesati.
[¶15] And what should be described as liable to grow old? Partners and children, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants and cattle, and gold and currency are liable to grow old. These attachments are liable to grow old. Someone who is tied, infatuated, and attached to such things, themselves liable to grow old, seeks what is also liable to grow old.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, jarādhammaṁ vadetha? Puttabhariyaṁ, bhikkhave, jarādhammaṁ, dāsidāsaṁ jarādhammaṁ, ajeḷakaṁ jarādhammaṁ, kukkuṭasūkaraṁ jarādhammaṁ, hatthigavāssavaḷavaṁ jarādhammaṁ, jātarūparajataṁ jarādhammaṁ. Jarādhammā hete, bhikkhave, upadhayo. Etthāyaṁ gathito mucchito ajjhāpanno attanā jarādhammo samāno jarādhammaṁyeva pariyesati.
[¶16] And what should be described as liable to fall sick? Partners and children, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and elephants and cattle are liable to fall sick. These attachments are liable to fall sick. Someone who is tied, infatuated, and attached to such things, themselves liable to falling sick, seeks what is also liable to fall sick.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, byādhidhammaṁ vadetha? Puttabhariyaṁ, bhikkhave, byādhidhammaṁ, dāsidāsaṁ byādhidhammaṁ, ajeḷakaṁ byādhidhammaṁ, kukkuṭasūkaraṁ byādhidhammaṁ, hatthigavāssavaḷavaṁ byādhidhammaṁ. Byādhidhammā hete, bhikkhave, upadhayo. Etthāyaṁ gathito mucchito ajjhāpanno attanā byādhidhammo samāno byādhidhammaṁyeva pariyesati.
[¶17] And what should be described as liable to die? Partners and children, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and elephants and cattle are liable to die. These attachments are liable to die. Someone who is tied, infatuated, and attached to such things, themselves liable to die, seeks what is also liable to die.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, maraṇadhammaṁ vadetha? Puttabhariyaṁ, bhikkhave, maraṇadhammaṁ, dāsidāsaṁ maraṇadhammaṁ, ajeḷakaṁ maraṇadhammaṁ, kukkuṭasūkaraṁ maraṇadhammaṁ, hatthigavāssavaḷavaṁ maraṇadhammaṁ. Maraṇadhammā hete, bhikkhave, upadhayo. Etthāyaṁ gathito mucchito ajjhāpanno attanā maraṇadhammo samāno maraṇadhammaṁyeva pariyesati.
[¶18] And what should be described as liable to sorrow? Partners and children, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and elephants and cattle are liable to sorrow. These attachments are liable to sorrow. Someone who is tied, infatuated, and attached to such things, themselves liable to sorrow, seeks what is also liable to sorrow.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, sokadhammaṁ vadetha? Puttabhariyaṁ, bhikkhave, sokadhammaṁ, dāsidāsaṁ sokadhammaṁ, ajeḷakaṁ sokadhammaṁ, kukkuṭasūkaraṁ sokadhammaṁ, hatthigavāssavaḷavaṁ sokadhammaṁ. Sokadhammā hete, bhikkhave, upadhayo. Etthāyaṁ gathito mucchito ajjhāpanno attanā sokadhammo samāno sokadhammaṁyeva pariyesati.
[¶19] And what should be described as liable to corruption? Partners and children, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants and cattle, and gold and currency are liable to corruption. These attachments are liable to corruption. Someone who is tied, infatuated, and attached to such things, themselves liable to corruption, seeks what is also liable to corruption. This is the ignoble quest.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, saṅkilesadhammaṁ vadetha? Puttabhariyaṁ, bhikkhave, saṅkilesadhammaṁ, dāsidāsaṁ saṅkilesadhammaṁ, ajeḷakaṁ saṅkilesadhammaṁ, kukkuṭasūkaraṁ saṅkilesadhammaṁ, hatthigavāssavaḷavaṁ saṅkilesadhammaṁ, jātarūparajataṁ saṅkilesadhammaṁ. Saṅkilesadhammā hete, bhikkhave, upadhayo. Etthāyaṁ gathito mucchito ajjhāpanno attanā saṅkilesadhammo samāno saṅkilesadhammaṁyeva pariyesati. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, anariyā pariyesanā.
[¶20] And what is the noble quest? It’s when someone who is themselves liable to be reborn, understanding the drawbacks in being liable to be reborn, seeks that which is free of rebirth, the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, extinguishment. Themselves liable to grow old, fall sick, die, sorrow, and become corrupted, understanding the drawbacks in these things, they seek that which is free of old age, sickness, death, sorrow, and corruption, the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, extinguishment. This is the noble quest.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, ariyā pariyesanā? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajātaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesati, attanā jarādhammo samāno jarādhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajaraṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesati, attanā byādhidhammo samāno byādhidhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā abyādhiṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesati, attanā maraṇadhammo samāno maraṇadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā amataṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesati, attanā sokadhammo samāno sokadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā asokaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesati, attanā saṅkilesadhammo samāno saṅkilesadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā asaṅkiliṭṭhaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesati. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyā pariyesanā.
[¶21] Mendicants, before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I too, being liable to be reborn, sought what is also liable to be reborn. Myself liable to grow old, fall sick, die, sorrow, and become corrupted, I sought what is also liable to these things. Then it occurred to me: ‘Why do I, being liable to be reborn, grow old, fall sick, sorrow, die, and become corrupted, seek things that have the same nature? Why don’t I seek that which is free of rebirth, old age, sickness, death, sorrow, and corruption, the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, extinguishment?’
> Pali: Ahampi sudaṁ, bhikkhave, pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddho bodhisattova samāno attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi, attanā jarādhammo samāno jarādhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi, attanā byādhidhammo samāno byādhidhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi, attanā maraṇadhammo samāno maraṇadhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi, attanā sokadhammo samāno sokadhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi, attanā saṅkilesadhammo samāno saṅkilesadhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi, attanā jarādhammo samāno …pe… byādhidhammo samāno … maraṇadhammo samāno … sokadhammo samāno … attanā saṅkilesadhammo samāno saṅkilesadhammaṁyeva pariyesāmi? Yannūnāhaṁ attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajātaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyeseyyaṁ, attanā jarādhammo samāno jarādhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajaraṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyeseyyaṁ, attanā byādhidhammo samāno byādhidhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā abyādhiṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyeseyyaṁ, attanā maraṇadhammo samāno maraṇadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā amataṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyeseyyaṁ, attanā sokadhammo samāno sokadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā asokaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyeseyyaṁ, attanā saṅkilesadhammo samāno saṅkilesadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā asaṅkiliṭṭhaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyeseyyan’ti.
[¶22] Some time later, while still with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life—though my mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces—I shaved off my hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, aparena samayena daharova samāno susukāḷakeso, bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajiṁ.
[¶23] Once I had gone forth I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ. upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso kālāma, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶24] Āḷāra Kālāma replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, āḷāro kālāmo maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā; tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶25] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ñāṇavādañca vadāmi theravādañca, ‘jānāmi passāmī’ti ca paṭijānāmi ahañceva aññe ca.
[¶26] Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Āḷāra Kālāma declares: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditates knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti; addhā āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ viharatī’ti.
[¶27] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, to what extent do you say you’ve realized this teaching with your own insight?’ When I said this, he declared the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, āḷāro kālāmo ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶28] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Āḷāra Kālāma who has faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Āḷāra Kālāma says he has realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi vīriyaṁ, mayhampatthi vīriyaṁ; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi sati, mayhampatthi sati; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi samādhi, mayhampatthi samādhi; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi paññā, mayhampatthi paññā. Yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ āḷāro kālāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti, tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶29] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, is it up to this point that you realized this teaching with your own insight, and declare having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘Ettāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶30] ‘I have, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemī’ti.
[¶31] ‘I too, reverend, have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶32] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it. So the teaching that I know, you know, and the teaching that you know, I know. I am like you and you are like me. Come now, reverend! We should both lead this community together.’
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi. Yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi tamahaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi, yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi tamahaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi. Iti yādiso ahaṁ tādiso tuvaṁ, yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso ahaṁ. Ehi dāni, āvuso, ubhova santā imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharāmā’ti.
[¶33] And that is how my tutor Āḷāra Kālāma placed me, his pupil, on the same position as him, and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, āḷāro kālāmo ācariyo me samāno attano antevāsiṁ maṁ samānaṁ attanā samasamaṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶34] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of nothingness.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva ākiñcaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶35] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁ kusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶36] Uddaka replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, udako rāmaputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā; tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶37] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ñāṇavādañca vadāmi theravādañca, ‘jānāmi passāmī’ti ca paṭijānāmi ahañceva aññe ca.
[¶38] Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Rāma declared: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditated knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesi; addhā rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ vihāsī’ti.
[¶39] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, to what extent did Rāma say he’d realized this teaching with his own insight?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti?
[¶40] When I said this, Uddaka son of Rāma declared the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶41] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Rāma who had faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Rāma said he had realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmasseva ahosi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho rāmasseva ahosi vīriyaṁ, mayhampatthi vīriyaṁ; na kho rāmasseva ahosi sati, mayhampatthi sati; na kho rāmasseva ahosi samādhi, mayhampatthi samādhi, na kho rāmasseva ahosi paññā, mayhampatthi paññā. Yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesi, tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶42] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, had Rāma realized this teaching with his own insight up to this point, and declared having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘Ettāvatā no, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶43] ‘He had, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti.
[¶44] ‘I too have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶45] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it. So the teaching that Rāma directly knew, you know, and the teaching you know, Rāma directly knew. Rāma was like you and you are like Rāma. Come now, reverend! You should lead this community.’
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi, taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi. Yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi, taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi, yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi, taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi. Iti yādiso rāmo ahosi tādiso tuvaṁ, yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso rāmo ahosi. Ehi dāni, āvuso, tuvaṁ imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharā’ti.
[¶46] And that is how my spiritual companion Uddaka son of Rāma placed me in the position of a tutor and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, udako rāmaputto sabrahmacārī me samāno ācariyaṭṭhāne maṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶47] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶48] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. Traveling stage by stage in the Magadhan lands, I arrived at the town of Senā in Uruvelā. There I saw a delightful park, a lovely grove with a flowing river that was clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby was a village to resort to for alms.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁ kusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno magadhesu anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena uruvelā senānigamo tadavasariṁ. Tatthaddasaṁ ramaṇīyaṁ bhūmibhāgaṁ, pāsādikañca vanasaṇḍaṁ, nadiñca sandantiṁ setakaṁ supatitthaṁ ramaṇīyaṁ, samantā ca gocaragāmaṁ.
[¶49] Then it occurred to me, ‘This park is truly delightful, a lovely grove with a flowing river that’s clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby there’s a village to resort to for alms. This is good enough for striving for a gentleman wanting to strive.’ So I sat down right there, thinking, ‘This is good enough for striving.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘ramaṇīyo vata bho bhūmibhāgo, pāsādiko ca vanasaṇḍo, nadī ca sandati setakā supatitthā ramaṇīyā, samantā ca gocaragāmo. Alaṁ vatidaṁ kulaputtassa padhānatthikassa padhānāyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, tattheva nisīdiṁ— alamidaṁ padhānāyāti.
[¶50] And so, being myself liable to be reborn, understanding the drawbacks in being liable to be reborn, I sought that which is free of rebirth, the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, extinguishment—and I found it. Being myself liable to grow old, fall sick, die, sorrow, and become corrupted, understanding the drawbacks in these things, I sought that which is free of old age, sickness, death, sorrow, and corruption, the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, extinguishment—and I found it.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajātaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesamāno ajātaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁ, attanā jarādhammo samāno jarādhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajaraṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesamāno ajaraṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁ, attanā byādhidhammo samāno byādhidhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā abyādhiṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesamāno abyādhiṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁ, attanā maraṇadhammo samāno maraṇadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā amataṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁ, attanā sokadhammo samāno sokadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā asokaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁ, attanā saṅkilesadhammo samāno saṅkilesadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā asaṅkiliṭṭhaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesamāno asaṅkiliṭṭhaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁ.
## 28. MN 26 · The Noble Quest · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/28/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/28/#p-N
[¶0] Knowledge and vision arose in me: ‘My freedom is unshakable; this is my last rebirth; now there’ll be no more future lives.’
> Pali: Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṁ udapādi: ‘akuppā me vimutti, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’ti.
[¶1] Then it occurred to me, ‘This principle I have discovered is deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute. But people like clinging, they love it and enjoy it. It’s hard for them to see this topic; that is, specific conditionality, dependent origination. It’s also hard for them to see this topic; that is, the stilling of all activities, the letting go of all attachments, the ending of craving, fading away, cessation, extinguishment. And if I were to teach this principle, others might not understand me, which would be wearying and troublesome for me.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘adhigato kho myāyaṁ dhammo gambhīro duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālayarāmā kho panāyaṁ pajā ālayaratā ālayasammuditā. Ālayarāmāya kho pana pajāya ālayaratāya ālayasammuditāya duddasaṁ idaṁ ṭhānaṁ yadidaṁ—idappaccayatā paṭiccasamuppādo. Idampi kho ṭhānaṁ duddasaṁ yadidaṁ—sabbasaṅkhārasamatho sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ. Ahañceva kho pana dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, pare ca me na ājāneyyuṁ, so mamassa kilamatho, sā mamassa vihesā’ti.
[¶2] And then these verses, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, occurred to me:
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, bhikkhave, imā anacchariyā gāthāyo paṭibhaṁsu pubbe assutapubbā:
[¶3] ‘I’ve struggled hard to realize this,
there’s no need to reveal it now!
Those mired in greed and hate
can’t really understand this teaching.
> Pali: ‘Kicchena me adhigataṁ,
halaṁ dāni pakāsituṁ;
Rāgadosaparetehi,
nāyaṁ dhammo susambudho.
[¶4] It goes against the stream, subtle,
deep, obscure, and very fine.
Those besotted by greed cannot see,
for they’re cloaked in a mass of darkness.’
> Pali: Paṭisotagāmiṁ nipuṇaṁ,
gambhīraṁ duddasaṁ aṇuṁ;
Rāgarattā na dakkhanti,
tamokhandhena āvuṭā’ti.
[¶5] So, as I reflected like this, my mind inclined to remaining passive, not to teaching the Dhamma.
> Pali: Itiha me, bhikkhave, paṭisañcikkhato appossukkatāya cittaṁ namati, no dhammadesanāya.
[¶6] Then the divinity Sahampati, knowing my train of thought, thought, ‘Oh lord! The world will be lost, the world will perish! For the mind of the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, inclines to remaining passive, not to teaching the Dhamma.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmuno sahampatissa mama cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya etadahosi: ‘nassati vata bho loko, vinassati vata bho loko, yatra hi nāma tathāgatassa arahato sammāsambuddhassa appossukkatāya cittaṁ namati, no dhammadesanāyā’ti.
[¶7] Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, the divinity Sahampati vanished from the realm of divinity and reappeared in front of me. He arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward me, and said, ‘Sir, let the Blessed One teach the Dhamma! Let the Holy One teach the Dhamma! There are beings with little dust in their eyes. They’re in decline because they haven’t heard the teaching. There will be those who understand the teaching!’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmā sahampati—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—brahmaloke antarahito mama purato pāturahosi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmā sahampati ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yenāhaṁ tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā maṁ etadavoca: ‘desetu, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṁ, desetu sugato dhammaṁ. Santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti. Bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro’ti.
[¶8] That is what the divinity Sahampati said. Then he went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca, bhikkhave, brahmā sahampati. Idaṁ vatvā athāparaṁ etadavoca:
[¶9] ‘Among the Magadhans there appeared in the past
an impure teaching thought up by the stained.
Fling open the door to freedom from death!
Let them hear the teaching the immaculate one discovered.
> Pali: ‘Pāturahosi magadhesu pubbe,
Dhammo asuddho samalehi cintito;
Apāpuretaṁ amatassa dvāraṁ,
Suṇantu dhammaṁ vimalenānubuddhaṁ.
[¶10] Standing high on a rocky mountain,
you can see the people all around.
In just the same way, All-seer, so intelligent,
having ascended the Temple of Truth,
rid of sorrow, look upon the people
swamped with sorrow, overcome by rebirth and old age.
> Pali: Sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito,
Yathāpi passe janataṁ samantato;
Tathūpamaṁ dhammamayaṁ sumedha,
Pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhu;
Sokāvatiṇṇaṁ janatamapetasoko,
Avekkhassu jātijarābhibhūtaṁ.
[¶11] Rise, hero! Victor in battle, caravan leader,
wander the world free of debt.
Let the Blessed One teach the Dhamma!
There will be those who understand!’
> Pali: Uṭṭhehi vīra vijitasaṅgāma,
Satthavāha aṇaṇa vicara loke;
Desassu bhagavā dhammaṁ,
Aññātāro bhavissantī’ti.
[¶12] Then, understanding the Divinity’s invitation, I surveyed the world with the eye of a Buddha, because of my compassion for sentient beings. And I saw sentient beings with little dust in their eyes, and some with much dust in their eyes; with keen faculties and with weak faculties, with good qualities and with bad qualities, easy to teach and hard to teach. And some of them lived seeing the danger in the fault to do with the next world, while others did not. It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. Some of them sprout and grow in the water reaching the water’s surface. And some of them sprout and grow in the water but rise up above the water and stand with no water clinging to them. In the same way, I saw sentient beings with little dust in their eyes, and some with much dust in their eyes.
> Pali: Atha kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, brahmuno ca ajjhesanaṁ viditvā sattesu ca kāruññataṁ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokesiṁ. Addasaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokento satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe, tikkhindriye mudindriye, svākāre dvākāre, suviññāpaye duviññāpaye, appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante, appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante. Seyyathāpi nāma uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni samodakaṁ ṭhitāni, appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakaṁ accuggamma ṭhitāni anupalittāni udakena; evameva kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokento addasaṁ satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe, tikkhindriye mudindriye, svākāre dvākāre, suviññāpaye duviññāpaye, appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante, appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante.
[¶13] Then I replied in verse to the divinity Sahampati:
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, brahmānaṁ sahampatiṁ gāthāya paccabhāsiṁ:
[¶14] ‘Flung open are the doors to freedom from death!
Let those with ears to hear commit to faith.
Thinking it would be troublesome, Divinity, I did not teach
the sophisticated, sublime Dhamma among mankind.’
> Pali: ‘Apārutā tesaṁ amatassa dvārā,
Ye sotavanto pamuñcantu saddhaṁ;
Vihiṁsasaññī paguṇaṁ na bhāsiṁ,
Dhammaṁ paṇītaṁ manujesu brahme’ti.
[¶15] Then the divinity Sahampati, knowing that his request for me to teach the Dhamma had been granted, bowed and respectfully circled me, keeping me on his right, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmā sahampati ‘katāvakāso khomhi bhagavatā dhammadesanāyā’ti maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
[¶16] Then I thought, ‘Who should I teach first of all? Who will quickly understand this teaching?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘kassa nu kho ahaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ; ko imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti?
[¶17] Then it occurred to me, ‘That Āḷāra Kālāma is astute, competent, intelligent, and has long had little dust in his eyes. Why don’t I teach him first of all? He’ll quickly understand the teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āḷāro kālāmo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī dīgharattaṁ apparajakkhajātiko. Yannūnāhaṁ āḷārassa kālāmassa paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ. So imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti.
[¶18] But a deity came to me and said, ‘Sir, Āḷāra Kālāma passed away seven days ago.’
> Pali: Atha kho maṁ, bhikkhave, devatā upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca: ‘sattāhakālaṅkato, bhante, āḷāro kālāmo’ti.
[¶19] And knowledge and vision arose in me, ‘Āḷāra Kālāma passed away seven days ago.’
> Pali: Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṁ udapādi: ‘sattāhakālaṅkato āḷāro kālāmo’ti.
[¶20] I thought, ‘This is a great loss for Āḷāra Kālāma. If he had heard the teaching, he would have understood it quickly.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘mahājāniyo kho āḷāro kālāmo. Sace hi so imaṁ dhammaṁ suṇeyya, khippameva ājāneyyā’ti.
[¶21] Then I thought, ‘Who should I teach first of all? Who will quickly understand this teaching?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘kassa nu kho ahaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ; ko imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti?
[¶22] Then it occurred to me, ‘That Uddaka son of Rāma is astute, competent, intelligent, and has long had little dust in his eyes. Why don’t I teach him first of all? He’ll quickly understand the teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho udako rāmaputto paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī dīgharattaṁ apparajakkhajātiko. Yannūnāhaṁ udakassa rāmaputtassa paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ. So imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti.
[¶23] But a deity came to me and said, ‘Sir, Uddaka son of Rāma passed away just last night.’
> Pali: Atha kho maṁ, bhikkhave, devatā upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca: ‘abhidosakālaṅkato, bhante, udako rāmaputto’ti.
[¶24] And knowledge and vision arose in me, ‘Uddaka son of Rāma passed away just last night.’
> Pali: Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṁ udapādi: ‘abhidosakālaṅkato udako rāmaputto’ti.
[¶25] I thought, ‘This is a great loss for Uddaka. If he had heard the teaching, he would have understood it quickly.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘mahājāniyo kho udako rāmaputto. Sace hi so imaṁ dhammaṁ suṇeyya, khippameva ājāneyyā’ti.
[¶26] Then I thought, ‘Who should I teach first of all? Who will quickly understand this teaching?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘kassa nu kho ahaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ; ko imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti?
[¶27] Then it occurred to me, ‘The group of five mendicants were very helpful to me. They looked after me during my time of resolute striving. Why don’t I teach them first of all?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū, ye maṁ padhānapahitattaṁ upaṭṭhahiṁsu. Yannūnāhaṁ pañcavaggiyānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyan’ti.
[¶28] Then I thought, ‘Where are the group of five mendicants staying these days?’ With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman I saw that the group of five mendicants were staying near Varanasi in the deer park at Isipatana. So, when I had stayed in Uruvelā as long as I pleased, I set out for Varanasi.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi: ‘kahaṁ nu kho etarahi pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū viharantī’ti? Addasaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena pañcavaggiye bhikkhū bārāṇasiyaṁ viharante isipatane migadāye. Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, uruvelāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena bārāṇasī tena cārikaṁ pakkamiṁ.
[¶29] While I was traveling along the road between Gayā and Bodhgaya, the Ājīvaka ascetic Upaka saw me and said, ‘Reverend, your faculties are so very clear, and your complexion is pure and bright. In whose name have you gone forth, reverend? Who is your Teacher? Whose teaching do you believe in?’
> Pali: Addasā kho maṁ, bhikkhave, upako ājīvako antarā ca gayaṁ antarā ca bodhiṁ addhānamaggappaṭipannaṁ. Disvāna maṁ etadavoca: ‘vippasannāni kho te, āvuso, indriyāni, parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto. Kaṁsi tvaṁ, āvuso, uddissa pabbajito, ko vā te satthā, kassa vā tvaṁ dhammaṁ rocesī’ti?
[¶30] I replied to Upaka in verse:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, upakaṁ ājīvakaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsiṁ:
[¶31] ‘I am the vanquisher of all, the knower of all,
unsullied in the midst of all things.
I’ve given up all, freed through the ending of craving.
Since I know for myself, whose follower should I be?
> Pali: ‘Sabbābhibhū sabbavidūhamasmi,
Sabbesu dhammesu anūpalitto;
Sabbañjaho taṇhākkhaye vimutto,
Sayaṁ abhiññāya kamuddiseyyaṁ.
[¶32] I have no tutor.
There is no one like me.
In the world with its gods,
I have no rival.
> Pali: Na me ācariyo atthi,
sadiso me na vijjati;
Sadevakasmiṁ lokasmiṁ,
natthi me paṭipuggalo.
[¶33] For in this world, I am the perfected one;
I am the supreme Teacher.
I alone am fully awakened,
cooled, quenched.
> Pali: Ahañhi arahā loke,
ahaṁ satthā anuttaro;
Ekomhi sammāsambuddho,
sītibhūtosmi nibbuto.
[¶34] I am going to the city of Kāsi
to roll forth the Wheel of Dhamma.
In this world that is so blind,
I’ll beat the drum of freedom from death!’
> Pali: Dhammacakkaṁ pavattetuṁ,
Gacchāmi kāsinaṁ puraṁ;
Andhībhūtasmiṁ lokasmiṁ,
Āhañchaṁ amatadundubhin’ti.
[¶35] ‘According to what you claim, reverend, you ought to be the Infinite Victor.’
> Pali: ‘Yathā kho tvaṁ, āvuso, paṭijānāsi, arahasi anantajino’ti.
[¶36] ‘The victors are those who, like me,
have reached the ending of defilements.
I have conquered bad qualities, Upaka—
that’s why I’m a victor.’
> Pali: ‘Mādisā ve jinā honti,
ye pattā āsavakkhayaṁ;
Jitā me pāpakā dhammā,
tasmāhamupaka jino’ti.
[¶37] When I had spoken, Upaka said: ‘If you say so, reverend.’ Shaking his head, he took a wrong turn and left.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, upako ājīvako ‘hupeyyapāvuso’ti vatvā sīsaṁ okampetvā ummaggaṁ gahetvā pakkāmi.
[¶38] Traveling stage by stage, I arrived at Varanasi, and went to see the group of five mendicants in the deer park at Isipatana. The group of five mendicants saw me coming off in the distance and stopped each other, saying, ‘Here comes the ascetic Gotama. He’s so indulgent; he strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence. We shouldn’t bow to him or rise for him or receive his bowl and robe. But we can set out a seat; he can sit if he likes.’ Yet as I drew closer, the group of five mendicants were unable to stop themselves per their own agreement. Some came out to greet me and receive my bowl and robe, some spread out a seat, while others set out water for washing my feet. But they still addressed me by name and as ‘reverend’.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena bārāṇasī isipatanaṁ migadāyo yena pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamiṁ. Addasaṁsu kho maṁ, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū dūrato āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna aññamaññaṁ saṇṭhapesuṁ: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, samaṇo gotamo āgacchati bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya. So neva abhivādetabbo, na paccuṭṭhātabbo; nāssa pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahetabbaṁ. Api ca kho āsanaṁ ṭhapetabbaṁ, sace ākaṅkhissati nisīdissatī’ti. Yathā yathā kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, upasaṅkamiṁ tathā tathā pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū nāsakkhiṁsu sakāya katikāya saṇṭhātuṁ. Appekacce maṁ paccuggantvā pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahesuṁ, appekacce āsanaṁ paññapesuṁ, appekacce pādodakaṁ upaṭṭhapesuṁ. Api ca kho maṁ nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācaranti.
[¶39] So I said to them, ‘Mendicants, don’t address me by name and as “reverend”. The Realized One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. Listen up, mendicants: I have achieved freedom from death! I shall instruct you, I will teach you the Dhamma. By practicing as instructed you will soon realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. You will live having achieved with your own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘mā, bhikkhave, tathāgataṁ nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācaratha. Arahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato sammāsambuddho. Odahatha, bhikkhave, sotaṁ, amatamadhigataṁ, ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶40] But they said to me, ‘Reverend Gotama, even by that conduct, that practice, that grueling work you did not achieve any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. How could you have achieved such a state now that you’ve become indulgent, strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘tāyapi kho tvaṁ, āvuso gotama, iriyāya tāya paṭipadāya tāya dukkarakārikāya nājjhagamā uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ, kiṁ pana tvaṁ etarahi bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya adhigamissasi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesan’ti?
[¶41] So I said to them, ‘The Realized One has not become indulgent, strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence. The Realized One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. Listen up, mendicants: I have achieved freedom from death! I shall instruct you, I will teach you the Dhamma. By practicing as instructed you will soon realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘na, bhikkhave, tathāgato bāhulliko, na padhānavibbhanto, na āvatto bāhullāya. Arahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato sammāsambuddho. Odahatha, bhikkhave, sotaṁ, amatamadhigataṁ, ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶42] But for a second time they said to me, ‘Reverend Gotama … you’ve returned to indulgence.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘tāyapi kho tvaṁ, āvuso gotama, iriyāya tāya paṭipadāya tāya dukkarakārikāya nājjhagamā uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ, kiṁ pana tvaṁ etarahi bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya adhigamissasi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesan’ti?
[¶43] So for a second time I said to them, ‘The Realized One has not become indulgent …’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘na, bhikkhave, tathāgato bāhulliko …pe… upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶44] But for a third time they said to me, ‘Reverend Gotama, even by that conduct, that practice, that grueling work you did not achieve any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. How could you have achieved such a state now that you’ve become indulgent, strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence?’
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘tāyapi kho tvaṁ, āvuso gotama, iriyāya tāya paṭipadāya tāya dukkarakārikāya nājjhagamā uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ, kiṁ pana tvaṁ etarahi bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya adhigamissasi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesan’ti?
[¶45] So I said to them, ‘Mendicants, have you ever known me to speak like this before?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘abhijānātha me no tumhe, bhikkhave, ito pubbe evarūpaṁ pabhāvitametan’ti?
[¶46] ‘No sir, we have not.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶47] ‘The Realized One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. Listen up, mendicants: I have achieved freedom from death! I shall instruct you, I will teach you the Dhamma. By practicing as instructed you will soon realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. You will live having achieved with your own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: ‘Arahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato sammāsambuddho. Odahatha, bhikkhave, sotaṁ, amatamadhigataṁ, ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶48] I was able to persuade the group of five mendicants. Then sometimes I advised two mendicants, while the other three went for alms. Then those three would feed all six of us with what they brought back. Sometimes I advised three mendicants, while the other two went for alms. Then those two would feed all six of us with what they brought back.
> Pali: Asakkhiṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetuṁ. Dvepi sudaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ovadāmi, tayo bhikkhū piṇḍāya caranti. Yaṁ tayo bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā āharanti tena chabbaggiyā yāpema. Tayopi sudaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ovadāmi, dve bhikkhū piṇḍāya caranti. Yaṁ dve bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā āharanti tena chabbaggiyā yāpema.
[¶49] As the group of five mendicants were being advised and instructed by me like this, being themselves liable to be reborn, understanding the drawbacks in being liable to be reborn, they sought that which is free of rebirth, the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, extinguishment—and they found it. Being themselves liable to grow old, fall sick, die, sorrow, and become corrupted, understanding the drawbacks in these things, they sought that which is free of old age, sickness, death, sorrow, and corruption, the supreme sanctuary from the yoke, extinguishment—and they found it. Knowledge and vision arose in them: ‘Our freedom is unshakable; this is our last rebirth; now there’ll be no more future lives.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū mayā evaṁ ovadiyamānā evaṁ anusāsiyamānā attanā jātidhammā samānā jātidhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajātaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesamānā ajātaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁsu, attanā jarādhammā samānā jarādhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā ajaraṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesamānā ajaraṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁsu, attanā byādhidhammā samānā …pe… attanā maraṇadhammā samānā … attanā sokadhammā samānā … attanā saṅkilesadhammā samānā saṅkilesadhamme ādīnavaṁ viditvā asaṅkiliṭṭhaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ pariyesamānā asaṅkiliṭṭhaṁ anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ nibbānaṁ ajjhagamaṁsu. Ñāṇañca pana nesaṁ dassanaṁ udapādi: ‘akuppā no vimutti, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’ti.
[¶50] Mendicants, there are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Pañcime, bhikkhave, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca kāmaguṇā.
[¶51] There are ascetics and brahmins who enjoy these five kinds of sensual stimulation tied, infatuated, attached, blind to the drawbacks, and not understanding the escape. You should understand that they have met with calamity and disaster, and the Wicked One can do with them what he wants.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā ime pañca kāmaguṇe gathitā mucchitā ajjhopannā anādīnavadassāvino anissaraṇapaññā paribhuñjanti, te evamassu veditabbā: ‘anayamāpannā byasanamāpannā yathākāmakaraṇīyā pāpimato’.
[¶52] Suppose a deer in the wilderness was lying caught on a pile of snares. You’d know that it has met with calamity and disaster, and the hunter can do with them what he wants. And when the hunter comes, it cannot flee where it wants.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, āraññako mago baddho pāsarāsiṁ adhisayeyya. So evamassa veditabbo: ‘anayamāpanno byasanamāpanno yathākāmakaraṇīyo luddassa. Āgacchante ca pana ludde yena kāmaṁ na pakkamissatī’ti.
[¶53] In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who enjoy these five kinds of sensual stimulation tied, infatuated, attached, blind to the drawbacks, and not understanding the escape. You should understand that they have met with calamity and disaster, and the Wicked One can do with them what he wants.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā ime pañca kāmaguṇe gathitā mucchitā ajjhopannā anādīnavadassāvino anissaraṇapaññā paribhuñjanti, te evamassu veditabbā: ‘anayamāpannā byasanamāpannā yathākāmakaraṇīyā pāpimato’.
[¶54] There are ascetics and brahmins who enjoy these five kinds of sensual stimulation without being tied, infatuated, or attached, seeing the drawbacks, and understanding the escape. You should understand that they haven’t met with calamity and disaster, and the Wicked One cannot do what he wants with them.
> Pali: Ye ca kho keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā ime pañca kāmaguṇe agathitā amucchitā anajjhopannā ādīnavadassāvino nissaraṇapaññā paribhuñjanti, te evamassu veditabbā: ‘na anayamāpannā na byasanamāpannā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā pāpimato’.
[¶55] Suppose a deer in the wilderness was lying on a pile of snares without being caught. You’d know that it hasn’t met with calamity and disaster, and the hunter cannot do what he wants with them. And when the hunter comes, it can flee where it wants.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, āraññako mago abaddho pāsarāsiṁ adhisayeyya. So evamassa veditabbo: ‘na anayamāpanno na byasanamāpanno na yathākāmakaraṇīyo luddassa. Āgacchante ca pana ludde yena kāmaṁ pakkamissatī’ti.
[¶56] In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who enjoy these five kinds of sensual stimulation without being tied, infatuated, or attached, seeing the drawbacks, and understanding the escape. You should understand that they haven’t met with calamity and disaster, and the Wicked One cannot do what he wants with them.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā ime pañca kāmaguṇe agathitā amucchitā anajjhopannā ādīnavadassāvino nissaraṇapaññā paribhuñjanti, te evamassu veditabbā: ‘na anayamāpannā na byasanamāpannā na yathākāmakaraṇīyā pāpimato’.
[¶57] Suppose there was a wild deer wandering in the forest that walked, stood, sat, and laid down in confidence. Why is that? Because it’s out of the hunter’s range.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, āraññako mago araññe pavane caramāno vissattho gacchati, vissattho tiṭṭhati, vissattho nisīdati, vissattho seyyaṁ kappeti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Anāpāthagato, bhikkhave, luddassa.
[¶58] In the same way, a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra, put out his eyes without a trace, and gone where the Wicked One cannot see.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu andhamakāsi māraṁ apadaṁ, vadhitvā māracakkhuṁ adassanaṁ gato pāpimato.
[¶59] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶60] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati, sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶61] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶62] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶63] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶64] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶65] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, enters and remains in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave …pe… pāpimato.
[¶66] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, enters and remains in the cessation of perception and feeling. And, having seen with wisdom, their defilements come to an end. This is called a mendicant who has blinded Māra, put out his eyes without a trace, and gone where the Wicked One cannot see. They’ve crossed over clinging to the world. And they walk, stand, sit, and lie down in confidence. Why is that? Because they’re out of the Wicked One’s range.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu andhamakāsi māraṁ apadaṁ, vadhitvā māracakkhuṁ adassanaṁ gato pāpimato. Tiṇṇo loke visattikaṁ vissattho gacchati, vissattho tiṭṭhati, vissattho nisīdati, vissattho seyyaṁ kappeti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Anāpāthagato, bhikkhave, pāpimato”ti.
[¶67] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶68] > Pali: Pāsarāsisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 29. MN 27 · The Shorter Simile of the Elephant’s Footprint
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/29/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/29/#p-N
[¶0] MN 27 · The Shorter Simile of the Elephant’s Footprint
> Pali: MN 27 · Cūḷahatthipadopamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the brahmin Jānussoṇi drove out from Sāvatthī in the middle of the day in an all-white chariot drawn by mares. He saw the wanderer Pilotika coming off in the distance, and said to him, “So, worthy Vacchāyana, where are you coming from in the middle of the day?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo sabbasetena vaḷavābhirathena sāvatthiyā niyyāti divādivassa. Addasā kho jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo pilotikaṁ paribbājakaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna pilotikaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “Handa kuto nu bhavaṁ vacchāyano āgacchati divādivassā”ti?
[¶3] “Just now, worthy sir, I’ve come from the presence of the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: “Ito hi kho ahaṁ, bho, āgacchāmi samaṇassa gotamassa santikā”ti.
[¶4] “What do you think of the ascetic Gotama’s lucidity of wisdom? Do you think he’s astute?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññati bhavaṁ vacchāyano samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṁ paṇḍito maññe”ti.
[¶5] “Worthy sir, who am I to judge the ascetic Gotama’s lucidity of wisdom? You’d really have to be on the same level to judge his lucidity of wisdom.”
> Pali: “Ko cāhaṁ, bho, ko ca samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṁ jānissāmi. Sopi nūnassa tādisova yo samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṁ jāneyyā”ti.
[¶6] “Worthy Vacchāyana praises the ascetic Gotama with high praise indeed.”
> Pali: “Uḷārāya khalu bhavaṁ vacchāyano samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pasaṁsāya pasaṁsatī”ti.
[¶7] “Who am I to praise the ascetic Gotama? He is praised by the praised as the first among gods and humans.”
> Pali: “Ko cāhaṁ, bho, ko ca samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pasaṁsissāmi, pasatthapasatthova so bhavaṁ gotamo seṭṭho devamanussānan”ti.
[¶8] “But for what reason are you so devoted to the ascetic Gotama?”
> Pali: “Kaṁ pana bhavaṁ vacchāyano atthavasaṁ sampassamāno samaṇe gotame evaṁ abhippasanno”ti?
[¶9] “Suppose that a skilled bull elephant tracker were to enter a bull elephant wood. There he’d see a large elephant’s footprint, long and broad. He would come to the conclusion, ‘This must be a big bull elephant.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bho, kusalo nāgavaniko nāgavanaṁ paviseyya. So passeyya nāgavane mahantaṁ hatthipadaṁ, dīghato ca āyataṁ, tiriyañca vitthataṁ. So niṭṭhaṁ gaccheyya: ‘mahā vata bho nāgo’ti.
[¶10] In the same way, because I saw four footprints of the ascetic Gotama I came to the conclusion, ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, bho, yato addasaṁ samaṇe gotame cattāri padāni athāhaṁ niṭṭhamagamaṁ: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶11] What four? Firstly, I see some astute aristocrats who are subtle, accomplished in the doctrines of others, hair-splitters. You’d think they live to demolish convictions with their intellect. They hear, ‘So, worthy sir, that ascetic Gotama will come down to such-and-such village or town.’ They formulate a question, thinking, ‘We’ll approach the ascetic Gotama and ask him this question. If he answers like this, we’ll refute him like that; and if he answers like that, we’ll refute him like this.’
> Pali: Katamāni cattāri? Idhāhaṁ, bho, passāmi ekacce khattiyapaṇḍite nipuṇe kataparappavāde vālavedhirūpe, te bhindantā maññe caranti paññāgatena diṭṭhigatāni. Te suṇanti: ‘samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osarissatī’ti. Te pañhaṁ abhisaṅkharonti: ‘imaṁ mayaṁ pañhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma. Evañce no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evamassa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāma. Evañcepi no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evampissa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāmā’ti.
[¶12] When they hear that he has come down they approach him. The ascetic Gotama educates, encourages, fires up, and inspires them with a Dhamma talk. They don’t even get around to asking their question to the ascetic Gotama, so how could they refute his answer? Invariably, they become his disciples. When I saw this first footprint of the ascetic Gotama, I came to the conclusion, ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Te suṇanti: ‘samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osaṭo’ti. Te yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkamanti. Te samaṇo gotamo dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṁseti. Te samaṇena gotamena dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā na ceva samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pañhaṁ pucchanti, kutossa vādaṁ āropessanti? Aññadatthu samaṇasseva gotamassa sāvakā sampajjanti. Yadāhaṁ, bho, samaṇe gotame imaṁ paṭhamaṁ padaṁ addasaṁ athāhaṁ niṭṭhamagamaṁ: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶13] Furthermore, I see some astute brahmins … some astute householders … they become his disciples.
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bho, passāmi idhekacce brāhmaṇapaṇḍite …pe… gahapatipaṇḍite … pe…
[¶14] Furthermore, I see some astute ascetics who are subtle, accomplished in the doctrines of others, hair-splitters. … They don’t even get around to asking their question to the ascetic Gotama, so how could they refute his answer? Invariably, they ask the ascetic Gotama for the chance to go forth. And he gives them the going-forth. Soon after going forth, living withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, they realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. They live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: samaṇapaṇḍite nipuṇe kataparappavāde vālavedhirūpe te bhindantā maññe caranti paññāgatena diṭṭhigatāni. Te suṇanti: ‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osarissatī’ti. Te pañhaṁ abhisaṅkharonti ‘imaṁ mayaṁ pañhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma. Evañce no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evamassa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāma. Evañcepi no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evampissa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāmā’ti. Te suṇanti ‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osaṭo’ti. Te yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkamanti. Te samaṇo gotamo dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṁseti. Te samaṇena gotamena dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā na ceva samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pañhaṁ pucchanti, kutossa vādaṁ āropessanti? Aññadatthu samaṇaṁyeva gotamaṁ okāsaṁ yācanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Te samaṇo gotamo pabbājeti. Te tattha pabbajitā samānā vūpakaṭṭhā appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharantā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti.
[¶15] They say, ‘We were almost lost! We almost perished! For we used to claim that we were ascetics, brahmins, and perfected ones, but we were none of these things. But now we really are ascetics, brahmins, and perfected ones!’ When I saw this fourth footprint of the ascetic Gotama, I came to the conclusion, ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘manaṁ vata, bho, anassāma, manaṁ vata, bho, panassāma; mayañhi pubbe assamaṇāva samānā samaṇamhāti paṭijānimha, abrāhmaṇāva samānā brāhmaṇamhāti paṭijānimha, anarahantova samānā arahantamhāti paṭijānimha. Idāni khomha samaṇā, idāni khomha brāhmaṇā, idāni khomha arahanto’ti. Yadāhaṁ, bho, samaṇe gotame imaṁ catutthaṁ padaṁ addasaṁ athāhaṁ niṭṭhamagamaṁ: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶16] It’s because I saw these four footprints of the ascetic Gotama that I came to the conclusion, ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’”
> Pali: Yato kho ahaṁ, bho, samaṇe gotame imāni cattāri padāni addasaṁ athāhaṁ niṭṭhamagamaṁ: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’”ti.
[¶17] When he had spoken, Jānussoṇi got down from his chariot, arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and expressed this heartfelt sentiment three times:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo sabbasetā vaḷavābhirathā orohitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶18] “Homage to that Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: “Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa;
[¶19] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa;
[¶20] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassāti.
[¶21] Hopefully, some time or other I’ll get to meet the worthy Gotama, and we can have a discussion.”
> Pali: Appeva nāma mayampi kadāci karahaci tena bhotā gotamena saddhiṁ samāgaccheyyāma, appeva nāma siyā kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶22] Then the brahmin Jānussoṇi went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and informed the Buddha of all he had discussed with the wanderer Pilotika.
> Pali: Atha kho jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo yāvatako ahosi pilotikena paribbājakena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ bhagavato ārocesi.
[¶23] When he had spoken, the Buddha said to him, “Brahmin, the simile of the elephant’s footprint is not yet completed in detail. As to how it is completed in detail, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā jāṇussoṇiṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “na kho, brāhmaṇa, ettāvatā hatthipadopamo vitthārena paripūro hoti. Api ca, brāhmaṇa, yathā hatthipadopamo vitthārena paripūro hoti taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶24] “Yes, worthy sir,” Jānussoṇi replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶25] “Suppose a bull elephant tracker were to enter a bull elephant wood. There they’d see a large elephant’s footprint, long and broad. A skilled bull elephant tracker does not yet come to the conclusion, ‘This must be a big bull elephant.’ Why not? Because in an elephant wood there are dwarf cow elephants with big footprints, and this footprint might be one of theirs.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, nāgavaniko nāgavanaṁ paviseyya. So passeyya nāgavane mahantaṁ hatthipadaṁ, dīghato ca āyataṁ, tiriyañca vitthataṁ. Yo hoti kusalo nāgavaniko neva tāva niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘mahā vata bho nāgo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Santi hi, brāhmaṇa, nāgavane vāmanikā nāma hatthiniyo mahāpadā, tāsaṁ petaṁ padaṁ assāti.
[¶26] They keep following the track until they see a big footprint, long and broad, and traces high up. A skilled bull elephant tracker does not yet come to the conclusion, ‘This must be a big bull elephant.’ Why not? Because in an elephant wood there are tall lofty cow elephants with big footprints, and this footprint might be one of theirs.
> Pali: So tamanugacchati. Tamanugacchanto passati nāgavane mahantaṁ hatthipadaṁ, dīghato ca āyataṁ, tiriyañca vitthataṁ, uccā ca nisevitaṁ. Yo hoti kusalo nāgavaniko neva tāva niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘mahā vata bho nāgo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Santi hi, brāhmaṇa, nāgavane uccā kāḷārikā nāma hatthiniyo mahāpadā, tāsaṁ petaṁ padaṁ assāti.
[¶27] They keep following the track until they see a big footprint, long and broad, and traces and tusk-marks high up. A skilled bull elephant tracker does not yet come to the conclusion, ‘This must be a big bull elephant.’ Why not? Because in an elephant wood there are tall matriarch cow elephants with big footprints, and this footprint might be one of theirs.
> Pali: So tamanugacchati. Tamanugacchanto passati nāgavane mahantaṁ hatthipadaṁ, dīghato ca āyataṁ, tiriyañca vitthataṁ, uccā ca nisevitaṁ, uccā ca dantehi ārañjitāni. Yo hoti kusalo nāgavaniko neva tāva niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘mahā vata bho nāgo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Santi hi, brāhmaṇa, nāgavane uccā kaṇerukā nāma hatthiniyo mahāpadā, tāsaṁ petaṁ padaṁ assāti.
[¶28] They keep following the track until they see a big footprint, long and broad, and traces, tusk-marks, and broken branches high up. And they see that bull elephant walking, standing, sitting, or lying down at the root of a tree or in the open. Then they’d come to the conclusion, ‘This is that big bull elephant.’
> Pali: So tamanugacchati. Tamanugacchanto passati nāgavane mahantaṁ hatthipadaṁ, dīghato ca āyataṁ, tiriyañca vitthataṁ, uccā ca nisevitaṁ, uccā ca dantehi ārañjitāni, uccā ca sākhābhaṅgaṁ. Tañca nāgaṁ passati rukkhamūlagataṁ vā abbhokāsagataṁ vā gacchantaṁ vā tiṭṭhantaṁ vā nisinnaṁ vā nipannaṁ vā. So niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘ayameva so mahānāgo’ti.
[¶29] In the same way, brahmin, a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He realizes with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely complete and pure.
> Pali: Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, idha tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ; kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.
[¶30] A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One, and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati.
[¶31] Once they’ve gone forth, they take up the training and livelihood of the mendicants. They give up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings.
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
[¶32] They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving.
> Pali: Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati.
[¶33] They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex.
> Pali: Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā.
[¶34] They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words.
> Pali: Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa.
[¶35] They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony.
> Pali: Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā, samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶36] They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, likable, and agreeable to the people.
> Pali: Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti. Yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶37] They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial.
> Pali: Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ.
[¶38] They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and at the wrong time. They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music. They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. They refrain from high and luxurious beds. They refrain from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land. They refrain from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence.
> Pali: So bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti, ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato, virato vikālabhojanā, naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti, mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti, uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti, jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, hatthigavāssavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti, kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti, tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti, ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti, chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
[¶39] They’re content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves.
> Pali: So santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. Seyyathāpi nāma pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶40] When they see a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶41] They act with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: So abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.
[¶42] When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble contentment, this noble sense restraint, and this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ.
[¶43] After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present. Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti. Byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti. Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti. Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati, ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti. Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶44] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This, brahmin, is that which is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ and also ‘a trace of the Realized One’ and also ‘a mark of the Realized One’. But a noble disciple does not yet come to the conclusion, ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tathāgatapadaṁ itipi, tathāgatanisevitaṁ itipi, tathāgatārañjitaṁ itipi. Na tveva tāva ariyasāvako niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶45] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This too is what is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa …pe… suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶46] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ This too is what is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa …pe… suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶47] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This too is what is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tathāgatapadaṁ itipi, tathāgatanisevitaṁ itipi, tathāgatārañjitaṁ itipi. Na tveva tāva ariyasāvako niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶48] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. … They recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. This too is what is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ …
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ, dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tathāgatapadaṁ itipi, tathāgatanisevitaṁ itipi, tathāgatārañjitaṁ itipi. Na tveva tāva ariyasāvako niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶49] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and surpasses the human, they understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. This too is what is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ …
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tathāgatapadaṁ itipi, tathāgatanisevitaṁ itipi, tathāgatārañjitaṁ itipi. Na tveva tāva ariyasāvako niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶50] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements.’ This, brahmin, is what is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ and also ‘a trace of the Realized One’ and also ‘a mark of the Realized One’. At this point a noble disciple has not yet come to a conclusion, but they are coming to the conclusion, ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tathāgatapadaṁ itipi, tathāgatanisevitaṁ itipi, tathāgatārañjitaṁ itipi. Na tveva tāva ariyasāvako niṭṭhaṁ gato hoti, api ca kho niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶51] Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶52] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ This, brahmin, is what is called ‘a footprint of the Realized One’ and also ‘a trace of the Realized One’ and also ‘a mark of the Realized One’. At this point a noble disciple has come to the conclusion, ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’ And it is at this point that the simile of the elephant’s footprint has been completed in detail.”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Idampi vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tathāgatapadaṁ itipi, tathāgatanisevitaṁ itipi, tathāgatārañjitaṁ itipi. Ettāvatā kho, brāhmaṇa, ariyasāvako niṭṭhaṁ gato hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti. Ettāvatā kho, brāhmaṇa, hatthipadopamo vitthārena paripūro hotī”ti.
[¶53] When he had spoken, the brahmin Jānussoṇi said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi, dhammañca, bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶54] > Pali: Cūḷahatthipadopamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 30. MN 28 · The Longer Simile of the Elephant’s Footprint
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/30/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/30/#p-N
[¶0] MN 28 · The Longer Simile of the Elephant’s Footprint
> Pali: MN 28 · Mahāhatthipadopamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There Sāriputta addressed the mendicants, “Reverends, mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū āmantesi: “āvuso bhikkhave”ti.
[¶2] “Reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Āvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶3] “The footprints of all creatures that walk can fit inside an elephant’s footprint, so an elephant’s footprint is said to be the biggest of them all. In the same way, all skillful qualities are included in the four noble truths. What four? The noble truths of suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, āvuso, yāni kānici jaṅgalānaṁ pāṇānaṁ padajātāni sabbāni tāni hatthipade samodhānaṁ gacchanti, hatthipadaṁ tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati yadidaṁ mahantattena; evameva kho, āvuso, ye keci kusalā dhammā sabbete catūsu ariyasaccesu saṅgahaṁ gacchanti. Katamesu catūsu? Dukkhe ariyasacce, dukkhasamudaye ariyasacce, dukkhanirodhe ariyasacce, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ariyasacce.
[¶4] And what is the noble truth of suffering? Rebirth is suffering; old age is suffering; death is suffering; sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress are suffering; not getting what you wish for is suffering. In brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering. And what are the five grasping aggregates? They are as follows: the grasping aggregates of form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ? Jātipi dukkhā, jarāpi dukkhā, maraṇampi dukkhaṁ, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā, yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ; saṅkhittena, pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā. Katame cāvuso, pañcupādānakkhandhā? Seyyathidaṁ—rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho.
[¶5] And what is the grasping aggregate of form? The four principal states, and form derived from the four principal states.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, rūpupādānakkhandho? Cattāri ca mahābhūtāni, catunnañca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāya rūpaṁ.
[¶6] And what are the four principal states? The elements of earth, water, fire, and air.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, cattāro mahābhūtā? Pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu.
[¶7] And what is the earth element? The earth element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior earth element? Anything internal, personal, that’s hard, solid, and appropriated. This includes: head hair, body hair, nails, teeth, skin, flesh, sinews, bones, bone marrow, kidneys, heart, liver, diaphragm, spleen, lungs, intestines, mesentery, undigested food, feces; or anything else internal, personal, that’s hard, solid, and appropriated. This is called the interior earth element. The interior earth element and the exterior earth element are just the earth element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the earth element, detaching the mind from the earth element.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, pathavīdhātu? Pathavīdhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā cāvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ kakkhaḷaṁ kharigataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ kakkhaḷaṁ kharigataṁ upādinnaṁ. Ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu, yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātu, pathavīdhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā pathavīdhātuyā nibbindati, pathavīdhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶8] There comes a time when the exterior water element flares up. At that time the exterior earth element vanishes. So for all its great age, the earth element will be revealed as impermanent, liable to end, vanish, and perish. What then of this ephemeral body appropriated by craving? Rather than ‘I’ or ‘mine’ or ‘I am’, they consider it to be none of these things.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ bāhirā āpodhātu pakuppati. Antarahitā tasmiṁ samaye bāhirā pathavīdhātu hoti. Tassā hi nāma, āvuso, bāhirāya pathavīdhātuyā tāva mahallikāya aniccatā paññāyissati, khayadhammatā paññāyissati, vayadhammatā paññāyissati, vipariṇāmadhammatā paññāyissati. Kiṁ panimassa mattaṭṭhakassa kāyassa taṇhupādinnassa ‘ahanti vā mamanti vā asmī’ti vā? Atha khvāssa notevettha hoti.
[¶9] If others abuse, attack, harass, and trouble that mendicant, they understand: ‘This painful feeling born of ear contact has arisen in me. That’s dependent, not independent. Dependent on what? Dependent on contact.’ They see that contact, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are impermanent. Based on that element alone, their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided.
> Pali: Tañce, āvuso, bhikkhuṁ pare akkosanti paribhāsanti rosenti vihesenti, so evaṁ pajānāti: ‘uppannā kho me ayaṁ sotasamphassajā dukkhavedanā. Sā ca kho paṭicca, no apaṭicca. Kiṁ paṭicca? Phassaṁ paṭicca’. So phasso aniccoti passati, vedanā aniccāti passati, saññā aniccāti passati, saṅkhārā aniccāti passati, viññāṇaṁ aniccanti passati. Tassa dhātārammaṇameva cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati.
[¶10] Others might treat that mendicant with disliking, loathing, and detestation, striking them with fists, stones, sticks, and swords. They understand: ‘This body is such that fists, stones, sticks, and swords strike it. But the Buddha has said in the Advice on the Simile of the Saw:
> Pali: Tañce, āvuso, bhikkhuṁ pare aniṭṭhehi akantehi amanāpehi samudācaranti— pāṇisamphassenapi leḍḍusamphassenapi daṇḍasamphassenapi satthasamphassenapi. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘tathābhūto kho ayaṁ kāyo yathābhūtasmiṁ kāye pāṇisamphassāpi kamanti, leḍḍusamphassāpi kamanti, daṇḍasamphassāpi kamanti, satthasamphassāpi kamanti. Vuttaṁ kho panetaṁ bhagavatā kakacūpamovāde:
[¶11] “Even if low-down bandits were to sever you limb from limb with a two-handed saw, anyone who had a malevolent thought on that account would not be following my instructions.” My energy shall be roused up and unflagging, my mindfulness established and lucid, my body tranquil and undisturbed, and my mind immersed and unified in samādhi. Gladly now, let fists, stones, sticks, and swords strike this body! For this is how the instructions of the Buddhas are followed.’
> Pali: “ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi, bhikkhave, kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okanteyyuṁ, tatrāpi yo mano padūseyya na me so tena sāsanakaro”ti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me vīriyaṁ bhavissati asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, passaddho kāyo asāraddho, samāhitaṁ cittaṁ ekaggaṁ. Kāmaṁ dāni imasmiṁ kāye pāṇisamphassāpi kamantu, leḍḍusamphassāpi kamantu, daṇḍasamphassāpi kamantu, satthasamphassāpi kamantu, karīyati hidaṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanan’ti.
[¶12] While recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful may not become stabilized in them. In that case they stir up a sense of urgency: ‘It’s my loss, my misfortune, that while recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful does not become stabilized in me.’ They’re like a daughter-in-law who stirs up a sense of urgency when they see their father-in-law. But if, while recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful does become stabilized in them, they’re happy with that. At this point, much has been done by that mendicant.
> Pali: Tassa ce, āvuso, bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhāti. So tena saṁvijjati saṁvegaṁ āpajjati: ‘alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ, yassa me evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato, upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhātī’ti. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, suṇisā sasuraṁ disvā saṁvijjati saṁvegaṁ āpajjati; evameva kho, āvuso, tassa ce bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato, upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhāti, so tena saṁvijjati saṁvegaṁ āpajjati: ‘alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ, yassa me evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato, upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhātī’ti. Tassa ce, āvuso, bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato upekkhā kusalanissitā saṇṭhāti, so tena attamano hoti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, bhikkhuno bahukataṁ hoti.
[¶13] And what is the water element? The water element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior water element? Anything internal, personal, that’s water, watery, and appropriated. This includes: bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat, tears, grease, saliva, snot, synovial fluid, urine; or anything else internal, personal, that’s water, watery, and appropriated. This is called the interior water element. The interior water element and the exterior water element are just the water element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the water element, detaching the mind from the water element.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, āpodhātu? Āpodhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā cāvuso, ajjhattikā āpodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ āpo āpogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttaṁ, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ āpo āpogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, ajjhattikā āpodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā āpodhātu yā ca bāhirā āpodhātu, āpodhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā āpodhātuyā nibbindati, āpodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶14] There comes a time when the exterior water element flares up. It sweeps away villages, towns, cities, countries, and regions. There comes a time when the water in the ocean sinks down a hundred leagues, or two, three, four, five, six, up to seven hundred leagues. There comes a time when the water in the ocean stands just seven palm trees deep, or six, five, four, three, two, or even just one palm tree deep. There comes a time when the water in the ocean stands just seven fathoms deep, or six, five, four, three, two, or even just one fathom deep. There comes a time when the water in the ocean stands just half a fathom deep, or waist deep, or knee deep, or even just ankle deep. There comes a time when there’s not even enough water left in the great ocean to wet the tip of the toe. So for all its great age, the water element will be revealed as impermanent, liable to end, vanish, and perish. What then of this ephemeral body appropriated by craving? Rather than ‘I’ or ‘mine’ or ‘I am’, they consider it to be none of these things. … If, while recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful does become stabilized in them, they’re happy with that. At this point, much has been done by that mendicant.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ bāhirā āpodhātu pakuppati. Sā gāmampi vahati, nigamampi vahati, nagarampi vahati, janapadampi vahati, janapadapadesampi vahati. Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ mahāsamudde yojanasatikānipi udakāni ogacchanti, dviyojanasatikānipi udakāni ogacchanti, tiyojanasatikānipi udakāni ogacchanti, catuyojanasatikānipi udakāni ogacchanti, pañcayojanasatikānipi udakāni ogacchanti, chayojanasatikānipi udakāni ogacchanti, sattayojanasatikānipi udakāni ogacchanti. Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ mahāsamudde sattatālampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, chattālampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, pañcatālampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, catuttālampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, titālampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, dvitālampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, tālamattampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti. Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ mahāsamudde sattaporisampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, chapporisampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, pañcaporisampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, catupporisampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, tiporisampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, dviporisampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, porisamattampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti. Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ mahāsamudde aḍḍhaporisampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, kaṭimattampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, jāṇukamattampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti, gopphakamattampi udakaṁ saṇṭhāti. Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo, yaṁ mahāsamudde aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṁ na hoti. Tassā hi nāma, āvuso, bāhirāya āpodhātuyā tāva mahallikāya aniccatā paññāyissati, khayadhammatā paññāyissati, vayadhammatā paññāyissati, vipariṇāmadhammatā paññāyissati. Kiṁ panimassa mattaṭṭhakassa kāyassa taṇhupādinnassa ‘ahanti vā mamanti vā asmī’ti vā? Atha khvāssa notevettha hoti …pe… tassa ce, āvuso, bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato upekkhā kusalanissitā saṇṭhāti. So tena attamano hoti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, bhikkhuno bahukataṁ hoti.
[¶15] And what is the fire element? The fire element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior fire element? Anything internal, pertaining to an individual that’s fire, fiery, and appropriated. This includes: that which warms, that which ages, that which heats you up when feverish, that which properly digests food and drink; or anything else internal, personal, that’s fire, fiery, and appropriated. This is called the interior fire element. The interior fire element and the exterior fire element are just the fire element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the fire element, detaching the mind from the fire element.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, tejodhātu? Tejodhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā cāvuso, ajjhattikā tejodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ tejo tejogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— yena ca santappati, yena ca jīrīyati, yena ca pariḍayhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ tejo tejogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, ajjhattikā tejodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā tejodhātu yā ca bāhirā tejodhātu, tejodhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā tejodhātuyā nibbindati, tejodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶16] There comes a time when the exterior fire element flares up. It burns up villages, towns, cities, countries, and regions until it reaches a green field, a roadside, a cliff’s edge, a body of water, or cleared parkland, where it’s extinguished due to not being fed. There comes a time when they go looking for a fire, taking just a chicken feather or a scrap of sinew as kindling. So for all its great age, the fire element will be revealed as impermanent, liable to end, vanish, and perish. What then of this ephemeral body appropriated by craving? Rather than ‘I’ or ‘mine’ or ‘I am’, they consider it to be none of these things. …
> Pali: Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ bāhirā tejodhātu pakuppati. Sā gāmampi dahati, nigamampi dahati, nagarampi dahati, janapadampi dahati, janapadapadesampi dahati. Sā haritantaṁ vā panthantaṁ vā selantaṁ vā udakantaṁ vā ramaṇīyaṁ vā bhūmibhāgaṁ āgamma anāhārā nibbāyati. Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ kukkuṭapattenapi nhārudaddulenapi aggiṁ gavesanti. Tassā hi nāma, āvuso, bāhirāya tejodhātuyā tāva mahallikāya aniccatā paññāyissati, khayadhammatā paññāyissati, vayadhammatā paññāyissati, vipariṇāmadhammatā paññāyissati. Kiṁ panimassa mattaṭṭhakassa kāyassa taṇhupādinnassa ‘ahanti vā mamanti vā asmī’ti vā?
[¶17] If, while recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful does become stabilized in them, they’re happy with that. At this point, much has been done by that mendicant.
> Pali: Atha khvāssa notevettha hoti …pe… tassa ce, āvuso, bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato upekkhā kusalanissitā saṇṭhāti, so tena attamano hoti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, bhikkhuno bahukataṁ hoti.
[¶18] And what is the air element? The air element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior air element? Anything internal, personal, that’s air, airy, and appropriated. This includes: winds that go up or down, winds in the belly or the bowels, winds that flow through the limbs, in-breaths and out-breaths; or anything else internal, personal, that’s air, airy, and appropriated. This is called the interior air element. The interior air element and the exterior air element are just the air element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the air element, detaching the mind from the air element.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, vāyodhātu? Vāyodhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā cāvuso, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ vāyo vāyogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— uddhaṅgamā vātā, adhogamā vātā, kucchisayā vātā, koṭṭhāsayā vātā, aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā, assāso passāso iti, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ vāyo vāyogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā vāyodhātu, yā ca bāhirā vāyodhātu, vāyodhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama nesohamasmi na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā vāyodhātuyā nibbindati vāyodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶19] There comes a time when the exterior air element flares up. It sweeps away villages, towns, cities, countries, and regions. There comes a time, in the last month of summer, when they look for wind by using a palm-leaf or fan, and even the grasses in the drip-fringe of a thatch roof don’t stir. So for all its great age, the air element will be revealed as impermanent, liable to end, vanish, and perish. What then of this ephemeral body appropriated by craving? Rather than ‘I’ or ‘mine’ or ‘I am’, they consider it to be none of these things.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ bāhirā vāyodhātu pakuppati. Sā gāmampi vahati, nigamampi vahati, nagarampi vahati, janapadampi vahati, janapadapadesampi vahati. Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ gimhānaṁ pacchime māse tālavaṇṭenapi vidhūpanenapi vātaṁ pariyesanti, ossavanepi tiṇāni na icchanti. Tassā hi nāma, āvuso, bāhirāya vāyodhātuyā tāva mahallikāya aniccatā paññāyissati, khayadhammatā paññāyissati, vayadhammatā paññāyissati, vipariṇāmadhammatā paññāyissati. Kiṁ panimassa mattaṭṭhakassa kāyassa taṇhupādinnassa ‘ahanti vā mamanti vā asmī’ti vā? Atha khvāssa notevettha hoti.
[¶20] If others abuse, attack, harass, and trouble that mendicant, they understand: ‘This painful feeling born of ear contact has arisen in me. That’s dependent, not independent. Dependent on what? Dependent on contact.’ They see that contact, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are impermanent. Based on that element alone, their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided.
> Pali: Tañce, āvuso, bhikkhuṁ pare akkosanti paribhāsanti rosenti vihesenti. So evaṁ pajānāti, uppannā kho me ayaṁ sotasamphassajā dukkhā vedanā. Sā ca kho paṭicca, no apaṭicca. Kiṁ paṭicca? Phassaṁ paṭicca. Sopi phasso aniccoti passati, vedanā aniccāti passati, saññā aniccāti passati, saṅkhārā aniccāti passati, viññāṇaṁ aniccanti passati. Tassa dhātārammaṇameva cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati.
[¶21] Others might treat that mendicant with disliking, loathing, and detestation, striking them with fists, stones, sticks, and swords. They understand: ‘This body is such that fists, stones, sticks, and swords strike it. But the Buddha has said in the Advice on the Simile of the Saw: “Even if low-down bandits were to sever you limb from limb with a two-handed saw, anyone who had a thought of hate on that account would not be following my instructions.” My energy shall be roused up and unflagging, my mindfulness established and lucid, my body tranquil and undisturbed, and my mind immersed and unified in samādhi. Gladly now, let fists, stones, sticks, and swords strike this body! For this is how the instructions of the Buddhas are followed.’
> Pali: Tañce, āvuso, bhikkhuṁ pare aniṭṭhehi akantehi amanāpehi samudācaranti, pāṇisamphassenapi leḍḍusamphassenapi daṇḍasamphassenapi satthasamphassenapi. So evaṁ pajānāti ‘tathābhūto kho ayaṁ kāyo yathābhūtasmiṁ kāye pāṇisamphassāpi kamanti, leḍḍusamphassāpi kamanti, daṇḍasamphassāpi kamanti, satthasamphassāpi kamanti. Vuttaṁ kho panetaṁ bhagavatā kakacūpamovāde “ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi, bhikkhave, kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okanteyyuṁ. Tatrāpi yo mano padūseyya, na me so tena sāsanakaro”ti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me vīriyaṁ bhavissati asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, passaddho kāyo asāraddho, samāhitaṁ cittaṁ ekaggaṁ. Kāmaṁ dāni imasmiṁ kāye pāṇisamphassāpi kamantu, leḍḍusamphassāpi kamantu, daṇḍasamphassāpi kamantu, satthasamphassāpi kamantu. Karīyati hidaṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanan’ti.
[¶22] While recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful may not become stabilized in them. In that case they stir up a sense of urgency: ‘It’s my loss, my misfortune, that while recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful does not become stabilized in me.’ They’re like a daughter-in-law who stirs up a sense of urgency when they see their father-in-law. But if, while recollecting the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in this way, equanimity based on the skillful does become stabilized in them, they’re happy with that. At this point, much has been done by that mendicant.
> Pali: Tassa ce, āvuso, bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhāti. So tena saṁvijjati saṁvegaṁ āpajjati: ‘alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ. Yassa me evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhātī’ti. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, suṇisā sasuraṁ disvā saṁvijjati saṁvegaṁ āpajjati; evameva kho, āvuso, tassa ce bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato, upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhāti. So tena saṁvijjati saṁvegaṁ āpajjati: ‘alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ. Yassa me evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato, upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhātī’ti. Tassa ce, āvuso, bhikkhuno evaṁ buddhaṁ anussarato, evaṁ dhammaṁ anussarato, evaṁ saṅghaṁ anussarato, upekkhā kusalanissitā saṇṭhāti, so tena attamano hoti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, bhikkhuno bahukataṁ hoti.
[¶23] When a space is enclosed by sticks, creepers, grass, and mud it becomes known as a ‘building’. In the same way, when a space is enclosed by bones, sinews, flesh, and skin it becomes known as a ‘form’.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, āvuso, kaṭṭhañca paṭicca valliñca paṭicca tiṇañca paṭicca mattikañca paṭicca ākāso parivārito agārantveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati; evameva kho, āvuso, aṭṭhiñca paṭicca nhāruñca paṭicca maṁsañca paṭicca cammañca paṭicca ākāso parivārito rūpantveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati.
[¶24] Reverends, though the interior eye is intact, so long as exterior sights don’t come into range and there’s no corresponding engagement, there’s no manifestation of the corresponding type of consciousness. Though the interior eye is intact and exterior sights come into range, so long as there’s no corresponding engagement, there’s no manifestation of the corresponding type of consciousness. But when the interior eye is intact and exterior sights come into range and there is corresponding engagement, there is the manifestation of the corresponding type of consciousness.
> Pali: Ajjhattikañceva, āvuso, cakkhuṁ aparibhinnaṁ hoti, bāhirā ca rūpā na āpāthaṁ āgacchanti, no ca tajjo samannāhāro hoti, neva tāva tajjassa viññāṇabhāgassa pātubhāvo hoti. Ajjhattikañceva, āvuso, cakkhuṁ aparibhinnaṁ hoti bāhirā ca rūpā āpāthaṁ āgacchanti, no ca tajjo samannāhāro hoti, neva tāva tajjassa viññāṇabhāgassa pātubhāvo hoti. Yato ca kho, āvuso, ajjhattikañceva cakkhuṁ aparibhinnaṁ hoti, bāhirā ca rūpā āpāthaṁ āgacchanti, tajjo ca samannāhāro hoti. Evaṁ tajjassa viññāṇabhāgassa pātubhāvo hoti.
[¶25] The form produced in this way is included in the grasping aggregate of form. The feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness produced in this way are each included in the corresponding grasping aggregate.
> Pali: Yaṁ tathābhūtassa rūpaṁ taṁ rūpupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati, yā tathābhūtassa vedanā sā vedanupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati, yā tathābhūtassa saññā sā saññupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati, ye tathābhūtassa saṅkhārā te saṅkhārupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchanti, yaṁ tathābhūtassa viññāṇaṁ taṁ viññāṇupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati.
[¶26] They understand: ‘So this is how there comes to be inclusion, gathering together, and assimilation into these five grasping aggregates. But the Buddha has said: “One who sees dependent origination sees the teaching. One who sees the teaching sees dependent origination.” And these five grasping aggregates are indeed dependently originated. The desire, clinging, attraction, and attachment for these five grasping aggregates is the origin of suffering. Giving up and getting rid of desire and greed for these five grasping aggregates is the cessation of suffering.’ At this point, much has been done by that mendicant.
> Pali: So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evañhi kira imesaṁ pañcannaṁ upādānakkhandhānaṁ saṅgaho sannipāto samavāyo hoti. Vuttaṁ kho panetaṁ bhagavatā: “yo paṭiccasamuppādaṁ passati so dhammaṁ passati; yo dhammaṁ passati so paṭiccasamuppādaṁ passatī”ti. Paṭiccasamuppannā kho panime yadidaṁ pañcupādānakkhandhā. Yo imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chando ālayo anunayo ajjhosānaṁ so dukkhasamudayo. Yo imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṁ, so dukkhanirodho’ti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, bhikkhuno bahukataṁ hoti.
[¶27] Though the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind is intact internally, so long as exterior ideas don’t come into range and there’s no corresponding engagement, there’s no manifestation of the corresponding type of consciousness.
> Pali: Ajjhattikañceva, āvuso, sotaṁ aparibhinnaṁ hoti …pe… ghānaṁ aparibhinnaṁ hoti … jivhā aparibhinnā hoti … kāyo aparibhinno hoti … mano aparibhinno hoti, bāhirā ca dhammā na āpāthaṁ āgacchanti no ca tajjo samannāhāro hoti, neva tāva tajjassa viññāṇabhāgassa pātubhāvo hoti.
[¶28] Though the mind is intact internally and exterior ideas come into range, so long as there’s no corresponding engagement, there’s no manifestation of the corresponding type of consciousness. But when the mind is intact internally and exterior ideas come into range and there is corresponding engagement, there is the manifestation of the corresponding type of consciousness.
> Pali: Ajjhattiko ceva, āvuso, mano aparibhinno hoti, bāhirā ca dhammā āpāthaṁ āgacchanti, no ca tajjo samannāhāro hoti, neva tāva tajjassa viññāṇabhāgassa pātubhāvo hoti. Yato ca kho, āvuso, ajjhattiko ceva mano aparibhinno hoti, bāhirā ca dhammā āpāthaṁ āgacchanti, tajjo ca samannāhāro hoti, evaṁ tajjassa viññāṇabhāgassa pātubhāvo hoti.
[¶29] The form produced in this way is included in the grasping aggregate of form. The feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness produced in this way are each included in the corresponding grasping aggregate. They understand: ‘So this is how there comes to be inclusion, gathering together, and assimilation into these five grasping aggregates.
> Pali: Yaṁ tathābhūtassa rūpaṁ taṁ rūpupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati, yā tathābhūtassa vedanā sā vedanupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati, yā tathābhūtassa saññā sā saññupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati, ye tathābhūtassa saṅkhārā te saṅkhārupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchanti, yaṁ tathābhūtassa viññāṇaṁ taṁ viññāṇupādānakkhandhe saṅgahaṁ gacchati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evañhi kira imesaṁ pañcannaṁ upādānakkhandhānaṁ saṅgaho sannipāto samavāyo hoti.
[¶30] But the Buddha has also said: “One who sees dependent origination sees the teaching. One who sees the teaching sees dependent origination.” And these five grasping aggregates are indeed dependently originated. The desire, clinging, attraction, and attachment for these five grasping aggregates is the origin of suffering. Giving up and getting rid of desire and greed for these five grasping aggregates is the cessation of suffering.’ At this point, much has been done by that mendicant.”
> Pali: Vuttaṁ kho panetaṁ bhagavatā: “yo paṭiccasamuppādaṁ passati so dhammaṁ passati; yo dhammaṁ passati so paṭiccasamuppādaṁ passatī”ti. Paṭiccasamuppannā kho panime yadidaṁ pañcupādānakkhandhā. Yo imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chando ālayo anunayo ajjhosānaṁ so dukkhasamudayo. Yo imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṁ so dukkhanirodho’ti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvuso, bhikkhuno bahukataṁ hotī”ti.
[¶31] That is what Venerable Sāriputta said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what Sāriputta said.
> Pali: Idamavoca āyasmā sāriputto. Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶32] > Pali: Mahāhatthipadopamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 31. MN 29 · The Longer Simile of the Heartwood
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/31/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/31/#p-N
[¶0] MN 29 · The Longer Simile of the Heartwood
> Pali: MN 29 · Mahāsāropamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain, not long after Devadatta had left. There the Buddha spoke to the mendicants about Devadatta:
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbate acirapakkante devadatte. Tatra kho bhagavā devadattaṁ ārabbha bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶2] “Mendicants, take the case of a gentleman who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, thinking, ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. They’re happy with that, and they’ve got all they wished for. And they glorify themselves and put others down because of that: ‘I’m the one with possessions, honor, and popularity. These other mendicants are obscure and insignificant.’ And so they become indulgent and fall into negligence on account of those possessions, honor, and popularity. And being negligent they live in suffering.
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena attānukkaṁseti paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi lābhasakkārasilokavā, ime panaññe bhikkhū appaññātā appesakkhā’ti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati.
[¶3] Suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But, passing over the heartwood, softwood, bark, and shoots, he’d cut off the branches and leaves and leave imagining they were heartwood. If a person with clear eyes saw him they’d say, ‘This gentleman doesn’t know what heartwood, softwood, bark, shoots, or branches and leaves are. That’s why he passed them over, cut off the branches and leaves, and left imagining they were heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he won’t succeed.’ …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ atikkamma papaṭikaṁ, sākhāpalāsaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ, na aññāsi phegguṁ, na aññāsi tacaṁ, na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ atikkamma papaṭikaṁ, sākhāpalāsaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶4] This is called a mendicant who has grabbed the branches and leaves of the spiritual life and stopped short with that.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti ‘ahamasmi lābhasakkārasilokavā, ime panaññe bhikkhū appaññātā appesakkhā’ti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sākhāpalāsaṁ aggahesi brahmacariyassa; tena ca vosānaṁ āpādi.
[¶5] Next, take a gentleman who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness … When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. They’re not happy with that, and haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. Nor do they become indulgent and fall into negligence on account of those possessions, honor, and popularity. Being diligent, they achieve accomplishment in ethics. They’re happy with that, and they’ve got all they wished for. And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that: ‘I’m the one who is ethical, of good character. These other mendicants are unethical, of bad character.’ And so they become indulgent and fall into negligence regarding their accomplishment in ethics. And being negligent they live in suffering.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati. Appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, ime panaññe bhikkhū dussīlā pāpadhammā’ti. So tāya sīlasampadāya majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati.
[¶6] Suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But, passing over the heartwood, softwood, and bark, he’d cut off the shoots and leave imagining they were heartwood. If a person with clear eyes saw him they’d say, ‘This gentleman doesn’t know what heartwood, softwood, bark, shoots, or branches and leaves are. That’s why he passed them over, cut off the shoots, and left imagining they were heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he won’t succeed.’ …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ, papaṭikaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ, na aññāsi phegguṁ, na aññāsi tacaṁ, na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ, papaṭikaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno; yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶7] This is called a mendicant who has grabbed the shoots of the spiritual life and stopped short with that.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati. Appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, ime panaññe bhikkhū dussīlā pāpadhammā’ti. So tāya sīlasampadāya majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu papaṭikaṁ aggahesi brahmacariyassa; tena ca vosānaṁ āpādi.
[¶8] Next, take a gentleman who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness … When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. … Being diligent, they achieve accomplishment in immersion. They’re happy with that, and they’ve got all they wished for. And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that: ‘I’m the one with immersion and unified mind. These other mendicants lack immersion, they have straying minds.’ And so they become indulgent and fall into negligence regarding that accomplishment in immersion. And being negligent they live in suffering.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati. Appamatto samāno samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi samāhito ekaggacitto, ime panaññe bhikkhū asamāhitā vibbhantacittā’ti. So tāya samādhisampadāya majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati.
[¶9] Suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But, passing over the heartwood and softwood, he’d cut off the bark and leave imagining it was heartwood. If a person with clear eyes saw him they’d say: ‘This gentleman doesn’t know what heartwood, softwood, bark, shoots, or branches and leaves are. That’s why he passed them over, cut off the bark, and left imagining it was heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he won’t succeed.’ …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ tacaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ, na aññāsi phegguṁ, na aññāsi tacaṁ, na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ tacaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶10] This is called a mendicant who has grabbed the bark of the spiritual life and stopped short with that.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi samāhito ekaggacitto, ime panaññe bhikkhū asamāhitā vibbhantacittā’ti. So tāya samādhisampadāya majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tacaṁ aggahesi brahmacariyassa; tena ca vosānaṁ āpādi.
[¶11] Next, take a gentleman who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness … When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. … Being diligent, they achieve knowledge and vision. They’re happy with that, and they’ve got all they wished for. And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that, ‘I’m the one who meditates knowing and seeing. These other mendicants meditate without knowing and seeing.’ And so they become indulgent and fall into negligence regarding that knowledge and vision. And being negligent they live in suffering.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati. Appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṁ ārādheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena ñāṇadassanena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi jānaṁ passaṁ viharāmi. Ime panaññe bhikkhū ajānaṁ apassaṁ viharantī’ti. So tena ñāṇadassanena majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati.
[¶12] Suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But, passing over the heartwood, he’d cut out the softwood and leave imagining it was heartwood. If a person with clear eyes saw him they’d say, ‘This gentleman doesn’t know what heartwood, softwood, bark, shoots, or branches and leaves are. That’s why he passed them over, cut out the softwood, and left imagining it was heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he won’t succeed.’ …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ phegguṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ na aññāsi phegguṁ na aññāsi tacaṁ na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ phegguṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶13] This is called a mendicant who has grabbed the softwood of the spiritual life and stopped short with that.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṁ ārādheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena ñāṇadassanena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi jānaṁ passaṁ viharāmi, ime panaññe bhikkhū ajānaṁ apassaṁ viharantī’ti. So tena ñāṇadassanena majjati pamajjati pamādaṁ āpajjati, pamatto samāno dukkhaṁ viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu phegguṁ aggahesi brahmacariyassa; tena ca vosānaṁ āpādi.
[¶14] Next, take a gentleman who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, thinking, ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. They’re not happy with that, and haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. Nor do they become indulgent and fall into negligence on account of those possessions, honor, and popularity. Being diligent, they achieve accomplishment in ethics. They’re happy with that, but they haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. Nor do they become indulgent and fall into negligence regarding that accomplishment in ethics. Being diligent, they achieve accomplishment in immersion. They’re happy with that, but they haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. Nor do they become indulgent and fall into negligence regarding that accomplishment in immersion. Being diligent, they achieve knowledge and vision. They’re happy with that, but they haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. Nor do they become indulgent and fall into negligence regarding that knowledge and vision. Being diligent, they achieve irreversible freedom. And it’s impossible for that mendicant to fall away from that irreversible freedom.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti, na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṁ ārādheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena ñāṇadassanena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno asamayavimokkhaṁ ārādheti. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṁ so bhikkhu tāya asamayavimuttiyā parihāyetha.
[¶15] Suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. He’d cut out just the heartwood and leave knowing it was heartwood. If a person with clear eyes saw him they’d say, ‘This gentleman knows what heartwood, softwood, bark, shoots, and branches and leaves are. That’s why he cut out just the heartwood and left knowing it was heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he will succeed.’ …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato sāraññeva chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti jānamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘aññāsi vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāraṁ, aññāsi phegguṁ, aññāsi tacaṁ, aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato sāraññeva chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti jānamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ anubhavissatī’ti.
[¶16] It’s impossible for that mendicant to fall away from that irreversible freedom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti, na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṁ ārādheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena ñāṇadassanena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena na majjati nappamajjati na pamādaṁ āpajjati, appamatto samāno asamayavimokkhaṁ ārādheti. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṁ so bhikkhu tāya asamayavimuttiyā parihāyetha.
[¶17] And so, mendicants, this spiritual life is not lived for the sake of possessions, honor, and popularity, or for accomplishment in ethics, or for accomplishment in immersion, or for knowledge and vision. It is this unshakable freedom of heart that is the goal of the spiritual life, the core and the final end.”
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, nayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ lābhasakkārasilokānisaṁsaṁ, na sīlasampadānisaṁsaṁ, na samādhisampadānisaṁsaṁ, na ñāṇadassanānisaṁsaṁ. Yā ca kho ayaṁ, bhikkhave, akuppā cetovimutti— etadatthamidaṁ, bhikkhave, brahmacariyaṁ, etaṁ sāraṁ etaṁ pariyosānan”ti.
[¶18] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶19] > Pali: Mahāsāropamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 32. MN 30 · The Shorter Simile of the Heartwood
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/32/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/32/#p-N
[¶0] MN 30 · The Shorter Simile of the Heartwood
> Pali: MN 30 · Cūḷasāropamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the brahmin Piṅgalakoccha went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho piṅgalakoccho brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho piṅgalakoccho brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Worthy Gotama, there are those ascetics and brahmins who lead an order and a community, and tutor a community. They’re well-known and famous religious founders, deemed holy by many people. Namely: Pūraṇa Kassapa, the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla, Ajita of the hair blanket, Pakudha Kaccāyana, Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, and the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan. According to their own claims, did all of them have direct knowledge, or none of them, or only some?”
> Pali: “yeme, bho gotama, samaṇabrāhmaṇā saṅghino gaṇino gaṇācariyā ñātā yasassino titthakarā sādhusammatā, bahujanassa, seyyathidaṁ—pūraṇo kassapo, makkhali gosālo, ajito kesakambalo, pakudho kaccāyano, sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto, sabbete sakāya paṭiññāya abbhaññaṁsu sabbeva nābbhaññaṁsu, udāhu ekacce abbhaññaṁsu ekacce nābbhaññaṁsū”ti?
[¶4] “Enough, brahmin, let this be: ‘According to their own claims, did all of them have direct knowledge, or none of them, or only some?’ I will teach you the Dhamma. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, brāhmaṇa, tiṭṭhatetaṁ— sabbete sakāya paṭiññāya abbhaññaṁsu sabbeva nābbhaññaṁsu, udāhu ekacce abbhaññaṁsu ekacce nābbhaññaṁsūti. Dhammaṁ te, brāhmaṇa, desessāmi, taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, worthy sir,” Piṅgalakoccha replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho piṅgalakoccho brāhmaṇo bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶6] “Suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But, passing over the heartwood, softwood, bark, and shoots, he’d cut off the branches and leaves and leave imagining they were heartwood. If a person with clear eyes saw him they’d say: ‘This gentleman doesn’t know what heartwood, softwood, bark, shoots, or branches and leaves are. That’s why he passed them over, cut off the branches and leaves, and left imagining they were heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he won’t succeed.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ atikkamma papaṭikaṁ, sākhāpalāsaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ, na aññāsi phegguṁ, na aññāsi tacaṁ, na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ atikkamma papaṭikaṁ, sākhāpalāsaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶7] Suppose there was another person in need of heartwood … he’d cut off the shoots and leave imagining they were heartwood …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ, papaṭikaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ, na aññāsi phegguṁ, na aññāsi tacaṁ, na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ papaṭikaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶8] Suppose there was another person in need of heartwood … he’d cut off the bark and leave imagining it was heartwood …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ, tacaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ, na aññāsi phegguṁ, na aññāsi tacaṁ, na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ, tacaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶9] Suppose there was another person in need of heartwood … he’d cut out the softwood and leave imagining it was heartwood …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ, phegguṁ chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso aññāsi sāraṁ, na aññāsi phegguṁ, na aññāsi tacaṁ, na aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, na aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ, phegguṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissatī’ti.
[¶10] Suppose there was another person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. He’d cut out just the heartwood and leave knowing it was heartwood. If a person with clear eyes saw him they’d say: ‘This gentleman knows what heartwood, softwood, bark, shoots, or branches and leaves are. That’s why he cut out just the heartwood and left knowing it was heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he will succeed.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi vā pana, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato sāraññeva chetvā ādāya pakkameyya ‘sāran’ti jānamāno. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘aññāsi vatāyaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāraṁ, aññāsi phegguṁ, aññāsi tacaṁ, aññāsi papaṭikaṁ, aññāsi sākhāpalāsaṁ. Tathā hayaṁ bhavaṁ puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato sāraññeva chetvā ādāya pakkanto “sāran”ti jānamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ anubhavissatī’ti.
[¶11] In the same way, take a certain individual who goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, thinking: ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. They’re happy with that, and they’ve got all they wished for. And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that: ‘I’m the one with possessions, honor, and popularity. These other mendicants are obscure and insignificant.’ They become lazy and slack on account of their possessions, honor, and popularity, not generating enthusiasm or trying to realize those things that are better and finer. … They’re like the individual who mistakes branches and leaves for heartwood, I say.
> Pali: Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, idhekacco puggalo saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi lābhasakkārasilokavā, ime panaññe bhikkhū appaññātā appesakkhā’ti. Lābhasakkārasilokena ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya na chandaṁ janeti, na vāyamati, olīnavuttiko ca hoti sāthaliko. Seyyathāpi so, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ atikkamma papaṭikaṁ, sākhāpalāsaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissati. Tathūpamāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imaṁ puggalaṁ vadāmi.
[¶12] Next, take an individual who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness … When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. They’re not happy with that, and haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. They don’t become lazy and slack regarding their possessions, honor, and popularity, but generate enthusiasm and try to realize those things that are better and finer. They achieve accomplishment in ethics. They’re happy with that, and they’ve got all they wished for. And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that: ‘I’m the one who is ethical, of good character. These other mendicants are unethical, of bad character.’ They become lazy and slack regarding their accomplishment in ethics, not generating enthusiasm or trying to realize those things that are better and finer. … They’re like the individual who mistakes shoots for heartwood, I say.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Lābhasakkārasilokena ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti, paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, ime panaññe bhikkhū dussīlā pāpadhammā’ti. Sīlasampadāya ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya na chandaṁ janeti, na vāyamati, olīnavuttiko ca hoti sāthaliko. Seyyathāpi so, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ atikkamma tacaṁ, papaṭikaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ, tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissati. Tathūpamāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imaṁ puggalaṁ vadāmi.
[¶13] Next, take an individual who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness … They achieve accomplishment in ethics … and immersion. … They become lazy and slack regarding their accomplishment in immersion, not generating enthusiasm or trying to realize those things that are better and finer. … They’re like the individual who mistakes bark for heartwood, I say.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti, na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Lābhasakkārasilokena ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Sīlasampadāya ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti, paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi samāhito ekaggacitto, ime panaññe bhikkhū asamāhitā vibbhantacittā’ti. Samādhisampadāya ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca, tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya na chandaṁ janeti, na vāyamati, olīnavuttiko ca hoti sāthaliko. Seyyathāpi so, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ atikkamma phegguṁ, tacaṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissati. Tathūpamāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imaṁ puggalaṁ vadāmi.
[¶14] Next, take an individual who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness … They achieve accomplishment in ethics … immersion … and knowledge and vision. They become lazy and slack regarding their knowledge and vision, not generating enthusiasm or trying to realize those things that are better and finer. … They’re like the individual who mistakes softwood for heartwood, I say.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena …pe… antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Lābhasakkārasilokena ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Sīlasampadāya ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Samādhisampadāya ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So ñāṇadassanaṁ ārādheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena attamano hoti, paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena ñāṇadassanena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti: ‘ahamasmi jānaṁ passaṁ viharāmi, ime panaññe bhikkhū ajānaṁ apassaṁ viharantī’ti. Ñāṇadassanena ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya na chandaṁ janeti, na vāyamati, olīnavuttiko ca hoti sāthaliko. Seyyathāpi so, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva sāraṁ, phegguṁ chetvā ādāya pakkanto ‘sāran’ti maññamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ nānubhavissati. Tathūpamāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imaṁ puggalaṁ vadāmi.
[¶15] Next, take an individual who has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, thinking: ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can find an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth they generate possessions, honor, and popularity. They’re not happy with that, and haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. They don’t become lazy and slack on account of their possessions, honor, and popularity, but generate enthusiasm and try to realize those things that are better and finer. They become accomplished in ethics. They’re happy with that, but they haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. They don’t become lazy and slack regarding their accomplishment in ethics, but generate enthusiasm and try to realize those things that are better and finer. They become accomplished in immersion. They’re happy with that, but they haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. They don’t become lazy and slack regarding their accomplishment in immersion, but generate enthusiasm and try to realize those things that are better and finer. They achieve knowledge and vision. They’re happy with that, but they haven’t got all they wished for. They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. They don’t become lazy and slack regarding their knowledge and vision, but generate enthusiasm and try to realize those things that are better and finer.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto, appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti, na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Lābhasakkārasilokena ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So sīlasampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya sīlasampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya sīlasampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Sīlasampadāya ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So samādhisampadaṁ ārādheti. So tāya samādhisampadāya attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tāya samādhisampadāya na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Samādhisampadāya ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko. So ñāṇadassanaṁ ārādheti. So tena ñāṇadassanena attamano hoti, no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. So tena ñāṇadassanena na attānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ñāṇadassanena ca ye aññe dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, anolīnavuttiko ca hoti asāthaliko.
[¶16] And what are those things that are better and finer than knowledge and vision?
> Pali: Katame ca, brāhmaṇa, dhammā ñāṇadassanena uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca?
[¶17] Take a mendicant who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶18] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶19] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶20] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶21] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶22] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶23] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶24] Furthermore, take a mendicant who, going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, enters and remains in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca.
[¶25] Furthermore, take a mendicant who, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, enters and remains in the cessation of perception and feeling. And, having seen with wisdom, their defilements come to an end. This too is something better and finer than knowledge and vision. These are the things that are better and finer than knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammo ñāṇadassanena uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca. Ime kho, brāhmaṇa, dhammā ñāṇadassanena uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca.
[¶26] Suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. He’d cut out just the heartwood and leave knowing it was heartwood. Whatever he needs to make from heartwood, he will succeed. That’s what this individual is like, I say.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi so, brāhmaṇa, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato sāraṁyeva chetvā ādāya pakkanto ‘sāran’ti jānamāno. Yañcassa sārena sārakaraṇīyaṁ tañcassa atthaṁ anubhavissati. Tathūpamāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imaṁ puggalaṁ vadāmi.
[¶27] And so, brahmin, this spiritual life is not lived for the sake of possessions, honor, and popularity, or for accomplishment in ethics, or for accomplishment in immersion, or for knowledge and vision. It is this unshakable freedom of heart that is the goal of the spiritual life, the core and the final end.”
> Pali: Iti kho, brāhmaṇa, nayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ lābhasakkārasilokānisaṁsaṁ, na sīlasampadānisaṁsaṁ, na samādhisampadānisaṁsaṁ, na ñāṇadassanānisaṁsaṁ. Yā ca kho ayaṁ, brāhmaṇa, akuppā cetovimutti— etadatthamidaṁ, brāhmaṇa, brahmacariyaṁ, etaṁ sāraṁ etaṁ pariyosānan”ti.
[¶28] When he had spoken, the brahmin Piṅgalakoccha said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! … From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, piṅgalakoccho brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶29] > Pali: Cūḷasāropamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶30] > Pali: Opammavaggo niṭṭhito tatiyo.
[¶31] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶32] > Pali: Moḷiyaphaggunariṭṭhañca nāmo,
Andhavane kathipuṇṇaṁ nivāpo;
Rāsikaṇerumahāgajanāmo,
Sārūpamo puna piṅgalakoccho.
## 33. MN 31 · The Shorter Discourse at Gosiṅga
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/33/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/33/#p-N
[¶0] MN 31 · The Shorter Discourse at Gosiṅga
> Pali: MN 31 · Cūḷagosiṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying at Ñātika in the brick house.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā nātike viharati giñjakāvasathe.
[¶2] Now at that time the venerables Anuruddha, Nandiya, and Kimbila were staying in the sal forest park at Gosiṅga.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo gosiṅgasālavanadāye viharanti.
[¶3] Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat and went to that park. The park keeper saw the Buddha coming off in the distance and said to him, “Don’t come into this park, ascetic. There are three gentlemen staying here whose nature is to desire self-knowledge. Do not disturb them.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena gosiṅgasālavanadāyo tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho dāyapālo bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mā, samaṇa, etaṁ dāyaṁ pāvisi. Santettha tayo kulaputtā attakāmarūpā viharanti. Mā tesaṁ aphāsumakāsī”ti.
[¶4] Anuruddha heard the park keeper conversing with the Buddha, and said to him, “Don’t keep the Buddha out, good park keeper! Our Teacher, the Blessed One, has arrived.” Then Anuruddha went to Nandiya and Kimbila, and said to them, “Come forth, venerables, come forth! Our Teacher, the Blessed One, has arrived!”
> Pali: Assosi kho āyasmā anuruddho dāyapālassa bhagavatā saddhiṁ mantayamānassa. Sutvāna dāyapālaṁ etadavoca: “mā, āvuso dāyapāla, bhagavantaṁ vāresi. Satthā no bhagavā anuppatto”ti. Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho yenāyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantañca nandiyaṁ āyasmantañca kimilaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto, satthā no bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶5] Then Anuruddha, Nandiya, and Kimbila came out to greet the Buddha. One received his bowl and robe, one spread out a seat, and one set out water for washing his feet. The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, and washed his feet. Those venerables bowed and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo bhagavantaṁ paccuggantvā— eko bhagavato pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahesi, eko āsanaṁ paññapesi, eko pādodakaṁ upaṭṭhāpesi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Nisajja kho bhagavā pāde pakkhālesi. Tepi kho āyasmanto bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶6] The Buddha said to Anuruddha, “I hope you’re keeping well, Anuruddha and friends, I hope you’re all right. And I hope you’re having no trouble getting almsfood.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “Kacci vo, anuruddhā, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ, kacci piṇḍakena na kilamathā”ti?
[¶7] “We’re keeping well, Blessed One, we’re getting by. And we have no trouble getting almsfood.”
> Pali: “Khamanīyaṁ, bhagavā, yāpanīyaṁ, bhagavā; na ca mayaṁ, bhante, piṇḍakena kilamāmā”ti.
[¶8] “I hope you’re living in harmony, appreciating each other, without quarreling, blending like milk and water, and regarding each other with kindly eyes?”
> Pali: “Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharathā”ti?
[¶9] “Indeed, sir, we live in harmony as you say.”
> Pali: “Taggha mayaṁ, bhante, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharāmā”ti.
[¶10] “But how do you live this way?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana tumhe, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharathā”ti?
[¶11] “In this case, sir, I think: ‘I’m fortunate, so very fortunate, to live together with spiritual companions such as these.’ I consistently treat these venerables with kindness by way of body, speech, and mind, both in public and in private. I think, ‘Why don’t I set aside my own ideas and just go along with these venerables’ ideas?’ And that’s what I do. Though we’re different in body, sir, we’re one in mind, it seems to me.”
> Pali: “Idha mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me, yohaṁ evarūpehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṁ viharāmī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, imesu āyasmantesu mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca; mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca; mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘yannūnāhaṁ sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vatteyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vattāmi. Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyā ekañca pana maññe cittan”ti.
[¶12] And the venerables Nandiya and Kimbila spoke likewise, and they added: “That’s how we live in harmony, appreciating each other, without quarreling, blending like milk and water, and regarding each other with kindly eyes.”
> Pali: Āyasmāpi kho nandiyo …pe… āyasmāpi kho kimilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mayhampi, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me, yohaṁ evarūpehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṁ viharāmī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, imesu āyasmantesu mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca, mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca, mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘yannūnāhaṁ sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vatteyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vattāmi. Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyā ekañca pana maññe cittan”ti. “Evaṁ kho mayaṁ, bhante, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharāmā”ti.
[¶13] “Good, good, Anuruddha and friends! But I hope you’re living diligently, keen, and resolute?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharathā”ti?
[¶14] “Indeed, sir, we live diligently.”
> Pali: “Taggha mayaṁ, bhante, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharāmā”ti.
[¶15] “But how do you live this way?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana tumhe, anuruddhā, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharathā”ti?
[¶16] “In this case, sir, whoever returns first from almsround prepares the seats, and puts out the drinking water and the rubbish bin. If there’s remainder, whoever returns last eats it if they like. Otherwise they throw it out where there is little that grows, or drop it into water that has no living creatures. Then they put away the seats, drinking water, and rubbish bin, and sweep the refectory. If someone sees that the pot of water for washing, drinking, or the toilet is empty they set it up. If he can’t do it, he summons another with a wave of the hand, and they set it up by lending each other a hand to lift. But we don’t break into speech for that reason. And every five days we sit together for the whole night and discuss the teachings. That’s how we live diligently, keen, and resolute.”
> Pali: “Idha, bhante, amhākaṁ yo paṭhamaṁ gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamati so āsanāni paññapeti, pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, avakkārapātiṁ upaṭṭhāpeti. Yo pacchā gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamati, sace hoti bhuttāvaseso sace ākaṅkhati bhuñjati, no ce ākaṅkhati appaharite vā chaḍḍeti, appāṇake vā udake opilāpeti. So āsanāni paṭisāmeti, pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ paṭisāmeti, avakkārapātiṁ paṭisāmeti, bhattaggaṁ sammajjati. Yo passati pānīyaghaṭaṁ vā paribhojanīyaghaṭaṁ vā vaccaghaṭaṁ vā rittaṁ tucchaṁ so upaṭṭhāpeti. Sacassa hoti avisayhaṁ, hatthavikārena dutiyaṁ āmantetvā hatthavilaṅghakena upaṭṭhāpema, na tveva mayaṁ, bhante, tappaccayā vācaṁ bhindāma. Pañcāhikaṁ kho pana mayaṁ, bhante, sabbarattikaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sannisīdāma. Evaṁ kho mayaṁ, bhante, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharāmā”ti.
[¶17] “Good, good, Anuruddha and friends! But as you live diligently like this, have you achieved any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones, a comfortable meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Atthi pana vo, anuruddhā, evaṁ appamattānaṁ ātāpīnaṁ pahitattānaṁ viharantānaṁ uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶18] “How could we not, sir? Whenever we want, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, we enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones, a comfortable meditation, that we have achieved while living diligent, keen, and resolute.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāma vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharāma. Ayaṁ kho no, bhante, amhākaṁ appamattānaṁ ātāpīnaṁ pahitattānaṁ viharantānaṁ uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti.
[¶19] “Good, good! But have you achieved any other superhuman distinction for going beyond and stilling that meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Etassa pana vo, anuruddhā, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā atthañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶20] “How could we not, sir? Whenever we want, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, we enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is another superhuman distinction that we have achieved for going beyond and stilling that meditation.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāma vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharāma. Etassa, bhante, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā ayamañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti.
[¶21] “Good, good! But have you achieved any other superhuman distinction for going beyond and stilling that meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Etassa pana vo, anuruddhā, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā atthañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶22] “How could we not, sir? Whenever we want, with the fading away of rapture, we enter and remain in the third absorption, where we meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ This is another superhuman distinction that we have achieved for going beyond and stilling that meditation.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāma pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhakā ca viharāma, satā ca sampajānā, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedema, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharāma. Etassa, bhante, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā ayamañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti.
[¶23] “Good, good! But have you achieved any other superhuman distinction for going beyond and stilling that meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Etassa pana vo, anuruddhā, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā atthañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶24] “How could we not, sir? Whenever we want, with the giving up of pleasure and pain, and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, we enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This is another superhuman distinction that we have achieved for going beyond and stilling that meditation.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāma sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharāma. Etassa, bhante, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā ayamañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti.
[¶25] “Good, good! But have you achieved any other superhuman distinction for going beyond and stilling that meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Etassa pana vo, anuruddhā, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā atthañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶26] “How could we not, sir? Whenever we want, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, we enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. This is another superhuman distinction that we have achieved for going beyond and stilling that meditation.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāma sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharāma. Etassa, bhante, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā ayamañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti.
[¶27] “Good, good! But have you achieved any other superhuman distinction for going beyond and stilling that meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Etassa pana vo, anuruddhā, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā atthañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶28] “How could we not, sir? Whenever we want, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, we enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. … going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, we enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. … going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, we enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is another superhuman distinction that we have achieved for going beyond and stilling that meditation.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāma sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharāma …pe… sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharāma …pe… sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharāma. Etassa, bhante, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā ayamañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti.
[¶29] “Good, good! But have you achieved any other superhuman distinction for going beyond and stilling that meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Etassa pana vo, anuruddhā, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā atthañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶30] “How could we not, sir? Whenever we want, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, we enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling. And, having seen with wisdom, our defilements have come to an end. This is another superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones, a comfortable meditation, that we have achieved for going beyond and stilling that meditation. And we don’t see any better or finer way of meditating comfortably than this.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bhante. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāma sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharāma, paññāya ca no disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā. Etassa, bhante, vihārassa samatikkamāya etassa vihārassa paṭippassaddhiyā ayamañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro. Imamhā ca mayaṁ, bhante, phāsuvihārā aññaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ uttaritaraṁ vā paṇītataraṁ vā na samanupassāmā”ti.
[¶31] “Good, good! There is no better or finer way of meditating comfortably than this.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Imamhā phāsuvihārā uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā phāsuvihāro natthī”ti.
[¶32] Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the venerables Anuruddha, Nandiya, and Kimbila with a Dhamma talk, after which he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantañca anuruddhaṁ āyasmantañca nandiyaṁ āyasmantañca kimilaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶33] The venerables then accompanied the Buddha for a little way before turning back. Nandiya and Kimbila said to Anuruddha, “Did we ever tell you that we had gained such and such meditations and attainments, up to the ending of defilements, as you revealed to the Buddha?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo bhagavantaṁ anusaṁyāyitvā tato paṭinivattitvā āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kiṁ nu kho mayaṁ āyasmato anuruddhassa evamārocimha: ‘imāsañca imāsañca vihārasamāpattīnaṁ mayaṁ lābhino’ti, yaṁ no āyasmā anuruddho bhagavato sammukhā yāva āsavānaṁ khayā pakāsetī”ti?
[¶34] “The venerables did not tell me that they had gained such meditations and attainments. But I discovered it by encompassing your minds, and deities also told me. I answered when the Buddha directly asked about it.”
> Pali: “Na kho me āyasmanto evamārocesuṁ: ‘imāsañca imāsañca vihārasamāpattīnaṁ mayaṁ lābhino’ti, api ca me āyasmantānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca vidito: ‘imāsañca imāsañca vihārasamāpattīnaṁ ime āyasmanto lābhino’ti. Devatāpi me etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ: ‘imāsañca imāsañca vihārasamāpattīnaṁ ime āyasmanto lābhino’ti. Tamenaṁ bhagavatā pañhābhipuṭṭhena byākatan”ti.
[¶35] Then the native spirit Dīgha Parajana went up to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him, “The Vajjis are lucky! The Vajjian people are so very lucky that the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha stays there, as well as these three gentlemen, the venerables Anuruddha, Nandiya, and Kimbila.”
> Pali: Atha kho dīgho parajano yakkho yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho dīgho parajano yakkho bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “lābhā vata, bhante, vajjīnaṁ, suladdhalābhā vajjipajāya, yattha tathāgato viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, ime ca tayo kulaputtā— āyasmā ca anuruddho, āyasmā ca nandiyo, āyasmā ca kimilo”ti.
[¶36] Hearing the cry of Dīgha Parajana, the earth gods raised the cry …
> Pali: Dīghassa parajanassa yakkhassa saddaṁ sutvā bhummā devā saddamanussāvesuṁ: “lābhā vata, bho, vajjīnaṁ, suladdhalābhā vajjipajāya, yattha tathāgato viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, ime ca tayo kulaputtā— āyasmā ca anuruddho, āyasmā ca nandiyo, āyasmā ca kimilo”ti.
[¶37] Hearing the cry of the earth gods, the gods of the four great kings … the gods of the thirty-three … the gods of Yama … the joyful gods … the gods who love to create … the gods who control what is created by others … the gods of the Divinity’s host raised the cry, “The Vajjis are lucky! The Vajjian people are so very lucky that the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha stays there, as well as these three gentlemen, the venerables Anuruddha, Nandiya, and Kimbila.”
> Pali: Bhummānaṁ devānaṁ saddaṁ sutvā cātumahārājikā devā …pe… tāvatiṁsā devā …pe… yāmā devā …pe… tusitā devā …pe… nimmānaratī devā …pe… paranimmitavasavattī devā …pe… brahmakāyikā devā saddamanussāvesuṁ: “lābhā vata, bho, vajjīnaṁ, suladdhalābhā vajjipajāya, yattha tathāgato viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, ime ca tayo kulaputtā— āyasmā ca anuruddho, āyasmā ca nandiyo, āyasmā ca kimilo”ti.
[¶38] And so at that moment, that second, that hour, those venerables were known as far as the realm of divinity.
> Pali: Itiha te āyasmanto tena khaṇena tena layena tena muhuttena yāva brahmalokā viditā ahesuṁ.
[¶39] “That’s so true, Dīgha! That’s so true! If the family from which those three gentlemen went forth from the lay life to homelessness were to recollect those venerables with confident heart, that would be for that family’s lasting welfare and happiness. If the family circle … village … town … city … country … all the aristocrats … all the brahmins … all the peasants … all the workers were to recollect those venerables with confident heart, that would be for all those menials’ lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, dīgha, evametaṁ, dīgha. Yasmāpi, dīgha, kulā ete tayo kulaputtā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, tañcepi kulaṁ ete tayo kulaputte pasannacittaṁ anussareyya, tassapāssa kulassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Yasmāpi, dīgha, kulaparivaṭṭā ete tayo kulaputtā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, so cepi kulaparivaṭṭo ete tayo kulaputte pasannacitto anussareyya, tassapāssa kulaparivaṭṭassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Yasmāpi, dīgha, gāmā ete tayo kulaputtā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, so cepi gāmo ete tayo kulaputte pasannacitto anussareyya, tassapāssa gāmassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Yasmāpi, dīgha, nigamā ete tayo kulaputtā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, so cepi nigamo ete tayo kulaputte pasannacitto anussareyya, tassapāssa nigamassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Yasmāpi, dīgha, nagarā ete tayo kulaputtā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, tañcepi nagaraṁ ete tayo kulaputte pasannacittaṁ anussareyya, tassapāssa nagarassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Yasmāpi, dīgha, janapadā ete tayo kulaputtā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, so cepi janapado ete tayo kulaputte pasannacitto anussareyya, tassapāssa janapadassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Sabbe cepi, dīgha, khattiyā ete tayo kulaputte pasannacittā anussareyyuṁ, sabbesānampāssa khattiyānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Sabbe cepi, dīgha, brāhmaṇā …pe… sabbe cepi, dīgha, vessā …pe… sabbe cepi, dīgha, suddā ete tayo kulaputte pasannacittā anussareyyuṁ, sabbesānampāssa suddānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya.
[¶40] If the whole world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—were to recollect those venerables with confident heart, that would be for the whole world’s lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: Sadevako cepi, dīgha, loko samārako sabrahmako sassamaṇabrāhmaṇī pajā sadevamanussā ete tayo kulaputte pasannacittā anussareyya, sadevakassapāssa lokassa samārakassa sabrahmakassa sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya.
[¶41] See, Dīgha, how those three gentlemen are practicing for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans!”
> Pali: Passa, dīgha, yāva ete tayo kulaputtā bahujanahitāya paṭipannā bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya, atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.
[¶42] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the native spirit Dīgha Parajana approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano dīgho parajano yakkho bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶43] > Pali: Cūḷagosiṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 34. MN 32 · The Longer Discourse at Gosiṅga
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/34/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/34/#p-N
[¶0] MN 32 · The Longer Discourse at Gosiṅga
> Pali: MN 32 · Mahāgosiṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the sal forest park at Gosiṅga, together with several well-known senior disciples, such as the venerables Sāriputta, Mahāmoggallāna, Mahākassapa, Anuruddha, Revata, Ānanda, and others.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā gosiṅgasālavanadāye viharati sambahulehi abhiññātehi abhiññātehi therehi sāvakehi saddhiṁ— āyasmatā ca sāriputtena āyasmatā ca mahāmoggallānena āyasmatā ca mahākassapena āyasmatā ca anuruddhena āyasmatā ca revatena āyasmatā ca ānandena, aññehi ca abhiññātehi abhiññātehi therehi sāvakehi saddhiṁ.
[¶2] Then in the late afternoon, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna came out of retreat, went to Venerable Mahākassapa, and said, “Come, Reverend Kassapa, let’s go to Venerable Sāriputta to hear the teaching.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenāyasmā mahākassapo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākassapaṁ etadavoca: “āyāmāvuso, kassapa, yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkamissāma dhammassavanāyā”ti.
[¶3] “Yes, reverend,” Mahākassapa replied. Then, together with Venerable Anuruddha, they went to Sāriputta to hear the teaching.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa paccassosi. Atha kho āyasmā ca mahāmoggallāno āyasmā ca mahākassapo āyasmā ca anuruddho yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu dhammassavanāya.
[¶4] Seeing them, Venerable Ānanda went to Venerable Revata, told him what was happening, and invited him also.
> Pali: Addasā kho āyasmā ānando āyasmantañca mahāmoggallānaṁ āyasmantañca mahākassapaṁ āyasmantañca anuruddhaṁ yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkamante dhammassavanāya. Disvāna yenāyasmā revato tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ revataṁ etadavoca: “upasaṅkamantā kho amū, āvuso revata, sappurisā yenāyasmā sāriputto tena dhammassavanāya. Āyāmāvuso revata, yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkamissāma dhammassavanāyā”ti. “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā revato āyasmato ānandassa paccassosi. Atha kho āyasmā ca revato āyasmā ca ānando yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu dhammassavanāya.
[¶5] Sāriputta saw them coming off in the distance and said to Ānanda, “Come, Venerable Ānanda. Welcome to Ānanda, the Buddha’s attendant, who is so close to the Buddha. Reverend Ānanda, the sal forest park at Gosiṅga is lovely, the night is bright, the sal trees are in full blossom, and heavenly scents seem to float on the air. What kind of mendicant would grace this park?”
> Pali: Addasā kho āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantañca revataṁ āyasmantañca ānandaṁ dūratova āgacchante. Disvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho āyasmā ānando. Svāgataṁ āyasmato ānandassa bhagavato upaṭṭhākassa bhagavato santikāvacarassa. Ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso ānanda, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti; kathaṁrūpena, āvuso ānanda, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti?
[¶6] “Reverend Sāriputta, it’s a mendicant who is very learned, remembering and keeping what they’ve learned. These teachings are good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased, describing a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. They are very learned in such teachings, remembering them, rehearsing them, mentally scrutinizing them, and penetrating them theoretically. And they teach the four assemblies in order to uproot the underlying tendencies with well-rounded and coherent words and phrases. That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo. Ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthā sabyañjanā; kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti, tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti, dhātā, vacasā paricitā, manasānupekkhitā, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā. So catassannaṁ parisānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehi anuppabandhehi anusayasamugghātāya. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti.
[¶7] When he had spoken, Sāriputta said to Revata, “Reverend Revata, Ānanda has answered according to his own inspiration. And now we ask you the same question.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ revataṁ etadavoca: “byākataṁ kho, āvuso revata, āyasmatā ānandena yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ revataṁ pucchāma: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso revata, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti; kathaṁrūpena, āvuso revata, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti?
[¶8] “Reverend Sāriputta, it’s a mendicant who enjoys retreat and loves retreat. They’re committed to inner serenity of the heart, they don’t neglect absorption, they’re endowed with discernment, and they frequent empty huts. That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu paṭisallānārāmo hoti paṭisallānarato, ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno, vipassanāya samannāgato, brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti.
[¶9] When he had spoken, Sāriputta said to Anuruddha, “Reverend Anuruddha, Revata has answered according to his own inspiration. And now we ask you the same question.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavoca: “byākataṁ kho, āvuso anuruddha, āyasmatā revatena yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ pucchāma: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso anuruddha, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti; kathaṁrūpena, āvuso anuruddha, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti?
[¶10] “Reverend Sāriputta, it’s a mendicant who surveys a thousandfold galaxy with clairvoyance that is purified and surpasses the human, just as a person with clear eyes could survey a thousand orbits from the upper floor of a royal longhouse. That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sahassaṁ lokānaṁ voloketi. Seyyathāpi, āvuso sāriputta, cakkhumā puriso uparipāsādavaragato sahassaṁ nemimaṇḍalānaṁ volokeyya; evameva kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sahassaṁ lokānaṁ voloketi. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti.
[¶11] When he had spoken, Sāriputta said to Mahākassapa, “Reverend Kassapa, Anuruddha has answered according to his own inspiration. And now we ask you the same question.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ mahākassapaṁ etadavoca: “byākataṁ kho, āvuso kassapa, āyasmatā anuruddhena yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ mahākassapaṁ pucchāma: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso kassapa, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti; kathaṁrūpena, āvuso kassapa, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti?
[¶12] “Reverend Sāriputta, it’s a mendicant who lives in the wilderness, eats only almsfood, wears rag robes, and owns just three robes; and they praise these things. They are of few wishes, content, secluded, aloof, and energetic; and they praise these things. They are accomplished in ethics, immersion, wisdom, freedom, and the knowledge and vision of freedom; and they praise these things. That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu attanā ca āraññiko hoti āraññikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca piṇḍapātiko hoti piṇḍapātikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca paṁsukūliko hoti paṁsukūlikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca tecīvariko hoti tecīvarikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca appiccho hoti appicchatāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca santuṭṭho hoti santuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca pavivitto hoti pavivekassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca asaṁsaṭṭho hoti asaṁsaggassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca āraddhavīriyo hoti vīriyārambhassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca sīlasampanno hoti sīlasampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca samādhisampanno hoti samādhisampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca paññāsampanno hoti paññāsampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca vimuttisampanno hoti vimuttisampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca vimuttiñāṇadassanasampanno hoti vimuttiñāṇadassanasampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti.
[¶13] When he had spoken, Sāriputta said to Mahāmoggallāna, “Reverend Moggallāna, Mahākassapa has answered according to his own inspiration. And now we ask you the same question.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ etadavoca: “byākataṁ kho, āvuso moggallāna, āyasmatā mahākassapena yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ pucchāma: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso moggallāna, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti; kathaṁrūpena, āvuso moggallāna, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti?
[¶14] “Reverend Sāriputta, it’s when two mendicants engage in discussion about the teaching. They question each other and answer each other’s questions without faltering, and their discussion on the teaching flows on. That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso sāriputta, dve bhikkhū abhidhammakathaṁ kathenti, te aññamaññaṁ pañhaṁ pucchanti, aññamaññassa pañhaṁ puṭṭhā vissajjenti, no ca saṁsādenti, dhammī ca nesaṁ kathā pavattinī hoti. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti.
[¶15] Then Mahāmoggallāna said to Sāriputta, “Each of us has spoken from our heart. And now we ask you: Reverend Sāriputta, the sal forest park at Gosiṅga is lovely, the night is bright, the sal trees are in full blossom, and heavenly scents seem to float on the air. What kind of mendicant would grace this park?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “byākataṁ kho, āvuso sāriputta, amhehi sabbeheva yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ pucchāma: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso sāriputta, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti; kathaṁrūpena, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti?
[¶16] “Reverend Moggallāna, it’s when a mendicant masters their mind and is not mastered by it. In the morning, they abide in whatever meditation or attainment they want. At midday, and in the evening, they abide in whatever meditation or attainment they want. Suppose that a ruler or their chief minister had a chest full of garments of different colors. In the morning, they’d don whatever pair of garments they wanted. At midday, and in the evening, they’d don whatever pair of garments they wanted.
> Pali: “Idhāvuso moggallāna, bhikkhu cittaṁ vasaṁ vatteti, no ca bhikkhu cittassa vasena vattati. So yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati sāyanhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā sāyanhasamayaṁ viharati. Seyyathāpi, āvuso moggallāna, rañño vā rājamahāmattassa vā nānārattānaṁ dussānaṁ dussakaraṇḍako pūro assa. So yaññadeva dussayugaṁ ākaṅkheyya pubbaṇhasamayaṁ pārupituṁ, taṁ tadeva dussayugaṁ pubbaṇhasamayaṁ pārupeyya; yaññadeva dussayugaṁ ākaṅkheyya majjhanhikasamayaṁ pārupituṁ, taṁ tadeva dussayugaṁ majjhanhikasamayaṁ pārupeyya; yaññadeva dussayugaṁ ākaṅkheyya sāyanhasamayaṁ pārupituṁ, taṁ tadeva dussayugaṁ sāyanhasamayaṁ pārupeyya.
[¶17] In the same way, a mendicant masters their mind and is not mastered by it. In the morning, they abide in whatever meditation or attainment they want. At midday, and in the evening, they abide in whatever meditation or attainment they want. That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, āvuso moggallāna, bhikkhu cittaṁ vasaṁ vatteti, no ca bhikkhu cittassa vasena vattati. So yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati sāyanhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā sāyanhasamayaṁ viharati. Evarūpena kho, āvuso moggallāna, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti.
[¶18] Then Sāriputta said to those venerables, “Each of us has spoken from the heart. Come, reverends, let’s go to the Buddha, and inform him about this. As he answers, so we’ll remember it.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto te āyasmante etadavoca: “byākataṁ kho, āvuso, amhehi sabbeheva yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Āyāmāvuso, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamissāma; upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ bhagavato ārocessāma. Yathā no bhagavā byākarissati tathā naṁ dhāressāmā”ti.
[¶19] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Then those venerables went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. Venerable Sāriputta told the Buddha of how the mendicants had come to see him, and how he had asked Ānanda: “‘Ānanda, the sal forest park at Gosiṅga is lovely, the night is bright, the sal trees are in full blossom, and heavenly scents seem to float on the air. What kind of mendicant would grace this park?’ When I had spoken, Ānanda said to me: ‘Reverend Sāriputta, it’s a mendicant who is very learned … That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.’”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te āyasmanto āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Atha kho te āyasmanto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idha, bhante, āyasmā ca revato āyasmā ca ānando yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu dhammassavanāya. Addasaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, āyasmantañca revataṁ āyasmantañca ānandaṁ dūratova āgacchante. Disvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘etu kho āyasmā ānando. Svāgataṁ āyasmato ānandassa bhagavato upaṭṭhākassa bhagavato santikāvacarassa. Ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso ānanda, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti; kathaṁrūpena, āvuso ānanda, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhante, āyasmā ānando maṁ etadavoca: ‘idhāvuso, sāriputta, bhikkhu bahussuto hoti sutadharo …pe… anusayasamugghātāya. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti.
[¶20] “Good, good, Sāriputta! Ānanda answered in the right way for him. For Ānanda is very learned …”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta. Yathā taṁ ānandova sammā byākaramāno byākareyya. Ānando hi, sāriputta, bahussuto sutadharo sutasannicayo. Ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthā sabyañjanā; kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti, tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti, dhātā, vacasā paricitā, manasānupekkhitā, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā. So catassannaṁ parisānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehi anuppabandhehi anusayasamugghātāyā”ti.
[¶21] “Next I asked Revata the same question. He said: ‘It’s a mendicant who enjoys retreat … That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, āyasmantaṁ revataṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘byākataṁ kho, āvuso revata, āyasmatā ānandena yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ revataṁ pucchāma— ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso revata, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā maññe gandhā sampavanti. Kathaṁrūpena, āvuso revata, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhante, āyasmā revato maṁ etadavoca: ‘idhāvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu paṭisallānārāmo hoti paṭisallānarato, ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto, anirākatajjhāno, vipassanāya samannāgato, brūhetā suññāgārānaṁ. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti.
[¶22] “Good, good, Sāriputta! Revata answered in the right way for him. For Revata enjoys retreat …”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta. Yathā taṁ revatova sammā byākaramāno byākareyya. Revato hi, sāriputta, paṭisallānārāmo paṭisallānarato, ajjhattaṁ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno, vipassanāya samannāgato brūhetā suññāgārānan”ti.
[¶23] “Next I asked Anuruddha the same question. He said: ‘It’s a mendicant who surveys the thousandfold galaxy with clairvoyance that is purified and surpasses the human … That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘byākataṁ kho, āvuso anuruddha, āyasmatā revatena …pe… kathaṁrūpena, āvuso anuruddha, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’ti. Evaṁ vutte, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho maṁ etadavoca: ‘idhāvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sahassaṁ lokānaṁ voloketi. Seyyathāpi, āvuso sāriputta, cakkhumā puriso …pe… evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti.
[¶24] “Good, good, Sāriputta! Anuruddha answered in the right way for him. For Anuruddha surveys the thousandfold galaxy with clairvoyance that is purified and surpasses the human.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta, yathā taṁ anuruddhova sammā byākaramāno byākareyya. Anuruddho hi, sāriputta, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sahassaṁ lokānaṁ voloketī”ti.
[¶25] “Next I asked Mahākassapa the same question. He said: ‘It’s a mendicant who lives in the wilderness … and is accomplished in the knowledge and vision of freedom; and they praise these things. That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, āyasmantaṁ mahākassapaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘byākataṁ kho, āvuso kassapa, āyasmatā anuruddhena yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ mahākassapaṁ pucchāma …pe… kathaṁrūpena kho, āvuso kassapa, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhante, āyasmā mahākassapo maṁ etadavoca: ‘idhāvuso sāriputta, bhikkhu attanā ca āraññiko hoti āraññikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca piṇḍapātiko hoti …pe… attanā ca paṁsukūliko hoti …pe… attanā ca tecīvariko hoti …pe… attanā ca appiccho hoti …pe… attanā ca santuṭṭho hoti …pe… attanā ca pavivitto hoti …pe… attanā ca asaṁsaṭṭho hoti …pe… attanā ca āraddhavīriyo hoti …pe… attanā ca sīlasampanno hoti …pe… attanā ca samādhisampanno hoti …pe… attanā ca paññāsampanno hoti … attanā ca vimuttisampanno hoti … attanā ca vimuttiñāṇadassanasampanno hoti vimuttiñāṇadassanasampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti.
[¶26] “Good, good, Sāriputta! Kassapa answered in the right way for him. For Kassapa lives in the wilderness … and is accomplished in the knowledge and vision of freedom; and he praises these things.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta. Yathā taṁ kassapova sammā byākaramāno byākareyya. Kassapo hi, sāriputta, attanā ca āraññiko āraññikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca piṇḍapātiko piṇḍapātikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca paṁsukūliko paṁsukūlikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca tecīvariko tecīvarikattassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca appiccho appicchatāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca santuṭṭho santuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca pavivitto pavivekassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca asaṁsaṭṭho asaṁsaggassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca āraddhavīriyo vīriyārambhassa ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca sīlasampanno sīlasampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca samādhisampanno samādhisampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca paññāsampanno paññāsampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca vimuttisampanno vimuttisampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī, attanā ca vimuttiñāṇadassanasampanno vimuttiñāṇadassanasampadāya ca vaṇṇavādī”ti.
[¶27] “Next I asked Mahāmoggallāna the same question. He said: ‘It’s when two mendicants engage in discussion about the teaching … That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ bhante āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘byākataṁ kho, āvuso moggallāna, āyasmatā mahākassapena yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ pucchāma …pe… kathaṁrūpena, āvuso moggallāna, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhante, āyasmā mahāmoggallāno maṁ etadavoca: ‘idhāvuso sāriputta, dve bhikkhū abhidhammakathaṁ kathenti. Te aññamaññaṁ pañhaṁ pucchanti, aññamaññassa pañhaṁ puṭṭhā vissajjenti, no ca saṁsādenti, dhammī ca nesaṁ kathā pavattinī hoti. Evarūpena kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti.
[¶28] “Good, good, Sāriputta! Moggallāna answered in the right way for him. For Moggallāna is a Dhamma speaker.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta, yathā taṁ moggallānova sammā byākaramāno byākareyya. Moggallāno hi, sāriputta, dhammakathiko”ti.
[¶29] When he had spoken, Moggallāna said to the Buddha, “Next, I asked Sāriputta: ‘Each of us has spoken according to our own inspiration. And now we ask you: Reverend Sāriputta, the sal forest park at Gosiṅga is lovely, the night is bright, the sal trees are in full blossom, and heavenly scents seem to float on the air. What kind of mendicant would grace this park?’ When I had spoken, Sāriputta said to me: ‘Reverend Moggallāna, it’s when a mendicant masters their mind and is not mastered by it … That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.’”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “atha khvāhaṁ, bhante, āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘byākataṁ kho, āvuso sāriputta, amhehi sabbeheva yathāsakaṁ paṭibhānaṁ. Tattha dāni mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ pucchāma— ramaṇīyaṁ, āvuso sāriputta, gosiṅgasālavanaṁ, dosinā ratti, sabbaphāliphullā sālā, dibbā, maññe, gandhā sampavanti. Kathaṁrūpena, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhante, āyasmā sāriputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘idhāvuso moggallāna, bhikkhu cittaṁ vasaṁ vatteti no ca bhikkhu cittassa vasena vattati. So yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati sāyanhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā sāyanhasamayaṁ viharati. Seyyathāpi, āvuso moggallāna, rañño vā rājamahāmattassa vā nānārattānaṁ dussānaṁ dussakaraṇḍako pūro assa. So yaññadeva dussayugaṁ ākaṅkheyya pubbaṇhasamayaṁ pārupituṁ, taṁ tadeva dussayugaṁ pubbaṇhasamayaṁ pārupeyya; yaññadeva dussayugaṁ ākaṅkheyya majjhanhikasamayaṁ pārupituṁ, taṁ tadeva dussayugaṁ majjhanhikasamayaṁ pārupeyya; yaññadeva dussayugaṁ ākaṅkheyya sāyanhasamayaṁ pārupituṁ, taṁ tadeva dussayugaṁ sāyanhasamayaṁ pārupeyya. Evameva kho, āvuso moggallāna, bhikkhu cittaṁ vasaṁ vatteti, no ca bhikkhu cittassa vasena vattati. So yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati sāyanhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā sāyanhasamayaṁ viharati. Evarūpena kho, āvuso moggallāna, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā’”ti.
[¶30] “Good, good, Moggallāna! Sāriputta answered in the right way for him. For Sāriputta masters his mind and is not mastered by it …”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, moggallāna. Yathā taṁ sāriputtova sammā byākaramāno byākareyya. Sāriputto hi, moggallāna, cittaṁ vasaṁ vatteti no ca sāriputto cittassa vasena vattati. So yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā majjhanhikasamayaṁ viharati; yāya vihārasamāpattiyā ākaṅkhati sāyanhasamayaṁ viharituṁ, tāya vihārasamāpattiyā sāyanhasamayaṁ viharatī”ti.
[¶31] When he had spoken, Sāriputta asked the Buddha, “Sir, who has spoken well?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kassa nu kho, bhante, subhāsitan”ti?
[¶32] “You’ve all spoken well in your own way. However, listen to me also as to what kind of mendicant would grace this sal forest park at Gosiṅga. It’s a mendicant who, after the meal, returns from almsround, sits down cross-legged, sets their body straight, and brings mindfulness to the present, thinking: ‘I will not break this sitting posture until my mind is freed from the defilements by not grasping!’ That’s the kind of mendicant who would grace this park.”
> Pali: “Sabbesaṁ vo, sāriputta, subhāsitaṁ pariyāyena. Api ca mamapi suṇātha yathārūpena bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyya. Idha, sāriputta, bhikkhu pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ pallaṅkaṁ bhindissāmi yāva me nānupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuccissatī’ti. Evarūpena kho, sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṁ sobheyyā”ti.
[¶33] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, those venerables approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te āyasmanto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶34] > Pali: Mahāgosiṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 35. MN 33 · The Longer Discourse on the Cowherd
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/35/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/35/#p-N
[¶0] MN 33 · The Longer Discourse on the Cowherd
> Pali: MN 33 · Mahāgopālakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, a cowherd with eleven factors can’t maintain and expand a herd of cattle. What eleven? It’s when a cowherd doesn’t know form, is unskilled in characteristics, doesn’t pick out flies’ eggs, doesn’t dress wounds, doesn’t spread smoke, doesn’t know the ford, doesn’t know satisfaction, doesn’t know the trail, is not skilled in ranges, milks dry, and doesn’t show extra respect to the bulls who are fathers and captains of the herd. A cowherd with these eleven factors can’t maintain and expand a herd of cattle.
> Pali: “Ekādasahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato gopālako abhabbo gogaṇaṁ pariharituṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ. Katamehi ekādasahi? Idha, bhikkhave, gopālako na rūpaññū hoti, na lakkhaṇakusalo hoti, na āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti, na vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti, na dhūmaṁ kattā hoti, na titthaṁ jānāti, na pītaṁ jānāti, na vīthiṁ jānāti, na gocarakusalo hoti anavasesadohī ca hoti. Ye te usabhā gopitaro gopariṇāyakā te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, ekādasahi aṅgehi samannāgato gopālako abhabbo gogaṇaṁ pariharituṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ.
[¶4] In the same way, a mendicant with eleven qualities can’t achieve growth, improvement, or maturity in this teaching and training. What eleven? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t know form, is unskilled in characteristics, doesn’t pick out flies’ eggs, doesn’t dress wounds, doesn’t spread smoke, doesn’t know the ford, doesn’t know satisfaction, doesn’t know the trail, is not skilled in ranges, milks dry, and doesn’t show extra respect to senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, ekādasahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu abhabbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjituṁ. Katamehi ekādasahi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na rūpaññū hoti, na lakkhaṇakusalo hoti, na āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti, na vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti, na dhūmaṁ kattā hoti, na titthaṁ jānāti, na pītaṁ jānāti, na vīthiṁ jānāti, na gocarakusalo hoti, anavasesadohī ca hoti. Ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti.
[¶5] And how does a mendicant not know form? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t truly understand that all form is the four principal states, or form derived from the four principal states. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t know form.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na rūpaññū hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yaṁ kiñci rūpaṁ sabbaṁ rūpaṁ ‘cattāri mahābhūtāni, catunnañca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāyarūpan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na rūpaññū hoti.
[¶6] And how is a mendicant not skilled in characteristics? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t understand that a fool is characterized by their deeds, and an astute person is characterized by their deeds. That’s how a mendicant isn’t skilled in characteristics.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na lakkhaṇakusalo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘kammalakkhaṇo bālo, kammalakkhaṇo paṇḍito’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na lakkhaṇakusalo hoti.
[¶7] And how does a mendicant not pick out flies’ eggs? It’s when a mendicant tolerates a sensual, malicious, or cruel thought that has arisen. They tolerate any bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen. They don’t give them up, dispel them, eliminate them, and obliterate them. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t pick out flies’ eggs.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu uppannaṁ kāmavitakkaṁ adhivāseti, nappajahati na vinodeti na byantī karoti na anabhāvaṁ gameti. Uppannaṁ byāpādavitakkaṁ …pe… uppannaṁ vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ …pe… uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme adhivāseti, nappajahati na vinodeti na byantī karoti na anabhāvaṁ gameti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti.
[¶8] And how does a mendicant not dress wounds? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they get caught up in the features and details. Since the faculty of sight is left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure become overwhelming. They don’t practice restraint, they don’t protect the faculty of sight, and they don’t achieve its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … smell an odor with their nose … taste a flavor with their tongue … feel a touch with their body … know an idea with their mind, they get caught up in the features and details. Since the faculty of the mind is left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure become overwhelming. They don’t practice restraint, they don’t protect the faculty of the mind, and they don’t achieve its restraint. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t dress wounds.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā nimittaggāhī hoti anubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya na paṭipajjati, na rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye na saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya nimittaggāhī hoti anubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya na paṭipajjati, na rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye na saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti.
[¶9] And how does a mendicant not spread smoke? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t teach others the Dhamma in detail as they learned and memorized it. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t spread smoke.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na dhūmaṁ kattā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ na vitthārena paresaṁ desetā hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na dhūmaṁ kattā hoti.
[¶10] And how does a mendicant not know the ford? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t from time to time go up to those mendicants who are very learned—inheritors of the heritage, who have memorized the teachings, the monastic law, and the outlines—and ask them questions: ‘Why, sir, does it say this? What does that mean?’ Those venerables don’t reveal what is hidden, clarify what is unclear, and dispel doubt regarding the many doubtful matters. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t know the ford.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na titthaṁ jānāti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā, te kālena kālaṁ upasaṅkamitvā na paripucchati, na paripañhati: ‘idaṁ, bhante, kathaṁ? Imassa ko attho’ti? Tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva na vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca na uttānīkaronti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhānīyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṁ na paṭivinodenti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na titthaṁ jānāti.
[¶11] And how does a mendicant not know satisfaction? It’s when a mendicant, when the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One are being taught, finds no inspiration in the meaning and the teaching, and finds no joy connected with the teaching. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t know satisfaction.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na pītaṁ jānāti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye desiyamāne na labhati atthavedaṁ, na labhati dhammavedaṁ, na labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na pītaṁ jānāti.
[¶12] And how does a mendicant not know the trail? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t truly understand the noble eightfold path. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t know the trail.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na vīthiṁ jānāti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyaṁ aṭṭhaṅgikaṁ maggaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na vīthiṁ jānāti.
[¶13] And how is a mendicant not skilled in ranges? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t truly understand the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. That’s how a mendicant is not skilled in ranges.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na gocarakusalo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cattāro satipaṭṭhāne yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na gocarakusalo hoti.
[¶14] And how does a mendicant milk dry? It’s when a mendicant is invited by a householder to accept robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick, and that mendicant doesn’t know moderation in accepting. That’s how a mendicant milks dry.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anavasesadohī hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ saddhā gahapatikā abhihaṭṭhuṁ pavārenti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi, tatra bhikkhu mattaṁ na jānāti paṭiggahaṇāya. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anavasesadohī hoti.
[¶15] And how does a mendicant not show extra respect to senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t consistently treat senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha with kindness by way of body, speech, and mind, both in public and in private. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t show extra respect to senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā, tesu na mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpeti āvi ceva raho ca; na mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpeti āvi ceva raho ca; na mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpeti āvi ceva raho ca. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti.
[¶16] A mendicant with these eleven qualities can’t achieve growth, improvement, or maturity in this teaching and training.
> Pali: Imehi kho, bhikkhave, ekādasahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu abhabbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjituṁ.
[¶17] A cowherd with eleven factors can maintain and expand a herd of cattle. What eleven? It’s when a cowherd knows form, is skilled in characteristics, picks out flies’ eggs, dresses wounds, spreads smoke, knows the ford, knows satisfaction, knows the trail, is skilled in ranges, doesn’t milk dry, and shows extra respect to the bulls who are fathers and captains of the herd. A cowherd with these eleven factors can maintain and expand a herd of cattle.
> Pali: Ekādasahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato gopālako bhabbo gogaṇaṁ pariharituṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ. Katamehi ekādasahi? Idha, bhikkhave, gopālako rūpaññū hoti, lakkhaṇakusalo hoti, āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti, vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti, dhūmaṁ kattā hoti, titthaṁ jānāti, pītaṁ jānāti, vīthiṁ jānāti, gocarakusalo hoti, sāvasesadohī ca hoti. Ye te usabhā gopitaro gopariṇāyakā te atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, ekādasahi aṅgehi samannāgato gopālako bhabbo gogaṇaṁ pariharituṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ.
[¶18] In the same way, a mendicant with eleven qualities can achieve growth, improvement, and maturity in this teaching and training. What eleven? It’s when a mendicant knows form, is skilled in characteristics, picks out flies’ eggs, dresses wounds, spreads smoke, knows the ford, knows satisfaction, knows the trail, is skilled in ranges, doesn’t milk dry, and shows extra respect to senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, ekādasahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjituṁ. Katamehi ekādasahi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu rūpaññū hoti, lakkhaṇakusalo hoti, āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti, vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti, dhūmaṁ kattā hoti, titthaṁ jānāti, pītaṁ jānāti, vīthiṁ jānāti, gocarakusalo hoti, sāvasesadohī ca hoti. Ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā te atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti.
[¶19] And how does a mendicant know form? It’s when a mendicant truly understands that all form is the four principal states, or form derived from the four principal states. That’s how a mendicant knows form.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu rūpaññū hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yaṁ kiñci rūpaṁ sabbaṁ rūpaṁ ‘cattāri mahābhūtāni, catunnañca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāyarūpan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu rūpaññū hoti.
[¶20] And how is a mendicant skilled in characteristics? It’s when a mendicant understands that a fool is characterized by their deeds, and an astute person is characterized by their deeds. That’s how a mendicant is skilled in characteristics.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu lakkhaṇakusalo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kammalakkhaṇo bālo, kammalakkhaṇo paṇḍitoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu lakkhaṇakusalo hoti.
[¶21] And how does a mendicant pick out flies’ eggs? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t tolerate a sensual, malicious, or cruel thought that has arisen. They don’t tolerate any bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen, but give them up, dispel them, eliminate them, and obliterate them. That’s how a mendicant picks out flies’ eggs.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu uppannaṁ kāmavitakkaṁ nādhivāseti, pajahati vinodeti byantī karoti anabhāvaṁ gameti. Uppannaṁ byāpādavitakkaṁ …pe… uppannaṁ vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ …pe… uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme nādhivāseti, pajahati vinodeti byantī karoti anabhāvaṁ gameti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āsāṭikaṁ hāretā hoti.
[¶22] And how does a mendicant dress wounds? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … smell an odor with their nose … taste a flavor with their tongue … feel a touch with their body … know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. That’s how a mendicant dresses wounds.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vaṇaṁ paṭicchādetā hoti.
[¶23] And how does a mendicant spread smoke? It’s when a mendicant teaches others the Dhamma in detail as they learned and memorized it. That’s how a mendicant spreads smoke.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhūmaṁ kattā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ desetā hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhūmaṁ kattā hoti.
[¶24] And how does a mendicant know the ford? It’s when from time to time a mendicant goes up to those mendicants who are very learned—inheritors of the heritage, who have memorized the teachings, the monastic law, and the outlines—and asks them questions: ‘Why, sir, does it say this? What does that mean?’ Those venerables reveal what is hidden, clarify what is unclear, and dispel doubt regarding the many doubtful matters. That’s how a mendicant knows the ford.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu titthaṁ jānāti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā te kālena kālaṁ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati, paripañhati: ‘idaṁ, bhante, kathaṁ? Imassa ko attho’ti? Tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca uttānīkaronti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhānīyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṁ paṭivinodenti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu titthaṁ jānāti.
[¶25] And how does a mendicant know satisfaction? It’s when a mendicant, when the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One are being taught, finds inspiration in the meaning and the teaching, and finds joy connected with the teaching. That’s how a mendicant knows satisfaction.
> Pali: Kathañca bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītaṁ jānāti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye desiyamāne labhati atthavedaṁ, labhati dhammavedaṁ, labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītaṁ jānāti.
[¶26] And how does a mendicant know the trail? It’s when a mendicant truly understands the noble eightfold path. That’s how a mendicant knows the trail.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vīthiṁ jānāti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyaṁ aṭṭhaṅgikaṁ maggaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vīthiṁ jānāti.
[¶27] And how is a mendicant skilled in ranges? It’s when a mendicant truly understands the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. That’s how a mendicant is skilled in ranges.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gocarakusalo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cattāro satipaṭṭhāne yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gocarakusalo hoti.
[¶28] And how does a mendicant not milk dry? It’s when a mendicant is invited by a householder to accept robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick, and that mendicant knows moderation in accepting. That’s how a mendicant doesn’t milk dry.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sāvasesadohī hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ saddhā gahapatikā abhihaṭṭhuṁ pavārenti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi. Tatra bhikkhu mattaṁ jānāti paṭiggahaṇāya. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sāvasesadohī hoti.
[¶29] And how does a mendicant show extra respect to senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha? It’s when a mendicant consistently treats senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha with kindness by way of body, speech, and mind, both in public and in private. That’s how a mendicant shows extra respect to senior mendicants of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā, te atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā tesu mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpeti āvi ceva raho ca; mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpeti āvi ceva raho ca; mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpeti āvi ceva raho ca. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā te atirekapūjāya pūjetā hoti.
[¶30] A mendicant with these eleven qualities can achieve growth, improvement, and maturity in this teaching and training.”
> Pali: Imehi kho, bhikkhave, ekādasahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjitun”ti.
[¶31] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶32] > Pali: Mahāgopālakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 36. MN 34 · The Shorter Discourse on the Cowherd
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/36/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/36/#p-N
[¶0] MN 34 · The Shorter Discourse on the Cowherd
> Pali: MN 34 · Cūḷagopālakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Vajjis near Ukkacelā on the bank of the Ganges River. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā vajjīsu viharati ukkacelāyaṁ gaṅgāya nadiyā tīre. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Once upon a time, mendicants, there was an unintelligent Magadhan cowherd. In the last month of the rainy season, in autumn, without inspecting the near shore or the far shore, he drove his cattle across a place with no ford on the Ganges River to the northern shore among the Suvidehans.
> Pali: “Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, māgadhako gopālako duppaññajātiko, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye, asamavekkhitvā gaṅgāya nadiyā orimaṁ tīraṁ, asamavekkhitvā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, atittheneva gāvo patāresi uttaraṁ tīraṁ suvidehānaṁ.
[¶4] But the cattle bunched up in mid-stream and came to ruin right there. Why is that? Because the unintelligent cowherd failed to inspect the shores before driving the cattle across at a place with no ford. In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who are unskilled in this world and the other world, unskilled in Māra’s dominion and its opposite, and unskilled in Death’s dominion and its opposite. If anyone thinks they are worth listening to and trusting, it will be for their lasting harm and suffering.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, gāvo majjhegaṅgāya nadiyā sote āmaṇḍaliyaṁ karitvā tattheva anayabyasanaṁ āpajjiṁsu. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so, bhikkhave, māgadhako gopālako duppaññajātiko, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye, asamavekkhitvā gaṅgāya nadiyā orimaṁ tīraṁ, asamavekkhitvā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, atittheneva gāvo patāresi uttaraṁ tīraṁ suvidehānaṁ. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā akusalā imassa lokassa akusalā parassa lokassa, akusalā māradheyyassa akusalā amāradheyyassa, akusalā maccudheyyassa akusalā amaccudheyyassa, tesaṁ ye sotabbaṁ saddahātabbaṁ maññissanti, tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya.
[¶5] Once upon a time, mendicants, there was an intelligent Magadhan cowherd. In the last month of the rainy season, in autumn, after inspecting the near shore and the far shore, he drove his cattle across a ford on the Ganges River to the northern shore among the Suvidehans.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, māgadhako gopālako sappaññajātiko, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye, samavekkhitvā gaṅgāya nadiyā orimaṁ tīraṁ, samavekkhitvā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, tittheneva gāvo patāresi uttaraṁ tīraṁ suvidehānaṁ.
[¶6] First he drove across the bulls, the fathers and captains of the herd. They breasted the stream of the Ganges and safely reached the far shore. Then he drove across the strong and tractable cattle. They too breasted the stream of the Ganges and safely reached the far shore. Then he drove across the bullocks and heifers. They too breasted the stream of the Ganges and safely reached the far shore. Then he drove across the calves and weak cattle. They too breasted the stream of the Ganges and safely reached the far shore. Once it happened that a baby calf had just been born. Urged on by its mother’s lowing, even it managed to breast the stream of the Ganges and safely reach the far shore. Why is that? Because the intelligent cowherd inspected both shores before driving the cattle across at a ford.
> Pali: So paṭhamaṁ patāresi ye te usabhā gopitaro gopariṇāyakā. Te tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu. Athāpare patāresi balavagāvo dammagāvo. Tepi tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu. Athāpare patāresi vacchatare vacchatariyo. Tepi tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu. Athāpare patāresi vacchake kisābalake. Tepi tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, vacchako taruṇako tāvadeva jātako mātugoravakena vuyhamāno, sopi tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamāsi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so, bhikkhave, māgadhako gopālako sappaññajātiko, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye, samavekkhitvā gaṅgāya nadiyā orimaṁ tīraṁ, samavekkhitvā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, tittheneva gāvo patāresi uttaraṁ tīraṁ suvidehānaṁ.
[¶7] In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who are skilled in this world and the other world, skilled in Māra’s dominion and its opposite, and skilled in Death’s dominion and its opposite. If anyone thinks they are worth listening to and trusting, it will be for their lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kusalā imassa lokassa kusalā parassa lokassa, kusalā māradheyyassa kusalā amāradheyyassa, kusalā maccudheyyassa kusalā amaccudheyyassa, tesaṁ ye sotabbaṁ saddahātabbaṁ maññissanti, tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya.
[¶8] Just like the bulls, fathers and captains of the herd, who crossed the Ganges to safety are the mendicants who are perfected, who have ended the defilements, completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and are rightly freed through enlightenment. Having breasted Māra’s stream, they have safely crossed over to the far shore.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ye te usabhā gopitaro gopariṇāyakā te tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye te bhikkhū arahanto khīṇāsavā vusitavanto katakaraṇīyā ohitabhārā anuppattasadatthā parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanā sammadaññāvimuttā, te tiriyaṁ mārassa sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṅgatā.
[¶9] Just like the strong and tractable cattle who crossed the Ganges to safety are the mendicants who, with the ending of the five lower fetters, are reborn spontaneously. They’re extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world. They too, having breasted Māra’s stream, will safely cross over to the far shore.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi te, bhikkhave, balavagāvo dammagāvo tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye te bhikkhū pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā, tepi tiriyaṁ mārassa sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gamissanti.
[¶10] Just like the bullocks and heifers who crossed the Ganges to safety are the mendicants who, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, are once-returners. They come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering. They too, having breasted Māra’s stream, will safely cross over to the far shore.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi te, bhikkhave, vacchatarā vacchatariyo tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye te bhikkhū tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti, tepi tiriyaṁ mārassa sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gamissanti.
[¶11] Just like the calves and weak cattle who crossed the Ganges to safety are the mendicants who, with the ending of three fetters are stream-enterers, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening. They too, having breasted Māra’s stream, will safely cross over to the far shore.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi te, bhikkhave, vacchakā kisābalakā tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamaṁsu; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye te bhikkhū tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyanā, tepi tiriyaṁ mārassa sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gamissanti.
[¶12] Just like the baby calf who had just been born, but, urged on by its mother’s lowing, still managed to cross the Ganges to safety are the mendicants who are followers of teachings, followers by faith. They too, having breasted Māra’s stream, will safely cross over to the far shore.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi so, bhikkhave, vacchako taruṇako tāvadeva jātako mātugoravakena vuyhamāno tiriyaṁ gaṅgāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ agamāsi; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye te bhikkhū dhammānusārino saddhānusārino, tepi tiriyaṁ mārassa sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gamissanti.
[¶13] Mendicants, I am skilled in this world and the other world, skilled in Māra’s dominion and its opposite, and skilled in Death’s dominion and its opposite. If anyone thinks I am worth listening to and trusting, it will be for their lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, kusalo imassa lokassa kusalo parassa lokassa, kusalo māradheyyassa kusalo amāradheyyassa, kusalo maccudheyyassa kusalo amaccudheyyassa. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, ye sotabbaṁ saddahātabbaṁ maññissanti, tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶14] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvā sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶15] “This world and the other world
have been clearly explained by one who knows;
as well as Māra’s reach,
and what’s out of Death’s reach.
> Pali: “Ayaṁ loko paro loko,
jānatā suppakāsito;
Yañca mārena sampattaṁ,
appattaṁ yañca maccunā.
[¶16] Directly knowing the whole world,
the Buddha who understands
has opened the door to freedom from death,
for finding the sanctuary, extinguishment.
> Pali: Sabbaṁ lokaṁ abhiññāya,
sambuddhena pajānatā;
Vivaṭaṁ amatadvāraṁ,
khemaṁ nibbānapattiyā.
[¶17] The Wicked One’s stream has been cut,
it’s blown away and mown down.
Be full of joy, mendicants,
set your heart on sanctuary!”
> Pali: Chinnaṁ pāpimato sotaṁ,
Viddhastaṁ vinaḷīkataṁ;
Pāmojjabahulā hotha,
Khemaṁ pattattha bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶18] > Pali: Cūḷagopālakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 37. MN 35 · The Shorter Discourse With Saccaka
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/37/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/37/#p-N
[¶0] MN 35 · The Shorter Discourse With Saccaka
> Pali: MN 35 · Cūḷasaccakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ.
[¶2] Now at that time Saccaka, the son of Jain parents, was staying in Vesālī. He was a controversialist who pretended to be astute and was deemed holy by many people. He was telling a crowd in Vesālī, “I don’t see any ascetic or brahmin who would not shake and rock and tremble, sweating from the armpits, were I to take them on in debate—not a leader of an order or a community, or the tutor of a community, and not even one who claims to be a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha. Even an insentient post would shake and rock and tremble were I to take it on in debate. How much more then a human being!”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena saccako nigaṇṭhaputto vesāliyaṁ paṭivasati bhassappavādako paṇḍitavādo sādhusammato bahujanassa. So vesāliyaṁ parisati evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati: “nāhaṁ taṁ passāmi samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā, saṅghiṁ gaṇiṁ gaṇācariyaṁ, api arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ paṭijānamānaṁ, yo mayā vādena vādaṁ samāraddho na saṅkampeyya na sampakampeyya na sampavedheyya, yassa na kacchehi sedā mucceyyuṁ. Thūṇaṁ cepāhaṁ acetanaṁ vādena vādaṁ samārabheyyaṁ, sāpi mayā vādena vādaṁ samāraddhā saṅkampeyya sampakampeyya sampavedheyya. Ko pana vādo manussabhūtassā”ti?
[¶3] Then Venerable Assaji robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Vesālī for alms. As Saccaka was going for a walk he saw Assaji coming off in the distance. He approached him and exchanged greetings with him.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā assaji pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Addasā kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto vesāliyaṁ jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno āyasmantaṁ assajiṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna yenāyasmā assaji tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā assajinā saddhiṁ sammodi.
[¶4] When the greetings and polite conversation were over, Saccaka stood to one side and said to Assaji, “Worthy Assaji, how does the ascetic Gotama guide his disciples? And on what topics does instruction to his disciples generally proceed?”
> Pali: Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto āyasmantaṁ assajiṁ etadavoca: “kathaṁ pana, bho assaji, samaṇo gotamo sāvake vineti, kathaṁbhāgā ca pana samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakesu anusāsanī bahulā pavattatī”ti?
[¶5] “Aggivessana, this is how the Buddha guides his disciples, and his instructions to disciples generally proceed on these topics: ‘Form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are impermanent. Form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are not-self. All conditions are impermanent. All things are not-self.’ This is how the Buddha guides his disciples, and how instruction to his disciples generally proceeds.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho, aggivessana, bhagavā sāvake vineti, evaṁbhāgā ca pana bhagavato sāvakesu anusāsanī bahulā pavattati: ‘rūpaṁ, bhikkhave, aniccaṁ, vedanā aniccā, saññā aniccā, saṅkhārā aniccā, viññāṇaṁ aniccaṁ. Rūpaṁ, bhikkhave, anattā, vedanā anattā, saññā anattā, saṅkhārā anattā, viññāṇaṁ anattā. Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe dhammā anattā’ti. Evaṁ kho, aggivessana, bhagavā sāvake vineti, evaṁbhāgā ca pana bhagavato sāvakesu anusāsanī bahulā pavattatī”ti.
[¶6] “It’s sad to hear, worthy Assaji, that the ascetic Gotama has such a doctrine. Hopefully, some time or other I’ll get to meet the worthy Gotama, and we can have a discussion. And hopefully I can dissuade him from this harmful misconception.”
> Pali: “Dussutaṁ vata, bho assaji, assumha ye mayaṁ evaṁvādiṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ assumha. Appeva nāma mayaṁ kadāci karahaci tena bhotā gotamena saddhiṁ samāgaccheyyāma, appeva nāma siyā kocideva kathāsallāpo, appeva nāma tasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā viveceyyāmā”ti.
[¶7] Now at that time around five hundred Licchavis were sitting together at the town hall on some business. Then Saccaka went up to them and said, “Come forth, good Licchavīs, come forth! Today I am going to have a discussion with the ascetic Gotama. If he stands by the position stated to me by one of his well-known disciples—a mendicant named Assaji—I’ll take him on in debate and drag him to and fro and round about, like a strong man would grab a fleecy sheep and drag it to and fro and round about! Taking him on in debate, I’ll drag him to and fro and round about, like a strong brewer’s worker would toss a large brewer’s sieve into a deep lake, grab it by the corners, and drag it to and fro and round about! Taking him on in debate, I’ll shake him down and about, and give him a beating, like a strong brewer’s mixer would grab a strainer by the corners and shake it down and about, and give it a beating! I’ll play a game of hemp-washing with the ascetic Gotama, like a sixty-year-old elephant would plunge into a deep lotus pond and play a game of hemp-washing! Come forth, good Licchavīs, come forth! Today I am going to have a discussion with the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena pañcamattāni licchavisatāni santhāgāre sannipatitāni honti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto yena te licchavī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te licchavī etadavoca: “abhikkamantu bhonto licchavī, abhikkamantu bhonto licchavī, ajja me samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo bhavissati. Sace me samaṇo gotamo tathā patiṭṭhissati yathā ca me ñātaññatarena sāvakena assajinā nāma bhikkhunā patiṭṭhitaṁ, seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso dīghalomikaṁ eḷakaṁ lomesu gahetvā ākaḍḍheyya parikaḍḍheyya samparikaḍḍheyya; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ ākaḍḍhissāmi parikaḍḍhissāmi samparikaḍḍhissāmi. Seyyathāpi nāma balavā soṇḍikākammakāro mahantaṁ soṇḍikākiḷañjaṁ gambhīre udakarahade pakkhipitvā kaṇṇe gahetvā ākaḍḍheyya parikaḍḍheyya samparikaḍḍheyya; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ ākaḍḍhissāmi parikaḍḍhissāmi samparikaḍḍhissāmi. Seyyathāpi nāma balavā soṇḍikādhutto vālaṁ kaṇṇe gahetvā odhuneyya niddhuneyya nipphoṭeyya; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ odhunissāmi niddhunissāmi nipphoṭessāmi. Seyyathāpi nāma kuñjaro saṭṭhihāyano gambhīraṁ pokkharaṇiṁ ogāhetvā sāṇadhovikaṁ nāma kīḷitajātaṁ kīḷati; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ sāṇadhovikaṁ maññe kīḷitajātaṁ kīḷissāmi. Abhikkamantu bhonto licchavī, abhikkamantu bhonto licchavī, ajja me samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo bhavissatī”ti.
[¶8] At that, some of the Licchavis said, “How can the ascetic Gotama refute Saccaka’s doctrine, when it is Saccaka who will refute Gotama’s doctrine?”
> Pali: Tatrekacce licchavī evamāhaṁsu: “kiṁ samaṇo gotamo saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa vādaṁ āropessati, atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropessatī”ti?
[¶9] But some of the Licchavis said, “Who is Saccaka to refute the Buddha’s doctrine, when it is the Buddha who will refute Saccaka’s doctrine?”
> Pali: Ekacce licchavī evamāhaṁsu: “kiṁ so bhavamāno saccako nigaṇṭhaputto yo bhagavato vādaṁ āropessati, atha kho bhagavā saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa vādaṁ āropessatī”ti?
[¶10] Then Saccaka, escorted by the five hundred Licchavis, went to the hall with the peaked roof in the Great Wood.
> Pali: Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto pañcamattehi licchavisatehi parivuto yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā tenupasaṅkami.
[¶11] At that time several mendicants were walking mindfully in the open air. Then Saccaka went up to them and said, “Good fellows, where is the worthy Gotama at present? For we want to see him.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū abbhokāse caṅkamanti. Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “kahaṁ nu kho, bho, etarahi so bhavaṁ gotamo viharati? Dassanakāmā hi mayaṁ taṁ bhavantaṁ gotaman”ti.
[¶12] “Aggivessana, the Buddha has plunged deep into the Great Wood and is sitting at the root of a tree for the day’s meditation.”
> Pali: “Esa, aggivessana, bhagavā mahāvanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisinno”ti.
[¶13] Then Saccaka, together with a large group of Licchavis, went to the Buddha in the Great Wood, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Before sitting down to one side, some of the Licchavīs bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.
> Pali: Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto mahatiyā licchaviparisāya saddhiṁ mahāvanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Tepi kho licchavī appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu, appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu, appekacce bhagavato santike nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu, appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶14] Then Saccaka said to the Buddha, “I’d like to ask the worthy Gotama about a certain point, if you’d take the time to answer.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “puccheyyāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ kiñcideva desaṁ, sace me bhavaṁ gotamo okāsaṁ karoti pañhassa veyyākaraṇāyā”ti.
[¶15] “Ask what you wish, Aggivessana.”
> Pali: “Puccha, aggivessana, yadākaṅkhasī”ti.
[¶16] “How does the worthy Gotama guide his disciples? And on what topics does instruction to his disciples generally proceed?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana bhavaṁ gotamo sāvake vineti, kathaṁbhāgā ca pana bhoto gotamassa sāvakesu anusāsanī bahulā pavattatī”ti?
[¶17] “This is how I guide my disciples, and my instructions to disciples generally proceed on these topics: ‘Form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are impermanent. Form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are not-self. All conditions are impermanent. All things are not-self.’ This is how I guide my disciples, and how instruction to my disciples generally proceeds.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, sāvake vinemi, evaṁbhāgā ca pana me sāvakesu anusāsanī bahulā pavattati: ‘rūpaṁ, bhikkhave, aniccaṁ, vedanā aniccā, saññā aniccā, saṅkhārā aniccā, viññāṇaṁ aniccaṁ. Rūpaṁ, bhikkhave, anattā, vedanā anattā, saññā anattā, saṅkhārā anattā, viññāṇaṁ anattā. Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe dhammā anattā’ti. Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, sāvake vinemi, evaṁbhāgā ca pana me sāvakesu anusāsanī bahulā pavattatī”ti.
[¶18] “A simile strikes me, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Upamā maṁ, bho gotama, paṭibhātī”ti.
[¶19] “Then speak as you feel inspired,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Paṭibhātu taṁ, aggivessanā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶20] “All the plants and seeds that achieve growth, increase, and maturity do so depending on the earth and grounded on the earth. All the hard work that gets done depends on the earth and is grounded on the earth.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, ye kecime bījagāmabhūtagāmā vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjanti, sabbe te pathaviṁ nissāya pathaviyaṁ patiṭṭhāya. Evamete bījagāmabhūtagāmā vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjanti. Seyyathāpi vā pana, bho gotama, ye kecime balakaraṇīyā kammantā karīyanti, sabbe te pathaviṁ nissāya pathaviyaṁ patiṭṭhāya. Evamete balakaraṇīyā kammantā karīyanti.
[¶21] In the same way, an individual person’s self is form. Established on form they brim with merit and wickedness. An individual person’s self is feeling … perception … choices … consciousness. Established on consciousness they brim with merit and wickedness.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, bho gotama, rūpattāyaṁ purisapuggalo rūpe patiṭṭhāya puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā pasavati, vedanattāyaṁ purisapuggalo vedanāyaṁ patiṭṭhāya puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā pasavati, saññattāyaṁ purisapuggalo saññāyaṁ patiṭṭhāya puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā pasavati, saṅkhārattāyaṁ purisapuggalo saṅkhāresu patiṭṭhāya puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā pasavati, viññāṇattāyaṁ purisapuggalo viññāṇe patiṭṭhāya puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā pasavatī”ti.
[¶22] “Aggivessana, are you not saying this: ‘Form is my self, feeling is my self, perception is my self, choices are my self, consciousness is my self’?”
> Pali: “Nanu tvaṁ, aggivessana, evaṁ vadesi: ‘rūpaṁ me attā, vedanā me attā, saññā me attā, saṅkhārā me attā, viññāṇaṁ me attā’”ti?
[¶23] “Indeed, worthy Gotama, that is what I am saying. And this big crowd agrees with me!”
> Pali: “Ahañhi, bho gotama, evaṁ vadāmi: ‘rūpaṁ me attā, vedanā me attā, saññā me attā, saṅkhārā me attā, viññāṇaṁ me attā’ti, ayañca mahatī janatā”ti.
[¶24] “What has this big crowd to do with you? Please just unpack your own statement.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi te, aggivessana, mahatī janatā karissati? Iṅgha tvaṁ, aggivessana, sakaññeva vādaṁ nibbeṭhehī”ti.
[¶25] “Then, worthy Gotama, what I am saying is this: ‘Form is my self, feeling is my self, perception is my self, choices are my self, consciousness is my self’.”
> Pali: “Ahañhi, bho gotama, evaṁ vadāmi: ‘rūpaṁ me attā, vedanā me attā, saññā me attā, saṅkhārā me attā, viññāṇaṁ me attā’”ti.
[¶26] “Well then, Aggivessana, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, Aggivessana? Consider an anointed aristocratic king such as Pasenadi of Kosala or Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha. Would they have the power in their own realm to execute those who have incurred execution, fine those who have incurred fines, or banish those who have incurred banishment?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, aggivessana, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi, yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, vatteyya rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa sakasmiṁ vijite vaso— ghātetāyaṁ vā ghātetuṁ, jāpetāyaṁ vā jāpetuṁ, pabbājetāyaṁ vā pabbājetuṁ, seyyathāpi rañño pasenadissa kosalassa, seyyathāpi vā pana rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassā”ti?
[¶27] “An anointed king would have such power, worthy Gotama. Even federations such as the Vajjis and Mallas have such power in their own realm. So of course an anointed king such as Pasenadi or Ajātasattu would wield such power, as is their right.”
> Pali: “Vatteyya, bho gotama, rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa sakasmiṁ vijite vaso— ghātetāyaṁ vā ghātetuṁ, jāpetāyaṁ vā jāpetuṁ, pabbājetāyaṁ vā pabbājetuṁ, seyyathāpi rañño pasenadissa kosalassa, seyyathāpi vā pana rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa. Imesampi hi, bho gotama, saṅghānaṁ gaṇānaṁ— Seyyathidaṁ—vajjīnaṁ mallānaṁ— vattati sakasmiṁ vijite vaso— ghātetāyaṁ vā ghātetuṁ, jāpetāyaṁ vā jāpetuṁ, pabbājetāyaṁ vā pabbājetuṁ. Kiṁ pana rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa, seyyathāpi rañño pasenadissa kosalassa, seyyathāpi vā pana rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa? Vatteyya, bho gotama, vattituñca marahatī”ti.
[¶28] “What do you think, Aggivessana? When you say, ‘Form is my self,’ do you have power over that form to say: ‘May my form be like this! May it not be like that’?” When he said this, Saccaka kept silent. The Buddha asked the question a second time, but Saccaka still kept silent. So the Buddha said to Saccaka, “Answer now, Aggivessana. Now is not the time for silence. If someone fails to answer a legitimate question when asked three times by the Buddha, their head explodes into seven pieces there and then.”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘rūpaṁ me attā’ti, vattati te tasmiṁ rūpe vaso— evaṁ me rūpaṁ hotu, evaṁ me rūpaṁ mā ahosī”ti? Evaṁ vutte, saccako nigaṇṭhaputto tuṇhī ahosi. Dutiyampi kho bhagavā saccakaṁ nigaṇṭhaputtaṁ etadavoca: “taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘rūpaṁ me attā’ti, vattati te tasmiṁ rūpe vaso— evaṁ me rūpaṁ hotu, evaṁ me rūpaṁ mā ahosī”ti? Dutiyampi kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto tuṇhī ahosi. Atha kho bhagavā saccakaṁ nigaṇṭhaputtaṁ etadavoca: “byākarohi dāni, aggivessana, na dāni te tuṇhībhāvassa kālo. Yo koci, aggivessana tathāgatena yāvatatiyaṁ sahadhammikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho na byākaroti, etthevassa sattadhā muddhā phalatī”ti.
[¶29] Now at that time the spirit Vajirapāṇī, taking up a burning iron thunderbolt, blazing and glowing, stood in the air above Saccaka, thinking, “If this Saccaka doesn’t answer when asked a third time, I’ll blow his head into seven pieces there and then!” And both the Buddha and Saccaka could see Vajirapāṇī.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena vajirapāṇi yakkho āyasaṁ vajiraṁ ādāya ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa uparivehāsaṁ ṭhito hoti: “sacāyaṁ saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavatā yāvatatiyaṁ sahadhammikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho na byākarissati etthevassa sattadhā muddhaṁ phālessāmī”ti. Taṁ kho pana vajirapāṇiṁ yakkhaṁ bhagavā ceva passati saccako ca nigaṇṭhaputto.
[¶30] Saccaka was terrified, shocked, and awestruck. Looking to the Buddha for shelter, asylum, and refuge, he said, “Ask me, worthy Gotama. I will answer.”
> Pali: Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhīto saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto bhagavantaṁyeva tāṇaṁ gavesī bhagavantaṁyeva leṇaṁ gavesī bhagavantaṁyeva saraṇaṁ gavesī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “pucchatu maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo, byākarissāmī”ti.
[¶31] “What do you think, Aggivessana? When you say, ‘Form is my self,’ do you have power over that form to say: ‘May my form be like this! May it not be like that’?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘rūpaṁ me attā’ti, vattati te tasmiṁ rūpe vaso— evaṁ me rūpaṁ hotu, evaṁ me rūpaṁ mā ahosī”ti?
[¶32] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶33] “Think about it, Aggivessana! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. What do you think, Aggivessana? When you say, ‘Feeling is my self,’ do you have power over that feeling to say: ‘May my feeling be like this! May it not be like that’?”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, aggivessana; manasi karitvā kho, aggivessana, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘vedanā me attā’ti, vattati te tissaṁ vedanāyaṁ vaso— evaṁ me vedanā hotu, evaṁ me vedanā mā ahosī”ti?
[¶34] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶35] “Think about it, Aggivessana! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. What do you think, Aggivessana? When you say, ‘Perception is my self,’ do you have power over that perception to say: ‘May my perception be like this! May it not be like that’?”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, aggivessana; manasi karitvā kho, aggivessana, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘saññā me attā’ti, vattati te tissaṁ saññāyaṁ vaso— evaṁ me saññā hotu, evaṁ me saññā mā ahosī”ti?
[¶36] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶37] “Think about it, Aggivessana! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. What do you think, Aggivessana? When you say, ‘Choices are my self,’ do you have power over those choices to say: ‘May my choices be like this! May they not be like that’?”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, aggivessana; manasi karitvā kho, aggivessana, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘saṅkhārā me attā’ti, vattati te tesu saṅkhāresu vaso— evaṁ me saṅkhārā hontu, evaṁ me saṅkhārā mā ahesun”ti?
[¶38] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶39] “Think about it, Aggivessana! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. What do you think, Aggivessana? When you say, ‘Consciousness is my self,’ do you have power over that consciousness to say: ‘May my consciousness be like this! May it not be like that’?”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, aggivessana; manasi karitvā kho, aggivessana, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘viññāṇaṁ me attā’ti, vattati te tasmiṁ viññāṇe vaso— evaṁ me viññāṇaṁ hotu, evaṁ me viññāṇaṁ mā ahosī”ti?
[¶40] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶41] “Think about it, Aggivessana! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. What do you think, Aggivessana? Is form permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, aggivessana; manasi karitvā kho, aggivessana, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, rūpaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶42] “Impermanent.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶43] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶44] “Suffering.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶45] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶46] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶47] “What do you think, Aggivessana? Is feeling … perception … choices … consciousness permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, vedanā …pe… saññā …pe… saṅkhārā …pe… taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, viññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶48] “Impermanent.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶49] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶50] “Suffering.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶51] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶52] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶53] “What do you think, Aggivessana? Consider someone who resorts, draws near, and clings to suffering, regarding it thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self.’ Would they be able to completely understand suffering themselves, or live having wiped out suffering?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, yo nu kho dukkhaṁ allīno dukkhaṁ upagato dukkhaṁ ajjhosito, dukkhaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati, api nu kho so sāmaṁ vā dukkhaṁ parijāneyya, dukkhaṁ vā parikkhepetvā vihareyyā”ti?
[¶54] “How could they? No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi siyā, bho gotama? No hidaṁ, bho gotamā”ti.
[¶55] “What do you think, Aggivessana? This being so, aren’t you someone who resorts, draws near, and clings to suffering, regarding it thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, nanu tvaṁ evaṁ sante dukkhaṁ allīno dukkhaṁ upagato dukkhaṁ ajjhosito, dukkhaṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassasī”ti?
[¶56] “How could I not? Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, bho gotama? Evametaṁ, bho gotamā”ti.
[¶57] “Suppose, Aggivessana, there was a person in need of heartwood. Wandering in search of heartwood, they’d take a sharp axe and enter a forest. There they’d see a big banana trunk, straight and young and grown unskewed. They’d cut it down at the base, cut off the top, and unroll the coiled sheaths. But they wouldn’t even find sapwood, much less heartwood.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno tiṇhaṁ kuṭhāriṁ ādāya vanaṁ paviseyya. So tattha passeyya mahantaṁ kadalikkhandhaṁ ujuṁ navaṁ akukkukajātaṁ. Tamenaṁ mūle chindeyya, mūle chetvā agge chindeyya, agge chetvā pattavaṭṭiṁ vinibbhujeyya. So tattha pattavaṭṭiṁ vinibbhujanto pheggumpi nādhigaccheyya, kuto sāraṁ?
[¶58] In the same way, when pursued, pressed, and grilled by me on your own doctrine, you turn out to be vacuous, hollow, and mistaken. But it was you who stated before the assembly of Vesālī: ‘I don’t see any ascetic or brahmin who would not shake and rock and tremble, sweating from the armpits, were I to take them on in debate—not a leader of an order or a community, or the tutor of a community, and not even one who claims to be a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha. Even an insentient post would shake and rock and tremble were I to take it on in debate. How much more then a human being!’ But sweat is pouring from your forehead; it’s soaked through your robe and drips on the ground. While I now have no sweat on my body.” So the Buddha revealed his golden body to the assembly. When this was said, Saccaka sat silent, dismayed, shoulders drooping, downcast, depressed, with nothing to say.
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, aggivessana, mayā sakasmiṁ vāde samanuyuñjiyamāno samanugāhiyamāno samanubhāsiyamāno ritto tuccho aparaddho. Bhāsitā kho pana te esā, aggivessana, vesāliyaṁ parisati vācā: ‘nāhaṁ taṁ passāmi samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā, saṅghiṁ gaṇiṁ gaṇācariyaṁ, api arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ paṭijānamānaṁ, yo mayā vādena vādaṁ samāraddho na saṅkampeyya na sampakampeyya na sampavedheyya, yassa na kacchehi sedā mucceyyuṁ. Thūṇaṁ cepāhaṁ acetanaṁ vādena vādaṁ samārabheyyaṁ sāpi mayā vādena vādaṁ samāraddhā saṅkampeyya sampakampeyya sampavedheyya. Ko pana vādo manussabhūtassā’ti? Tuyhaṁ kho pana, aggivessana, appekaccāni sedaphusitāni nalāṭā muttāni, uttarāsaṅgaṁ vinibhinditvā bhūmiyaṁ patiṭṭhitāni. Mayhaṁ kho pana, aggivessana, natthi etarahi kāyasmiṁ sedo”ti. Iti bhagavā tasmiṁ parisati suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṁ kāyaṁ vivari. Evaṁ vutte, saccako nigaṇṭhaputto tuṇhībhūto maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho pajjhāyanto appaṭibhāno nisīdi.
[¶59] Knowing this, the Licchavi Dummukha said to the Buddha, “A simile strikes me, Blessed One.”
> Pali: Atha kho dummukho licchaviputto saccakaṁ nigaṇṭhaputtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ maṅkubhūtaṁ pattakkhandhaṁ adhomukhaṁ pajjhāyantaṁ appaṭibhānaṁ viditvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “upamā maṁ, bhagavā, paṭibhātī”ti.
[¶60] “Then speak as you feel inspired,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Paṭibhātu taṁ, dummukhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶61] “Sir, suppose there was a lotus pond not far from a town or village, and a crab lived there. Then several boys or girls would leave the town or village and go to the pond, where they’d pull out the crab and put it on solid ground. Whenever that crab extended a claw, those boys or girls would snap, crack, and break it off with a stick or a stone. And when that crab’s claws had all been snapped, cracked, and broken off it wouldn’t be able to return down into that lotus pond. In the same way, sir, the Buddha has snapped, cracked, and broken off all Saccaka’s twists, ducks, and dodges. Now he can’t get near the Buddha again looking for a debate.”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhante, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre pokkharaṇī. Tatrāssa kakkaṭako. Atha kho, bhante, sambahulā kumārakā vā kumārikā vā tamhā gāmā vā nigamā vā nikkhamitvā yena sā pokkharaṇī tenupasaṅkameyyuṁ; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ pokkharaṇiṁ ogāhetvā taṁ kakkaṭakaṁ udakā uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Yaññadeva hi so, bhante, kakkaṭako aḷaṁ abhininnāmeyya taṁ tadeva te kumārakā vā kumārikā vā kaṭṭhena vā kathalena vā sañchindeyyuṁ sambhañjeyyuṁ sampalibhañjeyyuṁ. Evañhi so, bhante, kakkaṭako sabbehi aḷehi sañchinnehi sambhaggehi sampalibhaggehi abhabbo taṁ pokkharaṇiṁ puna otarituṁ, seyyathāpi pubbe. Evameva kho, bhante, yāni saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa visūkāyitāni visevitāni vipphanditāni tānipi sabbāni bhagavatā sañchinnāni sambhaggāni sampalibhaggāni; abhabbo ca dāni, bhante, saccako nigaṇṭhaputto puna bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamituṁ yadidaṁ vādādhippāyo”ti.
[¶62] But Saccaka said to him, “Hold on, Dummukha, hold on! I wasn’t talking with you, I was talking with the worthy Gotama.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, saccako nigaṇṭhaputto dummukhaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavoca: “āgamehi tvaṁ, dummukha, āgamehi tvaṁ, dummukha, (…) na mayaṁ tayā saddhiṁ mantema, idha mayaṁ bhotā gotamena saddhiṁ mantema.
[¶63] Worthy Gotama, leave aside that statement I made—as did various other ascetics and brahmins— it was, like, just a bit of nonsense. How do you define a disciple of the worthy Gotama who follows instructions and responds to advice; who has gone beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, gained assurance, and is independent of others in the Teacher’s instructions?”
> Pali: Tiṭṭhatesā, bho gotama, amhākañceva aññesañca puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ vācā. Vilāpaṁ vilapitaṁ maññe. Kittāvatā ca nu kho bhoto gotamassa sāvako sāsanakaro hoti ovādapatikaro tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane viharatī”ti?
[¶64] “It’s when one of my disciples truly sees any kind of form at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all form—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ They truly see any kind of feeling … perception … choices … consciousness at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all consciousness—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ That’s how to define one of my disciples who follows instructions and responds to advice; who has gone beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, gained assurance, and is independent of others in the Teacher’s instructions.”
> Pali: “Idha, aggivessana, mama sāvako yaṁ kiñci rūpaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā, sabbaṁ rūpaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passati; yā kāci vedanā …pe… yā kāci saññā …pe… ye keci saṅkhārā …pe… yaṁ kiñci viññāṇaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā, yaṁ dūre santike vā, sabbaṁ viññāṇaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passati. Ettāvatā kho, aggivessana, mama sāvako sāsanakaro hoti ovādapatikaro tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane viharatī”ti.
[¶65] “But how do you define a mendicant who is a perfected one, with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bho gotama, bhikkhu arahaṁ hoti khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto”ti?
[¶66] “It’s when a mendicant truly sees any kind of form at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all form—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ And having seen this with right understanding they’re freed by not grasping. They truly see any kind of feeling … perception … choices … consciousness at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all consciousness—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ And having seen this with right understanding they’re freed by not grasping. That’s how to define a mendicant who is a perfected one, with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment.
> Pali: “Idha, aggivessana, bhikkhu yaṁ kiñci rūpaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā sabbaṁ rūpaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā anupādā vimutto hoti; yā kāci vedanā …pe… yā kāci saññā …pe… ye keci saṅkhārā …pe… yaṁ kiñci viññāṇaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā sabbaṁ viññāṇaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā anupādā vimutto hoti. Ettāvatā kho, aggivessana, bhikkhu arahaṁ hoti khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto.
[¶67] A mendicant whose mind is freed like this has three unsurpassable qualities: unsurpassable seeing, practice, and freedom. They honor, respect, esteem, and venerate only the Realized One: ‘The Blessed One is awakened, tamed, serene, crossed over, and quenched. And he teaches Dhamma for awakening, self-control, serenity, crossing over, and extinguishment.’”
> Pali: Evaṁ vimuttacitto kho, aggivessana, bhikkhu tīhi anuttariyehi samannāgato hoti— dassanānuttariyena, paṭipadānuttariyena, vimuttānuttariyena. Evaṁ vimuttacitto kho, aggivessana, bhikkhu tathāgataññeva sakkaroti garuṁ karoti māneti pūjeti— buddho so bhagavā bodhāya dhammaṁ deseti, danto so bhagavā damathāya dhammaṁ deseti, santo so bhagavā samathāya dhammaṁ deseti, tiṇṇo so bhagavā taraṇāya dhammaṁ deseti, parinibbuto so bhagavā parinibbānāya dhammaṁ desetī”ti.
[¶68] When he had spoken, Saccaka said to him, “Worthy Gotama, it was rude and impudent of me to imagine I could attack you in debate. For a person might find safety after attacking a rutting elephant, but not after attacking the worthy Gotama. A person might find safety after attacking a blazing mass of fire, but not after attacking the worthy Gotama. They might find safety after attacking a poisonous viper, but not after attacking the worthy Gotama. It was rude and impudent of me to imagine I could attack you in debate. Would the worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mayameva, bho gotama, dhaṁsī, mayaṁ pagabbā, ye mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ āsādetabbaṁ amaññimha. Siyā hi, bho gotama, hatthiṁ pabhinnaṁ āsajja purisassa sotthibhāvo, na tveva bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ āsajja siyā purisassa sotthibhāvo. Siyā hi, bho gotama, pajjalitaṁ aggikkhandhaṁ āsajja purisassa sotthibhāvo, na tveva bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ āsajja siyā purisassa sotthibhāvo. Siyā hi, bho gotama, āsīvisaṁ ghoravisaṁ āsajja purisassa sotthibhāvo, na tveva bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ āsajja siyā purisassa sotthibhāvo. Mayameva, bho gotama, dhaṁsī, mayaṁ pagabbā, ye mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ āsādetabbaṁ amaññimha. Adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶69] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Saccaka addressed those Licchavis, “Listen, gentlemen. I have invited the ascetic Gotama together with the Saṅgha of mendicants for tomorrow’s meal. You may all bring me what you think is suitable.”
> Pali: Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā te licchavī āmantesi: “suṇantu me bhonto licchavī, samaṇo me gotamo nimantito svātanāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena. Tena me abhihareyyātha yamassa patirūpaṁ maññeyyāthā”ti.
[¶70] Then, when the night had passed, those Licchavis presented Saccaka with an offering of five hundred servings of food. And Saccaka had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own park. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho te licchavī tassā rattiyā accayena saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa pañcamattāni thālipākasatāni bhattābhihāraṁ abhihariṁsu. Atha kho nigaṇṭhaputto sake ārāme paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶71] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to Saccaka’s park, where he sat down on the seat spread out together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Then Saccaka served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Saccaka took a low seat and sat to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa ārāmo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena. Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi. Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶72] Then Saccaka said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, may the merit and the growth of merit in this gift be for the happiness of the donors.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yamidaṁ, bho gotama, dāne puññañca puññamahī ca taṁ dāyakānaṁ sukhāya hotū”ti.
[¶73] “Aggivessana, whatever comes from giving to a recipient of a religious donation such as yourself—who is not free of greed, hate, and delusion—will accrue to the donors. Whatever comes from giving to a recipient of a religious donation such as myself—who is free of greed, hate, and delusion—will accrue to you.”
> Pali: “Yaṁ kho, aggivessana, tādisaṁ dakkhiṇeyyaṁ āgamma avītarāgaṁ avītadosaṁ avītamohaṁ, taṁ dāyakānaṁ bhavissati. Yaṁ kho, aggivessana, mādisaṁ dakkhiṇeyyaṁ āgamma vītarāgaṁ vītadosaṁ vītamohaṁ, taṁ tuyhaṁ bhavissatī”ti.
[¶74] > Pali: Cūḷasaccakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 38. MN 36 · The Longer Discourse With Saccaka · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/38/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/38/#p-N
[¶0] MN 36 · The Longer Discourse With Saccaka
> Pali: MN 36 · Mahāsaccakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ.
[¶2] Now at that time in the morning the Buddha, being properly dressed, took his bowl and robe, wishing to enter Vesālī for alms.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ sunivattho hoti pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pavisitukāmo.
[¶3] Then as Saccaka, the son of Jain parents, was going for a walk he approached the hall with the peaked roof in the Great Wood. Venerable Ānanda saw him coming off in the distance, and said to the Buddha, “Sir, Saccaka, the son of Jain parents, is coming. He’s a controversialist who pretends to be astute and is deemed holy by many people. He wants to discredit the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha. Please, sir, sit for an hour out of sympathy.” The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out.
> Pali: Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho āyasmā ānando saccakaṁ nigaṇṭhaputtaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, saccako nigaṇṭhaputto āgacchati bhassappavādako paṇḍitavādo sādhusammato bahujanassa. Eso kho, bhante, avaṇṇakāmo buddhassa, avaṇṇakāmo dhammassa, avaṇṇakāmo saṅghassa. Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā muhuttaṁ nisīdatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane.
[¶4] Then Saccaka went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha,
> Pali: Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶5] “Worthy Gotama, there are some ascetics and brahmins who live committed to the practice of developing physical endurance, without developing the mind. They suffer painful physical feelings. This happened to someone once. Their thighs became paralyzed, their heart burst, hot blood gushed from their mouth, and they went mad and lost their mind. Their mind was subject to the body, and the body had power over it. Why is that? Because their mind was not developed. There are some ascetics and brahmins who live committed to the practice of developing the mind, without developing physical endurance. They suffer painful mental feelings. This happened to someone once. Their thighs became paralyzed, their heart burst, hot blood gushed from their mouth, and they went mad and lost their mind. Their body was subject to the mind, and the mind had power over it. Why is that? Because their physical endurance was not developed. It occurs to me that The worthy Gotama’s disciples must live committed to the practice of developing the mind, without developing physical endurance.”
> Pali: “Santi, bho gotama, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā kāyabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, no cittabhāvanaṁ. Phusanti hi te, bho gotama, sārīrikaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bho gotama, sārīrikāya dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭhassa sato ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissati, hadayampi nāma phalissati, uṇhampi lohitaṁ mukhato uggamissati, ummādampi pāpuṇissati cittakkhepaṁ. Tassa kho etaṁ, bho gotama, kāyanvayaṁ cittaṁ hoti, kāyassa vasena vattati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Abhāvitattā cittassa. Santi pana, bho gotama, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā cittabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, no kāyabhāvanaṁ. Phusanti hi te, bho gotama, cetasikaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bho gotama, cetasikāya dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭhassa sato ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissati, hadayampi nāma phalissati, uṇhampi lohitaṁ mukhato uggamissati, ummādampi pāpuṇissati cittakkhepaṁ. Tassa kho eso, bho gotama, cittanvayo kāyo hoti, cittassa vasena vattati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Abhāvitattā kāyassa. Tassa mayhaṁ, bho gotama, evaṁ hoti: ‘addhā bhoto gotamassa sāvakā cittabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, no kāyabhāvanan’”ti.
[¶6] “But Aggivessana, what have you heard about the development of physical endurance?”
> Pali: “Kinti pana te, aggivessana, kāyabhāvanā sutā”ti?
[¶7] “Take, for example, Nanda Vaccha, Kisa Saṅkicca, and the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla. They go naked, ignoring conventions. They lick their hands, and don’t come or wait when called. They don’t consent to food brought to them, or food prepared on their behalf, or an invitation for a meal. They don’t receive anything from a pot or bowl; or from someone who keeps sheep, or who has a weapon or a shovel in their home; or where a couple is eating; or where there is a woman who is pregnant, breastfeeding, or who lives with a man; or where there’s a hound waiting or flies buzzing. They accept no fish or meat or beer or wine, and drink no fermented gruel. They go to just one house for alms, taking just one mouthful, or two houses and two mouthfuls, up to seven houses and seven mouthfuls. They feed on one saucer a day, two saucers a day, up to seven saucers a day. They eat once a day, once every second day, up to once a week, and so on, even up to once a fortnight. They live committed to the practice of eating food at set intervals.”
> Pali: “Seyyathidaṁ— nando vaccho, kiso saṅkicco, makkhali gosālo— etehi, bho gotama, acelakā muttācārā hatthāpalekhanā naehibhaddantikā natiṭṭhabhaddantikā na abhihaṭaṁ na uddissakataṁ na nimantanaṁ sādiyanti, te na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhanti na kaḷopimukhā paṭiggaṇhanti na eḷakamantaraṁ na daṇḍamantaraṁ na musalamantaraṁ na dvinnaṁ bhuñjamānānaṁ na gabbhiniyā na pāyamānāya na purisantaragatāya na saṅkittīsu na yattha sā upaṭṭhito hoti na yattha makkhikā saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī, na macchaṁ na maṁsaṁ na suraṁ na merayaṁ na thusodakaṁ pivanti. Te ekāgārikā vā honti ekālopikā, dvāgārikā vā honti dvālopikā …pe… sattāgārikā vā honti sattālopikā. Ekissāpi dattiyā yāpenti, dvīhipi dattīhi yāpenti …pe… sattahipi dattīhi yāpenti. Ekāhikampi āhāraṁ āhārenti, dvīhikampi āhāraṁ āhārenti …pe… sattāhikampi āhāraṁ āhārenti. Iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyuttā viharantī”ti.
[¶8] “But Aggivessana, do they get by on so little?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana te, aggivessana, tāvatakeneva yāpentī”ti?
[¶9] “No, worthy Gotama. Sometimes they eat luxury fresh and cooked foods and drink a variety of luxury beverages. They gather their body’s strength, build it up, and get fat.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Appekadā, bho gotama, uḷārāni uḷārāni khādanīyāni khādanti, uḷārāni uḷārāni bhojanāni bhuñjanti, uḷārāni uḷārāni sāyanīyāni sāyanti, uḷārāni uḷārāni pānāni pivanti. Te imaṁ kāyaṁ balaṁ gāhenti nāma, brūhenti nāma, medenti nāmā”ti.
[¶10] “What they earlier gave up, they later got back. That is how there is the increase and decrease of this body. But Aggivessana, what have you heard about development of the mind?” When Saccaka was questioned by the Buddha about development of the mind, he was stumped.
> Pali: “Yaṁ kho te, aggivessana, purimaṁ pahāya pacchā upacinanti, evaṁ imassa kāyassa ācayāpacayo hoti. Kinti pana te, aggivessana, cittabhāvanā sutā”ti? Cittabhāvanāya kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavatā puṭṭho samāno na sampāyāsi.
[¶11] So the Buddha said to Saccaka, “The development of physical endurance that you have described is not the legitimate development of physical endurance in the Noble One’s training. And since you don’t even understand the development of physical endurance, how can you possibly understand the development of the mind? Still, as to how someone is undeveloped in physical endurance and mind, and how someone is developed in physical endurance and mind, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā saccakaṁ nigaṇṭhaputtaṁ etadavoca: “yāpi kho te esā, aggivessana, purimā kāyabhāvanā bhāsitā sāpi ariyassa vinaye no dhammikā kāyabhāvanā. Kāyabhāvanampi kho tvaṁ, aggivessana, na aññāsi, kuto pana tvaṁ cittabhāvanaṁ jānissasi? Api ca, aggivessana, yathā abhāvitakāyo ca hoti abhāvitacitto ca, bhāvitakāyo ca hoti bhāvitacitto ca. Taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶12] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Saccaka. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶13] “And how is someone undeveloped in physical endurance and mind? Take an unlearned ordinary person who has a pleasant feeling. When they experience a pleasant feeling they become full of lust for it. Then that pleasant feeling ceases. And when it ceases, a painful feeling arises. When they suffer painful feeling, they sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion. Because their physical endurance is undeveloped, pleasant feelings occupy the mind. And because their mind is undeveloped, painful feelings occupy the mind. Anyone whose mind is occupied by both pleasant and painful feelings like this is undeveloped both in physical endurance and in mind.
> Pali: “Kathañca, aggivessana, abhāvitakāyo ca hoti abhāvitacitto ca? Idha, aggivessana, assutavato puthujjanassa uppajjati sukhā vedanā. So sukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno sukhasārāgī ca hoti sukhasārāgitañca āpajjati. Tassa sā sukhā vedanā nirujjhati. Sukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati dukkhā vedanā. So dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati. Tassa kho esā, aggivessana, uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati abhāvitattā kāyassa, uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati abhāvitattā cittassa. Yassa kassaci, aggivessana, evaṁ ubhatopakkhaṁ uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati abhāvitattā kāyassa, uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati abhāvitattā cittassa, evaṁ kho, aggivessana, abhāvitakāyo ca hoti abhāvitacitto ca.
[¶14] And how is someone developed in physical endurance and mind? Take a learned noble disciple who has a pleasant feeling. When they experience a pleasant feeling they don’t become full of lust for it. Then that pleasant feeling ceases. And when it ceases, painful feeling arises. When they suffer painful feelings they don’t sorrow or wail or lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion. Because their physical endurance is developed, pleasant feelings don’t occupy the mind. And because their mind is developed, painful feelings don’t occupy the mind. Anyone whose mind is not occupied by both pleasant and painful feelings like this is developed both in physical endurance and in mind.”
> Pali: Kathañca, aggivessana, bhāvitakāyo ca hoti bhāvitacitto ca? Idha, aggivessana, sutavato ariyasāvakassa uppajjati sukhā vedanā. So sukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno na sukhasārāgī ca hoti, na sukhasārāgitañca āpajjati. Tassa sā sukhā vedanā nirujjhati. Sukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati dukkhā vedanā. So dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno na socati na kilamati na paridevati na urattāḷiṁ kandati na sammohaṁ āpajjati. Tassa kho esā, aggivessana, uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati bhāvitattā kāyassa, uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati bhāvitattā cittassa. Yassa kassaci, aggivessana, evaṁ ubhatopakkhaṁ uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati bhāvitattā kāyassa, uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati bhāvitattā cittassa. Evaṁ kho, aggivessana, bhāvitakāyo ca hoti bhāvitacitto cā”ti.
[¶15] “I am quite confident that the worthy Gotama is developed in physical endurance and in mind.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ bhoto gotamassa. Bhavañhi gotamo bhāvitakāyo ca hoti bhāvitacitto cā”ti.
[¶16] “Your words are clearly invasive and intrusive, Aggivessana. Nevertheless, I will answer you. Ever since I shaved off my hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness, it has not been possible for any pleasant or painful feeling to occupy my mind.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho te ayaṁ, aggivessana, āsajja upanīya vācā bhāsitā, api ca te ahaṁ byākarissāmi. Yato kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito, taṁ vata me uppannā vā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, uppannā vā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī”ti.
[¶17] “Worthy Gotama mustn’t have experienced the kind of pleasant or painful feelings that would occupy the mind.”
> Pali: “Na hi nūna bhoto gotamassa uppajjati tathārūpā sukhā vedanā yathārūpā uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭheyya; na hi nūna bhoto gotamassa uppajjati tathārūpā dukkhā vedanā yathārūpā uppannā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭheyyā”ti.
[¶18] “How could I not, Aggivessana? Before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I thought: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’
> Pali: “Kiñhi no siyā, aggivessana? Idha me, aggivessana, pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato etadahosi: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajāpatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti.
[¶19] Some time later, while still with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life—though my mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces—I shaved off my hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, aparena samayena daharova samāno, susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā, akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajiṁ.
[¶20] Once I had gone forth I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso kālāma, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶21] Āḷāra Kālāma replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aggivessana, āḷāro kālāmo maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā, tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶22] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ñāṇavādañca vadāmi theravādañca, ‘jānāmi passāmī’ti ca paṭijānāmi, ahañceva aññe ca.
[¶23] Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Āḷāra Kālāma declares: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditates knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti, addhā āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ viharatī’ti.
[¶24] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, to what extent do you say you’ve realized this teaching with your own insight?’ When I said this, he declared the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, aggivessana, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, aggivessana, āḷāro kālāmo ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶25] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Āḷāra Kālāma who has faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Āḷāra Kālāma says he has realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi vīriyaṁ, mayhampatthi vīriyaṁ; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi sati, mayhampatthi sati; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi samādhi, mayhampatthi samādhi; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi paññā, mayhampatthi paññā; yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ āḷāro kālāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶26] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, is it up to this point that you realized this teaching with your own insight, and declare having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, aggivessana, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘ettāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶27] ‘I have, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemī’ti.
[¶28] ‘I too have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶29] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it. So the teaching that I know, you know, and the teaching you know, I know. I am like you and you are like me. Come now, reverend! We should both lead this community together.’ And that is how my tutor Āḷāra Kālāma placed me, his pupil, on the same position as him, and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi tamahaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi tamahaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi. Iti yādiso ahaṁ tādiso tuvaṁ, yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso ahaṁ. Ehi dāni, āvuso, ubhova santā imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharāmā’ti. Iti kho, aggivessana, āḷāro kālāmo ācariyo me samāno attano antevāsiṁ maṁ samānaṁ attanā samasamaṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶30] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of nothingness.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva ākiñcaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶31] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶32] Uddaka replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aggivessana, udako rāmaputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā, tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶33] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ñāṇavādañca vadāmi theravādañca, ‘jānāmi passāmī’ti ca paṭijānāmi, ahañceva aññe ca.
[¶34] Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Rāma declared: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditated knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesi. Addhā rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ vihāsī’ti.
[¶35] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, to what extent did Rāma say he’d realized this teaching with his own insight?’ When I said this, Uddaka son of Rāma declared the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, aggivessana, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no āvuso rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, aggivessana, udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶36] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Rāma who had faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Rāma said he had realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmasseva ahosi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho rāmasseva ahosi vīriyaṁ, mayhampatthi vīriyaṁ; na kho rāmasseva ahosi sati, mayhampatthi sati; na kho rāmasseva ahosi samādhi, mayhampatthi samādhi; na kho rāmasseva ahosi paññā, mayhampatthi paññā; yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesi tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶37] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, had Rāma realized this teaching with his own insight up to this point, and declared having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, aggivessana, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘ettāvatā no āvuso rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶38] ‘He had, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho āvuso rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti.
[¶39] ‘I too have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶40] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it. So the teaching that Rāma directly knew, you know, and the teaching you know, Rāma directly knew. Rāma was like you and you are like Rāma. Come now, reverend! You should lead this community.’ And that is how my spiritual companion Uddaka son of Rāma placed me in the position of a tutor and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi, taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi, taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi. Iti yādiso rāmo ahosi tādiso tuvaṁ; yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso rāmo ahosi. Ehi dāni, āvuso, tuvaṁ imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharā’ti. Iti kho, aggivessana, udako rāmaputto sabrahmacārī me samāno ācariyaṭṭhāne ca maṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶41] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶42] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. Traveling stage by stage in the Magadhan lands, I arrived at the town of Senā in Uruvelā. There I saw a delightful park, a lovely grove with a flowing river that was clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby was a village to resort to for alms. Then it occurred to me, ‘This park is truly delightful, a lovely grove with a flowing river that’s clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby there’s a village to resort to for alms. This is good enough for striving for a gentleman wanting to strive.’ So I sat down right there, thinking: ‘This is good enough for striving.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno magadhesu anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena uruvelā senānigamo tadavasariṁ. Tatthaddasaṁ ramaṇīyaṁ bhūmibhāgaṁ, pāsādikañca vanasaṇḍaṁ, nadiñca sandantiṁ setakaṁ supatitthaṁ ramaṇīyaṁ, samantā ca gocaragāmaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘ramaṇīyo vata bho bhūmibhāgo, pāsādiko ca vanasaṇḍo, nadī ca sandati setakā supatitthā ramaṇīyā, samantā ca gocaragāmo. Alaṁ vatidaṁ kulaputtassa padhānatthikassa padhānāyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, tattheva nisīdiṁ ‘alamidaṁ padhānāyā’ti.
[¶43] And then these three similes, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, occurred to me. Suppose there was a green, sappy log, and it was lying in water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Aggivessana? By drilling the stick against that green, sappy log lying in water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Apissumaṁ, aggivessana, tisso upamā paṭibhaṁsu anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ udake nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, api nu so puriso amuṁ allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ, udake nikkhittaṁ, uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶44] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because it’s a green, sappy log, and it’s lying in the water. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Aduñhi, bho gotama, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ, tañca pana udake nikkhittaṁ. Yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶45] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who don’t live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. They haven’t internally given up or stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are incapable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the first example that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, aggivessana, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi avūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho, so ca ajjhattaṁ na suppahīno hoti, na suppaṭippassaddho, opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, aggivessana, paṭhamā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶46] Then a second example occurred to me. Suppose there was a green, sappy log, and it was lying on dry land far from the water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Aggivessana? By drilling the stick against that green, sappy log on dry land far from water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Aparāpi kho maṁ, aggivessana, dutiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, api nu so puriso amuṁ allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ, uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶47] “No, worthy Gotama. Why not? Because it’s still a green, sappy log, despite the fact that it’s lying on dry land far from water. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Aduñhi, bho gotama, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ, kiñcāpi ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ. Yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶48] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. But they haven’t internally given up or stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are incapable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the second example that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, aggivessana, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi vūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho so ca ajjhattaṁ na suppahīno hoti, na suppaṭippassaddho, opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, aggivessana, dutiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā
[¶49] Then a third example occurred to me. Suppose there was a dried up, withered log, and it was lying on dry land far from the water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Aggivessana? By drilling the stick against that dried up, withered log on dry land far from water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Aparāpi kho maṁ, aggivessana, tatiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, api nu so puriso amuṁ sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ, uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶50] “Yes, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because it’s a dried up, withered log, and it’s lying on dry land far from water.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Aduñhi, bho gotama, sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ, tañca pana ārakā udakā thale nikkhittan”ti.
[¶51] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. And they have internally given up and stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are capable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the third example that occurred to me. These are the three similes, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, aggivessana, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi vūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho, so ca ajjhattaṁ suppahīno hoti suppaṭippassaddho, opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, bhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, bhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, aggivessana, tatiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Imā kho maṁ, aggivessana, tisso upamā paṭibhaṁsu anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
## 39. MN 36 · The Longer Discourse With Saccaka · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/39/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/39/#p-N
[¶0] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I, with teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of my mouth, squeeze, squash, and scorch mind with mind?’ So that’s what I did, until sweat ran from my armpits. It was like when a strong man grabs a weaker man by the head or throat or shoulder and squeezes, squashes, and crushes them. In the same way, with teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of my mouth, I squeezed, squashed, and crushed mind with mind until sweat ran from my armpits. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving. But even such painful feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ dantebhi dantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇheyyaṁ abhinippīḷeyyaṁ abhisantāpeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, dantebhi dantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhāmi abhinippīḷemi abhisantāpemi. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, dantebhi dantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato kacchehi sedā muccanti. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, balavā puriso dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ sīse vā gahetvā khandhe vā gahetvā abhiniggaṇheyya abhinippīḷeyya abhisantāpeyya; evameva kho me, aggivessana, dantebhi dantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato kacchehi sedā muccanti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, aggivessana, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶1] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I practice the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose. But then winds came out my ears making a loud noise, like the puffing of a blacksmith’s bellows. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving. But even such painful feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu kaṇṇasotehi vātānaṁ nikkhamantānaṁ adhimatto saddo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya adhimatto saddo hoti; evameva kho me, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu kaṇṇasotehi vātānaṁ nikkhamantānaṁ adhimatto saddo hoti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, aggivessana, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā. Sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶2] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then strong winds ground my head, like a strong man was drilling into my head with a sharp point. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving. But even such painful feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, balavā puriso tiṇhena sikharena muddhani abhimattheyya; evameva kho me, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, aggivessana, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā. Sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶3] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then I got a severe headache, like a strong man was tightening a strong leather strap around my head. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving. But even such painful feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā honti. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, balavā puriso daḷhena varattakkhaṇḍena sīse sīsaveṭhaṁ dadeyya; evameva kho me, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā honti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, aggivessana, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā. Sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶4] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then strong winds carved up my belly, like a deft butcher or their apprentice was slicing my belly open with a sharp meat cleaver. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving. But even such painful feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā tiṇhena govikantanena kucchiṁ parikanteyya; evameva kho me, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, aggivessana, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā. Sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶5] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then there was a severe burning in my body, like two strong men grabbing a weaker man by the arms to burn and scorch him on a pit of glowing coals. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving. But even such painful feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho hoti. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, dve balavanto purisā dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuyā santāpeyyuṁ samparitāpeyyuṁ; evameva kho me, aggivessana, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho hoti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, aggivessana, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā. Sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā dukkhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶6] Then some deities saw me and said, ‘The ascetic Gotama is dead.’ Others said, ‘He’s not dead, but he’s dying.’ Others said, ‘He’s not dead or dying. The ascetic Gotama is a perfected one, for that is how the perfected ones live.’
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, aggivessana, devatā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekaccā devatā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo, api ca kālaṁ karotī’ti. Ekaccā devatā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo, napi kālaṁ karoti, arahaṁ samaṇo gotamo, vihāro tveva so arahato evarūpo hotī’ti.
[¶7] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I practice completely cutting off food?’ But deities came to me and said, ‘Good fellow, don’t practice totally cutting off food. If you do, we’ll infuse heavenly nectar into your pores and you will live on that.’ Then it occurred to me, ‘If I claim to be completely fasting while these deities are infusing heavenly nectar in my pores, that would be a lie on my part.’ So I refused those deities, saying, ‘There’s no need.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajjeyyan’ti. Atha kho maṁ, aggivessana, devatā upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘mā kho tvaṁ, mārisa, sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajji. Sace kho tvaṁ, mārisa, sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajjissasi, tassa te mayaṁ dibbaṁ ojaṁ lomakūpehi ajjhohāressāma, tāya tvaṁ yāpessasī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘ahañceva kho pana sabbaso ajajjitaṁ paṭijāneyyaṁ, imā ca me devatā dibbaṁ ojaṁ lomakūpehi ajjhohāreyyuṁ, tāya cāhaṁ yāpeyyaṁ, taṁ mamassa musā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, tā devatā paccācikkhāmi, ‘halan’ti vadāmi.
[¶8] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I just take a little bit of food each time, a handful of broth made from mung beans, horse gram, chickpeas, or green gram?’ So that’s what I did, until my body became severely emaciated. Due to eating so little, my major and minor limbs became like the joints of an eighty-year-old or a dying man, my bottom became like a camel’s hoof, my vertebrae stuck out like beads on a string, and my ribs were as gaunt as the broken-down rafters on an old barn. Due to eating so little, the gleam of my eyes sank deep in their sockets, like the gleam of water sunk deep down a well. Due to eating so little, my scalp shriveled and withered like a green bitter-gourd in the wind and sun.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhāreyyaṁ, pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ, yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ, yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ, yadi vā hareṇukayūsan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ, pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ, yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ, yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ, yadi vā hareṇukayūsaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhārayato, pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ, yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ, yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ, yadi vā hareṇukayūsaṁ, adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma āsītikapabbāni vā kāḷapabbāni vā; evamevassu me aṅgapaccaṅgāni bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma oṭṭhapadaṁ; evamevassu me ānisadaṁ hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma vaṭṭanāvaḷī; evamevassu me piṭṭhikaṇṭako uṇṇatāvanato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma jarasālāya gopānasiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti; evamevassu me phāsuḷiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma gambhīre udapāne udakatārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti; evamevassu me akkhikūpesu akkhitārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma tittakālābu āmakacchinno vātātapena samphuṭito hoti sammilāto; evamevassu me sīsacchavi samphuṭitā hoti sammilātā tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶9] Due to eating so little, the skin of my belly stuck to my backbone, so that when I tried to rub the skin of my belly I grabbed my backbone, and when I tried to rub my backbone I rubbed the skin of my belly. Due to eating so little, when I tried to urinate or defecate I fell face down right there. Due to eating so little, when I tried to relieve my body by rubbing my limbs with my hands, the hair, rotted at its roots, fell out.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, udaracchaviṁ parimasissāmīti piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi, piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ parimasissāmīti udaracchaviṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi, yāvassu me, aggivessana, udaracchavi piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ allīnā hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, vaccaṁ vā muttaṁ vā karissāmīti tattheva avakujjo papatāmi tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, imameva kāyaṁ assāsento pāṇinā gattāni anumajjāmi. Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, pāṇinā gattāni anumajjato pūtimūlāni lomāni kāyasmā papatanti tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶10] Then some people saw me and said: ‘The ascetic Gotama is black.’ Some said: ‘He’s not black, he’s brown.’ Some said: ‘He’s neither black nor brown. The ascetic Gotama has dingy skin.’ That’s how far the pure, bright complexion of my skin had been ruined by taking so little food.
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, aggivessana, manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘kāḷo samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekacce manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kāḷo samaṇo gotamo, sāmo samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekacce manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kāḷo samaṇo gotamo, napi sāmo, maṅguracchavi samaṇo gotamo’ti. Yāvassu me, aggivessana, tāva parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto upahato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶11] Then it occurred to me, ‘Whatever ascetics and brahmins have experienced painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion—whether in the past, future, or present—this is as far as it goes, no-one has done more than this. But I have not achieved any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones by this severe, grueling work. Could there be another path to awakening?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci atītamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayiṁsu, etāvaparamaṁ, nayito bhiyyo. Yepi hi keci anāgatamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayissanti, etāvaparamaṁ, nayito bhiyyo. Yepi hi keci etarahi samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, etāvaparamaṁ, nayito bhiyyo. Na kho panāhaṁ imāya kaṭukāya dukkarakārikāya adhigacchāmi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ. Siyā nu kho añño maggo bodhāyā’ti?
[¶12] Then it occurred to me, ‘I recall sitting in the cool shade of a black plum tree while my father the Sakyan was off working. Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Could that be the path to awakening?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ pitu sakkassa kammante sītāya jambucchāyāya nisinno vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharitā. Siyā nu kho eso maggo bodhāyā’ti?
[¶13] Stemming from that memory came the understanding: ‘That is the path to awakening!’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, satānusāri viññāṇaṁ ahosi: ‘eseva maggo bodhāyā’ti.
[¶14] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why am I afraid of that pleasure, for it has nothing to do with sensual pleasures or unskillful qualities?’ Then it occurred to me, ‘I’m not afraid of that pleasure, for it has nothing to do with sensual pleasures or unskillful qualities.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ tassa sukhassa bhāyāmi, yaṁ taṁ sukhaṁ aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehī’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘na kho ahaṁ tassa sukhassa bhāyāmi, yaṁ taṁ sukhaṁ aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehī’ti.
[¶15] Then it occurred to me, ‘I can’t achieve that pleasure with a body so severely emaciated. Why don’t I eat some solid food, some rice and porridge?’ So I ate some solid food.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, aggivessana, etadahosi: ‘na kho taṁ sukaraṁ sukhaṁ adhigantuṁ evaṁ adhimattakasimānaṁ pattakāyena, yannūnāhaṁ oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāreyyaṁ odanakummāsan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ odanakummāsaṁ.
[¶16] Now at that time the group of five mendicants were attending on me, thinking, ‘The ascetic Gotama will tell us of any truth that he realizes.’ But when I ate some solid food, they left disappointed in me, saying, ‘The ascetic Gotama has become indulgent; he has strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence.’
> Pali: Tena kho pana maṁ, aggivessana, samayena pañca bhikkhū paccupaṭṭhitā honti: ‘yaṁ kho samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ adhigamissati, taṁ no ārocessatī’ti. Yato kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ odanakummāsaṁ, atha me te pañca bhikkhū nibbijja pakkamiṁsu: ‘bāhulliko samaṇo gotamo, padhānavibbhanto, āvatto bāhullāyā’ti.
[¶17] After eating solid food and gathering my strength, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. But even such pleasant feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāretvā, balaṁ gahetvā, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶18] As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected were stilled, I entered and remained in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. But even such pleasant feeling did not occupy my mind. And with the fading away of rapture, I entered and remained in the third absorption, where I meditated with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ But even such pleasant feeling did not occupy my mind. With the giving up of pleasure and pain, and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, I entered and remained in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. But even such pleasant feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca vihāsiṁ, sato ca sampajāno. Sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedesiṁ yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶19] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward recollection of past lives. I recollected my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
[¶20] This was the first knowledge, which I achieved in the first watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute. But even such pleasant feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, aggivessana, rattiyā paṭhame yāme paṭhamā vijjā adhigatā; avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶21] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I saw sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understood how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi …pe…
[¶22] This was the second knowledge, which I achieved in the middle watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute. But even such pleasant feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: ayaṁ kho me, aggivessana, rattiyā majjhime yāme dutiyā vijjā adhigatā; avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶23] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. I truly understood: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ I truly understood: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ. ‘Ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶24] Knowing and seeing like this, my mind was freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When it was freed, I knew it was freed.
> Pali: Tassa me evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ ahosi.
[¶25] I understood: ‘Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶26] This was the third knowledge, which I achieved in the last watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute. But even such pleasant feeling did not occupy my mind.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, aggivessana, rattiyā pacchime yāme tatiyā vijjā adhigatā; avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato. Evarūpāpi kho me, aggivessana, uppannā sukhā vedanā cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati.
[¶27] Aggivessana, I recall teaching the Dhamma to an assembly of many hundreds, and each person thought that I was teaching the Dhamma especially for them. But it should not be seen like this. The Realized One teaches others only so that they can understand. When that talk was finished, I stilled, settled, unified, and immersed my mind in samādhi internally in the same meditation subject as a basis of immersion as before, in which I regularly meditate.”
> Pali: Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, aggivessana, anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ desetā. Apissu maṁ ekameko evaṁ maññati: ‘mamevārabbha samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ desetī’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, aggivessana, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ; yāvadeva viññāpanatthāya tathāgato paresaṁ dhammaṁ deseti. So kho ahaṁ, aggivessana, tassāyeva kathāya pariyosāne, tasmiṁyeva purimasmiṁ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṁ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṁ karomi samādahāmi, yena sudaṁ niccakappaṁ viharāmī”ti.
[¶28] “I’d believe that of the worthy Gotama, just like a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha. But do you ever recall sleeping during the day?”
> Pali: “Okappaniyametaṁ bhoto gotamassa yathā taṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa. Abhijānāti kho pana bhavaṁ gotamo divā supitā”ti?
[¶29] “I do recall that in the last month of the summer, I have spread out my outer robe folded in four and lain down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware.”
> Pali: “Abhijānāmahaṁ, aggivessana, gimhānaṁ pacchime māse pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapetvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno niddaṁ okkamitā”ti.
[¶30] “Some ascetics and brahmins call that a deluded abiding.”
> Pali: “Etaṁ kho, bho gotama, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammohavihārasmiṁ vadantī”ti?
[¶31] “That’s not how to define whether someone is deluded or not. But as to how to define whether someone is deluded or not, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Na kho, aggivessana, ettāvatā sammūḷho vā hoti asammūḷho vā. Api ca, aggivessana, yathā sammūḷho ca hoti asammūḷho ca, taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶32] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Saccaka.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶33] The Buddha said this:
> Pali: Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶34] “Anyone who has not given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death is deluded, I say. For it’s not giving up the defilements that makes you deluded. Anyone who has given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death—is not deluded, I say. For it’s giving up the defilements that makes you not deluded.
> Pali: “Yassa kassaci, aggivessana, ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā appahīnā, tamahaṁ ‘sammūḷho’ti vadāmi. Āsavānañhi, aggivessana, appahānā sammūḷho hoti. Yassa kassaci, aggivessana, ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā pahīnā, tamahaṁ ‘asammūḷho’ti vadāmi. Āsavānañhi, aggivessana, pahānā asammūḷho hoti.
[¶35] The Realized One has given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. He has cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them so they are unable to arise in the future. Just as a palm tree with its crown cut off is incapable of further growth, in the same way, the Realized One has given up the defilements so they are unable to arise in the future.”
> Pali: Tathāgatassa kho, aggivessana, ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, tālo matthakacchinno abhabbo puna virūḷhiyā; evameva kho, aggivessana, tathāgatassa ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā”ti.
[¶36] When he had spoken, Saccaka said to him, “It’s incredible, worthy Gotama, it’s amazing! How when the worthy Gotama is repeatedly attacked with inappropriate and intrusive criticism, the complexion of his skin brightens and the color of his face becomes clear, just like a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bho gotama, abbhutaṁ, bho gotama. Yāvañcidaṁ bhoto gotamassa evaṁ āsajja āsajja vuccamānassa, upanītehi vacanappathehi samudācariyamānassa, chavivaṇṇo ceva pariyodāyati, mukhavaṇṇo ca vippasīdati, yathā taṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶37] I recall taking on Pūraṇa Kassapa in debate. He dodged the issue, distracting the discussion with irrelevant points, and displaying annoyance, hate, and bitterness. But when the worthy Gotama is repeatedly attacked with inappropriate and intrusive criticism, the complexion of his skin brightens and the color of his face becomes clear, just like a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Abhijānāmahaṁ, bho gotama, pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ vādena vādaṁ samārabhitā. Sopi mayā vādena vādaṁ samāraddho aññenaññaṁ paṭicari, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmesi, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsi. Bhoto pana gotamassa evaṁ āsajja āsajja vuccamānassa, upanītehi vacanappathehi samudācariyamānassa, chavivaṇṇo ceva pariyodāyati, mukhavaṇṇo ca vippasīdati, yathā taṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶38] I recall taking on the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla, Ajita of the hair blanket, Pakudha Kaccāyana, Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, and the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan in debate. They all dodged the issue, distracting the discussion with irrelevant points, and displaying annoyance, hate, and bitterness. But when the worthy Gotama is repeatedly attacked with inappropriate and intrusive criticism, the complexion of his skin brightens and the color of his face becomes clear, just like a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Abhijānāmahaṁ, bho gotama, makkhaliṁ gosālaṁ …pe… ajitaṁ kesakambalaṁ … pakudhaṁ kaccāyanaṁ … sañjayaṁ belaṭṭhaputtaṁ … nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ vādena vādaṁ samārabhitā. Sopi mayā vādena vādaṁ samāraddho aññenaññaṁ paṭicari, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmesi, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsi. Bhoto pana gotamassa evaṁ āsajja āsajja vuccamānassa, upanītehi vacanappathehi samudācariyamānassa, chavivaṇṇo ceva pariyodāyati, mukhavaṇṇo ca vippasīdati, yathā taṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶39] Well, now, worthy Gotama, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bho gotama, gacchāma. Bahukiccā mayaṁ, bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶40] “Please, Aggivessana, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, aggivessana, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶41] Then Saccaka, the son of Jain parents, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmīti.
[¶42] > Pali: Mahāsaccakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 40. MN 37 · The Shorter Discourse on the Ending of Craving
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/40/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/40/#p-N
[¶0] MN 37 · The Shorter Discourse on the Ending of Craving
> Pali: MN 37 · Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde.
[¶2] And then Sakka, lord of gods, went up to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho sakko devānamindo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Sir, how do you briefly define a mendicant who is freed through the ending of craving, who has reached the ultimate end, the ultimate sanctuary from the yoke, the ultimate spiritual life, the ultimate goal, and is best among gods and humans?”
> Pali: “kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, bhikkhu saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti accantaniṭṭho accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosāno seṭṭho devamanussānan”ti?
[¶4] “Lord of gods, take a mendicant who has heard: ‘Nothing is worth insisting on.’ When a mendicant has heard that nothing is worth insisting on, they directly know all things. Directly knowing all things, they completely understand all things. Completely understanding all things, when they experience any kind of feeling—pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral— they meditate observing impermanence, dispassion, cessation, and letting go in those feelings. Meditating in this way, they don’t grasp at anything in the world. Not grasping, they’re not anxious. Not being anxious, they personally become extinguished. They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ That’s how I briefly define a mendicant who is freed through the ending of craving, who has reached the ultimate end, the ultimate sanctuary from the yoke, the ultimate spiritual life, the ultimate goal, and is best among gods and humans.”
> Pali: “Idha, devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṁ hoti: ‘sabbe dhammā nālaṁ abhinivesāyā’ti. Evañcetaṁ, devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṁ hoti: ‘sabbe dhammā nālaṁ abhinivesāyā’ti. So sabbaṁ dhammaṁ abhijānāti; sabbaṁ dhammaṁ abhiññāya sabbaṁ dhammaṁ parijānāti; sabbaṁ dhammaṁ pariññāya yaṁ kiñci vedanaṁ vedeti— sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, so tāsu vedanāsu aniccānupassī viharati, virāgānupassī viharati, nirodhānupassī viharati, paṭinissaggānupassī viharati. So tāsu vedanāsu aniccānupassī viharanto, virāgānupassī viharanto, nirodhānupassī viharanto, paṭinissaggānupassī viharanto na kiñci loke upādiyati. Anupādiyaṁ na paritassati, aparitassaṁ paccattaññeva parinibbāyati: ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Ettāvatā kho, devānaminda, bhikkhu saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti accantaniṭṭho accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosāno seṭṭho devamanussānan”ti.
[¶5] Then Sakka, lord of gods, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
[¶6] Now at that time Venerable Mahāmoggallāna was sitting not far from the Buddha. He thought, “Did that spirit comprehend what the Buddha said when he agreed with him, or not? Why don’t I find out?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavato avidūre nisinno hoti. Atha kho āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa etadahosi: “kiṁ nu kho so yakkho bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhisamecca anumodi udāhu no; yannūnāhaṁ taṁ yakkhaṁ jāneyyaṁ— yadi vā so yakkho bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhisamecca anumodi yadi vā no”ti?
[¶7] And then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, vanished from the Eastern Monastery and reappeared among the gods of the thirty-three. Now at that time Sakka was amusing himself in the Single Lotus Park, supplied and provided with a heavenly orchestra.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde antarahito devesu tāvatiṁsesu pāturahosi. Tena kho pana samayena sakko devānamindo ekapuṇḍarīke uyyāne dibbehi pañcahi tūriyasatehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti.
[¶8] Seeing Mahāmoggallāna coming off in the distance, he waved off the orchestra, approached Mahāmoggallāna, and said, “Come, my good fellow Moggallāna! Welcome, my good fellow! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Sit, my good Moggallāna, here, a seat is ready.” Mahāmoggallāna sat down on the seat spread out, while Sakka took a low seat and sat to one side.
> Pali: Addasā kho sakko devānamindo āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna tāni dibbāni pañca tūriyasatāni paṭippaṇāmetvā yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ etadavoca: “ehi kho, mārisa moggallāna, svāgataṁ, mārisa moggallāna. Cirassaṁ kho, mārisa moggallāna, imaṁ pariyāyaṁ akāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīda, mārisa moggallāna, idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti. Nisīdi kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno paññatte āsane. Sakkopi kho devānamindo aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶9] Mahāmoggallāna said to him, “Kosiya, how did the Buddha briefly explain freedom through the ending of craving? Please share this talk with me so that I can also get to hear it.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca: “yathā kathaṁ pana kho, kosiya, bhagavā saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṁ abhāsi? Sādhu mayampi etissā kathāya bhāgino assāma savanāyā”ti.
[¶10] “My good Moggallāna, I have many duties, and much to do, not only for myself, but also for the gods of the thirty-three. Still, what is properly heard, learned, attended, and memorized does not vanish all of a sudden. Once upon a time, a battle was fought between the gods and the titans. In that battle the gods won and the titans lost. When I returned from that battle as a conqueror, I created the Palace of Victory. The Palace of Victory has a hundred towers. Each tower has seven hundred chambers. Each chamber has seven nymphs. Each nymph has seven maids. Would you like to see the lovely Palace of Victory?” Mahāmoggallāna consented with silence.
> Pali: “Mayaṁ kho, mārisa moggallāna, bahukiccā bahukaraṇīyā— appeva sakena karaṇīyena, api ca devānaṁyeva tāvatiṁsānaṁ karaṇīyena. Api ca, mārisa moggallāna, sussutaṁyeva hoti suggahitaṁ sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ, yaṁ no khippameva antaradhāyati. Bhūtapubbaṁ, mārisa moggallāna, devāsurasaṅgāmo samupabyūḷho ahosi. Tasmiṁ kho pana, mārisa moggallāna, saṅgāme devā jiniṁsu, asurā parājiniṁsu. So kho ahaṁ, mārisa moggallāna, taṁ saṅgāmaṁ abhivijinitvā vijitasaṅgāmo tato paṭinivattitvā vejayantaṁ nāma pāsādaṁ māpesiṁ. Vejayantassa kho, mārisa moggallāna, pāsādassa ekasataṁ niyyūhaṁ. Ekekasmiṁ niyyūhe satta satta kūṭāgārasatāni. Ekamekasmiṁ kūṭāgāre satta satta accharāyo. Ekamekissā accharāya satta satta paricārikāyo. Iccheyyāsi no tvaṁ, mārisa moggallāna, vejayantassa pāsādassa rāmaṇeyyakaṁ daṭṭhun”ti? Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶11] Then, putting Venerable Mahāmoggallāna in front, Sakka, lord of gods, and Vessavaṇa, the Great King, went to the Palace of Victory. When they saw Moggallāna coming off in the distance, Sakka’s maids, being discreet and prudent, each went to her own bedroom. They were just like a daughter-in-law who is discreet and prudent when they see their father-in-law.
> Pali: Atha kho sakko ca devānamindo vessavaṇo ca mahārājā āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ purakkhatvā yena vejayanto pāsādo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. Addasaṁsu kho sakkassa devānamindassa paricārikāyo āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ; disvā ottappamānā hirīyamānā sakaṁ sakaṁ ovarakaṁ pavisiṁsu. Seyyathāpi nāma suṇisā sasuraṁ disvā ottappati hirīyati; evameva sakkassa devānamindassa paricārikāyo āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ disvā ottappamānā hirīyamānā sakaṁ sakaṁ ovarakaṁ pavisiṁsu.
[¶12] Then Sakka and Vessavaṇa encouraged Moggallāna to wander and explore the palace, saying, “See, in the palace, my good Moggallāna, this lovely thing! And that lovely thing!”
> Pali: Atha kho sakko ca devānamindo vessavaṇo ca mahārājā āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ vejayante pāsāde anucaṅkamāpenti anuvicarāpenti: “idampi, mārisa moggallāna, passa vejayantassa pāsādassa rāmaṇeyyakaṁ; idampi, mārisa moggallāna, passa vejayantassa pāsādassa rāmaṇeyyakan”ti.
[¶13] “That looks beautiful for the venerable Kosiya, as befits one who has made merit in the past. Humans, when they see something lovely, also say: ‘It looks beautiful enough for the gods of the thirty-three!’ That looks beautiful for the venerable Kosiya, as befits one who has made merit in the past.”
> Pali: “Sobhati idaṁ āyasmato kosiyassa, yathā taṁ pubbe katapuññassa. Manussāpi kiñcideva rāmaṇeyyakaṁ disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘sobhati vata bho yathā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānan’ti. Tayidaṁ āyasmato kosiyassa sobhati, yathā taṁ pubbe katapuññassā”ti.
[¶14] Then Moggallāna thought, “This spirit lives much too negligently. Why don’t I stir up a sense of urgency in him?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa etadahosi: “atibāḷhaṁ kho ayaṁ yakkho pamatto viharati. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ yakkhaṁ saṁvejeyyan”ti.
[¶15] Then Moggallāna used his psychic power to make the Palace of Victory shake and rock and tremble with his big toe. Then Sakka, Vessavaṇa, and the gods of the thirty-three, their minds full of wonder and amazement, thought, “Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! The ascetic has such power and might that he makes the god’s home shake and rock and tremble with his big toe!”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsi yathā vejayantaṁ pāsādaṁ pādaṅguṭṭhakena saṅkampesi sampakampesi sampavedhesi. Atha kho sakko ca devānamindo, vessavaṇo ca mahārājā, devā ca tāvatiṁsā acchariyabbhutacittajātā ahesuṁ: “acchariyaṁ vata, bho, abbhutaṁ vata, bho. Samaṇassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā, yatra hi nāma dibbabhavanaṁ pādaṅguṭṭhakena saṅkampessati sampakampessati sampavedhessatī”ti.
[¶16] Knowing that Sakka was shocked and awestruck, Moggallāna said to him, “Kosiya, how did the Buddha briefly explain freedom through the ending of craving? Please share this talk with me so that I can also get to hear it.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ saṁviggaṁ lomahaṭṭhajātaṁ viditvā sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ etadavoca: “yathā kathaṁ pana kho, kosiya, bhagavā saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṁ abhāsi? Sādhu mayampi etissā kathāya bhāgino assāma savanāyā”ti.
[¶17] “My good fellow Moggallāna, I approached the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him, ‘Sir, how do you briefly define a mendicant who is freed with the ending of craving, who has reached the ultimate end, the ultimate sanctuary from the yoke, the ultimate spiritual life, the ultimate goal, and is best among gods and humans?’
> Pali: “Idhāhaṁ, mārisa moggallāna, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho ahaṁ, mārisa moggallāna, bhagavantaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, bhikkhu saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti accantaniṭṭho accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosāno seṭṭho devamanussānan’ti?
[¶18] When I had spoken the Buddha said to me: ‘Lord of gods, it’s when a mendicant has heard: “Nothing is worth insisting on.” When a mendicant has heard that nothing is worth insisting on, they directly know all things. Directly knowing all things, they completely understand all things. Having completely understood all things, when they experience any kind of feeling—pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral— they meditate observing impermanence, dispassion, cessation, and letting go in those feelings. Meditating in this way, they don’t grasp at anything in the world. Not grasping, they’re not anxious. Not being anxious, they personally become extinguished. They understand: “Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.” That’s how I briefly define a mendicant who is freed through the ending of craving, who has reached the ultimate end, the ultimate sanctuary from the yoke, the ultimate spiritual life, the ultimate goal, and is best among gods and humans.’ That’s how the Buddha briefly explained freedom through the ending of craving to me.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, mārisa moggallāna, bhagavā maṁ etadavoca: ‘idha, devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṁ hoti: “sabbe dhammā nālaṁ abhinivesāyā”ti. Evañcetaṁ, devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṁ hoti “sabbe dhammā nālaṁ abhinivesāyā”ti. So sabbaṁ dhammaṁ abhijānāti, sabbaṁ dhammaṁ abhiññāya sabbaṁ dhammaṁ parijānāti, sabbaṁ dhammaṁ pariññāya yaṁ kiñci vedanaṁ vedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā. So tāsu vedanāsu aniccānupassī viharati, virāgānupassī viharati, nirodhānupassī viharati, paṭinissaggānupassī viharati. So tāsu vedanāsu aniccānupassī viharanto, virāgānupassī viharanto, nirodhānupassī viharanto, paṭinissaggānupassī viharanto na kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṁ na paritassati, aparitassaṁ paccattaññeva parinibbāyati: “khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti pajānāti. Ettāvatā kho, devānaminda, bhikkhu saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti accantaniṭṭho accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosāno seṭṭho devamanussānan’ti. Evaṁ kho me, mārisa moggallāna, bhagavā saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṁ abhāsī”ti.
[¶19] Moggallāna approved and agreed with what Sakka said. As easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, he vanished from among the gods of the thirty-three and reappeared in the Eastern Monastery.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno sakkassa devānamindassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—devesu tāvatiṁsesu antarahito pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde pāturahosi.
[¶20] Soon after Moggallāna left, Sakka’s maids said to him, “Good fellow, was that the Blessed One, your Teacher?”
> Pali: Atha kho sakkassa devānamindassa paricārikāyo acirapakkante āyasmante mahāmoggallāne sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ etadavocuṁ: “eso nu te, mārisa, so bhagavā satthā”ti?
[¶21] “No, it was not. That was my spiritual companion Venerable Mahāmoggallāna.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, mārisa, so bhagavā satthā. Sabrahmacārī me eso āyasmā mahāmoggallāno”ti.
[¶22] “You’re fortunate, good fellow, so very fortunate, to have a spiritual companion of such power and might! We can’t believe that’s not the Blessed One, your Teacher!”
> Pali: “Lābhā te, mārisa, suladdhaṁ te, mārisa yassa te sabrahmacārī evaṁmahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo. Aho nūna te so bhagavā satthā”ti.
[¶23] Then Mahāmoggallāna went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, do you recall briefly explaining freedom through the ending of craving to a certain well-known and illustrious spirit?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhijānāti no, bhante, bhagavā ahu ñātaññatarassa mahesakkhassa yakkhassa saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṁ bhāsitā”ti?
[¶24] “I do, Moggallāna.” And the Buddha retold all that happened when Sakka came to visit him, adding:
> Pali: “Abhijānāmahaṁ, moggallāna, idha sakko devānamindo yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, moggallāna, sakko devānamindo maṁ etadavoca: ‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, bhikkhu saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti accantaniṭṭho accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosāno seṭṭho devamanussānan’ti.
[¶25] “That’s how I recall briefly explaining freedom through the ending of craving to Sakka, lord of gods.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, moggallāna, sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ etadavocaṁ ‘idha devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṁ hoti “sabbe dhammā nālaṁ abhinivesāyā”ti. Evaṁ cetaṁ, devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṁ hoti “sabbe dhammā nālaṁ abhinivesāyā”ti. So sabbaṁ dhammaṁ abhijānāti, sabbaṁ dhammaṁ abhiññāya sabbaṁ dhammaṁ parijānāti, sabbaṁ dhammaṁ pariññāya yaṁ kiñci vedanaṁ vedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā. So tāsu vedanāsu aniccānupassī viharati, virāgānupassī viharati, nirodhānupassī viharati, paṭinissaggānupassī viharati. So tāsu vedanāsu aniccānupassī viharanto, virāgānupassī viharanto, nirodhānupassī viharanto, paṭinissaggānupassī viharanto na kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṁ na paritassati, aparitassaṁ paccattaññeva parinibbāyati: “khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti pajānāti. Ettāvatā kho, devānaminda, bhikkhu saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti accantaniṭṭho accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosāno seṭṭho devamanussānan’ti. Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, moggallāna, abhijānāmi sakkassa devānamindassa saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṁ bhāsitā”ti.
[¶26] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶27] > Pali: Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 41. MN 38 · The Longer Discourse on the Ending of Craving · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/41/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/41/#p-N
[¶0] MN 38 · The Longer Discourse on the Ending of Craving
> Pali: MN 38 · Mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time a mendicant named Sāti, the fisherman’s son, had the following harmful misconception: “As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, it is this very same consciousness that roams and transmigrates, not another.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sātissa nāma bhikkhuno kevaṭṭaputtassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ hoti: “tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati anaññan”ti.
[¶3] Several mendicants heard this rumour. They went up to Sāti and said to him, “Is it really true, Reverend Sāti, that you have such a harmful misconception: ‘As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, it is this very same consciousness that roams and transmigrates, not another’?”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho sambahulā bhikkhū: “sātissa kira nāma bhikkhuno kevaṭṭaputtassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan’”ti. Atha kho te bhikkhū yena sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “saccaṁ kira te, āvuso sāti, evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan’”ti?
[¶4] “Indeed, reverends. As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, it is this very same consciousness that roams and transmigrates, not another.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan”ti.
[¶5] Then, wishing to dissuade Sāti from his view, the mendicants pursued, pressed, and grilled him, “Don’t say that, Sāti! Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that. In many ways the Buddha has said that consciousness is dependently originated, that without a cause, consciousness does not come to be.”
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetukāmā samanuyuñjanti samanugāhanti samanubhāsanti: “mā evaṁ, āvuso sāti, avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Anekapariyāyenāvuso sāti, paṭiccasamuppannaṁ viññāṇaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā, aññatra paccayā natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo”ti.
[¶6] But even though the mendicants pressed him in this way, Sāti obstinately stuck to his misconception and insisted on it.
> Pali: Evampi kho sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto tehi bhikkhūhi samanuyuñjiyamāno samanugāhiyamāno samanubhāsiyamāno tadeva pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: “evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati anaññan”ti.
[¶7] When they weren’t able to dissuade Sāti from his view, the mendicants went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Yato kho te bhikkhū nāsakkhiṁsu sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetuṁ, atha kho te bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “sātissa nāma, bhante, bhikkhuno kevaṭṭaputtassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan’ti. Assumha kho mayaṁ, bhante, sātissa kira nāma bhikkhuno kevaṭṭaputtassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan’ti. Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, yena sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etadavocumha: ‘saccaṁ kira te, āvuso sāti, evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: “tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan”’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhante, sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto amhe etadavoca: ‘evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan’ti. Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetukāmā samanuyuñjimha samanugāhimha samanubhāsimha: ‘mā evaṁ, āvuso sāti, avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Anekapariyāyenāvuso sāti, paṭiccasamuppannaṁ viññāṇaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā, aññatra paccayā natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo’ti. Evampi kho, bhante, sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto amhehi samanuyuñjiyamāno samanugāhiyamāno samanubhāsiyamāno tadeva pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ thāmasā parāmasā abhinivissa voharati: ‘evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan’ti. Yato kho mayaṁ, bhante, nāsakkhimha sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetuṁ, atha mayaṁ etamatthaṁ bhagavato ārocemā”ti.
[¶8] So the Buddha addressed one of the monks, “Please, monk, in my name tell the mendicant Sāti that the Teacher summons him.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ bhikkhu, mama vacanena sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ āmantehi: ‘satthā taṁ, āvuso sāti, āmantetī’”ti.
[¶9] “Yes, sir,” that monk replied. He went to Sāti and said to him, “Reverend Sāti, the Teacher summons you.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā yena sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “satthā taṁ, āvuso sāti, āmantetī”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, reverend,” Sāti replied. He went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Is it really true, Sāti, that you have such a harmful misconception: ‘As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, it is this very same consciousness that roams and transmigrates, not another’?”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “saccaṁ kira te, sāti, evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘tathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan’”ti?
[¶11] “Indeed, sir. As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, it is this very same consciousness that roams and transmigrates, not another.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ byā kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi yathā tadevidaṁ viññāṇaṁ sandhāvati saṁsarati, anaññan”ti.
[¶12] “Sāti, what is that consciousness?”
> Pali: “Katamaṁ taṁ, sāti, viññāṇan”ti?
[¶13] “Sir, he is the one who speaks, the one who knows, who experiences the results of good and bad deeds in all the different realms.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, vado vedeyyo tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṁ kammānaṁ vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedetī”ti.
[¶14] “Futile man, who on earth have you ever known me to teach in that way? Haven’t I said in many ways that consciousness is dependently originated, that without a cause, consciousness does not come to be? But still you misrepresent me by your wrong grasp, harm yourself, and brim with much wickedness. This will be for your lasting harm and suffering.”
> Pali: “Kassa nu kho nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, mayā evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāsi? Nanu mayā, moghapurisa, anekapariyāyena paṭiccasamuppannaṁ viññāṇaṁ vuttaṁ, aññatra paccayā natthi viññāṇassa sambhavoti? Atha ca pana tvaṁ, moghapurisa, attanā duggahitena amhe ceva abbhācikkhasi, attānañca khaṇasi, bahuñca apuññaṁ pasavasi. Tañhi te, moghapurisa, bhavissati dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶15] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants, “What do you think, mendicants? Has this mendicant Sāti kindled even a spark of ardor in this teaching and training?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nāyaṁ sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto usmīkatopi imasmiṁ dhammavinaye”ti?
[¶16] “How could that be, sir? No, sir.” When this was said, Sāti sat silent, dismayed, shoulders drooping, downcast, depressed, with nothing to say.
> Pali: “Kiñhi siyā, bhante? No hetaṁ, bhante”ti. Evaṁ vutte, sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto tuṇhībhūto maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho pajjhāyanto appaṭibhāno nisīdi.
[¶17] Knowing this, the Buddha said, “Futile man, you will be known by your own harmful misconception. I’ll question the mendicants about this.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ maṅkubhūtaṁ pattakkhandhaṁ adhomukhaṁ pajjhāyantaṁ appaṭibhānaṁ viditvā sātiṁ bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “paññāyissasi kho tvaṁ, moghapurisa, etena sakena pāpakena diṭṭhigatena. Idhāhaṁ bhikkhū paṭipucchissāmī”ti.
[¶18] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants, “Mendicants, do you understand my teachings as Sāti does, when he misrepresents me by his wrong grasp, harms himself, and brims with much wickedness?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “tumhepi me, bhikkhave, evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānātha yathāyaṁ sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto attanā duggahitena amhe ceva abbhācikkhati, attānañca khaṇati, bahuñca apuññaṁ pasavatī”ti?
[¶19] “No, sir. For in many ways the Buddha has told us that consciousness is dependently originated, that without a cause, consciousness does not come to be.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Anekapariyāyena hi no, bhante, paṭiccasamuppannaṁ viññāṇaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā, aññatra paccayā natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo”ti.
[¶20] “Good, good, mendicants! It’s good that you understand my teaching like this. For in many ways I have told you that consciousness is dependently originated, that without a cause, consciousness does not come to be. But still this Sāti misrepresents me by his wrong grasp, harms himself, and brims with much wickedness. This will be for his lasting harm and suffering.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, bhikkhave. Sādhu kho me tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānātha. Anekapariyāyena hi vo, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppannaṁ viññāṇaṁ vuttaṁ mayā, aññatra paccayā natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo”ti. Atha ca panāyaṁ sāti bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto attanā duggahitena amhe ceva abbhācikkhati, attānañca khaṇati, bahuñca apuññaṁ pasavati. Tañhi tassa moghapurisassa bhavissati dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya.
[¶21] Consciousness is reckoned according to the very same condition dependent upon which it arises. Consciousness that arises dependent on the eye and sights is reckoned as eye consciousness. Consciousness that arises dependent on the ear and sounds is reckoned as ear consciousness. Consciousness that arises dependent on the nose and smells is reckoned as nose consciousness. Consciousness that arises dependent on the tongue and tastes is reckoned as tongue consciousness. Consciousness that arises dependent on the body and touches is reckoned as body consciousness. Consciousness that arises dependent on the mind and ideas is reckoned as mind consciousness.
> Pali: “Yaṁ yadeva, bhikkhave, paccayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, tena teneva viññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati. Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, cakkhuviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; sotañca paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, sotaviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; ghānañca paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, ghānaviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; jivhañca paṭicca rase ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, jivhāviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; kāyañca paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, kāyaviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, manoviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶22] It’s like fire, which is reckoned according to the very same condition dependent upon which it burns. A fire that burns dependent on logs is reckoned as a log fire. A fire that burns dependent on twigs is reckoned as a twig fire. A fire that burns dependent on grass is reckoned as a grass fire. A fire that burns dependent on cow-dung is reckoned as a cow-dung fire. A fire that burns dependent on husks is reckoned as a husk fire. A fire that burns dependent on rubbish is reckoned as a rubbish fire.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yaṁ yadeva paccayaṁ paṭicca aggi jalati tena teneva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati. Kaṭṭhañca paṭicca aggi jalati, kaṭṭhaggitveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; sakalikañca paṭicca aggi jalati, sakalikaggitveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; tiṇañca paṭicca aggi jalati, tiṇaggitveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; gomayañca paṭicca aggi jalati, gomayaggitveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; thusañca paṭicca aggi jalati, thusaggitveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; saṅkārañca paṭicca aggi jalati, saṅkāraggitveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶23] In the same way, consciousness is reckoned according to the very same condition dependent upon which it arises. …
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṁ yadeva paccayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, tena teneva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati. Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, cakkhuviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; sotañca paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, sotaviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati, ghānañca paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, ghānaviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati, jivhañca paṭicca rase ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, jivhāviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati. Kāyañca paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, kāyaviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati. Manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati viññāṇaṁ, manoviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶24] Mendicants, do you see that this has come to be?”
> Pali: Bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, passathā”ti?
[¶25] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶26] “Do you see that it came to be with that as fuel?”
> Pali: “Tadāhārasambhavanti, bhikkhave, passathā”ti?
[¶27] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶28] “Do you see that when that fuel ceases, what has come to be is liable to cease?”
> Pali: “Tadāhāranirodhā yaṁ bhūtaṁ, taṁ nirodhadhammanti, bhikkhave, passathā”ti?
[¶29] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶30] “Does doubt arise when you’re uncertain whether or not this has come to be?”
> Pali: “Bhūtamidaṁ nossūti, bhikkhave, kaṅkhato uppajjati vicikicchā”ti?
[¶31] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶32] “Does doubt arise when you’re uncertain whether or not this has come to be with that as fuel?”
> Pali: “Tadāhārasambhavaṁ nossūti, bhikkhave, kaṅkhato uppajjati vicikicchā”ti?
[¶33] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶34] “Does doubt arise when you’re uncertain whether or not when that fuel ceases, what has come to be is liable to cease?”
> Pali: “Tadāhāranirodhā yaṁ bhūtaṁ, taṁ nirodhadhammaṁ nossūti, bhikkhave, kaṅkhato uppajjati vicikicchā”ti?
[¶35] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶36] “Is doubt given up in someone who truly sees with right understanding that this has come to be?”
> Pali: “Bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato yā vicikicchā sā pahīyatī”ti?
[¶37] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶38] “Is doubt given up in someone who truly sees with right understanding that this has come to be with that as fuel?”
> Pali: “Tadāhārasambhavanti, bhikkhave, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato yā vicikicchā sā pahīyatī”ti?
[¶39] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶40] “Is doubt given up in someone who truly sees with right understanding that when that fuel ceases, what has come to be is liable to cease?”
> Pali: “Tadāhāranirodhā yaṁ bhūtaṁ, taṁ nirodhadhammanti, bhikkhave, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato yā vicikicchā sā pahīyatī”ti?
[¶41] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶42] “Are you free of doubt as to whether this has come to be?”
> Pali: “Bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, itipi vo ettha nibbicikicchā”ti?
[¶43] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶44] “Are you free of doubt as to whether this has come to be with that as fuel?”
> Pali: “Tadāhārasambhavanti, bhikkhave, itipi vo ettha nibbicikicchā”ti?
[¶45] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶46] “Are you free of doubt as to whether when that fuel ceases, what has come to be is liable to cease?”
> Pali: “Tadāhāranirodhā yaṁ bhūtaṁ taṁ nirodhadhammanti, bhikkhave, itipi vo ettha nibbicikicchā”ti?
[¶47] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶48] “Have you truly seen clearly with right understanding that this has come to be?”
> Pali: “Bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhan”ti?
[¶49] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶50] “Have you truly seen clearly with right understanding that this has come to be with that as fuel?”
> Pali: “Tadāhārasambhavanti, bhikkhave, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhan”ti?
[¶51] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶52] “Have you truly seen clearly with right understanding that when that fuel ceases, what has come to be is liable to cease?”
> Pali: “Tadāhāranirodhā yaṁ bhūtaṁ taṁ nirodhadhammanti, bhikkhave, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhan”ti?
[¶53] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶54] “Pure and bright as this view is, mendicants, if you cling to it, dally with it, treasure it, and treat it as your own, would you be understanding my simile of the teaching as a raft: for crossing over, not for holding on?”
> Pali: “Imañce tumhe, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ allīyetha kelāyetha dhanāyetha mamāyetha, api nu me tumhe, bhikkhave, kullūpamaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājāneyyātha nittharaṇatthāya no gahaṇatthāyā”ti?
[¶55] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶56] “Pure and bright as this view is, mendicants, if you don’t cling to it, dally with it, treasure it, and treat it as your own, would you be understanding my simile of the teaching as a raft: for crossing over, not for holding on?”
> Pali: “Imañce tumhe, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ na allīyetha na kelāyetha na dhanāyetha na mamāyetha, api nu me tumhe, bhikkhave, kullūpamaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājāneyyātha nittharaṇatthāya no gahaṇatthāyā”ti?
[¶57] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶58] “Mendicants, these four fuels maintain sentient beings that have been born and help those about to be born. What four? Edible food, whether solid or subtle; contact is the second, mental intention the third, and consciousness the fourth.
> Pali: “Cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā bhūtānaṁ vā sattānaṁ ṭhitiyā, sambhavesīnaṁ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro? Kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṁ catutthaṁ.
[¶59] What is the source, origin, birthplace, and inception of these four fuels? Craving.
> Pali: Ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro āhārā kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Ime cattāro āhārā taṇhānidānā taṇhāsamudayā taṇhājātikā taṇhāpabhavā.
[¶60] And what is the source of craving? Feeling.
> Pali: Taṇhā cāyaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Taṇhā vedanānidānā vedanāsamudayā vedanājātikā vedanāpabhavā.
[¶61] And what is the source of feeling? Contact.
> Pali: Vedanā cāyaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Vedanā phassanidānā phassasamudayā phassajātikā phassapabhavā.
[¶62] And what is the source of contact? The six sense fields.
> Pali: Phasso cāyaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidāno kiṁsamudayo kiṁjātiko kiṁpabhavo? Phasso saḷāyatananidāno saḷāyatanasamudayo saḷāyatanajātiko saḷāyatanapabhavo.
[¶63] And what is the source of the six sense fields? Name and form.
> Pali: Saḷāyatanañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ? Saḷāyatanaṁ nāmarūpanidānaṁ nāmarūpasamudayaṁ nāmarūpajātikaṁ nāmarūpapabhavaṁ.
[¶64] And what is the source of name and form? Consciousness.
> Pali: Nāmarūpañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ? Nāmarūpaṁ viññāṇanidānaṁ viññāṇasamudayaṁ viññāṇajātikaṁ viññāṇapabhavaṁ.
[¶65] And what is the source of consciousness? Choices.
> Pali: Viññāṇañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ? Viññāṇaṁ saṅkhāranidānaṁ saṅkhārasamudayaṁ saṅkhārajātikaṁ saṅkhārapabhavaṁ.
[¶66] And what is the source of choices? Ignorance.
> Pali: Saṅkhārā cime, bhikkhave, kiṁnidānā kiṁsamudayā kiṁjātikā kiṁpabhavā? Saṅkhārā avijjānidānā avijjāsamudayā avijjājātikā avijjāpabhavā.
[¶67] So, ignorance is a requirement for choices. Choices are a requirement for consciousness. Consciousness is a requirement for name and form. Name and form are requirements for the six sense fields. The six sense fields are requirements for contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Feeling is a requirement for craving. Craving is a requirement for grasping. Grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṁ, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṁ, saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ, upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.
[¶68] ‘Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death.’ That’s what I said. Is that how you see this or not?”
> Pali: Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; jātipaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇaṁ, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti?
[¶69] “That’s how we see it.”
> Pali: “Jātipaccayā, bhante, jarāmaraṇaṁ; evaṁ no ettha hoti— jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan”ti.
[¶70] “‘Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth.’ …
> Pali: “Bhavapaccayā jātīti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; bhavapaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, jāti, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Bhavapaccayā, bhante, jāti; evaṁ no ettha hoti— bhavapaccayā jātī”ti.
[¶71] > Pali: “Upādānapaccayā bhavoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; upādānapaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, bhavo, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Upādānapaccayā, bhante, bhavo; evaṁ no ettha hoti— upādānapaccayā bhavo”ti.
[¶72] > Pali: “Taṇhāpaccayā upādānanti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, taṇhāpaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, upādānaṁ, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Taṇhāpaccayā, bhante, upādānaṁ; evaṁ no ettha hoti— taṇhāpaccayā upādānan”ti.
[¶73] > Pali: “Vedanāpaccayā taṇhāti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; vedanāpaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, taṇhā, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Vedanāpaccayā, bhante, taṇhā; evaṁ no ettha hoti— vedanāpaccayā taṇhā”ti.
[¶74] > Pali: “Phassapaccayā vedanāti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; phassapaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, vedanā, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Phassapaccayā, bhante, vedanā; evaṁ no ettha hoti— phassapaccayā vedanā”ti.
[¶75] > Pali: “Saḷāyatanapaccayā phassoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; saḷāyatanapaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, phasso, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Saḷāyatanapaccayā, bhante, phasso; evaṁ no ettha hoti— saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso”ti.
[¶76] > Pali: “Nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatananti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; nāmarūpapaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, saḷāyatanaṁ, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Nāmarūpapaccayā, bhante, saḷāyatanaṁ; evaṁ no ettha hoti— nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanan”ti.
[¶77] > Pali: “Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpanti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; viññāṇapaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, nāmarūpaṁ, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Viññāṇapaccayā, bhante, nāmarūpaṁ; evaṁ no ettha hoti— viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpan”ti.
[¶78] > Pali: “Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇanti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; saṅkhārapaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, viññāṇaṁ, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Saṅkhārapaccayā, bhante, viññāṇaṁ; evaṁ no ettha hoti— saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇan”ti.
[¶79] ‘Ignorance is a requirement for choices.’ That’s what I said. Is that how you see this or not?”
> Pali: “Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; avijjāpaccayā nu kho, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti?
[¶80] “That’s how we see it.”
> Pali: “Avijjāpaccayā, bhante, saṅkhārā; evaṁ no ettha hoti— avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā”ti.
[¶81] “Good, mendicants! So both you and I say this. When this exists, this comes to be; due to the arising of this, this arises. That is: Ignorance is a requirement for choices. Choices are a requirement for consciousness. Consciousness is a requirement for name and form. Name and form are requirements for the six sense fields. The six sense fields are requirements for contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Feeling is a requirement for craving. Craving is a requirement for grasping. Grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave. Iti kho, bhikkhave, tumhepi evaṁ vadetha, ahampi evaṁ vadāmi— imasmiṁ sati idaṁ hoti, imassuppādā idaṁ uppajjati, yadidaṁ— avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṁ, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṁ, saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ, upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.
[¶82] When ignorance fades away and ceases with no residue left behind, choices cease. When choices cease, consciousness ceases. When consciousness ceases, name and form cease. When name and form cease, the six sense fields cease. When the six sense fields cease, contact ceases. When contact ceases, feeling ceases. When feeling ceases, craving ceases. When craving ceases, grasping ceases. When grasping ceases, continued existence ceases. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases. When rebirth ceases, old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress cease. That is how this entire mass of suffering ceases.
> Pali: Avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho, nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodho, saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodho, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho, vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodho, taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā nirujjhanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti.
[¶83] ‘When rebirth ceases, old age and death cease.’ That’s what I said. Is that how you see this or not?”
> Pali: Jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; jātinirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇanirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti?
[¶84] “That’s how we see it.”
> Pali: “Jātinirodhā, bhante, jarāmaraṇanirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho”ti.
[¶85] “‘When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases.’ …
> Pali: “Bhavanirodhā jātinirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; bhavanirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, jātinirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Bhavanirodhā, bhante, jātinirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— bhavanirodhā jātinirodho”ti.
## 42. MN 38 · The Longer Discourse on the Ending of Craving · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/42/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/42/#p-N
[¶0] > Pali: “Upādānanirodhā bhavanirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; upādānanirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, bhavanirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Upādānanirodhā, bhante, bhavanirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho”ti.
[¶1] > Pali: “Taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; taṇhānirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, upādānanirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Taṇhānirodhā, bhante, upādānanirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho”ti.
[¶2] > Pali: “Vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; vedanānirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, taṇhānirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Vedanānirodhā, bhante, taṇhānirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodho”ti.
[¶3] > Pali: “Phassanirodhā vedanānirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; phassanirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, vedanānirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Phassanirodhā, bhante, vedanānirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— phassanirodhā vedanānirodho”ti.
[¶4] > Pali: “Saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; saḷāyatananirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, phassanirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotīti? Saḷāyatananirodhā, bhante, phassanirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodho”ti.
[¶5] > Pali: “Nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; nāmarūpanirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, saḷāyatananirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Nāmarūpanirodhā, bhante, saḷāyatananirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodho”ti. “Viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; viññāṇanirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, nāmarūpanirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti?
[¶6] > Pali: “Viññāṇanirodhā, bhante, nāmarūpanirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho”ti. “Saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; saṅkhāranirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, viññāṇanirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti? “Saṅkhāranirodhā, bhante, viññāṇanirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho”ti.
[¶7] ‘When ignorance ceases, choices cease.’ That’s what I said. Is that how you see this or not?”
> Pali: “Avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodhoti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; avijjānirodhā nu kho, bhikkhave, saṅkhāranirodho, no vā, kathaṁ vā ettha hotī”ti?
[¶8] “That’s how we see it.”
> Pali: “Avijjānirodhā, bhante, saṅkhāranirodho; evaṁ no ettha hoti— avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho”ti.
[¶9] “Good, mendicants! So both you and I say this. When this doesn’t exist, this doesn’t come to be; due to the cessation of this, this ceases. That is: When ignorance ceases, choices cease. When choices cease, consciousness ceases. When consciousness ceases, name and form cease. When name and form cease, the six sense fields cease. When the six sense fields cease, contact ceases. When contact ceases, feeling ceases. When feeling ceases, craving ceases. When craving ceases, grasping ceases. When grasping ceases, continued existence ceases. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases. When rebirth ceases, old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress cease. That is how this entire mass of suffering ceases.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave. Iti kho, bhikkhave, tumhepi evaṁ vadetha, ahampi evaṁ vadāmi— imasmiṁ asati idaṁ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṁ nirujjhati, yadidaṁ— avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho, nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodho, saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodho, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho, vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodho, taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā nirujjhanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti.
[¶10] Knowing and seeing in this way, mendicants, would you turn back to the first beginning, thinking, ‘Did we exist in the past? Did we not exist in the past? What were we in the past? How were we in the past? After being what, what did we become in the past?’?”
> Pali: Api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā pubbantaṁ vā paṭidhāveyyātha: ‘ahesumha nu kho mayaṁ atītamaddhānaṁ, nanu kho ahesumha atītamaddhānaṁ, kiṁ nu kho ahesumha atītamaddhānaṁ, kathaṁ nu kho ahesumha atītamaddhānaṁ, kiṁ hutvā kiṁ ahesumha nu kho mayaṁ atītamaddhānan’”ti?
[¶11] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶12] “Knowing and seeing in this way, mendicants, would you turn forward to the final end, thinking, ‘Will we exist in the future? Will we not exist in the future? What will we be in the future? How will we be in the future? After being what, what will we become in the future?’?”
> Pali: “Api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā aparantaṁ vā paṭidhāveyyātha— bhavissāma nu kho mayaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, nanu kho bhavissāma anāgatamaddhānaṁ, kiṁ nu kho bhavissāma anāgatamaddhānaṁ, kathaṁ nu kho bhavissāma anāgatamaddhānaṁ, kiṁ hutvā kiṁ bhavissāma nu kho mayaṁ anāgatamaddhānan”ti?
[¶13] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶14] “Knowing and seeing in this way, mendicants, would you be undecided about the present, thinking, ‘Am I? Am I not? What am I? How am I? This sentient being—where did it come from? And where will it go?’?”
> Pali: “Api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā etarahi vā paccuppannamaddhānaṁ ajjhattaṁ kathaṅkathī assatha— ahaṁ nu khosmi, no nu khosmi, kiṁ nu khosmi, kathaṁ nu khosmi, ayaṁ nu kho satto kuto āgato, so kuhiṁ gāmī bhavissatī”ti?
[¶15] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶16] “Knowing and seeing in this way, would you say, ‘Our teacher is respected. We speak like this out of esteem for our teacher’?”
> Pali: “Api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā evaṁ vadeyyātha— satthā no garu, satthugāravena ca mayaṁ evaṁ vademā”ti?
[¶17] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶18] “Knowing and seeing in this way, would you say, ‘Our ascetic says this. We speak like this because it is what he says’?”
> Pali: “Api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā evaṁ vadeyyātha— samaṇo evamāha, samaṇā ca nāma mayaṁ evaṁ vademā”ti?
[¶19] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶20] “Knowing and seeing in this way, would you dedicate yourself to another teacher?”
> Pali: “Api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā aññaṁ satthāraṁ uddiseyyāthā”ti?
[¶21] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶22] “Knowing and seeing in this way, would you believe that the observances and boisterous, superstitious rites of the various ascetics and brahmins are essential?”
> Pali: “Api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā yāni tāni puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ vata kotūhalamaṅgalāni tāni sārato paccāgaccheyyāthā”ti?
[¶23] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶24] “Aren’t you speaking only of what you have known and seen and realized for yourselves?”
> Pali: “Nanu, bhikkhave, yadeva tumhākaṁ sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ, tadeva tumhe vadethā”ti.
[¶25] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶26] “Good, mendicants! You have been guided by me with this teaching that’s apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves. For when I said that this teaching is apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves, this is what I was referring to.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave, upanītā kho me tumhe, bhikkhave, iminā sandiṭṭhikena dhammena akālikena ehipassikena opaneyyikena paccattaṁ veditabbena viññūhi. Sandiṭṭhiko ayaṁ, bhikkhave, dhammo akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhi— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttanti.
[¶27] Mendicants, when three things come together an embryo is conceived. In a case where the mother and father come together, but the mother is not in the fertile phase of her menstrual cycle, and the virile spirit is not ready, the embryo is not conceived. In a case where the mother and father come together, the mother is in the fertile phase of her menstrual cycle, but the virile spirit is not ready, the embryo is not conceived. But when these three things come together—the mother and father come together, the mother is in the fertile phase of her menstrual cycle, and the virile spirit is ready—an embryo is conceived.
> Pali: Tiṇṇaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, sannipātā gabbhassāvakkanti hoti. Idha mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca na utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca na paccupaṭṭhito hoti, neva tāva gabbhassāvakkanti hoti. Idha mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca na paccupaṭṭhito hoti, neva tāva gabbhassāvakkanti hoti. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca paccupaṭṭhito hoti—evaṁ tiṇṇaṁ sannipātā gabbhassāvakkanti hoti.
[¶28] The mother nurtures the embryo in her womb for nine or ten months at great risk to her heavy burden. When nine or ten months have passed, the mother gives birth at great risk to her heavy burden. When the infant is born she nourishes it with her own blood. For mother’s milk is regarded as blood in the training of the Noble One.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, mātā nava vā dasa vā māse gabbhaṁ kucchinā pariharati mahatā saṁsayena garubhāraṁ. Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, mātā navannaṁ vā dasannaṁ vā māsānaṁ accayena vijāyati mahatā saṁsayena garubhāraṁ. Tamenaṁ jātaṁ samānaṁ sakena lohitena poseti. Lohitañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyassa vinaye yadidaṁ mātuthaññaṁ.
[¶29] That boy grows up and his faculties mature. He accordingly plays childish games such as toy plows, tipcat, somersaults, pinwheels, toy measures, toy carts, and toy bows.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, kumāro vuddhimanvāya indriyānaṁ paripākamanvāya yāni tāni kumārakānaṁ kīḷāpanakāni tehi kīḷati, seyyathidaṁ—vaṅkakaṁ ghaṭikaṁ mokkhacikaṁ ciṅgulakaṁ pattāḷhakaṁ rathakaṁ dhanukaṁ.
[¶30] That boy grows up and his faculties mature further. He accordingly amuses himself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, kumāro vuddhimanvāya indriyānaṁ paripākamanvāya pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti— cakkhuviññeyyehi rūpehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi,
[¶31] Sounds known by the ear …
> Pali: sotaviññeyyehi saddehi …
[¶32] Smells known by the nose …
> Pali: ghānaviññeyyehi gandhehi …
[¶33] Tastes known by the tongue …
> Pali: jivhāviññeyyehi rasehi …
[¶34] Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing.
> Pali: kāyaviññeyyehi phoṭṭhabbehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi.
[¶35] When they see a sight with their eyes, if it’s pleasant they desire it, but if it’s unpleasant they dislike it. They live with mindfulness of the body unestablished and their heart stunted. And they don’t truly understand the freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom where those arisen bad, unskillful qualities cease without remainder.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā piyarūpe rūpe sārajjati, appiyarūpe rūpe byāpajjati, anupaṭṭhitakāyasati ca viharati parittacetaso. Tañca cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti yatthassa te pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶36] Being so full of favoring and opposing, when they experience any kind of feeling—pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral—they approve, welcome, and keep clinging to it. This gives rise to relishing. Relishing feelings is grasping. Their grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates.
> Pali: So evaṁ anurodhavirodhaṁ samāpanno yaṁ kiñci vedanaṁ vedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, so taṁ vedanaṁ abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ vedanaṁ abhinandato abhivadato ajjhosāya tiṭṭhato uppajjati nandī. Yā vedanāsu nandī tadupādānaṁ, tassupādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.
[¶37] When they hear a sound with their ears …
> Pali: Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe…
[¶38] When they smell an odor with their nose …
> Pali: ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe…
[¶39] When they taste a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe…
[¶40] When they feel a touch with their body …
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe…
[¶41] When they know an idea with their mind, if it’s pleasant they desire it, but if it’s unpleasant they dislike it. They live with mindfulness of the body unestablished and their heart stunted. And they don’t truly understand the freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom where those arisen bad, unskillful qualities cease without remainder.
> Pali: manasā dhammaṁ viññāya piyarūpe dhamme sārajjati, appiyarūpe dhamme byāpajjati, anupaṭṭhitakāyasati ca viharati parittacetaso. Tañca cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti yatthassa te pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶42] Being so full of favoring and opposing, when they experience any kind of feeling—pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral—they approve, welcome, and keep clinging to it. This gives rise to relishing. Relishing feelings is grasping. Their grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates.
> Pali: So evaṁ anurodhavirodhaṁ samāpanno yaṁ kiñci vedanaṁ vedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, so taṁ vedanaṁ abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ vedanaṁ abhinandato abhivadato ajjhosāya tiṭṭhato uppajjati nandī. Yā vedanāsu nandī tadupādānaṁ, tassupādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.
[¶43] But consider when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He proclaims a teaching that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. He reveals an entirely full and pure spiritual life.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ; kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.
[¶44] A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from lay life to homelessness?’ After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajāpatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā, kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’”ti. So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya, mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā, kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati.
[¶45] Once they’ve gone forth, they take up the training and livelihood of the mendicants. They give up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings.
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
[¶46] They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving.
> Pali: Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati.
[¶47] They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex.
> Pali: Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti, ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā.
[¶48] They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words.
> Pali: Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa.
[¶49] They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony.
> Pali: Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti—ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā, sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī, samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶50] They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people.
> Pali: Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti—yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶51] They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial.
> Pali: Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā kālena, sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ.
[¶52] They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music. They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. They refrain from high and luxurious beds. They refrain from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land. They refrain from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence.
> Pali: So bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti, ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato, virato vikālabhojanā. Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti, mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti, uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti, jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, hatthigavāssavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti, dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti, kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti, tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti, ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti, chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
[¶53] They’re content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves.
> Pali: So santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. Seyyathāpi nāma pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶54] When they see a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati.
[¶55] When they hear a sound with their ears …
> Pali: Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe…
[¶56] When they smell an odor with their nose …
> Pali: ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe…
[¶57] When they taste a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe…
[¶58] When they feel a touch with their body …
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe…
[¶59] When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves.
> Pali: manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶60] They act with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: So abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.
[¶61] When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble contentment, this noble sense restraint, and this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato, vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati—araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ.
[¶62] After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present. Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti; byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti; thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī, sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti; uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti; vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶63] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶64] When they see a sight with their eyes, if it’s pleasant they don’t desire it, and if it’s unpleasant they don’t dislike it. They live with mindfulness of the body established and a limitless heart. And they truly understand the freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom where those arisen bad, unskillful qualities cease without remainder.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā piyarūpe rūpe na sārajjati, appiyarūpe rūpe na byāpajjati, upaṭṭhitakāyasati ca viharati appamāṇacetaso. Tañca cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti yatthassa te pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶65] Having given up favoring and opposing, when they experience any kind of feeling—pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral—they don’t approve, welcome, or keep clinging to it. As a result, relishing of feelings ceases. When their relishing ceases, grasping ceases. When grasping ceases, continued existence ceases. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases. When rebirth ceases, old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress cease. That is how this entire mass of suffering ceases.
> Pali: So evaṁ anurodhavirodhavippahīno yaṁ kiñci vedanaṁ vedeti, sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, so taṁ vedanaṁ nābhinandati nābhivadati nājjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ vedanaṁ anabhinandato anabhivadato anajjhosāya tiṭṭhato yā vedanāsu nandī sā nirujjhati. Tassa nandīnirodhā upādānanirodho, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā nirujjhanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti.
[¶66] When they hear a sound with their ears …
> Pali: Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe…
[¶67] When they smell an odor with their nose …
> Pali: ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe…
[¶68] When they taste a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe…
[¶69] When they feel a touch with their body …
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe…
[¶70] When they know an idea with their mind, if it’s pleasant they don’t desire it, and if it’s unpleasant they don’t dislike it. They live with mindfulness of the body established and a limitless heart. And they truly understand the freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom where those arisen bad, unskillful qualities cease without remainder.
> Pali: manasā dhammaṁ viññāya piyarūpe dhamme na sārajjati, appiyarūpe dhamme na byāpajjati, upaṭṭhitakāyasati ca viharati appamāṇacetaso, tañca cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti yatthassa te pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶71] Having given up favoring and opposing, when they experience any kind of feeling—pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral—they don’t approve, welcome, or keep clinging to it. As a result, relishing of feelings ceases. When their relishing ceases, grasping ceases. When grasping ceases, continued existence ceases. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases. When rebirth ceases, old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress cease. That is how this entire mass of suffering ceases.
> Pali: So evaṁ anurodhavirodhavippahīno yaṁ kiñci vedanaṁ vedeti, sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, so taṁ vedanaṁ nābhinandati nābhivadati nājjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ vedanaṁ anabhinandato anabhivadato anajjhosāya tiṭṭhato yā vedanāsu nandī sā nirujjhati. Tassa nandīnirodhā upādānanirodho, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā nirujjhanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti.
[¶72] Mendicants, you should memorize this brief statement on freedom through the ending of craving. But the mendicant Sāti, the fisherman’s son, is caught in a vast net of craving, a tangle of craving.”
> Pali: Imaṁ kho me tumhe, bhikkhave, saṅkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṁ dhāretha, sātiṁ pana bhikkhuṁ kevaṭṭaputtaṁ mahātaṇhājālataṇhāsaṅghāṭappaṭimukkan”ti.
[¶73] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶74] > Pali: Mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 43. MN 39 · The Longer Discourse at Assapura
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/43/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/43/#p-N
[¶0] MN 39 · The Longer Discourse at Assapura
> Pali: MN 39 · Mahāassapurasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Aṅgas, near the Aṅgan town named Assapura. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā aṅgesu viharati assapuraṁ nāma aṅgānaṁ nigamo. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, people label you as ascetics. And when they ask you what you are, you claim to be ascetics.
> Pali: “Samaṇā samaṇāti vo, bhikkhave, jano sañjānāti. Tumhe ca pana ‘ke tumhe’ti puṭṭhā samānā ‘samaṇāmhā’ti paṭijānātha;
[¶4] Given this label and this claim, you should train like this: ‘We will proceed having undertaken the things that make one an ascetic and a brahmin. That way our label will be accurate and our claim correct. The services of those whose robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick we enjoy shall be very fruitful and beneficial for them. And our going forth will not be barren, but will be fruitful and fertile.’
> Pali: tesaṁ vo, bhikkhave, evaṁsamaññānaṁ sataṁ evaṁpaṭiññānaṁ sataṁ ‘ye dhammā samaṇakaraṇā ca brāhmaṇakaraṇā ca te dhamme samādāya vattissāma, evaṁ no ayaṁ amhākaṁ samaññā ca saccā bhavissati paṭiññā ca bhūtā. Yesañca mayaṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṁ paribhuñjāma, tesaṁ te kārā amhesu mahapphalā bhavissanti mahānisaṁsā, amhākañcevāyaṁ pabbajjā avañjhā bhavissati saphalā saudrayā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶5] And what are the things that make one an ascetic and a brahmin? You should train like this: ‘We will have conscience and prudence.’ Now, mendicants, you might think, ‘We have conscience and prudence. This is sufficient; enough has been done. We have achieved the goal of life as an ascetic. There is nothing more to do.’ And you might rest content with just that much. I declare this to you, mendicants, I announce this to you: ‘You who seek to be true ascetics, do not lose sight of the goal of the ascetic life while there is still more to do.’
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā samaṇakaraṇā ca brāhmaṇakaraṇā ca? ‘Hirottappena samannāgatā bhavissāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi, sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’.
[¶6] What more is there to do? You should train like this: ‘Our bodily behavior will be pure, clear, open, neither inconsistent nor secretive. And we won’t glorify ourselves or put others down on account of our pure bodily behavior.’ Now, mendicants, you might think, ‘We have conscience and prudence, and our bodily behavior is pure. This is sufficient …’ I declare this to you, mendicants, I announce this to you: ‘You who seek to be true ascetics, do not lose sight of the goal of the ascetic life while there is still more to do.’
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Parisuddho no kāyasamācāro bhavissati uttāno vivaṭo na ca chiddavā saṁvuto ca. Tāya ca pana parisuddhakāyasamācāratāya nevattānukkaṁsessāma na paraṁ vambhessāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi, sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’.
[¶7] What more is there to do? You should train like this: ‘Our verbal behavior … mental behavior … livelihood will be pure, clear, open, neither inconsistent nor secretive. And we won’t glorify ourselves or put others down on account of our pure livelihood.’ Now, mendicants, you might think, ‘We have conscience and prudence, our bodily, verbal, and mental behavior is pure, and our livelihood is pure. This is sufficient; enough has been done. We have achieved the goal of life as an ascetic. There is nothing more to do.’ And you might rest content with just that much. I declare this to you, mendicants, I announce this to you: ‘You who seek to be true ascetics, do not lose sight of the goal of the ascetic life while there is still more to do.’
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Parisuddho no vacīsamācāro bhavissati uttāno vivaṭo na ca chiddavā saṁvuto ca. Tāya ca pana parisuddhavacīsamācāratāya nevattānukkaṁsessāma na paraṁ vambhessāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro, parisuddho vacīsamācāro; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi, sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’. Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Parisuddho no manosamācāro bhavissati uttāno vivaṭo na ca chiddavā saṁvuto ca. Tāya ca pana parisuddhamanosamācāratāya nevattānukkaṁsessāma na paraṁ vambhessāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro, parisuddho vacīsamācāro, parisuddho manosamācāro; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi, sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’. Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Parisuddho no ājīvo bhavissati uttāno vivaṭo na ca chiddavā saṁvuto ca. Tāya ca pana parisuddhājīvatāya nevattānukkaṁsessāma na paraṁ vambhessāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro, parisuddho vacīsamācāro, parisuddho manosamācāro, parisuddho ājīvo; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi, sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’.
[¶8] What more is there to do? You should train yourselves like this: ‘We will restrain our sense doors. When we see a sight with our eyes, we won’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, we will practice restraint, we will protect the faculty of sight, and we will achieve its restraint. When we hear a sound with our ears … When we smell an odor with our nose … When we taste a flavor with our tongue … When we feel a touch with our body … When we know an idea with our mind, we won’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, we will practice restraint, we will protect the faculty of mind, and we will achieve its restraint.’ Now, mendicants, you might think, ‘We have conscience and prudence, our bodily, verbal, and mental behavior is pure, our livelihood is pure, and our sense doors are restrained. This is sufficient …’
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Indriyesu guttadvārā bhavissāma; cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjissāma, rakkhissāma cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjissāma. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjissāma, rakkhissāma manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjissāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro, parisuddho vacīsamācāro, parisuddho manosamācāro, parisuddho ājīvo, indriyesumha guttadvārā; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi, sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’.
[¶9] What more is there to do? You should train yourselves like this: ‘We will not eat too much. We will only eat after reflecting rationally on our food. We will eat not for fun, indulgence, adornment, or decoration, but only to sustain this body, to avoid harm, and to support spiritual practice. In this way, we shall put an end to old discomfort and not give rise to new discomfort, and we will have the means to keep going, blamelessness, and a comfortable abiding.’ Now, mendicants, you might think, ‘We have conscience and prudence, our bodily, verbal, and mental behavior is pure, our livelihood is pure, our sense doors are restrained, and we don’t eat too much. This is sufficient …’
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Bhojane mattaññuno bhavissāma, paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṁ āharissāma, neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya, vihiṁsūparatiyā, brahmacariyānuggahāya, iti purāṇañca vedanaṁ paṭihaṅkhāma navañca vedanaṁ na uppādessāma, yātrā ca no bhavissati, anavajjatā ca, phāsu vihāro cā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro, parisuddho vacīsamācāro, parisuddho manosamācāro, parisuddho ājīvo, indriyesumha guttadvārā, bhojane mattaññuno; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo, sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’.
[¶10] What more is there to do? You should train yourselves like this: ‘We will be dedicated to wakefulness. When practicing walking and sitting meditation by day, we will purify our mind from obstacles. In the first watch of the night, we will continue to practice walking and sitting meditation. In the middle watch, we will lie down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware, and focused on the time of getting up. In the last watch, we will get up and continue to practice walking and sitting meditation, purifying our mind from obstacles.’ Now, mendicants, you might think, ‘We have conscience and prudence, our bodily, verbal, and mental behavior is pure, our livelihood is pure, our sense doors are restrained, we don’t eat too much, and we are dedicated to wakefulness. This is sufficient …’
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Jāgariyaṁ anuyuttā bhavissāma, divasaṁ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodhessāma. Rattiyā paṭhamaṁ yāmaṁ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodhessāma. Rattiyā majjhimaṁ yāmaṁ dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappessāma pāde pādaṁ accādhāya, sato sampajāno uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasi karitvā. Rattiyā pacchimaṁ yāmaṁ paccuṭṭhāya caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodhessāmā’ti, evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro, parisuddho vacīsamācāro, parisuddho manosamācāro, parisuddho ājīvo, indriyesumha guttadvārā, bhojane mattaññuno, jāgariyaṁ anuyuttā; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti, tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo, sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’.
[¶11] What more is there to do? You should train yourselves like this: ‘We will have mindfulness and situational awareness. We will act with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.’ Now, mendicants, you might think, ‘We have conscience and prudence, our bodily, verbal, and mental behavior is pure, our livelihood is pure, our sense doors are restrained, we don’t eat too much, we are dedicated to wakefulness, and we have mindfulness and situational awareness. This is sufficient …’
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? ‘Satisampajaññena samannāgatā bhavissāma, abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī’ti, evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ. Siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘hirottappenamha samannāgatā, parisuddho no kāyasamācāro, parisuddho vacīsamācāro, parisuddho manosamācāro, parisuddho ājīvo, indriyesumha guttadvārā, bhojane mattaññuno, jāgariyaṁ anuyuttā, satisampajaññena samannāgatā; alamettāvatā katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttariṁ karaṇīyan’ti tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṁ āpajjeyyātha. Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave: ‘mā vo, sāmaññatthikānaṁ sataṁ sāmaññattho parihāyi sati uttariṁ karaṇīye’.
[¶12] What more is there to do? Take a mendicant who frequents a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, uttariṁ karaṇīyaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati—araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanappatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ.
[¶13] After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present. Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti; byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti; thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati, ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti; uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati, ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti; vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati, akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶14] Suppose a man who has gotten into debt were to apply himself to work, and his efforts proved successful. He would pay off the original loan and have enough left over to support his partner. Thinking about this, he’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojeyya. Tassa te kammantā samijjheyyuṁ. So yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni tāni ca byantī kareyya, siyā cassa uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojesiṁ, tassa me te kammantā samijjhiṁsu. Sohaṁ yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni tāni ca byantī akāsiṁ, atthi ca me uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāyā’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶15] Suppose a person was sick, suffering, gravely ill. They’d lose their appetite and get physically weak. But after some time they’d recover from that illness, and regain their appetite and their strength. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso ābādhiko assa dukkhito bāḷhagilāno, bhattañcassa nacchādeyya, na cassa kāye balamattā. So aparena samayena tamhā ābādhā mucceyya, bhattañcassa chādeyya, siyā cassa kāye balamattā. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe ābādhiko ahosiṁ dukkhito bāḷhagilāno, bhattañca me nacchādesi, na ca me āsi kāye balamattā, somhi etarahi tamhā ābādhā mutto, bhattañca me chādeti, atthi ca me kāye balamattā’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶16] Suppose a person was imprisoned in a jail. But after some time they were released from jail, safe and sound, with no loss of wealth. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso bandhanāgāre baddho assa. So aparena samayena tamhā bandhanā mucceyya sotthinā abbhayena, na cassa kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe bandhanāgāre baddho ahosiṁ, somhi etarahi tamhā bandhanā mutto, sotthinā abbhayena, natthi ca me kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶17] Suppose a person was a bondservant. They would not be their own master, but indentured to another, unable to go where they wish. But after some time they’d be freed from servitude. They would be their own master, not indentured to another, a freeman able to go where they wish. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso dāso assa anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. So aparena samayena tamhā dāsabyā mucceyya attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe dāso ahosiṁ anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo, somhi etarahi tamhā dāsabyā mutto attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶18] Suppose there was a person with wealth and property who was traveling along a desert road. But after some time they crossed over the desert, safe and sound, with no loss of wealth. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjeyya. So aparena samayena tamhā kantārā nitthareyya sotthinā abbhayena, na cassa kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjiṁ. Somhi etarahi tamhā kantārā nitthiṇṇo sotthinā abbhayena, natthi ca me kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶19] In the same way, as long as these five hindrances are not given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards them as a debt, a disease, a prison, slavery, and a desert crossing. But when these five hindrances are given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards this as freedom from debt, good health, release from prison, emancipation, and a place of sanctuary at last.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathā iṇaṁ yathā rogaṁ yathā bandhanāgāraṁ yathā dāsabyaṁ yathā kantāraddhānamaggaṁ, ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīne attani samanupassati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, āṇaṇyaṁ yathā ārogyaṁ yathā bandhanāmokkhaṁ yathā bhujissaṁ yathā khemantabhūmiṁ; evameva bhikkhu ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassati.
[¶20] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. It’s like when a deft bathroom attendant or their apprentice pours bath powder into a bronze dish, sprinkling it little by little with water. They knead it until the ball of bath powder is soaked and saturated with moisture, spread through inside and out; yet no moisture oozes out.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi, savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho nhāpako vā nhāpakantevāsī vā kaṁsathāle nhānīyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ sanneyya. Sāyaṁ nhānīyapiṇḍi snehānugatā snehaparetā santarabāhirā, phuṭā snehena na ca pagghariṇī.
[¶21] In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶22] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. It’s like a deep lake fed by spring water. There’s no inlet to the east, west, north, or south, and the heavens would not properly bestow showers from time to time. But the stream of cool water welling up in the lake drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads throughout the lake. There’s no part of the lake that’s not spread through with cool water.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, udakarahado ubbhidodako. Tassa nevassa puratthimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na pacchimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na uttarāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na dakkhiṇāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya. Atha kho tamhāva udakarahadā sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā tameva udakarahadaṁ sītena vārinā abhisandeyya parisandeyya paripūreyya paripphareyya, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato udakarahadassa sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa.
[¶23] In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶24] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. From the tip to the root they’re drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with cool water. There’s no part of them that’s not soaked with cool water.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati, sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni yāva caggā yāva ca mūlā sītena vārinā abhisannāni parisannāni paripūrāni paripphuṭāni, nāssa kiñci sabbāvataṁ uppalānaṁ vā padumānaṁ vā puṇḍarīkānaṁ vā sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa.
[¶25] In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶26] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. They sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. It’s like someone sitting wrapped from head to foot with white cloth. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread over with white cloth.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso odātena vatthena sasīsaṁ pārupetvā nisinno assa, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena apphuṭaṁ assa.
[¶27] In the same way, they sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶28] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives, with features and details. Suppose a person was to leave their home village and go to another village. From that village they’d go to yet another village. And from that village they’d return to their home village. They’d think: ‘I went from my home village to another village. There I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. From that village I went to yet another village. There too I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. And from that village I returned to my home village.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ, dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya, tamhāpi gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya, so tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgaccheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho sakamhā gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatrapi evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ evaṁ nisīdiṁ evaṁ abhāsiṁ evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ; tamhāpi gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatrapi evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ evaṁ nisīdiṁ evaṁ abhāsiṁ evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ; somhi tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgato’ti.
[¶29] In the same way, a mendicant recollects their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶30] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. Suppose there were two houses with doors. A person with clear eyes standing in between them would see humans entering and leaving a house and wandering to and fro.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti …pe… seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dve agārā sadvārā. Tattha cakkhumā puriso majjhe ṭhito passeyya manusse gehaṁ pavisantepi nikkhamantepi, anucaṅkamantepi anuvicarantepi.
[¶31] In the same way, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti …pe….
[¶32] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements.’ Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed. They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti: ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶33] Suppose that in a mountain glen there was a lake that was transparent, clear, and unclouded. A person with clear eyes standing on the bank would see the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still. They’d think: ‘This lake is transparent, clear, and unclouded. And here are the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, pabbatasaṅkhepe udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso tīre ṭhito passeyya sippisambukampi sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi, carantampi tiṭṭhantampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tatrime sippisambukāpi sakkharakathalāpi macchagumbāpi carantipi tiṭṭhantipī’ti’.
[¶34] In the same way, a mendicant truly understands: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ They understand: ‘… there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti …pe… nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti.
[¶35] This mendicant is one who is called an ‘ascetic’, a ‘brahmin’, a ‘bathed initiate’, a ‘knowledge master’, a ‘scholar’, a ‘noble one’, and also a ‘perfected one’.
> Pali: Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘samaṇo’ itipi ‘brāhmaṇo’itipi ‘nhātako’itipi ‘vedagū’itipi ‘sottiyo’itipi ‘ariyo’itipi ‘arahaṁ’itipi.
[¶36] And how is a mendicant an ascetic? They have assuaged the bad, unskillful qualities that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. That’s how a mendicant is an ascetic.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samaṇo hoti? Samitāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā, saṅkilesikā, ponobbhavikā, sadarā, dukkhavipākā, āyatiṁ, jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samaṇo hoti.
[¶37] And how is a mendicant a brahmin? They have banished the bad, unskillful qualities. That’s how a mendicant is a brahmin.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu brāhmaṇo hoti? Bāhitāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā, saṅkilesikā, ponobbhavikā, sadarā, dukkhavipākā, āyatiṁ, jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu brāhmaṇo hoti.
[¶38] And how is a mendicant a bathed initiate? They have bathed off the bad, unskillful qualities. That’s how a mendicant is a bathed initiate.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu nhātako hoti? Nhātāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā, saṅkilesikā, ponobbhavikā, sadarā, dukkhavipākā, āyatiṁ, jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu nhātako hoti.
[¶39] And how is a mendicant a knowledge master? They have known the bad, unskillful qualities. That’s how a mendicant is a knowledge master.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vedagū hoti? Viditāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā, saṅkilesikā, ponobbhavikā, sadarā, dukkhavipākā, āyatiṁ, jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vedagū hoti.
[¶40] And how is a mendicant a scholar? They have scoured off the bad, unskillful qualities. That’s how a mendicant is a scholar.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sottiyo hoti? Nissutāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā, saṅkilesikā, ponobbhavikā, sadarā, dukkhavipākā, āyatiṁ, jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sottiyo hoti.
[¶41] And how is a mendicant a noble one? They have nobbled their foes, the bad, unskillful qualities. That’s how a mendicant is a noble one.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyo hoti? Ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā, saṅkilesikā, ponobbhavikā, sadarā, dukkhavipākā, āyatiṁ, jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyo hoti.
[¶42] And how is a mendicant a perfected one? They are impeccably remote from the bad, unskillful qualities that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. That’s how a mendicant is a perfected one.”
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṁ hoti? Ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā, saṅkilesikā, ponobbhavikā, sadarā, dukkhavipākā, āyatiṁ, jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶43] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶44] > Pali: Mahāassapurasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 44. MN 40 · The Shorter Discourse at Assapura
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/44/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/44/#p-N
[¶0] MN 40 · The Shorter Discourse at Assapura
> Pali: MN 40 · Cūḷaassapurasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Aṅgas, near the Aṅgan town named Assapura. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā aṅgesu viharati assapuraṁ nāma aṅgānaṁ nigamo. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, people label you as ascetics. And when they ask you what you are, you claim to be ascetics.
> Pali: “Samaṇā samaṇāti vo, bhikkhave, jano sañjānāti. Tumhe ca pana ‘ke tumhe’ti puṭṭhā samānā ‘samaṇāmhā’ti paṭijānātha.
[¶4] Given this label and this claim, you should train like this: ‘We will practice in the way that is proper for an ascetic. That way our label will be accurate and our claim correct. The services of those whose robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick we enjoy shall be very fruitful and beneficial for them. And our going forth will not be barren, but will be fruitful and fertile.’
> Pali: Tesaṁ vo, bhikkhave, evaṁsamaññānaṁ sataṁ evaṁpaṭiññānaṁ sataṁ: ‘yā samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadā taṁ paṭipajjissāma; evaṁ no ayaṁ amhākaṁ samaññā ca saccā bhavissati paṭiññā ca bhūtā; yesañca mayaṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṁ paribhuñjāma, tesaṁ te kārā amhesu mahapphalā bhavissanti mahānisaṁsā, amhākañcevāyaṁ pabbajjā avañjhā bhavissati saphalā saudrayā’ti. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶5] And how does a mendicant not practice in the way that is proper for an ascetic?
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno hoti?
[¶6] Any mendicant who has not given up covetousness, ill will, irritability, acrimony, disdain, contempt, jealousy, stinginess, deviousness, deceit, corrupt wishes, and wrong view is not practicing in the way that is proper for an ascetic, I say. And that is due to not giving up these stains, defects, and dregs of an ascetic, these grounds for rebirth in places of loss, to be experienced in bad places. I say that such a mendicant’s going forth may be compared to the kind of weapon called ‘deadborn’—double-edged, whetted with yellow arsenic—that has been covered and wrapped in an outer robe.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno abhijjhālussa abhijjhā appahīnā hoti, byāpannacittassa byāpādo appahīno hoti, kodhanassa kodho appahīno hoti, upanāhissa upanāho appahīno hoti, makkhissa makkho appahīno hoti, paḷāsissa paḷāso appahīno hoti, issukissa issā appahīnā hoti, maccharissa macchariyaṁ appahīnaṁ hoti, saṭhassa sāṭheyyaṁ appahīnaṁ hoti, māyāvissa māyā appahīnā hoti, pāpicchassa pāpikā icchā appahīnā hoti, micchādiṭṭhikassa micchādiṭṭhi appahīnā hoti— imesaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, samaṇamalānaṁ samaṇadosānaṁ samaṇakasaṭānaṁ āpāyikānaṁ ṭhānānaṁ duggativedaniyānaṁ appahānā ‘na samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno’ti vadāmi. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, matajaṁ nāma āvudhajātaṁ ubhatodhāraṁ pītanisitaṁ. Tadassa saṅghāṭiyā sampārutaṁ sampaliveṭhitaṁ. Tathūpamāhaṁ, bhikkhave, imassa bhikkhuno pabbajjaṁ vadāmi.
[¶7] I say that you don’t deserve the label ‘outer robe wearer’ just because you wear an outer robe. You don’t deserve the label ‘naked ascetic’ just because you go naked. You don’t deserve the label ‘dust and dirt wearer’ just because you’re caked in dust and dirt. You don’t deserve the label ‘water immerser’ just because you immerse yourself in water. You don’t deserve the label ‘tree root dweller’ just because you stay at the root of a tree. You don’t deserve the label ‘open air dweller’ just because you stay in the open air. You don’t deserve the label ‘stander’ just because you continually stand. You don’t deserve the label ‘interval eater’ just because you eat food at set intervals. You don’t deserve the label ‘reciter’ just because you recite hymns. You don’t deserve the label ‘matted-hair ascetic’ just because you have matted hair.
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, saṅghāṭikassa saṅghāṭidhāraṇamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, acelakassa acelakamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, rajojallikassa rajojallikamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, udakorohakassa udakorohaṇamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, rukkhamūlikassa rukkhamūlikamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, abbhokāsikassa abbhokāsikamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, ubbhaṭṭhakassa ubbhaṭṭhakamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, pariyāyabhattikassa pariyāyabhattikamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, mantajjhāyakassa mantajjhāyakamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, jaṭilakassa jaṭādhāraṇamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi.
[¶8] Imagine that just by wearing an outer robe someone with covetousness, ill will, irritability, acrimony, disdain, contempt, jealousy, stinginess, deviousness, deceit, corrupt wishes, and wrong view could give up these things. If that were the case, your friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would make you an outer robe wearer as soon as you were born. They’d encourage you: ‘Please, dearest, wear an outer robe! By doing so you will give up covetousness, ill will, irritability, acrimony, disdain, contempt, jealousy, stinginess, deviousness, deceit, corrupt wishes, and wrong view.’ But sometimes I see someone with these bad qualities who is an outer robe wearer. That’s why I say that you don’t deserve the label ‘outer robe wearer’ just because you wear an outer robe.
> Pali: Saṅghāṭikassa ce, bhikkhave, saṅghāṭidhāraṇamattena abhijjhālussa abhijjhā pahīyetha, byāpannacittassa byāpādo pahīyetha, kodhanassa kodho pahīyetha, upanāhissa upanāho pahīyetha, makkhissa makkho pahīyetha, paḷāsissa paḷāso pahīyetha, issukissa issā pahīyetha, maccharissa macchariyaṁ pahīyetha, saṭhassa sāṭheyyaṁ pahīyetha, māyāvissa māyā pahīyetha, pāpicchassa pāpikā icchā pahīyetha, micchādiṭṭhikassa micchādiṭṭhi pahīyetha, tamenaṁ mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā jātameva naṁ saṅghāṭikaṁ kareyyuṁ, saṅghāṭikattameva samādapeyyuṁ: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhadramukha, saṅghāṭiko hohi, saṅghāṭikassa te sato saṅghāṭidhāraṇamattena abhijjhālussa abhijjhā pahīyissati, byāpannacittassa byāpādo pahīyissati, kodhanassa kodho pahīyissati, upanāhissa upanāho pahīyissati, makkhissa makkho pahīyissati, paḷāsissa paḷāso pahīyissati, issukissa issā pahīyissati, maccharissa macchariyaṁ pahīyissati, saṭhassa sāṭheyyaṁ pahīyissati, māyāvissa māyā pahīyissati, pāpicchassa pāpikā icchā pahīyissati, micchādiṭṭhikassa micchādiṭṭhi pahīyissatī’ti. Yasmā ca kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, saṅghāṭikampi idhekaccaṁ passāmi abhijjhāluṁ byāpannacittaṁ kodhanaṁ upanāhiṁ makkhiṁ paḷāsiṁ issukiṁ macchariṁ saṭhaṁ māyāviṁ pāpicchaṁ micchādiṭṭhikaṁ, tasmā na saṅghāṭikassa saṅghāṭidhāraṇamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi.
[¶9] Imagine that just by going naked … wearing dust and dirt … immersing in water … staying at the root of a tree … staying in the open air … standing continually … eating at set intervals … reciting hymns … having matted hair someone with covetousness, ill will, irritability, acrimony, disdain, contempt, jealousy, stinginess, deviousness, deceit, corrupt wishes, and wrong view could give up these things. If that were the case, your friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would make you a matted-hair ascetic as soon as you were born. They’d encourage you: ‘Please, dearest, become a matted-hair ascetic! By doing so you will give up covetousness, ill will, irritability, hostility, disdain, contempt, jealousy, stinginess, deviousness, deceit, corrupt wishes, and wrong view.’ But sometimes I see someone with these bad qualities who is a matted-hair ascetic. That’s why I say that you don’t deserve the label ‘matted-hair ascetic’ just because you have matted hair.
> Pali: Acelakassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… rajojallikassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… udakorohakassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… rukkhamūlikassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… abbhokāsikassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… ubbhaṭṭhakassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… pariyāyabhattikassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… mantajjhāyakassa ce, bhikkhave …pe… jaṭilakassa ce, bhikkhave, jaṭādhāraṇamattena abhijjhālussa abhijjhā pahīyetha, byāpannacittassa byāpādo pahīyetha, kodhanassa kodho pahīyetha, upanāhissa upanāho pahīyetha, makkhissa makkho pahīyetha, paḷāsissa paḷāso pahīyetha, issukissa issā pahīyetha, maccharissa macchariyaṁ pahīyetha, saṭhassa sāṭheyyaṁ pahīyetha, māyāvissa māyā pahīyetha, pāpicchassa pāpikā icchā pahīyetha, micchādiṭṭhikassa micchādiṭṭhi pahīyetha, tamenaṁ mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā jātameva naṁ jaṭilakaṁ kareyyuṁ, jaṭilakattameva samādapeyyuṁ: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhadramukha, jaṭilako hohi, jaṭilakassa te sato jaṭādhāraṇamattena abhijjhālussa abhijjhā pahīyissati byāpannacittassa byāpādo pahīyissati, kodhanassa kodho pahīyissati …pe… pāpicchassa pāpikā icchā pahīyissati micchādiṭṭhikassa micchādiṭṭhi pahīyissatī’ti. Yasmā ca kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, jaṭilakampi idhekaccaṁ passāmi abhijjhāluṁ byāpannacittaṁ kodhanaṁ upanāhiṁ makkhiṁ palāsiṁ issukiṁ macchariṁ saṭhaṁ māyāviṁ pāpicchaṁ micchādiṭṭhiṁ, tasmā na jaṭilakassa jaṭādhāraṇamattena sāmaññaṁ vadāmi.
[¶10] And how does a mendicant practice in the way that is proper for an ascetic?
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno hoti?
[¶11] Any mendicant who has given up covetousness, ill will, irritability, acrimony, disdain, contempt, jealousy, stinginess, deviousness, deceit, corrupt wishes, and wrong view is practicing in the way that is proper for an ascetic, I say. And that is due to giving up these stains, defects, and dregs of an ascetic, these grounds for rebirth in places of loss, to be experienced in bad places.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno abhijjhālussa abhijjhā pahīnā hoti, byāpannacittassa byāpādo pahīno hoti, kodhanassa kodho pahīno hoti, upanāhissa upanāho pahīno hoti, makkhissa makkho pahīno hoti, paḷāsissa paḷāso pahīno hoti, issukissa issā pahīnā hoti, maccharissa macchariyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, saṭhassa sāṭheyyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, māyāvissa māyā pahīnā hoti, pāpicchassa pāpikā icchā pahīnā hoti, micchādiṭṭhikassa micchādiṭṭhi pahīnā hoti— imesaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, samaṇamalānaṁ samaṇadosānaṁ samaṇakasaṭānaṁ āpāyikānaṁ ṭhānānaṁ duggativedaniyānaṁ pahānā ‘samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno’ti vadāmi.
[¶12] They see themselves purified from all these bad, unskillful qualities. Seeing this, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed in samādhi.
> Pali: So sabbehi imehi pāpakehi akusalehi dhammehi visuddhamattānaṁ samanupassati (…). Tassa sabbehi imehi pāpakehi akusalehi dhammehi visuddhamattānaṁ samanupassato (…) pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.
[¶13] They meditate spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati.
[¶14] They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion …
> Pali: Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶15] They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing …
> Pali: muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶16] They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati.
[¶17] Suppose there was a lotus pond with clear, sweet, cool water, clean, with smooth banks, delightful. Then along comes a person—whether from the east, west, north, or south—struggling in the oppressive heat, weary, thirsty, and parched. No matter what direction they come from, when they arrive at that lotus pond they would alleviate their thirst and heat exhaustion.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, pokkharaṇī acchodakā sātodakā sītodakā setakā supatitthā ramaṇīyā. Puratthimāya cepi disāya puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipāsito. So taṁ pokkharaṇiṁ āgamma vineyya udakapipāsaṁ vineyya ghammapariḷāhaṁ …pe… pacchimāya cepi disāya puriso āgaccheyya …pe… uttarāya cepi disāya puriso āgaccheyya …pe… dakkhiṇāya cepi disāya puriso āgaccheyya. Yato kuto cepi naṁ puriso āgaccheyya ghammābhitatto ghammapareto, kilanto tasito pipāsito. So taṁ pokkharaṇiṁ āgamma vineyya udakapipāsaṁ, vineyya ghammapariḷāhaṁ.
[¶18] In the same way, suppose someone has gone forth from the lay life to homelessness—whether from a family of aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, or menials—and has arrived at the teaching and training proclaimed by a Realized One. Having developed love, compassion, rejoicing, and equanimity in this way they find inner peace. Because of that inner peace they are practicing the way proper for an ascetic, I say.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, khattiyakulā cepi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma, evaṁ mettaṁ karuṇaṁ muditaṁ upekkhaṁ bhāvetvā labhati ajjhattaṁ vūpasamaṁ. Ajjhattaṁ vūpasamā ‘samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno’ti vadāmi. Brāhmaṇakulā cepi …pe… vessakulā cepi …pe… suddakulā cepi …pe… yasmā kasmā cepi kulā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma, evaṁ mettaṁ karuṇaṁ muditaṁ upekkhaṁ bhāvetvā labhati ajjhattaṁ vūpasamaṁ. Ajjhattaṁ vūpasamā ‘samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno’ti vadāmi.
[¶19] And suppose someone has gone forth from the lay life to homelessness—whether from a family of aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, or workers— and they realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. They’re an ascetic because of the ending of defilements.”
> Pali: Khattiyakulā cepi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti. So ca āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Āsavānaṁ khayā samaṇo hoti. Brāhmaṇakulā cepi …pe… vessakulā cepi … suddakulā cepi … yasmā kasmā cepi kulā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Āsavānaṁ khayā samaṇo hotī”ti.
[¶20] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶21] > Pali: Cūḷaassapurasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶22] > Pali: Mahāyamakavaggo niṭṭhito catuttho.
[¶23] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶24] > Pali: Giñjakasālavanaṁ pariharituṁ,
Paññavato puna saccakanisedho;
Mukhavaṇṇapasīdanatāpindo,
Kevaṭṭaassapurajaṭilena.
## 45. MN 41 · The People of Sālā
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/45/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/45/#p-N
[¶0] MN 41 · The People of Sālā
> Pali: MN 41 · Sāleyyakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Kosalan brahmins named Sālā.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena sālā nāma kosalānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari.
[¶2] The brahmins and householders of Sālā heard, “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—while wandering in the land of the Kosalans has arrived at Sālā, together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. He reveals an entirely full and pure spiritual life. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ sālaṁ anuppatto. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ; kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶3] Then the brahmins and householders of Sālā went up to the Buddha. Before sitting down to one side, some bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent. Seated to one side they said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavato santike nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ:
[¶4] “What is the cause, worthy Gotama, what is the reason why some sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell? And what is the cause, worthy Gotama, what is the reason why some sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm?”
> Pali: “ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu, ko paccayo, yena m’idhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti? Ko pana, bho gotama, hetu, ko paccayo, yena m’idhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjantī”ti?
[¶5] “Unprincipled and immoral conduct is the reason why some sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. Principled and moral conduct is the reason why some sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.”
> Pali: “Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu kho, gahapatayo, evam’idhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti. Dhammacariyāsamacariyāhetu kho, gahapatayo, evam’idhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjantī”ti.
[¶6] “We don’t understand the detailed meaning of the worthy Gotama’s brief statement. Worthy Gotama, please teach us this matter in detail so we can understand the meaning.”
> Pali: “Na kho mayaṁ imassa bhoto gotamassa saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāma. Sādhu no bhavaṁ gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetu, yathā mayaṁ imassa bhoto gotamassa saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, vitthārena atthaṁ ājāneyyāmā”ti.
[¶7] “Well then, householders, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, gahapatayo, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, worthy sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶9] “Householders, unprincipled and immoral conduct is threefold by way of body, fourfold by way of speech, and threefold by way of mind.
> Pali: “Tividhaṁ kho, gahapatayo, kāyena adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti, catubbidhaṁ vācāya adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti, tividhaṁ manasā adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti.
[¶10] And how is unprincipled and immoral conduct threefold by way of body? It’s when someone kills living creatures. They’re violent, bloody-handed, a hardened killer, merciless to living beings.
> Pali: Kathañca, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ kāyena adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco pāṇātipātī hoti, luddo lohitapāṇi hatappahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu.
[¶11] They steal. With the intention to commit theft, they take the wealth or belongings of others from village or wilderness.
> Pali: Adinnādāyī kho pana hoti. Yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ, gāmagataṁ vā araññagataṁ vā, taṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādātā hoti.
[¶12] They commit sexual misconduct. They have relations with women who have their mother, father, both mother and father, brother, sister, relatives, or clan as guardian. They have relations with a woman who is protected on principle, or who has a husband, or whose violation is punishable by law, or even one who has been garlanded as a token of betrothal. This is how unprincipled and immoral conduct is threefold by way of body.
> Pali: Kāmesumicchācārī kho pana hoti. Yā tā māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sassāmikā saparidaṇḍā antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittāpi, tathārūpāsu cārittaṁ āpajjitā hoti. Evaṁ kho, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ kāyena adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti.
[¶13] And how is unprincipled and immoral conduct fourfold by way of speech? It’s when someone lies. They’re summoned to a council, an assembly, a family meeting, a guild, or to the royal court, and asked to bear witness: ‘Please, my friend, say what you know.’ Not knowing, they say ‘I know.’ Knowing, they say ‘I don’t know.’ Not seeing, they say ‘I see.’ And seeing, they say ‘I don’t see.’ So they deliberately lie for the sake of themselves or another, or for some trivial worldly reason.
> Pali: Kathañca, gahapatayo, catubbidhaṁ vācāya adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco musāvādī hoti. Sabhāgato vā parisāgato vā, ñātimajjhagato vā pūgamajjhagato vā rājakulamajjhagato vā, abhinīto sakkhipuṭṭho: ‘ehambho purisa, yaṁ jānāsi taṁ vadehī’ti, so ajānaṁ vā āha: ‘jānāmī’ti, jānaṁ vā āha: na jānāmī’ti, ‘apassaṁ vā āha: ‘passāmī’ti, passaṁ vā āha: ‘na passāmī’ti. Iti attahetu vā parahetu vā āmisakiñcikkhahetu vā sampajānamusā bhāsitā hoti.
[¶14] They backbite. They repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. And so they divide those who are harmonious, supporting division, delighting in division, loving division, speaking words that promote division.
> Pali: Pisuṇavāco kho pana hoti. Ito sutvā amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti samaggānaṁ vā bhettā, bhinnānaṁ vā anuppadātā, vaggārāmo vaggarato vagganandī vaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶15] They speak harshly. They use the kinds of words that are cruel, nasty, hurtful, offensive, bordering on anger, not leading to immersion.
> Pali: Pharusavāco kho pana hoti. Yā sā vācā aṇḍakā kakkasā parakaṭukā parābhisajjanī kodhasāmantā asamādhisaṁvattanikā, tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶16] They talk nonsense. Their speech is untimely, and is neither factual nor beneficial. It has nothing to do with the teaching or the training. Their words have no value, and are untimely, unreasonable, rambling, and pointless. This is how unprincipled and immoral conduct is fourfold by way of speech.
> Pali: Samphappalāpī kho pana hoti. Akālavādī abhūtavādī anatthavādī adhammavādī avinayavādī. Anidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti akālena anapadesaṁ apariyantavatiṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ. Evaṁ kho, gahapatayo, catubbidhaṁ vācāya adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti.
[¶17] And how is unprincipled and immoral conduct threefold by way of mind? It’s when someone is covetous. They covet the wealth and belongings of others: ‘Oh, if only their belongings were mine!’
> Pali: Kathañca, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ manasā adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco abhijjhālu hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ taṁ abhijjhātā hoti: ‘aho vata yaṁ parassa taṁ mamassā’ti.
[¶18] They have ill will and malicious intentions: ‘May these sentient beings be killed, slaughtered, slain, destroyed, or annihilated!’
> Pali: Byāpannacitto kho pana hoti paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo: ‘ime sattā haññantu vā vajjhantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā vā ahesun’ti.
[¶19] They have wrong view. Their perspective is distorted: ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ This is how unprincipled and immoral conduct is threefold by way of mind.
> Pali: Micchādiṭṭhiko kho pana hoti viparītadassano: ‘natthi dinnaṁ natthi yiṭṭhaṁ natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko natthi paro loko, natthi mātā natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti. Evaṁ kho, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ manasā adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hoti.
[¶20] That’s how unprincipled and immoral conduct is the reason why some sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: Evaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu kho, gahapatayo, evam’idhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti.
[¶21] Householders, principled and moral conduct is threefold by way of body, fourfold by way of speech, and threefold by way of mind.
> Pali: Tividhaṁ kho, gahapatayo, kāyena dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti, catubbidhaṁ vācāya dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti, tividhaṁ manasā dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti.
[¶22] And how is principled and moral conduct threefold by way of body? It’s when someone gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings.
> Pali: Kathañca, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ kāyena dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
[¶23] They give up stealing. They don’t, with the intention to commit theft, take the wealth or belongings of others from village or wilderness.
> Pali: Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti. Yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ, gāmagataṁ vā araññagataṁ vā, taṁ nādinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādātā hoti.
[¶24] They give up sexual misconduct. They don’t have relations with women who have their mother, father, both mother and father, brother, sister, relatives, or clan as guardian. They don’t have relations with a woman who is protected on principle, or who has a husband, or whose violation is punishable by law, or even one who has been garlanded as a token of betrothal. This is how principled and moral conduct is threefold by way of body.
> Pali: Kāmesumicchācāraṁ pahāya kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti. Yā tā māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sassāmikā saparidaṇḍā antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittāpi, tathārūpāsu na cārittaṁ āpajjitā hoti. Evaṁ kho, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ kāyena dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti.
[¶25] And how is principled and moral conduct fourfold by way of speech? It’s when someone gives up lying. They’re summoned to a council, an assembly, a family meeting, a guild, or to the royal court, and asked to bear witness: ‘Please, my friend, say what you know.’ Not knowing, they say ‘I don’t know.’ Knowing, they say ‘I know.’ Not seeing, they say ‘I don’t see.’ And seeing, they say ‘I see.’ So they don’t deliberately lie for the sake of themselves or another, or for some trivial worldly reason.
> Pali: Kathañca, gahapatayo, catubbidhaṁ vācāya dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti. Sabhāgato vā parisāgato vā, ñātimajjhagato vā pūgamajjhagato vā rājakulamajjhagato vā, abhinīto sakkhipuṭṭho: ‘ehambho purisa, yaṁ jānāsi taṁ vadehī’ti, so ajānaṁ vā āha: ‘na jānāmī’ti, jānaṁ vā āha: ‘jānāmī’ti, apassaṁ vā āha: ‘na passāmī’ti, passaṁ vā āha: ‘passāmī’ti. Iti attahetu vā parahetu vā āmisakiñcikkhahetu vā na sampajānamusā bhāsitā hoti.
[¶26] They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony.
> Pali: Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā, sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā, samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶27] They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, likable, and agreeable to the people.
> Pali: Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti. Yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā—tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶28] They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. This is how principled and moral conduct is fourfold by way of speech.
> Pali: Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti. Kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ. Evaṁ kho, gahapatayo, catubbidhaṁ vācāya dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti.
[¶29] And how is principled and moral conduct threefold by way of mind? It’s when someone is not covetous. They don’t covet the wealth and belongings of others: ‘Oh, if only their belongings were mine!’
> Pali: Kathañca, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ manasā dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco anabhijjhālu hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ taṁ nābhijjhātā hoti: ‘aho vata yaṁ parassa taṁ mamassā’ti.
[¶30] They have a kind heart and loving intentions: ‘May these sentient beings live free of enmity and ill will, untroubled and happy!’
> Pali: Abyāpannacitto kho pana hoti appaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo: ‘ime sattā averā abyābajjhā anīghā sukhī attānaṁ pariharantū’ti.
[¶31] They have right view, an undistorted perspective: ‘There is meaning in giving, sacrifice, and offerings. There are fruits and results of good and bad deeds. There is an afterlife. There are such things as mother and father, and beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there are ascetics and brahmins who are rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describe the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ This is how principled and moral conduct is threefold by way of mind.
> Pali: Sammādiṭṭhiko kho pana hoti aviparītadassano: ‘atthi dinnaṁ atthi yiṭṭhaṁ atthi hutaṁ, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, atthi ayaṁ loko atthi paro loko, atthi mātā atthi pitā, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti. Evaṁ kho, gahapatayo, tividhaṁ manasā dhammacariyāsamacariyā hoti.
[¶32] This is how principled and moral conduct is the reason why some sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Evaṁ dhammacariyāsamacariyāhetu kho, gahapatayo, evam’idhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.
[¶33] Someone of principled and moral conduct might wish: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of well-to-do aristocrats!’ It’s possible that this might happen. Why is that? Because they have principled and moral conduct.
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, gahapatayo, dhammacārī samacārī: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā khattiyamahāsālānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti; ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā khattiyamahāsālānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so dhammacārī samacārī.
[¶34] Someone of principled and moral conduct might wish: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of well-to-do brahmins … well-to-do householders … the gods of the four great kings … the gods of the thirty-three … the gods of Yama … the joyful gods … the gods who love to create … the gods who control what is created by others … the gods of the Divinity’s host … the luminous gods … the gods of limited luminosity … the gods of limitless luminosity … the gods of sublime luminosity … the gods of limited beauty … the gods of limitless beauty … the gods of universal beauty … the gods of abundant fruit … the gods of Aviha … the gods of Atappa … the gods fair to see … the fair seeing gods … the gods of Akaniṭṭha … the gods of the dimension of infinite space … the gods of the dimension of infinite consciousness … the gods of the dimension of nothingness … the gods of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ It’s possible that this might happen. Why is that? Because they have principled and moral conduct.
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, gahapatayo, dhammacārī samacārī: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brāhmaṇamahāsālānaṁ …pe… gahapatimahāsālānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti; ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā gahapatimahāsālānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so dhammacārī samacārī. Ākaṅkheyya ce, gahapatayo, dhammacārī samacārī: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti; ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so dhammacārī samacārī. Ākaṅkheyya ce, gahapatayo, dhammacārī samacārī: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tāvatiṁsānaṁ devānaṁ …pe… yāmānaṁ devānaṁ … tusitānaṁ devānaṁ … nimmānaratīnaṁ devānaṁ … paranimmitavasavattīnaṁ devānaṁ … brahmakāyikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti; ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmakāyikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so dhammacārī samacārī. Ākaṅkheyya ce, gahapatayo, dhammacārī samacārī: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā ābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti; ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā ābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so dhammacārī samacārī. Ākaṅkheyya ce, gahapatayo, dhammacārī samacārī: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā parittābhānaṁ devānaṁ …pe… appamāṇābhānaṁ devānaṁ … ābhassarānaṁ devānaṁ … parittasubhānaṁ devānaṁ … appamāṇasubhānaṁ devānaṁ … subhakiṇhānaṁ devānaṁ … vehapphalānaṁ devānaṁ … avihānaṁ devānaṁ … atappānaṁ devānaṁ … sudassānaṁ devānaṁ … sudassīnaṁ devānaṁ … akaniṭṭhānaṁ devānaṁ … ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ … viññāṇañcāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ … ākiñcaññāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ … nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti; ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so dhammacārī samacārī.
[¶35] Someone of principled and moral conduct might wish: ‘If only I might realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with my own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.’ It’s possible that this might happen. Why is that? Because they have principled and moral conduct.”
> Pali: Ākaṅkheyya ce, gahapatayo, dhammacārī samacārī: ‘aho vatāhaṁ āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyan’ti; ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ so āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so dhammacārī samacārī”ti.
[¶36] When he had spoken, the brahmins and householders of Sālā said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. We go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember us as lay followers who have gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsake no bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupete saraṇaṁ gate”ti.
[¶37] > Pali: Sāleyyakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 46. MN 43 · The Great Elaboration
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/46/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/46/#p-N
[¶0] MN 43 · The Great Elaboration
> Pali: MN 43 · Mahāvedallasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then in the late afternoon, Venerable Mahākoṭṭhita came out of retreat, went to Venerable Sāriputta, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Sāriputta:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahākoṭṭhiko sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā sāriputtena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā mahākoṭṭhiko āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Reverend, they speak of ‘a witless person’. How is a witless person defined?”
> Pali: “‘Duppañño duppañño’ti, āvuso, vuccati. Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, duppaññoti vuccatī”ti?
[¶4] “Reverend, they’re called witless because they don’t understand. And what don’t they understand? They don’t understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ They’re called witless because they don’t understand.”
> Pali: “‘Nappajānāti nappajānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā duppaññoti vuccati. Kiñca nappajānāti? ‘Idaṁ dukkhan’ti nappajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti nappajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti nappajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti nappajānāti. ‘Nappajānāti nappajānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā duppaññoti vuccatī”ti.
[¶5] Saying “Good, reverend,” Mahākoṭṭhita approved and agreed with what Sāriputta said. Then he asked another question:
> Pali: “Sādhāvuso”ti kho āyasmā mahākoṭṭhiko āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ uttariṁ pañhaṁ apucchi:
[¶6] “They speak of ‘a wise person’. How is a wise person defined?”
> Pali: “‘Paññavā paññavā’ti, āvuso, vuccati. Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, paññavāti vuccatī”ti?
[¶7] “They’re called wise because they understand. And what do they understand? They understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ They’re called wise because they understand.”
> Pali: “‘Pajānāti pajānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā paññavāti vuccati. Kiñca pajānāti? ‘Idaṁ dukkhan’ti pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti pajānāti. ‘Pajānāti pajānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā paññavāti vuccatī”ti.
[¶8] “They speak of ‘consciousness’. How is consciousness defined?”
> Pali: “‘Viññāṇaṁ viññāṇan’ti, āvuso, vuccati. Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, viññāṇanti vuccatī”ti?
[¶9] “It’s called consciousness because it cognizes. And what does it cognize? It cognizes ‘pleasure’ and ‘pain’ and ‘neutral’. It’s called consciousness because it cognizes.”
> Pali: “‘Vijānāti vijānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā viññāṇanti vuccati. Kiñca vijānāti? Sukhantipi vijānāti, dukkhantipi vijānāti, adukkhamasukhantipi vijānāti. ‘Vijānāti vijānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā viññāṇanti vuccatī”ti.
[¶10] “Wisdom and consciousness— are these things mixed or separate? And can we completely disentangle them so as to describe the difference between them?”
> Pali: “Yā cāvuso, paññā yañca viññāṇaṁ— ime dhammā saṁsaṭṭhā udāhu visaṁsaṭṭhā? Labbhā ca panimesaṁ dhammānaṁ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṁ paññāpetun”ti?
[¶11] “Wisdom and consciousness— these things are mixed, not separate. And you can never completely disentangle them so as to describe the difference between them. For you understand what you cognize, and you cognize what you understand. That’s why these things are mixed, not separate. And you can never completely disentangle them so as to describe the difference between them.”
> Pali: “Yā cāvuso, paññā yañca viññāṇaṁ— ime dhammā saṁsaṭṭhā, no visaṁsaṭṭhā. Na ca labbhā imesaṁ dhammānaṁ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṁ paññāpetuṁ. Yaṁ hāvuso, pajānāti taṁ vijānāti, yaṁ vijānāti taṁ pajānāti. Tasmā ime dhammā saṁsaṭṭhā, no visaṁsaṭṭhā. Na ca labbhā imesaṁ dhammānaṁ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṁ paññāpetun”ti.
[¶12] “Wisdom and consciousness— what is the difference between these things that are mixed, not separate?”
> Pali: “Yā cāvuso, paññā yañca viññāṇaṁ— imesaṁ dhammānaṁ saṁsaṭṭhānaṁ no visaṁsaṭṭhānaṁ kiṁ nānākaraṇan”ti?
[¶13] “The difference between these things is that wisdom should be developed, while consciousness should be completely understood.”
> Pali: “Yā cāvuso, paññā yañca viññāṇaṁ— imesaṁ dhammānaṁ saṁsaṭṭhānaṁ no visaṁsaṭṭhānaṁ paññā bhāvetabbā, viññāṇaṁ pariññeyyaṁ. Idaṁ nesaṁ nānākaraṇan”ti.
[¶14] “They speak of this thing called ‘feeling’. How is feeling defined?”
> Pali: “‘Vedanā vedanā’ti, āvuso, vuccati. Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, vedanāti vuccatī”ti?
[¶15] “It’s called feeling because it feels. And what does it feel? It feels pleasure, pain, and neutral. It’s called feeling because it feels.”
> Pali: “‘Vedeti vedetī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā vedanāti vuccati. Kiñca vedeti? Sukhampi vedeti, dukkhampi vedeti, adukkhamasukhampi vedeti. ‘Vedeti vedetī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā vedanāti vuccatī”ti.
[¶16] “They speak of this thing called ‘perception’. How is perception defined?”
> Pali: “‘Saññā saññā’ti, āvuso, vuccati. Kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, saññāti vuccatī”ti?
[¶17] “It’s called perception because it perceives. And what does it perceive? It perceives blue, yellow, red, and white. It’s called perception because it perceives.”
> Pali: “‘Sañjānāti sañjānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā saññāti vuccati. Kiñca sañjānāti? Nīlakampi sañjānāti, pītakampi sañjānāti, lohitakampi sañjānāti, odātampi sañjānāti. ‘Sañjānāti sañjānātī’ti kho, āvuso, tasmā saññāti vuccatī”ti.
[¶18] “Feeling, perception, and consciousness— are these things mixed or separate? And can we completely disentangle them so as to describe the difference between them?”
> Pali: “Yā cāvuso, vedanā yā ca saññā yañca viññāṇaṁ— ime dhammā saṁsaṭṭhā udāhu visaṁsaṭṭhā? Labbhā ca panimesaṁ dhammānaṁ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṁ paññāpetun”ti?
[¶19] “Feeling, perception, and consciousness— these things are mixed, not separate. And you can never completely disentangle them so as to describe the difference between them. For you perceive what you feel, and you cognize what you perceive. That’s why these things are mixed, not separate. And you can never completely disentangle them so as to describe the difference between them.”
> Pali: “Yā cāvuso, vedanā yā ca saññā yañca viññāṇaṁ— ime dhammā saṁsaṭṭhā, no visaṁsaṭṭhā. Na ca labbhā imesaṁ dhammānaṁ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṁ paññāpetuṁ. Yaṁ hāvuso, vedeti taṁ sañjānāti, yaṁ sañjānāti taṁ vijānāti. Tasmā ime dhammā saṁsaṭṭhā no visaṁsaṭṭhā. Na ca labbhā imesaṁ dhammānaṁ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṁ paññāpetun”ti.
[¶20] “What can be known by purified mind consciousness released from the five senses?”
> Pali: “Nissaṭṭhena hāvuso, pañcahi indriyehi parisuddhena manoviññāṇena kiṁ neyyan”ti?
[¶21] “Aware that ‘space is infinite’ it can know the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’ it can know the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’ it can know the dimension of nothingness.”
> Pali: “Nissaṭṭhena, āvuso, pañcahi indriyehi parisuddhena manoviññāṇena ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ neyyaṁ, ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ neyyaṁ, ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ neyyan”ti.
[¶22] “How do you understand something that can be known?”
> Pali: “Neyyaṁ panāvuso, dhammaṁ kena pajānātī”ti?
[¶23] “You understand something that can be known with the eye of wisdom.”
> Pali: “Neyyaṁ kho, āvuso, dhammaṁ paññācakkhunā pajānātī”ti.
[¶24] “What is the goal of wisdom?”
> Pali: “Paññā panāvuso, kimatthiyā”ti?
[¶25] “The goal of wisdom is direct knowledge, complete understanding, and giving up.”
> Pali: “Paññā kho, āvuso, abhiññatthā pariññatthā pahānatthā”ti.
[¶26] “How many conditions are there for the arising of right view?”
> Pali: “Kati panāvuso, paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāyā”ti?
[¶27] “There are two conditions for the arising of right view: the voice of another and rational application of mind. These are the two conditions for the arising of right view.”
> Pali: “Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāya— parato ca ghoso, yoniso ca manasikāro. Ime kho, āvuso, dve paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāyā”ti.
[¶28] “When right view is supported by how many factors does it have freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom as its fruit and benefit?”
> Pali: “Katihi panāvuso, aṅgehi anuggahitā sammādiṭṭhi cetovimuttiphalā ca hoti cetovimuttiphalānisaṁsā ca, paññāvimuttiphalā ca hoti paññāvimuttiphalānisaṁsā cā”ti?
[¶29] “When right view is supported by five factors it has freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom as its fruit and benefit. It’s when right view is supported by ethics, learning, discussion, serenity, and discernment. When right view is supported by these five factors it has freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom as its fruit and benefit.”
> Pali: “Pañcahi kho, āvuso, aṅgehi anuggahitā sammādiṭṭhi cetovimuttiphalā ca hoti cetovimuttiphalānisaṁsā ca, paññāvimuttiphalā ca hoti paññāvimuttiphalānisaṁsā ca. Idhāvuso, sammādiṭṭhi sīlānuggahitā ca hoti, sutānuggahitā ca hoti, sākacchānuggahitā ca hoti, samathānuggahitā ca hoti, vipassanānuggahitā ca hoti. Imehi kho, āvuso, pañcahaṅgehi anuggahitā sammādiṭṭhi cetovimuttiphalā ca hoti cetovimuttiphalānisaṁsā ca, paññāvimuttiphalā ca hoti paññāvimuttiphalānisaṁsā cā”ti.
[¶30] “How many states of existence are there?”
> Pali: “Kati panāvuso, bhavā”ti?
[¶31] “Reverend, there are these three states of existence. Existence in the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm.”
> Pali: “Tayome, āvuso, bhavā— kāmabhavo, rūpabhavo, arūpabhavo”ti.
[¶32] “But how is there regeneration into a new state of existence in the future?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ panāvuso, āyatiṁ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotī”ti?
[¶33] “It’s because of sentient beings—shrouded by ignorance and fettered by craving—taking pleasure wherever they land. That’s how there is regeneration into a new state of existence in the future.”
> Pali: “Avijjānīvaraṇānaṁ kho, āvuso, sattānaṁ taṇhāsaṁyojanānaṁ tatratatrābhinandanā— evaṁ āyatiṁ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotī”ti.
[¶34] “But how is there no regeneration into a new state of existence in the future?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ panāvuso, āyatiṁ punabbhavābhinibbatti na hotī”ti?
[¶35] “It’s when ignorance fades away, knowledge arises, and craving ceases. That’s how there is no regeneration into a new state of existence in the future.”
> Pali: “Avijjāvirāgā kho, āvuso, vijjuppādā taṇhānirodhā— evaṁ āyatiṁ punabbhavābhinibbatti na hotī”ti.
[¶36] “But what, reverend, is the first absorption?”
> Pali: “Katamaṁ panāvuso, paṭhamaṁ jhānan”ti?
[¶37] “Reverend, it’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is called the first absorption.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati— idaṁ vuccati, āvuso, paṭhamaṁ jhānan”ti.
[¶38] “But how many factors does the first absorption have?”
> Pali: “Paṭhamaṁ panāvuso, jhānaṁ katiaṅgikan”ti?
[¶39] “The first absorption has five factors. When a mendicant has entered the first absorption, placing the mind, keeping it connected, rapture, bliss, and unification of mind are present. That’s how the first absorption has five factors.”
> Pali: “Paṭhamaṁ kho, āvuso, jhānaṁ pañcaṅgikaṁ. Idhāvuso, paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa bhikkhuno vitakko ca vattati, vicāro ca pīti ca sukhañca cittekaggatā ca. Paṭhamaṁ kho, āvuso, jhānaṁ evaṁ pañcaṅgikan”ti.
[¶40] “But how many factors has the first absorption given up and how many does it possess?”
> Pali: “Paṭhamaṁ panāvuso, jhānaṁ kataṅgavippahīnaṁ kataṅgasamannāgatan”ti?
[¶41] “The first absorption has given up five factors and possesses five factors. When a mendicant has entered the first absorption, sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt are given up. Placing the mind, keeping it connected, rapture, bliss, and unification of mind are present. That’s how the first absorption has given up five factors and possesses five factors.”
> Pali: “Paṭhamaṁ kho, āvuso, jhānaṁ pañcaṅgavippahīnaṁ, pañcaṅgasamannāgataṁ. Idhāvuso, paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti; vitakko ca vattati, vicāro ca pīti ca sukhañca cittekaggatā ca. Paṭhamaṁ kho, āvuso, jhānaṁ evaṁ pañcaṅgavippahīnaṁ pañcaṅgasamannāgatan”ti.
[¶42] “Reverend, these five faculties have different domains and different ranges, and don’t experience each other’s domain and range. That is, the faculties of the eye, ear, nose, tongue, and body. What do these five faculties, with their different domains and ranges, have recourse to? What experiences their domains and ranges?”
> Pali: “Pañcimāni, āvuso, indriyāni nānāvisayāni nānāgocarāni, na aññamaññassa gocaravisayaṁ paccanubhonti, seyyathidaṁ— cakkhundriyaṁ, sotindriyaṁ, ghānindriyaṁ, jivhindriyaṁ, kāyindriyaṁ. Imesaṁ kho, āvuso, pañcannaṁ indriyānaṁ nānāvisayānaṁ nānāgocarānaṁ, na aññamaññassa gocaravisayaṁ paccanubhontānaṁ, kiṁ paṭisaraṇaṁ, ko ca nesaṁ gocaravisayaṁ paccanubhotī”ti?
[¶43] “These five faculties, with their different domains and ranges, have recourse to the mind. And the mind experiences their domains and ranges.”
> Pali: “Pañcimāni, āvuso, indriyāni nānāvisayāni nānāgocarāni, na aññamaññassa gocaravisayaṁ paccanubhonti, seyyathidaṁ— cakkhundriyaṁ, sotindriyaṁ, ghānindriyaṁ, jivhindriyaṁ, kāyindriyaṁ. Imesaṁ kho, āvuso, pañcannaṁ indriyānaṁ nānāvisayānaṁ nānāgocarānaṁ, na aññamaññassa gocaravisayaṁ paccanubhontānaṁ, mano paṭisaraṇaṁ, mano ca nesaṁ gocaravisayaṁ paccanubhotī”ti.
[¶44] “These five faculties depend on what to continue?”
> Pali: “Pañcimāni, āvuso, indriyāni, seyyathidaṁ— cakkhundriyaṁ, sotindriyaṁ, ghānindriyaṁ, jivhindriyaṁ, kāyindriyaṁ. Imāni kho, āvuso, pañcindriyāni kiṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhantī”ti?
[¶45] “These five faculties depend on vitality to continue.”
> Pali: “Pañcimāni, āvuso, indriyāni, seyyathidaṁ— cakkhundriyaṁ, sotindriyaṁ, ghānindriyaṁ, jivhindriyaṁ, kāyindriyaṁ. Imāni kho, āvuso, pañcindriyāni āyuṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhantī”ti.
[¶46] “But what does vitality depend on to continue?”
> Pali: “Āyu panāvuso, kiṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī”ti?
[¶47] “Vitality depends on warmth to continue.”
> Pali: “Āyu usmaṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī”ti.
[¶48] “But what does warmth depend on to continue?”
> Pali: “Usmā panāvuso, kiṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī”ti?
[¶49] “Warmth depends on vitality to continue.”
> Pali: “Usmā āyuṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī”ti.
[¶50] “Just now I understood you to say: ‘Vitality depends on warmth to continue.’ But I also understood you to say: ‘Warmth depends on vitality to continue.’ How then should we see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: “Idāneva kho mayaṁ, āvuso, āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ evaṁ ājānāma: ‘āyu usmaṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’ti. Idāneva pana mayaṁ, āvuso, āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ evaṁ ājānāma: ‘usmā āyuṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’ti. Yathā kathaṁ panāvuso, imassa bhāsitassa attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶51] “Well then, reverend, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said. Suppose there was an oil lamp burning. The luminosity appears dependent on the flame, and the flame appears dependent on the luminosity. In the same way, vitality depends on warmth to continue, and warmth depends on vitality to continue.”
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso, upamaṁ te karissāmi; upamāyapidhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, telappadīpassa jhāyato acciṁ paṭicca ābhā paññāyati, ābhaṁ paṭicca acci paññāyati; evameva kho, āvuso, āyu usmaṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhati, usmā āyuṁ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī”ti.
[¶52] “Are the vital forces and the phenomena that are felt one and the same? Or are the vital forces one thing, and the phenomena that are felt another?”
> Pali: “Teva nu kho, āvuso, āyusaṅkhārā, te vedaniyā dhammā udāhu aññe āyusaṅkhārā aññe vedaniyā dhammā”ti?
[¶53] “The vital forces are not the same things as the phenomena that are felt. For if the vital forces and the phenomena that are felt were the same things, a mendicant who had attained the cessation of perception and feeling would not emerge from it. But because the vital forces and the phenomena that are felt are different things, a mendicant who has attained the cessation of perception and feeling can emerge from it.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso, teva āyusaṅkhārā te vedaniyā dhammā. Te ca hāvuso, āyusaṅkhārā abhaviṁsu te vedaniyā dhammā, na yidaṁ saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpannassa bhikkhuno vuṭṭhānaṁ paññāyetha. Yasmā ca kho, āvuso, aññe āyusaṅkhārā aññe vedaniyā dhammā, tasmā saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpannassa bhikkhuno vuṭṭhānaṁ paññāyatī”ti.
[¶54] “How many things must this body lose before it lies abandoned, tossed aside like an insentient log?”
> Pali: “Yadā nu kho, āvuso, imaṁ kāyaṁ kati dhammā jahanti; athāyaṁ kāyo ujjhito avakkhitto seti, yathā kaṭṭhaṁ acetanan”ti?
[¶55] “This body must lose three things before it lies abandoned, tossed aside like an insentient log: vitality, warmth, and consciousness.”
> Pali: “Yadā kho, āvuso, imaṁ kāyaṁ tayo dhammā jahanti—āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṁ; athāyaṁ kāyo ujjhito avakkhitto seti, yathā kaṭṭhaṁ acetanan”ti.
[¶56] “What’s the difference between someone who has passed away and a mendicant who has attained the cessation of perception and feeling?”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, āvuso, mato kālaṅkato, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpanno—imesaṁ kiṁ nānākaraṇan”ti?
[¶57] “When someone dies, their physical, verbal, and mental processes have ceased and stilled; their vitality is spent; their warmth is dissipated; and their faculties have disintegrated. When a mendicant has attained the cessation of perception and feeling, their physical, verbal, and mental processes have ceased and stilled. But their vitality is not spent; their warmth is not dissipated; and their faculties are very clear. That’s the difference between someone who has passed away and a mendicant who has attained the cessation of perception and feeling.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, āvuso, mato kālaṅkato tassa kāyasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, vacīsaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, āyu parikkhīṇo, usmā vūpasantā, indriyāni paribhinnāni. Yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpanno tassapi kāyasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, vacīsaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, āyu na parikkhīṇo, usmā avūpasantā, indriyāni vippasannāni. Yvāyaṁ, āvuso, mato kālaṅkato, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpanno—idaṁ nesaṁ nānākaraṇan”ti.
[¶58] “How many conditions are necessary to attain the neutral release of the heart?”
> Pali: “Kati panāvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā”ti?
[¶59] “Four conditions are necessary to attain the neutral release of the heart. With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. These four conditions are necessary to attain the neutral release of the heart.”
> Pali: “Cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho, āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā”ti.
[¶60] “How many conditions are necessary to attain the signless release of the heart?”
> Pali: “Kati panāvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā”ti?
[¶61] “Two conditions are necessary to attain the signless release of the heart: not focusing on any signs, and focusing on the signless. These two conditions are necessary to attain the signless release of the heart.”
> Pali: “Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā— sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro. Ime kho, āvuso, dve paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā”ti.
[¶62] “How many conditions are necessary to remain in the signless release of the heart?”
> Pali: “Kati panāvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā”ti?
[¶63] “Three conditions are necessary to remain in the signless release of the heart: not focusing on any signs, focusing on the signless, and a previous determination. These three conditions are necessary to remain in the signless release of the heart.”
> Pali: “Tayo kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā— sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro, pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāro. Ime kho, āvuso, tayo paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā”ti.
[¶64] “How many conditions are necessary to emerge from the signless release of the heart?”
> Pali: “Kati panāvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā vuṭṭhānāyā”ti?
[¶65] “Two conditions are necessary to emerge from the signless release of the heart: focusing on all signs, and not focusing on the signless. These two conditions are necessary to emerge from the signless release of the heart.”
> Pali: “Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā vuṭṭhānāya— sabbanimittānañca manasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā amanasikāro. Ime kho, āvuso, dve paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā vuṭṭhānāyā”ti.
[¶66] “The limitless release of the heart, and the release of the heart through nothingness, and the release of the heart through emptiness, and the signless release of the heart: do these things differ in both meaning and phrasing? Or do they mean the same thing, and differ only in the phrasing?”
> Pali: “Yā cāyaṁ, āvuso, appamāṇā cetovimutti, yā ca ākiñcaññā cetovimutti, yā ca suññatā cetovimutti, yā ca animittā cetovimutti—ime dhammā nānātthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca udāhu ekatthā byañjanameva nānan”ti?
[¶67] “There is a way in which these things differ in both meaning and phrasing. But there’s also a way in which they mean the same thing, and differ only in the phrasing.
> Pali: “Yā cāyaṁ, āvuso, appamāṇā cetovimutti, yā ca ākiñcaññā cetovimutti, yā ca suññatā cetovimutti, yā ca animittā cetovimutti—atthi kho, āvuso, pariyāyo yaṁ pariyāyaṁ āgamma ime dhammā nānātthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca; atthi ca kho, āvuso, pariyāyo yaṁ pariyāyaṁ āgamma ime dhammā ekatthā, byañjanameva nānaṁ.
[¶68] And what’s the way in which these things differ in both meaning and phrasing?
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, pariyāyo yaṁ pariyāyaṁ āgamma ime dhammā nānātthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca?
[¶69] Firstly, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion … They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing … They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. This is called the limitless release of the heart.
> Pali: Idhāvuso, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā … upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, appamāṇā cetovimutti.
[¶70] And what is the release of the heart through nothingness? It’s when a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. This is called the heart’s release through nothingness.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, ākiñcaññā cetovimutti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma natthi kiñcīti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, ākiñcaññā cetovimutti.
[¶71] And what is the release of the heart through emptiness? It’s when a mendicant has gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut, and reflects like this: ‘This is empty of a self or what belongs to a self.’ This is called the release of the heart through emptiness.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, suññatā cetovimutti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘suññamidaṁ attena vā attaniyena vā’ti. Ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, suññatā cetovimutti.
[¶72] And what is the signless release of the heart? It’s when a mendicant, not focusing on any signs, enters and remains in the signless immersion of the heart. This is called the signless release of the heart.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, animittā cetovimutti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sabbanimittānaṁ amanasikārā animittaṁ cetosamādhiṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccatāvuso, animittā cetovimutti.
[¶73] This is the way in which these things differ in both meaning and phrasing.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, āvuso, pariyāyo yaṁ pariyāyaṁ āgamma ime dhammā nānātthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca.
[¶74] And what’s the way in which they mean the same thing, and differ only in the phrasing?
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, pariyāyo yaṁ pariyāyaṁ āgamma ime dhammā ekatthā byañjanameva nānaṁ?
[¶75] Greed, hate, and delusion are makers of limits. A mendicant who has ended the defilements has given these up, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, and obliterated them, so they are unable to arise in the future. The unshakable release of the heart is said to be the best kind of limitless release of the heart. That unshakable release of the heart is empty of greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Rāgo kho, āvuso, pamāṇakaraṇo, doso pamāṇakaraṇo, moho pamāṇakaraṇo. Te khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Yāvatā kho, āvuso, appamāṇā cetovimuttiyo, akuppā tāsaṁ cetovimutti aggamakkhāyati. Sā kho panākuppā cetovimutti suññā rāgena, suññā dosena, suññā mohena.
[¶76] Greed is something, hate is something, and delusion is something. A mendicant who has ended the defilements has given these up, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, and obliterated them, so they are unable to arise in the future. The unshakable release of the heart is said to be the best kind of release of the heart through nothingness. That unshakable release of the heart is empty of greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Rāgo kho, āvuso, kiñcano, doso kiñcano, moho kiñcano. Te khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Yāvatā kho, āvuso, ākiñcaññā cetovimuttiyo, akuppā tāsaṁ cetovimutti aggamakkhāyati. Sā kho panākuppā cetovimutti suññā rāgena, suññā dosena, suññā mohena.
[¶77] Greed, hate, and delusion are makers of signs. A mendicant who has ended the defilements has given these up, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, and obliterated them, so they are unable to arise in the future. The unshakable release of the heart is said to be the best kind of signless release of the heart. That unshakable release of the heart is empty of greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Rāgo kho, āvuso, nimittakaraṇo, doso nimittakaraṇo, moho nimittakaraṇo. Te khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Yāvatā kho, āvuso, animittā cetovimuttiyo, akuppā tāsaṁ cetovimutti aggamakkhāyati. Sā kho panākuppā cetovimutti suññā rāgena, suññā dosena, suññā mohena.
[¶78] This is the way in which they mean the same thing, and differ only in the phrasing.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, āvuso, pariyāyo yaṁ pariyāyaṁ āgamma ime dhammā ekatthā byañjanameva nānan”ti.
[¶79] That is what Venerable Sāriputta said. Satisfied, Venerable Mahākoṭṭhita approved what Sāriputta said.
> Pali: Idamavocāyasmā sāriputto. Attamano āyasmā mahākoṭṭhiko āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶80] > Pali: Mahāvedallasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 47. MN 44 · The Shorter Elaboration
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/47/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/47/#p-N
[¶0] MN 44 · The Shorter Elaboration
> Pali: MN 44 · Cūḷavedallasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Then the layman Visākha went to see the nun Dhammadinnā, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to her:
> Pali: Atha kho visākho upāsako yena dhammadinnā bhikkhunī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā dhammadinnaṁ bhikkhuniṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho visākho upāsako dhammadinnaṁ bhikkhuniṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Ma’am, they speak of this thing called ‘substantial reality’. What is this substantial reality that the Buddha spoke of?”
> Pali: “‘sakkāyo sakkāyo’ti, ayye, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, ayye, sakkāyo vutto bhagavatā”ti?
[¶4] “Visākha, the Buddha said that these five grasping aggregates are substantial reality. That is, the grasping aggregates of form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. The Buddha said that these five grasping aggregates are substantial reality.”
> Pali: “Pañca kho ime, āvuso visākha, upādānakkhandhā sakkāyo vutto bhagavatā, seyyathidaṁ—rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Ime kho, āvuso visākha, pañcupādānakkhandhā sakkāyo vutto bhagavatā”ti.
[¶5] Saying “Good, ma’am,” Visākha approved and agreed with what Dhammadinnā said. Then he asked another question:
> Pali: “Sādhayye”ti kho visākho upāsako dhammadinnāya bhikkhuniyā bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā dhammadinnaṁ bhikkhuniṁ uttariṁ pañhaṁ apucchi:
[¶6] “Ma’am, they speak of this thing called ‘the origin of substantial reality’. What is the origin of substantial reality that the Buddha spoke of?”
> Pali: “‘sakkāyasamudayo sakkāyasamudayo’ti, ayye, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, ayye, sakkāyasamudayo vutto bhagavatā”ti?
[¶7] “It’s the craving that leads to future lives, mixed up with relishing and greed, taking pleasure there wherever it alights. That is, craving for sensual pleasures, craving for continued existence, and craving for nonexistence. The Buddha said that this is the origin of substantial reality.”
> Pali: “Yāyaṁ, āvuso visākha, taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, seyyathidaṁ— kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā; ayaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyasamudayo vutto bhagavatā”ti.
[¶8] “Ma’am, they speak of this thing called ‘the cessation of substantial reality’. What is the cessation of substantial reality that the Buddha spoke of?”
> Pali: “‘Sakkāyanirodho sakkāyanirodho’ti, ayye, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, ayye, sakkāyanirodho vutto bhagavatā”ti?
[¶9] “It’s the fading away and cessation of that very same craving with no residue left behind; giving it away, letting it go, releasing it, and not clinging to it. The Buddha said that this is the cessation of substantial reality.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, āvuso visākha, tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo; ayaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyanirodho vutto bhagavatā”ti.
[¶10] “Ma’am, they speak of the practice that leads to the cessation of substantial reality. What is the practice that leads to the cessation of substantial reality that the Buddha spoke of?”
> Pali: “‘Sakkāyanirodhagāminī paṭipadā sakkāyanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti, ayye, vuccati. Katamā nu kho, ayye, sakkāyanirodhagāminī paṭipadā vuttā bhagavatā”ti?
[¶11] “The practice that leads to the cessation of substantial reality that the Buddha spoke of is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.”
> Pali: “Ayameva kho, āvuso visākha, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo sakkāyanirodhagāminī paṭipadā vuttā bhagavatā, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhī”ti.
[¶12] “But ma’am, is that grasping the exact same thing as the five grasping aggregates? Or is grasping one thing and the five grasping aggregates another?”
> Pali: “Taññeva nu kho, ayye, upādānaṁ te pañcupādānakkhandhā udāhu aññatra pañcahupādānakkhandhehi upādānan”ti?
[¶13] “That grasping is not the exact same thing as the five grasping aggregates. Nor is grasping one thing and the five grasping aggregates another. The desire and greed for the five grasping aggregates is the grasping there.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso visākha, taññeva upādānaṁ te pañcupādānakkhandhā, nāpi aññatra pañcahupādānakkhandhehi upādānaṁ. Yo kho, āvuso visākha, pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taṁ tattha upādānan”ti.
[¶14] “But ma’am, how does substantialist view come about?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ panāyye, sakkāyadiṭṭhi hotī”ti?
[¶15] “It’s when an unlearned ordinary person has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. They regard feeling … perception … choices … consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. That’s how substantialist view comes about.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso visākha, assutavā puthujjano, ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto, sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto, rūpaṁ attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, attani vā rūpaṁ, rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Vedanaṁ …pe… saññaṁ … saṅkhāre … viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati, viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, attani vā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Evaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyadiṭṭhi hotī”ti.
[¶16] “But ma’am, how does substantialist view not come about?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ panāyye, sakkāyadiṭṭhi na hotī”ti?
[¶17] “It’s when a learned noble disciple has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. They don’t regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. They don’t regard feeling … perception … choices … consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. That’s how substantialist view does not come about.”
> Pali: “Idhāvuso visākha, sutavā ariyasāvako, ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto, sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto, na rūpaṁ attato samanupassati, na rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, na attani vā rūpaṁ, na rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Na vedanaṁ …pe… na saññaṁ … na saṅkhāre …pe… na viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati, na viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, na attani vā viññāṇaṁ, na viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Evaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyadiṭṭhi na hotī”ti.
[¶18] “But ma’am, what is the noble eightfold path?”
> Pali: “Katamo panāyye, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo”ti?
[¶19] “It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.”
> Pali: “Ayameva kho, āvuso visākha, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhī”ti.
[¶20] “But ma’am, is the noble eightfold path conditioned or unconditioned?”
> Pali: “Ariyo panāyye, aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅkhato udāhu asaṅkhato”ti?
[¶21] “The noble eightfold path is conditioned.”
> Pali: “Ariyo kho, āvuso visākha, aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅkhato”ti.
[¶22] “Are the three spectrums of practice included in the noble eightfold path? Or is the noble eightfold path included in the three spectrums of practice?”
> Pali: “Ariyena nu kho, ayye, aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena tayo khandhā saṅgahitā udāhu tīhi khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito”ti?
[¶23] “The three spectrums of practice are not included in the noble eightfold path. Rather, the noble eightfold path is included in the three spectrums of practice. Right speech, right action, and right livelihood: these things are included in the spectrum of ethics. Right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion: these things are included in the spectrum of immersion. Right view and right purpose: these things are included in the spectrum of wisdom.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso visākha, ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena tayo khandhā saṅgahitā; tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito. Yā cāvuso visākha, sammāvācā yo ca sammākammanto yo ca sammāājīvo ime dhammā sīlakkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yo ca sammāvāyāmo yā ca sammāsati yo ca sammāsamādhi ime dhammā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yā ca sammādiṭṭhi yo ca sammāsaṅkappo, ime dhammā paññākkhandhe saṅgahitā”ti.
[¶24] “But ma’am, what is immersion? What things are the bases of immersion? What things are the prerequisites for immersion? What is the development of immersion?”
> Pali: “Katamo panāyye, samādhi, katame dhammā samādhinimittā, katame dhammā samādhiparikkhārā, katamā samādhibhāvanā”ti?
[¶25] “Unification of the mind is immersion. The four kinds of mindfulness meditation are the bases for immersion. The four right efforts are the prerequisites for immersion. The cultivation, development, and making much of these very same things is the development of immersion.”
> Pali: “Yā kho, āvuso visākha, cittassa ekaggatā ayaṁ samādhi; cattāro satipaṭṭhānā samādhinimittā; cattāro sammappadhānā samādhiparikkhārā. Yā tesaṁyeva dhammānaṁ āsevanā bhāvanā bahulīkammaṁ, ayaṁ ettha samādhibhāvanā”ti.
[¶26] “How many processes are there?”
> Pali: “Kati panāyye, saṅkhārā”ti?
[¶27] “There are these three processes. The physical process, the verbal process, and the mental process.”
> Pali: “Tayome, āvuso visākha, saṅkhārā— kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīsaṅkhāro, cittasaṅkhāro”ti.
[¶28] “But ma’am, what is the physical process? What’s the verbal process? What’s the mental process?”
> Pali: “Katamo panāyye, kāyasaṅkhāro, katamo vacīsaṅkhāro, katamo cittasaṅkhāro”ti?
[¶29] “Breathing is a physical process. Placing the mind and keeping it connected are a verbal process. Perception and feeling are a mental process.”
> Pali: “Assāsapassāsā kho, āvuso visākha, kāyasaṅkhāro, vitakkavicārā vacīsaṅkhāro, saññā ca vedanā ca cittasaṅkhāro”ti.
[¶30] “But ma’am, why is breathing a physical process? Why are placing the mind and keeping it connected a verbal process? Why are perception and feeling a mental process?”
> Pali: “Kasmā panāyye, assāsapassāsā kāyasaṅkhāro, kasmā vitakkavicārā vacīsaṅkhāro, kasmā saññā ca vedanā ca cittasaṅkhāro”ti?
[¶31] “Breathing is physical. It’s tied up with the body, that’s why breathing is a physical process. First you place the mind and keep it connected, then you break into speech. That’s why placing the mind and keeping it connected are a verbal process. Perception and feeling are mental. They’re tied up with the mind, that’s why perception and feeling are a mental process.”
> Pali: “Assāsapassāsā kho, āvuso visākha, kāyikā ete dhammā kāyappaṭibaddhā, tasmā assāsapassāsā kāyasaṅkhāro. Pubbe kho, āvuso visākha, vitakketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṁ bhindati, tasmā vitakkavicārā vacīsaṅkhāro. Saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā ete dhammā cittappaṭibaddhā, tasmā saññā ca vedanā ca cittasaṅkhāro”ti.
[¶32] “But ma’am, how does someone attain the cessation of perception and feeling?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ panāyye, saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpatti hotī”ti?
[¶33] “A mendicant who is entering such an attainment does not think: ‘I will enter the cessation of perception and feeling’ or ‘I am entering the cessation of perception and feeling’ or ‘I have entered the cessation of perception and feeling.’ Rather, their mind has been previously developed so as to lead to such a state.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso visākha, saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajjantassa bhikkhuno evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajjissan’ti vā, ‘ahaṁ saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajjāmī’ti vā, ‘ahaṁ saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpanno’ti vā. Atha khvāssa pubbeva tathā cittaṁ bhāvitaṁ hoti yaṁ taṁ tathattāya upanetī”ti.
[¶34] “But ma’am, which process ceases first for a mendicant who is entering the cessation of perception and feeling: physical, verbal, or mental?”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajjantassa panāyye, bhikkhuno katame dhammā paṭhamaṁ nirujjhanti—yadi vā kāyasaṅkhāro, yadi vā vacīsaṅkhāro, yadi vā cittasaṅkhāro”ti?
[¶35] “The verbal process ceases first, then physical, then mental.”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajjantassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno paṭhamaṁ nirujjhati vacīsaṅkhāro, tato kāyasaṅkhāro, tato cittasaṅkhāro”ti.
[¶36] “But ma’am, how does someone emerge from the cessation of perception and feeling?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ panāyye, saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṁ hotī”ti?
[¶37] “A mendicant who is emerging from such an attainment does not think: ‘I will emerge from the cessation of perception and feeling’ or ‘I am emerging from the cessation of perception and feeling’ or ‘I have emerged from the cessation of perception and feeling.’ Rather, their mind has been previously developed so as to lead to such a state.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso visākha, saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahantassa bhikkhuno evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahissan’ti vā, ‘ahaṁ saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahāmī’ti vā, ‘ahaṁ saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhito’ti vā. Atha khvāssa pubbeva tathā cittaṁ bhāvitaṁ hoti yaṁ taṁ tathattāya upanetī”ti.
[¶38] “But ma’am, which process arises first for a mendicant who is emerging from the cessation of perception and feeling: physical, verbal, or mental?”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahantassa panāyye, bhikkhuno katame dhammā paṭhamaṁ uppajjanti—yadi vā kāyasaṅkhāro, yadi vā vacīsaṅkhāro, yadi vā cittasaṅkhāro”ti?
[¶39] “The mental process arises first, then physical, then verbal.”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahantassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno paṭhamaṁ uppajjati cittasaṅkhāro, tato kāyasaṅkhāro, tato vacīsaṅkhāro”ti.
[¶40] “But ma’am, when a mendicant has emerged from the attainment of the cessation of perception and feeling, how many kinds of contact do they experience?”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhitaṁ panāyye, bhikkhuṁ kati phassā phusantī”ti?
[¶41] “They experience three kinds of contact: emptiness, signless, and undirected contacts.”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhitaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuṁ tayo phassā phusanti—suññato phasso, animitto phasso, appaṇihito phasso”ti.
[¶42] “But ma’am, when a mendicant has emerged from the attainment of the cessation of perception and feeling, what does their mind slant, slope, and incline to?”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa panāyye, bhikkhuno kiṁninnaṁ cittaṁ hoti kiṁpoṇaṁ kiṁpabbhāran”ti?
[¶43] “Their mind slants, slopes, and inclines to seclusion.”
> Pali: “Saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno vivekaninnaṁ cittaṁ hoti, vivekapoṇaṁ vivekapabbhāran”ti.
[¶44] “But ma’am, how many feelings are there?”
> Pali: “Kati panāyye, vedanā”ti?
[¶45] “There are three feelings: pleasant, painful, and neutral feeling.”
> Pali: “Tisso kho imā, āvuso visākha, vedanā— sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā”ti.
[¶46] “What are these three feelings?”
> Pali: “Katamā panāyye, sukhā vedanā, katamā dukkhā vedanā, katamā adukkhamasukhā vedanā”ti?
[¶47] “Anything felt physically or mentally as pleasant or enjoyable. This is pleasant feeling. Anything felt physically or mentally as painful or unpleasant. This is painful feeling. Anything felt physically or mentally as neither pleasurable nor painful. This is neutral feeling.”
> Pali: “Yaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, kāyikaṁ vā cetasikaṁ vā sukhaṁ sātaṁ vedayitaṁ— ayaṁ sukhā vedanā. Yaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, kāyikaṁ vā cetasikaṁ vā dukkhaṁ asātaṁ vedayitaṁ— ayaṁ dukkhā vedanā. Yaṁ kho, āvuso visākha, kāyikaṁ vā cetasikaṁ vā neva sātaṁ nāsātaṁ vedayitaṁ— ayaṁ adukkhamasukhā vedanā”ti.
[¶48] “What is pleasant and what is painful regarding each of the three feelings?”
> Pali: “Sukhā panāyye, vedanā kiṁsukhā kiṁdukkhā, dukkhā vedanā kiṁsukhā kiṁdukkhā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā kiṁsukhā kiṁdukkhā”ti?
[¶49] “Pleasant feeling is pleasant when it remains and painful when it perishes. Painful feeling is painful when it remains and pleasant when it perishes. Neutral feeling is pleasant in the presence of knowledge, and painful in the presence of ignorance.”
> Pali: “Sukhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā; dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā; adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā”ti.
[¶50] “What underlying tendencies underlie each of the three feelings?”
> Pali: “Sukhāya panāyye, vedanāya kiṁ anusayo anuseti, dukkhāya vedanāya kiṁ anusayo anuseti, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya kiṁ anusayo anusetī”ti?
[¶51] “The underlying tendency for greed underlies pleasant feeling. The underlying tendency for aversion underlies painful feeling. The underlying tendency for ignorance underlies neutral feeling.”
> Pali: “Sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya rāgānusayo anuseti, dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anuseti, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo anusetī”ti.
[¶52] “Do these underlying tendencies always underlie these feelings?”
> Pali: “Sabbāya nu kho, ayye, sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anuseti, sabbāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anuseti, sabbāya adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo anusetī”ti?
[¶53] “No, they do not.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso visākha, sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anuseti, na sabbāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anuseti, na sabbāya adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo anusetī”ti.
[¶54] “What should be given up in regard to each of these three feelings?”
> Pali: “Sukhāya panāyye, vedanāya kiṁ pahātabbaṁ, dukkhāya vedanāya kiṁ pahātabbaṁ, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya kiṁ pahātabban”ti?
[¶55] “The underlying tendency to greed should be given up when it comes to pleasant feeling. The underlying tendency to aversion should be given up when it comes to painful feeling. The underlying tendency to ignorance should be given up when it comes to neutral feeling.”
> Pali: “Sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya rāgānusayo pahātabbo, dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo pahātabbo, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo pahātabbo”ti.
[¶56] “Should these underlying tendencies be given up regarding all instances of these feelings?”
> Pali: “Sabbāya nu kho, ayye, sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo pahātabbo, sabbāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo pahātabbo, sabbāya adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo pahātabbo”ti?
[¶57] “No, not in all instances. Take a mendicant who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. With this they give up greed, and the underlying tendency to greed does not lie within that. And take a mendicant who reflects: ‘Oh, when will I enter and remain in the same dimension that the noble ones enter and remain in today?’ Nursing such a longing for the supreme liberations gives rise to sadness due to longing. With this they give up aversion, and the underlying tendency to aversion does not lie within that. Take a mendicant who, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. With this they give up ignorance, and the underlying tendency to ignorance does not lie within that.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso visākha, sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo pahātabbo, na sabbāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo pahātabbo, na sabbāya adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo pahātabbo. Idhāvuso visākha, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Rāgaṁ tena pajahati, na tattha rāgānusayo anuseti. Idhāvuso visākha, bhikkhu iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘kudāssu nāmāhaṁ tadāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharissāmi yadariyā etarahi āyatanaṁ upasampajja viharantī’ti? Iti anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṁ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati pihāppaccayā domanassaṁ. Paṭighaṁ tena pajahati, na tattha paṭighānusayo anuseti. Idhāvuso visākha, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā, dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Avijjaṁ tena pajahati, na tattha avijjānusayo anusetī”ti.
[¶58] “But ma’am, what is the counterpart of pleasant feeling?”
> Pali: “Sukhāya panāyye, vedanāya kiṁ paṭibhāgo”ti?
[¶59] “Painful feeling.”
> Pali: “Sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya dukkhā vedanā paṭibhāgo”ti.
[¶60] “What is the counterpart of painful feeling?”
> Pali: “Dukkhāya pannāyye, vedanāya kiṁ paṭibhāgo”ti?
[¶61] “Pleasant feeling.”
> Pali: “Dukkhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya sukhā vedanā paṭibhāgo”ti.
[¶62] “What is the counterpart of neutral feeling?”
> Pali: “Adukkhamasukhāya panāyye, vedanāya kiṁ paṭibhāgo”ti?
[¶63] “Ignorance.”
> Pali: “Adukkhamasukhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya avijjā paṭibhāgo”ti.
[¶64] “What is the counterpart of ignorance?”
> Pali: “Avijjāya panāyye, kiṁ paṭibhāgo”ti?
[¶65] “Knowledge.”
> Pali: “Avijjāya kho, āvuso visākha, vijjā paṭibhāgo”ti.
[¶66] “What is the counterpart of knowledge?”
> Pali: “Vijjāya panāyye, kiṁ paṭibhāgo”ti?
[¶67] “Freedom.”
> Pali: “Vijjāya kho, āvuso visākha, vimutti paṭibhāgo”ti.
[¶68] “What is the counterpart of freedom?”
> Pali: “Vimuttiyā panāyye, kiṁ paṭibhāgo”ti?
[¶69] “Extinguishment.”
> Pali: “Vimuttiyā kho, āvuso visākha, nibbānaṁ paṭibhāgo”ti.
[¶70] “What is the counterpart of extinguishment?”
> Pali: “Nibbānassa panāyye, kiṁ paṭibhāgo”ti?
[¶71] “Your question goes too far, Visākha. You weren’t able to grasp the limit of questioning. For extinguishment is the objective, destination, and culmination of the spiritual life. If you wish, go to the Buddha and ask him this question. You should remember it in line with his answer.”
> Pali: “Accayāsi, āvuso visākha, pañhaṁ, nāsakkhi pañhānaṁ pariyantaṁ gahetuṁ. Nibbānogadhañhi, āvuso visākha, brahmacariyaṁ, nibbānaparāyanaṁ nibbānapariyosānaṁ. Ākaṅkhamāno ca tvaṁ, āvuso visākha, bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ puccheyyāsi, yathā ca te bhagavā byākaroti tathā naṁ dhāreyyāsī”ti.
[¶72] And then the layman Visākha approved and agreed with what the nun Dhammadinnā said. He rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled her, keeping her on his right. Then he went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and informed the Buddha of all they had discussed.
> Pali: Atha kho visākho upāsako dhammadinnāya bhikkhuniyā bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā dhammadinnaṁ bhikkhuniṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho visākho upāsako yāvatako ahosi dhammadinnāya bhikkhuniyā saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ bhagavato ārocesi.
[¶73] When he had spoken, the Buddha said to him, “The nun Dhammadinnā is astute, Visākha, she has great wisdom. If you came to me and asked this question, I would answer it in exactly the same way as the nun Dhammadinnā. That is what it means, and that’s how you should remember it.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā visākhaṁ upāsakaṁ etadavoca: “paṇḍitā, visākha, dhammadinnā bhikkhunī, mahāpaññā, visākha, dhammadinnā bhikkhunī. Mañcepi tvaṁ, visākha, etamatthaṁ puccheyyāsi, ahampi taṁ evamevaṁ byākareyyaṁ, yathā taṁ dhammadinnāya bhikkhuniyā byākataṁ. Eso cevetassa attho. Evañca naṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶74] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the layman Visākha approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano visākho upāsako bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶75] > Pali: Cūḷavedallasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 48. MN 45 · The Shorter Discourse on Taking Up Practices
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/48/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/48/#p-N
[¶0] MN 45 · The Shorter Discourse on Taking Up Practices
> Pali: MN 45 · Cūḷadhammasamādānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, there are these four ways of taking up practices. What four? There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain. There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain. There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure. There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure.
> Pali: “cattārimāni, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānāni. Katamāni cattāri? Atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ; atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ; atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ; atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ.
[¶4] And what is the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain? There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘There’s nothing wrong with sensual pleasures.’ They throw themselves into sensual pleasures, cavorting with female wanderers with jeweled bands in their hair. They say, ‘What future danger do those ascetics and brahmins see in sensual pleasures that they speak of giving up sensual pleasures, and advocate the complete understanding of sensual pleasures? Pleasant is the touch of this female wanderer’s arm, tender, soft, and downy!’ And they throw themselves into sensual pleasures. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. And there they feel painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings. They say, ‘This is that future danger that those ascetics and brahmins saw. For it is because of sensual pleasures that I’m feeling painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings.’
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ? Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi kāmesu doso’ti. Te kāmesu pātabyataṁ āpajjanti. Te kho moḷibaddhāhi paribbājikāhi paricārenti. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁsu nāma te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kāmesu anāgatabhayaṁ sampassamānā kāmānaṁ pahānamāhaṁsu, kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapenti? Sukho imissā paribbājikāya taruṇāya mudukāya lomasāya bāhāya samphasso’ti te kāmesu pātabyataṁ āpajjanti. Te kāmesu pātabyataṁ āpajjitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti. Te tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘idaṁ kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kāmesu anāgatabhayaṁ sampassamānā kāmānaṁ pahānamāhaṁsu, kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapenti, ime hi mayaṁ kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayāmā’ti.
[¶5] Suppose that in the last month of summer a camel’s foot creeper pod were to burst open and a seed were to fall at the root of a sal tree. Then the deity haunting that sal tree would become apprehensive and nervous. But their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin—deities of the parks, forests, trees, and those who haunt the herbs, grass, and big trees—would come together to reassure them, ‘Do not fear, sir, do not fear! Hopefully that seed will be swallowed by a peacock, or eaten by a deer, or burnt by a forest fire, or picked up by a lumberjack, or eaten by termites, or it may not even be fertile.’ But none of these things happened. And the seed was fertile, so that when the monsoon clouds soaked it with rain, it sprouted. And the creeper wound its tender, soft, and downy tendrils around that sal tree. Then the deity thought, ‘What future danger did my friends see when they said: “Do not fear, sir, do not fear! Hopefully that seed will be swallowed by a peacock, or eaten by a deer, or burnt by a forest fire, or picked up by a lumberjack, or eaten by termites, or it may not even be fertile.” Pleasant is the touch of this creeper’s tender, soft, and downy tendrils.’ Then the creeper enfolded the sal tree, made a canopy over it, draped a curtain around it, and split apart all the main branches. Then the deity thought, ‘This is the future danger that my friends saw! It’s because of that camel’s foot creeper seed that I’m feeling painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gimhānaṁ pacchime māse māluvāsipāṭikā phaleyya. Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, māluvābījaṁ aññatarasmiṁ sālamūle nipateyya. Atha kho, bhikkhave, yā tasmiṁ sāle adhivatthā devatā sā bhītā saṁviggā santāsaṁ āpajjeyya. Atha kho, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ sāle adhivatthāya devatāya mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā ārāmadevatā vanadevatā rukkhadevatā osadhitiṇavanappatīsu adhivatthā devatā saṅgamma samāgamma evaṁ samassāseyyuṁ: ‘mā bhavaṁ bhāyi, mā bhavaṁ bhāyi; appeva nāmetaṁ māluvābījaṁ moro vā gileyya, mago vā khādeyya, davaḍāho vā ḍaheyya, vanakammikā vā uddhareyyuṁ, upacikā vā uṭṭhaheyyuṁ, abījaṁ vā panassā’ti. Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, māluvābījaṁ neva moro gileyya, na mago khādeyya, na davaḍāho ḍaheyya, na vanakammikā uddhareyyuṁ, na upacikā uṭṭhaheyyuṁ, bījañca panassa taṁ pāvussakena meghena abhippavuṭṭhaṁ sammadeva viruheyya. Sāssa māluvālatā taruṇā mudukā lomasā vilambinī, sā taṁ sālaṁ upaniseveyya. Atha kho, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ sāle adhivatthāya devatāya evamassa: ‘kiṁsu nāma te bhonto mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā ārāmadevatā vanadevatā rukkhadevatā osadhitiṇavanappatīsu adhivatthā devatā māluvābīje anāgatabhayaṁ sampassamānā saṅgamma samāgamma evaṁ samassāsesuṁ: “mā bhavaṁ bhāyi mā bhavaṁ bhāyi, appeva nāmetaṁ māluvābījaṁ moro vā gileyya, mago vā khādeyya, davaḍāho vā ḍaheyya, vanakammikā vā uddhareyyuṁ, upacikā vā uṭṭhaheyyuṁ, abījaṁ vā panassā”ti; sukho imissā māluvālatāya taruṇāya mudukāya lomasāya vilambiniyā samphasso’ti. Sā taṁ sālaṁ anuparihareyya. Sā taṁ sālaṁ anupariharitvā upari viṭabhiṁ kareyya. Upari viṭabhiṁ karitvā oghanaṁ janeyya. Oghanaṁ janetvā ye tassa sālassa mahantā mahantā khandhā te padāleyya. Atha kho, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ sāle adhivatthāya devatāya evamassa: ‘idaṁ kho te bhonto mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā ārāmadevatā vanadevatā rukkhadevatā osadhitiṇavanappatīsu adhivatthā devatā māluvābīje anāgatabhayaṁ sampassamānā saṅgamma samāgamma evaṁ samassāsesuṁ: “mā bhavaṁ bhāyi mā bhavaṁ bhāyi, appeva nāmetaṁ māluvābījaṁ moro vā gileyya, mago vā khādeyya, davaḍāho vā ḍaheyya, vanakammikā vā uddhareyyuṁ, upacikā vā uṭṭhaheyyuṁ abījaṁ vā panassā”ti. Yañcāhaṁ māluvābījahetu dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayāmī’ti.
[¶6] In the same way, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘There’s nothing wrong with sensual pleasures’ … This is called the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, santi eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino ‘natthi kāmesu doso’ti. Te kāmesu pātabyataṁ āpajjanti. Te moḷibaddhāhi paribbājikāhi paricārenti. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁsu nāma te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kāmesu anāgatabhayaṁ sampassamānā kāmānaṁ pahānamāhaṁsu, kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapenti? Sukho imissā paribbājikāya taruṇāya mudukāya lomasāya bāhāya samphasso’ti. Te kāmesu pātabyataṁ āpajjanti. Te kāmesu pātabyataṁ āpajjitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti. Te tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘idaṁ kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kāmesu anāgatabhayaṁ sampassamānā kāmānaṁ pahānamāhaṁsu, kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññapenti. Ime hi mayaṁ kāmahetu kāmanidānaṁ dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayāmā’ti. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ.
[¶7] And what is the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain? It’s when someone goes naked, ignoring conventions. They lick their hands, and don’t come or wait when called. They don’t consent to food brought to them, or food prepared on their behalf, or an invitation for a meal. They don’t receive anything from a pot or bowl; or from someone who keeps sheep, or who has a weapon or a shovel in their home; or where a couple is eating; or where there is a woman who is pregnant, breastfeeding, or who lives with a man; or where there’s a hound waiting or flies buzzing. They accept no fish or meat or beer or wine, and drink no fermented gruel. They go to just one house for alms, taking just one mouthful, or two houses and two mouthfuls, up to seven houses and seven mouthfuls. They feed on one saucer a day, two saucers a day, up to seven saucers a day. They eat once a day, once every second day, up to once a week, and so on, even up to once a fortnight. They live committed to the practice of eating food at set intervals.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco acelako hoti muttācāro hatthāpalekhano, naehibhaddantiko, natiṭṭhabhaddantiko, nābhihaṭaṁ, na uddissakataṁ, na nimantanaṁ sādiyati, so na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na kaḷopimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na eḷakamantaraṁ, na daṇḍamantaraṁ, na musalamantaraṁ, na dvinnaṁ bhuñjamānānaṁ, na gabbhiniyā, na pāyamānāya, na purisantaragatāya, na saṅkittīsu, na yattha sā upaṭṭhito hoti, na yattha makkhikā saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī, na macchaṁ, na maṁsaṁ, na suraṁ, na merayaṁ, na thusodakaṁ pivati. So ekāgāriko vā hoti ekālopiko, dvāgāriko vā hoti dvālopiko …pe… sattāgāriko vā hoti sattālopiko. Ekissāpi dattiyā yāpeti, dvīhipi dattīhi yāpeti … sattahipi dattīhi yāpeti. Ekāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti, dvīhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti … sattāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti. Iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati.
[¶8] They eat herbs, millet, wild rice, poor rice, water lettuce, rice bran, scum from boiling rice, sesame flour, grass, or cow dung. They survive on forest roots and fruits, or eating fallen fruit.
> Pali: So sākabhakkho vā hoti, sāmākabhakkho vā hoti, nīvārabhakkho vā hoti, daddulabhakkho vā hoti, haṭabhakkho vā hoti, kaṇabhakkho vā hoti, ācāmabhakkho vā hoti, piññākabhakkho vā hoti, tiṇabhakkho vā hoti, gomayabhakkho vā hoti, vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī.
[¶9] They wear robes of sunn hemp, mixed hemp, corpse-wrapping cloth, rags, lodh tree bark, antelope hide (whole or in strips), kusa grass, bark, wood-chips, human hair, horse-tail hair, or owls’ wings. They tear out their hair and beard, committed to this practice. They constantly stand, turning down seats. They squat, committed to the endeavor of squatting. They lie on a mat of thorns, making a mat of thorns their bed. They’re devoted to ritual bathing three times a day, including at dusk. And so they live committed to practicing these various ways of mortifying and tormenting the body. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is called the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain.
> Pali: So sāṇānipi dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti, chavadussānipi dhāreti, paṁsukūlānipi dhāreti, tirīṭānipi dhāreti, ajinampi dhāreti, ajinakkhipampi dhāreti, kusacīrampi dhāreti, vākacīrampi dhāreti, phalakacīrampi dhāreti, kesakambalampi dhāreti, vāḷakambalampi dhāreti, ulūkapakkhampi dhāreti, kesamassulocakopi hoti, kesamassulocanānuyogamanuyutto, ubbhaṭṭhakopi hoti, āsanapaṭikkhitto, ukkuṭikopi hoti ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyutto, kaṇṭakāpassayikopi hoti, kaṇṭakāpassaye seyyaṁ kappeti, sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Iti evarūpaṁ anekavihitaṁ kāyassa ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ.
[¶10] And what is the way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure? It’s when someone is ordinarily full of acute greed, hate, and delusion. They often feel the pain and sadness that greed, hate, and delusion bring. They lead the full and pure spiritual life in pain and sadness, weeping, with tearful faces. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. This is called the way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco pakatiyā tibbarāgajātiko hoti, so abhikkhaṇaṁ rāgajaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; pakatiyā tibbadosajātiko hoti, so abhikkhaṇaṁ dosajaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; pakatiyā tibbamohajātiko hoti, so abhikkhaṇaṁ mohajaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. So sahāpi dukkhena, sahāpi domanassena, assumukhopi rudamāno paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ.
[¶11] And what is the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure? It’s when someone is not ordinarily full of acute greed, hate, and delusion. They rarely feel the pain and sadness that greed, hate, and delusion bring. Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. This is called the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure. These are the four ways of taking up practices.”
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco pakatiyā na tibbarāgajātiko hoti, so na abhikkhaṇaṁ rāgajaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; pakatiyā na tibbadosajātiko hoti, so na abhikkhaṇaṁ dosajaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; pakatiyā na tibbamohajātiko hoti, so na abhikkhaṇaṁ mohajaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. So vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri dhammasamādānānī”ti.
[¶12] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶13] > Pali: Cūḷadhammasamādānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 49. MN 46 · The Great Discourse on Taking Up Practices
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/49/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/49/#p-N
[¶0] MN 46 · The Great Discourse on Taking Up Practices
> Pali: MN 46 · Mahādhammasamādānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, sentient beings typically have the wish, desire, and hope: ‘Oh, if only unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable things would decrease, and likable, desirable, and agreeable things would increase!’ But exactly the opposite happens to them. What do you take to be the reason for this?”
> Pali: “yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, sattā evaṅkāmā evaṁchandā evaṁadhippāyā: ‘aho vata aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā parihāyeyyuṁ, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍheyyun’ti. Tesaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṅkāmānaṁ evaṁchandānaṁ evaṁadhippāyānaṁ aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā parihāyanti. Tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, kaṁ hetuṁ paccethā”ti?
[¶4] “Our teachings are rooted in the Buddha. He is our guide and our refuge. Sir, may the Buddha himself please clarify the meaning of this. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Bhagavaṁmūlakā no, bhante, dhammā, bhagavaṁnettikā, bhagavaṁpaṭisaraṇā. Sādhu vata, bhante, bhagavantaññeva paṭibhātu etassa bhāsitassa attho; bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶5] “Well then, mendicants, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhikkhave, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶7] “Take an unlearned ordinary person who has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They don’t know what practices they should cultivate and foster, and what practices they shouldn’t cultivate and foster. So they cultivate and foster practices they shouldn’t, and don’t cultivate and foster practices they should. When they do so, unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable things increase, and likable, desirable, and agreeable things decrease. Why is that? Because that’s what it’s like for the ignorant.
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano, ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto, sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto, sevitabbe dhamme na jānāti asevitabbe dhamme na jānāti, bhajitabbe dhamme na jānāti abhajitabbe dhamme na jānāti. So sevitabbe dhamme ajānanto asevitabbe dhamme ajānanto, bhajitabbe dhamme ajānanto abhajitabbe dhamme ajānanto, asevitabbe dhamme sevati sevitabbe dhamme na sevati, abhajitabbe dhamme bhajati bhajitabbe dhamme na bhajati. Tassa asevitabbe dhamme sevato sevitabbe dhamme asevato, abhajitabbe dhamme bhajato bhajitabbe dhamme abhajato aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā parihāyanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ aviddasuno.
[¶8] But a learned noble disciple has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. They know what practices they should cultivate and foster, and what practices they shouldn’t cultivate and foster. So they cultivate and foster practices they should, and don’t cultivate and foster practices they shouldn’t. When they do so, unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable things decrease, and likable, desirable, and agreeable things increase. Why is that? Because that’s what it’s like for the knowledgable.
> Pali: Sutavā ca kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako, ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto, sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto, sevitabbe dhamme jānāti asevitabbe dhamme jānāti, bhajitabbe dhamme jānāti abhajitabbe dhamme jānāti. So sevitabbe dhamme jānanto asevitabbe dhamme jānanto, bhajitabbe dhamme jānanto abhajitabbe dhamme jānanto, asevitabbe dhamme na sevati sevitabbe dhamme sevati, abhajitabbe dhamme na bhajati bhajitabbe dhamme bhajati. Tassa asevitabbe dhamme asevato sevitabbe dhamme sevato, abhajitabbe dhamme abhajato bhajitabbe dhamme bhajato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā parihāyanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ viddasuno.
[¶9] Mendicants, there are these four ways of taking up practices. What four? There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain. There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain. There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure. There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure.
> Pali: Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānāni. Katamāni cattāri? Atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ; atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ; atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ; atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ.
[¶10] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain, an ignoramus, without knowing this, doesn’t truly understand: ‘This is the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain.’ So instead of avoiding that practice, they cultivate it. When they do so, unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable things increase, and likable, desirable, and agreeable things decrease. Why is that? Because that’s what it’s like for the ignorant.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ, taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākan’ti. Taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto taṁ sevati, taṁ na parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ sevato, taṁ aparivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā parihāyanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ aviddasuno.
[¶11] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pain, an ignoramus … cultivates it … and disagreeable things increase …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākan’ti. Taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto taṁ sevati, taṁ na parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ sevato, taṁ aparivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā parihāyanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ aviddasuno.
[¶12] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pleasure, an ignoramus … doesn’t cultivate it … and disagreeable things increase …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ, taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākan’ti. Taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto taṁ na sevati, taṁ parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ asevato, taṁ parivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā parihāyanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ aviddasuno.
[¶13] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure, an ignoramus … doesn’t cultivate it … and disagreeable things increase … Why is that? Because that’s what it’s like for the ignorant.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ, taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākan’ti. Taṁ avidvā avijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto taṁ na sevati, taṁ parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ asevato, taṁ parivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā parihāyanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ aviddasuno.
[¶14] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain, a wise person, knowing this, truly understands: ‘This is the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain.’ So instead of cultivating that practice, they avoid it. When they do so, unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable things decrease, and likable, desirable, and agreeable things increase. Why is that? Because that’s what it’s like for the knowledgable.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākan’ti. Taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānanto taṁ na sevati, taṁ parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ asevato, taṁ parivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā parihāyanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ viddasuno.
[¶15] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pain, a wise person … doesn’t cultivate it … and agreeable things increase …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākan’ti. Taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānanto taṁ na sevati, taṁ parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ asevato, taṁ parivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā parihāyanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ viddasuno.
[¶16] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pleasure, a wise person … cultivates it … and agreeable things increase …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākan’ti. Taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānanto taṁ sevati, taṁ na parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ sevato, taṁ aparivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā parihāyanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ viddasuno.
[¶17] When it comes to the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure, a wise person, knowing this, truly understands: ‘This is the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure.’ So instead of avoiding that practice, they cultivate it. When they do so, unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable things decrease, and likable, desirable, and agreeable things increase. Why is that? Because that’s what it’s like for the knowledgable.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti: ‘idaṁ kho dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākan’ti. Taṁ vidvā vijjāgato yathābhūtaṁ pajānanto taṁ sevati, taṁ na parivajjeti. Tassa taṁ sevato, taṁ aparivajjayato, aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā dhammā parihāyanti, iṭṭhā kantā manāpā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, hoti yathā taṁ viddasuno.
[¶18] And what is the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain? It’s when someone in pain and sadness kills living creatures, steals, and commits sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, with wrong view. Because of these things they experience pain and sadness. And when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is called the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena pāṇātipātī hoti, pāṇātipātapaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena adinnādāyī hoti, adinnādānapaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena kāmesu micchācārī hoti, kāmesu micchācārapaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena musāvādī hoti, musāvādapaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena pisuṇavāco hoti, pisuṇavācāpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena pharusavāco hoti, pharusavācāpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena samphappalāpī hoti, samphappalāpapaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena abhijjhālu hoti, abhijjhāpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena byāpannacitto hoti, byāpādapaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena micchādiṭṭhi hoti, micchādiṭṭhipaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ.
[¶19] And what is the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain? It’s when someone with pleasure and happiness kills living creatures, steals, and commits sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, with wrong view. Because of these things they experience pleasure and happiness. But when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is called the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena pāṇātipātī hoti, pāṇātipātapaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena adinnādāyī hoti, adinnādānapaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena kāmesumicchācārī hoti, kāmesumicchācārapaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena musāvādī hoti, musāvādapaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena pisuṇavāco hoti, pisuṇavācāpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena pharusavāco hoti, pharusavācāpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena samphappalāpī hoti, samphappalāpapaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena abhijjhālu hoti, abhijjhāpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena byāpannacitto hoti, byāpādapaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena micchādiṭṭhi hoti, micchādiṭṭhipaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ.
[¶20] And what is the way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure? It’s when someone in pain and sadness doesn’t kill living creatures, steal, or commit sexual misconduct. They don’t use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re contented, kind-hearted, with right view. Because of these things they experience pain and sadness. But when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. This is called the way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, pāṇātipātā veramaṇīpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā veramaṇīpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇīpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā veramaṇīpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇīpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇīpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā veramaṇīpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena anabhijjhālu hoti, anabhijjhāpaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena abyāpannacitto hoti, abyāpādapaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassena sammādiṭṭhi hoti, sammādiṭṭhipaccayā ca dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ.
[¶21] And what is the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure? It’s when someone with pleasure and happiness doesn’t kill living creatures, steal, or commit sexual misconduct. They don’t use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re contented, kind-hearted, with right view. Because of these things they experience pleasure and happiness. And when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. This is called the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure. These are the four ways of taking up practices.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, pāṇātipātā veramaṇīpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā veramaṇīpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇīpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā veramaṇīpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇīpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇīpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā veramaṇīpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena anabhijjhālu hoti, anabhijjhāpaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena abyāpannacitto hoti, abyāpādapaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassena sammādiṭṭhi hoti, sammādiṭṭhipaccayā ca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Idaṁ, vuccati, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri dhammasamādānāni.
[¶22] Suppose there was some bitter gourd mixed with poison. Then a man would come along who wants to live and doesn’t want to die, who wants to be happy and recoils from pain. They’d say to him: ‘Here, my man, this is bitter gourd mixed with poison. Drink it if you like. If you drink it, the color, aroma, and flavor will be unappetizing, and it will result in death or deadly pain.’ He wouldn’t put it down. Without appraisal, he’d drink it. The color, aroma, and flavor would be unappetizing, and it would result in death or deadly pain. This is comparable to the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain, I say.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, tittakālābu visena saṁsaṭṭho. Atha puriso āgaccheyya jīvitukāmo amaritukāmo sukhakāmo dukkhappaṭikūlo. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, ayaṁ tittakālābu visena saṁsaṭṭho, sace ākaṅkhasi piva. Tassa te pivato ceva nacchādessati vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana maraṇaṁ vā nigacchasi maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan’ti. So taṁ appaṭisaṅkhāya piveyya, nappaṭinissajjeyya. Tassa taṁ pivato ceva nacchādeyya vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ. Tathūpamāhaṁ, bhikkhave, imaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ vadāmi, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ.
[¶23] Suppose there was a bronze goblet of beverage that had a nice color, aroma, and flavor. But it was mixed with poison. Then a man would come along who wants to live and doesn’t want to die, who wants to be happy and recoils from pain. They’d say to him: ‘Here, my man, this bronze goblet of beverage has a nice color, aroma, and flavor. But it’s mixed with poison. Drink it if you like. If you drink it, the color, aroma, and flavor will be appetizing, but it will result in death or deadly pain.’ He wouldn’t put it down. Without appraisal, he’d drink it. The color, aroma, and flavor would be appetizing, but it would result in death or deadly pain. This is comparable to the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pain, I say.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, āpānīyakaṁso vaṇṇasampanno gandhasampanno rasasampanno. So ca kho visena saṁsaṭṭho. Atha puriso āgaccheyya jīvitukāmo amaritukāmo sukhakāmo dukkhappaṭikūlo. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, ayaṁ āpānīyakaṁso vaṇṇasampanno gandhasampanno rasasampanno. So ca kho visena saṁsaṭṭho, sace ākaṅkhasi piva. Tassa te pivatohi kho chādessati vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana maraṇaṁ vā nigacchasi maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan’ti. So taṁ appaṭisaṅkhāya piveyya, nappaṭinissajjeyya. Tassa taṁ pivatohi kho chādeyya vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ. Tathūpamāhaṁ, bhikkhave, imaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ vadāmi, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ.
[¶24] Suppose there was some rancid urine mixed with different medicines. Then a man with jaundice would come along. They’d say to him: ‘Here, my man, this is rancid urine mixed with different medicines. Drink it if you like. If you drink it, the color, aroma, and flavor will be unappetizing, but after drinking it you will be happy.’ He wouldn’t put it down. After appraisal, he’d drink it. The color, aroma, and flavor would be unappetizing, but after drinking it he would be happy. This is comparable to the way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pleasure, I say.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, pūtimuttaṁ nānābhesajjehi saṁsaṭṭhaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya paṇḍukarogī. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, idaṁ pūtimuttaṁ nānābhesajjehi saṁsaṭṭhaṁ, sace ākaṅkhasi piva. Tassa te pivatohi kho nacchādessati vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana sukhī bhavissasī’ti. So taṁ paṭisaṅkhāya piveyya, nappaṭinissajjeyya. Tassa taṁ pivatohi kho nacchādeyya vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana sukhī assa. Tathūpamāhaṁ, bhikkhave, imaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ vadāmi, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ.
[¶25] Suppose there was some curds, honey, ghee, and molasses all mixed together. Then a man with bloody dysentery would come along. They’d say to him: ‘Here, my man, this is curds, honey, ghee, and molasses all mixed together. Drink it if you like. If you drink it, the color, aroma, and flavor will be appetizing, and after drinking it you will be happy.’ He wouldn’t put it down. After appraisal, he’d drink it. The color, aroma, and flavor would be appetizing, and after drinking it he would be happy. This is comparable to the way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure, I say.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dadhi ca madhu ca sappi ca phāṇitañca ekajjhaṁ saṁsaṭṭhaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya lohitapakkhandiko. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, idaṁ dadhi ca madhu ca sappi ca phāṇitañca ekajjhaṁ saṁsaṭṭhaṁ, sace ākaṅkhasi piva. Tassa te pivato ceva chādessati vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana sukhī bhavissasī’ti. So taṁ paṭisaṅkhāya piveyya, nappaṭinissajjeyya. Tassa taṁ pivato ceva chādeyya vaṇṇenapi gandhenapi rasenapi, pivitvā ca pana sukhī assa. Tathūpamāhaṁ, bhikkhave, imaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ vadāmi, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ.
[¶26] It’s like the last month of the rainy season, in autumn, when the heavens are sunny and cloudless. And as the sun is rising to the firmament, having dispelled all the darkness of space, it shines and glows and dazzles. In the same way, this way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure dispels the doctrines of the various other ascetics and brahmins as it shines and glows and dazzles.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye viddhe vigatavalāhake deve ādicco nabhaṁ abbhussakkamāno sabbaṁ ākāsagataṁ tamagataṁ abhivihacca bhāsate ca tapate ca virocate ca; evameva kho, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ tadaññe puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇaparappavāde abhivihacca bhāsate ca tapate ca virocate cā”ti.
[¶27] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶28] > Pali: Mahādhammasamādānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 50. MN 47 · The Inquirer
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/50/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/50/#p-N
[¶0] MN 47 · The Inquirer
> Pali: MN 47 · Vīmaṁsakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, a mendicant who is an inquirer, unable to encompass another’s mind, should scrutinize the Realized One to understand whether he is a fully awakened Buddha or not.”
> Pali: “vīmaṁsakena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā parassa cetopariyāyaṁ ajānantena tathāgate samannesanā kātabbā ‘sammāsambuddho vā no vā’ iti viññāṇāyā”ti.
[¶4] “Our teachings are rooted in the Buddha. He is our guide and our refuge. Sir, may the Buddha himself please clarify the meaning of this. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Bhagavaṁmūlakā no, bhante, dhammā, bhagavaṁnettikā bhagavaṁpaṭisaraṇā; sādhu vata, bhante, bhagavantaṁyeva paṭibhātu etassa bhāsitassa attho; bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶5] “Well then, mendicants, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhikkhave, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶7] “Mendicants, a mendicant who is an inquirer, unable to encompass another’s mind, should scrutinize the Realized One for two things—things that can be seen and heard: ‘Can anything corrupt be seen or heard in the Realized One or not?’ Scrutinizing him they find that nothing corrupt can be seen or heard in the Realized One.
> Pali: “Vīmaṁsakena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā parassa cetopariyāyaṁ ajānantena dvīsu dhammesu tathāgato samannesitabbo cakkhusotaviññeyyesu dhammesu: ‘ye saṅkiliṭṭhā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti vā te tathāgatassa no vā’ti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ye saṅkiliṭṭhā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, na te tathāgatassa saṁvijjantī’ti.
[¶8] They scrutinize further: ‘Can anything mixed be seen or heard in the Realized One or not?’ Scrutinizing him they find that nothing mixed can be seen or heard in the Realized One.
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ye saṅkiliṭṭhā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, na te tathāgatassa saṁvijjantī’ti, tato naṁ uttariṁ samannesati: ‘ye vītimissā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti vā te tathāgatassa no vā’ti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ye vītimissā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, na te tathāgatassa saṁvijjantī’ti.
[¶9] They scrutinize further: ‘Can anything clean be seen or heard in the Realized One or not?’ Scrutinizing him they find that clean things can be seen and heard in the Realized One.
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ye vītimissā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, na te tathāgatassa saṁvijjantī’ti, tato naṁ uttariṁ samannesati: ‘ye vodātā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti vā te tathāgatassa no vā’ti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ye vodātā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti te tathāgatassā’ti.
[¶10] They scrutinize further: ‘Did the venerable attain this skillful state a long time ago, or just recently?’ Scrutinizing him they find that the venerable attained this skillful state a long time ago, not just recently.
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ye vodātā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti te tathāgatassā’ti, tato naṁ uttariṁ samannesati: ‘dīgharattaṁ samāpanno ayamāyasmā imaṁ kusalaṁ dhammaṁ, udāhu ittarasamāpanno’ti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘dīgharattaṁ samāpanno ayamāyasmā imaṁ kusalaṁ dhammaṁ, nāyamāyasmā ittarasamāpanno’ti.
[¶11] They scrutinize further: ‘Are certain dangers found in that venerable mendicant who has achieved fame and renown?’ For, mendicants, so long as a mendicant has not achieved fame and renown, certain dangers are not found in them. But when they achieve fame and renown, those dangers appear. Scrutinizing him they find that those dangers are not found in that venerable mendicant who has achieved fame and renown.
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘dīgharattaṁ samāpanno ayamāyasmā imaṁ kusalaṁ dhammaṁ, nāyamāyasmā ittarasamāpanno’ti, tato naṁ uttariṁ samannesati: ‘ñattajjhāpanno ayamāyasmā bhikkhu yasappatto, saṁvijjantassa idhekacce ādīnavā’ti? Na tāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno idhekacce ādīnavā saṁvijjanti yāva na ñattajjhāpanno hoti yasappatto. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ñattajjhāpanno hoti yasappatto, athassa idhekacce ādīnavā saṁvijjanti. Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ñattajjhāpanno ayamāyasmā bhikkhu yasappatto, nāssa idhekacce ādīnavā saṁvijjantī’ti.
[¶12] They scrutinize further: ‘Is this venerable securely stilled or insecurely stilled? Is the reason they don’t indulge in sensual pleasures that they’re free of greed because greed has ended?’ Scrutinizing him they find that that venerable is securely stilled, not insecurely stilled. The reason they don’t indulge in sensual pleasures is that they’re free of greed because greed has ended.
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘ñattajjhāpanno ayamāyasmā bhikkhu yasappatto, nāssa idhekacce ādīnavā saṁvijjantī’ti, tato naṁ uttariṁ samannesati: ‘abhayūparato ayamāyasmā, nāyamāyasmā bhayūparato; vītarāgattā kāme na sevati khayā rāgassā’ti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhayūparato ayamāyasmā, nāyamāyasmā bhayūparato; vītarāgattā kāme na sevati khayā rāgassā’ti.
[¶13] If others should ask that mendicant, ‘But what reason and evidence does the venerable have for saying this?’ Answering rightly, the mendicant should say, ‘Because, whether that venerable is staying in a community or alone, some people there are in a good state or a sorry state, some instruct a group, and some are seen among pleasures of the flesh while others remain unsullied. Yet that venerable doesn’t look down on them for that. Also, I have heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: “I am securely stilled, not insecurely stilled. The reason I don’t indulge in sensual pleasures is that I’m free of greed because greed has ended.”’
> Pali: Tañce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ pare evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘ke panāyasmato ākārā, ke anvayā, yenāyasmā evaṁ vadesi— abhayūparato ayamāyasmā, nāyamāyasmā bhayūparato; vītarāgattā kāme na sevati khayā rāgassā’ti. Sammā byākaramāno, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ byākareyya: ‘tathā hi pana ayamāyasmā saṅghe vā viharanto eko vā viharanto, ye ca tattha sugatā ye ca tattha duggatā, ye ca tattha gaṇamanusāsanti, ye ca idhekacce āmisesu sandissanti, ye ca idhekacce āmisena anupalittā, nāyamāyasmā taṁ tena avajānāti. Sammukhā kho pana metaṁ bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ— abhayūparatohamasmi, nāhamasmi bhayūparato, vītarāgattā kāme na sevāmi khayā rāgassā’ti.
[¶14] Next, they should ask the Realized One himself about this, ‘Can anything corrupt be seen or heard in the Realized One or not?’ The Realized One would answer, ‘Nothing corrupt can be seen or heard in the Realized One.’
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgatova uttariṁ paṭipucchitabbo: ‘ye saṅkiliṭṭhā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti vā te tathāgatassa no vā’ti? Byākaramāno, bhikkhave, tathāgato evaṁ byākareyya: ‘ye saṅkiliṭṭhā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, na te tathāgatassa saṁvijjantī’ti.
[¶15] ‘Can anything mixed be seen or heard in the Realized One or not?’ The Realized One would answer, ‘Nothing mixed can be seen or heard in the Realized One.’
> Pali: ‘Ye vītimissā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti vā te tathāgatassa no vā’ti? Byākaramāno, bhikkhave, tathāgato evaṁ byākareyya: ‘ye vītimissā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, na te tathāgatassa saṁvijjantī’ti.
[¶16] ‘Can anything clean be seen or heard in the Realized One or not?’ The Realized One would answer, ‘Clean things can be seen and heard in the Realized One. I am the scope and the range of that, but I am not determined by that.’
> Pali: ‘Ye vodātā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti vā te tathāgatassa no vā’ti? Byākaramāno, bhikkhave, tathāgato evaṁ byākareyya: ‘ye vodātā cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā, saṁvijjanti te tathāgatassa; etaṁ pathohamasmi, etaṁ gocaro, no ca tena tammayo’ti.
[¶17] A disciple ought to approach a teacher who has such a doctrine in order to listen to the teaching. The teacher explains Dhamma with its higher and higher stages, with its better and better stages, with its dark and bright sides. When they directly know a certain principle of those teachings, in accordance with how they were taught, the mendicant comes to a conclusion about the teachings. They have confidence in the Teacher: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha! The teaching is well explained! The Saṅgha is practicing well!’
> Pali: Evaṁvādiṁ kho, bhikkhave, satthāraṁ arahati sāvako upasaṅkamituṁ dhammassavanāya. Tassa satthā dhammaṁ deseti uttaruttariṁ paṇītapaṇītaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaṁ. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṁ deseti uttaruttariṁ paṇītapaṇītaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaṁ tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme abhiññāya idhekaccaṁ dhammaṁ dhammesu niṭṭhaṁ gacchati, satthari pasīdati: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’ti.
[¶18] If others should ask that mendicant, ‘But what reason and evidence does the venerable have for saying this?’ Answering rightly, the mendicant should say, ‘Reverends, I approached the Buddha to listen to the teaching. He explained Dhamma with its higher and higher stages, with its better and better stages, with its dark and bright sides. When I directly knew a certain principle of those teachings, in accordance with how I was taught, I came to a conclusion about the teachings. I had confidence in the Teacher: “The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha! The teaching is well explained! The Saṅgha is practicing well!”’
> Pali: Tañce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ pare evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘ke panāyasmato ākārā, ke anvayā, yenāyasmā evaṁ vadesi— sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’ti? Sammā byākaramāno, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ byākareyya: ‘idhāhaṁ, āvuso, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁ dhammassavanāya. Tassa me bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti uttaruttariṁ paṇītapaṇītaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaṁ. Yathā yathā me, āvuso, bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti uttaruttariṁ paṇītapaṇītaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaṁ tathā tathāhaṁ tasmiṁ dhamme abhiññāya idhekaccaṁ dhammaṁ dhammesu niṭṭhamagamaṁ, satthari pasīdiṁ— sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā, dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’ti.
[¶19] When someone’s faith is settled, rooted, and planted in the Realized One in this manner, with these words and phrases, it’s said to be grounded faith that’s based on evidence. It is strong, and cannot be shifted by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world. That is how there is legitimate scrutiny of the Realized One, and that is how the Realized One is legitimately well-scrutinized.”
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, imehi ākārehi imehi padehi imehi byañjanehi tathāgate saddhā niviṭṭhā hoti mūlajātā patiṭṭhitā, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, ākāravatī saddhā dassanamūlikā; daḷhā asaṁhāriyā samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, tathāgate dhammasamannesanā hoti. Evañca pana tathāgato dhammatāsusamanniṭṭho hotī”ti.
[¶20] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶21] > Pali: Vīmaṁsakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 51. MN 48 · The Mendicants of Kosambī
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/51/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/51/#p-N
[¶0] MN 48 · The Mendicants of Kosambī
> Pali: MN 48 · Kosambiyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Kosambī in Ghosita’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosambiyaṁ viharati ghositārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the mendicants of Kosambī were fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words. They couldn’t persuade each other or be persuaded, nor could they convince each other or be convinced.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kosambiyaṁ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti. Te na ceva aññamaññaṁ saññāpenti na ca saññattiṁ upenti, na ca aññamaññaṁ nijjhāpenti, na ca nijjhattiṁ upenti.
[¶3] Then a mendicant went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what was happening.
> Pali: Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idha, bhante, kosambiyaṁ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti, te na ceva aññamaññaṁ saññāpenti, na ca saññattiṁ upenti, na ca aññamaññaṁ nijjhāpenti, na ca nijjhattiṁ upentī”ti.
[¶4] So the Buddha addressed one of the monks, “Please, monk, in my name tell those mendicants that the Teacher summons them.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena te bhikkhū āmantehi: ‘satthā vo āyasmante āmantetī’”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, sir,” that monk replied. He went to those monks and said, “Venerables, the Teacher summons you.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “satthā āyasmante āmantetī”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, reverend,” those monks replied. They went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to them,
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te bhikkhū bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶7] “Is it really true, mendicants, that you have been fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words? And that you can’t persuade each other or be persuaded, nor can you convince each other or be convinced?”
> Pali: “saccaṁ kira tumhe, bhikkhave, bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharatha, te na ceva aññamaññaṁ saññāpetha, na ca saññattiṁ upetha, na ca aññamaññaṁ nijjhāpetha, na ca nijjhattiṁ upethā”ti?
[¶8] “Yes, sir,” they said.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶9] “What do you think, mendicants? When you’re fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words, are you treating your spiritual companions with kindness by way of body, speech, and mind, both in public and in private?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, yasmiṁ tumhe samaye bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharatha, api nu tumhākaṁ tasmiṁ samaye mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca, mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ …pe… mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho cā”ti?
[¶10] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶11] “So it seems that when you’re arguing you are not treating each other with kindness. So what then do you know and see, you futile men, that you behave in such a way? This will be for your lasting harm and suffering.”
> Pali: “Iti kira, bhikkhave, yasmiṁ tumhe samaye bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharatha, neva tumhākaṁ tasmiṁ samaye mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca, na mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ …pe… na mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Atha kiñcarahi tumhe, moghapurisā, kiṁ jānantā kiṁ passantā bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharatha, te na ceva aññamaññaṁ saññāpetha, na ca saññattiṁ upetha, na ca aññamaññaṁ nijjhāpetha, na ca nijjhattiṁ upetha? Tañhi tumhākaṁ, moghapurisā, bhavissati dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶12] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶13] “Mendicants, these six warm-hearted qualities make for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling. What six? Firstly, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with bodily kindness, both in public and in private. This warm-hearted quality makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.
> Pali: “chayime, bhikkhave, dhammā sāraṇīyā piyakaraṇā garukaraṇā saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattanti. Katame cha? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶14] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with verbal kindness …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶15] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with mental kindness …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶16] Furthermore, a mendicant shares without reservation any material things they have gained by legitimate means, even the food placed in the alms-bowl, using them in common with their ethical spiritual companions …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ye te lābhā dhammikā dhammaladdhā antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampi, tathārūpehi lābhehi appaṭivibhattabhogī hoti sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶17] Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the precepts shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. Those precepts are intact, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṁvattanikāni tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶18] Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the view shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. That view is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. This warm-hearted quality makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶19] These six warm-hearted qualities make for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.
> Pali: Ime kho, bhikkhave, cha sāraṇīyā dhammā piyakaraṇā garukaraṇā saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattanti.
[¶20] Of these six warm-hearted qualities, the chief is the view that is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. It holds and binds everything together. It’s like a bungalow. The roof-peak is the chief point, which holds and binds everything together. In the same way, of these six warm-hearted qualities, the chief is the view that is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. It holds and binds everything together.
> Pali: Imesaṁ kho, bhikkhave, channaṁ sāraṇīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ etaṁ aggaṁ etaṁ saṅgāhikaṁ etaṁ saṅghāṭanikaṁ—yadidaṁ yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, kūṭāgārassa etaṁ aggaṁ etaṁ saṅgāhikaṁ etaṁ saṅghāṭanikaṁ yadidaṁ kūṭaṁ; evameva kho, bhikkhave, imesaṁ channaṁ sāraṇīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ etaṁ aggaṁ etaṁ saṅgāhikaṁ etaṁ saṅghāṭanikaṁ yadidaṁ yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya.
[¶21] And how does the view that is noble and emancipating lead one who practices it to the complete ending of suffering? It’s when a mendicant has gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut, and reflects like this, ‘Is there anything that I’m overcome with internally and haven’t given up, because of which I might not accurately know and see?’ If a mendicant is overcome with sensual desire, it’s their mind that’s overcome. If a mendicant is overcome with ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, doubt, pursuing speculation about this world, pursuing speculation about the next world, or fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding others with barbed words, it’s their mind that’s overcome. They understand, ‘There is nothing that I’m overcome with internally and haven’t given up, because of which I might not accurately know and see. My heart is properly disposed for awakening to the truths.’ This is the first knowledge they have achieved that is noble and transcendent, and is distinct from that of ordinary people.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘atthi nu kho me taṁ pariyuṭṭhānaṁ ajjhattaṁ appahīnaṁ, yenāhaṁ pariyuṭṭhānena pariyuṭṭhitacitto yathābhūtaṁ nappajāneyyaṁ na passeyyan’ti? Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāmarāgapariyuṭṭhito hoti, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu byāpādapariyuṭṭhito hoti, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhito hoti, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu uddhaccakukkuccapariyuṭṭhito hoti, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vicikicchāpariyuṭṭhito hoti, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu idhalokacintāya pasuto hoti, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paralokacintāya pasuto hoti, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhaṇḍanajāto kalahajāto vivādāpanno aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudanto viharati, pariyuṭṭhitacittova hoti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘natthi kho me taṁ pariyuṭṭhānaṁ ajjhattaṁ appahīnaṁ, yenāhaṁ pariyuṭṭhānena pariyuṭṭhitacitto yathābhūtaṁ nappajāneyyaṁ na passeyyaṁ. Suppaṇihitaṁ me mānasaṁ saccānaṁ bodhāyā’ti. Idamassa paṭhamaṁ ñāṇaṁ adhigataṁ hoti ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ asādhāraṇaṁ puthujjanehi.
[¶22] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects, ‘When I develop, cultivate, and make much of this view, do I personally gain serenity and quenching?’ They understand, ‘When I develop, cultivate, and make much of this view, I personally gain serenity and quenching.’ This is their second knowledge …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘imaṁ nu kho ahaṁ diṭṭhiṁ āsevanto bhāvento bahulīkaronto labhāmi paccattaṁ samathaṁ, labhāmi paccattaṁ nibbutin’ti? So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘imaṁ kho ahaṁ diṭṭhiṁ āsevanto bhāvento bahulīkaronto labhāmi paccattaṁ samathaṁ, labhāmi paccattaṁ nibbutin’ti. Idamassa dutiyaṁ ñāṇaṁ adhigataṁ hoti ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ asādhāraṇaṁ puthujjanehi.
[¶23] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects, ‘Are there any ascetics or brahmins outside of the Buddhist community who have the same kind of view that I have?’ They understand, ‘There are no ascetics or brahmins outside of the Buddhist community who have the same kind of view that I have.’ This is their third knowledge …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yathārūpāyāhaṁ diṭṭhiyā samannāgato, atthi nu kho ito bahiddhā añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato’ti? So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yathārūpāyāhaṁ diṭṭhiyā samannāgato, natthi ito bahiddhā añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato’ti. Idamassa tatiyaṁ ñāṇaṁ adhigataṁ hoti ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ asādhāraṇaṁ puthujjanehi.
[¶24] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects, ‘Do I have the same nature as an individual accomplished in view?’ And what, mendicants, is the nature of an individual accomplished in view? This is the nature of an individual accomplished in view. Though they may fall into a kind of offense for which rehabilitation is possible, they quickly explain, clarify, and disclose it to the Teacher or a sensible spiritual companion. And having revealed it they restrain themselves in the future. Suppose there was a little baby boy. If he puts his hand or foot on a burning coal, he quickly pulls it back. In the same way, this is the nature of an individual accomplished in view. Though they may still fall into a kind of offense for which rehabilitation is possible, they quickly disclose it to the Teacher or a sensible spiritual companion. And having revealed it they restrain themselves in the future. They understand, ‘I have the same nature as an individual accomplished in view.’ This is their fourth knowledge …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yathārūpāya dhammatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya dhammatāya samannāgato’ti. Kathaṁrūpāya ca, bhikkhave, dhammatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato? Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhisampannassa puggalassa: kiñcāpi tathārūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjati, yathārūpāya āpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṁ paññāyati, atha kho naṁ khippameva satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu deseti vivarati uttānīkaroti; desetvā vivaritvā uttānīkatvā āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, daharo kumāro mando uttānaseyyako hatthena vā pādena vā aṅgāraṁ akkamitvā khippameva paṭisaṁharati; evameva kho, bhikkhave, dhammatā esā diṭṭhisampannassa puggalassa: kiñcāpi tathārūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjati yathārūpāya āpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṁ paññāyati, atha kho naṁ khippameva satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu deseti vivarati uttānīkaroti; desetvā vivaritvā uttānīkatvā āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yathārūpāya dhammatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya dhammatāya samannāgato’ti. Idamassa catutthaṁ ñāṇaṁ adhigataṁ hoti ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ asādhāraṇaṁ puthujjanehi.
[¶25] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects, ‘Do I have the same nature as an individual accomplished in view?’ And what, mendicants, is the nature of an individual accomplished in view? This is the nature of an individual accomplished in view. Though they might manage a diverse spectrum of duties for their spiritual companions, they still feel a keen regard for the training in higher ethics, higher mind, and higher wisdom. Suppose there was a cow with a baby calf. She watches her calf devotedly as she grazes. In the same way, this is the nature of an individual accomplished in view. Though they might manage a diverse spectrum of duties for their spiritual companions, they still feel a keen regard for the training in higher ethics, higher mind, and higher wisdom. They understand, ‘I have the same nature as an individual accomplished in view.’ This is their fifth knowledge …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yathārūpāya dhammatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya dhammatāya samannāgato’ti. Kathaṁrūpāya ca, bhikkhave, dhammatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato? Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhisampannassa puggalassa: kiñcāpi yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṁ uccāvacāni kiṅkaraṇīyāni tattha ussukkaṁ āpanno hoti, atha khvāssa tibbāpekkhā hoti adhisīlasikkhāya adhicittasikkhāya adhipaññāsikkhāya. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāvī taruṇavacchā thambañca ālumpati vacchakañca apacinati; evameva kho, bhikkhave, dhammatā esā diṭṭhisampannassa puggalassa: kiñcāpi yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṁ uccāvacāni kiṅkaraṇīyāni tattha ussukkaṁ āpanno hoti, atha khvāssa tibbāpekkhā hoti adhisīlasikkhāya adhicittasikkhāya adhipaññāsikkhāya. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yathārūpāya dhammatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya dhammatāya samannāgato’ti. Idamassa pañcamaṁ ñāṇaṁ adhigataṁ hoti ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ asādhāraṇaṁ puthujjanehi.
[¶26] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects, ‘Do I have the same strength as an individual accomplished in view?’ And what, mendicants, is the strength of an individual accomplished in view? The strength of an individual accomplished in view is that, when the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One are being taught, they pay attention, apply the mind, concentrate wholeheartedly, and actively listen to the teaching. They understand, ‘I have the same strength as an individual accomplished in view.’ This is their sixth knowledge …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yathārūpāya balatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya balatāya samannāgato’ti. Kathaṁrūpāya ca, bhikkhave, balatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato? Balatā esā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhisampannassa puggalassa yaṁ tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye desiyamāne aṭṭhiṁ katvā manasikatvā sabbacetasā samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṁ suṇāti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yathārūpāya balatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya balatāya samannāgato’ti. Idamassa chaṭṭhaṁ ñāṇaṁ adhigataṁ hoti ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ asādhāraṇaṁ puthujjanehi.
[¶27] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects, ‘Do I have the same strength as an individual accomplished in view?’ And what, mendicants, is the strength of an individual accomplished in view? The strength of an individual accomplished in view is that, when the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One are being taught, they find inspiration in the meaning and the teaching, and find joy connected with the teaching. They understand, ‘I have the same strength as an individual accomplished in view.’ This is the seventh knowledge they have achieved that is noble and transcendent, and is distinct from that of ordinary people.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yathārūpāya balatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya balatāya samannāgato’ti. Kathaṁrūpāya ca, bhikkhave, balatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato? Balatā esā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhisampannassa puggalassa yaṁ tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye desiyamāne labhati atthavedaṁ, labhati dhammavedaṁ, labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yathārūpāya balatāya diṭṭhisampanno puggalo samannāgato, ahampi tathārūpāya balatāya samannāgato’ti. Idamassa sattamaṁ ñāṇaṁ adhigataṁ hoti ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ asādhāraṇaṁ puthujjanehi.
[¶28] When a noble disciple has these seven factors, they have properly investigated their nature through the realization of the fruit of stream-entry. A noble disciple with these seven factors has the fruit of stream-entry.”
> Pali: Evaṁ sattaṅgasamannāgatassa kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvakassa dhammatā susamanniṭṭhā hoti sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya. Evaṁ sattaṅgasamannāgato kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako sotāpattiphalasamannāgato hotī”ti.
[¶29] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶30] > Pali: Kosambiyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 52. MN 49 · On the Invitation of Divinity
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/52/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/52/#p-N
[¶0] MN 49 · On the Invitation of Divinity
> Pali: MN 49 · Brahmanimantanikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “This one time, mendicants, I was staying near Ukkaṭṭhā in the Subhaga Forest at the root of a magnificent sal tree. Now at that time Baka the Divinity had the following harmful misconception: ‘This is permanent, this is everlasting, this is eternal, this is whole, this is not liable to pass away. For this is where there’s no being born, growing old, dying, passing away, or being reborn. And there’s no other escape beyond this.’
> Pali: “Ekamidāhaṁ, bhikkhave, samayaṁ ukkaṭṭhāyaṁ viharāmi subhagavane sālarājamūle. Tena kho pana, bhikkhave, samayena bakassa brahmuno evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ hoti: ‘idaṁ niccaṁ, idaṁ dhuvaṁ, idaṁ sassataṁ, idaṁ kevalaṁ, idaṁ acavanadhammaṁ, idañhi na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjati, ito ca panaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇaṁ natthī’ti.
[¶4] Then I knew what Baka the Divinity was thinking. As easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, I vanished from the Subhaga Forest and reappeared in that realm of divinity.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, bakassa brahmuno cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya— seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—ukkaṭṭhāyaṁ subhagavane sālarājamūle antarahito tasmiṁ brahmaloke pāturahosiṁ.
[¶5] Baka saw me coming off in the distance and said, ‘Come, good fellow! Welcome, good fellow! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. For this is permanent, this is everlasting, this is eternal, this is whole, this is not liable to pass away. For this is where there’s no being born, growing old, dying, passing away, or being reborn. And there’s no other escape beyond this.’
> Pali: Addasā kho maṁ, bhikkhave, bako brahmā dūratova āgacchantaṁ; disvāna maṁ etadavoca: ‘ehi kho, mārisa, svāgataṁ, mārisa. Cirassaṁ kho, mārisa, imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Idañhi, mārisa, niccaṁ, idaṁ dhuvaṁ, idaṁ sassataṁ, idaṁ kevalaṁ, idaṁ acavanadhammaṁ, idañhi na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjati. Ito ca panaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇaṁ natthī’ti.
[¶6] When he had spoken, I said to him, ‘Oh lord, Baka the Divinity is lost in ignorance! Oh lord, Baka the Divinity is lost in ignorance! Because what is actually impermanent, not lasting, transient, incomplete, and liable to pass away, he says is permanent, everlasting, eternal, whole, and not liable to pass away. And where there is being born, growing old, dying, passing away, and being reborn, he says that there’s no being born, growing old, dying, passing away, or being reborn. And although there is another escape beyond this, he says that there’s no other escape beyond this.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bakaṁ brahmānaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘avijjāgato vata bho bako brahmā, avijjāgato vata bho bako brahmā; yatra hi nāma aniccaṁyeva samānaṁ niccanti vakkhati, addhuvaṁyeva samānaṁ dhuvanti vakkhati, asassataṁyeva samānaṁ sassatanti vakkhati, akevalaṁyeva samānaṁ kevalanti vakkhati, cavanadhammaṁyeva samānaṁ acavanadhammanti vakkhati; yattha ca pana jāyati jīyati mīyati cavati upapajjati tañca vakkhati: “idañhi na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjatī”ti; santañca panaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇaṁ “natthaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇan”ti vakkhatī’ti.
[¶7] Then Māra the Wicked took possession of a member of the retinue of Divinity and said this to me, ‘Mendicant, mendicant! Don’t attack this one! Don’t attack this one! For this is the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā aññataraṁ brahmapārisajjaṁ anvāvisitvā maṁ etadavoca: ‘bhikkhu bhikkhu, metamāsado metamāsado, eso hi, bhikkhu, brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ.
[¶8] There have been ascetics and brahmins before you, mendicant, who criticized and loathed earth, water, fire, air, creatures, gods, the Progenitor, and the Divinity. When their bodies broke up and their breath was cut off they were established in a lower realm.
> Pali: Ahesuṁ kho ye, bhikkhu, tayā pubbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṁ pathavīgarahakā pathavījigucchakā, āpagarahakā āpajigucchakā, tejagarahakā tejajigucchakā, vāyagarahakā vāyajigucchakā, bhūtagarahakā bhūtajigucchakā, devagarahakā devajigucchakā, pajāpatigarahakā pajāpatijigucchakā, brahmagarahakā brahmajigucchakā— te kāyassa bhedā pāṇupacchedā hīne kāye patiṭṭhitā ahesuṁ.
[¶9] There have been ascetics and brahmins before you, mendicant, who praised and approved earth, water, fire, air, creatures, gods, the Progenitor, and the Divinity. When their bodies broke up and their breath was cut off they were established in a higher realm.
> Pali: Ye pana, bhikkhu, tayā pubbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṁ pathavīpasaṁsakā pathavābhinandino, āpapasaṁsakā āpābhinandino, tejapasaṁsakā tejābhinandino, vāyapasaṁsakā vāyābhinandino, bhūtapasaṁsakā bhūtābhinandino, devapasaṁsakā devābhinandino, pajāpatipasaṁsakā pajāpatābhinandino, brahmapasaṁsakā brahmābhinandino— te kāyassa bhedā pāṇupacchedā paṇīte kāye patiṭṭhitā.
[¶10] So, mendicant, I tell you this: please, good fellow, do exactly what the Divinity says. Don’t go beyond the word of the Divinity. If you do, then you’ll end up like a person who, when approached by Lady Luck, would fend her off with a staff; or who, as they are falling over a cliff, would push away the ground with their hands and feet. Please, good fellow, do exactly what the Divinity says. Don’t go beyond the word of the Divinity. Do you not see the assembly of the Divinity gathered here?’
> Pali: Taṁ tāhaṁ, bhikkhu, evaṁ vadāmi: “iṅgha tvaṁ, mārisa, yadeva te brahmā āha tadeva tvaṁ karohi, mā tvaṁ brahmuno vacanaṁ upātivattittho”. Sace kho tvaṁ, bhikkhu, brahmuno vacanaṁ upātivattissasi, seyyathāpi nāma puriso siriṁ āgacchantiṁ daṇḍena paṭippaṇāmeyya, seyyathāpi vā pana, bhikkhu, puriso narakappapāte papatanto hatthehi ca pādehi ca pathaviṁ virādheyya, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ, bhikkhu, tuyhaṁ bhavissati. Iṅgha tvaṁ, mārisa, yadeva te brahmā āha tadeva tvaṁ karohi, mā tvaṁ brahmuno vacanaṁ upātivattittho. Nanu tvaṁ, bhikkhu, passasi brahmaparisaṁ sannipatitan’ti?
[¶11] And so Māra the Wicked presented the assembly of the Divinity to me.
> Pali: Iti kho maṁ, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā brahmaparisaṁ upanesi.
[¶12] When he had spoken, I said to Māra, ‘I know you, Wicked One. Do not think, “He does not know me.” You are Māra the Wicked. And the Divinity, the Divinity’s assembly, and the retinue of Divinity have all fallen into your hands; they’re under your sway. And you think, “Maybe this one, too, has fallen into my hands; maybe he’s under my sway!” But I haven’t fallen into your hands; I’m not under your sway.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘jānāmi kho tāhaṁ, pāpima; mā tvaṁ maññittho: “na maṁ jānātī”ti. Māro tvamasi, pāpima. Yo ceva, pāpima, brahmā, yā ca brahmaparisā, ye ca brahmapārisajjā, sabbeva tava hatthagatā sabbeva tava vasaṅgatā. Tuyhañhi, pāpima, evaṁ hoti: “esopi me assa hatthagato, esopi me assa vasaṅgato”ti. Ahaṁ kho pana, pāpima, neva tava hatthagato neva tava vasaṅgato’ti.
[¶13] When I had spoken, Baka the Divinity said to me, ‘But, good fellow, what I say is permanent, everlasting, eternal, whole, and not liable to pass away is in fact permanent, everlasting, eternal, whole, and not liable to pass away. And where I say there’s no being born, growing old, dying, passing away, or being reborn there is in fact no being born, growing old, dying, passing away, or being reborn. And when I say there’s no other escape beyond this there is in fact no other escape beyond this. There have been ascetics and brahmins in the world before you, mendicant, whose deeds of fervent mortification lasted as long as your entire life. When there was another escape beyond this they knew it, and when there was no other escape beyond this, they knew it. So, mendicant, I tell you this: you will never find another escape beyond this, and you will eventually get weary and frustrated. If you attach to earth, you will lie close to me, in my domain, subject to my will, and expendable. If you attach to water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity, you will lie close to me, in my domain, subject to my will, and expendable.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, bako brahmā maṁ etadavoca: ‘ahañhi, mārisa, niccaṁyeva samānaṁ “niccan”ti vadāmi, dhuvaṁyeva samānaṁ “dhuvan”ti vadāmi, sassataṁyeva samānaṁ “sassatan”ti vadāmi, kevalaṁyeva samānaṁ “kevalan”ti vadāmi, acavanadhammaṁyeva samānaṁ “acavanadhamman”ti vadāmi, yattha ca pana na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjati tadevāhaṁ vadāmi: “idañhi na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjatī”ti. Asantañca panaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇaṁ “natthaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇan”ti vadāmi. Ahesuṁ kho, bhikkhu, tayā pubbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṁ yāvatakaṁ tuyhaṁ kasiṇaṁ āyu tāvatakaṁ tesaṁ tapokammameva ahosi. Te kho evaṁ jāneyyuṁ santañca panaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇaṁ “atthaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇan”ti, asantaṁ vā aññaṁ uttari nissaraṇaṁ “natthaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇan”ti. Taṁ tāhaṁ, bhikkhu, evaṁ vadāmi: “na cevaññaṁ uttari nissaraṇaṁ dakkhissasi, yāvadeva ca pana kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī bhavissasi. Sace kho tvaṁ, bhikkhu, pathaviṁ ajjhosissasi, opasāyiko me bhavissasi vatthusāyiko, yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyo. Sace āpaṁ … tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ ajjhosissasi, opasāyiko me bhavissasi vatthusāyiko, yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyo”’ti.
[¶14] ‘Divinity, I too know that if I attach to earth, I will lie close to you, in your domain, subject to your will, and expendable. If I attach to water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity, I will lie close to you, in your domain, subject to your will, and expendable. And in addition, Divinity, I understand your range and your light: “That’s how powerful is Baka the Divinity, how illustrious and mighty.”’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho evaṁ, brahme, jānāmi: “sace pathaviṁ ajjhosissāmi, opasāyiko te bhavissāmi vatthusāyiko, yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyo. Sace āpaṁ … tejaṁ … vāyaṁ … bhūte … deve … pajāpatiṁ … brahmaṁ ajjhosissāmi, opasāyiko te bhavissāmi vatthusāyiko, yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyo”ti api ca te ahaṁ, brahme, gatiñca pajānāmi, jutiñca pajānāmi: “evaṁ mahiddhiko bako brahmā, evaṁ mahānubhāvo bako brahmā, evaṁ mahesakkho bako brahmā”ti.
[¶15] ‘But in what way do you understand my range and my light?’
> Pali: Yathākathaṁ pana me tvaṁ, mārisa, gatiñca pajānāsi, jutiñca pajānāsi: “evaṁ mahiddhiko bako brahmā, evaṁ mahānubhāvo bako brahmā, evaṁ mahesakkho bako brahmā”’ti?
[¶16] ‘A galaxy extends a thousand times as far
as the moon and sun revolve
and the dazzling ones light up the quarters.
And there you wield your power.
> Pali: ‘Yāvatā candimasūriyā,
Pariharanti disā bhanti virocanā;
Tāva sahassadhā loko,
Ettha te vattate vaso.
[¶17] You know the high and low,
the passionate and dispassionate,
and the coming and going of sentient beings
from this realm to another.
> Pali: Paroparañca jānāsi,
atho rāgavirāginaṁ;
Itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṁ,
sattānaṁ āgatiṁ gatinti.
[¶18] That’s how I understand your range and your light.
> Pali: Evaṁ kho te ahaṁ, brahme, gatiñca pajānāmi jutiñca pajānāmi: “evaṁ mahiddhiko bako brahmā, evaṁ mahānubhāvo bako brahmā, evaṁ mahesakkho bako brahmā”ti.
[¶19] But there are three other realms that you don’t know or see, but which I know and see. There is the realm named after the gods of sublime luminosity. You passed away from there and were reborn here. You’ve dwelt here so long that you’ve forgotten about that, so you don’t know it or see it. But I know it and see it. So Divinity, I am not your equal in knowledge, let alone your inferior. Rather, I know more than you.
> Pali: Atthi kho, brahme, añño kāyo, taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi; tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. Atthi kho, brahme, ābhassarā nāma kāyo yato tvaṁ cuto idhūpapanno. Tassa te aticiranivāsena sā sati pamuṭṭhā, tena taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi; tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. Evampi kho ahaṁ, brahme, neva te samasamo abhiññāya, kuto nīceyyaṁ? Atha kho ahameva tayā bhiyyo.
[¶20] There is the realm named after the gods of universal beauty … There is the realm named after the gods of abundant fruit, which you don’t know or see. But I know it and see it. So Divinity, I am not your equal in knowledge, let alone your inferior. Rather, I know more than you.
> Pali: Atthi kho, brahme, subhakiṇho nāma kāyo, vehapphalo nāma kāyo, abhibhū nāma kāyo, taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi; tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. Evampi kho ahaṁ, brahme, neva te samasamo abhiññāya, kuto nīceyyaṁ? Atha kho ahameva tayā bhiyyo.
[¶21] Since directly knowing earth as earth, and since directly knowing that which does not fall within the scope of experience characterized by earth, I have not become earth, I have not become in earth, I have not become as earth, I have not become one who thinks ‘earth is mine’, I have not affirmed earth. So Divinity, I am not your equal in knowledge, let alone your inferior. Rather, I know more than you.
> Pali: Pathaviṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme, pathavito abhiññāya yāvatā pathaviyā pathavattena ananubhūtaṁ tadabhiññāya pathaviṁ nāpahosiṁ, pathaviyā nāpahosiṁ, pathavito nāpahosiṁ, pathaviṁ meti nāpahosiṁ, pathaviṁ nābhivadiṁ. Evampi kho ahaṁ, brahme, neva te samasamo abhiññāya, kuto nīceyyaṁ? Atha kho ahameva tayā bhiyyo.
[¶22] Since directly knowing water … fire … air … creatures … gods … the Progenitor … the Divinity … the gods of sublime luminosity … the gods of universal beauty … the gods of abundant fruit … the Vanquisher … Since directly knowing all as all, and since directly knowing that which does not fall within the scope of experience characterized by all, I have not become all, I have not become in all, I have not become as all, I have not become one who thinks ‘all is mine’, I have not affirmed all. So Divinity, I am not your equal in knowledge, let alone your inferior. Rather, I know more than you.’
> Pali: Āpaṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… tejaṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… vāyaṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… bhūte kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… deve kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… pajāpatiṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… brahmaṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… ābhassare kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… subhakiṇhe kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… vehapphale kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… abhibhuṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme …pe… sabbaṁ kho ahaṁ, brahme, sabbato abhiññāya yāvatā sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūtaṁ tadabhiññāya sabbaṁ nāpahosiṁ sabbasmiṁ nāpahosiṁ sabbato nāpahosiṁ sabbaṁ meti nāpahosiṁ, sabbaṁ nābhivadiṁ. Evampi kho ahaṁ, brahme, neva te samasamo abhiññāya, kuto nīceyyaṁ? Atha kho ahameva tayā bhiyyo’ti.
[¶23] ‘Well, good fellow, if you have directly known that which does not fall within the scope of experience characterized by all, may that not be vacuous and hollow for you!
> Pali: ‘Sace kho, mārisa, sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūtaṁ, tadabhiññāya mā heva te rittakameva ahosi, tucchakameva ahosīti.
[¶24] Consciousness where no form appears,
infinite, radiant all-round.
> Pali: Viññāṇaṁ anidassanaṁ
anantaṁ sabbato pabhaṁ.
[¶25] That is what does not fall within the scope of experience characterized by earth, water, fire, air, creatures, gods, the Progenitor, the Divinity, the gods of sublime luminosity, the gods of universal beauty, the gods of abundant fruit, the Vanquisher, and the all.
> Pali: Taṁ pathaviyā pathavattena ananubhūtaṁ, āpassa āpattena ananubhūtaṁ, tejassa tejattena ananubhūtaṁ, vāyassa vāyattena ananubhūtaṁ, bhūtānaṁ bhūtattena ananubhūtaṁ, devānaṁ devattena ananubhūtaṁ, pajāpatissa pajāpatittena ananubhūtaṁ, brahmānaṁ brahmattena ananubhūtaṁ, ābhassarānaṁ ābhassarattena ananubhūtaṁ, subhakiṇhānaṁ subhakiṇhattena ananubhūtaṁ, vehapphalānaṁ vehapphalattena ananubhūtaṁ, abhibhussa abhibhuttena ananubhūtaṁ, sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūtaṁ.
[¶26] Come then, good fellow, see me vanish from you!’
> Pali: Handa carahi te, mārisa, passa antaradhāyāmī’ti.
[¶27] ‘Come on then, Divinity, vanish from me—if you can.’
> Pali: ‘Handa carahi me tvaṁ, brahme, antaradhāyassu, sace visahasī’ti.
[¶28] Then Baka the Divinity said, ‘I will vanish from the ascetic Gotama! I will vanish from the ascetic Gotama!’ But he was unable to vanish from me.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bako brahmā: ‘antaradhāyissāmi samaṇassa gotamassa, antaradhāyissāmi samaṇassa gotamassā’ti nevassu me sakkoti antaradhāyituṁ.
[¶29] So I said to him, ‘Come then, Divinity, see me vanish from you!’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bakaṁ brahmānaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘handa carahi te brahme antaradhāyāmī’ti.
[¶30] ‘Come on then, good fellow, vanish from me—if you can.’
> Pali: ‘Handa carahi me tvaṁ, mārisa, antaradhāyassu sace visahasī’ti.
[¶31] Then I used my psychic power to will that my voice would extend so that divinity, his assembly, and his retinue would hear me, but they would not see me. And while vanished I spoke this verse:
> Pali: Atha kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsiṁ: ‘ettāvatā brahmā ca brahmaparisā ca brahmapārisajjā ca saddañca me sossanti, na ca maṁ dakkhantī’ti. Antarahito imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsiṁ:
[¶32] ‘Seeing the danger in existence—
that life in any existence will cease to be—
I didn’t affirm any kind of existence,
and didn’t grasp at relishing.’
> Pali: ‘Bhavevāhaṁ bhayaṁ disvā,
bhavañca vibhavesinaṁ;
Bhavaṁ nābhivadiṁ kiñci,
nandiñca na upādiyin’ti.
[¶33] Then the Divinity, his assembly, and his retinue, their minds full of wonder and amazement, thought, ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! The ascetic Gotama has such psychic power and might! We’ve never before seen or heard of any other ascetic or brahmin with psychic power and might like the ascetic Gotama, who has gone forth from the Sakyan clan. Though people enjoy continued existence, loving it so much, he has extracted it, root and all.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, brahmā ca brahmaparisā ca brahmapārisajjā ca acchariyabbhutacittajātā ahesuṁ: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho. Samaṇassa gotamassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā, na ca vata no ito pubbe diṭṭho vā, suto vā, añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁ mahiddhiko evaṁ mahānubhāvo yathāyaṁ samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito. Bhavarāmāya vata, bho, pajāya bhavaratāya bhavasammuditāya samūlaṁ bhavaṁ udabbahī’ti.
[¶34] Then Māra the Wicked took possession of a member of the retinue of Divinity and said this to me, ‘If such is your understanding, good fellow, do not present it to your disciples or those gone forth! Do not teach this Dhamma to your disciples or those gone forth! Do not wish this for your disciples or those gone forth!
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā aññataraṁ brahmapārisajjaṁ anvāvisitvā maṁ etadavoca: ‘sace kho tvaṁ, mārisa, evaṁ pajānāsi, sace tvaṁ evaṁ anubuddho, mā sāvake upanesi, mā pabbajite; mā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desesi, mā pabbajitānaṁ; mā sāvakesu gedhimakāsi, mā pabbajitesu.
[¶35] There have been ascetics and brahmins before you, mendicant, who claimed to be perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas. They presented, taught, and wished this for their disciples and those gone forth. When their bodies broke up and their breath was cut off they were established in a lower realm.
> Pali: Ahesuṁ kho, bhikkhu, tayā pubbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā paṭijānamānā. Te sāvake upanesuṁ pabbajite, sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desesuṁ pabbajitānaṁ, sāvakesu gedhimakaṁsu pabbajitesu, te sāvake upanetvā pabbajite, sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desetvā pabbajitānaṁ, sāvakesu gedhitacittā pabbajitesu, kāyassa bhedā pāṇupacchedā hīne kāye patiṭṭhitā.
[¶36] But there have also been other ascetics and brahmins before you, mendicant, who claimed to be perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas. They did not present, teach, or wish this for their disciples and those gone forth. When their bodies broke up and their breath was cut off they were established in a higher realm.
> Pali: Ahesuṁ ye pana, bhikkhu, tayā pubbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā paṭijānamānā. Te na sāvake upanesuṁ na pabbajite, na sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desesuṁ na pabbajitānaṁ, na sāvakesu gedhimakaṁsu na pabbajitesu, te na sāvake upanetvā na pabbajite, na sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desetvā na pabbajitānaṁ, na sāvakesu gedhitacittā na pabbajitesu, kāyassa bhedā pāṇupacchedā paṇīte kāye patiṭṭhitā.
[¶37] So, mendicant, I tell you this: please, good fellow, remain passive, dwelling in blissful meditation in this life, for this is better left unsaid. Good fellow, do not instruct others.’
> Pali: Taṁ tāhaṁ, bhikkhu, evaṁ vadāmi— iṅgha tvaṁ, mārisa, appossukko diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāramanuyutto viharassu, anakkhātaṁ kusalañhi, mārisa, mā paraṁ ovadāhī’ti.
[¶38] When he had spoken, I said to Māra, ‘I know you, Wicked One. Do not think, “He doesn’t know me.” You are Māra the Wicked. You don’t speak to me like this out of sympathy, but with no sympathy. For you think, “Those who the ascetic Gotama teaches will go beyond my reach.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘jānāmi kho tāhaṁ, pāpima, mā tvaṁ maññittho: “na maṁ jānātī”ti. Māro tvamasi, pāpima. Na maṁ tvaṁ, pāpima, hitānukampī evaṁ vadesi; ahitānukampī maṁ tvaṁ, pāpima, evaṁ vadesi. Tuyhañhi, pāpima, evaṁ hoti: “yesaṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ desessati, te me visayaṁ upātivattissantī”ti.
[¶39] Those who formerly claimed to be fully awakened Buddhas were not in fact fully awakened Buddhas. But I am. The Realized One remains such whether or not he teaches disciples. The Realized One remains as such whether or not he presents the teaching to disciples. Why is that? Because the Realized One has given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. He has cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them so they are unable to arise in the future. Just as a palm tree with its crown cut off is incapable of further growth, the Realized One has given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. He has cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them so they are unable to arise in the future.’”
> Pali: Asammāsambuddhāva pana te, pāpima, samānā sammāsambuddhāmhāti paṭijāniṁsu. Ahaṁ kho pana, pāpima, sammāsambuddhova samāno sammāsambuddhomhīti paṭijānāmi. Desentopi hi, pāpima, tathāgato sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ tādisova adesentopi hi, pāpima, tathāgato sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ tādisova. Upanentopi hi, pāpima, tathāgato sāvake tādisova, anupanentopi hi, pāpima, tathāgato sāvake tādisova. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathāgatassa, pāpima, ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā— te pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Seyyathāpi, pāpima, tālo matthakacchinno abhabbo puna virūḷhiyā; evameva kho, pāpima, tathāgatassa ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā— te pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā’ti.
[¶40] And so, because of the silencing of Māra, and because of the invitation of the Divinity, the name of this discussion is “On the Invitation of Divinity”.
> Pali: Iti hidaṁ mārassa ca anālapanatāya brahmuno ca abhinimantanatāya, tasmā imassa veyyākaraṇassa brahmanimantanikantveva adhivacanan”ti.
[¶41] > Pali: Brahmanimantanikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 53. MN 50 · The Warning to Māra
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/53/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/53/#p-N
[¶0] MN 50 · The Warning to Māra
> Pali: MN 50 · Māratajjanīyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Mahāmoggallāna was staying in the land of the Bhaggas at Crocodile’s Bellow, in the deer park at Bhesakaḷā’s Wood.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhaggesu viharati susumāragire bhesakaḷāvane migadāye.
[¶2] At that time Moggallāna was walking mindfully in the open air.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno abbhokāse caṅkamati.
[¶3] Now at that time Māra the Wicked had got inside Moggallāna’s belly. Moggallāna thought, “Why now is my belly so very heavy, like I’ve just eaten a load of beans?” Then he stepped down from the walking path, entered his dwelling, sat down on the seat spread out, and investigated inside himself.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena māro pāpimā āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa kucchigato hoti koṭṭhamanupaviṭṭho. Atha kho āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa etadahosi: “kiṁ nu kho me kucchi garugaro viya? Māsācitaṁ maññe”ti. Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno caṅkamā orohitvā vihāraṁ pavisitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno paccattaṁ yoniso manasākāsi.
[¶4] He saw that Māra the Wicked had got inside his belly. So he said to Māra, “Come out, Wicked One, come out! Do not harass the Realized One or his disciple. Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”
> Pali: Addasā kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno māraṁ pāpimantaṁ kucchigataṁ koṭṭhamanupaviṭṭhaṁ. Disvāna māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavoca: “nikkhama, pāpima; nikkhama, pāpima. Mā tathāgataṁ vihesesi, mā tathāgatasāvakaṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶5] Then Māra thought, “This ascetic doesn’t really know me or see me when he tells me to come out. Not even the Teacher could recognize me so quickly, so how could a disciple?”
> Pali: Atha kho mārassa pāpimato etadahosi: “ajānameva kho maṁ ayaṁ samaṇo apassaṁ evamāha: ‘nikkhama, pāpima; nikkhama, pāpima. Mā tathāgataṁ vihesesi, mā tathāgatasāvakaṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā’ti. Yopissa so satthā sopi maṁ neva khippaṁ jāneyya, kuto pana maṁ ayaṁ sāvako jānissatī”ti?
[¶6] Then Moggallāna said to Māra, “I know you even when you’re like this, Wicked One. Do not think, ‘He doesn’t know me.’ You are Māra the Wicked. And you think, ‘This ascetic doesn’t really know me or see me when he tells me to come out. Not even the Teacher could recognize me so quickly, so how could a disciple?’”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavoca: “evampi kho tāhaṁ, pāpima, jānāmi, mā tvaṁ maññittho: ‘na maṁ jānātī’ti. Māro tvamasi, pāpima; tuyhañhi, pāpima, evaṁ hoti: ‘ajānameva kho maṁ ayaṁ samaṇo apassaṁ evamāha— nikkhama, pāpima; nikkhama, pāpima. Mā tathāgataṁ vihesesi, mā tathāgatasāvakaṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyāti. Yopissa so satthā sopi maṁ neva khippaṁ jāneyya, kuto pana maṁ ayaṁ sāvako jānissatī’”ti?
[¶7] Then Māra thought, “This ascetic really does know me and see me when he tells me to come out.”
> Pali: Atha kho mārassa pāpimato etadahosi: “jānameva kho maṁ ayaṁ samaṇo passaṁ evamāha: ‘nikkhama, pāpima; nikkhama, pāpima. Mā tathāgataṁ vihesesi, mā tathāgatasāvakaṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā’”ti.
[¶8] Then Māra came up out of Moggallāna’s mouth and stood against the door. Moggallāna saw him there and said, “I see you even there, Wicked One. Do not think, ‘He doesn’t see me.’ That’s you, Wicked One, standing against the door.
> Pali: Atha kho māro pāpimā āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa mukhato uggantvā paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsi. Addasā kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno māraṁ pāpimantaṁ paccaggaḷe ṭhitaṁ; disvāna māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavoca: “etthāpi kho tāhaṁ, pāpima, passāmi; mā tvaṁ maññittho ‘na maṁ passatī’ti. Eso tvaṁ, pāpima, paccaggaḷe ṭhito.
[¶9] Once upon a time, Wicked One, I was a Māra named Dūsī, and I had a sister named Kāḷī. You were her son, which made you my nephew.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbāhaṁ, pāpima, dūsī nāma māro ahosiṁ, tassa me kāḷī nāma bhaginī. Tassā tvaṁ putto. So me tvaṁ bhāgineyyo ahosi.
[¶10] At that time Kakusandha, the Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha arose in the world. Kakusandha had a fine pair of chief disciples named Vidhura and Sañjīva. Of all the disciples of the Buddha Kakusandha, none were the equal of Venerable Vidhura in teaching Dhamma. And that’s how he came to be known as Vidhura.
> Pali: Tena kho pana, pāpima, samayena kakusandho bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke uppanno hoti. Kakusandhassa kho pana, pāpima, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa vidhurasañjīvaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Yāvatā kho pana, pāpima, kakusandhassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa sāvakā. Tesu na ca koci āyasmatā vidhurena samasamo hoti yadidaṁ dhammadesanāya. Iminā kho evaṁ, pāpima, pariyāyena āyasmato vidhurassa vidhuroteva samaññā udapādi.
[¶11] But when Venerable Sañjīva had gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut, he easily attained the cessation of perception and feeling. Once upon a time, Sañjīva was sitting at the root of a certain tree having attained the cessation of perception and feeling. Some cowherds, shepherds, farmers, and passers-by saw him sitting there and said, ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! This ascetic passed away while seated. We should cremate him.’ They collected grass, wood, and cow-dung, heaped it all on Sañjīva’s body, set it on fire, and left.
> Pali: Āyasmā pana, pāpima, sañjīvo araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi appakasireneva saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajjati. Bhūtapubbaṁ, pāpima, āyasmā sañjīvo aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpanno nisinno hoti. Addasaṁsu kho, pāpima, gopālakā pasupālakā kassakā pathāvino āyasmantaṁ sañjīvaṁ aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpannaṁ nisinnaṁ; disvāna tesaṁ etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata, bho. Ayaṁ samaṇo nisinnakova kālaṅkato. Handa naṁ dahāmā’ti. Atha kho te, pāpima, gopālakā pasupālakā kassakā pathāvino tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca gomayañca saṅkaḍḍhitvā āyasmato sañjīvassa kāye upacinitvā aggiṁ datvā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶12] Then, when the night had passed, Sañjīva emerged from that attainment, shook out his robes, and, since it was morning, he robed up and entered the village for alms. Those cowherds, shepherds, farmers, and passers-by saw him wandering for alms and said, ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! This ascetic passed away while seated, and now he has come back to life!’ And that’s how he came to be known as Sañjīva.
> Pali: Atha kho, pāpima, āyasmā sañjīvo tassā rattiyā accayena tāya samāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā cīvarāni papphoṭetvā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Addasaṁsu kho te, pāpima, gopālakā pasupālakā kassakā pathāvino āyasmantaṁ sañjīvaṁ piṇḍāya carantaṁ; disvāna nesaṁ etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata, bho. Ayaṁ samaṇo nisinnakova kālaṅkato, svāyaṁ paṭisañjīvito’ti. Iminā kho evaṁ, pāpima, pariyāyena āyasmato sañjīvassa sañjīvoteva samaññā udapādi.
[¶13] Then it occurred to Māra Dūsī, ‘I don’t know the course of rebirth of these ethical mendicants of good character. Why don’t I take possession of these brahmins and householders and say, “Come, all of you, abuse, attack, harass, and trouble the ethical mendicants of good character. Hopefully by doing this we can upset their minds so that Māra Dūsī can find a vulnerability.”’ And that’s exactly what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho, pāpima, dūsissa mārassa etadahosi: ‘imesaṁ kho ahaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ sīlavantānaṁ kalyāṇadhammānaṁ neva jānāmi āgatiṁ vā gatiṁ vā. Yannūnāhaṁ brāhmaṇagahapatike anvāviseyyaṁ— etha, tumhe bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme akkosatha paribhāsatha rosetha vihesetha. Appeva nāma tumhehi akkosiyamānānaṁ paribhāsiyamānānaṁ rosiyamānānaṁ vihesiyamānānaṁ siyā cittassa aññathattaṁ, yathā taṁ dūsī māro labhetha otāran’ti. Atha kho te, pāpima, dūsī māro brāhmaṇagahapatike anvāvisi: ‘etha, tumhe bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme akkosatha paribhāsatha rosetha vihesetha. Appeva nāma tumhehi akkosiyamānānaṁ paribhāsiyamānānaṁ rosiyamānānaṁ vihesiyamānānaṁ siyā cittassa aññathattaṁ, yathā taṁ dūsī māro labhetha otāran’ti.
[¶14] Then those brahmins and householders abused, attacked, harassed, and troubled the ethical mendicants of good character: ‘These shavelings, fake ascetics, primitives, black spawn from the feet of our kinsman, say, “We practice absorption meditation! We practice absorption meditation!” Shoulders drooping, downcast, and dopey, they meditate and concentrate and contemplate and ruminate. They’re just like an owl on a branch, which meditates and concentrates and contemplates and ruminates as it hunts a mouse. They’re just like a jackal on a river-bank, which meditates and concentrates and contemplates and ruminates as it hunts a fish. They’re just like a cat by an alley or a drain or a dustbin, which meditates and concentrates and contemplates and ruminates as it hunts a mouse. They’re just like an unladen donkey by an alley or a drain or a dustbin, which meditates and concentrates and contemplates and ruminates. In the same way, these shavelings, fake ascetics, primitives, black spawn from the feet of our kinsman, say, “We practice absorption meditation! We practice absorption meditation!” Shoulders drooping, downcast, and dopey, they meditate and concentrate and contemplate and ruminate.’
> Pali: Atha kho te, pāpima, brāhmaṇagahapatikā anvāvisiṭṭhā dūsinā mārena bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme akkosanti paribhāsanti rosenti vihesenti: ‘ime pana muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kiṇhā bandhupādāpaccā “jhāyinosmā jhāyinosmā”ti pattakkhandhā adhomukhā madhurakajātā jhāyanti pajjhāyanti nijjhāyanti apajjhāyanti. Seyyathāpi nāma ulūko rukkhasākhāyaṁ mūsikaṁ maggayamāno jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati; evamevime muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kiṇhā bandhupādāpaccā “jhāyinosmā jhāyinosmā”ti pattakkhandhā adhomukhā madhurakajātā jhāyanti pajjhāyanti nijjhāyanti apajjhāyanti. Seyyathāpi nāma kotthu nadītīre macche maggayamāno jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati; evamevime muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kiṇhā bandhupādāpaccā “jhāyinosmā jhāyinosmā”ti pattakkhandhā adhomukhā madhurakajātā jhāyanti pajjhāyanti nijjhāyanti apajjhāyanti. Seyyathāpi nāma biḷāro sandhisamalasaṅkaṭīre mūsikaṁ maggayamāno jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati; evamevime muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kiṇhā bandhupādāpaccā “jhāyinosmā jhāyinosmā”ti pattakkhandhā adhomukhā madhurakajātā jhāyanti pajjhāyanti nijjhāyanti apajjhāyanti. Seyyathāpi nāma gadrabho vahacchinno sandhisamalasaṅkaṭīre jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati; evamevime muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kiṇhā bandhupādāpaccā “jhāyinosmā jhāyinosmā”ti pattakkhandhā adhomukhā madhurakajātā jhāyanti pajjhāyanti nijjhāyanti apajjhāyantī’ti.
[¶15] Most of the people who died at that time—when their body broke up, after death—were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: Ye kho pana, pāpima, tena samayena manussā kālaṁ karonti yebhuyyena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti.
[¶16] Then Kakusandha the Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, addressed the mendicants: ‘Mendicants, the brahmins and householders have been possessed by Māra Dūsī. He told them to abuse you in the hope of upsetting your minds so that he can find a vulnerability. Come, all of you mendicants, meditate spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. Meditate spreading a heart full of compassion … Meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing … Meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.’
> Pali: Atha kho, pāpima, kakusandho bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bhikkhū āmantesi: ‘anvāviṭṭhā kho, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇagahapatikā dūsinā mārena— etha, tumhe bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme akkosatha paribhāsatha rosetha vihesetha, appeva nāma tumhehi akkosiyamānānaṁ paribhāsiyamānānaṁ rosiyamānānaṁ vihesiyamānānaṁ siyā cittassa aññathattaṁ, yathā taṁ dūsī māro labhetha otāran’ti. Etha, tumhe, bhikkhave, mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharatha, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharatha. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharatha, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharathā’ti.
[¶17] When those mendicants were instructed and advised by the Buddha Kakusandha in this way, they went to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut, where they meditated spreading a heart full of love … compassion … rejoicing … equanimity.
> Pali: Atha kho te, pāpima, bhikkhū kakusandhena bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena evaṁ ovadiyamānā evaṁ anusāsiyamānā araññagatāpi rukkhamūlagatāpi suññāgāragatāpi mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihariṁsu, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihariṁsu. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihariṁsu, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihariṁsu.
[¶18] Then it occurred to Māra Dūsī, ‘Even when I do this I don’t know the course of rebirth of these ethical mendicants of good character. Why don’t I take possession of these brahmins and householders and say, “Come, all of you, honor, respect, esteem, and venerate the ethical mendicants of good character. Hopefully by doing this we can upset their minds so that Māra Dūsī can find a vulnerability.”’
> Pali: Atha kho, pāpima, dūsissa mārassa etadahosi: ‘evampi kho ahaṁ karonto imesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ sīlavantānaṁ kalyāṇadhammānaṁ neva jānāmi āgatiṁ vā gatiṁ vā, yannūnāhaṁ brāhmaṇagahapatike anvāviseyyaṁ: “etha, tumhe bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme sakkarotha garuṁ karotha mānetha pūjetha, appeva nāma tumhehi sakkariyamānānaṁ garukariyamānānaṁ māniyamānānaṁ pūjiyamānānaṁ siyā cittassa aññathattaṁ, yathā taṁ dūsī māro labhetha otāran”’ti.
[¶19] And that’s exactly what he did. Then those brahmins and householders honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated the ethical mendicants of good character.
> Pali: Atha kho te, pāpima, dūsī māro brāhmaṇagahapatike anvāvisi: ‘etha, tumhe bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme sakkarotha garuṁ karotha mānetha pūjetha, appeva nāma tumhehi sakkariyamānānaṁ garukariyamānānaṁ māniyamānānaṁ pūjiyamānānaṁ siyā cittassa aññathattaṁ, yathā taṁ dūsī māro labhetha otāran’ti. Atha kho te, pāpima, brāhmaṇagahapatikā anvāviṭṭhā dūsinā mārena bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti.
[¶20] Most of the people who died at that time—when their body broke up, after death—were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Ye kho pana, pāpima, tena samayena manussā kālaṁ karonti yebhuyyena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.
[¶21] Then Kakusandha the Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, addressed the mendicants: ‘Mendicants, the brahmins and householders have been possessed by Māra Dūsī. He told them to venerate you in the hope of upsetting your minds so that he can find a vulnerability. Come, all you mendicants, meditate observing the ugliness of the body, perceiving the repulsiveness of food, perceiving dissatisfaction with the whole world, and observing the impermanence of all conditions.’
> Pali: Atha kho, pāpima, kakusandho bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bhikkhū āmantesi: ‘anvāviṭṭhā kho, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇagahapatikā dūsinā mārena: “etha, tumhe bhikkhū sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme sakkarotha garuṁ karotha mānetha pūjetha, appeva nāma tumhehi sakkariyamānānaṁ garukariyamānānaṁ māniyamānānaṁ pūjiyamānānaṁ siyā cittassa aññathattaṁ, yathā taṁ dūsī māro labhetha otāran”ti. Etha, tumhe, bhikkhave, asubhānupassino kāye viharatha, āhāre paṭikūlasaññino, sabbaloke anabhiratisaññino, sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccānupassino’ti.
[¶22] When those mendicants were instructed and advised by the Buddha Kakusandha in this way, they went to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut, where they meditated observing the ugliness of the body, perceiving the repulsiveness of food, perceiving dissatisfaction with the whole world, and observing the impermanence of all conditions.
> Pali: Atha kho te, pāpima, bhikkhū kakusandhena bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena evaṁ ovadiyamānā evaṁ anusāsiyamānā araññagatāpi rukkhamūlagatāpi suññāgāragatāpi asubhānupassino kāye vihariṁsu, āhāre paṭikūlasaññino, sabbaloke anabhiratisaññino, sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccānupassino.
[¶23] Then the Buddha Kakusandha robed up in the morning and, taking this bowl and robe, entered the village for alms with Venerable Vidhura as his second monk.
> Pali: Atha kho, pāpima, kakusandho bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya āyasmatā vidhurena pacchāsamaṇena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.
[¶24] Then Māra Dūsī took possession of a certain boy, picked up a rock, and hit Vidhura on the head, cracking it open. Then Vidhura, with blood pouring from his cracked skull, still followed behind the Buddha Kakusandha. Then the Buddha Kakusandha turned to gaze back, the way that elephants do, saying, ‘This Māra Dūsī knows no limit.’ And as he was gazing, Māra Dūsī fell from that place and was reborn in the Great Hell.
> Pali: Atha kho, pāpima, dūsī māro aññataraṁ kumārakaṁ anvāvisitvā sakkharaṁ gahetvā āyasmato vidhurassa sīse pahāramadāsi; sīsaṁ vobhindi. Atha kho, pāpima, āyasmā vidhuro bhinnena sīsena lohitena gaḷantena kakusandhaṁyeva bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi. Atha kho, pāpima, kakusandho bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho nāgāpalokitaṁ apalokesi: ‘na vāyaṁ dūsī māro mattamaññāsī’ti. Sahāpalokanāya ca pana, pāpima, dūsī māro tamhā ca ṭhānā cavi mahānirayañca upapajji.
[¶25] Now that Great Hell is known by three names: ‘Related to the Six Fields of Contact’ and also ‘The Impaling With Spikes’ and also ‘Uniquely Painful’. Then the wardens of hell came to me and said, ‘When spike meets spike in your heart, you will know that you’ve been roasting in hell for a thousand years.’
> Pali: Tassa kho pana, pāpima, mahānirayassa tayo nāmadheyyā honti— chaphassāyataniko itipi, saṅkusamāhato itipi, paccattavedaniyo itipi. Atha kho maṁ, pāpima, nirayapālā upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘yadā kho te, mārisa, saṅkunā saṅku hadaye samāgaccheyya. Atha naṁ tvaṁ jāneyyāsi: “vassasahassaṁ me niraye paccamānassā”’ti.
[¶26] I roasted for many years, many centuries, many millennia in that Great Hell. For ten thousand years I roasted in the annex of that Great Hell, experiencing the pain called ‘this is emergence’. My body was in human form, but I had the head of a fish.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, pāpima, bahūni vassāni bahūni vassasatāni bahūni vassasahassāni tasmiṁ mahāniraye apacciṁ. Dasavassasahassāni tasseva mahānirayassa ussade apacciṁ vuṭṭhānimaṁ nāma vedanaṁ vediyamāno. Tassa mayhaṁ, pāpima, evarūpo kāyo hoti, seyyathāpi manussassa. Evarūpaṁ sīsaṁ hoti, seyyathāpi macchassa.
[¶27] What kind of hell was that,
where Dūsī was roasted
after attacking the disciple Vidhura
along with the brahmin Kakusandha?
> Pali: Kīdiso nirayo āsi,
yattha dūsī apaccatha;
Vidhuraṁ sāvakamāsajja,
kakusandhañca brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶28] There were 100 iron spikes,
each one uniquely painful.
That’s the kind of hell
where Dūsī was roasted
after attacking the disciple Vidhura
along with the brahmin Kakusandha.
> Pali: Sataṁ āsi ayosaṅkū,
sabbe paccattavedanā;
Īdiso nirayo āsi,
yattha dūsī apaccatha;
Vidhuraṁ sāvakamāsajja,
kakusandhañca brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶29] Dark One, if you attack
a mendicant who directly knows this,
a disciple of the Buddha,
you’ll fall into suffering.
> Pali: Yo etamabhijānāti,
bhikkhu buddhassa sāvako;
Tādisaṁ bhikkhumāsajja,
kaṇha dukkhaṁ nigacchasi.
[¶30] There are mansions that last an eon
standing in the middle of a lake.
Sapphire-colored, brilliant,
they sparkle and shine.
Dancing there are nymphs
shining in all different colors.
> Pali: Majjhe sarassa tiṭṭhanti,
vimānā kappaṭṭhāyino;
Veḷuriyavaṇṇā rucirā,
accimanto pabhassarā;
Accharā tattha naccanti,
puthu nānattavaṇṇiyo.
[¶31] Dark One, if you attack
a mendicant who directly knows this,
a disciple of the Buddha,
you’ll fall into suffering.
> Pali: Yo etamabhijānāti,
bhikkhu buddhassa sāvako;
Tādisaṁ bhikkhumāsajja,
kaṇha dukkhaṁ nigacchasi.
[¶32] I’m the one who, urged by the Buddha,
shook the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother
with his big toe
as the Saṅgha of mendicants watched.
> Pali: Yo ve buddhena codito,
bhikkhu saṅghassa pekkhato;
Migāramātupāsādaṁ,
pādaṅguṭṭhena kampayi.
[¶33] Dark One, if you attack
a mendicant who directly knows this,
a disciple of the Buddha,
you’ll fall into suffering.
> Pali: Yo etamabhijānāti,
bhikkhu buddhassa sāvako;
Tādisaṁ bhikkhumāsajja,
kaṇha dukkhaṁ nigacchasi.
[¶34] I’m the one who shook the Palace of Victory
with his big toe
owing to psychic power,
inspiring deities to awe.
> Pali: Yo vejayantaṁ pāsādaṁ,
pādaṅguṭṭhena kampayi;
Iddhibalenupatthaddho,
saṁvejesi ca devatā.
[¶35] Dark One, if you attack
a mendicant who directly knows this,
a disciple of the Buddha,
you’ll fall into suffering.
> Pali: Yo etamabhijānāti,
bhikkhu buddhassa sāvako;
Tādisaṁ bhikkhumāsajja,
kaṇha dukkhaṁ nigacchasi.
[¶36] I’m the one who asked Sakka
in the Palace of Victory:
‘Vāsava, I hope you recall
the one who is freed through the ending of craving?’
And I’m the one to whom Sakka
admitted the truth when asked.
> Pali: Yo vejayantapāsāde,
sakkaṁ so paripucchati;
Api vāsava jānāsi,
taṇhākkhayavimuttiyo;
Tassa sakko viyākāsi,
pañhaṁ puṭṭho yathātathaṁ.
[¶37] Dark One, if you attack
a mendicant who directly knows this,
a disciple of the Buddha,
you’ll fall into suffering.
> Pali: Yo etamabhijānāti,
bhikkhu buddhassa sāvako;
Tādisaṁ bhikkhumāsajja,
kaṇha dukkhaṁ nigacchasi.
[¶38] I’m the one who asked the Divinity
in the Hall of Clear Right before the assembly:
‘Respectable sir, do you still have the same view
that you had in the past?
Or do you see the radiance
surpassing the realm of divinity?’
> Pali: Yo brahmaṁ paripucchati,
sudhammāyābhito sabhaṁ;
Ajjāpi tyāvuso diṭṭhi,
yā te diṭṭhi pure ahu;
Passasi vītivattantaṁ,
brahmaloke pabhassaraṁ.
[¶39] And I’m the one to whom the Divinity
truthfully admitted his progress:
‘Good fellow, I don’t have that view
that I had in the past.
> Pali: Tassa brahmā viyākāsi,
anupubbaṁ yathātathaṁ;
Na me mārisa sā diṭṭhi,
yā me diṭṭhi pure ahu.
[¶40] I see the radiance
surpassing the realm of divinity.
So how could I say today
that I am permanent and eternal?’
> Pali: Passāmi vītivattantaṁ,
brahmaloke pabhassaraṁ;
Sohaṁ ajja kathaṁ vajjaṁ,
ahaṁ niccomhi sassato.
[¶41] Dark One, if you attack
a mendicant who directly knows this,
a disciple of the Buddha,
you’ll fall into suffering.
> Pali: Yo etamabhijānāti,
bhikkhu buddhassa sāvako;
Tādisaṁ bhikkhumāsajja,
kaṇha dukkhaṁ nigacchasi.
[¶42] I’m the one who touched the peak of Mount Meru
using the power of meditative liberation.
I’ve visited the forests of the people
who dwell in the land east of Videha.
> Pali: Yo mahāmeruno kūṭaṁ,
vimokkhena aphassayi;
Vanaṁ pubbavidehānaṁ,
ye ca bhūmisayā narā.
[¶43] Dark One, if you attack
a mendicant who directly knows this,
a disciple of the Buddha,
you’ll fall into suffering.
> Pali: Yo etamabhijānāti,
bhikkhu buddhassa sāvako;
Tādisaṁ bhikkhumāsajja,
kaṇha dukkhaṁ nigacchasi.
[¶44] Though a fire doesn’t think,
‘I’ll burn the fool!’
Still the fool who attacks
the fire gets burnt.
> Pali: Na ve aggi cetayati,
‘ahaṁ bālaṁ ḍahāmī’ti;
Bālo ca jalitaṁ aggiṁ,
āsajja naṁ sa ḍayhati.
[¶45] In the same way, Māra,
in attacking the Realized One,
you’ll only burn yourself,
like a fool touching the flames.
> Pali: Evameva tuvaṁ māra,
āsajja naṁ tathāgataṁ;
Sayaṁ ḍahissasi attānaṁ,
bālo aggiṁva samphusaṁ.
[¶46] Māra’s done a bad thing
in attacking the Realized One.
Wicked One, do you imagine that
your wickedness won’t bear fruit?
> Pali: Apuññaṁ pasavī māro,
āsajja naṁ tathāgataṁ;
Kiṁ nu maññasi pāpima,
na me pāpaṁ vipaccati.
[¶47] Your deeds heap up wickedness
that will last a long time, terminator!
Give up on the Buddha, Māra!
And hold no hope for the mendicants!”
> Pali: Karoto cīyati pāpaṁ,
cirarattāya antaka;
Māra nibbinda buddhamhā,
āsaṁ mākāsi bhikkhusu.
[¶48] That is how, in the Bhesekaḷā grove,
the mendicant warned Māra.
That spirit, downcast,
disappeared right there.
> Pali: Iti māraṁ atajjesi,
bhikkhu bhesakaḷāvane;
Tato so dummano yakkho,
tatthevantaradhāyathā”ti.
[¶49] > Pali: Māratajjanīyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶50] > Pali: Cūḷayamakavaggo niṭṭhito pañcamo.
[¶51] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶52] > Pali: Sāleyya verañjaduve ca tuṭṭhi,
Cūḷamahādhammasamādānañca;
Vīmaṁsakā kosambi ca brāhmaṇo,
Dūsī ca māro dasamo ca vaggo.
[¶53] > Pali: Idaṁ vaggānamuddānaṁ
[¶54] > Pali: Mūlapariyāyo ceva,
sīhanādo ca uttamo;
Kakaco ceva gosiṅgo,
sāleyyo ca ime pañca.
[¶55] > Pali: Mūlapaṇṇāsakaṁ samattaṁ.
## 54. MN 51 · With Kandaraka
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/54/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/54/#p-N
[¶0] MN 51 · With Kandaraka
> Pali: MN 51 · Kandarakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Campā on the banks of the Gaggarā Lotus Pond together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā campāyaṁ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ.
[¶2] Then Pessa the elephant marshal’s son and Kandaraka the wanderer went to the Buddha. When they had approached, Pessa bowed and sat down to one side. But the wanderer Kandaraka exchanged greetings with the Buddha and stood to one side. He looked around the mendicant Saṅgha, who were so very silent, and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho pesso ca hatthārohaputto kandarako ca paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā pesso hatthārohaputto bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Kandarako pana paribbājako bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho kandarako paribbājako tuṇhībhūtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anuviloketvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “It’s incredible, worthy Gotama, it’s amazing! How the mendicant Saṅgha has been led to practice properly by the worthy Gotama! The perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas in the past or the future who lead the mendicant Saṅgha to practice properly at best do so like the worthy Gotama does in the present.”
> Pali: “acchariyaṁ, bho gotama, abbhutaṁ, bho gotama. Yāvañcidaṁ bhotā gotamena sammā bhikkhusaṅgho paṭipādito. Yepi te, bho gotama, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā tepi bhagavanto etaparamaṁyeva sammā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṭipādesuṁ— seyyathāpi etarahi bhotā gotamena sammā bhikkhusaṅgho paṭipādito. Yepi te, bho gotama, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā tepi bhagavanto etaparamaṁyeva sammā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṭipādessanti— seyyathāpi etarahi bhotā gotamena sammā bhikkhusaṅgho paṭipādito”ti.
[¶4] “That’s so true, Kandaraka! That’s so true! The perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas in the past or the future who lead the mendicant Saṅgha to practice properly at best do so like I do in the present.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, kandaraka, evametaṁ, kandaraka. Yepi te, kandaraka, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā tepi bhagavanto etaparamaṁyeva sammā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṭipādesuṁ— seyyathāpi etarahi mayā sammā bhikkhusaṅgho paṭipādito. Yepi te, kandaraka, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā tepi bhagavanto etaparamaṁyeva sammā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṭipādessanti— seyyathāpi etarahi mayā sammā bhikkhusaṅgho paṭipādito.
[¶5] For in this mendicant Saṅgha there are perfected mendicants, who have ended the defilements, completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and are rightly freed through enlightenment. And in this mendicant Saṅgha there are trainee mendicants who are consistently ethical, living consistently, alert, living alertly. They meditate with their minds firmly established in the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. What four?
> Pali: Santi hi, kandaraka, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe arahanto khīṇāsavā vusitavanto katakaraṇīyā ohitabhārā anuppattasadatthā parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanā sammadaññāvimuttā. Santi hi, kandaraka, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe sekkhā santatasīlā santatavuttino nipakā nipakavuttino; te catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu suppatiṭṭhitacittā viharanti. Katamesu catūsu?
[¶6] It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of the mind—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.”
> Pali: Idha, kandaraka, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; citte cittānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassan”ti.
[¶7] When he had spoken, Pessa said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, pesso hatthārohaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶8] “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! How well described by the Buddha are the four kinds of mindfulness meditation! They are in order to purify sentient beings, to get past sorrow and crying, to make an end of pain and sadness, to discover the system, and to realize extinguishment. For we white-clothed laypeople also from time to time meditate with our minds well established in the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. We meditate observing an aspect of the body … feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Yāva supaññattā cime, bhante, bhagavatā cattāro satipaṭṭhānā sattānaṁ visuddhiyā sokaparidevānaṁ samatikkamāya dukkhadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya. Mayampi hi, bhante, gihī odātavasanā kālena kālaṁ imesu catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu suppatiṭṭhitacittā viharāma. Idha mayaṁ, bhante, kāye kāyānupassino viharāma ātāpino sampajānā satimanto, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; vedanāsu vedanānupassino viharāma ātāpino sampajānā satimanto, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; citte cittānupassino viharāma ātāpino sampajānā satimanto, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; dhammesu dhammānupassino viharāma ātāpino sampajānā satimanto, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶9] It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! How the Buddha knows what’s best for sentient beings, even though humans continue to be so shady, rotten, and tricky. For human beings are shady, sir, while beasts are obvious. For I can drive an elephant in training, and while going back and forth in Campā it’ll try all the tricks, bluffs, ruses, and feints that it can. But my bondservants, servants, and workers behave one way by body, another by speech, and their minds another. It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! How the Buddha knows what’s best for sentient beings, even though humans continue to be so shady, rotten, and tricky. For human beings are shady, sir, while beasts are obvious.”
> Pali: Acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Yāvañcidaṁ, bhante, bhagavā evaṁ manussagahane evaṁ manussakasaṭe evaṁ manussasāṭheyye vattamāne sattānaṁ hitāhitaṁ jānāti. Gahanañhetaṁ, bhante, yadidaṁ manussā; uttānakañhetaṁ, bhante, yadidaṁ pasavo. Ahañhi, bhante, pahomi hatthidammaṁ sāretuṁ. Yāvatakena antarena campaṁ gatāgataṁ karissati sabbāni tāni sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vaṅkeyyāni jimheyyāni pātukarissati. Amhākaṁ pana, bhante, dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā aññathāva kāyena samudācaranti aññathāva vācāya aññathāva nesaṁ cittaṁ hoti. Acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Yāvañcidaṁ, bhante, bhagavā evaṁ manussagahane evaṁ manussakasaṭe evaṁ manussasāṭheyye vattamāne sattānaṁ hitāhitaṁ jānāti. Gahanañhetaṁ, bhante, yadidaṁ manussā; uttānakañhetaṁ, bhante, yadidaṁ pasavo”ti.
[¶10] “That’s so true, Pessa! That’s so true! For human beings are shady, while beasts are obvious. Pessa, these four individuals are found in the world. What four?
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, pessa, evametaṁ, pessa. Gahanañhetaṁ, pessa, yadidaṁ manussā; uttānakañhetaṁ, pessa, yadidaṁ pasavo. Cattārome, pessa, puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ. Katame cattāro?
[¶11] One individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves.
> Pali: Idha, pessa, ekacco puggalo attantapo hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto;
[¶12] One individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others.
> Pali: idha pana, pessa, ekacco puggalo parantapo hoti paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto;
[¶13] One individual mortifies themselves and others, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others.
> Pali: idha pana, pessa, ekacco puggalo attantapo ca hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto;
[¶14] One individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others. They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.
> Pali: idha pana, pessa, ekacco puggalo nevattantapo hoti nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. So anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati.
[¶15] Which one of these four individuals do you like the sound of?”
> Pali: Imesaṁ, pessa, catunnaṁ puggalānaṁ katamo te puggalo cittaṁ ārādhetī”ti?
[¶16] “Sir, I don’t like the sound of the first three individuals. I only like the sound of the last individual, who doesn’t mortify either themselves or others.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, ayaṁ me puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yopāyaṁ, bhante, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, ayampi me puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yopāyaṁ, bhante, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, ayampi me puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yo ca kho ayaṁ, bhante, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati— ayameva me puggalo cittaṁ ārādhetī”ti.
[¶17] “But why don’t you like the sound of those three individuals?”
> Pali: “Kasmā pana te, pessa, ime tayo puggalā cittaṁ nārādhentī”ti?
[¶18] “Sir, the individual who mortifies themselves does so even though they want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I don’t like the sound of that individual. The individual who mortifies others does so even though others want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I don’t like the sound of that individual. The individual who mortifies themselves and others does so even though both themselves and others want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I don’t like the sound of that individual. The individual who doesn’t mortify either themselves or others—living without wishes, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine—does not torment themselves or others, both of whom want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I like the sound of that individual. Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so attānaṁ sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ ātāpeti paritāpeti— iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yopāyaṁ, bhante, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so paraṁ sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ ātāpeti paritāpeti— iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yopāyaṁ, bhante, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so attānañca parañca sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ ātāpeti paritāpeti— iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yo ca kho ayaṁ, bhante, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati; so attānañca parañca sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ neva ātāpeti na paritāpeti— iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ ārādheti. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bhante, gacchāma; bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶19] “Please, Pessa, go at your convenience.” And then Pessa the elephant marshal’s son approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. He got up from his seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, pessa, kālaṁ maññasī”ti. Atha kho pesso hatthārohaputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶20] Then, not long after he had left, the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, Pessa the elephant marshal’s son is astute. He has great wisdom. If he had sat here an hour so that I could have analyzed these four individuals in detail, he would have greatly benefited. Still, even with this much he has already greatly benefited.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkante pesse hatthārohaputte bhikkhū āmantesi: “paṇḍito, bhikkhave, pesso hatthārohaputto; mahāpañño, bhikkhave, pesso hatthārohaputto. Sace, bhikkhave, pesso hatthārohaputto muhuttaṁ nisīdeyya yāvassāhaṁ ime cattāro puggale vitthārena vibhajissāmi, mahatā atthena saṁyutto abhavissa. Api ca, bhikkhave, ettāvatāpi pesso hatthārohaputto mahatā atthena saṁyutto”ti.
[¶21] “Now is the time, Blessed One! Now is the time, Holy One! May the Buddha analyze these four individuals in detail. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Etassa, bhagavā, kālo, etassa, sugata, kālo, yaṁ bhagavā ime cattāro puggale vitthārena vibhajeyya. Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶22] “Well then, mendicants, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhikkhave, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶23] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶24] “And what individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves? It’s when an individual goes naked, ignoring conventions. They lick their hands, and don’t come or wait when called. They don’t consent to food brought to them, or food prepared for them, or an invitation for a meal. They don’t receive anything from a pot or bowl; or from someone who keeps sheep, or who has a weapon or a shovel in their home; or where a couple is eating; or where there is a woman who is pregnant, breastfeeding, or who lives with a man; or where there’s a hound waiting or flies buzzing. They accept no fish or meat or beer or wine, and drink no fermented gruel. They go to just one house for alms, taking just one mouthful, or two houses and two mouthfuls, up to seven houses and seven mouthfuls. They feed on one saucer a day, two saucers a day, up to seven saucers a day. They eat once a day, once every second day, up to once a week, and so on, even up to once a fortnight. They live committed to the practice of eating food at set intervals.
> Pali: “Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo acelako hoti muttācāro hatthāpalekhano naehibhaddantiko natiṭṭhabhaddantiko; nābhihaṭaṁ na uddissakataṁ na nimantanaṁ sādiyati; so na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti na kaḷopimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti na eḷakamantaraṁ na daṇḍamantaraṁ na musalamantaraṁ na dvinnaṁ bhuñjamānānaṁ na gabbhiniyā na pāyamānāya na purisantaragatāya na saṅkittīsu na yattha sā upaṭṭhito hoti na yattha makkhikā saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī; na macchaṁ na maṁsaṁ na suraṁ na merayaṁ na thusodakaṁ pivati. So ekāgāriko vā hoti ekālopiko, dvāgāriko vā hoti dvālopiko …pe… sattāgāriko vā hoti sattālopiko; ekissāpi dattiyā yāpeti, dvīhipi dattīhi yāpeti …pe… sattahipi dattīhi yāpeti; ekāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti, dvīhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti …pe… sattāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti—iti evarūpaṁ aḍḍhamāsikaṁ pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati.
[¶25] They eat herbs, millet, wild rice, poor rice, water lettuce, rice bran, scum from boiling rice, sesame flour, grass, or cow dung. They survive on forest roots and fruits, or eating fallen fruit.
> Pali: So sākabhakkho vā hoti, sāmākabhakkho vā hoti, nīvārabhakkho vā hoti, daddulabhakkho vā hoti, haṭabhakkho vā hoti, kaṇabhakkho vā hoti, ācāmabhakkho vā hoti, piññākabhakkho vā hoti, tiṇabhakkho vā hoti, gomayabhakkho vā hoti; vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī.
[¶26] They wear robes of sunn hemp, mixed hemp, corpse-wrapping cloth, rags, lodh tree bark, antelope hide (whole or in strips), kusa grass, bark, wood-chips, human hair, horse-tail hair, or owls’ wings. They tear out their hair and beard, committed to this practice. They constantly stand, turning down seats. They squat, committed to the endeavor of squatting. They lie on a mat of thorns, making a mat of thorns their bed. They’re devoted to ritual bathing three times a day, including at dusk. And so they live committed to practicing these various ways of mortifying and tormenting the body. This is called an individual who mortifies themselves, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves.
> Pali: So sāṇānipi dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti, chavadussānipi dhāreti, paṁsukūlānipi dhāreti, tirīṭānipi dhāreti, ajinampi dhāreti, ajinakkhipampi dhāreti, kusacīrampi dhāreti, vākacīrampi dhāreti, phalakacīrampi dhāreti, kesakambalampi dhāreti, vāḷakambalampi dhāreti, ulūkapakkhampi dhāreti; kesamassulocakopi hoti, kesamassulocanānuyogamanuyutto, ubbhaṭṭhakopi hoti āsanapaṭikkhitto, ukkuṭikopi hoti ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyutto, kaṇṭakāpassayikopi hoti kaṇṭakāpassaye seyyaṁ kappeti; sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharati— iti evarūpaṁ anekavihitaṁ kāyassa ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶27] And what individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others? It’s when an individual is a slaughterer of sheep, pigs, or poultry, a hunter or trapper, a fisher, a bandit, an executioner, a butcher, a jailer, or someone with some other kind of cruel livelihood. This is called an individual who mortifies others, being committed to the practice of mortifying others.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo orabbhiko hoti sūkariko sākuṇiko māgaviko luddo macchaghātako coro coraghātako goghātako bandhanāgāriko, ye vā panaññepi keci kurūrakammantā. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶28] And what individual mortifies themselves and others, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others? It’s when an individual is an anointed aristocratic king or a well-to-do brahmin. He has a new ceremonial hall built to the east of the citadel. He shaves off his hair and beard, dresses in a rough antelope hide, and smears his body with ghee and oil. Scratching his back with antlers, he enters the hall with his chief queen and the brahmin high priest. There he lies on the bare ground strewn with grass. The king feeds on the milk from one teat of a cow that has a calf of the same color. The chief queen feeds on the milk from the second teat. The brahmin high priest feeds on the milk from the third teat. The milk from the fourth teat is served to the sacred flame. The calf feeds on the leftovers. He says: ‘Slaughter this many bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats, rams, and horses for the sacrifice! Fell this many trees and reap this much grass for the sacrificial equipment!’ His bondservants, servants, and workers do their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. This is called an individual who mortifies themselves and others, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo rājā vā hoti khattiyo muddhāvasitto brāhmaṇo vā mahāsālo. So puratthimena nagarassa navaṁ santhāgāraṁ kārāpetvā kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kharājinaṁ nivāsetvā sappitelena kāyaṁ abbhañjitvā magavisāṇena piṭṭhiṁ kaṇḍuvamāno navaṁ santhāgāraṁ pavisati saddhiṁ mahesiyā brāhmaṇena ca purohitena. So tattha anantarahitāya bhūmiyā haritupalittāya seyyaṁ kappeti. Ekissāya gāviyā sarūpavacchāya yaṁ ekasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena rājā yāpeti, yaṁ dutiyasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena mahesī yāpeti, yaṁ tatiyasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena brāhmaṇo purohito yāpeti, yaṁ catutthasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena aggiṁ juhati, avasesena vacchako yāpeti. So evamāha: ‘ettakā usabhā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā vacchatarā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā vacchatariyo haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā ajā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā urabbhā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā assā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā rukkhā chijjantu yūpatthāya, ettakā dabbhā lūyantu barihisatthāyā’ti. Yepissa te honti dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā tepi daṇḍatajjitā bhayatajjitā assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni karonti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶29] And what individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, but lives without wishes, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine?
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati?
[¶30] It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.
[¶31] A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajāpatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya, mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā, kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati.
[¶32] Once they’ve gone forth, they take up the training and livelihood of the mendicants. They give up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving. They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex. They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words. They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people. They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music. They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. They refrain from high and luxurious beds. They refrain from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land. They refrain from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence.
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati. Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā. Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa. Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya—iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ. So bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti, ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā; naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti; mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti; uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti; jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti; dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti; kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti; tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti; ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti; chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
[¶33] They’re content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves.
> Pali: So santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. Seyyathāpi nāma pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti, sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶34] When they see a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶35] They act with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: So abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.
[¶36] When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble contentment, this noble sense restraint, and this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ.
[¶37] After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present. Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will and malevolence. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti, byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti; thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti; uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti; vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶38] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati;
[¶39] As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected.
> Pali: vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati;
[¶40] And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’
> Pali: pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati;
[¶41] With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶42] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶43] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā; ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶44] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶45] They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’. Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: ‘Ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶46] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶47] This is called an individual who neither mortifies themselves or others, being committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others. They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. So attantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharatī”ti.
[¶48] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶49] > Pali: Kandarakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 55. MN 52 · The Wealthy Citizen
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/55/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/55/#p-N
[¶0] MN 52 · The Wealthy Citizen
> Pali: MN 52 · Aṭṭhakanāgarasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Ānanda was staying near Vesālī in the little village of Beluva.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā ānando vesāliyaṁ viharati beluvagāmake.
[¶2] Now at that time the householder Dasama, a wealthy citizen, had arrived at Pāṭaliputta on some business. He went to the Chicken Monastery, approached a certain mendicant, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, where is Venerable Ānanda now staying? For I want to see him.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro pāṭaliputtaṁ anuppatto hoti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro yena kukkuṭārāmo yena aññataro bhikkhu tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ bhikkhuṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca: “kahaṁ nu kho, bhante, āyasmā ānando etarahi viharati? Dassanakāmā hi mayaṁ taṁ āyasmantaṁ ānandan”ti.
[¶3] “Householder, Venerable Ānanda is staying near Vesālī in the little village of Beluva.”
> Pali: “Eso, gahapati, āyasmā ānando vesāliyaṁ viharati beluvagāmake”ti.
[¶4] Then the householder Dasama, having concluded his business there, went to the little village of Beluva in Vesālī to see Ānanda. He bowed, sat down to one side, and said to Ānanda:
> Pali: Atha kho dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro pāṭaliputte taṁ karaṇīyaṁ tīretvā yena vesālī yena beluvagāmako yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca:
[¶5] “Honorable Ānanda, is there one thing that has been rightly explained by the Blessed One—who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha—practicing which a diligent, keen, and resolute mendicant’s mind is freed, their defilements are ended, and they arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke?”
> Pali: “atthi nu kho, bhante ānanda, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ekadhammo akkhāto yattha bhikkhuno appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avimuttañceva cittaṁ vimuccati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇātī”ti?
[¶6] “There is, householder.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, gahapati, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ekadhammo akkhāto, yattha bhikkhuno appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avimuttañceva cittaṁ vimuccati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇātī”ti.
[¶7] “And what is that one thing?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante ānanda, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ekadhammo akkhāto, yattha bhikkhuno appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avimuttañceva cittaṁ vimuccati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇātī”ti?
[¶8] “Householder, it’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Then they reflect: ‘Even this first absorption is produced by choices and intentions.’ They understand: ‘But whatever is produced by choices and intentions is impermanent and liable to cessation.’ Abiding in that they attain the ending of defilements. If they don’t attain the ending of defilements, with the ending of the five lower fetters they’re reborn spontaneously, because of their passion and love for that meditation. They are extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world. This is one thing that has been rightly explained by the Blessed One—who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha—practicing which a diligent, keen, and resolute mendicant’s mind is freed, their defilements are ended, and they arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke.
> Pali: “Idha, gahapati, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘idampi kho paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ. Yaṁ kho pana kiñci abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ tadaniccaṁ nirodhadhamman’ti pajānāti. So tattha ṭhito āsavānaṁ khayaṁ pāpuṇāti. No ce āsavānaṁ khayaṁ pāpuṇāti, teneva dhammarāgena tāya dhammanandiyā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko hoti tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, gahapati, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ekadhammo akkhāto, yattha bhikkhuno appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avimuttañceva cittaṁ vimuccati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti.
[¶9] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘idampi kho dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ …pe… anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti. Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘idampi kho tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ …pe… anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti. Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘idampi kho catutthaṁ jhānaṁ abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ …pe… anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti.
[¶10] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. Then they reflect: ‘Even this heart’s release by love is produced by choices and intentions.’ They understand: ‘But whatever is produced by choices and intentions is impermanent and liable to cessation.’ …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayampi kho mettācetovimutti abhisaṅkhatā abhisañcetayitā. Yaṁ kho pana kiñci abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ tadaniccaṁ nirodhadhamman’ti pajānāti. So tattha ṭhito …pe… anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti.
[¶11] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of compassion … rejoicing … equanimity …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayampi kho upekkhācetovimutti abhisaṅkhatā abhisañcetayitā. Yaṁ kho pana kiñci abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ tadaniccaṁ nirodhadhamman’ti pajānāti. So tattha ṭhito …pe… anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti.
[¶12] Furthermore, householder, a mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. Then they reflect: ‘Even this attainment of the dimension of infinite space is produced by choices and intentions.’ They understand: ‘But whatever is produced by choices and intentions is impermanent and liable to cessation.’ …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayampi kho ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpatti abhisaṅkhatā abhisañcetayitā. Yaṁ kho pana kiñci abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ tadaniccaṁ nirodhadhamman’ti pajānāti. So tattha ṭhito …pe… anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti.
[¶13] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayampi kho viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpatti abhisaṅkhatā abhisañcetayitā. Yaṁ kho pana kiñci abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ tadaniccaṁ nirodhadhamman’ti pajānāti. So tattha ṭhito …pe… anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇāti.
[¶14] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. Then they reflect: ‘Even this attainment of the dimension of nothingness is produced by choices and intentions.’ They understand: ‘But whatever is produced by choices and intentions is impermanent and liable to cessation.’ Abiding in that they attain the ending of defilements. If they don’t attain the ending of defilements, with the ending of the five lower fetters they’re reborn spontaneously because of their passion and love for that meditation. They are extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world. This too is one thing that has been rightly explained by the Blessed One—who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha—practicing which a diligent, keen, and resolute mendicant’s mind is freed, their defilements are ended, and they arrive at the supreme sanctuary from the yoke.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapati, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayampi kho ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpatti abhisaṅkhatā abhisañcetayitā. Yaṁ kho pana kiñci abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ tadaniccaṁ nirodhadhamman’ti pajānāti. So tattha ṭhito āsavānaṁ khayaṁ pāpuṇāti. No ce āsavānaṁ khayaṁ pāpuṇāti, teneva dhammarāgena tāya dhammanandiyā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko hoti tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, gahapati, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ekadhammo akkhāto yattha bhikkhuno appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avimuttañceva cittaṁ vimuccati, aparikkhīṇā ca āsavā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, ananuppattañca anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ anupāpuṇātī”ti.
[¶15] When he said this, the householder Dasama said to Venerable Ānanda, “Honorable Ānanda, suppose a person was looking for the entrance to a treasure trove. And all at once they’d come across eleven entrances! In the same way, I was searching for the door to freedom from death. And all at once I found eleven doors to freedom from death for cultivation. Suppose a person had a house with eleven doors. If the house caught fire they’d be able to flee to safety through any one of those doors. In the same way, I’m able to flee to safety through any one of these eleven doors to freedom from death. Sir, those of other religions seek a fee for the tutor. Why shouldn’t I make an offering to Venerable Ānanda?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “seyyathāpi, bhante ānanda, puriso ekaṁva nidhimukhaṁ gavesanto sakideva ekādasa nidhimukhāni adhigaccheyya; evameva kho ahaṁ, bhante, ekaṁ amatadvāraṁ gavesanto sakideva ekādasa amatadvārāni alatthaṁ bhāvanāya. Seyyathāpi, bhante, purisassa agāraṁ ekādasadvāraṁ, so tasmiṁ agāre āditte ekamekenapi dvārena sakkuṇeyya attānaṁ sotthiṁ kātuṁ; evameva kho ahaṁ, bhante, imesaṁ ekādasannaṁ amatadvārānaṁ ekamekenapi amatadvārena sakkuṇissāmi attānaṁ sotthiṁ kātuṁ. Imehi nāma, bhante, aññatitthiyā ācariyassa ācariyadhanaṁ pariyesissanti, kimaṅgaṁ panāhaṁ āyasmato ānandassa pūjaṁ na karissāmī”ti.
[¶16] Then the householder Dasama, having assembled the Saṅgha from Vesālī and Pāṭaliputta, served and satisfied them with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. He clothed each and every mendicant in a pair of garments, with a set of three robes for Ānanda. And he had a dwelling worth five hundred built for Ānanda.
> Pali: Atha kho dasamo gahapati aṭṭhakanāgaro pāṭaliputtakañca vesālikañca bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātetvā paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi, ekamekañca bhikkhuṁ paccekaṁ dussayugena acchādesi, āyasmantañca ānandaṁ ticīvarena acchādesi, āyasmato ca ānandassa pañcasatavihāraṁ kārāpesīti.
[¶17] > Pali: Aṭṭhakanāgarasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 56. MN 53 · A Trainee
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/56/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/56/#p-N
[¶0] MN 53 · A Trainee
> Pali: MN 53 · Sekhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, near Kapilavatthu in the Banyan Tree Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ nigrodhārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time a new town hall had recently been constructed for the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu. It had not yet been occupied by an ascetic or brahmin or any human at all. Then the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kāpilavatthavānaṁ sakyānaṁ navaṁ santhāgāraṁ acirakāritaṁ hoti anajjhāvuṭṭhaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtena. Atha kho kāpilavatthavā sakyā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho kāpilavatthavā sakyā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ:
[¶3] “Sir, a new town hall has recently been constructed for the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu. It has not yet been occupied by an ascetic or brahmin or any human at all. May the Buddha be the first to use it, and only then will the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu use it. That would be for the lasting welfare and happiness of the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu.” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: “idha, bhante, kāpilavatthavānaṁ sakyānaṁ navaṁ santhāgāraṁ acirakāritaṁ anajjhāvuṭṭhaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtena. Taṁ, bhante, bhagavā paṭhamaṁ paribhuñjatu. Bhagavatā paṭhamaṁ paribhuttaṁ pacchā kāpilavatthavā sakyā paribhuñjissanti. Tadassa kāpilavatthavānaṁ sakyānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶4] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, the Sakyans got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right. Then they went to the new town hall, where they spread carpets all over, prepared seats, set up a water jar, and placed an oil lamp. Then they went back to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and told him of their preparations, saying, “Please, sir, come at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho kāpilavatthavā sakyā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena navaṁ santhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sabbasanthariṁ santhāgāraṁ santharitvā āsanāni paññapetvā udakamaṇikaṁ upaṭṭhapetvā telappadīpaṁ āropetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho kāpilavatthavā sakyā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “sabbasanthariṁ santhataṁ, bhante, santhāgāraṁ, āsanāni paññattāni, udakamaṇiko upaṭṭhāpito, telappadīpo āropito. Yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶5] Then the Buddha robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the new town hall together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Having washed his feet, he entered the town hall and sat against the central column facing east. The Saṅgha of mendicants also washed their feet, entered the town hall, and sat against the west wall facing east, with the Buddha right in front of them. The Sakyans of Kapilavatthu also washed their feet, entered the town hall, and sat against the east wall facing west, with the Buddha right in front of them.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena santhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā pāde pakkhāletvā santhāgāraṁ pavisitvā majjhimaṁ thambhaṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi. Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho pāde pakkhāletvā santhāgāraṁ pavisitvā pacchimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi, bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā. Kāpilavatthavāpi kho sakyā pāde pakkhāletvā santhāgāraṁ pavisitvā puratthimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya pacchimābhimukhā nisīdiṁsu, bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā.
[¶6] The Buddha spent much of the night educating, encouraging, firing up, and inspiring the Sakyans with a Dhamma talk. Then he addressed Venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, speak about the practicing trainee to the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu as you feel inspired. My back is sore, I’ll stretch it.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā kāpilavatthave sakye bahudeva rattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “paṭibhātu taṁ, ānanda, kāpilavatthavānaṁ sakyānaṁ sekho pāṭipado. Piṭṭhi me āgilāyati; tamahaṁ āyamissāmī”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. And then the Buddha spread out his outer robe folded in four and laid down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware, and focused on the time of getting up.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññāpetvā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi, pāde pādaṁ accādhāya, sato sampajāno, uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasi karitvā.
[¶8] Then Ānanda addressed Mahānāma the Sakyan:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando mahānāmaṁ sakkaṁ āmantesi:
[¶9] “Mahānāma, a noble disciple is accomplished in ethics, guards the sense doors, eats in moderation, and is dedicated to wakefulness. They have seven good qualities, and they get the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when they want, without trouble or difficulty.
> Pali: “idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlasampanno hoti, indriyesu guttadvāro hoti, bhojane mattaññū hoti, jāgariyaṁ anuyutto hoti, sattahi saddhammehi samannāgato hoti, catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī.
[¶10] And how is a noble disciple accomplished in ethics? It’s when a noble disciple is ethical, restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. That’s how a noble disciple is ethical.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlasampanno hoti? Idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. Evaṁ kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlasampanno hoti.
[¶11] And how does a noble disciple guard the sense doors? When a noble disciple sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. That’s how a noble disciple guards the sense doors.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahānāma, ariyasāvako indriyesu guttadvāro hoti? Idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Evaṁ kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako indriyesu guttadvāro hoti.
[¶12] And how does a noble disciple eat in moderation? It’s when a noble disciple reflects rationally on the food that they eat: ‘Not for fun, indulgence, adornment, or decoration, but only to sustain this body, to avoid harm, and to support spiritual practice. In this way, I shall put an end to old discomfort and not give rise to new discomfort, and I will have the means to keep going, blamelessness, and a comfortable abiding.’ That’s how a noble disciple eats in moderation.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahānāma, ariyasāvako bhojane mattaññū hoti? Idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṁ āhāreti: ‘neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya; yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya vihiṁsūparatiyā brahmacariyānuggahāya. Iti purāṇañca vedanaṁ paṭihaṅkhāmi, navañca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cā’ti. Evaṁ kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako bhojane mattaññū hoti.
[¶13] And how is a noble disciple dedicated to wakefulness? It’s when a noble disciple practices walking and sitting meditation by day, purifying their mind from obstacles. In the first watch of the night, they continue to practice walking and sitting meditation. In the middle watch, they lie down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware, and focused on the time of getting up. In the last watch, they get up and continue to practice walking and sitting meditation, purifying their mind from obstacles. That’s how a noble disciple is dedicated to wakefulness.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahānāma, ariyasāvako jāgariyaṁ anuyutto hoti? Idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako divasaṁ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodheti, rattiyā paṭhamaṁ yāmaṁ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodheti, rattiyā majjhimaṁ yāmaṁ dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappeti, pāde pādaṁ accādhāya, sato sampajāno, uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasi karitvā, rattiyā pacchimaṁ yāmaṁ paccuṭṭhāya caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodheti. Evaṁ kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako jāgariyaṁ anuyutto hoti.
[¶14] And how does a noble disciple have seven good qualities? It’s when a noble disciple has faith in the Realized One’s awakening: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’
> Pali: Kathañca, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sattahi saddhammehi samannāgato hoti? Idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako saddho hoti, saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṁ: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti.
[¶15] They have a conscience. They’re conscientious about bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and conscientious about having any bad, unskillful qualities.
> Pali: Hirimā hoti, hirīyati kāyaduccaritena vacīduccaritena manoduccaritena, hirīyati pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samāpattiyā.
[¶16] They exercise prudence. They’re prudent when it comes to bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and prudent when it comes to acquiring any bad, unskillful qualities.
> Pali: Ottappī hoti, ottappati kāyaduccaritena vacīduccaritena manoduccaritena, ottappati pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samāpattiyā.
[¶17] They’re very learned, remembering and keeping what they’ve learned. These teachings are good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased, describing a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. They are very learned in such teachings, remembering them, rehearsing them, mentally scrutinizing them, and penetrating them theoretically.
> Pali: Bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo. Ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthā sabyañjanā kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā.
[¶18] They live with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They’re strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities.
> Pali: Āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya, thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶19] They’re mindful. They have utmost mindfulness and alertness, and can remember and recall what was said and done long ago.
> Pali: Satimā hoti, paramena satinepakkena samannāgato, cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā.
[¶20] They’re wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering. That’s how a noble disciple has seven good qualities.
> Pali: Paññavā hoti, udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato, ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā. Evaṁ kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sattahi saddhammehi samannāgato hoti.
[¶21] And how does a noble disciple get the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when they want, without trouble or difficulty? It’s when a noble disciple, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. That’s how a noble disciple gets the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when they want, without trouble or difficulty.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahānāma, ariyasāvako catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī? Idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evaṁ kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī.
[¶22] When a noble disciple is accomplished in ethics, guards the sense doors, eats in moderation, and is dedicated to wakefulness; and they have seven good qualities, and they get the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when they want, without trouble or difficulty, they are called a noble disciple who is a practicing trainee. Their eggs are unspoiled, and they are capable of breaking out of their shell, becoming awakened, and achieving the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. Suppose there was a chicken with eight or ten or twelve eggs. And she properly sat on them to keep them warm and incubated. Even if that chicken doesn’t wish, ‘If only my chicks could break out of the eggshell with their claws and beak and hatch safely!’ Still they can break out and hatch safely.
> Pali: Yato kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako evaṁ sīlasampanno hoti, evaṁ indriyesu guttadvāro hoti, evaṁ bhojane mattaññū hoti, evaṁ jāgariyaṁ anuyutto hoti, evaṁ sattahi saddhammehi samannāgato hoti, evaṁ catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī, ayaṁ vuccati, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sekho pāṭipado apuccaṇḍatāya samāpanno, bhabbo abhinibbhidāya, bhabbo sambodhāya, bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya. Seyyathāpi, mahānāma, kukkuṭiyā aṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dvādasa vā tānāssu kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitāni sammā pariseditāni sammā paribhāvitāni, kiñcāpi tassā kukkuṭiyā na evaṁ icchā uppajjeyya: ‘aho vatime kukkuṭapotakā pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṁ padāletvā sotthinā abhinibbhijjeyyun’ti, atha kho bhabbāva te kukkuṭapotakā pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṁ padāletvā sotthinā abhinibbhijjituṁ.
[¶23] In the same way, when a noble disciple is practicing all these things they are called a noble disciple who is a practicing trainee. Their eggs are unspoiled, and they are capable of breaking out of their shell, becoming awakened, and achieving the supreme sanctuary from the yoke.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahānāma, yato ariyasāvako evaṁ sīlasampanno hoti, evaṁ indriyesu guttadvāro hoti, evaṁ bhojane mattaññū hoti, evaṁ jāgariyaṁ anuyutto hoti, evaṁ sattahi saddhammehi samannāgato hoti, evaṁ catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī, ayaṁ vuccati, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sekho pāṭipado apuccaṇḍatāya samāpanno, bhabbo abhinibbhidāya, bhabbo sambodhāya, bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya.
[¶24] Relying on this supreme purity of mindfulness and equanimity, that noble disciple recollects their many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. … And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. This is their first breaking out, like a chick from an eggshell.
> Pali: Sa kho so, mahānāma, ariyasāvako imaṁyeva anuttaraṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ āgamma anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, ayamassa paṭhamābhinibbhidā hoti kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhā.
[¶25] Relying on this supreme purity of mindfulness and equanimity, that noble disciple, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, sees sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. … They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. This is their second breaking out, like a chick from an eggshell.
> Pali: Sa kho so, mahānāma, ariyasāvako imaṁyeva anuttaraṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ āgamma dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti, ayamassa dutiyābhinibbhidā hoti kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhā.
[¶26] Relying on this supreme purity of mindfulness and equanimity, that noble disciple realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. This is their third breaking out, like a chick from an eggshell.
> Pali: Sa kho so, mahānāma, ariyasāvako imaṁyeva anuttaraṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ āgamma āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati, ayamassa tatiyābhinibbhidā hoti kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhā.
[¶27] A noble disciple’s conduct includes the following: being accomplished in ethics, guarding the sense doors, moderation in eating, being dedicated to wakefulness, having seven good qualities, and getting the four absorptions when they want, without trouble or difficulty.
> Pali: Yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlasampanno hoti, idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ; yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako indriyesu guttadvāro hoti, idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ; yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako bhojane mattaññū hoti, idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ; yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako jāgariyaṁ anuyutto hoti, idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ; yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sattahi saddhammehi samannāgato hoti, idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ; yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī, idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ.
[¶28] A noble disciple’s knowledge includes the following: recollecting their past lives, clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, and realizing the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Yañca kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, idampissa hoti vijjāya; yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti, idampissa hoti vijjāya. Yampi, mahānāma, ariyasāvako āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati, idampissa hoti vijjāya.
[¶29] This noble disciple is said to be ‘accomplished in knowledge’, and also ‘accomplished in conduct’, and also ‘accomplished in knowledge and conduct’.
> Pali: Ayaṁ vuccati, mahānāma, ariyasāvako vijjāsampanno itipi caraṇasampanno itipi vijjācaraṇasampanno itipi.
[¶30] And the divinity Sanaṅkumāra also spoke this verse:
> Pali: Brahmunāpesā, mahānāma, sanaṅkumārena gāthā bhāsitā:
[¶31] ‘The aristocrat is best among people
who take clan as the standard.
But one accomplished in knowledge and conduct
is best among gods and humans.’
> Pali: ‘Khattiyo seṭṭho janetasmiṁ,
ye gottapaṭisārino;
Vijjācaraṇasampanno,
so seṭṭho devamānuse’ti.
[¶32] And that verse was well sung by the Divinity Sanaṅkumāra, not poorly sung; well spoken, not poorly spoken, beneficial, not harmful, and it was approved by the Buddha.”
> Pali: Sā kho panesā, mahānāma, brahmunā sanaṅkumārena gāthā sugītā no duggītā, subhāsitā no dubbhāsitā, atthasaṁhitā no anatthasaṁhitā, anumatā bhagavatā”ti.
[¶33] Then the Buddha got up and said to Venerable Ānanda, “Good, good, Ānanda! It’s good that you spoke to the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu about the practicing trainee.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā uṭṭhahitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “sādhu sādhu, ānanda, sādhu kho tvaṁ, ānanda, kāpilavatthavānaṁ sakyānaṁ sekhaṁ pāṭipadaṁ abhāsī”ti.
[¶34] That is what Venerable Ānanda said, and the Teacher concurred. Satisfied, the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu approved what Venerable Ānanda said.
> Pali: Idamavocāyasmā ānando. Samanuñño satthā ahosi. Attamanā kāpilavatthavā sakyā āyasmato ānandassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶35] > Pali: Sekhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 57. MN 54 · With Potaliya the Householder
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/57/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/57/#p-N
[¶0] MN 54 · With Potaliya the Householder
> Pali: MN 54 · Potaliyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Aṅguttarāpans, near the town of theirs named Āpaṇa.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā aṅguttarāpesu viharati āpaṇaṁ nāma aṅguttarāpānaṁ nigamo.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Āpaṇa for alms. He wandered for alms in Āpaṇa. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to a certain forest grove for the day’s meditation. Having plunged deep into it, he sat at the root of a certain tree to meditate.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya āpaṇaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Āpaṇe piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yenaññataro vanasaṇḍo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.
[¶3] Potaliya the householder also approached that forest grove while going for a walk. He was well dressed in sarong and cloak, with parasol and sandals. Having plunged deep into it, he went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he stood to one side, and the Buddha said to him, “There are seats, householder. Please sit if you wish.”
> Pali: Potaliyopi kho gahapati sampannanivāsanapāvuraṇo chattupāhanāhi jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena so vanasaṇḍo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho potaliyaṁ gahapatiṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “saṁvijjanti kho, gahapati, āsanāni; sace ākaṅkhasi nisīdā”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, Potaliya was angry and upset. Thinking, “The ascetic Gotama addresses me as ‘householder’!” he stayed silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, potaliyo gahapati “gahapativādena maṁ samaṇo gotamo samudācaratī”ti kupito anattamano tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶5] For a second time … and a third time the Buddha said to him, “There are seats, householder. Please sit if you wish.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho bhagavā …pe… tatiyampi kho bhagavā potaliyaṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “saṁvijjanti kho, gahapati, āsanāni; sace ākaṅkhasi nisīdā”ti.
[¶6] When he said this, Potaliya was angry and upset. Thinking, “The ascetic Gotama addresses me as ‘householder’!” he said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, it is neither proper nor appropriate for you to address me as ‘householder’.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, potaliyo gahapati “gahapativādena maṁ samaṇo gotamo samudācaratī”ti kupito anattamano bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tayidaṁ, bho gotama, nacchannaṁ, tayidaṁ nappatirūpaṁ, yaṁ maṁ tvaṁ gahapativādena samudācarasī”ti.
[¶7] “Well, householder, you have the features, attributes, and signs of a householder.”
> Pali: “Te hi te, gahapati, ākārā, te liṅgā, te nimittā yathā taṁ gahapatissā”ti.
[¶8] “Worthy Gotama, it’s because I have turned down all work and cut off all business.”
> Pali: “Tathā hi pana me, bho gotama, sabbe kammantā paṭikkhittā, sabbe vohārā samucchinnā”ti.
[¶9] “Householder, in what way have you turned down all work and cut off all business?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana te, gahapati, sabbe kammantā paṭikkhittā, sabbe vohārā samucchinnā”ti?
[¶10] “Worthy Gotama, all the money, grain, gold, and silver I used to have has been handed over to my children as their inheritance. And in this matter I do not advise or reprimand them, but live with nothing more than food and clothes. That’s how I have turned down all work and cut off all business.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho gotama, yaṁ ahosi dhanaṁ vā dhaññaṁ vā rajataṁ vā jātarūpaṁ vā sabbaṁ taṁ puttānaṁ dāyajjaṁ niyyātaṁ, tatthāhaṁ anovādī anupavādī ghāsacchādanaparamo viharāmi. Evaṁ kho me, bho gotama, sabbe kammantā paṭikkhittā, sabbe vohārā samucchinnā”ti.
[¶11] “The cutting off of business as you describe it is one thing, householder, but the cutting off of business in the Noble One’s training is quite different.”
> Pali: “Aññathā kho tvaṁ, gahapati, vohārasamucchedaṁ vadasi, aññathā ca pana ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedo hotī”ti.
[¶12] “But what, sir, is cutting off of business in the Noble One’s training? Sir, please teach me this.”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana, bhante, ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedo hoti? Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā tathā dhammaṁ desetu yathā ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedo hotī”ti.
[¶13] “Well then, householder, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, gahapati, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶14] “Yes, sir,” said Potaliya.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho potaliyo gahapati bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶15] The Buddha said this:
> Pali: Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶16] “Householder, these eight things lead to the cutting off of business in the Noble One’s training. What eight? Killing living creatures should be given up, relying on not killing living creatures. Stealing should be given up, relying on not stealing. Lying should be given up, relying on speaking the truth. Backbiting should be given up, relying on not backbiting. Greed and lust should be given up, relying on not being greedy and lustful. Blaming and insulting should be given up, relying on not blaming and not insulting. Anger and distress should be given up, relying on not being angry and distressed. Arrogance should be given up, relying on not being arrogant. These are the eight things—stated in brief without being analyzed in detail—that lead to the cutting off of business in the Noble One’s training.”
> Pali: “aṭṭha kho ime, gahapati, dhammā ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedāya saṁvattanti. Katame aṭṭha? Apāṇātipātaṁ nissāya pāṇātipāto pahātabbo; dinnādānaṁ nissāya adinnādānaṁ pahātabbaṁ; saccavācaṁ nissāya musāvādo pahātabbo; apisuṇaṁ vācaṁ nissāya pisuṇā vācā pahātabbā; agiddhilobhaṁ nissāya giddhilobho pahātabbo; anindārosaṁ nissāya nindāroso pahātabbo; akkodhūpāyāsaṁ nissāya kodhūpāyāso pahātabbo; anatimānaṁ nissāya atimāno pahātabbo. Ime kho, gahapati, aṭṭha dhammā saṅkhittena vuttā, vitthārena avibhattā, ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedāya saṁvattantī”ti.
[¶17] “Sir, please teach me these eight things in detail out of sympathy.”
> Pali: “Ye me, bhante, bhagavatā aṭṭha dhammā saṅkhittena vuttā, vitthārena avibhattā, ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedāya saṁvattanti, sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā ime aṭṭha dhamme vitthārena vibhajatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.
[¶18] “Well then, householder, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, gahapati, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶19] “Yes, sir,” said Potaliya. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho potaliyo gahapati bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶20] “‘Killing living creatures should be given up, relying on not killing living creatures.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? It’s when a noble disciple reflects: ‘I am practicing to give up and cut off the fetters that might cause me to kill living creatures. But if I were to kill living creatures, because of that I would reprimand myself; sensible people, after examination, would criticize me; and when my body breaks up, after death, I could expect to be reborn in a bad place. And killing living creatures is itself a fetter and a hindrance. The distressing and feverish defilements that might arise because of killing living creatures do not occur in someone who does not kill living creatures.’ ‘Killing living creatures should be given up, relying on not killing living creatures.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: “‘Apāṇātipātaṁ nissāya pāṇātipāto pahātabbo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu pāṇātipātī assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana pāṇātipātī assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya pāṇātipātapaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ pāṇātipātapaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā pāṇātipātapaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ pāṇātipāto. Ye ca pāṇātipātapaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, pāṇātipātā paṭiviratassa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Apāṇātipātaṁ nissāya pāṇātipāto pahātabbo’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶21] ‘Stealing … lying … backbiting … greed and lust … blaming and insulting … anger and distress …
> Pali: ‘Dinnādānaṁ nissāya adinnādānaṁ pahātabban’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu adinnādāyī assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana adinnādāyī assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya adinnādānapaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ adinnādānapaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā adinnādānapaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ adinnādānaṁ. Ye ca adinnādānapaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā adinnādānā paṭiviratassa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Dinnādānaṁ nissāya adinnādānaṁ pahātabban’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. ‘Saccavācaṁ nissāya musāvādo pahātabbo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu musāvādī assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana musāvādī assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya musāvādapaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ musāvādapaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā musāvādapaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ musāvādo. Ye ca musāvādapaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, musāvādā paṭiviratassa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Saccavācaṁ nissāya musāvādo pahātabbo’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. ‘Apisuṇaṁ vācaṁ nissāya pisuṇā vācā pahātabbā’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu pisuṇavāco assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana pisuṇavāco assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya pisuṇavācāpaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ pisuṇavācāpaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā pisuṇavācāpaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ pisuṇā vācā. Ye ca pisuṇavācāpaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratassa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Apisuṇaṁ vācaṁ nissāya pisuṇā vācā pahātabbā’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. ‘Agiddhilobhaṁ nissāya giddhilobho pahātabbo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu giddhilobhī assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana giddhilobhī assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya giddhilobhapaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ giddhilobhapaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā giddhilobhapaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ giddhilobho. Ye ca giddhilobhapaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, giddhilobhā paṭiviratassa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Agiddhilobhaṁ nissāya giddhilobho pahātabbo’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. ‘Anindārosaṁ nissāya nindāroso pahātabbo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu nindārosī assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana nindārosī assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya nindārosapaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ nindārosapaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā nindārosapaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ nindāroso. Ye ca nindārosapaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, anindārosissa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Anindārosaṁ nissāya nindāroso pahātabbo’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. ‘Akkodhūpāyāsaṁ nissāya kodhūpāyāso pahātabbo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu kodhūpāyāsī assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana kodhūpāyāsī assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya kodhūpāyāsapaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ kodhūpāyāsapaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā kodhūpāyāsapaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ kodhūpāyāso. Ye ca kodhūpāyāsapaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, akkodhūpāyāsissa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Akkodhūpāyāsaṁ nissāya kodhūpāyāso pahātabbo’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶22] Arrogance should be given up, relying on not being arrogant.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? It’s when a noble disciple reflects: ‘I am practicing to give up and cut off the fetters that might cause me to be arrogant. But if I were to be arrogant, because of that I would reprimand myself; sensible people, after examination, would criticize me; and when my body breaks up, after death, I could expect to be reborn in a bad place. And arrogance is itself a fetter and a hindrance. The distressing and feverish defilements that might arise because of arrogance do not occur in someone who is not arrogant.’ ‘Arrogance should be given up by not being arrogant.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Anatimānaṁ nissāya atimāno pahātabbo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Idha, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yesaṁ kho ahaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ hetu atimānī assaṁ, tesāhaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya samucchedāya paṭipanno. Ahañceva kho pana atimānī assaṁ, attāpi maṁ upavadeyya atimānapaccayā, anuviccāpi maṁ viññū garaheyyuṁ atimānapaccayā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā duggati pāṭikaṅkhā atimānapaccayā. Etadeva kho pana saṁyojanaṁ etaṁ nīvaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ atimāno. Ye ca atimānapaccayā uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, anatimānissa evaṁsa te āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti’. ‘Anatimānaṁ nissāya atimāno pahātabbo’ti— iti yantaṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶23] These are the eight things—stated in brief and analyzed in detail—that lead to the cutting off of business in the Noble One’s training. But just this much does not constitute the cutting off of business in each and every respect in the Noble One’s training.”
> Pali: Ime kho, gahapati, aṭṭha dhammā saṅkhittena vuttā, vitthārena vibhattā, ye ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedāya saṁvattanti; na tveva tāva ariyassa vinaye sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ vohārasamucchedo hotī”ti.
[¶24] “But, sir, how is there the cutting off of business in each and every respect in the Noble One’s training? Sir, please teach me this.”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana, bhante, ariyassa vinaye sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ vohārasamucchedo hoti? Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā tathā dhammaṁ desetu yathā ariyassa vinaye sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ vohārasamucchedo hotī”ti.
[¶25] “Well then, householder, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, gahapati, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶26] “Yes, sir,” said Potaliya. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho potaliyo gahapati bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶27] 1. The Dangers of Sensual Pleasures
> Pali: 1. Kāmādīnavakathā
[¶28] “Householder, suppose a dog weak with hunger was hanging around a butcher’s shop. A deft butcher or their apprentice would toss them a skeleton scraped clean of flesh and smeared in blood. What do you think, householder? Gnawing on such a fleshless skeleton, would that dog still get rid of its hunger?”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, gahapati, kukkuro jighacchādubbalyapareto goghātakasūnaṁ paccupaṭṭhito assa. Tamenaṁ dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā aṭṭhikaṅkalaṁ sunikkantaṁ nikkantaṁ nimmaṁsaṁ lohitamakkhitaṁ upasumbheyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, api nu kho so kukkuro amuṁ aṭṭhikaṅkalaṁ sunikkantaṁ nikkantaṁ nimmaṁsaṁ lohitamakkhitaṁ palehanto jighacchādubbalyaṁ paṭivineyyā”ti?
[¶29] “No, sir. Why not? Because that skeleton is scraped clean of flesh and smeared in blood. That dog will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Aduñhi, bhante, aṭṭhikaṅkalaṁ sunikkantaṁ nikkantaṁ nimmaṁsaṁ lohitamakkhitaṁ. Yāvadeva pana so kukkuro kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶30] “In the same way, a noble disciple reflects: ‘With the simile of a skeleton the Buddha said that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks.’ Having truly seen this with right understanding, they shun equanimity based on diversity and develop only the equanimity based on unity, where all kinds of grasping to the worldly pleasures of the flesh cease without remainder.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā yāyaṁ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā taṁ abhinivajjetvā, yāyaṁ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā yattha sabbaso lokāmisūpādānā aparisesā nirujjhanti tamevūpekkhaṁ bhāveti.
[¶31] Suppose a vulture or a crow or a hawk was to grab a scrap of meat and fly away. Other vultures, crows, and hawks would keep chasing it, pecking and clawing. What do you think, householder? If that vulture, crow, or hawk doesn’t quickly let go of that scrap of meat, wouldn’t that result in death or deadly suffering for them?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, gahapati, gijjho vā kaṅko vā kulalo vā maṁsapesiṁ ādāya uḍḍīyeyya. Tamenaṁ gijjhāpi kaṅkāpi kulalāpi anupatitvā anupatitvā vitaccheyyuṁ vissajjeyyuṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, sace so gijjho vā kaṅko vā kulalo vā taṁ maṁsapesiṁ na khippameva paṭinissajjeyya, so tatonidānaṁ maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan”ti?
[¶32] “Yes, sir.” …
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶33] > Pali: “Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘maṁsapesūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā yāyaṁ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā taṁ abhinivajjetvā yāyaṁ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā yattha sabbaso lokāmisūpādānā aparisesā nirujjhanti tamevūpekkhaṁ bhāveti.
[¶34] “Suppose a person carrying a blazing grass torch was to walk against the wind. What do you think, householder? If that person doesn’t quickly let go of that blazing grass torch, wouldn’t they burn their hands or arm or other major or minor limb, resulting in death or deadly suffering for them?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso ādittaṁ tiṇukkaṁ ādāya paṭivātaṁ gaccheyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, sace so puriso taṁ ādittaṁ tiṇukkaṁ na khippameva paṭinissajjeyya tassa sā ādittā tiṇukkā hatthaṁ vā daheyya bāhuṁ vā daheyya aññataraṁ vā aññataraṁ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṁ daheyya, so tatonidānaṁ maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan”ti?
[¶35] “Yes, sir.” …
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶36] > Pali: “Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘tiṇukkūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā …pe… tamevūpekkhaṁ bhāveti.
[¶37] “Suppose there was a pit of glowing coals deeper than a man’s height, full of glowing coals that neither flamed nor smoked. Then a person would come along who wants to live and doesn’t want to die, who wants to be happy and recoils from pain. Two strong men would grab them by the arms and drag them toward the pit of glowing coals. What do you think, householder? Wouldn’t that person writhe and struggle to and fro?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, gahapati, aṅgārakāsu sādhikaporisā, pūrā aṅgārānaṁ vītaccikānaṁ vītadhūmānaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya jīvitukāmo amaritukāmo sukhakāmo dukkhapaṭikkūlo. Tamenaṁ dve balavanto purisā nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuṁ upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, api nu so puriso iticiticeva kāyaṁ sannāmeyyā”ti?
[¶38] “Yes, sir. Why is that? For that person knows: ‘If I fall in that pit of glowing coals, that’d result in my death or deadly pain.’” …
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Viditañhi, bhante, tassa purisassa imañcāhaṁ aṅgārakāsuṁ papatissāmi, tatonidānaṁ maraṇaṁ vā nigacchissāmi maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan”ti.
[¶39] > Pali: “Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā …pe… tamevūpekkhaṁ bhāveti.
[¶40] “Suppose a person was to see delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds in a dream. But when they woke they couldn’t see them at all. …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso supinakaṁ passeyya ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇirāmaṇeyyakaṁ. So paṭibuddho na kiñci paṭipasseyya.
[¶41] > Pali: Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘supinakūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti …pe… tamevūpekkhaṁ bhāveti.
[¶42] Suppose a man had borrowed some goods—a gentleman’s carriage and fine jeweled earrings— and preceded and surrounded by these he proceeded through the middle of Āpaṇa. When people saw him they’d say: ‘This must be a wealthy man! For that’s how the wealthy enjoy their wealth.’ But when the owners saw him, they’d take back what was theirs. What do you think? Would that be enough for that man to get upset?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso yācitakaṁ bhogaṁ yācitvā yānaṁ vā poriseyyaṁ pavaramaṇikuṇḍalaṁ. So tehi yācitakehi bhogehi purakkhato parivuto antarāpaṇaṁ paṭipajjeyya. Tamenaṁ jano disvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘bhogī vata bho puriso, evaṁ kira bhogino bhogāni bhuñjantī’ti. Tamenaṁ sāmikā yattha yattheva passeyyuṁ tattha tattheva sāni hareyyuṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, alaṁ nu kho tassa purisassa aññathattāyā”ti?
[¶43] “Yes, sir. Why is that? Because the owners took back what was theirs.” …
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Sāmino hi, bhante, sāni harantī”ti.
[¶44] > Pali: “Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yācitakūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti …pe… tamevūpekkhaṁ bhāveti.
[¶45] “Suppose there was a dense forest grove not far from a town or village. And there was a tree laden with fruit, yet none of the fruit had fallen to the ground. And along came a person in need of fruit, wandering in search of fruit. Having plunged deep into that forest grove, they’d see that tree laden with fruit. They’d think: ‘That tree is laden with fruit, yet none of the fruit has fallen to the ground. But I know how to climb a tree. Why don’t I climb the tree, eat as much as I like, then fill my pouch?’ And that’s what they’d do. And along would come a second person in need of fruit, wandering in search of fruit, carrying a sharp axe. Having plunged deep into that forest grove, they’d see that tree laden with fruit. They’d think: ‘That tree is laden with fruit, yet none of the fruit has fallen to the ground. But I don’t know how to climb a tree. Why don’t I chop this tree down at the root, eat as much as I like, then fill my pouch?’ And so they’d chop the tree down at the root. What do you think, householder? If the first person, who climbed the tree, doesn’t quickly come down, when that tree fell wouldn’t they break their hand or arm or other major or minor limb, resulting in death or deadly suffering for them?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, gahapati, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre tibbo vanasaṇḍo. Tatrassa rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo ca, na cassu kānici phalāni bhūmiyaṁ patitāni. Atha puriso āgaccheyya phalatthiko phalagavesī phalapariyesanaṁ caramāno. So taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā taṁ rukkhaṁ passeyya sampannaphalañca upapannaphalañca. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo ca, natthi ca kānici phalāni bhūmiyaṁ patitāni. Jānāmi kho panāhaṁ rukkhaṁ ārohituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ rukkhaṁ ārohitvā yāvadatthañca khādeyyaṁ ucchaṅgañca pūreyyan’ti. So taṁ rukkhaṁ ārohitvā yāvadatthañca khādeyya ucchaṅgañca pūreyya. Atha dutiyo puriso āgaccheyya phalatthiko phalagavesī phalapariyesanaṁ caramāno tiṇhaṁ kuṭhāriṁ ādāya. So taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā taṁ rukkhaṁ passeyya sampannaphalañca upapannaphalañca. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo ca, natthi ca kānici phalāni bhūmiyaṁ patitāni. Na kho panāhaṁ jānāmi rukkhaṁ ārohituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ rukkhaṁ mūlato chetvā yāvadatthañca khādeyyaṁ ucchaṅgañca pūreyyan’ti. So taṁ rukkhaṁ mūlatova chindeyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, amuko yo so puriso paṭhamaṁ rukkhaṁ ārūḷho sace so na khippameva oroheyya tassa so rukkho papatanto hatthaṁ vā bhañjeyya pādaṁ vā bhañjeyya aññataraṁ vā aññataraṁ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṁ bhañjeyya, so tatonidānaṁ maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan”ti?
[¶46] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶47] “In the same way, a noble disciple reflects: ‘With the simile of the fruit tree the Buddha said that sensual pleasures give little gratification and much suffering and distress, and they are all the more full of drawbacks.’ Having truly seen this with right understanding, they shun equanimity based on diversity and develop only the equanimity based on unity, where all kinds of grasping to the worldly pleasures of the flesh cease without remainder.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘rukkhaphalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā yāyaṁ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā taṁ abhinivajjetvā yāyaṁ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā yattha sabbaso lokāmisūpādānā aparisesā nirujjhanti tamevūpekkhaṁ bhāveti.
[¶48] Relying on this supreme purity of mindfulness and equanimity, that noble disciple recollects their many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. … They recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: Sa kho so, gahapati, ariyasāvako imaṁyeva anuttaraṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ āgamma anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶49] Relying on this supreme purity of mindfulness and equanimity, that noble disciple, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, sees sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. … They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: Sa kho so, gahapati, ariyasāvako imaṁyeva anuttaraṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ āgamma dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶50] Relying on this supreme purity of mindfulness and equanimity, that noble disciple realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Sa kho so, gahapati, ariyasāvako imaṁyeva anuttaraṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ āgamma āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati.
[¶51] That’s how there is the cutting off of business in each and every respect in the Noble One’s training.
> Pali: Ettāvatā kho, gahapati, ariyassa vinaye sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ vohārasamucchedo hoti.
[¶52] What do you think, householder? Do you regard yourself as having cut off business in a way comparable to the cutting off of business in each and every respect in the Noble One’s training?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, yathā ariyassa vinaye sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ vohārasamucchedo hoti, api nu tvaṁ evarūpaṁ vohārasamucchedaṁ attani samanupassasī”ti?
[¶53] “Who am I compared to one who has cut off business in each and every respect in the Noble One’s training? I am far from that. Sir, I used to think that the wanderers following other religions were thoroughbreds, and I fed them and treated them accordingly, but they were not actually thoroughbreds. I thought that the mendicants were not thoroughbreds, and I fed them and treated them accordingly, but they actually were thoroughbreds. But now I shall understand that the wanderers following other religions are not actually thoroughbreds, and I will feed them and treat them accordingly. And I shall understand that the mendicants actually are thoroughbreds, and I will feed them and treat them accordingly. The Buddha has inspired me to have love, confidence, and respect for ascetics!
> Pali: “Ko cāhaṁ, bhante, ko ca ariyassa vinaye sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ vohārasamucchedo. Ārakā ahaṁ, bhante, ariyassa vinaye sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ vohārasamucchedā. Mayañhi, bhante, pubbe aññatitthiye paribbājake anājānīyeva samāne ājānīyāti amaññimha, anājānīyeva samāne ājānīyabhojanaṁ bhojimha, anājānīyeva samāne ājānīyaṭhāne ṭhapimha; bhikkhū pana mayaṁ, bhante, ājānīyeva samāne anājānīyāti amaññimha, ājānīyeva samāne anājānīyabhojanaṁ bhojimha, ājānīyeva samāne anājānīyaṭhāne ṭhapimha; idāni pana mayaṁ, bhante, aññatitthiye paribbājake anājānīyeva samāne anājānīyāti jānissāma, anājānīyeva samāne anājānīyabhojanaṁ bhojessāma, anājānīyeva samāne anājānīyaṭhāne ṭhapessāma. Bhikkhū pana mayaṁ, bhante, ājānīyeva samāne ājānīyāti jānissāma, ājānīyeva samāne ājānīyabhojanaṁ bhojessāma, ājānīyeva samāne ājānīyaṭhāne ṭhapessāma. Ajanesi vata me, bhante, bhagavā samaṇesu samaṇappemaṁ, samaṇesu samaṇappasādaṁ, samaṇesu samaṇagāravaṁ.
[¶54] Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya, ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ kho, bhante, bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶55] > Pali: Potaliyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 58. MN 55 · With Jīvaka
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/58/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/58/#p-N
[¶0] MN 55 · With Jīvaka
> Pali: MN 55 · Jīvakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Mango Grove of Jīvaka Komārabhacca.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane.
[¶2] Then Jīvaka went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jīvako komārabhacco bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Sir, I have heard this: ‘They slaughter living creatures specially for the ascetic Gotama. The ascetic Gotama knowingly eats meat prepared on his behalf: this is a deed he caused.’ I trust those who say this repeat what the Buddha has said, and do not misrepresent him with an untruth? Is their explanation in line with the teaching? Are there any legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism?”
> Pali: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ uddissa pāṇaṁ ārabhanti, taṁ samaṇo gotamo jānaṁ uddissakataṁ maṁsaṁ paribhuñjati paṭiccakamman’ti. Ye te, bhante, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ uddissa pāṇaṁ ārabhanti, taṁ samaṇo gotamo jānaṁ uddissakataṁ maṁsaṁ paribhuñjati paṭiccakamman’ti, kacci te, bhante, bhagavato vuttavādino, na ca bhagavantaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhanti, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaronti, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchatī”ti?
[¶4] “Jīvaka, those who say this do not repeat what I have said. They misrepresent me with what is false and untrue.
> Pali: “Ye te, jīvaka, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ uddissa pāṇaṁ ārabhanti, taṁ samaṇo gotamo jānaṁ uddissakataṁ maṁsaṁ paribhuñjati paṭiccakamman’ti na me te vuttavādino, abbhācikkhanti ca maṁ te asatā abhūtena.
[¶5] In three cases I say that meat may not be eaten: it’s seen, heard, or suspected. These are three cases in which meat may not be eaten.
> Pali: Tīhi kho ahaṁ, jīvaka, ṭhānehi maṁsaṁ aparibhoganti vadāmi. Diṭṭhaṁ, sutaṁ, parisaṅkitaṁ— imehi kho ahaṁ, jīvaka, tīhi ṭhānehi maṁsaṁ aparibhoganti vadāmi.
[¶6] In three cases I say that meat may be eaten: it’s not seen, heard, or suspected. These are three cases in which meat may be eaten.
> Pali: Tīhi kho ahaṁ, jīvaka, ṭhānehi maṁsaṁ paribhoganti vadāmi. Adiṭṭhaṁ, asutaṁ, aparisaṅkitaṁ— imehi kho ahaṁ, jīvaka, tīhi ṭhānehi maṁsaṁ paribhoganti vadāmi.
[¶7] Take the case of a mendicant living supported by a town or village. They meditate spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. A householder or their child approaches and invites them for the next day’s meal. The mendicant accepts if they want.
> Pali: Idha, jīvaka, bhikkhu aññataraṁ gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā upanissāya viharati. So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Tamenaṁ gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā upasaṅkamitvā svātanāya bhattena nimanteti. Ākaṅkhamānova, jīvaka, bhikkhu adhivāseti.
[¶8] When the night has passed, they robe up in the morning, take their bowl and robe, and approach that householder’s home, where they sit on the seat spread out. That householder or their child serves them with delicious almsfood. It never occurs to them, ‘It’s so good that this householder serves me with delicious almsfood! I hope they serve me with such delicious almsfood in the future!’ They don’t think that. They eat that almsfood untied, uninfatuated, unattached, seeing the drawback, and understanding the escape.
> Pali: So tassā rattiyā accayena pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena tassa gahapatissa vā gahapatiputtassa vā nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamati; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdati. Tamenaṁ so gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā paṇītena piṇḍapātena parivisati. Tassa na evaṁ hoti: ‘sādhu vata māyaṁ gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā paṇītena piṇḍapātena pariviseyyāti. Aho vata māyaṁ gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā āyatimpi evarūpena paṇītena piṇḍapātena pariviseyyā’ti— evampissa na hoti. So taṁ piṇḍapātaṁ agathito amucchito anajjhopanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati.
[¶9] What do you think, Jīvaka? At that time is that mendicant intending to hurt themselves, hurt others, or hurt both?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, jīvaka, api nu so bhikkhu tasmiṁ samaye attabyābādhāya vā ceteti, parabyābādhāya vā ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāya vā cetetī”ti?
[¶10] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶11] “Aren’t they eating blameless food at that time?”
> Pali: “Nanu so, jīvaka, bhikkhu tasmiṁ samaye anavajjaṁyeva āhāraṁ āhāretī”ti?
[¶12] “Yes, sir. Sir, I have heard that The Divinity abides in love. Now, I’ve seen the Buddha with my own eyes, and it is the Buddha who truly abides in love.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante. Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘brahmā mettāvihārī’ti. Taṁ me idaṁ, bhante, bhagavā sakkhidiṭṭho; bhagavā hi, bhante, mettāvihārī”ti.
[¶13] “Any greed, hate, or delusion that might give rise to ill will has been given up by the Realized One, cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated, and is unable to arise in the future. If that’s what you were referring to, I grant it.”
> Pali: “Yena kho, jīvaka, rāgena yena dosena yena mohena byāpādavā assa so rāgo so doso so moho tathāgatassa pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Sace kho te, jīvaka, idaṁ sandhāya bhāsitaṁ anujānāmi te etan”ti.
[¶14] “That’s exactly what I was referring to.”
> Pali: “Etadeva kho pana me, bhante, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ”.
[¶15] “Take the case, Jīvaka, of a mendicant living supported by a town or village. They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion …
> Pali: “Idha, jīvaka, bhikkhu aññataraṁ gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā upanissāya viharati. So karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶16] They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing …
> Pali: muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶17] They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. A householder or their child approaches and invites them for the next day’s meal. The mendicant accepts if they want.
> Pali: upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Tamenaṁ gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā upasaṅkamitvā svātanāya bhattena nimanteti. Ākaṅkhamānova, jīvaka, bhikkhu adhivāseti.
[¶18] When the night has passed, they robe up in the morning, take their bowl and robe, and approach that householder’s home, where they sit on the seat spread out. That householder or their child serves them with delicious almsfood. It never occurs to them, ‘It’s so good that this householder serves me with delicious almsfood! I hope they serve me with such delicious almsfood in the future!’ They don’t think that. They eat that almsfood untied, uninfatuated, unattached, seeing the drawback, and understanding the escape.
> Pali: So tassā rattiyā accayena pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena gahapatissa vā gahapatiputtassa vā nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamati; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdati. Tamenaṁ so gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā paṇītena piṇḍapātena parivisati. Tassa na evaṁ hoti: ‘sādhu vata māyaṁ gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā paṇītena piṇḍapātena pariviseyyāti. Aho vata māyaṁ gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā āyatimpi evarūpena paṇītena piṇḍapātena pariviseyyā’ti— evampissa na hoti. So taṁ piṇḍapātaṁ agathito amucchito anajjhopanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati.
[¶19] What do you think, Jīvaka? At that time is that mendicant intending to hurt themselves, hurt others, or hurt both?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, jīvaka, api nu so bhikkhu tasmiṁ samaye attabyābādhāya vā ceteti, parabyābādhāya vā ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāya vā cetetī”ti?
[¶20] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶21] “Aren’t they eating blameless food at that time?”
> Pali: “Nanu so, jīvaka, bhikkhu tasmiṁ samaye anavajjaṁyeva āhāraṁ āhāretī”ti?
[¶22] “Yes, sir. Sir, I have heard that The Divinity abides in equanimity. Now, I’ve seen the Buddha with my own eyes, and it is the Buddha who truly abides in equanimity.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante. Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘brahmā upekkhāvihārī’ti. Taṁ me idaṁ, bhante, bhagavā sakkhidiṭṭho; bhagavā hi, bhante, upekkhāvihārī”ti.
[¶23] “Any greed, hate, or delusion that might give rise to cruelty, discontent, or aversion has been given up by the Realized One, cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated, and is unable to arise in the future. If that’s what you were referring to, I grant it.”
> Pali: “Yena kho, jīvaka, rāgena yena dosena yena mohena vihesavā assa arativā assa paṭighavā assa so rāgo so doso so moho tathāgatassa pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Sace kho te, jīvaka, idaṁ sandhāya bhāsitaṁ, anujānāmi te etan”ti.
[¶24] “That’s exactly what I was referring to.”
> Pali: “Etadeva kho pana me, bhante, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ”.
[¶25] “Jīvaka, anyone who slaughters a living creature specially for the Realized One or the Realized One’s disciple brims with much wickedness for five reasons.
> Pali: “Yo kho, jīvaka, tathāgataṁ vā tathāgatasāvakaṁ vā uddissa pāṇaṁ ārabhati so pañcahi ṭhānehi bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavati.
[¶26] When they say: ‘Go, fetch that living creature,’ this is the first reason.
> Pali: Yampi so, gahapati, evamāha: ‘gacchatha, amukaṁ nāma pāṇaṁ ānethā’ti, iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavati.
[¶27] When that living creature experiences pain and sadness as it’s led along by a collar, this is the second reason.
> Pali: Yampi so pāṇo galappaveṭhakena ānīyamāno dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti, iminā dutiyena ṭhānena bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavati.
[¶28] When they say: ‘Go, slaughter that living creature,’ this is the third reason.
> Pali: Yampi so evamāha: ‘gacchatha imaṁ pāṇaṁ ārabhathā’ti, iminā tatiyena ṭhānena bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavati.
[¶29] When that living creature experiences pain and sadness as it’s being slaughtered, this is the fourth reason.
> Pali: Yampi so pāṇo ārabhiyamāno dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti, iminā catutthena ṭhānena bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavati.
[¶30] When they serve the Realized One or the Realized One’s disciple with unallowable food, this is the fifth reason.
> Pali: Yampi so tathāgataṁ vā tathāgatasāvakaṁ vā akappiyena āsādeti, iminā pañcamena ṭhānena bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavati.
[¶31] Anyone who slaughters a living creature specially for the Realized One or the Realized One’s disciple brims with much wickedness for five reasons.”
> Pali: Yo kho, jīvaka, tathāgataṁ vā tathāgatasāvakaṁ vā uddissa pāṇaṁ ārabhati so imehi pañcahi ṭhānehi bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavatī”ti.
[¶32] When he had spoken, Jīvaka said to the Buddha: “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! The mendicants indeed eat allowable food. The mendicants indeed eat blameless food. Excellent, sir! Excellent! … From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, jīvako komārabhacco bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Kappiyaṁ vata, bhante, bhikkhū āhāraṁ āhārenti; anavajjaṁ vata, bhante, bhikkhū āhāraṁ āhārenti. Abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶33] > Pali: Jīvakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 59. MN 56 · With Upāli · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/59/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/59/#p-N
[¶0] MN 56 · With Upāli
> Pali: MN 56 · Upālisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Nāḷandā in Pāvārika’s Mango Grove.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ viharati pāvārikambavane.
[¶2] At that time the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan was residing at Nāḷandā together with a large assembly of Jain ascetics. Then the Jain ascetic Dīgha Tapassī wandered for alms in Nāḷandā. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to Pāvārika’s Mango Grove. There he approached the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto nāḷandāyaṁ paṭivasati mahatiyā nigaṇṭhaparisāya saddhiṁ. Atha kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho nāḷandāyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena pāvārikambavanaṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi.
[¶3] When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he stood to one side. The Buddha said to him, “There are seats, Tapassī. Please sit if you wish.”
> Pali: Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “saṁvijjanti kho, tapassi, āsanāni; sace ākaṅkhasi nisīdā”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, Dīgha Tapassī took a low seat and sat to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Tapassī, how many kinds of deed does the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan describe for performing bad deeds?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “kati pana, tapassi, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto kammāni paññapeti pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā”ti?
[¶5] “Reverend Gotama, the Jain Ñātika doesn’t usually speak in terms of ‘deeds’. He usually speaks in terms of ‘rods’.”
> Pali: “Na kho, āvuso gotama, āciṇṇaṁ nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa ‘kammaṁ, kamman’ti paññapetuṁ; ‘daṇḍaṁ, daṇḍan’ti kho, āvuso gotama, āciṇṇaṁ nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa paññapetun”ti.
[¶6] “Then how many kinds of rod does the Jain Ñātika describe for performing bad deeds?”
> Pali: “Kati pana, tapassi, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto daṇḍāni paññapeti pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā”ti?
[¶7] “The Jain Ñātika describes three kinds of rod for performing bad deeds: the physical rod, the verbal rod, and the mental rod.”
> Pali: “Tīṇi kho, āvuso gotama, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto daṇḍāni paññapeti pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyāti, seyyathidaṁ— kāyadaṇḍaṁ, vacīdaṇḍaṁ, manodaṇḍan”ti.
[¶8] “But are these kinds of rod all distinct from each other?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, tapassi, aññadeva kāyadaṇḍaṁ, aññaṁ vacīdaṇḍaṁ, aññaṁ manodaṇḍan”ti?
[¶9] “Yes, each is quite distinct.”
> Pali: “Aññadeva, āvuso gotama, kāyadaṇḍaṁ, aññaṁ vacīdaṇḍaṁ, aññaṁ manodaṇḍan”ti.
[¶10] “Of the three rods thus analyzed and differentiated, which rod does the Jain Ñātika describe as being the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds: the physical rod, the verbal rod, or the mental rod?”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ pana, tapassi, tiṇṇaṁ daṇḍānaṁ evaṁ paṭivibhattānaṁ evaṁ paṭivisiṭṭhānaṁ katamaṁ daṇḍaṁ nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto mahāsāvajjataraṁ paññapeti pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, yadi vā kāyadaṇḍaṁ, yadi vā vacīdaṇḍaṁ, yadi vā manodaṇḍan”ti?
[¶11] “The Jain Ñātika describes the physical rod as being the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much the verbal rod or the mental rod.”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ kho, āvuso gotama, tiṇṇaṁ daṇḍānaṁ evaṁ paṭivibhattānaṁ evaṁ paṭivisiṭṭhānaṁ kāyadaṇḍaṁ nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto mahāsāvajjataraṁ paññapeti pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā vacīdaṇḍaṁ, no tathā manodaṇḍan”ti.
[¶12] “Do you say the physical rod, Tapassī?”
> Pali: “Kāyadaṇḍanti, tapassi, vadesi”?
[¶13] “I say the physical rod, Reverend Gotama.”
> Pali: “Kāyadaṇḍanti, āvuso gotama, vadāmi”.
[¶14] “Do you say the physical rod, Tapassī?”
> Pali: “Kāyadaṇḍanti, tapassi, vadesi”?
[¶15] “I say the physical rod, Reverend Gotama.”
> Pali: “Kāyadaṇḍanti, āvuso gotama, vadāmi”.
[¶16] “Do you say the physical rod, Tapassī?”
> Pali: “Kāyadaṇḍanti, tapassi, vadesi”?
[¶17] “I say the physical rod, Reverend Gotama.”
> Pali: “Kāyadaṇḍanti, āvuso gotama, vadāmī”ti.
[¶18] Thus the Buddha made Dīgha Tapassī stand by this point up to the third time.
> Pali: Itiha bhagavā dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ imasmiṁ kathāvatthusmiṁ yāvatatiyakaṁ patiṭṭhāpesi.
[¶19] When this was said, Dīgha Tapassī said to the Buddha, “But Reverend Gotama, how many kinds of rod do you describe for performing bad deeds?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tvaṁ panāvuso gotama, kati daṇḍāni paññapesi pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā”ti?
[¶20] “Tapassī, the Realized One doesn’t usually speak in terms of ‘rods’. He usually speaks in terms of ‘deeds’.”
> Pali: “Na kho, tapassi, āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatassa ‘daṇḍaṁ, daṇḍan’ti paññapetuṁ; ‘kammaṁ, kamman’ti kho, tapassi, āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatassa paññapetun”ti?
[¶21] “Then how many kinds of deed do you describe for performing bad deeds?”
> Pali: “Tvaṁ panāvuso gotama, kati kammāni paññapesi pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā”ti?
[¶22] “I describe three kinds of deed for performing bad deeds: physical deeds, verbal deeds, and mental deeds.”
> Pali: “Tīṇi kho ahaṁ, tapassi, kammāni paññapemi pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, seyyathidaṁ— kāyakammaṁ, vacīkammaṁ, manokamman”ti.
[¶23] “But are these kinds of deed all distinct from each other?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ panāvuso gotama, aññadeva kāyakammaṁ, aññaṁ vacīkammaṁ, aññaṁ manokamman”ti?
[¶24] “Yes, each is quite distinct.”
> Pali: “Aññadeva, tapassi, kāyakammaṁ, aññaṁ vacīkammaṁ, aññaṁ manokamman”ti.
[¶25] “Of the three deeds thus analyzed and differentiated, which deed do you describe as being the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds: physical deeds, verbal deeds, or mental deeds?”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ panāvuso gotama, tiṇṇaṁ kammānaṁ evaṁ paṭivibhattānaṁ evaṁ paṭivisiṭṭhānaṁ katamaṁ kammaṁ mahāsāvajjataraṁ paññapesi pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, yadi vā kāyakammaṁ, yadi vā vacīkammaṁ, yadi vā manokamman”ti?
[¶26] “I describe mental deeds as being the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much physical deeds or verbal deeds.”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ kho ahaṁ, tapassi, tiṇṇaṁ kammānaṁ evaṁ paṭivibhattānaṁ evaṁ paṭivisiṭṭhānaṁ manokammaṁ mahāsāvajjataraṁ paññapemi pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā kāyakammaṁ, no tathā vacīkamman”ti.
[¶27] “Do you say mental deeds, Reverend Gotama?”
> Pali: “Manokammanti, āvuso gotama, vadesi”?
[¶28] “I say mental deeds, Tapassī.”
> Pali: “Manokammanti, tapassi, vadāmi”.
[¶29] “Do you say mental deeds, Reverend Gotama?”
> Pali: “Manokammanti, āvuso gotama, vadesi”?
[¶30] “I say mental deeds, Tapassī.”
> Pali: “Manokammanti, tapassi, vadāmi”.
[¶31] “Do you say mental deeds, Reverend Gotama?”
> Pali: “Manokammanti, āvuso gotama, vadesi”?
[¶32] “I say mental deeds, Tapassī.”
> Pali: “Manokammanti, tapassi, vadāmī”ti.
[¶33] Thus the Jain ascetic Dīgha Tapassī made the Buddha stand by this point up to the third time, after which he rose from his seat and went to see the Jain Ñātika.
> Pali: Itiha dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho bhagavantaṁ imasmiṁ kathāvatthusmiṁ yāvatatiyakaṁ patiṭṭhāpetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami.
[¶34] Now at that time the Jain Ñātika was sitting together with a large assembly of Bālaki laypeople headed by Upāli. The Jain Ñātika saw Dīgha Tapassī coming off in the distance and said to him, “So, Tapassī, where are you coming from in the middle of the day?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto mahatiyā gihiparisāya saddhiṁ nisinno hoti bālakiniyā parisāya upālipamukhāya. Addasā kho nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ; disvāna dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ etadavoca: “handa kuto nu tvaṁ, tapassi, āgacchasi divā divassā”ti?
[¶35] “Just now, sir, I’ve come from the presence of the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: “Ito hi kho ahaṁ, bhante, āgacchāmi samaṇassa gotamassa santikā”ti.
[¶36] “But did you have some discussion with him?”
> Pali: “Ahu pana te, tapassi, samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti?
[¶37] “I did.”
> Pali: “Ahu kho me, bhante, samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶38] “And what kind of discussion did you have with him?” Then Dīgha Tapassī informed the Jain Ñātika of all they had discussed. When he had spoken, the Jain Ñātika said to him, “Good, good, Tapassī! The Jain ascetic Dīgha Tapassī has answered the ascetic Gotama like a learned disciple who rightly understands their teacher’s instructions. For how significant is the measly mental rod when compared with the solid physical rod? Rather, the physical rod is the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much the verbal rod or the mental rod.”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana te, tapassi, ahu samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti? Atha kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho yāvatako ahosi bhagavatā saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa ārocesi. Evaṁ vutte, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ etadavoca: “sādhu sādhu, tapassi. Yathā taṁ sutavatā sāvakena sammadeva satthusāsanaṁ ājānantena evameva dīghatapassinā nigaṇṭhena samaṇassa gotamassa byākataṁ. Kiñhi sobhati chavo manodaṇḍo imassa evaṁ oḷārikassa kāyadaṇḍassa upanidhāya. Atha kho kāyadaṇḍova mahāsāvajjataro pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā vacīdaṇḍo, no tathā manodaṇḍo”ti.
[¶39] When he said this, the householder Upāli said to him, “Good, sir! Well done, Dīgha Tapassī! The Honorable Tapassī has answered the ascetic Gotama like a learned disciple who rightly understands their teacher’s instructions. For how significant is the measly mental rod when compared with the solid physical rod? Rather, the physical rod is the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much the verbal rod or the mental rod.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, upāli gahapati nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “sādhu sādhu, bhante dīghatapassī. Yathā taṁ sutavatā sāvakena sammadeva satthusāsanaṁ ājānantena evamevaṁ bhadantena tapassinā samaṇassa gotamassa byākataṁ. Kiñhi sobhati chavo manodaṇḍo imassa evaṁ oḷārikassa kāyadaṇḍassa upanidhāya. Atha kho kāyadaṇḍova mahāsāvajjataro pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā vacīdaṇḍo, no tathā manodaṇḍo.
[¶40] I’d better go and refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine regarding this point. If he stands by the position that he stated to Dīgha Tapassī, I’ll take him on in debate and drag him to and fro and round about, like a strong man would grab a fleecy sheep and drag it to and fro and round about! Taking him on in debate, I’ll drag him to and fro and round about, like a strong brewer’s worker would toss a large brewer’s sieve into a deep lake, grab it by the corners, and drag it to and fro and round about! Taking him on in debate, I’ll shake him down and about and give him a beating, like a strong brewer’s mixer would grab a strainer by the corners and shake it down and about, and give it a beating! I’ll play a game of hemp-washing with the ascetic Gotama, like a sixty-year-old elephant would plunge into a deep lotus pond and play a game of hemp-washing! Sir, I’d better go and refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine on this point.”
> Pali: Handa cāhaṁ, bhante, gacchāmi samaṇassa gotamassa imasmiṁ kathāvatthusmiṁ vādaṁ āropessāmi. Sace me samaṇo gotamo tathā patiṭṭhahissati yathā bhadantena tapassinā patiṭṭhāpitaṁ; seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso dīghalomikaṁ eḷakaṁ lomesu gahetvā ākaḍḍheyya parikaḍḍheyya samparikaḍḍheyya; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ ākaḍḍhissāmi parikaḍḍhissāmi samparikaḍḍhissāmi. Seyyathāpi nāma balavā soṇḍikākammakāro mahantaṁ soṇḍikākilañjaṁ gambhīre udakarahade pakkhipitvā kaṇṇe gahetvā ākaḍḍheyya parikaḍḍheyya samparikaḍḍheyya; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ ākaḍḍhissāmi parikaḍḍhissāmi samparikaḍḍhissāmi. Seyyathāpi nāma balavā soṇḍikādhutto vālaṁ kaṇṇe gahetvā odhuneyya niddhuneyya nipphoṭeyya; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ vādena vādaṁ odhunissāmi niddhunissāmi nipphoṭessāmi. Seyyathāpi nāma kuñjaro saṭṭhihāyano gambhīraṁ pokkharaṇiṁ ogāhetvā sāṇadhovikaṁ nāma kīḷitajātaṁ kīḷati; evamevāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ sāṇadhovikaṁ maññe kīḷitajātaṁ kīḷissāmi. Handa cāhaṁ, bhante, gacchāmi samaṇassa gotamassa imasmiṁ kathāvatthusmiṁ vādaṁ āropessāmī”ti.
[¶41] “Go, householder, refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine on this point. For either I should do so, or Dīgha Tapassī, or you.”
> Pali: “Gaccha tvaṁ, gahapati, samaṇassa gotamassa imasmiṁ kathāvatthusmiṁ vādaṁ āropehi. Ahaṁ vā hi, gahapati, samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropeyyaṁ, dīghatapassī vā nigaṇṭho, tvaṁ vā”ti.
[¶42] When he said this, Dīgha Tapassī said to the Jain Ñātika, “Sir, I don’t believe it’s a good idea for the householder Upāli to rebut the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine. For the ascetic Gotama is deceitful. He knows a conversion trick, and uses it to convert the disciples of other religions.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “na kho metaṁ, bhante, ruccati yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropeyya. Samaṇo hi, bhante, gotamo māyāvī āvaṭṭaniṁ māyaṁ jānāti yāya aññatitthiyānaṁ sāvake āvaṭṭetī”ti.
[¶43] “It is impossible, Tapassī, it cannot happen that Upāli could become Gotama’s disciple. But it is possible that Gotama could become Upāli’s disciple. Go, householder, refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine on this point. For either I should do so, or Dīgha Tapassī, or you.”
> Pali: “Aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ, tapassi, anavakāso yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyya. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ samaṇo gotamo upālissa gahapatissa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyya. Gaccha tvaṁ, gahapati, samaṇassa gotamassa imasmiṁ kathāvatthusmiṁ vādaṁ āropehi. Ahaṁ vā hi, gahapati, samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropeyyaṁ, dīghatapassī vā nigaṇṭho, tvaṁ vā”ti.
[¶44] For a second time … and a third time, Dīgha Tapassī said to the Jain Ñātika, “Sir, I don’t believe it’s a good idea for the householder Upāli to rebut the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine. For the ascetic Gotama is deceitful. He knows a conversion trick, and uses it to convert the disciples of other religions.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho dīghatapassī …pe… tatiyampi kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “na kho metaṁ, bhante, ruccati yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropeyya. Samaṇo hi, bhante, gotamo māyāvī āvaṭṭaniṁ māyaṁ jānāti yāya aññatitthiyānaṁ sāvake āvaṭṭetī”ti.
[¶45] “It is impossible, Tapassī, it cannot happen that Upāli could become Gotama’s disciple. But it is possible that Gotama could become Upāli’s disciple. Go, householder, refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine on this point. For either I should do so, or Dīgha Tapassī, or you.”
> Pali: “Aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ, tapassi, anavakāso yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyya. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ samaṇo gotamo upālissa gahapatissa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyya. Gaccha tvaṁ, gahapati, samaṇassa gotamassa imasmiṁ kathāvatthusmiṁ vādaṁ āropehi. Ahaṁ vā hi, gahapati, samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropeyyaṁ, dīghatapassī vā nigaṇṭho, tvaṁ vā”ti.
[¶46] “Yes, sir,” replied the householder Upāli to the Jain Ñātika. He rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled him, keeping him on his right. Then he went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, did the Jain ascetic Dīgha Tapassī come here?”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho upāli gahapati nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena pāvārikambavanaṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho upāli gahapati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “āgamā nu khvidha, bhante, dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho”ti?
[¶47] “He did, householder.”
> Pali: “Āgamā khvidha, gahapati, dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho”ti.
[¶48] “But did you have some discussion with him?”
> Pali: “Ahu kho pana te, bhante, dīghatapassinā nigaṇṭhena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti?
[¶49] “I did.”
> Pali: “Ahu kho me, gahapati, dīghatapassinā nigaṇṭhena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶50] “And what kind of discussion did you have with him?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana te, bhante, ahu dīghatapassinā nigaṇṭhena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti?
[¶51] Then the Buddha informed Upāli of all they had discussed.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yāvatako ahosi dīghatapassinā nigaṇṭhena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ upālissa gahapatissa ārocesi.
[¶52] When he said this, the householder Upāli said to him, “Good, sir, well done by Tapassī! The Jain ascetic Dīgha Tapassī has answered the ascetic Gotama like a learned disciple who rightly understands their teacher’s instructions. For how impressive is the measly mental rod when compared with the solid physical rod? Rather, the physical rod is the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much the verbal rod or the mental rod.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, upāli gahapati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sādhu sādhu, bhante tapassī. Yathā taṁ sutavatā sāvakena sammadeva satthusāsanaṁ ājānantena evamevaṁ dīghatapassinā nigaṇṭhena bhagavato byākataṁ. Kiñhi sobhati chavo manodaṇḍo imassa evaṁ oḷārikassa kāyadaṇḍassa upanidhāya? Atha kho kāyadaṇḍova mahāsāvajjataro pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā vacīdaṇḍo, no tathā manodaṇḍo”ti.
[¶53] “Householder, so long as you debate on the basis of truth, we can have some discussion about this.”
> Pali: “Sace kho tvaṁ, gahapati, sacce patiṭṭhāya manteyyāsi siyā no ettha kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶54] “I will debate on the basis of truth, sir. Let us have some discussion about this.”
> Pali: “Sacce ahaṁ, bhante, patiṭṭhāya mantessāmi; hotu no ettha kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶55] “What do you think, householder? Take a Jain ascetic who is sick, suffering, gravely ill. They turn down cold water and use only hot water. Not getting cold water, they might die. Now, where does the Jain Ñātika say they would be reborn?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, idhassa nigaṇṭho ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno sītodakapaṭikkhitto uṇhodakapaṭisevī. So sītodakaṁ alabhamāno kālaṁ kareyya. Imassa pana, gahapati, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto katthūpapattiṁ paññapetī”ti?
[¶56] “Sir, there are gods called ‘mind-bound’. They would be reborn there. Why is that? Because they died with mental attachment.”
> Pali: “Atthi, bhante, manosattā nāma devā tattha so upapajjati”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Asu hi, bhante, manopaṭibaddho kālaṁ karotī”ti.
[¶57] “Think about it, householder! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. But you said that you would debate on the basis of truth.”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, gahapati, manasi karitvā kho, gahapati, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Bhāsitā kho pana te, gahapati, esā vācā: ‘sacce ahaṁ, bhante, patiṭṭhāya mantessāmi, hotu no ettha kathāsallāpo’”ti.
[¶58] “Even though the Buddha says this, still the physical rod is the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much the verbal rod or the mental rod.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi, bhante, bhagavā evamāha, atha kho kāyadaṇḍova mahāsāvajjataro pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā vacīdaṇḍo, no tathā manodaṇḍo”ti.
[¶59] “What do you think, householder? Take a Jain ascetic who is restrained in the fourfold constraint, is restrained in all that is to be restrained, is bridled in all that is to be restrained, has shaken off evil in all that is to be restrained, and is curbed in all that is to be restrained. When going out and coming back they injure many little creatures. Now, what result does the Jain Ñātika say they would incur?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, idhassa nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto sabbavārivārito sabbavāriyutto sabbavāridhuto sabbavāriphuṭo. So abhikkamanto paṭikkamanto bahū khuddake pāṇe saṅghātaṁ āpādeti. Imassa pana, gahapati, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto kaṁ vipākaṁ paññapetī”ti?
[¶60] “Sir, the Jain Ñātika says that unintentional acts are not very blameworthy.”
> Pali: “Asañcetanikaṁ, bhante, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto no mahāsāvajjaṁ paññapetī”ti.
[¶61] “But if they are intentional?”
> Pali: “Sace pana, gahapati, cetetī”ti?
[¶62] “Then they are very blameworthy.”
> Pali: “Mahāsāvajjaṁ, bhante, hotī”ti.
[¶63] “But where does the Jain Ñātika say that intention is classified?”
> Pali: “Cetanaṁ pana, gahapati, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto kismiṁ paññapetī”ti?
[¶64] “In the mental rod, sir.”
> Pali: “Manodaṇḍasmiṁ, bhante”ti.
[¶65] “Think about it, householder! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. But you said that you would debate on the basis of truth.”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, gahapati, manasi karitvā kho, gahapati, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Bhāsitā kho pana te, gahapati, esā vācā: ‘sacce ahaṁ, bhante, patiṭṭhāya mantessāmi; hotu no ettha kathāsallāpo’”ti.
[¶66] “Even though the Buddha says this, still the physical rod is the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much the verbal rod or the mental rod.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi, bhante, bhagavā evamāha, atha kho kāyadaṇḍova mahāsāvajjataro pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā vacīdaṇḍo, no tathā manodaṇḍo”ti.
[¶67] “What do you think, householder? Is this Nāḷandā successful and prosperous, populous and full of people?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, ayaṁ nāḷandā iddhā ceva phītā ca bahujanā ākiṇṇamanussā”ti?
[¶68] “Indeed it is, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante, ayaṁ nāḷandā iddhā ceva phītā ca bahujanā ākiṇṇamanussā”ti.
[¶69] “What do you think, householder? Suppose a man were to come along with a drawn sword and say: ‘In one hour I will reduce all the living creatures within the bounds of Nāḷandā to one heap and mass of flesh!’ What do you think, householder? Could he do that?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, idha puriso āgaccheyya ukkhittāsiko. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ yāvatikā imissā nāḷandāya pāṇā te ekena khaṇena ekena muhuttena ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ karissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, pahoti nu kho so puriso yāvatikā imissā nāḷandāya pāṇā te ekena khaṇena ekena muhuttena ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kātun”ti?
[¶70] “Sir, even ten, twenty, thirty, forty, or fifty men couldn’t do that. How impressive is one measly man?”
> Pali: “Dasapi, bhante, purisā, vīsampi, bhante, purisā, tiṁsampi, bhante, purisā, cattārīsampi, bhante, purisā, paññāsampi, bhante, purisā nappahonti yāvatikā imissā nāḷandāya pāṇā te ekena khaṇena ekena muhuttena ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kātuṁ. Kiñhi sobhati eko chavo puriso”ti.
[¶71] “What do you think, householder? Suppose an ascetic or brahmin with psychic power, who has achieved mastery of the mind, were to come along and say: ‘I will reduce Nāḷandā to ashes with a single malevolent act of will!’ What do you think, householder? Could he do that?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, idha āgaccheyya samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā cetovasippatto. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ imaṁ nāḷandaṁ ekena manopadosena bhasmaṁ karissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, pahoti nu kho so samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā cetovasippatto imaṁ nāḷandaṁ ekena manopadosena bhasmaṁ kātun”ti?
[¶72] “Sir, an ascetic or brahmin with psychic power, who has achieved mastery of the mind, could reduce ten, twenty, thirty, forty, or fifty Nāḷandās to ashes with a single malevolent act of will. How significant is one measly Nāḷandā?”
> Pali: “Dasapi, bhante, nāḷandā, vīsampi nāḷandā, tiṁsampi nāḷandā, cattārīsampi nāḷandā, paññāsampi nāḷandā pahoti so samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā cetovasippatto ekena manopadosena bhasmaṁ kātuṁ. Kiñhi sobhati ekā chavā nāḷandā”ti.
[¶73] “Think about it, householder! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. But you said that you would debate on the basis of truth.”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, gahapati, manasi karitvā kho, gahapati, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Bhāsitā kho pana te, gahapati, esā vācā: ‘sacce ahaṁ, bhante, patiṭṭhāya mantessāmi; hotu no ettha kathāsallāpo’”ti.
[¶74] “Even though the Buddha says this, still the physical rod is the most blameworthy for performing bad deeds, not so much the verbal rod or the mental rod.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi, bhante, bhagavā evamāha, atha kho kāyadaṇḍova mahāsāvajjataro pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā vacīdaṇḍo, no tathā manodaṇḍo”ti.
[¶75] “What do you think, householder? Have you heard how the wildernesses of Daṇḍaka, Kaliṅga, Mejjha, and Mātaṅga came to be that way?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, sutaṁ te daṇḍakīraññaṁ kāliṅgāraññaṁ majjhāraññaṁ mātaṅgāraññaṁ araññaṁ araññabhūtan”ti?
[¶76] “I have, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante, sutaṁ me daṇḍakīraññaṁ kāliṅgāraññaṁ majjhāraññaṁ mātaṅgāraññaṁ araññaṁ araññabhūtan”ti.
[¶77] “What have you heard?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, gahapati, kinti te sutaṁ kena taṁ daṇḍakīraññaṁ kāliṅgāraññaṁ majjhāraññaṁ mātaṅgāraññaṁ araññaṁ araññabhūtan”ti?
[¶78] “I heard that it was because of a malevolent act of will by seers that the wildernesses of Daṇḍaka, Kaliṅga, Mejjha, and Mātaṅga came to be that way.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante, isīnaṁ manopadosena taṁ daṇḍakīraññaṁ kāliṅgāraññaṁ majjhāraññaṁ mātaṅgāraññaṁ araññaṁ araññabhūtan”ti.
[¶79] “Think about it, householder! You should think before answering. What you said before and what you said after don’t match up. But you said that you would debate on the basis of truth.”
> Pali: “Manasi karohi, gahapati, manasi karitvā kho, gahapati, byākarohi. Na kho te sandhiyati purimena vā pacchimaṁ, pacchimena vā purimaṁ. Bhāsitā kho pana te, gahapati, esā vācā: ‘sacce ahaṁ, bhante, patiṭṭhāya mantessāmi; hotu no ettha kathāsallāpo’”ti.
[¶80] “Sir, I was already delighted and satisfied by the Buddha’s very first simile. Nevertheless, I wanted to hear the Buddha’s various solutions to the problem, so I thought I’d oppose you in this way.
> Pali: “Purimenevāhaṁ, bhante, opammena bhagavato attamano abhiraddho. Api cāhaṁ imāni bhagavato vicitrāni pañhapaṭibhānāni sotukāmo, evāhaṁ bhagavantaṁ paccanīkaṁ kātabbaṁ amaññissaṁ.
[¶81] Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶82] “Householder, you should act after careful consideration. It’s good for well-known people such as yourself to act after careful consideration.”
> Pali: “Anuviccakāraṁ kho, gahapati, karohi, anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṁ ñātamanussānaṁ sādhu hotī”ti.
[¶83] “Now I’m even more delighted and satisfied with the Buddha, since he tells me to act after careful consideration. For if the followers of other religions were to gain me as a disciple, they’d carry a banner all over Nāḷandā, saying: ‘The householder Upāli has become our disciple!’ And yet the Buddha says: ‘Householder, you should act after careful consideration. It’s good for well-known people such as yourself to act after careful consideration.’
> Pali: “Imināpāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato bhiyyoso mattāya attamano abhiraddho yaṁ maṁ bhagavā evamāha: ‘anuviccakāraṁ kho, gahapati, karohi, anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṁ ñātamanussānaṁ sādhu hotī’ti. Mañhi, bhante, aññatitthiyā sāvakaṁ labhitvā kevalakappaṁ nāḷandaṁ paṭākaṁ parihareyyuṁ: ‘upāli amhākaṁ gahapati sāvakattaṁ upagato’ti. Atha ca pana maṁ bhagavā evamāha: ‘anuviccakāraṁ kho, gahapati, karohi, anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṁ ñātamanussānaṁ sādhu hotī’ti.
## 60. MN 56 · With Upāli · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/60/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/60/#p-N
[¶0] For a second time, I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Esāhaṁ, bhante, dutiyampi bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶1] “For a long time now, householder, your family has been a well-spring of support for the Jain ascetics. You should consider giving to them when they come.”
> Pali: “Dīgharattaṁ kho te, gahapati, nigaṇṭhānaṁ opānabhūtaṁ kulaṁ yena nesaṁ upagatānaṁ piṇḍakaṁ dātabbaṁ maññeyyāsī”ti.
[¶2] “Now I’m even more delighted and satisfied with the Buddha, since he tells me to consider giving to the Jain ascetics when they come. I have heard, sir, that the ascetic Gotama says this: ‘Gifts should only be given to me, not to others. Gifts should only be given to my disciples, not to the disciples of others. Only what is given to me is very fruitful, not what is given to others. Only what is given to my disciples is very fruitful, not what is given to the disciples of others.’ Yet the Buddha encourages me to give to the Jain ascetics. Well, sir, we’ll know the proper time for that.
> Pali: “Imināpāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato bhiyyoso mattāya attamano abhiraddho yaṁ maṁ bhagavā evamāha: ‘dīgharattaṁ kho te, gahapati, nigaṇṭhānaṁ opānabhūtaṁ kulaṁ yena nesaṁ upagatānaṁ piṇḍakaṁ dātabbaṁ maññeyyāsī’ti. Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante, samaṇo gotamo evamāha: ‘mayhameva dānaṁ dātabbaṁ, nāññesaṁ dānaṁ dātabbaṁ; mayhameva sāvakānaṁ dānaṁ dātabbaṁ, nāññesaṁ sāvakānaṁ dānaṁ dātabbaṁ; mayhameva dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ, nāññesaṁ dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ; mayhameva sāvakānaṁ dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ, nāññesaṁ sāvakānaṁ dinnaṁ mahapphalan’ti. Atha ca pana maṁ bhagavā nigaṇṭhesupi dāne samādapeti. Api ca, bhante, mayamettha kālaṁ jānissāma.
[¶3] For a third time, I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Esāhaṁ, bhante, tatiyampi bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶4] Then the Buddha taught the householder Upāli step by step, with a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He revealed the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. And when he knew that Upāli’s mind was ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he revealed the special teaching of the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in Upāli: “Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.” Then Upāli saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. He went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā upālissa gahapatissa anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ— dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ, kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Yadā bhagavā aññāsi upāliṁ gahapatiṁ kallacittaṁ muducittaṁ vinīvaraṇacittaṁ udaggacittaṁ pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā taṁ pakāsesi— dukkhaṁ, samudayaṁ, nirodhaṁ, maggaṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; evameva upālissa gahapatissa tasmiṁyeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti. Atha kho upāli gahapati diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶5] He said to the Buddha, “Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: “handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bhante, gacchāma, bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶6] “Please, householder, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, gahapati, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶7] And then the householder Upāli approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. He got up from his seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right. Then he went back to his own home, where he addressed the gatekeeper, “My good gatekeeper, from this day forth close the gate to Jain monks and nuns, and open it for the Buddha’s monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen. If any Jain ascetics come, say this to them: ‘Wait, sir, do not enter. From now on the householder Upāli has become a disciple of the ascetic Gotama. His gate is closed to Jain monks and nuns, and opened for the Buddha’s monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen. If you require almsfood, wait here, they will bring it to you.’”
> Pali: Atha kho upāli gahapati bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena sakaṁ nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā dovārikaṁ āmantesi: “ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ nigaṇṭhīnaṁ, anāvaṭaṁ dvāraṁ bhagavato bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Sace koci nigaṇṭho āgacchati tamenaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tiṭṭha, bhante, mā pāvisi. Ajjatagge upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato. Āvaṭaṁ dvāraṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ nigaṇṭhīnaṁ, anāvaṭaṁ dvāraṁ bhagavato bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Sace te, bhante, piṇḍakena attho, ettheva tiṭṭha, ettheva te āharissantī’”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, sir,” replied the gatekeeper.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho dovāriko upālissa gahapatissa paccassosi.
[¶9] Dīgha Tapassī heard that Upāli had become a disciple of the ascetic Gotama. He went to the Jain Ñātika and said to him, “Sir, they say that the householder Upāli has become a disciple of the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: Assosi kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho: “upāli kira gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato”ti. Atha kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante, upāli kira gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato”ti.
[¶10] “It is impossible, Tapassī, it cannot happen that Upāli could become Gotama’s disciple. But it is possible that Gotama could become Upāli’s disciple.”
> Pali: “Aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ, tapassi, anavakāso yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyya. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ samaṇo gotamo upālissa gahapatissa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyyā”ti.
[¶11] For a second time … and a third time, Dīgha Tapassī said to the Jain Ñātika, “Sir, they say that the householder Upāli has become a disciple of the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho …pe… tatiyampi kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante …
[¶12] “It is impossible, Tapassī, it cannot happen that Upāli could become Gotama’s disciple. But it is possible that Gotama could become Upāli’s disciple.”
> Pali: pe… upālissa gahapatissa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyyā”ti.
[¶13] “Well, sir, I’d better go and find out whether or not Upāli has become Gotama’s disciple.”
> Pali: “Handāhaṁ, bhante, gacchāmi yāva jānāmi yadi vā upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato yadi vā no”ti.
[¶14] “Go, Tapassī, and find out whether or not Upāli has become Gotama’s disciple.”
> Pali: “Gaccha tvaṁ, tapassi, jānāhi yadi vā upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato yadi vā no”ti.
[¶15] Then Dīgha Tapassī went to Upāli’s home. The gatekeeper saw him coming off in the distance and said to him, “Wait, sir, do not enter. From now on the householder Upāli has become a disciple of the ascetic Gotama. His gate is closed to Jain monks and nuns, and opened for the Buddha’s monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen. If you require almsfood, wait here, they will bring it to you.”
> Pali: Atha kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho yena upālissa gahapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho dovāriko dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna dīghatapassiṁ nigaṇṭhaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭha, bhante, mā pāvisi. Ajjatagge upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato. Āvaṭaṁ dvāraṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ nigaṇṭhīnaṁ, anāvaṭaṁ dvāraṁ bhagavato bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Sace te, bhante, piṇḍakena attho, ettheva tiṭṭha, ettheva te āharissantī”ti.
[¶16] Saying, “No, worthy man, I do not require almsfood,” he turned back and went to the Jain Ñātika and said to him, “Sir, it’s really true that Upāli has become Gotama’s disciple. Sir, I couldn’t get you to accept that it wasn’t a good idea for the householder Upāli to rebut the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine. For the ascetic Gotama is deceitful. He knows a conversion trick, and uses it to convert the disciples of other religions. The householder Upāli has been converted by the ascetic Gotama’s conversion trick!”
> Pali: “Na me, āvuso, piṇḍakena attho”ti vatvā tato paṭinivattitvā yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “saccaṁyeva kho, bhante, yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato. Etaṁ kho te ahaṁ, bhante, nālatthaṁ, na kho me, bhante, ruccati yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropeyya. Samaṇo hi, bhante, gotamo māyāvī āvaṭṭaniṁ māyaṁ jānāti yāya aññatitthiyānaṁ sāvake āvaṭṭetīti. Āvaṭṭo kho te, bhante, upāli gahapati samaṇena gotamena āvaṭṭaniyā māyāyā”ti.
[¶17] “It is impossible, Tapassī, it cannot happen that Upāli could become Gotama’s disciple. But it is possible that Gotama could become Upāli’s disciple.”
> Pali: “Aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ, tapassi, anavakāso yaṁ upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyya. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ samaṇo gotamo upālissa gahapatissa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyyā”ti.
[¶18] For a second time … and a third time, Dīgha Tapassī told the Jain Ñātika that it was really true.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “saccaṁyeva, bhante …pe… upālissa gahapatissa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyyā”ti. Tatiyampi kho dīghatapassī nigaṇṭho nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “saccaṁyeva kho, bhante …
[¶19] “It is impossible …
> Pali: pe… upālissa gahapatissa sāvakattaṁ upagaccheyyā”ti.
[¶20] Well, Tapassī, I’d better go and find out for myself whether or not Upāli has become Gotama’s disciple.”
> Pali: “Handa cāhaṁ, tapassi, gacchāmi yāva cāhaṁ sāmaṁyeva jānāmi yadi vā upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato yadi vā no”ti.
[¶21] Then the Jain Ñātika went to Upāli’s home together with a large following of Jain ascetics. The gatekeeper saw him coming off in the distance and said to him: “Wait, sir, do not enter. From now on the householder Upāli has become a disciple of the ascetic Gotama. His gate is closed to Jain monks and nuns, and opened for the Buddha’s monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen. If you require almsfood, wait here, they will bring it to you.”
> Pali: Atha kho nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto mahatiyā nigaṇṭhaparisāya saddhiṁ yena upālissa gahapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho dovāriko nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭha, bhante, mā pāvisi. Ajjatagge upāli gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakattaṁ upagato. Āvaṭaṁ dvāraṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ nigaṇṭhīnaṁ, anāvaṭaṁ dvāraṁ bhagavato bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Sace te, bhante, piṇḍakena attho, ettheva tiṭṭha, ettheva te āharissantī”ti.
[¶22] “Well then, my good gatekeeper, go to Upāli and say: ‘Sir, the Jain Ñātika is waiting outside the gates together with a large following of Jain ascetics. He wishes to see you.’”
> Pali: “Tena hi, samma dovārika, yena upāli gahapati tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā upāliṁ gahapatiṁ evaṁ vadehi: ‘nigaṇṭho, bhante, nāṭaputto mahatiyā nigaṇṭhaparisāya saddhiṁ bahidvārakoṭṭhake ṭhito; so te dassanakāmo’”ti.
[¶23] “Yes, sir,” replied the gatekeeper. He went to Upāli and relayed what was said. Upāli said to him, “Well, then, my good gatekeeper, prepare seats in the hall of the middle gate.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho dovāriko nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa paṭissutvā yena upāli gahapati tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā upāliṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “nigaṇṭho, bhante, nāṭaputto mahatiyā nigaṇṭhaparisāya saddhiṁ bahidvārakoṭṭhake ṭhito; so te dassanakāmo”ti. “Tena hi, samma dovārika, majjhimāya dvārasālāya āsanāni paññapehī”ti.
[¶24] “Yes, sir,” replied the gatekeeper. He did as he was asked, then returned to Upāli and said, “Sir, seats have been prepared in the hall of the middle gate. Please go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho dovāriko upālissa gahapatissa paṭissutvā majjhimāya dvārasālāya āsanāni paññapetvā yena upāli gahapati tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā upāliṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “paññattāni kho, bhante, majjhimāya dvārasālāya āsanāni. Yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶25] Then Upāli went to the hall of the middle gate, where he sat on the highest and finest seat. He addressed the gatekeeper, “Well then, my good gatekeeper, go to the Jain Ñātika and say to him: ‘Sir, Upāli says you may enter if you wish.’”
> Pali: Atha kho upāli gahapati yena majjhimā dvārasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā yaṁ tattha āsanaṁ aggañca seṭṭhañca uttamañca paṇītañca tattha sāmaṁ nisīditvā dovārikaṁ āmantesi: “tena hi, samma dovārika, yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ evaṁ vadehi: ‘upāli, bhante, gahapati evamāha— pavisa kira, bhante, sace ākaṅkhasī’”ti.
[¶26] “Yes, sir,” replied the gatekeeper. He went to the Jain Ñātika and relayed what was said.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho dovāriko upālissa gahapatissa paṭissutvā yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “upāli, bhante, gahapati evamāha: ‘pavisa kira, bhante, sace ākaṅkhasī’”ti.
[¶27] Then the Jain Ñātika went to the hall of the middle gate together with a large following of Jain ascetics. Previously, when Upāli saw the Jain Ñātika coming, he would go out to greet him and, having wiped off the highest and finest seat with his upper robe, he would embrace him and sit him down. But today, having seated himself on the highest and finest seat, he said to the Jain Ñātika, “There are seats, sir. Please sit if you wish.”
> Pali: Atha kho nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto mahatiyā nigaṇṭhaparisāya saddhiṁ yena majjhimā dvārasālā tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho upāli gahapati— yaṁ sudaṁ pubbe yato passati nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ disvāna tato paccuggantvā yaṁ tattha āsanaṁ aggañca seṭṭhañca uttamañca paṇītañca taṁ uttarāsaṅgena sammajjitvā pariggahetvā nisīdāpeti so— dāni yaṁ tattha āsanaṁ aggañca seṭṭhañca uttamañca paṇītañca tattha sāmaṁ nisīditvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “saṁvijjanti kho, bhante, āsanāni; sace ākaṅkhasi, nisīdā”ti.
[¶28] When he said this, the Jain Ñātika said to him: “You’re mad, householder! You’re a moron! You said: ‘I’ll go and refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine.’ But you come back caught in the vast net of his doctrine. Suppose a man went to deliver a pair of testicles, but came back castrated. Or they went to deliver eyes, but came back blinded. In the same way, you said: ‘I’ll go and refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine.’ But you come back caught in the vast net of his doctrine. You’ve been converted by the ascetic Gotama’s conversion trick!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto upāliṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “ummattosi tvaṁ, gahapati, dattosi tvaṁ, gahapati. ‘Gacchāmahaṁ, bhante, samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropessāmī’ti gantvā mahatāsi vādasaṅghāṭena paṭimukko āgato. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso aṇḍahārako gantvā ubbhatehi aṇḍehi āgaccheyya, seyyathā vā pana gahapati puriso akkhikahārako gantvā ubbhatehi akkhīhi āgaccheyya; evameva kho tvaṁ, gahapati, ‘gacchāmahaṁ, bhante, samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropessāmī’ti gantvā mahatāsi vādasaṅghāṭena paṭimukko āgato. Āvaṭṭosi kho tvaṁ, gahapati, samaṇena gotamena āvaṭṭaniyā māyāyā”ti.
[¶29] “Sir, this conversion trick is excellent. This conversion trick is lovely! If my loved ones—relatives and kin—were to be converted by this, it would be for their lasting welfare and happiness. If all the aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials were to be converted by this, it would be for their lasting welfare and happiness. If the whole world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—were to be converted by this, it would be for their lasting welfare and happiness. Well then, sir, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Bhaddikā, bhante, āvaṭṭanī māyā; kalyāṇī, bhante, āvaṭṭanī māyā; piyā me, bhante, ñātisālohitā imāya āvaṭṭaniyā āvaṭṭeyyuṁ; piyānampi me assa ñātisālohitānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya; sabbe cepi, bhante, khattiyā imāya āvaṭṭaniyā āvaṭṭeyyuṁ; sabbesānampissa khattiyānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya; sabbe cepi, bhante, brāhmaṇā …pe… vessā …pe… suddā imāya āvaṭṭaniyā āvaṭṭeyyuṁ; sabbesānampissa suddānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya; sadevako cepi, bhante, loko samārako sabrahmako sassamaṇabrāhmaṇī pajā sadevamanussā imāya āvaṭṭaniyā āvaṭṭeyyuṁ; sadevakassapissa lokassa samārakassa sabrahmakassa sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyāti. Tena hi, bhante, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāyapidhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶30] Once upon a time, there was an old brahmin, elderly and senior. His wife was a young brahmin lady who was pregnant and about to give birth. Then she said to the brahmin, ‘Go, brahmin, buy a baby monkey from the market and bring it back so it can be a playmate for my child.’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhante, aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa jiṇṇassa vuḍḍhassa mahallakassa daharā māṇavikā pajāpatī ahosi gabbhinī upavijaññā. Atha kho, bhante, sā māṇavikā taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca, ‘gaccha tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, āpaṇā makkaṭacchāpakaṁ kiṇitvā ānehi, yo me kumārakassa kīḷāpanako bhavissatī’ti.
[¶31] When she said this, the brahmin said to her, ‘Wait, my dear, until you give birth. If your child is a boy, I’ll buy you a male monkey, but if it’s a girl, I’ll buy a female monkey.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, so brāhmaṇo taṁ māṇavikaṁ etadavoca: ‘āgamehi tāva, bhoti, yāva vijāyati. Sace tvaṁ, bhoti, kumārakaṁ vijāyissasi, tassā te ahaṁ āpaṇā makkaṭacchāpakaṁ kiṇitvā ānessāmi, yo te kumārakassa kīḷāpanako bhavissati. Sace pana tvaṁ, bhoti, kumārikaṁ vijāyissasi, tassā te ahaṁ āpaṇā makkaṭacchāpikaṁ kiṇitvā ānessāmi, yā te kumārikāya kīḷāpanikā bhavissatī’ti.
[¶32] For a second time … For a third time she said to the brahmin, ‘Go, brahmin, buy a baby monkey from the market and bring it back so it can be a playmate for my child.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho, bhante, sā māṇavikā …pe… tatiyampi kho, bhante, sā māṇavikā taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: ‘gaccha tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, āpaṇā makkaṭacchāpakaṁ kiṇitvā ānehi, yo me kumārakassa kīḷāpanako bhavissatī’ti.
[¶33] Then that brahmin, because of his love for the brahmin lady, bought a male baby monkey at the market, brought it to her, and said, ‘I’ve bought this male baby monkey for you so it can be a playmate for your child.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, so brāhmaṇo tassā māṇavikāya sāratto paṭibaddhacitto āpaṇā makkaṭacchāpakaṁ kiṇitvā ānetvā taṁ māṇavikaṁ etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ te, bhoti, āpaṇā makkaṭacchāpako kiṇitvā ānīto, yo te kumārakassa kīḷāpanako bhavissatī’ti.
[¶34] When he said this, she said to him, ‘Go, brahmin, take this monkey to Rattapāṇi the dyer and say, “Worthy Rattapāṇi, I wish to have this monkey dyed the color of yellow greasepaint, pounded and re-pounded, and pressed on both sides.”’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, sā māṇavikā taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: ‘gaccha tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imaṁ makkaṭacchāpakaṁ ādāya yena rattapāṇi rajakaputto tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā rattapāṇiṁ rajakaputtaṁ evaṁ vadehi— icchāmahaṁ, samma rattapāṇi, imaṁ makkaṭacchāpakaṁ pītāvalepanaṁ nāma raṅgajātaṁ rajitaṁ ākoṭitapaccākoṭitaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhan’ti.
[¶35] Then that brahmin, because of his love for the brahmin lady, took the monkey to Rattapāṇi the dyer and said, ‘Worthy Rattapāṇi, I wish to have this monkey dyed the color of yellow greasepaint, pounded and re-pounded, and pressed on both sides.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, so brāhmaṇo tassā māṇavikāya sāratto paṭibaddhacitto taṁ makkaṭacchāpakaṁ ādāya yena rattapāṇi rajakaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rattapāṇiṁ rajakaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘icchāmahaṁ, samma rattapāṇi, imaṁ makkaṭacchāpakaṁ pītāvalepanaṁ nāma raṅgajātaṁ rajitaṁ ākoṭitapaccākoṭitaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhan’ti.
[¶36] When he said this, Rattapāṇi said to him, ‘Sir, this monkey can endure a dying, but not a pounding or a pressing.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, rattapāṇi rajakaputto taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ kho te, bhante, makkaṭacchāpako raṅgakkhamo hi kho, no ākoṭanakkhamo, no vimajjanakkhamo’ti.
[¶37] In the same way, the doctrine of the foolish Jains looks fine initially—for fools, not for the astute—but can’t endure being scrutinized or pressed.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhante, bālānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ vādo raṅgakkhamo hi kho bālānaṁ no paṇḍitānaṁ, no anuyogakkhamo, no vimajjanakkhamo.
[¶38] Then some time later that brahmin took a new pair of garments to Rattapāṇi the dyer and said, ‘Worthy Rattapāṇi, I wish to have this new pair of garments dyed the color of yellow greasepaint, pounded and re-pounded, and pressed on both sides.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, so brāhmaṇo aparena samayena navaṁ dussayugaṁ ādāya yena rattapāṇi rajakaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rattapāṇiṁ rajakaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘icchāmahaṁ, samma rattapāṇi, imaṁ navaṁ dussayugaṁ pītāvalepanaṁ nāma raṅgajātaṁ rajitaṁ ākoṭitapaccākoṭitaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhan’ti.
[¶39] When he said this, Rattapāṇi said to him, ‘Sir, this pair of garments can endure a dying, a pounding, and a pressing.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, rattapāṇi rajakaputto taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: ‘idaṁ kho te, bhante, navaṁ dussayugaṁ raṅgakkhamañceva ākoṭanakkhamañca vimajjanakkhamañcā’ti.
[¶40] In the same way, the doctrine of the Buddha looks fine initially—for the astute, not for fools—and it can endure being scrutinized and pressed.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhante, tassa bhagavato vādo arahato sammāsambuddhassa raṅgakkhamo ceva paṇḍitānaṁ no bālānaṁ, anuyogakkhamo ca vimajjanakkhamo cā”ti.
[¶41] “Householder, the king and his retinue know you as a disciple of the Jain Ñātika. Whose disciple should we remember you as?”
> Pali: “Sarājikā kho, gahapati, parisā evaṁ jānāti: ‘upāli gahapati nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa sāvako’ti. Kassa taṁ, gahapati, sāvakaṁ dhāremā”ti?
[¶42] When he had spoken, the householder Upāli rose from his seat, arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms in the direction of the Buddha, and said to the Jain Ñātika, “Well then, sir, hear whose disciple I am:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, upāli gahapati uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca: “tena hi, bhante, suṇohi yassāhaṁ sāvako”ti:
[¶43] The attentive one, free of delusion,
with hard-heartedness dissolved, victor in battle;
he’s untroubled and very even-minded,
with the virtue of an elder and the wisdom of a saint,
immaculate in the midst of it all:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: “Dhīrassa vigatamohassa,
Pabhinnakhīlassa vijitavijayassa;
Anīghassa susamacittassa,
Vuddhasīlassa sādhupaññassa;
Vesamantarassa vimalassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶44] He has no indecision, he’s content,
joyful, he has spat out the world’s bait;
he has completed the ascetic’s task as a man,
a man who bears his final body;
he’s beyond compare, he’s stainless:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Akathaṅkathissa tusitassa,
Vantalokāmisassa muditassa;
Katasamaṇassa manujassa,
Antimasārīrassa narassa;
Anopamassa virajassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶45] He’s free of doubt, he’s skillful,
he’s a trainer, an excellent charioteer;
supreme, with brilliant qualities,
confident, his light shines forth;
he has cut off conceit, he’s a hero:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Asaṁsayassa kusalassa,
Venayikassa sārathivarassa;
Anuttarassa ruciradhammassa,
Nikkaṅkhassa pabhāsakassa;
Mānacchidassa vīrassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶46] The boss bull, immeasurable,
profound, sagacious;
he is the maker of sanctuary, knowledgeable,
firm in principle and restrained;
he has slipped his chains and is liberated:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Nisabhassa appameyyassa,
Gambhīrassa monapattassa;
Khemaṅkarassa vedassa,
Dhammaṭṭhassa saṁvutattassa;
Saṅgātigassa muttassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶47] He’s a giant, living remotely,
he’s ended the fetters and is liberated;
he’s skilled in debate and cleansed,
with banner lowered, desireless;
he’s tamed, and doesn’t proliferate:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Nāgassa pantasenassa,
Khīṇasaṁyojanassa muttassa;
Paṭimantakassa dhonassa,
Pannadhajassa vītarāgassa;
Dantassa nippapañcassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶48] He is the seventh seer, free of deceit,
with three knowledges, he has attained to divinity,
he has bathed, he knows philology,
he’s tranquil, he understands what is known;
he is Sakka the Able, Purindada the Firstgiver:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Isisattamassa akuhassa,
Tevijjassa brahmapattassa;
Nhātakassa padakassa,
Passaddhassa viditavedassa;
Purindadassa sakkassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶49] The Noble One, evolved,
he has attained the goal and explains it;
he is mindful, discerning,
neither leaning forward nor pulling back,
he’s unstirred, attained to mastery:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Ariyassa bhāvitattassa,
Pattipattassa veyyākaraṇassa;
Satimato vipassissa,
Anabhinatassa no apanatassa;
Anejassa vasippattassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶50] Transcendent, he practices absorption,
no inner thoughts arising, he is pure,
independent and fearless;
secluded, he has reached the peak,
crossed over, he helps others across:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Samuggatassa jhāyissa,
Ananugatantarassa suddhassa;
Asitassa hitassa,
Pavivittassa aggappattassa;
Tiṇṇassa tārayantassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶51] He’s peaceful, his wisdom is vast,
with great wisdom, he’s free of greed;
he is the Realized One, the Holy One,
unrivaled, unequaled,
self-assured, and subtle:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.
> Pali: Santassa bhūripaññassa,
Mahāpaññassa vītalobhassa;
Tathāgatassa sugatassa,
Appaṭipuggalassa asamassa;
Visāradassa nipuṇassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi.
[¶52] He has cut off craving and is awakened,
free of fuming, unsullied;
a mighty spirit worthy of offerings,
best of men, inestimable,
grand, he has reached the peak of glory:
he is the Buddha, and I am his disciple.”
> Pali: Taṇhacchidassa buddhassa,
Vītadhūmassa anupalittassa;
Āhuneyyassa yakkhassa,
Uttamapuggalassa atulassa;
Mahato yasaggapattassa,
Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmī”ti.
[¶53] “But when did you compose these praises of the ascetic Gotama’s beautiful qualities, householder?”
> Pali: “Kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā”ti?
[¶54] “Sir, suppose there was a large heap of many different flowers. A deft garland-maker or their apprentice could tie them into a colorful garland. In the same way, the Buddha has many beautiful qualities to praise, many hundreds of such qualities. Who, sir, would not praise the praiseworthy?”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhante, nānāpupphānaṁ mahāpuppharāsi, tamenaṁ dakkho mālākāro vā mālākārantevāsī vā vicittaṁ mālaṁ gantheyya; evameva kho, bhante, so bhagavā anekavaṇṇo anekasatavaṇṇo. Ko hi, bhante, vaṇṇārahassa vaṇṇaṁ na karissatī”ti?
[¶55] Unable to bear this honor paid to the Buddha, the Jain Ñātika spewed hot blood from his mouth there and then.
> Pali: Atha kho nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa bhagavato sakkāraṁ asahamānassa tattheva uṇhaṁ lohitaṁ mukhato uggacchīti.
[¶56] > Pali: Upālisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 61. MN 57 · The Ascetic Who Behaved Like a Dog
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/61/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/61/#p-N
[¶0] MN 57 · The Ascetic Who Behaved Like a Dog
> Pali: MN 57 · Kukkuravatikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Koliyans, where they have a town named Haliddavasana.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā koliyesu viharati haliddavasanaṁ nāma koliyānaṁ nigamo.
[¶2] Then Puṇṇa the Koliyan, a cow votary, and the naked ascetic Seniya, a dog votary, went to the Buddha. Puṇṇa bowed to the Buddha and sat down to one side, while Seniya exchanged greetings and polite conversation with him before sitting down to one side curled up like a dog.
> Pali: Atha kho puṇṇo ca koliyaputto govatiko acelo ca seniyo kukkuravatiko yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Acelo pana seniyo kukkuravatiko bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā kukkurova palikujjitvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶3] Puṇṇa said to the Buddha, “Sir, this naked ascetic Seniya the dog votary does a hard thing: he eats food placed on the ground. For a long time he has undertaken that observance to behave like a dog. Where will he be reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, acelo seniyo kukkuravatiko dukkarakārako chamānikkhittaṁ bhojanaṁ bhuñjati. Tassa taṁ kukkuravataṁ dīgharattaṁ samattaṁ samādinnaṁ. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶4] “Enough, Puṇṇa, let it be. Don’t ask me that.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, puṇṇa, tiṭṭhatetaṁ; mā maṁ etaṁ pucchī”ti.
[¶5] For a second time … and a third time, Puṇṇa said to the Buddha, “Sir, this naked ascetic Seniya does a hard thing: he eats food placed on the ground. For a long time he has undertaken that observance to behave like a dog. Where will he be reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko …pe… tatiyampi kho puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, acelo seniyo kukkuravatiko dukkarakārako chamānikkhittaṁ bhojanaṁ bhuñjati. Tassa taṁ kukkuravataṁ dīgharattaṁ samattaṁ samādinnaṁ. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶6] “Clearly, Puṇṇa, I’m not getting through to you when I say: ‘Enough, Puṇṇa, let it be. Don’t ask me that.’ Nevertheless, I will answer you.
> Pali: “Addhā kho te ahaṁ, puṇṇa, na labhāmi. Alaṁ, puṇṇa, tiṭṭhatetaṁ; mā maṁ etaṁ pucchīti; api ca tyāhaṁ byākarissāmi.
[¶7] Take someone who develops the dog observance fully and uninterruptedly. They develop a dog’s ethics, a dog’s mentality, and a dog’s behavior fully and uninterruptedly. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of dogs. But if they have such a view: ‘By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice, may I become one of the gods!’ This is their wrong view. An individual with wrong view is reborn in one of two places, I say: hell or the animal realm. So if the dog observance succeeds it leads to rebirth in the company of dogs, but if it fails it leads to hell.”
> Pali: Idha, puṇṇa, ekacco kukkuravataṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, kukkurasīlaṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, kukkuracittaṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, kukkurākappaṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ. So kukkuravataṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, kukkurasīlaṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, kukkuracittaṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, kukkurākappaṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā kukkurānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati. Sace kho panassa evaṁdiṭṭhi hoti: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti, sāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhissa kho ahaṁ, puṇṇa, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aññataraṁ gatiṁ vadāmi—nirayaṁ vā tiracchānayoniṁ vā. Iti kho, puṇṇa, sampajjamānaṁ kukkuravataṁ kukkurānaṁ sahabyataṁ upaneti, vipajjamānaṁ nirayan”ti.
[¶8] When he said this, Seniya cried and burst out in tears.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, acelo seniyo kukkuravatiko parodi, assūni pavattesi.
[¶9] The Buddha said to Puṇṇa, “This is what I didn’t get through to you when I said: ‘Enough, Puṇṇa, let it be. Don’t ask me that.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā puṇṇaṁ koliyaputtaṁ govatikaṁ etadavoca: “etaṁ kho te ahaṁ, puṇṇa, nālatthaṁ. Alaṁ, puṇṇa, tiṭṭhatetaṁ; mā maṁ etaṁ pucchī”ti.
[¶10] Seniya said, “Sir, I’m not crying because of what the Buddha said. But, sir, for a long time I have undertaken this observance to behave like a dog. Sir, this Puṇṇa is a cow votary. For a long time he has undertaken that observance to behave like a cow. Where will he be reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: “Nāhaṁ, bhante, etaṁ rodāmi yaṁ maṁ bhagavā evamāha; api ca me idaṁ, bhante, kukkuravataṁ dīgharattaṁ samattaṁ samādinnaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhante, puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko. Tassa taṁ govataṁ dīgharattaṁ samattaṁ samādinnaṁ. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶11] “Enough, Seniya, let it be. Don’t ask me that.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, seniya, tiṭṭhatetaṁ; mā maṁ etaṁ pucchī”ti.
[¶12] For a second time … and a third time Seniya said to the Buddha, “Sir, this Puṇṇa is a cow votary. For a long time he has undertaken that observance to behave like a cow. Where will he be reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho acelo seniyo …pe… tatiyampi kho acelo seniyo kukkuravatiko bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko. Tassa taṁ govataṁ dīgharattaṁ samattaṁ samādinnaṁ. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶13] “Clearly, Seniya, I’m not getting through to you when I say: ‘Enough, Seniya, let it be. Don’t ask me that.’ Nevertheless, I will answer you.
> Pali: “Addhā kho te ahaṁ, seniya, na labhāmi. Alaṁ, seniya, tiṭṭhatetaṁ; mā maṁ etaṁ pucchīti; api ca tyāhaṁ byākarissāmi.
[¶14] Take someone who develops the cow observance fully and uninterruptedly. They develop a cow’s ethics, a cow’s mentality, and a cow’s behavior fully and uninterruptedly. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of cows. But if they have such a view: ‘By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice, may I become one of the gods!’ This is their wrong view. An individual with wrong view is reborn in one of two places, I say: hell or the animal realm. So if the cow observance succeeds it leads to rebirth in the company of cows, but if it fails it leads to hell.”
> Pali: Idha, seniya, ekacco govataṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, gosīlaṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, gocittaṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, gavākappaṁ bhāveti paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ. So govataṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, gosīlaṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, gocittaṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ, gavākappaṁ bhāvetvā paripuṇṇaṁ abbokiṇṇaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā gunnaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati. Sace kho panassa evaṁdiṭṭhi hoti: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti, sāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhissa kho ahaṁ, seniya, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aññataraṁ gatiṁ vadāmi—nirayaṁ vā tiracchānayoniṁ vā. Iti kho, seniya, sampajjamānaṁ govataṁ gunnaṁ sahabyataṁ upaneti, vipajjamānaṁ nirayan”ti.
[¶15] When he said this, Puṇṇa cried and burst out in tears.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko parodi, assūni pavattesi.
[¶16] The Buddha said to Seniya, “This is what I didn’t get through to you when I said: ‘Enough, Seniya, let it be. Don’t ask me that.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acelaṁ seniyaṁ kukkuravatikaṁ etadavoca: “etaṁ kho te ahaṁ, seniya, nālatthaṁ. Alaṁ, seniya, tiṭṭhatetaṁ; mā maṁ etaṁ pucchī”ti.
[¶17] Puṇṇa said, “Sir, I’m not crying because of what the Buddha said. But, sir, for a long time I have undertaken this observance to behave like a cow. I am quite confident that the Buddha is capable of teaching me so that I can give up this cow observance, and the naked ascetic Seniya can give up that dog observance.”
> Pali: “Nāhaṁ, bhante, etaṁ rodāmi yaṁ maṁ bhagavā evamāha; api ca me idaṁ, bhante, govataṁ dīgharattaṁ samattaṁ samādinnaṁ. Evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; pahoti bhagavā tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ yathā ahaṁ cevimaṁ govataṁ pajaheyyaṁ, ayañceva acelo seniyo kukkuravatiko taṁ kukkuravataṁ pajaheyyā”ti.
[¶18] “Well then, Puṇṇa, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, puṇṇa, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶19] “Yes, sir,” he replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶20] “Puṇṇa, I declare these four kinds of deeds, having realized them with my own insight. What four?
> Pali: “Cattārimāni, puṇṇa, kammāni mayā sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditāni. Katamāni cattāri?
[¶21] There are dark deeds with dark results;
> Pali: Atthi, puṇṇa, kammaṁ kaṇhaṁ kaṇhavipākaṁ;
[¶22] bright deeds with bright results;
> Pali: atthi, puṇṇa, kammaṁ sukkaṁ sukkavipākaṁ;
[¶23] dark and bright deeds with dark and bright results; and
> Pali: atthi, puṇṇa, kammaṁ kaṇhasukkaṁ kaṇhasukkavipākaṁ;
[¶24] neither dark nor bright deeds with neither dark nor bright results, which lead to the ending of deeds.
> Pali: atthi, puṇṇa, kammaṁ akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṁ, kammakkhayāya saṁvattati.
[¶25] And what are dark deeds with dark results? It’s when someone makes hurtful choices by way of body, speech, and mind. Having made these choices, they’re reborn in a hurtful world, where hurtful contacts strike them. Touched by hurtful contacts, they experience hurtful feelings that are absolutely painful—like the beings in hell. This is how a being is born from a being. For your deeds determine your rebirth, and when you’re reborn contacts strike you. This is why I say that sentient beings are heirs to their deeds. These are called dark deeds with dark results.
> Pali: Katamañca, puṇṇa, kammaṁ kaṇhaṁ kaṇhavipākaṁ? Idha, puṇṇa, ekacco sabyābajjhaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti, sabyābajjhaṁ vacīsaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti, sabyābajjhaṁ manosaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti. So sabyābajjhaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā, sabyābajjhaṁ vacīsaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā, sabyābajjhaṁ manosaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā, sabyābajjhaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Tamenaṁ sabyābajjhaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ samānaṁ sabyābajjhā phassā phusanti. So sabyābajjhehi phassehi phuṭṭho samāno sabyābajjhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti ekantadukkhaṁ, seyyathāpi sattā nerayikā. Iti kho, puṇṇa, bhūtā bhūtassa upapatti hoti; yaṁ karoti tena upapajjati, upapannamenaṁ phassā phusanti. Evampāhaṁ, puṇṇa, ‘kammadāyādā sattā’ti vadāmi. Idaṁ vuccati, puṇṇa, kammaṁ kaṇhaṁ kaṇhavipākaṁ.
[¶26] And what are bright deeds with bright results? It’s when someone makes pleasing choices by way of body, speech, and mind. Having made these choices, they are reborn in a pleasing world, where pleasing contacts strike them. Touched by pleasing contacts, they experience pleasing feelings of absolute happiness—like the gods of universal beauty. This is how a being is born from a being. For your deeds determine your rebirth, and when you’re reborn contacts strike you. This is why I say that sentient beings are heirs to their deeds. These are called bright deeds with bright results.
> Pali: Katamañca, puṇṇa, kammaṁ sukkaṁ sukkavipākaṁ? Idha, puṇṇa, ekacco abyābajjhaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti, abyābajjhaṁ vacīsaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti, abyābajjhaṁ manosaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti. So abyābajjhaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā, abyābajjhaṁ vacīsaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā, abyābajjhaṁ manosaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā abyābajjhaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Tamenaṁ abyābajjhaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ samānaṁ abyābajjhā phassā phusanti. So abyābajjhehi phassehi phuṭṭho samāno abyābajjhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti ekantasukhaṁ, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Iti kho, puṇṇa, bhūtā bhūtassa upapatti hoti; yaṁ karoti tena upapajjati, upapannamenaṁ phassā phusanti. Evampāhaṁ, puṇṇa, ‘kammadāyādā sattā’ti vadāmi. Idaṁ vuccati, puṇṇa, kammaṁ sukkaṁ sukkavipākaṁ.
[¶27] And what are dark and bright deeds with dark and bright results? It’s when someone makes both hurtful and pleasing choices by way of body, speech, and mind. Having made these choices, they are reborn in a world that is both hurtful and pleasing, where hurtful and pleasing contacts strike them. Touched by both hurtful and pleasing contacts, they experience both hurtful and pleasing feelings that are a mixture of pleasure and pain—like humans, some gods, and some beings in the underworld. This is how a being is born from a being. For what you do brings about your rebirth, and when you’re reborn contacts strike you. This is why I say that sentient beings are heirs to their deeds. These are called dark and bright deeds with dark and bright results.
> Pali: Katamañca, puṇṇa, kammaṁ kaṇhasukkaṁ kaṇhasukkavipākaṁ? Idha, puṇṇa, ekacco sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi kāyasaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti, sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi vacīsaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti, sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi manosaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharoti. So sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi kāyasaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā, sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi vacīsaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā, sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi manosaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkharitvā sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi lokaṁ upapajjati. Tamenaṁ sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi lokaṁ upapannaṁ samānaṁ sabyābajjhāpi abyābajjhāpi phassā phusanti. So sabyābajjhehipi abyābajjhehipi phassehi phuṭṭho samāno sabyābajjhampi abyābajjhampi vedanaṁ vedeti vokiṇṇasukhadukkhaṁ, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Iti kho, puṇṇa, bhūtā bhūtassa upapatti hoti; yaṁ karoti tena upapajjati. Upapannamenaṁ phassā phusanti. Evampāhaṁ, puṇṇa, ‘kammadāyādā sattā’ti vadāmi. Idaṁ vuccati, puṇṇa, kammaṁ kaṇhasukkaṁ kaṇhasukkavipākaṁ.
[¶28] And what are neither dark nor bright deeds with neither dark nor bright results, which lead to the ending of deeds? It’s the intention to give up dark deeds with dark results, bright deeds with bright results, and both dark and bright deeds with both dark and bright results. These are called neither dark nor bright deeds with neither dark nor bright results, which lead to the ending of deeds.
> Pali: Katamañca, puṇṇa, kammaṁ akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṁ, kammakkhayāya saṁvattati? Tatra, puṇṇa, yamidaṁ kammaṁ kaṇhaṁ kaṇhavipākaṁ tassa pahānāya yā cetanā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ sukkaṁ sukkavipākaṁ tassa pahānāya yā cetanā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ kaṇhasukkaṁ kaṇhasukkavipākaṁ tassa pahānāya yā cetanā— idaṁ vuccati, puṇṇa, kammaṁ akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṁ, kammakkhayāya saṁvattatīti.
[¶29] These are the four kinds of deeds that I declare, having realized them with my own insight.”
> Pali: Imāni kho, puṇṇa, cattāri kammāni mayā sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditānī”ti.
[¶30] When he had spoken, Puṇṇa the Koliyan said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! … From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, puṇṇo koliyaputto govatiko bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶31] And Seniya the naked ascetic said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! … I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. Sir, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence?”
> Pali: Acelo pana seniyo kukkuravatiko bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante …pe… pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶32] “Seniya, if someone formerly ordained in another sect wishes to take the going forth, the ordination in this teaching and training, they must spend four months on probation. When four months have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, they’ll give the going forth, the ordination into monkhood. However, I recognize individual differences in this matter.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, seniya, aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṁ so cattāro māse parivasati. Catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti, upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya. Api ca mettha puggalavemattatā viditā”ti.
[¶33] “Sir, if four months probation are required in such a case, I’ll spend four years on probation. When four years have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, let them give me the going forth, the ordination into monkhood.”
> Pali: “Sace, bhante, aññatitthiyapubbā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhantā pabbajjaṁ ākaṅkhantā upasampadaṁ te cattāro māse parivasanti catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya, ahaṁ cattāri vassāni parivasissāmi catunnaṁ vassānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājentu, upasampādentu bhikkhubhāvāyā”ti.
[¶34] And the naked ascetic Seniya received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence. Not long after his ordination, Venerable Seniya, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Alattha kho acelo seniyo kukkuravatiko bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ. Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā seniyo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, Tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶35] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Seniya became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā seniyo arahataṁ ahosīti.
[¶36] > Pali: Kukkuravatikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 62. MN 58 · With Prince Abhaya
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/62/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/62/#p-N
[¶0] MN 58 · With Prince Abhaya
> Pali: MN 58 · Abhayarājakumārasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Then Prince Abhaya went up to the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Jain Ñātika said to him, “Come, prince, refute the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine. Then you will get a good reputation: ‘Prince Abhaya refuted the doctrine of the ascetic Gotama, so mighty and powerful!’”
> Pali: Atha kho abhayo rājakumāro yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho abhayaṁ rājakumāraṁ nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto etadavoca: “ehi tvaṁ, rājakumāra, samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropehi. Evaṁ te kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchissati: ‘abhayena rājakumārena samaṇassa gotamassa evaṁ mahiddhikassa evaṁ mahānubhāvassa vādo āropito’”ti.
[¶3] “But sir, how am I to do this?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ panāhaṁ, bhante, samaṇassa gotamassa evaṁ mahiddhikassa evaṁ mahānubhāvassa vādaṁ āropessāmī”ti?
[¶4] “Here, prince, go to the ascetic Gotama and say to him: ‘Sir, may the Realized One utter speech that is disliked by others?’ When he’s asked this, if he answers: ‘He may, prince,’ say this to him, ‘So what then, sir, is the difference between you and an ordinary person? For even an ordinary person may utter speech that is disliked by others.’ But if he answers, ‘He may not, prince,’ say this to him: ‘So why then, sir, did you declare of Devadatta: “Devadatta is going to a place of loss, to hell, there to remain for an eon, irredeemable”? Devadatta was angry and upset with what you said.’
> Pali: “Ehi tvaṁ, rājakumāra, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ vadehi: ‘bhāseyya nu kho, bhante, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā’ti? Sace te samaṇo gotamo evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaroti: ‘bhāseyya, rājakumāra, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā’ti, tamenaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘atha kiñcarahi te, bhante, puthujjanena nānākaraṇaṁ? Puthujjanopi hi taṁ vācaṁ bhāseyya yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā’ti. Sace pana te samaṇo gotamo evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaroti: ‘na, rājakumāra, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ bhāseyya yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā’ti, tamenaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘atha kiñcarahi te, bhante, devadatto byākato: “āpāyiko devadatto, nerayiko devadatto, kappaṭṭho devadatto, atekiccho devadatto”ti? Tāya ca pana te vācāya devadatto kupito ahosi anattamano’ti.
[¶5] When you put this dilemma to him, the Buddha won’t be able to either spit it out or swallow it down. He’ll be like a man with an iron cross stuck in his throat, unable to either spit it out or swallow it down.”
> Pali: Imaṁ kho te, rājakumāra, samaṇo gotamo ubhatokoṭikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno neva sakkhiti uggilituṁ na sakkhiti ogilituṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma purisassa ayosiṅghāṭakaṁ kaṇṭhe vilaggaṁ, so neva sakkuṇeyya uggilituṁ na sakkuṇeyya ogilituṁ; evameva kho te, rājakumāra, samaṇo gotamo imaṁ ubhatokoṭikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno neva sakkhiti uggilituṁ na sakkhiti ogilitun”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, sir,” replied Abhaya. He rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Jain Ñātika, keeping him on his right. Then he went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho abhayo rājakumāro nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶7] Then he looked up at the sun and thought, “It’s too late to refute the Buddha’s doctrine today. I shall refute his doctrine in my own home tomorrow.” He said to the Buddha, “Sir, would the Buddha, together with three other monks, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnassa kho abhayassa rājakumārassa sūriyaṁ ulloketvā etadahosi: “akālo kho ajja bhagavato vādaṁ āropetuṁ. Sve dānāhaṁ sake nivesane bhagavato vādaṁ āropessāmī”ti bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya attacatuttho bhattan”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶8] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Abhaya rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho abhayo rājakumāro bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶9] Then when the night had passed, the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to Abhaya’s home, and sat down on the seat spread out. Then Abhaya served and satisfied the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tassā rattiyā accayena pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena abhayassa rājakumārassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho abhayo rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.
[¶10] When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Abhaya took a low seat, sat to one side, and said to him, “Sir, may the Realized One utter speech that is disliked by others?”
> Pali: Atha kho abhayo rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho abhayo rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “bhāseyya nu kho, bhante, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā”ti?
[¶11] “This matter is not categorical, prince.”
> Pali: “Na khvettha, rājakumāra, ekaṁsenā”ti.
[¶12] “Then the Jains have lost in this, sir.”
> Pali: “Ettha, bhante, anassuṁ nigaṇṭhā”ti.
[¶13] “But prince, why do you say that the Jains have lost in this?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, rājakumāra, evaṁ vadesi: ‘ettha, bhante, anassuṁ nigaṇṭhā’”ti?
[¶14] Then Abhaya told the Buddha all that had happened.
> Pali: “Idhāhaṁ, bhante, yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho maṁ, bhante, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto etadavoca: ‘ehi tvaṁ, rājakumāra, samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṁ āropehi. Evaṁ te kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchissati— abhayena rājakumārena samaṇassa gotamassa evaṁ mahiddhikassa evaṁ mahānubhāvassa vādo āropito’ti. Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathā kathaṁ panāhaṁ, bhante, samaṇassa gotamassa evaṁ mahiddhikassa evaṁ mahānubhāvassa vādaṁ āropessāmī’ti? ‘Ehi tvaṁ, rājakumāra, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ vadehi: “bhāseyya nu kho, bhante, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā”ti? Sace te samaṇo gotamo evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaroti: “bhāseyya, rājakumāra, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā”ti, tamenaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: “atha kiñcarahi te, bhante, puthujjanena nānākaraṇaṁ? Puthujjanopi hi taṁ vācaṁ bhāseyya yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā”ti. Sace pana te samaṇo gotamo evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaroti: “na, rājakumāra, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ bhāseyya yā sā vācā paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā”ti, tamenaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi— atha kiñcarahi te, bhante, devadatto byākato: “āpāyiko devadatto, nerayiko devadatto, kappaṭṭho devadatto, atekiccho devadatto”ti? Tāya ca pana te vācāya devadatto kupito ahosi anattamano’ti. Imaṁ kho te, rājakumāra, samaṇo gotamo ubhatokoṭikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno neva sakkhiti uggilituṁ na sakkhiti ogilituṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma purisassa ayosiṅghāṭakaṁ kaṇṭhe vilaggaṁ, so neva sakkuṇeyya uggilituṁ na sakkuṇeyya ogilituṁ; evameva kho te, rājakumāra, samaṇo gotamo imaṁ ubhatokoṭikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno neva sakkhiti uggilituṁ na sakkhiti ogilitun”ti.
[¶15] Now at that time a little baby boy was sitting in Prince Abhaya’s lap. Then the Buddha said to Abhaya, “What do you think, prince? If—because of your negligence or his nursemaid’s negligence—your boy were to put a stick or stone in his mouth, what would you do to him?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena daharo kumāro mando uttānaseyyako abhayassa rājakumārassa aṅke nisinno hoti. Atha kho bhagavā abhayaṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavoca: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, sacāyaṁ kumāro tuyhaṁ vā pamādamanvāya dhātiyā vā pamādamanvāya kaṭṭhaṁ vā kaṭhalaṁ vā mukhe āhareyya, kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶16] “I’d try to take it out, sir. If that didn’t work, I’d cradle his head with my left hand and take it out using a hooked finger of my right hand, even if it drew blood. Why is that? Because I have sympathy for the boy, sir.”
> Pali: “Āhareyyassāhaṁ, bhante. Sace, bhante, na sakkuṇeyyaṁ ādikeneva āhattuṁ, vāmena hatthena sīsaṁ pariggahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena vaṅkaṅguliṁ karitvā salohitampi āhareyyaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Atthi me, bhante, kumāre anukampā”ti.
[¶17] “In the same way, prince, the Realized One does not utter speech that he knows to be untrue, false, and pointless, and which is disliked by others. The Realized One does not utter speech that he knows to be true and correct, but which is harmful and disliked by others. The Realized One knows the right time to speak so as to explain what he knows to be true, correct, and beneficial, but which is disliked by others. The Realized One does not utter speech that he knows to be untrue, false, and pointless, but which is liked by others. The Realized One does not utter speech that he knows to be true and correct, but which is harmful, even if it is liked by others. The Realized One knows the right time to speak so as to explain what he knows to be true, correct, and beneficial, and which is liked by others. Why is that? Because the Realized One has sympathy for sentient beings.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājakumāra, yaṁ tathāgato vācaṁ jānāti abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ sā ca paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā, na taṁ tathāgato vācaṁ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṁ jānāti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ sā ca paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṁ na bhāsati. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṁ jānāti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ sā ca paresaṁ appiyā amanāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāya. Yaṁ tathāgato vācaṁ jānāti abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ sā ca paresaṁ piyā manāpā, na taṁ tathāgato vācaṁ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṁ jānāti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ sā ca paresaṁ piyā manāpā tampi tathāgato vācaṁ na bhāsati. Yañca tathāgato vācaṁ jānāti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ sā ca paresaṁ piyā manāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Atthi, rājakumāra, tathāgatassa sattesu anukampā”ti.
[¶18] “Sir, there are astute aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics who come to see you with a question already planned. Do you think beforehand that if they ask you like this, you’ll answer like that, or does the answer just strike you on the spot?”
> Pali: “Yeme, bhante, khattiyapaṇḍitāpi brāhmaṇapaṇḍitāpi gahapatipaṇḍitāpi samaṇapaṇḍitāpi pañhaṁ abhisaṅkharitvā tathāgataṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchanti, pubbeva nu kho, etaṁ, bhante, bhagavato cetaso parivitakkitaṁ hoti ‘ye maṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ pucchissanti tesāhaṁ evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissāmī’ti, udāhu ṭhānasovetaṁ tathāgataṁ paṭibhātī”ti?
[¶19] “Well then, prince, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, prince? Are you skilled in the various parts of a chariot?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājakumāra, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi, yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, kusalo tvaṁ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgānan”ti?
[¶20] “I am, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante, kusalo ahaṁ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgānan”ti.
[¶21] “What do you think, prince? When they come to you and ask: ‘What’s the name of this chariot part?’ Do you think beforehand that if they ask you like this, you’ll answer like that, or does the answer appear to you on the spot?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, ye taṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘kiṁ nāmidaṁ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgan’ti? Pubbeva nu kho te etaṁ cetaso parivitakkitaṁ assa ‘ye maṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ pucchissanti tesāhaṁ evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissāmī’ti, udāhu ṭhānasovetaṁ paṭibhāseyyā”ti?
[¶22] “Sir, I’m well-known as a charioteer skilled in a chariot’s parts. All the major and minor parts are well-known to me. The answer just appears to me on the spot.”
> Pali: “Ahañhi, bhante, rathiko saññāto kusalo rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgānaṁ. Sabbāni me rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgāni suviditāni. Ṭhānasovetaṁ maṁ paṭibhāseyyā”ti.
[¶23] “In the same way, when astute aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics come to see me with a question already planned, the answer just strikes me on the spot. Why is that? Because the Realized One has clearly penetrated the principle of the teachings, so that the answer just strikes him on the spot.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājakumāra, ye te khattiyapaṇḍitāpi brāhmaṇapaṇḍitāpi gahapatipaṇḍitāpi samaṇapaṇḍitāpi pañhaṁ abhisaṅkharitvā tathāgataṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchanti, ṭhānasovetaṁ tathāgataṁ paṭibhāti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Sā hi, rājakumāra, tathāgatassa dhammadhātu suppaṭividdhā yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā ṭhānasovetaṁ tathāgataṁ paṭibhātī”ti.
[¶24] When he had spoken, Prince Abhaya said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! … From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, abhayo rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante …pe… ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶25] > Pali: Abhayarājakumārasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 63. MN 59 · The Many Kinds of Feeling
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/63/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/63/#p-N
[¶0] MN 59 · The Many Kinds of Feeling
> Pali: MN 59 · Bahuvedanīyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the chamberlain Pañcakaṅga went up to Venerable Udāyī, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, how many feelings has the Buddha spoken of?”
> Pali: Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati yenāyasmā udāyī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ udāyiṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ udāyiṁ etadavoca: “kati nu kho, bhante udāyi, vedanā vuttā bhagavatā”ti?
[¶3] “Chamberlain, the Buddha has spoken of three feelings: pleasant, painful, and neutral. The Buddha has spoken of these three feelings.”
> Pali: “Tisso kho, thapati, vedanā vuttā bhagavatā. Sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā— imā kho, thapati, tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, Pañcakaṅga said to Udāyī, “Sir, Udāyī, the Buddha hasn’t spoken of three feelings. He’s spoken of two feelings: pleasant and painful. The Buddha said that neutral feeling is included as a peaceful and subtle kind of pleasure.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ udāyiṁ etadavoca: “na kho, bhante udāyi, tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā; dve vedanā vuttā bhagavatā— sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā. Yāyaṁ, bhante, adukkhamasukhā vedanā santasmiṁ esā paṇīte sukhe vuttā bhagavatā”ti.
[¶5] For a second time, Udāyī said to Pañcakaṅga, “The Buddha hasn’t spoken of two feelings, he’s spoken of three.” For a second time, Pañcakaṅga said to Udāyī, “The Buddha hasn’t spoken of three feelings, he’s spoken of two.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho āyasmā udāyī pañcakaṅgaṁ thapatiṁ etadavoca: “na kho, gahapati, dve vedanā vuttā bhagavatā; tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā. Sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā— imā kho, thapati, tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā”ti. Dutiyampi kho pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ udāyiṁ etadavoca: “na kho, bhante udāyi, tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā; dve vedanā vuttā bhagavatā— sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā. Yāyaṁ, bhante, adukkhamasukhā vedanā santasmiṁ esā paṇīte sukhe vuttā bhagavatā”ti.
[¶6] And for a third time, Udāyī said to Pañcakaṅga, “The Buddha hasn’t spoken of two feelings, he’s spoken of three.”
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho āyasmā udāyī pañcakaṅgaṁ thapatiṁ etadavoca: “na kho, thapati, dve vedanā vuttā bhagavatā; tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā. Sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā— imā kho, thapati, tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā”ti.
[¶7] And for a third time, Pañcakaṅga said to Udāyī, “The Buddha hasn’t spoken of three feelings, he’s spoken of two.”
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ udāyiṁ etadavoca: “na kho, bhante udāyi, tisso vedanā vuttā bhagavatā, dve vedanā vuttā bhagavatā— sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā. Yāyaṁ, bhante, adukkhamasukhā vedanā santasmiṁ esā paṇīte sukhe vuttā bhagavatā”ti.
[¶8] But neither was able to persuade the other.
> Pali: Neva kho sakkhi āyasmā udāyī pañcakaṅgaṁ thapatiṁ saññāpetuṁ, na panāsakkhi pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ udāyiṁ saññāpetuṁ.
[¶9] Venerable Ānanda heard this discussion between Udāyī and Pañcakaṅga. Then he went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and informed the Buddha of all they had discussed. When he had spoken, the Buddha said to him,
> Pali: Assosi kho āyasmā ānando āyasmato udāyissa pañcakaṅgena thapatinā saddhiṁ imaṁ kathāsallāpaṁ. Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando yāvatako ahosi āyasmato udāyissa pañcakaṅgena thapatinā saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ bhagavato ārocesi. Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca:
[¶10] “Ānanda, the explanation by the mendicant Udāyī, which the chamberlain Pañcakaṅga didn’t agree with, was quite correct. But the explanation by Pañcakaṅga, which Udāyī didn’t agree with, was also quite correct. In one explanation I’ve spoken of two feelings. In another explanation I’ve spoken of three feelings, or five, six, eighteen, thirty-six, or a hundred and eight feelings. I’ve explained the teaching in all these different ways. This being so, you can expect that those who don’t concede, approve, or agree with what has been well spoken will fight, quarrel, and dispute, continually wounding each other with barbed words. I’ve explained the teaching in all these different ways. This being so, you can expect that those who do concede, approve, or agree with what has been well spoken will live in harmony, appreciating each other, without quarreling, blending like milk and water, and regarding each other with kindly eyes.
> Pali: “santaññeva kho, ānanda, pariyāyaṁ pañcakaṅgo thapati udāyissa nābbhanumodi, santaññeva ca pana pariyāyaṁ udāyī pañcakaṅgassa thapatissa nābbhanumodi. Dvepānanda, vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena, tissopi vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena, pañcapi vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena, chapi vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena, aṭṭhārasapi vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena, chattiṁsapi vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena, aṭṭhasatampi vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena. Evaṁ pariyāyadesito kho, ānanda, mayā dhammo. Evaṁ pariyāyadesite kho, ānanda, mayā dhamme ye aññamaññassa subhāsitaṁ sulapitaṁ na samanujānissanti na samanumaññissanti na samanumodissanti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharissanti. Evaṁ pariyāyadesito kho, ānanda, mayā dhammo. Evaṁ pariyāyadesite kho, ānanda, mayā dhamme ye aññamaññassa subhāsitaṁ sulapitaṁ samanujānissanti samanumaññissanti samanumodissanti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharissanti.
[¶11] There are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation. The pleasure and happiness that arise from these five kinds of sensual stimulation is called sensual pleasure.
> Pali: Pañca kho ime, ānanda, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā …pe… jivhāviññeyyā rasā …pe… kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, ānanda, pañca kāmaguṇā. Yaṁ kho, ānanda, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati kāmasukhaṁ.
[¶12] There are those who might say that this is the highest pleasure and happiness that sentient beings experience. But I don’t grant them that. Why is that? Because there is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is a pleasure that is finer than that.
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘etaparamaṁ sattā sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti, idamassa nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Atthānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶13] There are those who would say that this is the highest pleasure and happiness that sentient beings experience. But I don’t grant them that. Why is that? Because there is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. …
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘etaparamaṁ sattā sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti, idamassa nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Atthānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶14] There is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ …
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya … pe…. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶15] There is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. …
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya … pe…. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶16] There is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when a mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. …
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya … pe…. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā, paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā, nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶17] There is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. …
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya … pe…. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶18] There is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. …
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya … pe…. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶19] There is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, enters and remains in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is a pleasure that is finer than that.
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya … pe…. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶20] There are those who would say that this is the highest pleasure and happiness that sentient beings experience. But I don’t grant them that. Why is that? Because there is another pleasure that is finer than that. And what is that pleasure? It’s when a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, enters and remains in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is a pleasure that is finer than that.
> Pali: Yo kho, ānanda, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘etaparamaṁ sattā sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti, idamassa nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Atthānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca. Katamañcānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca? Idhānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etamhā sukhā aññaṁ sukhaṁ abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶21] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘The ascetic Gotama spoke of the cessation of perception and feeling, and he includes it in happiness. What’s up with that?’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, ānanda, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samaṇo gotamo āha; tañca sukhasmiṁ paññapeti. Tayidaṁ kiṁsu, tayidaṁ kathaṁsū’ti?
[¶22] When wanderers of other religions say this, you should say to them, ‘Reverends, when the Buddha describes what’s included in happiness, he’s not just referring to pleasant feeling. The Realized One describes pleasure as included in happiness wherever it is found, and in whatever context.’”
> Pali: Evaṁvādino, ānanda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘na kho, āvuso, bhagavā sukhaṁyeva vedanaṁ sandhāya sukhasmiṁ paññapeti; api ca, āvuso, yattha yattha sukhaṁ upalabbhati yahiṁ yahiṁ taṁ taṁ tathāgato sukhasmiṁ paññapetī’”ti.
[¶23] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶24] > Pali: Bahuvedanīyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 64. MN 60 · A Sure Bet · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/64/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/64/#p-N
[¶0] MN 60 · A Sure Bet
> Pali: MN 60 · Apaṇṇakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Kosalan brahmins named Sālā.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena sālā nāma kosalānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari.
[¶2] The brahmins and householders of Sālā heard:
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā:
[¶3] “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—wandering in the land of the Kosalans has arrived at Sālā, together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: “samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ sālaṁ anuppatto. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶4] Then the brahmins and householders of Sālā went up to the Buddha. Before sitting down to one side, some bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent. The Buddha said to them:
> Pali: Atha kho sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu; sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce bhagavato santike nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho sāleyyake brāhmaṇagahapatike bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “So, householders, is there any teacher you’re happy with, in whom you have acquired grounded faith?”
> Pali: “atthi pana vo, gahapatayo, koci manāpo satthā yasmiṁ vo ākāravatī saddhā paṭiladdhā”ti?
[¶6] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “Natthi kho no, bhante, koci manāpo satthā yasmiṁ no ākāravatī saddhā paṭiladdhā”ti.
[¶7] “Since you haven’t found a teacher you’re happy with, you should undertake and implement this sure bet teaching. For when the sure bet teaching is undertaken, it will be for your lasting welfare and happiness. And what is the sure bet teaching?
> Pali: “Manāpaṁ vo, gahapatayo, satthāraṁ alabhantehi ayaṁ apaṇṇako dhammo samādāya vattitabbo. Apaṇṇako hi, gahapatayo, dhammo samatto samādinno, so vo bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Katamo ca, gahapatayo, apaṇṇako dhammo?
[¶8] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’
> Pali: Santi, gahapatayo, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ; natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko; natthi mātā, natthi pitā; natthi sattā opapātikā; natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammā paṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti.
[¶9] And there are some ascetics and brahmins whose doctrine directly contradicts this. They say: ‘There is meaning in giving, sacrifice, and offerings. There are fruits and results of good and bad deeds. There is an afterlife. There are such things as mother and father, and beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there are ascetics and brahmins who are rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describe the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’
> Pali: Tesaṁyeva kho, gahapatayo, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ujuvipaccanīkavādā. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘atthi dinnaṁ, atthi yiṭṭhaṁ, atthi hutaṁ; atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko; atthi ayaṁ loko, atthi paro loko; atthi mātā, atthi pitā; atthi sattā opapātikā; atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammā paṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti.
[¶10] What do you think, householders? Don’t these doctrines directly contradict each other?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, gahapatayo: ‘nanume samaṇabrāhmaṇā aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā’”ti?
[¶11] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶12] “Since this is so, consider those ascetics and brahmins whose view is that there’s no meaning in giving, etc. You can expect that they will shun good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and undertake and implement bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind. Why is that? Because those ascetics and brahmins don’t see that unskillful qualities are full of drawbacks, sordidness, and corruption, or that skillful qualities have the benefit and cleansing power of renunciation.
> Pali: “Tatra, gahapatayo, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ …pe… ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—yamidaṁ kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ—ime tayo kusale dhamme abhinivajjetvā yamidaṁ kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ—ime tayo akusale dhamme samādāya vattissanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Na hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā passanti akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ vodānapakkhaṁ.
[¶13] Moreover, since there actually is another world, their view that there is no other world is wrong view. Since there actually is another world, their thought that there is no other world is wrong purpose. Since there actually is another world, their speech that there is no other world is wrong speech. Since there actually is another world, in saying that there is no other world they contradict those perfected ones who know the other world. Since there actually is another world, in persuading another that there is no other world they are persuading them to accept an untrue teaching. And on account of that they glorify themselves and put others down. So they give up their former ethical conduct and are established in unethical conduct. And that is how these many bad, unskillful qualities come to be with wrong view as condition—wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, contradicting the noble ones, persuading others to accept untrue teachings, and glorifying oneself and putting others down.
> Pali: Santaṁyeva pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘natthi paro loko’ tissa diṭṭhi hoti; sāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘natthi paro loko’ti saṅkappeti; svāssa hoti micchāsaṅkappo. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘natthi paro loko’ti vācaṁ bhāsati; sāssa hoti micchāvācā. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘natthi paro loko’ti āha; ye te arahanto paralokaviduno tesamayaṁ paccanīkaṁ karoti. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘natthi paro loko’ti paraṁ saññāpeti; sāssa hoti asaddhammasaññatti. Tāya ca pana asaddhammasaññattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Iti pubbeva kho panassa susīlyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, dussīlyaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ— ayañca micchādiṭṭhi micchāsaṅkappo micchāvācā ariyānaṁ paccanīkatā asaddhammasaññatti attukkaṁsanā paravambhanā. Evamassime aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti micchādiṭṭhipaccayā.
[¶14] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘If there is no other world, when this individual person’s body breaks up they will keep themselves safe. And if there is another world, when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. But let us grant that those who say that there is no other world are correct. Regardless, that individual is still criticized by sensible people in this very life as being an immoral individual of wrong view, a nihilist.’ But if there really is another world, they hold a losing hand on both counts. For they are criticized by sensible people in this very life, and when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. They have wrongly undertaken this sure bet teaching in such a way that it encompasses the positive outcomes of one side only, leaving out the skillful premise.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sace kho natthi paro loko evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā sotthimattānaṁ karissati; sace kho atthi paro loko, evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissati. Kāmaṁ kho pana māhu paro loko, hotu nesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ; atha ca panāyaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ gārayho—dussīlo purisapuggalo micchādiṭṭhi natthikavādo’ti. Sace kho attheva paro loko, evaṁ imassa bhoto purisapuggalassa ubhayattha kaliggaho— yañca diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ gārayho, yañca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissati. Evamassāyaṁ apaṇṇako dhammo dussamatto samādinno, ekaṁsaṁ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, riñcati kusalaṁ ṭhānaṁ.
[¶15] Since this is so, consider those ascetics and brahmins whose view is that there is meaning in giving, etc. You can expect that they will shun bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and undertake and implement good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind. Why is that? Because those ascetics and brahmins see that unskillful qualities are full of drawbacks, sordidness, and corruption, and that skillful qualities have the benefit and cleansing power of renunciation.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘atthi dinnaṁ …pe… ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—yamidaṁ kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ—ime tayo akusale dhamme abhinivajjetvā yamidaṁ kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ—ime tayo kusale dhamme samādāya vattissanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Passanti hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ vodānapakkhaṁ.
[¶16] Moreover, since there actually is another world, their view that there is another world is right view. Since there actually is another world, their thought that there is another world is right purpose. Since there actually is another world, their speech that there is another world is right speech. Since there actually is another world, in saying that there is another world they don’t contradict those perfected ones who know the other world. Since there actually is another world, in persuading another that there is another world they are persuading them to accept a true teaching. And on account of that they don’t glorify themselves or put others down. So they give up their former unethical conduct and are established in ethical conduct. And that is how these many skillful qualities come to be with right view as condition—right view, right purpose, right speech, not contradicting the noble ones, persuading others to accept true teachings, and not glorifying oneself or putting others down.
> Pali: Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘atthi paro loko’ tissa diṭṭhi hoti; sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘atthi paro loko’ti saṅkappeti; svāssa hoti sammāsaṅkappo. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘atthi paro loko’ti vācaṁ bhāsati; sāssa hoti sammāvācā. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘atthi paro loko’ti āha; ye te arahanto paralokaviduno tesamayaṁ na paccanīkaṁ karoti. Santaṁyeva kho pana paraṁ lokaṁ ‘atthi paro loko’ti paraṁ saññāpeti; sāssa hoti saddhammasaññatti. Tāya ca pana saddhammasaññattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Iti pubbeva kho panassa dussīlyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, susīlyaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ— ayañca sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā ariyānaṁ apaccanīkatā saddhammasaññatti anattukkaṁsanā aparavambhanā. Evamassime aneke kusalā dhammā sambhavanti sammādiṭṭhipaccayā.
[¶17] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘If there is another world, when this individual’s body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. But let us grant that those who say that there is no other world are correct. Regardless, that individual is still praised by sensible people in this very life as being a moral individual of right view, who affirms a positive teaching.’ So if there really is another world, they hold a winning hand on both counts. For they are praised by sensible people in this very life, and when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. They have rightly undertaken this sure bet teaching in such a way that it encompasses the positive outcomes of both sides, leaving out the unskillful premise.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sace kho atthi paro loko, evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissati. Kāmaṁ kho pana māhu paro loko, hotu nesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ; atha ca panāyaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ pāsaṁso—sīlavā purisapuggalo sammādiṭṭhi atthikavādo’ti. Sace kho attheva paro loko, evaṁ imassa bhoto purisapuggalassa ubhayattha kaṭaggaho— yañca diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ pāsaṁso, yañca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissati. Evamassāyaṁ apaṇṇako dhammo susamatto samādinno ubhayaṁsaṁ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, riñcati akusalaṁ ṭhānaṁ.
[¶18] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘The one who acts does nothing wrong when they punish, mutilate, torture, aggrieve, oppress, intimidate, or when they encourage others to do the same. They do nothing wrong when they kill, steal, break into houses, plunder wealth, steal from isolated buildings, commit highway robbery, commit adultery, and lie. If you were to reduce all the living creatures of this earth to one heap and mass of flesh with a razor-edged chakram, no evil comes of that, and no outcome of evil. If you were to go along the south bank of the Ganges killing, mutilating, and torturing, and encouraging others to do the same, no evil comes of that, and no outcome of evil. If you were to go along the north bank of the Ganges giving and sacrificing and encouraging others to do the same, no merit comes of that, and no outcome of merit. In giving, self-control, restraint, and truthfulness there is no merit or outcome of merit.’
> Pali: Santi, gahapatayo, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘karoto kārayato, chindato chedāpayato, pacato pācāpayato, socayato socāpayato, kilamato kilamāpayato, phandato phandāpayato, pāṇamatipātayato, adinnaṁ ādiyato, sandhiṁ chindato, nillopaṁ harato, ekāgārikaṁ karoto, paripanthe tiṭṭhato, paradāraṁ gacchato, musā bhaṇato; karoto na karīyati pāpaṁ. Khurapariyantena cepi cakkena yo imissā pathaviyā pāṇe ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kareyya, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Dakkhiṇañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya hananto ghātento, chindanto chedāpento, pacanto pācento; natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Uttarañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya dadanto dāpento, yajanto yajāpento; natthi tatonidānaṁ puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo. Dānena damena saṁyamena saccavajjena natthi puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo’ti.
[¶19] And there are some ascetics and brahmins whose doctrine directly contradicts this. They say: ‘The one who acts does a bad deed when they punish, mutilate, torture, aggrieve, oppress, intimidate, or when they encourage others to do the same. They do a bad deed when they kill, steal, break into houses, plunder wealth, steal from isolated buildings, commit highway robbery, commit adultery, and lie. If you were to reduce all the living creatures of this earth to one heap and mass of flesh with a razor-edged chakram, evil comes of that, and an outcome of evil. If you were to go along the south bank of the Ganges killing, mutilating, and torturing, and encouraging others to do the same, evil comes of that, and an outcome of evil. If you were to go along the north bank of the Ganges giving and sacrificing and encouraging others to do the same, merit comes of that, and an outcome of merit. In giving, self-control, restraint, and truthfulness there is merit and outcome of merit.’
> Pali: Tesaṁyeva kho, gahapatayo, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ujuvipaccanīkavādā te evamāhaṁsu: ‘karoto kārayato, chindato chedāpayato, pacato pācāpayato, socayato socāpayato, kilamato kilamāpayato, phandato phandāpayato, pāṇamatipātayato, adinnaṁ ādiyato, sandhiṁ chindato, nillopaṁ harato, ekāgārikaṁ karoto, paripanthe tiṭṭhato, paradāraṁ gacchato, musā bhaṇato; karoto karīyati pāpaṁ. Khurapariyantena cepi cakkena yo imissā pathaviyā pāṇe ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kareyya, atthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, atthi pāpassa āgamo. Dakkhiṇañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya hananto ghātento, chindanto chedāpento, pacanto pācento; atthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, atthi pāpassa āgamo. Uttarañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya dadanto dāpento, yajanto yajāpento; atthi tatonidānaṁ puññaṁ, atthi puññassa āgamo. Dānena damena saṁyamena saccavajjena atthi puññaṁ, atthi puññassa āgamo’ti.
[¶20] What do you think, householders? Don’t these doctrines directly contradict each other?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, gahapatayo, nanume samaṇabrāhmaṇā aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā”ti?
[¶21] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶22] “Since this is so, consider those ascetics and brahmins whose view is that the one who acts does nothing wrong when they punish, etc. You can expect that they will shun good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and undertake and implement bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind. Why is that? Because those ascetics and brahmins don’t see that unskillful qualities are full of drawbacks, sordidness, and corruption, or that skillful qualities have the benefit and cleansing power of renunciation.
> Pali: “Tatra, gahapatayo, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘karoto kārayato, chindato chedāpayato, pacato pācāpayato, socayato socāpayato, kilamato kilamāpayato, phandato phandāpayato, pāṇamatipātayato, adinnaṁ ādiyato, sandhiṁ chindato, nillopaṁ harato, ekāgārikaṁ karoto, paripanthe tiṭṭhato, paradāraṁ gacchato, musā bhaṇato; karoto na karīyati pāpaṁ. Khurapariyantena cepi cakkena yo imissā pathaviyā pāṇe ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kareyya, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Dakkhiṇañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya hananto ghātento …pe… dānena damena saṁyamena saccavajjena natthi puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo’ti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—yamidaṁ kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ—ime tayo kusale dhamme abhinivajjetvā yamidaṁ kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ—ime tayo akusale dhamme samādāya vattissanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Na hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā passanti akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ vodānapakkhaṁ.
[¶23] Moreover, since action actually does have an effect, their view that action is ineffective is wrong view. Since action actually does have an effect, their thought that action is ineffective is wrong purpose. Since action actually does have an effect, their speech that action is ineffective is wrong speech. Since action actually does have an effect, in saying that action is ineffective they contradict those perfected ones who teach that action is effective. Since action actually does have an effect, in persuading another that action is ineffective they are persuading them to accept an untrue teaching. And on account of that they glorify themselves and put others down. So they give up their former ethical conduct and are established in unethical conduct. And that is how these many bad, unskillful qualities come to be with wrong view as condition—wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, contradicting the noble ones, persuading others to accept untrue teachings, and glorifying oneself and putting others down.
> Pali: Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘natthi kiriyā’ tissa diṭṭhi hoti; sāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘natthi kiriyā’ti saṅkappeti; svāssa hoti micchāsaṅkappo. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘natthi kiriyā’ti vācaṁ bhāsati; sāssa hoti micchāvācā. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘natthi kiriyā’ti āha, ye te arahanto kiriyavādā tesamayaṁ paccanīkaṁ karoti. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘natthi kiriyā’ti paraṁ saññāpeti; sāssa hoti asaddhammasaññatti. Tāya ca pana asaddhammasaññattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Iti pubbeva kho panassa susīlyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, dussīlyaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ— ayañca micchādiṭṭhi micchāsaṅkappo micchāvācā ariyānaṁ paccanīkatā asaddhammasaññatti attukkaṁsanā paravambhanā. Evamassime aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti micchādiṭṭhipaccayā.
[¶24] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘If there is no effective action, when this individual’s body breaks up they will keep themselves safe. And if there is effective action, when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. But let us grant that those who say that there is no effective action are correct. Regardless, that individual is still criticized by sensible people in this very life as being an immoral individual of wrong view, one who denies the efficacy of action.’ But if there really is effective action, they hold a losing hand on both counts. For they are criticized by sensible people in this very life, and when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. They have wrongly undertaken this sure bet teaching in such a way that it encompasses the positive outcomes of one side only, leaving out the skillful premise.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sace kho natthi kiriyā, evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā sotthimattānaṁ karissati; sace kho atthi kiriyā evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissati. Kāmaṁ kho pana māhu kiriyā, hotu nesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ; atha ca panāyaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ gārayho—dussīlo purisapuggalo micchādiṭṭhi akiriyavādo’ti. Sace kho attheva kiriyā, evaṁ imassa bhoto purisapuggalassa ubhayattha kaliggaho— yañca diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ gārayho, yañca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissati. Evamassāyaṁ apaṇṇako dhammo dussamatto samādinno, ekaṁsaṁ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, riñcati kusalaṁ ṭhānaṁ.
[¶25] Since this is so, consider those ascetics and brahmins whose view is that the one who acts does a bad deed when they punish, etc. You can expect that they will shun bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and undertake and implement good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind. Why is that? Because those ascetics and brahmins see that unskillful qualities are full of drawbacks, sordidness, and corruption, and that skillful qualities have the benefit and cleansing power of renunciation.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘karoto kārayato, chindato chedāpayato, pacato pācāpayato, socayato socāpayato, kilamato kilamāpayato, phandato phandāpayato, pāṇamatipātayato, adinnaṁ ādiyato, sandhiṁ chindato, nillopaṁ harato, ekāgārikaṁ karoto, paripanthe tiṭṭhato, paradāraṁ gacchato, musā bhaṇato; karoto karīyati pāpaṁ. Khurapariyantena cepi cakkena yo imissā pathaviyā pāṇe ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kareyya, atthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, atthi pāpassa āgamo. Dakkhiṇañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya hananto ghātento, chindanto chedāpento, pacanto pācento, atthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, atthi pāpassa āgamo. Uttarañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya dadanto dāpento, yajanto yajāpento, atthi tatonidānaṁ puññaṁ, atthi puññassa āgamo. Dānena damena saṁyamena saccavajjena atthi puññaṁ, atthi puññassa āgamo’ti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ yamidaṁ kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ—ime tayo akusale dhamme abhinivajjetvā yamidaṁ kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ—ime tayo kusale dhamme samādāya vattissanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Passanti hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ vodānapakkhaṁ.
[¶26] Moreover, since action actually does have an effect, their view that action is effective is right view. Since action actually does have an effect, their thought that action is effective is right purpose. Since action actually does have an effect, their speech that action is effective is right speech. Since action actually does have an effect, in saying that action is effective they don’t contradict those perfected ones who teach that action is effective. Since action actually does have an effect, in persuading another that action is effective they are persuading them to accept a true teaching. And on account of that they don’t glorify themselves or put others down. So they give up their former unethical conduct and are established in ethical conduct. And that is how these many skillful qualities come to be with right view as condition—right view, right purpose, right speech, not contradicting the noble ones, persuading others to accept true teachings, and not glorifying oneself or putting others down.
> Pali: Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘atthi kiriyā’ tissa diṭṭhi hoti; sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘atthi kiriyā’ti saṅkappeti; svāssa hoti sammāsaṅkappo. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘atthi kiriyā’ti vācaṁ bhāsati; sāssa hoti sammāvācā. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘atthi kiriyā’ti āha; ye te arahanto kiriyavādā tesamayaṁ na paccanīkaṁ karoti. Santaṁyeva kho pana kiriyaṁ ‘atthi kiriyā’ti paraṁ saññāpeti; sāssa hoti saddhammasaññatti. Tāya ca pana saddhammasaññattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Iti pubbeva kho panassa dussīlyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, susīlyaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ— ayañca sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā ariyānaṁ apaccanīkatā saddhammasaññatti anattukkaṁsanā aparavambhanā. Evamassime aneke kusalā dhammā sambhavanti sammādiṭṭhipaccayā.
[¶27] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘If there is effective action, when this individual’s body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. But let us grant that those who say that there is no effective action are correct. Regardless, that individual is still praised by sensible people in this very life as being a moral individual of right view, who affirms the efficacy of action.’ So if there really is effective action, they hold a winning hand on both counts. For they are praised by sensible people in this very life, and when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. They have rightly undertaken this sure bet teaching in such a way that it encompasses the positive outcomes of both sides, leaving out the unskillful premise.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sace kho atthi kiriyā, evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissati. Kāmaṁ kho pana māhu kiriyā, hotu nesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ; atha ca panāyaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ pāsaṁso—sīlavā purisapuggalo sammādiṭṭhi kiriyavādo’ti. Sace kho attheva kiriyā, evaṁ imassa bhoto purisapuggalassa ubhayattha kaṭaggaho— yañca diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ pāsaṁso, yañca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissati. Evamassāyaṁ apaṇṇako dhammo susamatto samādinno, ubhayaṁsaṁ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, riñcati akusalaṁ ṭhānaṁ.
## 65. MN 60 · A Sure Bet · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/65/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/65/#p-N
[¶0] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘There is no cause or reason for the corruption of sentient beings. Sentient beings are corrupted without cause or reason. There’s no cause or reason for the purification of sentient beings. Sentient beings are purified without cause or reason. There is no power, no energy, no human strength or vigor. All sentient beings, all living creatures, all beings, all souls lack control, power, and energy. Molded by destiny, circumstance, and nature, they experience pleasure and pain in the six classes of rebirth.’
> Pali: Santi, gahapatayo, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya; ahetū appaccayā sattā saṅkilissanti. Natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā; ahetū appaccayā sattā visujjhanti. Natthi balaṁ, natthi vīriyaṁ, natthi purisathāmo, natthi purisaparakkamo; sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti.
[¶1] And there are some ascetics and brahmins whose doctrine directly contradicts this. They say: ‘There is a cause and reason for the corruption of sentient beings. Sentient beings are corrupted with cause and reason. There is a cause and reason for the purification of sentient beings. Sentient beings are purified with cause and reason. There is power, energy, human strength and vigor. It is not the case that all sentient beings, all living creatures, all beings, all souls lack control, power, and energy, or that, molded by destiny, circumstance, and nature, they experience pleasure and pain in the six classes of rebirth.’
> Pali: Tesaṁyeva kho, gahapatayo, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ujuvipaccanīkavādā. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘atthi hetu, atthi paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya; sahetū sappaccayā sattā saṅkilissanti. Atthi hetu, atthi paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā; sahetū sappaccayā sattā visujjhanti. Atthi balaṁ, atthi vīriyaṁ, atthi purisathāmo, atthi purisaparakkamo; na sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti.
[¶2] What do you think, householders? Don’t these doctrines directly contradict each other?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, gahapatayo, nanume samaṇabrāhmaṇā aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā”ti?
[¶3] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶4] “Since this is so, consider those ascetics and brahmins whose view is that there’s no cause or reason for the corruption of sentient beings, etc. You can expect that they will shun good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and undertake and implement bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind. Why is that? Because those ascetics and brahmins don’t see that unskillful qualities are full of drawbacks, sordidness, and corruption, or that skillful qualities have the benefit and cleansing power of renunciation.
> Pali: “Tatra, gahapatayo, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya; ahetū appaccayā sattā saṅkilissanti. Natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā; ahetū appaccayā sattā visujjhanti. Natthi balaṁ, natthi vīriyaṁ, natthi purisathāmo, natthi purisaparakkamo; sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—yamidaṁ kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ—ime tayo kusale dhamme abhinivajjetvā yamidaṁ kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ—ime tayo akusale dhamme samādāya vattissanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Na hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā passanti akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ vodānapakkhaṁ.
[¶5] Moreover, since there actually is causality, their view that there is no causality is wrong view. Since there actually is causality, their thought that there is no causality is wrong purpose. Since there actually is causality, their speech that there is no causality is wrong speech. Since there actually is causality, in saying that there is no causality they contradict those perfected ones who teach that there is causality. Since there actually is causality, in persuading another that there is no causality they are persuading them to accept an untrue teaching. And on account of that they glorify themselves and put others down. So they give up their former ethical conduct and are established in unethical conduct. And that is how these many bad, unskillful qualities come to be with wrong view as condition—wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, contradicting the noble ones, persuading others to accept untrue teachings, and glorifying oneself and putting others down.
> Pali: Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘natthi hetū’ tissa diṭṭhi hoti; sāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘natthi hetū’ti saṅkappeti; svāssa hoti micchāsaṅkappo. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘natthi hetū’ti vācaṁ bhāsati; sāssa hoti micchāvācā. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘natthi hetū’ti āha; ye te arahanto hetuvādā tesamayaṁ paccanīkaṁ karoti. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘natthi hetū’ti paraṁ saññāpeti; sāssa hoti asaddhammasaññatti. Tāya ca pana asaddhammasaññattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Iti pubbeva kho panassa susīlyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, dussīlyaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ— ayañca micchādiṭṭhi micchāsaṅkappo micchāvācā ariyānaṁ paccanīkatā asaddhammasaññatti attānukkaṁsanā paravambhanā. Evamassime aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti micchādiṭṭhipaccayā.
[¶6] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘If there is no causality, when this individual’s body breaks up they will keep themselves safe. And if there is causality, when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. But let us grant that those who say that there is no causality are correct. Regardless, that individual is still criticized by sensible people in this very life as being an immoral individual of wrong view, one who denies causality.’ But if there really is causality, they hold a losing hand on both counts. For they are criticized by sensible people in this very life, and when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. They have wrongly undertaken this sure bet teaching in such a way that it encompasses the positive outcomes of one side only, leaving out the skillful premise.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sace kho natthi hetu, evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sotthimattānaṁ karissati; sace kho atthi hetu, evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissati. Kāmaṁ kho pana māhu hetu, hotu nesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ; atha ca panāyaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ gārayho—dussīlo purisapuggalo micchādiṭṭhi ahetukavādo’ti. Sace kho attheva hetu, evaṁ imassa bhoto purisapuggalassa ubhayattha kaliggaho— yañca diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ gārayho, yañca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissati. Evamassāyaṁ apaṇṇako dhammo dussamatto samādinno, ekaṁsaṁ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, riñcati kusalaṁ ṭhānaṁ.
[¶7] Since this is so, consider those ascetics and brahmins whose view is that there is a cause and reason for the corruption of sentient beings, etc. You can expect that they will shun bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and undertake and implement good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind. Why is that? Because those ascetics and brahmins see that unskillful qualities are full of drawbacks, sordidness, and corruption, and that skillful qualities have the benefit and cleansing power of renunciation.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘atthi hetu, atthi paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya; sahetū sappaccayā sattā saṅkilissanti. Atthi hetu, atthi paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā; sahetū sappaccayā sattā visujjhanti. Atthi balaṁ, atthi vīriyaṁ, atthi purisathāmo, atthi purisaparakkamo; na sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti tesametaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ—yamidaṁ kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ—ime tayo akusale dhamme abhinivajjetvā yamidaṁ kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ—ime tayo kusale dhamme samādāya vattissanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Passanti hi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ vodānapakkhaṁ.
[¶8] Moreover, since there actually is causality, their view that there is causality is right view. Since there actually is causality, their thought that there is causality is right purpose. Since there actually is causality, their speech that there is causality is right speech. Since there actually is causality, in saying that there is causality they don’t contradict those perfected ones who teach that there is causality. Since there actually is causality, in persuading another that there is causality they are persuading them to accept a true teaching. And on account of that they don’t glorify themselves or put others down. So they give up their former unethical conduct and are established in ethical conduct. And that is how these many skillful qualities come to be with right view as condition—right view, right purpose, right speech, not contradicting the noble ones, persuading others to accept true teachings, and not glorifying oneself or putting others down.
> Pali: Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘atthi hetū’ tissa diṭṭhi hoti; sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘atthi hetū’ti saṅkappeti; svāssa hoti sammāsaṅkappo. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘atthi hetū’ti vācaṁ bhāsati; sāssa hoti sammāvācā. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘atthi hetū’ti āha, ye te arahanto hetuvādā tesamayaṁ na paccanīkaṁ karoti. Santaṁyeva kho pana hetuṁ ‘atthi hetū’ti paraṁ saññāpeti; sāssa hoti saddhammasaññatti. Tāya ca pana saddhammasaññattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Iti pubbeva kho panassa dussīlyaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, susīlyaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ— ayañca sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā ariyānaṁ apaccanīkatā saddhammasaññatti anattukkaṁsanā aparavambhanā. Evamassime aneke kusalā dhammā sambhavanti sammādiṭṭhipaccayā.
[¶9] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘If there is causality, when this individual’s body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. But let us grant that those who say that there is no causality are correct. Regardless, that individual is still praised by sensible people in this very life as being a moral individual of right view, who affirms causality.’ So if there really is causality, they hold a winning hand on both counts. For they are praised by sensible people in this very life, and when their body breaks up, after death, they will be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. They have rightly undertaken this sure bet teaching in such a way that it encompasses the positive outcomes of both sides, leaving out the unskillful premise.
> Pali: Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sace kho atthi hetu, evamayaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissati. Kāmaṁ kho pana māhu hetu, hotu nesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ; atha ca panāyaṁ bhavaṁ purisapuggalo diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ pāsaṁso—sīlavā purisapuggalo sammādiṭṭhi hetuvādo’ti. Sace kho atthi hetu, evaṁ imassa bhoto purisapuggalassa ubhayattha kaṭaggaho— yañca diṭṭheva dhamme viññūnaṁ pāsaṁso, yañca kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissati. Evamassāyaṁ apaṇṇako dhammo susamatto samādinno, ubhayaṁsaṁ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, riñcati akusalaṁ ṭhānaṁ.
[¶10] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘There are no totally formless states of meditation.’
> Pali: Santi, gahapatayo, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi sabbaso āruppā’ti.
[¶11] And there are some ascetics and brahmins whose doctrine directly contradicts this. They say: ‘There are totally formless states of meditation.’
> Pali: Tesaṁyeva kho, gahapatayo, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ujuvipaccanīkavādā. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘atthi sabbaso āruppā’ti.
[¶12] What do you think, householders? Don’t these doctrines directly contradict each other?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, gahapatayo, nanume samaṇabrāhmaṇā aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā”ti?
[¶13] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶14] “A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘Some ascetics and brahmins say that there are no totally formless meditations, but I have not seen that. Some ascetics and brahmins say that there are totally formless meditations, but I have not known that. Without knowing or seeing, it would not be appropriate for me to take one side and declare, ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ If those ascetics and brahmins who say that there are no totally formless meditations are correct, it is possible that it’s a sure bet I will be reborn among the gods who are formed and made of mind. If those ascetics and brahmins who say that there are totally formless meditations are correct, it is possible that it’s a sure bet I will be reborn among the gods who are formless and made of perception. Now, owing to form, bad things are seen: taking up the rod and the sword, quarrels, arguments, and disputes, accusations, backbiting, and lies. But those things don’t exist where it is totally formless.’ Reflecting like this, they simply practice for disillusionment, dispassion, and cessation regarding forms.
> Pali: “Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati— ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi sabbaso āruppā’ti, idaṁ me adiṭṭhaṁ; yepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘atthi sabbaso āruppā’ti, idaṁ me aviditaṁ. Ahañceva kho pana ajānanto apassanto ekaṁsena ādāya vohareyyaṁ— idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññanti, na metaṁ assa patirūpaṁ. Ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi sabbaso āruppā’ti, sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati— ye te devā rūpino manomayā, apaṇṇakaṁ me tatrūpapatti bhavissati. Ye pana te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘atthi sabbaso āruppā’ti, sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati— ye te devā arūpino saññāmayā, apaṇṇakaṁ me tatrūpapatti bhavissati. Dissanti kho pana rūpādhikaraṇaṁ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādā. ‘Natthi kho panetaṁ sabbaso arūpe’ti. So iti paṭisaṅkhāya rūpānaṁyeva nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti.
[¶15] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘There is no such thing as the total cessation of continued existence.’
> Pali: Santi, gahapatayo, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti.
[¶16] And there are some ascetics and brahmins whose doctrine directly contradicts this. They say: ‘There is such a thing as the total cessation of continued existence.’
> Pali: Tesaṁyeva kho, gahapatayo, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ujuvipaccanīkavādā. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘atthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti.
[¶17] What do you think, householders? Don’t these doctrines directly contradict each other?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, gahapatayo, nanume samaṇabrāhmaṇā aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā”ti?
[¶18] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶19] “A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘Some ascetics and brahmins say that there is no such thing as the total cessation of continued existence, but I have not seen that. Some ascetics and brahmins say that there is such a thing as the total cessation of continued existence, but I have not known that. Without knowing or seeing, it would not be appropriate for me to take one side and declare, ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ If those ascetics and brahmins who say that there is no such thing as the total cessation of continued existence are correct, it is possible that it’s a sure bet I will be reborn among the gods who are formless and made of perception. If those ascetics and brahmins who say that there is such a thing as the total cessation of continued existence are correct, it is possible that I will be fully extinguished in this very life. The view of those ascetics and brahmins who say that there is no such thing as the total cessation of continued existence is close to greed, yoking, relishing, attachment, and grasping. The view of those ascetics and brahmins who say that there is such a thing as the total cessation of continued existence is close to non-greed, non-yoking, non-relishing, non-attachment, and non-grasping.’ Reflecting like this, they simply practice for disillusionment, dispassion, and cessation regarding future lives.
> Pali: “Tatra, gahapatayo, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati— ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti, idaṁ me adiṭṭhaṁ; yepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘atthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti, idaṁ me aviditaṁ. Ahañceva kho pana ajānanto apassanto ekaṁsena ādāya vohareyyaṁ— idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññanti, na metaṁ assa patirūpaṁ. Ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti, sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati— ye te devā arūpino saññāmayā apaṇṇakaṁ me tatrūpapatti bhavissati. Ye pana te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘atthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti, sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati— yaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme parinibbāyissāmi. Ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘natthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti, tesamayaṁ diṭṭhi sārāgāya santike, saṁyogāya santike, abhinandanāya santike, ajjhosānāya santike, upādānāya santike. Ye pana te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘atthi sabbaso bhavanirodho’ti, tesamayaṁ diṭṭhi asārāgāya santike, asaṁyogāya santike, anabhinandanāya santike, anajjhosānāya santike, anupādānāya santiketi. So iti paṭisaṅkhāya bhavānaṁyeva nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti.
[¶20] Householders, these four individuals are found in the world. What four?
> Pali: Cattārome, gahapatayo, puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ. Katame cattāro?
[¶21] One individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves.
> Pali: Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco puggalo attantapo hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶22] One individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others.
> Pali: Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco puggalo parantapo hoti paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶23] One individual mortifies themselves and others, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others.
> Pali: Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco puggalo attantapo ca hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶24] One individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others. They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.
> Pali: Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco puggalo nevattantapo hoti nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto; so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati.
[¶25] And what individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves? It’s when a person goes naked, ignoring conventions. … And so they live committed to practicing these various ways of mortifying and tormenting the body. This is called an individual who mortifies themselves, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves.
> Pali: Katamo ca, gahapatayo, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco puggalo acelako hoti muttācāro hatthāpalekhano …pe… iti evarūpaṁ anekavihitaṁ kāyassa ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, gahapatayo, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶26] And what individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others? It’s when an individual is a butcher of sheep, pigs, poultry, or deer, a hunter or fisher, a bandit, an executioner, a butcher of cattle, a jailer, or has some other cruel livelihood. This is called an individual who mortifies others, being committed to the practice of mortifying others.
> Pali: Katamo ca, gahapatayo, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco puggalo orabbhiko hoti sūkariko …pe… ye vā panaññepi keci kurūrakammantā. Ayaṁ vuccati, gahapatayo, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶27] And what individual mortifies themselves and others, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others? It’s when an individual is an anointed aristocratic king or a well-to-do brahmin. He has a new ceremonial hall built to the east of the citadel. He shaves off his hair and beard, dresses in a rough antelope hide, and smears his body with ghee and oil. … His bondservants, servants, and workers do their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping, with tearful faces. This is called an individual who mortifies themselves and others, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others.
> Pali: Katamo ca, gahapatayo, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, gahapatayo, ekacco puggalo rājā vā hoti khattiyo muddhāvasitto …pe… tepi daṇḍatajjitā bhayatajjitā assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni karonti. Ayaṁ vuccati, gahapatayo, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶28] And what individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others, living without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine?
> Pali: Katamo ca, gahapatayo, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto; so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati?
[¶29] It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in some good family. … They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption.
> Pali: Idha, gahapatayo, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho … pe… so ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶30] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. … They recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶31] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. … They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶32] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’. Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti …pe… ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶33] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶34] This is called an individual who neither mortifies themselves or others, being committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others. They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ vuccati, gahapatayo, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto; so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharatī”ti.
[¶35] When he had spoken, the brahmins and householders of Sālā said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. We go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember us as lay followers who have gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sāleyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsake no bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gate”ti.
[¶36] > Pali: Apaṇṇakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶37] > Pali: Gahapativaggo niṭṭhito paṭhamo.
[¶38] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶39] > Pali: Kandaranāgarasekhavato ca,
Potaliyo puna jīvakabhacco;
Upālidamatho kukkuraabhayo,
Bahuvedanīyāpaṇṇakato dasamo.
## 66. MN 61 · Advice to Rāhula at Ambalaṭṭhika
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/66/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/66/#p-N
[¶0] MN 61 · Advice to Rāhula at Ambalaṭṭhika
> Pali: MN 61 · Ambalaṭṭhikarāhulovādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Now at that time Venerable Rāhula was staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat and went to Ambalaṭṭhika to see Venerable Rāhula. Rāhula saw the Buddha coming off in the distance. He spread out a seat and placed water for washing the feet. The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, and washed his feet. Rāhula bowed to the Buddha and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā rāhulo ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ viharati. Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena ambalaṭṭhikā yenāyasmā rāhulo tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho āyasmā rāhulo bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna āsanaṁ paññāpesi, udakañca pādānaṁ. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Nisajja pāde pakkhālesi. Āyasmāpi kho rāhulo bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶3] Then the Buddha, leaving a little water in the pot, addressed Rāhula, “Rāhula, do you see this little bit of water left in the pot?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā parittaṁ udakāvasesaṁ udakādhāne ṭhapetvā āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ āmantesi: “passasi no tvaṁ, rāhula, imaṁ parittaṁ udakāvasesaṁ udakādhāne ṭhapitan”ti?
[¶4] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶5] “That’s how little of the ascetic’s nature is left in those who are not ashamed to tell a deliberate lie.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ parittakaṁ kho, rāhula, tesaṁ sāmaññaṁ yesaṁ natthi sampajānamusāvāde lajjā”ti.
[¶6] Then the Buddha, discarding what little water was left in the pot, said to Rāhula, “Do you see this little bit of water that was discarded?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā parittaṁ udakāvasesaṁ chaḍḍetvā āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ āmantesi: “passasi no tvaṁ, rāhula, parittaṁ udakāvasesaṁ chaḍḍitan”ti?
[¶7] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶8] “That’s how the ascetic’s nature is discarded in those who are not ashamed to tell a deliberate lie.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ kho, rāhula, tesaṁ sāmaññaṁ yesaṁ natthi sampajānamusāvāde lajjā”ti.
[¶9] Then the Buddha, turning the pot upside down, said to Rāhula, “Do you see how this pot is turned upside down?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā taṁ udakādhānaṁ nikkujjitvā āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ āmantesi: “passasi no tvaṁ, rāhula, imaṁ udakādhānaṁ nikkujjitan”ti?
[¶10] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶11] “That’s how the ascetic’s nature is turned upside down in those who are not ashamed to tell a deliberate lie.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ nikkujjitaṁ kho, rāhula, tesaṁ sāmaññaṁ yesaṁ natthi sampajānamusāvāde lajjā”ti.
[¶12] Then the Buddha, turning the pot right side up, said to Rāhula, “Do you see how this pot is vacant and hollow?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā taṁ udakādhānaṁ ukkujjitvā āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ āmantesi: “passasi no tvaṁ, rāhula, imaṁ udakādhānaṁ rittaṁ tucchan”ti?
[¶13] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶14] “That’s how vacant and hollow the ascetic’s nature is in those who are not ashamed to tell a deliberate lie.
> Pali: “Evaṁ rittaṁ tucchaṁ kho, rāhula, tesaṁ sāmaññaṁ yesaṁ natthi sampajānamusāvāde lajjāti.
[¶15] Suppose there was a royal bull elephant with tusks like draft-poles, able to draw a heavy load, pedigree and battle-hardened. In battle it uses its fore-feet and hind-feet, its fore-quarters and hind-quarters, its head, ears, tusks, and tail, but it still protects its trunk. So its rider thinks: ‘This royal bull elephant still protects its trunk. It has not yet given its life.’ But when that royal bull elephant … in battle uses its fore-feet and hind-feet, its fore-quarters and hind-quarters, its head, ears, tusks, and tail, and its trunk, its rider thinks: ‘This royal bull elephant … in battle uses its fore-feet and hind-feet, its fore-quarters and hind-quarters, its head, ears, tusks, and tail, and its trunk. It has given its life. Now there is nothing that royal bull elephant would not do.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, rāhula, rañño nāgo īsādanto urūḷhavā abhijāto saṅgāmāvacaro saṅgāmagato purimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti, pacchimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti, purimenapi kāyena kammaṁ karoti, pacchimenapi kāyena kammaṁ karoti, sīsenapi kammaṁ karoti, kaṇṇehipi kammaṁ karoti, dantehipi kammaṁ karoti, naṅguṭṭhenapi kammaṁ karoti; rakkhateva soṇḍaṁ. Tattha hatthārohassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho rañño nāgo īsādanto urūḷhavā abhijāto saṅgāmāvacaro saṅgāmagato purimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti, pacchimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti …pe… naṅguṭṭhenapi kammaṁ karoti; rakkhateva soṇḍaṁ. Apariccattaṁ kho rañño nāgassa jīvitan’ti. Yato kho, rāhula, rañño nāgo īsādanto urūḷhavā abhijāto saṅgāmāvacaro saṅgāmagato purimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti, pacchimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti …pe… naṅguṭṭhenapi kammaṁ karoti, soṇḍāyapi kammaṁ karoti, tattha hatthārohassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho rañño nāgo īsādanto urūḷhavā abhijāto saṅgāmāvacaro saṅgāmagato purimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti, pacchimehipi pādehi kammaṁ karoti, purimenapi kāyena kammaṁ karoti, pacchimenapi kāyena kammaṁ karoti, sīsenapi kammaṁ karoti, kaṇṇehipi kammaṁ karoti, dantehipi kammaṁ karoti, naṅguṭṭhenapi kammaṁ karoti, soṇḍāyapi kammaṁ karoti. Pariccattaṁ kho rañño nāgassa jīvitaṁ. Natthi dāni kiñci rañño nāgassa akaraṇīyan’ti.
[¶16] In the same way, when someone is not ashamed to tell a deliberate lie, there is no bad deed they would not do, I say. So you should train like this: ‘I will not tell a lie, even for a joke.’
> Pali: Evameva kho, rāhula, yassa kassaci sampajānamusāvāde natthi lajjā, nāhaṁ tassa kiñci pāpaṁ akaraṇīyanti vadāmi. Tasmātiha te, rāhula, ‘hassāpi na musā bhaṇissāmī’ti— evañhi te, rāhula, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶17] What do you think, Rāhula? What is the purpose of a mirror?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rāhula, kimatthiyo ādāso”ti?
[¶18] “It’s for checking your reflection, sir.”
> Pali: “Paccavekkhaṇattho, bhante”ti.
[¶19] “In the same way, deeds of body, speech, and mind should be done only after repeated checking.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rāhula, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā kāyena kammaṁ kattabbaṁ, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā vācāya kammaṁ kattabbaṁ, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā manasā kammaṁ kattabbaṁ.
[¶20] When you want to act with the body, you should check on that same deed: ‘Does this act with the body that I want to do lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both? Is it unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result?’ If, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act with the body that I want to do leads to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result.’ To the best of your ability, Rāhula, you should not do such a deed. But if, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act with the body that I want to do doesn’t lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s skillful, with happiness as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should do such a deed.
> Pali: Yadeva tvaṁ, rāhula, kāyena kammaṁ kattukāmo ahosi, tadeva te kāyakammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— akusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— akusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, kāyena kammaṁ sasakkaṁ na karaṇīyaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— kusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, kāyena kammaṁ karaṇīyaṁ.
[¶21] While you are acting with the body, you should check on that same act: ‘Does this act with the body that I am doing lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both? Is it unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result?’ If, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act with the body that I am doing leads to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should desist from such a deed. But if, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act with the body that I am doing doesn’t lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s skillful, with happiness as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should continue doing such a deed.
> Pali: Karontenapi te, rāhula, kāyena kammaṁ tadeva te kāyakammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, paṭisaṁhareyyāsi tvaṁ, rāhula, evarūpaṁ kāyakammaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— kusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, anupadajjeyyāsi tvaṁ, rāhula, evarūpaṁ kāyakammaṁ.
[¶22] After you have acted with the body, you should check on that same act: ‘Does this act with the body that I have done lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both? Is it unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result?’ If, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act with the body that I have done leads to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should confess, reveal, and clarify such a deed to the Teacher or a sensible spiritual companion. And having revealed it you should restrain yourself in future. But if, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act with the body that I have done doesn’t lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s skillful, with happiness as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should live in rapture and joy because of this, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Katvāpi te, rāhula, kāyena kammaṁ tadeva te kāyakammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace kho tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ akāsiṁ, idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, kāyakammaṁ satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu desetabbaṁ, vivaritabbaṁ, uttānīkātabbaṁ; desetvā vivaritvā uttānīkatvā āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjitabbaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me kāyakammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— kusalaṁ idaṁ kāyakammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, teneva tvaṁ, rāhula, pītipāmojjena vihareyyāsi ahorattānusikkhī kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶23] When you want to act with speech, you should check on that same deed: ‘Does this act of speech that I want to do lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both? …’ …
> Pali: “Yadeva tvaṁ, rāhula, vācāya kammaṁ kattukāmo ahosi, tadeva te vacīkammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— akusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— akusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, vācāya kammaṁ sasakkaṁ na karaṇīyaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— kusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, vācāya kammaṁ karaṇīyaṁ.
[¶24] > Pali: Karontenapi te, rāhula, vācāya kammaṁ tadeva te vacīkammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, paṭisaṁhareyyāsi tvaṁ, rāhula, evarūpaṁ vacīkammaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— kusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, anupadajjeyyāsi tvaṁ, rāhula, evarūpaṁ vacīkammaṁ.
[¶25] If, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act of speech that I have done leads to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should confess, reveal, and clarify such a deed to the Teacher or a sensible spiritual companion. And having revealed it you should restrain yourself in future. But if, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act of speech that I have done doesn’t lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s skillful, with happiness as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should live in rapture and joy because of this, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Katvāpi te, rāhula, vācāya kammaṁ tadeva te vacīkammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace kho tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, vacīkammaṁ satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu desetabbaṁ, vivaritabbaṁ, uttānīkattabbaṁ; desetvā vivaritvā uttānīkatvā āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjitabbaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ vācāya kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me vacīkammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— kusalaṁ idaṁ vacīkammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, teneva tvaṁ, rāhula, pītipāmojjena vihareyyāsi ahorattānusikkhī kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶26] When you want to act with the mind, you should check on that same deed: ‘Does this act of mind that I want to do lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both? …’ …
> Pali: Yadeva tvaṁ, rāhula, manasā kammaṁ kattukāmo ahosi, tadeva te manokammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me manokammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— akusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me manokammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— akusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, manasā kammaṁ sasakkaṁ na karaṇīyaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ kattukāmo idaṁ me manokammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvatteyya— kusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ te, rāhula, manasā kammaṁ karaṇīyaṁ.
[¶27] > Pali: Karontenapi te, rāhula, manasā kammaṁ tadeva te manokammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me manokammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me manokammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, paṭisaṁhareyyāsi tvaṁ, rāhula, evarūpaṁ manokammaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ karomi idaṁ me manokammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— kusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, anupadajjeyyāsi tvaṁ, rāhula, evarūpaṁ manokammaṁ.
[¶28] If, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act of mind that I have done leads to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s unskillful, with suffering as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should be horrified, repelled, and disgusted by that deed. And being repelled, you should restrain yourself in future. But if, while checking in this way, you know: ‘This act with the mind that I have done doesn’t lead to hurting myself, hurting others, or hurting both. It’s skillful, with happiness as its outcome and result.’ Then, Rāhula, you should live in rapture and joy because of this, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Katvāpi te, rāhula, manasā kammaṁ tadeva te manokammaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘yannu kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me manokammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti? Sace kho tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me manokammaṁ attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— akusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ dukkhudrayaṁ dukkhavipākan’ti, evarūpaṁ pana te, rāhula, manokammaṁ aṭṭīyitabbaṁ harāyitabbaṁ jigucchitabbaṁ; aṭṭīyitvā harāyitvā jigucchitvā āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjitabbaṁ. Sace pana tvaṁ, rāhula, paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jāneyyāsi: ‘yaṁ kho ahaṁ idaṁ manasā kammaṁ akāsiṁ idaṁ me manokammaṁ nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati— kusalaṁ idaṁ manokammaṁ sukhudrayaṁ sukhavipākan’ti, teneva tvaṁ, rāhula, pītipāmojjena vihareyyāsi ahorattānusikkhī kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶29] All the ascetics and brahmins of the past, future, and present who purify their physical, verbal, and mental actions do so after repeatedly checking. So Rāhula, you should train yourself like this: ‘I will purify my physical, verbal, and mental actions after repeatedly checking.’”
> Pali: Ye hi keci, rāhula, atītamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyakammaṁ parisodhesuṁ, vacīkammaṁ parisodhesuṁ, manokammaṁ parisodhesuṁ, sabbe te evamevaṁ paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā kāyakammaṁ parisodhesuṁ, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā vacīkammaṁ parisodhesuṁ, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā manokammaṁ parisodhesuṁ. Yepi hi keci, rāhula, anāgatamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyakammaṁ parisodhessanti, vacīkammaṁ parisodhessanti, manokammaṁ parisodhessanti, sabbe te evamevaṁ paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā kāyakammaṁ parisodhessanti, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā vacīkammaṁ parisodhessanti, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā manokammaṁ parisodhessan”ti. Yepi hi keci, rāhula, etarahi samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyakammaṁ parisodhenti, vacīkammaṁ parisodhenti, manokammaṁ parisodhenti, sabbe te evamevaṁ paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā kāyakammaṁ parisodhenti, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā vacīkammaṁ parisodhenti, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā manokammaṁ parisodhenti. Tasmātiha, rāhula, ‘paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā kāyakammaṁ parisodhessāmi, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā vacīkammaṁ parisodhessāmi, paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā manokammaṁ parisodhessāmī’ti— evañhi te, rāhula, sikkhitabban”ti.
[¶30] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Rāhula approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā rāhulo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶31] > Pali: Ambalaṭṭhikarāhulovādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 67. MN 62 · The Longer Advice to Rāhula
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/67/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/67/#p-N
[¶0] MN 62 · The Longer Advice to Rāhula
> Pali: MN 62 · Mahārāhulovādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms. And Venerable Rāhula also robed up and followed behind the Buddha.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Āyasmāpi kho rāhulo pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi.
[¶3] Then the Buddha looked back at Rāhula and said, “Rāhula, you should truly see any kind of form at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all form—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā apaloketvā āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ āmantesi: “yaṁ kiñci, rāhula, rūpaṁ—atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā—sabbaṁ rūpaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabban”ti.
[¶4] “Only form, Blessed One? Only form, Holy One?”
> Pali: “Rūpameva nu kho, bhagavā, rūpameva nu kho, sugatā”ti?
[¶5] “Form, Rāhula, as well as feeling and perception and choices and consciousness.”
> Pali: “Rūpampi, rāhula, vedanāpi, rāhula, saññāpi, rāhula, saṅkhārāpi, rāhula, viññāṇampi, rāhulā”ti.
[¶6] Then Rāhula thought, “Who would go to the village for alms today after being advised directly by the Buddha?” Turning back, he sat down cross-legged at the root of a certain tree, setting his body straight, and bringing mindfulness to the present.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā rāhulo “ko najja bhagavatā sammukhā ovādena ovadito gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pavisissatī”ti tato paṭinivattitvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisīdi pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.
[¶7] Venerable Sāriputta saw him sitting there, and addressed him, “Rāhula, develop mindfulness of breathing. When mindfulness of breathing is developed and cultivated it’s very fruitful and beneficial.”
> Pali: Addasā kho āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisinnaṁ pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. Disvāna āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ āmantesi: “ānāpānassatiṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Ānāpānassati, rāhula, bhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā”ti.
[¶8] Then in the late afternoon, Rāhula came out of retreat, went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā rāhulo sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā rāhulo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶9] “Sir, how is mindfulness of breathing developed and cultivated to be very fruitful and beneficial?”
> Pali: “kathaṁ bhāvitā nu kho, bhante, ānāpānassati, kathaṁ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā”ti?
[¶10] “Rāhula, the interior earth element is anything internal, personal, that’s hard, solid, and appropriated. This includes: head hair, body hair, nails, teeth, skin, flesh, sinews, bones, bone marrow, kidneys, heart, liver, diaphragm, spleen, lungs, intestines, mesentery, undigested food, feces; or anything else internal, personal, that’s hard, solid, and appropriated. This is called the interior earth element. The interior earth element and the exterior earth element are just the earth element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the earth element, detaching the mind from the earth element.
> Pali: “Yaṁ kiñci, rāhula, ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ kakkhaḷaṁ kharigataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ kakkhaḷaṁ kharigataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, rāhula, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātu, pathavīdhāturevesā. Taṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā pathavīdhātuyā nibbindati, pathavīdhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶11] And what is the water element? The water element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior water element? Anything internal, personal, that’s water, watery, and appropriated. This includes: bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat, tears, grease, saliva, snot, synovial fluid, urine; or anything else internal, personal, that’s water, watery, and appropriated. This is called the interior water element. The interior water element and the exterior water element are just the water element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the water element, detaching the mind from the water element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, rāhula, āpodhātu? Āpodhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, rāhula, ajjhattikā āpodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ āpo āpogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttaṁ, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ āpo āpogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, rāhula, ajjhattikā āpodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā āpodhātu yā ca bāhirā āpodhātu āpodhāturevesā. Taṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā āpodhātuyā nibbindati, āpodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶12] And what is the fire element? The fire element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior fire element? Anything internal, personal, that’s fire, fiery, and appropriated. This includes: that which warms, that which ages, that which heats you up when feverish, that which properly digests food and drink; or anything else internal, personal, that’s fire, fiery, and appropriated. This is called the interior fire element. The interior fire element and the exterior fire element are just the fire element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the fire element, detaching the mind from the fire element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, rāhula, tejodhātu? Tejodhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, rāhula, ajjhattikā tejodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ tejo tejogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— yena ca santappati yena ca jīrīyati yena ca pariḍayhati yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ tejo tejogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, rāhula, ajjhattikā tejodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā tejodhātu yā ca bāhirā tejodhātu tejodhāturevesā. Taṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā tejodhātuyā nibbindati, tejodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶13] And what is the air element? The air element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior air element? Anything internal, personal, that’s air, airy, and appropriated. This includes: winds that go up or down, winds in the belly or the bowels, winds that flow through the limbs, in-breaths and out-breaths; or anything else internal, personal, that’s air, airy, and appropriated. This is called the interior air element. The interior air element and the exterior air element are just the air element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the air element, detaching the mind from the air element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, rāhula, vāyodhātu? Vāyodhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, rāhula, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ vāyo vāyogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— uddhaṅgamā vātā, adhogamā vātā, kucchisayā vātā, koṭṭhāsayā vātā, aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā, assāso passāso iti, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ vāyo vāyogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, rāhula, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā vāyodhātu yā ca bāhirā vāyodhātu vāyodhāturevesā. Taṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā vāyodhātuyā nibbindati, vāyodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶14] And what is the space element? The space element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior space element? Anything internal, personal, that’s space, spacious, and appropriated. This includes: the ear canals, nostrils, and mouth; and the space for swallowing what is eaten and drunk, the space where it stays, and the space for excreting it from the nether regions; or anything else internal, personal, that’s space, spacious, and appropriated. This is called the interior space element. The interior space element and the exterior space element are just the space element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the space element, detaching the mind from the space element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, rāhula, ākāsadhātu? Ākāsadhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, rāhula, ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ ākāsaṁ ākāsagataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— kaṇṇacchiddaṁ nāsacchiddaṁ mukhadvāraṁ, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ ajjhoharati, yattha ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ santiṭṭhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ adhobhāgaṁ nikkhamati, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ ākāsaṁ ākāsagataṁ, aghaṁ aghagataṁ, vivaraṁ vivaragataṁ, asamphuṭṭhaṁ, maṁsalohitehi upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, rāhula, ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu yā ca bāhirā ākāsadhātu ākāsadhāturevesā. Taṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā ākāsadhātuyā cittaṁ nibbindati, ākāsadhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶15] Rāhula, meditate like the earth. For when you meditate like the earth, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind. Suppose they were to toss both clean and unclean things on the earth, like feces, urine, spit, pus, and blood. The earth isn’t horrified, repelled, and disgusted because of this. In the same way, meditate like the earth. For when you meditate like the earth, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind.
> Pali: Pathavīsamaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Pathavīsamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti. Seyyathāpi, rāhula, pathaviyā sucimpi nikkhipanti, asucimpi nikkhipanti, gūthagatampi nikkhipanti, muttagatampi nikkhipanti, kheḷagatampi nikkhipanti, pubbagatampi nikkhipanti, lohitagatampi nikkhipanti, na ca tena pathavī aṭṭīyati vā harāyati vā jigucchati vā; evameva kho tvaṁ, rāhula, pathavīsamaṁ bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Pathavīsamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti.
[¶16] Meditate like water. For when you meditate like water, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind. Suppose they were to wash both clean and unclean things in the water, like feces, urine, spit, pus, and blood. The water isn’t horrified, repelled, and disgusted because of this. In the same way, meditate like water. For when you meditate like water, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind.
> Pali: Āposamaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Āposamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti. Seyyathāpi, rāhula, āpasmiṁ sucimpi dhovanti, asucimpi dhovanti, gūthagatampi dhovanti, muttagatampi dhovanti, kheḷagatampi dhovanti, pubbagatampi dhovanti, lohitagatampi dhovanti, na ca tena āpo aṭṭīyati vā harāyati vā jigucchati vā; evameva kho tvaṁ, rāhula, āposamaṁ bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Āposamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti.
[¶17] Meditate like fire. For when you meditate like fire, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind. Suppose a fire were to burn both clean and unclean things, like feces, urine, spit, pus, and blood. The fire isn’t horrified, repelled, and disgusted because of this. In the same way, meditate like fire. For when you meditate like fire, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind.
> Pali: Tejosamaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Tejosamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti. Seyyathāpi, rāhula, tejo sucimpi dahati, asucimpi dahati, gūthagatampi dahati, muttagatampi dahati, kheḷagatampi dahati, pubbagatampi dahati, lohitagatampi dahati, na ca tena tejo aṭṭīyati vā harāyati vā jigucchati vā; evameva kho tvaṁ, rāhula, tejosamaṁ bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Tejosamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti.
[¶18] Meditate like wind. For when you meditate like wind, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind. Suppose the wind were to blow on both clean and unclean things, like feces, urine, spit, pus, and blood. The wind isn’t horrified, repelled, and disgusted because of this. In the same way, meditate like the wind. For when you meditate like wind, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind.
> Pali: Vāyosamaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Vāyosamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti. Seyyathāpi, rāhula, vāyo sucimpi upavāyati, asucimpi upavāyati, gūthagatampi upavāyati, muttagatampi upavāyati, kheḷagatampi upavāyati, pubbagatampi upavāyati, lohitagatampi upavāyati, na ca tena vāyo aṭṭīyati vā harāyati vā jigucchati vā; evameva kho tvaṁ, rāhula, vāyosamaṁ bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Vāyosamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti.
[¶19] Meditate like space. For when you meditate like space, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind. Just as space is not established anywhere, in the same way, meditate like space. For when you meditate like space, pleasant and unpleasant contacts will not occupy your mind.
> Pali: Ākāsasamaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Ākāsasamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti. Seyyathāpi, rāhula, ākāso na katthaci patiṭṭhito; evameva kho tvaṁ, rāhula, ākāsasamaṁ bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Ākāsasamañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato uppannā manāpāmanāpā phassā cittaṁ na pariyādāya ṭhassanti.
[¶20] Meditate on love. For when you meditate on love any ill will will be given up.
> Pali: Mettaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Mettañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato yo byāpādo so pahīyissati.
[¶21] Meditate on compassion. For when you meditate on compassion any cruelty will be given up.
> Pali: Karuṇaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Karuṇañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato yā vihesā sā pahīyissati.
[¶22] Meditate on rejoicing. For when you meditate on rejoicing any discontent will be given up.
> Pali: Muditaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Muditañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato yā arati sā pahīyissati.
[¶23] Meditate on equanimity. For when you meditate on equanimity any aversion will be given up.
> Pali: Upekkhaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Upekkhañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato yo paṭigho so pahīyissati.
[¶24] Meditate on ugliness. For when you meditate on ugliness any lust will be given up.
> Pali: Asubhaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Asubhañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato yo rāgo so pahīyissati.
[¶25] Meditate on impermanence. For when you meditate on impermanence any conceit ‘I am’ will be given up.
> Pali: Aniccasaññaṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Aniccasaññañhi te, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvayato yo asmimāno so pahīyissati.
[¶26] Develop mindfulness of breathing. When mindfulness of breathing is developed and cultivated it’s very fruitful and beneficial. And how is mindfulness of breathing developed and cultivated to be very fruitful and beneficial?
> Pali: Ānāpānassatiṁ, rāhula, bhāvanaṁ bhāvehi. Ānāpānassati hi te, rāhula, bhāvitā bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Kathaṁ bhāvitā ca, rāhula, ānāpānassati, kathaṁ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā?
[¶27] It’s when a mendicant—gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut—sits down cross-legged, sets their body straight, and brings mindfulness to the present. Just mindful, they breathe in. Mindful, they breathe out.
> Pali: Idha, rāhula, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So satova assasati satova passasati.
[¶28] Breathing in heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing in heavily.’ Breathing out heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing out heavily.’ Breathing in lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing in lightly.’ Breathing out lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing out lightly.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in stilling the physical process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out stilling the physical process.’
> Pali: Dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Sabbakāyappaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘sabbakāyappaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶29] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing rapture.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing rapture.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing bliss.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing bliss.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the mental process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the mental process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in stilling the mental process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out stilling the mental process.’
> Pali: ‘Pītippaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘pītippaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘sukhappaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘sukhappaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ cittasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ cittasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶30] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in gladdening the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out gladdening the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in immersing the mind in samādhi.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out immersing the mind in samādhi.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in freeing the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out freeing the mind.’
> Pali: ‘Cittappaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘cittappaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘abhippamodayaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘abhippamodayaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘samādahaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘samādahaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘vimocayaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘vimocayaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶31] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing impermanence.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing impermanence.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing fading away.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing fading away.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing cessation.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing cessation.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing letting go.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing letting go.’
> Pali: ‘Aniccānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘aniccānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘virāgānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘virāgānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘nirodhānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘nirodhānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘paṭinissaggānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶32] Mindfulness of breathing, when developed and cultivated in this way, is very fruitful and beneficial. When mindfulness of breathing is developed and cultivated in this way, even as the final breaths cease they are known, not unknown.”
> Pali: Evaṁ bhāvitā kho, rāhula, ānāpānassati, evaṁ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Evaṁ bhāvitāya, rāhula, ānāpānassatiyā, evaṁ bahulīkatāya yepi te carimakā assāsā tepi viditāva nirujjhanti no aviditā”ti.
[¶33] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Rāhula approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā rāhulo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶34] > Pali: Mahārāhulovādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 68. MN 63 · The Shorter Discourse With Māluṅkyaputta
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/68/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/68/#p-N
[¶0] MN 63 · The Shorter Discourse With Māluṅkyaputta
> Pali: MN 63 · Cūḷamālukyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then as Venerable Māluṅkyaputta was in private retreat this thought came to his mind:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato mālukyaputtassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi:
[¶3] “There are several convictions that the Buddha has left undeclared; he has set them aside and turned them down. For example: the cosmos is eternal, or not eternal, or finite, or infinite; the soul and the body are one and the same, or the soul is one thing, the body another; after death, a realized one still exists, or no longer exists, or both still exists and no longer exists, or neither still exists nor no longer exists. The Buddha does not explain these points to me. I don’t endorse that, and do not accept it. I’ll go to him and ask him about this. If he gives me a straight answer on any of these points, I will lead the spiritual life under him. If he does not explain these points to me, I shall resign the training and return to a lesser life.”
> Pali: “yānimāni diṭṭhigatāni bhagavatā abyākatāni ṭhapitāni paṭikkhittāni: ‘sassato loko’tipi, ‘asassato loko’tipi, ‘antavā loko’tipi, ‘anantavā loko’tipi, ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’tipi, ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’tipi, ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’tipi, ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’tipi, ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’tipi, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’tipi— tāni me bhagavā na byākaroti. Yāni me bhagavā na byākaroti taṁ me na ruccati, taṁ me nakkhamati. Sohaṁ bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ pucchissāmi. Sace me bhagavā byākarissati: ‘sassato loko’ti vā ‘asassato loko’ti vā …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā— evāhaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi; no ce me bhagavā byākarissati: ‘sassato loko’ti vā ‘asassato loko’ti vā …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā— evāhaṁ sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattissāmī”ti.
[¶4] Then in the late afternoon, Māluṅkyaputta came out of retreat and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down to one side, and told the Buddha of his thoughts. He then continued:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mālukyaputto sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā mālukyaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶5] “If the Buddha knows that the cosmos is eternal, please tell me. If you know that the cosmos is not eternal, tell me. If you don’t know whether the cosmos is eternal or not, then it is straightforward to simply say: ‘I neither know nor see.’ If you know that the cosmos is finite, or infinite; that the soul and the body are one and the same, or is the soul one thing, the body another; that after death, a realized one still exists, or no longer exists, or both still exists and no longer exists, or neither still exists nor no longer exists, please tell me. If you don’t know any of these things, then it is straightforward to simply say: ‘I neither know nor see.’”
> Pali: “Idha mayhaṁ, bhante, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi— yānimāni diṭṭhigatāni bhagavatā abyākatāni ṭhapitāni paṭikkhittāni: ‘sassato loko’tipi, ‘asassato loko’tipi …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’tipi— tāni me bhagavā na byākaroti. Yāni me bhagavā na byākaroti taṁ me na ruccati, taṁ me nakkhamati. Sohaṁ bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ pucchissāmi. Sace me bhagavā byākarissati: ‘sassato loko’ti vā, ‘asassato loko’ti vā …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā— evāhaṁ bhagavati, brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi. No ce me bhagavā byākarissati: ‘sassato loko’ti vā, ‘asassato loko’ti vā …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā— evāhaṁ sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattissāmīti. Sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘sassato loko’ti, ‘sassato loko’ti me bhagavā byākarotu; sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘asassato loko’ti, ‘asassato loko’ti me bhagavā byākarotu. No ce bhagavā jānāti: ‘sassato loko’ti vā, ‘asassato loko’ti vā, ajānato kho pana apassato etadeva ujukaṁ hoti yadidaṁ: ‘na jānāmi, na passāmī’ti. Sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘antavā loko’ti, ‘anantavā loko’ti me bhagavā byākarotu; sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘anantavā loko’ti, ‘anantavā loko’ti me bhagavā byākarotu. No ce bhagavā jānāti: ‘antavā loko’ti vā, ‘anantavā loko’ti vā, ajānato kho pana apassato etadeva ujukaṁ hoti yadidaṁ: ‘na jānāmi, na passāmī’ti. Sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti, ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti me bhagavā byākarotu; sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti, ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti me bhagavā byākarotu. No ce bhagavā jānāti: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā, ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā, ajānato kho pana apassato etadeva ujukaṁ hoti yadidaṁ: ‘na jānāmi, na passāmī’ti. Sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti me bhagavā byākarotu; sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti me bhagavā byākarotu. No ce bhagavā jānāti: ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, ajānato kho pana apassato etadeva ujukaṁ hoti yadidaṁ: ‘na jānāmi na passāmī’ti. Sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti me bhagavā byākarotu; sace bhagavā jānāti: ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti me bhagavā byākarotu. No ce bhagavā jānāti: ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, ajānato kho pana apassato etadeva ujukaṁ hoti yadidaṁ: ‘na jānāmi, na passāmī’”ti.
[¶6] “What, Māluṅkyaputta, did I ever say to you: ‘Come, Māluṅkyaputta, lead the spiritual life under me, and I will declare these things to you’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu tāhaṁ, mālukyaputta, evaṁ avacaṁ: ‘ehi tvaṁ, mālukyaputta, mayi brahmacariyaṁ cara, ahaṁ te byākarissāmi:
[¶7] > Pali: “sassato loko”ti vā, “asassato loko”ti vā, “antavā loko”ti vā, “anantavā loko”ti vā, “taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran”ti vā, “aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran”ti vā, “hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā’”ti?
[¶8] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶9] “Or did you ever say to me: ‘Sir, I will lead the spiritual life under the Buddha, and the Buddha will declare these things to me’?”
> Pali: “Tvaṁ vā pana maṁ evaṁ avaca: ‘ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi, bhagavā me byākarissati:
[¶10] > Pali: “sassato loko”ti vā, “asassato loko”ti vā, “antavā loko”ti vā, “anantavā loko”ti vā, “taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran”ti vā, “aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran”ti vā, “hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā’”ti?
[¶11] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶12] “So it seems that I did not say to you: ‘Come, Māluṅkyaputta, lead the spiritual life under me, and I will declare these things to you.’ And you never said to me: ‘Sir, I will lead the spiritual life under the Buddha, and the Buddha will declare these things to me.’ In that case, you futile man, who are you and what do you disavow?
> Pali: “Iti kira, mālukyaputta, nevāhaṁ taṁ vadāmi: ‘ehi tvaṁ, mālukyaputta, mayi brahmacariyaṁ cara, ahaṁ te byākarissāmi: “sassato loko”ti vā, “asassato loko”ti vā …pe… “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇāti vā”’ti; napi kira maṁ tvaṁ vadesi: ‘ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi, bhagavā me byākarissati: “sassato loko”ti vā “asassato loko”ti vā …pe… “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā’ti. Evaṁ sante, moghapurisa, ko santo kaṁ paccācikkhasi?
[¶13] Suppose someone were to say this: ‘I will not lead the spiritual life under the Buddha until the Buddha declares to me that the cosmos is eternal, or that the cosmos is not eternal … or that after death a realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists.’ That would still remain undeclared by the Realized One, and meanwhile that individual would die.
> Pali: Yo kho, mālukyaputta, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi yāva me bhagavā na byākarissati: “sassato loko”ti vā, “asassato loko”ti vā …pe… “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā’ti, abyākatameva taṁ, mālukyaputta, tathāgatena assa, atha so puggalo kālaṁ kareyya.
[¶14] Suppose a man was struck by an arrow thickly smeared with poison. His friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat him. But the man would say: ‘I won’t extract this arrow as long as I don’t know whether the man who wounded me was an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial.’ He’d say: ‘I won’t extract this arrow as long as I don’t know the following things about the man who wounded me: his name and clan; whether he’s tall, short, or medium; whether his skin is black, brown, or dingy; and whether he comes from such-and-such village, town, or city. I won’t extract this arrow as long as I don’t know whether the bow that wounded me was straight or recurved; whether the bow-string is made of swallow-wort fibre, sunn hemp fibre, sinew, sanseveria fibre, or spurge fibre; whether the shaft is made from a bush or a plantation tree; whether the shaft was fitted with feathers from a vulture, a heron, a hawk, a peacock, or a stork; whether the shaft was bound with sinews of a cow, a buffalo, a black lion, or an ape; and whether the arrowhead was spiked, razor-tipped, barbed, made of iron or a calf’s tooth, or lancet-shaped.’ That man would still not have learned these things, and meanwhile they’d die.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mālukyaputta, puriso sallena viddho assa savisena gāḷhapalepanena. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhapeyyuṁ. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ purisaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vā’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ purisaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto iti vā’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ purisaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, dīgho vā rasso vā majjhimo vā’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ purisaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, kāḷo vā sāmo vā maṅguracchavī vā’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ purisaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, amukasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā nagare vā’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ dhanuṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, yadi vā cāpo yadi vā kodaṇḍo’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ jiyaṁ jānāmi yāyamhi viddho, yadi vā akkassa yadi vā saṇhassa yadi vā nhārussa yadi vā maruvāya yadi vā khīrapaṇṇino’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ kaṇḍaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, yadi vā gacchaṁ yadi vā ropiman’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ kaṇḍaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, yassa pattehi vājitaṁ yadi vā gijjhassa yadi vā kaṅkassa yadi vā kulalassa yadi vā morassa yadi vā sithilahanuno’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ kaṇḍaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, yassa nhārunā parikkhittaṁ yadi vā gavassa yadi vā mahiṁsassa yadi vā bheravassa yadi vā semhārassā’ti; so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ imaṁ sallaṁ āharissāmi yāva na taṁ sallaṁ jānāmi yenamhi viddho, yadi vā sallaṁ yadi vā khurappaṁ yadi vā vekaṇḍaṁ yadi vā nārācaṁ yadi vā vacchadantaṁ yadi vā karavīrapattan’ti— aññātameva taṁ, mālukyaputta, tena purisena assa, atha so puriso kālaṁ kareyya.
[¶15] In the same way, suppose someone was to say: ‘I will not lead the spiritual life under the Buddha until the Buddha declares to me that the cosmos is eternal, or that the cosmos is not eternal … or that after death a realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists.’ That would still remain undeclared by the Realized One, and meanwhile that individual would die.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mālukyaputta, yo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na tāvāhaṁ bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi yāva me bhagavā na byākarissati: “sassato loko”ti vā “asassato loko”ti vā …pe… “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā’ti— abyākatameva taṁ, mālukyaputta, tathāgatena assa, atha so puggalo kālaṁ kareyya.
[¶16] It’s not true that if there were the view ‘the cosmos is eternal’ there would be the living of the spiritual life. It’s not true that if there were the view ‘the cosmos is not eternal’ there would be the living of the spiritual life. When there is the view that the cosmos is eternal or that the cosmos is not eternal, there is rebirth, there is old age, there is death, and there is sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. And it is the defeat of these things in this very life that I advocate. It’s not true that if there were the view ‘the cosmos is finite’ … ‘the cosmos is infinite’ … ‘the soul and the body are one and the same’ … ‘the soul is one thing, the body another’ … ‘a realized one still exists after death’ … ‘a realized one no longer exists after death’ … ‘a realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death’ … ‘a realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death’ there would be the living of the spiritual life. When there are any of these views there is rebirth, there is old age, there is death, and there is sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. And it is the defeat of these things in this very life that I advocate.
> Pali: ‘Sassato loko’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evaṁ no. ‘Asassato loko’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evampi no. ‘Sassato loko’ti vā, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati, ‘asassato loko’ti vā diṭṭhiyā sati attheva jāti, atthi jarā, atthi maraṇaṁ, santi sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā; yesāhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme nighātaṁ paññapemi. ‘Antavā loko’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evaṁ no. ‘Anantavā loko’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evampi no. ‘Antavā loko’ti vā, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati, ‘anantavā loko’ti vā diṭṭhiyā sati attheva jāti, atthi jarā, atthi maraṇaṁ, santi sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā; yesāhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme nighātaṁ paññapemi. ‘Taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evaṁ no. ‘Aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evampi no. ‘Taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati, ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā diṭṭhiyā sati attheva jāti …pe… nighātaṁ paññapemi. ‘Hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evaṁ no. ‘Na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evampi no. ‘Hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati, ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā diṭṭhiyā sati attheva jāti …pe… yesāhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme nighātaṁ paññapemi. ‘Hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evaṁ no. ‘Neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso abhavissāti, evampi no. ‘Hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti, mālukyaputta, diṭṭhiyā sati, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā diṭṭhiyā sati attheva jāti …pe… yesāhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme nighātaṁ paññapemi.
[¶17] So, Māluṅkyaputta, you should remember what I have not declared as undeclared, and what I have declared as declared. And what have I not declared? I have not declared the following: ‘the cosmos is eternal,’ ‘the cosmos is not eternal,’ ‘the cosmos is finite,’ ‘the world is infinite,’ ‘the soul and the body are one and the same,’ ‘the soul is one thing, the body another,’ ‘a realized one still exists after death,’ ‘a realized one no longer exists after death,’ ‘a realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death,’ ‘a realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death.’
> Pali: Tasmātiha, mālukyaputta, abyākatañca me abyākatato dhāretha; byākatañca me byākatato dhāretha. Kiñca, mālukyaputta, mayā abyākataṁ? ‘Sassato loko’ti mālukyaputta, mayā abyākataṁ; ‘asassato loko’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘antavā loko’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘anantavā loko’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti— mayā abyākataṁ; ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti— mayā abyākataṁ.
[¶18] And why haven’t I declared these things? Because they aren’t beneficial or relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. They don’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why I haven’t declared them.
> Pali: Kasmā cetaṁ, mālukyaputta, mayā abyākataṁ? Na hetaṁ, mālukyaputta, atthasaṁhitaṁ na ādibrahmacariyakaṁ na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati. Tasmā taṁ mayā abyākataṁ.
[¶19] And what have I declared? I have declared the following: ‘this is suffering,’ ‘this is the origin of suffering,’ ‘this is the cessation of suffering,’ ‘this is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’
> Pali: Kiñca, mālukyaputta, mayā byākataṁ? ‘Idaṁ dukkhan’ti, mālukyaputta, mayā byākataṁ; ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti— mayā byākataṁ; ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti— mayā byākataṁ; ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti— mayā byākataṁ.
[¶20] And why have I declared these things? Because they are beneficial and relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. They lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why I have declared them. So, Māluṅkyaputta, you should remember what I have not declared as undeclared, and what I have declared as declared.”
> Pali: Kasmā cetaṁ, mālukyaputta, mayā byākataṁ? Etañhi, mālukyaputta, atthasaṁhitaṁ etaṁ ādibrahmacariyakaṁ nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati. Tasmā taṁ mayā byākataṁ. Tasmātiha, mālukyaputta, abyākatañca me abyākatato dhāretha; byākatañca me byākatato dhārethā”ti.
[¶21] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Māluṅkyaputta approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā mālukyaputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶22] > Pali: Cūḷamālukyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 69. MN 64 · The Longer Discourse With Māluṅkya
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/69/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/69/#p-N
[¶0] MN 64 · The Longer Discourse With Māluṅkya
> Pali: MN 64 · Mahāmālukyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, do you remember the five lower fetters taught by me?”
> Pali: “dhāretha no tumhe, bhikkhave, mayā desitāni pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanānī”ti?
[¶4] When he said this, Venerable Māluṅkyaputta said to him, “Sir, I remember them.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā mālukyaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ahaṁ kho, bhante, dhāremi bhagavatā desitāni pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanānī”ti.
[¶5] “But how do you remember them?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana tvaṁ, mālukyaputta, dhāresi mayā desitāni pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanānī”ti?
[¶6] “I remember the lower fetters taught by the Buddha as follows: substantialist view, doubt, misapprehension of precepts and observances, sensual desire, and ill will. That’s how I remember the five lower fetters taught by the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Sakkāyadiṭṭhiṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ desitaṁ dhāremi; vicikicchaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ desitaṁ dhāremi; sīlabbataparāmāsaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ desitaṁ dhāremi; kāmacchandaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ desitaṁ dhāremi; byāpādaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ desitaṁ dhāremi. Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, dhāremi bhagavatā desitāni pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanānī”ti.
[¶7] “Who on earth do you remember being taught the five lower fetters in that way? Wouldn’t the wanderers of other religions fault you using the simile of the infant? For a little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘substantial reality’, so how could substantialist view possibly arise in them? Yet the underlying tendency to substantialist view still lies within them. A little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘teachings’, so how could doubt about the teachings possibly arise in them? Yet the underlying tendency to doubt still lies within them. A little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘precepts’, so how could misapprehension of precepts and observances possibly arise in them? Yet the underlying tendency to misapprehension of precepts and observances still lies within them. A little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘sensual pleasures’, so how could desire for sensual pleasures possibly arise in them? Yet the underlying tendency to sensual desire still lies within them. A little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘sentient beings’, so how could ill will for sentient beings possibly arise in them? Yet the underlying tendency to ill will still lies within them. Wouldn’t the wanderers of other religions fault you using the simile of the infant?”
> Pali: “Kassa kho nāma tvaṁ, mālukyaputta, imāni evaṁ pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni desitāni dhāresi? Nanu, mālukyaputta, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā iminā taruṇūpamena upārambhena upārambhissanti? Daharassa hi, mālukyaputta, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa sakkāyotipi na hoti, kuto panassa uppajjissati sakkāyadiṭṭhi? Anusetvevassa sakkāyadiṭṭhānusayo. Daharassa hi, mālukyaputta, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa dhammātipi na hoti, kuto panassa uppajjissati dhammesu vicikicchā? Anusetvevassa vicikicchānusayo. Daharassa hi, mālukyaputta, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa sīlātipi na hoti, kuto panassa uppajjissati sīlesu sīlabbataparāmāso? Anusetvevassa sīlabbataparāmāsānusayo. Daharassa hi, mālukyaputta, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa kāmātipi na hoti, kuto panassa uppajjissati kāmesu kāmacchando? Anusetvevassa kāmarāgānusayo. Daharassa hi, mālukyaputta, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa sattātipi na hoti, kuto panassa uppajjissati sattesu byāpādo? Anusetvevassa byāpādānusayo. Nanu, mālukyaputta, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā iminā taruṇūpamena upārambhena upārambhissantī”ti?
[¶8] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Now is the time, Blessed One! Now is the time, Holy One! May the Buddha teach the five lower fetters. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “etassa, bhagavā, kālo, etassa, sugata, kālo yaṁ bhagavā pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni deseyya. Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶9] “Well then, Ānanda, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hānanda, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶11] “Ānanda, take an unlearned ordinary person who has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. Their heart is overcome and mired in substantialist view, and they don’t truly understand the escape from substantialist view that has arisen. That substantialist view is entrenched in them, not eliminated: it is a lower fetter.
> Pali: “Idhānanda, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto, sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto sakkāyadiṭṭhipariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati sakkāyadiṭṭhiparetena; uppannāya ca sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa sā sakkāyadiṭṭhi thāmagatā appaṭivinītā orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ.
[¶12] Their heart is overcome and mired in doubt, and they don’t truly understand the escape from doubt that has arisen. That doubt is entrenched in them, not eliminated: it is a lower fetter.
> Pali: Vicikicchāpariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati vicikicchāparetena; uppannāya ca vicikicchāya nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa sā vicikicchā thāmagatā appaṭivinītā orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ.
[¶13] Their heart is overcome and mired in misapprehension of precepts and observances, and they don’t truly understand the escape from misapprehension of precepts and observances that has arisen. That misapprehension of precepts and observances is entrenched in them, not eliminated: it is a lower fetter.
> Pali: Sīlabbataparāmāsapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati sīlabbataparāmāsaparetena; uppannassa ca sīlabbataparāmāsassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa so sīlabbataparāmāso thāmagato appaṭivinīto orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ.
[¶14] Their heart is overcome and mired in sensual desire, and they don’t truly understand the escape from sensual desire that has arisen. That sensual desire is entrenched in them, not eliminated: it is a lower fetter.
> Pali: Kāmarāgapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati kāmarāgaparetena; uppannassa ca kāmarāgassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa so kāmarāgo thāmagato appaṭivinīto orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ.
[¶15] Their heart is overcome and mired in ill will, and they don’t truly understand the escape from ill will that has arisen. That ill will is entrenched in them, not eliminated: it is a lower fetter.
> Pali: Byāpādapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati byāpādaparetena; uppannassa ca byāpādassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa so byāpādo thāmagato appaṭivinīto orambhāgiyaṁ saṁyojanaṁ.
[¶16] But a learned noble disciple has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. Their heart is not overcome and mired in substantialist view, and they truly understand the escape from substantialist view that has arisen. That substantialist view, along with any underlying tendency to it, is given up in them.
> Pali: Sutavā ca kho, ānanda, ariyasāvako ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto, sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na sakkāyadiṭṭhipariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati na sakkāyadiṭṭhiparetena; uppannāya ca sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa sā sakkāyadiṭṭhi sānusayā pahīyati.
[¶17] Their heart is not overcome and mired in doubt, and they truly understand the escape from doubt that has arisen. That doubt, along with any underlying tendency to it, is given up in them.
> Pali: Na vicikicchāpariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati na vicikicchāparetena; uppannāya ca vicikicchāya nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa sā vicikicchā sānusayā pahīyati.
[¶18] Their heart is not overcome and mired in misapprehension of precepts and observances, and they truly understand the escape from misapprehension of precepts and observances that has arisen. That misapprehension of precepts and observances, along with any underlying tendency to it, is given up in them.
> Pali: Na sīlabbataparāmāsapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati na sīlabbataparāmāsaparetena; uppannassa ca sīlabbataparāmāsassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa so sīlabbataparāmāso sānusayo pahīyati.
[¶19] Their heart is not overcome and mired in sensual desire, and they truly understand the escape from sensual desire that has arisen. That sensual desire, along with any underlying tendency to it, is given up in them.
> Pali: Na kāmarāgapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati na kāmarāgaparetena; uppannassa ca kāmarāgassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa so kāmarāgo sānusayo pahīyati.
[¶20] Their heart is not overcome and mired in ill will, and they truly understand the escape from ill will that has arisen. That ill will, along with any underlying tendency to it, is given up in them.
> Pali: Na byāpādapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati na byāpādaparetena; uppannassa ca byāpādassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa so byāpādo sānusayo pahīyati.
[¶21] There is a path and a practice for giving up the five lower fetters. It’s not possible to know or see or give up the five lower fetters without relying on that path and that practice. Suppose there was a large tree standing with heartwood. It’s not possible to cut out the heartwood without having cut through the bark and the softwood. In the same way, there is a path and a practice for giving up the five lower fetters. It’s not possible to know or see or give up the five lower fetters without relying on that path and that practice.
> Pali: Yo, ānanda, maggo yā paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya taṁ maggaṁ taṁ paṭipadaṁ anāgamma pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni ñassati vā dakkhati vā pajahissati vāti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato tacaṁ acchetvā phegguṁ acchetvā sāracchedo bhavissatīti— netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati; evameva kho, ānanda, yo maggo yā paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya taṁ maggaṁ taṁ paṭipadaṁ anāgamma pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni ñassati vā dakkhati vā pajahissati vāti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶22] But it is possible to know and see and give up the five lower fetters by relying on that path and that practice.
> Pali: Yo ca kho, ānanda, maggo yā paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya taṁ maggaṁ taṁ paṭipadaṁ āgamma pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni ñassati vā dakkhati vā pajahissati vāti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶23] Suppose there was a large tree standing with heartwood. It is possible to cut out the heartwood after having cut through the bark and the softwood. In the same way, there is a path and a practice for giving up the five lower fetters. It is possible to know and see and give up the five lower fetters by relying on that path and that practice. Suppose the Ganges River was full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. Then along comes a feeble person, who thinks: ‘By swimming with my arms I’ll safely cross over to the far shore of the Ganges.’ But they’re not able to do so. In the same way, when the Dhamma is being taught to them for the cessation of substantial reality, those whose mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided should be regarded as being like that feeble person. Suppose the Ganges River was full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. Then along comes a strong person, who thinks: ‘By swimming with my arms I’ll safely cross over to the far shore of the Ganges.’ And they are able to do so.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, ānanda, mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato tacaṁ chetvā phegguṁ chetvā sāracchedo bhavissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. evameva kho, ānanda, yo maggo yā paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya taṁ maggaṁ taṁ paṭipadaṁ āgamma pañcorambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni ñassati vā dakkhati vā pajahissati vāti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, gaṅgā nadī pūrā udakassa samatittikā kākapeyyā. Atha dubbalako puriso āgaccheyya: ‘ahaṁ imissā gaṅgāya nadiyā tiriyaṁ bāhāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gacchissāmī’ti; so na sakkuṇeyya gaṅgāya nadiyā tiriyaṁ bāhāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gantuṁ. Evameva kho, ānanda, yesaṁ kesañci sakkāyanirodhāya dhamme desiyamāne cittaṁ na pakkhandati nappasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati; seyyathāpi so dubbalako puriso evamete daṭṭhabbā. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, gaṅgā nadī pūrā udakassa samatittikā kākapeyyā. Atha balavā puriso āgaccheyya: ‘ahaṁ imissā gaṅgāya nadiyā tiriyaṁ bāhāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gacchissāmī’ti; so sakkuṇeyya gaṅgāya nadiyā tiriyaṁ bāhāya sotaṁ chetvā sotthinā pāraṁ gantuṁ.
[¶24] In the same way, when the Dhamma is being taught to them for the cessation of substantial reality, those whose mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided should be regarded as being like that strong person.
> Pali: Evameva kho, ānanda, yesaṁ kesañci sakkāyanirodhāya dhamme desiyamāne cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati; seyyathāpi so balavā puriso evamete daṭṭhabbā.
[¶25] And what, Ānanda, is the path and the practice for giving up the five lower fetters? It’s when a mendicant—due to the seclusion from attachments, the giving up of unskillful qualities, and the complete settling of physical discomforts—quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They contemplate the phenomena there—included in form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness—as impermanent, as suffering, as diseased, as a boil, as a dart, as gloom, as an affliction, as alien, as breaking apart, as empty, as not-self. They turn their mind away from those things, and apply it to the element free of death: ‘This is peaceful; this is sublime—that is, the stilling of all activities, the letting go of all attachments, the ending of craving, fading away, cessation, extinguishment.’ Abiding in that they attain the ending of defilements. If they don’t attain the ending of defilements, with the ending of the five lower fetters they’re reborn spontaneously, because of their passion and love for that meditation. They are extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world. This is the path and the practice for giving up the five lower fetters.
> Pali: Katamo cānanda, maggo, katamā paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya? Idhānanda, bhikkhu upadhivivekā akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānā sabbaso kāyaduṭṭhullānaṁ paṭippassaddhiyā vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So yadeva tattha hoti rūpagataṁ vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ te dhamme aniccato dukkhato rogato gaṇḍato sallato aghato ābādhato parato palokato suññato anattato samanupassati. So tehi dhammehi cittaṁ paṭivāpeti. So tehi dhammehi cittaṁ paṭivāpetvā amatāya dhātuyā cittaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ sabbasaṅkhārasamatho sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbānan’ti. So tattha ṭhito āsavānaṁ khayaṁ pāpuṇāti; no ce āsavānaṁ khayaṁ pāpuṇāti teneva dhammarāgena tāya dhammanandiyā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko hoti, tattha parinibbāyī, anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, ānanda, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya.
[¶26] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. They contemplate the phenomena there—included in form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness—as impermanent … They turn their mind away from those things … If they don’t attain the ending of defilements, they’re reborn spontaneously … and are not liable to return from that world. This too is the path and the practice for giving up the five lower fetters.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So yadeva tattha hoti rūpagataṁ vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ … pe… anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, ānanda, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya.
[¶27] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. They contemplate the phenomena there—included in feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness—as impermanent … They turn their mind away from those things … If they don’t attain the ending of defilements, they’re reborn spontaneously … and are not liable to return from that world. This too is the path and the practice for giving up the five lower fetters.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So yadeva tattha hoti vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ … pe… anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, ānanda, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya.
[¶28] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. They contemplate the phenomena there—included in feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness—as impermanent … They turn their mind away from those things … If they don’t attain the ending of defilements, they’re reborn spontaneously … and are not liable to return from that world. This too is the path and the practice for giving up the five lower fetters.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So yadeva tattha hoti vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ … pe… anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, ānanda, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya.
[¶29] Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. They contemplate the phenomena there—included in feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness—as impermanent … They turn their mind away from those things … If they don’t attain the ending of defilements, they’re reborn spontaneously … and are not liable to return from that world. This too is the path and the practice for giving up the five lower fetters.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So yadeva tattha hoti vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ … pe… anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, ānanda, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāyā”ti.
[¶30] “Sir, if this is the path and the practice for giving up the five lower fetters, how then are some mendicants here released in heart while others are released by wisdom?”
> Pali: “Eso ce, bhante, maggo esā paṭipadā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ pahānāya, atha kiñcarahi idhekacce bhikkhū cetovimuttino ekacce bhikkhū paññāvimuttino”ti?
[¶31] “In that case, I say it is the disparity of their faculties.”
> Pali: “Ettha kho panesāhaṁ, ānanda, indriyavemattataṁ vadāmī”ti.
[¶32] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶33] > Pali: Mahāmālukyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 70. MN 65 · With Bhaddāli
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/70/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/70/#p-N
[¶0] MN 65 · With Bhaddāli
> Pali: MN 65 · Bhaddālisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I eat my food in one sitting per day. Doing so, I find that I’m healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. You too should eat your food in one sitting per day. Doing so, you’ll find that you’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably.”
> Pali: “Ahaṁ kho, bhikkhave, ekāsanabhojanaṁ bhuñjāmi; ekāsanabhojanaṁ kho, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhuñjamāno appābādhatañca sañjānāmi appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Etha, tumhepi, bhikkhave, ekāsanabhojanaṁ bhuñjatha; ekāsanabhojanaṁ kho, bhikkhave, tumhepi bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānissatha appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañcā”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, Venerable Bhaddāli said to the Buddha, “Sir, I’m not going to attempt to eat my food in one sitting per day. For when eating once a day I might feel remorse and regret.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā bhaddāli bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ahaṁ kho, bhante, na ussahāmi ekāsanabhojanaṁ bhuñjituṁ; ekāsanabhojanañhi me, bhante, bhuñjato siyā kukkuccaṁ, siyā vippaṭisāro”ti.
[¶5] “Well then, Bhaddāli, eat one part of the meal in the place where you’re invited, and bring the rest back to eat. Eating this way, too, you will sustain yourself.”
> Pali: “Tena hi tvaṁ, bhaddāli, yattha nimantito assasi tattha ekadesaṁ bhuñjitvā ekadesaṁ nīharitvāpi bhuñjeyyāsi. Evampi kho tvaṁ, bhaddāli, bhuñjamāno ekāsano yāpessasī”ti.
[¶6] “Sir, I’m not going to attempt to eat that way, either. For when eating that way I might also feel remorse and regret.” Then, as this rule was being laid down by the Buddha and the Saṅgha was undertaking it, Bhaddāli announced he would not attempt to keep it. Then for the whole of that three months Bhaddāli would not see the Buddha face to face, as happens when someone doesn’t fulfill the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: “Evampi kho ahaṁ, bhante, na ussahāmi bhuñjituṁ; evampi hi me, bhante, bhuñjato siyā kukkuccaṁ, siyā vippaṭisāro”ti. Atha kho āyasmā bhaddāli bhagavatā sikkhāpade paññāpiyamāne bhikkhusaṅghe sikkhaṁ samādiyamāne anussāhaṁ pavedesi. Atha kho āyasmā bhaddāli sabbaṁ taṁ temāsaṁ na bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṁ adāsi, yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī.
[¶7] At that time several mendicants were making a robe for the Buddha, thinking that when his robe was finished and the three months of the rains residence had passed the Buddha would set out wandering.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū bhagavato cīvarakammaṁ karonti— niṭṭhitacīvaro bhagavā temāsaccayena cārikaṁ pakkamissatīti.
[¶8] Then Bhaddāli went up to those mendicants, and exchanged greetings with them. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. The mendicants said to Bhaddāli, “Reverend Bhaddāli, this robe is being made for the Buddha. When it’s finished and the three months of the rains residence have passed the Buddha will set out wandering. Come on, Bhaddāli, learn your lesson. Don’t make it hard for yourself later on.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā bhaddāli yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā tehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ bhaddāliṁ te bhikkhū etadavocuṁ: “idaṁ kho, āvuso bhaddāli, bhagavato cīvarakammaṁ karīyati. Niṭṭhitacīvaro bhagavā temāsaccayena cārikaṁ pakkamissati. Iṅghāvuso bhaddāli, etaṁ dosakaṁ sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, mā te pacchā dukkarataraṁ ahosī”ti.
[¶9] “Yes, reverends,” Bhaddāli replied. He went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “I made a mistake, sir. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of me that, as this rule was being laid down by the Buddha and the Saṅgha was undertaking it, I announced I would not attempt to keep it. Please, sir, accept my mistake for what it is, so I will restrain myself in future.”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā bhaddāli tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā bhaddāli bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “accayo maṁ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yohaṁ bhagavatā sikkhāpade paññāpiyamāne bhikkhusaṅghe sikkhaṁ samādiyamāne anussāhaṁ pavedesiṁ. Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā accayaṁ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṁ saṁvarāyā”ti.
[¶10] “Indeed, Bhaddāli, you made a mistake. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of you that, as this rule was being laid down by the Buddha and the Saṅgha was undertaking it, you announced you would not attempt to keep it.
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, bhaddāli, accayo accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ mayā sikkhāpade paññāpiyamāne bhikkhusaṅghe sikkhaṁ samādiyamāne anussāhaṁ pavedesi.
[¶11] And you didn’t realize this situation: ‘The Buddha is staying in Sāvatthī, and he’ll know me as the mendicant named Bhaddāli who doesn’t fulfill the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.’
> Pali: Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi: ‘bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṁ viharati, bhagavāpi maṁ jānissati— bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosi.
[¶12] And you didn’t realize this situation: ‘Several monks have commenced the rains retreat in Sāvatthī … several nuns have commenced the rains retreat in Sāvatthī … several laymen reside in Sāvatthī … several laywomen reside in Sāvatthī, and they’ll know me as the mendicant named Bhaddāli who doesn’t fulfill the training according to the Teacher’s instructions. …
> Pali: Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi: ‘sambahulā kho bhikkhū sāvatthiyaṁ vassaṁ upagatā, tepi maṁ jānissanti— bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosi. Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi: ‘sambahulā kho bhikkhuniyo sāvatthiyaṁ vassaṁ upagatā, tāpi maṁ jānissanti— bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosi. Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi: ‘sambahulā kho upāsakā sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasanti, tepi maṁ jānissanti— bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosi. Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi: ‘sambahulā kho upāsikā sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasanti, tāpi maṁ jānissanti— bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosi.
[¶13] Several ascetics and brahmins who follow various other religions have commenced the rains retreat in Sāvatthī, and they’ll know me as the mendicant named Bhaddāli, one of the senior disciples of Gotama, who doesn’t fulfill the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.’ You also didn’t realize this situation.”
> Pali: Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi: ‘sambahulā kho nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā sāvatthiyaṁ vassaṁ upagatā, tepi maṁ jānissanti— bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako theraññataro bhikkhu sāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī”ti.
[¶14] “I made a mistake, sir. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of me that, as this rule was being laid down by the Buddha and the Saṅgha was undertaking it, I announced I would not attempt to keep it. Please, sir, accept my mistake for what it is, so I will restrain myself in future.”
> Pali: “Accayo maṁ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yohaṁ bhagavatā sikkhāpade paññāpiyamāne bhikkhusaṅghe sikkhaṁ samādiyamāne anussāhaṁ pavedesiṁ. Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā accayaṁ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṁ saṁvarāyā”ti.
[¶15] “Indeed, Bhaddāli, you made a mistake. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of you that, as this rule was being laid down by the Buddha and the Saṅgha was undertaking it, you announced you would not attempt to keep it.
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, bhaddāli, accayo accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ mayā sikkhāpade paññāpiyamāne bhikkhusaṅghe sikkhaṁ samādiyamāne anussāhaṁ pavedesi.
[¶16] What do you think, Bhaddāli? Suppose I was to say this to a mendicant who is freed both ways: ‘Please, mendicant, be a bridge for me to cross over the mud.’ Would they cross over themselves, or struggle to get out of it, or just say no?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhaddāli, idhassa bhikkhu ubhatobhāgavimutto, tamahaṁ evaṁ vadeyyaṁ: ‘ehi me tvaṁ, bhikkhu, paṅke saṅkamo hohī’ti, api nu kho so saṅkameyya vā aññena vā kāyaṁ sannāmeyya, ‘no’ti vā vadeyyā”ti?
[¶17] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶18] “What do you think, Bhaddāli? Suppose I was to say the same thing to a mendicant who is freed by wisdom, or a direct witness, or attained to view, or freed by faith, or a follower of teachings, or a follower by faith: ‘Please, mendicant, be a bridge for me to cross over the mud.’ Would they cross over themselves, or struggle to get out of it, or just say no?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhaddāli, idhassa bhikkhu paññāvimutto … kāyasakkhi … diṭṭhippatto … saddhāvimutto … dhammānusārī … saddhānusārī, tamahaṁ evaṁ vadeyyaṁ: ‘ehi me tvaṁ, bhikkhu, paṅke saṅkamo hohī’ti, api nu kho so saṅkameyya vā aññena vā kāyaṁ sannāmeyya, ‘no’ti vā vadeyyā”ti?
[¶19] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶20] “What do you think, Bhaddāli? At that time were you freed both ways, freed by wisdom, a direct witness, attained to view, freed by faith, a follower of teachings, or a follower by faith?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhaddāli, api nu tvaṁ, bhaddāli, tasmiṁ samaye ubhatobhāgavimutto vā hosi paññāvimutto vā kāyasakkhi vā diṭṭhippatto vā saddhāvimutto vā dhammānusārī vā saddhānusārī vā”ti?
[¶21] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶22] “Weren’t you vacuous, hollow, and mistaken?”
> Pali: “Nanu tvaṁ, bhaddāli, tasmiṁ samaye ritto tuccho aparaddho”ti?
[¶23] “Yes, sir.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante.
[¶24] I made a mistake … Please, sir, accept my mistake for what it is, so I will restrain myself in future.”
> Pali: Accayo maṁ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yohaṁ bhagavatā sikkhāpade paññāpiyamāne bhikkhusaṅghe sikkhaṁ samādiyamāne anussāhaṁ pavedesiṁ. Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā accayaṁ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṁ saṁvarāyā”ti.
[¶25] “Indeed, Bhaddāli, you made a mistake. … But since you have recognized your mistake for what it is, and have dealt with it properly, I accept it. For it is growth in the training of the Noble One to recognize a mistake for what it is, deal with it properly, and commit to restraint in the future.
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, bhaddāli, accayo accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ mayā sikkhāpade paññāpiyamāne bhikkhusaṅghe sikkhaṁ samādiyamāne anussāhaṁ pavedesi. Yato ca kho tvaṁ, bhaddāli, accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikarosi, taṁ te mayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāma. Vuddhihesā, bhaddāli, ariyassa vinaye yo accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikaroti, āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjati.
[¶26] Bhaddāli, take a mendicant who doesn’t fulfill the training according to the Teacher’s instructions. They think, ‘Why don’t I frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. Hopefully I’ll realize a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones.’ So they frequent a secluded lodging. While they’re living withdrawn, they’re reprimanded by the Teacher, by sensible spiritual companions after examination, by deities, and by themselves. Being reprimanded in this way, they don’t realize any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. Why is that? Because that’s how it is when someone doesn’t fulfill the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: Idha, bhaddāli, ekacco bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘yannūnāhaṁ vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajeyyaṁ araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Appeva nāmāhaṁ uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ sacchikareyyan’ti. So vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Tassa tathāvūpakaṭṭhassa viharato satthāpi upavadati, anuviccapi viññū sabrahmacārī upavadanti, devatāpi upavadanti, attāpi attānaṁ upavadati. So satthārāpi upavadito, anuviccapi viññūhi sabrahmacārīhi upavadito, devatāhipi upavadito, attanāpi attānaṁ upavadito na uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ sacchikaroti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārissa.
[¶27] But take a mendicant who does fulfill the training according to the Teacher’s instructions. They think, ‘Why don’t I frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. Hopefully I’ll realize a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones.’ They frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. While they’re living withdrawn, they’re not reprimanded by the Teacher, by sensible spiritual companions after examination, by deities, or by themselves. Not being reprimanded in this way, they realize a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhaddāli, ekacco bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārī hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘yannūnāhaṁ vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajeyyaṁ araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Appeva nāmāhaṁ uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ sacchikareyyan’ti. So vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Tassa tathāvūpakaṭṭhassa viharato satthāpi na upavadati, anuviccapi viññū sabrahmacārī na upavadanti, devatāpi na upavadanti, attāpi attānaṁ na upavadati. So satthārāpi anupavadito, anuviccapi viññūhi sabrahmacārīhi anupavadito, devatāhipi anupavadito, attanāpi attānaṁ anupavadito uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ sacchikaroti.
[¶28] Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Why is that? Because that’s what happens when someone fulfills the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: So vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārissa.
[¶29] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. Why is that? Because that’s what happens when someone fulfills the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhaddāli, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārissa.
[¶30] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ Why is that? Because that’s what happens when someone fulfills the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhaddāli, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārissa.
[¶31] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. Why is that? Because that’s what happens when someone fulfills the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhaddāli, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārissa.
[¶32] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. … They recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. Why is that? Because that’s what happens when someone fulfills the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārissa.
[¶33] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. … they’re reborn in the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. … they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman … they understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. Why is that? Because that’s what happens when someone fulfills the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā …pe… vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā; ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā …pe… sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārissa.
[¶34] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti; ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶35] Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶36] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ Why is that? Because that’s what happens when someone fulfills the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi taṁ, bhaddāli, hoti yathā taṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya paripūrakārissā”ti.
[¶37] When he said this, Venerable Bhaddāli said to the Buddha, “What is the cause, sir, what is the reason why they punish some monk, repeatedly pressuring him? And what is the cause, what is the reason why they don’t similarly punish another monk, repeatedly pressuring him?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā bhaddāli bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo yena midhekaccaṁ bhikkhuṁ pasayha pasayha kāraṇaṁ karonti? Ko pana, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo yena midhekaccaṁ bhikkhuṁ no tathā pasayha pasayha kāraṇaṁ karontī”ti?
[¶38] “Take a monk who is a frequent offender with many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he dodges the issue, distracting the discussion with irrelevant points. He displays annoyance, hate, and bitterness. He doesn’t proceed properly, he doesn’t fall in line, he doesn’t proceed to get past it, and he doesn’t say: ‘I’ll do what pleases the Saṅgha.’ In such a case, the monks say: ‘Reverends, this monk is a frequent offender, with many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he dodges the issue, distracting the discussion with irrelevant points. He displays annoyance, hate, and bitterness. He doesn’t proceed properly, he doesn’t fall in line, he doesn’t proceed to get past it, and he doesn’t say: “I’ll do what pleases the Saṅgha.” It’d be good for the venerables to examine this monk in such a way that this disciplinary issue is not quickly settled.’ And that’s what they do.
> Pali: “Idha, bhaddāli, ekacco bhikkhu abhiṇhāpattiko hoti āpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmeti, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, na sammā vattati, na lomaṁ pāteti, na netthāraṁ vattati, ‘yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī’ti nāha. Tatra, bhaddāli, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu abhiṇhāpattiko āpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmeti, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, na sammā vattati, na lomaṁ pāteti, na netthāraṁ vattati, “yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī”ti nāha. Sādhu vatāyasmanto imassa bhikkhuno tathā tathā upaparikkhatha yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ na khippameva vūpasameyyā’ti. Tassa kho evaṁ, bhaddāli, bhikkhuno bhikkhū tathā tathā upaparikkhanti yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ na khippameva vūpasammati.
[¶39] Take some other monk who is a frequent offender with many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he doesn’t dodge the issue, distracting the discussion with irrelevant points. He doesn’t display annoyance, hate, and bitterness. He proceeds properly, he falls in line, he proceeds to get past it, and he says: ‘I’ll do what pleases the Saṅgha.’ In such a case, the monks say: ‘Reverends, this monk is a frequent offender, with many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he doesn’t dodge the issue, distracting the discussion with irrelevant points. He doesn’t display annoyance, hate, and bitterness. He proceeds properly, he falls in line, he proceeds to get past it, and he says: “I’ll do what pleases the Saṅgha.” It’d be good for the venerables to examine this monk in such a way that this disciplinary issue is quickly settled.’ And that’s what they do.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhaddāli, ekacco bhikkhu abhiṇhāpattiko hoti āpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno nāññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṁ na apanāmeti, na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, sammā vattati, lomaṁ pāteti, netthāraṁ vattati, ‘yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī’ti āha. Tatra, bhaddāli, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu abhiṇhāpattiko āpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno nāññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṁ na apanāmeti, na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, sammā vattati, lomaṁ pāteti, netthāraṁ vattati, “yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī”ti āha. Sādhu vatāyasmanto, imassa bhikkhuno tathā tathā upaparikkhatha yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ khippameva vūpasameyyā’ti. Tassa kho evaṁ, bhaddāli, bhikkhuno bhikkhū tathā tathā upaparikkhanti yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ khippameva vūpasammati.
[¶40] Take some other monk who is an occasional offender without many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he dodges the issue … In such a case, the monks say: ‘Reverends, this monk is an occasional offender without many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he dodges the issue … It’d be good for the venerables to examine this monk in such a way that this disciplinary issue is not quickly settled.’ And that’s what they do.
> Pali: Idha, bhaddāli, ekacco bhikkhu adhiccāpattiko hoti anāpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmeti, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, na sammā vattati, na lomaṁ pāteti, na netthāraṁ vattati, ‘yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī’ti nāha. Tatra, bhaddāli, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu adhiccāpattiko anāpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmeti, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, na sammā vattati, na lomaṁ pāteti, na netthāraṁ vattati, “yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī”ti nāha. Sādhu vatāyasmanto, imassa bhikkhuno tathā tathā upaparikkhatha yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ na khippameva vūpasameyyā’ti. Tassa kho evaṁ, bhaddāli, bhikkhuno bhikkhū tathā tathā upaparikkhanti yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ na khippameva vūpasammati.
[¶41] Take some other monk who is an occasional offender without many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he doesn’t dodge the issue … In such a case, the monks say: ‘Reverends, this monk is an occasional offender without many offenses. When admonished by the monks, he doesn’t dodge the issue … It’d be good for the venerables to examine this monk in such a way that this disciplinary issue is quickly settled.’ And that’s what they do.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhaddāli, ekacco bhikkhu adhiccāpattiko hoti anāpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno nāññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, na bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmeti, na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, sammā vattati, lomaṁ pāteti, netthāraṁ vattati, ‘yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī’ti āha. Tatra, bhaddāli, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu adhiccāpattiko anāpattibahulo. So bhikkhūhi vuccamāno nāññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, na bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmeti, na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti, sammā vattati, lomaṁ pāteti, netthāraṁ vattati, “yena saṅgho attamano hoti taṁ karomī”ti āha. Sādhu vatāyasmanto, imassa bhikkhuno tathā tathā upaparikkhatha yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ khippameva vūpasameyyā’ti. Tassa kho evaṁ, bhaddāli, bhikkhuno bhikkhū tathā tathā upaparikkhanti yathāssidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ khippameva vūpasammati.
[¶42] Take some other monk who gets by with mere faith and fondness. In such a case, the monks say: ‘Reverends, this monk gets by with mere faith and fondness. Suppose we punish him, repeatedly pressuring him— no, let him not lose what little faith and fondness he has!’
> Pali: Idha, bhaddāli, ekacco bhikkhu saddhāmattakena vahati pemamattakena. Tatra, bhaddāli, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu saddhāmattakena vahati pemamattakena. Sace mayaṁ imaṁ bhikkhuṁ pasayha pasayha kāraṇaṁ karissāma— mā yampissa taṁ saddhāmattakaṁ pemamattakaṁ tamhāpi parihāyī’ti.
[¶43] Suppose there was a person with one eye. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would protect that one eye: ‘Let them not lose the one eye that they have!’ In the same way, some monk gets by with mere faith and fondness. In such a case, the monks say: ‘Reverends, this monk gets by with mere faith and fondness. Suppose we punish him, repeatedly pressuring him— no, let him not lose what little faith and love he has!’ This is the cause, this is the reason why they punish some monk, repeatedly pressuring him. And this is the cause, this is the reason why they don’t similarly punish another monk, repeatedly pressuring him.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhaddāli, purisassa ekaṁ cakkhuṁ, tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā taṁ ekaṁ cakkhuṁ rakkheyyuṁ: ‘mā yampissa taṁ ekaṁ cakkhuṁ tamhāpi parihāyī’ti; evameva kho, bhaddāli, idhekacco bhikkhu saddhāmattakena vahati pemamattakena. Tatra, bhaddāli, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu saddhāmattakena vahati pemamattakena. Sace mayaṁ imaṁ bhikkhuṁ pasayha pasayha kāraṇaṁ karissāma— mā yampissa taṁ saddhāmattakaṁ pemamattakaṁ tamhāpi parihāyī’ti. Ayaṁ kho, bhaddāli, hetu ayaṁ paccayo yena midhekaccaṁ bhikkhuṁ pasayha pasayha kāraṇaṁ karonti. Ayaṁ pana, bhaddāli, hetu ayaṁ paccayo, yena midhekaccaṁ bhikkhuṁ no tathā pasayha pasayha kāraṇaṁ karontī”ti.
[¶44] “What is the cause, sir, what is the reason why there used to be fewer training rules but more enlightened mendicants? And what is the cause, what is the reason why these days there are more training rules and fewer enlightened mendicants?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo yena pubbe appatarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni ahesuṁ bahutarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahiṁsu? Ko pana, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo yena etarahi bahutarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni honti appatarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahantī”ti?
[¶45] “That’s how it is, Bhaddāli. When sentient beings are in decline and the true teaching is disappearing there are more training rules and fewer enlightened mendicants. The Teacher does not lay down training rules for disciples as long as certain defiling influences have not appeared in the Saṅgha. But when such defiling influences appear in the Saṅgha, the Teacher lays down training rules for disciples to protect against them.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, bhaddāli, hoti sattesu hāyamānesu, saddhamme antaradhāyamāne, bahutarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni honti appatarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahantīti. Na tāva, bhaddāli, satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññāpeti yāva na idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti. Yato ca kho, bhaddāli, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññāpeti tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya.
[¶46] And they don’t appear until the Saṅgha has attained a great size, an abundance of material support and fame, learning, and seniority. But when the Saṅgha has attained these things, then such defiling influences appear in the Saṅgha, and the Teacher lays down training rules for disciples to protect against them.
> Pali: Na tāva, bhaddāli, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti yāva na saṅgho mahattaṁ patto hoti. Yato ca kho, bhaddāli, saṅgho mahattaṁ patto hoti, atha idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti. Atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññāpeti tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya. Na tāva, bhaddāli, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti yāva na saṅgho lābhaggaṁ patto hoti, yasaggaṁ patto hoti, bāhusaccaṁ patto hoti, rattaññutaṁ patto hoti. Yato ca kho, bhaddāli, saṅgho rattaññutaṁ patto hoti, atha idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññāpeti tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya.
[¶47] There were only a few of you there at the time when I taught the exposition on the simile of the thoroughbred colt. Do you remember that, Bhaddāli?”
> Pali: Appakā kho tumhe, bhaddāli, tena samayena ahuvattha yadā vo ahaṁ ājānīyasusūpamaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ desesiṁ. Taṁ sarasi bhaddālī”ti?
[¶48] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶49] “What do you believe the reason for that is?”
> Pali: “Tatra, bhaddāli, kaṁ hetuṁ paccesī”ti?
[¶50] “Sir, it’s surely because for a long time now I haven’t fulfilled the training according to the Teacher’s instructions.”
> Pali: “So hi nūnāhaṁ, bhante, dīgharattaṁ satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī ahosin”ti.
[¶51] “That’s not the only reason, Bhaddāli. Rather, for a long time I have encompassed your mind and known: ‘While I’m teaching, this futile man doesn’t pay attention, apply the mind, concentrate wholeheartedly, or actively listen to the teaching.’ Still, Bhaddāli, I shall teach the exposition on the simile of the thoroughbred colt. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Na kho, bhaddāli, eseva hetu, esa paccayo. Api ca me tvaṁ, bhaddāli, dīgharattaṁ cetasā cetoparicca vidito: ‘na cāyaṁ moghapuriso mayā dhamme desiyamāne aṭṭhiṁ katvā manasi katvā sabbacetaso samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṁ suṇātī’ti. Api ca te ahaṁ, bhaddāli, ājānīyasusūpamaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ desessāmi. Taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶52] “Yes, sir,” Bhaddāli replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā bhaddāli bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶53] “Suppose a deft horse trainer were to obtain a fine thoroughbred. First of all he’d make it get used to wearing the bit. Because it has not done this before, it still resorts to some twists, ducks, and dodges. But with regular and gradual practice its bad behavior is extinguished.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhaddāli, dakkho assadamako bhadraṁ assājānīyaṁ labhitvā paṭhameneva mukhādhāne kāraṇaṁ kāreti. Tassa mukhādhāne kāraṇaṁ kāriyamānassa hontiyeva visūkāyitāni visevitāni vipphanditāni kānici kānici, yathā taṁ akāritapubbaṁ kāraṇaṁ kāriyamānassa. So abhiṇhakāraṇā anupubbakāraṇā tasmiṁ ṭhāne parinibbāyati.
[¶54] When it has done this, the horse trainer next makes it get used to wearing the harness. Because it has not done this before, it still resorts to some twists, ducks, and dodges. But with regular and gradual practice its bad behavior is extinguished.
> Pali: Yato kho, bhaddāli, bhadro assājānīyo abhiṇhakāraṇā anupubbakāraṇā tasmiṁ ṭhāne parinibbuto hoti, tamenaṁ assadamako uttari kāraṇaṁ kāreti yugādhāne. Tassa yugādhāne kāraṇaṁ kāriyamānassa hontiyeva visūkāyitāni visevitāni vipphanditāni kānici kānici, yathā taṁ akāritapubbaṁ kāraṇaṁ kāriyamānassa. So abhiṇhakāraṇā anupubbakāraṇā tasmiṁ ṭhāne parinibbāyati.
[¶55] When it has done this, the horse trainer next makes it get used to walking in procession, circling, prancing, galloping, charging, the protocols and customs of court, and in the very best speed, fleetness, and camaraderie. Because it has not done this before, it still resorts to some twists, ducks, and dodges. But with regular and gradual practice its bad behavior is extinguished.
> Pali: Yato kho, bhaddāli, bhadro assājānīyo abhiṇhakāraṇā anupubbakāraṇā tasmiṁ ṭhāne parinibbuto hoti, tamenaṁ assadamako uttari kāraṇaṁ kāreti anukkame maṇḍale khurakāse dhāve davatte rājaguṇe rājavaṁse uttame jave uttame haye uttame sākhalye. Tassa uttame jave uttame haye uttame sākhalye kāraṇaṁ kāriyamānassa hontiyeva visūkāyitāni visevitāni vipphanditāni kānici kānici, yathā taṁ akāritapubbaṁ kāraṇaṁ kāriyamānassa. So abhiṇhakāraṇā anupubbakāraṇā tasmiṁ ṭhāne parinibbāyati.
[¶56] When it has done this, the horse trainer next rewards it with a grooming and a rub down. A fine royal thoroughbred with these ten factors is worthy of a king, fit to serve a king, and reckoned as a factor of kingship.
> Pali: Yato kho, bhaddāli, bhadro assājānīyo abhiṇhakāraṇā anupubbakāraṇā tasmiṁ ṭhāne parinibbuto hoti, tamenaṁ assadamako uttari vaṇṇiyañca pāṇiyañca anuppavecchati. Imehi kho, bhaddāli, dasahaṅgehi samannāgato bhadro assājānīyo rājāraho hoti rājabhoggo rañño aṅganteva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶57] In the same way, a mendicant with ten qualities is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of veneration with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world. What ten? It’s when a mendicant has an adept’s right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right immersion, right knowledge, and right freedom. A mendicant with these ten qualities is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of veneration with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhaddāli, dasahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu āhuneyyo hoti pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassa. Katamehi dasahi? Idha, bhaddāli, bhikkhu asekhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāsaṅkappena samannāgato hoti, asekhāya sammāvācāya samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammākammantena samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāājīvena samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāvāyāmena samannāgato hoti, asekhāya sammāsatiyā samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāsamādhinā samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāñāṇena samannāgato hoti, asekhāya sammāvimuttiyā samannāgato hoti— imehi kho, bhaddāli, dasahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu āhuneyyo hoti pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassā”ti.
[¶58] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Bhaddāli approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā bhaddāli bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶59] > Pali: Bhaddālisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 71. MN 66 · The Simile of the Quail
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/71/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/71/#p-N
[¶0] MN 66 · The Simile of the Quail
> Pali: MN 66 · Laṭukikopamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Aṅguttarāpans, near the town of theirs named Āpaṇa.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā aṅguttarāpesu viharati āpaṇaṁ nāma aṅguttarāpānaṁ nigamo.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Āpaṇa for alms. He wandered for alms in Āpaṇa. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to a certain forest grove for the day’s meditation. Having plunged deep into it, he sat at the root of a certain tree to meditate.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya āpaṇaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Āpaṇe piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yenaññataro vanasaṇḍo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.
[¶3] Venerable Udāyī also robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Āpaṇa for alms. He wandered for alms in Āpaṇa. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to that forest grove for the day’s meditation. Having plunged deep into it, he sat at the root of a certain tree to meditate. Then as Venerable Udāyī was in private retreat this thought came to his mind:
> Pali: Āyasmāpi kho udāyī pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya āpaṇaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Āpaṇe piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena so vanasaṇḍo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi. Atha kho āyasmato udāyissa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi:
[¶4] “The Buddha has rid us of so many things that bring suffering and gifted us so many things that bring happiness! He has rid us of so many unskillful things and gifted us so many skillful things!”
> Pali: “bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā dukkhadhammānaṁ apahattā, bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā sukhadhammānaṁ upahattā; bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ apahattā, bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upahattā”ti.
[¶5] Then in the late afternoon, Udāyī came out of retreat and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā udāyī sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā udāyī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶6] “Just now, sir, as I was in private retreat this thought came to mind: ‘The Buddha has rid us of so many things that bring suffering and gifted us so many things that bring happiness! He has rid us of so many unskillful things and gifted us so many skillful things!’
> Pali: “idha mayhaṁ, bhante, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā dukkhadhammānaṁ apahattā, bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā sukhadhammānaṁ upahattā; bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ apahattā, bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upahattā’ti.
[¶7] For we used to eat at dusk, at daybreak, and at the wrong time of day. But then there came a time when the Buddha addressed the mendicants, saying, ‘Please, mendicants, give up that meal at the wrong time of day.’ At that, sir, we became sad and upset, ‘But these faithful householders give us delicious fresh and cooked foods at the wrong time of day. And the Blessed One tells us to give it up! The Holy One tells us to let it go!’ But when we considered our fondness and respect for the Buddha, and our sense of conscience and prudence, we gave up that meal at the wrong time of day. Then we ate at dusk and daybreak.
> Pali: Mayañhi, bhante, pubbe sāyañceva bhuñjāma pāto ca divā ca vikāle. Ahu kho so, bhante, samayo yaṁ bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: ‘iṅgha tumhe, bhikkhave, etaṁ divāvikālabhojanaṁ pajahathā’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, ahudeva aññathattaṁ, ahudeva domanassaṁ: ‘yampi no saddhā gahapatikā divā vikāle paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ denti tassapi no bhagavā pahānamāha, tassapi no sugato paṭinissaggamāhā’ti. Te mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavati pemañca gāravañca hiriñca ottappañca sampassamānā evaṁ taṁ divāvikālabhojanaṁ pajahimhā. Te mayaṁ, bhante, sāyañceva bhuñjāma pāto ca.
[¶8] But then there came a time when the Buddha addressed the mendicants, saying, ‘Please, mendicants, give up that meal at the wrong time of night.’ At that, sir, we became sad and upset, ‘But that’s considered the more delicious of the two meals. And the Blessed One tells us to give it up! The Holy One tells us to let it go!’ Once it so happened that a certain person got some soup during the day. He said, ‘Come, let’s set this aside; we’ll enjoy it together this evening.’ Nearly all meals are prepared at night, only a few in the day. But when we considered our love and respect for the Buddha, and our sense of conscience and prudence, we gave up that meal at the wrong time of night.
> Pali: Ahu kho so, bhante, samayo yaṁ bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: ‘iṅgha tumhe, bhikkhave, etaṁ rattiṁvikālabhojanaṁ pajahathā’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, ahudeva aññathattaṁ ahudeva domanassaṁ: ‘yampi no imesaṁ dvinnaṁ bhattānaṁ paṇītasaṅkhātataraṁ tassapi no bhagavā pahānamāha, tassapi no sugato paṭinissaggamāhā’ti. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhante, aññataro puriso divā sūpeyyaṁ labhitvā evamāha: ‘handa ca imaṁ nikkhipatha, sāyaṁ sabbeva samaggā bhuñjissāmā’ti. Yā kāci, bhante, saṅkhatiyo sabbā tā rattiṁ, appā divā. Te mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavati pemañca gāravañca hiriñca ottappañca sampassamānā evaṁ taṁ rattiṁvikālabhojanaṁ pajahimhā.
[¶9] In the past, mendicants went wandering for alms in the dark of the night. They walked into a swamp, or fell into a sewer, or collided with a thorn bush, or collided with a sleeping cow, or encountered youths escaping a crime or on their way to commit one, or were invited by a lady to commit a lewd act.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhante, bhikkhū rattandhakāratimisāyaṁ piṇḍāya carantā candanikampi pavisanti, oligallepi papatanti, kaṇṭakāvāṭampi ārohanti, suttampi gāviṁ ārohanti, māṇavehipi samāgacchanti katakammehipi akatakammehipi, mātugāmopi te asaddhammena nimanteti.
[¶10] Once it so happened that I was wandering for alms in the dark of the night. A woman washing a pot saw me by a flash of lightning. Startled, she cried out, ‘Woe is me! It’s a damn goblin!’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbāhaṁ, bhante, rattandhakāratimisāyaṁ piṇḍāya carāmi. Addasā kho maṁ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṁ dhovantī. Disvā maṁ bhītā vissaramakāsi: ‘abhumme pisāco vata man’ti.
[¶11] When she said this, I said to her, ‘Sister, I am no goblin. I’m a mendicant waiting for alms.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, taṁ itthiṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘nāhaṁ, bhagini, pisāco; bhikkhu piṇḍāya ṭhito’ti.
[¶12] ‘Die, mendicant’s father! Die, mendicant’s mother! Better to have your belly sliced open with a sharp meat cleaver than to wander for alms in the dark of night for the sake of your belly!’
> Pali: ‘Bhikkhussa ātumārī, bhikkhussa mātumārī. Varaṁ te, bhikkhu, tiṇhena govikantanena kucchi parikanto, na tveva varaṁ yaṁ rattandhakāratimisāyaṁ kucchihetu piṇḍāya carasī’ti.
[¶13] Recollecting that, I thought, ‘The Buddha has rid us of so many things that bring suffering and gifted us so many things that bring happiness! He has rid us of so many unskillful things and gifted us so many skillful things!’”
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, tadanussarato evaṁ hoti: ‘bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā dukkhadhammānaṁ apahattā, bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā sukhadhammānaṁ upahattā; bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ apahattā, bahūnaṁ vata no bhagavā kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upahattā’”ti.
[¶14] “This is exactly what happens when some futile people are told by me to give something up. They say, ‘What, such a trivial, trifling thing as this? This ascetic is much too strict!’ They don’t give it up, and they nurse bitterness toward me; and for the mendicants eager to train, that becomes a strong, firm, stout bond, a tie that has not rotted, and a heavy yoke.
> Pali: “Evameva panudāyi, idhekacce moghapurisā ‘idaṁ pajahathā’ti mayā vuccamānā te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁ panimassa appamattakassa oramattakassa adhisallikhatevāyaṁ samaṇo’ti. Te tañceva nappajahanti, mayi ca appaccayaṁ upaṭṭhāpenti. Ye ca bhikkhū sikkhākāmā tesaṁ taṁ, udāyi, hoti balavaṁ bandhanaṁ, daḷhaṁ bandhanaṁ, thiraṁ bandhanaṁ, apūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, thūlo, kaliṅgaro—
[¶15] Suppose a quail was tied with a vine, and was waiting there to be injured, caged, or killed. Would it be right to say that, for that quail, that vine is weak, feeble, rotten, and insubstantial?”
> Pali: seyyathāpi, udāyi, laṭukikā sakuṇikā pūtilatāya bandhanena baddhā tattheva vadhaṁ vā bandhaṁ vā maraṇaṁ vā āgameti. Yo nu kho, udāyi, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yena sā laṭukikā sakuṇikā pūtilatāya bandhanena baddhā tattheva vadhaṁ vā bandhaṁ vā maraṇaṁ vā āgameti, tañhi tassā abalaṁ bandhanaṁ, dubbalaṁ bandhanaṁ, pūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, asārakaṁ bandhanan’ti; sammā nu kho so, udāyi, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶16] “No, sir. For that quail, that vine is a strong, firm, stout bond, a tie that has not rotted, and a heavy yoke.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Yena sā, bhante, laṭukikā sakuṇikā pūtilatāya bandhanena baddhā tattheva vadhaṁ vā bandhaṁ vā maraṇaṁ vā āgameti, tañhi tassā balavaṁ bandhanaṁ, daḷhaṁ bandhanaṁ, thiraṁ bandhanaṁ apūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, thūlo, kaliṅgaro”ti.
[¶17] “In the same way, when some futile people are told by me to give something up, they say, ‘What, such a trivial, trifling thing as this? This ascetic is much too strict!’ They don’t give it up, and they nurse bitterness toward me; and for the mendicants eager to train, that becomes a strong, firm, stout bond, a tie that has not rotted, and a heavy yoke.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, udāyi, idhekacce moghapurisā ‘idaṁ pajahathā’ti mayā vuccamānā te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁ panimassa appamattakassa oramattakassa adhisallikhatevāyaṁ samaṇo’ti? Te tañceva nappajahanti, mayi ca appaccayaṁ upaṭṭhāpenti. Ye ca bhikkhū sikkhākāmā tesaṁ taṁ, udāyi, hoti balavaṁ bandhanaṁ, daḷhaṁ bandhanaṁ, thiraṁ bandhanaṁ, apūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, thūlo, kaliṅgaro.
[¶18] But when some gentlemen are told by me to give something up, they say, ‘What, we just have to give up such a trivial, trifling thing as this, when the Blessed One tells us to give it up, the Holy One tells us to let it go?’ They give it up, and they don’t nurse bitterness toward me; and when the mendicants eager to train have given that up, they live relaxed, unruffled, surviving on charity, their hearts free as a wild deer. For them, that bond is weak, feeble, rotten, and insubstantial.
> Pali: Idha panudāyi, ekacce kulaputtā ‘idaṁ pajahathā’ti mayā vuccamānā te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁ panimassa appamattakassa oramattakassa pahātabbassa yassa no bhagavā pahānamāha, yassa no sugato paṭinissaggamāhā’ti? Te tañceva pajahanti, mayi ca na appaccayaṁ upaṭṭhāpenti. Ye ca bhikkhū sikkhākāmā te taṁ pahāya appossukkā pannalomā paradattavuttā migabhūtena cetasā viharanti. Tesaṁ taṁ, udāyi, hoti abalaṁ bandhanaṁ, dubbalaṁ bandhanaṁ, pūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, asārakaṁ bandhanaṁ—
[¶19] Suppose there was a royal bull elephant with tusks like draft-poles, able to draw a heavy load, pedigree and battle-hardened. And it was bound with a strong harness. But just by twisting its body a little, it would break apart its bonds and go wherever it wants. Would it be right to say that, for that bull elephant, that strong harness is a strong, firm, stout bond, a tie that has not rotted, and a heavy yoke?”
> Pali: seyyathāpi, udāyi, rañño nāgo īsādanto urūḷhavā abhijāto saṅgāmāvacaro daḷhehi varattehi bandhanehi baddho īsakaṁyeva kāyaṁ sannāmetvā tāni bandhanāni saṁchinditvā sampadāletvā yena kāmaṁ pakkamati. Yo nu kho, udāyi, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yehi so rañño nāgo īsādanto urūḷhavā abhijāto saṅgāmāvacaro daḷhehi varattehi bandhanehi baddho īsakaṁyeva kāyaṁ sannāmetvā tāni bandhanāni saṁchinditvā sampadāletvā yena kāmaṁ pakkamati, tañhi tassa balavaṁ bandhanaṁ, daḷhaṁ bandhanaṁ, thiraṁ bandhanaṁ, apūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, thūlo, kaliṅgaro’ti; sammā nu kho so, udāyi, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶20] “No, sir. For that bull elephant, that strong harness is weak, feeble, rotten, and insubstantial.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Yehi so, bhante, rañño nāgo īsādanto urūḷhavā abhijāto saṅgāmāvacaro daḷhehi varattehi bandhanehi baddho īsakaṁyeva kāyaṁ sannāmetvā tāni bandhanāni saṁchinditvā sampadāletvā yena kāmaṁ pakkamati, tañhi tassa abalaṁ bandhanaṁ …pe… asārakaṁ bandhanan”ti.
[¶21] “In the same way, when some gentlemen are told by me to give something up, they say, ‘What, we just have to give up such a trivial, trifling thing as this, when the Blessed One tells us to give it up, the Holy One tells us to let it go?’ They give it up, and they don’t nurse bitterness toward me; and when the mendicants eager to train have given that up, they live relaxed, unruffled, surviving on charity, their hearts free as a wild deer. For them, that bond is weak, feeble, rotten, and insubstantial.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, udāyi, idhekacce kulaputtā ‘idaṁ pajahathā’ti mayā vuccamānā te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁ panimassa appamattakassa oramattakassa pahātabbassa yassa no bhagavā pahānamāha, yassa no sugato paṭinissaggamāhā’ti? Te tañceva pajahanti, mayi ca na appaccayaṁ upaṭṭhāpenti. Ye ca bhikkhū sikkhākāmā te taṁ pahāya appossukkā pannalomā paradattavuttā migabhūtena cetasā viharanti. Tesaṁ taṁ, udāyi, hoti abalaṁ bandhanaṁ, dubbalaṁ bandhanaṁ, pūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, asārakaṁ bandhanaṁ.
[¶22] Suppose there was a poor man, with few possessions and little wealth. He had a single broken-down hovel open to the crows, not the best sort; a single broken-down couch, not the best sort; a single pot for storing grain, not the best sort; and a single wifey, not the best sort. He’d see a mendicant sitting in meditation in the cool shade, their hands and feet well washed after eating a satisfying meal. He’d think, ‘The ascetic life is so very pleasant! The ascetic life is so very healthy! If only I could shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ But he’s not able to give up his broken-down hovel, his broken-down couch, his pot for storing grain, or his wifey—none of which are the best sort—in order to go forth. Would it be right to say that, for that man, those bonds are weak, feeble, rotten, and insubstantial?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso daliddo assako anāḷhiyo; tassassa ekaṁ agārakaṁ oluggaviluggaṁ kākātidāyiṁ naparamarūpaṁ, ekā khaṭopikā oluggaviluggā naparamarūpā, ekissā kumbhiyā dhaññasamavāpakaṁ naparamarūpaṁ, ekā jāyikā naparamarūpā. So ārāmagataṁ bhikkhuṁ passeyya sudhotahatthapādaṁ manuññaṁ bhojanaṁ bhuttāviṁ sītāya chāyāya nisinnaṁ adhicitte yuttaṁ. Tassa evamassa: ‘sukhaṁ vata bho sāmaññaṁ, ārogyaṁ vata bho sāmaññaṁ. So vatassaṁ yohaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So na sakkuṇeyya ekaṁ agārakaṁ oluggaviluggaṁ kākātidāyiṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekaṁ khaṭopikaṁ oluggaviluggaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekissā kumbhiyā dhaññasamavāpakaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekaṁ jāyikaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Yo nu kho, udāyi, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yehi so puriso bandhanehi baddho na sakkoti ekaṁ agārakaṁ oluggaviluggaṁ kākātidāyiṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekaṁ khaṭopikaṁ oluggaviluggaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekissā kumbhiyā dhaññasamavāpakaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekaṁ jāyikaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ; tañhi tassa abalaṁ bandhanaṁ, dubbalaṁ bandhanaṁ, pūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, asārakaṁ bandhanan’ti; sammā nu kho so, udāyi, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶23] “No, sir. For that man, they are a strong, firm, stout bond, a tie that has not rotted, and a heavy yoke.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Yehi so, bhante, puriso bandhanehi baddho, na sakkoti ekaṁ agārakaṁ oluggaviluggaṁ kākātidāyiṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekaṁ khaṭopikaṁ oluggaviluggaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekissā kumbhiyā dhaññasamavāpakaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya, ekaṁ jāyikaṁ naparamarūpaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ; tañhi tassa balavaṁ bandhanaṁ, daḷhaṁ bandhanaṁ, thiraṁ bandhanaṁ, apūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, thūlo, kaliṅgaro”ti.
[¶24] “In the same way, when some futile people are told by me to give something up, they say, ‘What, such a trivial, trifling thing as this? This ascetic is much too strict!’ They don’t give it up, and they nurse bitterness toward me; and for the mendicants eager to train, that becomes a strong, firm, stout bond, a tie that has not rotted, and a heavy yoke.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, udāyi, idhekacce moghapurisā ‘idaṁ pajahathā’ti mayā vuccamānā te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁ panimassa appamattakassa oramattakassa adhisallikhatevāyaṁ samaṇo’ti? Te tañceva nappajahanti, mayi ca appaccayaṁ upaṭṭhāpenti. Ye ca bhikkhū sikkhākāmā tesaṁ taṁ, udāyi, hoti balavaṁ bandhanaṁ, daḷhaṁ bandhanaṁ, thiraṁ bandhanaṁ, apūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, thūlo, kaliṅgaro.
[¶25] Suppose there was a rich householder or householder’s child, affluent, and wealthy. He had a vast amount of gold ingots, grain, fields, lands, wives, and male and female bondservants. He’d see a mendicant sitting in meditation in the cool shade, their hands and feet well washed after eating a satisfying meal. He’d think, ‘The ascetic life is so very pleasant! The ascetic life is so very healthy! If only I could shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ And he is able to give up his vast amount of gold ingots, grain, fields, lands, wives, and male and female bondservants in order to go forth. Would it be right to say that, for that householder, they are a strong, firm, stout bond, a tie that has not rotted, and a heavy yoke?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, udāyi, gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo, nekānaṁ nikkhagaṇānaṁ cayo, nekānaṁ dhaññagaṇānaṁ cayo, nekānaṁ khettagaṇānaṁ cayo, nekānaṁ vatthugaṇānaṁ cayo, nekānaṁ bhariyagaṇānaṁ cayo, nekānaṁ dāsagaṇānaṁ cayo, nekānaṁ dāsigaṇānaṁ cayo; so ārāmagataṁ bhikkhuṁ passeyya sudhotahatthapādaṁ manuññaṁ bhojanaṁ bhuttāviṁ sītāya chāyāya nisinnaṁ adhicitte yuttaṁ. Tassa evamassa: ‘sukhaṁ vata bho sāmaññaṁ, ārogyaṁ vata bho sāmaññaṁ. So vatassaṁ yohaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So sakkuṇeyya nekāni nikkhagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dhaññagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni khettagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni vatthugaṇāni pahāya, nekāni bhariyagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dāsagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dāsigaṇāni pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Yo nu kho, udāyi, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yehi so gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā bandhanehi baddho, sakkoti nekāni nikkhagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dhaññagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni khettagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni vatthugaṇāni pahāya, nekāni bhariyagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dāsagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dāsigaṇāni pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ, tañhi tassa balavaṁ bandhanaṁ, daḷhaṁ bandhanaṁ, thiraṁ bandhanaṁ, apūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, thūlo, kaliṅgaro’ti; sammā nu kho so, udāyi, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶26] “No, sir. For that householder, those bonds are weak, feeble, rotten, and insubstantial.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Yehi so, bhante, gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā bandhanehi baddho, sakkoti nekāni nikkhagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dhaññagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni khettagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni vatthugaṇāni pahāya, nekāni bhariyagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dāsagaṇāni pahāya, nekāni dāsigaṇāni pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ; tañhi tassa abalaṁ bandhanaṁ, dubbalaṁ bandhanaṁ, pūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, asārakaṁ bandhanan”ti.
[¶27] “In the same way, when some gentlemen are told by me to give something up, they say, ‘What, we just have to give up such a trivial, trifling thing as this, when the Blessed One tells us to give it up, the Holy One tells us to let it go?’ They give it up, and they don’t nurse bitterness toward me; and when the mendicants eager to train have given that up, they live relaxed, unruffled, surviving on charity, their hearts free as a wild deer. For them, that bond is weak, feeble, rotten, and insubstantial.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, udāyi, idhekacce kulaputtā ‘idaṁ pajahathā’ti mayā vuccamānā te evamāhaṁsu: ‘kiṁ panimassa appamattakassa oramattakassa pahātabbassa yassa no bhagavā pahānamāha, yassa no sugato paṭinissaggamāhā’ti? Te tañceva pajahanti, mayi ca na appaccayaṁ upaṭṭhāpenti. Ye ca bhikkhū sikkhākāmā te taṁ pahāya appossukkā pannalomā paradattavuttā migabhūtena cetasā viharanti. Tesaṁ taṁ, udāyi, hoti abalaṁ bandhanaṁ, dubbalaṁ bandhanaṁ, pūtikaṁ bandhanaṁ, asārakaṁ bandhanaṁ.
[¶28] Udāyī, these four individuals are found in the world. What four?
> Pali: Cattārome, udāyi, puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ. Katame cattāro?
[¶29] Take a certain individual practicing to give up and let go of attachments. As they do so, memories and thoughts connected with attachments beset them. They tolerate them and don’t give them up, dispel them, eliminate them, and obliterate them. I call this individual ‘fettered’, not ‘detached’. Why is that? Because I understand the disparity of faculties as it applies to this individual.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, ekacco puggalo upadhipahānāya paṭipanno hoti upadhipaṭinissaggāya. Tamenaṁ upadhipahānāya paṭipannaṁ upadhipaṭinissaggāya upadhipaṭisaṁyuttā sarasaṅkappā samudācaranti. So te adhivāseti, nappajahati, na vinodeti, na byantīkaroti, na anabhāvaṁ gameti. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, udāyi, puggalaṁ ‘saṁyutto’ti vadāmi no ‘visaṁyutto’. Taṁ kissa hetu? Indriyavemattatā hi me, udāyi, imasmiṁ puggale viditā.
[¶30] Take another individual practicing to give up and let go of attachments. As they do so, memories and thoughts connected with attachments beset them. They don’t tolerate them, but give them up, dispel them, eliminate them, and obliterate them. I also call this individual ‘fettered’, not ‘detached’. Why is that? Because I understand the disparity of faculties as it applies to this individual.
> Pali: Idha panudāyi, ekacco puggalo upadhipahānāya paṭipanno hoti upadhipaṭinissaggāya. Tamenaṁ upadhipahānāya paṭipannaṁ upadhipaṭinissaggāya upadhipaṭisaṁyuttā sarasaṅkappā samudācaranti. So te nādhivāseti, pajahati, vinodeti, byantīkaroti, anabhāvaṁ gameti. Imampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, puggalaṁ ‘saṁyutto’ti vadāmi no ‘visaṁyutto’. Taṁ kissa hetu? Indriyavemattatā hi me, udāyi, imasmiṁ puggale viditā.
[¶31] Take another individual practicing to give up and let go of attachments. As they do so, memories and thoughts connected with attachments beset them every so often, due to the loss of mindfulness. Slowly mindfulness arises, then they quickly give up, dispel, eliminate, and obliterate those thoughts. Suppose there was an iron cauldron that had been heated all day, and a person let two or three drops of water fall onto it. Slowly the drops fall, but then they quickly dry up and evaporate.
> Pali: Idha panudāyi, ekacco puggalo upadhipahānāya paṭipanno hoti upadhipaṭinissaggāya. Tamenaṁ upadhipahānāya paṭipannaṁ upadhipaṭinissaggāya kadāci karahaci satisammosā upadhipaṭisaṁyuttā sarasaṅkappā samudācaranti; dandho, udāyi, satuppādo. Atha kho naṁ khippameva pajahati, vinodeti, byantīkaroti, anabhāvaṁ gameti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso divasaṁsantatte ayokaṭāhe dve vā tīṇi vā udakaphusitāni nipāteyya; dandho, udāyi, udakaphusitānaṁ nipāto. Atha kho naṁ khippameva parikkhayaṁ pariyādānaṁ gaccheyya.
[¶32] In the same way, take an individual practicing to give up and let go of attachments. As they do so, memories and thoughts connected with attachments beset them every so often, due to the loss of mindfulness. Slowly mindfulness arises, but then they quickly give up, dispel, eliminate, and obliterate those thoughts. I also call this individual ‘fettered’, not ‘detached’. Why is that? Because I understand the disparity of faculties as it applies to this individual.
> Pali: Evameva kho, udāyi, idhekacco puggalo upadhipahānāya paṭipanno hoti upadhipaṭinissaggāya. Tamenaṁ upadhipahānāya paṭipannaṁ upadhipaṭinissaggāya kadāci karahaci satisammosā upadhipaṭisaṁyuttā sarasaṅkappā samudācaranti; dandho, udāyi, satuppādo. Atha kho naṁ khippameva pajahati, vinodeti, byantīkaroti, anabhāvaṁ gameti. Imampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, puggalaṁ ‘saṁyutto’ti vadāmi no ‘visaṁyutto’. Taṁ kissa hetu? Indriyavemattatā hi me, udāyi, imasmiṁ puggale viditā.
[¶33] Take another individual who, understanding that attachment is the root of suffering, is freed with the ending of attachments. I call this individual ‘detached’, not ‘fettered’. Why is that? Because I understand the disparity of faculties as it applies to this individual. These are the four individuals found in the world.
> Pali: Idha panudāyi, ekacco puggalo ‘upadhi dukkhassa mūlan’ti— iti viditvā nirupadhi hoti, upadhisaṅkhaye vimutto. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, udāyi, puggalaṁ ‘visaṁyutto’ti vadāmi no ‘saṁyutto’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Indriyavemattatā hi me, udāyi, imasmiṁ puggale viditā. Ime kho, udāyi, cattāro puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ.
[¶34] Udāyī, these are the five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Pañca kho ime, udāyi, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Ime kho, udāyi, pañca kāmaguṇā.
[¶35] The pleasure and happiness that arise from these five kinds of sensual stimulation is called sensual pleasure—a filthy, ordinary, ignoble pleasure. Such pleasure should not be cultivated or developed, but should be feared, I say.
> Pali: Yaṁ kho, udāyi, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati kāmasukhaṁ miḷhasukhaṁ puthujjanasukhaṁ anariyasukhaṁ, na sevitabbaṁ, na bhāvetabbaṁ, na bahulīkātabbaṁ; ‘bhāyitabbaṁ etassa sukhassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶36] Take a mendicant who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶37] This is called the pleasure of renunciation, the pleasure of seclusion, the pleasure of peace, the pleasure of awakening. Such pleasure should be cultivated and developed, and should not be feared, I say.
> Pali: Idaṁ vuccati nekkhammasukhaṁ pavivekasukhaṁ upasamasukhaṁ sambodhasukhaṁ, āsevitabbaṁ, bhāvetabbaṁ, bahulīkātabbaṁ; ‘na bhāyitabbaṁ etassa sukhassā’ti vadāmi.
[¶38] Take a mendicant who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption. This belongs to the perturbable, I say. And what there belongs to the perturbable? Whatever placing of the mind and keeping it connected has not ceased there is what belongs to the perturbable.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; idaṁ kho ahaṁ, udāyi, iñjitasmiṁ vadāmi. Kiñca tattha iñjitasmiṁ? Yadeva tattha vitakkavicārā aniruddhā honti idaṁ tattha iñjitasmiṁ.
[¶39] Take a mendicant who, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, enters and remains in the second absorption. This belongs to the perturbable, I say. And what there belongs to the perturbable? Whatever rapture and bliss has not ceased there is what belongs to the perturbable.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, iñjitasmiṁ vadāmi. Kiñca tattha iñjitasmiṁ? Yadeva tattha pītisukhaṁ aniruddhaṁ hoti idaṁ tattha iñjitasmiṁ.
[¶40] Take a mendicant who, with the fading away of rapture, enters and remains in the third absorption. This belongs to the perturbable. And what there belongs to the perturbable? Whatever bliss with equanimity has not ceased there is what belongs to the perturbable.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, iñjitasmiṁ vadāmi. Kiñca tattha iñjitasmiṁ? Yadeva tattha upekkhāsukhaṁ aniruddhaṁ hoti idaṁ tattha iñjitasmiṁ.
[¶41] Take a mendicant who, giving up pleasure and pain, enters and remains in the fourth absorption. This belongs to the imperturbable, I say.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; idaṁ kho ahaṁ, udāyi, aniñjitasmiṁ vadāmi.
[¶42] Take a mendicant who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption. But this is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; idaṁ kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶43] Take a mendicant who, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, enters and remains in the second absorption. That goes beyond it. But this too is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶44] Take a mendicant who, with the fading away of rapture, enters and remains in the third absorption. That goes beyond it. But this too is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶45] Take a mendicant who, giving up pleasure and pain, enters and remains in the fourth absorption. That goes beyond it. But this too is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶46] Take a mendicant who, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. That goes beyond it. But this too is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶47] Take a mendicant who, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. That goes beyond it. But this too is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶48] Take a mendicant who, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. That goes beyond it. But this too is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶49] Take a mendicant who, going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, enters and remains in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. That goes beyond it. But this too is not enough, I say: give it up, go beyond it. And what goes beyond it?
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo; idampi kho ahaṁ, udāyi, ‘analan’ti vadāmi, ‘pajahathā’ti vadāmi, ‘samatikkamathā’ti vadāmi. Ko ca tassa samatikkamo?
[¶50] Take a mendicant who, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, enters and remains in the cessation of perception and feeling. That goes beyond it.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ tassa samatikkamo;
[¶51] So, Udāyī, I even recommend giving up the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Do you see any fetter, large or small, that I don’t recommend giving up?”
> Pali: iti kho ahaṁ, udāyi, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanassapi pahānaṁ vadāmi. Passasi no tvaṁ, udāyi, taṁ saṁyojanaṁ aṇuṁ vā thūlaṁ vā yassāhaṁ no pahānaṁ vadāmī”ti?
[¶52] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”ti.
[¶53] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Udāyī approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā udāyī bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶54] > Pali: Laṭukikopamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 72. MN 67 · At Cātumā
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/72/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/72/#p-N
[¶0] MN 67 · At Cātumā
> Pali: MN 67 · Cātumasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Cātumā in a myrobalan grove.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā cātumāyaṁ viharati āmalakīvane.
[¶2] Now at that time five hundred mendicants headed by Sāriputta and Moggallāna arrived at Cātumā to see the Buddha. And the visiting mendicants, while exchanging pleasantries with the resident mendicants, preparing their lodgings, and putting away their bowls and robes, made a colossal racket.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sāriputtamoggallānappamukhāni pañcamattāni bhikkhusatāni cātumaṁ anuppattāni honti bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Te ca āgantukā bhikkhū nevāsikehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ paṭisammodamānā senāsanāni paññāpayamānā pattacīvarāni paṭisāmayamānā uccāsaddā mahāsaddā ahesuṁ.
[¶3] Then the Buddha said to Venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, who’s making that colossal racket? You’d think it was fishermen hauling in a catch!”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “ke panete, ānanda, uccāsaddā mahāsaddā, kevaṭṭā maññe macchavilope”ti?
[¶4] And Ānanda told him what had happened.
> Pali: “Etāni, bhante, sāriputtamoggallānappamukhāni pañcamattāni bhikkhusatāni cātumaṁ anuppattāni bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Te āgantukā bhikkhū nevāsikehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ paṭisammodamānā senāsanāni paññāpayamānā pattacīvarāni paṭisāmayamānā uccāsaddā mahāsaddā”ti.
[¶5] “Well then, Ānanda, in my name tell those mendicants that the Teacher summons them.”
> Pali: “Tenahānanda, mama vacanena te bhikkhū āmantehi: ‘satthā āyasmante āmantetī’”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. He went to those mendicants and said, “Venerables, the Teacher summons you.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “satthā āyasmante āmantetī”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, reverend,” replied those mendicants. Then they rose from their seats and went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to them:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato ānandassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te bhikkhū bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶8] “Mendicants, what’s with that colossal racket? You’d think it was fishermen hauling in a catch!”
> Pali: “kiṁ nu tumhe, bhikkhave, uccāsaddā mahāsaddā, kevaṭṭā maññe macchavilope”ti?
[¶9] And they told him what had happened.
> Pali: “Imāni, bhante, sāriputtamoggallānappamukhāni pañcamattāni bhikkhusatāni cātumaṁ anuppattāni bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Teme āgantukā bhikkhū nevāsikehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ paṭisammodamānā senāsanāni paññāpayamānā pattacīvarāni paṭisāmayamānā uccāsaddā mahāsaddā”ti.
[¶10] “Go away, mendicants, I dismiss you. You are not to stay in my presence.”
> Pali: “Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo, na vo mama santike vatthabban”ti.
[¶11] “Yes, sir,” replied those mendicants. They got up from their seats, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right. They set their lodgings in order and left, taking their bowls and robes.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya pakkamiṁsu.
[¶12] Now at that time the Sakyans of Cātumā were sitting together at the town hall on some business. Seeing those mendicants coming off in the distance, they went up to them and said, “Hello venerables, where are you going?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena cātumeyyakā sakyā santhāgāre sannipatitā honti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Addasaṁsu kho cātumeyyakā sakyā te bhikkhū dūratova āgacchante; disvāna yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavocuṁ: “handa kahaṁ pana tumhe āyasmanto gacchathā”ti?
[¶13] “Reverends, the mendicant Saṅgha has been dismissed by the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Bhagavatā kho, āvuso, bhikkhusaṅgho paṇāmito”ti.
[¶14] “Well then, venerables, sit here for an hour. Hopefully we’ll be able to restore the Buddha’s confidence.”
> Pali: “Tenahāyasmanto muhuttaṁ nisīdatha, appeva nāma mayaṁ sakkuṇeyyāma bhagavantaṁ pasādetun”ti.
[¶15] “Yes, respectable sirs,” replied the mendicants.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū cātumeyyakānaṁ sakyānaṁ paccassosuṁ.
[¶16] Then the Sakyans of Cātumā went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho cātumeyyakā sakyā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho cātumeyyakā sakyā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ:
[¶17] “May the Buddha be happy with the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha welcome the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha support the mendicant Saṅgha now as he did in the past! There are mendicants here who are junior, recently gone forth, newly come to this teaching and training. If they don’t get to see the Buddha they may change and fall apart. If young seedlings don’t get water they may change and fall apart. In the same way, there are mendicants here who are junior, recently gone forth, newly come to this teaching and training. If they don’t get to see the Buddha they may change and fall apart. If a young calf doesn’t see its mother it may change and fall apart. In the same way, there are mendicants here who are junior, recently gone forth, newly come to this teaching and training. If they don’t get to see the Buddha they may change and fall apart. May the Buddha be happy with the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha welcome the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha support the mendicant Saṅgha now as he did in the past!”
> Pali: “abhinandatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ; abhivadatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhante, bhagavatā pubbe bhikkhusaṅgho anuggahito; evameva bhagavā etarahi anuggaṇhātu bhikkhusaṅghaṁ. Santettha, bhante, bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā adhunāgatā imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ. Tesaṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya alabhantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo. Seyyathāpi, bhante, bījānaṁ taruṇānaṁ udakaṁ alabhantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ siyā vipariṇāmo; evameva kho, bhante, santettha bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā adhunāgatā imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ, tesaṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya alabhantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo. Seyyathāpi, bhante, vacchassa taruṇassa mātaraṁ apassantassa siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo; evameva kho, bhante, santettha bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā adhunāgatā imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ, tesaṁ bhagavantaṁ apassantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo. Abhinandatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ; abhivadatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhante, bhagavatā pubbe bhikkhusaṅgho anuggahito; evameva bhagavā etarahi anuggaṇhātu bhikkhusaṅghan”ti.
[¶18] Then the divinity Sahampati knew the Buddha’s train of thought. As easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, he vanished from the realm of divinity and reappeared in front of the Buddha. He arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and said:
> Pali: Atha kho brahmā sahampati bhagavato cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—brahmaloke antarahito bhagavato purato pāturahosi. Atha kho brahmā sahampati ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶19] “May the Buddha be happy with the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha welcome the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha support the mendicant Saṅgha now as he did in the past! There are mendicants here who are junior, recently gone forth, newly come to this teaching and training. If they don’t get to see the Buddha they may change and fall apart. If young seedlings don’t get water they may change and fall apart. … If a young calf doesn’t see its mother it may change and fall apart. In the same way, there are mendicants here who are junior, recently gone forth, newly come to this teaching and training. If they don’t get to see the Buddha they may change and fall apart. May the Buddha be happy with the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha welcome the mendicant Saṅgha! May the Buddha support the mendicant Saṅgha now as he did in the past!”
> Pali: “abhinandatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ; abhivadatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhante, bhagavatā pubbe bhikkhusaṅgho anuggahito; evameva bhagavā etarahi anuggaṇhātu bhikkhusaṅghaṁ. Santettha, bhante, bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā adhunāgatā imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ, tesaṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya alabhantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo. Seyyathāpi, bhante, bījānaṁ taruṇānaṁ udakaṁ alabhantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo; evameva kho, bhante, santettha bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā adhunāgatā imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ, tesaṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya alabhantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo. Seyyathāpi, bhante, vacchassa taruṇassa mātaraṁ apassantassa siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo; evameva kho, bhante, santettha bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā adhunāgatā imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ, tesaṁ bhagavantaṁ apassantānaṁ siyā aññathattaṁ, siyā vipariṇāmo. Abhinandatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ; abhivadatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhante, bhagavatā pubbe bhikkhusaṅgho anuggahito; evameva bhagavā etarahi anuggaṇhātu bhikkhusaṅghan”ti.
[¶20] The Sakyans of Cātumā and the divinity Sahampati were able to restore the Buddha’s confidence with the similes of the seedlings and the calf.
> Pali: Asakkhiṁsu kho cātumeyyakā ca sakyā brahmā ca sahampati bhagavantaṁ pasādetuṁ bījūpamena ca taruṇūpamena ca.
[¶21] Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna addressed the mendicants, “Get up, reverends, and pick up your bowls and robes. The Buddha’s confidence has been restored by the Sakyans of Cātumā and the divinity Sahampati with the similes of the seedlings and the calf.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhikkhū āmantesi: “uṭṭhethāvuso, gaṇhatha pattacīvaraṁ. Pasādito bhagavā cātumeyyakehi ca sakyehi brahmunā ca sahampatinā bījūpamena ca taruṇūpamena cā”ti.
[¶22] “Yes, reverend,” replied those mendicants. Then they rose from their seats and, taking their bowls and robes, went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to Venerable Sāriputta, “Sāriputta, what did you think when the mendicant Saṅgha was dismissed by me?”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pattacīvaramādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “kinti te, sāriputta, ahosi mayā bhikkhusaṅghe paṇāmite”ti?
[¶23] “Sir, I thought this: ‘The Buddha has dismissed the mendicant Saṅgha. Now he will remain passive, dwelling in blissful meditation in this life, and so will we.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho me, bhante, ahosi: ‘bhagavatā bhikkhusaṅgho paṇāmito. Appossukko dāni bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ anuyutto viharissati, mayampi dāni appossukkā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāramanuyuttā viharissāmā’”ti.
[¶24] “Hold on, Sāriputta, hold on! Don’t you ever think such a thing again!”
> Pali: “Āgamehi tvaṁ, sāriputta, āgamehi tvaṁ, sāriputta, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāran”ti.
[¶25] Then the Buddha addressed Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, “Moggallāna, what did you think when the mendicant Saṅgha was dismissed by me?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ āmantesi: “kinti te, moggallāna, ahosi mayā bhikkhusaṅghe paṇāmite”ti?
[¶26] “Sir, I thought this: ‘The Buddha has dismissed the mendicant Saṅgha. Now he will remain passive, dwelling in blissful meditation in this life. Meanwhile, Venerable Sāriputta and I shall lead the mendicant Saṅgha.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho me, bhante, ahosi: ‘bhagavatā bhikkhusaṅgho paṇāmito. Appossukko dāni bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ anuyutto viharissati, ahañca dāni āyasmā ca sāriputto bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmā’”ti.
[¶27] “Good, good, Moggallāna! For either I should lead the mendicant Saṅgha, or else Sāriputta and Moggallāna.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, moggallāna. Ahaṁ vā hi, moggallāna, bhikkhusaṅghaṁ parihareyyaṁ sāriputtamoggallānā vā”ti.
[¶28] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶29] “Mendicants, when you go into the water you should anticipate four dangers. What four? The dangers of waves, gharials, whirlpools, and sharks. These are the four dangers that you should anticipate when you go into the water.
> Pali: “cattārimāni, bhikkhave, bhayāni udakorohante pāṭikaṅkhitabbāni. Katamāni cattāri? Ūmibhayaṁ, kumbhīlabhayaṁ, āvaṭṭabhayaṁ, susukābhayaṁ— imāni, bhikkhave, cattāri bhayāni udakorohante pāṭikaṅkhitabbāni.
[¶30] In the same way, an individual gone forth from the lay life to homelessness in this teaching and training should anticipate four dangers. What four? The dangers of waves, gharials, whirlpools, and sharks.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, cattārimāni bhayāni idhekacce puggale imasmiṁ dhammavinaye agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajite pāṭikaṅkhitabbāni. Katamāni cattāri? Ūmibhayaṁ, kumbhīlabhayaṁ, āvaṭṭabhayaṁ, susukābhayaṁ.
[¶31] And what, mendicants, is the danger of waves? It’s when a gentleman has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, thinking: ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth, their spiritual companions advise and instruct them: ‘You should go out like this, and come back like that. You should look to the front like this, and to the side like that. You should contract your limbs like this, and extend them like that. This is how you should bear your outer robe, bowl, and robes.’ They think: ‘Formerly, as laypeople, we advised and instructed others. And now these mendicants—who you’d think were our children or grandchildren—imagine they can advise and instruct us!’ They resign the training and return to a lesser life. This is called a mendicant who resigns the training and returns to a lesser life for fear of the danger of waves. ‘Danger of waves’ is a term for anger and distress.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, ūmibhayaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto; appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. Tamenaṁ tathā pabbajitaṁ samānaṁ sabrahmacārī ovadanti, anusāsanti: ‘evaṁ te abhikkamitabbaṁ, evaṁ te paṭikkamitabbaṁ, evaṁ te ālokitabbaṁ, evaṁ te vilokitabbaṁ, evaṁ te samiñjitabbaṁ, evaṁ te pasāritabbaṁ, evaṁ te saṅghāṭipattacīvaraṁ dhāretabban’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘mayaṁ kho pubbe agāriyabhūtā samānā aññe ovadāma, anusāsāma. Ime panamhākaṁ puttamattā maññe, nattamattā maññe, amhe ovaditabbaṁ anusāsitabbaṁ maññantī’ti. So sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, ūmibhayassa bhīto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvatto. ‘Ūmibhayan’ti kho, bhikkhave, kodhupāyāsassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶32] And what, mendicants, is the danger of gharials? It’s when a gentleman has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, thinking: ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth, their spiritual companions advise and instruct them: ‘You may eat, consume, taste, and drink these things, but not those. You may eat what’s allowable, but not what’s unallowable. You may eat at the right time, but not at the wrong time.’ They think: ‘Formerly, as laypeople, we used to eat, consume, taste, and drink what we wanted, not what we didn’t want. We ate and drank both allowable and unallowable things, at the right time and the wrong time. And these faithful householders give us delicious fresh and cooked foods at the wrong time of day. But these guys imagine they can gag our mouths!’ They resign the training and return to a lesser life. This is called one who resigns the training and returns to a lesser life because they’re afraid of the danger of gharials. ‘Danger of gharials’ is a term for gluttony.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, kumbhīlabhayaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto; appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. Tamenaṁ tathā pabbajitaṁ samānaṁ sabrahmacārī ovadanti anusāsanti: ‘idaṁ te khāditabbaṁ, idaṁ te na khāditabbaṁ; idaṁ te bhuñjitabbaṁ, idaṁ te na bhuñjitabbaṁ; idaṁ te sāyitabbaṁ, idaṁ te na sāyitabbaṁ; idaṁ te pātabbaṁ, idaṁ te na pātabbaṁ; kappiyaṁ te khāditabbaṁ, akappiyaṁ te na khāditabbaṁ; kappiyaṁ te bhuñjitabbaṁ, akappiyaṁ te na bhuñjitabbaṁ; kappiyaṁ te sāyitabbaṁ, akappiyaṁ te na sāyitabbaṁ; kappiyaṁ te pātabbaṁ, akappiyaṁ te na pātabbaṁ; kāle te khāditabbaṁ, vikāle te na khāditabbaṁ; kāle te bhuñjitabbaṁ, vikāle te na bhuñjitabbaṁ; kāle te sāyitabbaṁ, vikāle te na sāyitabbaṁ; kāle te pātabbaṁ, vikāle te na pātabban’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘mayaṁ kho pubbe agāriyabhūtā samānā yaṁ icchāma taṁ khādāma, yaṁ na icchāma na taṁ khādāma; yaṁ icchāma taṁ bhuñjāma, yaṁ na icchāma na taṁ bhuñjāma; yaṁ icchāma taṁ sāyāma, yaṁ na icchāma na taṁ sāyāma; yaṁ icchāma taṁ pivāma, yaṁ na icchāma na taṁ pivāma; kappiyampi khādāma, akappiyampi khādāma; kappiyampi bhuñjāma, akappiyampi bhuñjāma; kappiyampi sāyāma, akappiyampi sāyāma; kappiyampi pivāma, akappiyampi pivāma; kālepi khādāma, vikālepi khādāma; kālepi bhuñjāma vikālepi bhuñjāma; kālepi sāyāma, vikālepi sāyāma; kālepi pivāma, vikālepi pivāma. Yampi no saddhā gahapatikā divā vikāle paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ denti tatthapime mukhāvaraṇaṁ maññe karontī’ti. So sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, kumbhīlabhayassa bhīto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvatto. ‘Kumbhīlabhayan’ti kho, bhikkhave, odarikattassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶33] And what, mendicants, is the danger of whirlpools? It’s when a gentleman has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, thinking: ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth, they robe up in the morning and, taking their bowl and robe, enter a village or town for alms without guarding body, speech, and mind, without establishing mindfulness, and without restraining the sense faculties. There they see a householder or their child amusing themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. They think: ‘Formerly, as laypeople, we amused ourselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. And it’s true that my family is wealthy. I can both enjoy my wealth and make merit.’ They resign the training and return to a lesser life. This is called one who resigns the training and returns to a lesser life for fear of the danger of whirlpools. ‘Danger of whirlpools’ is a term for the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, āvaṭṭabhayaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto; appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya pavisati. Arakkhiteneva kāyena arakkhitāya vācāya anupaṭṭhitāya satiyā asaṁvutehi indriyehi so tattha passati gahapatiṁ vā gahapatiputtaṁ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṁ samaṅgībhūtaṁ paricārayamānaṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘mayaṁ kho pubbe agāriyabhūtā samānā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārimhā. Saṁvijjanti kho pana me kule bhogā. Sakkā bhoge ca bhuñjituṁ puññāni ca kātun’ti. So sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, āvaṭṭabhayassa bhīto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvatto. ‘Āvaṭṭabhayan’ti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶34] And what, mendicants, is the danger of sharks? It’s when a gentleman has gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, thinking: ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering.’ When they’ve gone forth, they robe up in the morning and, taking their bowl and robe, enter a village or town for alms without guarding body, speech, and mind, without establishing mindfulness, and without restraining the sense faculties. There they see a lady scantily clad, with revealing clothes. Lust infects their mind, so they resign the training and return to a lesser life. This is called one who resigns the training and returns to a lesser life for fear of the danger of sharks. ‘Danger of sharks’ is a term for ladies.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, susukābhayaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputto saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti: ‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto; appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethā’ti. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya pavisati. Arakkhiteneva kāyena arakkhitāya vācāya anupaṭṭhitāya satiyā asaṁvutehi indriyehi so tattha passati mātugāmaṁ dunnivatthaṁ vā duppārutaṁ vā. Tassa mātugāmaṁ disvā dunnivatthaṁ vā duppārutaṁ vā rāgo cittaṁ anuddhaṁseti. So rāgānuddhaṁsena cittena sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, susukābhayassa bhīto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvatto. ‘Susukābhayan’ti kho, bhikkhave, mātugāmassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ.
[¶35] These are the four dangers that an individual who gone forth from the lay life to homelessness in this teaching and training should anticipate.”
> Pali: Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri bhayāni, idhekacce puggale imasmiṁ dhammavinaye agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajite pāṭikaṅkhitabbānī”ti.
[¶36] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶37] > Pali: Cātumasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 73. MN 68 · At Naḷakapāna
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/73/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/73/#p-N
[¶0] MN 68 · At Naḷakapāna
> Pali: MN 68 · Naḷakapānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Kosalans near Naḷakapāna in the grove of flame-of-the-forest trees.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu viharati naḷakapāne palāsavane.
[¶2] Now at that time several very well-known gentlemen had gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness in the Buddha’s name— The venerables Anuruddha, Bhaddiya, Kimbila, Bhagu, Kuṇḍadhāna, Revata, Ānanda, and other very well-known gentlemen.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā abhiññātā abhiññātā kulaputtā bhagavantaṁ uddissa saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā honti— āyasmā ca anuruddho, āyasmā ca bhaddiyo, āyasmā ca kimilo, āyasmā ca bhagu, āyasmā ca koṇḍañño, āyasmā ca revato, āyasmā ca ānando, aññe ca abhiññātā abhiññātā kulaputtā.
[¶3] Now at that time the Buddha was sitting in the open, surrounded by the mendicant Saṅgha. Then the Buddha spoke to the mendicants about those gentlemen: “Mendicants, those gentlemen who have gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness in my name—I trust they’re satisfied with the spiritual life?” When this was said, the mendicants kept silent.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto abbhokāse nisinno hoti. Atha kho bhagavā te kulaputte ārabbha bhikkhū āmantesi: “ye te, bhikkhave, kulaputtā mamaṁ uddissa saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, kacci te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū abhiratā brahmacariye”ti? Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶4] For a second and a third time the Buddha asked the same question. For a third time, the mendicants kept silent.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho bhagavā te kulaputte ārabbha bhikkhū āmantesi: “ye te, bhikkhave, kulaputtā mamaṁ uddissa saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, kacci te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū abhiratā brahmacariye”ti? Dutiyampi kho te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ. Tatiyampi kho bhagavā te kulaputte ārabbha bhikkhū āmantesi: “ye te, bhikkhave, kulaputtā mamaṁ uddissa saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, kacci te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū abhiratā brahmacariye”ti? Tatiyampi kho te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶5] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “Why don’t I question just those gentlemen?” Then the Buddha said to Venerable Anuruddha, “Anuruddha and friends, I hope you’re satisfied with the spiritual life?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “yannūnāhaṁ te kulaputte puccheyyan”ti. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ āmantesi: “kacci tumhe, anuruddhā, abhiratā brahmacariye”ti?
[¶6] “Indeed, sir, we are satisfied with the spiritual life.”
> Pali: “Taggha mayaṁ, bhante, abhiratā brahmacariye”ti.
[¶7] “Good, good, Anuruddha and friends! It’s appropriate for gentlemen like yourselves, who have gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness, to be satisfied with the spiritual life. Since you’re blessed with youth, in the prime of life, with pristine black hair, you could have enjoyed sensual pleasures; yet you have gone forth from the lay life to homelessness. But you didn’t go forth to escape a summons by a king or a summons for a bandit, or because you were in debt or in fear, or in order to make a living. Rather, didn’t you go forth thinking: ‘I’m swamped by rebirth, old age, and death; by sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. I’m swamped by suffering, mired in suffering. Hopefully I can make an end to this entire mass of suffering’?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Etaṁ kho, anuruddhā, tumhākaṁ patirūpaṁ kulaputtānaṁ saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitānaṁ yaṁ tumhe abhirameyyātha brahmacariye. Yena tumhe, anuruddhā, bhadrena yobbanena samannāgatā paṭhamena vayasā susukāḷakesā kāme paribhuñjeyyātha tena tumhe, anuruddhā, bhadrenapi yobbanena samannāgatā paṭhamena vayasā susukāḷakesā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā. Te ca kho pana tumhe, anuruddhā, neva rājābhinītā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, na corābhinītā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, na iṇaṭṭā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, na bhayaṭṭā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, nājīvikāpakatā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā. Api ca khomhi otiṇṇo jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, dukkhotiṇṇo dukkhapareto; appeva nāma imassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa antakiriyā paññāyethāti— nanu tumhe, anuruddhā, evaṁ saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā”ti?
[¶8] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶9] “But, Anuruddha and friends, when a gentleman has gone forth like this, what should he do? Take someone who doesn’t achieve the rapture and bliss that are secluded from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, or something even more peaceful than that. Their mind is still occupied by desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, doubt, discontent, and sloth. That’s someone who doesn’t achieve the rapture and bliss that are secluded from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, or something even more peaceful than that.
> Pali: “Evaṁ pabbajitena ca pana, anuruddhā, kulaputtena kimassa karaṇīyaṁ? Vivekaṁ, anuruddhā, kāmehi vivekaṁ akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ nādhigacchati aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ, tassa abhijjhāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, byāpādopi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, thinamiddhampi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati uddhaccakukkuccampi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, vicikicchāpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, aratīpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, tandīpi cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Vivekaṁ, anuruddhā, kāmehi vivekaṁ akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ nādhigacchati aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ.
[¶10] Take someone who does achieve the rapture and bliss that are secluded from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, or something even more peaceful than that. Their mind is not occupied by desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, doubt, discontent, and sloth. That’s someone who does achieve the rapture and bliss that are secluded from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, or something even more peaceful than that.
> Pali: Vivekaṁ, anuruddhā, kāmehi vivekaṁ akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ adhigacchati aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ, tassa abhijjhāpi cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, byāpādopi cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, thinamiddhampi cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, uddhaccakukkuccampi cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, vicikicchāpi cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, aratīpi cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, tandīpi cittaṁ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Vivekaṁ, anuruddhā, kāmehi vivekaṁ akusalehi dhammehi pītisukhaṁ adhigacchati aññaṁ vā tato santataraṁ.
[¶11] Is this what you think of me? ‘The Realized One has not given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. That’s why, after appraisal, he uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things.’”
> Pali: Kinti vo, anuruddhā, mayi hoti: ‘ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā, appahīnā te tathāgatassa; tasmā tathāgato saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodetī’”ti?
[¶12] “No sir, we don’t think of you that way. We think of you this way: ‘The Realized One has given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. That’s why, after appraisal, he uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things.’”
> Pali: “Na kho no, bhante, bhagavati evaṁ hoti: ‘ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā, appahīnā te tathāgatassa; tasmā tathāgato saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodetī’ti. Evaṁ kho no, bhante, bhagavati hoti: ‘ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā, pahīnā te tathāgatassa; tasmā tathāgato saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodetī’”ti.
[¶13] “Good, good, Anuruddha and friends! The Realized One has given up the defilements that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. He has cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them so they are unable to arise in the future. Just as a palm tree with its crown cut off is incapable of further growth, in the same way, the Realized One has given up the defilements so they are unable to arise in the future. That’s why, after appraisal, he uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Tathāgatassa, anuruddhā, ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā, pahīnā te ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Seyyathāpi, anuruddhā, tālo matthakacchinno abhabbo punavirūḷhiyā; evameva kho, anuruddhā, tathāgatassa ye āsavā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā, pahīnā te ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā; tasmā tathāgato saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodeti.
[¶14] What do you think, Anuruddha and friends? What advantage does the Realized One see in declaring the rebirth of his disciples who have passed away: ‘This one is reborn here, while that one is reborn there’?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, anuruddhā, kaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno tathāgato sāvake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu byākaroti: ‘asu amutra upapanno; asu amutra upapanno’”ti?
[¶15] “Our teachings are rooted in the Buddha. He is our guide and our refuge. Sir, may the Buddha himself please clarify the meaning of this. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Bhagavaṁmūlakā no, bhante, dhammā bhagavaṁnettikā bhagavaṁpaṭisaraṇā. Sādhu vata, bhante, bhagavantaṁyeva paṭibhātu etassa bhāsitassa attho. Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶16] “The Realized One does not declare such things for the sake of fawning or flattering people, nor for the benefit of possessions, honor, or popularity, nor thinking, ‘So let people know about me!’ Rather, there are gentlemen of faith who are full of sublime joy and gladness. When they hear that, they apply their minds to that end. That is for their lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: “Na kho, anuruddhā, tathāgato janakuhanatthaṁ na janalapanatthaṁ na lābhasakkārasilokānisaṁsatthaṁ na ‘iti maṁ jano jānātū’ti sāvake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu byākaroti: ‘asu amutra upapanno, asu amutra upapanno’ti. Santi ca kho, anuruddhā, kulaputtā saddhā uḷāravedā uḷārapāmojjā. Te taṁ sutvā tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharanti. Tesaṁ taṁ, anuruddhā, hoti dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya.
[¶17] Take a monk who hears this: ‘The monk named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that he was enlightened.’ And he’s either seen for himself, or heard from someone else, that that venerable had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that monk’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, he applies his mind to that end. That’s how a monk lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhu suṇāti: ‘itthannāmo bhikkhu kālaṅkato; so bhagavatā byākato— aññāya saṇṭhahī’ti. So kho panassa āyasmā sāmaṁ diṭṭho vā hoti anussavassuto vā: ‘evaṁsīlo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁpañño so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁvihārī so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁvimutto so āyasmā ahosi itipī’ti. So tassa saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussaranto tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuno phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶18] Take a monk who hears this: ‘The monk named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of the five lower fetters, he’s been reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.’ And he’s either seen for himself, or heard from someone else, that that venerable had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that monk’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, he applies his mind to that end. That too is how a monk lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhu suṇāti: ‘itthannāmo bhikkhu kālaṅkato; so bhagavatā byākato— pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā’ti. So kho panassa āyasmā sāmaṁ diṭṭho vā hoti anussavassuto vā: ‘evaṁsīlo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammo …pe… evaṁpañño … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimutto so āyasmā ahosi itipī’ti. So tassa saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussaranto tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuno phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶19] Take a monk who hears this: ‘The monk named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, he’s a once-returner. He’ll come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.’ And he’s either seen for himself, or heard from someone else, that that venerable had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that monk’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, he applies his mind to that end. That too is how a monk lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhu suṇāti: ‘itthannāmo bhikkhu kālaṅkato; so bhagavatā byākato— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissatī’ti. So kho panassa āyasmā sāmaṁ diṭṭho vā hoti anussavassuto vā: ‘evaṁsīlo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammo …pe… evaṁpañño … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimutto so āyasmā ahosi itipī’ti. So tassa saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussaranto tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuno phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶20] Take a monk who hears this: ‘The monk named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters he’s a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.’ And he’s either seen for himself, or heard from someone else, that that venerable had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that monk’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, he applies his mind to that end. That too is how a monk lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhu suṇāti: ‘itthannāmo bhikkhu kālaṅkato; so bhagavatā byākato— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpanno avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti. So kho panassa āyasmā sāmaṁ diṭṭho vā hoti anussavassuto vā: ‘evaṁsīlo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammo …pe… evaṁpañño … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimutto so āyasmā ahosi itipī’ti. So tassa saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussaranto tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuno phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶21] Take a nun who hears this: ‘The nun named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that she was enlightened.’ And she’s either seen for herself, or heard from someone else, that that sister had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that nun’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, she applies her mind to that end. That’s how a nun lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhunī suṇāti: ‘itthannāmā bhikkhunī kālaṅkatā; sā bhagavatā byākatā— aññāya saṇṭhahī’ti. Sā kho panassā bhaginī sāmaṁ diṭṭhā vā hoti anussavassutā vā: ‘evaṁsīlā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁpaññā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁvihārinī sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁvimuttā sā bhaginī ahosi itipī’ti. Sā tassā saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussarantī tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuniyā phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶22] Take a nun who hears this: ‘The nun named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of the five lower fetters, she’s been reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.’ And she’s either seen for herself, or heard from someone else, that that sister had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that nun’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, she applies her mind to that end. That too is how a nun lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhunī suṇāti: ‘itthannāmā bhikkhunī kālaṅkatā; sā bhagavatā byākatā— pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyinī anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā’ti. Sā kho panassā bhaginī sāmaṁ diṭṭhā vā hoti anussavassutā vā: ‘evaṁsīlā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammā …pe… evaṁpaññā … evaṁvihārinī … evaṁvimuttā sā bhaginī ahosi itipī’ti. Sā tassā saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussarantī tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuniyā phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶23] Take a nun who hears this: ‘The nun named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, she’s a once-returner. She’ll come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.’ And she’s either seen for herself, or heard from someone else, that that sister had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that nun’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, she applies her mind to that end. That too is how a nun lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhunī suṇāti: ‘itthannāmā bhikkhunī kālaṅkatā; sā bhagavatā byākatā— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāminī sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissatī’ti. Sā kho panassā bhaginī sāmaṁ diṭṭhā vā hoti anussavassutā vā: ‘evaṁsīlā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammā …pe… evaṁpaññā … evaṁvihārinī … evaṁvimuttā sā bhaginī ahosi itipī’ti. Sā tassā saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussarantī tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuniyā phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶24] Take a nun who hears this: ‘The nun named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters she’s a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.’ And she’s either seen for herself, or heard from someone else, that that sister had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that nun’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, she applies her mind to that end. That too is how a nun lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, bhikkhunī suṇāti: ‘itthannāmā bhikkhunī kālaṅkatā; sā bhagavatā byākatā— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā’ti. Sā kho panassā bhaginī sāmaṁ diṭṭhā vā hoti anussavassutā vā: ‘evaṁsīlā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammā … evaṁpaññā … evaṁvihārinī … evaṁvimuttā sā bhaginī ahosi itipī’ti. Sā tassā saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussarantī tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, bhikkhuniyā phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶25] Take a layman who hears this: ‘The layman named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of the five lower fetters, he’s been reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.’ And he’s either seen for himself, or heard from someone else, that that venerable had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that layman’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, he applies his mind to that end. That’s how a layman lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, upāsako suṇāti: ‘itthannāmo upāsako kālaṅkato; so bhagavatā byākato— pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā’ti. So kho panassa āyasmā sāmaṁ diṭṭho vā hoti anussavassuto vā: ‘evaṁsīlo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁpañño so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁvihārī so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁvimutto so āyasmā ahosi itipī’ti. So tassa saddhañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussaranto tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, upāsakassa phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶26] Take a layman who hears this: ‘The layman named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, he’s a once-returner. He’ll come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.’ And he’s either seen for himself, or heard from someone else, that that venerable had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that layman’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, he applies his mind to that end. That too is how a layman lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, upāsako suṇāti: ‘itthannāmo upāsako kālaṅkato; so bhagavatā byākato— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissatī’ti. So kho panassa āyasmā sāmaṁ diṭṭho vā hoti anussavassuto vā: ‘evaṁsīlo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammo … evaṁpañño … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimutto so āyasmā ahosi itipī’ti. So tassa saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussaranto tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, upāsakassa phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶27] Take a layman who hears this: ‘The layman named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters he’s a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.’ And he’s either seen for himself, or heard from someone else, that that venerable had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that layman’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, he applies his mind to that end. That too is how a layman lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, upāsako suṇāti: ‘itthannāmo upāsako kālaṅkato; so bhagavatā byākato— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpanno avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti. So kho panassa āyasmā sāmaṁ diṭṭho vā hoti anussavassuto vā: ‘evaṁsīlo so āyasmā ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammo … evaṁpañño … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimutto so āyasmā ahosi itipī’ti. So tassa saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussaranto tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā upāsakassa phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶28] Take a laywoman who hears this: ‘The laywoman named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of the five lower fetters, she’s been reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.’ And she’s either seen for herself, or heard from someone else, that that sister had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that laywoman’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, she applies her mind to that end. That’s how a laywoman lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, upāsikā suṇāti: ‘itthannāmā upāsikā kālaṅkatā; sā bhagavatā byākatā— pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyinī anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā’ti. Sā kho panassā bhaginī sāmaṁ diṭṭhā vā hoti anussavassutā vā: ‘evaṁsīlā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammā … evaṁpaññā … evaṁvihārinī … evaṁvimuttā sā bhaginī ahosi itipī’ti. Sā tassā saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussarantī tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, upāsikāya phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶29] Take a laywoman who hears this: ‘The laywoman named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, she’s a once-returner. She’ll come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.’ And she’s either seen for herself, or heard from someone else, that that sister had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that laywoman’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, she applies her mind to that end. That too is how a laywoman lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, upāsikā suṇāti: ‘itthannāmā upāsikā kālaṅkatā; sā bhagavatā byākatā— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāminī sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissatī’ti. Sā kho panassā bhaginī sāmaṁ diṭṭhā vā hoti anussavassutā vā: ‘evaṁsīlā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammā … evaṁpaññā … evaṁvihārinī … evaṁvimuttā sā bhaginī ahosi itipī’ti. Sā tassā saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussarantī tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, upāsikāya phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶30] Take a laywoman who hears this: ‘The laywoman named so-and-so has passed away. The Buddha has declared that, with the ending of three fetters she’s a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.’ And she’s either seen for herself, or heard from someone else, that that sister had such ethics, such qualities, such wisdom, such meditation, or such freedom. Recollecting that laywoman’s faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom, she applies her mind to that end. That too is how a laywoman lives at ease.
> Pali: Idhānuruddhā, upāsikā suṇāti: ‘itthannāmā upāsikā kālaṅkatā; sā bhagavatā byākatā— tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā’ti. Sā kho panassā bhaginī sāmaṁ diṭṭhā vā hoti anussavassutā vā: ‘evaṁsīlā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁdhammā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁpaññā sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁvihārinī sā bhaginī ahosi itipi, evaṁvimuttā sā bhaginī ahosi itipī’ti. Sā tassā saddhañca sīlañca sutañca cāgañca paññañca anussarantī tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati. Evampi kho, anuruddhā, upāsikāya phāsuvihāro hoti.
[¶31] So it’s not for the sake of fawning or flattering people, nor for the benefit of possessions, honor, or popularity, nor thinking, ‘So let people know about me!’ that the Realized One declares the rebirth of his disciples who have passed away: ‘This one is reborn here, while that one is reborn there.’ Rather, there are gentlemen of faith who are full of joy and gladness. When they hear that, they apply their minds to that end. That is for their lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: Iti kho, anuruddhā, tathāgato na janakuhanatthaṁ na janalapanatthaṁ na lābhasakkārasilokānisaṁsatthaṁ na ‘iti maṁ jano jānātū’ti sāvake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu byākaroti: ‘asu amutra upapanno, asu amutra upapanno’ti. Santi ca kho, anuruddhā, kulaputtā saddhā uḷāravedā uḷārapāmojjā. Te taṁ sutvā tadatthāya cittaṁ upasaṁharanti. Tesaṁ taṁ, anuruddhā, hoti dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶32] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Anuruddha approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā anuruddho bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶33] > Pali: Naḷakapānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 74. MN 69 · With Gulissāni
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/74/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/74/#p-N
[¶0] MN 69 · With Gulissāni
> Pali: MN 69 · Goliyānisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Now at that time a wilderness mendicant of boorish behavior named Gulissāni had come down to the midst of the Saṅgha on some business. There Venerable Sāriputta spoke to the mendicants about Gulissāni:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena goliyāni nāma bhikkhu āraññiko padasamācāro saṅghamajjhe osaṭo hoti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto goliyāniṁ bhikkhuṁ ārabbha bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶3] “Reverends, a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should have respect and reverence for his spiritual companions. If he doesn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he has no respect and reverence for his spiritual companions?’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should have respect and reverence for his spiritual companions.
> Pali: “Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena sabrahmacārīsu sagāravena bhavitabbaṁ sappatissena. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto sabrahmacārīsu agāravo hoti appatisso, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena, yo ayamāyasmā sabrahmacārīsu agāravo hoti appatisso’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena sabrahmacārīsu sagāravena bhavitabbaṁ sappatissena.
[¶4] A wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should be careful where he sits, thinking: ‘I shall sit so that I don’t intrude on the senior monks and I don’t block the junior monks from a seat.’ If he doesn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he’s not careful where he sits?’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should be careful where he sits.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena āsanakusalena bhavitabbaṁ: ‘iti there ca bhikkhū nānupakhajja nisīdissāmi nave ca bhikkhū na āsanena paṭibāhissāmī’ti. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto na āsanakusalo hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena, yo ayamāyasmā āsanakusalo na hotī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena āsanakusalena bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶5] A wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should know even the supplementary regulations. If he doesn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he doesn’t even know the supplementary regulations?’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should know even the supplementary regulations.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena ābhisamācārikopi dhammo jānitabbo. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto ābhisamācārikampi dhammaṁ na jānāti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā ābhisamācārikampi dhammaṁ na jānātī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena ābhisamācārikopi dhammo jānitabbo.
[¶6] A wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t enter the village too early or return too late in the day. If he does so, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he enters the village too early or returns too late in the day?’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t enter the village too early or return too late in the day.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena nātikālena gāmo pavisitabbo nātidivā paṭikkamitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto atikālena gāmaṁ pavisati atidivā paṭikkamati, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā atikālena gāmaṁ pavisati atidivā paṭikkamatī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena nātikālena gāmo pavisitabbo, nātidivā paṭikkamitabbaṁ.
[¶7] A wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t have relations with families before or after the meal. If he does so, there’ll be some who say: ‘This wilderness venerable, staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, must be used to wandering about at the wrong time, since he behaves like this when he’s come to the Saṅgha.’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t have relations with families before or after the meal.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena na purebhattaṁ pacchābhattaṁ kulesu cārittaṁ āpajjitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto purebhattaṁ pacchābhattaṁ kulesu cārittaṁ āpajjati, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Ayaṁ nūnimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena viharato vikālacariyā bahulīkatā, tamenaṁ saṅghagatampi samudācaratī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena na purebhattaṁ pacchābhattaṁ kulesu cārittaṁ āpajjitabbaṁ.
[¶8] A wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t be restless and fickle. If he is, there’ll be some who say: ‘This wilderness venerable, staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, must be used to being restless and fickle, since he behaves like this when he’s come to the Saṅgha.’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t be restless and fickle.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena anuddhatena bhavitabbaṁ acapalena. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto uddhato hoti capalo, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Idaṁ nūnimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena viharato uddhaccaṁ cāpalyaṁ bahulīkataṁ, tamenaṁ saṅghagatampi samudācaratī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena anuddhatena bhavitabbaṁ acapalena.
[¶9] A wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t be scurrilous and loose-tongued. If he is, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he’s scurrilous and loose-tongued?’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha shouldn’t be scurrilous and loose-tongued.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena amukharena bhavitabbaṁ avikiṇṇavācena. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto mukharo hoti vikiṇṇavāco, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā mukharo vikiṇṇavāco’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena amukharena bhavitabbaṁ avikiṇṇavācena.
[¶10] A wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should be easy to admonish, with good friends. If he’s hard to admonish, with bad friends, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he’s hard to admonish, with bad friends?’ That’s why a wilderness monk who has come to stay in the Saṅgha should be easy to admonish, with good friends.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena suvacena bhavitabbaṁ kalyāṇamittena. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu saṅghagato saṅghe viharanto dubbaco hoti pāpamitto, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā dubbaco pāpamitto’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā saṅghagatena saṅghe viharantena suvacena bhavitabbaṁ kalyāṇamittena.
[¶11] A wilderness monk should guard the sense doors. If he doesn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he doesn’t guard the sense doors?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should guard the sense doors.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā indriyesu guttadvārena bhavitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu indriyesu aguttadvāro hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā indriyesu aguttadvāro’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā indriyesu guttadvārena bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶12] A wilderness monk should eat in moderation. If he doesn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he eats too much?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should eat in moderation.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā bhojane mattaññunā bhavitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu bhojane amattaññū hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā bhojane amattaññū’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā bhojane mattaññunā bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶13] A wilderness monk should be committed to wakefulness. If he isn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he’s not committed to wakefulness?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should be committed to wakefulness.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā jāgariyaṁ anuyuttena bhavitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu jāgariyaṁ ananuyutto hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā jāgariyaṁ ananuyutto’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā jāgariyaṁ anuyuttena bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶14] A wilderness monk should be energetic. If he isn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he’s not energetic?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should be energetic.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā āraddhavīriyena bhavitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu kusīto hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā kusīto’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā āraddhavīriyena bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶15] A wilderness monk should be mindful. If he isn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he’s not mindful?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should be mindful.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā upaṭṭhitassatinā bhavitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu muṭṭhassatī hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā muṭṭhassatī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā upaṭṭhitassatinā bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶16] A wilderness monk should have immersion. If he doesn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he doesn’t have immersion?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should have immersion.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā samāhitena bhavitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu asamāhito hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā asamāhito’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā samāhitena bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶17] A wilderness monk should be wise. If he isn’t, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he’s not wise?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should be wise.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā paññavatā bhavitabbaṁ. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu duppañño hoti, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā duppañño’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā paññavatā bhavitabbaṁ.
[¶18] A wilderness monk should make an effort in regards to the teaching and training. There are those who will question a wilderness monk about the teaching and training. If he is stumped, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he is stumped by a question about the teaching and training?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should make an effort to learn the teaching and training.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā abhidhamme abhivinaye yogo karaṇīyo. Santāvuso, āraññikaṁ bhikkhuṁ abhidhamme abhivinaye pañhaṁ pucchitāro. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu abhidhamme abhivinaye pañhaṁ puṭṭho na sampāyati, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā abhidhamme abhivinaye pañhaṁ puṭṭho na sampāyatī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā abhidhamme abhivinaye yogo karaṇīyo.
[¶19] A wilderness monk should practice meditation to realize the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. There are those who will question a wilderness monk about the formless liberations. If he is stumped, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he is stumped by a question about the formless liberations?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should practice meditation to realize the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form.
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā tattha yogo karaṇīyo. Santāvuso, āraññikaṁ bhikkhuṁ ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā tattha pañhaṁ pucchitāro. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho na sampāyati, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho na sampāyatī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā tattha yogo karaṇīyo.
[¶20] A wilderness monk should practice meditation to realize the superhuman state. There are those who will question a wilderness monk about the superhuman state. If he is stumped, there’ll be some who say: ‘What’s the point of this wilderness venerable’s staying alone and autonomous in the wilderness, since he doesn’t know the goal for which he went forth?’ That’s why a wilderness monk should practice meditation to realize the superhuman state.”
> Pali: Āraññikenāvuso, bhikkhunā uttari manussadhamme yogo karaṇīyo. Santāvuso, āraññikaṁ bhikkhuṁ uttari manussadhamme pañhaṁ pucchitāro. Sace, āvuso, āraññiko bhikkhu uttari manussadhamme pañhaṁ puṭṭho na sampāyati, tassa bhavanti vattāro. ‘Kiṁ panimassāyasmato āraññikassa ekassāraññe serivihārena yo ayamāyasmā yassatthāya pabbajito tamatthaṁ na jānātī’ti— tassa bhavanti vattāro. Tasmā āraññikena bhikkhunā uttari manussadhamme yogo karaṇīyo”ti.
[¶21] When Venerable Sāriputta said this, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna said to him, “Reverend Sāriputta, should these things be undertaken and followed only by wilderness monks, or by those who live within a village as well?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā mahāmoggallāno āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “āraññikeneva nu kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhunā ime dhammā samādāya vattitabbā udāhu gāmantavihārināpī”ti?
[¶22] “Reverend Moggallāna, these things should be undertaken and followed by wilderness monks, and still more by those who live within a village.”
> Pali: “Āraññikenāpi kho, āvuso moggallāna, bhikkhunā ime dhammā samādāya vattitabbā pageva gāmantavihārinā”ti.
[¶23] > Pali: Goliyānisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 75. MN 70 · At Kīṭāgiri
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/75/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/75/#p-N
[¶0] MN 70 · At Kīṭāgiri
> Pali: MN 70 · Kīṭāgirisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kāsis together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants:
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kāsīsu cārikaṁ carati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶2] “Mendicants, I abstain from eating at night. Doing so, I find that I’m healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. You too should never eat at night. Doing so, you’ll find that you’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably.”
> Pali: “ahaṁ kho, bhikkhave, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjāmi. Aññatra kho panāhaṁ, bhikkhave, rattibhojanā bhuñjamāno appābādhatañca sañjānāmi appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Etha, tumhepi, bhikkhave, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjatha. Aññatra kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhepi rattibhojanā bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānissatha appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañcā”ti.
[¶3] “Yes, sir,” they replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.
[¶4] Then the Buddha, traveling stage by stage in the land of the Kāsis, arrived at a town of the Kāsis named Kīṭāgiri, and stayed there.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā kāsīsu anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena kīṭāgiri nāma kāsīnaṁ nigamo tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā kīṭāgirismiṁ viharati kāsīnaṁ nigame.
[¶5] Now at that time the mendicants who followed Assaji and Punabbasuka were residing at Kīṭāgiri. Then several mendicants went up to them and said, “Reverends, the Buddha never eats at night, and neither does the mendicant Saṅgha. Doing so, they find that they’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. You too should abstain from eating at night. Doing so, you’ll find that you’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena assajipunabbasukā nāma bhikkhū kīṭāgirismiṁ āvāsikā honti. Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yena assajipunabbasukā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū etadavocuṁ: “bhagavā kho, āvuso, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjati bhikkhusaṅgho ca. Aññatra kho panāvuso, rattibhojanā bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānanti appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Etha, tumhepi, āvuso, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjatha. Aññatra kho panāvuso, tumhepi rattibhojanā bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānissatha appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañcā”ti.
[¶6] When they said this, the mendicants who followed Assaji and Punabbasuka said to them, “Reverends, we eat at dusk, at daybreak, and at the wrong time of day. Doing so, we find that we’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. Why should we give up what is apparent in the present to chase after what takes effect over time? We shall eat at dusk, at daybreak, and at the wrong time of day.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, assajipunabbasukā bhikkhū te bhikkhū etadavocuṁ: “mayaṁ kho, āvuso, sāyañceva bhuñjāma pāto ca divā ca vikāle. Te mayaṁ sāyañceva bhuñjamānā pāto ca divā ca vikāle appābādhatañca sañjānāma appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Te mayaṁ kiṁ sandiṭṭhikaṁ hitvā kālikaṁ anudhāvissāma? Sāyañceva mayaṁ bhuñjissāma pāto ca divā ca vikāle”ti.
[¶7] Since those mendicants were unable to persuade the mendicants who were followers of Assaji and Punabbasuka, they approached the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Yato kho te bhikkhū nāsakkhiṁsu assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū saññāpetuṁ, atha yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idha mayaṁ, bhante, yena assajipunabbasukā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū etadavocumha: ‘bhagavā kho, āvuso, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjati bhikkhusaṅgho ca; aññatra kho panāvuso, rattibhojanā bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānanti appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Etha, tumhepi, āvuso, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjatha. Aññatra kho panāvuso, tumhepi rattibhojanā bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānissatha appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañcā’ti. Evaṁ vutte, bhante, assajipunabbasukā bhikkhū amhe etadavocuṁ: ‘mayaṁ kho, āvuso, sāyañceva bhuñjāma pāto ca divā ca vikāle. Te mayaṁ sāyañceva bhuñjamānā pāto ca divā ca vikāle appābādhatañca sañjānāma appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Te mayaṁ kiṁ sandiṭṭhikaṁ hitvā kālikaṁ anudhāvissāma? Sāyañceva mayaṁ bhuñjissāma pāto ca divā ca vikāle’ti. Yato kho mayaṁ, bhante, nāsakkhimha assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū saññāpetuṁ, atha mayaṁ etamatthaṁ bhagavato ārocemā”ti.
[¶8] So the Buddha addressed one of the monks, “Please, monk, in my name tell the mendicants who follow Assaji and Punabbasuka that the Teacher summons them.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū āmantehi: ‘satthā āyasmante āmantetī’”ti.
[¶9] “Yes, sir,” that monk replied. He went to those mendicants and said, “Venerables, the Teacher summons you.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā yena assajipunabbasukā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū etadavoca: “satthā āyasmante āmantetī”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, reverend,” those mendicants replied. They went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho assajipunabbasukā bhikkhū tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶11] The Buddha said to them, “Is it really true, mendicants, that several mendicants went to you and said: ‘Reverends, the Buddha never eats at night, and neither does the mendicant Saṅgha. Doing so, they find that they’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. You too should never eat at night. Doing so, you’ll find that you’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably.’ When they said this, did you really say to them: ‘Reverends, we eat at dusk, at daybreak, and at the wrong time of day. Doing so, we find that we’re healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. Why should we give up what is apparent in the present to chase after what takes effect over time? We shall eat at dusk, at daybreak, and at the wrong time of day.’”
> Pali: “saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave, sambahulā bhikkhū tumhe upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘bhagavā kho, āvuso, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjati bhikkhusaṅgho ca. Aññatra kho panāvuso, rattibhojanā bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānanti appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Etha, tumhepi, āvuso, aññatreva rattibhojanā bhuñjatha. Aññatra kho panāvuso, tumhepi rattibhojanā bhuñjamānā appābādhatañca sañjānissatha appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañcā’ti. Evaṁ vutte, kira, bhikkhave, tumhe te bhikkhū evaṁ avacuttha: ‘mayaṁ kho panāvuso, sāyañceva bhuñjāma pāto ca divā ca vikāle. Te mayaṁ sāyañceva bhuñjamānā pāto ca divā ca vikāle appābādhatañca sañjānāma appātaṅkatañca lahuṭṭhānañca balañca phāsuvihārañca. Te mayaṁ kiṁ sandiṭṭhikaṁ hitvā kālikaṁ anudhāvissāma? Sāyañceva mayaṁ bhuñjissāma pāto ca divā ca vikāle’”ti.
[¶12] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶13] “Mendicants, have you ever known me to teach the Dhamma like this: no matter what this individual experiences—pleasurable, painful, or neutral—their unskillful qualities decline and their skillful qualities grow?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu me tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānātha yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tassa akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī”ti?
[¶14] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶15] “Haven’t you known me to teach the Dhamma like this: ‘When someone feels this kind of pleasant feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline. But when someone feels that kind of pleasant feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow. When someone feels this kind of painful feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline. But when someone feels that kind of painful feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow. When someone feels this kind of neutral feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline. But when someone feels that kind of neutral feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow’?”
> Pali: “Nanu me tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānātha idhekaccassa yaṁ evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, idha panekaccassa evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, idha panekaccassa evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, idha panekaccassa evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī”ti?
[¶16] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶17] “Good, mendicants! Now, suppose I hadn’t known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels this kind of pleasant feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline.’ Not knowing this, would it be appropriate for me to say: ‘You should give up this kind of pleasant feeling’?”
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave. Mayā cetaṁ, bhikkhave, aññātaṁ abhavissa adiṭṭhaṁ aviditaṁ asacchikataṁ aphassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evāhaṁ ajānanto ‘evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ pajahathā’ti vadeyyaṁ; api nu me etaṁ, bhikkhave, patirūpaṁ abhavissā”ti?
[¶18] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶19] “But I have known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels this kind of pleasant feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline.’ Since this is so, that’s why I say: ‘You should give up this kind of pleasant feeling.’ Now, suppose I hadn’t known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels that kind of pleasant feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow.’ Not knowing this, would it be appropriate for me to say: ‘You should enter and remain in that kind of pleasant feeling’?”
> Pali: “Yasmā ca kho etaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ñātaṁ diṭṭhaṁ viditaṁ sacchikataṁ phassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, tasmāhaṁ ‘evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ pajahathā’ti vadāmi. Mayā cetaṁ, bhikkhave, aññātaṁ abhavissa adiṭṭhaṁ aviditaṁ asacchikataṁ aphassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evāhaṁ ajānanto ‘evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti vadeyyaṁ; api nu me etaṁ, bhikkhave, patirūpaṁ abhavissā”ti?
[¶20] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶21] “But I have known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels that kind of pleasant feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow.’ Since this is so, that’s why I say: ‘You should enter and remain in that kind of pleasant feeling.’
> Pali: “Yasmā ca kho etaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ñātaṁ diṭṭhaṁ viditaṁ sacchikataṁ phassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, tasmāhaṁ ‘evarūpaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti vadāmi.
[¶22] Now, suppose I hadn’t known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels this kind of painful feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline.’ Not knowing this, would it be appropriate for me to say: ‘You should give up this kind of painful feeling’?”
> Pali: Mayā cetaṁ, bhikkhave, aññātaṁ abhavissa adiṭṭhaṁ aviditaṁ asacchikataṁ aphassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evāhaṁ ajānanto ‘evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ pajahathā’ti vadeyyaṁ; api nu me etaṁ, bhikkhave, patirūpaṁ abhavissā”ti?
[¶23] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶24] “But I have known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels this kind of painful feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline.’ Since this is so, that’s why I say: ‘You should give up this kind of painful feeling.’ Now, suppose I hadn’t known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels that kind of painful feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow.’ Not knowing this, would it be appropriate for me to say: ‘You should enter and remain in that kind of painful feeling’?”
> Pali: “Yasmā ca kho etaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ñātaṁ diṭṭhaṁ viditaṁ sacchikataṁ phassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, tasmāhaṁ ‘evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ pajahathā’ti vadāmi. Mayā cetaṁ, bhikkhave, aññātaṁ abhavissa adiṭṭhaṁ aviditaṁ asacchikataṁ aphassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evāhaṁ ajānanto ‘evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti vadeyyaṁ; api nu me etaṁ, bhikkhave, patirūpaṁ abhavissā”ti?
[¶25] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶26] “But I have known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels that kind of painful feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow.’ Since this is so, that’s why I say: ‘You should enter and remain in that kind of painful feeling.’
> Pali: “Yasmā ca kho etaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ñātaṁ diṭṭhaṁ viditaṁ sacchikataṁ phassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, tasmāhaṁ ‘evarūpaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti vadāmi.
[¶27] Now, suppose I hadn’t known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels this kind of neutral feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline.’ Not knowing this, would it be appropriate for me to say: ‘You should give up this kind of neutral feeling’?”
> Pali: Mayā cetaṁ, bhikkhave, aññātaṁ abhavissa adiṭṭhaṁ aviditaṁ asacchikataṁ aphassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evāhaṁ ajānanto ‘evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ pajahathā’ti vadeyyaṁ; api nu me etaṁ, bhikkhave, patirūpaṁ abhavissā”ti?
[¶28] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶29] “But I have known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels this kind of neutral feeling, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline.’ Since this is so, that’s why I say: ‘You should give up this kind of neutral feeling.’ Now, suppose I hadn’t known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels that kind of neutral feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow.’ Not knowing this, would it be appropriate for me to say: ‘You should enter and remain in that kind of neutral feeling’?”
> Pali: “Yasmā ca kho etaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ñātaṁ diṭṭhaṁ viditaṁ sacchikataṁ phassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, tasmāhaṁ ‘evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ pajahathā’ti vadāmi. Mayā cetaṁ, bhikkhave, aññātaṁ abhavissa adiṭṭhaṁ aviditaṁ asacchikataṁ aphassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evāhaṁ ajānanto ‘evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti vadeyyaṁ; api nu me etaṁ, bhikkhave, patirūpaṁ abhavissā”ti?
[¶30] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶31] “But I have known, seen, understood, realized, and experienced this with wisdom: ‘When someone feels that kind of neutral feeling, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow.’ Since this is so, that’s why I say: ‘You should enter and remain in that kind of neutral feeling.’
> Pali: “Yasmā ca kho etaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ñātaṁ diṭṭhaṁ viditaṁ sacchikataṁ phassitaṁ paññāya: ‘idhekaccassa evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, tasmāhaṁ ‘evarūpaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti vadāmi.
[¶32] Mendicants, I don’t say that all these mendicants still have work to do with diligence. Nor do I say that all these mendicants have no work to do with diligence. I say that mendicants don’t have work to do with diligence if they are perfected, with defilements ended, having completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and become rightly freed through enlightenment. Why is that? They’ve done their work with diligence. They’re incapable of being negligent.
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, sabbesaṁyeva bhikkhūnaṁ ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi; na panāhaṁ, bhikkhave, sabbesaṁyeva bhikkhūnaṁ ‘na appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū arahanto khīṇāsavā vusitavanto katakaraṇīyā ohitabhārā anuppattasadatthā parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanā sammadaññāvimuttā, tathārūpānāhaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ ‘na appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Kataṁ tesaṁ appamādena. Abhabbā te pamajjituṁ.
[¶33] I say that mendicants still have work to do with diligence if they are trainees, who haven’t achieved their heart’s desire, but live aspiring to the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. Why is that? Thinking: ‘Hopefully this venerable will frequent appropriate lodgings, associate with good friends, and control their faculties. Then they might realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, and live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ Seeing this fruit of diligence for those mendicants, I say that they still have work to do with diligence.
> Pali: Ye ca kho te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū sekkhā appattamānasā anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ patthayamānā viharanti, tathārūpānāhaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Appeva nāmime āyasmanto anulomikāni senāsanāni paṭisevamānā kalyāṇamitte bhajamānā indriyāni samannānayamānā— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyunti. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, imesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ appamādaphalaṁ sampassamāno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi.
[¶34] Mendicants, these seven individuals are found in the world. What seven? One freed both ways, one freed by wisdom, a direct witness, one attained to view, one freed by faith, a follower of teachings, and a follower by faith.
> Pali: Sattime, bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ. Katame satta? Ubhatobhāgavimutto, paññāvimutto, kāyasakkhi, diṭṭhippatto, saddhāvimutto, dhammānusārī, saddhānusārī.
[¶35] And what individual is freed both ways? It’s an individual who has direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. And, having seen with wisdom, their defilements have come to an end. This individual is called freed both ways. And I say that this mendicant has no work to do with diligence. Why is that? They’ve done their work with diligence. They’re incapable of being negligent.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo ubhatobhāgavimutto? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā te kāyena phusitvā viharati paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo ubhatobhāgavimutto imassa kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘na appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Kataṁ tassa appamādena. Abhabbo so pamajjituṁ.
[¶36] And what individual is freed by wisdom? It’s an individual who does not have direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. Nevertheless, having seen with wisdom, their defilements have come to an end. This individual is called freed by wisdom. I say that this mendicant has no work to do with diligence. Why is that? They’ve done their work with diligence. They’re incapable of being negligent.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo paññāvimutto? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā te na kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo paññāvimutto. Imassapi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘na appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Kataṁ tassa appamādena. Abhabbo so pamajjituṁ.
[¶37] And what individual is a direct witness? It’s an individual who has direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. And, having seen with wisdom, some of their defilements have come to an end. This individual is called a direct witness. I say that this mendicant still has work to do with diligence. Why is that? Thinking: ‘Hopefully this venerable will frequent appropriate lodgings, associate with good friends, and control their faculties. Then they might realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, and live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ Seeing this fruit of diligence for this mendicant, I say that they still have work to do with diligence.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo kāyasakkhi? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā te kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo kāyasakkhi. Imassa kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Appeva nāma ayamāyasmā anulomikāni senāsanāni paṭisevamāno kalyāṇamitte bhajamāno indriyāni samannānayamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyāti. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, imassa bhikkhuno appamādaphalaṁ sampassamāno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi.
[¶38] And what individual is attained to view? It’s an individual who doesn’t have direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. Nevertheless, having seen with wisdom, some of their defilements have come to an end. And they have clearly seen and clearly contemplated with wisdom the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One. This individual is called attained to view. I say that this mendicant also still has work to do with diligence. Why is that? Thinking: ‘Hopefully this venerable will frequent appropriate lodgings, associate with good friends, and control their faculties. Then they might realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, and live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ Seeing this fruit of diligence for this mendicant, I say that they still have work to do with diligence.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo diṭṭhippatto? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā te na kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti, tathāgatappaveditā cassa dhammā paññāya vodiṭṭhā honti vocaritā. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo diṭṭhippatto. Imassapi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Appeva nāma ayamāyasmā anulomikāni senāsanāni paṭisevamāno kalyāṇamitte bhajamāno indriyāni samannānayamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyāti. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, imassa bhikkhuno appamādaphalaṁ sampassamāno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi.
[¶39] And what individual is freed by faith? It’s an individual who doesn’t have direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. Nevertheless, having seen with wisdom, some of their defilements have come to an end. And their faith is settled, rooted, and planted in the Realized One. This individual is called freed by faith. I say that this mendicant also still has work to do with diligence. Why is that? Thinking: ‘Hopefully this venerable will frequent appropriate lodgings, associate with good friends, and control their faculties. Then they might realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, and live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ Seeing this fruit of diligence for this mendicant, I say that they still have work to do with diligence.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo saddhāvimutto. Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā te na kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti, tathāgate cassa saddhā niviṭṭhā hoti mūlajātā patiṭṭhitā. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo saddhāvimutto. Imassapi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Appeva nāma ayamāyasmā anulomikāni senāsanāni paṭisevamāno kalyāṇamitte bhajamāno indriyāni samannānayamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyāti. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, imassa bhikkhuno appamādaphalaṁ sampassamāno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi.
[¶40] And what individual is a follower of teachings? It’s an individual who doesn’t have direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. And having seen with wisdom, their defilements have not come to an end. And they accept the teachings proclaimed by the Realized One after deliberating them with a degree of wisdom. And they have the following qualities: the faculties of faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom. This individual is called a follower of teachings. I say that this mendicant also still has work to do with diligence. Why is that? Thinking: ‘Hopefully this venerable will frequent appropriate lodgings, associate with good friends, and control their faculties. Then they might realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, and live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ Seeing this fruit of diligence for this mendicant, I say that they still have work to do with diligence.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo dhammānusārī? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā te na kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti, tathāgatappaveditā cassa dhammā paññāya mattaso nijjhānaṁ khamanti, api cassa ime dhammā honti, seyyathidaṁ— saddhindriyaṁ, vīriyindriyaṁ, satindriyaṁ, samādhindriyaṁ, paññindriyaṁ. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo dhammānusārī. Imassapi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Appeva nāma ayamāyasmā anulomikāni senāsanāni paṭisevamāno kalyāṇamitte bhajamāno indriyāni samannānayamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyāti. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, imassa bhikkhuno appamādaphalaṁ sampassamāno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi.
[¶41] And what individual is a follower by faith? It’s an individual who doesn’t have direct meditative experience of the peaceful liberations that are formless, transcending form. And having seen with wisdom, their defilements have not come to an end. And they have a degree of faith and fondness for the Realized One. And they have the following qualities: the faculties of faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom. This individual is called a follower by faith. I say that this mendicant also still has work to do with diligence. Why is that? Thinking: ‘Hopefully this venerable will frequent appropriate lodgings, associate with good friends, and control their faculties. Then they might realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, and live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’ Seeing this fruit of diligence for this mendicant, I say that they still have work to do with diligence.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo saddhānusārī? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā te na kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti, tathāgate cassa saddhāmattaṁ hoti pemamattaṁ, api cassa ime dhammā honti, seyyathidaṁ— saddhindriyaṁ, vīriyindriyaṁ, satindriyaṁ, samādhindriyaṁ, paññindriyaṁ. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo saddhānusārī. Imassapi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Appeva nāma ayamāyasmā anulomikāni senāsanāni paṭisevamāno kalyāṇamitte bhajamāno indriyāni samannānayamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyāti. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, imassa bhikkhuno appamādaphalaṁ sampassamāno ‘appamādena karaṇīyan’ti vadāmi.
[¶42] Mendicants, I don’t say that enlightenment is achieved right away. Rather, enlightenment is achieved by gradual training, progress, and practice.
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, ādikeneva aññārādhanaṁ vadāmi; api ca, bhikkhave, anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā aññārādhanā hoti.
[¶43] And how is enlightenment achieved by gradual training, progress, and practice? It’s when someone in whom faith has arisen approaches a teacher. They pay homage, actively listen, hear the teachings, remember the teachings, examine their meaning, and accept them after deliberation. Then enthusiasm springs up; they make an attempt, weigh up, and strive. Striving, they directly realize the ultimate truth, and see it with penetrating wisdom.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā aññārādhanā hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsati, payirupāsanto sotaṁ odahati, ohitasoto dhammaṁ suṇāti, sutvā dhammaṁ dhāreti, dhatānaṁ dhammānaṁ atthaṁ upaparikkhati, atthaṁ upaparikkhato dhammā nijjhānaṁ khamanti, dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā sati chando jāyati, chandajāto ussahati, ussāhetvā tuleti, tulayitvā padahati, pahitatto samāno kāyena ceva paramasaccaṁ sacchikaroti, paññāya ca naṁ ativijjha passati.
[¶44] Mendicants, there has not been that faith, that approaching, that paying homage, that listening, that hearing the teachings, that remembering the teachings, that examining their meaning, that acceptance after deliberation, that enthusiasm, that making an attempt, that weighing up, or that striving. You’re on a bad path, mendicants! You’re practicing the wrong way! How far these futile men have strayed from this teaching and training!
> Pali: Sāpi nāma, bhikkhave, saddhā nāhosi; tampi nāma, bhikkhave, upasaṅkamanaṁ nāhosi; sāpi nāma, bhikkhave, payirupāsanā nāhosi; tampi nāma, bhikkhave, sotāvadhānaṁ nāhosi; tampi nāma, bhikkhave, dhammassavanaṁ nāhosi; sāpi nāma, bhikkhave, dhammadhāraṇā nāhosi; sāpi nāma, bhikkhave, atthūpaparikkhā nāhosi; sāpi nāma, bhikkhave, dhammanijjhānakkhanti nāhosi; sopi nāma, bhikkhave, chando nāhosi; sopi nāma, bhikkhave, ussāho nāhosi; sāpi nāma, bhikkhave, tulanā nāhosi; tampi nāma, bhikkhave, padhānaṁ nāhosi. Vippaṭipannāttha, bhikkhave, micchāpaṭipannāttha, bhikkhave. Kīva dūrevime, bhikkhave, moghapurisā apakkantā imamhā dhammavinayā.
[¶45] There is an exposition in four statements, which a sensible person would quickly understand when it is recited. I shall recite it for you, mendicants. Try to understand it.”
> Pali: Atthi, bhikkhave, catuppadaṁ veyyākaraṇaṁ yassuddiṭṭhassa viññū puriso nacirasseva paññāyatthaṁ ājāneyya. Uddisissāmi vo, bhikkhave, ājānissatha me tan”ti?
[¶46] “Sir, who are we next to those who understand the teaching?”
> Pali: “Ke ca mayaṁ, bhante, ke ca dhammassa aññātāro”ti?
[¶47] “Even with a teacher who values things of the flesh, is an heir in things of the flesh, who lives caught up in things of the flesh, you wouldn’t get into such haggling: ‘If we get this, we’ll do that. If we don’t get this, we won’t do it.’ What then of the Realized One, who lives utterly detached from things of the flesh?
> Pali: “Yopi so, bhikkhave, satthā āmisagaru āmisadāyādo āmisehi saṁsaṭṭho viharati tassa pāyaṁ evarūpī paṇopaṇaviyā na upeti: ‘evañca no assa atha naṁ kareyyāma, na ca no evamassa na naṁ kareyyāmā’ti, kiṁ pana, bhikkhave, yaṁ tathāgato sabbaso āmisehi visaṁsaṭṭho viharati.
[¶48] For a faithful disciple who is practicing to fathom the Teacher’s instructions, this is in line with the teaching: ‘The Buddha is my Teacher, I am his disciple. The Buddha knows, I do not know.’ For a faithful disciple who is practicing to fathom the Teacher’s instructions, the Teacher’s instructions are nourishing and nutritious. For a faithful disciple who is practicing to fathom the Teacher’s instructions, this is in line with the teaching: ‘Gladly, let only skin, sinews, and bones remain! Let the flesh and blood waste away in my body! I will not relax my energy until I have achieved what is possible by human strength, energy, and vigor.’ For a faithful disciple who is practicing to fathom the Teacher’s instructions, one of two results can be expected: enlightenment in this very life, or if there’s residue left behind, non-return.”
> Pali: Saddhassa, bhikkhave, sāvakassa satthusāsane pariyogāhiya vattato ayamanudhammo hoti: ‘satthā bhagavā, sāvakohamasmi; jānāti bhagavā, nāhaṁ jānāmī’ti. Saddhassa, bhikkhave, sāvakassa satthusāsane pariyogāhiya vattato ruḷhanīyaṁ satthusāsanaṁ hoti ojavantaṁ. Saddhassa, bhikkhave, sāvakassa satthusāsane pariyogāhiya vattato ayamanudhammo hoti: ‘kāmaṁ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, sarīre upassussatu maṁsalohitaṁ, yaṁ taṁ purisathāmena purisavīriyena purisaparakkamena pattabbaṁ na taṁ apāpuṇitvā vīriyassa saṇṭhānaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Saddhassa, bhikkhave, sāvakassa satthusāsane pariyogāhiya vattato dvinnaṁ phalānaṁ aññataraṁ phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ— diṭṭheva dhamme aññā, sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā”ti.
[¶49] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶50] > Pali: Kīṭāgirisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶51] > Pali: Bhikkhuvaggo niṭṭhito dutiyo.
[¶52] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶53] > Pali: Kuñjara rāhula sassataloko,
Mālukyaputto ca bhaddāli nāmo;
Khudda dijātha sahampatiyācaṁ,
Nāḷaka raññikiṭāgirināmo.
## 76. MN 71 · To Vacchagotta on the Three Knowledges
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/76/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/76/#p-N
[¶0] MN 71 · To Vacchagotta on the Three Knowledges
> Pali: MN 71 · Tevijjavacchasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ.
[¶2] Now at that time the wanderer Vacchagotta was residing in the Single Lotus monastery for the wanderers.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena vacchagotto paribbājako ekapuṇḍarīke paribbājakārāme paṭivasati.
[¶3] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Vesālī for alms. Then it occurred to him, “It’s too early to wander for alms in Vesālī. Why don’t I visit the wanderer Vacchagotta at the Single Lotus Monastery?” So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “atippago kho tāva vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya carituṁ; yannūnāhaṁ yena ekapuṇḍarīko paribbājakārāmo yena vacchagotto paribbājako tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti. Atha kho bhagavā yena ekapuṇḍarīko paribbājakārāmo yena vacchagotto paribbājako tenupasaṅkami.
[¶4] Vacchagotta saw the Buddha coming off in the distance, and said to him, “Let the Blessed One come, sir! Welcome to the Blessed One, sir! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please, sir, sit down, here, a seat is ready.”
> Pali: Addasā kho vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “Etu kho, bhante, bhagavā. Svāgataṁ, bhante, bhagavato. Cirassaṁ kho, bhante, bhagavā imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu, bhante, bhagavā idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti.
[¶5] The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, while Vacchagotta took a low seat and sat to one side. Then Vacchagotta said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Vacchagottopi kho paribbājako aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶6] “Sir, I have heard this: ‘The ascetic Gotama claims to be all-knowing and all-seeing, to know and see everything without exception, thus: “Knowledge and vision are constantly and continually present to me, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking.”’ I trust those who say this repeat what the Buddha has said, and do not misrepresent him with an untruth? Is their explanation in line with the teaching? Are there any legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism?”
> Pali: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaññū sabbadassāvī, aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānāti, carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan’ti. Ye te, bhante, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaññū sabbadassāvī, aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānāti, carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan’ti, kacci te, bhante, bhagavato vuttavādino, na ca bhagavantaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhanti, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaronti, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchatī”ti?
[¶7] “Vaccha, those who say this do not repeat what I have said. They misrepresent me with what is false and untrue.”
> Pali: “Ye te, vaccha, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaññū sabbadassāvī, aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānāti, carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan’ti, na me te vuttavādino, abbhācikkhanti ca pana maṁ asatā abhūtenā”ti.
[¶8] “So how should we answer so as to repeat what the Buddha has said, and not misrepresent him with an untruth? How should we explain in line with his teaching, with no legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ byākaramānā pana mayaṁ, bhante, vuttavādino ceva bhagavato assāma, na ca bhagavantaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkheyyāma, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākareyyāma, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgaccheyyā”ti?
[¶9] “‘The ascetic Gotama has the three knowledges.’ Answering like this you would repeat what I have said, and not misrepresent me with an untruth. You would explain in line with my teaching, and there would be no legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism.
> Pali: “‘Tevijjo samaṇo gotamo’ti kho, vaccha, byākaramāno vuttavādī ceva me assa, na ca maṁ abhūtena abbhācikkheyya, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākareyya, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgaccheyya.
[¶10] For, Vaccha, whenever I want, I recollect my many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. I remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so I recollect my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: Ahañhi, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāmi anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
[¶11] And whenever I want, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: Ahañhi, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāmi dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi.
[¶12] And I have realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. I live having realized it with my own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Ahañhi, vaccha, āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmi.
[¶13] ‘The ascetic Gotama has the three knowledges.’ Answering like this you would repeat what I have said, and not misrepresent me with an untruth. You would explain in line with my teaching, and there would be no legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism.”
> Pali: ‘Tevijjo samaṇo gotamo’ti kho, vaccha, byākaramāno vuttavādī ceva me assa, na ca maṁ abhūtena abbhācikkheyya, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākareyya, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgaccheyyā”ti.
[¶14] When he said this, the wanderer Vacchagotta said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, are there any laypeople who, without giving up the fetter of lay life, make an end of suffering when the body breaks up?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “atthi nu kho, bho gotama, koci gihī gihisaṁyojanaṁ appahāya kāyassa bhedā dukkhassantakaro”ti?
[¶15] “No, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Natthi kho, vaccha, koci gihī gihisaṁyojanaṁ appahāya kāyassa bhedā dukkhassantakaro”ti.
[¶16] “But are there any laypeople who, without giving up the fetter of lay life, go to heaven when the body breaks up?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho gotama, koci gihī gihisaṁyojanaṁ appahāya kāyassa bhedā saggūpago”ti?
[¶17] “There’s not just one hundred laypeople, Vaccha, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that who, without giving up the fetter of lay life, go to heaven when the body breaks up.”
> Pali: “Na kho, vaccha, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova ye gihī gihisaṁyojanaṁ appahāya kāyassa bhedā saggūpagā”ti.
[¶18] “Worthy Gotama, are there any Ājīvaka ascetics who make an end of suffering when the body breaks up?”
> Pali: “Atthi nu kho, bho gotama, koci ājīvako kāyassa bhedā dukkhassantakaro”ti?
[¶19] “No, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Natthi kho, vaccha, koci ājīvako kāyassa bhedā dukkhassantakaro”ti.
[¶20] “But are there any Ājīvaka ascetics who go to heaven when the body breaks up?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho gotama, koci ājīvako kāyassa bhedā saggūpago”ti?
[¶21] “Vaccha, when I recollect the past ninety-one eons, I can’t find any Ājīvaka ascetics who have gone to heaven, except one; and he taught the efficacy of deeds and action.”
> Pali: “Ito kho so, vaccha, ekanavuto kappo yamahaṁ anussarāmi, nābhijānāmi kañci ājīvakaṁ saggūpagaṁ aññatra ekena; sopāsi kammavādī kiriyavādī”ti.
[¶22] “In that case, worthy Gotama, that sectarian fold is empty even of the chance to go to heaven.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ sante, bho gotama, suññaṁ aduṁ titthāyatanaṁ antamaso saggūpagenapī”ti?
[¶23] “Yes, Vaccha, that sectarian fold is empty even of the chance to go to heaven.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, vaccha, suññaṁ aduṁ titthāyatanaṁ antamaso saggūpagenapī”ti.
[¶24] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the wanderer Vacchagotta approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶25] > Pali: Tevijjavacchasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 77. MN 72 · With Vacchagotta on Fire
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/77/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/77/#p-N
[¶0] MN 72 · With Vacchagotta on Fire
> Pali: MN 72 · Aggivacchasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the wanderer Vacchagotta went up to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho vacchagotto paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Worthy Gotama, is this your view: ‘The cosmos is eternal. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, ‘sassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶4] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘sassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶5] “Then is this your view: ‘The cosmos is not eternal. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, ‘asassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶6] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘asassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶7] “Then is this your view: ‘The cosmos is finite. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, ‘antavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶8] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘antavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶9] “Then is this your view: ‘The cosmos is infinite. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, ‘anantavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶10] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘anantavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶11] “Then is this your view: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶12] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶13] “Then is this your view: ‘The soul is one thing, the body another. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶14] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶15] “Then is this your view: ‘A realized one still exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶16] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶17] “Then is this your view: ‘A realized one no longer exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶18] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶19] “Then is this your view: ‘A realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶20] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶21] “Then is this your view: ‘A realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?
[¶22] “That’s not my view, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶23] “Worthy Gotama, when asked these ten questions, you say: ‘That’s not my view.’ Seeing what drawback do you avoid all these convictions?”
> Pali: “‘Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, sassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— sassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, asassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— asassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, antavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— antavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, anantavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— anantavā loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīraṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. ‘Kiṁ pana, bho gotama, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti— evaṁdiṭṭhi bhavaṁ gotamo’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho ahaṁ, vaccha, evaṁdiṭṭhi— neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti vadesi. Kiṁ pana bho gotamo ādīnavaṁ sampassamāno evaṁ imāni sabbaso diṭṭhigatāni anupagato”ti?
[¶24] “Each of these ten convictions is the thicket of views, the desert of views, the twist of views, the dodge of views, the fetter of views. They’re beset with suffering, distress, anguish, and fever. They don’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. Seeing this drawback I avoid all these convictions.”
> Pali: “‘Sassato loko’ti kho, vaccha, diṭṭhigatametaṁ diṭṭhigahanaṁ diṭṭhikantāro diṭṭhivisūkaṁ diṭṭhivipphanditaṁ diṭṭhisaṁyojanaṁ sadukkhaṁ savighātaṁ saupāyāsaṁ sapariḷāhaṁ, na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati. ‘Asassato loko’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘antavā loko’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘anantavā loko’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, vaccha …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, vaccha, diṭṭhigatametaṁ diṭṭhigahanaṁ diṭṭhikantāro diṭṭhivisūkaṁ diṭṭhivipphanditaṁ diṭṭhisaṁyojanaṁ sadukkhaṁ savighātaṁ saupāyāsaṁ sapariḷāhaṁ, na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati. Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, vaccha, ādīnavaṁ sampassamāno evaṁ imāni sabbaso diṭṭhigatāni anupagato”ti.
[¶25] “But does the worthy Gotama have any convictions at all?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana bhoto gotamassa kiñci diṭṭhigatan”ti?
[¶26] “A realized one has done away with convictions. For a realized one has seen: ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form. Such is feeling, such is the origin of feeling, such is the disappearance of feeling. Such is perception, such is the origin of perception, such is the disappearance of perception. Such are choices, such is the origin of choices, such is the disappearance of choices. Such is consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’ That’s why a Realized One is freed by not grasping with the ending, fading away, cessation, giving up, and letting go of all conceiving, all churning, and all I-making, mine-making, or underlying tendency to conceit, I say.”
> Pali: “Diṭṭhigatanti kho, vaccha, apanītametaṁ tathāgatassa. Diṭṭhañhetaṁ, vaccha, tathāgatena: ‘iti rūpaṁ, iti rūpassa samudayo, iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo; iti vedanā, iti vedanāya samudayo, iti vedanāya atthaṅgamo; iti saññā, iti saññāya samudayo, iti saññāya atthaṅgamo; iti saṅkhārā, iti saṅkhārānaṁ samudayo, iti saṅkhārānaṁ atthaṅgamo; iti viññāṇaṁ, iti viññāṇassa samudayo, iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo’ti. Tasmā tathāgato sabbamaññitānaṁ sabbamathitānaṁ sabbaahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānānusayānaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā anupādā vimuttoti vadāmī”ti.
[¶27] “But worthy Gotama, when a mendicant’s mind is freed like this, where are they reborn?”
> Pali: “Evaṁ vimuttacitto pana, bho gotama, bhikkhu kuhiṁ upapajjatī”ti?
[¶28] “‘They’re reborn’ doesn’t apply, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upeti”.
[¶29] “Well then, are they not reborn?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho gotama, na upapajjatī”ti?
[¶30] “‘They’re not reborn’ doesn’t apply, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Na upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upeti”.
[¶31] “Well then, are they both reborn and not reborn?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho gotama, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatī”ti?
[¶32] “‘They’re both reborn and not reborn’ doesn’t apply, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upeti”.
[¶33] “Well then, are they neither reborn nor not reborn?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho gotama, neva upapajjati na na upapajjatī”ti?
[¶34] “‘They’re neither reborn nor not reborn’ doesn’t apply, Vaccha.”
> Pali: “Neva upapajjati na na upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upeti”.
[¶35] “Worthy Gotama, when asked all these questions, you say: ‘It doesn’t apply.’ I fail to understand this point, worthy Gotama; I’ve fallen into confusion. And I’ve now lost even the degree of clarity I had from previous discussions with the worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “‘Evaṁ vimuttacitto pana, bho gotama, bhikkhu kuhiṁ upapajjatī’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upetī’ti vadesi. ‘Tena hi, bho gotama, na upapajjatī’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upetī’ti vadesi. ‘Tena hi, bho gotama, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatī’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upetī’ti vadesi. ‘Tena hi, bho gotama, neva upapajjati na na upapajjatī’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘neva upapajjati na na upapajjatīti kho, vaccha, na upetī’ti vadesi. Etthāhaṁ, bho gotama, aññāṇamāpādiṁ, ettha sammohamāpādiṁ. Yāpi me esā bhoto gotamassa purimena kathāsallāpena ahu pasādamattā sāpi me etarahi antarahitā”ti.
[¶36] “No wonder you don’t understand, Vaccha, no wonder you’re confused. For this principle is deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute. It’s hard for you to understand, since you have a different view, creed, and belief, and another discipline and denomination.
> Pali: “Alañhi te, vaccha, aññāṇāya, alaṁ sammohāya. Gambhīro hāyaṁ, vaccha, dhammo duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo. So tayā dujjāno aññadiṭṭhikena aññakhantikena aññarucikena aññatrayogena aññatrācariyakena.
[¶37] Well then, Vaccha, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like.
> Pali: Tena hi, vaccha, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi; yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi.
[¶38] What do you think, Vaccha? Suppose a fire was burning in front of you. Would you know: ‘This fire is burning in front of me’?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vaccha, sace te purato aggi jaleyya, jāneyyāsi tvaṁ: ‘ayaṁ me purato aggi jalatī’”ti?
[¶39] “Yes, I would, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Sace me, bho gotama, purato aggi jaleyya, jāneyyāhaṁ: ‘ayaṁ me purato aggi jalatī’”ti.
[¶40] “But Vaccha, suppose they were to ask you: ‘This fire burning in front of you: what does it depend on to burn?’ How would you answer?”
> Pali: “Sace pana taṁ, vaccha, evaṁ puccheyya: ‘yo te ayaṁ purato aggi jalati ayaṁ aggi kiṁ paṭicca jalatī’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho tvaṁ, vaccha, kinti byākareyyāsī”ti?
[¶41] > Pali: “Sace maṁ, bho gotama, evaṁ puccheyya:
[¶42] “I would answer like this: ‘This fire burning in front of me burns in dependence on grass and logs as fuel.’”
> Pali: ‘yo te ayaṁ purato aggi jalati ayaṁ aggi kiṁ paṭicca jalatī’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bho gotama, evaṁ byākareyyaṁ: ‘yo me ayaṁ purato aggi jalati ayaṁ aggi tiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṁ paṭicca jalatī’”ti.
[¶43] “Suppose that fire burning in front of you was extinguished. Would you know: ‘This fire in front of me is quenched’?”
> Pali: “Sace te, vaccha, purato so aggi nibbāyeyya, jāneyyāsi tvaṁ: ‘ayaṁ me purato aggi nibbuto’”ti?
[¶44] “Yes, I would, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Sace me, bho gotama, purato so aggi nibbāyeyya, jāneyyāhaṁ: ‘ayaṁ me purato aggi nibbuto’”ti.
[¶45] “But Vaccha, suppose they were to ask you: ‘This fire in front of you that is quenched: in what direction did it go— east, south, west, or north?’ How would you answer?”
> Pali: “Sace pana taṁ, vaccha, evaṁ puccheyya: ‘yo te ayaṁ purato aggi nibbuto so aggi ito katamaṁ disaṁ gato— puratthimaṁ vā dakkhiṇaṁ vā pacchimaṁ vā uttaraṁ vā’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho tvaṁ, vaccha, kinti byākareyyāsī”ti?
[¶46] “It doesn’t apply, worthy Gotama. The fire depended on grass and logs as fuel. When that runs out, and no more fuel is added, the fire is reckoned to have become quenched due to lack of fuel.”
> Pali: “Na upeti, bho gotama, yañhi so, bho gotama, aggi tiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṁ paṭicca ajali tassa ca pariyādānā aññassa ca anupahārā anāhāro nibbutotveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchatī”ti.
[¶47] “In the same way, Vaccha, any form by which a realized one might be described has been given up, cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated, and unable to arise in the future. A realized one is freed from reckoning in terms of form. They’re deep, immeasurable, and hard to fathom, like the ocean. ‘They’re reborn’, ‘they’re not reborn’, ‘they’re both reborn and not reborn’, ‘they’re neither reborn nor not reborn’—none of these apply.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, vaccha, yena rūpena tathāgataṁ paññāpayamāno paññāpeyya taṁ rūpaṁ tathāgatassa pahīnaṁ ucchinnamūlaṁ tālāvatthukataṁ anabhāvaṅkataṁ āyatiṁ anuppādadhammaṁ. Rūpasaṅkhayavimutto kho, vaccha, tathāgato gambhīro appameyyo duppariyogāḷho— seyyathāpi mahāsamuddo. Upapajjatīti na upeti, na upapajjatīti na upeti, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatīti na upeti, neva upapajjati na na upapajjatīti na upeti.
[¶48] Any feeling … perception … choices … consciousness by which a realized one might be described has been given up, cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated, and unable to arise in the future. A realized one is freed from reckoning in terms of consciousness. They’re deep, immeasurable, and hard to fathom, like the ocean. ‘They’re reborn’, ‘they’re not reborn’, ‘they’re both reborn and not reborn’, ‘they’re neither reborn nor not reborn’—none of these apply.”
> Pali: Yāya vedanāya tathāgataṁ paññāpayamāno paññāpeyya sā vedanā tathāgatassa pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Vedanāsaṅkhayavimutto kho, vaccha, tathāgato gambhīro appameyyo duppariyogāḷho— seyyathāpi mahāsamuddo. Upapajjatīti na upeti, na upapajjatīti na upeti, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatīti na upeti, neva upapajjati na na upapajjatīti na upeti. Yāya saññāya tathāgataṁ paññāpayamāno paññāpeyya sā saññā tathāgatassa pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Saññāsaṅkhayavimutto kho, vaccha, tathāgato gambhīro appameyyo duppariyogāḷho— seyyathāpi mahāsamuddo. Upapajjatīti na upeti, na upapajjatīti na upeti, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatīti na upeti, neva upapajjati na na upapajjatīti na upeti. Yehi saṅkhārehi tathāgataṁ paññāpayamāno paññāpeyya te saṅkhārā tathāgatassa pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Saṅkhārasaṅkhayavimutto kho, vaccha, tathāgato gambhīro appameyyo duppariyogāḷho— seyyathāpi mahāsamuddo. Upapajjatīti na upeti, na upapajjatīti na upeti, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatīti na upeti, neva upapajjati na na upapajjatīti na upeti. Yena viññāṇena tathāgataṁ paññāpayamāno paññāpeyya taṁ viññāṇaṁ tathāgatassa pahīnaṁ ucchinnamūlaṁ tālāvatthukataṁ anabhāvaṅkataṁ āyatiṁ anuppādadhammaṁ. Viññāṇasaṅkhayavimutto kho, vaccha, tathāgato gambhīro appameyyo duppariyogāḷho— seyyathāpi mahāsamuddo. Upapajjatīti na upeti, na upapajjatīti na upeti, upapajjati ca na ca upapajjatīti na upeti, neva upapajjati na na upapajjatīti na upetī”ti.
[¶49] When he said this, the wanderer Vacchagotta said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶50] “Worthy Gotama, suppose there was a large sal tree not far from a town or village. And because it’s impermanent, its branches and foliage, bark and shoots, and softwood would fall off. After some time it would be rid of branches and foliage, bark and shoots, and softwood, pure, and consolidated in the core. In the same way, worthy Gotama’s dispensation is rid of branches and foliage, bark and shoots, and softwood, pure, and consolidated in the core.
> Pali: “seyyathāpi, bho gotama, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre mahāsālarukkho. Tassa aniccatā sākhāpalāsā palujjeyyuṁ, tacapapaṭikā palujjeyyuṁ, pheggū palujjeyyuṁ; so aparena samayena apagatasākhāpalāso apagatatacapapaṭiko apagataphegguko suddho assa, sāre patiṭṭhito; evameva bhoto gotamassa pāvacanaṁ apagatasākhāpalāsaṁ apagatatacapapaṭikaṁ apagatapheggukaṁ suddhaṁ, sāre patiṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶51] Excellent, worthy Gotama! … From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶52] > Pali: Aggivacchasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 78. MN 73 · The Longer Discourse With Vacchagotta
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/78/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/78/#p-N
[¶0] MN 73 · The Longer Discourse With Vacchagotta
> Pali: MN 73 · Mahāvacchasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Then the wanderer Vacchagotta went up to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha, “For a long time I have had discussions with the worthy Gotama. Please teach me in brief what is skillful and what is unskillful.”
> Pali: Atha kho vacchagotto paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “dīgharattāhaṁ bhotā gotamena sahakathī. Sādhu me bhavaṁ gotamo saṅkhittena kusalākusalaṁ desetū”ti.
[¶3] “Vaccha, I can teach you what is skillful and what is unskillful in brief or in detail. Still, let me do so in brief. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Saṅkhittenapi kho te ahaṁ, vaccha, kusalākusalaṁ deseyyaṁ, vitthārenapi kho te ahaṁ, vaccha, kusalākusalaṁ deseyyaṁ; api ca te ahaṁ, vaccha, saṅkhittena kusalākusalaṁ desessāmi. Taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, worthy sir,” Vaccha replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Greed is unskillful, contentment is skillful. Hate is unskillful, love is skillful. Delusion is unskillful, understanding is skillful. So there are these three unskillful things and three that are skillful.
> Pali: “Lobho kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, alobho kusalaṁ; doso kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, adoso kusalaṁ; moho kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, amoho kusalaṁ. Iti kho, vaccha, ime tayo dhammā akusalā, tayo dhammā kusalā.
[¶6] Killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; covetousness, ill will, and wrong view: these things are unskillful. Refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; refraining from speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical; contentment, good will, and right view: these things are skillful. So there are these ten unskillful things and ten that are skillful.
> Pali: Pāṇātipāto kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, pāṇātipātā veramaṇī kusalaṁ; adinnādānaṁ kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, adinnādānā veramaṇī kusalaṁ; kāmesumicchācāro kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī kusalaṁ; musāvādo kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, musāvādā veramaṇī kusalaṁ; pisuṇā vācā kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī kusalaṁ; pharusā vācā kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī kusalaṁ; samphappalāpo kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, samphappalāpā veramaṇī kusalaṁ; abhijjhā kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, anabhijjhā kusalaṁ; byāpādo kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ, abyāpādo kusalaṁ; micchādiṭṭhi kho, vaccha, akusalaṁ sammādiṭṭhi kusalaṁ. Iti kho, vaccha, ime dasa dhammā akusalā, dasa dhammā kusalā.
[¶7] When a mendicant has given up craving so it is cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated, and unable to arise in the future, that mendicant is perfected. They’ve ended the defilements, completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and are rightly freed through enlightenment.”
> Pali: Yato kho, vaccha, bhikkhuno taṇhā pahīnā hoti ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā, so hoti bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto”ti.
[¶8] “Leaving aside the worthy Gotama, is there even a single monk disciple of Worthy Gotama who has realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and lives having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements?”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatu bhavaṁ gotamo. Atthi pana te bhoto gotamassa ekabhikkhupi sāvako yo āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharatī”ti?
[¶9] “There are not just one hundred such monks who are my disciples, Vaccha, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that.”
> Pali: “Na kho, vaccha, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova ye bhikkhū mama sāvakā āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharantī”ti.
[¶10] “Leaving aside the worthy Gotama and the monks, is there even a single nun disciple of Worthy Gotama who has realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and lives having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements?”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatu bhavaṁ gotamo, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhū. Atthi pana bhoto gotamassa ekā bhikkhunīpi sāvikā yā āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharatī”ti?
[¶11] “There are not just one hundred such nuns who are my disciples, Vaccha, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that.”
> Pali: “Na kho, vaccha, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova yā bhikkhuniyo mama sāvikā āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharantī”ti.
[¶12] “Leaving aside the worthy Gotama, the monks, and the nuns, is there even a single layman disciple of Worthy Gotama—white-clothed and chaste—who, with the ending of the five lower fetters, is reborn spontaneously, to be extinguished there, not liable to return from that world?”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatu bhavaṁ gotamo, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhū, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhuniyo. Atthi pana bhoto gotamassa ekupāsakopi sāvako gihī odātavasano brahmacārī yo pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā”ti?
[¶13] “There are not just one hundred such chaste laymen who are my disciples, Vaccha, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that.”
> Pali: “Na kho, vaccha, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova ye upāsakā mama sāvakā gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā”ti.
[¶14] “Leaving aside Worthy Gotama, the monks, the nuns, and the chaste laymen, is there even a single layman disciple of the worthy Gotama—white-clothed, enjoying sensual pleasures, following instructions, and responding to advice—who has gone beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and lives self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instruction?”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatu bhavaṁ gotamo, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhū, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhuniyo, tiṭṭhantu upāsakā gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino. Atthi pana bhoto gotamassa ekupāsakopi sāvako gihī odātavasano kāmabhogī sāsanakaro ovādappaṭikaro yo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane viharatī”ti?
[¶15] “There are not just one hundred such laymen enjoying sensual pleasures who are my disciples, Vaccha, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that.”
> Pali: “Na kho, vaccha, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova ye upāsakā mama sāvakā gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino sāsanakarā ovādappaṭikarā tiṇṇavicikicchā vigatakathaṅkathā vesārajjappattā aparappaccayā satthusāsane viharantī”ti.
[¶16] “Leaving aside Worthy Gotama, the monks, the nuns, the chaste laymen, and the laymen enjoying sensual pleasures, is there even a single laywoman disciple of Worthy Gotama—white-clothed and chaste—who, with the ending of the five lower fetters, is reborn spontaneously, to be extinguished there, not liable to return from that world?”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatu bhavaṁ gotamo, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhū, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhuniyo, tiṭṭhantu upāsakā gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino, tiṭṭhantu upāsakā gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino. Atthi pana bhoto gotamassa ekupāsikāpi sāvikā gihinī odātavasanā brahmacārinī yā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyinī anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā”ti?
[¶17] “There are not just one hundred such chaste laywomen who are my disciples, Vaccha, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that.”
> Pali: “Na kho, vaccha, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova yā upāsikā mama sāvikā gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyiniyo anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā”ti.
[¶18] “Leaving aside Worthy Gotama, the monks, the nuns, the chaste laymen, the laymen enjoying sensual pleasures, and the chaste laywomen, is there even a single laywoman disciple of the worthy Gotama—white-clothed, enjoying sensual pleasures, following instructions, and responding to advice—who has gone beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and lives self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instruction?”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatu bhavaṁ gotamo, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhū, tiṭṭhantu bhikkhuniyo, tiṭṭhantu upāsakā gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino, tiṭṭhantu upāsakā gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino, tiṭṭhantu upāsikā gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo. Atthi pana bhoto gotamassa ekupāsikāpi sāvikā gihinī odātavasanā kāmabhoginī sāsanakarā ovādappaṭikarā yā tiṇṇavicikicchā vigatakathaṅkathā vesārajjappattā aparappaccayā satthusāsane viharatī”ti?
[¶19] “There are not just one hundred such laywomen enjoying sensual pleasures who are my disciples, Vaccha, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that.”
> Pali: “Na kho, vaccha, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova yā upāsikā mama sāvikā gihiniyo odātavasanā kāmabhoginiyo sāsanakarā ovādappaṭikarā tiṇṇavicikicchā vigatakathaṅkathā vesārajjappattā aparappaccayā satthusāsane viharantī”ti.
[¶20] “If the worthy Gotama was the only one to succeed in this teaching, not any monks, then this spiritual path would be incomplete in that respect. But because both the worthy Gotama and monks have succeeded in this teaching, this spiritual path is complete in that respect.
> Pali: “Sace hi, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavaṁyeva gotamo ārādhako abhavissa, no ca kho bhikkhū ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ abhavissa tenaṅgena. Yasmā ca kho, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako bhikkhū ca ārādhakā; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ tenaṅgena.
[¶21] If the worthy Gotama and the monks were the only ones to succeed in this teaching, not any nuns … chaste laymen … laymen enjoying sensual pleasures … chaste laywomen …
> Pali: Sace hi, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako abhavissa, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, no ca kho bhikkhuniyo ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ abhavissa tenaṅgena. Yasmā ca kho, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ tenaṅgena. Sace hi, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako abhavissa, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu, no ca kho upāsakā gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ abhavissa tenaṅgena. Yasmā ca kho, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ tenaṅgena. Sace hi, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako abhavissa, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, no ca kho upāsakā gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ abhavissa tenaṅgena. Yasmā ca kho, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino ārādhakā; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ tenaṅgena. Sace hi, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako abhavissa, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, no ca kho upāsikā gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ abhavissa tenaṅgena. Yasmā ca kho, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino ārādhakā, upāsikā ca gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo ārādhikā; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ tenaṅgena.
[¶22] laywomen enjoying sensual pleasures, then this spiritual path would be incomplete in that respect. But because Worthy Gotama, monks, nuns, chaste laymen, laymen enjoying sensual pleasures, chaste laywomen, and laywomen enjoying sensual pleasures have all succeeded in this teaching, this spiritual path is complete in that respect.
> Pali: Sace hi, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako abhavissa, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino ārādhakā abhavissaṁsu, upāsikā ca gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu, no ca kho upāsikā gihiniyo odātavasanā kāmabhoginiyo ārādhikā abhavissaṁsu; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ abhavissa tenaṅgena. Yasmā ca kho, bho gotama, imaṁ dhammaṁ bhavañceva gotamo ārādhako, bhikkhū ca ārādhakā, bhikkhuniyo ca ārādhikā, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino ārādhakā, upāsakā ca gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino ārādhakā, upāsikā ca gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo ārādhikā, upāsikā ca gihiniyo odātavasanā kāmabhoginiyo ārādhikā; evamidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ tenaṅgena.
[¶23] Just as the Ganges River slants, slopes, and inclines toward the ocean, and keeps pressing into the ocean, in the same way Worthy Gotama’s assembly—with both laypeople and renunciates—slants, slopes, and inclines toward extinguishment, and keeps pressing upon extinguishment.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, gaṅgā nadī samuddaninnā samuddapoṇā samuddapabbhārā samuddaṁ āhacca tiṭṭhati, evamevāyaṁ bhoto gotamassa parisā sagahaṭṭhapabbajitā nibbānaninnā nibbānapoṇā nibbānapabbhārā nibbānaṁ āhacca tiṭṭhati.
[¶24] Excellent, worthy Gotama! … I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. May I receive the going forth, the ordination in the worthy Gotama’s presence?”
> Pali: Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama …pe… esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ bhoto gotamassa santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶25] “Vaccha, if someone formerly ordained in another sect wishes to take the going forth, the ordination in this teaching and training, they must spend four months on probation. When four months have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, they’ll give the going forth, the ordination into monkhood. However, I recognize individual differences in this matter.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, vaccha, aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṁ, so cattāro māse parivasati. Catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya; api ca mettha puggalavemattatā viditā”ti.
[¶26] “Sir, if four months probation are required in such a case, I’ll spend four years on probation. When four years have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, let them give me the going forth, the ordination into monkhood.” And the wanderer Vaccha received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence.
> Pali: “Sace, bhante, aññatitthiyapubbā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhantā pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhantā upasampadaṁ cattāro māse parivasanti, catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya; ahaṁ cattāri vassāni parivasissāmi. Catunnaṁ vassānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājentu upasampādentu bhikkhubhāvāyā”ti. Alattha kho vacchagotto paribbājako bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ alattha upasampadaṁ.
[¶27] Not long after his ordination, a fortnight later, Venerable Vacchagotta went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, I’ve reached as far as possible with the knowledge and understanding of a trainee. Please teach me further.”
> Pali: Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā vacchagotto addhamāsūpasampanno yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā vacchagotto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yāvatakaṁ, bhante, sekhena ñāṇena sekhāya vijjāya pattabbaṁ, anuppattaṁ taṁ mayā; uttari ca me bhagavā dhammaṁ desetū”ti.
[¶28] “Well then, Vaccha, further develop two things: serenity and discernment. When you have further developed these two things, they’ll lead to the penetration of many elements.
> Pali: “Tena hi tvaṁ, vaccha, dve dhamme uttari bhāvehi—samathañca vipassanañca. Ime kho te, vaccha, dve dhammā uttari bhāvitā—samatho ca vipassanā ca—anekadhātupaṭivedhāya saṁvattissanti.
[¶29] As far as you want, you will be capable of realizing these things, since each and every one is within range: ‘May I wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying myself and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity.’
> Pali: So tvaṁ, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhissasi: ‘anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhaveyyaṁ—ekopi hutvā bahudhā assaṁ, bahudhāpi hutvā eko assaṁ; āvibhāvaṁ, tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gaccheyyaṁ, seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ kareyyaṁ, seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gaccheyyaṁ, seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kameyyaṁ, seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parimaseyyaṁ, parimajjeyyaṁ; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteyyan’ti, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇissasi, sati satiāyatane.
[¶30] Whenever you want, you will be capable of realizing these things, since each and every one is within range: ‘With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, may I hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far.’
> Pali: So tvaṁ, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhissasi: ‘dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇeyyaṁ—dibbe ca mānuse ca, ye dūre santike cā’ti, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇissasi, sati satiāyatane.
[¶31] As far as you want, you will be capable of realizing these things, since each and every one is within range: ‘May I understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with my mind. May I understand mind with greed as “mind with greed”, and mind without greed as “mind without greed”; mind with hate as “mind with hate”, and mind without hate as “mind without hate”; mind with delusion as “mind with delusion”, and mind without delusion as “mind without delusion”; constricted mind as “constricted mind”, and scattered mind as “scattered mind”; expansive mind as “expansive mind”, and unexpansive mind as “unexpansive mind”; mind that is not supreme as “mind that is not supreme”, and mind that is supreme as “mind that is supreme”; mind immersed in samādhi as “mind immersed in samādhi”, and mind not immersed in samādhi as “mind not immersed in samādhi”; freed mind as “freed mind”, and unfreed mind as “unfreed mind”.’
> Pali: So tvaṁ, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhissasi: ‘parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajāneyyaṁ— sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ sarāgaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ vītarāgaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ sadosaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ vītadosaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; samohaṁ vā cittaṁ samohaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ vītamohaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ saṅkhittaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ vikkhittaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ mahaggataṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ amahaggataṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ sauttaraṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ anuttaraṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ samāhitaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ asamāhitaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ; vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ cittanti pajāneyyaṁ, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ avimuttaṁ cittanti pajāneyyan’ti, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇissasi, sati satiāyatane.
[¶32] As far as you want, you will be capable of realizing these things, since each and every one is within range: ‘May I recollect many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. May I remember: “There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.” May I recollect my many past lives, with features and details.’
> Pali: So tvaṁ, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhissasi: ‘anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussareyyaṁ, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi; anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe—amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapannoti; iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussareyyan’ti, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇissasi, sati satiāyatane.
[¶33] Whenever you want, you will be capable of realizing these things, since each and every one is within range: ‘With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, may I see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place—and understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: “These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.” And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, may I see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. And may I understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.’
> Pali: So tvaṁ, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhissasi: ‘dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passeyyaṁ cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajāneyyaṁ—ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā; ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannāti; iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passeyyaṁ cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajāneyyan’ti, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇissasi, sati satiāyatane.
[¶34] As far as you want, you will be capable of realizing these things, since each and every one is within range: ‘May I realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with my own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.’”
> Pali: So tvaṁ, vaccha, yāvadeva ākaṅkhissasi: ‘āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyan’ti, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇissasi, sati satiāyatane”ti.
[¶35] And then Venerable Vacchagotta approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. He got up from his seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā vacchagotto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶36] Then Vacchagotta, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā vacchagotto eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶37] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Vacchagotta became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā vacchagotto arahataṁ ahosi.
[¶38] Now at that time several mendicants were going to see the Buddha. Vacchagotta saw them coming off in the distance, went up to them, and said, “Hello venerables, where are you going?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ dassanāya gacchanti. Addasā kho āyasmā vacchagotto te bhikkhū dūratova āgacchante. Disvāna yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “handa kahaṁ pana tumhe āyasmanto gacchathā”ti?
[¶39] “Reverend, we are going to see the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Bhagavantaṁ kho mayaṁ, āvuso, dassanāya gacchāmā”ti.
[¶40] “Well then, reverends, in my name please bow with your head to the Buddha’s feet and say: ‘Sir, the mendicant Vacchagotta bows with his head to your feet and says, “I have served the Blessed One! I have served the Holy One!”’”
> Pali: “Tenahāyasmanto mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatha, evañca vadetha: ‘vacchagotto, bhante, bhikkhu bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, evañca vadeti— pariciṇṇo me bhagavā, pariciṇṇo me sugato’”ti.
[¶41] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Then those mendicants went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, the mendicant Vacchagotta bows with his head to your feet and says: ‘I have served the Blessed One! I have served the Holy One!’”
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato vacchagottassa paccassosuṁ. Atha kho te bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “āyasmā, bhante, vacchagotto bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, evañca vadeti: ‘pariciṇṇo me bhagavā, pariciṇṇo me sugato’”ti.
[¶42] “I’ve already encompassed Vacchagotta’s mind and understood that he has the three knowledges, and is very mighty and powerful. And deities also told me about this.”
> Pali: “Pubbeva me, bhikkhave, vacchagotto bhikkhu cetasā ceto paricca vidito: ‘tevijjo vacchagotto bhikkhu mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo’ti. Devatāpi me etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ: ‘tevijjo, bhante, vacchagotto bhikkhu mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo’”ti.
[¶43] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶44] > Pali: Mahāvacchasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 79. MN 74 · With Dīghanakha
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/79/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/79/#p-N
[¶0] MN 74 · With Dīghanakha
> Pali: MN 74 · Dīghanakhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain in the Boar’s Cave.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbate sūkarakhatāyaṁ.
[¶2] Then the wanderer Dīghanakha went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he stood to one side and said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, this is my doctrine and view: ‘Nothing is acceptable to me.’”
> Pali: Atha kho dīghanakho paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho dīghanakho paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ahañhi, bho gotama, evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘sabbaṁ me nakkhamatī’”ti.
[¶3] “This view of yours, Aggivessana— is that acceptable to you?”
> Pali: “Yāpi kho te esā, aggivessana, diṭṭhi: ‘sabbaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti, esāpi te diṭṭhi nakkhamatī”ti?
[¶4] “If I were to accept this view, worthy Gotama, it would make no difference, it would make no difference!”
> Pali: “Esā ce me, bho gotama, diṭṭhi khameyya, taṁpassa tādisameva, taṁpassa tādisamevā”ti.
[¶5] “Well, Aggivessana, there are many more in the world who say, ‘It would make no difference! It would make no difference!’ But they don’t give up that view, and they grasp another view. And there are a scant few in the world who say, ‘It would make no difference! It would make no difference!’ And they give up that view by not grasping another view.
> Pali: “Ato kho te, aggivessana, bahū hi bahutarā lokasmiṁ ye evamāhaṁsu: ‘taṁpassa tādisameva, taṁpassa tādisamevā’ti. Te tañceva diṭṭhiṁ nappajahanti aññañca diṭṭhiṁ upādiyanti. Ato kho te, aggivessana, tanū hi tanutarā lokasmiṁ ye evamāhaṁsu: ‘taṁpassa tādisameva, taṁpassa tādisamevā’ti. Te tañceva diṭṭhiṁ pajahanti aññañca diṭṭhiṁ na upādiyanti.
[¶6] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Everything is acceptable to me.’ There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Nothing is acceptable to me.’ There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Some things are acceptable to me and some things are not.’ Regarding this, the view of the ascetics and brahmins to whom everything is acceptable is close to greed, bondage, approving, attachment, and grasping. The view of the ascetics and brahmins to whom nothing is acceptable is far from greed, bondage, approving, attachment, and grasping.”
> Pali: Santaggivessana, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sabbaṁ me khamatī’ti; santaggivessana, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sabbaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti; santaggivessana, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘ekaccaṁ me khamati, ekaccaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti. Tatraggivessana, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sabbaṁ me khamatī’ti tesamayaṁ diṭṭhi sārāgāya santike, saññogāya santike, abhinandanāya santike, ajjhosānāya santike, upādānāya santike; tatraggivessana ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sabbaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti tesamayaṁ diṭṭhi asārāgāya santike, asaññogāya santike, anabhinandanāya santike, anajjhosānāya santike, anupādānāya santike”ti.
[¶7] When he said this, the wanderer Dīghanakha said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama commends my conviction! He recommends my conviction!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, dīghanakho paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ukkaṁseti me bhavaṁ gotamo diṭṭhigataṁ, samukkaṁseti me bhavaṁ gotamo diṭṭhigatan”ti.
[¶8] “Now, regarding the ascetics and brahmins to whom some things are acceptable and some things are not. Their view of what is acceptable is close to greed, bondage, approving, attachment, and grasping. Their view of what is not acceptable is far from greed, bondage, approving, attachment, and grasping.
> Pali: “Tatraggivessana, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘ekaccaṁ me khamati, ekaccaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti. Yā hi tesaṁ khamati sāyaṁ diṭṭhi sārāgāya santike, saññogāya santike, abhinandanāya santike, ajjhosānāya santike, upādānāya santike; yā hi tesaṁ nakkhamati sāyaṁ diṭṭhi asārāgāya santike, asaññogāya santike, anabhinandanāya santike, anajjhosānāya santike, anupādānāya santike.
[¶9] When it comes to the view of the ascetics and brahmins to whom everything is acceptable, a sensible person reflects like this: ‘I have the view that everything is acceptable. Suppose I were to obstinately stick to this view and insist, “This is the only truth, anything else is futile.” Then I’d argue with two individuals— an ascetic or brahmin to whom nothing is acceptable, and an ascetic or brahmin to whom some things are acceptable and some things are not. And when there’s arguing, there’s dispute; when there’s dispute there’s distress; and when there’s distress there’s harm.’ So, considering in themselves the potential for argument, dispute, distress, and harm, they give up that view by not grasping another view. That’s how those views are given up and let go.
> Pali: Tatraggivessana, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sabbaṁ me khamatī’ti tattha viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yā kho me ayaṁ diṭṭhi— sabbaṁ me khamatīti, imañce ahaṁ diṭṭhiṁ thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa vohareyyaṁ— idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti; dvīhi me assa viggaho— yo cāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi—sabbaṁ me nakkhamatīti, yo cāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi—ekaccaṁ me khamati, ekaccaṁ me nakkhamatīti— imehi assa dvīhi viggaho. Iti viggahe sati vivādo, vivāde sati vighāto, vighāte sati vihesā’. Iti so viggahañca vivādañca vighātañca vihesañca attani sampassamāno tañceva diṭṭhiṁ pajahati aññañca diṭṭhiṁ na upādiyati. Evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ paṭinissaggo hoti.
[¶10] When it comes to the view of the ascetics and brahmins to whom nothing is acceptable, a sensible person reflects like this: ‘I have the view that nothing is acceptable. Suppose I were to obstinately stick to this view and insist, “This is the only truth, anything else is futile.” Then I’d argue with two individuals— an ascetic or brahmin to whom everything is acceptable, and an ascetic or brahmin to whom some things are acceptable and some things are not. And when there’s arguing, there’s dispute; when there’s dispute there’s distress; and when there’s distress there’s harm.’ So, considering in themselves the potential for argument, dispute, distress, and harm, they give up that view by not grasping another view. That’s how those views are given up and let go.
> Pali: Tatraggivessana, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sabbaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti tattha viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yā kho me ayaṁ diṭṭhi— sabbaṁ me nakkhamatīti, imañce ahaṁ diṭṭhiṁ thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa vohareyyaṁ— idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti; dvīhi me assa viggaho— yo cāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi—sabbaṁ me khamatīti, yo cāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi—ekaccaṁ me khamati ekaccaṁ me nakkhamatīti— imehi assa dvīhi viggaho. Iti viggahe sati vivādo, vivāde sati vighāto, vighāte sati vihesā’. Iti so viggahañca vivādañca vighātañca vihesañca attani sampassamāno tañceva diṭṭhiṁ pajahati aññañca diṭṭhiṁ na upādiyati. Evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ paṭinissaggo hoti.
[¶11] When it comes to the view of the ascetics and brahmins to whom some things are acceptable and some things are not, a sensible person reflects like this: ‘I have the view that some things are acceptable and some things are not. Suppose I were to obstinately stick to this view and insist, “This is the only truth, anything else is futile.” Then I’d argue with two individuals— an ascetic or brahmin to whom everything is acceptable, and an ascetic or brahmin to whom nothing is acceptable. And when there’s arguing, there’s dispute; when there’s dispute there’s distress; and when there’s distress there’s harm.’ So, considering in themselves the potential for argument, dispute, distress, and harm, they give up that view by not grasping another view. That’s how those views are given up and let go.
> Pali: Tatraggivessana, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘ekaccaṁ me khamati, ekaccaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti tattha viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yā kho me ayaṁ diṭṭhi— ekaccaṁ me khamati, ekaccaṁ me nakkhamatīti, imañce ahaṁ diṭṭhiṁ thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa vohareyyaṁ— idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti; dvīhi me assa viggaho— yo cāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi—sabbaṁ me khamatīti, yo cāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi—sabbaṁ me nakkhamatīti— imehi assa dvīhi viggaho. Iti viggahe sati vivādo, vivāde sati vighāto, vighāte sati vihesā’. Iti so viggahañca vivādañca vighātañca vihesañca attani sampassamāno tañceva diṭṭhiṁ pajahati aññañca diṭṭhiṁ na upādiyati. Evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametāsaṁ diṭṭhīnaṁ paṭinissaggo hoti.
[¶12] Aggivessana, this body is formed. It’s made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction. You should see it as impermanent, as suffering, as diseased, as a boil, as a dart, as gloom, as an affliction, as alien, as breaking apart, as empty, as not-self. Doing so, you’ll give up desire, affection, and subservience to the body.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho panaggivessana, kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo, aniccato dukkhato rogato gaṇḍato sallato aghato ābādhato parato palokato suññato anattato samanupassitabbo. Tassimaṁ kāyaṁ aniccato dukkhato rogato gaṇḍato sallato aghato ābādhato parato palokato suññato anattato samanupassato yo kāyasmiṁ kāyachando kāyasneho kāyanvayatā sā pahīyati.
[¶13] There are these three feelings: pleasant, painful, and neutral. At a time when you feel a pleasant feeling, you don’t feel a painful or neutral feeling; you only feel a pleasant feeling. At a time when you feel a painful feeling, you don’t feel a pleasant or neutral feeling; you only feel a painful feeling. At a time when you feel a neutral feeling, you don’t feel a pleasant or painful feeling; you only feel a neutral feeling.
> Pali: Tisso kho imā, aggivessana, vedanā— sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Yasmiṁ, aggivessana, samaye sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, neva tasmiṁ samaye dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti; sukhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti. Yasmiṁ, aggivessana, samaye dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, neva tasmiṁ samaye sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti; dukkhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti. Yasmiṁ, aggivessana, samaye adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, neva tasmiṁ samaye sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, na dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti; adukkhamasukhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti.
[¶14] Pleasant, painful, and neutral feelings are impermanent, conditioned, dependently originated, liable to end, vanish, fade away, and cease.
> Pali: Sukhāpi kho, aggivessana, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā; dukkhāpi kho, aggivessana, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā; adukkhamasukhāpi kho, aggivessana, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā.
[¶15] Seeing this, a learned noble disciple grows disillusioned with pleasant, painful, and neutral feelings. Being disillusioned, desire fades away. When desire fades away they’re freed. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Evaṁ passaṁ, aggivessana, sutavā ariyasāvako sukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, dukkhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, adukkhamasukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati; nibbindaṁ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ, vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶16] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶17] A mendicant whose mind is freed like this doesn’t side with anyone or dispute with anyone. They use the language of the world to communicate without getting stuck on it.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vimuttacitto kho, aggivessana, bhikkhu na kenaci saṁvadati, na kenaci vivadati, yañca loke vuttaṁ tena voharati, aparāmasan”ti.
[¶18] Now at that time Venerable Sāriputta was standing behind the Buddha fanning him. Then he thought, “It seems the Buddha speaks of giving up and letting go of all these things through direct knowledge.” Reflecting like this, Venerable Sāriputta’s mind was freed from the defilements by not grasping.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato piṭṭhito ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ bījayamāno. Atha kho āyasmato sāriputtassa etadahosi: “tesaṁ tesaṁ kira no bhagavā dhammānaṁ abhiññā pahānamāha, tesaṁ tesaṁ kira no sugato dhammānaṁ abhiññā paṭinissaggamāhā”ti. Iti hidaṁ āyasmato sāriputtassa paṭisañcikkhato anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimucci.
[¶19] And the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in the wanderer Dīghanakha: “Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.” Then Dīghanakha saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. He went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. He said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Dīghanakhassa pana paribbājakassa virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti. Atha kho dīghanakho paribbājako diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶20] “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evameva kho bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶21] > Pali: Dīghanakhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 80. MN 75 · With Māgaṇḍiya
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/80/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/80/#p-N
[¶0] MN 75 · With Māgaṇḍiya
> Pali: MN 75 · Māgaṇḍiyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Kurus, near the Kuru town named Kammāsadamma, on a grass mat in the fire chamber of a brahmin of the Bhāradvāja clan.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kurūsu viharati kammāsadhammaṁ nāma kurūnaṁ nigamo, bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa agyāgāre tiṇasanthārake.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Kammāsadamma for alms. He wandered for alms in Kammāsadamma. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to a certain forest grove for the day’s meditation. Having plunged deep into it, he sat at the root of a certain tree to meditate.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya kammāsadhammaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Kammāsadhammaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena aññataro vanasaṇḍo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.
[¶3] Then as the wanderer Māgaṇḍiya was going for a walk he approached that fire chamber. He saw the grass mat spread out there and asked the brahmin of the Bhāradvāja clan, “Worthy Bhāradvāja, who has this grass mat been spread out for? It looks like an ascetic’s bed.”
> Pali: Atha kho māgaṇḍiyo paribbājako jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa agyāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho māgaṇḍiyo paribbājako bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa agyāgāre tiṇasanthārakaṁ paññattaṁ. Disvāna bhāradvājagottaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “kassa nvayaṁ bhoto bhāradvājassa agyāgāre tiṇasanthārako paññatto, samaṇaseyyānurūpaṁ maññe”ti?
[¶4] “There is the ascetic Gotama, a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ This bed has been spread for that worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Atthi, bho māgaṇḍiya, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Tassesā bhoto gotamassa seyyā paññattā”ti.
[¶5] “Well, it’s a sad sight, worthy Bhāradvāja, a very sad sight indeed, to see a bed for the worthy Gotama, that baby-killer!”
> Pali: “Duddiṭṭhaṁ vata, bho bhāradvāja, addasāma; duddiṭṭhaṁ vata, bho bhāradvāja, addasāma. Ye mayaṁ tassa bhoto gotamassa bhūnahuno seyyaṁ addasāmā”ti.
[¶6] “Be careful what you say, Māgaṇḍiya, be careful what you say. Many astute aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and ascetics are devoted to the worthy Gotama. They’ve been guided by him in the noble system, the skillful teaching.”
> Pali: “Rakkhassetaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, vācaṁ; rakkhassetaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, vācaṁ. Bahū hi tassa bhoto gotamassa khattiyapaṇḍitāpi brāhmaṇapaṇḍitāpi gahapatipaṇḍitāpi samaṇapaṇḍitāpi abhippasannā vinītā ariye ñāye dhamme kusale”ti.
[¶7] “Even if I was to see the worthy Gotama face to face, worthy Bhāradvāja, I would say to his face: ‘The ascetic Gotama is a baby-killer.’ Why is that? For so it came to me while sleeping.”
> Pali: “Sammukhā cepi mayaṁ, bho bhāradvāja, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ passeyyāma, sammukhāpi naṁ vadeyyāma: ‘bhūnahu samaṇo gotamo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi no sutte ocaratī”ti.
[¶8] “If you don’t mind, I’ll tell the ascetic Gotama about this.”
> Pali: “Sace taṁ bhoto māgaṇḍiyassa agaru āroceyyāmi taṁ samaṇassa gotamassā”ti.
[¶9] “Don’t worry, worthy Bhāradvāja. You may tell him exactly what I’ve said.”
> Pali: “Appossukko bhavaṁ bhāradvājo vuttova naṁ vadeyyā”ti.
[¶10] With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, the Buddha heard this discussion between the brahmin of the Bhāradvāja clan and the wanderer Māgaṇḍiya. Coming out of retreat, he went to the brahmin’s fire chamber and sat on the grass mat. Then the brahmin of the Bhāradvāja clan went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Bhāradvāja, did you have a discussion with the wanderer Māgaṇḍiya about this grass mat?”
> Pali: Assosi kho bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa māgaṇḍiyena paribbājakena saddhiṁ imaṁ kathāsallāpaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa agyāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā nisīdi bhagavā paññatte tiṇasanthārake. Atha kho bhāradvājagotto brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho bhāradvājagottaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “ahu pana te, bhāradvāja, māgaṇḍiyena paribbājakena saddhiṁ imaṁyeva tiṇasanthārakaṁ ārabbha kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti?
[¶11] When he said this, the brahmin, shocked and awestruck, said to the Buddha, “I wanted to mention this very thing to the worthy Gotama, but you brought it up before I had a chance.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhāradvājagotto brāhmaṇo saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “etadeva kho pana mayaṁ bhoto gotamassa ārocetukāmā. Atha ca pana bhavaṁ gotamo anakkhātaṁyeva akkhāsī”ti.
[¶12] But this conversation between the Buddha and the brahmin was left unfinished. Then as the wanderer Māgaṇḍiya was going for a walk he approached that fire chamber. He went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and the Buddha said to him:
> Pali: Ayañca hi bhagavato bhāradvājagottena brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ antarākathā vippakatā hoti. Atha kho māgaṇḍiyo paribbājako jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa agyāgāraṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho māgaṇḍiyaṁ paribbājakaṁ bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶13] “Māgaṇḍiya, the eye likes sights, it loves them and enjoys them. That’s been tamed, guarded, protected and restrained by the Realized One, and he teaches Dhamma for its restraint. Is that what you were referring to when you called me a baby-killer?”
> Pali: “Cakkhuṁ kho, māgaṇḍiya, rūpārāmaṁ rūparataṁ rūpasammuditaṁ. Taṁ tathāgatassa dantaṁ guttaṁ rakkhitaṁ saṁvutaṁ, tassa ca saṁvarāya dhammaṁ deseti. Idaṁ nu te etaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘bhūnahu samaṇo gotamo’”ti?
[¶14] “That’s exactly what I was referring to. Why is that? For so it came to me while sleeping.”
> Pali: “Etadeva kho pana me, bho gotama, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘bhūnahu samaṇo gotamo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi no sutte ocaratī”ti.
[¶15] “The ear likes sounds … The nose likes smells … The tongue likes tastes … The body likes touches … The mind likes ideas, it loves them and enjoys them. That’s been tamed, guarded, protected and restrained by the Realized One, and he teaches Dhamma for its restraint. Is that what you were referring to when you called me a baby-killer?”
> Pali: “Sotaṁ kho, māgaṇḍiya, saddārāmaṁ …pe… ghānaṁ kho, māgaṇḍiya gandhārāmaṁ … jivhā kho, māgaṇḍiya, rasārāmā rasaratā rasasammuditā. Sā tathāgatassa dantā guttā rakkhitā saṁvutā, tassā ca saṁvarāya dhammaṁ deseti. Idaṁ nu te etaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘bhūnahu samaṇo gotamo’”ti? “Etadeva kho pana me, bho gotama, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘bhūnahu samaṇo gotamo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi no sutte ocaratī”ti. “Kāyo kho, māgaṇḍiya, phoṭṭhabbārāmo phoṭṭhabbarato …pe… mano kho, māgaṇḍiya, dhammārāmo dhammarato dhammasammudito. So tathāgatassa danto gutto rakkhito saṁvuto, tassa ca saṁvarāya dhammaṁ deseti. Idaṁ nu te etaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘bhūnahu samaṇo gotamo’”ti?
[¶16] “That’s exactly what I was referring to. Why is that? For so it came to me while sleeping.”
> Pali: “Etadeva kho pana me, bho gotama, sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘bhūnahu samaṇo gotamo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhi no sutte ocaratī”ti.
[¶17] “What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Take someone who used to amuse themselves with sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Some time later—having truly understood the origin, ending, gratification, drawback, and escape of sights, and having given up craving and dispelled passion for sights—they would live rid of thirst, their mind settled internally. What would you have to say to them, Māgaṇḍiya?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya: ‘idhekacco cakkhuviññeyyehi rūpehi paricāritapubbo assa iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi, so aparena samayena rūpānaṁyeva samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā rūpataṇhaṁ pahāya rūpapariḷāhaṁ paṭivinodetvā vigatapipāso ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto vihareyya. Imassa pana te, māgaṇḍiya, kimassa vacanīyan’”ti?
[¶18] “Nothing, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Na kiñci, bho gotama”.
[¶19] “What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Take someone who used to amuse themselves with sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Some time later—having truly understood the origin, ending, gratification, drawback, and escape of touches, and having given up craving and dispelled passion for touches—they would live rid of thirst, their mind settled internally. What would you have to say to them, Māgaṇḍiya?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya: ‘idhekacco sotaviññeyyehi saddehi …pe… ghānaviññeyyehi gandhehi … jivhāviññeyyehi rasehi … kāyaviññeyyehi phoṭṭhabbehi paricāritapubbo assa iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi, so aparena samayena phoṭṭhabbānaṁyeva samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā phoṭṭhabbataṇhaṁ pahāya phoṭṭhabbapariḷāhaṁ paṭivinodetvā vigatapipāso ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto vihareyya. Imassa pana te, māgaṇḍiya, kimassa vacanīyan’”ti?
[¶20] “Nothing, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Na kiñci, bho gotama”.
[¶21] “Well, when I was still a layperson I used to amuse myself, supplied and provided with sights known by the eye … sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. I had three stilt longhouses— one for the rainy season, one for the winter, and one for the summer. I stayed in a stilt longhouse without coming downstairs for the four months of the rainy season, where I was entertained by musicians—none of them men. Some time later—having truly understood the origin, ending, gratification, drawback, and escape of sensual pleasures, and having given up craving and dispelled passion for sensual pleasures—I live rid of thirst, my mind settled internally. I see other sentient beings who are not free from sensual pleasures being consumed by craving for sensual pleasures, burning with passion for sensual pleasures, indulging in sensual pleasures. I don’t envy them, nor do I hope to enjoy that. Why is that? Because there is a satisfaction that is apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, which even equals heavenly pleasure. Enjoying that satisfaction, I don’t envy what is inferior, nor do I hope to enjoy it.
> Pali: “Ahaṁ kho pana, māgaṇḍiya, pubbe agāriyabhūto samāno pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāresiṁ cakkhuviññeyyehi rūpehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi, sotaviññeyyehi saddehi …pe… ghānaviññeyyehi gandhehi … jivhāviññeyyehi rasehi … kāyaviññeyyehi phoṭṭhabbehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi. Tassa mayhaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, tayo pāsādā ahesuṁ— eko vassiko, eko hemantiko, eko gimhiko. So kho ahaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, vassike pāsāde vassike cattāro māse nippurisehi tūriyehi paricārayamāno na heṭṭhāpāsādaṁ orohāmi. So aparena samayena kāmānaṁyeva samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā kāmataṇhaṁ pahāya kāmapariḷāhaṁ paṭivinodetvā vigatapipāso ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto viharāmi. So aññe satte passāmi kāmesu avītarāge kāmataṇhāhi khajjamāne kāmapariḷāhena pariḍayhamāne kāme paṭisevante. So tesaṁ na pihemi, na tattha abhiramāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yāhayaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, rati, aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi— api dibbaṁ sukhaṁ samadhigayha tiṭṭhati— tāya ratiyā ramamāno hīnassa na pihemi, na tattha abhiramāmi.
[¶22] Suppose there was a householder or a householder’s child who was rich, affluent, and wealthy. And they would amuse themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. That is, sights known by the eye … sounds … smells … tastes … touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Having practiced good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, when their body breaks up, after death, they’d be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm, in the company of the gods of the thirty-three. There they’d amuse themselves in the Garden of Delight, escorted by a band of nymphs, supplied and provided with the five kinds of heavenly sensual stimulation. Then they’d see a householder or a householder’s child amusing themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māgaṇḍiya, gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreyya cakkhuviññeyyehi rūpehi … pe… phoṭṭhabbehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi. So kāyena sucaritaṁ caritvā vācāya sucaritaṁ caritvā manasā sucaritaṁ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ. So tattha nandane vane accharāsaṅghaparivuto dibbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreyya. So passeyya gahapatiṁ vā gahapatiputtaṁ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṁ samaṅgībhūtaṁ paricārayamānaṁ.
[¶23] What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Would that god—amusing themselves in the Garden of Delight, escorted by a band of nymphs, supplied and provided with the five kinds of heavenly sensual stimulation—envy that householder or householder’s child their five kinds of human sensual stimulation, or return to human sensual pleasures?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya, api nu so devaputto nandane vane accharāsaṅghaparivuto dibbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricārayamāno amussa gahapatissa vā gahapatiputtassa vā piheyya, mānusakānaṁ vā pañcannaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ mānusakehi vā kāmehi āvaṭṭeyyā”ti?
[¶24] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because heavenly sensual pleasures are better than human sensual pleasures.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mānusakehi, bho gotama, kāmehi dibbakāmā abhikkantatarā ca paṇītatarā cā”ti.
[¶25] “In the same way, Māgaṇḍiya, when I was still a layperson I used to amuse myself with sights … sounds … smells … tastes … touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Some time later—having truly understood the origin, ending, gratification, drawback, and escape of sensual pleasures, and having given up craving and dispelled passion for sensual pleasures—I live rid of thirst, my mind settled internally. I see other sentient beings who are not free from sensual pleasures being consumed by craving for sensual pleasures, burning with passion for sensual pleasures, indulging in sensual pleasures. I don’t envy them, nor do I hope to enjoy that. Why is that? Because there is a satisfaction that is apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, which even equals heavenly pleasure. Enjoying that satisfaction, I don’t envy what is inferior, nor do I hope to enjoy it.
> Pali: “Evameva kho ahaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, pubbe agāriyabhūto samāno pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāresiṁ cakkhuviññeyyehi rūpehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi, sotaviññeyyehi saddehi …pe… ghānaviññeyyehi gandhehi … jivhāviññeyyehi rasehi … kāyaviññeyyehi phoṭṭhabbehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi. So aparena samayena kāmānaṁyeva samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā kāmataṇhaṁ pahāya kāmapariḷāhaṁ paṭivinodetvā vigatapipāso ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto viharāmi. So aññe satte passāmi kāmesu avītarāge kāmataṇhāhi khajjamāne kāmapariḷāhena pariḍayhamāne kāme paṭisevante, so tesaṁ na pihemi, na tattha abhiramāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yāhayaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, rati aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi— api dibbaṁ sukhaṁ samadhigayha tiṭṭhati— tāya ratiyā ramamāno hīnassa na pihemi, na tattha abhiramāmi.
[¶26] Suppose there was a person affected by leprosy, with sores and blisters on their limbs. Being devoured by worms, scratching with their nails at the opening of their wounds, they’d cauterize their body over a pit of glowing coals. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat them. The surgeon would make medicine for them, and by using that they’d be cured of leprosy. They’d be healthy, happy, autonomous, master of themselves, able to go where they wanted. Then they’d see another person affected by leprosy, with sores and blisters on their limbs, being devoured by worms, scratching with their nails at the opening of their wounds, cauterizing their body over a pit of glowing coals.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māgaṇḍiya, kuṭṭhī puriso arugatto pakkagatto kimīhi khajjamāno nakhehi vaṇamukhāni vippatacchamāno aṅgārakāsuyā kāyaṁ paritāpeyya. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto bhesajjaṁ kareyya. So taṁ bhesajjaṁ āgamma kuṭṭhehi parimucceyya, arogo assa sukhī serī sayaṁvasī yena kāmaṁ gamo. So aññaṁ kuṭṭhiṁ purisaṁ passeyya arugattaṁ pakkagattaṁ kimīhi khajjamānaṁ nakhehi vaṇamukhāni vippatacchamānaṁ aṅgārakāsuyā kāyaṁ paritāpentaṁ.
[¶27] What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Would that person envy that other person affected by leprosy for their pit of glowing coals or for taking medicine?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya, api nu so puriso amussa kuṭṭhissa purisassa piheyya aṅgārakāsuyā vā bhesajjaṁ paṭisevanāya vā”ti?
[¶28] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because you need to take medicine only when there’s a disease. When there’s no disease, there’s no need for medicine.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Taṁ kissa hetu? Roge hi, bho gotama, sati bhesajjena karaṇīyaṁ hoti, roge asati na bhesajjena karaṇīyaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶29] “In the same way, Māgaṇḍiya, when I was still a layperson I used to amuse myself with sights … sounds … smells … tastes … touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Some time later—having truly understood the origin, ending, gratification, drawback, and escape of sensual pleasures, and having given up craving and dispelled passion for sensual pleasures—I live rid of thirst, my mind settled internally. I see other sentient beings who are not free from sensual pleasures being consumed by craving for sensual pleasures, burning with passion for sensual pleasures, indulging in sensual pleasures. I don’t envy them, nor do I hope to enjoy that. Why is that? Because there is a satisfaction that is apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities, which even equals heavenly pleasure. Enjoying that satisfaction, I don’t envy what is inferior, nor do I hope to enjoy it.
> Pali: “Evameva kho ahaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, pubbe agāriyabhūto samāno pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāresiṁ, cakkhuviññeyyehi rūpehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi, sotaviññeyyehi saddehi …pe… ghānaviññeyyehi gandhehi … jivhāviññeyyehi rasehi … kāyaviññeyyehi phoṭṭhabbehi iṭṭhehi kantehi manāpehi piyarūpehi kāmūpasaṁhitehi rajanīyehi. So aparena samayena kāmānaṁyeva samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā kāmataṇhaṁ pahāya kāmapariḷāhaṁ paṭivinodetvā vigatapipāso ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto viharāmi. So aññe satte passāmi kāmesu avītarāge kāmataṇhāhi khajjamāne kāmapariḷāhena pariḍayhamāne kāme paṭisevante. So tesaṁ na pihemi, na tattha abhiramāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yāhayaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, rati, aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi— api dibbaṁ sukhaṁ samadhigayha tiṭṭhati— tāya ratiyā ramamāno hīnassa na pihemi, na tattha abhiramāmi.
[¶30] Suppose there was a person affected by leprosy, with sores and blisters on their limbs. Being devoured by worms, scratching with their nails at the opening of their wounds, they’d cauterize their body over a pit of glowing coals. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat them. The surgeon would make medicine for them, and by using that they’d be cured of leprosy. They’d be healthy, happy, autonomous, master of themselves, able to go where they wanted. Two strong men would grab them by the arms and drag them toward the pit of glowing coals.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māgaṇḍiya, kuṭṭhī puriso arugatto pakkagatto kimīhi khajjamāno nakhehi vaṇamukhāni vippatacchamāno aṅgārakāsuyā kāyaṁ paritāpeyya. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto bhesajjaṁ kareyya. So taṁ bhesajjaṁ āgamma kuṭṭhehi parimucceyya, arogo assa sukhī serī sayaṁvasī yena kāmaṁ gamo. Tamenaṁ dve balavanto purisā nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuṁ upakaḍḍheyyuṁ.
[¶31] What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Wouldn’t that person writhe and struggle to and fro?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya, api nu so puriso iti citiceva kāyaṁ sannāmeyyā”ti?
[¶32] “Yes, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because that fire is really painful to touch, fiercely burning and scorching.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama. Taṁ kissa hetu? Asu hi, bho gotama, aggi dukkhasamphasso ceva mahābhitāpo ca mahāpariḷāho cā”ti.
[¶33] “What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Is it only now that the fire is really painful to touch, fiercely burning and scorching, or was it painful previously as well?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya, idāneva nu kho so aggi dukkhasamphasso ceva mahābhitāpo ca mahāpariḷāho ca udāhu pubbepi so aggi dukkhasamphasso ceva mahābhitāpo ca mahāpariḷāho cā”ti?
[¶34] “That fire is painful now and it was also painful previously. That person was affected by leprosy, with sores and blisters on their limbs. Being devoured by worms, scratching with their nails at the opening of their wounds, their sense faculties were impaired. So even though the fire was actually painful to touch, they had a distorted perception that it was pleasant.”
> Pali: “Idāni ceva, bho gotama, so aggi dukkhasamphasso ceva mahābhitāpo ca mahāpariḷāho ca, pubbepi so aggi dukkhasamphasso ceva mahābhitāpo ca mahāpariḷāho ca. Asu ca, bho gotama, kuṭṭhī puriso arugatto pakkagatto kimīhi khajjamāno nakhehi vaṇamukhāni vippatacchamāno upahatindriyo dukkhasamphasseyeva aggismiṁ sukhamiti viparītasaññaṁ paccalatthā”ti.
[¶35] “In the same way, sensual pleasures of the past, future, and present are painful to touch, fiercely burning and scorching. These sentient beings who are not free from sensual pleasures—being consumed by craving for sensual pleasures, burning with passion for sensual pleasures—have impaired sense faculties. So even though sensual pleasures are actually painful to touch, they have a distorted perception that they are pleasant.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, māgaṇḍiya, atītampi addhānaṁ kāmā dukkhasamphassā ceva mahābhitāpā ca mahāpariḷāhā ca, anāgatampi addhānaṁ kāmā dukkhasamphassā ceva mahābhitāpā ca mahāpariḷāhā ca, etarahipi paccuppannaṁ addhānaṁ kāmā dukkhasamphassā ceva mahābhitāpā ca mahāpariḷāhā ca. Ime ca, māgaṇḍiya, sattā kāmesu avītarāgā kāmataṇhāhi khajjamānā kāmapariḷāhena pariḍayhamānā upahatindriyā dukkhasamphassesuyeva kāmesu sukhamiti viparītasaññaṁ paccalatthuṁ.
[¶36] Suppose there was a person affected by leprosy, with sores and blisters on their limbs. Being devoured by worms, scratching with their nails at the opening of their wounds, they’re cauterizing their body over a pit of glowing coals. The more they scratch their wounds and cauterize their body, the more their wounds become foul, stinking, and infected. But still, they derive a degree of pleasure and gratification from the itchiness of their wounds. In the same way, I see other sentient beings who are not free from sensual pleasures being consumed by craving for sensual pleasures, burning with passion for sensual pleasures, indulging in sensual pleasures. The more they indulge in sensual pleasures, the more their craving for sensual pleasures grows, and the more they burn with passion for sensual pleasures. But still, they derive a degree of pleasure and gratification from the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māgaṇḍiya, kuṭṭhī puriso arugatto pakkagatto kimīhi khajjamāno nakhehi vaṇamukhāni vippatacchamāno aṅgārakāsuyā kāyaṁ paritāpeti. Yathā yathā kho, māgaṇḍiya, asu kuṭṭhī puriso arugatto pakkagatto kimīhi khajjamāno nakhehi vaṇamukhāni vippatacchamāno aṅgārakāsuyā kāyaṁ paritāpeti tathā tathāssa tāni vaṇamukhāni asucitarāni ceva honti duggandhatarāni ca pūtikatarāni ca, hoti ceva kāci sātamattā assādamattā—yadidaṁ vaṇamukhānaṁ kaṇḍūvanahetu; evameva kho, māgaṇḍiya, sattā kāmesu avītarāgā kāmataṇhāhi khajjamānā kāmapariḷāhena ca pariḍayhamānā kāme paṭisevanti. Yathā yathā kho, māgaṇḍiya, sattā kāmesu avītarāgā kāmataṇhāhi khajjamānā kāmapariḷāhena ca pariḍayhamānā kāme paṭisevanti tathā tathā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ kāmataṇhā ceva pavaḍḍhati, kāmapariḷāhena ca pariḍayhanti, hoti ceva sātamattā assādamattā—yadidaṁ pañcakāmaguṇe paṭicca.
[¶37] What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Have you seen or heard of a king or a royal minister of the past, future, or present, amusing themselves supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation, who—without giving up craving for sensual pleasures and dispelling passion for sensual pleasures—lives rid of thirst, their mind settled internally?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya, api nu te diṭṭho vā suto vā rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricārayamāno kāmataṇhaṁ appahāya kāmapariḷāhaṁ appaṭivinodetvā vigatapipāso ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto vihāsi vā viharati vā viharissati vā”ti?
[¶38] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶39] “Good, Māgaṇḍiya. Neither have I. On the contrary, all the ascetics or brahmins of the past, future, or present who live rid of thirst, their minds settled internally, do so after truly understanding the origin, ending, gratification, drawback, and escape of sensual pleasures, and after giving up craving and dispelling passion for sensual pleasures.”
> Pali: “Sādhu, māgaṇḍiya. Mayāpi kho etaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, neva diṭṭhaṁ na sutaṁ rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricārayamāno kāmataṇhaṁ appahāya kāmapariḷāhaṁ appaṭivinodetvā vigatapipāso ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto vihāsi vā viharati vā viharissati vā. Atha kho, māgaṇḍiya, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā vigatapipāsā ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacittā vihāsuṁ vā viharanti vā viharissanti vā sabbe te kāmānaṁyeva samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā kāmataṇhaṁ pahāya kāmapariḷāhaṁ paṭivinodetvā vigatapipāsā ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacittā vihāsuṁ vā viharanti vā viharissanti vā”ti.
[¶40] Then on that occasion the Buddha expressed this heartfelt sentiment:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶41] “Health is the ultimate blessing;
extinguishment, the ultimate happiness.
Of paths, the ultimate is eightfold—
it’s safe, and leads to freedom from death.”
> Pali: “Ārogyaparamā lābhā,
nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhaṁ;
Aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggānaṁ,
khemaṁ amatagāminan”ti.
[¶42] When he said this, Māgaṇḍiya said to him, “It’s incredible, worthy Gotama, it’s amazing! How well said this was by the worthy Gotama! ‘Health is the ultimate blessing; extinguishment, the ultimate happiness.’ I’ve also heard that wanderers of the past, the tutors of tutors, said: ‘Health is the ultimate blessing; extinguishment, the ultimate happiness.’ And it agrees, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, māgaṇḍiyo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bho gotama, abbhutaṁ, bho gotama. Yāva subhāsitañcidaṁ bhotā gotamena: ‘ārogyaparamā lābhā, nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhan’ti. Mayāpi kho etaṁ, bho gotama, sutaṁ pubbakānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘ārogyaparamā lābhā, nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhan’ti; tayidaṁ, bho gotama, sametī”ti.
[¶43] “But Māgaṇḍiya, when you heard that wanderers of the past said this, what is that health? And what is that extinguishment?” When he said this, Māgaṇḍiya stroked his own limbs with his hands, saying:
> Pali: “Yaṁ pana te etaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, sutaṁ pubbakānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘ārogyaparamā lābhā, nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhan’ti, katamaṁ taṁ ārogyaṁ, katamaṁ taṁ nibbānan”ti? Evaṁ vutte, māgaṇḍiyo paribbājako sakāneva sudaṁ gattāni pāṇinā anomajjati:
[¶44] “This is that health, worthy Gotama, this is that extinguishment! For I am now healthy and happy, and have no afflictions.”
> Pali: “idantaṁ, bho gotama, ārogyaṁ, idantaṁ nibbānaṁ. Ahañhi, bho gotama, etarahi arogo sukhī, na maṁ kiñci ābādhatī”ti.
[¶45] “Māgaṇḍiya, suppose a person was blind from birth. They couldn’t see sights that are dark or bright, or blue, yellow, red, or magenta. They couldn’t see even and uneven ground, or the stars, or the moon and sun. They might hear a sighted person saying: ‘White cloth is really nice, it’s attractive, stainless, and clean.’ They’d go in search of white cloth. But someone would cheat them with a dirty, soiled garment, saying: ‘My man, here is a white cloth for you, it’s attractive, stainless, and clean.’ They’d take it and put it on, expressing their gladness: ‘White cloth is really nice, it’s attractive, stainless, and clean.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, māgaṇḍiya, jaccandho puriso; so na passeyya kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, na passeyya nīlakāni rūpāni, na passeyya pītakāni rūpāni, na passeyya lohitakāni rūpāni, na passeyya mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, na passeyya samavisamaṁ, na passeyya tārakarūpāni, na passeyya candimasūriye. So suṇeyya cakkhumato bhāsamānassa: ‘chekaṁ vata, bho, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti. So odātapariyesanaṁ careyya. Tamenaṁ aññataro puriso telamalikatena sāhuḷicīrena vañceyya: ‘idaṁ te, ambho purisa, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti. So taṁ paṭiggaṇheyya, paṭiggahetvā pārupeyya, pārupetvā attamano attamanavācaṁ nicchāreyya: ‘chekaṁ vata, bho, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti.
[¶46] What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Did that person blind from birth do this knowing and seeing, or out of faith in the sighted person?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya, api nu so jaccandho puriso jānanto passanto amuṁ telamalikataṁ sāhuḷicīraṁ paṭiggaṇheyya, paṭiggahetvā pārupeyya, pārupetvā attamano attamanavācaṁ nicchāreyya: ‘chekaṁ vata, bho, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti udāhu cakkhumato saddhāyā”ti?
[¶47] “They did so not knowing or seeing, but out of faith in the sighted person.”
> Pali: “Ajānanto hi, bho gotama, apassanto so jaccandho puriso amuṁ telamalikataṁ sāhuḷicīraṁ paṭiggaṇheyya, paṭiggahetvā pārupeyya, pārupetvā attamano attamanavācaṁ nicchāreyya: ‘chekaṁ vata, bho, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti, cakkhumato saddhāyā”ti.
[¶48] “In the same way, the wanderers of other religions are blind and sightless. Not knowing health and not seeing extinguishment, they still recite this verse: ‘Health is the ultimate blessing; extinguishment, the ultimate happiness.’ For this verse was recited by the perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas of the past:
> Pali: “Evameva kho, māgaṇḍiya, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā andhā acakkhukā ajānantā ārogyaṁ, apassantā nibbānaṁ, atha ca panimaṁ gāthaṁ bhāsanti: ‘ārogyaparamā lābhā, nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhan’ti. Pubbakehesā, māgaṇḍiya, arahantehi sammāsambuddhehi gāthā bhāsitā:
[¶49] ‘Health is the ultimate blessing;
extinguishment, the ultimate happiness.
Of paths, the ultimate is eightfold—
it’s safe, and leads to freedom from death.’
> Pali: ‘Ārogyaparamā lābhā,
nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhaṁ;
Aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggānaṁ,
khemaṁ amatagāminan’ti.
[¶50] These days it has gradually become a verse used by ordinary people. But Māgaṇḍiya, this body is a disease, a boil, a dart, a gloom, an affliction. Yet you say of this body: ‘This is that health, this is that extinguishment!’ Māgaṇḍiya, you don’t have the noble vision by which you might know health and see extinguishment.”
> Pali: Sā etarahi anupubbena puthujjanagāthā. Ayaṁ kho pana, māgaṇḍiya, kāyo rogabhūto gaṇḍabhūto sallabhūto aghabhūto ābādhabhūto, so tvaṁ imaṁ kāyaṁ rogabhūtaṁ gaṇḍabhūtaṁ sallabhūtaṁ aghabhūtaṁ ābādhabhūtaṁ: ‘idantaṁ, bho gotama, ārogyaṁ, idantaṁ nibbānan’ti vadesi. Tañhi te, māgaṇḍiya, ariyaṁ cakkhuṁ natthi yena tvaṁ ariyena cakkhunā ārogyaṁ jāneyyāsi, nibbānaṁ passeyyāsī”ti.
[¶51] “I am quite confident that the worthy Gotama is capable of teaching me so that I can know health and see extinguishment.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ bhoto gotamassa. Pahoti me bhavaṁ gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ yathāhaṁ ārogyaṁ jāneyyaṁ, nibbānaṁ passeyyan”ti.
[¶52] “Māgaṇḍiya, suppose a person was blind from birth. They couldn’t see sights that are dark or bright, or blue, yellow, red, or magenta. They couldn’t see even and uneven ground, or the stars, or the moon and sun. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat them. The surgeon would make medicine for them, but when they used it their eyes were not cured and they still could not see clearly. What do you think, Māgaṇḍiya? Wouldn’t that doctor just get weary and frustrated?”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, māgaṇḍiya, jaccandho puriso; so na passeyya kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, na passeyya nīlakāni rūpāni, na passeyya pītakāni rūpāni, na passeyya lohitakāni rūpāni, na passeyya mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, na passeyya samavisamaṁ, na passeyya tārakarūpāni, na passeyya candimasūriye. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto bhesajjaṁ kareyya. So taṁ bhesajjaṁ āgamma na cakkhūni uppādeyya, na cakkhūni visodheyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māgaṇḍiya, nanu so vejjo yāvadeva kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti?
[¶53] “Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶54] “In the same way, suppose I were to teach you the Dhamma, saying: ‘This is that health, this is that extinguishment.’ But you might not know health or see extinguishment, which would be wearying and troublesome for me.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, māgaṇḍiya, ahañce te dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ: ‘idantaṁ ārogyaṁ, idantaṁ nibbānan’ti, so tvaṁ ārogyaṁ na jāneyyāsi, nibbānaṁ na passeyyāsi. So mamassa kilamatho, sā mamassa vihesā”ti.
[¶55] “I am quite confident that the worthy Gotama is capable of teaching me so that I can know health and see extinguishment.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ bhoto gotamassa. Pahoti me bhavaṁ gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ yathāhaṁ ārogyaṁ jāneyyaṁ, nibbānaṁ passeyyan”ti.
[¶56] “Māgaṇḍiya, suppose a person was blind from birth. They couldn’t see sights that are dark or bright, or blue, yellow, red, or magenta. They couldn’t see even and uneven ground, or the stars, or the moon and sun. They might hear a sighted person saying: ‘White cloth is really nice, it’s attractive, stainless, and clean.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, māgaṇḍiya, jaccandho puriso; so na passeyya kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, na passeyya nīlakāni rūpāni, na passeyya pītakāni rūpāni, na passeyya lohitakāni rūpāni, na passeyya mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, na passeyya samavisamaṁ, na passeyya tārakarūpāni, na passeyya candimasūriye. So suṇeyya cakkhumato bhāsamānassa: ‘chekaṁ vata, bho, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti.
[¶57] They’d go in search of white cloth. But someone would cheat them with a dirty, soiled garment, saying: ‘My man, here is a white cloth for you, it’s attractive, stainless, and clean.’ They’d take it and put it on. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat them. The surgeon would make medicine for them: emetics, purgatives, ointment, counter-ointment, or nasal treatment. And when they used it their eyes would be cured so that they could see clearly. As soon as their eyes were cured they’d lose all desire for that dirty, soiled garment. Then they would consider that person to be no friend, but an enemy, and might even think of murdering them: ‘For such a long time I’ve been cheated, tricked, and deceived by that person with this dirty, soiled garment when he said, “My man, here is a white cloth for you, it’s attractive, stainless, and clean.”’
> Pali: So odātapariyesanaṁ careyya. Tamenaṁ aññataro puriso telamalikatena sāhuḷicīrena vañceyya: ‘idaṁ te, ambho purisa, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti. So taṁ paṭiggaṇheyya, paṭiggahetvā pārupeyya. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto bhesajjaṁ kareyya— uddhaṁvirecanaṁ adhovirecanaṁ añjanaṁ paccañjanaṁ natthukammaṁ. So taṁ bhesajjaṁ āgamma cakkhūni uppādeyya, cakkhūni visodheyya. Tassa saha cakkhuppādā yo amusmiṁ telamalikate sāhuḷicīre chandarāgo so pahīyetha. Tañca naṁ purisaṁ amittatopi daheyya, paccatthikatopi daheyya, api ca jīvitā voropetabbaṁ maññeyya: ‘dīgharattaṁ vata, bho, ahaṁ iminā purisena telamalikatena sāhuḷicīrena nikato vañcito paluddho— idaṁ te, ambho purisa, odātaṁ vatthaṁ abhirūpaṁ nimmalaṁ sucī’ti.
[¶58] In the same way, Māgaṇḍiya, suppose I were to teach you the Dhamma, saying: ‘This is that health, this is that extinguishment.’ You might know health and see extinguishment. And as soon as your vision arises you might give up desire for the five grasping aggregates. And you might even think: ‘For such a long time I’ve been cheated, tricked, and deceived by this mind. For what I have been grasping is only form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. My grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates.’”
> Pali: Evameva kho, māgaṇḍiya, ahañce te dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ: ‘idantaṁ ārogyaṁ, idantaṁ nibbānan’ti. So tvaṁ ārogyaṁ jāneyyāsi, nibbānaṁ passeyyāsi. Tassa te saha cakkhuppādā yo pañcasupādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo so pahīyetha; api ca te evamassa: ‘dīgharattaṁ vata bho ahaṁ iminā cittena nikato vañcito paluddho. Ahañhi rūpaṁyeva upādiyamāno upādiyiṁ, vedanaṁyeva upādiyamāno upādiyiṁ, saññaṁyeva upādiyamāno upādiyiṁ, saṅkhāreyeva upādiyamāno upādiyiṁ, viññāṇaṁyeva upādiyamāno upādiyiṁ. Tassa me upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti; evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’”ti.
[¶59] “I am quite confident that the worthy Gotama is capable of teaching me so that I can rise from this seat cured of blindness.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ bhoto gotamassa. Pahoti me bhavaṁ gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ yathāhaṁ imamhā āsanā anandho vuṭṭhaheyyan”ti.
[¶60] “Well then, Māgaṇḍiya, you should associate with true persons. When you associate with true persons, you will hear the true teaching. When you hear the true teaching, you’ll practice in line with the teaching. When you practice in line with the teaching, you’ll know and see for yourself: ‘These are diseases, boils, and darts. And here is where diseases, boils, and darts cease without remainder.’ When my grasping ceases, continued existence ceases. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases. When rebirth ceases, old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress cease. That is how this entire mass of suffering ceases.”
> Pali: “Tena hi tvaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, sappurise bhajeyyāsi. Yato kho tvaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, sappurise bhajissasi tato tvaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, saddhammaṁ sossasi; yato kho tvaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, saddhammaṁ sossasi tato tvaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, dhammānudhammaṁ paṭipajjissasi; yato kho tvaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, dhammānudhammaṁ paṭipajjissasi tato tvaṁ, māgaṇḍiya, sāmaṁyeva ñassasi, sāmaṁ dakkhissasi— ime rogā gaṇḍā sallā; idha rogā gaṇḍā sallā aparisesā nirujjhanti. Tassa me upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā nirujjhanti; evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī”ti.
[¶61] When he said this, Māgaṇḍiya said to him, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. May I receive the going forth, the ordination in the worthy Gotama’s presence?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, māgaṇḍiyo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ bhoto gotamassa santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶62] “Māgaṇḍiya, if someone formerly ordained in another sect wishes to take the going forth, the ordination in this teaching and training, they must spend four months on probation. When four months have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, they’ll give the going forth, the ordination into monkhood. However, I recognize individual differences in this matter.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, māgaṇḍiya, aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṁ, so cattāro māse parivasati; catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti, upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya. Api ca mettha puggalavemattatā viditā”ti.
[¶63] “Sir, if four months probation are required in such a case, I’ll spend four years on probation. When four years have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, let them give me the going forth, the ordination into monkhood.”
> Pali: “Sace, bhante, aññatitthiyapubbā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhantā pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhantā upasampadaṁ cattāro māse parivasanti, catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya; ahaṁ cattāri vassāni parivasissāmi, catunnaṁ vassānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājentu, upasampādentu bhikkhubhāvāyā”ti.
[¶64] And the wanderer Māgaṇḍiya received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence. Not long after his ordination, Venerable Māgaṇḍiya, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Alattha kho māgaṇḍiyo paribbājako bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ. Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā māgaṇḍiyo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶65] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Māgaṇḍiya became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā māgaṇḍiyo arahataṁ ahosīti.
[¶66] > Pali: Māgaṇḍiyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 81. MN 76 · With Sandaka · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/81/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/81/#p-N
[¶0] MN 76 · With Sandaka
> Pali: MN 76 · Sandakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Kosambī in Ghosita’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosambiyaṁ viharati ghositārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the wanderer Sandaka was residing at the cave of the wavy leaf fig tree together with a large assembly of around five hundred wanderers.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sandako paribbājako pilakkhaguhāyaṁ paṭivasati mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ pañcamattehi paribbājakasatehi.
[¶3] Then in the late afternoon, Venerable Ānanda came out of retreat and addressed the mendicants: “Come, reverends, let’s go to the Devakata Pool to see the cave.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito bhikkhū āmantesi: “āyāmāvuso, yena devakatasobbho tenupasaṅkamissāma guhādassanāyā”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Then Ānanda together with several mendicants went to the Devakata Pool.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato ānandassa paccassosuṁ. Atha kho āyasmā ānando sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ yena devakatasobbho tenupasaṅkami.
[¶5] Now at that time, Sandaka and the large assembly of wanderers were sitting together making an uproar, a colossal racket. They engaged in all kinds of low talk, such as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sandako paribbājako mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ nisinno hoti unnādiniyā uccāsaddamahāsaddāya anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ kathentiyā, seyyathidaṁ— rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā.
[¶6] Sandaka saw Ānanda coming off in the distance, and hushed his own assembly, “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. The ascetic Ānanda, a disciple of the ascetic Gotama, is coming. He is included among the disciples of the ascetic Gotama, who is residing near Kosambī. Such venerables like the quiet, are educated to be quiet, and praise the quiet. Hopefully if he sees that our assembly is quiet he’ll see fit to approach.” Then those wanderers fell silent.
> Pali: Addasā kho sandako paribbājako āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna sakaṁ parisaṁ saṇṭhāpesi: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha; ayaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako āgacchati samaṇo ānando. Yāvatā kho pana samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakā kosambiyaṁ paṭivasanti, ayaṁ tesaṁ aññataro samaṇo ānando. Appasaddakāmā kho pana te āyasmanto appasaddavinītā appasaddassa vaṇṇavādino; appeva nāma appasaddaṁ parisaṁ viditvā upasaṅkamitabbaṁ maññeyyā”ti. Atha kho te paribbājakā tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶7] Then Venerable Ānanda went up to the wanderer Sandaka, who said to him, “Come, worthy Ānanda! Welcome, worthy Ānanda! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please sit down, here, a seat is ready.” Ānanda sat down on the seat spread out, while Sandaka took a low seat and sat to one side. Ānanda said to Sandaka, “Sandaka, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena sandako paribbājako tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho sandako paribbājako āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho bhavaṁ ānando, svāgataṁ bhoto ānandassa. Cirassaṁ kho bhavaṁ ānando imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu bhavaṁ ānando, idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti. Nisīdi kho āyasmā ānando paññatte āsane. Sandakopi kho paribbājako aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho sandakaṁ paribbājakaṁ āyasmā ānando etadavoca: “kāya nuttha, sandaka, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶8] “Worthy Ānanda, leave aside what we were sitting talking about just now. It won’t be hard for you to hear about that later. It’d be great if Mister Ānanda himself would give a Dhamma talk explaining his own denomination.”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatesā, bho ānanda, kathā yāya mayaṁ etarahi kathāya sannisinnā. Nesā bhoto ānandassa kathā dullabhā bhavissati pacchāpi savanāya. Sādhu vata bhavantaṁyeva ānandaṁ paṭibhātu sake ācariyake dhammīkathā”ti.
[¶9] “Well then, Sandaka, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, sandaka, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Sandaka. Venerable Ānanda said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho sandako paribbājako āyasmato ānandassa paccassosi. Āyasmā ānando etadavoca:
[¶11] “Sandaka, these things have been explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha: four ways that negate the spiritual life, and four kinds of unreliable spiritual life. A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, not practice such spiritual paths, and if they did practice them, they wouldn’t succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.”
> Pali: “cattārome, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena abrahmacariyavāsā akkhātā cattāri ca anassāsikāni brahmacariyāni akkhātāni, yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti.
[¶12] “But worthy Ānanda, what are the four ways that negate the spiritual life, and the four kinds of unreliable spiritual life?”
> Pali: “Katame pana te, bho ānanda, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro abrahmacariyavāsā akkhātā, yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti?
[¶13] “Sandaka, take a certain teacher who has this doctrine and view: ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight. This person is made up of the four principal states. When they die, the earth in their body progresses and proceeds to the substance of earth. The water in their body progresses and proceeds to the substance of water. The fire in their body progresses and proceeds to the substance of fire. The air in their body progresses and proceeds to the substance of air. The faculties are transferred to space. Four men with a bier carry away the corpse. Their footprints show the way to the cremation ground. The bones become bleached. Offerings dedicated to the gods end in ashes. Giving is a doctrine of morons. When anyone affirms a positive teaching it’s just hollow, false nonsense. Both the foolish and the astute are annihilated and destroyed when their body breaks up, and they don’t exist after death.’
> Pali: “Idha, sandaka, ekacco satthā evaṁvādī hoti evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paroloko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedenti. Cātumahābhūtiko ayaṁ puriso yadā kālaṁ karoti, pathavī pathavīkāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, āpo āpokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, tejo tejokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, vāyo vāyokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, ākāsaṁ indriyāni saṅkamanti. Āsandipañcamā purisā mataṁ ādāya gacchanti, yāvāḷāhanā padāni paññāyanti. Kāpotakāni aṭṭhīni bhavanti. Bhassantā āhutiyo; dattupaññattaṁ yadidaṁ dānaṁ. Tesaṁ tucchā musā vilāpo ye keci atthikavādaṁ vadanti. Bāle ca paṇḍite ca kāyassa bhedā ucchijjanti vinassanti na honti paraṁ maraṇā’ti.
[¶14] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher has such a doctrine and view. If what that teacher says is true, both I who have not accomplished this and one who has accomplished it have attained exactly the same level. Yet I’m not one who says that both of us are annihilated and destroyed when our body breaks up, and we don’t exist after death. But it’s superfluous for this teacher to go nude, bald, persisting in squatting, tearing out their hair and beard. For I’m living at home with my children, using sandalwood imported from Kāsi, wearing garlands, fragrance, and makeup, and accepting gold and currency. Yet I’ll have exactly the same destiny in the next life as this teacher. What do I know or see that I should lead the spiritual life under this teacher? This negates the spiritual life.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi— natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paroloko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedenti. Cātumahābhūtiko ayaṁ puriso yadā kālaṁ karoti, pathavī pathavīkāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, āpo āpokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, tejo tejokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, vāyo vāyokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, ākāsaṁ indriyāni saṅkamanti. Āsandipañcamā purisā mataṁ ādāya gacchanti, yāvāḷāhanā padāni paññāyanti. Kāpotakāni aṭṭhīni bhavanti. Bhassantā āhutiyo; dattupaññattaṁ yadidaṁ dānaṁ. Tesaṁ tucchā musā vilāpo ye keci atthikavādaṁ vadanti. Bāle ca paṇḍite ca kāyassa bhedā ucchijjanti vinassanti na honti paraṁ maraṇā’ti. Sace imassa bhoto satthuno saccaṁ vacanaṁ, akatena me ettha kataṁ, avusitena me ettha vusitaṁ. Ubhopi mayaṁ ettha samasamā sāmaññaṁ pattā, yo cāhaṁ na vadāmi ‘ubho kāyassa bhedā ucchijjissāma, vinassissāma, na bhavissāma paraṁ maraṇā’ti. Atirekaṁ kho panimassa bhoto satthuno naggiyaṁ muṇḍiyaṁ ukkuṭikappadhānaṁ kesamassulocanaṁ, yohaṁ puttasambādhasayanaṁ ajjhāvasanto kāsikacandanaṁ paccanubhonto mālāgandhavilepanaṁ dhārento jātarūparajataṁ sādiyanto iminā bhotā satthārā samasamagatiko bhavissāmi abhisamparāyaṁ. Sohaṁ kiṁ jānanto kiṁ passanto imasmiṁ satthari brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi? ‘So abrahmacariyavāso ayan’ti— iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
[¶15] This is the first way that negates the spiritual life.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena paṭhamo abrahmacariyavāso akkhāto yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶16] Furthermore, take a certain teacher who has this doctrine and view: ‘The one who acts does nothing wrong when they punish, mutilate, torture, aggrieve, oppress, intimidate, or when they encourage others to do the same. Nothing bad is done when they kill, steal, break into houses, plunder wealth, steal from isolated buildings, commit highway robbery, commit adultery, and lie. If you were to reduce all the living creatures of this earth to one heap and mass of flesh with a razor-edged chakram, no evil comes of that, and no outcome of evil. If you were to go along the south bank of the Ganges killing, mutilating, and torturing, and encouraging others to do the same, no evil comes of that, and no outcome of evil. If you were to go along the north bank of the Ganges giving and sacrificing and encouraging others to do the same, no merit comes of that, and no outcome of merit. In giving, self-control, restraint, and truthfulness there is no merit or outcome of merit.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, idhekacco satthā evaṁvādī hoti evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘karoto kārayato chindato chedāpayato pacato pācāpayato socayato socāpayato kilamato kilamāpayato phandato phandāpayato pāṇamatipātayato adinnaṁ ādiyato sandhiṁ chindato nillopaṁ harato ekāgārikaṁ karoto paripanthe tiṭṭhato paradāraṁ gacchato musā bhaṇato karoto na karīyati pāpaṁ. Khurapariyantena cepi cakkena yo imissā pathaviyā pāṇe ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kareyya, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Dakkhiṇañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya hananto ghātento chindanto chedāpento pacanto pacāpento, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Uttarañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya dadanto dāpento yajanto yajāpento, natthi tatonidānaṁ puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo. Dānena damena saṁyamena saccavajjena natthi puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo’ti.
[¶17] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher has such a doctrine and view. If what that teacher says is true, both I who have not accomplished this and one who has accomplished it have attained exactly the same level. Yet I’m not one who says that when both of us act, nothing wrong is done. But it’s superfluous for this teacher to go nude, bald, persisting in squatting, tearing out their hair and beard. For I’m living at home with my children, using sandalwood imported from Kāsi, wearing garlands, fragrance, and makeup, and accepting gold and currency. Yet I’ll have exactly the same destiny in the next life as this teacher. What do I know or see that I should lead the spiritual life under this teacher? This negates the spiritual life.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi— karoto kārayato chindato chedāpayato pacato pācāpayato socato socāpayato kilamato kilamāpayato phandato phandāpayato pāṇamatipātayato adinnaṁ ādiyato sandhiṁ chindato nillopaṁ harato ekāgārikaṁ karoto paripanthe tiṭṭhato paradāraṁ gacchato musā bhaṇato karoto na karīyati pāpaṁ khurapariyantena cepi cakkena yo imissā pathaviyā pāṇe ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kareyya, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Dakkhiṇañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya hananto ghātento chindanto chedāpento pacanto pacāpento, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Uttarañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya dadanto dāpento yajanto yajāpento, natthi tatonidānaṁ puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo. Dānena damena saṁyamena saccavajjena natthi puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo’ti. Sace imassa bhoto satthuno saccaṁ vacanaṁ, akatena me ettha kataṁ, avusitena me ettha vusitaṁ. Ubhopi mayaṁ ettha samasamā sāmaññaṁ pattā, yo cāhaṁ na vadāmi ‘ubhinnaṁ kurutaṁ na karīyati pāpan’ti. Atirekaṁ kho panimassa bhoto satthuno naggiyaṁ muṇḍiyaṁ ukkuṭikappadhānaṁ kesamassulocanaṁ, yohaṁ puttasambādhasayanaṁ ajjhāvasanto kāsikacandanaṁ paccanubhonto mālāgandhavilepanaṁ dhārento jātarūparajataṁ sādiyanto iminā bhotā satthārā samasamagatiko bhavissāmi abhisamparāyaṁ. Sohaṁ kiṁ jānanto kiṁ passanto imasmiṁ satthari brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi? ‘So abrahmacariyavāso ayan’ti iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
[¶18] This is the second way that negates the spiritual life.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dutiyo abrahmacariyavāso akkhāto yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶19] Furthermore, take a certain teacher who has this doctrine and view: ‘There is no cause or reason for the corruption of sentient beings. Sentient beings are corrupted without cause or reason. There’s no cause or reason for the purification of sentient beings. Sentient beings are purified without cause or reason. There is no power, no energy, no human strength or vigor. All sentient beings, all living creatures, all beings, all souls lack control, power, and energy. Molded by destiny, circumstance, and nature, they experience pleasure and pain in the six classes of rebirth.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, idhekacco satthā evaṁvādī hoti evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya; ahetū appaccayā sattā saṅkilissanti; natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā; ahetū appaccayā sattā visujjhanti; natthi balaṁ, natthi vīriyaṁ, natthi purisathāmo, natthi purisaparakkamo; sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti.
[¶20] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher has such a doctrine and view. If what that teacher says is true, both I who have not accomplished this and one who has accomplished it have attained exactly the same level. Yet I’m not one who says that both of us are purified without cause or reason. But it’s superfluous for this teacher to go nude, bald, persisting in squatting, tearing out their hair and beard. For I’m living at home with my children, using sandalwood imported from Kāsi, wearing garlands, fragrance, and makeup, and accepting gold and currency. Yet I’ll have exactly the same destiny in the next life as this teacher. What do I know or see that I should lead the spiritual life under this teacher? This negates the spiritual life.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi— natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya, ahetū appaccayā sattā saṅkilissanti. Natthi hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā, ahetū appaccayā sattā visujjhanti. Natthi balaṁ, natthi vīriyaṁ, natthi purisathāmo, natthi purisaparakkamo, sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti. Sace imassa bhoto satthuno saccaṁ vacanaṁ, akatena me ettha kataṁ, avusitena me ettha vusitaṁ. Ubhopi mayaṁ ettha samasamā sāmaññaṁ pattā, yo cāhaṁ na vadāmi ‘ubho ahetū appaccayā visujjhissāmā’ti. Atirekaṁ kho panimassa bhoto satthuno naggiyaṁ muṇḍiyaṁ ukkuṭikappadhānaṁ kesamassulocanaṁ, yohaṁ puttasambādhasayanaṁ ajjhāvasanto kāsikacandanaṁ paccanubhonto mālāgandhavilepanaṁ dhārento jātarūparajataṁ sādiyanto iminā bhotā satthārā samasamagatiko bhavissāmi abhisamparāyaṁ. Sohaṁ kiṁ jānanto kiṁ passanto imasmiṁ satthari brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi? ‘So abrahmacariyavāso ayan’ti— iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
[¶21] This is the third way that negates the spiritual life.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tatiyo abrahmacariyavāso akkhāto yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶22] Furthermore, take a certain teacher who has this doctrine and view: ‘There are these seven substances that are not made, not derived, not created, without a creator, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They don’t move or deteriorate or obstruct each other. They’re unable to cause pleasure, pain, or both pleasure and pain to each other. What seven? The substances of earth, water, fire, air; pleasure, pain, and the soul is the seventh. These seven substances are not made, not derived, not created, without a creator, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They don’t move or deteriorate or obstruct each other. They’re unable to cause pleasure, pain, or both pleasure and pain to each other. And here there is no one who kills or who makes others kill; no one who learns or who educates others; no one who understands or who helps others understand. If you chop off someone’s head with a sharp sword, you don’t take anyone’s life. The sword simply passes through the gap between the seven substances. There are 1.4 million main wombs, and 6,000, and 600; 500 deeds, and five, and three; deeds and half-deeds; 62 paths of practice, 62 sub-eons, six classes of rebirth, and eight stages in a person’s life; 4,900 Ājīvaka ascetics, 4,900 wanderers, and 4,900 dragon abodes; 2,000 lordships, 3,000 hells, and 36 realms of dusky sky; seven percipient embryos, seven non-percipient embryos, seven knotless embryos, seven gods, seven mental heavens, seven goblins, seven streams, seven castoff incarnations and 700 castoff incarnations, seven downfalls and 700 downfalls, seven dreams and 700 dreams, and 8.4 million great eons—through all of which the foolish and the astute transmigrate before making an end of suffering. And here there is no such thing as this: “By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice I shall force unripened deeds to bear their fruit, or eliminate old deeds by experiencing their results little by little”—for that cannot be. Pleasure and pain are allotted. Transmigration lasts only for a limited period, so there’s no increase or decrease, no getting better or worse. It’s like how, when you toss a ball of string, it rolls away unraveling. In the same way, after transmigrating the foolish and the astute will make an end of suffering.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, idhekacco satthā evaṁvādī hoti evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘sattime kāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā animmitā animmātā vañjhā kūṭaṭṭhā esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitā, te na iñjanti na vipariṇamanti na aññamaññaṁ byābādhenti nālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā. Katame satta? Pathavīkāyo āpokāyo tejokāyo vāyokāyo sukhe dukkhe jīve sattame— ime sattakāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā animmitā animmātā vañjhā kūṭaṭṭhā esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitā. Te na iñjanti na vipariṇamanti na aññamaññaṁ byābādhenti. Nālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā. Tattha natthi hantā vā ghātetā vā sotā vā sāvetā vā viññātā vā viññāpetā vā. Yopi tiṇhena satthena sīsaṁ chindati, na koci kañci jīvitā voropeti. Sattannaṁ tveva kāyānamantarena satthaṁ vivaramanupatati. Cuddasa kho panimāni yonipamukhasatasahassāni saṭṭhi ca satāni cha ca satāni pañca ca kammuno satāni pañca ca kammāni tīṇi ca kammāni, kamme ca aḍḍhakamme ca, dvaṭṭhipaṭipadā, dvaṭṭhantarakappā, chaḷābhijātiyo, aṭṭha purisabhūmiyo, ekūnapaññāsa ājīvakasate, ekūnapaññāsa paribbājakasate, ekūnapaññāsa nāgāvāsasate, vīse indriyasate, tiṁse nirayasate, chattiṁsa rajodhātuyo, satta saññīgabbhā, satta asaññīgabbhā, satta nigaṇṭhigabbhā, satta devā, satta mānusā, satta pesācā, satta sarā, satta pavuṭā, satta papātā, satta papātasatāni, satta supinā, satta supinasatāni, cullāsīti mahākappino satasahassāni, yāni bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṁsaritvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti. Tattha natthi imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā aparipakkaṁ vā kammaṁ paripācessāmi, paripakkaṁ vā kammaṁ phussa phussa byantiṁ karissāmīti. Hevaṁ natthi doṇamite sukhadukkhe pariyantakate saṁsāre, natthi hāyanavaḍḍhane, natthi ukkaṁsāvakaṁse. Seyyathāpi nāma suttaguḷe khitte nibbeṭhiyamānameva paleti; evameva bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṁsaritvā dukkhassantaṁ karissantī’ti.
[¶23] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher has such a doctrine and view. If what that teacher says is true, both I who have not accomplished this and one who has accomplished it have attained exactly the same level. Yet I’m not one who says that after transmigrating both of us will make an end of suffering. But it’s superfluous for this teacher to go nude, bald, persisting in squatting, tearing out their hair and beard. For I’m living at home with my children, using sandalwood imported from Kāsi, wearing garlands, fragrance, and makeup, and accepting gold and currency. Yet I’ll have exactly the same destiny in the next life as this teacher. What do I know or see that I should lead the spiritual life under this teacher? This negates the spiritual life.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhi— sattime kāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā animmitā animmātā vañjhā kūṭaṭṭhā esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitā. Te na iñjanti na vipariṇamanti na aññamaññaṁ byābādhenti. Nālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā. Katame satta? Pathavīkāyo āpokāyo tejokāyo vāyokāyo sukhe dukkhe jīve sattame— ime satta kāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā animmitā animmātā vañjhā kūṭaṭṭhā esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitā. Te na iñjanti na vipariṇamanti na aññamaññaṁ byābādhenti. Nālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā. Tattha natthi hantā vā ghātetā vā sotā vā sāvetā vā viññātā vā viññāpetā vā. Yopi tiṇhena satthena sīsaṁ chindati, na koci kañci jīvitā voropeti. Sattannaṁ tveva kāyānamantarena satthaṁ vivaramanupatati. Cuddasa kho panimāni yonipamukhasatasahassāni saṭṭhi ca satāni cha ca satāni pañca ca kammuno satāni pañca ca kammāni tīṇi ca kammāni, kamme ca aḍḍhakamme ca, dvaṭṭhipaṭipadā, dvaṭṭhantarakappā, chaḷābhijātiyo, aṭṭha purisabhūmiyo, ekūnapaññāsa ājīvakasate, ekūnapaññāsa paribbājakasate, ekūnapaññāsa nāgāvāsasate, vīse indriyasate, tiṁse nirayasate, chattiṁsa rajodhātuyo, satta saññīgabbhā, satta asaññīgabbhā, satta nigaṇṭhigabbhā, satta devā, satta mānusā, satta pesācā, satta sarā, satta pavuṭā, satta papātā, satta papātasatāni, satta supinā, satta supinasatāni, cullāsīti mahākappino satasahassāni, yāni bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṁsaritvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti. Tattha natthi imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā aparipakkaṁ vā kammaṁ paripācessāmi, paripakkaṁ vā kammaṁ phussa phussa byantiṁ karissāmīti, hevaṁ natthi doṇamite sukhadukkhe pariyantakate saṁsāre, natthi hāyanavaḍḍhane, natthi ukkaṁsāvakaṁse. Seyyathāpi nāma suttaguḷe khitte nibbeṭhiyamānameva paleti; evameva bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṁsaritvā dukkhassantaṁ karissantī’ti. Sace pana imassa bhoto satthuno saccaṁ vacanaṁ, akatena me ettha kataṁ, avusitena me ettha vusitaṁ. Ubhopi mayaṁ ettha samasamā sāmaññaṁ pattā, yo cāhaṁ na vadāmi ‘ubho sandhāvitvā saṁsaritvā dukkhassantaṁ karissāmā’ti. Atirekaṁ kho panimassa bhoto satthuno naggiyaṁ muṇḍiyaṁ ukkuṭikappadhānaṁ kesamassulocanaṁ, yohaṁ puttasambādhasayanaṁ ajjhāvasanto kāsikacandanaṁ paccanubhonto mālāgandhavilepanaṁ dhārento jātarūparajataṁ sādiyanto iminā bhotā satthārā samasamagatiko bhavissāmi abhisamparāyaṁ. Sohaṁ kiṁ jānanto kiṁ passanto imasmiṁ satthari brahmacariyaṁ carissāmi? ‘So abrahmacariyavāso ayan’ti— iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
## 82. MN 76 · With Sandaka · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/82/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/82/#p-N
[¶0] This is the fourth way that negates the spiritual life.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena catuttho abrahmacariyavāso akkhāto yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶1] These are the four ways that negate the spiritual life that have been explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, not practice such spiritual paths, and if they did practice them, they wouldn’t succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.”
> Pali: Ime kho te, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro abrahmacariyavāsā akkhātā yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti.
[¶2] “It’s incredible, worthy Ānanda, it’s amazing, how these four ways that negate the spiritual life have been explained by the Buddha. But worthy Ānanda, what are the four kinds of unreliable spiritual life?”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho ānanda, abbhutaṁ, bho ānanda. Yāvañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro abrahmacariyavāsāva samānā ‘abrahmacariyavāsā’ti akkhātā yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalanti. Katamāni pana tāni, bho ānanda, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāri anassāsikāni brahmacariyāni akkhātāni yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti?
[¶3] “Sandaka, take a certain teacher who claims to be all-knowing and all-seeing, to know and see everything without exception, thus: ‘Knowledge and vision are constantly and continually present to me, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking.’ They enter an empty house; they get no almsfood; a dog bites them; they encounter a wild elephant, a wild horse, and a wild cow; they ask the name and clan of a woman or man; they ask the name and path to a village or town. When asked, ‘Why is this?’ they answer: ‘I had to enter an empty house, that’s why I entered it. I had to get no almsfood, that’s why I got none. I had to get bitten by a dog, that’s why I was bitten. I had to encounter a wild elephant, a wild horse, and a wild cow, that’s why I encountered them. I had to ask the name and clan of a woman or man, that’s why I asked. I had to ask the name and path to a village or town, that’s why I asked.’
> Pali: “Idha, sandaka, ekacco satthā sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānāti: ‘carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan’ti. So suññampi agāraṁ pavisati, piṇḍampi na labhati, kukkuropi ḍaṁsati, caṇḍenapi hatthinā samāgacchati, caṇḍenapi assena samāgacchati, caṇḍenapi goṇena samāgacchati, itthiyāpi purisassapi nāmampi gottampi pucchati, gāmassapi nigamassapi nāmampi maggampi pucchati. So ‘kimidan’ti puṭṭho samāno ‘suññaṁ me agāraṁ pavisitabbaṁ ahosi’, tena pāvisiṁ; ‘piṇḍampi aladdhabbaṁ ahosi’, tena nālatthaṁ; ‘kukkurena ḍaṁsitabbaṁ ahosi’, tenamhi daṭṭho; ‘caṇḍena hatthinā samāgantabbaṁ ahosi’, tena samāgamiṁ; ‘caṇḍena assena samāgantabbaṁ ahosi’, tena samāgamiṁ; ‘caṇḍena goṇena samāgantabbaṁ ahosi’, tena samāgamiṁ; ‘itthiyāpi purisassapi nāmampi gottampi pucchitabbaṁ ahosi’, tena pucchiṁ; ‘gāmassapi nigamassapi nāmampi maggampi pucchitabbaṁ ahosi’, tena pucchinti.
[¶4] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher makes such a claim, but they answer in such a way. This spiritual life is unreliable.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānāti …pe… ‘gāmassapi nigamassapi nāmampi maggampi pucchitabbaṁ ahosi, tena pucchin’ti. So ‘anassāsikaṁ idaṁ brahmacariyan’ti— iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
[¶5] This is the first kind of unreliable spiritual life.
> Pali: Idaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena paṭhamaṁ anassāsikaṁ brahmacariyaṁ akkhātaṁ yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶6] Furthermore, take another teacher who is an oral transmitter, who takes oral transmission to be the truth. They teach by oral transmission, by the lineage of testament, by canonical authority. But when a teacher takes oral transmission to be the truth, some of that is well learned, some poorly learned, some true, and some otherwise.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, idhekacco satthā anussaviko hoti anussavasacco. So anussavena itihitihaparamparāya piṭakasampadāya dhammaṁ deseti. Anussavikassa kho pana, sandaka, satthuno anussavasaccassa sussutampi hoti dussutampi hoti tathāpi hoti aññathāpi hoti.
[¶7] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher takes oral transmission to be the truth. He teaches by oral transmission, by the lineage of testament, by canonical authority. But when a teacher takes oral transmission to be the truth, some of that is well learned, some poorly learned, some true, and some otherwise. This spiritual life is unreliable.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā anussaviko anussavasacco so anussavena itihitihaparamparāya piṭakasampadāya dhammaṁ deseti. Anussavikassa kho pana satthuno anussavasaccassa sussutampi hoti dussutampi hoti tathāpi hoti aññathāpi hoti’. So ‘anassāsikaṁ idaṁ brahmacariyan’ti— iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
[¶8] This is the second kind of unreliable spiritual life.
> Pali: Idaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dutiyaṁ anassāsikaṁ brahmacariyaṁ akkhātaṁ yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶9] Furthermore, take another teacher who relies on logic and inquiry. They teach what they have worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing their own perspective. But when a teacher relies on logic and inquiry, some of that is well reasoned, some poorly reasoned, some true, and some otherwise.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, idhekacco satthā takkī hoti vīmaṁsī. So takkapariyāhataṁ vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti. Takkissa kho pana, sandaka, satthuno vīmaṁsissa sutakkitampi hoti duttakkitampi hoti tathāpi hoti aññathāpi hoti.
[¶10] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher relies on logic and inquiry. They teach what they have worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing their own perspective. But when a teacher relies on logic and inquiry, some of that is well reasoned, some poorly reasoned, some true, and some otherwise. This spiritual life is unreliable.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā takkī vīmaṁsī. So takkapariyāhataṁ vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti. Takkissa kho pana satthuno vīmaṁsissa sutakkitampi hoti duttakkitampi hoti tathāpi hoti aññathāpi hoti’. So ‘anassāsikaṁ idaṁ brahmacariyan’ti— iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
[¶11] This is the third kind of unreliable spiritual life.
> Pali: Idaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tatiyaṁ anassāsikaṁ brahmacariyaṁ akkhātaṁ yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶12] Furthermore, take another teacher who is dull and stupid. Because of that, whenever they’re asked a question, they resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops: ‘I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, idhekacco satthā mando hoti momūho. So mandattā momūhattā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjati amarāvikkhepaṁ: ‘evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no’ti.
[¶13] A sensible person reflects on this matter in this way: ‘This teacher is dull and stupid. Because of that, whenever they’re asked a question, they resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops: “I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so.” This spiritual life is unreliable.’ Realizing this, they leave disappointed.
> Pali: Tatra, sandaka, viññū puriso iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā mando momūho. So mandattā momūhattā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjati amarāvikkhepaṁ— evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no’ti. So ‘anassāsikaṁ idaṁ brahmacariyan’ti— iti viditvā tasmā brahmacariyā nibbijja pakkamati.
[¶14] This is the fourth kind of unreliable spiritual life.
> Pali: Idaṁ kho, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena catutthaṁ anassāsikaṁ brahmacariyaṁ akkhātaṁ yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶15] These are the four kinds of unreliable spiritual life that have been explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, not practice such spiritual paths, and if they did practice them, they wouldn’t complete the system of the skillful teaching.”
> Pali: Imāni kho tāni, sandaka, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāri anassāsikāni brahmacariyāni akkhātāni yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti.
[¶16] “It’s incredible, worthy Ānanda, it’s amazing, how these four kinds of unreliable spiritual life have been explained by the Buddha. But, worthy Ānanda, what would a teacher say and explain so that a sensible person would, to the best of their ability, practice such a spiritual path, and once practicing it, they would complete the system of the skillful teaching?”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho ānanda, abbhutaṁ, bho ānanda. Yāvañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāri anassāsikāneva brahmacariyāni anassāsikāni brahmacariyānīti akkhātāni yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na vaseyya, vasanto ca nārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. So pana, bho ānanda, satthā kiṁ vādī kiṁ akkhāyī yattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti.
[¶17] “Sandaka, it’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. … He gives up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, he enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, lead the spiritual life with a teacher under whom they achieve such a high distinction, and, once practicing it, they would complete the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: “Idha, sandaka, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā …pe… so ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yasmiṁ kho, sandaka, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāravisesaṁ adhigacchati tattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶18] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant … enters and remains in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, lead the spiritual life under a teacher who achieves such a high distinction, and, once practicing it, they would complete the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yasmiṁ kho, sandaka, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāravisesaṁ adhigacchati tattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yasmiṁ kho, sandaka, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāravisesaṁ adhigacchati tattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Puna caparaṁ, sandaka, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yasmiṁ kho, sandaka, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāravisesaṁ adhigacchati tattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶19] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. … They recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, lead the spiritual life with a teacher under whom they achieve such a high distinction, and, once practicing it, they would complete the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Yasmiṁ kho, sandaka, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāravisesaṁ adhigacchati tattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶20] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. … They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, lead the spiritual life with a teacher under whom they achieve such a high distinction, and, once practicing it, they would complete the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Yasmiṁ kho, sandaka, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāravisesaṁ adhigacchati tattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶21] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti; ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶22] Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶23] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ A sensible person would, to the best of their ability, lead the spiritual life with a teacher under whom they achieve such a high distinction, and, once practicing it, they would complete the system of the skillful teaching.”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Yasmiṁ kho, sandaka, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāravisesaṁ adhigacchati tattha viññū puriso sasakkaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vaseyya, vasanto ca ārādheyya ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti.
[¶24] “But worthy Ānanda, when a mendicant is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—could they still enjoy sensual pleasures?”
> Pali: “Yo pana so, bho ānanda, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññā vimutto paribhuñjeyya so kāme”ti?
[¶25] “Sandaka, a mendicant who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—can’t transgress in five respects. A mendicant with defilements ended can’t deliberately take the life of a living creature, take something with the intention to steal, have sex, tell a deliberate lie, or store up goods for their own enjoyment like they used to as a layperson. A mendicant who is perfected can’t transgress in these five respects.”
> Pali: “Yo so, sandaka, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, abhabbo so pañcaṭṭhānāni ajjhācarituṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropetuṁ, abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādātuṁ, abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevetuṁ, abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sampajānamusā bhāsituṁ, abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṁ kāme paribhuñjituṁ, seyyathāpi pubbe agāriyabhūto. Yo so, sandaka, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, abhabbo so imāni pañcaṭṭhānāni ajjhācaritun”ti.
[¶26] “But worthy Ānanda, when a mendicant is perfected, would the knowledge and vision that their defilements are ended be constantly and continually present to them, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking?”
> Pali: “Yo pana so, bho ānanda, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto tassa carato ceva tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ: ‘khīṇā me āsavā’”ti?
[¶27] “Well then, Sandaka, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said. Suppose there was a person whose hands and feet had been amputated. Would they be aware that their hands and feet had been amputated constantly and continually, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking? Or would they be aware of it only when they checked it?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, sandaka, upamaṁ te karissāmi; upamāyapidhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti. Seyyathāpi, sandaka, purisassa hatthapādā chinnā; tassa carato ceva tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ jānāti: ‘chinnā me hatthapādā’ti, udāhu paccavekkhamāno jānāti: ‘chinnā me hatthapādā’”ti?
[¶28] “They wouldn’t be aware of it constantly, only when they checked it.”
> Pali: “Na kho, bho ānanda, so puriso satataṁ samitaṁ jānāti: ‘chinnā me hatthapādā’ti. Api ca kho pana naṁ paccavekkhamāno jānāti: ‘chinnā me hatthapādā’”ti.
[¶29] “In the same way, when a mendicant is perfected, the knowledge and vision that their defilements are ended is not constantly and continually present to them, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking. Rather, they are aware of it only when they checked it.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, sandaka, yo so bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto tassa carato ceva tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ na paccupaṭṭhitaṁ: ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti; api ca kho pana naṁ paccavekkhamāno jānāti: ‘khīṇā me āsavā’”ti.
[¶30] “But Reverend Ānanda, in this teaching and training, how many are emancipated?”
> Pali: “Kīvabahukā pana, bho ānanda, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye niyyātāro”ti?
[¶31] “There are not just one hundred who are emancipated, Sandaka, or two or three or four or five hundred, but many more than that in this teaching and training.”
> Pali: “Na kho, sandaka, ekaṁyeva sataṁ na dve satāni na tīṇi satāni na cattāri satāni na pañca satāni, atha kho bhiyyova ye imasmiṁ dhammavinaye niyyātāro”ti.
[¶32] “It’s incredible, worthy Ānanda, it’s amazing! Namely, that there’s no glorifying one’s own teaching and putting down the teaching of others. The Dhamma is taught in its own field, and so many emancipated are recognized. But these Ājīvakas, sons of she whose sons are dead, glorify themselves and put others down. And they only recognize three who have been emancipated: Nanda Vaccha, Kisa Saṅkicca, and the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla.”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho ānanda, abbhutaṁ, bho ānanda. Na ca nāma sadhammokkaṁsanā bhavissati, na paradhammavambhanā, āyatane ca dhammadesanā tāva bahukā ca niyyātāro paññāyissanti. Ime panājīvakā puttamatāya puttā attānañceva ukkaṁsenti, pare ca vambhenti tayo ceva niyyātāro paññapenti, seyyathidaṁ— nandaṁ vacchaṁ, kisaṁ saṅkiccaṁ, makkhaliṁ gosālan”ti.
[¶33] Then the wanderer Sandaka addressed his own assembly, “Go, good fellows. The spiritual life is lived under the ascetic Gotama. It’s not easy for me to forsake possessions, honor, or popularity now.” And that’s how the wanderer Sandaka sent his own assembly to lead the spiritual life under the Buddha.
> Pali: Atha kho sandako paribbājako sakaṁ parisaṁ āmantesi: “carantu bhonto samaṇe gotame brahmacariyavāso. Na dāni sukaraṁ amhehi lābhasakkārasiloke pariccajitun”ti. Iti hidaṁ sandako paribbājako sakaṁ parisaṁ uyyojesi bhagavati brahmacariyeti.
[¶34] > Pali: Sandakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 83. MN 77 · The Longer Discourse with Sakuludāyī · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/83/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/83/#p-N
[¶0] MN 77 · The Longer Discourse with Sakuludāyī
> Pali: MN 77 · Mahāsakuludāyisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Now at that time several very well-known wanderers were residing in their monastery in the peacocks’ feeding ground. They included Annabhāra, Varadhara, Sakuludāyī, and other very well-known wanderers.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā abhiññātā abhiññātā paribbājakā moranivāpe paribbājakārāme paṭivasanti, seyyathidaṁ— annabhāro varadharo sakuludāyī ca paribbājako aññe ca abhiññātā abhiññātā paribbājakā.
[¶3] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Rājagaha for alms. Then it occurred to him, “It’s too early to wander for alms in Rājagaha. Why don’t I visit the wanderer Sakuludāyī at the monastery for the wanderers in the peacocks’ feeding ground?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “atippago kho tāva rājagahe piṇḍāya carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ yena moranivāpo paribbājakārāmo yena sakuludāyī paribbājako tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti.
[¶4] So the Buddha went to the monastery for the wanderers.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena moranivāpo paribbājakārāmo tenupasaṅkami.
[¶5] Now at that time, Sakuludāyī was sitting together with a large assembly of wanderers making an uproar, a colossal racket. They engaged in all kinds of low talk, such as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sakuludāyī paribbājako mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ nisinno hoti unnādiniyā uccāsaddamahāsaddāya anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ kathentiyā, seyyathidaṁ— rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā.
[¶6] Sakuludāyī saw the Buddha coming off in the distance, and hushed his own assembly, “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. Here comes the ascetic Gotama. The venerable likes quiet and praises quiet. Hopefully if he sees that our assembly is quiet he’ll see fit to approach.” Then those wanderers fell silent.
> Pali: Addasā kho sakuludāyī paribbājako bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna sakaṁ parisaṁ saṇṭhāpeti: “appasaddā bhonto hontu; mā bhonto saddamakattha. Ayaṁ samaṇo gotamo āgacchati; appasaddakāmo kho pana so āyasmā appasaddassa vaṇṇavādī. Appeva nāma appasaddaṁ parisaṁ viditvā upasaṅkamitabbaṁ maññeyyā”ti. Atha kho te paribbājakā tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶7] Then the Buddha approached Sakuludāyī, who said to him, “Let the Blessed One come, sir! Welcome to the Blessed One, sir! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please, sir, sit down, this seat is ready.” The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, while Sakuludāyī took a low seat and sat to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena sakuludāyī paribbājako tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho sakuludāyī paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho, bhante, bhagavā. Svāgataṁ, bhante, bhagavato. Cirassaṁ kho, bhante, bhagavā imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu, bhante, bhagavā; idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Sakuludāyīpi kho paribbājako aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶8] The Buddha said to him, “Udāyī, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho sakuludāyiṁ paribbājakaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “Kāya nuttha, udāyi, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶9] “Sir, leave aside what we were sitting talking about just now. It won’t be hard for you to hear about that later.
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatesā, bhante, kathā yāya mayaṁ etarahi kathāya sannisinnā. Nesā, bhante, kathā bhagavato dullabhā bhavissati pacchāpi savanāya.
[¶10] Sir, a few days ago several ascetics and brahmins who follow various other religions were sitting together at the debating hall, and this discussion came up among them: ‘The people of Aṅga and Magadha are so fortunate, so very fortunate! For there are these ascetics and brahmins who lead an order and a community, and tutor a community. They’re well-known and famous religious founders, deemed holy by many people. And they have come down for the rainy season residence at Rājagaha. They include Pūraṇa Kassapa, the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla, Ajita of the hair blanket, Pakudha Kaccāyana, Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, and the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan. This ascetic Gotama also leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. And he too has come down for the rains residence at Rājagaha. Which of these ascetics and brahmins is honored, respected, revered, and venerated by their disciples? And how do their disciples, honoring and respecting them, remain loyal?’
> Pali: Purimāni, bhante, divasāni purimatarāni nānātitthiyānaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ kutūhalasālāyaṁ sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayamantarākathā udapādi: ‘lābhā vata, bho, aṅgamagadhānaṁ, suladdhalābhā vata, bho, aṅgamagadhānaṁ. Tatrime samaṇabrāhmaṇā saṅghino gaṇino gaṇācariyā ñātā yasassino titthakarā sādhusammatā bahujanassa rājagahaṁ vassāvāsaṁ osaṭā. Ayampi kho pūraṇo kassapo saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa; sopi rājagahaṁ vassāvāsaṁ osaṭo. Ayampi kho makkhali gosālo …pe… ajito kesakambalo … pakudho kaccāyano … sañjayo belaṭṭhaputto … nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa; sopi rājagahaṁ vassāvāsaṁ osaṭo. Ayampi kho samaṇo gotamo saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa; sopi rājagahaṁ vassāvāsaṁ osaṭo. Ko nu kho imesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saṅghīnaṁ gaṇīnaṁ gaṇācariyānaṁ ñātānaṁ yasassinaṁ titthakarānaṁ sādhusammatānaṁ bahujanassa sāvakānaṁ sakkato garukato mānito pūjito, kañca pana sāvakā sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharantī’ti?
[¶11] Some of them said: ‘This Pūraṇa Kassapa leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. But he’s not honored, respected, revered, and venerated by his disciples. And his disciples, not honoring and respecting him, don’t remain loyal to him. Once it so happened that he was teaching an assembly of many hundreds. Then one of his disciples made a noise, “My good fellows, don’t ask Pūraṇa Kassapa about that. He doesn’t know that. I know it. Ask me about it, and I’ll answer you.” Once it so happened that Pūraṇa Kassapa didn’t get his way, though he called out with raised arms, “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. They’re not asking you, they’re asking me! I’ll answer you!” Indeed, many of his disciples have left him after refuting his doctrine: “You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!” That’s how Pūraṇa Kassapa is not honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by his disciples. On the contrary, his disciples, not honoring and respecting him, don’t remain loyal to him. Rather, he’s reviled, and rightly so.’
> Pali: Tatrekacce evamāhaṁsu: ‘ayaṁ kho pūraṇo kassapo saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa; so ca kho sāvakānaṁ na sakkato na garukato na mānito na pūjito, na ca pana pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ sāvakā sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti. Bhūtapubbaṁ pūraṇo kassapo anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ deseti. Tatraññataro pūraṇassa kassapassa sāvako saddamakāsi: “mā bhonto pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ etamatthaṁ pucchittha; neso etaṁ jānāti; mayametaṁ jānāma, amhe etamatthaṁ pucchatha; mayametaṁ bhavantānaṁ byākarissāmā”ti. Bhūtapubbaṁ pūraṇo kassapo bāhā paggayha kandanto na labhati: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha. Nete, bhavante, pucchanti, amhe ete pucchanti; mayametesaṁ byākarissāmā”ti. Bahū kho pana pūraṇassa kassapassa sāvakā vādaṁ āropetvā apakkantā: “na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi? Micchāpaṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammāpaṭipanno, sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te, purevacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchāvacanīyaṁ pure avaca, adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahitosi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosī”ti. Iti pūraṇo kassapo sāvakānaṁ na sakkato na garukato na mānito na pūjito, na ca pana pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ sāvakā sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti. Akkuṭṭho ca pana pūraṇo kassapo dhammakkosenā’ti.
[¶12] Others said: ‘This bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla … Ajita of the hair blanket … Pakudha Kaccāyana … Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta … This Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. But he’s not honored, respected, revered, and venerated by his disciples. And his disciples, not honoring and respecting him, don’t remain loyal to him. Once it so happened that he was teaching an assembly of many hundreds. Then one of his disciples made a noise, “My good fellows, don’t ask the Jain Ñātika about that. He doesn’t know that. I know it. Ask me about it, and I’ll answer you.” Once it so happened that the Jain Ñātika didn’t get his way, though he called out with raised arms, “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. They’re not asking you, they’re asking me! I’ll answer you!” Indeed, many of his disciples have left him after refuting his doctrine: “You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!” That’s how the Jain Ñātika is not honored, respected, revered, and venerated by his disciples. On the contrary, his disciples, not honoring and respecting him, don’t remain loyal to him. Rather, he’s reviled, and rightly so.’
> Pali: Ekacce evamāhaṁsu: ‘ayampi kho makkhali gosālo …pe… ajito kesakambalo … pakudho kaccāyano … sañjayo belaṭṭhaputto … nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa; so ca kho sāvakānaṁ na sakkato na garukato na mānito na pūjito, na ca pana nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ sāvakā sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti. Bhūtapubbaṁ nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ deseti. Tatraññataro nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa sāvako saddamakāsi: “mā bhonto nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etamatthaṁ pucchittha; neso etaṁ jānāti; mayametaṁ jānāma, amhe etamatthaṁ pucchatha; mayametaṁ bhavantānaṁ byākarissāmā”ti. Bhūtapubbaṁ nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto bāhā paggayha kandanto na labhati: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha. Nete bhavante pucchanti, amhe ete pucchanti; mayametesaṁ byākarissāmā”ti. Bahū kho pana nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa sāvakā vādaṁ āropetvā apakkantā: “na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi. Kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi? Micchāpaṭipanno tvamasi. Ahamasmi sammāpaṭipanno. Sahitaṁ me asahitaṁ te, purevacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchāvacanīyaṁ pure avaca, adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahitosi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosī”ti. Iti nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto sāvakānaṁ na sakkato na garukato na mānito na pūjito, na ca pana nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ sāvakā sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti. Akkuṭṭho ca pana nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto dhammakkosenā’ti.
[¶13] Others said: ‘This ascetic Gotama leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. He’s honored, respected, revered, and venerated by his disciples. And his disciples, honoring and respecting him, remain loyal to him. Once it so happened that he was teaching an assembly of many hundreds. Then one of his disciples cleared their throat. And one of their spiritual companions nudged them with their knee, to indicate, “Hush, venerable, don’t make sound! Our teacher, the Blessed One, is teaching!” While the ascetic Gotama is teaching an assembly of many hundreds, there is no sound of his disciples coughing or clearing their throats. That large crowd is poised expectantly at the ready, thinking, “Whatever the Buddha teaches, we shall listen to it.” It’s like when there’s a person at the crossroads pressing out pure dwarf-bee honey, and a large crowd is poised expectantly at the ready. In the same way, while the ascetic Gotama is teaching an assembly of many hundreds, there is no sound of his disciples coughing or clearing their throats. That large crowd is poised expectantly at the ready, thinking, “Whatever the Buddha teaches, we shall listen to it.” Even when disciples of the ascetic Gotama, having clashed with their spiritual companions, resign the training and return to a lesser life, they speak only praise of the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha. They blame only themselves, not others: “We were unlucky, we had little merit. For even after going forth in such a well explained teaching and training we weren’t able to practice for life the perfectly full and pure spiritual life.” They become monastery workers or lay followers, and they proceed having undertaken the five precepts. That’s how the ascetic Gotama is honored, respected, revered, and venerated by his disciples. And that’s how his disciples, honoring and respecting him, remain loyal to him.’”
> Pali: Ekacce evamāhaṁsu: ‘ayampi kho samaṇo gotamo saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa; so ca kho sāvakānaṁ sakkato garukato mānito pūjito, samaṇañca pana gotamaṁ sāvakā sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti. Bhūtapubbaṁ samaṇo gotamo anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ desesi. Tatraññataro samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako ukkāsi. Tamenāññataro sabrahmacārī jaṇṇukena ghaṭṭesi: “appasaddo āyasmā hotu, māyasmā saddamakāsi, satthā no bhagavā dhammaṁ desesī”ti. Yasmiṁ samaye samaṇo gotamo anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ deseti, neva tasmiṁ samaye samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakānaṁ khipitasaddo vā hoti ukkāsitasaddo vā. Tamenaṁ mahājanakāyo paccāsīsamānarūpo paccupaṭṭhito hoti: “yaṁ no bhagavā dhammaṁ bhāsissati taṁ no sossāmā”ti. Seyyathāpi nāma puriso cātummahāpathe khuddamadhuṁ anelakaṁ pīḷeyya. Tamenaṁ mahājanakāyo paccāsīsamānarūpo paccupaṭṭhito assa. Evameva yasmiṁ samaye samaṇo gotamo anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ deseti, neva tasmiṁ samaye samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakānaṁ khipitasaddo vā hoti ukkāsitasaddo vā. Tamenaṁ mahājanakāyo paccāsīsamānarūpo paccupaṭṭhito hoti: “yaṁ no bhagavā dhammaṁ bhāsissati taṁ no sossāmā”ti. Yepi samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakā sabrahmacārīhi sampayojetvā sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattanti tepi satthu ceva vaṇṇavādino honti, dhammassa ca vaṇṇavādino honti, saṅghassa ca vaṇṇavādino honti, attagarahinoyeva honti anaññagarahino, “mayamevamhā alakkhikā mayaṁ appapuññā te mayaṁ evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā nāsakkhimhā yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ caritun”ti. Te ārāmikabhūtā vā upāsakabhūtā vā pañcasikkhāpade samādāya vattanti. Iti samaṇo gotamo sāvakānaṁ sakkato garukato mānito pūjito, samaṇañca pana gotamaṁ sāvakā sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharantī’”ti.
[¶14] “But Udāyī, how many qualities do you see in me, because of which my disciples honor, respect, revere, and venerate me; and honoring and respecting me, they remain loyal to me?”
> Pali: “Kati pana tvaṁ, udāyi, mayi dhamme samanupassasi, yehi mamaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharantī”ti?
[¶15] “Sir, I see five such qualities in the Buddha. What five?
> Pali: “Pañca kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati dhamme samanupassāmi yehi bhagavantaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti. Katame pañca?
[¶16] The Buddha eats little and praises eating little. This is the first such quality I see in the Buddha.
> Pali: Bhagavā hi, bhante, appāhāro, appāhāratāya ca vaṇṇavādī. Yampi, bhante, bhagavā appāhāro, appāhāratāya ca vaṇṇavādī imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ samanupassāmi yena bhagavantaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶17] Furthermore, the Buddha is content with any kind of robe, and praises such contentment. This is the second such quality I see in the Buddha.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, bhagavā santuṭṭho itarītarena cīvarena, itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī. Yampi, bhante, bhagavā santuṭṭho itarītarena cīvarena, itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati dutiyaṁ dhammaṁ samanupassāmi yena bhagavantaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶18] Furthermore, the Buddha is content with any kind of almsfood, and praises such contentment. This is the third such quality I see in the Buddha.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, bhagavā santuṭṭho itarītarena piṇḍapātena, itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī. Yampi, bhante, bhagavā santuṭṭho itarītarena piṇḍapātena, itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati tatiyaṁ dhammaṁ samanupassāmi yena bhagavantaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶19] Furthermore, the Buddha is content with any kind of lodging, and praises such contentment. This is the fourth such quality I see in the Buddha.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, bhagavā santuṭṭho itarītarena senāsanena, itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī. Yampi, bhante, bhagavā santuṭṭho itarītarena senāsanena, itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati catutthaṁ dhammaṁ samanupassāmi yena bhagavantaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶20] Furthermore, the Buddha is secluded, and praises seclusion. This is the fifth such quality I see in the Buddha.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, bhagavā pavivitto, pavivekassa ca vaṇṇavādī. Yampi, bhante, bhagavā pavivitto, pavivekassa ca vaṇṇavādī, imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati pañcamaṁ dhammaṁ samanupassāmi yena bhagavantaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶21] These are the five qualities I see in the Buddha, because of which his disciples honor, respect, revere, and venerate him; and honoring and respecting him, they remain loyal to him.”
> Pali: Ime kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati pañca dhamme samanupassāmi yehi bhagavantaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharantī”ti.
[¶22] “Suppose, Udāyī, my disciples were loyal to me because I eat little. Well, there are disciples of mine who eat a tumbler of food, or half a tumbler; they eat a wood-apple, or half a wood-apple. But sometimes I even eat this bowl full to the brim, or even more. So if it were the case that my disciples are loyal to me because I eat little, then those disciples who eat even less would not be loyal to me.
> Pali: “‘Appāhāro samaṇo gotamo, appāhāratāya ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, santi kho pana me, udāyi, sāvakā kosakāhārāpi aḍḍhakosakāhārāpi beluvāhārāpi aḍḍhabeluvāhārāpi. Ahaṁ kho pana, udāyi, appekadā iminā pattena samatittikampi bhuñjāmi bhiyyopi bhuñjāmi. ‘Appāhāro samaṇo gotamo, appāhāratāya ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, ye te, udāyi, mama sāvakā kosakāhārāpi aḍḍhakosakāhārāpi beluvāhārāpi aḍḍhabeluvāhārāpi na maṁ te iminā dhammena sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ.
[¶23] Suppose my disciples were loyal to me because I’m content with any kind of robe. Well, there are disciples of mine who have rag robes, wearing shabby robes. They gather scraps from charnel grounds, rubbish dumps, and shops, make them into a patchwork robe and wear it. But sometimes I wear robes offered by householders that are strong, yet next to which bottle-gourd down is coarse. So if it were the case that my disciples are loyal to me because I’m content with any kind of robe, then those disciples who wear rag robes would not be loyal to me.
> Pali: ‘Santuṭṭho samaṇo gotamo itarītarena cīvarena, itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, santi kho pana me, udāyi, sāvakā paṁsukūlikā lūkhacīvaradharā te susānā vā saṅkārakūṭā vā pāpaṇikā vā nantakāni uccinitvā saṅghāṭiṁ karitvā dhārenti. Ahaṁ kho panudāyi, appekadā gahapaticīvarāni dhāremi daḷhāni satthalūkhāni alābulomasāni. ‘Santuṭṭho samaṇo gotamo itarītarena cīvarena, itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, ye te, udāyi, mama sāvakā paṁsukūlikā lūkhacīvaradharā te susānā vā saṅkārakūṭā vā pāpaṇikā vā nantakāni uccinitvā saṅghāṭiṁ karitvā dhārenti, na maṁ te iminā dhammena sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ.
[¶24] Suppose my disciples were loyal to me because I’m content with any kind of almsfood. Well, there are disciples of mine who eat only almsfood, wander indiscriminately for almsfood, happy to eat whatever they glean. When they’ve entered an inhabited area, they don’t consent when invited to sit down. But sometimes I even eat by invitation boiled fine rice with the dark grains picked out, served with many soups and sauces. So if it were the case that my disciples are loyal to me because I’m content with any kind of almsfood, then those disciples who eat only almsfood would not be loyal to me.
> Pali: ‘Santuṭṭho samaṇo gotamo itarītarena piṇḍapātena, itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, santi kho pana me, udāyi, sāvakā piṇḍapātikā sapadānacārino uñchāsake vate ratā, te antaragharaṁ paviṭṭhā samānā āsanenapi nimantiyamānā na sādiyanti. Ahaṁ kho panudāyi, appekadā nimantanepi bhuñjāmi sālīnaṁ odanaṁ vicitakāḷakaṁ anekasūpaṁ anekabyañjanaṁ. ‘Santuṭṭho samaṇo gotamo itarītarena piṇḍapātena, itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, ye te, udāyi, mama sāvakā piṇḍapātikā sapadānacārino uñchāsake vate ratā te antaragharaṁ paviṭṭhā samānā āsanenapi nimantiyamānā na sādiyanti, na maṁ te iminā dhammena sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ.
[¶25] Suppose my disciples were loyal to me because I’m content with any kind of lodging. Well, there are disciples of mine who stay at the root of a tree, in the open air. For eight months they don’t go under a roof. But sometimes I even stay in bungalows, plastered inside and out, draft-free, with doors fastened and windows shuttered. So if it were the case that my disciples are loyal to me because I’m content with any kind of lodging, then those disciples who stay at the root of a tree would not be loyal to me.
> Pali: ‘Santuṭṭho samaṇo gotamo itarītarena senāsanena, itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, santi kho pana me, udāyi, sāvakā rukkhamūlikā abbhokāsikā, te aṭṭhamāse channaṁ na upenti. Ahaṁ kho panudāyi, appekadā kūṭāgāresupi viharāmi ullittāvalittesu nivātesu phusitaggaḷesu pihitavātapānesu. ‘Santuṭṭho samaṇo gotamo itarītarena senāsanena, itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, ye te, udāyi, mama sāvakā rukkhamūlikā abbhokāsikā te aṭṭhamāse channaṁ na upenti, na maṁ te iminā dhammena sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ.
[¶26] Suppose my disciples were loyal to me because I’m secluded and I praise seclusion. Well, there are disciples of mine who live in the wilderness, in remote lodgings. Having ventured deep into remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest, they live there, coming down to the midst of the Saṅgha each fortnight for the recitation of the monastic code. But sometimes I live crowded by monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen; by rulers and their chief ministers, and monastics of other religions and their disciples. So if it were the case that my disciples are loyal to me because I’m secluded and praise seclusion, then those disciples who live in the wilderness would not be loyal to me.
> Pali: ‘Pavivitto samaṇo gotamo, pavivekassa ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ, santi kho pana me, udāyi, sāvakā āraññikā pantasenāsanā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni ajjhogāhetvā viharanti, te anvaddhamāsaṁ saṅghamajjhe osaranti pātimokkhuddesāya. Ahaṁ kho panudāyi, appekadā ākiṇṇo viharāmi bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīhi upāsakehi upāsikāhi raññā rājamahāmattehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi. ‘Pavivitto samaṇo gotamo, pavivekassa ca vaṇṇavādī’ti, iti ce maṁ, udāyi, sāvakā sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ. Ye te, udāyi, mama sāvakā āraññakā pantasenāsanā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni ajjhogāhetvā viharanti te anvaddhamāsaṁ saṅghamajjhe osaranti pātimokkhuddesāya, na maṁ te iminā dhammena sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya vihareyyuṁ.
[¶27] So, Udāyī, it’s not because of these five qualities that my disciples honor, respect, revere, and venerate me; and honoring and respecting me, they remain loyal to me.
> Pali: Iti kho, udāyi, na mamaṁ sāvakā imehi pañcahi dhammehi sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶28] There are five other qualities because of which my disciples honor, respect, revere, and venerate me; and honoring and respecting me, they remain loyal to me. What five?
> Pali: Atthi kho, udāyi, aññe ca pañca dhammā yehi pañcahi dhammehi mamaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti. Katame pañca?
[¶29] Firstly, my disciples esteem me for the higher ethics: ‘The ascetic Gotama is ethical. He possesses the entire spectrum of ethical conduct to the highest degree.’ Since this is so, this is the first quality because of which my disciples are loyal to me.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, mamaṁ sāvakā adhisīle sambhāventi: ‘sīlavā samaṇo gotamo paramena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato’ti. Yampudāyi, mamaṁ sāvakā adhisīle sambhāventi: ‘sīlavā samaṇo gotamo paramena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato’ti, ayaṁ kho, udāyi, paṭhamo dhammo yena mamaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶30] Furthermore, my disciples esteem me for my excellent knowledge and vision: ‘The ascetic Gotama only claims to know when he does in fact know. He only claims to see when he really does see. He teaches based on direct knowledge, not without direct knowledge. He teaches based on reason, not without reason. He teaches with a demonstrable basis, not without it.’ Since this is so, this is the second quality because of which my disciples are loyal to me.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, mamaṁ sāvakā abhikkante ñāṇadassane sambhāventi: ‘jānaṁyevāha samaṇo gotamo—jānāmīti, passaṁyevāha samaṇo gotamo—passāmīti; abhiññāya samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti no anabhiññāya; sanidānaṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti no anidānaṁ; sappāṭihāriyaṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti no appāṭihāriyan’ti. Yampudāyi, mamaṁ sāvakā abhikkante ñāṇadassane sambhāventi: ‘jānaṁyevāha samaṇo gotamo—jānāmīti, passaṁyevāha samaṇo gotamo—passāmīti; abhiññāya samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti no anabhiññāya; sanidānaṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti no anidānaṁ; sappāṭihāriyaṁ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti no appāṭihāriyan’ti, ayaṁ kho, udāyi, dutiyo dhammo yena mamaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶31] Furthermore, my disciples esteem me for my higher wisdom: ‘The ascetic Gotama is wise. He possesses the entire spectrum of wisdom to the highest degree. It’s not possible that he would fail to foresee grounds for future criticism, or to legitimately and completely refute the doctrines of others that come up.’ What do you think, Udāyī? Would my disciples, knowing and seeing this, break in and interrupt me?”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, mamaṁ sāvakā adhipaññāya sambhāventi: ‘paññavā samaṇo gotamo paramena paññākkhandhena samannāgato; taṁ vata anāgataṁ vādapathaṁ na dakkhati, uppannaṁ vā parappavādaṁ na sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggaṇhissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati’. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, api nu me sāvakā evaṁ jānantā evaṁ passantā antarantarā kathaṁ opāteyyun”ti?
[¶32] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶33] “That’s because I don’t expect to be instructed by my disciples. Invariably, my disciples expect instruction from me.
> Pali: “Na kho panāhaṁ, udāyi, sāvakesu anusāsaniṁ paccāsīsāmi; aññadatthu mamayeva sāvakā anusāsaniṁ paccāsīsanti.
[¶34] Since this is so, this is the third quality because of which my disciples are loyal to me.
> Pali: Yampudāyi, mamaṁ sāvakā adhipaññāya sambhāventi: ‘paññavā samaṇo gotamo paramena paññākkhandhena samannāgato; taṁ vata anāgataṁ vādapathaṁ na dakkhati, uppannaṁ vā parappavādaṁ na sahadhammena niggahitaṁ niggaṇhissatīti— netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati’. Ayaṁ kho, udāyi, tatiyo dhammo yena mamaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶35] Furthermore, my disciples come to me and ask how the noble truth of suffering applies to the suffering in which they are swamped and mired. And I provide them with a satisfying answer to their question. They ask how the noble truths of the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering apply to the suffering in which they are swamped and mired. And I provide them with satisfying answers to their questions. Since this is so, this is the fourth quality because of which my disciples are loyal to me.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, mama sāvakā yena dukkhena dukkhotiṇṇā dukkhaparetā te maṁ upasaṅkamitvā dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ pucchanti, tesāhaṁ dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi, tesāhaṁ cittaṁ ārādhemi pañhassa veyyākaraṇena; te maṁ dukkhasamudayaṁ … dukkhanirodhaṁ … dukkhanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ ariyasaccaṁ pucchanti, tesāhaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ ariyasaccaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi, tesāhaṁ cittaṁ ārādhemi pañhassa veyyākaraṇena. Yampudāyi, mama sāvakā yena dukkhena dukkhotiṇṇā dukkhaparetā te maṁ upasaṅkamitvā dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ pucchanti, tesāhaṁ dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi, tesāhaṁ cittaṁ ārādhemi pañhassa veyyākaraṇena. Te maṁ dukkhasamudayaṁ … dukkhanirodhaṁ … dukkhanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ ariyasaccaṁ pucchanti. Tesāhaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ ariyasaccaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi. Tesāhaṁ cittaṁ ārādhemi pañhassa veyyākaraṇena. Ayaṁ kho, udāyi, catuttho dhammo yena mamaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶36] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāventi. Idhudāyi, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati … citte cittānupassī viharati … dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶37] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the four right efforts. It’s when a mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen are given up. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāro sammappadhāne bhāventi. Idhudāyi, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, vīriyaṁ ārabhati, cittaṁ paggaṇhāti, padahati; uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, vīriyaṁ ārabhati, cittaṁ paggaṇhāti, padahati; anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, vīriyaṁ ārabhati, cittaṁ paggaṇhāti, padahati; uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti, vāyamati, vīriyaṁ ārabhati, cittaṁ paggaṇhāti, padahati. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶38] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the four bases of psychic power. It’s when a mendicant develops the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to enthusiasm, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to energy, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to mental development, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to inquiry, and active effort. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāro iddhipāde bhāventi. Idhudāyi, bhikkhu chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, vīriyasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, cittasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, vīmaṁsāsamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
## 84. MN 77 · The Longer Discourse with Sakuludāyī · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/84/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/84/#p-N
[¶0] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the five faculties. It’s when a mendicant develops the faculties of faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom, which lead to peace and awakening. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā pañcindriyāni bhāventi. Idhudāyi, bhikkhu saddhindriyaṁ bhāveti upasamagāmiṁ sambodhagāmiṁ; vīriyindriyaṁ bhāveti …pe… satindriyaṁ bhāveti … samādhindriyaṁ bhāveti … paññindriyaṁ bhāveti upasamagāmiṁ sambodhagāmiṁ. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶1] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the five powers. It’s when a mendicant develops the powers of faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom, which lead to peace and awakening. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā pañca balāni bhāventi. Idhudāyi, bhikkhu saddhābalaṁ bhāveti upasamagāmiṁ sambodhagāmiṁ; vīriyabalaṁ bhāveti …pe… satibalaṁ bhāveti … samādhibalaṁ bhāveti … paññābalaṁ bhāveti upasamagāmiṁ sambodhagāmiṁ. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶2] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the seven awakening factors. It’s when a mendicant develops the awakening factors of mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity, which rely on seclusion, fading away, and cessation, and ripen as letting go. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā sattabojjhaṅge bhāventi. Idhudāyi, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ; dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …pe… vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶3] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the noble eightfold path. It’s when a mendicant develops right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā ariyaṁ aṭṭhaṅgikaṁ maggaṁ bhāventi. Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sammādiṭṭhiṁ bhāveti, sammāsaṅkappaṁ bhāveti, sammāvācaṁ bhāveti, sammākammantaṁ bhāveti, sammāājīvaṁ bhāveti, sammāvāyāmaṁ bhāveti, sammāsatiṁ bhāveti, sammāsamādhiṁ bhāveti. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶4] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the eight liberations.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā aṭṭha vimokkhe bhāventi.
[¶5] Having physical form, they see forms. This is the first liberation.
> Pali: Rūpī rūpāni passati, ayaṁ paṭhamo vimokkho;
[¶6] Not perceiving form internally, they see forms externally. This is the second liberation.
> Pali: ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, ayaṁ dutiyo vimokkho;
[¶7] They’re focused only on beauty. This is the third liberation.
> Pali: subhanteva adhimutto hoti, ayaṁ tatiyo vimokkho;
[¶8] Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fourth liberation.
> Pali: sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ catuttho vimokkho;
[¶9] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the fifth liberation.
> Pali: sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ pañcamo vimokkho;
[¶10] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. This is the sixth liberation.
> Pali: sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ chaṭṭho vimokkho;
[¶11] Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the seventh liberation.
> Pali: sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ sattamo vimokkho;
[¶12] Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is the eighth liberation.
> Pali: sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ aṭṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶13] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶14] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the eight dimensions of mastery.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni bhāventi.
[¶15] Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the first dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁ saññī hoti. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶16] Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the second dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁ saññī hoti. Idaṁ dutiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶17] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the third dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁ saññī hoti. Idaṁ tatiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶18] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fourth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁ saññī hoti. Idaṁ catutthaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶19] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, blue, with blue color and blue appearance. They’re like a flax flower that’s blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, blue, with blue color and blue appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fifth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁ saññī hoti. Idaṁ pañcamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶20] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. They’re like a champak flower that’s yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the sixth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁ saññī hoti. Idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶21] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are red, with red color and red appearance. They’re like a scarlet mallow flower that’s red, with red color and red appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, red, with red color and red appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are red, with red color and red appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the seventh dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁ saññī hoti. Idaṁ sattamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶22] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are white, with white color and white appearance. They’re like the morning star that’s white, with white color and white appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, white, with white color and white appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are white, with white color and white appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the eighth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ odātaṁ odātavaṇṇaṁ odātanidassanaṁ odātanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi, passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶23] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶24] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the ten universal dimensions of meditation.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā dasa kasiṇāyatanāni bhāventi.
[¶25] Someone perceives the meditation on universal earth above, below, across, undivided and limitless.
> Pali: Pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ;
[¶26] They perceive the meditation on universal water … the meditation on universal fire … the meditation on universal air … the meditation on universal blue … the meditation on universal yellow … the meditation on universal red … the meditation on universal white … the meditation on universal space … the meditation on universal consciousness above, below, across, undivided and limitless.
> Pali: āpokasiṇameko sañjānāti …pe… tejokasiṇameko sañjānāti … vāyokasiṇameko sañjānāti … nīlakasiṇameko sañjānāti … pītakasiṇameko sañjānāti … lohitakasiṇameko sañjānāti … odātakasiṇameko sañjānāti … ākāsakasiṇameko sañjānāti … viññāṇakasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ.
[¶27] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶28] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to develop the four absorptions.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāri jhānāni bhāventi.
[¶29] It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. It’s like when a deft bathroom attendant or their apprentice pours bath powder into a bronze dish, sprinkling it little by little with water. They knead it until the ball of bath powder is soaked and saturated with moisture, spread through inside and out; yet no moisture oozes out. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion.
> Pali: Idhudāyi, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, dakkho nhāpako vā nhāpakantevāsī vā kaṁsathāle nhānīyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ sanneyya, sāyaṁ nhānīyapiṇḍi snehānugatā snehaparetā santarabāhirā phuṭā snehena na ca pagghariṇī; evameva kho, udāyi, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶30] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. It’s like a deep lake fed by spring water. There’s no inlet to the east, west, north, or south, and the heavens would not properly bestow showers from time to time. But the stream of cool water welling up in the lake drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads throughout the lake. There’s no part of the lake that’s not spread through with cool water. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, udakarahado gambhīro ubbhidodako. Tassa nevassa puratthimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na pacchimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na uttarāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na dakkhiṇāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammā dhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya; atha kho tamhāva udakarahadā sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā tameva udakarahadaṁ sītena vārinā abhisandeyya parisandeyya paripūreyya paripphareyya, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato udakarahadassa sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa. Evameva kho, udāyi, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶31] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption. They meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. From the tip to the root they’re drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with cool water. There’s no part of them that’s not soaked with cool water. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni anto nimuggaposīni, tāni yāva caggā yāva ca mūlā sītena vārinā abhisannāni parisannāni paripūrāni paripphuṭāni, nāssa kiñci sabbāvataṁ, uppalānaṁ vā padumānaṁ vā puṇḍarīkānaṁ vā sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa; evameva kho, udāyi, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶32] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption. It is without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. They sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. It’s like someone sitting wrapped from head to foot with white cloth. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread over with white cloth. In the same way, they sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso odātena vatthena sasīsaṁ pārupitvā nisinno assa, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena apphuṭaṁ assa; evameva kho, udāyi, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶33] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to understand this: ‘This body of mine is formed. It’s made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction. And this consciousness of mine is attached to it, tied to it.’ Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent and clear, endowed with all good qualities. And it was strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown. And a person with clear eyes were to take it in their hand and examine it: ‘This beryl gem is naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent and clear, endowed with all good qualities. And it’s strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā evaṁ pajānanti: ‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhaṁ’. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno sabbākārasampanno; tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya: ‘ayaṁ kho maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno sabbākārasampanno; tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā’ti.
[¶34] In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to understand this: ‘This body of mine is formed. It’s made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction. And this consciousness of mine is attached to it, tied to it.’
> Pali: Evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā evaṁ pajānanti: ‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti.
[¶35] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶36] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to create from this body another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. Suppose a person was to draw a reed out from its sheath. They’d think: ‘This is the reed, this is the sheath. The reed and the sheath are different things. The reed has been drawn out from the sheath.’ Or suppose a person was to draw a sword out from its scabbard. They’d think: ‘This is the sword, this is the scabbard. The sword and the scabbard are different things. The sword has been drawn out from the scabbard.’ Or suppose a person was to draw a snake out from its slough. They’d think: ‘This is the snake, this is the slough. The snake and the slough are different things. The snake has been drawn out from the slough.’ In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to create from this body another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimminanti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso muñjamhā īsikaṁ pabbāheyya; tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ muñjo, ayaṁ īsikā; añño muñjo, aññā īsikā; muñjamhā tveva īsikā pabbāḷhā’ti. Seyyathā vā panudāyi, puriso asiṁ kosiyā pabbāheyya; tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ asi, ayaṁ kosi; añño asi aññā kosi; kosiyā tveva asi pabbāḷho’ti. Seyyathā vā, panudāyi, puriso ahiṁ karaṇḍā uddhareyya; tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ ahi, ayaṁ karaṇḍo; añño ahi, añño karaṇḍo; karaṇḍā tveva ahi ubbhato’ti. Evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimminanti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ.
[¶37] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶38] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful. They control the body as far as the realm of divinity. Suppose a deft potter or their apprentice had some well-prepared clay. They could produce any kind of pot that they like. Or suppose a deft ivory-carver or their apprentice had some well-prepared ivory. They could produce any kind of ivory item that they like. Or suppose a deft goldsmith or their apprentice had some well-prepared gold. They could produce any kind of gold item that they like. In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to wield the many kinds of psychic power …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhonti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā honti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ, tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamānā gacchanti, seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karonti, seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchanti, seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamanti, seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parimasanti parimajjanti, yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vattenti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, dakkho kumbhakāro vā kumbhakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatāya mattikāya yaṁ yadeva bhājanavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya; seyyathā vā panudāyi, dakkho dantakāro vā dantakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ dantasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva dantavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya; seyyathā vā panudāyi, dakkho suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ suvaṇṇasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva suvaṇṇavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. Evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhonti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā honti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ, tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamānā gacchanti, seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karonti, seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchanti, seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamanti, seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parimasanti parimajjanti, yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vattenti.
[¶39] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶40] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use so that, with clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. Suppose there was a powerful horn blower. They’d easily make themselves heard in the four quarters. In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use so that, with clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇanti—dibbe ca mānuse ca, ye dūre santike ca. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, balavā saṅkhadhamo appakasireneva cātuddisā viññāpeyya; evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇanti—dibbe ca mānuse ca, ye dūre santike ca.
[¶41] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶42] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. They understand mind with greed as ‘mind with greed’, and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed’; mind with hate as ‘mind with hate’, and mind without hate as ‘mind without hate’; mind with delusion as ‘mind with delusion’, and mind without delusion as ‘mind without delusion’; constricted mind as ‘constricted mind’, and scattered mind as ‘scattered mind’; expansive mind as ‘expansive mind’, and unexpansive mind as ‘unexpansive mind’; mind that is not supreme as ‘mind that is not supreme’, and mind that is supreme as ‘mind that is supreme’; mind immersed in samādhi as ‘mind immersed in samādhi’, and mind not immersed in samādhi as ‘mind not immersed in samādhi’; freed mind as ‘freed mind’, and unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind’. Suppose there was a woman or man who was young, youthful, and fond of adornments, and they check their own reflection in a clean bright mirror or a clear bowl of water. If they had a spot they’d know ‘I have a spot’, and if they had no spots they’d know ‘I have no spots’. In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānanti— sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti; sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti; samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti; saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti; mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānanti; sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānanti; samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti; vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, itthī vā puriso vā daharo yuvā maṇḍanakajātiko ādāse vā parisuddhe pariyodāte acche vā udakapatte sakaṁ mukhanimittaṁ paccavekkhamāno sakaṇikaṁ vā ‘sakaṇikan’ti jāneyya, akaṇikaṁ vā ‘akaṇikan’ti jāneyya; evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānanti— sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ …pe… sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ … vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ … samohaṁ vā cittaṁ … vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ … saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ … vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ … mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ … amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ … sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ … anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ … samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ … asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ … vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ … avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānanti.
[¶43] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶44] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to recollect the many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. Suppose a person was to leave their home village and go to another village. From that village they’d go to yet another village. And from that village they’d return to their home village. They’d think: ‘I went from my home village to another village. There I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. From that village I went to yet another village. There too I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. And from that village I returned to my home village.’ In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to recollect the many kinds of past lives.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussaranti, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi, anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya, tamhāpi gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya; so tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgaccheyya; tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatra evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ evaṁ nisīdiṁ evaṁ abhāsiṁ evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ; tamhāpi gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatrāpi evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ evaṁ nisīdiṁ evaṁ abhāsiṁ evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ, somhi tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgato’ti. Evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussaranti, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussaranti.
[¶45] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶46] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use so that, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. Suppose there were two houses with doors. A person with clear eyes standing in between them would see humans entering and leaving a house and wandering to and fro. In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use so that, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passanti cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānanti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā; ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passanti cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānanti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, dve agārā sadvārā. Tatra cakkhumā puriso majjhe ṭhito passeyya manusse gehaṁ pavisantepi nikkhamantepi anucaṅkamantepi anuvicarantepi; evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passanti cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānanti …pe…
[¶47] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶48] Furthermore, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. Suppose that in a mountain glen there was a lake that was transparent, clear, and unclouded. A person with clear eyes standing on the bank would see the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still. They’d think: ‘This lake is transparent, clear, and unclouded. And here are the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, pabbatasaṅkhepe udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo, tattha cakkhumā puriso tīre ṭhito passeyya sippisambukampi sakkharakaṭhalampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo, tatrime sippisambukāpi sakkharakaṭhalāpi macchagumbāpi carantipi tiṭṭhantipī’ti.
[¶49] In the same way, I have explained to my disciples a practice that they use to realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Evameva kho, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti.
[¶50] And many of my disciples meditate on that having attained perfection and consummation of insight.
> Pali: Tatra ca pana me sāvakā bahū abhiññāvosānapāramippattā viharanti.
[¶51] This is the fifth quality because of which my disciples are loyal to me.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, udāyi, pañcamo dhammo yena mama sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharanti.
[¶52] These are the five qualities because of which my disciples honor, respect, revere, and venerate me; and honoring and respecting me, they remain loyal to me.”
> Pali: Ime kho, udāyi, pañca dhammā yehi mamaṁ sāvakā sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharantī”ti.
[¶53] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the wanderer Sakuludāyī approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano sakuludāyī paribbājako bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶54] > Pali: Mahāsakuludāyisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 85. MN 78 · With Uggāhamāna Samaṇamaṇḍikāputta
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/85/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/85/#p-N
[¶0] MN 78 · With Uggāhamāna Samaṇamaṇḍikāputta
> Pali: MN 78 · Samaṇamuṇḍikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the wanderer Uggāhamāna Samaṇamaṇḍikāputta was residing together with around five hundred wanderers in Mallikā’s single-halled monastery for philosophical debates, hedged by pale-moon ebony trees.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasati mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ pañcamattehi paribbājakasatehi.
[¶3] Then the chamberlain Pañcakaṅga left Sāvatthī in the middle of the day to see the Buddha. It occurred to him, “It’s the wrong time to see the Buddha, as he’s in retreat. And it’s the wrong time to see the esteemed mendicants, as they’re in retreat. Why don’t I go to Mallikā’s monastery to visit the wanderer Uggāhamāna?” So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati sāvatthiyā nikkhami divā divassa bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Atha kho pañcakaṅgassa thapatissa etadahosi: “akālo kho tāva bhagavantaṁ dassanāya; paṭisallīno bhagavā. Manobhāvaniyānampi bhikkhūnaṁ asamayo dassanāya; paṭisallīnā manobhāvaniyā bhikkhū. Yannūnāhaṁ yena samayappavādako tindukācīro ekasālako mallikāya ārāmo yena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti. Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati yena samayappavādako tindukācīro ekasālako mallikāya ārāmo yena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto tenupasaṅkami.
[¶4] Now at that time, Uggāhamāna was sitting together with a large assembly of wanderers making an uproar, a colossal racket. They engaged in all kinds of low talk, such as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ nisinno hoti unnādiniyā uccāsaddamahāsaddāya anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ kathentiyā, seyyathidaṁ— rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā.
[¶5] Uggāhamāna saw Pañcakaṅga coming off in the distance, and hushed his own assembly, “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. Here comes Pañcakaṅga, a disciple of the ascetic Gotama. He is included among the white-clothed lay disciples of the ascetic Gotama, who is residing in Sāvatthī. Such venerables like the quiet, are educated to be quiet, and praise the quiet. Hopefully if he sees that our assembly is quiet he’ll see fit to approach.” Then those wanderers fell silent.
> Pali: Addasā kho uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto pañcakaṅgaṁ thapatiṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna sakaṁ parisaṁ saṇṭhāpesi: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha; ayaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako āgacchati pañcakaṅgo thapati. Yāvatā kho pana samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakā gihī odātavasanā sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasanti ayaṁ tesaṁ aññataro pañcakaṅgo thapati. Appasaddakāmā kho pana te āyasmanto appasaddavinītā appasaddassa vaṇṇavādino; appeva nāma appasaddaṁ parisaṁ viditvā upasaṅkamitabbaṁ maññeyyā”ti. Atha kho te paribbājakā tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶6] Then Pañcakaṅga approached Uggāhamāna, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Uggāhamāna said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati yena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā uggāhamānena paribbājakena samaṇamuṇḍikāputtena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho pañcakaṅgaṁ thapatiṁ uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto etadavoca:
[¶7] “Householder, when an individual person has four qualities I describe them as an invincible ascetic—accomplished in the skillful, excelling in the skillful, attained to the highest attainment. What four? It’s when they do no bad deeds with their body; speak no bad words; think no bad thoughts; and don’t earn a living by bad livelihood. When an individual possesses these four qualities I describe them as an invincible ascetic.”
> Pali: “catūhi kho ahaṁ, gahapati, dhammehi samannāgataṁ purisapuggalaṁ paññapemi sampannakusalaṁ paramakusalaṁ uttamapattipattaṁ samaṇaṁ ayojjhaṁ. Katamehi catūhi? Idha, gahapati, na kāyena pāpakammaṁ karoti, na pāpakaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati, na pāpakaṁ saṅkappaṁ saṅkappeti, na pāpakaṁ ājīvaṁ ājīvati— imehi kho ahaṁ, gahapati, catūhi dhammehi samannāgataṁ purisapuggalaṁ paññapemi sampannakusalaṁ paramakusalaṁ uttamapattipattaṁ samaṇaṁ ayojjhan”ti.
[¶8] Then Pañcakaṅga neither approved nor rejected the wanderer Uggāhamāna’s statement. He rose from his seat, thinking, “I will learn the meaning of this statement from the Buddha himself.”
> Pali: Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati uggāhamānassa paribbājakassa samaṇamuṇḍikāputtassa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandi nappaṭikkosi. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi: “bhagavato santike etassa bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānissāmī”ti.
[¶9] Then he went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and informed the Buddha of all that had been discussed.
> Pali: Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho pañcakaṅgo thapati yāvatako ahosi uggāhamānena paribbājakena samaṇamuṇḍikāputtena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ bhagavato ārocesi.
[¶10] When he had spoken, the Buddha said to him, “Chamberlain, if what Uggāhamāna says is true, a little baby boy is an invincible ascetic—accomplished in the skillful, excelling in the skillful, attained to the highest attainment. For a little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘a body’, so how could they possibly do a bad deed with their body, aside from just wriggling? And a little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘speech’, so how could they possibly speak bad words, aside from just crying? And a little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘thought’, so how could they possibly think bad thoughts, aside from just whimpering? And a little baby doesn’t even have a concept of ‘livelihood’, so how could they possibly earn a living by bad livelihood, aside from their mother’s breast? If what Uggāhamāna says is true, a little baby boy is an invincible ascetic—accomplished in the skillful, excelling in the skillful, attained to the highest attainment.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā pañcakaṅgaṁ thapatiṁ etadavoca: “evaṁ sante kho, thapati, daharo kumāro mando uttānaseyyako sampannakusalo bhavissati paramakusalo uttamapattipatto samaṇo ayojjho, yathā uggāhamānassa paribbājakassa samaṇamuṇḍikāputtassa vacanaṁ. Daharassa hi, thapati, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa kāyotipi na hoti, kuto pana kāyena pāpakammaṁ karissati, aññatra phanditamattā. Daharassa hi, thapati, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa vācātipi na hoti, kuto pana pāpakaṁ vācaṁ bhāsissati, aññatra roditamattā. Daharassa hi, thapati, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa saṅkappotipi na hoti, kuto pana pāpakaṁ saṅkappaṁ saṅkappissati, aññatra vikūjitamattā. Daharassa hi, thapati, kumārassa mandassa uttānaseyyakassa ājīvotipi na hoti, kuto pana pāpakaṁ ājīvaṁ ājīvissati, aññatra mātuthaññā. Evaṁ sante kho, thapati, daharo kumāro mando uttānaseyyako sampannakusalo bhavissati paramakusalo uttamapattipatto samaṇo ayojjho, yathā uggāhamānassa paribbājakassa samaṇamuṇḍikāputtassa vacanaṁ.
[¶11] When an individual person has four qualities I describe them, not as an invincible ascetic—accomplished in the skillful, excelling in the skillful, attained to the highest attainment—but as having achieved the same level as a little baby. What four? It’s when they do no bad deeds with their body; speak no bad words; think no bad thoughts; and don’t earn a living by bad livelihood. When an individual possesses these four qualities I describe them, not as an invincible ascetic, but as having achieved the same level as a little baby.
> Pali: Catūhi kho ahaṁ, thapati, dhammehi samannāgataṁ purisapuggalaṁ paññapemi na ceva sampannakusalaṁ na paramakusalaṁ na uttamapattipattaṁ samaṇaṁ ayojjhaṁ, api cimaṁ daharaṁ kumāraṁ mandaṁ uttānaseyyakaṁ samadhigayha tiṭṭhati. Katamehi catūhi? Idha, thapati, na kāyena pāpakammaṁ karoti, na pāpakaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati, na pāpakaṁ saṅkappaṁ saṅkappeti, na pāpakaṁ ājīvaṁ ājīvati— imehi kho ahaṁ, thapati, catūhi dhammehi samannāgataṁ purisapuggalaṁ paññapemi na ceva sampannakusalaṁ na paramakusalaṁ na uttamapattipattaṁ samaṇaṁ ayojjhaṁ, api cimaṁ daharaṁ kumāraṁ mandaṁ uttānaseyyakaṁ samadhigayha tiṭṭhati.
[¶12] When an individual person has ten qualities, chamberlain, I describe them as an invincible ascetic—accomplished in the skillful, excelling in the skillful, attained to the highest attainment.
> Pali: Dasahi kho ahaṁ, thapati, dhammehi samannāgataṁ purisapuggalaṁ paññapemi sampannakusalaṁ paramakusalaṁ uttamapattipattaṁ samaṇaṁ ayojjhaṁ.
[¶13] The following things must be understood, I say. ‘These are unskillful behaviors.’ ‘Unskillful behaviors stem from this.’ ‘Here unskillful behaviors cease without remainder.’ ‘Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of unskillful behaviors.’
> Pali: Ime akusalā sīlā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Itosamuṭṭhānā akusalā sīlā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Idha akusalā sīlā aparisesā nirujjhanti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Evaṁ paṭipanno akusalānaṁ sīlānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi.
[¶14] ‘These are skillful behaviors.’ ‘Skillful behaviors stem from this.’ ‘Here skillful behaviors cease without remainder.’ ‘Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of skillful behaviors.’
> Pali: Ime kusalā sīlā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Itosamuṭṭhānā kusalā sīlā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Idha kusalā sīlā aparisesā nirujjhanti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Evaṁ paṭipanno kusalānaṁ sīlānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi.
[¶15] ‘These are unskillful thoughts.’ ‘Unskillful thoughts stem from this.’ ‘Here unskillful thoughts cease without remainder.’ ‘Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of unskillful thoughts.’
> Pali: Ime akusalā saṅkappā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Itosamuṭṭhānā akusalā saṅkappā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Idha akusalā saṅkappā aparisesā nirujjhanti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Evaṁ paṭipanno akusalānaṁ saṅkappānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi.
[¶16] ‘These are skillful thoughts.’ ‘Skillful thoughts stem from this.’ ‘Here skillful thoughts cease without remainder.’ ‘Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of skillful thoughts.’
> Pali: Ime kusalā saṅkappā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Itosamuṭṭhānā kusalā saṅkappā; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Idha kusalā saṅkappā aparisesā nirujjhanti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi. Evaṁ paṭipanno kusalānaṁ saṅkappānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti; tamahaṁ, thapati, veditabbanti vadāmi.
[¶17] And what, chamberlain, are unskillful behaviors? Unskillful deeds by way of body and speech, and bad livelihood. These are called unskillful behaviors.
> Pali: Katame ca, thapati, akusalā sīlā? Akusalaṁ kāyakammaṁ, akusalaṁ vacīkammaṁ, pāpako ājīvo— ime vuccanti, thapati, akusalā sīlā.
[¶18] And where do these unskillful behaviors stem from? Where they stem from has been stated. You should say that they stem from the mind. What mind? The mind takes many and diverse forms. But unskillful behaviors stem from a mind that has greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, akusalā sīlā kiṁsamuṭṭhānā? Samuṭṭhānampi nesaṁ vuttaṁ. ‘Cittasamuṭṭhānā’tissa vacanīyaṁ. Katamaṁ cittaṁ? Cittampi hi bahuṁ anekavidhaṁ nānappakārakaṁ. Yaṁ cittaṁ sarāgaṁ sadosaṁ samohaṁ, itosamuṭṭhānā akusalā sīlā.
[¶19] And where do these unskillful behaviors cease without remainder? Their cessation has also been stated. It’s when a mendicant gives up bad conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, and develops good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind; they give up wrong livelihood and earn a living by right livelihood. This is where these unskillful behaviors cease without remainder.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, akusalā sīlā kuhiṁ aparisesā nirujjhanti? Nirodhopi nesaṁ vutto. Idha, thapati, bhikkhu kāyaduccaritaṁ pahāya kāyasucaritaṁ bhāveti, vacīduccaritaṁ pahāya vacīsucaritaṁ bhāveti, manoduccaritaṁ pahāya manosucaritaṁ bhāveti, micchājīvaṁ pahāya sammājīvena jīvitaṁ kappeti— etthete akusalā sīlā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶20] And how is someone practicing for the cessation of unskillful behaviors? It’s when a mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen are given up. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed. Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of unskillful behaviors.
> Pali: Kathaṁ paṭipanno, thapati, akusalānaṁ sīlānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti? Idha, thapati, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Evaṁ paṭipanno kho, thapati, akusalānaṁ sīlānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti.
[¶21] And what are skillful behaviors? Skillful deeds by way of body and speech, and purified livelihood are included in behavior, I say. These are called skillful behaviors.
> Pali: Katame ca, thapati, kusalā sīlā? Kusalaṁ kāyakammaṁ, kusalaṁ vacīkammaṁ, ājīvaparisuddhampi kho ahaṁ, thapati, sīlasmiṁ vadāmi. Ime vuccanti, thapati, kusalā sīlā.
[¶22] And where do these skillful behaviors stem from? Where they stem from has been stated. You should say that they stem from the mind. What mind? The mind takes many and diverse forms. But skillful behaviors stem from a mind that is free from greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, kusalā sīlā kiṁsamuṭṭhānā? Samuṭṭhānampi nesaṁ vuttaṁ. ‘Cittasamuṭṭhānā’tissa vacanīyaṁ. Katamaṁ cittaṁ? Cittampi hi bahuṁ anekavidhaṁ nānappakārakaṁ. Yaṁ cittaṁ vītarāgaṁ vītadosaṁ vītamohaṁ, itosamuṭṭhānā kusalā sīlā.
[¶23] And where do these skillful behaviors cease without remainder? Their cessation has also been stated. It’s when a mendicant behaves ethically, but they are not determined by ethical behavior. And they truly understand the freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom where these skillful behaviors cease without remainder.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, kusalā sīlā kuhiṁ aparisesā nirujjhanti? Nirodhopi nesaṁ vutto. Idha, thapati, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti no ca sīlamayo, tañca cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti; yatthassa te kusalā sīlā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶24] And how is someone practicing for the cessation of skillful behaviors? It’s when a mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise … so that unskillful qualities are given up … so that skillful qualities arise … so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed. Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of skillful behaviors.
> Pali: Kathaṁ paṭipanno ca, thapati, kusalānaṁ sīlānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti? Idha, thapati, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya …pe… anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya …pe… uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Evaṁ paṭipanno kho, thapati, kusalānaṁ sīlānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti.
[¶25] And what are unskillful thoughts? Purposes of sensuality, of malice, and of cruelty. These are called unskillful thoughts.
> Pali: Katame ca, thapati, akusalā saṅkappā? Kāmasaṅkappo, byāpādasaṅkappo, vihiṁsāsaṅkappo— ime vuccanti, thapati, akusalā saṅkappā.
[¶26] And where do these unskillful thoughts stem from? Where they stem from has been stated. You should say that they stem from perception. What perception? Perception takes many and diverse forms. Perceptions of sensuality, malice, and cruelty— unskillful thoughts stem from this.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, akusalā saṅkappā kiṁsamuṭṭhānā? Samuṭṭhānampi nesaṁ vuttaṁ. ‘Saññāsamuṭṭhānā’tissa vacanīyaṁ. Katamā saññā? Saññāpi hi bahū anekavidhā nānappakārakā. Kāmasaññā, byāpādasaññā, vihiṁsāsaññā— itosamuṭṭhānā akusalā saṅkappā.
[¶27] And where do these unskillful thoughts cease without remainder? Their cessation has also been stated. It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is where these unskillful thoughts cease without remainder.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, akusalā saṅkappā kuhiṁ aparisesā nirujjhanti? Nirodhopi nesaṁ vutto. Idha, thapati, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; etthete akusalā saṅkappā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶28] And how is someone practicing for the cessation of unskillful thoughts? It’s when a mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise … so that unskillful qualities are given up … so that skillful qualities arise … so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed. Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of unskillful thoughts.
> Pali: Kathaṁ paṭipanno ca, thapati, akusalānaṁ saṅkappānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti? Idha, thapati, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya …pe… anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya …pe… uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Evaṁ paṭipanno kho, thapati, akusalānaṁ saṅkappānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti.
[¶29] And what are skillful thoughts? Thoughts of renunciation, good will, and harmlessness. These are called skillful thoughts.
> Pali: Katame ca, thapati, kusalā saṅkappā? Nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo, avihiṁsāsaṅkappo— ime vuccanti, thapati, kusalā saṅkappā.
[¶30] And where do these skillful thoughts stem from? Where they stem from has been stated. You should say that they stem from perception. What perception? Perception takes many and diverse forms. Perceptions of renunciation, good will, and harmlessness— skillful thoughts stem from this.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, kusalā saṅkappā kiṁsamuṭṭhānā? Samuṭṭhānampi nesaṁ vuttaṁ. ‘Saññāsamuṭṭhānā’tissa vacanīyaṁ. Katamā saññā? Saññāpi hi bahū anekavidhā nānappakārakā. Nekkhammasaññā, abyāpādasaññā, avihiṁsāsaññā— itosamuṭṭhānā kusalā saṅkappā.
[¶31] And where do these skillful thoughts cease without remainder? Their cessation has also been stated. It’s when, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is where these skillful thoughts cease without remainder.
> Pali: Ime ca, thapati, kusalā saṅkappā kuhiṁ aparisesā nirujjhanti? Nirodhopi nesaṁ vutto. Idha, thapati, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; etthete kusalā saṅkappā aparisesā nirujjhanti.
[¶32] And how is someone practicing for the cessation of skillful thoughts? It’s when a mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise … so that unskillful qualities are given up … so that skillful qualities arise … so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed. Someone practicing like this is practicing for the cessation of skillful thoughts.
> Pali: Kathaṁ paṭipanno ca, thapati, kusalānaṁ saṅkappānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti? Idha, thapati, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya …pe… anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya …pe… uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Evaṁ paṭipanno kho, thapati, kusalānaṁ saṅkappānaṁ nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti.
[¶33] Chamberlain, when an individual person has what ten qualities do I describe them as an invincible ascetic—accomplished in the skillful, excelling in the skillful, attained to the highest attainment? It’s when a mendicant has an adept’s right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right immersion, right knowledge, and right freedom. When an individual possesses these ten qualities, I describe them as an invincible ascetic—accomplished in the skillful, excelling in the skillful, attained to the highest attainment.”
> Pali: Katamehi cāhaṁ, thapati, dasahi dhammehi samannāgataṁ purisapuggalaṁ paññapemi sampannakusalaṁ paramakusalaṁ uttamapattipattaṁ samaṇaṁ ayojjhaṁ? Idha, thapati, bhikkhu asekhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāsaṅkappena samannāgato hoti, asekhāya sammāvācāya samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammākammantena samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāājīvena samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāvāyāmena samannāgato hoti, asekhāya sammāsatiyā samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāsamādhinā samannāgato hoti, asekhena sammāñāṇena samannāgato hoti, asekhāya sammāvimuttiyā samannāgato hoti— imehi kho ahaṁ, thapati, dasahi dhammehi samannāgataṁ purisapuggalaṁ paññapemi sampannakusalaṁ paramakusalaṁ uttamapattipattaṁ samaṇaṁ ayojjhan”ti.
[¶34] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Pañcakaṅga the chamberlain approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano pañcakaṅgo thapati bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶35] > Pali: Samaṇamuṇḍikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 86. MN 79 · The Shorter Discourse With Sakuludāyī
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/86/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/86/#p-N
[¶0] MN 79 · The Shorter Discourse With Sakuludāyī
> Pali: MN 79 · Cūḷasakuludāyisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground. Now at that time the wanderer Sakuludāyī was residing together with a large assembly of wanderers in their monastery in the peacocks’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena kho pana samayena sakuludāyī paribbājako moranivāpe paribbājakārāme paṭivasati mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Rājagaha for alms. Then it occurred to him, “It’s too early to wander for alms in Rājagaha. Why don’t I visit the wanderer Sakuludāyī at the monastery for the wanderers in the peacocks’ feeding ground?” Then the Buddha went to the monastery for the wanderers.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “atippago kho tāva rājagahe piṇḍāya carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ yena moranivāpo paribbājakārāmo yena sakuludāyī paribbājako tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti. Atha kho bhagavā yena moranivāpo paribbājakārāmo tenupasaṅkami.
[¶3] Now at that time, Sakuludāyī was sitting together with a large assembly of wanderers making an uproar, a colossal racket. They engaged in all kinds of low talk, such as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sakuludāyī paribbājako mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ nisinno hoti unnādiniyā uccāsaddamahāsaddāya anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ kathentiyā, seyyathidaṁ— rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā.
[¶4] Sakuludāyī saw the Buddha coming off in the distance, and hushed his own assembly, “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. Here comes the ascetic Gotama. The venerable likes quiet and praises quiet. Hopefully if he sees that our assembly is quiet he’ll see fit to approach.” Then those wanderers fell silent.
> Pali: Addasā kho sakuludāyī paribbājako bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna sakaṁ parisaṁ saṇṭhāpesi: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha. Ayaṁ samaṇo gotamo āgacchati; appasaddakāmo kho pana so āyasmā appasaddassa vaṇṇavādī. Appeva nāma appasaddaṁ parisaṁ viditvā upasaṅkamitabbaṁ maññeyyā”ti. Atha kho te paribbājakā tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶5] Then the Buddha approached Sakuludāyī, who said to him, “Let the Blessed One come, sir! Welcome to the Blessed One, sir! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please, sir, sit down, this seat is ready.” The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, while Sakuludāyī took a low seat and sat to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Udāyī, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena sakuludāyī paribbājako tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho sakuludāyī paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho, bhante, bhagavā. Svāgataṁ, bhante, bhagavato. Cirassaṁ kho, bhante, bhagavā imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu, bhante, bhagavā; idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Sakuludāyīpi kho paribbājako aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho sakuludāyiṁ paribbājakaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “kāya nuttha, udāyi, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶6] “Sir, leave aside what we were sitting talking about just now. It won’t be hard for you to hear about that later. When I don’t come to the assembly, they sit and engage in all kinds of low talk. But when I have come to the assembly, they sit gazing up at my face alone, thinking, ‘Whatever the ascetic Udāyī teaches, we shall listen to it.’ But when the Buddha has come to the assembly, both myself and the assembly sit gazing up at your face, thinking, ‘Whatever the Buddha teaches, we shall listen to it.’”
> Pali: “Tiṭṭhatesā, bhante, kathā yāya mayaṁ etarahi kathāya sannisinnā. Nesā, bhante, kathā bhagavato dullabhā bhavissati pacchāpi savanāya. Yadāhaṁ, bhante, imaṁ parisaṁ anupasaṅkanto homi athāyaṁ parisā anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ kathentī nisinnā hoti; yadā ca kho ahaṁ, bhante, imaṁ parisaṁ upasaṅkanto homi athāyaṁ parisā mamaññeva mukhaṁ ullokentī nisinnā hoti: ‘yaṁ no samaṇo udāyī dhammaṁ bhāsissati taṁ sossāmā’ti; yadā pana, bhante, bhagavā imaṁ parisaṁ upasaṅkanto hoti athāhañceva ayañca parisā bhagavato mukhaṁ ullokentā nisinnā homa: ‘yaṁ no bhagavā dhammaṁ bhāsissati taṁ sossāmā’”ti.
[¶7] “Well then, Udāyī, suggest something for me to talk about.”
> Pali: “Tenahudāyi, taṁyevettha paṭibhātu yathā maṁ paṭibhāseyyā”ti.
[¶8] “Sir, a few days ago someone was claiming to be all-knowing and all-seeing, to know and see everything without exception, thus: ‘Knowledge and vision are constantly and continually present to me, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking.’ When I asked them a question about the first beginning, they dodged the issue, distracted the discussion with irrelevant points, and displayed annoyance, hate, and bitterness. That reminded me of the Buddha: ‘Surely it must be the Blessed One, the Holy One who is so skilled in such matters.’”
> Pali: “Purimāni, bhante, divasāni purimatarāni sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānamāno ‘carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan’ti. So mayā pubbantaṁ ārabbha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno aññenaññaṁ paṭicari, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmesi, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁyeva ārabbha sati udapādi: ‘aho nūna bhagavā, aho nūna sugato. Yo imesaṁ dhammānaṁ sukusalo’”ti.
[¶9] “But Udāyī, who was it that made such a claim and behaved in such a way?”
> Pali: “Ko pana so, udāyi, sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānamāno ‘carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan’ti, yo tayā pubbantaṁ ārabbha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno aññenaññaṁ paṭicari, bahiddhā kathaṁ apanāmesi kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsī”ti?
[¶10] “It was the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan, sir.”
> Pali: “Nigaṇṭho, bhante, nāṭaputto”ti.
[¶11] “Udāyī, someone who can recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details, might ask me a question about the first beginning, or I might ask them a question about the first beginning. And they might satisfy me with their answer, or I might satisfy them with my answer.
> Pali: “Yo kho, udāyi, anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussareyya, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussareyya, so vā maṁ pubbantaṁ ārabbha pañhaṁ puccheyya, taṁ vāhaṁ pubbantaṁ ārabbha pañhaṁ puccheyyaṁ; so vā me pubbantaṁ ārabbha pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheyya, tassa vāhaṁ pubbantaṁ ārabbha pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheyyaṁ.
[¶12] Someone who, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, understands how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds might ask me a question about the final end, or I might ask them a question about the final end. And they might satisfy me with their answer, or I might satisfy them with my answer.
> Pali: Yo kho, udāyi, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passeyya cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajāneyya, so vā maṁ aparantaṁ ārabbha pañhaṁ puccheyya, taṁ vāhaṁ aparantaṁ ārabbha pañhaṁ puccheyyaṁ; so vā me aparantaṁ ārabbha pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheyya, tassa vāhaṁ aparantaṁ ārabbha pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheyyaṁ.
[¶13] Nevertheless, Udāyī, leave aside the first beginning and the final end. I shall teach you the Dhamma: ‘When this exists, this comes to be; due to the arising of this, this arises. When this doesn’t exist, that is not; due to the cessation of this, that ceases.’”
> Pali: Api ca, udāyi, tiṭṭhatu pubbanto, tiṭṭhatu aparanto. Dhammaṁ te desessāmi— imasmiṁ sati idaṁ hoti, imassuppādā idaṁ uppajjati; imasmiṁ asati idaṁ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṁ nirujjhatī”ti.
[¶14] “Well sir, I can’t even recall with features and details what I’ve undergone in this incarnation. How should I possibly recollect my many kinds of past lives with features and details, like the Buddha? For I can’t even see a mud-goblin right now. How should I possibly, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, see sentient beings passing away and being reborn, like the Buddha? But then the Buddha told me, ‘Nevertheless, Udāyī, leave aside the first beginning and the final end. I shall teach you the Dhamma:
> Pali: “Ahañhi, bhante, yāvatakampi me iminā attabhāvena paccanubhūtaṁ tampi nappahomi sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anussarituṁ, kuto panāhaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarissāmi, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarissāmi, seyyathāpi bhagavā? Ahañhi, bhante, etarahi paṁsupisācakampi na passāmi, kuto panāhaṁ dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passissāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānissāmi, seyyathāpi bhagavā? Yaṁ pana maṁ, bhante, bhagavā evamāha: ‘api ca, udāyi, tiṭṭhatu pubbanto, tiṭṭhatu aparanto; dhammaṁ te desessāmi—
[¶15] “When this exists, this comes to be; due to the arising of this, this arises. When this doesn’t exist, this doesn’t come to be; due to the cessation of this, this ceases.”’ But that is even more unclear to me. Perhaps I might satisfy the Buddha by answering a question about my own denomination.”
> Pali: imasmiṁ sati idaṁ hoti, imassuppādā idaṁ uppajjati; imasmiṁ asati idaṁ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṁ nirujjhatī’ti tañca pana me bhiyyoso mattāya na pakkhāyati. Appeva nāmāhaṁ, bhante, sake ācariyake bhagavato cittaṁ ārādheyyaṁ pañhassa veyyākaraṇenā”ti.
[¶16] “But Udāyī, what is your own denomination?”
> Pali: “Kinti pana te, udāyi, sake ācariyake hotī”ti?
[¶17] “Sir, it’s this: ‘This is the ultimate splendor, this is the ultimate splendor.’”
> Pali: “Amhākaṁ, bhante, sake ācariyake evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo, ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo’”ti.
[¶18] “But what is that ultimate splendor?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ pana te etaṁ, udāyi, sake ācariyake evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo, ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo’ti, katamo so paramo vaṇṇo”ti?
[¶19] “Sir, the ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.”
> Pali: “Yasmā, bhante, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo”ti.
[¶20] “But what is that ultimate splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana so paramo vaṇṇo yasmā vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthī”ti?
[¶21] “Sir, the ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.”
> Pali: “Yasmā, bhante, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo”ti.
[¶22] “Udāyī, you could draw this out for a long time. You say, ‘The ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.’ But you don’t describe that splendor. Suppose a man was to say, ‘Whoever the finest lady in the land is, it is her that I want, her I desire!’ They’d say to him, ‘My man, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know whether she’s an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’ They’d say to him, ‘My friend, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know her name or clan? Whether she’s tall or short or medium? Whether her skin is black, brown, or dingy? Whether she comes from such-and-such village, town, or city?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’ They’d say to him, ‘My man, do you desire someone who you’ve never even known or seen?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘Yes.’
> Pali: “Dīghāpi kho te esā, udāyi, phareyya: ‘yasmā, bhante, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo’ti vadesi, tañca vaṇṇaṁ na paññapesi. Seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ yā imasmiṁ janapade janapadakalyāṇī taṁ icchāmi, taṁ kāmemī’ti. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ—khattiyī vā brāhmaṇī vā vessī vā suddī vā’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ—evaṁnāmā evaṅgottāti vāti …pe… dīghā vā rassā vā majjhimā vā kāḷī vā sāmā vā maṅguracchavī vāti … amukasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā nagare vā’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi, taṁ tvaṁ icchasi kāmesī’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘āmā’ti vadeyya.
[¶23] What do you think, Udāyī? This being so, doesn’t that man’s statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi— nanu evaṁ sante, tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶24] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶25] “In the same way, you say, ‘The ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.’ But you don’t describe that splendor.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho tvaṁ, udāyi, ‘yasmā, bhante, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo’ti vadesi, tañca vaṇṇaṁ na paññapesī”ti.
[¶26] “Worthy sir, suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked. When placed on a cream rug it would shine and glow and dazzle. Such is the splendor of the self that is free of disease after death.”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhante, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato paṇḍukambale nikkhitto bhāsate ca tapate ca virocati ca, evaṁ vaṇṇo attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā”ti.
[¶27] “What do you think, Udāyī? Which of these two has a finer splendor: such a beryl gem, or a firefly in the dark of night?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yo vā maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato paṇḍukambale nikkhitto bhāsate ca tapate ca virocati ca, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya kimi khajjopanako—imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶28] “A firefly in the dark of night, sir.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, rattandhakāratimisāya kimi khajjopanako—ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶29] “What do you think, Udāyī? Which of these two has a finer splendor: a firefly in the dark of night, or an oil lamp in the dark of night?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya kimi khajjopanako, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya telappadīpo—imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶30] “An oil lamp in the dark of night, sir.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, rattandhakāratimisāya telappadīpo—ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶31] “What do you think, Udāyī? Which of these two has a finer splendor: an oil lamp in the dark of night, or a great mass of fire in the dark of night?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya telappadīpo, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya mahāaggikkhandho—imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶32] “A great mass of fire in the dark of night, sir.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, rattandhakāratimisāya mahāaggikkhandho—ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶33] “What do you think, Udāyī? Which of these two has a finer splendor: a great mass of fire in the dark of night, or the morning star in the clear and cloudless heavens at the crack of dawn?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya mahāaggikkhandho, yā vā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ viddhe vigatavalāhake deve osadhitārakā—imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶34] “The morning star in the clear and cloudless heavens at the crack of dawn, sir.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ viddhe vigatavalāhake deve osadhitārakā—ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶35] “What do you think, Udāyī? Which of these two has a finer splendor: the morning star in the clear and cloudless heavens at the crack of dawn, or the full moon at midnight in the clear and cloudless heavens on the fifteenth day sabbath?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yā vā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ viddhe vigatavalāhake deve osadhitārakā, yo vā tadahuposathe pannarase viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido aḍḍharattasamayaṁ cando—imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶36] “The full moon at midnight in the clear and cloudless heavens on the fifteenth day sabbath, sir.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, tadahuposathe pannarase viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido aḍḍharattasamayaṁ cando—ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶37] “What do you think, Udāyī? Which of these two has a finer splendor: the full moon at midnight in the clear and cloudless heavens on the fifteenth day sabbath, or the sun at midday in the clear and cloudless heavens in the last month of the rainy season, in autumn?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yo vā tadahuposathe pannarase viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido aḍḍharattasamayaṁ cando, yo vā vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido majjhanhikasamayaṁ sūriyo—imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶38] “The sun at midday in the clear and cloudless heavens in the last month of the rainy season, in autumn, sir.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido majjhanhikasamayaṁ sūriyo—ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶39] “Beyond this, Udāyī, I know very many gods on whom the luminosity of the sun and moon makes no impression. Nevertheless, I do not say: ‘The splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.’ But of the splendor inferior to a firefly you say, ‘This is the ultimate splendor.’ And you don’t describe that splendor.”
> Pali: “Ato kho te, udāyi, bahū hi bahutarā devā ye imesaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ ābhā nānubhonti, tyāhaṁ pajānāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘yasmā vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthī’ti. Atha ca pana tvaṁ, udāyi, ‘yvāyaṁ vaṇṇo kiminā khajjopanakena nihīnataro ca patikiṭṭhataro ca so paramo vaṇṇo’ti vadesi, tañca vaṇṇaṁ na paññapesī”ti.
[¶40] “The Blessed One has cut short the discussion! The Holy One has cut short the discussion!”
> Pali: “Acchidaṁ bhagavā kathaṁ, acchidaṁ sugato kathan”ti.
[¶41] “But Udāyī, why do you say this?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, udāyi, evaṁ vadesi: ‘acchidaṁ bhagavā kathaṁ, acchidaṁ sugato kathan’”ti?
[¶42] “Sir, it says this in our own denomination: ‘This is the ultimate splendor, this is the ultimate splendor.’ But when pursued, pressed, and grilled on our own denomination, we turned out to be vacuous, hollow, and mistaken.”
> Pali: “Amhākaṁ, bhante, sake ācariyake evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo, ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo’ti. Te mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā sake ācariyake samanuyuñjīyamānā samanuggāhīyamānā samanubhāsīyamānā rittā tucchā aparaddhā”ti.
[¶43] “But Udāyī, is there a world of absolute happiness? And is there a grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ panudāyi, atthi ekantasukho loko, atthi ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti?
[¶44] “Sir, it says this in our own denomination: ‘There is a world of absolute happiness. And there is a grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness.’”
> Pali: “Amhākaṁ, bhante, sake ācariyake evaṁ hoti: ‘atthi ekantasukho loko, atthi ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā’”ti.
[¶45] “Well, what is that grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness?”
> Pali: “Katamā pana sā, udāyi, ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti?
[¶46] “Sir, it’s when someone gives up killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, and lying. And they proceed having undertaken some kind of mortification. This is the grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness.”
> Pali: “Idha, bhante, ekacco pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācāraṁ pahāya kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, aññataraṁ vā pana tapoguṇaṁ samādāya vattati. Ayaṁ kho sā, bhante, ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti.
[¶47] “What do you think, Udāyī? On an occasion when someone refrains from killing living creatures, is their self absolutely happy at that time, or does it have both pleasure and pain?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yasmiṁ samaye pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, ekantasukhī vā tasmiṁ samaye attā hoti sukhadukkhī vā”ti?
[¶48] “It has both pleasure and pain.”
> Pali: “Sukhadukkhī, bhante”.
[¶49] “What do you think, Udāyī? On an occasion when someone refrains from stealing … sexual misconduct … lying, is their self absolutely happy at that time, or does it have both pleasure and pain?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yasmiṁ samaye adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, ekantasukhī vā tasmiṁ samaye attā hoti sukhadukkhī vā”ti? “Sukhadukkhī, bhante”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yasmiṁ samaye kāmesumicchācāraṁ pahāya kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, ekantasukhī vā tasmiṁ samaye attā hoti sukhadukkhī vā”ti? “Sukhadukkhī, bhante”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yasmiṁ samaye musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, ekantasukhī vā tasmiṁ samaye attā hoti sukhadukkhī vā”ti?
[¶50] “It has both pleasure and pain.”
> Pali: “Sukhadukkhī, bhante”.
[¶51] “What do you think, Udāyī? On an occasion when someone proceeds having undertaken some kind of mortification, is their self absolutely happy at that time, or does it have both pleasure and pain?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, yasmiṁ samaye aññataraṁ tapoguṇaṁ samādāya vattati, ekantasukhī vā tasmiṁ samaye attā hoti sukhadukkhī vā”ti?
[¶52] “It has both pleasure and pain.”
> Pali: “Sukhadukkhī, bhante”.
[¶53] “What do you think, Udāyī? Is an absolutely happy world realized by relying on a practice of mixed pleasure and pain?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, udāyi, api nu kho vokiṇṇasukhadukkhaṁ paṭipadaṁ āgamma ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyā hotī”ti?
[¶54] “The Blessed One has cut short the discussion! The Holy One has cut short the discussion!”
> Pali: “Acchidaṁ bhagavā kathaṁ, acchidaṁ sugato kathan”ti.
[¶55] “But Udāyī, why do you say this?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, udāyi, vadesi: ‘acchidaṁ bhagavā kathaṁ, acchidaṁ sugato kathan’”ti?
[¶56] “Sir, it says this in our own denomination: ‘There is a world of absolute happiness. And there is a grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness.’ But when pursued, pressed, and grilled on our own denomination, we turned out to be vacuous, hollow, and mistaken.
> Pali: “Amhākaṁ, bhante, sake ācariyake evaṁ hoti: ‘atthi ekantasukho loko, atthi ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti. Te mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā sake ācariyake samanuyuñjiyamānā samanuggāhiyamānā samanubhāsiyamānā rittā tucchā aparaddhā”ti.
[¶57] But sir, is there a world of absolute happiness? And is there a grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhante, atthi ekantasukho loko, atthi ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti?
[¶58] “There is a world of absolute happiness, Udāyī. And there is a grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, udāyi, ekantasukho loko, atthi ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti.
[¶59] “Well sir, what is that grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness?”
> Pali: “Katamā pana sā, bhante, ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti?
[¶60] “It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption. With the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption. This is the grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness.”
> Pali: “Idhudāyi, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati; pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati— ayaṁ kho sā, udāyi, ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti.
[¶61] “Sir, that’s not the grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness. At that point an absolutely happy world has already been realized.”
> Pali: “Na kho sā, bhante, ākāravatī paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāya, sacchikato hissa, bhante, ettāvatā ekantasukho loko hotī”ti.
[¶62] “No, Udāyī, at that point an absolutely happy world has not been realized. This is the grounded practice for realizing a world of absolute happiness.”
> Pali: “Na khvāssa, udāyi, ettāvatā ekantasukho loko sacchikato hoti; ākāravatī tveva sā paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”ti.
[¶63] When he said this, Sakuludāyī’s assembly made an uproar, a colossal racket, “In that case, we are lost, together with our denomination! We are lost, together with our denomination! We know nothing higher than this!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sakuludāyissa paribbājakassa parisā unnādinī uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahosi: “ettha mayaṁ anassāma sācariyakā, ettha mayaṁ anassāma sācariyakā. Na mayaṁ ito bhiyyo uttaritaraṁ pajānāmā”ti.
[¶64] Then Sakuludāyī, having quieted those wanderers, said to the Buddha, “Well sir, at what point is an absolutely happy world realized?”
> Pali: Atha kho sakuludāyī paribbājako te paribbājake appasadde katvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kittāvatā panāssa, bhante, ekantasukho loko sacchikato hotī”ti?
[¶65] “It’s when, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption. There are deities who have been reborn in a absolutely happy world. That mendicant associates with them, converses, and engages in discussion. It’s at this point that a absolutely happy world has been realized.”
> Pali: “Idhudāyi, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ … upasampajja viharati. Yā tā devatā ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ upapannā tāhi devatāhi saddhiṁ santiṭṭhati sallapati sākacchaṁ samāpajjati. Ettāvatā khvāssa, udāyi, ekantasukho loko sacchikato hotī”ti.
[¶66] “Surely the mendicants must lead the spiritual life under the Buddha for the sake of realizing this absolutely happy world?”
> Pali: “Etassa nūna, bhante, ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti?
[¶67] “No, Udāyī, the mendicants don’t lead the spiritual life under me for the sake of realizing this absolutely happy world. There are other things that are finer, for the sake of which the mendicants lead the spiritual life under me.”
> Pali: “Na kho, udāyi, ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti. Atthi kho, udāyi, aññeva dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca, yesaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti.
[¶68] “But what are those finer things?”
> Pali: “Katame pana te, bhante, dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca yesaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti?
[¶69] “It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. …
> Pali: “Idhudāyi, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā …pe…
[¶70] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption. This is one of the finer things for the sake of which the mendicants lead the spiritual life under me.
> Pali: so ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, udāyi, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶71] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. This too is one of the finer things.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, udāyi, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā … dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, udāyi, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶72] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. This too is one of the finer things.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Ayampi kho, udāyi, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶73] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. This too is one of the finer things.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Ayampi kho, udāyi, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶74] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti …pe… ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti … ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti … ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti … ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶75] Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶76] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ This too is one of the finer things. These are the finer things for the sake of which the mendicants lead the spiritual life under me.”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Ayampi kho, udāyi, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti. Ime kho, udāyi, dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca yesaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti.
[¶77] When he had spoken, Sakuludāyī said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. Sir, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sakuludāyī paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶78] When he said this, Sakuludāyī’s assembly said to him, “Worthy Udāyī, don’t lead the spiritual life under the ascetic Gotama. You have been a tutor; don’t live as a pupil. You’ll end up like a water jar that turns into a water ladle. Worthy Udāyī, don’t lead the spiritual life under the ascetic Gotama. You have been a tutor; don’t live as a pupil.” And that’s how the wanderer Sakuludāyī’s own assembly prevented him from leading the spiritual life under the Buddha.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sakuludāyissa paribbājakassa parisā sakuludāyiṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavocuṁ: “mā bhavaṁ, udāyi, samaṇe gotame brahmacariyaṁ cari; mā bhavaṁ, udāyi, ācariyo hutvā antevāsīvāsaṁ vasi. Seyyathāpi nāma udakamaṇiko hutvā udañcaniko assa, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ bhoto udāyissa bhavissati. Mā bhavaṁ, udāyi, samaṇe gotame brahmacariyaṁ cari; mā bhavaṁ, udāyi, ācariyo hutvā antevāsīvāsaṁ vasī”ti. Iti hidaṁ sakuludāyissa paribbājakassa parisā sakuludāyiṁ paribbājakaṁ antarāyamakāsi bhagavati brahmacariyeti.
[¶79] > Pali: Cūḷasakuludāyisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 87. MN 80 · With Vekhanasa
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/87/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/87/#p-N
[¶0] MN 80 · With Vekhanasa
> Pali: MN 80 · Vekhanasasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the wanderer Vekhanasa went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he stood to one side, and expressed this heartfelt sentiment in the Buddha’s presence: “This is the ultimate splendor, this is the ultimate splendor.”
> Pali: Atha kho vekhanaso paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho vekhanaso paribbājako bhagavato santike udānaṁ udānesi: “ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo, ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo”ti.
[¶3] “But Kaccāna, why do you say: ‘This is the ultimate splendor, this is the ultimate splendor.’ What is that ultimate splendor?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, kaccāna, evaṁ vadesi: ‘ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo, ayaṁ paramo vaṇṇo’ti? Katamo, kaccāna, so paramo vaṇṇo”ti?
[¶4] “Worthy Gotama, the ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.”
> Pali: “Yasmā, bho gotama, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo”ti.
[¶5] “But what is that ultimate splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana so, kaccāna, vaṇṇo yasmā vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthī”ti?
[¶6] “Worthy Gotama, the ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.”
> Pali: “Yasmā, bho gotama, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo”ti.
[¶7] “Kaccāna, you could draw this out for a long time. You say, ‘The ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.’ But you don’t describe that splendor.
> Pali: “Dīghāpi kho te esā, kaccāna, phareyya: ‘yasmā, bho gotama, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo’ti vadesi, tañca vaṇṇaṁ na paññapesi.
[¶8] Suppose a man was to say, ‘Whoever the finest lady in the land is, it is her that I want, her I desire!’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, kaccāna, puriso evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ yā imasmiṁ janapade janapadakalyāṇī, taṁ icchāmi taṁ kāmemī’ti.
[¶9] They’d say to him, ‘My man, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know whether she’s an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ—khattiyī vā brāhmaṇī vā vessī vā suddī vā’ti?
[¶10] Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya.
[¶11] They’d say to him, ‘My friend, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know her name or clan? Whether she’s tall or short or medium? Whether her skin is black, brown, or dingy? Whether she comes from such-and-such village, town, or city?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ evaṁnāmā evaṅgottāti vāti …pe… dīghā vā rassā vā majjhimā vā kāḷī vā sāmā vā maṅguracchavī vāti … amukasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā nagare vā’ti?
[¶12] Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya.
[¶13] They’d say to him, ‘My man, do you desire someone who you’ve never even known or seen?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi, taṁ tvaṁ icchasi kāmesī’ti?
[¶14] Asked this, he’d say, ‘Yes.’
> Pali: Iti puṭṭho ‘āmā’ti vadeyya.
[¶15] What do you think, Kaccāna? This being so, doesn’t that man’s statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kaccāna, nanu evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶16] “Clearly that’s the case, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶17] “In the same way, you say, ‘The ultimate splendor is the splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.’ But you don’t describe that splendor.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho tvaṁ, kaccāna, ‘yasmā, bho gotama, vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthi so paramo vaṇṇo’ti vadesi; tañca vaṇṇaṁ na paññapesī”ti.
[¶18] “Mister Gotama, suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked. When placed on a cream rug it would shine and glow and dazzle. Such is the splendor of the self that is free of disease after death.”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato paṇḍukambale nikkhitto bhāsate ca tapate ca virocati ca, evaṁ vaṇṇo attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā”ti.
[¶19] “What do you think, Kaccāna? Which of these two has a finer splendor: such a beryl gem, or a firefly in the dark of night?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kaccāna, yo vā maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato paṇḍukambale nikkhitto bhāsate ca tapate ca virocati ca, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya kimi khajjopanako imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶20] “A firefly in the dark of night.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho gotama, rattandhakāratimisāya kimi khajjopanako, ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶21] “What do you think, Kaccāna? Which of these two has a finer splendor: a firefly in the dark of night, or an oil lamp in the dark of night?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kaccāna, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya kimi khajjopanako, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya telappadīpo, imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶22] “An oil lamp in the dark of night.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho gotama, rattandhakāratimisāya telappadīpo, ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶23] “What do you think, Kaccāna? Which of these two has a finer splendor: an oil lamp in the dark of night, or a great mass of fire in the dark of night?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kaccāna, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya telappadīpo, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya mahāaggikkhandho, imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶24] “A great mass of fire in the dark of night.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho gotama, rattandhakāratimisāya mahāaggikkhandho, ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶25] “What do you think, Kaccāna? Which of these two has a finer splendor: a great mass of fire in the dark of night, or the morning star in the clear and cloudless heavens at the crack of dawn?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kaccāna, yo vā rattandhakāratimisāya mahāaggikkhandho, yā vā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ viddhe vigatavalāhake deve osadhitārakā, imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶26] “The morning star in the clear and cloudless heavens at the crack of dawn.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho gotama, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ viddhe vigatavalāhake deve osadhitārakā, ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶27] “What do you think, Kaccāna? Which of these two has a finer splendor: the morning star in the clear and cloudless heavens at the crack of dawn, or the full moon at midnight in the clear and cloudless heavens on the fifteenth day sabbath?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kaccāna, yā vā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ viddhe vigatavalāhake deve osadhitārakā, yo vā tadahuposathe pannarase viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido aḍḍharattasamayaṁ cando, imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶28] “The full moon at midnight in the clear and cloudless heavens on the fifteenth day sabbath.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho gotama, tadahuposathe pannarase viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido aḍḍharattasamayaṁ cando, ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶29] “What do you think, Kaccāna? Which of these two has a finer splendor: the full moon at midnight in the clear and cloudless heavens on the fifteenth day sabbath, or the sun at midday in the clear and cloudless heavens in the last month of the rainy season, in autumn?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kaccāna, yo vā tadahuposathe pannarase viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido aḍḍharattasamayaṁ cando, yo vā vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido majjhanhikasamayaṁ sūriyo, imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ katamo vaṇṇo abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti?
[¶30] “The sun at midday in the clear and cloudless heavens in the last month of the rainy season, in autumn.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho gotama, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye viddhe vigatavalāhake deve abhido majjhanhikasamayaṁ sūriyo—ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti.
[¶31] “Beyond this, Kaccāna, I know very many gods on whom the luminosity of the sun and moon makes no impression. Nevertheless, I do not say: ‘The splendor compared to which no other splendor is finer.’ But of the splendor inferior to a firefly you say, ‘This is the ultimate splendor.’ And you don’t describe that splendor.
> Pali: “Ato kho te, kaccāna, bahū hi bahutarā devā ye imesaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ ābhā nānubhonti, tyāhaṁ pajānāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘yasmā vaṇṇā añño vaṇṇo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca natthī’ti. Atha ca pana tvaṁ, kaccāna, ‘yvāyaṁ vaṇṇo kiminā khajjopanakena nihīnataro ca patikiṭṭhataro ca so paramo vaṇṇo’ti vadesi; tañca vaṇṇaṁ na paññapesi.
[¶32] Kaccāna, there are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Pañca kho ime, kaccāna, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, kaccāna, pañca kāmaguṇā.
[¶33] The pleasure and happiness that arises from these five kinds of sensual stimulation is called sensual pleasure. ‘From the senses comes sensual pleasure. Beyond sensual pleasure is the pleasure that surmounts the sensual, which is said to be the best of these.’”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho, kaccāna, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati kāmasukhaṁ. Iti kāmehi kāmasukhaṁ, kāmasukhā kāmaggasukhaṁ tattha aggamakkhāyatī”ti.
[¶34] When he said this, Vekhanasa said to the Buddha, “It’s incredible, worthy Gotama, it’s amazing! How well said this was by the worthy Gotama! ‘From the senses comes sensual pleasure. Beyond sensual pleasure is the pleasure that surmounts the sensual, which is said to be the best of these.’ Worthy Gotama, from the senses comes sensual pleasure. Beyond sensual pleasure is the pleasure that surmounts the sensual, which is said to be the best of these.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vekhanaso paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bho gotama, abbhutaṁ, bho gotama. Yāva subhāsitañcidaṁ bhotā gotamena: ‘kāmehi kāmasukhaṁ, kāmasukhā kāmaggasukhaṁ tattha aggamakkhāyatī’ti. ‘Kāmehi, bho gotama, kāmasukhaṁ, kāmasukhā kāmaggasukhaṁ, tattha aggamakkhāyatī’”ti
[¶35] “Kaccāna, since you have a different view, creed, and belief, and another discipline and denomination, it’s hard for you to understand the senses, sensual pleasure, and the pleasure that surmounts the sensual. There are mendicants who are perfected, who have ended the defilements, completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and are rightly freed through enlightenment. They can understand the senses, sensual pleasure, and the pleasure that surmounts the sensual.”
> Pali: “dujjānaṁ kho etaṁ, kaccāna, tayā aññadiṭṭhikena aññakhantikena aññarucikena aññatrayogena aññatrācariyakena— kāmā vā kāmasukhaṁ vā kāmaggasukhaṁ vā. Ye kho te, kaccāna, bhikkhū arahanto khīṇāsavā vusitavanto katakaraṇīyā ohitabhārā anuppattasadatthā parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanā sammadaññāvimuttā te kho etaṁ jāneyyuṁ— kāmā vā kāmasukhaṁ vā kāmaggasukhaṁ vā”ti.
[¶36] When he said this, Vekhanasa became angry and upset. He even attacked and badmouthed the Buddha himself, saying, “The ascetic Gotama will be worsted!” He said to the Buddha, “This is exactly what happens with some ascetics and brahmins. Not knowing the first beginning or seeing the final end, they nevertheless claim: ‘We understand: “Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.”’ Their statement turns out to be a joke—mere words, vacuous and hollow.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vekhanaso paribbājako kupito anattamano bhagavantaṁyeva khuṁsento bhagavantaṁyeva vambhento bhagavantaṁyeva vadamāno: “samaṇo gotamo pāpito bhavissatī”ti bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “evameva panidhekacce samaṇabrāhmaṇā ajānantā pubbantaṁ, apassantā aparantaṁ atha ca pana ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti—pajānāmā’ti—paṭijānanti. Tesamidaṁ bhāsitaṁ hassakaṁyeva sampajjati, nāmakaṁyeva sampajjati, rittakaṁyeva sampajjati, tucchakaṁyeva sampajjatī”ti.
[¶37] “Kaccāna, there are some ascetics and brahmins who, not knowing the first beginning or seeing the final end, nevertheless claim: ‘We understand: “Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.”’ There is a legitimate refutation of them. Nevertheless, Kaccāna, leave aside the first beginning and the final end. Let a sensible person come—neither devious nor deceitful, a person of integrity. I teach and instruct them. Practicing as instructed they will soon know and see for themselves, ‘So this is how to be rightly released from the bond, that is, the bond of ignorance.’ Suppose there was a little baby bound with swaddling up to the neck. As they grow up and their senses mature, they’re accordingly released from those bonds. They’d know ‘I’m released,’ and there would be no more bonds.
> Pali: “Ye kho te, kaccāna, samaṇabrāhmaṇā ajānantā pubbantaṁ, apassantā aparantaṁ, ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti—pajānāmā’ti—paṭijānanti; tesaṁ soyeva sahadhammiko niggaho hoti. Api ca, kaccāna, tiṭṭhatu pubbanto, tiṭṭhatu aparanto. Etu viññū puriso asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko, ahamanusāsāmi ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno nacirasseva sāmaññeva ñassati sāmaṁ dakkhiti— evaṁ kira sammā bandhanā vippamokkho hoti, yadidaṁ avijjā bandhanā. Seyyathāpi, kaccāna, daharo kumāro mando uttānaseyyako kaṇṭhapañcamehi bandhanehi baddho assa suttabandhanehi; tassa vuddhimanvāya indriyānaṁ paripākamanvāya tāni bandhanāni mucceyyuṁ; so mokkhomhīti kho jāneyya no ca bandhanaṁ.
[¶38] In the same way, let a sensible person come—neither devious nor deceitful, a person of integrity. I teach and instruct them. Practicing as instructed they will soon know and see for themselves, ‘So this is how to be rightly released from the bond, that is, the bond of ignorance.’”
> Pali: Evameva kho, kaccāna, etu viññū puriso asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko, ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi; yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno nacirasseva sāmaññeva ñassati, sāmaṁ dakkhiti: ‘evaṁ kira sammā bandhanā vippamokkho hoti, yadidaṁ avijjā bandhanā’”ti.
[¶39] When he said this, Vekhanasa said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! … From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vekhanaso paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶40] > Pali: Vekhanasasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶41] > Pali: Paribbājakavaggo niṭṭhito tatiyo.
[¶42] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶43] > Pali: Puṇḍarī aggisaha kathināmo,
Dīghanakho puna bhāradvājagotto;
Sandakaudāyimuṇḍikaputto,
Maṇiko tathākaccāno varavaggo.
## 88. MN 81 · With Ghaṭīkāra
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/88/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/88/#p-N
[¶0] MN 81 · With Ghaṭīkāra
> Pali: MN 81 · Ghaṭikārasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. Then the Buddha left the road, and at a certain spot he smiled.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ carati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ. Atha kho bhagavā maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṁ padese sitaṁ pātvākāsi.
[¶2] Then Venerable Ānanda thought, “What is the cause, what is the reason why the Buddha smiled? Realized Ones do not smile for no reason.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo bhagavato sitassa pātukammāya? Na akāraṇena tathāgatā sitaṁ pātukarontī”ti.
[¶3] So Ānanda arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and said, “What is the cause, what is the reason why the Buddha smiled? Realized Ones do not smile for no reason.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo bhagavato sitassa pātukammāya? Na akāraṇena tathāgatā sitaṁ pātukarontī”ti.
[¶4] “Once upon a time, Ānanda, there was a market town in this spot named Vebhaliṅga. It was successful and prosperous, populous and full of people. And Kassapa, a blessed one, a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, lived supported by Vebhaliṅga. It was here, in fact, that he had his monastery, where he advised the mendicant Saṅgha while seated.”
> Pali: “Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, imasmiṁ padese vegaḷiṅgaṁ nāma gāmanigamo ahosi iddho ceva phīto ca bahujano ākiṇṇamanusso. Vegaḷiṅgaṁ kho, ānanda, gāmanigamaṁ kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho upanissāya vihāsi. Idha sudaṁ, ānanda, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ārāmo ahosi. Idha sudaṁ, ānanda, kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho nisinnako bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ovadatī”ti.
[¶5] Then Ānanda spread out his outer robe folded in four and said to the Buddha, “Well then, sir, may the Blessed One sit here! Then this piece of land will have been occupied by two perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas.” The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out. When he was seated he said to Venerable Ānanda:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tena hi, bhante, bhagavā nisīdatu ettha. Ayaṁ bhūmipadeso dvīhi arahantehi sammāsambuddhehi paribhutto bhavissatī”ti. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Nisajja kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi:
[¶6] “Once upon a time, Ānanda, there was a market town in this spot named Vebhaliṅga. It was successful and prosperous, populous and full of people. And Kassapa, a blessed one, a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, lived supported by Vebhaliṅga. It was here, in fact, that he had his monastery, where he advised the mendicant Saṅgha while seated.
> Pali: “Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, imasmiṁ padese vegaḷiṅgaṁ nāma gāmanigamo ahosi iddho ceva phīto ca bahujano ākiṇṇamanusso. Vegaḷiṅgaṁ kho, ānanda, gāmanigamaṁ kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho upanissāya vihāsi. Idha sudaṁ, ānanda, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ārāmo ahosi. Idha sudaṁ, ānanda, kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho nisinnako bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ovadati.
[¶7] The Buddha Kassapa had as chief supporter in Vebhaliṅga a potter named Ghaṭīkāra. Ghaṭīkāra had a dear friend named Jotipāla, a student. Then Ghaṭīkāra addressed Jotipāla, ‘Come, dear Jotipāla, let’s go to see the Blessed One Kassapa, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For I deem it holy to see that Blessed One.’
> Pali: Vegaḷiṅge kho, ānanda, gāmanigame ghaṭikāro nāma kumbhakāro kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Ghaṭikārassa kho, ānanda, kumbhakārassa jotipālo nāma māṇavo sahāyo ahosi piyasahāyo. Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: ‘āyāma, samma jotipāla, kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāma. Sādhusammatañhi me tassa bhagavato dassanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’ti.
[¶8] When he said this, Jotipāla said to him, ‘Enough, dear Ghaṭīkāra. What’s the use of seeing that shaveling, that fake ascetic?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: ‘alaṁ, samma ghaṭikāra. Kiṁ pana tena muṇḍakena samaṇakena diṭṭhenā’ti?
[¶9] For a second time … and a third time, Ghaṭīkāra addressed Jotipāla, ‘Come, dear Jotipāla, let’s go to see the Blessed One Kassapa, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For I deem it holy to see that Blessed One.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho, ānanda …pe… tatiyampi kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: ‘āyāma, samma jotipāla, kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāma. Sādhusammatañhi me tassa bhagavato dassanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’ti.
[¶10] For a third time, Jotipāla said to him, ‘Enough, dear Ghaṭīkāra. What’s the use of seeing that shaveling, that fake ascetic?’
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: ‘alaṁ, samma ghaṭikāra. Kiṁ pana tena muṇḍakena samaṇakena diṭṭhenā’ti?
[¶11] ‘Well then, dear Jotipāla, let’s take some bathing cleanser and go to the river to bathe.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma jotipāla, sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ gamissāma sināyitun’ti.
[¶12] ‘Yes, dear,’ replied Jotipāla. So that’s what they did.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa paccassosi. Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro ca kumbhakāro jotipālo ca māṇavo sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ agamaṁsu sināyituṁ.
[¶13] Then Ghaṭīkāra addressed Jotipāla, ‘Dear Jotipāla, the Buddha Kassapa’s monastery is not far away. Let’s go to see the Blessed One Kassapa, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For I deem it holy to see that Blessed One.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: ‘ayaṁ, samma jotipāla, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa avidūre ārāmo. Āyāma, samma jotipāla, kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāma. Sādhusammatañhi me tassa bhagavato dassanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’ti.
[¶14] When he said this, Jotipāla said to him, ‘Enough, dear Ghaṭīkāra. What’s the use of seeing that shaveling, that fake ascetic?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: ‘alaṁ, samma ghaṭikāra. Kiṁ pana tena muṇḍakena samaṇakena diṭṭhenā’ti?
[¶15] For a second time … and a third time, Ghaṭīkāra addressed Jotipāla, ‘Dear Jotipāla, the Buddha Kassapa’s monastery is not far away. Let’s go to see the Blessed One Kassapa, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For I deem it holy to see that Blessed One.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho, ānanda …pe… tatiyampi kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ, samma jotipāla, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa avidūre ārāmo. Āyāma, samma jotipāla, kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāma. Sādhusammatañhi me tassa bhagavato dassanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’ti.
[¶16] For a third time, Jotipāla said to him, ‘Enough, dear Ghaṭīkāra. What’s the use of seeing that shaveling, that fake ascetic?’
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: ‘alaṁ, samma ghaṭikāra. Kiṁ pana tena muṇḍakena samaṇakena diṭṭhenā’ti?
[¶17] Then Ghaṭīkāra grabbed Jotipāla by the skirt-hem and said, ‘Dear Jotipāla, the Buddha Kassapa’s monastery is not far away. Let’s go to see the Blessed One Kassapa, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For I deem it holy to see that Blessed One.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ ovaṭṭikāyaṁ parāmasitvā etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ, samma jotipāla, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa avidūre ārāmo. Āyāma, samma jotipāla, kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāma. Sādhusammatañhi me tassa bhagavato dassanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’ti.
[¶18] So Jotipāla undid his skirt-hem and said to Ghaṭīkāra, ‘Enough, dear Ghaṭīkāra. What’s the use of seeing that shaveling, that fake ascetic?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo ovaṭṭikaṁ vinivaṭṭetvā ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: ‘alaṁ, samma ghaṭikāra. Kiṁ pana tena muṇḍakena samaṇakena diṭṭhenā’ti?
[¶19] Then Ghaṭīkāra grabbed Jotipāla by the hair of his freshly-washed head and said, ‘Dear Jotipāla, the Buddha Kassapa’s monastery is not far away. Let’s go to see the Blessed One Kassapa, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For I deem it holy to see that Blessed One.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ sīsaṁnhātaṁ kesesu parāmasitvā etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ, samma jotipāla, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa avidūre ārāmo. Āyāma, samma jotipāla, kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāma. Sādhusammatañhi me tassa bhagavato dassanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’ti.
[¶20] Then Jotipāla thought, ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing, how this potter Ghaṭīkāra, though of lowly birth, should presume to grab me by the hair of my freshly-washed head! This must be no ordinary matter.’ He said to Ghaṭīkāra, ‘You’d even milk it to this extent, dear Ghaṭīkāra?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, jotipālassa māṇavassa etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho. Yatra hi nāmāyaṁ ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro ittarajacco samāno amhākaṁ sīsaṁnhātānaṁ kesesu parāmasitabbaṁ maññissati; na vatidaṁ kira orakaṁ maññe bhavissatī’ti; ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: ‘yāvatādohipi, samma ghaṭikārā’ti?
[¶21] ‘I even milk it to this extent, dear Jotipāla. For that is how holy I deem it to see that Blessed One.’
> Pali: ‘Yāvatādohipi, samma jotipāla. Tathā hi pana me sādhusammataṁ tassa bhagavato dassanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’ti.
[¶22] ‘Well then, dear Ghaṭīkāra, release me, we shall go.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma ghaṭikāra, muñca; gamissāmā’ti.
[¶23] Then Ghaṭīkāra the potter and Jotipāla the student went to the Buddha Kassapa. Ghaṭīkāra bowed and sat down to one side, but Jotipāla exchanged greetings with the Buddha and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro ca kumbhakāro jotipālo ca māṇavo yena kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Jotipālo pana māṇavo kassapena bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶24] Ghaṭīkāra said to the Buddha Kassapa, ‘Sir, this is the student Jotipāla, my dear friend. Please teach him the Dhamma.’ Then the Buddha Kassapa educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired Ghaṭīkāra and Jotipāla with a Dhamma talk. Then they got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha Kassapa, keeping him on their right, before leaving.
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ me, bhante, jotipālo māṇavo sahāyo piyasahāyo. Imassa bhagavā dhammaṁ desetū’ti. Atha kho, ānanda, kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho ghaṭikārañca kumbhakāraṁ jotipālañca māṇavaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi. Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro ca kumbhakāro jotipālo ca māṇavo kassapena bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶25] Then Jotipāla said to Ghatīkāra, ‘Dear Ghaṭīkāra, you have heard this teaching, so why don’t you go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: ‘imaṁ nu tvaṁ, samma ghaṭikāra, dhammaṁ suṇanto atha ca pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ na pabbajissasī’ti?
[¶26] ‘Don’t you know, dear Jotipāla, that I provide for my blind old parents?’
> Pali: ‘Nanu maṁ, samma jotipāla, jānāsi, andhe jiṇṇe mātāpitaro posemī’ti?
[¶27] ‘Well then, dear Ghaṭīkāra, I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma ghaṭikāra, ahaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmī’ti.
[¶28] Then Ghaṭīkāra and Jotipāla went to the Buddha Kassapa, bowed and sat down to one side. Ghaṭīkāra said to the Buddha Kassapa, ‘Sir, this is the student Jotipāla, my dear friend. Please give him the going forth.’ And Jotipāla the student received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro ca kumbhakāro jotipālo ca māṇavo yena kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, ānanda, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ me, bhante, jotipālo māṇavo sahāyo piyasahāyo. Imaṁ bhagavā pabbājetū’ti. Alattha kho, ānanda, jotipālo māṇavo kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ.
[¶29] Not long after Jotipāla’s ordination, a fortnight later, the Buddha Kassapa—having stayed in Vebhaliṅga as long as he pleased—set out for Varanasi. Traveling stage by stage, he arrived at Varanasi, where he stayed near Varanasi, in the deer park at Isipatana. King Kikī of Kāsi heard that he had arrived. He had the finest carriages harnessed. He then mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out in full royal pomp from Varanasi to see the Buddha Kassapa. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the Buddha Kassapa on foot. He bowed and sat down to one side. The Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho acirūpasampanne jotipāle māṇave aḍḍhamāsupasampanne vegaḷiṅge yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena bārāṇasī tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena bārāṇasī tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ, ānanda, kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bārāṇasiyaṁ viharati isipatane migadāye. Assosi kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā: ‘kassapo kira bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bārāṇasiṁ anuppatto bārāṇasiyaṁ viharati isipatane migadāye’ti. Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi bārāṇasiyā niyyāsi mahaccarājānubhāvena kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ dassanāya. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho, ānanda, kikiṁ kāsirājānaṁ kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.
[¶30] Then King Kikī said to the Buddha, ‘Sir, would the Buddha together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?’ The Buddha Kassapa consented with silence.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā kassapena bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā’ti. Adhivāsesi kho, ānanda, kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶31] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, King Kikī rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving. And when the night had passed, King Kikī had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home—soft saffron rice with the dark grains picked out, served with many soups and sauces. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, ‘Sir, it’s time. The meal is ready.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā kassapassa bhagavato sammāsambuddhassa adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi. Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā paṇḍupuṭakassa sālino vigatakāḷakaṁ anekasūpaṁ anekabyañjanaṁ, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa kālaṁ ārocāpesi: ‘kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan’ti.
[¶32] Then Kassapa Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the home of King Kikī, where he sat down on the seat spread out together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Then King Kikī served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena kikissa kāsirañño nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena. Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.
[¶33] When the Buddha Kassapa had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, King Kikī took a low seat and sat to one side. There he said to the Buddha Kassapa, ‘Sir, would the Buddha please accept my invitation to reside in Varanasi for the rainy season? The Saṅgha will be looked after in the same style.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ vassāvāsaṁ; evarūpaṁ saṅghassa upaṭṭhānaṁ bhavissatī’ti.
[¶34] ‘Enough, Great King. I have already accepted an invitation for the rains residence.’
> Pali: ‘Alaṁ, mahārāja. Adhivuttho me vassāvāso’ti.
[¶35] For a second time … and a third time King Kikī said to the Buddha Kassapa, ‘Sir, would the Buddha please accept my invitation to reside in Varanasi for the rainy season? The Saṅgha will be looked after in the same style.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho, ānanda … tatiyampi kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ vassāvāsaṁ; evarūpaṁ saṅghassa upaṭṭhānaṁ bhavissatī’ti.
[¶36] ‘Enough, Great King. I have already accepted an invitation for the rains residence.’
> Pali: ‘Alaṁ, mahārāja. Adhivuttho me vassāvāso’ti.
[¶37] Then King Kikī, thinking, ‘The Buddha does not accept my invitation to reside for the rains in Varanasi,’ became sad and upset. Then King Kikī said to the Buddha Kassapa, ‘Sir, do you have another supporter better than me?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, kikissa kāsirañño ‘na me kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho adhivāseti bārāṇasiyaṁ vassāvāsan’ti ahudeva aññathattaṁ, ahu domanassaṁ. Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā kassapaṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘atthi nu kho, bhante, añño koci mayā upaṭṭhākataro’ti?
[¶38] ‘Great king, there is a market town named Vebhaliṅga, where there is a potter named Ghaṭīkāra. He is my chief supporter. Now, Great King, when you thought, “The Buddha does not accept my invitation to reside for the rains in Varanasi,” you became sad and upset. But Ghaṭīkāra doesn’t get upset, nor will he.
> Pali: ‘Atthi, mahārāja, vegaḷiṅgaṁ nāma gāmanigamo. Tattha ghaṭikāro nāma kumbhakāro; so me upaṭṭhāko aggupaṭṭhāko. Tuyhaṁ kho pana, mahārāja, na me kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho adhivāseti bārāṇasiyaṁ vassāvāsanti attheva aññathattaṁ, atthi domanassaṁ. Tayidaṁ ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa natthi ca na ca bhavissati.
[¶39] Ghaṭīkāra has gone for refuge to the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha. He doesn’t kill living creatures, steal, commit sexual misconduct, lie, or consume intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor. He has experiential confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and possesses the ethics loved by the noble ones. He is free of doubt regarding suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. He eats in one part of the day; he’s chaste, ethical, and of good character. He has set aside gems and gold, and quit using gold and currency. He has put down the shovel and doesn’t dig the earth with his own hands. He takes what has crumbled off by a riverbank or been dug up by mice, and brings it back in a carrier. When he has made a pot, he says, “Anyone may leave bagged sesame, mung beans, or chickpeas here and take what they wish.” He provided for his blind old parents. And since he has ended the five lower fetters, Ghaṭīkāra will be reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.
> Pali: Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gato, dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gato, saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gato. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro pāṇātipātā paṭivirato, adinnādānā paṭivirato, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato, musāvādā paṭivirato, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato, saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgato, ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro dukkhe nikkaṅkho, dukkhasamudaye nikkaṅkho, dukkhanirodhe nikkaṅkho, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya nikkaṅkho. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro ekabhattiko brahmacārī sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro nikkhittamaṇisuvaṇṇo apetajātarūparajato. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro pannamusalo na sahatthā pathaviṁ khaṇati. Yaṁ hoti kūlapaluggaṁ vā mūsikukkaro vā taṁ kājena āharitvā bhājanaṁ karitvā evamāha: “ettha yo icchati taṇḍulapaṭibhastāni vā muggapaṭibhastāni vā kaḷāyapaṭibhastāni vā nikkhipitvā yaṁ icchati taṁ haratū”ti. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro andhe jiṇṇe mātāpitaro poseti. Ghaṭikāro kho, mahārāja, kumbhakāro pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā.
[¶40] This one time, Great King, I was staying near the market town of Vebhaliṅga. Then I robed up in the morning and, taking my bowl and robe, went to the home of Ghaṭīkāra’s parents, where I said to them, “Excuse me, where has Bhaggava gone?”
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, mahārāja, samayaṁ vegaḷiṅge nāma gāmanigame viharāmi. Atha khvāhaṁ, mahārāja, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa mātāpitaro etadavocaṁ: “handa ko nu kho ayaṁ bhaggavo gato”ti?
[¶41] “Your supporter has gone out, sir. But take rice from the pot and sauce from the pan and eat.” So that’s what I did. And after eating I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: “Nikkhanto kho te, bhante, upaṭṭhāko antokumbhiyā odanaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjā”ti. Atha khvāhaṁ, mahārāja, kumbhiyā odanaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶42] Then Ghaṭīkāra went up to his parents and said, “Who took rice from the pot and sauce from the pan, ate it, and left?”
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro yena mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mātāpitaro etadavoca: “ko kumbhiyā odanaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto”ti?
[¶43] “It was the Buddha Kassapa, my dear.”
> Pali: “Kassapo, tāta, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho kumbhiyā odanaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto”ti?
[¶44] Then Ghaṭīkāra thought, “I’m so fortunate, so very fortunate, in that the Buddha Kassapa trusts me so much!” Then joy and happiness did not leave him for a fortnight, or his parents for a week.
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa etadahosi: “lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me, yassa me kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho evaṁ abhivissattho”ti. Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ aḍḍhamāsaṁ pītisukhaṁ na vijahati, sattāhaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ.
[¶45] Another time, Great King, I was staying near that same market town of Vebhaliṅga. Then I robed up in the morning and, taking my bowl and robe, went to the home of Ghaṭīkāra’s parents, where I said to them, “Excuse me, where has Bhaggava gone?”
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, mahārāja, samayaṁ tattheva vegaḷiṅge nāma gāmanigame viharāmi. Atha khvāhaṁ, mahārāja, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa mātāpitaro etadavocaṁ: “handa ko nu kho ayaṁ bhaggavo gato”ti?
[¶46] “Your supporter has gone out, sir. But take porridge from the pot and sauce from the pan and eat.” So that’s what I did. And after eating I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: “Nikkhanto kho te, bhante, upaṭṭhāko anto kaḷopiyā kummāsaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjā”ti. Atha khvāhaṁ, mahārāja, kaḷopiyā kummāsaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶47] Then Ghaṭīkāra went up to his parents and said, “Who took porridge from the pot and sauce from the pan, ate it, and left?”
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro yena mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mātāpitaro etadavoca: “ko kaḷopiyā kummāsaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto”ti?
[¶48] “It was the Buddha Kassapa, my dear.”
> Pali: “Kassapo, tāta, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho kaḷopiyā kummāsaṁ gahetvā pariyogā sūpaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto”ti.
[¶49] Then Ghaṭīkāra thought, “I’m so fortunate, so very fortunate, to be trusted so much by the Buddha Kassapa!” Then joy and happiness did not leave him for a fortnight, or his parents for a week.
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa etadahosi: “lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me, yassa me kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho evaṁ abhivissattho”ti. Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ aḍḍhamāsaṁ pītisukhaṁ na vijahati, sattāhaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ.
[¶50] Another time, Great King, I was staying near that same market town of Vebhaliṅga. Now at that time my hut leaked. So I addressed the mendicants,
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, mahārāja, samayaṁ tattheva vegaḷiṅge nāma gāmanigame viharāmi. Tena kho pana samayena kuṭi ovassati. Atha khvāhaṁ, mahārāja, bhikkhū āmantesiṁ:
[¶51] “Mendicants, go to Ghaṭīkāra’s home and find some grass.”
> Pali: “gacchatha, bhikkhave, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa nivesane tiṇaṁ jānāthā”ti.
[¶52] When I said this, those mendicants said to me, “Sir, there’s no grass there, but his workshop has a grass roof.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, mahārāja, te bhikkhū maṁ etadavocuṁ: “natthi kho, bhante, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa nivesane tiṇaṁ, atthi ca khvāssa āvesane tiṇacchadanan”ti.
[¶53] “Then go to the workshop and strip the grass.” So that’s what they did.
> Pali: “Gacchatha, bhikkhave, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa āvesanaṁ uttiṇaṁ karothā”ti. Atha kho te, mahārāja, bhikkhū ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa āvesanaṁ uttiṇamakaṁsu.
[¶54] Then Ghaṭīkāra’s parents said to those mendicants, “Who’s stripping the grass from the workshop?”
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa mātāpitaro te bhikkhū etadavocuṁ: “ke āvesanaṁ uttiṇaṁ karontī”ti?
[¶55] “It’s the mendicants, sister. The Buddha’s hut is leaking.”
> Pali: “Bhikkhū, bhagini, kassapassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa kuṭi ovassatī”ti.
[¶56] “Take it, sirs! Take it, dearest ones!”
> Pali: “Haratha, bhante, haratha, bhadramukhā”ti.
[¶57] Then Ghaṭīkāra went up to his parents and said, “Who stripped the grass from the workshop?”
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro yena mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mātāpitaro etadavoca: “ke āvesanaṁ uttiṇamakaṁsū”ti?
[¶58] “It was the mendicants, dear. It seems the Buddha’s hut is leaking.”
> Pali: “Bhikkhū, tāta, kassapassa kira bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa kuṭi ovassatī”ti.
[¶59] Then Ghaṭīkāra thought, “I’m so fortunate, so very fortunate, to be trusted so much by the Buddha Kassapa!” Then joy and happiness did not leave him for a fortnight, or his parents for a week.
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa etadahosi: “lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me, yassa me kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho evaṁ abhivissattho”ti. Atha kho, mahārāja, ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ aḍḍhamāsaṁ pītisukhaṁ na vijahati, sattāhaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ.
[¶60] Then the workshop remained with the atmosphere for a roof for the whole three months, but the heavens did not rain on it. And that, Great King, is what Ghaṭīkāra the potter is like.’
> Pali: Atha kho, mahārāja, āvesanaṁ sabbantaṁ temāsaṁ ākāsacchadanaṁ aṭṭhāsi, na devotivassi. Evarūpo ca, mahārāja, ghaṭikāro kumbhakāro’ti.
[¶61] ‘Ghaṭīkāra the potter is fortunate, very fortunate, to be so trusted by the Buddha Kassapa.’
> Pali: ‘Lābhā, bhante, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa, suladdhā, bhante, ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa yassa bhagavā evaṁ abhivissattho’ti.
[¶62] Then King Kikī sent around five hundred loads of rice, soft saffron rice, and suitable sauce to Ghaṭīkāra. Then one of the king’s men approached Ghaṭīkāra and said, ‘Sir, these five hundred loads of rice, soft saffron rice, and suitable sauce have been sent to you by King Kikī of Kāsi. Please accept them.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, kikī kāsirājā ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa pañcamattāni taṇḍulavāhasatāni pāhesi paṇḍupuṭakassa sālino tadupiyañca sūpeyyaṁ. Atha kho te, ānanda, rājapurisā ghaṭikāraṁ kumbhakāraṁ upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘imāni kho, bhante, pañcamattāni taṇḍulavāhasatāni kikinā kāsirājena pahitāni paṇḍupuṭakassa sālino tadupiyañca sūpeyyaṁ. Tāni, bhante, paṭiggaṇhathā’ti.
[¶63] ‘The king has many duties, and much to do. I have enough. Let this be for the king himself.’
> Pali: ‘Rājā kho bahukicco bahukaraṇīyo. Alaṁ me. Raññova hotū’ti.
[¶64] Ānanda, you might think: ‘Surely the student Jotipāla must have been someone else at that time?’ But you should not see it like this. I myself was the student Jotipāla at that time.”
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, ānanda, evamassa: ‘añño nūna tena samayena jotipālo māṇavo ahosī’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, ānanda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Ahaṁ tena samayena jotipālo māṇavo ahosin”ti.
[¶65] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶66] > Pali: Ghaṭikārasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 89. MN 82 · With Raṭṭhapāla · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/89/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/89/#p-N
[¶0] MN 82 · With Raṭṭhapāla
> Pali: MN 82 · Raṭṭhapālasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kurus together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants when he arrived at a town of the Kurus named Thullakoṭṭhika.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kurūsu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena thullakoṭṭhikaṁ nāma kurūnaṁ nigamo tadavasari.
[¶2] The brahmins and householders of Thullakoṭṭhika heard:
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho thullakoṭṭhikā brāhmaṇagahapatikā:
[¶3] “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Thullakoṭṭhika, together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kurūsu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ thullakoṭṭhikaṁ anuppatto. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶4] Then the brahmins and householders of Thullakoṭṭhika went up to the Buddha. Before sitting down to one side, some bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent. When they were seated, the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired them with a Dhamma talk.
> Pali: Atha kho thullakoṭṭhikā brāhmaṇagahapatikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavato santike nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho thullakoṭṭhike brāhmaṇagahapatike bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.
[¶5] Now at that time a gentleman named Raṭṭhapāla, the son of the leading clan in Thullakoṭṭhika, was sitting in the assembly. He thought, “As I understand the Buddha’s teaching, it’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from lay life to homelessness?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena raṭṭhapālo nāma kulaputto tasmiṁyeva thullakoṭṭhike aggakulassa putto tissaṁ parisāyaṁ nisinno hoti. Atha kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa etadahosi: “yathā yathā khvāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan”ti.
[¶6] Then, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, the brahmins and householders of Thullakoṭṭhika got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho thullakoṭṭhikā brāhmaṇagahapatikā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶7] Soon after they left, Raṭṭhapāla went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, as I understand the Buddha’s teaching, it’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. I wish to shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Sir, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence? May the Buddha please give me the going forth!”
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto acirapakkantesu thullakoṭṭhikesu brāhmaṇagahapatikesu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yathā yathāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Icchāmahaṁ, bhante, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadaṁ. Pabbājetu maṁ bhagavā”ti.
[¶8] “But, Raṭṭhapāla, do you have your parents’ permission?”
> Pali: “Anuññātosi pana tvaṁ, raṭṭhapāla, mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?
[¶9] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “Na khohaṁ, bhante, anuññāto mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.
[¶10] “Raṭṭhapāla, Buddhas don’t give the going forth to the child of parents who haven’t given their permission.”
> Pali: “Na kho, raṭṭhapāla, tathāgatā ananuññātaṁ mātāpitūhi puttaṁ pabbājentī”ti.
[¶11] “I’ll make sure, sir, to get my parents’ permission.”
> Pali: “Svāhaṁ, bhante, tathā karissāmi yathā maṁ mātāpitaro anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.
[¶12] Then Raṭṭhapāla rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha. Then he went to his parents and said, “Mum and dad, as I understand the Buddha’s teachings, it’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. I wish to shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Please give me permission to go forth.”
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mātāpitaro etadavoca: “ammatātā, yathā yathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Icchāmahaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Anujānātha maṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.
[¶13] When he said this, Raṭṭhapāla’s parents said to him, “But, dear Raṭṭhapāla, you’re our only child. You’re dear to us and we love you. You’re pampered and raised in comfort. You know nothing of suffering. Even when you die we will lose you against our wishes. So how can we allow you to go forth while you’re still alive?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa mātāpitaro raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “tvaṁ khosi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparibhato. Na tvaṁ, tāta raṭṭhapāla, kassaci dukkhassa jānāsi. (…) Maraṇenapi te mayaṁ akāmakā vinā bhavissāma. Kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?
[¶14] For a second time … For a third time, Raṭṭhapāla asked his parents for permission, but got the same reply.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto …pe… tatiyampi kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto mātāpitaro etadavoca: “ammatātā, yathā yathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Icchāmahaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Anujānātha maṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti. Tatiyampi kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa mātāpitaro raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “tvaṁ khosi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparibhato. Na tvaṁ, tāta raṭṭhapāla, kassaci dukkhassa jānāsi. Maraṇenapi te mayaṁ akāmakā vinā bhavissāma. Kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?
[¶15] Then Raṭṭhapāla thought, “My parents don’t allow me to go forth.” He laid down right there on the bare ground, saying, “I’ll either die right here or go forth.” And he refused to eat, up to the seventh meal.
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto: “na maṁ mātāpitaro anujānanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti tattheva anantarahitāya bhūmiyā nipajji: “idheva me maraṇaṁ bhavissati pabbajjā vā”ti. Atha kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto ekampi bhattaṁ na bhuñji, dvepi bhattāni na bhuñji, tīṇipi bhattāni na bhuñji, cattāripi bhattāni na bhuñji, pañcapi bhattāni na bhuñji, chapi bhattāni na bhuñji, sattapi bhattāni na bhuñji.
[¶16] Then Raṭṭhapāla’s parents said to him, “Dear Raṭṭhapāla, you’re our only child. You’re dear to us and we love you. You’re pampered and raised in comfort. You know nothing of suffering. When you die we will lose you against our wishes. So how can we allow you to go forth from lay life to homelessness while you’re still living? Get up, Raṭṭhapāla! Eat, drink, and amuse yourself. While enjoying sensual pleasures, delight in making merit. We don’t allow you to go forth. When you die we will lose you against our wishes. So how can we allow you to go forth while you’re still alive?”
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa mātāpitaro raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “tvaṁ khosi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparibhato. Na tvaṁ, tāta raṭṭhapāla, kassaci, dukkhassa jānāsi. Maraṇenapi te mayaṁ akāmakā vinā bhavissāma. Kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Uṭṭhehi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca; bhuñjanto pivanto paricārento kāme paribhuñjanto puññāni karonto abhiramassu. Na taṁ mayaṁ anujānāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Maraṇenapi te mayaṁ akāmakā vinā bhavissāma. Kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?
[¶17] When they said this, Raṭṭhapāla kept silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶18] For a second time, and a third time, Raṭṭhapāla’s parents made the same request.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa mātāpitaro raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ …pe… dutiyampi kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tuṇhī ahosi. Tatiyampi kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa mātāpitaro raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “tvaṁ khosi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparibhato. Na tvaṁ, tāta raṭṭhapāla, kassaci dukkhassa jānāsi. Maraṇenapi te mayaṁ akāmakā vinā bhavissāma, kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Uṭṭhehi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca; bhuñjanto pivanto paricārento kāme paribhuñjanto puññāni karonto abhiramassu. Na taṁ mayaṁ anujānāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Maraṇenapi te mayaṁ akāmakā vinā bhavissāma. Kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?
[¶19] And for a third time, Raṭṭhapāla kept silent. Raṭṭhapāla’s parents then went to see his friends. They told them of the situation and asked for their help.
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶20] Then Raṭṭhapāla’s friends went to him and said, “Our dear Raṭṭhapāla, you are your parents’ only child. You’re dear to them and they love you. You’re pampered and raised in comfort. You know nothing of suffering. When you die your parents will lose you against their wishes. So how can they allow you to go forth while you’re still alive? Get up, Raṭṭhapāla! Eat, drink, and amuse yourself. While enjoying sensual pleasures, delight in making merit. Your parents will not allow you to go forth. Even when you die your parents will lose you against their wishes. So how can they allow you to go forth while you’re still alive?”
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa sahāyakā yena raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “tvaṁ khosi, samma raṭṭhapāla, mātāpitūnaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparibhato. Na tvaṁ, samma raṭṭhapāla, kassaci dukkhassa jānāsi. Maraṇenapi te mātāpitaro akāmakā vinā bhavissanti. Kiṁ pana te taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Uṭṭhehi, samma raṭṭhapāla, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca; bhuñjanto pivanto paricārento kāme paribhuñjanto puññāni karonto abhiramassu. Na taṁ mātāpitaro anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Maraṇenapi te mātāpitaro akāmakā vinā bhavissanti. Kiṁ pana te taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?
[¶21] When they said this, Raṭṭhapāla kept silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶22] For a second time … For a third time, Raṭṭhapāla’s friends made the same request. And for a third time, Raṭṭhapāla kept silent.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho … tatiyampi kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa sahāyakā raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “tvaṁ khosi, samma raṭṭhapāla, mātāpitūnaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparibhato, na tvaṁ, samma raṭṭhapāla, kassaci dukkhassa jānāsi, maraṇenapi te mātāpitaro akāmakā vinā bhavissanti. Kiṁ pana te taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya? Uṭṭhehi, samma raṭṭhapāla, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca, bhuñjanto pivanto paricārento kāme paribhuñjanto puññāni karonto abhiramassu. Na taṁ mātāpitaro anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya, maraṇenapi te mātāpitaro akāmakā vinā bhavissanti. Kiṁ pana te taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti? Tatiyampi kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶23] Then Raṭṭhapāla’s friends went to his parents and said, “Mum and dad, Raṭṭhapāla is lying there on the bare ground saying: ‘I’ll either die right here or go forth.’ If you don’t allow him to go forth, he’ll die there. But if you do allow him to go forth, you’ll see him again afterwards. And if he doesn’t enjoy the renunciate life, where else will he have to go? He’ll come right back here. Please give Raṭṭhapāla permission to go forth.”
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa sahāyakā yena raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa mātāpitaro etadavocuṁ: “ammatātā, eso raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tattheva anantarahitāya bhūmiyā nipanno: ‘idheva me maraṇaṁ bhavissati pabbajjā vā’ti. Sace tumhe raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ nānujānissatha agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya, tattheva maraṇaṁ āgamissati. Sace pana tumhe raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ anujānissatha agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya, pabbajitampi naṁ dakkhissatha. Sace raṭṭhapālo kulaputto nābhiramissati agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya, kā tassa aññā gati bhavissati? Idheva paccāgamissati. Anujānātha raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.
[¶24] “Then, dears, we give Raṭṭhapāla permission to go forth. But once gone forth he must visit his parents.”
> Pali: “Anujānāma, tātā, raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Pabbajitena ca pana mātāpitaro uddassetabbā”ti.
[¶25] Then Raṭṭhapāla’s friends went to him and said, “Get up, Raṭṭhapāla! Your parents have given you permission to go forth from lay life to homelessness. But once gone forth you must visit your parents.”
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa sahāyakā yena raṭṭhapālo kulaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā raṭṭhapālaṁ kulaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “uṭṭhehi, samma raṭṭhapāla, anuññātosi mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Pabbajitena ca pana te mātāpitaro uddassetabbā”ti.
[¶26] Raṭṭhapāla got up and regained his strength. He went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, I have my parents’ permission to go forth from the lay life to homelessness. May the Buddha please give me the going forth.”
> Pali: Atha kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto uṭṭhahitvā balaṁ gāhetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “anuññāto ahaṁ, bhante, mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Pabbājetu maṁ bhagavā”ti.
[¶27] And Raṭṭhapāla received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence. Not long after Venerable Raṭṭhapāla’s ordination, a fortnight later, the Buddha—having stayed in Thullakoṭṭhika as long as he pleased—set out for Sāvatthī. Traveling stage by stage, he arrived at Sāvatthī, where he stayed in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Alattha kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā acirūpasampanne āyasmante raṭṭhapāle aḍḍhamāsupasampanne thullakoṭṭhike yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶28] Then Venerable Raṭṭhapāla, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶29] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Raṭṭhapāla became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā raṭṭhapālo arahataṁ ahosi.
[¶30] Then he went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, I would like to visit my parents, if the Buddha allows it.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “icchāmahaṁ, bhante, mātāpitaro uddassetuṁ, sace maṁ bhagavā anujānātī”ti.
[¶31] Then the Buddha focused on encompassing Raṭṭhapāla’s mind. When he knew that it was impossible for Raṭṭhapāla to resign the training and return to a lesser life, he said, “Please, Raṭṭhapāla, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa cetasā ceto paricca manasākāsi. Yathā bhagavā aññāsi: “abhabbo kho raṭṭhapālo kulaputto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattitun”ti, atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ etadavoca: “yassadāni tvaṁ, raṭṭhapāla, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶32] And then Raṭṭhapāla rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right. Then he set his lodgings in order and, taking his bowl and robe, set out for Thullakoṭṭhika. Traveling stage by stage, he arrived at Thullakoṭṭhika, where he stayed in King Koravya’s deer range. Then Raṭṭhapāla robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Thullakoṭṭhika for alms. Wandering indiscriminately for almsfood, he approached his own father’s house.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena thullakoṭṭhikaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena thullakoṭṭhiko tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ āyasmā raṭṭhapālo thullakoṭṭhike viharati rañño korabyassa migacīre. Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya thullakoṭṭhikaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Thullakoṭṭhike sapadānaṁ piṇḍāya caramāno yena sakapitu nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.
[¶33] Now at that time Raṭṭhapāla’s father was having his hair dressed in the hall of the middle gate. He saw Raṭṭhapāla coming off in the distance and said,
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā majjhimāya dvārasālāya ullikhāpeti. Addasā kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna etadavoca:
[¶34] “Our dear and beloved only son was made to go forth by these shavelings, these fake ascetics!” And at his own father’s home Raṭṭhapāla received neither alms nor a polite refusal, but only abuse.
> Pali: “imehi muṇḍakehi samaṇakehi amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo pabbājito”ti. Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo sakapitu nivesane neva dānaṁ alattha na paccakkhānaṁ; aññadatthu akkosameva alattha.
[¶35] Now at that time a family bondservant wanted to throw away the previous night’s porridge. So Raṭṭhapāla said to her, “If that’s to be thrown away, sister, pour it here in my bowl.” As she was pouring the porridge into his bowl, she recognized the features of his hands, feet, and voice.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa ñātidāsī ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ chaḍḍetukāmā hoti. Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo taṁ ñātidāsiṁ etadavoca: “sacetaṁ, bhagini, chaḍḍanīyadhammaṁ, idha me patte ākirā”ti. Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa ñātidāsī taṁ ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa patte ākirantī hatthānañca pādānañca sarassa ca nimittaṁ aggahesi.
[¶36] She then went to his mother and said, “Please, madam, you should know this. Master Raṭṭhapāla has arrived.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa ñātidāsī yenāyasmato raṭṭhapālassa mātā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa mātaraṁ etadavoca: “yaggheyye, jāneyyāsi: ‘ayyaputto raṭṭhapālo anuppatto’”ti.
[¶37] “If you speak the truth, wench, I’ll make you a free woman!”
> Pali: “Sace, je, saccaṁ bhaṇasi, adāsiṁ taṁ karomī”ti.
[¶38] Then Raṭṭhapāla’s mother went to his father and said, “Please householder, you should know this. It seems our son Raṭṭhapāla has arrived.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa mātā yenāyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitaraṁ etadavoca: “yagghe, gahapati, jāneyyāsi: ‘raṭṭhapālo kira kulaputto anuppatto’”ti?
[¶39] Now at that time Raṭṭhapāla was eating last night’s porridge by a wall. Then Raṭṭhapāla’s father went up to him and said, “Dear Raṭṭhapāla! How can you be eating last night’s porridge? Why not go to your own home?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā raṭṭhapālo taṁ ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ aññataraṁ kuṭṭamūlaṁ nissāya paribhuñjati. Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā yenāyasmā raṭṭhapālo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ etadavoca: “atthi nāma, tāta raṭṭhapāla, ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ paribhuñjissasi? Nanu, tāta raṭṭhapāla, sakaṁ gehaṁ gantabban”ti?
[¶40] “Householder, how could those of us who have gone forth from the lay life to homelessness have a house? We are homeless, householder. I came to your house, but there I received neither alms nor a polite refusal, but only abuse.”
> Pali: “Kuto no, gahapati, amhākaṁ gehaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitānaṁ? Anagārā mayaṁ, gahapati. Agamamha kho te, gahapati, gehaṁ, tattha neva dānaṁ alatthamha na paccakkhānaṁ; aññadatthu akkosameva alatthamhā”ti.
[¶41] “Come, dear Raṭṭhapāla, let’s go to the house.”
> Pali: “Ehi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, gharaṁ gamissāmā”ti.
[¶42] “Enough, householder. My meal is finished for today.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, gahapati, kataṁ me ajja bhattakiccaṁ”.
[¶43] “Well then, dear Raṭṭhapāla, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me.” Raṭṭhapāla consented with silence.
> Pali: “Tena hi, tāta raṭṭhapāla, adhivāsehi svātanāya bhattan”ti. Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶44] Then, knowing that Raṭṭhapāla had consented, his father went back to his own house. He made a heap of gold, both coined and uncoined, and hid it under mats. Then he addressed Raṭṭhapāla’s former wives, “Please, daughters-in-law, adorn yourselves in the way that our son Raṭṭhapāla found you most adorable.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa adhivāsanaṁ viditvā yena sakaṁ nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mahantaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇassa puñjaṁ kārāpetvā kilañjehi paṭicchādetvā āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa purāṇadutiyikā āmantesi: “etha tumhe, vadhuyo, yena alaṅkārena alaṅkatā pubbe raṭṭhapālassa kulaputtassa piyā hotha manāpā tena alaṅkārena alaṅkarothā”ti.
[¶45] And when the night had passed Raṭṭhapāla’s father had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home, and announced the time to the Venerable Raṭṭhapāla, saying, “Sir, it’s time. The meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa kālaṁ ārocesi: “kālo, tāta raṭṭhapāla, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶46] Then Raṭṭhapāla robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to his father’s home, and sat down on the seat spread out. Raṭṭhapāla’s father, revealing the heap of gold, both coined and uncoined, said to him, “Dear Raṭṭhapāla, this is your maternal fortune. There’s another paternal fortune, and an ancestral one. You can both enjoy your wealth and make merit. Come, return to a lesser life, enjoy wealth, and make merit!”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sakapitu nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā taṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇassa puñjaṁ vivarāpetvā āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ etadavoca: “idaṁ te, tāta raṭṭhapāla, mātu mattikaṁ dhanaṁ, aññaṁ pettikaṁ, aññaṁ pitāmahaṁ. Sakkā, tāta raṭṭhapāla, bhoge ca bhuñjituṁ puññāni ca kātuṁ. Ehi tvaṁ, tāta raṭṭhapāla, hīnāyāvattitvā bhoge ca bhuñjassu puññāni ca karohī”ti.
[¶47] “If you’d follow my advice, householder, you’d have this heap of gold, both coined and uncoined, loaded on a cart and carried away to be dumped in the middle of the Ganges River. Why is that? Because this will bring you nothing but sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.”
> Pali: “Sace me tvaṁ, gahapati, vacanaṁ kareyyāsi, imaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇassa puñjaṁ sakaṭe āropetvā nibbāhāpetvā majjhegaṅgāya nadiyā sote opilāpeyyāsi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ye uppajjissanti hi te, gahapati, tatonidānaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti.
[¶48] Then Raṭṭhapāla’s former wives each clasped his feet and said, “What are they like, master, the nymphs for whom you lead the spiritual life?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa purāṇadutiyikā paccekaṁ pādesu gahetvā āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kīdisā nāma tā, ayyaputta, accharāyo yāsaṁ tvaṁ hetu brahmacariyaṁ carasī”ti?
[¶49] “Sisters, I don’t lead the spiritual life for the sake of nymphs.”
> Pali: “Na kho mayaṁ, bhaginī, accharānaṁ hetu brahmacariyaṁ carāmā”ti.
[¶50] Saying, “Our master Raṭṭhapāla addresses us as sisters!” they fainted right away.
> Pali: “Bhaginivādena no ayyaputto raṭṭhapālo samudācaratī”ti tā tattheva mucchitā papatiṁsu.
[¶51] Then Raṭṭhapāla said to his father, “If there is food to be given, householder, please give it. But don’t harass me.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo pitaraṁ etadavoca: “sace, gahapati, bhojanaṁ dātabbaṁ, detha; mā no viheṭhethā”ti.
## 90. MN 82 · With Raṭṭhapāla · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/90/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/90/#p-N
[¶0] “Eat, dear Raṭṭhapāla. The meal is ready.” Then Raṭṭhapāla’s father served and satisfied Venerable Raṭṭhapāla with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods.
> Pali: “Bhuñja, tāta raṭṭhapāla, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti. Atha kho āyasmato raṭṭhapālassa pitā āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.
[¶1] When he had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, he spoke this verse while standing right there:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo bhuttāvī onītapattapāṇī ṭhitakova imā gāthā abhāsi:
[¶2] “See this fancy puppet,
a body built of sores,
diseased, obsessed over,
in which nothing lasts at all.
> Pali: “Passa cittīkataṁ bimbaṁ,
arukāyaṁ samussitaṁ;
Āturaṁ bahusaṅkappaṁ,
yassa natthi dhuvaṁ ṭhiti.
[¶3] See this fancy figure,
with its gems and earrings;
it is bones swathed in skin,
made pretty by its clothes.
> Pali: Passa cittīkataṁ rūpaṁ,
maṇinā kuṇḍalena ca;
Aṭṭhi tacena onaddhaṁ,
saha vatthebhi sobhati.
[¶4] Rouged feet
and powdered face
may be enough to beguile a fool,
but not a seeker of the far shore.
> Pali: Alattakakatā pādā,
mukhaṁ cuṇṇakamakkhitaṁ;
Alaṁ bālassa mohāya,
no ca pāragavesino.
[¶5] Hair in eight braids
and eyeshadow
may be enough to beguile a fool,
but not a seeker of the far shore.
> Pali: Aṭṭhāpadakatā kesā,
nettā añjanamakkhitā;
Alaṁ bālassa mohāya,
no ca pāragavesino.
[¶6] A rotting body all adorned
like a freshly painted makeup box
may be enough to beguile a fool,
but not a seeker of the far shore.
> Pali: Añjanīva navā cittā,
pūtikāyo alaṅkato;
Alaṁ bālassa mohāya,
no ca pāragavesino.
[¶7] The hunter laid his snare,
but the deer didn’t spring the trap.
I’ve eaten the bait and now I go,
leaving the trapper to lament.”
> Pali: Odahi migavo pāsaṁ,
nāsadā vākaraṁ migo;
Bhutvā nivāpaṁ gacchāma,
kandante migabandhake”ti.
[¶8] Then Raṭṭhapāla, having spoke this verse while standing, went to King Koravya’s deer range and sat at the root of a tree for the day’s meditation.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā raṭṭhapālo ṭhitakova imā gāthā bhāsitvā yena rañño korabyassa migacīraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.
[¶9] Then King Koravya addressed his gamekeeper, “My good gamekeeper, tidy up the park of the deer range. We will go to see the scenery.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā korabyo migavaṁ āmantesi: “sodhehi, samma migava, migacīraṁ uyyānabhūmiṁ; gacchāma subhūmiṁ dassanāyā”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, Your Majesty,” replied the gamekeeper. While tidying the deer range he saw Raṭṭhapāla sitting in meditation. Seeing this, he went to the king, and said, “The deer range is tidy, Your Majesty. And the gentleman named Raṭṭhapāla, the son of the leading clan in Thullakoṭṭhika, of whom you have often spoken highly, is meditating there at the root of a tree.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho migavo rañño korabyassa paṭissutvā migacīraṁ sodhento addasa āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisinnaṁ. Disvāna yena rājā korabyo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ korabyaṁ etadavoca: “suddhaṁ kho te, deva, migacīraṁ. Atthi cettha raṭṭhapālo nāma kulaputto imasmiṁyeva thullakoṭṭhike aggakulassa putto yassa tvaṁ abhiṇhaṁ kittayamāno ahosi, so aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisinno”ti.
[¶11] “Well then, my good gamekeeper, that’s enough of the park for today. Now I shall pay homage to the worthy Raṭṭhapāla.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, samma migava, alaṁ dānajja uyyānabhūmiyā. Tameva dāni mayaṁ bhavantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ payirupāsissāmā”ti.
[¶12] And then King Koravya said, “Distribute the fresh and cooked foods that have been prepared there.” He had the finest carriages harnessed. Then he mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out in full royal pomp from Thullakoṭṭhika to see Raṭṭhapāla. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached Raṭṭhapāla on foot, together with a group of eminent officials. They exchanged greetings, and, when the greetings and polite conversation were over, he stood to one side and said to Raṭṭhapāla:
> Pali: Atha kho rājā korabyo “yaṁ tattha khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyattaṁ taṁ sabbaṁ vissajjethā”ti vatvā bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi thullakoṭṭhikamhā niyyāsi mahaccarājānubhāvena āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ dassanāya. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova ussaṭāya ussaṭāya parisāya yenāyasmā raṭṭhapālo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā raṭṭhapālena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho rājā korabyo āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ etadavoca:
[¶13] “Here, worthy Raṭṭhapāla, sit on this elephant rug.”
> Pali: “idha bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo hatthatthare nisīdatū”ti.
[¶14] “Enough, Great King, you sit on it. I’m sitting on my own seat.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, mahārāja, nisīda tvaṁ; nisinno ahaṁ sake āsane”ti.
[¶15] So the king sat down on the seat spread out, and said:
> Pali: Nisīdi rājā korabyo paññatte āsane. Nisajja kho rājā korabyo āyasmantaṁ raṭṭhapālaṁ etadavoca:
[¶16] “Worthy Raṭṭhapāla, there are these four kinds of decay. Because of these, some people shave off their hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. What four? Decay due to old age, decay due to sickness, decay of wealth, and decay of relatives.
> Pali: “Cattārimāni, bho raṭṭhapāla, pārijuññāni yehi pārijuññehi samannāgatā idhekacce kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti. Katamāni cattāri? Jarāpārijuññaṁ, byādhipārijuññaṁ, bhogapārijuññaṁ, ñātipārijuññaṁ.
[¶17] And what is decay due to old age? It’s when someone is old, elderly, and senior, advanced in years, and has reached the final stage of life. They reflect: ‘I’m now old, elderly, and senior. I’m advanced in years and have reached the final stage of life. It’s not easy for me to acquire more wealth or to increase the wealth I’ve already acquired. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ So because of that decay due to old age they go forth. This is called decay due to old age. But worthy Raṭṭhapāla is now a youth, young, with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life. You have no decay due to old age. So what did you know or see or hear that made you go forth?
> Pali: Katamañca, bho raṭṭhapāla, jarāpārijuññaṁ? Idha, bho raṭṭhapāla, ekacco jiṇṇo hoti vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi etarahi jiṇṇo vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto. Na kho pana mayā sukaraṁ anadhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ adhigantuṁ adhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So tena jarāpārijuññena samannāgato kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Idaṁ vuccati, bho raṭṭhapāla, jarāpārijuññaṁ. Bhavaṁ kho pana raṭṭhapālo etarahi daharo yuvā susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā. Taṁ bhoto raṭṭhapālassa jarāpārijuññaṁ natthi. Kiṁ bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo ñatvā vā disvā vā sutvā vā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito?
[¶18] And what is decay due to sickness? It’s when someone is sick, suffering, gravely ill. They reflect: ‘I’m now sick, suffering, gravely ill. It’s not easy for me to acquire more wealth or to increase the wealth I’ve already acquired. Why don’t I go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ So because of that decay due to sickness they go forth. This is called decay due to sickness. But worthy Raṭṭhapāla is now rarely ill or unwell. Your stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold. You have no decay due to sickness. So what did you know or see or hear that made you go forth?
> Pali: Katamañca, bho raṭṭhapāla, byādhipārijuññaṁ? Idha, bho raṭṭhapāla, ekacco ābādhiko hoti dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi etarahi ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. Na kho pana mayā sukaraṁ anadhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ adhigantuṁ adhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So tena byādhipārijuññena samannāgato kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Idaṁ vuccati, bho raṭṭhapāla, byādhipārijuññaṁ. Bhavaṁ kho pana raṭṭhapālo etarahi appābādho appātaṅko samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya. Taṁ bhoto raṭṭhapālassa byādhipārijuññaṁ natthi. Kiṁ bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo ñatvā vā disvā vā sutvā vā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito?
[¶19] And what is decay of wealth? It’s when someone is rich, affluent, and wealthy. But gradually their wealth dwindles away. They reflect: ‘I used to be rich, affluent, and wealthy. But gradually my wealth has dwindled away. It’s not easy for me to acquire more wealth or to increase the wealth I’ve already acquired. Why don’t I go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ So because of that decay of wealth they go forth. This is called decay of wealth. But worthy Raṭṭhapāla is the son of the leading clan here in Thullakoṭṭhika. You have no decay of wealth. So what did you know or see or hear that made you go forth?
> Pali: Katamañca, bho raṭṭhapāla, bhogapārijuññaṁ? Idha, bho raṭṭhapāla, ekacco aḍḍho hoti mahaddhano mahābhogo. Tassa te bhogā anupubbena parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe aḍḍho ahosiṁ mahaddhano mahābhogo. Tassa me te bhogā anupubbena parikkhayaṁ gatā. Na kho pana mayā sukaraṁ anadhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ adhigantuṁ adhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So tena bhogapārijuññena samannāgato kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Idaṁ vuccati, bho raṭṭhapāla, bhogapārijuññaṁ. Bhavaṁ kho pana raṭṭhapālo imasmiṁyeva thullakoṭṭhike aggakulassa putto. Taṁ bhoto raṭṭhapālassa bhogapārijuññaṁ natthi. Kiṁ bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo ñatvā vā disvā vā sutvā vā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito?
[¶20] And what is decay of relatives? It’s when someone has many friends and colleagues, relatives and kin. But gradually their relatives dwindle away. They reflect: ‘I used to have many friends and colleagues, relatives and kin. But gradually they’ve dwindled away. It’s not easy for me to acquire more wealth or to increase the wealth I’ve already acquired. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ So because of that decay of relatives they go forth. This is called decay of relatives. But worthy Raṭṭhapāla has many friends and colleagues, relatives and kin right here in Thullakoṭṭhika. You have no decay of relatives. So what did you know or see or hear that made you go forth?
> Pali: Katamañca, bho raṭṭhapāla, ñātipārijuññaṁ? Idha, bho raṭṭhapāla, ekaccassa bahū honti mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā. Tassa te ñātakā anupubbena parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘mamaṁ kho pubbe bahū ahesuṁ mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā. Tassa me te anupubbena parikkhayaṁ gatā. Na kho pana mayā sukaraṁ anadhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ adhigantuṁ adhigataṁ vā bhogaṁ phātiṁ kātuṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So tena ñātipārijuññena samannāgato kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Idaṁ vuccati, bho raṭṭhapāla, ñātipārijuññaṁ. Bhoto kho pana raṭṭhapālassa imasmiṁyeva thullakoṭṭhike bahū mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā. Taṁ bhoto raṭṭhapālassa ñātipārijuññaṁ natthi. Kiṁ bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo ñatvā vā disvā vā sutvā vā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito?
[¶21] There are these four kinds of decay. Because of these, some people shave off their hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Worthy Raṭṭhapāla has none of these. So what did you know or see or hear that made you go forth?”
> Pali: Imāni kho, bho raṭṭhapāla, cattāri pārijuññāni, yehi pārijuññehi samannāgatā idhekacce kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti. Tāni bhoto raṭṭhapālassa natthi. Kiṁ bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo ñatvā vā disvā vā sutvā vā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito”ti?
[¶22] “Great king, the Blessed One who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha has taught these four summaries of the teaching for recitation. It was after knowing and seeing and hearing these that I went forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: “Atthi kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammuddesā uddiṭṭhā, ye ahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito.
[¶23] What four?
> Pali: Katame cattāro?
[¶24] ‘The world is unstable and swept away.’ This is the first summary.
> Pali: ‘Upaniyyati loko addhuvo’ti kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena paṭhamo dhammuddeso uddiṭṭho, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito.
[¶25] ‘The world has no shelter and no savior.’ This is the second summary.
> Pali: ‘Atāṇo loko anabhissaro’ti kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dutiyo dhammuddeso uddiṭṭho, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito.
[¶26] ‘The world has no owner—you must leave it all behind and pass on.’ This is the third summary.
> Pali: ‘Assako loko, sabbaṁ pahāya gamanīyan’ti kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tatiyo dhammuddeso uddiṭṭho, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito.
[¶27] ‘The world is wanting, insatiable, the slave of craving.’ This is the fourth summary.
> Pali: ‘Ūno loko atitto taṇhādāso’ti kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena catuttho dhammuddeso uddiṭṭho, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito.
[¶28] The Blessed One who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha taught these four summaries of the teaching. It was after knowing and seeing and hearing these that I went forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: Ime kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammuddesā uddiṭṭhā, ye ahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito”ti.
[¶29] “‘The world is unstable and swept away.’ So the worthy Raṭṭhapāla said. How should I see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: “‘Upaniyyati loko addhuvo’ti— bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo āha. Imassa, bho raṭṭhapāla, bhāsitassa kathaṁ attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶30] “What do you think, Great King? When you were twenty or twenty-five years of age, were you well-versed at riding elephants, horses, and chariots, and at archery and swordsmanship? Were you strong in thigh and arm, capable, and battle-hardened?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, tvaṁ vīsativassuddesikopi paṇṇavīsativassuddesikopi hatthismimpi katāvī assasmimpi katāvī rathasmimpi katāvī dhanusmimpi katāvī tharusmimpi katāvī ūrubalī bāhubalī alamatto saṅgāmāvacaro”ti?
[¶31] “I was, worthy Raṭṭhapāla. Sometimes it seems as if I had superpowers then. I don’t see anyone who could have equaled me in strength.”
> Pali: “Ahosiṁ ahaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, vīsativassuddesikopi paṇṇavīsativassuddesikopi hatthismimpi katāvī assasmimpi katāvī rathasmimpi katāvī dhanusmimpi katāvī tharusmimpi katāvī ūrubalī bāhubalī alamatto saṅgāmāvacaro. Appekadāhaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, iddhimāva maññe na attano balena samasamaṁ samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶32] “What do you think, Great King? These days are you just as strong in thigh and arm, capable, and battle-hardened?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, evameva tvaṁ etarahi ūrubalī bāhubalī alamatto saṅgāmāvacaro”ti?
[¶33] “No, worthy Raṭṭhapāla. For now I am old, elderly, and senior, I’m advanced in years and have reached the final stage of life. I am eighty years old. Sometimes I intend to step in one place, but my foot goes somewhere else.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla. Etarahi jiṇṇo vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto āsītiko me vayo vattati. Appekadāhaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, ‘idha pādaṁ karissāmī’ti aññeneva pādaṁ karomī”ti.
[¶34] “This is what the Buddha was referring to when he said: ‘The world is unstable and swept away.’”
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘upaniyyati loko addhuvo’ti, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito”ti.
[¶35] “It’s incredible, worthy Raṭṭhapāla, it’s amazing, how well said this was by the Buddha. For the world is indeed unstable and swept away.
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, abbhutaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla. Yāva subhāsitañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena: ‘upaniyyati loko addhuvo’ti. Upaniyyati hi, bho raṭṭhapāla, loko addhuvo.
[¶36] In this royal court you can find divisions of elephants, cavalry, chariots, and infantry. They will serve to defend us from any threats. Yet you said: ‘The world has no shelter and no savior.’ How should I see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: Saṁvijjante kho, bho raṭṭhapāla, imasmiṁ rājakule hatthikāyāpi assakāyāpi rathakāyāpi pattikāyāpi, amhākaṁ āpadāsu pariyodhāya vattissanti. ‘Atāṇo loko anabhissaro’ti— bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo āha. Imassa pana, bho raṭṭhapāla, bhāsitassa kathaṁ attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶37] “What do you think, Great King? Do you have any chronic ailments?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, atthi te koci anusāyiko ābādho”ti?
[¶38] “Yes, I do. Sometimes my friends and colleagues, relatives and kin surround me, thinking: ‘Now the king will die! Now the king will die!’”
> Pali: “Atthi me, bho raṭṭhapāla, anusāyiko ābādho. Appekadā maṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā parivāretvā ṭhitā honti: ‘idāni rājā korabyo kālaṁ karissati, idāni rājā korabyo kālaṁ karissatī’”ti.
[¶39] “What do you think, Great King? Can you get your friends and colleagues, relatives and kin to help: ‘Please, my dear friends and colleagues, relatives and kin, all of you here share my pain so that I may feel less pain.’ Or must you alone feel that pain?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, labhasi tvaṁ te mittāmacce ñātisālohite: ‘āyantu me bhonto mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, sabbeva santā imaṁ vedanaṁ saṁvibhajatha, yathāhaṁ lahukatarikaṁ vedanaṁ vediyeyyan’ti— udāhu tvaṁyeva taṁ vedanaṁ vediyasī”ti?
[¶40] “I can’t get my friends to share my pain. Rather, I alone must feel it.”
> Pali: “Nāhaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, labhāmi te mittāmacce ñātisālohite: ‘āyantu me bhonto mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, sabbeva santā imaṁ vedanaṁ saṁvibhajatha, yathāhaṁ lahukatarikaṁ vedanaṁ vediyeyyan’ti. Atha kho ahameva taṁ vedanaṁ vediyāmī”ti.
[¶41] “This is what the Buddha was referring to when he said: ‘The world has no shelter and no savior.’”
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘atāṇo loko anabhissaro’ti, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito”ti.
[¶42] “It’s incredible, worthy Raṭṭhapāla, it’s amazing, how well said this was by the Buddha. For the world indeed has no shelter and no savior.
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, abbhutaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla. Yāva subhāsitaṁ cidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena: ‘atāṇo loko anabhissaro’ti. Atāṇo hi, bho raṭṭhapāla, loko anabhissaro.
[¶43] In this royal court you can find abundant gold, both coined and uncoined, stored above and below ground. Yet you said: ‘The world has no owner—you must leave it all behind and pass on.’ How should I see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: Saṁvijjati kho, bho raṭṭhapāla, imasmiṁ rājakule pahūtaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ bhūmigatañca vehāsagatañca. ‘Assako loko, sabbaṁ pahāya gamanīyan’ti— bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo āha. Imassa pana, bho raṭṭhapāla, bhāsitassa kathaṁ attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶44] “What do you think, Great King? These days you amuse yourself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. But is there any way to ensure that in the next life you will continue to amuse yourself in the same way, supplied and provided with the same five kinds of sensual stimulation? Or will others make use of this property, while you pass on according to your deeds?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, yathā tvaṁ etarahi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāresi, lacchasi tvaṁ paratthāpi: ‘evamevāhaṁ imeheva pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāremī’ti, udāhu aññe imaṁ bhogaṁ paṭipajjissanti, tvaṁ pana yathākammaṁ gamissasī”ti?
[¶45] “There’s no way to ensure that I will continue to amuse myself in the same way. Rather, others will take over this property, while I pass on according to my deeds.”
> Pali: “Yathāhaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, etarahi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāremi, nāhaṁ lacchāmi paratthāpi: ‘evameva imeheva pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāremī’ti. Atha kho aññe imaṁ bhogaṁ paṭipajjissanti; ahaṁ pana yathākammaṁ gamissāmī”ti.
[¶46] “This is what the Buddha was referring to when he said: ‘The world has no owner—you must leave it all behind and pass on.’”
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘assako loko, sabbaṁ pahāya gamanīyan’ti, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito”ti.
[¶47] “It’s incredible, worthy Raṭṭhapāla, it’s amazing, how well said this was by the Buddha. For the world indeed has no owner—you must leave it all behind and pass on.
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, abbhutaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla. Yāva subhāsitaṁ cidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena: ‘assako loko, sabbaṁ pahāya gamanīyan’ti. Assako hi, bho raṭṭhapāla, loko sabbaṁ pahāya gamanīyaṁ.
[¶48] You also said this: ‘The world is wanting, insatiable, the slave of craving.’ How should I see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: ‘Ūno loko atitto taṇhādāso’ti— bhavaṁ raṭṭhapālo āha. Imassa, bho raṭṭhapāla, bhāsitassa kathaṁ attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶49] “What do you think, Great King? Do you reign over the prosperous land of Kuru?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, phītaṁ kuruṁ ajjhāvasasī”ti?
[¶50] “Indeed I do.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, phītaṁ kuruṁ ajjhāvasāmī”ti.
[¶51] “What do you think, Great King? Suppose a trustworthy and dependable man were to come from the east. He’d approach you and say: ‘Please, Great King, you should know this. I come from the east. There I saw a large country that is successful and prosperous, populous and full of people. They have many divisions of elephants, cavalry, chariots, and infantry. And there’s plenty of money and grain, plenty of gold, coined and uncoined, worked and unworked, and plenty of women for the taking. With your current forces you can conquer it. Conquer it, Great King!’ What would you do?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha puriso āgaccheyya puratthimāya disāya saddhāyiko paccayiko. So taṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yagghe, mahārāja, jāneyyāsi, ahaṁ āgacchāmi puratthimāya disāya? Tatthaddasaṁ mahantaṁ janapadaṁ iddhañceva phītañca bahujanaṁ ākiṇṇamanussaṁ. Bahū tattha hatthikāyā assakāyā rathakāyā pattikāyā; bahu tattha dhanadhaññaṁ; bahu tattha hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ akatañceva katañca; bahu tattha itthipariggaho. Sakkā ca tāvatakeneva balamattena abhivijinituṁ. Abhivijina, mahārājā’ti, kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶52] “I would conquer it and reign over it.”
> Pali: “Tampi mayaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, abhivijiya ajjhāvaseyyāmā”ti.
[¶53] “What do you think, Great King? Suppose a trustworthy and dependable man were to come from the west, north, south, or from over the ocean. He’d approach you and say the same thing. What would you do?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha puriso āgaccheyya pacchimāya disāya … uttarāya disāya … dakkhiṇāya disāya … parasamuddato saddhāyiko paccayiko. So taṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yagghe, mahārāja, jāneyyāsi, ahaṁ āgacchāmi parasamuddato? Tatthaddasaṁ mahantaṁ janapadaṁ iddhañceva phītañca bahujanaṁ ākiṇṇamanussaṁ. Bahū tattha hatthikāyā assakāyā rathakāyā pattikāyā; bahu tattha dhanadhaññaṁ; bahu tattha hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ akatañceva katañca; bahu tattha itthipariggaho. Sakkā ca tāvatakeneva balamattena abhivijinituṁ. Abhivijina, mahārājā’ti, kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶54] “I would conquer it and reign over it.”
> Pali: “Tampi mayaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, abhivijiya ajjhāvaseyyāmā”ti.
[¶55] “This is what the Buddha was referring to when he said: ‘The world is wanting, insatiable, the slave of craving.’ And it was after knowing and seeing and hearing this that I went forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘ūno loko atitto taṇhādāso’ti, yamahaṁ ñatvā ca disvā ca sutvā ca agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito”ti.
[¶56] “It’s incredible, worthy Raṭṭhapāla, it’s amazing, how well said this was by the Buddha. For the world is indeed wanting, insatiable, the slave of craving.”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla, abbhutaṁ, bho raṭṭhapāla. Yāva subhāsitañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena: ‘ūno loko atitto taṇhādāso’ti. Ūno hi, bho raṭṭhapāla, loko atitto taṇhādāso”ti.
[¶57] That is what Venerable Raṭṭhapāla said. Then he went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca āyasmā raṭṭhapālo. Idaṁ vatvā athāparaṁ etadavoca:
[¶58] “I see rich humans in the world who,
because of delusion, give not the wealth they’ve earned.
Greedily, they hoard their riches,
yearning for ever more sensual pleasures.
> Pali: “Passāmi loke sadhane manusse,
Laddhāna vittaṁ na dadanti mohā;
Luddhā dhanaṁ sannicayaṁ karonti,
Bhiyyova kāme abhipatthayanti.
[¶59] A king who conquered the earth by force,
ruling the land from sea to sea,
unsatisfied with the near shore of the ocean,
would still yearn for the further shore.
> Pali: Rājā pasayhā pathaviṁ vijitvā,
Sasāgarantaṁ mahimāvasanto;
Oraṁ samuddassa atittarūpo,
Pāraṁ samuddassapi patthayetha.
[¶60] Not just the king, but others too,
reach death not rid of craving.
They leave the body still wanting,
for in this world sensual pleasures never satisfy.
> Pali: Rājā ca aññe ca bahū manussā,
Avītataṇhā maraṇaṁ upenti;
Ūnāva hutvāna jahanti dehaṁ,
Kāmehi lokamhi na hatthi titti.
[¶61] Relatives lament, their hair disheveled,
saying ‘Ah! Alas! They’re not immortal!’
They take out the body wrapped in a shroud,
heap up a pyre, and burn it there.
> Pali: Kandanti naṁ ñātī pakiriya kese,
Ahovatā no amarāti cāhu;
Vatthena naṁ pārutaṁ nīharitvā,
Citaṁ samādāya tatoḍahanti.
[¶62] It’s poked with stakes while being burnt,
in just a single cloth, all wealth gone.
Relatives, friends, and companions
can’t help you when you’re dying.
> Pali: So ḍayhati sūlehi tujjamāno,
Ekena vatthena pahāya bhoge;
Na mīyamānassa bhavanti tāṇā,
Ñātīdha mittā atha vā sahāyā.
[¶63] Heirs take your riches,
while beings fare on according to their deeds.
Riches don’t follow you when you die;
nor do children, wife, wealth, nor kingdom.
> Pali: Dāyādakā tassa dhanaṁ haranti,
Satto pana gacchati yena kammaṁ;
Na mīyamānaṁ dhanamanveti kiñci,
Puttā ca dārā ca dhanañca raṭṭhaṁ.
[¶64] Longevity isn’t gained by riches,
nor does wealth banish old age;
for the attentive say this life is short,
it’s perishable and not eternal.
> Pali: Na dīghamāyuṁ labhate dhanena,
Na cāpi vittena jaraṁ vihanti;
Appaṁ hidaṁ jīvitamāhu dhīrā,
Asassataṁ vippariṇāmadhammaṁ.
[¶65] The rich and the poor feel its touch;
the fool and the attentive one feel it too.
But the fool lies stricken by their own folly,
while the attentive don’t tremble at the touch.
> Pali: Aḍḍhā daliddā ca phusanti phassaṁ,
Bālo ca dhīro ca tatheva phuṭṭho;
Bālo ca bālyā vadhitova seti,
Dhīro ca na vedhati phassaphuṭṭho.
[¶66] Therefore wisdom’s much better than wealth,
since by wisdom you reach consummation in this life.
But if because of delusion you don’t reach consummation,
you’ll do evil deeds in life after life.
> Pali: Tasmā hi paññāva dhanena seyyo,
Yāya vosānamidhādhigacchati;
Abyositattā hi bhavābhavesu,
Pāpāni kammāni karonti mohā.
[¶67] One who enters a womb and the world beyond,
will transmigrate from one life to the next.
While someone of little wisdom, placing faith in them,
also enters a womb and the world beyond.
> Pali: Upeti gabbhañca parañca lokaṁ,
Saṁsāramāpajja paramparāya;
Tassappapañño abhisaddahanto,
Upeti gabbhañca parañca lokaṁ.
[¶68] As a bandit caught in a window
is punished for his own bad deeds;
so after departing, in the world beyond,
people are punished for their own bad deeds.
> Pali: Coro yathā sandhimukhe gahito,
Sakammunā haññati pāpadhammo;
Evaṁ pajā pecca paramhi loke,
Sakammunā haññati pāpadhammo.
[¶69] Sensual pleasures are diverse, sweet, delightful;
appearing in disguise they disturb the mind.
Seeing danger in sensual stimulations,
I went forth, O King.
> Pali: Kāmāhi citrā madhurā manoramā,
Virūparūpena mathenti cittaṁ;
Ādīnavaṁ kāmaguṇesu disvā,
Tasmā ahaṁ pabbajitomhi rāja.
[¶70] As fruit falls from a tree, so the sons of Manu fall,
young and old, when the body breaks up.
Seeing this, too, I went forth, O King;
it’s a sure bet that the ascetic life is better.”
> Pali: Dumapphalāneva patanti māṇavā,
Daharā ca vuḍḍhā ca sarīrabhedā;
Etampi disvā pabbajitomhi rāja,
Apaṇṇakaṁ sāmaññameva seyyo”ti.
[¶71] > Pali: Raṭṭhapālasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 91. MN 83 · About King Maghadeva
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/91/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/91/#p-N
[¶0] MN 83 · About King Maghadeva
> Pali: MN 83 · Maghadevasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Mithilā in the Maghadeva Mango Grove. Then the Buddha smiled at a certain spot.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā mithilāyaṁ viharati maghadevaambavane. Atha kho bhagavā aññatarasmiṁ padese sitaṁ pātvākāsi.
[¶2] Then Venerable Ānanda thought, “What is the cause, what is the reason why the Buddha smiled? Realized Ones do not smile for no reason.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo bhagavato sitassa pātukammāya? Na akāraṇena tathāgatā sitaṁ pātukarontī”ti.
[¶3] So Ānanda arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and said, “What is the cause, what is the reason why the Buddha smiled? Realized Ones do not smile for no reason.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo bhagavato sitassa pātukammāya? Na akāraṇena tathāgatā sitaṁ pātukarontī”ti.
[¶4] “Once upon a time, Ānanda, right here in Mithilā there was a just and principled king named Maghadeva, a great king who stood by his duty. He justly treated brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. And he observed the sabbath on the fourteenth, fifteenth, and eighth of the fortnight.
> Pali: “Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, imissāyeva mithilāyaṁ rājā ahosi maghadevo nāma dhammiko dhammarājā dhamme ṭhito mahārājā; dhammaṁ carati brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca; uposathañca upavasati cātuddasiṁ pañcadasiṁ aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassa.
[¶5] Then, after many years, many hundred years, many thousand years had passed, King Maghadeva addressed his barber, ‘My dear barber, when you see grey hairs growing on my head, please tell me.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā maghadevo bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena kappakaṁ āmantesi: ‘yadā me, samma kappaka, passeyyāsi sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni, atha me āroceyyāsī’ti.
[¶6] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the barber.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, kappako rañño maghadevassa paccassosi.
[¶7] When many thousand years had passed, the barber saw grey hairs growing on the king’s head. He said to the king, ‘The messengers of the gods have shown themselves to you. Grey hairs can be seen growing on your head.’
> Pali: Addasā kho, ānanda, kappako bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena rañño maghadevassa sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni. Disvāna rājānaṁ maghadevaṁ etadavoca: ‘pātubhūtā kho devassa devadūtā, dissanti sirasmiṁ palitāni jātānī’ti.
[¶8] ‘Well then, my dear barber, carefully pull them out with tweezers and place them in my cupped hands.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma kappaka, tāni palitāni sādhukaṁ saṇḍāsena uddharitvā mama añjalismiṁ patiṭṭhāpehī’ti.
[¶9] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the barber, and he did as the king said.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, kappako rañño maghadevassa paṭissutvā tāni palitāni sādhukaṁ saṇḍāsena uddharitvā rañño maghadevassa añjalismiṁ patiṭṭhāpesi.
[¶10] The king gave the barber a prize village, then summoned the crown prince and said, ‘Dear prince, the messengers of the gods have shown themselves to me. Grey hairs can be seen growing on my head. I have enjoyed human pleasures. Now it is time to seek heavenly pleasures. Come, dear prince, rule the realm. I shall shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā maghadevo kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘pātubhūtā kho me, tāta kumāra, devadūtā; dissanti sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni; bhuttā kho pana me mānusakā kāmā; samayo dibbe kāme pariyesituṁ. Ehi tvaṁ, tāta kumāra, imaṁ rajjaṁ paṭipajja. Ahaṁ pana kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmi.
[¶11] For dear prince, you too will one day see grey hairs growing on your head. When this happens, after giving a prize village to the barber and carefully instructing the crown prince in kingship, you should shave off your hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Keep up this good practice that I have founded. Do not be my final man. When a pair of men are living, the one who breaks such good practice is their final man. Therefore I say to you, “Keep up this good practice that I have founded. Do not be my final man.”’
> Pali: Tena hi, tāta kumāra, yadā tvampi passeyyāsi sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni, atha kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyāsi. Yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyāsi, mā kho me tvaṁ antimapuriso ahosi. Yasmiṁ kho, tāta kumāra, purisayuge vattamāne evarūpassa kalyāṇassa vattassa samucchedo hoti so tesaṁ antimapuriso hoti. Taṁ tāhaṁ, tāta kumāra, evaṁ vadāmi— yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyāsi, mā kho me tvaṁ antimapuriso ahosī’ti.
[¶12] And so, after giving a prize village to the barber and carefully instructing the crown prince in kingship, King Maghadeva shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness here in this mango grove. He meditated spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, he spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. He meditated spreading a heart full of compassion … rejoicing … equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, he spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā maghadevo kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihāsi. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā … muditāsahagatena cetasā … upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihāsi.
[¶13] For 84,000 years King Maghadeva played games as a child, for 84,000 years he acted as viceroy, for 84,000 years he ruled the realm, and for 84,000 years he led the spiritual life after going forth here in this mango grove. And having developed the four divine meditations, when his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in a good place, a realm of divinity.
> Pali: Rājā kho panānanda, maghadevo caturāsītivassasahassāni kumārakīḷitaṁ kīḷi, caturāsītivassasahassāni oparajjaṁ kāresi, caturāsītivassasahassāni rajjaṁ kāresi, caturāsītivassasahassāni imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito brahmacariyamacari. So cattāro brahmavihāre bhāvetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmalokūpago ahosi.
[¶14] Then, after many years, many hundred years, many thousand years had passed, King Maghadeva’s son addressed his barber, ‘My dear barber, when you see grey hairs growing on my head, please tell me.’ And all unfolded as in the case of his father. And having developed the four divine meditations, when his body broke up, after death, Maghadeva’s son was reborn in a good place, a realm of divinity.
> Pali: Atha kho rañño, ānanda, maghadevassa putto bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena kappakaṁ āmantesi: ‘yadā me, samma kappaka, passeyyāsi sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni, atha kho āroceyyāsī’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, kappako rañño maghadevassa puttassa paccassosi. Addasā kho, ānanda, kappako bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena rañño maghadevassa puttassa sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni. Disvāna rañño maghadevassa puttaṁ etadavoca: ‘pātubhūtā kho devassa devadūtā; dissanti sirasmiṁ palitāni jātānī’ti. ‘Tena hi, samma kappaka, tāni palitāni sādhukaṁ saṇḍāsena uddharitvā mama añjalismiṁ patiṭṭhāpehī’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, kappako rañño maghadevassa puttassa paṭissutvā tāni palitāni sādhukaṁ saṇḍāsena uddharitvā rañño maghadevassa puttassa añjalismiṁ patiṭṭhāpesi. Atha kho, ānanda, rañño maghadevassa putto kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘pātubhūtā kho me, tāta kumāra, devadūtā; dissanti sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni; bhuttā kho pana me mānusakā kāmā; samayo dibbe kāme pariyesituṁ. Ehi tvaṁ, tāta kumāra, imaṁ rajjaṁ paṭipajja. Ahaṁ pana kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmi. Tena hi, tāta kumāra, yadā tvampi passeyyāsi sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni, atha kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyāsi. Yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyāsi, mā kho me tvaṁ antimapuriso ahosi. Yasmiṁ kho, tāta kumāra, purisayuge vattamāne evarūpassa kalyāṇassa vattassa samucchedo hoti so tesaṁ antimapuriso hoti. Taṁ tāhaṁ, tāta kumāra, evaṁ vadāmi— yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyāsi, mā kho me tvaṁ antimapuriso ahosī’ti. Atha kho, ānanda, rañño maghadevassa putto kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihāsi. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā … muditāsahagatena cetasā … upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihāsi. Rañño kho panānanda, maghadevassa putto caturāsītivassasahassāni kumārakīḷitaṁ kīḷi, caturāsītivassasahassāni oparajjaṁ kāresi, caturāsītivassasahassāni rajjaṁ kāresi, caturāsītivassasahassāni imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito brahmacariyamacari. So cattāro brahmavihāre bhāvetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmalokūpago ahosi.
[¶15] And a lineage of 84,000 kings, sons of sons of King Maghadeva, shaved off their hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness here in this mango grove. They meditated spreading a heart full of love … compassion … rejoicing … equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. For 84,000 years they played games as a child, for 84,000 years they acted as viceroy, for 84,000 years they ruled the realm, and for 84,000 years they led the spiritual life after going forth here in this mango grove. And having developed the four divine meditations, when their bodies broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a realm of divinity.
> Pali: Rañño kho panānanda, maghadevassa puttapaputtakā tassa paramparā caturāsītirājasahassāni imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajiṁsu. Te mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihariṁsu, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihariṁsu. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā … muditāsahagatena cetasā … upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihariṁsu, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihariṁsu. Caturāsītivassasahassāni kumārakīḷitaṁ kīḷiṁsu, caturāsītivassasahassāni oparajjaṁ kāresuṁ, caturāsītivassasahassāni rajjaṁ kāresuṁ, caturāsītivassasahassāni imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā brahmacariyamacariṁsu. Te cattāro brahmavihāre bhāvetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmalokūpagā ahesuṁ.
[¶16] Nimi was the last of those kings, a just and principled king, a great king who stood by his duty. He justly treated brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. And he observed the sabbath on the fourteenth, fifteenth, and eighth of the fortnight.
> Pali: Nimi tesaṁ rājā pacchimako ahosi dhammiko dhammarājā dhamme ṭhito mahārājā; dhammaṁ carati brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca; uposathañca upavasati cātuddasiṁ pañcadasiṁ aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassa.
[¶17] Once upon a time, Ānanda, while the gods of the thirty-three were sitting together in the Hall of Clear Right, this discussion came up among them: ‘The people of Videha are so fortunate, so very fortunate to have Nimi as their king. He is a just and principled king, a great king who stands by his duty. He justly treats brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. And he observes the sabbath on the fourteenth, fifteenth, and eighth of the fortnight.’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayamantarākathā udapādi: ‘lābhā vata, bho, videhānaṁ, suladdhaṁ vata, bho, videhānaṁ, yesaṁ nimi rājā dhammiko dhammarājā dhamme ṭhito mahārājā; dhammaṁ carati brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca; uposathañca upavasati cātuddasiṁ pañcadasiṁ aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassā’ti.
[¶18] Then Sakka, lord of gods, addressed the gods of the thirty-three, ‘Good fellows, would you like to see King Nimi?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi: ‘iccheyyātha no tumhe, mārisā, nimiṁ rājānaṁ daṭṭhun’ti?
[¶19] ‘We would.’
> Pali: ‘Icchāma mayaṁ, mārisa, nimiṁ rājānaṁ daṭṭhun’ti.
[¶20] Now at that time it was the fifteenth day sabbath, and King Nimi had bathed his head and was sitting upstairs in the royal longhouse to observe the sabbath. Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, Sakka vanished from the thirty-three gods and reappeared in front of King Nimi. He said to the king, ‘You’re fortunate, Great King, so very fortunate. The gods of the thirty-three were sitting together in the Hall of Clear Right, where they were singing your praises. They would like to see you. I shall send a chariot harnessed with a thousand thoroughbreds for you, Great King. Mount the heavenly chariot, Great King, without wavering!’ King Nimi consented with silence.
> Pali: Tena kho pana, ānanda, samayena nimi rājā tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhāto uposathiko uparipāsādavaragato nisinno hoti. Atha kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—devesu tāvatiṁsesu antarahito nimissa rañño pamukhe pāturahosi. Atha kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo nimiṁ rājānaṁ etadavoca: ‘lābhā te, mahārāja, suladdhaṁ te, mahārāja. Devā, mahārāja, tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ kittayamānarūpā sannisinnā: “lābhā vata, bho, videhānaṁ, suladdhaṁ vata, bho, videhānaṁ, yesaṁ nimi rājā dhammiko dhammarājā dhamme ṭhito mahārājā; dhammaṁ carati brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca; uposathañca upavasati cātuddasiṁ pañcadasiṁ aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassā”ti. Devā te, mahārāja, tāvatiṁsā dassanakāmā. Tassa te ahaṁ, mahārāja, sahassayuttaṁ ājaññarathaṁ pahiṇissāmi; abhiruheyyāsi, mahārāja, dibbaṁ yānaṁ avikampamāno’ti. Adhivāsesi kho, ānanda, nimi rājā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶21] Then, knowing that the king had consented, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, Sakka vanished from King Nimi and reappeared among the gods of the thirty-three.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo nimissa rañño adhivāsanaṁ viditvā—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—nimissa rañño pamukhe antarahito devesu tāvatiṁsesu pāturahosi.
[¶22] Then Sakka, lord of gods, addressed his chariot handler Mātali, ‘Come, dear Mātali, harness the chariot with a thousand thoroughbreds. Then go to King Nimi and say, “Great king, this chariot has been sent for you by Sakka, lord of gods. Mount the heavenly chariot, Great King, without wavering!”’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo mātaliṁ saṅgāhakaṁ āmantesi: ‘ehi tvaṁ, samma mātali, sahassayuttaṁ ājaññarathaṁ yojetvā nimiṁ rājānaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadehi— ayaṁ te, mahārāja, sahassayutto ājaññaratho sakkena devānamindena pesito; abhiruheyyāsi, mahārāja, dibbaṁ yānaṁ avikampamāno’ti.
[¶23] ‘Yes, lord,’ replied Mātali. He did as Sakka asked, and said to the king, ‘Great king, this chariot has been sent for you by Sakka, lord of gods. Mount the heavenly chariot, Great King, without wavering! But which way should we go—the way of those who experience the result of bad deeds, or the way of those who experience the result of good deeds?’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhaddantavā’ti kho, ānanda, mātali saṅgāhako sakkassa devānamindassa paṭissutvā sahassayuttaṁ ājaññarathaṁ yojetvā nimiṁ rājānaṁ upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ te, mahārāja, sahassayutto ājaññaratho sakkena devānamindena pesito; abhiruha, mahārāja, dibbaṁ yānaṁ avikampamāno. Api ca, mahārāja, katamena taṁ nemi, yena vā pāpakammā pāpakānaṁ kammānaṁ vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, yena vā kalyāṇakammā kalyāṇakammānaṁ vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedentī’ti?
[¶24] ‘Take me both ways, Mātali.’
> Pali: ‘Ubhayeneva maṁ, mātali, nehī’ti.
[¶25] Mātali brought King Nimi to the Hall of Clear Right. Sakka saw King Nimi coming off in the distance, and said to him: ‘Come, Great King! Welcome, Great King! The gods of the thirty-three who wanted to see you were sitting together in the Hall of Clear Right, where they were singing your praises. The gods of the thirty-three would like to see you. Enjoy heavenly glory among the gods!’
> Pali: Sampavesesi kho, ānanda, mātali, saṅgāhako nimiṁ rājānaṁ sudhammaṁ sabhaṁ. Addasā kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo nimiṁ rājānaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna nimiṁ rājānaṁ etadavoca: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja. Svāgataṁ, mahārāja. Devā te dassanakāmā, mahārāja, tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ kittayamānarūpā sannisinnā: “lābhā vata, bho, videhānaṁ, suladdhaṁ vata, bho, videhānaṁ, yesaṁ nimi rājā dhammiko dhammarājā dhamme ṭhito mahārājā; dhammaṁ carati brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca; uposathañca upavasati cātuddasiṁ pañcadasiṁ aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassā”ti. Devā te, mahārāja, tāvatiṁsā dassanakāmā. Abhirama, mahārāja, devesu devānubhāvenā’ti.
[¶26] ‘Enough, good fellow. Send me back to Mithilā right away. That way I shall justly treat brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. And I shall observe the sabbath on the fourteenth, fifteenth, and eighth of the fortnight.’
> Pali: ‘Alaṁ, mārisa, tattheva maṁ mithilaṁ paṭinetu. Tathāhaṁ dhammaṁ carissāmi brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca; uposathañca upavasāmi cātuddasiṁ pañcadasiṁ aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassā’ti.
[¶27] Then Sakka, lord of gods, addressed his chariot handler Mātali, ‘Come, dear Mātali, harness the chariot with a thousand thoroughbreds and send King Nimi back to Mithilā right away.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo mātaliṁ saṅgāhakaṁ āmantesi: ‘ehi tvaṁ, samma mātali, sahassayuttaṁ ājaññarathaṁ yojetvā nimiṁ rājānaṁ tattheva mithilaṁ paṭinehī’ti.
[¶28] ‘Yes, lord,’ replied Mātali, and did as Sakka asked. And there King Nimi justly treated his people, and observed the sabbath.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhaddantavā’ti kho, ānanda, mātali saṅgāhako sakkassa devānamindassa paṭissutvā sahassayuttaṁ ājaññarathaṁ yojetvā nimiṁ rājānaṁ tattheva mithilaṁ paṭinesi. Tatra sudaṁ, ānanda, nimi rājā dhammaṁ carati brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca, uposathañca upavasati cātuddasiṁ pañcadasiṁ aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassāti.
[¶29] Then, after many years, many hundred years, many thousand years had passed, King Nimi addressed his barber, ‘My dear barber, when you see grey hairs growing on my head, please tell me.’ And all unfolded as before.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, nimi rājā bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena kappakaṁ āmantesi: ‘yadā me, samma kappaka, passeyyāsi sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni, atha me āroceyyāsī’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, kappako nimissa rañño paccassosi. Addasā kho, ānanda, kappako bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena nimissa rañño sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni. Disvāna nimiṁ rājānaṁ etadavoca: ‘pātubhūtā kho devassa devadūtā; dissanti sirasmiṁ palitāni jātānī’ti. ‘Tena hi, samma kappaka, tāni palitāni sādhukaṁ saṇḍāsena uddharitvā mama añjalismiṁ patiṭṭhāpehī’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, kappako nimissa rañño paṭissutvā tāni palitāni sādhukaṁ saṇḍāsena uddharitvā nimissa rañño añjalismiṁ patiṭṭhāpesi. Atha kho, ānanda, nimi rājā kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘pātubhūtā kho me, tāta kumāra, devadūtā; dissanti sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni; bhuttā kho pana me mānusakā kāmā; samayo dibbe kāme pariyesituṁ. Ehi tvaṁ, tāta kumāra, imaṁ rajjaṁ paṭipajja. Ahaṁ pana kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmi. Tena hi, tāta kumāra, yadā tvampi passeyyāsi sirasmiṁ palitāni jātāni, atha kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyāsi. Yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyāsi, mā kho me tvaṁ antimapuriso ahosi. Yasmiṁ kho, tāta kumāra, purisayuge vattamāne evarūpassa kalyāṇassa vattassa samucchedo hoti so tesaṁ antimapuriso hoti. Taṁ tāhaṁ, tāta kumāra, evaṁ vadāmi: “yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyāsi, mā kho me tvaṁ antimapuriso ahosī”’ti.
[¶30] And having developed the four divine meditations, when his body broke up, after death, King Nimi was reborn in a good place, a realm of divinity.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, nimi rājā kappakassa gāmavaraṁ datvā jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihāsi. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā … muditāsahagatena cetasā … upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā vihāsi. Nimi kho panānanda, rājā caturāsītivassasahassāni kumārakīḷitaṁ kīḷi, caturāsītivassasahassāni oparajjaṁ kāresi, caturāsītivassasahassāni rajjaṁ kāresi, caturāsītivassasahassāni imasmiṁyeva maghadevaambavane agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito brahmacariyamacari. So cattāro brahmavihāre bhāvetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmalokūpago ahosi.
[¶31] But King Nimi had a son named Kaḷāra Janaka. He didn’t go forth from the lay life to homelessness. He broke that good practice. He was their final man.
> Pali: Nimissa kho panānanda, rañño kaḷārajanako nāma putto ahosi. Na so agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. So taṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ samucchindi. So tesaṁ antimapuriso ahosi.
[¶32] Ānanda, you might think, ‘Surely King Maghadeva, by whom that good practice was founded, must have been someone else at that time?’ But you should not see it like this. I myself was King Maghadeva at that time. I was the one who founded that good practice, which was kept up by those who came after.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, ānanda, evamassa: ‘añño nūna tena samayena rājā maghadevo ahosi, yena taṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitan’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, ānanda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Ahaṁ tena samayena rājā maghadevo ahosiṁ. Ahaṁ taṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihiniṁ, mayā taṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ; pacchimā janatā anuppavattesi.
[¶33] But that good practice doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the realm of divinity. But now I have founded a good practice that does lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment.
> Pali: Taṁ kho panānanda, kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā. Idaṁ kho panānanda, etarahi mayā kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati.
[¶34] And what is that good practice? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. This is the good practice I have now founded that leads to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment.
> Pali: Katamañcānanda, etarahi mayā kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, etarahi mayā kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati.
[¶35] Ānanda, I say to you: ‘You all should keep up this good practice that I have founded. Do not be my final men.’ When a pair of men are living, the one who breaks such good practice is their final man. Ānanda, I say to you: ‘You all should keep up this good practice that I have founded. Do not be my final men.’”
> Pali: Taṁ vo ahaṁ, ānanda, evaṁ vadāmi: ‘yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyātha, mā kho me tumhe antimapurisā ahuvattha’. Yasmiṁ kho, ānanda, purisayuge vattamāne evarūpassa kalyāṇassa vattassa samucchedo hoti so tesaṁ antimapuriso hoti. Taṁ vo ahaṁ, ānanda, evaṁ vadāmi: ‘yena me idaṁ kalyāṇaṁ vattaṁ nihitaṁ anuppavatteyyātha, mā kho me tumhe antimapurisā ahuvatthā’”ti.
[¶36] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶37] > Pali: Maghadevasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 92. MN 84 · At Madhurā
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/92/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/92/#p-N
[¶0] MN 84 · At Madhurā
> Pali: MN 84 · Madhurasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Mahākaccāna was staying near Madhurā in the Nut Grass Grove.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā mahākaccāno madhurāyaṁ viharati gundāvane.
[¶2] King Avantiputta of Madhurā heard, “It seems the ascetic Kaccāna is staying near Madhurā in the Nut Grass Grove. He has this good reputation: ‘He is astute, competent, intelligent, learned, a brilliant speaker, eloquent, mature, a perfected one.’ It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: Assosi kho rājā mādhuro avantiputto: “samaṇo khalu, bho, kaccāno madhurāyaṁ viharati gundāvane. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ kaccānaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī bahussuto cittakathī kalyāṇapaṭibhāno vuddho ceva arahā ca’. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶3] And then King Avantiputta had the finest carriages harnessed. He mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out in full royal pomp from Madhurā to see Mahākaccāna. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached Mahākaccāna on foot. They exchanged greetings, and when the greetings and polite conversation were over, the king sat down to one side and said to Mahākaccāna:
> Pali: Atha kho rājā mādhuro avantiputto bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi madhurāya niyyāsi mahaccarājānubhāvena āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ dassanāya. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā mahākaccānena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho rājā mādhuro avantiputto āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etadavoca:
[¶4] “Worthy Kaccāna, the brahmins say: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.’ What does the worthy Kaccāna have to say about this?”
> Pali: “brāhmaṇā, bho kaccāna, evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’ti. Idha bhavaṁ kaccāno kimakkhāyī”ti?
[¶5] “Great king, that’s just hearsay in the world. And here’s a way to understand that it’s just hearsay in the world.
> Pali: “Ghosoyeva kho eso, mahārāja, lokasmiṁ: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’ti. Tadamināpetaṁ, mahārāja, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ghosoyeveso lokasmiṁ: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’ti.
[¶6] What do you think, Great King? Suppose an aristocrat prospers in money, grain, silver, or gold. Wouldn’t there be aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials who would get up before him and go to bed after him, and be obliging, behaving nicely and speaking politely?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, khattiyassa cepi ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā khattiyopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī … brāhmaṇopissāssa … vessopissāssa … suddopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti?
[¶7] “There would, worthy Kaccāna.”
> Pali: “Khattiyassa cepi, bho kaccāna, ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā khattiyopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī … brāhmaṇopissāssa … vessopissāssa … suddopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti.
[¶8] “What do you think, Great King? Suppose a brahmin … a peasant … a menial prospers in money, grain, silver, or gold. Wouldn’t there be menials, aristocrats, brahmins, and peasants who would get up before him and go to bed after him, and be obliging, behaving nicely and speaking politely?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, brāhmaṇassa cepi ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā brāhmaṇopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī … vessopissāssa … suddopissāssa … khattiyopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti? “Brāhmaṇassa cepi, bho kaccāna, ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā brāhmaṇopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī … vessopissāssa … suddopissāssa … khattiyopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, vessassa cepi ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā vessopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī … suddopissāssa … khattiyopissāssa … brāhmaṇopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti? “Vessassa cepi, bho kaccāna, ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā vessopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī … suddopissāssa … khattiyopissāssa … brāhmaṇopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, suddassa cepi ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā suddopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī … khattiyopissāssa … brāhmaṇopissāssa … vessopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti?
[¶9] “There would, worthy Kaccāna.”
> Pali: “Suddassa cepi, bho kaccāna, ijjheyya dhanena vā dhaññena vā rajatena vā jātarūpena vā suddopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādīti … khattiyopissāssa … brāhmaṇopissāssa … vessopissāssa pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī”ti.
[¶10] “What do you think, Great King? If this is so, are the four classes equal or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, yadi evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶11] “Certainly, worthy Kaccāna, in this case these four classes are equal. I can’t see any difference between them.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho kaccāna, evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti. Nesaṁ ettha kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶12] “And here’s another way to understand that the claims of the brahmins are just hearsay in the world.
> Pali: “Imināpi kho etaṁ, mahārāja, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ghosoyeveso lokasmiṁ: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’ti.
[¶13] What do you think, Great King? Take an aristocrat who kills living creatures, steals, and commits sexual misconduct; uses speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and is covetous, malicious, and has wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, would they be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell, or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idhassa khattiyo pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavāco pharusavāco samphappalāpī abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶14] “Such an aristocrat would be reborn in a bad place. That’s what I think, but I’ve also heard it from the perfected ones.”
> Pali: “Khattiyopi hi, bho kaccāna, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavāco pharusavāco samphappalāpī abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya. Evaṁ me ettha hoti, evañca pana me etaṁ arahataṁ sutan”ti.
[¶15] “Good, good, Great King! It’s good that you think so, and it’s good that you’ve heard it from the perfected ones. What do you think, Great King? Take a brahmin … a peasant … a menial who kills living creatures, steals, and commits sexual misconduct; uses speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and is covetous, malicious, and has wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, would they be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell, or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, mahārāja. Sādhu kho te etaṁ, mahārāja, evaṁ hoti, sādhu ca pana te etaṁ arahataṁ sutaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idhassa brāhmaṇo …pe… idhassa vesso …pe… idhassa suddo pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶16] “Such a brahmin, peasant, or menial would be reborn in a bad place. That’s what I think, but I’ve also heard it from the perfected ones.”
> Pali: “Suddopi hi, bho kaccāna, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya. Evaṁ me ettha hoti, evañca pana me etaṁ arahataṁ sutan”ti.
[¶17] “Good, good, Great King! It’s good that you think so, and it’s good that you’ve heard it from the perfected ones. What do you think, Great King? If this is so, are the four classes equal or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, mahārāja. Sādhu kho te etaṁ, mahārāja, evaṁ hoti, sādhu ca pana te etaṁ arahataṁ sutaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, yadi evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶18] “Certainly, worthy Kaccāna, in this case these four classes are equal. I can’t see any difference between them.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho kaccāna, evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti. Nesaṁ ettha kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶19] “And here’s another way to understand that the claims of the brahmins are just hearsay in the world.
> Pali: “Imināpi kho etaṁ, mahārāja, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ghosoyeveso lokasmiṁ: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶20] What do you think, Great King? Take an aristocrat who doesn’t kill living creatures, steal, or commit sexual misconduct. They don’t use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re contented, kind-hearted, with right view. When their body breaks up, after death, would they be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm, or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idhassa khattiyo pāṇātipātā paṭivirato, adinnādānā paṭivirato, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato, musāvādā paṭivirato, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato, samphappalāpā paṭivirato, anabhijjhālu abyāpannacitto sammādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶21] “Such an aristocrat would be reborn in a good place. That’s what I think, but I’ve also heard it from the perfected ones.”
> Pali: “Khattiyopi hi, bho kaccāna, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato, adinnādānā paṭivirato, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato, musāvādā paṭivirato, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato, samphappalāpā paṭivirato, anabhijjhālu abyāpannacitto sammādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya. Evaṁ me ettha hoti, evañca pana me etaṁ arahataṁ sutan”ti.
[¶22] “Good, good, Great King! It’s good that you think so, and it’s good that you’ve heard it from the perfected ones. What do you think, Great King? Take a brahmin, peasant, or menial who doesn’t kill living creatures, steal, or commit sexual misconduct. They don’t use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re contented, kind-hearted, with right view. When their body breaks up, after death, would they be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm, or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, mahārāja. Sādhu kho te etaṁ, mahārāja, evaṁ hoti, sādhu ca pana te etaṁ arahataṁ sutaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idhassa brāhmaṇo, idhassa vesso, idhassa suddo pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶23] “Such a brahmin, peasant, or menial would be reborn in a good place. That’s what I think, but I’ve also heard it from the perfected ones.”
> Pali: “Suddopi hi, bho kaccāna, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato, adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya. Evaṁ me ettha hoti, evañca pana me etaṁ arahataṁ sutan”ti.
[¶24] “Good, good, Great King! It’s good that you think so, and it’s good that you’ve heard it from the perfected ones. What do you think, Great King? If this is so, are the four classes equal or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, mahārāja. Sādhu kho te etaṁ, mahārāja, evaṁ hoti, sādhu ca pana te etaṁ arahataṁ sutaṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, yadi evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶25] “Certainly, worthy Kaccāna, in this case these four classes are equal. I can’t see any difference between them.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho kaccāna, evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti. Nesaṁ ettha kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶26] “And here’s another way to understand that the claims of the brahmins are just hearsay in the world.
> Pali: “Imināpi kho etaṁ, mahārāja, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ghosoyeveso lokasmiṁ: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶27] What do you think, Great King? Take an aristocrat who breaks into houses, plunders wealth, steals from isolated buildings, commits highway robbery, and commits adultery. Suppose your men arrest him and present him to you, saying: ‘Your Majesty, this man is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ What would you do to him?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha khattiyo sandhiṁ vā chindeyya, nillopaṁ vā hareyya, ekāgārikaṁ vā kareyya, paripanthe vā tiṭṭheyya, paradāraṁ vā gaccheyya, tañce te purisā gahetvā dasseyyuṁ: ‘ayaṁ te, deva, coro āgucārī. Imassa yaṁ icchasi taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶28] “I would have him executed, fined, or banished, or dealt with as befits the crime. Why is that? Because he’s lost his former status as an aristocrat, and is just reckoned as a bandit.”
> Pali: “Ghāteyyāma vā, bho kaccāna, jāpeyyāma vā pabbājeyyāma vā yathāpaccayaṁ vā kareyyāma. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yā hissa, bho kaccāna, pubbe ‘khattiyo’ti samaññā sāssa antarahitā; corotveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchatī”ti.
[¶29] “What do you think, Great King? Take a brahmin, peasant, or menial who breaks into houses, plunders wealth, steals from isolated buildings, commits highway robbery, and commits adultery. Suppose your men arrest him and present him to you, saying: ‘Your Majesty, this man is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ What would you do to him?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha brāhmaṇo, idha vesso, idha suddo sandhiṁ vā chindeyya, nillopaṁ vā hareyya, ekāgārikaṁ vā kareyya, paripanthe vā tiṭṭheyya, paradāraṁ vā gaccheyya, tañce te purisā gahetvā dasseyyuṁ: ‘ayaṁ te, deva, coro āgucārī. Imassa yaṁ icchasi taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶30] “I would have him executed, fined, or banished, or dealt with as befits the crime. Why is that? Because he’s lost his former status as a brahmin, peasant, or menial, and is just reckoned as a bandit.”
> Pali: “Ghāteyyāma vā, bho kaccāna, jāpeyyāma vā pabbājeyyāma vā yathāpaccayaṁ vā kareyyāma. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yā hissa, bho kaccāna, pubbe ‘suddo’ti samaññā sāssa antarahitā; corotveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchatī”ti.
[¶31] “What do you think, Great King? If this is so, are the four classes equal or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, yadi evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶32] “Certainly, worthy Kaccāna, in this case these four classes are equal. I can’t see any difference between them.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho kaccāna, evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti. Nesaṁ ettha kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶33] “And here’s another way to understand that the claims of the brahmins are just hearsay in the world.
> Pali: “Imināpi kho etaṁ, mahārāja, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ghosoyeveso lokasmiṁ: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶34] What do you think, Great King? Take an aristocrat who shaves off their hair and beard, dresses in ocher robes, and goes forth from the lay life to homelessness. They abstain from killing living creatures, stealing, and lying. They abstain from eating at night, eat in one part of the day, and are chaste, ethical, and of good character. How would you treat them?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha khattiyo kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito assa virato pāṇātipātā, virato adinnādānā, virato musāvādā, rattūparato, ekabhattiko, brahmacārī, sīlavā, kalyāṇadhammo. Kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶35] “I would bow to them, rise in their presence, or offer them a seat. I’d invite them to accept robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. And I’d organize their lawful guarding and protection. Why is that? Because they’ve lost their former status as an aristocrat, and are just reckoned as an ascetic.”
> Pali: “Abhivādeyyāma vā, bho kaccāna, paccuṭṭheyyāma vā āsanena vā nimanteyyāma abhinimanteyyāma vā naṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi dhammikaṁ vā assa rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidaheyyāma. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yā hissa, bho kaccāna, pubbe ‘khattiyo’ti samaññā sāssa antarahitā; samaṇotveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchatī”ti.
[¶36] “What do you think, Great King? Take a brahmin, peasant, or menial who shaves off their hair and beard, dresses in ocher robes, and goes forth from the lay life to homelessness. They abstain from killing living creatures, stealing, and lying. They abstain from eating at night, eat in one part of the day, and are chaste, ethical, and of good character. How would you treat them?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha brāhmaṇo, idha vesso, idha suddo kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito assa virato pāṇātipātā, virato adinnādānā virato musāvādā, rattūparato, ekabhattiko, brahmacārī, sīlavā, kalyāṇadhammo. Kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶37] “I would bow to them, rise in their presence, or offer them a seat. I’d invite them to accept robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. And I’d organize their lawful guarding and protection. Why is that? Because they’ve lost their former status as a brahmin, peasant, or menial, and are just reckoned as an ascetic.”
> Pali: “Abhivādeyyāma vā, bho kaccāna, paccuṭṭheyyāma vā āsanena vā nimanteyyāma abhinimanteyyāma vā naṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi dhammikaṁ vā assa rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidaheyyāma. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yā hissa, bho kaccāna, pubbe ‘suddo’ti samaññā sāssa antarahitā; samaṇotveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchatī”ti.
[¶38] “What do you think, Great King? If this is so, are the four classes equal or not? Or how do you see this?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, yadi evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti no vā? Kathaṁ vā te ettha hotī”ti?
[¶39] “Certainly, worthy Kaccāna, in this case these four classes are equal. I can’t see any difference between them.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho kaccāna, evaṁ sante, ime cattāro vaṇṇā samasamā honti. Nesaṁ ettha kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶40] “This is another way to understand that this is just hearsay in the world: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.’”
> Pali: “Imināpi kho etaṁ, mahārāja, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ghosoyeveso lokasmiṁ: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶41] When he had spoken, King Avantiputta of Madhurā said to Mahākaccāna, “Excellent, worthy Kaccāna! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the worthy Kaccāna has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Kaccāna, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Kaccāna remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, rājā mādhuro avantiputto āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho kaccāna, abhikkantaṁ, bho kaccāna. Seyyathāpi, bho kaccāna, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā kaccānena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ kaccānaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ kaccāno dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶42] “Great king, don’t go for refuge to me. You should go for refuge to that same Blessed One to whom I have gone for refuge.”
> Pali: “Mā kho maṁ tvaṁ, mahārāja, saraṇaṁ agamāsi. Tameva tvaṁ bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gaccha yamahaṁ saraṇaṁ gato”ti.
[¶43] “But where is that Blessed One at present, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: “Kahaṁ pana, bho kaccāna, etarahi so bhagavā viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti?
[¶44] “Great king, the Buddha has already become fully quenched.”
> Pali: “Parinibbuto kho, mahārāja, etarahi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti.
[¶45] “Worthy Kaccāna, if I heard that the Buddha was within ten leagues, or twenty, or even up to a hundred leagues away, I’d go a hundred leagues to see him. But since the Buddha has become fully quenched, I go for refuge to that fully quenched Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Kaccāna remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: “Sacepi mayaṁ, bho kaccāna, suṇeyyāma taṁ bhagavantaṁ dasasu yojanesu, dasapi mayaṁ yojanāni gaccheyyāma taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ. Sacepi mayaṁ, bho kaccāna, suṇeyyāma taṁ bhagavantaṁ vīsatiyā yojanesu, tiṁsāya yojanesu, cattārīsāya yojanesu, paññāsāya yojanesu, paññāsampi mayaṁ yojanāni gaccheyyāma taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ. Yojanasate cepi mayaṁ bho kaccāna, suṇeyyāma taṁ bhagavantaṁ, yojanasatampi mayaṁ gaccheyyāma taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ. Yato ca, bho kaccāna, parinibbuto so bhagavā, parinibbutampi mayaṁ bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ kaccāno dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶46] > Pali: Madhurasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 93. MN 85 · With Prince Bodhi · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/93/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/93/#p-N
[¶0] MN 85 · With Prince Bodhi
> Pali: MN 85 · Bodhirājakumārasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Bhaggas at Crocodile’s Bellow, in the deer park at Bhesakaḷā’s Wood.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā bhaggesu viharati susumāragire bhesakaḷāvane migadāye.
[¶2] Now at that time a new stilt longhouse named Pink Lotus had recently been constructed for Prince Bodhi. It had not yet been occupied by an ascetic or brahmin or any human at all.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bodhissa rājakumārassa kokanado nāma pāsādo acirakārito hoti anajjhāvuṭṭho samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtena.
[¶3] Then Prince Bodhi addressed the student Sañjikāputta, “Please, dear Sañjikāputta, go to the Buddha, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And then ask him whether he would accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the mendicant Saṅgha.”
> Pali: Atha kho bodhi rājakumāro sañjikāputtaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vanda, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘bodhi, bhante, rājakumāro bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi: ‘adhivāsetu kira, bhante, bhagavā bodhissa rājakumārassa svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā’”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, worthy sir,” Sañjikāputta replied. He did as Prince Bodhi asked, and the Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho sañjikāputto māṇavo bodhissa rājakumārassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho sañjikāputto māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “bodhi kho rājakumāro bhoto gotamassa pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati. Evañca vadeti: ‘adhivāsetu kira bhavaṁ gotamo bodhissa rājakumārassa svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā’”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶5] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Sañjikāputta rose from his seat, went to Prince Bodhi, and said, “I gave your message to the worthy Gotama, and he accepted.”
> Pali: Atha kho sañjikāputto māṇavo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena bodhi rājakumāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bodhiṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavoca: “avocumha bhoto vacanena taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ: ‘bodhi kho rājakumāro bhoto gotamassa pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati. Evañca vadeti— adhivāsetu kira bhavaṁ gotamo bodhissa rājakumārassa svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā’ti. Adhivuṭṭhañca pana samaṇena gotamenā”ti.
[¶6] And when the night had passed Prince Bodhi had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home. He also had the Pink Lotus longhouse spread with white cloth down to the last step of the staircase. Then he said to Sañjikāputta, “Please, dear Sañjikāputta, go to the Buddha, and announce the time, saying, ‘Sir, it’s time. The meal is ready.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bodhi rājakumāro tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā, kokanadañca pāsādaṁ odātehi dussehi santharāpetvā yāva pacchimasopānakaḷevarā, sañjikāputtaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocehi: ‘kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan’”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, worthy sir,” Sañjikāputta replied, and he did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho sañjikāputto māṇavo bodhissa rājakumārassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocesi: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶8] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to Prince Bodhi’s home.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena bodhissa rājakumārassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.
[¶9] Now at that time Prince Bodhi was standing outside the gates waiting for the Buddha. Seeing the Buddha coming off in the distance, he went out to greet him. After bowing and inviting the Buddha to go first, he approached the Pink Lotus longhouse. But the Buddha stopped by the last step of the staircase.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bodhi rājakumāro bahidvārakoṭṭhake ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ āgamayamāno. Addasā kho bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna paccuggantvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā purakkhatvā yena kokanado pāsādo tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho bhagavā pacchimaṁ sopānakaḷevaraṁ nissāya aṭṭhāsi.
[¶10] Then Prince Bodhi said to him, “Sir, let the Blessed One ascend on the cloth! Let the Holy One ascend on the cloth! It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.” But when he said this, the Buddha kept silent.
> Pali: Atha kho bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhiruhatu, bhante, bhagavā dussāni, abhiruhatu sugato dussāni; yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶11] For a second time … and a third time, Prince Bodhi said to him, “Sir, let the Blessed One ascend on the cloth! Let the Holy One ascend on the cloth! It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho …pe… tatiyampi kho bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhiruhatu, bhante, bhagavā dussāni, abhiruhatu sugato dussāni; yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶12] Then the Buddha glanced at Venerable Ānanda. So Ānanda said to Prince Bodhi, “Fold up the cloth, Prince. The Buddha will not step upon white cloth. The Realized One has sympathy for future generations.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ apalokesi. Atha kho āyasmā ānando bodhiṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavoca: “saṁharatu, rājakumāra, dussāni; na bhagavā celapaṭikaṁ akkamissati. Pacchimaṁ janataṁ tathāgato anukampatī”ti.
[¶13] So Prince Bodhi had the cloth folded up and the seats spread out upstairs in the longhouse. Then the Buddha ascended the longhouse and sat on the seats spread out together with the Saṅgha of mendicants.
> Pali: Atha kho bodhi rājakumāro dussāni saṁharāpetvā uparikokanadapāsāde āsanāni paññapesi. Atha kho bhagavā kokanadaṁ pāsādaṁ abhiruhitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.
[¶14] Then Prince Bodhi served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Prince Bodhi took a low seat, sat to one side, and said to him, “Sir, this is what I think: ‘Pleasure is not gained through pleasure; pleasure is gained through pain.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bodhi rājakumāro buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi. Atha kho bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mayhaṁ kho, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘na kho sukhena sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ, dukkhena kho sukhaṁ adhigantabban’”ti.
[¶15] “Prince, before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I too thought, ‘Pleasure is not gained through pleasure; pleasure is gained through pain.’
> Pali: “Mayhampi kho, rājakumāra, pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato etadahosi: ‘na kho sukhena sukhaṁ adhigantabbaṁ, dukkhena kho sukhaṁ adhigantabban’ti.
[¶16] Some time later, while still with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life—though my mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces—I shaved off my hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. Once I had gone forth I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, aparena samayena daharova samāno susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajiṁ. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso kālāma, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶17] Āḷāra Kālāma replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, rājakumāra, āḷāro kālāmo maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā, tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶18] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others. Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Āḷāra Kālāma declares: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditates knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ñāṇavādañca vadāmi, theravādañca jānāmi passāmīti ca paṭijānāmi, ahañceva aññe ca. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti; addhā āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ viharatī’ti.
[¶19] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, to what extent do you say you’ve realized this teaching with your own insight?’ When I said this, he declared the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, rājakumāra, āḷāro kālāmo ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶20] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Āḷāra Kālāma who has faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Āḷāra Kālāma says he has realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi vīriyaṁ …pe… sati … samādhi … paññā, mayhampatthi paññā. Yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ āḷāro kālāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶21] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, is it up to this point that you realized this teaching with your own insight, and declare having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘ettāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶22] ‘I have, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemī’ti.
[¶23] ‘I too have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶24] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it. So the teaching that I know, you know, and the teaching you know, I know. I am like you and you are like me. Come now, reverend! We should both lead this community together.’ And that is how my tutor Āḷāra Kālāma placed me, his pupil, on the same position as him, and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi, taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi. Yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi, tamahaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi tamahaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi. Iti yādiso ahaṁ, tādiso tuvaṁ; yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso ahaṁ. Ehi dāni, āvuso, ubhova santā imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharāmā’ti. Iti kho, rājakumāra, āḷāro kālāmo ācariyo me samāno attano antevāsiṁ maṁ samānaṁ attanā samasamaṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶25] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of nothingness.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva ākiñcaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶26] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶27] Uddaka replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, rājakumāra, udako rāmaputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā, tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶28] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ñāṇavādañca vadāmi, theravādañca jānāmi passāmīti ca paṭijānāmi, ahañceva aññe ca.
[¶29] Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Rāma declared: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditated knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesi; addhā rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ vihāsī’ti.
[¶30] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, to what extent did Rāma say he’d realized this teaching with his own insight?’ When I said this, Uddaka son of Rāma declared the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, rājakumāra, udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶31] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Rāma who had faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Rāma said he had realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmasseva ahosi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho rāmasseva ahosi vīriyaṁ …pe… sati … samādhi … paññā, mayhampatthi paññā. Yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶32] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, had Rāma realized this teaching with his own insight up to this point, and declared having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘ettāvatā no, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶33] ‘He had, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti.
[¶34] ‘I too have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶35] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it. So the teaching that Rāma directly knew, you know, and the teaching you know, Rāma directly knew. Rāma was like you and you are like Rāma. Come now, reverend! You should lead this community.’ And that is how my spiritual companion Uddaka son of Rāma placed me in the position of a tutor and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi. Yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi. Iti yādiso rāmo ahosi tādiso tuvaṁ, yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso rāmo ahosi. Ehi dāni, āvuso, tuvaṁ imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharā’ti. Iti kho, rājakumāra, udako rāmaputto sabrahmacārī me samāno ācariyaṭṭhāne maṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶36] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶37] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. Traveling stage by stage in the Magadhan lands, I arrived at the town of Senā in Uruvelā. There I saw a delightful park, a lovely grove with a flowing river that was clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby was a village to resort to for alms.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno, magadhesu anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno, yena uruvelā senānigamo tadavasariṁ. Tatthaddasaṁ ramaṇīyaṁ bhūmibhāgaṁ, pāsādikañca vanasaṇḍaṁ, nadiñca sandantiṁ setakaṁ supatitthaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ samantā ca gocaragāmaṁ.
[¶38] Then it occurred to me, ‘This park is truly delightful, a lovely grove with a flowing river that’s clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby there’s a village to resort to for alms. This is good enough for striving for a gentleman wanting to strive.’ So I sat down right there, thinking, ‘This is good enough for striving.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘ramaṇīyo vata bho bhūmibhāgo, pāsādiko ca vanasaṇḍo, nadī ca sandati setakā supatitthā, ramaṇīyā samantā ca gocaragāmo. Alaṁ vatidaṁ kulaputtassa padhānatthikassa padhānāyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, tattheva nisīdiṁ: ‘alamidaṁ padhānāyā’ti.
[¶39] And then these three similes, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, occurred to me.
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, rājakumāra, tisso upamā paṭibhaṁsu anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶40] Suppose there was a green, sappy log, and it was lying in water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Prince? By drilling the stick against that green, sappy log lying in water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ udake nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, api nu so puriso amuṁ allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ udake nikkhittaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶41] “No, sir. Why is that? Because it’s a green, sappy log, and it’s lying in the water. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bhante. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aduñhi, bhante, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ tañca pana udake nikkhittaṁ, yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶42] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who don’t live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. They haven’t internally given up or stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are incapable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the first example that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājakumāra, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi avūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho so ca ajjhattaṁ na suppahīno hoti, na suppaṭippassaddho. Opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, rājakumāra, paṭhamā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶43] Then a second example occurred to me.
> Pali: Aparāpi kho maṁ, rājakumāra, dutiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶44] Suppose there was a green, sappy log, and it was lying on dry land far from the water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Prince? By drilling the stick against that green, sappy log on dry land far from water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, api nu so puriso amuṁ allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶45] “No, sir. Why is that? Because it’s still a green, sappy log, despite the fact that it’s lying on dry land far from water. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bhante. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aduñhi, bhante, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ kiñcāpi ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ, yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶46] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. But they haven’t internally given up or stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are incapable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the second example that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājakumāra, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi vūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho so ca ajjhattaṁ na suppahīno hoti, na suppaṭippassaddho. Opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, rājakumāra, dutiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶47] Then a third example occurred to me.
> Pali: Aparāpi kho maṁ, rājakumāra, tatiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶48] Suppose there was a dried up, withered log, and it was lying on dry land far from the water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Prince? By drilling the stick against that dried up, withered log on dry land far from water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, api nu so puriso amuṁ sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶49] “Yes, sir. Why is that? Because it’s a dried up, withered log, and it’s lying on dry land far from water.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aduñhi, bhante, sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ, tañca pana ārakā udakā thale nikkhittan”ti.
[¶50] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. And they have internally given up and stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are capable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the third example that occurred to me. These are the three similes, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājakumāra, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi vūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho so ca ajjhattaṁ suppahīno hoti suppaṭippassaddho. Opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, bhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, bhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, rājakumāra, tatiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Imā kho maṁ, rājakumāra, tisso upamā paṭibhaṁsu anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶51] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I, with teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of my mouth, squeeze, squash, and scorch mind with mind?’ So that’s what I did, until sweat ran from my armpits. It was like when a strong man grabs a weaker man by the head or throat or shoulder and squeezes, squashes, and crushes them. In the same way, with teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of my mouth, I squeezed, squashed, and crushed mind with mind until sweat ran from my armpits. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇheyyaṁ abhinippīḷeyyaṁ abhisantāpeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhāmi abhinippīḷemi abhisantāpemi. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato kacchehi sedā muccanti. Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, balavā puriso dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ sīse vā gahetvā khandhe vā gahetvā abhiniggaṇheyya abhinippīḷeyya abhisantāpeyya; evameva kho me, rājakumāra, dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato kacchehi sedā muccanti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, rājakumāra, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶52] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I practice the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose. But then winds came out my ears making a loud noise, like the puffing of a blacksmith’s bellows. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu kaṇṇasotehi vātānaṁ nikkhamantānaṁ adhimatto saddo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya adhimatto saddo hoti; evameva kho me, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu kaṇṇasotehi vātānaṁ nikkhamantānaṁ adhimatto saddo hoti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, rājakumāra, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶53] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then severe winds ground my head, like a strong man was drilling into my head with a sharp point. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, balavā puriso tiṇhena sikharena muddhani abhimattheyya; evameva kho me, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, rājakumāra, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶54] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then I got a severe headache, like a strong man was tightening a strong leather strap around my head. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā honti. Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, balavā puriso daḷhena varattakkhaṇḍena sīse sīsaveṭhaṁ dadeyya; evameva kho me, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā honti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, rājakumāra, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶55] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then severe winds carved up my belly, like a deft butcher or their apprentice was slicing my belly open with a sharp meat cleaver. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā tiṇhena govikantanena kucchiṁ parikanteyya; evameva kho me, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā, vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, rājakumāra, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶56] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then there was a severe burning in my body, like two strong men grabbing a weaker man by the arms to burn and scorch him on a pit of glowing coals. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho hoti. Seyyathāpi, rājakumāra, dve balavanto purisā dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuyā santāpeyyuṁ samparitāpeyyuṁ; evameva kho me, rājakumāra, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho hoti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, rājakumāra, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶57] Then some deities saw me and said, ‘The ascetic Gotama is dead.’ Others said, ‘He’s not dead, but he’s dying.’ Others said, ‘He’s not dead or dying. The ascetic Gotama is a perfected one, for that is how the perfected ones live.’
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, rājakumāra, devatā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekaccā devatā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo, api ca kālaṁ karotī’ti. Ekaccā devatā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo, nāpi kālaṁ karoti. Arahaṁ samaṇo gotamo. Vihāro tveva so arahato evarūpo hotī’ti.
[¶58] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I practice completely cutting off food?’ But deities came to me and said, ‘Good fellow, don’t practice totally cutting off food. If you do, we’ll infuse heavenly nectar into your pores and you will live on that.’ Then it occurred to me, ‘If I claim to be completely fasting while these deities are infusing heavenly nectar in my pores, that would be a lie on my part.’ So I refused those deities, saying, ‘There’s no need.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajjeyyan’ti. Atha kho maṁ, rājakumāra, devatā upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘mā kho tvaṁ, mārisa, sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajji. Sace kho tvaṁ, mārisa, sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajjissasi, tassa te mayaṁ dibbaṁ ojaṁ lomakūpehi ajjhohāressāma, tāya tvaṁ yāpessasī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘ahañceva kho pana sabbaso ajajjitaṁ paṭijāneyyaṁ. Imā ca me devatā dibbaṁ ojaṁ lomakūpehi ajjhohāreyyuṁ, tāya cāhaṁ yāpeyyaṁ, taṁ mamassa musā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, tā devatā paccācikkhāmi. ‘Halan’ti vadāmi.
[¶59] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I just take a little bit of food each time, a handful of broth made from mung beans, horse gram, chickpeas, or green gram?’ So that’s what I did, until my body became severely emaciated. Due to eating so little, my major and minor limbs became like the joints of an eighty-year-old or a dying man, my bottom became like a camel’s hoof, my vertebrae stuck out like beads on a string, and my ribs were as gaunt as the broken-down rafters on an old barn. Due to eating so little, the gleam of my eyes sank deep in their sockets, like the gleam of water sunk deep down a well. Due to eating so little, my scalp shriveled and withered like a green bitter-gourd in the wind and sun. Due to eating so little, the skin of my belly stuck to my backbone, so that when I tried to rub the skin of my belly I grabbed my backbone, and when I tried to rub my backbone I rubbed the skin of my belly. Due to eating so little, when I tried to urinate or defecate I fell face down right there. Due to eating so little, when I tried to relieve my body by rubbing my limbs with my hands, the hair, rotted at its roots, fell out.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhāreyyaṁ pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ yadi vā hareṇukayūsan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ yadi vā hareṇukayūsaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhārayato pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ yadi vā hareṇukayūsaṁ, adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma āsītikapabbāni vā kāḷapabbāni vā; evamevassu me aṅgapaccaṅgāni bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma oṭṭhapadaṁ; evamevassu me ānisadaṁ hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma vaṭṭanāvaḷī; evamevassu me piṭṭhikaṇṭako uṇṇatāvanato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma jarasālāya gopānasiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti; evamevassu me phāsuḷiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma gambhīre udapāne udakatārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti; evamevassu me akkhikūpesu akkhitārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma tittakālābu āmakacchinno vātātapena samphuṭito hoti sammilāto; evamevassu me sīsacchavi samphuṭitā hoti sammilātā tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, ‘udaracchaviṁ parimasissāmī’ti piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi, ‘piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ parimasissāmī’ti udaracchaviṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi. Yāvassu me, rājakumāra, udaracchavi piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ allīnā hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, ‘vaccaṁ vā muttaṁ vā karissāmī’ti tattheva avakujjo papatāmi tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, imameva kāyaṁ assāsento pāṇinā gattāni anumajjāmi. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, pāṇinā gattāni anumajjato pūtimūlāni lomāni kāyasmā papatanti tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶60] Then some people saw me and said, ‘The ascetic Gotama is black.’ Some said, ‘He’s not black, he’s brown.’ Some said, ‘He’s neither black nor brown. The ascetic Gotama has dingy skin.’ That’s how far the pure, bright complexion of my skin had been ruined by taking so little food.
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, rājakumāra, manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘kāḷo samaṇo gotamo’ti, ekacce manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kāḷo samaṇo gotamo, sāmo samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekacce manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kāḷo samaṇo gotamo, napi sāmo, maṅguracchavi samaṇo gotamo’ti. Yāvassu me, rājakumāra, tāva parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto upahato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya.
## 94. MN 85 · With Prince Bodhi · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/94/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/94/#p-N
[¶0] Then it occurred to me, ‘Whatever ascetics and brahmins have experienced painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion—whether in the past, future, or present—this is as far as it goes, no-one has done more than this. But I have not achieved any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones by this severe, grueling work. Could there be another path to awakening?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci atītamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayiṁsu, etāvaparamaṁ nayito bhiyyo. Yepi hi keci anāgatamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayissanti, etāvaparamaṁ nayito bhiyyo. Yepi hi keci etarahi samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, etāvaparamaṁ nayito bhiyyo. Na kho panāhaṁ imāya kaṭukāya dukkarakārikāya adhigacchāmi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ; siyā nu kho añño maggo bodhāyā’ti.
[¶1] Then it occurred to me, ‘I recall sitting in the cool shade of a black plum tree while my father the Sakyan was off working. Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Could that be the path to awakening?’ Stemming from that memory came the understanding: ‘That is the path to awakening!’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ pitu sakkassa kammante sītāya jambucchāyāya nisinno vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharitā; siyā nu kho eso maggo bodhāyā’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, satānusāri viññāṇaṁ ahosi: ‘eseva maggo bodhāyā’ti.
[¶2] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why am I afraid of that pleasure, for it has nothing to do with sensual pleasures or unskillful qualities?’ Then it occurred to me, ‘I’m not afraid of that pleasure, for it has nothing to do with sensual pleasures or unskillful qualities.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ tassa sukhassa bhāyāmi yaṁ taṁ sukhaṁ aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehī’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘na kho ahaṁ tassa sukhassa bhāyāmi yaṁ taṁ sukhaṁ aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehī’ti.
[¶3] Then it occurred to me, ‘I can’t achieve that pleasure with a body so severely emaciated. Why don’t I eat some solid food, some rice and porridge?’ So I ate some solid food. Now at that time the group of five mendicants were attending on me, thinking, ‘The ascetic Gotama will tell us of any truth that he realizes.’ But when I ate some solid food, they left disappointed in me, saying, ‘The ascetic Gotama has become indulgent; he has strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘na kho taṁ sukaraṁ sukhaṁ adhigantuṁ evaṁ adhimattakasimānaṁ pattakāyena. Yannūnāhaṁ oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāreyyaṁ odanakummāsan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ odanakummāsaṁ. Tena kho pana maṁ, rājakumāra, samayena pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū paccupaṭṭhitā honti: ‘yaṁ kho samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ adhigamissati taṁ no ārocessatī’ti. Yato kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ odanakummāsaṁ, atha me te pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū nibbijja pakkamiṁsu: ‘bāhulliko samaṇo gotamo padhānavibbhanto, āvatto bāhullāyā’ti.
[¶4] After eating solid food and gathering my strength, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward recollection of past lives. I recollected many past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. And so I recollected my many kinds of past lives, with features and details. This was the first knowledge, which I achieved in the first watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāretvā balaṁ gahetvā vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā … dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi. Ayaṁ kho me, rājakumāra, rattiyā paṭhame yāme paṭhamā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno—yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶5] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I saw sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understood how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi …pe…
[¶6] This was the second knowledge, which I achieved in the middle watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: ayaṁ kho me, rājakumāra, rattiyā majjhime yāme dutiyā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno—yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶7] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. I truly understood: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ I truly understood: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ …pe… ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ; ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ …pe… ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶8] Knowing and seeing like this, my mind was freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When it was freed, I knew it was freed.
> Pali: Tassa me evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ ahosi.
[¶9] I understood: ‘Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶10] This was the third knowledge, which I achieved in the last watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, rājakumāra, rattiyā pacchime yāme tatiyā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno—yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶11] Then it occurred to me, ‘This principle I have discovered is deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute. But people like clinging, they love it and enjoy it. It’s hard for them to see this topic; that is, specific conditionality, dependent origination. It’s also hard for them to see this topic; that is, the stilling of all activities, the letting go of all attachments, the ending of craving, fading away, cessation, extinguishment. And if I were to teach this principle, others might not understand me, which would be wearying and troublesome for me.’ And then these verses, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, occurred to me:
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘adhigato kho myāyaṁ dhammo gambhīro duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālayarāmā kho panāyaṁ pajā ālayaratā ālayasammuditā. Ālayarāmāya kho pana pajāya ālayaratāya ālayasammuditāya duddasaṁ idaṁ ṭhānaṁ yadidaṁ—idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. Idampi kho ṭhānaṁ duddasaṁ—yadidaṁ sabbasaṅkhārasamatho sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ. Ahañceva kho pana dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, pare ca me na ājāneyyuṁ, so mamassa kilamatho, sā mamassa vihesā’ti. Apissu maṁ, rājakumāra, imā anacchariyā gāthāyo paṭibhaṁsu pubbe assutapubbā:
[¶12] ‘I’ve struggled hard to realize this,
there’s no need to reveal it now!
Those mired in greed and hate
can’t really understand this teaching.
> Pali: ‘Kicchena me adhigataṁ,
halaṁ dāni pakāsituṁ;
Rāgadosaparetehi,
nāyaṁ dhammo susambudho.
[¶13] It goes against the stream, subtle,
deep, obscure, and very fine.
Those besotted by greed cannot see,
for they’re cloaked in a mass of darkness.’
> Pali: Paṭisotagāmiṁ nipuṇaṁ,
gambhīraṁ duddasaṁ aṇuṁ;
Rāgarattā na dakkhanti,
tamokhandhena āvuṭā’ti.
[¶14] So, as I reflected like this, my mind inclined to remaining passive, not to teaching the Dhamma.
> Pali: Itiha me, rājakumāra, paṭisañcikkhato appossukkatāya cittaṁ namati no dhammadesanāya.
[¶15] Then the divinity Sahampati, knowing my train of thought, thought, ‘Oh lord! The world will be lost, the world will perish! For the mind of the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, inclines to remaining passive, not to teaching the Dhamma.’
> Pali: Atha kho, rājakumāra, brahmuno sahampatissa mama cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya etadahosi: ‘nassati vata bho loko; vinassati vata bho loko. Yatra hi nāma tathāgatassa arahato sammāsambuddhassa appossukkatāya cittaṁ namati no dhammadesanāyā’ti.
[¶16] Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, the divinity Sahampati vanished from the realm of divinity and reappeared in front of me. He arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward me, and said, ‘Sir, let the Blessed One teach the Dhamma! Let the Holy One teach the Dhamma! There are beings with little dust in their eyes. They’re in decline because they haven’t heard the teaching. There will be those who understand the teaching!’
> Pali: Atha kho, rājakumāra, brahmā sahampati—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—brahmaloke antarahito mama purato pāturahosi. Atha kho, rājakumāra, brahmā sahampati ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yenāhaṁ tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā maṁ etadavoca: ‘desetu, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṁ, desetu sugato dhammaṁ. Santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā assavanatāya dhammassa parihāyanti; bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro’ti.
[¶17] That is what the divinity Sahampati said. Then he went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca, rājakumāra, brahmā sahampati; idaṁ vatvā athāparaṁ etadavoca:
[¶18] ‘Among the Magadhans there appeared in the past
an impure teaching thought up by the stained.
Fling open the door to freedom from death!
Let them hear the teaching the immaculate one discovered.
> Pali: ‘Pāturahosi magadhesu pubbe,
Dhammo asuddho samalehi cintito;
Apāpuretaṁ amatassa dvāraṁ,
Suṇantu dhammaṁ vimalenānubuddhaṁ.
[¶19] Standing high on a rocky mountain,
you can see the people all around.
In just the same way, All-seer, so intelligent,
having ascended the Temple of Truth,
> Pali: Sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito,
Yathāpi passe janataṁ samantato;
Tathūpamaṁ dhammamayaṁ sumedha,
Pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhu.
[¶20] rid of sorrow, look upon the people
swamped with sorrow, overcome by rebirth and old age.
Rise, hero! Victor in battle, caravan leader,
wander the world free of debt.
Let the Blessed One teach the Dhamma!
There will be those who understand!’
> Pali: Sokāvatiṇṇaṁ janatamapetasoko,
Avekkhassu jātijarābhibhūtaṁ;
Uṭṭhehi vīra vijitasaṅgāma,
Satthavāha aṇaṇa vicara loke;
Desassu bhagavā dhammaṁ,
Aññātāro bhavissantī’ti.
[¶21] Then, understanding the Divinity’s invitation, I surveyed the world with the eye of a Buddha, because of my compassion for sentient beings. And I saw sentient beings with little dust in their eyes, and some with much dust in their eyes; with keen faculties and with weak faculties, with good qualities and with bad qualities, easy to teach and hard to teach. And some of them lived seeing the danger in the fault to do with the next world, while others did not. It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. Some of them sprout and grow in the water reaching the water’s surface. And some of them sprout and grow in the water but rise up above the water and stand with no water clinging to them. In the same way, I saw sentient beings with little dust in their eyes, and some with much dust in their eyes. Then I replied in verse to the divinity Sahampati:
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, brahmuno ca ajjhesanaṁ viditvā sattesu ca kāruññataṁ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokesiṁ. Addasaṁ kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokento satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye svākāre dvākāre suviññāpaye duviññāpaye appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante, appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante. Seyyathāpi nāma uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni samodakaṁ ṭhitāni, appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakā accuggamma ṭhitāni anupalittāni udakena; evameva kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra; buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokento addasaṁ satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye svākāre dvākāre suviññāpaye duviññāpaye, appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante, appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante. Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, brahmānaṁ sahampatiṁ gāthāya paccabhāsiṁ:
[¶22] ‘Flung open are the doors to freedom from death!
Let those with ears to hear commit to faith.
Thinking it would be troublesome, Divinity, I did not teach
the sophisticated, sublime Dhamma among mankind.’
> Pali: ‘Apārutā tesaṁ amatassa dvārā,
Ye sotavanto pamuñcantu saddhaṁ;
Vihiṁsasaññī paguṇaṁ na bhāsiṁ,
Dhammaṁ paṇītaṁ manujesu brahme’ti.
[¶23] Then the divinity Sahampati, knowing that his request for me to teach the Dhamma had been granted, bowed and respectfully circled me, keeping me on his right, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Atha kho, rājakumāra, brahmā sahampati ‘katāvakāso khomhi bhagavatā dhammadesanāyā’ti maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
[¶24] Then it occurred to me, ‘Who should I teach first of all? Who will quickly understand the teaching?’ Then it occurred to me, ‘That Āḷāra Kālāma is astute, competent, intelligent, and has long had little dust in his eyes. Why don’t I teach him first of all? He’ll quickly understand the teaching.’ But a deity came to me and said, ‘Sir, Āḷāra Kālāma passed away seven days ago.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘kassa nu kho ahaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ? Ko imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āḷāro kālāmo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī dīgharattaṁ apparajakkhajātiko. Yannūnāhaṁ āḷārassa kālāmassa paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ; so imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti. Atha kho maṁ, rājakumāra, devatā upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca: ‘sattāhakālaṅkato, bhante, āḷāro kālāmo’ti.
[¶25] And knowledge and vision arose in me, ‘Āḷāra Kālāma passed away seven days ago.’ Then it occurred to me, ‘This is a great loss for Āḷāra Kālāma. If he had heard the teaching, he would have understood it quickly.’
> Pali: Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṁ udapādi: ‘sattāhakālaṅkato āḷāro kālāmo’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘mahājāniyo kho āḷāro kālāmo. Sace hi so imaṁ dhammaṁ suṇeyya, khippameva ājāneyyā’ti.
[¶26] Then it occurred to me, ‘Who should I teach first of all? Who will quickly understand the teaching?’ Then it occurred to me, ‘That Uddaka son of Rāma is astute, competent, intelligent, and has long had little dust in his eyes. Why don’t I teach him first of all? He’ll quickly understand the teaching.’ But a deity came to me and said, ‘Sir, Uddaka son of Rāma, passed away just last night.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘kassa nu kho ahaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ? Ko imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho udako rāmaputto paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī dīgharattaṁ apparajakkhajātiko. Yannūnāhaṁ udakassa rāmaputtassa paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ; so imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti. Atha kho maṁ, rājakumāra, devatā upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca: ‘abhidosakālaṅkato, bhante, udako rāmaputto’ti.
[¶27] And knowledge and vision arose in me, ‘Uddaka son of Rāma, passed away just last night.’ Then it occurred to me, ‘This is a great loss for Uddaka. If he had heard the teaching, he would have understood it quickly.’
> Pali: Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṁ udapādi: ‘abhidosakālaṅkato udako rāmaputto’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘mahājāniyo kho udako rāmaputto. Sace hi so imaṁ dhammaṁ suṇeyya, khippameva ājāneyyā’ti.
[¶28] Then it occurred to me, ‘Who should I teach first of all? Who will quickly understand the teaching?’ Then it occurred to me, ‘The group of five mendicants were very helpful to me. They looked after me during my time of resolute striving. Why don’t I teach them first of all?’ Then it occurred to me, ‘Where are the group of five mendicants staying these days?’ With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman I saw that the group of five mendicants were staying near Varanasi in the deer park at Isipatana.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘kassa nu kho ahaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ? Ko imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū ye maṁ padhānapahitattaṁ upaṭṭhahiṁsu. Yannūnāhaṁ pañcavaggiyānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyan’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, rājakumāra, etadahosi: ‘kahaṁ nu kho etarahi pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū viharantī’ti. Addasaṁ khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena pañcavaggiye bhikkhū bārāṇasiyaṁ viharante isipatane migadāye.
[¶29] So, when I had stayed in Uruvelā as long as I pleased, I set out for Varanasi.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, uruvelāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena bārāṇasī tena cārikaṁ pakkamiṁ.
[¶30] While I was traveling along the road between Gayā and Bodhgaya, the Ājīvaka ascetic Upaka saw me and said, ‘Reverend, your faculties are so very clear, and your complexion is pure and bright. In whose name have you gone forth, reverend? Who is your Teacher? Whose teaching do you believe in?’
> Pali: Addasā kho maṁ, rājakumāra, upako ājīvako antarā ca gayaṁ antarā ca bodhiṁ addhānamaggappaṭipannaṁ. Disvāna maṁ etadavoca: ‘vippasannāni kho te, āvuso, indriyāni, parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto. Kaṁsi tvaṁ, āvuso, uddissa pabbajito? Ko vā te satthā? Kassa vā tvaṁ dhammaṁ rocesī’ti?
[¶31] I replied to Upaka in verse:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, rājakumāra, upakaṁ ājīvakaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsiṁ:
[¶32] ‘I am the vanquisher of all, the knower of all,
unsullied in the midst of all things.
I’ve given up all, freed in the ending of craving.
Since I know for myself, whose follower should I be?
> Pali: ‘Sabbābhibhū sabbavidūhamasmi,
Sabbesu dhammesu anūpalitto;
Sabbañjaho taṇhākkhaye vimutto,
Sayaṁ abhiññāya kamuddiseyyaṁ.
[¶33] I have no tutor.
There is no one like me.
In the world with its gods,
I have no rival.
> Pali: Na me ācariyo atthi,
sadiso me na vijjati;
Sadevakasmiṁ lokasmiṁ,
natthi me paṭipuggalo.
[¶34] For in this world, I am the perfected one;
I am the supreme Teacher.
I alone am fully awakened,
cooled, quenched.
> Pali: Ahañhi arahā loke,
ahaṁ satthā anuttaro;
Ekomhi sammāsambuddho,
sītibhūtosmi nibbuto.
[¶35] I am going to the city of Kāsi
to roll forth the Wheel of Dhamma.
In this world that is so blind,
I’ll beat the drum of freedom from death!’
> Pali: Dhammacakkaṁ pavattetuṁ,
Gacchāmi kāsinaṁ puraṁ;
Andhībhūtasmiṁ lokasmiṁ,
Āhañchaṁ amatadundubhin’ti.
[¶36] ‘According to what you claim, reverend, you ought to be the Infinite Victor.’
> Pali: ‘Yathā kho tvaṁ, āvuso, paṭijānāsi arahasi anantajino’ti.
[¶37] ‘The victors are those who, like me,
have reached the ending of defilements.
I have conquered bad qualities, Upaka—
that’s why I’m a victor.’
> Pali: ‘Mādisā ve jinā honti,
ye pattā āsavakkhayaṁ;
Jitā me pāpakā dhammā,
tasmāhamupaka jino’ti.
[¶38] When I had spoken, Upaka said: ‘If you say so, reverend.’ Shaking his head, he took a wrong turn and left.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, rājakumāra, upako ājīvako ‘hupeyyapāvuso’ti vatvā sīsaṁ okampetvā ummaggaṁ gahetvā pakkāmi.
[¶39] Traveling stage by stage, I arrived at Varanasi, and went to see the group of five mendicants in the deer park at Isipatana. The group of five mendicants saw me coming off in the distance and stopped each other, saying, ‘Here comes the ascetic Gotama. He’s so indulgent; he strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence. We shouldn’t bow to him or rise for him or receive his bowl and robe. But we can set out a seat; he can sit if he likes.’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, rājakumāra, anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena bārāṇasī isipatanaṁ migadāyo yena pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamiṁ. Addasaṁsu kho maṁ, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna aññamaññaṁ saṇṭhapesuṁ: ‘ayaṁ kho, āvuso, samaṇo gotamo āgacchati bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya. So neva abhivādetabbo, na paccuṭṭhātabbo, nāssa pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahetabbaṁ; api ca kho āsanaṁ ṭhapetabbaṁ—sace so ākaṅkhissati nisīdissatī’ti.
[¶40] Yet as I drew closer, the group of five mendicants were unable to stop themselves per their own agreement. Some came out to greet me and receive my bowl and robe, some spread out a seat, while others set out water for washing my feet. But they still addressed me by name and as ‘reverend’.
> Pali: Yathā yathā kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū upasaṅkamiṁ tathā tathā pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū nāsakkhiṁsu sakāya katikāya saṇṭhātuṁ. Appekacce maṁ paccuggantvā pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahesuṁ. Appekacce āsanaṁ paññapesuṁ. Appekacce pādodakaṁ upaṭṭhapesuṁ. Api ca kho maṁ nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācaranti.
[¶41] So I said to them, ‘Mendicants, don’t address me by name and as “reverend”. The Realized One is Perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. Listen up, mendicants: I have achieved freedom from death! I shall instruct you, I will teach you the Dhamma. By practicing as instructed you will soon realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. You will live having achieved with your own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘mā, bhikkhave, tathāgataṁ nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācaratha; arahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato sammāsambuddho. Odahatha, bhikkhave, sotaṁ. Amatamadhigataṁ ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶42] But they said to me, ‘Reverend Gotama, even by that conduct, that practice, that grueling work you did not achieve any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. How could you have achieved such a state now that you’ve become indulgent, strayed from the struggle and fallen into indulgence?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘tāyapi kho tvaṁ, āvuso gotama, iriyāya tāya paṭipadāya tāya dukkarakārikāya nājjhagamā uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ; kiṁ pana tvaṁ etarahi bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya adhigamissasi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesan’ti?
[¶43] So I said to them, ‘The Realized One has not become indulgent, strayed from the struggle and fallen into indulgence. The Realized One is Perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. Listen up, mendicants: I have achieved freedom from death! I shall instruct you, I will teach you the Dhamma. By practicing as instructed you will soon realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. You will live having achieved with your own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘na, bhikkhave, tathāgato bāhulliko na padhānavibbhanto na āvatto bāhullāya. Arahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato sammāsambuddho. Odahatha, bhikkhave, sotaṁ. Amatamadhigataṁ ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶44] But for a second time they said to me, ‘Reverend Gotama … you’ve fallen into indulgence.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘tāyapi kho tvaṁ, āvuso gotama, iriyāya tāya paṭipadāya tāya dukkarakārikāya nājjhagamā uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ; kiṁ pana tvaṁ etarahi bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya adhigamissasi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesan’ti?
[¶45] So for a second time I said to them, ‘The Realized One has not become indulgent …’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘na, bhikkhave, tathāgato bāhulliko na padhānavibbhanto na āvatto bāhullāya. Arahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato sammāsambuddho. Odahatha, bhikkhave, sotaṁ. Amatamadhigataṁ ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶46] But for a third time they said to me, ‘Reverend Gotama … you’ve fallen into indulgence.’
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘tāyapi kho tvaṁ, āvuso gotama, iriyāya tāya paṭipadāya tāya dukkarakārikāya nājjhagamā uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ; kiṁ pana tvaṁ etarahi bāhulliko padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāya adhigamissasi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesan’ti?
[¶47] So I said to them, ‘Mendicants, have you ever known me to speak like this before?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū etadavocaṁ: ‘abhijānātha me no tumhe, bhikkhave, ito pubbe evarūpaṁ pabhāvitametan’ti?
[¶48] ‘No, sir.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶49] ‘The Realized One is Perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. Listen up, mendicants: I have achieved freedom from death! I shall instruct you, I will teach you the Dhamma. By practicing as instructed you will soon realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. You will live having achieved with your own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: ‘Arahaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato sammāsambuddho. Odahatha, bhikkhave, sotaṁ. Amatamadhigataṁ ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶50] I was able to persuade the group of five mendicants. Then sometimes I advised two mendicants, while the other three went for alms. Then those three would feed all six of us with what they brought back. Sometimes I advised three mendicants, while the other two went for alms. Then those two would feed all six of us with what they brought back.
> Pali: Asakkhiṁ kho ahaṁ, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetuṁ. Dvepi sudaṁ, rājakumāra, bhikkhū ovadāmi. Tayo bhikkhū piṇḍāya caranti. Yaṁ tayo bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā āharanti, tena chabbaggiyā yāpema. Tayopi sudaṁ, rājakumāra, bhikkhū ovadāmi, dve bhikkhū piṇḍāya caranti. Yaṁ dve bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā āharanti tena chabbaggiyā yāpema.
[¶51] As the group of five mendicants were being advised and instructed by me like this, they soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. They lived having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: Atha kho, rājakumāra, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū mayā evaṁ ovadiyamānā evaṁ anusāsiyamānā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihariṁsū”ti.
[¶52] When he had spoken, Prince Bodhi said to the Buddha, “Sir, when a mendicant has the Realized One as trainer, how long would it take for them to realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kīva cirena nu kho, bhante, bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā”ti?
[¶53] “Well then, prince, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, prince? Are you skilled in the art of wielding a hooked goad while riding an elephant?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājakumāra, taṁyevettha paṭipucchissāmi. Yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, kusalo tvaṁ hatthārūḷhe aṅkusagayhe sippe”ti?
[¶54] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante, kusalo ahaṁ hatthārūḷhe aṅkusagayhe sippe”ti.
[¶55] “What do you think, prince? Suppose a man were to come along thinking, ‘Prince Bodhi knows the art of wielding a hooked goad while riding an elephant. I’ll train in that art under him.’ If he’s faithless, he wouldn’t achieve what he could with faith. If he’s unhealthy, he wouldn’t achieve what he could with good health. If he’s devious or deceitful, he wouldn’t achieve what he could with honesty and integrity. If he’s lazy, he wouldn’t achieve what he could with energy. If he’s stupid, he wouldn’t achieve what he could with wisdom. What do you think, prince? Could that man still train under you in the art of wielding a hooked goad while riding an elephant?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, idha puriso āgaccheyya: ‘bodhi rājakumāro hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ jānāti; tassāhaṁ santike hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ sikkhissāmī’ti. So cassa assaddho; yāvatakaṁ saddhena pattabbaṁ taṁ na sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa bahvābādho; yāvatakaṁ appābādhena pattabbaṁ taṁ na sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa saṭho māyāvī; yāvatakaṁ asaṭhena amāyāvinā pattabbaṁ taṁ na sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa kusīto; yāvatakaṁ āraddhavīriyena pattabbaṁ taṁ na sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa duppañño; yāvatakaṁ paññavatā pattabbaṁ taṁ na sampāpuṇeyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, api nu so puriso tava santike hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ sikkheyyā”ti?
[¶56] “Sir, if he had even a single one of these factors he couldn’t train under me, let alone all five.”
> Pali: “Ekamekenāpi, bhante, aṅgena samannāgato so puriso na mama santike hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ sikkheyya, ko pana vādo pañcahaṅgehī”ti.
[¶57] “What do you think, prince? Suppose a man were to come along thinking, ‘Prince Bodhi knows the art of wielding a hooked goad while riding an elephant. I’ll train in that art under him.’ If he’s faithful, he’d achieve what he could with faith. If he’s healthy, he’d achieve what he could with good health. If he’s honest and has integrity, he’d achieve what he could with honesty and integrity. If he’s energetic, he’d achieve what he could with energy. If he’s wise, he’d achieve what he could with wisdom. What do you think, prince? Could that man still train under you in the art of wielding a hooked goad while riding an elephant?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, idha puriso āgaccheyya: ‘bodhi rājakumāro hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ jānāti; tassāhaṁ santike hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ sikkhissāmī’ti. So cassa saddho; yāvatakaṁ saddhena pattabbaṁ taṁ sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa appābādho; yāvatakaṁ appābādhena pattabbaṁ taṁ sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa asaṭho amāyāvī; yāvatakaṁ asaṭhena amāyāvinā pattabbaṁ taṁ sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa āraddhavīriyo; yāvatakaṁ āraddhavīriyena pattabbaṁ taṁ sampāpuṇeyya. So cassa paññavā; yāvatakaṁ paññavatā pattabbaṁ taṁ sampāpuṇeyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājakumāra, api nu so puriso tava santike hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ sikkheyyā”ti?
[¶58] “Sir, if he had even a single one of these factors he could train under me, let alone all five.”
> Pali: “Ekamekenāpi, bhante, aṅgena samannāgato so puriso mama santike hatthārūḷhaṁ aṅkusagayhaṁ sippaṁ sikkheyya, ko pana vādo pañcahaṅgehī”ti.
[¶59] “In the same way, prince, there are these five factors that support meditation. What five? It’s when a noble disciple has faith in the Realized One’s awakening: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They are rarely ill or unwell. Their stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold, but just right, and fit for meditation. They’re not devious or deceitful. They reveal themselves honestly to the Teacher or sensible spiritual companions. They live with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They’re strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities. They’re wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering. These are the five factors that support meditation.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājakumāra, pañcimāni padhāniyaṅgāni. Katamāni pañca? Idha, rājakumāra, bhikkhu saddho hoti; saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṁ: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti; appābādho hoti appātaṅko samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya majjhimāya padhānakkhamāya; asaṭho hoti amāyāvī yathābhūtaṁ attānaṁ āvikattā satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu; āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya, thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu; paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā. Imāni kho, rājakumāra, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni.
[¶60] When a mendicant with these five factors that support meditation has the Realized One as trainer, they could realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in seven years. Let alone seven years, they could realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in six years, or as little as one year. Let alone one year, when a mendicant with these five factors that support meditation has the Realized One as trainer, they could realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in seven months, or as little as one day. Let alone one day, when a mendicant with these five factors that support meditation has the Realized One as trainer, they could be instructed at dusk and achieve distinction at daybreak, or be instructed at daybreak and achieve distinction at dusk.”
> Pali: Imehi, rājakumāra, pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyya satta vassāni. Tiṭṭhantu, rājakumāra, satta vassāni. Imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyya chabbassāni … pañca vassāni … cattāri vassāni … tīṇi vassāni … dve vassāni … ekaṁ vassaṁ. Tiṭṭhatu, rājakumāra, ekaṁ vassaṁ. Imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyya satta māsāni. Tiṭṭhantu, rājakumāra, satta māsāni. Imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ— brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyya cha māsāni … pañca māsāni … cattāri māsāni … tīṇi māsāni … dve māsāni … ekaṁ māsaṁ … aḍḍhamāsaṁ. Tiṭṭhatu, rājakumāra, aḍḍhamāso. Imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ— brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyya satta rattindivāni. Tiṭṭhantu, rājakumāra, satta rattindivāni. Imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno— yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ— brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyya cha rattindivāni … pañca rattindivāni … cattāri rattindivāni … tīṇi rattindivāni … dve rattindivāni … ekaṁ rattindivaṁ. Tiṭṭhatu, rājakumāra, eko rattindivo. Imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu tathāgataṁ vināyakaṁ labhamāno sāyamanusiṭṭho pāto visesaṁ adhigamissati, pātamanusiṭṭho sāyaṁ visesaṁ adhigamissatī”ti.
[¶61] When he had spoken, Prince Bodhi said to the Buddha, “Oh, the Buddha! Oh, the teaching! Oh, how well explained is the teaching! For someone could be instructed at dusk and achieve distinction at daybreak, or be instructed at daybreak and achieve distinction at dusk.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “aho buddho, aho dhammo, aho dhammassa svākkhātatā. Yatra hi nāma sāyamanusiṭṭho pāto visesaṁ adhigamissati, pātamanusiṭṭho sāyaṁ visesaṁ adhigamissatī”ti.
[¶62] When he said this, Sañjikāputta said to Prince Bodhi, “Though the worthy Bodhi speaks like this, you don’t go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sañjikāputto māṇavo bodhiṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavoca: “evameva panāyaṁ bhavaṁ bodhi: ‘aho buddho, aho dhammo, aho dhammassa svākkhātatā’ti ca vadeti; atha ca pana na taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcā”ti.
[¶63] “Don’t say that, dear Sañjikāputta, don’t say that! I have heard and learned this in the presence of my lady mother. This one time the Buddha was staying near Kosambī in Ghosita’s monastery. Then my pregnant lady mother went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, ‘Sir, the prince or princess in my womb goes for refuge to the Buddha, the teaching, and the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember them as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.’
> Pali: “Mā hevaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, avaca; mā hevaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, avaca. Sammukhā metaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, ayyāya sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ”. “Ekamidaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, samayaṁ bhagavā kosambiyaṁ viharati ghositārāme. Atha kho me ayyā kucchimatī yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho me ayyā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: ‘yo me ayaṁ, bhante, kucchigato kumārako vā kumārikā vā so bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ taṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan’ti.
[¶64] Another time the Buddha was staying here in the land of the Bhaggas at Crocodile’s Bellow, in the deer park at Bhesakaḷā’s Wood. Then my nursemaid, carrying me on her hip, went to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him, ‘Sir, this Prince Bodhi goes for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember him as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.’
> Pali: Ekamidaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, samayaṁ bhagavā idheva bhaggesu viharati susumāragire bhesakaḷāvane migadāye. Atha kho maṁ dhāti aṅkena haritvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho maṁ dhāti bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: ‘ayaṁ, bhante, bodhi rājakumāro bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ taṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan’ti.
[¶65] Now for a third time I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Esāhaṁ, samma sañjikāputta, tatiyakampi bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶66] > Pali: Bodhirājakumārasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 95. MN 86 · With Aṅgulimāla
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/95/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/95/#p-N
[¶0] MN 86 · With Aṅgulimāla
> Pali: MN 86 · Aṅgulimālasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time in the realm of King Pasenadi of Kosala there was a bandit named Aṅgulimāla. He was violent, bloody-handed, a hardened killer, merciless to living beings. He laid waste to villages, towns, and countries. He was constantly murdering humans, and he wore their fingers as a necklace.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena rañño pasenadissa kosalassa vijite coro aṅgulimālo nāma hoti luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu. Tena gāmāpi agāmā katā, nigamāpi anigamā katā, janapadāpi ajanapadā katā. So manusse vadhitvā vadhitvā aṅgulīnaṁ mālaṁ dhāreti.
[¶3] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms. Then, after the meal, on his return from almsround, he set his lodgings in order and, taking his bowl and robe, he walked down the road that led to Aṅgulimāla.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena coro aṅgulimālo tenaddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajji.
[¶4] The cowherds, shepherds, farmers, and travelers saw him on the road, and said to him, “Don’t take this road, ascetic. On this road there is a bandit named Aṅgulimāla. He is violent, bloody-handed, a hardened killer, merciless to living beings. He has laid waste to villages, towns, and countries. He is constantly murdering humans, and he wears their fingers as a necklace. People travel along this road only after banding closely together in groups of ten, twenty, thirty, forty, or fifty. Still they meet their end by Aṅgulimāla’s hand.” But when they said this, the Buddha went on in silence.
> Pali: Addasāsuṁ kho gopālakā pasupālakā kassakā pathāvino bhagavantaṁ yena coro aṅgulimālo tenaddhānamaggapaṭipannaṁ. Disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “mā, samaṇa, etaṁ maggaṁ paṭipajji. Etasmiṁ, samaṇa, magge coro aṅgulimālo nāma luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu. Tena gāmāpi agāmā katā, nigamāpi anigamā katā, janapadāpi ajanapadā katā. So manusse vadhitvā vadhitvā aṅgulīnaṁ mālaṁ dhāreti. Etañhi, samaṇa, maggaṁ dasapi purisā vīsampi purisā tiṁsampi purisā cattārīsampi purisā paññāsampi purisā saṅkaritvā saṅkaritvā paṭipajjanti. Tepi corassa aṅgulimālassa hatthatthaṁ gacchantī”ti. Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā tuṇhībhūto agamāsi.
[¶5] For a second time … and a third time, they urged the Buddha to turn back.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho gopālakā …pe… tatiyampi kho gopālakā pasupālakā kassakā pathāvino bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “mā, samaṇa, etaṁ maggaṁ paṭipajji, etasmiṁ samaṇa magge coro aṅgulimālo nāma luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu, tena gāmāpi agāmā katā, nigamāpi anigamā katā, janapadāpi ajanapadā katā. So manusse vadhitvā vadhitvā aṅgulīnaṁ mālaṁ dhāreti. Etañhi samaṇa maggaṁ dasapi purisā vīsampi purisā tiṁsampi purisā cattārīsampi purisā paññāsampi purisā saṅkaritvā saṅkaritvā paṭipajjanti. Tepi corassa aṅgulimālassa hatthatthaṁ gacchantī”ti.
[¶6] But when they said this, the Buddha went on in silence.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tuṇhībhūto agamāsi.
[¶7] The bandit Aṅgulimāla saw the Buddha coming off in the distance, and thought, “Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! People travel along this road only after banding closely together in groups of ten, twenty, thirty, forty, or fifty. Still they meet their end by my hand. But still this ascetic comes along alone and unaccompanied, like a conqueror. Why don’t I take his life?”
> Pali: Addasā kho coro aṅgulimālo bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvānassa etadahosi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho. Imañhi maggaṁ dasapi purisā vīsampi purisā tiṁsampi purisā cattārīsampi purisā paññāsampi purisā saṅkaritvā saṅkaritvā paṭipajjanti. Tepi mama hatthatthaṁ gacchanti. Atha ca panāyaṁ samaṇo eko adutiyo pasayha maññe āgacchati. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ samaṇaṁ jīvitā voropeyyan”ti.
[¶8] Then Aṅgulimāla donned his sword and shield, fastened his bow and arrows, and followed behind the Buddha. But the Buddha used his psychic power to will that Aṅgulimāla could not catch up with him no matter how hard he tried, even though the Buddha kept walking at a normal speed.
> Pali: Atha kho coro aṅgulimālo asicammaṁ gahetvā dhanukalāpaṁ sannayhitvā bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi. Atha kho bhagavā tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsi yathā coro aṅgulimālo bhagavantaṁ pakatiyā gacchantaṁ sabbathāmena gacchanto na sakkoti sampāpuṇituṁ.
[¶9] Then Aṅgulimāla thought, “Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! Previously, even when I’ve chased a speeding elephant, horse, chariot or deer, I’ve always caught up with them. But I can’t catch up with this ascetic no matter how hard I try, even though he’s walking at a normal speed.”
> Pali: Atha kho corassa aṅgulimālassa etadahosi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho. Ahañhi pubbe hatthimpi dhāvantaṁ anupatitvā gaṇhāmi, assampi dhāvantaṁ anupatitvā gaṇhāmi, rathampi dhāvantaṁ anupatitvā gaṇhāmi, migampi dhāvantaṁ anupatitvā gaṇhāmi; atha ca panāhaṁ imaṁ samaṇaṁ pakatiyā gacchantaṁ sabbathāmena gacchanto na sakkomi sampāpuṇitun”ti.
[¶10] He stood still and said, “Stop, stop, ascetic!”
> Pali: Ṭhitova bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭha, tiṭṭha, samaṇā”ti.
[¶11] “I’ve stopped, Aṅgulimāla—now you stop.”
> Pali: “Ṭhito ahaṁ, aṅgulimāla, tvañca tiṭṭhā”ti.
[¶12] Then Aṅgulimāla thought, “These ascetics who follow the Sakyan speak the truth. Yet while walking the ascetic says: ‘I’ve stopped, Aṅgulimāla—now you stop.’ Why don’t I ask him about this?”
> Pali: Atha kho corassa aṅgulimālassa etadahosi: “ime kho samaṇā sakyaputtiyā saccavādino saccapaṭiññā. Atha panāyaṁ samaṇo gacchaṁ yevāha: ‘ṭhito ahaṁ, aṅgulimāla, tvañca tiṭṭhā’ti. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ samaṇaṁ puccheyyan”ti.
[¶13] Then he addressed the Buddha in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho coro aṅgulimālo bhagavantaṁ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi:
[¶14] “While walking, ascetic, you say ‘I’ve stopped.’
And I have stopped, but you tell me I’ve not.
I’m asking you this, ascetic:
how is it you’ve stopped and I have not?”
> Pali: “Gacchaṁ vadesi samaṇa ṭhitomhi,
Mamañca brūsi ṭhitamaṭṭhitoti;
Pucchāmi taṁ samaṇa etamatthaṁ,
Kathaṁ ṭhito tvaṁ ahamaṭṭhitomhī”ti.
[¶15] “Aṅgulimāla, I have forever stopped—
I’ve laid aside violence toward all creatures.
But you can’t stop yourself from harming living creatures;
that’s why I’ve stopped, but you have not.”
> Pali: “Ṭhito ahaṁ aṅgulimāla sabbadā,
Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṁ;
Tuvañca pāṇesu asaññatosi,
Tasmā ṭhitohaṁ tuvamaṭṭhitosī”ti.
[¶16] “Oh, at long last a renowned great seer,
an ascetic has followed me into this deep wood.
Now that I’ve heard your verse on Dhamma,
I shall live without evil.”
> Pali: “Cirassaṁ vata me mahito mahesī,
Mahāvanaṁ pāpuṇi saccavādī;
Sohaṁ carissāmi pahāya pāpaṁ,
Sutvāna gāthaṁ tava dhammayuttaṁ”.
[¶17] With these words, the bandit hurled his sword and weapons
down a cliff into an abyss.
He venerated the Holy One’s feet,
and requested the going forth right away.
> Pali: Itveva coro asimāvudhañca,
Sobbhe papāte narake akiri;
Avandi coro sugatassa pāde,
Tattheva naṁ pabbajjaṁ ayāci.
[¶18] Then the Buddha, the compassionate great seer,
the Teacher of the world with its gods,
said to him, “Come, monk!”
And with that he became a monk.
> Pali: Buddho ca kho kāruṇiko mahesi,
Yo satthā lokassa sadevakassa;
“Tamehi bhikkhū”ti tadā avoca,
Eseva tassa ahu bhikkhubhāvoti.
[¶19] Then the Buddha set out for Sāvatthī with Venerable Aṅgulimāla as his second monk. Traveling stage by stage, he arrived at Sāvatthī, where he stayed in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmatā aṅgulimālena pacchāsamaṇena yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶20] Now at that time a crowd had gathered by the gate of King Pasenadi’s royal compound making a colossal racket, “In your realm, Your Majesty, there is a bandit named Aṅgulimāla. He is violent, bloody-handed, a hardened killer, merciless to living beings. He has laid waste to villages, towns, and countries. He is constantly murdering humans, and he wears their fingers as a necklace. Your Majesty must put a stop to him!”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena rañño pasenadissa kosalassa antepuradvāre mahājanakāyo sannipatitvā uccāsaddo mahāsaddo hoti: “coro te, deva, vijite aṅgulimālo nāma luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu. Tena gāmāpi agāmā katā, nigamāpi anigamā katā, janapadāpi ajanapadā katā. So manusse vadhitvā vadhitvā aṅgulīnaṁ mālaṁ dhāreti. Taṁ devo paṭisedhetū”ti.
[¶21] Then King Pasenadi drove out from Sāvatthī in the middle of the day with around five hundred horses, heading for the monastery. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the Buddha on foot. He bowed and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him,
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo pañcamattehi assasatehi sāvatthiyā nikkhami divā divassa. Yena ārāmo tena pāvisi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶22] “What is it, Great King? Is King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha angry with you, or the Licchavis of Vesālī, or some other opposing ruler?”
> Pali: “kiṁ nu te, mahārāja, rājā vā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro kupito vesālikā vā licchavī aññe vā paṭirājāno”ti?
[¶23] “No, sir. In my realm there is a bandit named Aṅgulimāla. He is violent, bloody-handed, a hardened killer, merciless to living beings. … I shall put a stop to him.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, bhante, rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro kupito, nāpi vesālikā licchavī, nāpi aññe paṭirājāno. Coro me, bhante, vijite aṅgulimālo nāma luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu. Tena gāmāpi agāmā katā, nigamāpi anigamā katā, janapadāpi ajanapadā katā. So manusse vadhitvā vadhitvā aṅgulīnaṁ mālaṁ dhāreti. Tāhaṁ, bhante, paṭisedhissāmī”ti.
[¶24] “But, Great King, suppose you were to see that Aṅgulimāla had shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and gone forth from the lay life to homelessness. And that he was refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and lying; that he was eating in one part of the day, and was chaste, ethical, and of good character. What would you do to him?”
> Pali: “Sace pana tvaṁ, mahārāja, aṅgulimālaṁ passeyyāsi kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitaṁ, virataṁ pāṇātipātā, virataṁ adinnādānā, virataṁ musāvādā, ekabhattikaṁ, brahmacāriṁ, sīlavantaṁ, kalyāṇadhammaṁ, kinti naṁ kareyyāsī”ti?
[¶25] “I would bow to him, rise in his presence, or offer him a seat. I’d invite him to accept robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. And I’d organize his lawful guarding and protection. But sir, how could such an immoral, evil man ever have such virtue and restraint?”
> Pali: “Abhivādeyyāma vā, bhante, paccuṭṭheyyāma vā āsanena vā nimanteyyāma, abhinimanteyyāma vā naṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi, dhammikaṁ vā assa rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidaheyyāma. Kuto panassa, bhante, dussīlassa pāpadhammassa evarūpo sīlasaṁyamo bhavissatī”ti?
[¶26] Now at that time Venerable Aṅgulimāla was sitting not far from the Buddha. Then the Buddha pointed with his right arm and said to the king, “Great king, this is Aṅgulimāla.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā aṅgulimālo bhagavato avidūre nisinno hoti. Atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇaṁ bāhuṁ paggahetvā rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ etadavoca: “eso, mahārāja, aṅgulimālo”ti.
[¶27] Then the king became frightened, scared, his hair standing on end. Knowing this, the Buddha said to him, “Do not fear, Great King. You have nothing to fear from him.” Then the king’s fear died down.
> Pali: Atha kho rañño pasenadissa kosalassa ahudeva bhayaṁ, ahu chambhitattaṁ, ahu lomahaṁso. Atha kho bhagavā rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ bhītaṁ saṁviggaṁ lomahaṭṭhajātaṁ viditvā rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ etadavoca: “mā bhāyi, mahārāja, natthi te ito bhayan”ti. Atha kho rañño pasenadissa kosalassa yaṁ ahosi bhayaṁ vā chambhitattaṁ vā lomahaṁso vā so paṭippassambhi.
[¶28] Then the king went over to Aṅgulimāla and said, “Sir, is the master really Aṅgulimāla?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo yenāyasmā aṅgulimālo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ aṅgulimālaṁ etadavoca: “ayyo no, bhante, aṅgulimālo”ti?
[¶29] “Yes, Great King.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, mahārājā”ti.
[¶30] “What clans were your father and mother from?”
> Pali: “Kathaṅgotto ayyassa pitā, kathaṅgottā mātā”ti?
[¶31] “My father was a Gagga, and my mother a Mantāṇī.”
> Pali: “Gaggo kho, mahārāja, pitā, mantāṇī mātā”ti.
[¶32] “Sir, may Master Gagga son of Mantāṇī be happy. I’ll make sure that you’re provided with robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick.”
> Pali: “Abhiramatu, bhante, ayyo gaggo mantāṇiputto. Ahamayyassa gaggassa mantāṇiputtassa ussukkaṁ karissāmi cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānan”ti.
[¶33] But at that time Venerable Aṅgulimāla lived in the wilderness, ate only almsfood, and owned just three robes. So he said to the king, “Enough, Great King. My robes are complete.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā aṅgulimālo āraññiko hoti piṇḍapātiko paṁsukūliko tecīvariko. Atha kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ etadavoca: “alaṁ, mahārāja, paripuṇṇaṁ me cīvaran”ti.
[¶34] Then the king went back to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! How the Buddha tames those who are wild, pacifies those who are violent, and extinguishes those who are unquenched! For I was not able to tame him with the rod and the sword, but the Buddha tamed him without rod or sword. Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Yāvañcidaṁ, bhante, bhagavā adantānaṁ dametā, asantānaṁ sametā, aparinibbutānaṁ parinibbāpetā. Yañhi mayaṁ, bhante, nāsakkhimhā daṇḍenapi satthenapi dametuṁ so bhagavatā adaṇḍena asattheneva danto. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bhante, gacchāma; bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶35] “Please, Great King, go at your convenience.” Then King Pasenadi rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: “Yassadāni, mahārāja, kālaṁ maññasī”ti. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶36] Then Venerable Aṅgulimāla robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms. Then as he was wandering indiscriminately for almsfood he saw a woman undergoing a distressing obstructed labor. Seeing this, it occurred to him, “Oh, beings undergo such travail! Oh, beings undergo such travail!”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Addasā kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo sāvatthiyaṁ sapadānaṁ piṇḍāya caramāno aññataraṁ itthiṁ mūḷhagabbhaṁ vighātagabbhaṁ. Disvānassa etadahosi: “kilissanti vata, bho, sattā; kilissanti vata, bho, sattā”ti.
[¶37] Then after wandering for alms in Sāvatthī, after the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened. The Buddha said to him, “Well then, Aṅgulimāla, go to that woman and say this:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idhāhaṁ, bhante, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ. Addasaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, sāvatthiyaṁ sapadānaṁ piṇḍāya caramāno aññataraṁ itthiṁ mūḷhagabbhaṁ vighātagabbhaṁ. Disvāna mayhaṁ etadahosi: ‘kilissanti vata bho sattā, kilissanti vata bho sattā’”ti. “Tena hi tvaṁ, aṅgulimāla, yena sā itthī tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ itthiṁ evaṁ vadehi:
[¶38] ‘Ever since I was born, sister, I don’t recall having intentionally taken the life of a living creature. By this truth, may both you and your baby be safe.’”
> Pali: ‘yatohaṁ, bhagini, jāto nābhijānāmi sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropetā, tena saccena sotthi te hotu, sotthi gabbhassā’”ti.
[¶39] “But sir, wouldn’t that be telling a deliberate lie? For I have intentionally killed many living creatures.”
> Pali: “So hi nūna me, bhante, sampajānamusāvādo bhavissati. Mayā hi, bhante, bahū sañcicca pāṇā jīvitā voropitā”ti.
[¶40] “In that case, Aṅgulimāla, go to that woman and say this:
> Pali: “Tena hi tvaṁ, aṅgulimāla, yena sā itthī tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ itthiṁ evaṁ vadehi:
[¶41] ‘Ever since I was born in the noble birth, sister, I don’t recall having intentionally taken the life of a living creature. By this truth, may both you and your baby be safe.’”
> Pali: ‘yatohaṁ, bhagini, ariyāya jātiyā jāto, nābhijānāmi sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropetā, tena saccena sotthi te hotu, sotthi gabbhassā’”ti.
[¶42] “Yes, sir,” replied Aṅgulimāla. He went to that woman and said:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo bhagavato paṭissutvā yena sā itthī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ itthiṁ etadavoca:
[¶43] “Ever since I was born in the noble birth, sister, I don’t recall having intentionally taken the life of a living creature. By this truth, may both you and your baby be safe.”
> Pali: “yatohaṁ, bhagini, ariyāya jātiyā jāto, nābhijānāmi sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropetā, tena saccena sotthi te hotu, sotthi gabbhassā”ti.
[¶44] Then that woman was safe, and so was her baby.
> Pali: Atha khvāssā itthiyā sotthi ahosi, sotthi gabbhassa.
[¶45] Then Aṅgulimāla, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶46] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Aṅgulimāla became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā aṅgulimālo arahataṁ ahosi.
[¶47] Then Venerable Aṅgulimāla robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms. Now at that time someone threw a stone that hit Aṅgulimāla, someone else threw a stick, and someone else threw gravel. Then Aṅgulimāla—with cracked head, bleeding, his bowl broken, and his outer robe torn—went to the Buddha.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Tena kho pana samayena aññenapi leḍḍu khitto āyasmato aṅgulimālassa kāye nipatati, aññenapi daṇḍo khitto āyasmato aṅgulimālassa kāye nipatati, aññenapi sakkharā khittā āyasmato aṅgulimālassa kāye nipatati. Atha kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo bhinnena sīsena, lohitena gaḷantena, bhinnena pattena, vipphālitāya saṅghāṭiyā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.
[¶48] The Buddha saw him coming off in the distance, and said to him, “Endure it, brahmin! Endure it, brahmin! You’re experiencing in this very life the result of deeds that might have caused you to be tormented in hell for many years, many hundreds or thousands of years.”
> Pali: Addasā kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ aṅgulimālaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna āyasmantaṁ aṅgulimālaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsehi tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, adhivāsehi tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa. Yassa kho tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, kammassa vipākena bahūni vassāni bahūni vassasatāni bahūni vassasahassāni niraye pacceyyāsi tassa tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, kammassa vipākaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme paṭisaṁvedesī”ti.
[¶49] Later, Venerable Aṅgulimāla was experiencing the bliss of release while in private retreat. On that occasion he expressed this heartfelt sentiment:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā aṅgulimālo rahogato paṭisallīno vimuttisukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedi; tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶50] “He who once was heedless,
but turned to heedfulness,
shines upon this world,
like the moon freed from clouds.
> Pali: “Yo pubbeva pamajjitvā,
pacchā so nappamajjati;
Somaṁ lokaṁ pabhāseti,
abbhā muttova candimā.
[¶51] Someone whose bad deed
is supplanted by the good,
shines upon this world,
like the moon freed from clouds.
> Pali: Yassa pāpaṁ kataṁ kammaṁ,
kusalena pidhīyati;
Somaṁ lokaṁ pabhāseti,
abbhā muttova candimā.
[¶52] A young mendicant
devoted to the Buddha’s teaching,
shines upon this world,
like the moon freed from clouds.
> Pali: Yo have daharo bhikkhu,
yuñjati buddhasāsane;
Somaṁ lokaṁ pabhāseti,
abbhā muttova candimā.
[¶53] May even my enemies hear a Dhamma talk!
May even my enemies devote themselves to the Buddha’s teaching!
May even my enemies associate with those good men
who establish others in the Dhamma!
> Pali: Disā hi me dhammakathaṁ suṇantu,
Disā hi me yuñjantu buddhasāsane;
Disā hi me te manujā bhajantu,
Ye dhammamevādapayanti santo.
[¶54] May even my enemies hear Dhamma at the right time,
from those who teach acceptance,
praising acquiescence;
and may they follow that path!
> Pali: Disā hi me khantivādānaṁ,
avirodhappasaṁsīnaṁ;
Suṇantu dhammaṁ kālena,
tañca anuvidhīyantu.
[¶55] For then they’d never wish harm
upon myself or others.
Having arrived at ultimate peace,
they’d look after creatures firm and frail.
> Pali: Na hi jātu so mamaṁ hiṁse,
aññaṁ vā pana kiñci naṁ;
Pappuyya paramaṁ santiṁ,
rakkheyya tasathāvare.
[¶56] For while irrigators guide water,
fletchers bend arrows straight,
and carpenters bend timber straight,
the astute tame themselves.
> Pali: Udakañhi nayanti nettikā,
Usukārā namayanti tejanaṁ;
Dāruṁ namayanti tacchakā,
Attānaṁ damayanti paṇḍitā.
[¶57] Some tame by using the rod,
some with goads, and some with whips.
But the unaffected one tamed me
without rod or sword.
> Pali: Daṇḍeneke damayanti,
aṅkusehi kasāhi ca;
Adaṇḍena asatthena,
ahaṁ dantomhi tādinā.
[¶58] My name is ‘Harmless’,
though I used to be harmful.
The name I bear today is true,
for I do no harm to anyone.
> Pali: Ahiṁsakoti me nāmaṁ,
hiṁsakassa pure sato;
Ajjāhaṁ saccanāmomhi,
na naṁ hiṁsāmi kiñci naṁ.
[¶59] I used to be a bandit,
the notorious Aṅgulimāla.
Swept away in a great flood,
I went to the Buddha as a refuge.
> Pali: Coro ahaṁ pure āsiṁ,
aṅgulimāloti vissuto;
Vuyhamāno mahoghena,
buddhaṁ saraṇamāgamaṁ.
[¶60] I used to have blood on my hands,
the notorious Aṅgulimāla.
See the refuge I’ve found—
the leash to existence is eradicated.
> Pali: Lohitapāṇi pure āsiṁ,
aṅgulimāloti vissuto;
Saraṇagamanaṁ passa,
bhavanetti samūhatā.
[¶61] I’ve done many of the sort of deeds
that lead to a bad destination.
The result of my deeds has already struck me,
so I enjoy my food free of debt.
> Pali: Tādisaṁ kammaṁ katvāna,
bahuṁ duggatigāminaṁ;
Phuṭṭho kammavipākena,
aṇaṇo bhuñjāmi bhojanaṁ.
[¶62] Fools and simpletons
devote themselves to negligence.
But the wise protect diligence
as their best treasure.
> Pali: Pamādamanuyuñjanti,
bālā dummedhino janā;
Appamādañca medhāvī,
dhanaṁ seṭṭhaṁva rakkhati.
[¶63] Don’t devote yourself to negligence,
or delight in erotic intimacy.
For if you’re diligent and practice absorption,
you’ll attain abundant happiness.
> Pali: Mā pamādamanuyuñjetha,
mā kāmarati santhavaṁ;
Appamatto hi jhāyanto,
pappoti vipulaṁ sukhaṁ.
[¶64] It was welcome, not unwelcome,
the advice I got was good.
Of the well-explained teachings,
I arrived at the best.
> Pali: Svāgataṁ nāpagataṁ,
nayidaṁ dummantitaṁ mama;
Saṁvibhattesu dhammesu,
yaṁ seṭṭhaṁ tadupāgamaṁ.
[¶65] It was welcome, not unwelcome,
the advice I got was good.
I’ve attained the three knowledges
and fulfilled the Buddha’s instructions.”
> Pali: Svāgataṁ nāpagataṁ,
nayidaṁ dummantitaṁ mama;
Tisso vijjā anuppattā,
kataṁ buddhassa sāsanan”ti.
[¶66] > Pali: Aṅgulimālasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 96. MN 87 · Born From the Beloved
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/96/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/96/#p-N
[¶0] MN 87 · Born From the Beloved
> Pali: MN 87 · Piyajātikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time a certain householder’s dear and beloved only child passed away. After their death he didn’t feel like working or eating. He would go to the cremation ground and wail, “Where are you, my only child? Where are you, my only child?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa gahapatissa ekaputtako piyo manāpo kālaṅkato hoti. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya neva kammantā paṭibhanti na bhattaṁ paṭibhāti. So āḷāhanaṁ gantvā kandati: “kahaṁ, ekaputtaka, kahaṁ, ekaputtakā”ti.
[¶3] Then he went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Your faculties, householder, are those of one who is unstable in their own mind; there is a deterioration in your faculties.”
> Pali: Atha kho so gahapati yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho taṁ gahapatiṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “na kho te, gahapati, sake citte ṭhitassa indriyāni, atthi te indriyānaṁ aññathattan”ti.
[¶4] “And how, sir, could there be no deterioration of my faculties? For my dear and beloved only child has passed away. Since their death I haven’t felt like working or eating. I go to the cremation ground and wail: ‘Where are you, my only child? Where are you, my only child?’”
> Pali: “Kiñhi me, bhante, indriyānaṁ nāññathattaṁ bhavissati; mayhañhi, bhante, ekaputto piyo manāpo kālaṅkato. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya neva kammantā paṭibhanti, na bhattaṁ paṭibhāti. Sohaṁ āḷāhanaṁ gantvā kandāmi: ‘kahaṁ, ekaputtaka, kahaṁ, ekaputtakā’”ti.
[¶5] “That’s so true, householder! That’s so true, householder! For our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.”
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, gahapati, evametaṁ, gahapati. Piyajātikā hi, gahapati, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā”ti.
[¶6] “Sir, who on earth could ever think such a thing! For our loved ones are a source of joy and happiness.” Disagreeing with the Buddha’s statement, rejecting it, he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: “Kassa kho nāmetaṁ, bhante, evaṁ bhavissati: ‘piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’ti? Piyajātikā hi kho, bhante, ānandasomanassā piyappabhavikā”ti. Atha kho so gahapati bhagavato bhāsitaṁ anabhinanditvā paṭikkositvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶7] Now at that time several gamblers were playing dice not far from the Buddha. That householder approached them and told them what had happened.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā akkhadhuttā bhagavato avidūre akkhehi dibbanti. Atha kho so gahapati yena te akkhadhuttā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā akkhadhutte etadavoca: “idhāhaṁ, bhonto, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho maṁ, bhonto, samaṇo gotamo etadavoca: ‘na kho te, gahapati, sake citte ṭhitassa indriyāni, atthi te indriyānaṁ aññathattan’ti. Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhonto, samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kiñhi me, bhante, indriyānaṁ nāññathattaṁ bhavissati; mayhañhi, bhante, ekaputtako piyo manāpo kālaṅkato. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya neva kammantā paṭibhanti, na bhattaṁ paṭibhāti. Sohaṁ āḷāhanaṁ gantvā kandāmi— kahaṁ, ekaputtaka, kahaṁ, ekaputtakā’ti. ‘Evametaṁ, gahapati, evametaṁ, gahapati. Piyajātikā hi, gahapati, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’ti. ‘Kassa kho nāmetaṁ, bhante, evaṁ bhavissati— piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā? Piyajātikā hi kho, bhante, ānandasomanassā piyappabhavikā’ti. Atha khvāhaṁ, bhonto, samaṇassa gotamassa bhāsitaṁ anabhinanditvā paṭikkositvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamin”ti.
[¶8] “That’s so true, householder! That’s so true, householder! For our loved ones are a source of joy and happiness.”
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, gahapati, evametaṁ, gahapati. Piyajātikā hi, gahapati, ānandasomanassā piyappabhavikā”ti.
[¶9] Thinking, “The gamblers and I are in agreement,” the householder left.
> Pali: Atha kho so gahapati “sameti me akkhadhuttehī”ti pakkāmi.
[¶10] Eventually that topic of discussion reached the royal compound. Then King Pasenadi addressed Queen Mallikā, “Mallikā, your ascetic Gotama said this: ‘Our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.’”
> Pali: Atha kho idaṁ kathāvatthu anupubbena rājantepuraṁ pāvisi. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo mallikaṁ deviṁ āmantesi: “idaṁ te, mallike, samaṇena gotamena bhāsitaṁ: ‘piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’”ti.
[¶11] “If that’s what the Buddha said, Great King, then that’s how it is.”
> Pali: “Sacetaṁ, mahārāja, bhagavatā bhāsitaṁ, evametan”ti.
[¶12] “No matter what the ascetic Gotama says, Mallikā agrees with him: ‘If that’s what the Buddha said, Great King, then that’s how it is.’ You’re just like a pupil who agrees with everything their tutor says. Go away, Mallikā, get out of here!”
> Pali: “Evameva panāyaṁ mallikā yaññadeva samaṇo gotamo bhāsati taṁ tadevassa abbhanumodati: ‘Sacetaṁ, mahārāja, bhagavatā bhāsitaṁ evametan’ti. Seyyathāpi nāma, yaññadeva ācariyo antevāsissa bhāsati taṁ tadevassa antevāsī abbhanumodati: ‘evametaṁ, ācariya, evametaṁ, ācariyā’ti. Evameva kho tvaṁ, mallike, yaññadeva samaṇo gotamo bhāsati taṁ tadevassa abbhanumodasi: ‘Sacetaṁ, mahārāja, bhagavatā bhāsitaṁ evametan’ti. Cara pire, mallike, vinassā”ti.
[¶13] Then Queen Mallikā addressed the brahmin Nāḷijaṅgha, “Please, brahmin, go to the Buddha, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And then say: ‘Sir, did the Buddha make this statement: “Our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress”?’ Remember well how the Buddha answers and tell it to me. For Realized Ones say nothing that is not so.”
> Pali: Atha kho mallikā devī nāḷijaṅghaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘mallikā, bhante, devī bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti; evañca vadehi: ‘bhāsitā nu kho, bhante, bhagavatā esā vācā— piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’ti. Yathā te bhagavā byākaroti taṁ sādhukaṁ uggahetvā mama āroceyyāsi. Na hi tathāgatā vitathaṁ bhaṇantī”ti.
[¶14] “Yes, ma’am,” he replied. He went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, Queen Mallikā bows with her head to your feet. She asks if you are healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And she asks whether the Buddha made this statement: ‘Our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhotī”ti kho nāḷijaṅgho brāhmaṇo mallikāya deviyā paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho nāḷijaṅgho brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mallikā, bho gotama, devī bhoto gotamassa pāde sirasā vandati; appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati; evañca vadeti: ‘bhāsitā nu kho, bhante, bhagavatā esā vācā— piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’”ti.
[¶15] “That’s right, brahmin, that’s right! For our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa. Piyajātikā hi, brāhmaṇa, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikāti.
[¶16] And here’s a way to understand how our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. Once upon a time right here in Sāvatthī a certain woman’s mother passed away. And because of that she went mad and lost her mind. She went from street to street and from square to square saying, ‘Has anyone seen my mother? Has anyone seen my mother?’
> Pali: Tadamināpetaṁ, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā. Bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imissāyeva sāvatthiyā aññatarissā itthiyā mātā kālamakāsi. Sā tassā kālakiriyāya ummattikā khittacittā rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘api me mātaraṁ addassatha, api me mātaraṁ addassathā’ti?
[¶17] And here’s another way to understand how our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.
> Pali: Imināpi kho etaṁ, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikāti.
[¶18] Once upon a time right here in Sāvatthī a certain woman’s father … brother … sister … son … daughter … husband passed away. And because of that she went mad and lost her mind. She went from street to street and from square to square saying, ‘Has anyone seen my husband? Has anyone seen my husband?’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imissāyeva sāvatthiyā aññatarissā itthiyā pitā kālamakāsi … bhātā kālamakāsi … bhaginī kālamakāsi … putto kālamakāsi … dhītā kālamakāsi … sāmiko kālamakāsi. Sā tassa kālakiriyāya ummattikā khittacittā rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘api me sāmikaṁ addassatha, api me sāmikaṁ addassathā’ti?
[¶19] And here’s another way to understand how our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.
> Pali: Imināpi kho etaṁ, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikāti.
[¶20] Once upon a time right here in Sāvatthī a certain man’s mother … father … brother … sister … son … daughter … wife passed away. And because of that he went mad and lost his mind. He went from street to street and from square to square saying, ‘Has anyone seen my wife? Has anyone seen my wife?’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imissāyeva sāvatthiyā aññatarassa purisassa mātā kālamakāsi. So tassā kālakiriyāya ummattako khittacitto rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘api me mātaraṁ addassatha, api me mātaraṁ addassathā’ti? Imināpi kho etaṁ, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikāti. Bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imissāyeva sāvatthiyā aññatarassa purisassa pitā kālamakāsi … bhātā kālamakāsi … bhaginī kālamakāsi … putto kālamakāsi … dhītā kālamakāsi … pajāpati kālamakāsi. So tassā kālakiriyāya ummattako khittacitto rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘api me pajāpatiṁ addassatha, api me pajāpatiṁ addassathā’ti?
[¶21] And here’s another way to understand how our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.
> Pali: Imināpi kho etaṁ, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikāti.
[¶22] Once upon a time right here in Sāvatthī a certain woman went to live with her relative’s family. But her relatives wanted to divorce her from her husband and give her to another, who she didn’t want. So she told her husband about this. But he cut her in two and disemboweled himself, thinking, ‘We shall be together after death.’ That’s another way to understand how our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.”
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, imissāyeva sāvatthiyā aññatarā itthī ñātikulaṁ agamāsi. Tassā te ñātakā sāmikaṁ acchinditvā aññassa dātukāmā. Sā ca taṁ na icchati. Atha kho sā itthī sāmikaṁ etadavoca: ‘ime, maṁ, ayyaputta, ñātakā tvaṁ acchinditvā aññassa dātukāmā. Ahañca taṁ na icchāmī’ti. Atha kho so puriso taṁ itthiṁ dvidhā chetvā attānaṁ upphālesi: ‘ubho pecca bhavissāmā’ti. Imināpi kho etaṁ, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā”ti.
[¶23] Then Nāḷijaṅgha the brahmin, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, rose from his seat, went to Queen Mallikā, and told her of all they had discussed. Then Queen Mallikā approached King Pasenadi and said to him, “What do you think, Great King? Do you love Princess Vajirī?”
> Pali: Atha kho nāḷijaṅgho brāhmaṇo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena mallikā devī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā yāvatako ahosi bhagavatā saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ mallikāya deviyā ārocesi. Atha kho mallikā devī yena rājā pasenadi kosalo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ etadavoca: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, piyā te vajirī kumārī”ti?
[¶24] “Indeed I do, Mallikā.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, mallike, piyā me vajirī kumārī”ti.
[¶25] “What do you think, Great King? If she were to decay and perish, would sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress arise in you?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, vajiriyā te kumāriyā vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶26] “If she were to decay and perish, my life would fall apart. How could sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress not arise in me?”
> Pali: “Vajiriyā me, mallike, kumāriyā vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā jīvitassapi siyā aññathattaṁ, kiṁ pana me na uppajjissanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶27] “This is what the Buddha was referring to when he said: ‘Our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.’
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’ti.
[¶28] What do you think, Great King? Do you love Queen Vāsabhā? …
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, piyā te vāsabhā khattiyā”ti? “Evaṁ, mallike, piyā me vāsabhā khattiyā”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, vāsabhāya te khattiyāya vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti? “Vāsabhāya me, mallike, khattiyāya vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā jīvitassapi siyā aññathattaṁ, kiṁ pana me na uppajjissanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti? “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’ti.
[¶29] Do you love your son, General Viḍūḍabha? …
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, piyo te viṭaṭūbho senāpatī”ti? “Evaṁ, mallike, piyo me viṭaṭūbho senāpatī”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, viṭaṭūbhassa te senāpatissa vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti? “Viṭaṭūbhassa me, mallike, senāpatissa vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā jīvitassapi siyā aññathattaṁ, kiṁ pana me na uppajjissanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti? “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’ti.
[¶30] Do you love me?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, piyā te ahan”ti?
[¶31] “Indeed I do love you, Mallikā.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, mallike, piyā mesi tvan”ti.
[¶32] “What do you think, Great King? If I were to decay and perish, would sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress arise in you?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, mayhaṁ te vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶33] “If you were to decay and perish, my life would fall apart. How could sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress not arise in me?”
> Pali: “Tuyhañhi me, mallike, vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā jīvitassapi siyā aññathattaṁ, kiṁ pana me na uppajjissanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶34] “This is what the Buddha was referring to when he said: ‘Our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.’
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’ti.
[¶35] What do you think, Great King? Do you love the realms of Kāsi and Kosala?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, piyā te kāsikosalā”ti?
[¶36] “Indeed I do, Mallikā. It’s due to the bounty of Kāsi and Kosala that we use sandalwood imported from Kāsi and wear garlands, fragrance, and makeup.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, mallike, piyā me kāsikosalā. Kāsikosalānaṁ, mallike, ānubhāvena kāsikacandanaṁ paccanubhoma, mālāgandhavilepanaṁ dhāremā”ti.
[¶37] “What do you think, Great King? If these realms were to decay and perish, would sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress arise in you?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, kāsikosalānaṁ te vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶38] “If they were to decay and perish, my life would fall apart. How could sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress not arise in me?”
> Pali: “Kāsikosalānañhi, mallike, vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā jīvitassapi siyā aññathattaṁ, kiṁ pana me na uppajjissanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā”ti?
[¶39] “This is what the Buddha was referring to when he said: ‘Our loved ones are a source of sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress.’”
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho taṁ, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sandhāya bhāsitaṁ: ‘piyajātikā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā piyappabhavikā’”ti.
[¶40] “It’s incredible, Mallikā, it’s amazing, how far the Buddha sees with penetrating wisdom, it seems to me. Come, Mallikā, rinse my hands.”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, mallike, abbhutaṁ, mallike. Yāvañca so bhagavā paññāya ativijjha maññe passati. Ehi, mallike, ācamehī”ti.
[¶41] Then King Pasenadi rose from his seat, arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and expressed this heartfelt sentiment three times:
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶42] “Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: “Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶43] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶44] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!”
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassā”ti.
[¶45] > Pali: Piyajātikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 97. MN 88 · The Foreign Cloth
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/97/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/97/#p-N
[¶0] MN 88 · The Foreign Cloth
> Pali: MN 88 · Bāhitikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then Venerable Ānanda robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms. He wandered for alms in Sāvatthī. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to the Eastern Monastery, the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother, for the day’s meditation.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena pubbārāmo migāramātupāsādo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya.
[¶3] Now at that time King Pasenadi of Kosala mounted the Single Lotus Elephant and drove out from Sāvatthī in the middle of the day. He saw Ānanda coming off in the distance and said to the chief minister Sirivaḍḍha, “My dear Sirivaḍḍha, isn’t that Venerable Ānanda?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena rājā pasenadi kosalo ekapuṇḍarīkaṁ nāgaṁ abhiruhitvā sāvatthiyā niyyāti divā divassa. Addasā kho rājā pasenadi kosalo āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna sirivaḍḍhaṁ mahāmattaṁ āmantesi: “āyasmā no eso, samma sirivaḍḍha, ānando”ti.
[¶4] “Indeed it is, Great King.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, mahārāja, āyasmā eso ānando”ti.
[¶5] Then King Pasenadi addressed a man, “Please, my man, go to Venerable Ānanda, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Say to him, ‘Sir, King Pasenadi of Kosala bows with his head at your feet.’ And then say, ‘Sir, if you have no urgent business, please wait a while out of sympathy.’”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena āyasmato ānandassa pāde sirasā vandāhi: ‘rājā, bhante, pasenadi kosalo āyasmato ānandassa pāde sirasā vandatī’ti; evañca vadehi: ‘sace kira, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa na kiñci accāyikaṁ karaṇīyaṁ, āgametu kira, bhante, āyasmā ānando muhuttaṁ anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, Your Majesty,” that man replied. He did as the king asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho so puriso rañño pasenadissa kosalassa paṭissutvā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho so puriso āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “rājā, bhante, pasenadi kosalo āyasmato ānandassa pāde sirasā vandati; evañca vadeti: ‘sace kira, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa na kiñci accāyikaṁ karaṇīyaṁ, āgametu kira, bhante, āyasmā ānando muhuttaṁ anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti.
[¶7] Ānanda consented with silence.
> Pali: Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā ānando tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶8] Then King Pasenadi rode on the elephant as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached Ānanda on foot. He bowed, stood to one side, and said to Ānanda, “Sir, if you have no urgent business, it would be nice of you to go to the bank of the Aciravatī River out of sympathy.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo yāvatikā nāgassa bhūmi nāgena gantvā nāgā paccorohitvā pattikova yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho rājā pasenadi kosalo āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “sace, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa na kiñci accāyikaṁ karaṇīyaṁ, sādhu, bhante, āyasmā ānando yena aciravatiyā nadiyā tīraṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.
[¶9] Ānanda consented with silence.
> Pali: Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā ānando tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶10] He went to the river bank and sat at the root of a certain tree on a seat spread out. Then King Pasenadi rode on the elephant as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached Ānanda on foot. He bowed, stood to one side, and said to Ānanda, “Here, Venerable Ānanda, sit on this elephant rug.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena aciravatiyā nadiyā tīraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo yāvatikā nāgassa bhūmi nāgena gantvā nāgā paccorohitvā pattikova yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho rājā pasenadi kosalo āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “idha, bhante, āyasmā ānando hatthatthare nisīdatū”ti.
[¶11] “Enough, Great King, you sit on it. I’m sitting on my own seat.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, mahārāja. Nisīda tvaṁ; nisinno ahaṁ sake āsane”ti.
[¶12] So the king sat down on the seat spread out, and said, “Honorable Ānanda, would the Buddha engage in the sort of behavior—by way of body, speech, or mind—that is faulted by ascetics and brahmins?”
> Pali: Nisīdi kho rājā pasenadi kosalo paññatte āsane. Nisajja kho rājā pasenadi kosalo āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “kiṁ nu kho, bhante ānanda, so bhagavā tathārūpaṁ kāyasamācāraṁ samācareyya, yvāssa kāyasamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehī”ti?
[¶13] “No, Great King, the Buddha would not engage in the sort of behavior that is faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins.”
> Pali: “Na kho, mahārāja, so bhagavā tathārūpaṁ kāyasamācāraṁ samācareyya, yvāssa kāyasamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti. “Kiṁ pana, bhante ānanda, so bhagavā tathārūpaṁ vacīsamācāraṁ …pe… manosamācāraṁ samācareyya, yvāssa manosamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehī”ti? “Na kho, mahārāja, so bhagavā tathārūpaṁ manosamācāraṁ samācareyya, yvāssa manosamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti.
[¶14] “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! For I couldn’t fully express the question, but Venerable Ānanda’s answer completed it for me. I don’t believe that praise or criticism of others spoken by incompetent fools, without examining or scrutinizing, is the most important thing. Rather, I believe that praise or criticism of others spoken by competent and intelligent people after examining and scrutinizing is the most important thing.
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Yañhi mayaṁ, bhante, nāsakkhimhā pañhena paripūretuṁ taṁ, bhante, āyasmatā ānandena pañhassa veyyākaraṇena paripūritaṁ. Ye te, bhante, bālā abyattā ananuvicca apariyogāhetvā paresaṁ vaṇṇaṁ vā avaṇṇaṁ vā bhāsanti, na mayaṁ taṁ sārato paccāgacchāma; ye pana te, bhante, paṇḍitā viyattā medhāvino anuvicca pariyogāhetvā paresaṁ vaṇṇaṁ vā avaṇṇaṁ vā bhāsanti, mayaṁ taṁ sārato paccāgacchāma.
[¶15] But Honorable Ānanda, what kind of bodily behavior is faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins?”
> Pali: Katamo pana, bhante ānanda, kāyasamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti?
[¶16] “Unskillful behavior.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro akusalo”.
[¶17] “But what kind of bodily behavior is unskillful?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro akusalo”?
[¶18] “Blameworthy behavior.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro sāvajjo”.
[¶19] “But what kind of bodily behavior is blameworthy?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro sāvajjo”?
[¶20] “Hurtful behavior.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro sabyābajjho”.
[¶21] “But what kind of bodily behavior is hurtful?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro sabyābajjho”?
[¶22] “Behavior that results in suffering.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro dukkhavipāko”.
[¶23] “But what kind of bodily behavior results in suffering?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro dukkhavipāko”?
[¶24] “Bodily behavior that leads to hurting yourself, hurting others, and hurting both, and which makes unskillful qualities grow while skillful qualities decline. That kind of bodily behavior is faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati. Tassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti; evarūpo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti.
[¶25] “But what kind of verbal behavior … mental behavior is faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins?” …
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante ānanda, vacīsamācāro …pe… manosamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti?
[¶26] > Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro akusalo”.
[¶27] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro akusalo”? “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro sāvajjo”.
[¶28] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro sāvajjo”? “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro sabyābajjho”.
[¶29] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro sabyābajjho”? “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro dukkhavipāko”.
[¶30] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro dukkhavipāko”?
[¶31] “Mental behavior that leads to hurting yourself, hurting others, and hurting both, and which makes unskillful qualities grow while skillful qualities decline. That kind of mental behavior is faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro attabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati. Tassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti; evarūpo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro opārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti.
[¶32] “Sir, does the Buddha praise giving up all these unskillful things?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, bhante ānanda, so bhagavā sabbesaṁyeva akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ vaṇṇetī”ti?
[¶33] “Great king, the Realized One has given up all unskillful things and possesses skillful things.”
> Pali: “Sabbākusaladhammapahīno kho, mahārāja, tathāgato kusaladhammasamannāgato”ti.
[¶34] “But sir, what kind of bodily behavior is not faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante ānanda, kāyasamācāro anopārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti?
[¶35] “Skillful behavior.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro kusalo”.
[¶36] “But what kind of bodily behavior is skillful?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro kusalo”?
[¶37] “Blameless behavior.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anavajjo”.
[¶38] “But what kind of bodily behavior is blameless?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro anavajjo”?
[¶39] “Pleasing behavior.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro abyābajjho”.
[¶40] “But what kind of bodily behavior is pleasing?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro abyābajjho”?
[¶41] “Behavior that results in happiness.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro sukhavipāko”.
[¶42] “But what kind of bodily behavior results in happiness?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro sukhavipāko”?
[¶43] “Bodily behavior that leads to pleasing yourself, pleasing others, and pleasing both, and which makes unskillful qualities decline while skillful qualities grow. That kind of bodily behavior is not faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati. Tassa akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Evarūpo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anopārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti.
[¶44] “But what kind of verbal behavior … mental behavior is not faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins?” …
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante ānanda, vacīsamācāro …pe… manosamācāro anopārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti?
[¶45] > Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro kusalo”.
[¶46] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro kusalo”? “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro anavajjo”.
[¶47] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro anavajjo”? “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro abyābajjho”.
[¶48] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro abyābajjho”? “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro sukhavipāko”.
[¶49] > Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, manosamācāro sukhavipāko”?
[¶50] “Mental behavior that leads to pleasing yourself, pleasing others, and pleasing both, and which makes unskillful qualities decline while skillful qualities grow. That kind of mental behavior is not faulted by sensible ascetics and brahmins.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro nevattabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na parabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati, na ubhayabyābādhāyapi saṁvattati. Tassa akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Evarūpo kho, mahārāja, manosamācāro anopārambho samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī”ti.
[¶51] “Sir, does the Buddha praise embracing all these skillful things?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhante ānanda, so bhagavā sabbesaṁyeva kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadaṁ vaṇṇetī”ti?
[¶52] “Great king, the Realized One has given up all unskillful things and possesses skillful things.”
> Pali: “Sabbākusaladhammapahīno kho, mahārāja, tathāgato kusaladhammasamannāgato”ti.
[¶53] “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! How well this was said by Venerable Ānanda! I’m delighted and satisfied with what you’ve expressed so well. So much so that if an elephant-treasure was suitable for you, I would give you one. If a horse-treasure was suitable for you, I would give you one. If a prize village was suitable for you, I would give you one. But, sir, I know that these things are not suitable for you. This foreign cloth was sent to me by King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, packed in a parasol case. It’s exactly sixteen measures long and eight wide. May Venerable Ānanda please accept it out of sympathy.”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Yāva subhāsitañcidaṁ, bhante, āyasmatā ānandena. Iminā ca mayaṁ, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa subhāsitena attamanābhiraddhā. Evaṁ attamanābhiraddhā ca mayaṁ, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa subhāsitena. Sace, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa hatthiratanaṁ kappeyya, hatthiratanampi mayaṁ āyasmato ānandassa dadeyyāma. Sace, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa assaratanaṁ kappeyya, assaratanampi mayaṁ āyasmato ānandassa dadeyyāma. Sace, bhante, āyasmato ānandassa gāmavaraṁ kappeyya, gāmavarampi mayaṁ āyasmato ānandassa dadeyyāma. Api ca, bhante, mayampetaṁ jānāma: ‘netaṁ āyasmato ānandassa kappatī’ti. Ayaṁ me, bhante, bāhitikā raññā māgadhena ajātasattunā vedehiputtena vatthanāḷiyā pakkhipitvā pahitā soḷasasamā āyāmena, aṭṭhasamā vitthārena. Taṁ, bhante, āyasmā ānando paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.
[¶54] “Enough, Great King. My three robes are complete.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, mahārāja, paripuṇṇaṁ me ticīvaran”ti.
[¶55] “Sir, we have both seen this Aciravatī River when it has rained heavily in the mountains, and the river overflows both its banks. In the same way, Venerable Ānanda can make a set of three robes for himself from this foreign cloth, and you can share your old robes with your fellow monks. In this way my religious donation will come to overflow, it seems to me. Please accept the foreign cloth.”
> Pali: “Ayaṁ, bhante, aciravatī nadī diṭṭhā āyasmatā ceva ānandena amhehi ca. Yadā uparipabbate mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho hoti, athāyaṁ aciravatī nadī ubhato kūlāni saṁvissandantī gacchati; evameva kho, bhante, āyasmā ānando imāya bāhitikāya attano ticīvaraṁ karissati. Yaṁ panāyasmato ānandassa purāṇaṁ ticīvaraṁ taṁ sabrahmacārīhi saṁvibhajissati. Evāyaṁ amhākaṁ dakkhiṇā saṁvissandantī maññe gamissati. Paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante, āyasmā ānando bāhitikan”ti.
[¶56] So Ānanda accepted it.
> Pali: Paṭiggahesi kho āyasmā ānando bāhitikaṁ.
[¶57] Then King Pasenadi said to him, “Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bhante ānanda, gacchāma; bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶58] “Please, Great King, go at your convenience.” Then King Pasenadi approved and agreed with what Ānanda said. He rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled Ānanda, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, mahārāja, kālaṁ maññasī”ti. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo āyasmato ānandassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶59] Soon after he left, Ānanda went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened. He presented the cloth to the Buddha.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando acirapakkantassa rañño pasenadissa kosalassa yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando yāvatako ahosi raññā pasenadinā kosalena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ bhagavato ārocesi. Tañca bāhitikaṁ bhagavato pādāsi.
[¶60] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants,
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶61] “Mendicants, King Pasenadi is lucky, so very lucky, to get to see Ānanda and pay homage to him.”
> Pali: “lābhā, bhikkhave, rañño pasenadissa kosalassa, suladdhalābhā, bhikkhave, rañño pasenadissa kosalassa; yaṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo labhati ānandaṁ dassanāya, labhati payirupāsanāyā”ti.
[¶62] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶63] > Pali: Bāhitikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 98. MN 89 · Shrines to the Teaching
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/98/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/98/#p-N
[¶0] MN 89 · Shrines to the Teaching
> Pali: MN 89 · Dhammacetiyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, near the Sakyan town named Medaḷumpa.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati medāḷupaṁ nāma sakyānaṁ nigamo.
[¶2] Now at that time King Pasenadi of Kosala had arrived at Townsville on some business.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena rājā pasenadi kosalo nagarakaṁ anuppatto hoti kenacideva karaṇīyena.
[¶3] Then he addressed Dīgha Kārāyana, “My good Kārāyana, harness the finest chariots. We will go to a park and see the scenery.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo dīghaṁ kārāyanaṁ āmantesi: “yojehi, samma kārāyana, bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni, uyyānabhūmiṁ gacchāma subhūmiṁ dassanāyā”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, Your Majesty,” replied Dīgha Kārāyana. He harnessed the chariots and informed the king, “Your Majesty, the finest chariots are harnessed. Please go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho dīgho kārāyano rañño pasenadissa kosalassa paṭissutvā bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa paṭivedesi: “yuttāni kho te, deva, bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni. Yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶5] Then King Pasenadi mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out in full royal pomp from Townsville, heading for the park grounds. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and entered the park on foot.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi nagarakamhā niyyāsi mahaccā rājānubhāvena. Yena ārāmo tena pāyāsi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova ārāmaṁ pāvisi.
[¶6] As he was going for a walk in the park he saw roots of trees that were impressive and inspiring, quiet and still, far from the madding crowd, remote from human settlements, and fit for retreat. The sight reminded him right away of the Buddha: “These roots of trees, so impressive and inspiring, are like those where we used to pay homage to the Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha.”
> Pali: Addasā kho rājā pasenadi kosalo ārāme jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno rukkhamūlāni pāsādikāni pasādanīyāni appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppāni. Disvāna bhagavantaṁyeva ārabbha sati udapādi: “imāni kho tāni rukkhamūlāni pāsādikāni pasādanīyāni appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppāni, yattha sudaṁ mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ payirupāsāma arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.
[¶7] He addressed Dīgha Kārāyana, “These roots of trees, so impressive and inspiring, are like those where we used to pay homage to the Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. My good Kārāyana, where is that Buddha at present?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo dīghaṁ kārāyanaṁ āmantesi: “imāni kho, samma kārāyana, tāni rukkhamūlāni pāsādikāni pasādanīyāni appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppāni, yattha sudaṁ mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ payirupāsāma arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ. Kahaṁ nu kho, samma kārāyana, etarahi so bhagavā viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti?
[¶8] “Great king, there is a Sakyan town named Medaḷumpa. That’s where the Buddha is now staying.”
> Pali: “Atthi, mahārāja, medāḷupaṁ nāma sakyānaṁ nigamo. Tattha so bhagavā etarahi viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti.
[¶9] “But how far away is that town?”
> Pali: “Kīvadūre pana, samma kārāyana, nagarakamhā medāḷupaṁ nāma sakyānaṁ nigamo hotī”ti?
[¶10] “Not far, Great King, it’s three leagues. We can get there while it’s still light.”
> Pali: “Na dūre, mahārāja; tīṇi yojanāni; sakkā divasāvasesena gantun”ti.
[¶11] “Well then, harness the chariots, and we shall go to see the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, samma kārāyana, yojehi bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni, gamissāma mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.
[¶12] “Yes, Your Majesty,” replied Dīgha Kārāyana. He harnessed the chariots and informed the king, “Your Majesty, the finest chariots are harnessed. Please go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho dīgho kārāyano rañño pasenadissa kosalassa paṭissutvā bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa paṭivedesi: “yuttāni kho te, deva, bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni. Yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶13] Then King Pasenadi mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out from Townsville to Medaḷumpa. He reached the town while it was still light and headed for the monastery grounds. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and entered the monastery on foot.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi nagarakamhā yena medāḷupaṁ nāma sakyānaṁ nigamo tena pāyāsi. Teneva divasāvasesena medāḷupaṁ nāma sakyānaṁ nigamaṁ sampāpuṇi. Yena ārāmo tena pāyāsi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova ārāmaṁ pāvisi.
[¶14] At that time several mendicants were walking mindfully in the open air. King Pasenadi of Kosala went up to them and said, “Sirs, where is the Blessed One at present, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha? For I want to see him.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū abbhokāse caṅkamanti. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “kahaṁ nu kho, bhante, etarahi so bhagavā viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho? Dassanakāmā hi mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.
[¶15] “Great king, that’s his dwelling, with the door closed. Approach it quietly, without hurrying; go onto the porch, clear your throat, and knock on the door-panel. The Buddha will open the door.” The king right away presented his sword and turban to Dīgha Kārāyana, who thought, “Now the king seeks privacy. I should wait here.”
> Pali: “Eso, mahārāja, vihāro saṁvutadvāro. Tena appasaddo upasaṅkamitvā ataramāno āḷindaṁ pavisitvā ukkāsitvā aggaḷaṁ ākoṭehi. Vivarissati bhagavā te dvāran”ti. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo tattheva khaggañca uṇhīsañca dīghassa kārāyanassa pādāsi. Atha kho dīghassa kārāyanassa etadahosi: “rahāyati kho dāni rājā, idheva dāni mayā ṭhātabban”ti.
[¶16] Then the king approached the Buddha’s dwelling, cleared his throat and knocked on the door-panel, and the Buddha opened the door.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo yena so vihāro saṁvutadvāro tena appasaddo upasaṅkamitvā ataramāno āḷindaṁ pavisitvā ukkāsitvā aggaḷaṁ ākoṭesi. Vivari bhagavā dvāraṁ.
[¶17] King Pasenadi entered the dwelling, and bowed with his head to the Buddha’s feet, caressing them and covering them with kisses, and pronounced his name: “Sir, I am Pasenadi, king of Kosala! I am Pasenadi, king of Kosala!”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo vihāraṁ pavisitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti: “rājāhaṁ, bhante, pasenadi kosalo; rājāhaṁ, bhante, pasenadi kosalo”ti.
[¶18] “But, Great King, for what reason do you demonstrate such utmost deference for this body, conveying your manifest love?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, mahārāja, atthavasaṁ sampassamāno imasmiṁ sarīre evarūpaṁ paramanipaccakāraṁ karosi, mittūpahāraṁ upadaṁsesī”ti?
[¶19] “Sir, I infer about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’ It happens, sir, that I see some ascetics and brahmins leading the spiritual life only for a limited period: ten, twenty, thirty, or forty years. Some time later—nicely bathed and anointed, with hair and beard dressed—they amuse themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. But here I see the mendicants leading the spiritual life entirely full and pure as long as they live, to their last breath. I don’t see any other spiritual life elsewhere so full and pure. That’s why I infer this about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: “Atthi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti. Idhāhaṁ, bhante, passāmi eke samaṇabrāhmaṇe pariyantakataṁ brahmacariyaṁ carante dasapi vassāni, vīsampi vassāni, tiṁsampi vassāni, cattārīsampi vassāni. Te aparena samayena sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti. Idha panāhaṁ, bhante, bhikkhū passāmi yāvajīvaṁ āpāṇakoṭikaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carante. Na kho panāhaṁ, bhante, ito bahiddhā aññaṁ evaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ samanupassāmi. Ayampi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶20] Furthermore, kings fight with kings, aristocrats fight with aristocrats, brahmins fight with brahmins, householders fight with householders. A mother fights with her child, child with mother, father with child, and child with father. Brother fights with brother, brother with sister, sister with brother, and friend fights with friend. But here I see the mendicants living in harmony, appreciating each other, without dispute, blending like milk and water, and regarding each other with kindly eyes. I don’t see any other assembly elsewhere so harmonious. So I infer this about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, rājānopi rājūhi vivadanti, khattiyāpi khattiyehi vivadanti, brāhmaṇāpi brāhmaṇehi vivadanti, gahapatayopi gahapatīhi vivadanti, mātāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi mātarā vivadati, pitāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi pitarā vivadati, bhātāpi bhaginiyā vivadati, bhaginīpi bhātarā vivadati, sahāyopi sahāyena vivadati. Idha panāhaṁ, bhante, bhikkhū passāmi samagge sammodamāne avivadamāne khīrodakībhūte aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassante viharante. Na kho panāhaṁ, bhante, ito bahiddhā aññaṁ evaṁ samaggaṁ parisaṁ samanupassāmi. Ayampi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶21] Furthermore, I have walked and wandered from monastery to monastery and from park to park. There I’ve seen some ascetics and brahmins who are thin, haggard, pale, and veiny—hardly a captivating sight for people, you’d think. It occurred to me: ‘Clearly these venerables lead the spiritual life dissatisfied, or they’re hiding some bad deed they’ve done. That’s why they’re thin, haggard, pale, and veiny—hardly a captivating sight for people, you’d think.’ I went up to them and said: ‘Venerables, why are you so thin, haggard, pale, and veiny—hardly a captivating sight for people, you’d think?’ They say: ‘We have jaundice, Great King.’ But here I see mendicants always smiling and joyful, obviously happy, with cheerful faces, living relaxed, unruffled, surviving on charity, their hearts free as a wild deer. It occurred to me: ‘Clearly these venerables have realized a higher distinction in the Buddha’s instructions than they had before. That’s why these venerables are always smiling and joyful, obviously happy, with cheerful faces, living relaxed, unruffled, surviving on charity, their hearts free as a wild deer.’ So I infer this about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bhante, ārāmena ārāmaṁ, uyyānena uyyānaṁ anucaṅkamāmi anuvicarāmi. Sohaṁ tattha passāmi eke samaṇabrāhmaṇe kise lūkhe dubbaṇṇe uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāte dhamanisanthatagatte, na viya maññe cakkhuṁ bandhante janassa dassanāya. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘addhā ime āyasmanto anabhiratā vā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, atthi vā tesaṁ kiñci pāpaṁ kammaṁ kataṁ paṭicchannaṁ; tathā hi ime āyasmanto kisā lūkhā dubbaṇṇā uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā dhamanisanthatagattā, na viya maññe cakkhuṁ bandhanti janassa dassanāyā’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘kiṁ nu kho tumhe āyasmanto kisā lūkhā dubbaṇṇā uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā dhamanisanthatagattā, na viya maññe cakkhuṁ bandhatha janassa dassanāyā’ti? Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘bandhukarogo no, mahārājā’ti. Idha panāhaṁ, bhante, bhikkhū passāmi haṭṭhapahaṭṭhe udaggudagge abhiratarūpe pīṇindriye appossukke pannalome paradattavutte migabhūtena cetasā viharante. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘addhā ime āyasmanto tassa bhagavato sāsane uḷāraṁ pubbenāparaṁ visesaṁ jānanti; tathā hi ime āyasmanto haṭṭhapahaṭṭhā udaggudaggā abhiratarūpā pīṇindriyā appossukkā pannalomā paradattavuttā migabhūtena cetasā viharantī’ti. Ayampi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶22] Furthermore, as an anointed aristocratic king I am able to execute, fine, or banish those who are guilty. Yet when I’m sitting in court they interrupt me. And I can’t get them to stop interrupting me and wait until I’ve finished speaking. But here I see the mendicants while the Buddha is teaching an assembly of many hundreds, and there is no sound of his disciples coughing or clearing their throats. Once it so happened that the Buddha was teaching an assembly of many hundreds. Then one of his disciples cleared their throat. And one of their spiritual companions nudged them with their knee, to indicate: ‘Hush, venerable, don’t make a sound! Our teacher, the Blessed One, is teaching!’ It occurred to me: ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing, how an assembly can be so well trained without rod or sword!’ I don’t see any other assembly elsewhere so well trained. So I infer this about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bhante, rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto; pahomi ghātetāyaṁ vā ghātetuṁ, jāpetāyaṁ vā jāpetuṁ, pabbājetāyaṁ vā pabbājetuṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, aḍḍakaraṇe nisinnassa antarantarā kathaṁ opātenti. Sohaṁ na labhāmi: ‘mā me bhonto aḍḍakaraṇe nisinnassa antarantarā kathaṁ opātetha, kathāpariyosānaṁ me bhonto āgamentū’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, antarantarā kathaṁ opātenti. Idha panāhaṁ, bhante, bhikkhū passāmi; yasmiṁ samaye bhagavā anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ deseti, neva tasmiṁ samaye bhagavato sāvakānaṁ khipitasaddo vā hoti ukkāsitasaddo vā. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhante, bhagavā anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṁ deseti. Tatraññataro bhagavato sāvako ukkāsi. Tamenaṁ aññataro sabrahmacārī jaṇṇukena ghaṭṭesi: ‘appasaddo āyasmā hotu, māyasmā saddamakāsi; satthā no bhagavā dhammaṁ desetī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho. Adaṇḍena vata kira, bho, asatthena evaṁ suvinītā parisā bhavissatī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ, bhante, ito bahiddhā aññaṁ evaṁ suvinītaṁ parisaṁ samanupassāmi. Ayampi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶23] Furthermore, I’ve seen some astute aristocrats who are subtle, accomplished in the doctrines of others, hair-splitters. You’d think they live to demolish convictions with their intellect. They hear: ‘So, gentlemen, that ascetic Gotama will come down to such-and-such village or town.’ They formulate a question, thinking: ‘We’ll approach the ascetic Gotama and ask him this question. If he answers like this, we’ll refute him like that; and if he answers like that, we’ll refute him like this.’ When they hear that he has come down they approach him. The Buddha educates, encourages, fires up, and inspires them with a Dhamma talk. They don’t even get around to asking their question to the Buddha, so how could they refute his answer? Invariably, they become his disciples. So I infer this about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bhante, passāmi idhekacce khattiyapaṇḍite nipuṇe kataparappavāde vālavedhirūpe. Te bhindantā maññe caranti paññāgatena diṭṭhigatāni. Te suṇanti: ‘samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osarissatī’ti. Te pañhaṁ abhisaṅkharonti: ‘imaṁ mayaṁ pañhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma. Evañce no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evamassa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāma; evañcepi no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evampissa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāmā’ti. Te suṇanti: ‘samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osaṭo’ti. Te yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamanti. Te bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṁseti. Te bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā na ceva bhagavantaṁ pañhaṁ pucchanti, kuto vādaṁ āropessanti? Aññadatthu bhagavato sāvakā sampajjanti. Ayampi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶24] Furthermore, I see some astute brahmins … some astute householders … some astute ascetics who are subtle, accomplished in the doctrines of others, hair-splitters. … They don’t even get around to asking their question to the Buddha, so how could they refute his answer? Invariably, they ask the Buddha for the chance to go forth. And he gives them the going-forth. Soon after going forth, living withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, they realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. They live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness. They say: ‘We were almost lost! We almost perished! For we used to claim that we were ascetics, brahmins, and perfected ones, but we were none of these things. But now we really are ascetics, brahmins, and perfected ones!’ So I infer this about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bhante, passāmi idhekacce brāhmaṇapaṇḍite …pe… gahapatipaṇḍite …pe… samaṇapaṇḍite nipuṇe kataparappavāde vālavedhirūpe. Te bhindantā maññe caranti paññāgatena diṭṭhigatāni. Te suṇanti: ‘samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osarissatī’ti. Te pañhaṁ abhisaṅkharonti: ‘imaṁ mayaṁ pañhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma. Evañce no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evamassa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāma; evañcepi no puṭṭho evaṁ byākarissati, evampissa mayaṁ vādaṁ āropessāmā’ti. Te suṇanti: ‘samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā osaṭo’ti. Te yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamanti. Te bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṁseti. Te bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā na ceva bhagavantaṁ pañhaṁ pucchanti, kuto vādaṁ āropessanti? Aññadatthu bhagavantaṁyeva okāsaṁ yācanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya. Te bhagavā pabbājeti. Te tathāpabbajitā samānā ekā vūpakaṭṭhā appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharantā nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti. Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘manaṁ vata, bho, anassāma; manaṁ vata, bho, panassāma’. Mayañhi pubbe assamaṇāva samānā samaṇāmhāti paṭijānimhā, abrāhmaṇāva samānā brāhmaṇāmhāti paṭijānimhā, anarahantova samānā arahantāmhāti paṭijānimhā. ‘Idāni khomha samaṇā, idāni khomha brāhmaṇā, idāni khomha arahanto’ti. Ayampi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶25] Furthermore, these chamberlains Isidatta and Purāṇa share my meals and my carriages. I give them a livelihood and bring them renown. And yet they don’t show me the same level of deference that they show to the Buddha. Once it so happened that while I was leading a military campaign and testing Isidatta and Purāṇa I took up residence in a cramped house. They spent much of the night discussing the teaching, then they lay down with their heads toward where the Buddha was and their feet toward me. It occurred to me: ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! These chamberlains Isidatta and Purāṇa share my meals and my carriages. I give them a livelihood and bring them renown. And yet they don’t show me the same level of deference that they show to the Buddha. Clearly these venerables have realized a higher distinction in the Buddha’s instructions than they had before.’ So I infer this about the Buddha from the teaching: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bhante, ime isidattapurāṇā thapatayo mamabhattā mamayānā, ahaṁ nesaṁ jīvikāya dātā, yasassa āhattā; atha ca pana no tathā mayi nipaccakāraṁ karonti yathā bhagavati. Bhūtapubbāhaṁ, bhante, senaṁ abbhuyyāto samāno ime ca isidattapurāṇā thapatayo vīmaṁsamāno aññatarasmiṁ sambādhe āvasathe vāsaṁ upagacchiṁ. Atha kho, bhante, ime isidattapurāṇā thapatayo bahudeva rattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya vītināmetvā, yato ahosi bhagavā tato sīsaṁ katvā maṁ pādato karitvā nipajjiṁsu. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho. Ime isidattapurāṇā thapatayo mamabhattā mamayānā, ahaṁ nesaṁ jīvikāya dātā, yasassa āhattā; atha ca pana no tathā mayi nipaccakāraṁ karonti yathā bhagavati. Addhā ime āyasmanto tassa bhagavato sāsane uḷāraṁ pubbenāparaṁ visesaṁ jānantī’ti. Ayampi kho me, bhante, bhagavati dhammanvayo hoti: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶26] Furthermore, the Buddha is an aristocrat, and so am I. The Buddha is Kosalan, and so am I. The Buddha is eighty years old, and so am I. Since this is so, it’s proper for me to act with such utmost deference for the Buddha and convey my manifest love.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, bhagavāpi khattiyo, ahampi khattiyo; bhagavāpi kosalo, ahampi kosalo; bhagavāpi āsītiko, ahampi āsītiko. Yampi, bhante, bhagavāpi khattiyo ahampi khattiyo, bhagavāpi kosalo ahampi kosalo, bhagavāpi āsītiko ahampi āsītiko; imināvārahāmevāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavati paramanipaccakāraṁ kātuṁ, mittūpahāraṁ upadaṁsetuṁ.
[¶27] Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bhante, gacchāma; bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶28] “Please, Great King, go at your convenience.” Then King Pasenadi rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, mahārāja, kālaṁ maññasī”ti. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶29] Soon after the king had left, the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, before he got up and left, King Pasenadi spoke shrines to the teaching. Learn these shrines to the teaching! Memorize these shrines to the teaching! Remember these shrines to the teaching! These shrines to the teaching are beneficial and relate to the fundamentals of the spiritual life.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantassa rañño pasenadissa kosalassa bhikkhū āmantesi: “eso, bhikkhave, rājā pasenadi kosalo dhammacetiyāni bhāsitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto. Uggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, dhammacetiyāni; pariyāpuṇātha, bhikkhave, dhammacetiyāni; dhāretha, bhikkhave, dhammacetiyāni. Atthasaṁhitāni, bhikkhave, dhammacetiyāni ādibrahmacariyakānī”ti.
[¶30] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶31] > Pali: Dhammacetiyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 99. MN 90 · At Kaṇṇakatthala
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/99/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/99/#p-N
[¶0] MN 90 · At Kaṇṇakatthala
> Pali: MN 90 · Kaṇṇakatthalasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Ujuññā in the deer park at Kaṇṇakatthala.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā uruññāyaṁ viharati kaṇṇakatthale migadāye.
[¶2] Now at that time King Pasenadi of Kosala had arrived at Ujuññā on some business. Then he addressed a man, “Please, my man, go to the Buddha, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And then say: ‘Sir, King Pasenadi of Kosala will come to see you today when he has finished breakfast.’”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena rājā pasenadi kosalo uruññaṁ anuppatto hoti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘rājā, bhante, pasenadi kosalo bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti; evañca vadehi: ‘ajja kira, bhante, rājā pasenadi kosalo pacchābhattaṁ bhuttapātarāso bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶3] “Yes, Your Majesty,” that man replied. He did as the king asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho so puriso rañño pasenadissa kosalassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so puriso bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “rājā, bhante, pasenadi kosalo bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati; evañca vadeti: ‘ajja kira, bhante, rājā pasenadi kosalo pacchābhattaṁ bhuttapātarāso bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶4] The sisters Somā and Sakulā heard this. While the meal was being served, they approached the king and said, “Great king, since you are going to the Buddha, please bow in our name with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho somā ca bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī: “ajja kira rājā pasenadi kosalo pacchābhattaṁ bhuttapātarāso bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti. Atha kho somā ca bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ bhattābhihāre upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: “tena hi, mahārāja, amhākampi vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘somā ca, bhante, bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’”ti.
[¶5] When he had finished breakfast, King Pasenadi went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, the sisters Somā and Sakulā bow with their heads to your feet. They ask if you are healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo pacchābhattaṁ bhuttapātarāso yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “somā ca, bhante, bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī”ti.
[¶6] “But, Great King, couldn’t they get any other messenger?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, mahārāja, somā ca bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī aññaṁ dūtaṁ nālatthun”ti?
[¶7] So Pasenadi explained the circumstances of the message. The Buddha said, “May the sisters Somā and Sakulā be happy, Great King.”
> Pali: “Assosuṁ kho, bhante, somā ca bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī: ‘ajja kira rājā pasenadi kosalo pacchābhattaṁ bhuttapātarāso bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’ti. Atha kho, bhante, somā ca bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī maṁ bhattābhihāre upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘tena hi, mahārāja, amhākampi vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha— somā ca bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’”ti. “Sukhiniyo hontu tā, mahārāja, somā ca bhaginī sakulā ca bhaginī”ti.
[¶8] Then the king said to the Buddha, “I have heard, sir, that the ascetic Gotama says this: ‘There is no ascetic or brahmin who will ever claim to be all-knowing and all-seeing, to know and see everything without exception: that is not possible.’ I trust those who say this repeat what the Buddha has said, and do not misrepresent him with an untruth? Is their explanation in line with the teaching? Are there any legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante, samaṇo gotamo evamāha: ‘natthi so samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā yo sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānissati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti. Ye te, bhante, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇo gotamo evamāha—natthi so samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā yo sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānissati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti; kacci te, bhante, bhagavato vuttavādino, na ca bhagavantaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhanti, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaronti, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchatī”ti?
[¶9] “Great king, those who say this do not repeat what I have said. They misrepresent me with what is false and untrue.”
> Pali: “Ye te, mahārāja, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇo gotamo evamāha—natthi so samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā yo sabbaññū sabbadassāvī aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānissati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti; na me te vuttavādino, abbhācikkhanti ca pana maṁ te asatā abhūtenā”ti.
[¶10] Then King Pasenadi addressed General Viḍūḍabha, “General, who introduced this topic of discussion to the royal compound?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo viṭaṭūbhaṁ senāpatiṁ āmantesi: “ko nu kho, senāpati, imaṁ kathāvatthuṁ rājantepure abbhudāhāsī”ti?
[¶11] “It was Sañjaya, Great King, the brahmin of the Ākāsa clan.”
> Pali: “Sañjayo, mahārāja, brāhmaṇo ākāsagotto”ti.
[¶12] Then the king addressed a man, “Please, my man, in my name tell Sañjaya that King Pasenadi summons him.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, mama vacanena sañjayaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ ākāsagottaṁ āmantehi: ‘rājā taṁ, bhante, pasenadi kosalo āmantetī’”ti.
[¶13] “Yes, Your Majesty,” that man replied. He did as the king asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho so puriso rañño pasenadissa kosalassa paṭissutvā yena sañjayo brāhmaṇo ākāsagotto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā sañjayaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ ākāsagottaṁ etadavoca: “rājā taṁ, bhante, pasenadi kosalo āmantetī”ti.
[¶14] Then the king said to the Buddha, “Sir, might the Buddha have spoken in reference to one thing, but that person believed it was something else? How then do you recall making this statement?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “siyā nu kho, bhante, bhagavatā aññadeva kiñci sandhāya bhāsitaṁ, tañca jano aññathāpi paccāgaccheyya. Yathā kathaṁ pana, bhante, bhagavā abhijānāti vācaṁ bhāsitā”ti?
[¶15] “Great king, I recall making this statement: ‘There is no ascetic or brahmin who will ever know all and see all simultaneously: that is not possible.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, mahārāja, abhijānāmi vācaṁ bhāsitā: ‘natthi so samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā yo sakideva sabbaṁ ñassati, sabbaṁ dakkhiti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’”ti.
[¶16] “What the Buddha says appears reasonable.
> Pali: “Heturūpaṁ, bhante, bhagavā āha; saheturūpaṁ, bhante, bhagavā āha: ‘natthi so samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā yo sakideva sabbaṁ ñassati, sabbaṁ dakkhiti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti.
[¶17] Sir, there are these four classes: aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials. Is there any difference between them?”
> Pali: Cattārome, bhante, vaṇṇā— khattiyā, brāhmaṇā, vessā, suddā. Imesaṁ nu kho, bhante, catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ siyā viseso siyā nānākaraṇan”ti?
[¶18] “Of the four classes, two are said to be preeminent— the aristocrats and the brahmins. That is, when it comes to bowing down, rising up, greeting with cupped palms, and observing proper etiquette.”
> Pali: “Cattārome, mahārāja, vaṇṇā— khattiyā, brāhmaṇā, vessā, suddā. Imesaṁ kho, mahārāja, catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ dve vaṇṇā aggamakkhāyanti— khattiyā ca brāhmaṇā ca— yadidaṁ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammānī”ti.
[¶19] “Sir, I am not asking you about this life, but about the life to come.”
> Pali: “Nāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ diṭṭhadhammikaṁ pucchāmi; samparāyikāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ pucchāmi. Cattārome, bhante, vaṇṇā— khattiyā, brāhmaṇā, vessā, suddā. Imesaṁ nu kho, bhante, catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ siyā viseso siyā nānākaraṇan”ti?
[¶20] “Great king, there are these five factors that support meditation. What five? It’s when a mendicant has faith in the Realized One’s awakening: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They are rarely ill or unwell. Their stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold, but just right, and fit for meditation. They’re not devious or deceitful. They reveal themselves honestly to the Teacher or sensible spiritual companions. They live with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They’re strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities. They’re wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering. These are the five factors that support meditation. There are these four classes: aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials. If they had these five factors that support meditation, that would be for their lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: “Pañcimāni, mahārāja, padhāniyaṅgāni. Katamāni pañca? Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu saddho hoti, saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṁ: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti; appābādho hoti appātaṅko samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya majjhimāya padhānakkhamāya; asaṭho hoti amāyāvī yathābhūtaṁ attānaṁ āvikattā satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu; āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya, thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu; paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā— imāni kho, mahārāja, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni. Cattārome, mahārāja, vaṇṇā— khattiyā, brāhmaṇā, vessā, suddā. Te cassu imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatā; ettha pana nesaṁ assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶21] “Sir, there are these four classes: aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials. If they had these five factors that support meditation, would there be any difference between them?”
> Pali: “Cattārome, bhante, vaṇṇā— khattiyā, brāhmaṇā, vessā, suddā. Te cassu imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatā; ettha pana nesaṁ, bhante, siyā viseso siyā nānākaraṇan”ti?
[¶22] “In that case, I say it is the disparity of their efforts in meditation. Suppose there was a pair of elephants or horses or oxen in training who were well tamed and well trained. And there was a pair who were not tamed or trained. What do you think, Great King? Wouldn’t the pair that was well tamed and well trained perform the tasks of the tamed, and reach the level of the tamed?”
> Pali: “Ettha kho nesāhaṁ, mahārāja, padhānavemattataṁ vadāmi. Seyyathāpissu, mahārāja, dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā sudantā suvinītā, dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā adantā avinītā. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, ye te dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā sudantā suvinītā, api nu te dantāva dantakāraṇaṁ gaccheyyuṁ, dantāva dantabhūmiṁ sampāpuṇeyyun”ti?
[¶23] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶24] “But would the pair that was not tamed and trained perform the tasks of the tamed and reach the level of the tamed, just like the tamed pair?”
> Pali: “Ye pana te dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā adantā avinītā, api nu te adantāva dantakāraṇaṁ gaccheyyuṁ, adantāva dantabhūmiṁ sampāpuṇeyyuṁ, seyyathāpi te dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā sudantā suvinītā”ti?
[¶25] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶26] “In the same way, there are things that must be attained by someone with faith, health, integrity, energy, and wisdom. It’s not possible for a faithless, unhealthy, deceitful, lazy, witless person to attain them.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, mahārāja, yaṁ taṁ saddhena pattabbaṁ appābādhena asaṭhena amāyāvinā āraddhavīriyena paññavatā, taṁ vata assaddho bahvābādho saṭho māyāvī kusīto duppañño pāpuṇissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī”ti.
[¶27] “What the Buddha says appears reasonable. Sir, there are these four classes: aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and workers. If they had these five factors that support meditation, and if they practiced rightly, would there be any difference between them?”
> Pali: “Heturūpaṁ, bhante, bhagavā āha; saheturūpaṁ, bhante, bhagavā āha. Cattārome, bhante, vaṇṇā— khattiyā, brāhmaṇā, vessā, suddā. Te cassu imehi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatā te cassu sammappadhānā; ettha pana nesaṁ, bhante, siyā viseso siyā nānākaraṇan”ti?
[¶28] “In that case, I say that there is no difference between the freedom of one and the freedom of the other. Suppose a person took dry teak wood and lit a fire and produced heat. Then another person did the same using sāl wood, another used mango wood, while another used wood of the cluster fig. What do you think, Great King? Would there be any difference between the fires produced by these different kinds of wood, that is, in the flame, color, or luminosity?”
> Pali: “Ettha kho nesāhaṁ, mahārāja, na kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ vadāmi—yadidaṁ vimuttiyā vimuttiṁ. Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso sukkhaṁ sākakaṭṭhaṁ ādāya aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyya; athāparo puriso sukkhaṁ sālakaṭṭhaṁ ādāya aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyya; athāparo puriso sukkhaṁ ambakaṭṭhaṁ ādāya aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyya; athāparo puriso sukkhaṁ udumbarakaṭṭhaṁ ādāya aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, siyā nu kho tesaṁ aggīnaṁ nānādāruto abhinibbattānaṁ kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ acciyā vā acciṁ, vaṇṇena vā vaṇṇaṁ, ābhāya vā ābhan”ti?
[¶29] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶30] “In the same way, when fire has been churned by energy and produced by effort, I say that there is no difference between the freedom of one and the freedom of the other.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, mahārāja, yaṁ taṁ tejaṁ vīriyā nimmathitaṁ padhānābhinibbattaṁ, nāhaṁ tattha kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ vadāmi—yadidaṁ vimuttiyā vimuttin”ti.
[¶31] “What the Buddha says appears reasonable. But sir, do gods survive?”
> Pali: “Heturūpaṁ, bhante, bhagavā āha; saheturūpaṁ, bhante, bhagavā āha. Kiṁ pana, bhante, atthi devā”ti?
[¶32] “But what exactly are you asking?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, mahārāja, evaṁ vadesi: ‘kiṁ pana, bhante, atthi devā’”ti?
[¶33] “Whether those gods come back to this place or not.”
> Pali: “Yadi vā te, bhante, devā āgantāro itthattaṁ yadi vā anāgantāro itthattaṁ”?
[¶34] “Those gods who are afflicted come back to this place, but those who are unafflicted do not come back.”
> Pali: “Ye te, mahārāja, devā sabyābajjhā te devā āgantāro itthattaṁ, ye te devā abyābajjhā te devā anāgantāro itthattan”ti.
[¶35] When he said this, General Viḍūḍabha said to the Buddha, “Sir, will the gods who are afflicted topple or expel from their place the gods who are unafflicted?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, viṭaṭūbho senāpati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ye te, bhante, devā sabyābajjhā āgantāro itthattaṁ te devā, ye te devā abyābajjhā anāgantāro itthattaṁ te deve tamhā ṭhānā cāvessanti vā pabbājessanti vā”ti?
[¶36] Then Venerable Ānanda thought, “This General Viḍūḍabha is King Pasenadi’s son, and I am the Buddha’s son. Now is the time for one son to confer with another.” So Ānanda addressed General Viḍūḍabha, “Well then, general, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, general? As far as the dominion of King Pasenadi of Kosala extends, where he rules as sovereign lord, can he topple or expel from that place any ascetic or brahmin, regardless of whether they are good or bad, or whether or not they are genuine spiritual practitioners?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho viṭaṭūbho senāpati rañño pasenadissa kosalassa putto; ahaṁ bhagavato putto. Ayaṁ kho kālo yaṁ putto puttena manteyyā”ti. Atha kho āyasmā ānando viṭaṭūbhaṁ senāpatiṁ āmantesi: “tena hi, senāpati, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi; yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, senāpati, yāvatā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa vijitaṁ yattha ca rājā pasenadi kosalo issariyādhipaccaṁ rajjaṁ kāreti, pahoti tattha rājā pasenadi kosalo samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā puññavantaṁ vā apuññavantaṁ vā brahmacariyavantaṁ vā abrahmacariyavantaṁ vā tamhā ṭhānā cāvetuṁ vā pabbājetuṁ vā”ti?
[¶37] “He can, worthy.”
> Pali: “Yāvatā, bho, rañño pasenadissa kosalassa vijitaṁ yattha ca rājā pasenadi kosalo issariyādhipaccaṁ rajjaṁ kāreti, pahoti tattha rājā pasenadi kosalo samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā puññavantaṁ vā apuññavantaṁ vā brahmacariyavantaṁ vā abrahmacariyavantaṁ vā tamhā ṭhānā cāvetuṁ vā pabbājetuṁ vā”ti.
[¶38] “What do you think, general? As far as the dominion of King Pasenadi does not extend, where he does not rule as sovereign lord, can he topple or expel from that place any ascetic or brahmin, regardless of whether they are good or bad, or whether or not they are genuine spiritual practitioners?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, senāpati, yāvatā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa avijitaṁ yattha ca rājā pasenadi kosalo na issariyādhipaccaṁ rajjaṁ kāreti, tattha pahoti rājā pasenadi kosalo samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā puññavantaṁ vā apuññavantaṁ vā brahmacariyavantaṁ vā abrahmacariyavantaṁ vā tamhā ṭhānā cāvetuṁ vā pabbājetuṁ vā”ti?
[¶39] “He cannot, worthy.”
> Pali: “Yāvatā, bho, rañño pasenadissa kosalassa avijitaṁ yattha ca rājā pasenadi kosalo na issariyādhipaccaṁ rajjaṁ kāreti, na tattha pahoti rājā pasenadi kosalo samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā puññavantaṁ vā apuññavantaṁ vā brahmacariyavantaṁ vā abrahmacariyavantaṁ vā tamhā ṭhānā cāvetuṁ vā pabbājetuṁ vā”ti.
[¶40] “What do you think, general? Have you heard of the gods of the thirty-three?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, senāpati, sutā te devā tāvatiṁsā”ti?
[¶41] “Yes, worthy, I’ve heard of them, and so has the worthy King Pasenadi.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho. Sutā me devā tāvatiṁsā. Idhāpi bhotā raññā pasenadinā kosalena sutā devā tāvatiṁsā”ti.
[¶42] “What do you think, general? Can King Pasenadi topple or expel from their place the gods of the thirty-three?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, senāpati, pahoti rājā pasenadi kosalo deve tāvatiṁse tamhā ṭhānā cāvetuṁ vā pabbājetuṁ vā”ti?
[¶43] “King Pasenadi can’t even see the gods of the thirty-three, so how could he possibly topple or expel them from their place?”
> Pali: “Dassanampi, bho, rājā pasenadi kosalo deve tāvatiṁse nappahoti, kuto pana tamhā ṭhānā cāvessati vā pabbājessati vā”ti?
[¶44] “In the same way, general, the gods who are afflicted can’t even see the gods who are unafflicted, so how could they possibly topple or expel them from their place?”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, senāpati, ye te devā sabyābajjhā āgantāro itthattaṁ te devā, ye te devā abyābajjhā anāgantāro itthattaṁ te deve dassanāyapi nappahonti; kuto pana tamhā ṭhānā cāvessanti vā pabbājessanti vā”ti?
[¶45] Then the king said to the Buddha, “Sir, what is this mendicant’s name?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “konāmo ayaṁ, bhante, bhikkhū”ti?
[¶46] “Ānanda, Great King.”
> Pali: “Ānando nāma, mahārājā”ti.
[¶47] “A joy he is, and a joy he seems! What Venerable Ānanda says seems reasonable. But sir, does a divinity survive?”
> Pali: “Ānando vata bho, ānandarūpo vata bho. Heturūpaṁ, bhante, āyasmā ānando āha; saheturūpaṁ, bhante, āyasmā ānando āha. Kiṁ pana, bhante, atthi brahmā”ti?
[¶48] “But what exactly are you asking?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, mahārāja, evaṁ vadesi: ‘kiṁ pana, bhante, atthi brahmā’”ti?
[¶49] “Whether that divinity comes back to this place or not.”
> Pali: “Yadi vā so, bhante, brahmā āgantā itthattaṁ, yadi vā anāgantā itthattan”ti?
[¶50] “A divinity who is afflicted comes back to this place, but one who is unafflicted does not come back.”
> Pali: “Yo so, mahārāja, brahmā sabyābajjho so brahmā āgantā itthattaṁ, yo so brahmā abyābajjho so brahmā anāgantā itthattan”ti.
[¶51] Then a certain man said to the king, “Great king, Sañjaya, the brahmin of the Ākāsa clan, has come.”
> Pali: Atha kho aññataro puriso rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ etadavoca: “sañjayo, mahārāja, brāhmaṇo ākāsagotto āgato”ti.
[¶52] Then King Pasenadi asked Sañjaya, “Brahmin, who introduced this topic of discussion to the royal compound?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo sañjayaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ ākāsagottaṁ etadavoca: “ko nu kho, brāhmaṇa, imaṁ kathāvatthuṁ rājantepure abbhudāhāsī”ti?
[¶53] “It was General Viḍūḍabha, Great King.”
> Pali: “Viṭaṭūbho, mahārāja, senāpatī”ti.
[¶54] But Viḍūḍabha said, “It was Sañjaya, Great King, the brahmin of the Ākāsa clan.”
> Pali: Viṭaṭūbho senāpati evamāha: “sañjayo, mahārāja, brāhmaṇo ākāsagotto”ti.
[¶55] Then a certain man said to the king, “It’s time to go, Great King.”
> Pali: Atha kho aññataro puriso rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ etadavoca: “yānakālo, mahārājā”ti.
[¶56] So the king said to the Buddha, “Sir, I asked you about omniscience, and you answered. I endorse and accept this, and am satisfied with it. I asked you about purification in the four classes, about the gods, and about divinities, and you answered in each case. Whatever I asked the Buddha about, he answered. I endorse and accept this, and am satisfied with it. Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sabbaññutaṁ mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ apucchimhā, sabbaññutaṁ bhagavā byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca, tena camhā attamanā. Cātuvaṇṇisuddhiṁ mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ apucchimhā, cātuvaṇṇisuddhiṁ bhagavā byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca, tena camhā attamanā. Adhideve mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ apucchimhā, adhideve bhagavā byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca, tena camhā attamanā. Adhibrahmānaṁ mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ apucchimhā, adhibrahmānaṁ bhagavā byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca, tena camhā attamanā. Yaṁ yadeva ca mayaṁ bhagavantaṁ apucchimhā taṁ tadeva bhagavā byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca, tena camhā attamanā. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bhante, gacchāma; bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶57] “Please, Great King, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, mahārāja, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶58] Then King Pasenadi approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. Then he got up from his seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmīti.
[¶59] > Pali: Kaṇṇakatthalasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶60] > Pali: Rājavaggo niṭṭhito catuttho.
[¶61] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶62] > Pali: Ghaṭikāro raṭṭhapālo,
maghadevo madhuriyaṁ;
Bodhi aṅgulimālo ca,
piyajātaṁ bāhitikaṁ;
Dhammacetiyasuttañca,
dasamaṁ kaṇṇakatthalaṁ.
## 100. MN 91 · With Brahmāyu
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/100/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/100/#p-N
[¶0] MN 91 · With Brahmāyu
> Pali: MN 91 · Brahmāyusutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Videhans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā videhesu cārikaṁ carati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.
[¶2] Now at that time the brahmin Brahmāyu was residing in Mithilā. He was old, elderly, and senior, advanced in years, having reached the final stage of life; he was a hundred and twenty years old. He had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena brahmāyu brāhmaṇo mithilāyaṁ paṭivasati jiṇṇo vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, vīsavassasatiko jātiyā, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo.
[¶3] He heard: “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—is wandering in the land of the Videhans, together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: Assosi kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo: “samaṇo khalu bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito videhesu cārikaṁ carati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶4] Now at that time the brahmin Brahmāyu had a pupil named Uttara. He too had mastered the Vedic curriculum. Brahmāyu told Uttara of the Buddha’s presence in the land of the Videhans, and added: “Please, dear Uttara, go to the ascetic Gotama and find out whether or not he lives up to his reputation. Through you I shall learn about the worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa uttaro nāma māṇavo antevāsī hoti tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uttaraṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: “ayaṁ, tāta uttara, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito videhesu cārikaṁ carati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho …pe… sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī’ti. Ehi tvaṁ, tāta uttara, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ jānāhi, yadi vā taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ tathā santaṁyeva saddo abbhuggato, yadi vā no tathā; yadi vā so bhavaṁ gotamo tādiso, yadi vā na tādiso. Tathā mayaṁ taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ vedissāmā”ti.
[¶5] “But sir, how shall I find out whether or not the ascetic Gotama lives up to his reputation?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ panāhaṁ, bho, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ jānissāmi yadi vā taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ tathā santaṁyeva saddo abbhuggato, yadi vā no tathā; yadi vā so bhavaṁ gotamo tādiso, yadi vā na tādiso”ti.
[¶6] “Dear Uttara, the thirty-two marks of a great man have been handed down in our hymns. A great man who possesses these has only two possible destinies, no other. If he stays at home he becomes a king, a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extends to all four sides, he achieves stability in the country, and he possesses the seven treasures. He has the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He has over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea, he reigns by principle, without rod or sword. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who has cast off the world’s veil. But, dear Uttara, I am the one who gives the hymns, and you are the one who receives them.”
> Pali: “Āgatāni kho, tāta uttara, amhākaṁ mantesu dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavanti, seyyathidaṁ— cakkaratanaṁ, hatthiratanaṁ, assaratanaṁ, maṇiratanaṁ, itthiratanaṁ, gahapatiratanaṁ, pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado. Ahaṁ kho pana, tāta uttara, mantānaṁ dātā; tvaṁ mantānaṁ paṭiggahetā”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Uttara. He got up from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled Brahmāyu, keeping him on his right, before setting out for the land of the Videhans where the Buddha was wandering. Traveling stage by stage, he came to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and scrutinized his body for the thirty-two marks of a great man. He saw all of them except two, which he had doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho uttaro māṇavo brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā videhesu yena bhagavā tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho uttaro māṇavo bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni samannesi. Addasā kho uttaro māṇavo bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yebhuyyena thapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya ca.
[¶8] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “This student Uttara sees all the marks except two, which he has doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “passati kho me ayaṁ uttaro māṇavo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yebhuyyena thapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya cā”ti.
[¶9] So the Buddha used his psychic power to will that Uttara would see his private parts sheathed in a foreskin. And he stuck out his tongue and stroked back and forth on his ear holes and nostrils, and covered his entire forehead with his tongue.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsi yathā addasa uttaro māṇavo bhagavato kosohitaṁ vatthaguyhaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā jivhaṁ ninnāmetvā ubhopi kaṇṇasotāni anumasi paṭimasi; ubhopi nāsikasotāni anumasi paṭimasi; kevalampi nalāṭamaṇḍalaṁ jivhāya chādesi.
[¶10] Then Uttara thought, “The ascetic Gotama possesses the thirty-two marks. Why don’t I follow him and observe his deportment?” So Uttara followed the Buddha like a shadow for seven months.
> Pali: Atha kho uttarassa māṇavassa etadahosi: “samannāgato kho samaṇo gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi. Yannūnāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ anubandheyyaṁ, iriyāpathamassa passeyyan”ti. Atha kho uttaro māṇavo sattamāsāni bhagavantaṁ anubandhi chāyāva anapāyinī.
[¶11] When seven months had passed he set out wandering toward Mithilā. There he approached the brahmin Brahmāyu, bowed, and sat down to one side. Brahmāyu said to him, “Well, dear Uttara, does the worthy Gotama live up to his reputation or not?”
> Pali: Atha kho uttaro māṇavo sattannaṁ māsānaṁ accayena videhesu yena mithilā tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena mithilā yena brahmāyu brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho uttaraṁ māṇavaṁ brahmāyu brāhmaṇo etadavoca: “kacci, tāta uttara, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ tathā santaṁyeva saddo abbhuggato, no aññathā? Kacci pana so bhavaṁ gotamo tādiso, no aññādiso”ti?
[¶12] “He does, sir. The worthy Gotama possesses the thirty-two marks.
> Pali: “Tathā santaṁyeva, bho, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saddo abbhuggato, no aññathā; tādisova so bhavaṁ gotamo, no aññādiso. Samannāgato ca so bhavaṁ gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi.
[¶13] He has well-planted feet.
> Pali: Suppatiṭṭhitapādo kho pana bho bhavaṁ gotamo; idampi tassa bhoto gotamassa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶14] On the soles of his feet there are thousand-spoked wheels, with rims and hubs, complete in every detail.
> Pali: Heṭṭhā kho pana tassa bhoto gotamassa pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrāni …
[¶15] He has stretched heels.
> Pali: Āyatapaṇhi kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶16] He has long fingers.
> Pali: Dīghaṅguli kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶17] His hands and feet are soft and tender.
> Pali: Mudutalunahatthapādo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶18] He has serried hands and feet.
> Pali: Jālahatthapādo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶19] The tops of his feet are arched.
> Pali: Ussaṅkhapādo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶20] His calves are like those of an antelope.
> Pali: Eṇijaṅgho kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶21] When standing upright and not bending over, the palms of both hands touch the knees.
> Pali: Ṭhitako kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jaṇṇukāni parimasati parimajjati …
[¶22] His private parts are sheathed in a foreskin.
> Pali: Kosohitavatthaguyho kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶23] He is golden colored; his skin shines like lustrous gold.
> Pali: Suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo kañcanasannibhattaco …
[¶24] He has delicate skin, so delicate that dust and dirt don’t stick to his body.
> Pali: Sukhumacchavi kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo. Sukhumattā chaviyā rajojallaṁ kāye na upalimpati …
[¶25] His hairs grow one per pore.
> Pali: Ekekalomo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo; ekekāni lomāni lomakūpesu jātāni …
[¶26] His hairs stand up; they’re blue-black and curl clockwise.
> Pali: Uddhaggalomo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo; uddhaggāni lomāni jātāni nīlāni añjanavaṇṇāni kuṇḍalāvaṭṭāni dakkhiṇāvaṭṭakajātāni …
[¶27] His body is tall and straight-limbed.
> Pali: Brahmujugatto kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶28] He has bulging muscles in seven places.
> Pali: Sattussado kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶29] His chest is like that of a lion.
> Pali: Sīhapubbaddhakāyo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶30] He is filled out between the shoulders.
> Pali: Citantaraṁso kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶31] He has the proportional circumference of a banyan tree: the span of his arms equals the height of his body.
> Pali: Nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo; yāvatakvassa kāyo tāvatakvassa byāmo, yāvatakvassa byāmo tāvatakvassa kāyo …
[¶32] His torso is cylindrical.
> Pali: Samavaṭṭakkhandho kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶33] He has ridged taste buds.
> Pali: Rasaggasaggī kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶34] His jaw is like that of a lion.
> Pali: Sīhahanu kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶35] He has forty teeth.
> Pali: Cattālīsadanto kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶36] His teeth are even.
> Pali: Samadanto kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶37] His teeth have no gaps.
> Pali: Aviraḷadanto kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶38] His teeth are perfectly white.
> Pali: Susukkadāṭho kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶39] He has a large tongue.
> Pali: Pahūtajivho kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶40] He has the voice of the Divinity, like a cuckoo’s call.
> Pali: Brahmassaro kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo karavikabhāṇī …
[¶41] His eyes are indigo.
> Pali: Abhinīlanetto kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶42] He has eyelashes like a cow’s.
> Pali: Gopakhumo kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo …
[¶43] Between his eyebrows there grows a tuft, soft and white like cotton-wool.
> Pali: Uṇṇā kho panassa bhoto gotamassa bhamukantare jātā odātā mudutūlasannibhā …
[¶44] The crown of his head is like a turban.
> Pali: Uṇhīsasīso kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo; idampi tassa bhoto gotamassa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶45] These are the thirty-two marks of a great man possessed by the worthy Gotama.
> Pali: Imehi kho, bho, so bhavaṁ gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato.
[¶46] When he’s walking he takes the first step with the right foot. He doesn’t lift his foot too far or place it too near. He doesn’t walk too slow or too fast. He walks without knocking his knees or ankles together. When he’s walking he keeps his thighs neither too straight nor too bent, neither too tight nor too loose. When he walks, only the lower half of his body moves, and he walks effortlessly. When he turns to look he does so with the whole body. He doesn’t look directly up or down. He doesn’t look all around while walking, but focuses a plough’s length in front. Beyond that he has unhindered knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Gacchanto kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo dakkhiṇeneva pādena paṭhamaṁ pakkamati. So nātidūre pādaṁ uddharati, nāccāsanne pādaṁ nikkhipati; so nātisīghaṁ gacchati, nātisaṇikaṁ gacchati; na ca adduvena adduvaṁ saṅghaṭṭento gacchati, na ca gopphakena gopphakaṁ saṅghaṭṭento gacchati. So gacchanto na satthiṁ unnāmeti, na satthiṁ onāmeti; na satthiṁ sannāmeti, na satthiṁ vināmeti. Gacchato kho pana tassa bhoto gotamassa adharakāyova iñjati, na ca kāyabalena gacchati. Apalokento kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo sabbakāyeneva apaloketi; so na uddhaṁ ulloketi, na adho oloketi; na ca vipekkhamāno gacchati, yugamattañca pekkhati; tato cassa uttari anāvaṭaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ bhavati.
[¶47] When entering an inhabited area he keeps his body neither too straight nor too bent, neither too tight nor too loose.
> Pali: So antaragharaṁ pavisanto na kāyaṁ unnāmeti, na kāyaṁ onāmeti; na kāyaṁ sannāmeti, na kāyaṁ vināmeti.
[¶48] He turns around neither too far nor too close to the seat. He doesn’t lean on his hand when sitting down. And he doesn’t just plonk his body down on the seat. When sitting in inhabited areas he doesn’t fidget with his hands or feet. He doesn’t sit with his knees or ankles crossed. He doesn’t sit with his hand holding his chin. When sitting in inhabited areas he doesn’t shake, tremble, quake, or get nervous, and so he is not nervous at all. When sitting in inhabited areas he still practices seclusion.
> Pali: So nātidūre nāccāsanne āsanassa parivattati, na ca pāṇinā ālambitvā āsane nisīdati, na ca āsanasmiṁ kāyaṁ pakkhipati. So antaraghare nisinno samāno na hatthakukkuccaṁ āpajjati, na pādakukkuccaṁ āpajjati; na adduvena adduvaṁ āropetvā nisīdati; na ca gopphakena gopphakaṁ āropetvā nisīdati; na ca pāṇinā hanukaṁ upadahitvā nisīdati. So antaraghare nisinno samāno na chambhati na kampati na vedhati na paritassati. So achambhī akampī avedhī aparitassī vigatalomahaṁso. Vivekavatto ca so bhavaṁ gotamo antaraghare nisinno hoti.
[¶49] When receiving water for rinsing the bowl, he holds the bowl neither too straight nor too bent, neither too tight nor too loose.
> Pali: So pattodakaṁ paṭiggaṇhanto na pattaṁ unnāmeti, na pattaṁ onāmeti; na pattaṁ sannāmeti, na pattaṁ vināmeti.
[¶50] He receives neither too little nor too much water. He rinses the bowl without making a sloshing noise, or spinning it around. He doesn’t put the bowl on the ground to rinse his hands; his hands and bowl are rinsed at the same time. He doesn’t throw the bowl rinsing water away too far or too near, or splash it about. When receiving rice, he holds the bowl neither too straight nor too bent, neither too close nor too loose. He receives neither too little nor too much rice. He eats sauce in a moderate proportion, and doesn’t put too much sauce on his portions. He chews over each portion two or three times before swallowing. But no grain of rice enters his body unchewed, and none remain in his mouth. Only then does he raise another portion to his lips. He eats experiencing the taste, but without experiencing greed for the taste.
> Pali: So pattodakaṁ paṭiggaṇhāti nātithokaṁ nātibahuṁ. So na khulukhulukārakaṁ pattaṁ dhovati, na samparivattakaṁ pattaṁ dhovati, na pattaṁ bhūmiyaṁ nikkhipitvā hatthe dhovati; hatthesu dhotesu patto dhoto hoti, patte dhote hatthā dhotā honti. So pattodakaṁ chaḍḍeti nātidūre nāccāsanne, na ca vicchaḍḍayamāno. So odanaṁ paṭiggaṇhanto na pattaṁ unnāmeti, na pattaṁ onāmeti; na pattaṁ sannāmeti, na pattaṁ vināmeti. So odanaṁ paṭiggaṇhāti nātithokaṁ nātibahuṁ. Byañjanaṁ kho pana bhavaṁ gotamo byañjanamattāya āhāreti, na ca byañjanena ālopaṁ atināmeti. Dvattikkhattuṁ kho bhavaṁ gotamo mukhe ālopaṁ samparivattetvā ajjhoharati; na cassa kāci odanamiñjā asambhinnā kāyaṁ pavisati, na cassa kāci odanamiñjā mukhe avasiṭṭhā hoti; athāparaṁ ālopaṁ upanāmeti. Rasapaṭisaṁvedī kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo āhāraṁ āhāreti, no ca rasarāgapaṭisaṁvedī.
[¶51] He eats food thinking of eight reasons: ‘Not for fun, indulgence, adornment, or decoration, but only to sustain this body, to avoid harm, and to support spiritual practice. In this way, I shall put an end to old discomfort and not give rise to new discomfort, and I will have the means to keep going, blamelessness, and a comfortable abiding.’
> Pali: Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṁ kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo āhāraṁ āhāreti— neva davāya, na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya, yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya, vihiṁsūparatiyā brahmacariyānuggahāya: ‘iti purāṇañca vedanaṁ paṭihaṅkhāmi navañca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cā’ti.
[¶52] After eating, when receiving water for washing the bowl, he holds the bowl neither too straight nor too bent, neither too tight nor too loose. He receives neither too little nor too much water. He washes the bowl without making a sloshing noise, or spinning it around. He doesn’t put the bowl on the ground to wash his hands; his hands and bowl are washed at the same time. He doesn’t throw the bowl washing water away too far or too near, or splash it about.
> Pali: So bhuttāvī pattodakaṁ paṭiggaṇhanto na pattaṁ unnāmeti, na pattaṁ onāmeti; na pattaṁ sannāmeti, na pattaṁ vināmeti. So pattodakaṁ paṭiggaṇhāti nātithokaṁ nātibahuṁ. So na khulukhulukārakaṁ pattaṁ dhovati, na samparivattakaṁ pattaṁ dhovati, na pattaṁ bhūmiyaṁ nikkhipitvā hatthe dhovati; hatthesu dhotesu patto dhoto hoti, patte dhote hatthā dhotā honti. So pattodakaṁ chaḍḍeti nātidūre nāccāsanne, na ca vicchaḍḍayamāno.
[¶53] After eating he doesn’t put the bowl on the ground too far away or too close. He’s not careless with his bowl, nor does he spend too much time on it.
> Pali: So bhuttāvī na pattaṁ bhūmiyaṁ nikkhipati nātidūre nāccāsanne, na ca anatthiko pattena hoti, na ca ativelānurakkhī pattasmiṁ.
[¶54] After eating he sits a while in silence, but doesn’t wait too long to give the verses of appreciation. After eating he expresses appreciation without criticizing the meal or expecting another one. Invariably, he educates, encourages, fires up, and inspires that assembly with a Dhamma talk. Then he gets up from his seat and leaves.
> Pali: So bhuttāvī muhuttaṁ tuṇhī nisīdati, na ca anumodanassa kālamatināmeti. So bhuttāvī anumodati, na taṁ bhattaṁ garahati, na aññaṁ bhattaṁ paṭikaṅkhati; aññadatthu dhammiyā kathāya taṁ parisaṁ sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṁseti. So taṁ parisaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamati.
[¶55] He walks neither too fast nor too slow, without wanting to get out of there.
> Pali: So nātisīghaṁ gacchati, nātisaṇikaṁ gacchati, na ca muccitukāmo gacchati;
[¶56] He wears his robe on his body neither too high nor too low, neither too clinging nor too loose. The wind doesn’t blow his robe off his body. And dust and dirt don’t stick to his body.
> Pali: na ca tassa bhoto gotamassa kāye cīvaraṁ accukkaṭṭhaṁ hoti na ca accokkaṭṭhaṁ, na ca kāyasmiṁ allīnaṁ na ca kāyasmā apakaṭṭhaṁ; na ca tassa bhoto gotamassa kāyamhā vāto cīvaraṁ apavahati; na ca tassa bhoto gotamassa kāye rajojallaṁ upalimpati.
[¶57] When he has gone to the monastery he sits on a seat spread out and washes his feet. But he doesn’t waste time with pedicures. When he has washed his feet, he sits down cross-legged, sets his body straight, and brings mindfulness to the present. He has no intention to hurt himself, hurt others, or hurt both. He only wishes for the welfare of himself, of others, of both, and of the whole world. In the monastery when he teaches Dhamma to an assembly, he neither flatters them nor rebukes them. Invariably, he educates, encourages, fires up, and inspires that assembly with a Dhamma talk.
> Pali: So ārāmagato nisīdati paññatte āsane. Nisajja pāde pakkhāleti; na ca so bhavaṁ gotamo pādamaṇḍanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. So pāde pakkhāletvā nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So neva attabyābādhāya ceteti, na parabyābādhāya ceteti, na ubhayabyābādhāya ceteti; attahitaparahitaubhayahitasabbalokahitameva so bhavaṁ gotamo cintento nisinno hoti. So ārāmagato parisati dhammaṁ deseti, na taṁ parisaṁ ussādeti, na taṁ parisaṁ apasādeti; aññadatthu dhammiyā kathāya taṁ parisaṁ sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṁseti.
[¶58] The sound of his voice has eight qualities: it is clear, comprehensible, charming, audible, lucid, undistorted, deep, and resonant. He makes sure his voice is intelligible as far as the assembly goes, but the sound doesn’t extend outside the assembly. And when they’ve been inspired with a Dhamma talk by the worthy Gotama they get up from their seats and leave looking back at him alone, and not forgetting their lesson.
> Pali: Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato kho panassa bhoto gotamassa mukhato ghoso niccharati— vissaṭṭho ca, viññeyyo ca, mañju ca, savanīyo ca, bindu ca, avisārī ca, gambhīro ca, ninnādī ca. Yathāparisaṁ kho pana so bhavaṁ gotamo sarena viññāpeti, na cassa bahiddhā parisāya ghoso niccharati. Te tena bhotā gotamena dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamanti avalokayamānāyeva avijahitattā.
[¶59] I have seen the worthy Gotama walking and standing; entering inhabited areas, and sitting and eating there; sitting silently after eating, and expressing appreciation; going to the monastery, sitting silently there, and teaching Dhamma to an assembly there. Such is the worthy Gotama; such he is and more than that.”
> Pali: Addasāma kho mayaṁ, bho, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ gacchantaṁ, addasāma ṭhitaṁ, addasāma antaragharaṁ pavisantaṁ, addasāma antaraghare nisinnaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ, addasāma antaraghare bhuñjantaṁ, addasāma bhuttāviṁ nisinnaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ, addasāma bhuttāviṁ anumodantaṁ, addasāma ārāmaṁ gacchantaṁ, addasāma ārāmagataṁ nisinnaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ, addasāma ārāmagataṁ parisati dhammaṁ desentaṁ. Ediso ca ediso ca so bhavaṁ gotamo, tato ca bhiyyo”ti.
[¶60] When he had spoken, the brahmin Brahmāyu rose from his seat, arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and uttered this aphorism three times:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ udānaṁ udāneti:
[¶61] “Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: “Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶62] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶63] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassāti.
[¶64] Hopefully, some time or other I’ll get to meet him, and we can have a discussion.”
> Pali: Appeva nāma mayaṁ kadāci karahaci tena bhotā gotamena samāgaccheyyāma? Appeva nāma siyā kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶65] And then the Buddha, traveling stage by stage in the Videhan lands, arrived at Mithilā, where he stayed in the Maghadeva Mango Grove.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā videhesu anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena mithilā tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā mithilāyaṁ viharati maghadevaambavane.
[¶66] The brahmins and householders of Mithilā heard: “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Mithilā, where he is staying in the Maghadeva Mango Grove. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho mithileyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito videhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi mithilaṁ anuppatto, mithilāyaṁ viharati maghadevaambavane. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶67] Then the brahmins and householders of Mithilā went up to the Buddha. Before sitting down to one side, some bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.
> Pali: Atha kho mithileyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavato santike nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶68] The brahmin Brahmāyu also heard that the Buddha had arrived. So he went to the Maghadeva Mango Grove together with several disciples.
> Pali: Assosi kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito mithilaṁ anuppatto, mithilāyaṁ viharati maghadevaambavane”ti. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo sambahulehi sāvakehi saddhiṁ yena maghadevaambavanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.
[¶69] Not far from the grove he thought, “It wouldn’t be appropriate for me to go to see the ascetic Gotama without letting him know beforehand.”
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyuno brāhmaṇassa avidūre ambavanassa etadahosi: “na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ yohaṁ pubbe appaṭisaṁvidito samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyan”ti.
[¶70] So he addressed one of his young students: “Here, young student, go to the ascetic Gotama and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And then say: ‘Worthy Gotama, the brahmin Brahmāyu is old, elderly, and senior, advanced in years, having reached the final stage of life; he is a hundred and twenty years old. He has mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knows them word-by-word, and their grammar. He is well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. Of all the brahmins and householders residing in Mithilā, Brahmāyu is said to be the foremost in wealth, hymns, lifespan, and fame. He wants to see the worthy Gotama.’”
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo aññataraṁ māṇavakaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘brahmāyu, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi: ‘brahmāyu, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo jiṇṇo vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, vīsavassasatiko jātiyā, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo. Yāvatā, bho, brāhmaṇagahapatikā mithilāyaṁ paṭivasanti, brahmāyu tesaṁ brāhmaṇo aggamakkhāyati— yadidaṁ bhogehi; brahmāyu tesaṁ brāhmaṇo aggamakkhāyati— yadidaṁ mantehi; brahmāyu tesaṁ brāhmaṇo aggamakkhāyati— yadidaṁ āyunā ceva yasasā ca. So bhoto gotamassa dassanakāmo’”ti.
[¶71] “Yes, worthy sir,” that young student replied. He did as he was asked, and the Buddha said, “Please, student, let Brahmāyu come at his convenience.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so māṇavako brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho so māṇavako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “brahmāyu, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati; evañca vadeti: ‘brahmāyu, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo jiṇṇo vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, vīsavassasatiko jātiyā, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo. Yāvatā, bho, brāhmaṇagahapatikā mithilāyaṁ paṭivasanti, brahmāyu tesaṁ brāhmaṇo aggamakkhāyati— yadidaṁ bhogehi; brahmāyu tesaṁ brāhmaṇo aggamakkhāyati— yadidaṁ mantehi; brahmāyu tesaṁ brāhmaṇo aggamakkhāyati— yadidaṁ āyunā ceva yasasā ca. So bhoto gotamassa dassanakāmo’”ti. “Yassadāni, māṇava, brahmāyu brāhmaṇo kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶72] The young student went back to Brahmāyu and said to him, “Your request for an audience with the ascetic Gotama has been granted. Please go at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho so māṇavako yena brahmāyu brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “katāvakāso khomhi bhavatā samaṇena gotamena. Yassadāni bhavaṁ kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶73] Then the brahmin Brahmāyu went up to the Buddha. The assembly saw him coming off in the distance, and made way for him, as he was well-known and famous.
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho sā parisā brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna oramiya okāsamakāsi yathā taṁ ñātassa yasassino.
[¶74] Brahmāyu said to that retinue, “Enough, gentlemen. Please sit on your own seats. I shall sit here by the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo taṁ parisaṁ etadavoca: “alaṁ, bho. Nisīdatha tumhe sake āsane. Idhāhaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa santike nisīdissāmī”ti.
[¶75] Then the brahmin Brahmāyu went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and scrutinized the Buddha’s body for the thirty-two marks of a great man. He saw all of them except two, which he had doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue. Then Brahmāyu addressed the Buddha in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni samannesi. Addasā kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya ca. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶76] “I have learned of the thirty-two
marks of a great man.
There are two that I don’t see
on the body of the worthy Gotama.
> Pali: “Ye me dvattiṁsāti sutā,
mahāpurisalakkhaṇā;
Duve tesaṁ na passāmi,
bhoto kāyasmiṁ gotama.
[¶77] Are the private parts sheathed in a foreskin,
O supreme man?
Though called by a word of the feminine gender,
perhaps your tongue is a manly one?
> Pali: Kacci kosohitaṁ bhoto,
vatthaguyhaṁ naruttama;
Nārīsamānasavhayā,
kacci jivhā na dassakā.
[¶78] Perhaps your tongue is large,
as we have been informed.
Please stick it out in its full extent,
and so, O seer, dispel my doubt.
> Pali: Kacci pahūtajivhosi,
yathā taṁ jāniyāmase;
Ninnāmayetaṁ pahūtaṁ,
kaṅkhaṁ vinaya no ise.
[¶79] For my welfare and benefit in this life,
and happiness in lives to come.
And I ask you to grant the opportunity
to ask whatever I desire.”
> Pali: Diṭṭhadhammahitatthāya,
samparāyasukhāya ca;
Katāvakāsā pucchāma,
yaṁ kiñci abhipatthitan”ti.
[¶80] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “Brahmāyu sees all the marks except two, which he has doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “passati kho me ayaṁ brahmāyu brāhmaṇo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya cā”ti.
[¶81] So the Buddha used his psychic power to will that Brahmāyu would see his private parts sheathed in a foreskin. And he stuck out his tongue and stroked back and forth on his ear holes and nostrils, and covered his entire forehead with his tongue.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsi yathā addasa brahmāyu brāhmaṇo bhagavato kosohitaṁ vatthaguyhaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā jivhaṁ ninnāmetvā ubhopi kaṇṇasotāni anumasi paṭimasi; ubhopi nāsikasotāni anumasi paṭimasi; kevalampi nalāṭamaṇḍalaṁ jivhāya chādesi.
[¶82] Then the Buddha replied to Brahmāyu in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ gāthāhi paccabhāsi:
[¶83] “The thirty-two marks of a great man
that you have learned
are all found on my body:
so do not doubt, brahmin.
> Pali: “Ye te dvattiṁsāti sutā,
mahāpurisalakkhaṇā;
Sabbe te mama kāyasmiṁ,
mā te kaṅkhāhu brāhmaṇa.
[¶84] I have known what should be known,
and developed what should be developed,
and given up what should be given up:
and so, brahmin, I am a Buddha.
> Pali: Abhiññeyyaṁ abhiññātaṁ,
bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṁ;
Pahātabbaṁ pahīnaṁ me,
tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇa.
[¶85] For your welfare and benefit in this life,
and happiness in lives to come:
I grant you the opportunity
to ask whatever you desire.”
> Pali: Diṭṭhadhammahitatthāya,
samparāyasukhāya ca;
Katāvakāso pucchassu,
yaṁ kiñci abhipatthitan”ti.
[¶86] Then Brahmāyu thought:
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi:
[¶87] “My request has been granted. Should I ask him about what is beneficial in this life or the next?” Then he thought, “I’m well versed in the benefits that apply to this life, and others ask me about this. Why don’t I ask the ascetic Gotama about the benefit that specifically applies to lives to come?”
> Pali: “katāvakāso khomhi samaṇena gotamena. Kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ puccheyyaṁ: ‘diṭṭhadhammikaṁ vā atthaṁ samparāyikaṁ vā’”ti. Atha kho brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “kusalo kho ahaṁ diṭṭhadhammikānaṁ atthānaṁ. Aññepi maṁ diṭṭhadhammikaṁ atthaṁ pucchanti. Yannūnāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ samparāyikaṁyeva atthaṁ puccheyyan”ti.
[¶88] So Brahmāyu addressed the Buddha in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶89] “How do you become a brahmin?
And how do you become a knowledge master?
How a master of the three knowledges?
And how is one called a scholar?
> Pali: “Kathaṁ kho brāhmaṇo hoti,
kathaṁ bhavati vedagū;
Tevijjo bho kathaṁ hoti,
sotthiyo kinti vuccati.
[¶90] How do you become a perfected one?
And how a consummate one?
How do you become a sage?
And how is one declared to be awakened?”
> Pali: Arahaṁ bho kathaṁ hoti,
kathaṁ bhavati kevalī;
Muni ca bho kathaṁ hoti,
buddho kinti pavuccatī”ti.
[¶91] Then the Buddha replied to Brahmāyu in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ gāthāhi paccabhāsi:
[¶92] “One who knows their past lives,
sees heaven and places of loss,
and has attained the end of rebirth:
such a sage has perfect insight.
> Pali: “Pubbenivāsaṁ yo vedi,
saggāpāyañca passati;
Atho jātikkhayaṁ patto,
abhiññā vosito muni.
[¶93] They know their mind is pure,
completely freed from greed;
they’ve given up birth and death,
and have completed the spiritual journey.
Gone beyond all things,
such a one is declared to be awakened.”
> Pali: Cittaṁ visuddhaṁ jānāti,
muttaṁ rāgehi sabbaso;
Pahīnajātimaraṇo,
brahmacariyassa kevalī;
Pāragū sabbadhammānaṁ,
buddho tādī pavuccatī”ti.
[¶94] When he said this, Brahmāyu got up from his seat and arranged his robe over one shoulder. He bowed with his head to the Buddha’s feet, caressing them and covering them with kisses, and pronounced his name: “I am the brahmin Brahmāyu, worthy Gotama! I am the brahmin Brahmāyu!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti: “brahmāyu ahaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo; brahmāyu ahaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo”ti.
[¶95] Then that assembly, their minds full of wonder and amazement, thought, “Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing, that Brahmāyu, who is so well-known and famous, should show the Buddha such utmost deference.” Then the Buddha said to Brahmāyu, “Enough, brahmin. Get up, and sit in your own seat, since your mind has such confidence in me.” So Brahmāyu got up and sat in his own seat.
> Pali: Atha kho sā parisā acchariyabbhutacittajātā ahosi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho. Yatra hi nāmāyaṁ brahmāyu brāhmaṇo ñāto yasassī evarūpaṁ paramanipaccakāraṁ karissatī”ti. Atha kho bhagavā brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “alaṁ, brāhmaṇa, uṭṭhaha nisīda tvaṁ sake āsane yato te mayi cittaṁ pasannan”ti. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhahitvā sake āsane nisīdi.
[¶96] Then the Buddha taught him step by step, with a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He revealed the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. And when the Buddha knew that Brahmāyu’s mind was ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he revealed the special teaching of the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in the brahmin Brahmāyu: “Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ— dānakathaṁ, sīlakathaṁ, saggakathaṁ; kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Yadā bhagavā aññāsi brahmāyuṁ brāhmaṇaṁ kallacittaṁ muducittaṁ vinīvaraṇacittaṁ udaggacittaṁ pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā taṁ pakāsesi— dukkhaṁ, samudayaṁ, nirodhaṁ, maggaṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; evameva brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa tasmiṁyeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.
[¶97] Then Brahmāyu saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. He went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. He said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶98] “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life. Would you and the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence. Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Brahmāyu rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ. Adhivāsetu ca me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶99] And when the night had passed Brahmāyu had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶100] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the home of the brahmin Brahmāyu, where he sat down on the seat spread out together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. For seven days, Brahmāyu served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena brahmāyussa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo sattāhaṁ buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.
[¶101] When the seven days had passed, the Buddha left to wander in the Videhan lands. Not long after the Buddha left, Brahmāyu passed away.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tassa sattāhassa accayena videhesu cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo acirapakkantassa bhagavato kālamakāsi.
[¶102] Then several mendicants went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, Brahmāyu has passed away. Where has he been reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “brahmāyu, bhante, brāhmaṇo kālaṅkato. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶103] “Mendicants, the brahmin Brahmāyu was astute. He practiced in line with the teaching, and did not trouble me about the teachings. With the ending of the five lower fetters, he’s been reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.”
> Pali: “Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, brahmāyu brāhmaṇo paccapādi dhammassānudhammaṁ, na ca maṁ dhammādhikaraṇaṁ vihesesi. Brahmāyu, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇo pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko hoti, tattha parinibbāyī, anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā”ti.
[¶104] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶105] > Pali: Brahmāyusuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 101. MN 92 · With Sela
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/101/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/101/#p-N
[¶0] MN 92 · With Sela
> Pali: MN 92 · Selasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering together with a large Saṅgha of 1,250 mendicants in the land of the Aṅguttarāpans when he arrived at a town of theirs named Āpaṇa.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā aṅguttarāpesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi yena āpaṇaṁ nāma aṅguttarāpānaṁ nigamo tadavasari.
[¶2] The matted-hair ascetic Keṇiya heard: “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Āpaṇa, together with a large Saṅgha of 1,250 mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He proclaims a teaching that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: Assosi kho keṇiyo jaṭilo: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito aṅguttarāpesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi āpaṇaṁ anuppatto. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶3] So Keṇiya approached the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. The Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk.
> Pali: Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.
[¶4] Then he said to the Buddha, “Would Worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?”
> Pali: Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.
[¶5] When he said this, the Buddha said to him, “The Saṅgha is large, Keṇiya; there are 1,250 mendicants. And you are devoted to the brahmins.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ etadavoca: “mahā kho, keṇiya, bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni, tvañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno”ti.
[¶6] For a second time, Keṇiya asked the Buddha to accept a meal offering. “Never mind that the Saṅgha is large, with 1,250 mendicants, and that I am devoted to the brahmins. Would Worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” And for a second time, the Buddha gave the same reply. For a third time, Keṇiya asked the Buddha to accept a meal offering. “Never mind that the Saṅgha is large, with 1,250 mendicants, and that I am devoted to the brahmins. Would Worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kiñcāpi kho, bho gotama, mahā bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni, ahañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno; adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Dutiyampi kho bhagavā keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ etadavoca: “mahā kho, keṇiya, bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni, tvañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno”ti. Tatiyampi kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kiñcāpi kho, bho gotama, mahā bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni, ahañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno; adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶7] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Keṇiya rose from his seat and went to his own hermitage. There he addressed his friends and colleagues, relatives and kin, “My friends and colleagues, relatives and kin: please listen! The ascetic Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha has been invited by me for tomorrow’s meal. Please help me out with the manual preparations.”
> Pali: Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena sako assamo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mittāmacce ñātisālohite āmantesi: “suṇantu me bhonto, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā; samaṇo me gotamo nimantito svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena. Yena me kāyaveyyāvaṭikaṁ kareyyāthā”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, worthy sir,” they replied. Some dug ovens, some chopped wood, some washed dishes, some set up a water jar, and some spread out seats. Meanwhile, Keṇiya set up the pavilion himself.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho keṇiyassa jaṭilassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā keṇiyassa jaṭilassa paṭissutvā appekacce uddhanāni khaṇanti, appekacce kaṭṭhāni phālenti, appekacce bhājanāni dhovanti, appekacce udakamaṇikaṁ patiṭṭhāpenti, appekacce āsanāni paññapenti. Keṇiyo pana jaṭilo sāmaṁyeva maṇḍalamālaṁ paṭiyādeti.
[¶9] Now at that time the brahmin Sela was residing in Āpaṇa. He had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. And he was teaching three hundred young students to recite the hymns.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena selo brāhmaṇo āpaṇe paṭivasati tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo, tīṇi ca māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti.
[¶10] And at that time Keṇiya was devoted to Sela. Then Sela, while going for a walk escorted by the three hundred young students, approached Keṇiya’s hermitage. He saw the preparations going on, and said to Keṇiya, “Worthy Keṇiya, is your son or daughter being married? Or are you setting up a grand sacrifice? Or has King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha been invited for tomorrow’s meal?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena keṇiyo jaṭilo sele brāhmaṇe abhippasanno hoti. Atha kho selo brāhmaṇo tīhi māṇavakasatehi parivuto jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena keṇiyassa jaṭilassa assamo tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho selo brāhmaṇo keṇiyassa jaṭilassa assame appekacce uddhanāni khaṇante, appekacce kaṭṭhāni phālente, appekacce bhājanāni dhovante, appekacce udakamaṇikaṁ patiṭṭhāpente, appekacce āsanāni paññapente, keṇiyaṁ pana jaṭilaṁ sāmaṁyeva maṇḍalamālaṁ paṭiyādentaṁ. Disvāna keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ etadavoca: “kiṁ nu bhoto keṇiyassa āvāho vā bhavissati vivāho vā bhavissati mahāyañño vā paccupaṭṭhito, rājā vā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro nimantito svātanāya saddhiṁ balakāyenā”ti?
[¶11] “There is no marriage, Worthy Sela, and the king is not coming. Rather, I am setting up a grand sacrifice. The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Āpaṇa, together with a large Saṅgha of 1,250 mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has been invited by me for tomorrow’s meal together with the mendicant Saṅgha.”
> Pali: “Na me, bho sela, āvāho bhavissati napi vivāho bhavissati napi rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro nimantito svātanāya saddhiṁ balakāyena; api ca kho me mahāyañño paccupaṭṭhito. Atthi, bho, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito aṅguttarāpesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi āpaṇaṁ anuppatto. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So me nimantito svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.
[¶12] “Did you say ‘the awakened one’?”
> Pali: “Buddhoti—bho keṇiya, vadesi”?
[¶13] “I said ‘the awakened one’.”
> Pali: “Buddhoti—bho sela, vadāmi”.
[¶14] “Did you say ‘the awakened one’?”
> Pali: “Buddhoti—bho keṇiya, vadesi”?
[¶15] “I said ‘the awakened one’.”
> Pali: “Buddhoti—bho sela, vadāmī”ti.
[¶16] Then Sela thought: “It’s hard to even find the word ‘awakened one’ in the world. The thirty-two marks of a great man have been handed down in our hymns. A great man who possesses these has only two possible destinies, no other. If he stays at home he becomes a king, a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extends to all four sides, he achieves stability in the country, and he possesses the seven treasures. He has the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He has over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea, he reigns by principle, without rod or sword. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who casts off the veil from the world.”
> Pali: Atha kho selassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “ghosopi kho eso dullabho lokasmiṁ—yadidaṁ ‘buddho’ti. Āgatāni kho panamhākaṁ mantesu dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavanti, seyyathidaṁ— cakkaratanaṁ, hatthiratanaṁ, assaratanaṁ, maṇiratanaṁ, itthiratanaṁ, gahapatiratanaṁ, pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Sace pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado”.
[¶17] He said, “But Keṇiya, where is the Blessed One at present, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: “Kahaṁ pana, bho keṇiya, etarahi so bhavaṁ gotamo viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti?
[¶18] When he said this, Keṇiya pointed with his right arm and said, “There, worthy Sela, at that line of blue forest.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, keṇiyo jaṭilo dakkhiṇaṁ bāhuṁ paggahetvā selaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “yenesā, bho sela, nīlavanarājī”ti.
[¶19] Then Sela, together with his young students, approached the Buddha. He said to his young students, “Come quietly, gentlemen, tread gently. For the Buddhas are intimidating, like a lion living alone. When I’m consulting with the ascetic Gotama, don’t interrupt. Wait until I’ve finished speaking.”
> Pali: Atha kho selo brāhmaṇo tīhi māṇavakasatehi saddhiṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho selo brāhmaṇo te māṇavake āmantesi: “appasaddā bhonto āgacchantu pade padaṁ nikkhipantā; durāsadā hi te bhagavanto sīhāva ekacarā. Yadā cāhaṁ, bho, samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ manteyyaṁ, mā me bhonto antarantarā kathaṁ opātetha. Kathāpariyosānaṁ me bhavanto āgamentū”ti.
[¶20] Then Sela went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and scrutinized the Buddha’s body for the thirty-two marks of a great man.
> Pali: Atha kho selo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho selo brāhmaṇo bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni samannesi.
[¶21] He saw all of them except two, which he had doubts about: whether the private parts were sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.
> Pali: Addasā kho selo brāhmaṇo bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya ca.
[¶22] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “Sela sees all the marks except two, which he has doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “passati kho me ayaṁ selo brāhmaṇo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya cā”ti.
[¶23] The Buddha used his psychic power to will that Sela would see his private parts sheathed in a foreskin. And he stuck out his tongue and stroked back and forth on his ear holes and nostrils, and covered his entire forehead with his tongue.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsi, yathā addasa selo brāhmaṇo bhagavato kosohitaṁ vatthaguyhaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā jivhaṁ ninnāmetvā ubhopi kaṇṇasotāni anumasi paṭimasi; ubhopi nāsikasotāni anumasi paṭimasi; kevalampi nalāṭamaṇḍalaṁ jivhāya chādesi.
[¶24] Then Sela thought, “The ascetic Gotama possesses the thirty-two marks completely, lacking none. But I don’t know whether or not he is an awakened one. I have heard that brahmins of the past who were elderly and senior, the tutors of tutors, said, ‘Those who are perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas reveal themselves when praised.’ Why don’t I extoll him in his presence with fitting verses?”
> Pali: Atha kho selassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “samannāgato kho samaṇo gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi paripuṇṇehi, no aparipuṇṇehi; no ca kho naṁ jānāmi buddho vā no vā. Sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘ye te bhavanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā te sake vaṇṇe bhaññamāne attānaṁ pātukarontī’ti. Yannūnāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ sammukhā sāruppāhi gāthāhi abhitthaveyyan”ti.
[¶25] Then Sela extolled the Buddha in his presence with fitting verses:
> Pali: Atha kho selo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ sammukhā sāruppāhi gāthāhi abhitthavi:
[¶26] “O Blessed One, your body’s perfect,
you’re radiant, handsome, lovely to behold;
golden colored,
with teeth so white; you’re strong.
> Pali: “Paripuṇṇakāyo suruci,
Sujāto cārudassano;
Suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā,
Susukkadāṭhosi vīriyavā.
[¶27] The characteristics
of a handsome man,
the marks of a great man,
are all found on your body.
> Pali: Narassa hi sujātassa,
ye bhavanti viyañjanā;
Sabbe te tava kāyasmiṁ,
mahāpurisalakkhaṇā.
[¶28] Your eyes are clear, your face is fair,
you’re formidable, upright, majestic.
In the midst of the Saṅgha of ascetics,
you dazzle like the sun.
> Pali: Pasannanetto sumukho,
brahā uju patāpavā;
Majjhe samaṇasaṅghassa,
ādiccova virocasi.
[¶29] You’re a mendicant fine to see,
with skin that shines like lustrous gold.
But with such excellent appearance,
what do you want with the ascetic life?
> Pali: Kalyāṇadassano bhikkhu,
kañcanasannibhattaco;
Kiṁ te samaṇabhāvena,
evaṁ uttamavaṇṇino.
[¶30] You’re fit to be a king,
a wheel-turning monarch, chief of charioteers,
victorious in the four quarters,
lord of the Black Plum Tree Land.
> Pali: Rājā arahasi bhavituṁ,
cakkavattī rathesabho;
Cāturanto vijitāvī,
jambusaṇḍassa issaro.
[¶31] Aristocrats, nobles, and kings
ought follow your rule.
Gotama, may you reign
as king of kings, lord of mankind!”
> Pali: Khattiyā bhogirājāno,
anuyantā bhavantu te;
Rājābhirājā manujindo,
rajjaṁ kārehi gotama”.
[¶32] “I am a king, Sela,
the supreme king of the teaching.
By the teaching I roll forth the wheel
which cannot be rolled back.”
> Pali: “Rājāhamasmi selāti,
dhammarājā anuttaro;
Dhammena cakkaṁ vattemi,
cakkaṁ appaṭivattiyaṁ”.
[¶33] “You claim to be awakened,
the supreme king of the teaching.
‘I roll forth the teaching’:
so you say, Gotama.
> Pali: “Sambuddho paṭijānāsi,
dhammarājā anuttaro;
‘Dhammena cakkaṁ vattemi’,
iti bhāsasi gotama.
[¶34] Then who is your general,
the disciple who follows the Teacher’s way?
Who keeps rolling the wheel
of the teaching you rolled forth?”
> Pali: Ko nu senāpati bhoto,
sāvako satthuranvayo;
Ko tetamanuvatteti,
dhammacakkaṁ pavattitaṁ”.
[¶35] “By me the wheel was rolled forth,”
said the Buddha,
“the supreme wheel of the teaching.
Sāriputta, taking after the Realized One,
keeps it rolling on.
> Pali: “Mayā pavattitaṁ cakkaṁ,
(selāti bhagavā)
Dhammacakkaṁ anuttaraṁ;
Sāriputto anuvatteti,
Anujāto tathāgataṁ.
[¶36] I have known what should be known,
and developed what should be developed,
and given up what should be given up:
and so, brahmin, I am a Buddha.
> Pali: Abhiññeyyaṁ abhiññātaṁ,
bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṁ;
Pahātabbaṁ pahīnaṁ me,
tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇa.
[¶37] Dispel your doubt in me—
make up your mind, brahmin!
The sight of a Buddha
is hard to find again.
> Pali: Vinayassu mayi kaṅkhaṁ,
adhimuccassu brāhmaṇa;
Dullabhaṁ dassanaṁ hoti,
sambuddhānaṁ abhiṇhaso.
[¶38] I am a Buddha, brahmin,
the supreme surgeon,
one of those whose appearance in the world
is hard to find again.
> Pali: Yesaṁ ve dullabho loke,
pātubhāvo abhiṇhaso;
Sohaṁ brāhmaṇa sambuddho,
sallakatto anuttaro.
[¶39] A manifestation of divinity, unequaled,
crusher of Māra’s army;
having subdued all my opponents,
I rejoice, fearing nothing from any quarter.”
> Pali: Brahmabhūto atitulo,
mārasenappamaddano;
Sabbāmitte vasī katvā,
modāmi akutobhayo”.
[¶40] “Pay heed, sirs, to what
is spoken by the Clear-eyed One.
The surgeon, the great hero,
roars like a lion in the jungle.
> Pali: “Imaṁ bhonto nisāmetha,
yathā bhāsati cakkhumā;
Sallakatto mahāvīro,
sīhova nadatī vane.
[¶41] A manifestation of divinity, unequaled,
crusher of Māra’s army;
who would not be inspired by him,
even one born in a dark class?
> Pali: Brahmabhūtaṁ atitulaṁ,
mārasenappamaddanaṁ;
Ko disvā nappasīdeyya,
api kaṇhābhijātiko.
[¶42] Those who wish may follow me;
those who don’t may go.
Right here, I’ll go forth in his presence,
the one of such outstanding wisdom.”
> Pali: Yo maṁ icchati anvetu,
yo vā nicchati gacchatu;
Idhāhaṁ pabbajissāmi,
varapaññassa santike”.
[¶43] “Sir, if you endorse
the teaching of the Buddha,
we’ll also go forth in his presence,
the one of such outstanding wisdom.”
> Pali: “Etañce ruccati bhoto,
sammāsambuddhasāsanaṁ;
Mayampi pabbajissāma,
varapaññassa santike”.
[¶44] “These three hundred brahmins
with cupped palms held up, ask:
‘May we lead the spiritual life
in your presence, Blessed One?’”
> Pali: Brāhmaṇā tisatā ime,
yācanti pañjalīkatā;
“Brahmacariyaṁ carissāma,
bhagavā tava santike”.
[¶45] “The spiritual life is well explained,”
said the Buddha,
“apparent in the present life, immediately effective.
Here the going forth isn’t in vain
for one who trains with diligence.”
> Pali: “Svākkhātaṁ brahmacariyaṁ,
(selāti bhagavā)
Sandiṭṭhikamakālikaṁ;
Yattha amoghā pabbajjā,
Appamattassa sikkhato”ti.
[¶46] And the brahmin Sela together with his assembly received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence.
> Pali: Alattha kho selo brāhmaṇo sapariso bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ.
[¶47] And when the night had passed Keṇiya had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own hermitage. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo tassā rattiyā accayena sake assame paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶48] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to Keṇiya’s hermitage, where he sat down on the seat spread out together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Then Keṇiya served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Keṇiya took a low seat and sat to one side. The Buddha expressed his appreciation with these verses:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena keṇiyassa jaṭilassa assamo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena. Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi, sampavāresi. Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ bhagavā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi:
[¶49] “The foremost of sacrifices is the offering to the sacred flame;
the Sāvitrī is the foremost of prayer;
of humans, the king is the foremost;
the ocean’s the foremost of rivers;
> Pali: “Aggihuttamukhā yaññā,
sāvittī chandaso mukhaṁ;
Rājā mukhaṁ manussānaṁ,
nadīnaṁ sāgaro mukhaṁ.
[¶50] the foremost of stars is the moon;
the sun is the foremost of blazes;
for those who sacrifice seeking merit,
the Saṅgha is the foremost.”
> Pali: Nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ cando,
ādicco tapataṁ mukhaṁ;
Puññaṁ ākaṅkhamānānaṁ,
saṅgho ve yajataṁ mukhan”ti.
[¶51] When the Buddha had expressed his appreciation to Keṇiya the matted-hair ascetic with these verses, he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ imāhi gāthāhi anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶52] Then Venerable Sela and his assembly, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. They lived having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā selo sapariso eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶53] They understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Sela together with his assembly became perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā selo sapariso arahataṁ ahosi.
[¶54] Then Sela with his assembly went to the Buddha. He arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his joined palms toward the Buddha, and said:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā selo sapariso yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶55] “This is the eighth day since
we went for refuge, O Clear-eyed One.
In these seven days, Blessed One,
we’ve become tamed in your teaching.
> Pali: “Yaṁ taṁ saraṇamāgamma,
ito aṭṭhami cakkhumā;
Sattarattena bhagavā,
dantamha tava sāsane.
[¶56] You are the Buddha, you are the Teacher,
you are the sage who has overcome Māra;
you have cut off the underlying tendencies,
you’ve crossed over, and you bring humanity across.
> Pali: Tuvaṁ buddho tuvaṁ satthā,
tuvaṁ mārābhibhū muni;
Tuvaṁ anusaye chetvā,
tiṇṇo tāresimaṁ pajaṁ.
[¶57] You have transcended attachments,
your defilements are shattered;
like a lion free of grasping,
with fear and dread given up.
> Pali: Upadhī te samatikkantā,
āsavā te padālitā;
Sīhova anupādāno,
pahīnabhayabheravo.
[¶58] These three hundred mendicants
stand with cupped palms raised.
Stretch out your feet, great hero:
let these giants bow to the Teacher.”
> Pali: Bhikkhavo tisatā ime,
tiṭṭhanti pañjalīkatā;
Pāde vīra pasārehi,
nāgā vandantu satthuno”ti.
[¶59] > Pali: Selasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 102. MN 93 · With Assalāyana
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/102/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/102/#p-N
[¶0] MN 93 · With Assalāyana
> Pali: MN 93 · Assalāyanasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time around five hundred brahmins from abroad were residing in Sāvatthī on some business. Then those brahmins thought, “This ascetic Gotama advocates purification for all four classes. Who is capable of debating with him about this?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nānāverajjakānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pañcamattāni brāhmaṇasatāni sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasanti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho tesaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho samaṇo gotamo cātuvaṇṇiṁ suddhiṁ paññapeti. Ko nu kho pahoti samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun”ti?
[¶3] Now at that time the student Assalāyana was residing in Sāvatthī. He was young, tonsured, and sixteen years old. He had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena assalāyano nāma māṇavo sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasati daharo, vuttasiro, soḷasavassuddesiko jātiyā, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo.
[¶4] Then those brahmins thought, “This Assalāyana is capable of debating with the ascetic Gotama about this.”
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho assalāyano māṇavo sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasati daharo, vuttasiro, soḷasavassuddesiko jātiyā, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū …pe… anavayo. So kho pahoti samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun”ti.
[¶5] So they approached Assalāyana and said to him, “This ascetic Gotama advocates purification for all four classes. Please, worthy Assalāyana, debate with the ascetic Gotama about this.”
> Pali: Atha kho te brāhmaṇā yena assalāyano māṇavo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā assalāyanaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ayaṁ, bho assalāyana, samaṇo gotamo cātuvaṇṇiṁ suddhiṁ paññapeti. Etu bhavaṁ assalāyano samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetū”ti.
[¶6] When they said this, Assalāyana said to them, “They say that the ascetic Gotama is a speaker of principle. But speakers of principle are hard to debate. I’m not capable of debating with the ascetic Gotama about this.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, assalāyano māṇavo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dhammavādī; dhammavādino ca pana duppaṭimantiyā bhavanti. Nāhaṁ sakkomi samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun”ti.
[¶7] For a second time, those brahmins said to him “This ascetic Gotama advocates purification for all four classes. Please, worthy Assalāyana, debate with the ascetic Gotama about this. For you have lived as a wanderer.” And for a second time, Assalāyana refused.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho te brāhmaṇā assalāyanaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ayaṁ, bho assalāyana, samaṇo gotamo cātuvaṇṇiṁ suddhiṁ paññapeti. Etu bhavaṁ assalāyano samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetu. Caritaṁ kho pana bhotā assalāyanena paribbājakan”ti. Dutiyampi kho assalāyano māṇavo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dhammavādī; dhammavādino ca pana duppaṭimantiyā bhavanti. Nāhaṁ sakkomi samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun”ti.
[¶8] For a third time, those brahmins said to him, “This ascetic Gotama advocates purification for all four classes. Please, worthy Assalāyana, debate with the ascetic Gotama about this. For you have lived as a wanderer. Don’t admit defeat before going into battle!”
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho te brāhmaṇā assalāyanaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ayaṁ, bho assalāyana, samaṇo gotamo cātuvaṇṇiṁ suddhiṁ paññapeti. Etu bhavaṁ assalāyano samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetu. Caritaṁ kho pana bhotā assalāyanena paribbājakaṁ. Mā bhavaṁ assalāyano ayuddhaparājitaṁ parājayī”ti.
[¶9] When they said this, Assalāyana said to them, “Clearly, worthy sirs, I’m not getting through to you when I say: ‘They say that the ascetic Gotama is a speaker of principle. But speakers of principle are hard to debate. I’m not capable of debating with the ascetic Gotama about this.’ Nevertheless, I shall go at your bidding.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, assalāyano māṇavo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca: “addhā kho ahaṁ bhavanto na labhāmi. Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dhammavādī; dhammavādino ca pana duppaṭimantiyā bhavanti. Nāhaṁ sakkomi samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetunti. Api cāhaṁ bhavantānaṁ vacanena gamissāmī”ti.
[¶10] Then Assalāyana together with a large group of brahmins went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho assalāyano māṇavo mahatā brāhmaṇagaṇena saddhiṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho assalāyano māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶11] “Worthy Gotama, the brahmins say: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.’ What do you say about this?”
> Pali: “brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’ti. Idha bhavaṁ gotamo kimāhā”ti?
[¶12] “But Assalāyana, brahmin women are seen menstruating, being pregnant, giving birth, and breastfeeding. Yet even though they’re born from a brahmin womb they say: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.’”
> Pali: “Dissanti kho pana, assalāyana, brāhmaṇānaṁ brāhmaṇiyo utuniyopi gabbhiniyopi vijāyamānāpi pāyamānāpi. Te ca brāhmaṇiyonijāva samānā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶13] “Even though you say this, still the brahmins maintain their belief.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ gotamo evamāha, atha khvettha brāhmaṇā evametaṁ maññanti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶14] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Have you heard that in Greece and Persia and other foreign lands there are only two classes, masters and bonded servants; and that masters may become servants, and servants masters?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, sutaṁ te: ‘yonakambojesu aññesu ca paccantimesu janapadesu dveva vaṇṇā—ayyo ceva dāso ca; ayyo hutvā dāso hoti, dāso hutvā ayyo hotī’”ti?
[¶15] “Yes, I have heard that.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho, sutaṁ taṁ me: ‘yonakambojesu aññesu ca paccantimesu janapadesu dveva vaṇṇā—ayyo ceva dāso ca; ayyo hutvā dāso hoti, dāso hutvā ayyo hotī’”ti.
[¶16] “Then what is the source of the brahmins’ certainty and forcefulness in this matter that they make this claim?”
> Pali: “Ettha, assalāyana, brāhmaṇānaṁ kiṁ balaṁ, ko assāso yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti?
[¶17] “Even though you say this, still the brahmins maintain their belief.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ gotamo evamāha, atha khvettha brāhmaṇā evametaṁ maññanti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶18] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose an aristocrat were to kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct; to use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and to be covetous, malicious, with wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’d be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. Would this happen only to an aristocrat, and not to a brahmin? Or suppose a peasant, or a menial were to act in the same way. Would that result befall only a peasant or a menial, and not to a brahmin?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, khattiyova nu kho pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavāco pharusavāco samphappalāpī abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya, no brāhmaṇo? Vessova nu kho …pe… suddova nu kho pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavāco pharusavāco samphappalāpī abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya, no brāhmaṇo”ti?
[¶19] “No, worthy Gotama. If they acted the same way, the same result would befall an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial. For if any of the four classes were to kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct; to use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and to be covetous, malicious, with wrong view, then, when their body breaks up, after death, they’d be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Khattiyopi hi, bho gotama, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavāco pharusavāco samphappalāpī abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya. Brāhmaṇopi hi, bho gotama …pe… vessopi hi, bho gotama …pe… suddopi hi, bho gotama …pe… sabbepi hi, bho gotama, cattāro vaṇṇā pāṇātipātino adinnādāyino kāmesumicchācārino musāvādino pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpino abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyyun”ti.
[¶20] “Then what is the source of the brahmins’ certainty and forcefulness in this matter that they make this claim?”
> Pali: “Ettha, assalāyana, brāhmaṇānaṁ kiṁ balaṁ, ko assāso yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti?
[¶21] “Even though you say this, still the brahmins maintain their belief.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ gotamo evamāha, atha khvettha brāhmaṇā evametaṁ maññanti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶22] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose a brahmin were to refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; from using speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and from covetousness, malice, and wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’d be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. Would this happen only to a brahmin, and not to an aristocrat, a peasant, or a menial?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, brāhmaṇova nu kho pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato musāvādā paṭivirato pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato samphappalāpā paṭivirato anabhijjhālu abyāpannacitto sammādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya, no khattiyo, no vesso, no suddo”ti?
[¶23] “No, worthy Gotama. If they acted the same way, the same result would befall an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial. For if any of the four classes were to refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; from using speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and from covetousness, malice, and wrong view, then, when their body breaks up, after death, they’d be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Khattiyopi hi, bho gotama, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato musāvādā paṭivirato pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato samphappalāpā paṭivirato anabhijjhālu abyāpannacitto sammādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya. Brāhmaṇopi hi, bho gotama …pe… vessopi hi, bho gotama …pe… suddopi hi, bho gotama …pe… sabbepi hi, bho gotama, cattāro vaṇṇā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyyun”ti.
[¶24] “Then what is the source of the brahmins’ certainty and forcefulness in this matter that they make this claim?”
> Pali: “Ettha, assalāyana, brāhmaṇānaṁ kiṁ balaṁ, ko assāso yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti?
[¶25] “Even though you say this, still the brahmins maintain their belief.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ gotamo evamāha, atha khvettha brāhmaṇā evametaṁ maññanti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶26] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Is only a brahmin capable of developing a heart of love, free of enmity and ill will for this region, and not an aristocrat, peasant, or menial?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, brāhmaṇova nu kho pahoti asmiṁ padese averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāvetuṁ, no khattiyo, no vesso, no suddo”ti?
[¶27] “No, worthy Gotama. Aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials can all do so. For all four classes are capable of developing a heart of love, free of enmity and ill will for this region.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Khattiyopi hi, bho gotama, pahoti asmiṁ padese averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāvetuṁ; brāhmaṇopi hi, bho gotama … vessopi hi, bho gotama … suddopi hi, bho gotama … sabbepi hi, bho gotama, cattāro vaṇṇā pahonti asmiṁ padese averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāvetun”ti.
[¶28] “Then what is the source of the brahmins’ certainty and forcefulness in this matter that they make this claim?”
> Pali: “Ettha, assalāyana, brāhmaṇānaṁ kiṁ balaṁ, ko assāso yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti?
[¶29] “Even though you say this, still the brahmins maintain their belief.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ gotamo evamāha, atha khvettha brāhmaṇā evametaṁ maññanti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶30] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Is only a brahmin capable of taking some bathing cleanser, going to the river, and rinsing off dust and dirt, and not an aristocrat, peasant, or menial?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, brāhmaṇova nu kho pahoti sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ gantvā rajojallaṁ pavāhetuṁ, no khattiyo, no vesso, no suddo”ti?
[¶31] “No, worthy Gotama. All four classes are capable of doing this.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Khattiyopi hi, bho gotama, pahoti sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ gantvā rajojallaṁ pavāhetuṁ, brāhmaṇopi hi, bho gotama … vessopi hi, bho gotama … suddopi hi, bho gotama … sabbepi hi, bho gotama, cattāro vaṇṇā pahonti sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ gantvā rajojallaṁ pavāhetun”ti.
[¶32] “Then what is the source of the brahmins’ certainty and forcefulness in this matter that they make this claim?”
> Pali: “Ettha, assalāyana, brāhmaṇānaṁ kiṁ balaṁ, ko assāso yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti?
[¶33] “Even though you say this, still the brahmins maintain their belief.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ gotamo evamāha, atha khvettha brāhmaṇā evametaṁ maññanti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶34] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose an anointed aristocratic king were to gather a hundred people of various births and say to them: ‘Please worthy sirs, let anyone here who was born in a family of aristocrats, brahmins, or chieftains take a drill-stick made of teak, sal, salaḷa, sandalwood, or cherry wood, light a fire and produce heat. And let anyone here who was born in a family of corpse-workers, hunters, bamboo-workers, chariot-makers, or scavengers take a drill-stick made from a mutt’s drinking trough, a pig’s trough, a dustbin, or castor-oil wood, light a fire and produce heat.’
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, idha rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto nānājaccānaṁ purisānaṁ purisasataṁ sannipāteyya: ‘āyantu bhonto ye tattha khattiyakulā brāhmaṇakulā rājaññakulā uppannā, sākassa vā sālassa vā salaḷassa vā candanassa vā padumakassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya, aggiṁ abhinibbattentu, tejo pātukarontu. Āyantu pana bhonto ye tattha caṇḍālakulā nesādakulā venakulā rathakārakulā pukkusakulā uppannā, sāpānadoṇiyā vā sūkaradoṇiyā vā rajakadoṇiyā vā eraṇḍakaṭṭhassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya, aggiṁ abhinibbattentu, tejo pātukarontū’ti.
[¶35] What do you think, Assalāyana? Would only the fire produced by the high class people with good quality wood have flames, color, and radiance, and be usable as fire, and not the fire produced by the low class people with poor quality wood?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, yo evaṁ nu kho so khattiyakulā brāhmaṇakulā rājaññakulā uppannehi sākassa vā sālassa vā salaḷassa vā candanassa vā padumakassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto, tejo pātukato, so eva nu khvāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca, tena ca sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ; yo pana so caṇḍālakulā nesādakulā venakulā rathakārakulā pukkusakulā uppannehi sāpānadoṇiyā vā sūkaradoṇiyā vā rajakadoṇiyā vā eraṇḍakaṭṭhassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto, tejo pātukato svāssa aggi na ceva accimā na ca vaṇṇavā na ca pabhassaro, na ca tena sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātun”ti?
[¶36] “No, worthy Gotama. The fire produced by the high class people with good quality wood would have flames, color, and radiance, and be usable as fire, and so would the fire produced by the low class people with poor quality wood. For all fire has flames, color, and radiance, and is usable as fire.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Yopi hi so, bho gotama, khattiyakulā brāhmaṇakulā rājaññakulā uppannehi sākassa vā sālassa vā salaḷassa vā candanassa vā padumakassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto, tejo pātukato svāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca, tena ca sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ; yopi so caṇḍālakulā nesādakulā venakulā rathakārakulā pukkusakulā uppannehi sāpānadoṇiyā vā sūkaradoṇiyā vā rajakadoṇiyā vā eraṇḍakaṭṭhassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto, tejo pātukato, svāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca, tena ca sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ. Sabbopi hi, bho gotama, aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca, sabbenapi sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātun”ti.
[¶37] “Then what is the source of the brahmins’ certainty and forcefulness in this matter that they make this claim?”
> Pali: “Ettha, assalāyana, brāhmaṇānaṁ kiṁ balaṁ, ko assāso yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’”ti?
[¶38] “Even though you say this, still the brahmins maintain their belief.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ gotamo evamāha, atha khvettha brāhmaṇā evametaṁ maññanti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’”ti.
[¶39] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose an aristocrat boy was to sleep with a brahmin girl, and they had a child. Would that child be called an aristocrat after the father or a brahmin after the mother?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, idha khattiyakumāro brāhmaṇakaññāya saddhiṁ saṁvāsaṁ kappeyya, tesaṁ saṁvāsamanvāya putto jāyetha; yo so khattiyakumārena brāhmaṇakaññāya putto uppanno, siyā so mātupi sadiso pitupi sadiso, ‘khattiyo’tipi vattabbo ‘brāhmaṇo’tipi vattabbo”ti?
[¶40] “They could be called either.”
> Pali: “Yo so, bho gotama, khattiyakumārena brāhmaṇakaññāya putto uppanno, siyā so mātupi sadiso pitupi sadiso, ‘khattiyo’tipi vattabbo ‘brāhmaṇo’tipi vattabbo”ti.
[¶41] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose a brahmin boy was to sleep with an aristocrat girl, and they had a child. Would that child be called an aristocrat after the mother or a brahmin after the father?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, idha brāhmaṇakumāro khattiyakaññāya saddhiṁ saṁvāsaṁ kappeyya, tesaṁ saṁvāsamanvāya putto jāyetha; yo so brāhmaṇakumārena khattiyakaññāya putto uppanno, siyā so mātupi sadiso pitupi sadiso, ‘khattiyo’tipi vattabbo ‘brāhmaṇo’tipi vattabbo”ti?
[¶42] “They could be called either.”
> Pali: “Yo so, bho gotama, brāhmaṇakumārena khattiyakaññāya putto uppanno, siyā so mātupi sadiso pitupi sadiso, ‘khattiyo’tipi vattabbo ‘brāhmaṇo’tipi vattabbo”ti.
[¶43] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose a mare were to couple with a donkey, and she gave birth to a mule. Would that mule be called a horse after the mother or a donkey after the father?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, idha vaḷavaṁ gadrabhena sampayojeyyuṁ, tesaṁ sampayogamanvāya kisoro jāyetha; yo so vaḷavāya gadrabhena kisoro uppanno, siyā so mātupi sadiso pitupi sadiso, ‘asso’tipi vattabbo ‘gadrabho’tipi vattabbo”ti?
[¶44] “It’s a mule, as it is a crossbreed. I see the difference in this case, but not in the previous cases.”
> Pali: “Kuṇḍañhi so, bho gotama, assataro hoti. Idaṁ hissa, bho gotama, nānākaraṇaṁ passāmi; amutra ca panesānaṁ na kiñci nānākaraṇaṁ passāmī”ti.
[¶45] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose there were two young students who were brothers who had shared a womb. One was an educated reciter, while the other was not an educated reciter. Who would the brahmins feed first at an offering of food for ancestors, an offering of a dish of milk-rice, a sacrifice, or a feast for guests?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, idhāssu dve māṇavakā bhātaro sodariyā, eko ajjhāyako upanīto eko anajjhāyako anupanīto. Kamettha brāhmaṇā paṭhamaṁ bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā”ti?
[¶46] “They’d first feed the young student who was an educated reciter. For how could an offering to someone who is not an educated reciter be very fruitful?”
> Pali: “Yo so, bho gotama, māṇavako ajjhāyako upanīto tamettha brāhmaṇā paṭhamaṁ bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā. Kiñhi, bho gotama, anajjhāyake anupanīte dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ bhavissatī”ti?
[¶47] “What do you think, Assalāyana? Suppose there were two young students who were brothers who had shared a womb. One was an educated reciter, but was unethical, of bad character, while the other was not an educated reciter, but was ethical and of good character. Who would the brahmins feed first?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, assalāyana, idhāssu dve māṇavakā bhātaro sodariyā, eko ajjhāyako upanīto dussīlo pāpadhammo, eko anajjhāyako anupanīto sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo. Kamettha brāhmaṇā paṭhamaṁ bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā”ti?
[¶48] “They’d first feed the young student who was not an educated reciter, but was ethical and of good character. For how could an offering to someone who is unethical and of bad character be very fruitful?”
> Pali: “Yo so, bho gotama, māṇavako anajjhāyako anupanīto sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo tamettha brāhmaṇā paṭhamaṁ bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā. Kiñhi, bho gotama, dussīle pāpadhamme dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ bhavissatī”ti?
[¶49] “Firstly you relied on birth, Assalāyana, then you switched to education, then you switched to abstemious behavior. Now you’ve come around to believing in purification for the four classes, just as I advocate.” When he said this, Assalāyana sat silent, dismayed, shoulders drooping, downcast, depressed, with nothing to say.
> Pali: “Pubbe kho tvaṁ, assalāyana, jātiṁ agamāsi; jātiṁ gantvā mante agamāsi; mante gantvā tape agamāsi; tape gantvā cātuvaṇṇiṁ suddhiṁ paccāgato, yamahaṁ paññapemī”ti. Evaṁ vutte, assalāyano māṇavo tuṇhībhūto maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho pajjhāyanto appaṭibhāno nisīdi.
[¶50] Knowing this, the Buddha said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā assalāyanaṁ māṇavaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ maṅkubhūtaṁ pattakkhandhaṁ adhomukhaṁ pajjhāyantaṁ appaṭibhānaṁ viditvā assalāyanaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca:
[¶51] “Once upon a time, Assalāyana, seven brahmin seers settled in leaf huts in a wilderness region. They had the following harmful misconception: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.’
> Pali: “bhūtapubbaṁ, assalāyana, sattannaṁ brāhmaṇisīnaṁ araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu sammantānaṁ evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ hoti: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo … pe… brahmadāyādā’ti.
[¶52] The seer Devala the Dark heard about this. So he did up his hair and beard, dressed in magenta robes, put on his lined sandals, grasped a golden staff, and appeared in the courtyard of the seven brahmin seers. Then he wandered about the yard saying, ‘Where, oh where have those brahmin seers gone? Where, oh where have those brahmin seers gone?’
> Pali: Assosi kho, assalāyana, asito devalo isi: ‘sattannaṁ kira brāhmaṇisīnaṁ araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu sammantānaṁ evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ— brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo …pe… brahmadāyādā’ti. Atha kho, assalāyana, asito devalo isi kesamassuṁ kappetvā mañjiṭṭhavaṇṇāni dussāni nivāsetvā paṭaliyo upāhanā āruhitvā jātarūpamayaṁ daṇḍaṁ gahetvā sattannaṁ brāhmaṇisīnaṁ patthaṇḍile pāturahosi. Atha kho, assalāyana, asito devalo isi sattannaṁ brāhmaṇisīnaṁ patthaṇḍile caṅkamamāno evamāha: ‘handa ko nu kho ime bhavanto brāhmaṇisayo gatā; handa ko nu kho ime bhavanto brāhmaṇisayo gatā’ti?
[¶53] Then those brahmin seers said, ‘Who’s this wandering about our courtyard like a village lout? Let’s curse him!’
> Pali: Atha kho, assalāyana, sattannaṁ brāhmaṇisīnaṁ etadahosi: ‘ko nāyaṁ gāmaṇḍalarūpo viya sattannaṁ brāhmaṇisīnaṁ patthaṇḍile caṅkamamāno evamāha: “handa ko nu kho ime bhavanto brāhmaṇisayo gatā; handa ko nu kho ime bhavanto brāhmaṇisayo gatāti? Handa naṁ abhisapāmā”’ti.
[¶54] So they cursed Devala the Dark, ‘Be ashes, lowlife! Be ashes, lowlife!’ But the more the seers cursed him, the more attractive, good-looking, and lovely Devala the Dark became.
> Pali: Atha kho, assalāyana, satta brāhmaṇisayo asitaṁ devalaṁ isiṁ abhisapiṁsu: ‘bhasmā, vasala, hohi; bhasmā, vasala, hohī’ti. Yathā yathā kho, assalāyana, satta brāhmaṇisayo asitaṁ devalaṁ isiṁ abhisapiṁsu tathā tathā asito devalo isi abhirūpataro ceva hoti dassanīyataro ca pāsādikataro ca.
[¶55] Then those brahmin seers said, ‘Our fervor is in vain! Our spiritual path is fruitless! For when we used to curse someone to become ashes, ashes they became. But the more we curse this one, the more attractive, good-looking, and lovely he becomes.’
> Pali: Atha kho, assalāyana, sattannaṁ brāhmaṇisīnaṁ etadahosi: ‘moghaṁ vata no tapo, aphalaṁ brahmacariyaṁ. Mayañhi pubbe yaṁ abhisapāma— bhasmā, vasala, hohi; bhasmā, vasala, hohīti bhasmāva bhavati ekacco. Imaṁ pana mayaṁ yathā yathā abhisapāma tathā tathā abhirūpataro ceva hoti dassanīyataro ca pāsādikataro cā’ti.
[¶56] ‘Worthy sirs, your fervor is not in vain; your spiritual path is not fruitless. Please let go of your malevolence toward me.’
> Pali: ‘Na bhavantānaṁ moghaṁ tapo, nāphalaṁ brahmacariyaṁ. Iṅgha bhavanto, yo mayi manopadoso taṁ pajahathā’ti.
[¶57] ‘We let go of our malevolence toward you. But who are you, worthy sir?’
> Pali: ‘Yo bhavati manopadoso taṁ pajahāma. Ko nu bhavaṁ hotī’ti?
[¶58] ‘Have you heard of the seer Devala the Dark?’
> Pali: ‘Suto nu bhavataṁ— asito devalo isī’ti?
[¶59] ‘Yes, worthy sir.’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’.
[¶60] ‘I am he, worthy sir.’ Then they approached Devala and bowed to him.
> Pali: ‘So khvāhaṁ, bho, homī’ti. Atha kho, assalāyana, satta brāhmaṇisayo asitaṁ devalaṁ isiṁ abhivādetuṁ upakkamiṁsu.
[¶61] Devala said to them, ‘I heard that when the seven brahmin seers had settled in leaf huts in a wilderness region, they had the following harmful misconception: “Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.”’
> Pali: Atha kho, assalāyana, asito devalo isi satta brāhmaṇisayo etadavoca: ‘sutaṁ metaṁ, bho, sattannaṁ kira brāhmaṇisīnaṁ araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu sammantānaṁ evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ— brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’ti.
[¶62] ‘That’s right, worthy sir.’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’.
[¶63] ‘But do you know whether your birth mother only had relations with a brahmin and not with a non-brahmin?’
> Pali: ‘Jānanti pana bhonto— yā janikā mātā brāhmaṇaṁyeva agamāsi, no abrāhmaṇan’ti?
[¶64] ‘We don’t know that.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, bho’.
[¶65] ‘But do you know whether your birth mother’s mothers back to the seventh generation only had relations with brahmins and not with non-brahmins?’
> Pali: ‘Jānanti pana bhonto— yā janikāmātu mātā yāva sattamā mātumātāmahayugā brāhmaṇaṁyeva agamāsi, no abrāhmaṇan’ti?
[¶66] ‘We don’t know that.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, bho’.
[¶67] ‘But do you know whether your birth father only had relations with a brahmin woman and not with a non-brahmin?’
> Pali: ‘Jānanti pana bhonto— yo janako pitā brāhmaṇiṁyeva agamāsi, no abrāhmaṇin’ti?
[¶68] ‘We don’t know that.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, bho’.
[¶69] ‘But do you know whether your birth father’s fathers back to the seventh generation only had relations with brahmins and not with non-brahmins?’
> Pali: ‘Jānanti pana bhonto— yo janakapitu pitā yāva sattamā pitupitāmahayugā brāhmaṇiṁyeva agamāsi, no abrāhmaṇin’ti?
[¶70] ‘We don’t know that.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, bho’.
[¶71] ‘But do you know how an embryo is conceived?’
> Pali: ‘Jānanti pana bhonto— yathā gabbhassa avakkanti hotī’ti?
[¶72] ‘We do know that, worthy sir. An embryo is conceived when these three things come together—the mother and father come together, the mother is in the fertile phase of her menstrual cycle, and the virile spirit is ready.’
> Pali: ‘Jānāma mayaṁ, bho— yathā gabbhassa avakkanti hoti. Idha mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca paccupaṭṭhito hoti; evaṁ tiṇṇaṁ sannipātā gabbhassa avakkanti hotī’ti.
[¶73] ‘But do you know for sure whether that virile spirit is an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial?’
> Pali: ‘Jānanti pana bhonto— taggha, so gandhabbo khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vā’ti?
[¶74] ‘We don’t know that.’
> Pali: ‘Na mayaṁ, bho, jānāma— taggha so gandhabbo khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vā’ti.
[¶75] ‘In that case, worthy sir, don’t you know what you are?’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ sante, bho, jānātha— ke tumhe hothā’ti?
[¶76] ‘In that case, worthy sir, we don’t know what we are.’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ sante, bho, na mayaṁ jānāma— ke mayaṁ homā’ti.
[¶77] Given that even those seven brahmin seers could not prevail when pursued, pressed, and grilled by the seer Devala on their own genealogy, how could you prevail now being grilled by me on your own genealogy when you and your denomination do not so much as pick up the last spoonful?”
> Pali: Te hi nāma, assalāyana, satta brāhmaṇisayo asitena devalena isinā sake jātivāde samanuyuñjīyamānā samanuggāhīyamānā samanubhāsīyamānā na sampāyissanti; kiṁ pana tvaṁ etarahi mayā sakasmiṁ jātivāde samanuyuñjīyamāno samanuggāhīyamāno samanubhāsīyamāno sampāyissasi, yesaṁ tvaṁ sācariyako na puṇṇo dabbigāho”ti.
[¶78] When he had spoken, Assalāyana said to him, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! … From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, assalāyano māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶79] > Pali: Assalāyanasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 103. MN 94 · With Ghoṭamukha
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/103/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/103/#p-N
[¶0] MN 94 · With Ghoṭamukha
> Pali: MN 94 · Ghoṭamukhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Udena was staying near Varanasi in the Khemiya Mango Grove.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā udeno bārāṇasiyaṁ viharati khemiyambavane.
[¶2] Now at that time the brahmin Ghoṭamukha had arrived at Varanasi on some business. Then as he was going for a walk he went to the Khemiya Mango Grove. At that time Venerable Udena was walking mindfully in the open air. Ghoṭamukha approached and exchanged greetings with him.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo bārāṇasiṁ anuppatto hoti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena khemiyambavanaṁ tenupasaṅkami. Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā udeno abbhokāse caṅkamati. Atha kho ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo yenāyasmā udeno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā udenena saddhiṁ sammodi.
[¶3] Walking alongside Udena, he said, “My ascetic, there is no such thing as a principled renunciate life; that’s what I think. Yet I have not seen honorable ones such as yourself, or a relevant teaching.”
> Pali: Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā āyasmantaṁ udenaṁ caṅkamantaṁ anucaṅkamamāno evamāha: “ambho samaṇa, ‘natthi dhammiko paribbajo’— evaṁ me ettha hoti. Tañca kho bhavantarūpānaṁ vā adassanā, yo vā panettha dhammo”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, Udena stepped down from the walking path, entered his dwelling, and sat down on the seat spread out. Ghoṭamukha also stepped down from the walking path and entered the dwelling, where he stood to one side. Udena said to him, “There are seats, brahmin. Please sit if you wish.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā udeno caṅkamā orohitvā vihāraṁ pavisitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Ghoṭamukhopi kho brāhmaṇo caṅkamā orohitvā vihāraṁ pavisitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho ghoṭamukhaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āyasmā udeno etadavoca: “saṁvijjanti kho, brāhmaṇa, āsanāni. Sace ākaṅkhasi, nisīdā”ti.
[¶5] “I was just waiting for you to sit down. For how on earth could one such as I presume to sit first without being invited?”
> Pali: “Etadeva kho pana mayaṁ bhoto udenassa āgamayamānā nisīdāma. Kathañhi nāma mādiso pubbe animantito āsane nisīditabbaṁ maññeyyā”ti?
[¶6] Then he took a low seat and sat to one side, where he said, “My ascetic, there is no such thing as a principled renunciate life; that’s what I think. Yet I have not seen worthy ones such as yourself, or a relevant teaching.”
> Pali: Atha kho ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo āyasmantaṁ udenaṁ etadavoca: “ambho samaṇa, ‘natthi dhammiko paribbajo’— evaṁ me ettha hoti. Tañca kho bhavantarūpānaṁ vā adassanā, yo vā panettha dhammo”ti.
[¶7] “Brahmin, we can discuss this. But only if you grant what should be granted, and reject what should be rejected. And if you ask me the meaning of anything you don’t understand, saying: ‘Sir, why is this? What does that mean?’”
> Pali: “Sace kho pana me tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, anuññeyyaṁ anujāneyyāsi, paṭikkositabbañca paṭikkoseyyāsi; yassa ca pana me bhāsitassa atthaṁ na jāneyyāsi, mamaṁyeva tattha uttari paṭipuccheyyāsi: ‘idaṁ, bho udena, kathaṁ, imassa kvattho’ti? Evaṁ katvā siyā no ettha kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶8] “Let us discuss this. I will do as you say.”
> Pali: “Anuññeyyaṁ khvāhaṁ bhoto udenassa anujānissāmi, paṭikkositabbañca paṭikkosissāmi; yassa ca panāhaṁ bhoto udenassa bhāsitassa atthaṁ na jānissāmi, bhavantaṁyeva tattha udenaṁ uttari paṭipucchissāmi: ‘idaṁ, bho udena, kathaṁ, imassa kvattho’ti? Evaṁ katvā hotu no ettha kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶9] “Brahmin, these four individuals are found in the world. What four?
> Pali: “Cattārome, brāhmaṇa, puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ. Katame cattāro?
[¶10] One individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves.
> Pali: Idha, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo attantapo hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶11] One individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo parantapo hoti paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶12] One individual mortifies themselves and others, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo attantapo ca hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶13] One individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others. They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo nevattantapo hoti nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. So anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati.
[¶14] Which one of these four individuals do you like the sound of?”
> Pali: Imesaṁ, brāhmaṇa, catunnaṁ puggalānaṁ katamo te puggalo cittaṁ ārādhetī”ti?
[¶15] “Worthy Udena, I don’t like the sound of the first three individuals. I only like the sound of the last individual, who doesn’t mortify either themselves or others.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho udena, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto ayaṁ me puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti; yopāyaṁ, bho udena, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto ayampi me puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti; yopāyaṁ, bho udena, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto ayampi me puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti; yo ca kho ayaṁ, bho udena, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati. Ayameva me puggalo cittaṁ ārādhetī”ti.
[¶16] “But why don’t you like the sound of those three individuals?”
> Pali: “Kasmā pana te, brāhmaṇa, ime tayo puggalā cittaṁ nārādhentī”ti?
[¶17] “Worthy Udena, the individual who mortifies themselves does so even though they want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I don’t like the sound of that individual. The individual who mortifies others does so even though others want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I don’t like the sound of that individual. The individual who mortifies themselves and others does so even though both themselves and others want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I don’t like the sound of that individual. The individual who doesn’t mortify either themselves or others—living without wishes, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine—does not torment themselves or others, both of whom want to be happy and recoil from pain. That’s why I like the sound of that individual.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho udena, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so attānaṁ sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ ātāpeti paritāpeti; iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yopāyaṁ, bho udena, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so paraṁ sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ ātāpeti paritāpeti; iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yopāyaṁ, bho udena, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so attānañca parañca sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ ātāpeti paritāpeti; iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ nārādheti. Yo ca kho ayaṁ, bho udena, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati, so attānañca parañca sukhakāmaṁ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṁ neva ātāpeti na paritāpeti; iminā me ayaṁ puggalo cittaṁ ārādhetī”ti.
[¶18] “There are, brahmin, these two groups of people. What two? There’s one group of people who, being obsessed with jeweled earrings, seeks partners and children, male and female bondservants, fields and lands, and gold and currency.
> Pali: “Dvemā, brāhmaṇa, parisā. Katamā dve? Idha, brāhmaṇa, ekaccā parisā sārattarattā maṇikuṇḍalesu puttabhariyaṁ pariyesati, dāsidāsaṁ pariyesati, khettavatthuṁ pariyesati, jātarūparajataṁ pariyesati.
[¶19] And there’s another group of people who, not being obsessed with jeweled earrings, has given up partner and children, male and female bondservants, fields and lands, and gold and currency, and goes forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekaccā parisā asārattarattā maṇikuṇḍalesu puttabhariyaṁ pahāya, dāsidāsaṁ pahāya, khettavatthuṁ pahāya, jātarūparajataṁ pahāya, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā.
[¶20] Now, brahmin, that individual who doesn’t mortify either themselves or others— in which of these two groups of people do you usually find such an individual?”
> Pali: Svāyaṁ, brāhmaṇa, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. So anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati. Idha katamaṁ tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, puggalaṁ katamāya parisāya bahulaṁ samanupassasi— yā cāyaṁ parisā sārattarattā maṇikuṇḍalesu puttabhariyaṁ pariyesati dāsidāsaṁ pariyesati khettavatthuṁ pariyesati jātarūparajataṁ pariyesati, yā cāyaṁ parisā asārattarattā maṇikuṇḍalesu puttabhariyaṁ pahāya dāsidāsaṁ pahāya khettavatthuṁ pahāya jātarūparajataṁ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā”ti?
[¶21] “I usually find such an individual in the group that has gone forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bho udena, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati; imāhaṁ puggalaṁ yāyaṁ parisā asārattarattā maṇikuṇḍalesu puttabhariyaṁ pahāya dāsidāsaṁ pahāya khettavatthuṁ pahāya jātarūparajataṁ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā imissaṁ parisāyaṁ bahulaṁ samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶22] “Just now I understood you to say: ‘My ascetic, there is no such thing as a principled renunciate life; that’s what I think. Yet I have not seen honorable ones such as yourself, or a relevant teaching.’”
> Pali: “Idāneva kho pana te, brāhmaṇa, bhāsitaṁ: ‘mayaṁ evaṁ ājānāma— ambho samaṇa, natthi dhammiko paribbajo, evaṁ me ettha hoti. Tañca kho bhavantarūpānaṁ vā adassanā, yo vā panettha dhammo’”ti.
[¶23] “Well, I obviously had my reasons for saying that, worthy Udena. But there is such a thing as a principled renunciate life. That’s what I think, and that’s how you should remember me. Now, these four individuals that you’ve spoken of in a brief summary: please explain them to me in detail, out of sympathy.”
> Pali: “Addhā mesā, bho udena, sānuggahā vācā bhāsitā. ‘Atthi dhammiko paribbajo’— evaṁ me ettha hoti. Evañca pana maṁ bhavaṁ udeno dhāretu. Ye ca me bhotā udenena cattāro puggalā saṅkhittena vuttā vitthārena avibhattā, sādhu me bhavaṁ, udeno ime cattāro puggale vitthārena vibhajatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.
[¶24] “Well then, brahmin, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶25] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Ghoṭamukha. Udena said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo āyasmato udenassa paccassosi. Āyasmā udeno etadavoca:
[¶26] “What individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves? It’s when an individual goes naked, ignoring conventions. They lick their hands, and don’t come or wait when called. They don’t consent to food brought to them, or food prepared on their behalf, or an invitation for a meal. They don’t receive anything from a pot or bowl; or from someone who keeps sheep, or who has a weapon or a shovel in their home; or where a couple is eating; or where there is a woman who is pregnant, breastfeeding, or who lives with a man; or where there’s a hound waiting or flies buzzing. They accept no fish or meat or beer or wine, and drink no fermented gruel. They go to just one house for alms, taking just one mouthful, or two houses and two mouthfuls, up to seven houses and seven mouthfuls. They feed on one saucer a day, two saucers a day, up to seven saucers a day. They eat once a day, once every second day, up to once a week, and so on, even up to once a fortnight. They live committed to the practice of eating food at set intervals. They eat herbs, millet, wild rice, poor rice, water lettuce, rice bran, scum from boiling rice, sesame flour, grass, or cow dung. They survive on forest roots and fruits, or eating fallen fruit. They wear robes of sunn hemp, mixed hemp, corpse-wrapping cloth, rags, lodh tree bark, antelope hide (whole or in strips), kusa grass, bark, wood-chips, human hair, horse-tail hair, or owls’ wings. They tear out their hair and beard, committed to this practice. They constantly stand, turning down seats. They squat, committed to the endeavor of squatting. They lie on a mat of thorns, making a mat of thorns their bed. They’re devoted to ritual bathing three times a day, including at dusk. And so they live committed to practicing these various ways of mortifying and tormenting the body. This is called an individual who mortifies themselves, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves.
> Pali: “Katamo ca, brāhmaṇa, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo acelako hoti muttācāro hatthāpalekhano naehibhaddantiko natiṭṭhabhaddantiko, nābhihaṭaṁ na uddissakataṁ na nimantanaṁ sādiyati. So na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na kaḷopimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na eḷakamantaraṁ, na daṇḍamantaraṁ, na musalamantaraṁ, na dvinnaṁ bhuñjamānānaṁ, na gabbhiniyā, na pāyamānāya, na purisantaragatāya, na saṅkittīsu, na yattha sā upaṭṭhito hoti, na yattha makkhikā saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī, na macchaṁ na maṁsaṁ, na suraṁ na merayaṁ na thusodakaṁ pivati. So ekāgāriko vā hoti ekālopiko, dvāgāriko vā hoti dvālopiko …pe… sattāgāriko vā hoti sattālopiko; ekissāpi dattiyā yāpeti, dvīhipi dattīhi yāpeti …pe… sattahipi dattīhi yāpeti; ekāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti, dvīhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti …pe… sattāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti—iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikaṁ pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. So sākabhakkho vā hoti, sāmākabhakkho vā hoti, nīvārabhakkho vā hoti, daddulabhakkho vā hoti, haṭabhakkho vā hoti, kaṇabhakkho vā hoti, ācāmabhakkho vā hoti, piññākabhakkho vā hoti, tiṇabhakkho vā hoti, gomayabhakkho vā hoti, vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī. So sāṇānipi dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti, chavadussānipi dhāreti, paṁsukūlānipi dhāreti, tirīṭānipi dhāreti, ajinampi dhāreti, ajinakkhipampi dhāreti, kusacīrampi dhāreti, vākacīrampi dhāreti, phalakacīrampi dhāreti, kesakambalampi dhāreti, vāḷakambalampi dhāreti, ulūkapakkhampi dhāreti; kesamassulocakopi hoti kesamassulocanānuyogamanuyutto, ubbhaṭṭhakopi hoti āsanapaṭikkhitto, ukkuṭikopi hoti ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyutto, kaṇṭakāpassayikopi hoti kaṇṭakāpassaye seyyaṁ kappeti; sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharati— iti evarūpaṁ anekavihitaṁ kāyassa ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, puggalo attantapo attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶27] And what individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others? It’s when an individual is a slaughterer of sheep, pigs, poultry, or deer, a hunter or fisher, a bandit, an executioner, a butcher of cattle, a jailer, or has some other cruel livelihood. This is called an individual who mortifies others, being committed to the practice of mortifying others.
> Pali: Katamo ca, brāhmaṇa, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo orabbhiko hoti sūkariko sākuṇiko māgaviko luddo macchaghātako coro coraghātako goghātako bandhanāgāriko—ye vā panaññepi keci kurūrakammantā. Ayaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, puggalo parantapo paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶28] And what individual mortifies themselves and others, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others? It’s when an individual is an anointed aristocratic king or a well-to-do brahmin. He has a new ceremonial hall built to the east of the citadel. He shaves off his hair and beard, dresses in a rough antelope hide, and smears his body with ghee and oil. Scratching his back with antlers, he enters the hall with his chief queen and the brahmin high priest. There he lies on the bare ground strewn with grass. The king feeds on the milk from one teat of a cow that has a calf of the same color. The chief queen feeds on the milk from the second teat. The brahmin high priest feeds on the milk from the third teat. The milk from the fourth teat is served to the sacred flame. The calf feeds on the leftovers. He says: ‘Slaughter this many bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats, rams, and horses for the sacrifice! Fell this many trees and reap this much grass for the sacrificial equipment!’ His bondservants, servants, and workers do their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. This is called an individual who mortifies themselves and others, being committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others.
> Pali: Katamo ca, brāhmaṇa, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto? Idha, brāhmaṇa, ekacco puggalo rājā vā hoti khattiyo muddhāvasitto, brāhmaṇo vā mahāsālo. So puratthimena nagarassa navaṁ santhāgāraṁ kārāpetvā kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kharājinaṁ nivāsetvā sappitelena kāyaṁ abbhañjitvā magavisāṇena piṭṭhiṁ kaṇḍuvamāno navaṁ santhāgāraṁ pavisati saddhiṁ mahesiyā brāhmaṇena ca purohitena. So tattha anantarahitāya bhūmiyā haritupalittāya seyyaṁ kappeti. Ekissāya gāviyā sarūpavacchāya yaṁ ekasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena rājā yāpeti, yaṁ dutiyasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena mahesī yāpeti, yaṁ tatiyasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena brāhmaṇo purohito yāpeti, yaṁ catutthasmiṁ thane khīraṁ hoti tena aggiṁ juhati, avasesena vacchako yāpeti. So evamāha: ‘ettakā usabhā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā vacchatarā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā vacchatariyo haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā ajā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā urabbhā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā assā haññantu yaññatthāya, ettakā rukkhā chijjantu yūpatthāya, ettakā dabbhā lūyantu barihisatthāyā’ti. Yepissa te honti ‘dāsā’ti vā ‘pessā’ti vā ‘kammakarā’ti vā tepi daṇḍatajjitā bhayatajjitā assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni karonti. Ayaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, puggalo attantapo ca attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.
[¶29] And what individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others, living without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine?
> Pali: Katamo ca, brāhmaṇa, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto; so anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati?
[¶30] It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure.
> Pali: Idha, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.
[¶31] A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One, and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Once they’ve gone forth, they take up the training and livelihood of the mendicants. They give up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings.
> Pali: Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
[¶32] They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving.
> Pali: Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati.
[¶33] They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex.
> Pali: Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā.
[¶34] They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words.
> Pali: Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa.
[¶35] They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony.
> Pali: Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā, samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶36] They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people.
> Pali: Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti. Yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti.
[¶37] They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial.
> Pali: Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ.
[¶38] They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music. They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. They refrain from high and luxurious beds. They refrain from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land. They refrain from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence.
> Pali: So bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti. Ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā. Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. Kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti. Tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti. Ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti. Chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
[¶39] They’re content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves.
> Pali: So santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. Seyyathāpi nāma pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶40] When they see a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶41] They act with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: So abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.
[¶42] When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble contentment, this noble sense restraint, and this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ.
[¶43] After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present. Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti; byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti; thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti; uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti; vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶44] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶45] As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected.
> Pali: Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶46] And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’
> Pali: Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶47] With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶48] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi, anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto; so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto; so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶49] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā …pe… ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā …pe… ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶50] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti; ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶51] Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶52] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶53] This is called an individual who neither mortifies themselves or others, being committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others. They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, puggalo nevattantapo nāttaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. So anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharatī”ti.
[¶54] When he had spoken, Ghoṭamukha said to him, “Excellent, worthy Udena! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the worthy Udena has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Udena, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Udena remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo āyasmantaṁ udenaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho udena, abhikkantaṁ, bho udena. Seyyathāpi, bho udena, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā udenena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ udenaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ udeno dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶55] “Brahmin, don’t go for refuge to me. You should go for refuge to that same Blessed One to whom I have gone for refuge.”
> Pali: “Mā kho maṁ tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, saraṇaṁ agamāsi. Tameva bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāhi yamahaṁ saraṇaṁ gato”ti.
[¶56] “But worthy Udena, where is the Blessed One at present, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: “Kahaṁ pana, bho udena, etarahi so bhavaṁ gotamo viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti?
[¶57] “Brahmin, the Buddha has already become fully quenched.”
> Pali: “Parinibbuto kho, brāhmaṇa, etarahi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti.
[¶58] “Worthy Udena, if I heard that the worthy Gotama was within ten leagues, or twenty, or even up to a hundred leagues away, I’d go a hundred leagues to see him.
> Pali: “Sacepi mayaṁ, bho udena, suṇeyyāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dasasu yojanesu, dasapi mayaṁ yojanāni gaccheyyāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ. Sacepi mayaṁ, bho udena, suṇeyyāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ vīsatiyā yojanesu … tiṁsāya yojanesu … cattārīsāya yojanesu … paññāsāya yojanesu, paññāsampi mayaṁ yojanāni gaccheyyāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ. Yojanasate cepi mayaṁ, bho udena, suṇeyyāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ, yojanasatampi mayaṁ gaccheyyāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ.
[¶59] But since the worthy Gotama has become fully quenched, I go for refuge to that worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Udena remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life. Worthy Udena, the king of Aṅga gives me a regular daily allowance. I will give you one portion of that.”
> Pali: Yato ca kho, bho udena, parinibbuto so bhavaṁ gotamo, parinibbutampi mayaṁ taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ udeno dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ. Atthi ca me, bho udena, aṅgarājā devasikaṁ niccabhikkhaṁ dadāti, tato ahaṁ bhoto udenassa ekaṁ niccabhikkhaṁ dadāmī”ti.
[¶60] “But brahmin, what does the king of Aṅga give you as a regular daily allowance?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana te, brāhmaṇa, aṅgarājā devasikaṁ niccabhikkhaṁ dadātī”ti?
[¶61] “Five hundred dollars.”
> Pali: “Pañca, bho udena, kahāpaṇasatānī”ti.
[¶62] “It’s not proper for us to receive gold and currency.”
> Pali: “Na kho no, brāhmaṇa, kappati jātarūparajataṁ paṭiggahetun”ti.
[¶63] “If that’s not proper, I will have a dwelling built for the worthy Udena.”
> Pali: “Sace taṁ bhoto udenassa na kappati vihāraṁ bhoto udenassa kārāpessāmī”ti.
[¶64] “If you want to build me a dwelling, then build an assembly hall for the Saṅgha at Pāṭaliputta.”
> Pali: “Sace kho me tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, vihāraṁ, kārāpetukāmo, pāṭaliputte saṅghassa upaṭṭhānasālaṁ kārāpehī”ti.
[¶65] “Now I’m even more delighted and satisfied with the worthy Udena, since he encourages me to give to the Saṅgha. So with this allowance and another one I will have an assembly hall built for the Saṅgha at Pāṭaliputta.”
> Pali: “Imināpāhaṁ bhoto udenassa bhiyyoso mattāya attamano abhiraddho yaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ udeno saṅghe dāne samādapeti. Esāhaṁ, bho udena, etissā ca niccabhikkhāya aparāya ca niccabhikkhāya pāṭaliputte saṅghassa upaṭṭhānasālaṁ kārāpessāmī”ti.
[¶66] And so he had that hall built. And these days it’s called the “Ghoṭamukhī”.
> Pali: Atha kho ghoṭamukho brāhmaṇo etissā ca niccabhikkhāya aparāya ca niccabhikkhāya pāṭaliputte saṅghassa upaṭṭhānasālaṁ kārāpesi. Sā etarahi “ghoṭamukhī”ti vuccatīti.
[¶67] > Pali: Ghoṭamukhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 104. MN 95 · With Caṅkī
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/104/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/104/#p-N
[¶0] MN 95 · With Caṅkī
> Pali: MN 95 · Caṅkīsutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Kosalan brahmins named Opāsāda. He stayed in the Godswood of sal trees to the north of Opāsāda.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena opāsādaṁ nāma kosalānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā opāsāde viharati uttarena opāsādaṁ devavane sālavane.
[¶2] Now at that time the brahmin Caṅkī was living in Opāsāda. It was a crown property given by King Pasenadi of Kosala, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena caṅkī brāhmaṇo opāsādaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ.
[¶3] The brahmins and householders of Opāsāda heard: “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Opāsāda together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. He is staying in the Godswood to the north. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho opāsādakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ opāsādaṁ anuppatto, opāsāde viharati uttarena opāsādaṁ devavane sālavane. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶4] Then, exiting Opāsāda, they formed into companies and headed north to the Godswood.
> Pali: Atha kho opāsādakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā opāsādā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā uttarenamukhā gacchanti yena devavanaṁ sālavanaṁ.
[¶5] Now at that time the brahmin Caṅkī had retired to the upper floor of his stilt longhouse for his midday nap. He saw the brahmins and householders heading for the Godswood, and addressed his butler, “My butler, why are the brahmins and householders heading north for the Godswood?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena caṅkī brāhmaṇo uparipāsāde divāseyyaṁ upagato. Addasā kho caṅkī brāhmaṇo opāsādake brāhmaṇagahapatike opāsādā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūte uttarenamukhaṁ yena devavanaṁ sālavanaṁ tenupasaṅkamante. Disvā khattaṁ āmantesi: “kiṁ nu kho, bho khatte, opāsādakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā opāsādā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā uttarenamukhā gacchanti yena devavanaṁ sālavanan”ti?
[¶6] “The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Opāsāda together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. He is staying in the Godswood to the north. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They’re going to see that worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Atthi, bho caṅkī, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ opāsādaṁ anuppatto, opāsāde viharati uttarena opāsādaṁ devavane sālavane. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Tamete bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya gacchantī”ti.
[¶7] “Well then, go to the brahmins and householders and say to them: ‘Sirs, the brahmin Caṅkī asks you to wait, as he will also go to see the ascetic Gotama.’”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho khatte, yena opāsādakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā opāsādake brāhmaṇagahapatike evaṁ vadehi: ‘caṅkī, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha— āgamentu kira bhonto, caṅkīpi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the butler, and did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so khatto caṅkissa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena opāsādakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā opāsādake brāhmaṇagahapatike etadavoca: “caṅkī, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘āgamentu kira bhonto, caṅkīpi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶9] Now at that time around five hundred brahmins from abroad were residing in Opāsāda on some business. They heard that the brahmin Caṅkī was going to see the ascetic Gotama. They approached Caṅkī and said to him, “Is it really true that you are going to see the ascetic Gotama?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nānāverajjakānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pañcamattāni brāhmaṇasatāni opāsāde paṭivasanti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Assosuṁ kho te brāhmaṇā: “caṅkī kira brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti. Atha kho te brāhmaṇā yena caṅkī brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā caṅkiṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: “saccaṁ kira bhavaṁ caṅkī samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti?
[¶10] “Yes, gentlemen, it is true.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho me, bho, hoti: ‘ahaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmī’”ti.
[¶11] “Please don’t! It’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.
> Pali: “Mā bhavaṁ caṅkī samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkami. Na arahati bhavaṁ caṅkī samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; samaṇotveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ caṅkiṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶12] You are well born on both your mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.
> Pali: Bhavañhi caṅkī ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Yampi bhavaṁ caṅkī ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ caṅkī samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; samaṇotveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ caṅkiṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶13] You’re rich, affluent, and wealthy. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi caṅkī aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo …pe…
[¶14] You recite and remember the hymns, and have mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. You know them word-by-word, and their grammar. You are well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. …
> Pali: bhavañhi caṅkī tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe…
[¶15] You are attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. You have divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …
> Pali: bhavañhi caṅkī abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…
[¶16] You are ethical, mature in ethical conduct. …
> Pali: bhavañhi caṅkī sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe…
[¶17] You’re a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …
> Pali: bhavañhi caṅkī kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…
[¶18] You’re the tutor of tutors for many, and teach three hundred young students to recite the hymns. …
> Pali: bhavañhi caṅkī bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo, tīṇi māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti …pe…
[¶19] You’re honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Pasenadi of Kosala and the brahmin Pokkharasāti. …
> Pali: bhavañhi caṅkī rañño pasenadissa kosalassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe… bhavañhi caṅkī brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶20] You live in Opāsāda, a crown property given by King Pasenadi of Kosala, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin.
> Pali: bhavañhi caṅkī opāsādaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ.
[¶21] For all these reasons it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.”
> Pali: Yampi bhavaṁ caṅkī opāsādaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ caṅkī samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; samaṇotveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ caṅkiṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitun”ti.
[¶22] When they had spoken, Caṅkī said to those brahmins:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, caṅkī brāhmaṇo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca:
[¶23] “Well then, gentlemen, listen to why it’s appropriate for me to go to see the ascetic Gotama, and it’s not appropriate for him to come to see me.
> Pali: “tena hi, bho, mamapi suṇātha, yathā mayameva arahāma taṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; na tveva arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶24] He is well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. For this reason it’s not appropriate for the ascetic Gotama to come to see me; rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him.
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶25] When he went forth he abandoned abundant gold, both coined and uncoined, stored above and below ground. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo pahūtaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ ohāya pabbajito bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhañca …pe…
[¶26] He went forth from the lay life to homelessness while still a youth, young, with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo daharova samāno yuvā susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…
[¶27] Though his mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces, he shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…
[¶28] He is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He has divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…
[¶29] He is ethical, possessing ethical conduct that is noble and skillful. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sīlavā ariyasīlī kusalasīlī kusalena sīlena samannāgato …pe…
[¶30] He’s a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…
[¶31] He’s a tutor of tutors. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo …pe…
[¶32] He has ended sensual desire, and is rid of caprice. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khīṇakāmarāgo vigatacāpallo …pe…
[¶33] He teaches the efficacy of deeds and action. He doesn’t wish any harm upon the community of brahmins. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kammavādī kiriyavādī apāpapurekkhāro brahmaññāya pajāya …pe…
[¶34] He went forth from an eminent family of unbroken aristocratic lineage. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo uccā kulā pabbajito asambhinnā khattiyakulā …pe…
[¶35] He went forth from a rich, affluent, and wealthy family. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo aḍḍhā kulā pabbajito mahaddhanā mahābhogā …pe…
[¶36] People come from distant lands and distant countries to question him. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā saṁpucchituṁ āgacchanti …pe…
[¶37] Many thousands of deities have gone for refuge for life to him. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ anekāni devatāsahassāni pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gatāni …pe…
[¶38] He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti …pe…
[¶39] He has the thirty-two marks of a great man. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato …pe…
[¶40] King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro saputtadāro pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶41] King Pasenadi of Kosala and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo saputtadāro pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶42] The brahmin Pokkharasāti and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti saputtadāro pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶43] The ascetic Gotama has arrived to stay in the Godswood to the north of Opāsāda. Any ascetic or brahmin who comes to stay in our village district is our guest, and should be honored and respected as such. For this reason, too, it’s not appropriate for the worthy Gotama to come to see me; rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him.
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo opāsādaṁ anuppatto opāsāde viharati uttarena opāsādaṁ devavane sālavane. Ye kho te samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā amhākaṁ gāmakkhettaṁ āgacchanti, atithī no te honti. Atithī kho panamhehi sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā. Yampi samaṇo gotamo opāsādaṁ anuppatto opāsāde viharati uttarena opāsādaṁ devavane sālavane, atithimhākaṁ samaṇo gotamo. Atithi kho panamhehi sakkātabbo garukātabbo mānetabbo pūjetabbo. Imināpaṅgena na arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶44] This is the extent of the worthy Gotama’s praise that I have memorized. But his praises are not confined to this, for the praise of the worthy Gotama is limitless. The possession of even a single one of these factors makes it inappropriate for Worthy Gotama to come to see me; rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him. Well then, gentlemen, let’s all go to see the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: Ettake kho ahaṁ, bho, tassa bhoto gotamassa vaṇṇe pariyāpuṇāmi, no ca kho so bhavaṁ gotamo ettakavaṇṇo; aparimāṇavaṇṇo hi so bhavaṁ gotamo. Ekamekenapi tena aṅgena samannāgato na arahati, so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitunti. Tena hi, bho, sabbeva mayaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶45] Then Caṅkī together with a large group of brahmins went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho caṅkī brāhmaṇo mahatā brāhmaṇagaṇena saddhiṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶46] Now at that time the Buddha was sitting engaged in some polite conversation together with some very senior brahmins. And the student Kāpaṭika was sitting in that assembly. He was young, tonsured, and sixteen years old. He had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. While the senior brahmins were conversing together with the Buddha, he interrupted.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā vuddhehi vuddhehi brāhmaṇehi saddhiṁ kiñci kiñci kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā nisinno hoti. Tena kho pana samayena kāpaṭiko nāma māṇavo daharo vuttasiro soḷasavassuddesiko jātiyā, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo tassaṁ parisāyaṁ nisinno hoti. So vuddhānaṁ vuddhānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ bhagavatā saddhiṁ mantayamānānaṁ antarantarā kathaṁ opāteti.
[¶47] Then the Buddha rebuked Kāpaṭika, “Venerable Bhāradvāja, don’t interrupt the senior brahmins. Wait until they’ve finished speaking.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā kāpaṭikaṁ māṇavaṁ apasādeti: “māyasmā bhāradvājo vuddhānaṁ vuddhānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ mantayamānānaṁ antarantarā kathaṁ opātetu. Kathāpariyosānaṁ āyasmā bhāradvājo āgametū”ti.
[¶48] When he had spoken, Caṅkī said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, don’t rebuke the student Kāpaṭika. He’s a gentleman, learned and astute, who enunciates well. He is capable of debating with the worthy Gotama about this.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, caṅkī brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mā bhavaṁ gotamo kāpaṭikaṁ māṇavaṁ apasādesi. kulaputto ca kāpaṭiko māṇavo, bahussuto ca kāpaṭiko māṇavo, paṇḍito ca kāpaṭiko māṇavo, kalyāṇavākkaraṇo ca kāpaṭiko māṇavo, pahoti ca kāpaṭiko māṇavo bhotā gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun”ti.
[¶49] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “Clearly the student Kāpaṭika will talk about the scriptural heritage of the three Vedas. That’s why the brahmins put him at the front.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “addhā kho kāpaṭikassa māṇavassa tevijjake pāvacane kathā bhavissati. Tathā hi naṁ brāhmaṇā sampurekkharontī”ti.
[¶50] Then Kāpaṭika thought, “When the ascetic Gotama looks at me, I’ll ask him a question.” Then the Buddha, knowing Kāpaṭika’s train of thought, looked at him.
> Pali: Atha kho kāpaṭikassa māṇavassa etadahosi: “yadā me samaṇo gotamo cakkhuṁ upasaṁharissati, athāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pañhaṁ pucchissāmī”ti. Atha kho bhagavā kāpaṭikassa māṇavassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya yena kāpaṭiko māṇavo tena cakkhūni upasaṁhāsi.
[¶51] Then Kāpaṭika thought, “The ascetic Gotama is engaging with me. Why don’t I ask him a question?” Then he said, “Worthy Gotama, regarding that which by the lineage of testament and by canonical authority is the ancient hymnal of the brahmins, the brahmins come to the categorical conclusion: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ What do you say about this?”
> Pali: Atha kho kāpaṭikassa māṇavassa etadahosi: “samannāharati kho maṁ samaṇo gotamo. Yannūnāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pañhaṁ puccheyyan”ti. Atha kho kāpaṭiko māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yadidaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇānaṁ porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ itihitihaparamparāya piṭakasampadāya, tattha ca brāhmaṇā ekaṁsena niṭṭhaṁ gacchanti: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti. Idha bhavaṁ gotamo kimāhā”ti?
[¶52] “Well, Bhāradvāja, is there even a single one of the brahmins who says this: ‘I know this, I see this: this is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhāradvāja, atthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekabrāhmaṇopi yo evamāha: ‘ahametaṁ jānāmi, ahametaṁ passāmi. Idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’”ti?
[¶53] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶54] “Well, is there even a single tutor of the brahmins, or a tutors’ tutor, or anyone back to the seventh generation of tutors, who says this: ‘I know this, I see this: this is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhāradvāja, atthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyopi, ekācariyapācariyopi, yāva sattamā ācariyamahayugāpi, yo evamāha: ‘ahametaṁ jānāmi, ahametaṁ passāmi. Idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’”ti?
[¶55] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶56] “Well, what of the ancient seers of the brahmins, namely Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamadaggi, Aṅgīrasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, and Bhagu? They were the authors and propagators of the hymns. Their hymnal was sung and propagated and compiled in ancient times; and these days, brahmins continue to sing and chant it, chanting what was chanted and teaching what was taught. Did even they say: ‘We know this, we see this: this is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhāradvāja, yepi te brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti bhāsitamanubhāsanti vācitamanuvācenti seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, tepi evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayametaṁ jānāma, mayametaṁ passāma. Idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’”ti?
[¶57] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶58] “So, Bhāradvāja, it seems that there is not a single one of the brahmins, not even anyone back to the seventh generation of tutors, nor even the ancient seers of the brahmins who say: ‘We know this, we see this: this is the only truth, anything else is futile.’
> Pali: “Iti kira, bhāradvāja, natthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekabrāhmaṇopi yo evamāha: ‘ahametaṁ jānāmi, ahametaṁ passāmi. Idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti; natthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyopi ekācariyapācariyopi, yāva sattamā ācariyamahayugāpi, yo evamāha: ‘ahametaṁ jānāmi, ahametaṁ passāmi. Idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti; yepi te brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti bhāsitamanubhāsanti vācitamanuvācenti seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, tepi na evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayametaṁ jānāma, mayametaṁ passāma. Idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti.
[¶59] Suppose there was a queue of blind men, each holding the one in front: the first one does not see, the middle one does not see, and the last one does not see. In the same way, it seems to me that the brahmins’ statement turns out to be like a queue of blind men: the first one does not see, the middle one does not see, and the last one does not see. What do you think, Bhāradvāja? This being so, doesn’t the brahmins’ faith turn out to be baseless?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, andhaveṇi paramparāsaṁsattā purimopi na passati majjhimopi na passati pacchimopi na passati; evameva kho, bhāradvāja, andhaveṇūpamaṁ maññe brāhmaṇānaṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjati—purimopi na passati majjhimopi na passati pacchimopi na passati. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhāradvāja, nanu evaṁ sante brāhmaṇānaṁ amūlikā saddhā sampajjatī”ti?
[¶60] “The brahmins don’t just honor this because of faith, but also because of oral transmission.”
> Pali: “Na khvettha, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā saddhāyeva payirupāsanti, anussavāpettha brāhmaṇā payirupāsantī”ti.
[¶61] “First you relied on faith, now you speak of oral transmission. These five things can be seen to turn out in two different ways in this very life. What five? Faith, endorsement, oral transmission, reasoned train of thought, and acceptance of a view after deliberation. Even though you have full faith in something, it may be vacuous, hollow, and false. And even if you don’t have full faith in something, it may be true and real, not otherwise. Even though you fully endorse something … something may be well transmitted … something may be well thought out … something may be well deliberated, it may be vacuous, hollow, and false. And even if something is not well deliberated, it may be true and real, not otherwise. For a sensible person who is preserving truth this is not sufficient to come to the categorical conclusion: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’”
> Pali: “Pubbeva kho tvaṁ, bhāradvāja, saddhaṁ agamāsi, anussavaṁ idāni vadesi. Pañca kho ime, bhāradvāja, dhammā diṭṭheva dhamme dvedhā vipākā. Katame pañca? Saddhā, ruci, anussavo, ākāraparivitakko, diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti— ime kho, bhāradvāja, pañca dhammā diṭṭheva dhamme dvedhā vipākā. Api ca, bhāradvāja, susaddahitaṁyeva hoti, tañca hoti rittaṁ tucchaṁ musā; no cepi susaddahitaṁ hoti, tañca hoti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anaññathā. Api ca, bhāradvāja, surucitaṁyeva hoti …pe… svānussutaṁyeva hoti …pe… suparivitakkitaṁyeva hoti …pe… sunijjhāyitaṁyeva hoti, tañca hoti rittaṁ tucchaṁ musā; no cepi sunijjhāyitaṁ hoti, tañca hoti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anaññathā. Saccamanurakkhatā, bhāradvāja, viññunā purisena nālamettha ekaṁsena niṭṭhaṁ gantuṁ: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶62] “But worthy Gotama, how do you define the preservation of truth?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bho gotama, saccānurakkhaṇā hoti, kittāvatā saccamanurakkhati? Saccānurakkhaṇaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti.
[¶63] “If a person has faith, they preserve truth by saying, ‘Such is my faith.’ But they don’t yet come to the categorical conclusion: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ If a person endorses something … or has received an oral transmission … or has a reasoned train of thought about something … or has accepted a view after deliberation, they preserve truth by saying, ‘Such is the view I have accepted after deliberation.’ But they don’t yet come to the categorical conclusion: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ That’s how the preservation of truth is defined, Bhāradvāja. I describe the preservation of truth as defined in this way. But this is not yet the awakening to the truth.”
> Pali: “Saddhā cepi, bhāradvāja, purisassa hoti; ‘evaṁ me saddhā’ti— iti vadaṁ saccamanurakkhati, na tveva tāva ekaṁsena niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti (…). Ruci cepi, bhāradvāja, purisassa hoti …pe… anussavo cepi, bhāradvāja, purisassa hoti …pe… ākāraparivitakko cepi, bhāradvāja, purisassa hoti …pe… diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti cepi, bhāradvāja, purisassa hoti; ‘evaṁ me diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantī’ti— iti vadaṁ saccamanurakkhati, na tveva tāva ekaṁsena niṭṭhaṁ gacchati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti. Ettāvatā kho, bhāradvāja, saccānurakkhaṇā hoti, ettāvatā saccamanurakkhati, ettāvatā ca mayaṁ saccānurakkhaṇaṁ paññapema; na tveva tāva saccānubodho hotī”ti.
[¶64] “That’s how the preservation of truth is defined, worthy Gotama. We regard the preservation of truth as defined in this way. But worthy Gotama, how do you define awakening to the truth?”
> Pali: “Ettāvatā, bho gotama, saccānurakkhaṇā hoti, ettāvatā saccamanurakkhati, ettāvatā ca mayaṁ saccānurakkhaṇaṁ pekkhāma. Kittāvatā pana, bho gotama, saccānubodho hoti, kittāvatā saccamanubujjhati? Saccānubodhaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti.
[¶65] “Bhāradvāja, take the case of a mendicant living supported by a town or village. A householder or their child approaches and scrutinizes them for three qualities: qualities that arouse greed, things that provoke hate, and things that promote delusion. ‘Does this venerable have any qualities that arouse greed? Such qualities that, were their mind to be overwhelmed by them, they might say that they know, even though they don’t know, or that they see, even though they don’t see; or that they might encourage others to do what is for their lasting harm and suffering?’ Scrutinizing them they find: ‘This venerable has no such qualities that arouse greed. Rather, that venerable has bodily and verbal behavior like that of someone without greed. And the principle that they teach is deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute. It’s not easy for someone with greed to teach this.’
> Pali: “Idha, bhāradvāja, bhikkhu aññataraṁ gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā upanissāya viharati. Tamenaṁ gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā upasaṅkamitvā tīsu dhammesu samannesati— lobhanīyesu dhammesu, dosanīyesu dhammesu, mohanīyesu dhammesu. Atthi nu kho imassāyasmato tathārūpā lobhanīyā dhammā yathārūpehi lobhanīyehi dhammehi pariyādinnacitto ajānaṁ vā vadeyya— jānāmīti, apassaṁ vā vadeyya— passāmīti, paraṁ vā tadatthāya samādapeyya yaṁ paresaṁ assa dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyāti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘natthi kho imassāyasmato tathārūpā lobhanīyā dhammā yathārūpehi lobhanīyehi dhammehi pariyādinnacitto ajānaṁ vā vadeyya— jānāmīti, apassaṁ vā vadeyya— passāmīti, paraṁ vā tadatthāya samādapeyya yaṁ paresaṁ assa dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya. Tathārūpo kho panimassāyasmato kāyasamācāro tathārūpo vacīsamācāro yathā taṁ aluddhassa. Yaṁ kho pana ayamāyasmā dhammaṁ deseti, gambhīro so dhammo duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo; na so dhammo sudesiyo luddhenā’ti.
[¶66] Scrutinizing them in this way they see that they are purified of qualities that arouse greed. Next, they scrutinize them for qualities that provoke hate. ‘Does this venerable have any qualities that provoke hate? Such qualities that, were their mind to be overwhelmed by them, they might say that they know, even though they don’t know, or that they see, even though they don’t see; or that they might encourage others to do what is for their lasting harm and suffering?’ Scrutinizing them they find: ‘This venerable has no such qualities that provoke hate. Rather, that venerable has bodily and verbal behavior like that of someone without hate. And the principle that they teach is deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute. It’s not easy for someone with hate to teach this.’
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno visuddhaṁ lobhanīyehi dhammehi samanupassati tato naṁ uttari samannesati dosanīyesu dhammesu. Atthi nu kho imassāyasmato tathārūpā dosanīyā dhammā yathārūpehi dosanīyehi dhammehi pariyādinnacitto ajānaṁ vā vadeyya— jānāmīti, apassaṁ vā vadeyya— passāmīti, paraṁ vā tadatthāya samādapeyya yaṁ paresaṁ assa dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyāti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘natthi kho imassāyasmato tathārūpā dosanīyā dhammā yathārūpehi dosanīyehi dhammehi pariyādinnacitto ajānaṁ vā vadeyya— jānāmīti, apassaṁ vā vadeyya— passāmīti, paraṁ vā tadatthāya samādapeyya yaṁ paresaṁ assa dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya. Tathārūpo kho panimassāyasmato kāyasamācāro tathārūpo vacīsamācāro yathā taṁ aduṭṭhassa. Yaṁ kho pana ayamāyasmā dhammaṁ deseti, gambhīro so dhammo duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo; na so dhammo sudesiyo duṭṭhenā’ti.
[¶67] Scrutinizing them in this way they see that they are purified of qualities that provoke hate. Next, they scrutinize them for qualities that promote delusion. ‘Does this venerable have any qualities that promote delusion? Such qualities that, were their mind to be overwhelmed by them, they might say that they know, even though they don’t know, or that they see, even though they don’t see; or that they might encourage others to do what is for their lasting harm and suffering?’ Scrutinizing them they find: ‘This venerable has no such qualities that promote delusion. Rather, that venerable has bodily and verbal behavior like that of someone without delusion. And the principle that they teach is deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute. It’s not easy for someone with delusion to teach this.’
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno visuddhaṁ dosanīyehi dhammehi samanupassati, tato naṁ uttari samannesati mohanīyesu dhammesu. Atthi nu kho imassāyasmato tathārūpā mohanīyā dhammā yathārūpehi mohanīyehi dhammehi pariyādinnacitto ajānaṁ vā vadeyya— jānāmīti, apassaṁ vā vadeyya— passāmīti, paraṁ vā tadatthāya samādapeyya yaṁ paresaṁ assa dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyāti? Tamenaṁ samannesamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘natthi kho imassāyasmato tathārūpā mohanīyā dhammā yathārūpehi mohanīyehi dhammehi pariyādinnacitto ajānaṁ vā vadeyya— jānāmīti, apassaṁ vā vadeyya— passāmīti, paraṁ vā tadatthāya samādapeyya yaṁ paresaṁ assa dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya. Tathārūpo kho panimassāyasmato kāyasamācāro tathārūpo vacīsamācāro yathā taṁ amūḷhassa. Yaṁ kho pana ayamāyasmā dhammaṁ deseti, gambhīro so dhammo duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo; na so dhammo sudesiyo mūḷhenā’ti.
[¶68] Scrutinizing them in this way they see that they are purified of qualities that promote delusion. Next, they place faith in them. When faith has arisen they approach the teacher. They pay homage, actively listen, hear the teachings, remember the teachings, examine their meaning, and accept them after deliberation. Then enthusiasm springs up; they make an attempt, weigh up, and strive. Striving, they directly realize the ultimate truth, and see it with penetrating wisdom. That’s how the awakening to truth is defined, Bhāradvāja. I describe the awakening to truth as defined in this way. But this is not yet the attainment of truth.”
> Pali: Yato naṁ samannesamāno visuddhaṁ mohanīyehi dhammehi samanupassati; atha tamhi saddhaṁ niveseti, saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsati, payirupāsanto sotaṁ odahati, ohitasoto dhammaṁ suṇāti, sutvā dhammaṁ dhāreti, dhatānaṁ dhammānaṁ atthaṁ upaparikkhati, atthaṁ upaparikkhato dhammā nijjhānaṁ khamanti, dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā sati chando jāyati, chandajāto ussahati, ussahitvā tuleti, tulayitvā padahati, pahitatto samāno kāyena ceva paramasaccaṁ sacchikaroti paññāya ca naṁ ativijjha passati. Ettāvatā kho, bhāradvāja, saccānubodho hoti, ettāvatā saccamanubujjhati, ettāvatā ca mayaṁ saccānubodhaṁ paññapema; na tveva tāva saccānuppatti hotī”ti.
[¶69] “That’s how the awakening to truth is defined, worthy Gotama. I regard the awakening to truth as defined in this way. But worthy Gotama, how do you define the attainment of truth?”
> Pali: “Ettāvatā, bho gotama, saccānubodho hoti, ettāvatā saccamanubujjhati, ettāvatā ca mayaṁ saccānubodhaṁ pekkhāma. Kittāvatā pana, bho gotama, saccānuppatti hoti, kittāvatā saccamanupāpuṇāti? Saccānuppattiṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti.
[¶70] “By the cultivation, development, and making much of these very same things there is the attainment of truth. That’s how the attainment of truth is defined, Bhāradvāja. I describe the attainment of truth as defined in this way.”
> Pali: “Tesaṁyeva, bhāradvāja, dhammānaṁ āsevanā bhāvanā bahulīkammaṁ saccānuppatti hoti. Ettāvatā kho, bhāradvāja, saccānuppatti hoti, ettāvatā saccamanupāpuṇāti, ettāvatā ca mayaṁ saccānuppattiṁ paññapemā”ti.
[¶71] “That’s how the attainment of truth is defined, worthy Gotama. I regard the attainment of truth as defined in this way. But what quality is helpful for arriving at the truth?”
> Pali: “Ettāvatā, bho gotama, saccānuppatti hoti, ettāvatā saccamanupāpuṇāti, ettāvatā ca mayaṁ saccānuppattiṁ pekkhāma. Saccānuppattiyā pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Saccānuppattiyā bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti.
[¶72] “Striving is helpful for arriving at the truth. If you don’t strive, you won’t arrive at the truth. You arrive at the truth because you strive. That’s why striving is helpful for arriving at the truth.”
> Pali: “Saccānuppattiyā kho, bhāradvāja, padhānaṁ bahukāraṁ. No cetaṁ padaheyya, nayidaṁ saccamanupāpuṇeyya. Yasmā ca kho padahati tasmā saccamanupāpuṇāti. Tasmā saccānuppattiyā padhānaṁ bahukāran”ti.
[¶73] “But what quality is helpful for striving?”
> Pali: “Padhānassa pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Padhānassa bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti.
[¶74] “Weighing up the teachings is helpful for striving …
> Pali: “Padhānassa kho, bhāradvāja, tulanā bahukārā. No cetaṁ tuleyya, nayidaṁ padaheyya. Yasmā ca kho tuleti tasmā padahati. Tasmā padhānassa tulanā bahukārā”ti.
[¶75] Making an attempt is helpful for weighing up the teachings …
> Pali: “Tulanāya pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Tulanāya bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Tulanāya kho, bhāradvāja, ussāho bahukāro. No cetaṁ ussaheyya, nayidaṁ tuleyya. Yasmā ca kho ussahati tasmā tuleti. Tasmā tulanāya ussāho bahukāro”ti.
[¶76] Enthusiasm is helpful for making an attempt …
> Pali: “Ussāhassa pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Ussāhassa bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Ussāhassa kho, bhāradvāja, chando bahukāro. No cetaṁ chando jāyetha, nayidaṁ ussaheyya. Yasmā ca kho chando jāyati tasmā ussahati. Tasmā ussāhassa chando bahukāro”ti.
[¶77] Acceptance of the teachings after deliberation is helpful for enthusiasm …
> Pali: “Chandassa pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Chandassa bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Chandassa kho, bhāradvāja, dhammanijjhānakkhanti bahukārā. No cete dhammā nijjhānaṁ khameyyuṁ, nayidaṁ chando jāyetha. Yasmā ca kho dhammā nijjhānaṁ khamanti tasmā chando jāyati. Tasmā chandassa dhammanijjhānakkhanti bahukārā”ti.
[¶78] Examining the meaning of the teachings is helpful for accepting them after deliberation …
> Pali: “Dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā kho, bhāradvāja, atthūpaparikkhā bahukārā. No cetaṁ atthaṁ upaparikkheyya, nayidaṁ dhammā nijjhānaṁ khameyyuṁ. Yasmā ca kho atthaṁ upaparikkhati tasmā dhammā nijjhānaṁ khamanti. Tasmā dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā atthūpaparikkhā bahukārā”ti.
[¶79] Remembering the teachings is helpful for examining their meaning …
> Pali: “Atthūpaparikkhāya pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Atthūpaparikkhāya bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Atthūpaparikkhāya kho, bhāradvāja, dhammadhāraṇā bahukārā. No cetaṁ dhammaṁ dhāreyya, nayidaṁ atthaṁ upaparikkheyya. Yasmā ca kho dhammaṁ dhāreti tasmā atthaṁ upaparikkhati. Tasmā atthūpaparikkhāya dhammadhāraṇā bahukārā”ti.
[¶80] Hearing the teachings is helpful for remembering the teachings …
> Pali: “Dhammadhāraṇāya pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Dhammadhāraṇāya bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Dhammadhāraṇāya kho, bhāradvāja, dhammassavanaṁ bahukāraṁ. No cetaṁ dhammaṁ suṇeyya, nayidaṁ dhammaṁ dhāreyya. Yasmā ca kho dhammaṁ suṇāti tasmā dhammaṁ dhāreti. Tasmā dhammadhāraṇāya dhammassavanaṁ bahukāran”ti.
[¶81] Active listening is helpful for hearing the teachings …
> Pali: “Dhammassavanassa pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Dhammassavanassa bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Dhammassavanassa kho, bhāradvāja, sotāvadhānaṁ bahukāraṁ. No cetaṁ sotaṁ odaheyya, nayidaṁ dhammaṁ suṇeyya. Yasmā ca kho sotaṁ odahati tasmā dhammaṁ suṇāti. Tasmā dhammassavanassa sotāvadhānaṁ bahukāran”ti.
[¶82] Paying homage is helpful for active listening …
> Pali: “Sotāvadhānassa pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Sotāvadhānassa bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Sotāvadhānassa kho, bhāradvāja, payirupāsanā bahukārā. No cetaṁ payirupāseyya, nayidaṁ sotaṁ odaheyya. Yasmā ca kho payirupāsati tasmā sotaṁ odahati. Tasmā sotāvadhānassa payirupāsanā bahukārā”ti.
[¶83] Approaching is helpful for paying homage …
> Pali: “Payirupāsanāya pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Payirupāsanāya bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Payirupāsanāya kho, bhāradvāja, upasaṅkamanaṁ bahukāraṁ. No cetaṁ upasaṅkameyya, nayidaṁ payirupāseyya. Yasmā ca kho upasaṅkamati tasmā payirupāsati. Tasmā payirupāsanāya upasaṅkamanaṁ bahukāran”ti.
[¶84] Faith is helpful for approaching a teacher. If you don’t give rise to faith, you won’t approach a teacher. You approach a teacher because you have faith. That’s why faith is helpful for approaching a teacher.”
> Pali: “Upasaṅkamanassa pana, bho gotama, katamo dhammo bahukāro? Upasaṅkamanassa bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ pucchāmā”ti. “Upasaṅkamanassa kho, bhāradvāja, saddhā bahukārā. No cetaṁ saddhā jāyetha, nayidaṁ upasaṅkameyya. Yasmā ca kho saddhā jāyati tasmā upasaṅkamati. Tasmā upasaṅkamanassa saddhā bahukārā”ti.
[¶85] “I’ve asked the worthy Gotama about the preservation of truth, and he has answered me. I endorse and accept this, and am satisfied with it. I’ve asked the worthy Gotama about awakening to the truth, and he has answered me. I endorse and accept this, and am satisfied with it. I’ve asked the worthy Gotama about the attainment of truth, and he has answered me. I endorse and accept this, and am satisfied with it. I’ve asked the worthy Gotama about the things that are helpful for the attainment of truth, and he has answered me. I endorse and accept this, and am satisfied with it. Whatever point I have asked the worthy Gotama about he has answered me. I endorse and accept this, and am satisfied with it.
> Pali: “Saccānurakkhaṇaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ apucchimha, saccānurakkhaṇaṁ bhavaṁ gotamo byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca tena camha attamanā. Saccānubodhaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ apucchimha, saccānubodhaṁ bhavaṁ gotamo byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca tena camha attamanā. Saccānuppattiṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ apucchimha, saccānuppattiṁ bhavaṁ gotamo byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca tena camha attamanā. Saccānuppattiyā bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ apucchimha, saccānuppattiyā bahukāraṁ dhammaṁ bhavaṁ gotamo byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca tena camha attamanā. Yaṁyadeva ca mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ apucchimha taṁtadeva bhavaṁ gotamo byākāsi; tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca tena camha attamanā.
[¶86] Worthy Gotama, I used to think this: ‘Who are these shavelings, fake ascetics, primitives, black spawn from the feet of our kinsman next to those who understand the teaching?’ The Buddha has inspired me to have fondness, confidence, and respect for ascetics!
> Pali: Mayañhi, bho gotama, pubbe evaṁ jānāma: ‘ke ca muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā bandhupādāpaccā, ke ca dhammassa aññātāro’ti? Ajanesi vata me bhavaṁ gotamo samaṇesu samaṇapemaṁ, samaṇesu samaṇapasādaṁ, samaṇesu samaṇagāravaṁ.
[¶87] Excellent, worthy Gotama! … From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶88] > Pali: Caṅkīsuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 105. MN 96 · With Esukārī
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/105/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/105/#p-N
[¶0] MN 96 · With Esukārī
> Pali: MN 96 · Esukārīsutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then Esukārī the brahmin went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho esukārī brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho esukārī brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Worthy Gotama, the brahmins prescribe four kinds of service: for a brahmin, an aristocrat, a peasant, and a menial. This is the service they prescribe for a brahmin: ‘A brahmin, an aristocrat, a peasant, and a menial may all serve a brahmin.’ This is the service they prescribe for an aristocrat: ‘An aristocrat, a peasant, and a menial may all serve an aristocrat.’ This is the service they prescribe for a peasant: ‘A peasant or a menial may serve a peasant.’ This is the service they prescribe for a menial: ‘Only a menial may serve a menial. For who else will serve a menial?’ These are the four kinds of service that the brahmins prescribe. What do you say about this?”
> Pali: “brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, catasso pāricariyā paññapenti— brāhmaṇassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti, khattiyassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti, vessassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti, suddassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti: ‘brāhmaṇo vā brāhmaṇaṁ paricareyya, khattiyo vā brāhmaṇaṁ paricareyya, vesso vā brāhmaṇaṁ paricareyya, suddo vā brāhmaṇaṁ paricareyyā’ti. Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā khattiyassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti: ‘khattiyo vā khattiyaṁ paricareyya, vesso vā khattiyaṁ paricareyya, suddo vā khattiyaṁ paricareyyā’ti. Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā khattiyassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā vessassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti: ‘vesso vā vessaṁ paricareyya, suddo vā vessaṁ paricareyyā’ti. Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā vessassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā suddassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti: ‘suddova suddaṁ paricareyya. Ko panañño suddaṁ paricarissatī’ti? Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā suddassa pāricariyaṁ paññapenti. Brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, imā catasso pāricariyā paññapenti. Idha bhavaṁ gotamo kimāhā”ti?
[¶4] “But brahmin, did the whole world authorize the brahmins to prescribe these four kinds of service?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, brāhmaṇa, sabbo loko brāhmaṇānaṁ etadabbhanujānāti: ‘imā catasso pāricariyā paññapentū’”ti?
[¶5] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶6] “It’s as if they were to force a chop on a poor, penniless person, telling them, ‘Eat this meat and pay for it!’ In the same way, the brahmins have prescribed these four kinds of service without the consent of those ascetics and brahmins.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso daliddo assako anāḷhiyo. Tassa akāmassa bilaṁ olaggeyyuṁ: ‘idaṁ te, ambho purisa, maṁsaṁ khāditabbaṁ, mūlañca anuppadātabban’ti. Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, brāhmaṇā appaṭiññāya tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ, atha ca panimā catasso pāricariyā paññapenti.
[¶7] Brahmin, I don’t say that you should serve everyone, nor do I say that you shouldn’t serve anyone. I say that you shouldn’t serve someone if serving them makes you worse, not better. And I say that you should serve someone if serving them makes you better, not worse.
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘sabbaṁ paricaritabban’ti vadāmi; nāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘sabbaṁ na paricaritabban’ti vadāmi. Yaṁ hissa, brāhmaṇa, paricarato pāricariyāhetu pāpiyo assa na seyyo, nāhaṁ taṁ ‘paricaritabban’ti vadāmi; yañca khvāssa, brāhmaṇa, paricarato pāricariyāhetu seyyo assa na pāpiyo tamahaṁ ‘paricaritabban’ti vadāmi.
[¶8] If they were to ask an aristocrat this, ‘Who should you serve? Someone in whose service you get worse, or someone in whose service you get better?’ Answering rightly, an aristocrat would say, ‘Someone in whose service I get better.’
> Pali: Khattiyañcepi, brāhmaṇa, evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘yaṁ vā te paricarato pāricariyāhetu pāpiyo assa na seyyo, yaṁ vā te paricarato pāricariyāhetu seyyo assa na pāpiyo; kamettha paricareyyāsī’ti, khattiyopi hi, brāhmaṇa, sammā byākaramāno evaṁ byākareyya: ‘yañhi me paricarato pāricariyāhetu pāpiyo assa na seyyo, nāhaṁ taṁ paricareyyaṁ; yañca kho me paricarato pāricariyāhetu seyyo assa na pāpiyo tamahaṁ paricareyyan’ti.
[¶9] If they were to ask a brahmin … a peasant … or a menial this, ‘Who should you serve? Someone in whose service you get worse, or someone in whose service you get better?’ Answering rightly, a menial would say, ‘Someone in whose service I get better.’
> Pali: Brāhmaṇañcepi, brāhmaṇa …pe… vessañcepi, brāhmaṇa …pe… suddañcepi, brāhmaṇa, evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘yaṁ vā te paricarato pāricariyāhetu pāpiyo assa na seyyo, yaṁ vā te paricarato pāricariyāhetu seyyo assa na pāpiyo; kamettha paricareyyāsī’ti, suddopi hi, brāhmaṇa, sammā byākaramāno evaṁ byākareyya: ‘yañhi me paricarato pāricariyāhetu pāpiyo assa na seyyo, nāhaṁ taṁ paricareyyaṁ; yañca kho me paricarato pāricariyāhetu seyyo assa na pāpiyo tamahaṁ paricareyyan’ti.
[¶10] Brahmin, I don’t say that an eminent family makes you a better or worse person. I don’t say that exceptional beauty makes you a better or worse person. I don’t say that exceptional wealth makes you a better or worse person.
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘uccākulīnatā seyyaṁso’ti vadāmi, na panāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘uccākulīnatā pāpiyaṁso’ti vadāmi; nāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘uḷāravaṇṇatā seyyaṁso’ti vadāmi, na panāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘uḷāravaṇṇatā pāpiyaṁso’ti vadāmi; nāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘uḷārabhogatā seyyaṁso’ti vadāmi, na panāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘uḷārabhogatā pāpiyaṁso’ti vadāmi.
[¶11] For some people from eminent families kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, with wrong view. That’s why I don’t say that an eminent family makes you a better person.
> Pali: Uccākulīnopi hi, brāhmaṇa, idhekacco pāṇātipātī hoti, adinnādāyī hoti, kāmesumicchācārī hoti, musāvādī hoti, pisuṇāvāco hoti, pharusāvāco hoti, samphappalāpī hoti, abhijjhālu hoti, byāpannacitto hoti, micchādiṭṭhi hoti. Tasmā ‘na uccākulīnatā seyyaṁso’ti vadāmi.
[¶12] But some people from eminent families also refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. They refrain from using speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re content, kind-hearted, with right view. That’s why I don’t say that an eminent family makes you a worse person.
> Pali: Uccākulīnopi hi, brāhmaṇa, idhekacco pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, anabhijjhālu hoti, abyāpannacitto hoti, sammādiṭṭhi hoti. Tasmā ‘na uccākulīnatā pāpiyaṁso’ti vadāmi.
[¶13] And some people who are exceptionally beautiful … And some people who are exceptionally wealthy kill living creatures … and have wrong view. That’s why I don’t say that exceptional wealth makes you a better person. But some people who are exceptionally wealthy also refrain from killing living creatures … and have right view. That’s why I don’t say that any of these things makes you a better or worse person.
> Pali: Uḷāravaṇṇopi hi, brāhmaṇa … pe… uḷārabhogopi hi, brāhmaṇa, idhekacco pāṇātipātī hoti … pe… micchādiṭṭhi hoti. Tasmā ‘na uḷārabhogatā seyyaṁso’ti vadāmi. Uḷārabhogopi hi, brāhmaṇa, idhekacco pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti. Tasmā ‘na uḷārabhogatā pāpiyaṁso’ti vadāmi.
[¶14] Brahmin, I don’t say that you should serve everyone, nor do I say that you shouldn’t serve anyone. And I say that you should serve someone if serving them makes you grow in faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. I say that you shouldn’t serve someone if serving them doesn’t make you grow in faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom.”
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘sabbaṁ paricaritabban’ti vadāmi, na panāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ‘sabbaṁ na paricaritabban’ti vadāmi. Yaṁ hissa, brāhmaṇa, paricarato pāricariyāhetu saddhā vaḍḍhati, sīlaṁ vaḍḍhati, sutaṁ vaḍḍhati, cāgo vaḍḍhati, paññā vaḍḍhati, tamahaṁ ‘paricaritabban’ti vadāmi. Yaṁ hissa, brāhmaṇa, paricarato pāricariyāhetu na saddhā vaḍḍhati, na sīlaṁ vaḍḍhati, na sutaṁ vaḍḍhati, na cāgo vaḍḍhati, na paññā vaḍḍhati, nāhaṁ taṁ ‘paricaritabban’ti vadāmī”ti.
[¶15] When he had spoken, Esukārī said to him:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, esukārī brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶16] “Worthy Gotama, the brahmins prescribe four kinds of wealth: for a brahmin, an aristocrat, a peasant, and a menial. The wealth they prescribe for a brahmin is living on alms. A brahmin who scorns his own wealth, living on alms, fails in his duty like a guard who steals. The wealth they prescribe for an aristocrat is the bow and quiver. An aristocrat who scorns his own wealth, the bow and quiver, fails in his duty like a guard who steals. The wealth they prescribe for a peasant is farming and animal husbandry. A peasant who scorns his own wealth, farming and animal husbandry, fails in his duty like a guard who steals. The wealth they prescribe for a menial is the scythe and flail. A menial who scorns his own wealth, the scythe and flail, fails in his duty like a guard who steals. These are the four kinds of wealth that the brahmins prescribe. What do you say about this?”
> Pali: “brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, cattāri dhanāni paññapenti— brāhmaṇassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti, khattiyassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti, vessassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti, suddassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti bhikkhācariyaṁ; bhikkhācariyañca pana brāhmaṇo sandhanaṁ atimaññamāno akiccakārī hoti gopova adinnaṁ ādiyamānoti. Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā khattiyassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti dhanukalāpaṁ; dhanukalāpañca pana khattiyo sandhanaṁ atimaññamāno akiccakārī hoti gopova adinnaṁ ādiyamānoti. Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā khattiyassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā vessassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti kasigorakkhaṁ; kasigorakkhañca pana vesso sandhanaṁ atimaññamāno akiccakārī hoti gopova adinnaṁ ādiyamānoti. Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā vessassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti. Tatridaṁ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā suddassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti asitabyābhaṅgiṁ; asitabyābhaṅgiñca pana suddo sandhanaṁ atimaññamāno akiccakārī hoti gopova adinnaṁ ādiyamānoti. Idaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā suddassa sandhanaṁ paññapenti. Brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, imāni cattāri dhanāni paññapenti. Idha bhavaṁ gotamo kimāhā”ti?
[¶17] “But brahmin, did the whole world authorize the brahmins to prescribe these four kinds of wealth?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, brāhmaṇa, sabbo loko brāhmaṇānaṁ etadabbhanujānāti: ‘imāni cattāri dhanāni paññapentū’”ti?
[¶18] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶19] “It’s as if they were to force a chop on a poor, penniless person, telling them, ‘Eat this meat and pay for it!’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, puriso daliddo assako anāḷhiyo. Tassa akāmassa bilaṁ olaggeyyuṁ: ‘idaṁ te, ambho purisa, maṁsaṁ khāditabbaṁ, mūlañca anuppadātabban’ti.
[¶20] In the same way, the brahmins have prescribed these four kinds of wealth without the consent of these ascetics and brahmins.
> Pali: Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, brāhmaṇā appaṭiññāya tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ, atha ca panimāni cattāri dhanāni paññapenti.
[¶21] I assert that a person’s own wealth is the noble, transcendent teaching. But they are reckoned by recollecting the traditional family customs of their mother and father wherever they are incarnated. If they incarnate in a family of aristocrats they are reckoned as an aristocrat. If they incarnate in a family of brahmins they are reckoned as a brahmin. If they incarnate in a family of peasants they are reckoned as a peasant. If they incarnate in a family of menials they are reckoned as a menial.
> Pali: Ariyaṁ kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, lokuttaraṁ dhammaṁ purisassa sandhanaṁ paññapemi. Porāṇaṁ kho panassa mātāpettikaṁ kulavaṁsaṁ anussarato yattha yattheva attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti tena teneva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati. Khattiyakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘khattiyo’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; brāhmaṇakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘brāhmaṇo’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; vessakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘vesso’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; suddakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘suddo’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶22] It’s like fire, which is reckoned according to the very same condition dependent upon which it burns. A fire that burns dependent on logs is reckoned as a log fire. A fire that burns dependent on twigs is reckoned as a twig fire. A fire that burns dependent on grass is reckoned as a grass fire. A fire that burns dependent on cow-dung is reckoned as a cow-dung fire.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, yaṁyadeva paccayaṁ paṭicca aggi jalati tena teneva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati. Kaṭṭhañce paṭicca aggi jalati ‘kaṭṭhaggi’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; sakalikañce paṭicca aggi jalati ‘sakalikaggi’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; tiṇañce paṭicca aggi jalati ‘tiṇaggi’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; gomayañce paṭicca aggi jalati ‘gomayaggi’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶23] In the same way, I assert that a person’s own wealth is the noble, transcendent teaching. But they are reckoned by recollecting the traditional family customs of their mother and father wherever they are incarnated.
> Pali: Evameva kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, ariyaṁ lokuttaraṁ dhammaṁ purisassa sandhanaṁ paññapemi. Porāṇaṁ kho panassa mātāpettikaṁ kulavaṁsaṁ anussarato yattha yattheva attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti tena teneva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶24] > Pali: Khattiyakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘khattiyo’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; brāhmaṇakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘brāhmaṇo’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; vessakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘vesso’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati; suddakule ce attabhāvassa abhinibbatti hoti ‘suddo’tveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchati.
[¶25] Suppose someone from a family of aristocrats goes forth from the lay life to homelessness. Relying on the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One they refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sex. They refrain from using speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re content, kind-hearted, with right view. They succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: Khattiyakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, abrahmacariyā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, anabhijjhālu hoti, abyāpannacitto hoti, sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶26] Suppose someone from a family of brahmins … peasants … menials goes forth from the lay life to homelessness. Relying on the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One … they succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: Brāhmaṇakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Vessakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Suddakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶27] What do you think, brahmin? Is only a brahmin capable of developing a heart of love free of enmity and ill will for this region, and not an aristocrat, peasant, or menial?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, brāhmaṇa, brāhmaṇova nu kho pahoti asmiṁ padese averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāvetuṁ, no khattiyo no vesso no suddo”ti?
[¶28] “No, worthy Gotama. Aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials can all do so. For all four classes are capable of developing a heart of love free of enmity and ill will for this region.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Khattiyopi hi, bho gotama, pahoti asmiṁ padese averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāvetuṁ; brāhmaṇopi hi, bho gotama … vessopi hi, bho gotama … suddopi hi, bho gotama … sabbepi hi, bho gotama, cattāro vaṇṇā pahonti asmiṁ padese averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāvetun”ti.
[¶29] “In the same way, suppose someone from a family of aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, or menials goes forth from the lay life to homelessness. Relying on the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One … they succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, khattiyakulā cepi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Brāhmaṇakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa … vessakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa … suddakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶30] What do you think, brahmin? Is only a brahmin capable of taking some bathing cleanser, going to the river, and rinsing off dust and dirt, and not an aristocrat, peasant, or menial?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, brāhmaṇa, brāhmaṇova nu kho pahoti sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ gantvā rajojallaṁ pavāhetuṁ, no khattiyo no vesso no suddo”ti?
[¶31] “No, worthy Gotama. All four classes are capable of doing this.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Khattiyopi hi, bho gotama, pahoti sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ gantvā rajojallaṁ pavāhetuṁ; brāhmaṇopi hi, bho gotama … vessopi hi, bho gotama … suddopi hi, bho gotama … sabbepi hi, bho gotama, cattāro vaṇṇā pahonti sottisināniṁ ādāya nadiṁ gantvā rajojallaṁ pavāhetun”ti.
[¶32] “In the same way, suppose someone from a family of aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, or menials goes forth from the lay life to homelessness. Relying on the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One … they succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, khattiyakulā cepi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Brāhmaṇakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa … vessakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa … suddakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ.
[¶33] What do you think, brahmin? Suppose an anointed aristocratic king were to gather a hundred people born in different classes and say to them: ‘Please gentlemen, let anyone here who was born in a family of aristocrats, brahmins, or chieftains take a drill-stick made of teak, sal, salaḷa, sandalwood, or cherry wood, light a fire and produce heat. And let anyone here who was born in a family of corpse-workers, hunters, bamboo-workers, chariot-makers, or scavengers take a drill-stick made from a mutt’s drinking trough, a pig’s trough, a dustbin, or castor-oil wood, light a fire and produce heat.’
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, brāhmaṇa, idha rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto nānājaccānaṁ purisānaṁ purisasataṁ sannipāteyya: ‘āyantu bhonto ye tattha khattiyakulā brāhmaṇakulā rājaññakulā uppannā sākassa vā sālassa vā salaḷassa vā candanassa vā padumakassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggiṁ abhinibbattentu, tejo pātukarontu; āyantu pana bhonto ye tattha caṇḍālakulā nesādakulā venakulā rathakārakulā pukkusakulā uppannā sāpānadoṇiyā vā sūkaradoṇiyā vā rajakadoṇiyā vā eraṇḍakaṭṭhassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggiṁ abhinibbattentu, tejo pātukarontū’”ti?
[¶34] What do you think, brahmin? Would only the fire produced by the high class people with good quality wood have flames, color, and radiance, and be usable as fire, and not the fire produced by the low class people with poor quality wood?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, brāhmaṇa, yo evaṁ nu kho so khattiyakulā brāhmaṇakulā rājaññakulā uppannehi sākassa vā sālassa vā salaḷassa vā candanassa vā padumakassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto tejo pātukato so eva nu khvāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca tena ca sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ; yo pana so caṇḍālakulā nesādakulā venakulā rathakārakulā pukkusakulā uppannehi sāpānadoṇiyā vā sūkaradoṇiyā vā rajakadoṇiyā vā eraṇḍakaṭṭhassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto tejo pātukato svāssa aggi na ceva accimā na ca vaṇṇavā na ca pabhassaro na ca tena sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātun”ti?
[¶35] “No, worthy Gotama. The fire produced by the high class people with good quality wood would have flames, color, and radiance, and be usable as fire, and so would the fire produced by the low class people with poor quality wood. For all fire has flames, color, and radiance, and is usable as fire.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Yopi hi so, bho gotama, khattiyakulā brāhmaṇakulā rājaññakulā uppannehi sākassa vā sālassa vā salaḷassa vā candanassa vā padumakassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto tejo pātukato svāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca tena ca sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ; yopi so caṇḍālakulā nesādakulā venakulā rathakārakulā pukkusakulā uppannehi sāpānadoṇiyā vā sūkaradoṇiyā vā rajakadoṇiyā vā eraṇḍakaṭṭhassa vā uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya aggi abhinibbatto tejo pātukato svāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca tena ca sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ. Sabbopi hi, bho gotama, aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro ca sabbenapi sakkā agginā aggikaraṇīyaṁ kātun”ti.
[¶36] “In the same way, suppose someone from a family of aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, or menials goes forth from the lay life to homelessness. Relying on the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One they refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sex. They refrain from using speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re content, kind-hearted, with right view. They succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, khattiyakulā cepi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Brāhmaṇakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa … vessakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa … suddakulā cepi, brāhmaṇa, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, so ca tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, abrahmacariyā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, anabhijjhālu hoti, abyāpannacitto hoti, sammādiṭṭhi hoti, ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti.
[¶37] When he had spoken, Esukārī said to him, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! … From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, esukārī brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama …pe… upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶38] > Pali: Esukārīsuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 106. MN 97 · With Dhanañjāni
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/106/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/106/#p-N
[¶0] MN 97 · With Dhanañjāni
> Pali: MN 97 · Dhanañjānisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Now at that time Venerable Sāriputta was wandering in the Southern Hills together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. Then a certain mendicant who had completed the rainy season residence in Rājagaha went to the Southern Hills, where he approached Venerable Sāriputta, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Sāriputta said to him, “Reverend, I hope the Buddha is healthy and strong?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā sāriputto dakkhiṇāgirismiṁ cārikaṁ carati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ. Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu rājagahe vassaṁvuṭṭho yena dakkhiṇāgiri yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā sāriputtena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho taṁ bhikkhuṁ āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca: “kaccāvuso, bhagavā arogo ca balavā cā”ti?
[¶3] “He is, reverend.”
> Pali: “Arogo cāvuso, bhagavā balavā cā”ti.
[¶4] “And I hope that the mendicant Saṅgha is healthy and strong.”
> Pali: “Kacci panāvuso, bhikkhusaṅgho arogo ca balavā cā”ti?
[¶5] “It is.”
> Pali: “Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho, āvuso, arogo ca balavā cā”ti.
[¶6] “Reverend, at the rice checkpoint at the city gate there is a brahmin named Dhanañjāni. I hope that he is healthy and strong?”
> Pali: “Ettha, āvuso, taṇḍulapālidvārāya dhanañjāni nāma brāhmaṇo atthi. Kaccāvuso, dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo arogo ca balavā cā”ti?
[¶7] “He too is well.”
> Pali: “Dhanañjānipi kho, āvuso, brāhmaṇo arogo ca balavā cā”ti.
[¶8] “But is he diligent?”
> Pali: “Kacci panāvuso, dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo appamatto”ti?
[¶9] “How could he possibly be diligent? Dhanañjāni robs the brahmins and householders in the name of the king, and he robs the king in the name of the brahmins and householders. His wife, a lady of faith who he married from a family of faith, has passed away. And he has taken a new wife who has no faith.”
> Pali: “Kuto panāvuso, dhanañjānissa brāhmaṇassa appamādo? Dhanañjāni, āvuso, brāhmaṇo rājānaṁ nissāya brāhmaṇagahapatike vilumpati, brāhmaṇagahapatike nissāya rājānaṁ vilumpati. Yāpissa bhariyā saddhā saddhakulā ānītā sāpi kālaṅkatā; aññāssa bhariyā assaddhā assaddhakulā ānītā”ti.
[¶10] “Oh, it’s bad news to hear that Dhanañjāni is negligent. Hopefully, some time or other I’ll get to meet him, and we can have a discussion.”
> Pali: “Dussutaṁ vatāvuso, assumha, dussutaṁ vatāvuso, assumha; ye mayaṁ dhanañjāniṁ brāhmaṇaṁ pamattaṁ assumha. Appeva ca nāma mayaṁ kadāci karahaci dhanañjāninā brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ samāgaccheyyāma, appeva nāma siyā kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti?
[¶11] When Sāriputta had stayed in the Southern Hills as long as he pleased, he set out for Rājagaha. Traveling stage by stage, he arrived at Rājagaha, where he stayed in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto dakkhiṇāgirismiṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena rājagahaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena rājagahaṁ tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ āyasmā sāriputto rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶12] Then he robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Rājagaha for alms. Now at that time Dhanañjāni was having his cows milked in a cow-shed outside the city. Then Sāriputta wandered for alms in Rājagaha. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he approached Dhanañjāni.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Tena kho pana samayena dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo bahinagare gāvo goṭṭhe duhāpeti. Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto rājagahe piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami.
[¶13] Seeing Sāriputta coming off in the distance, Dhanañjāni went to him and said, “Here, worthy Sāriputta, drink some fresh milk before the meal time.”
> Pali: Addasā kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “ito, bho sāriputta, payo, pīyataṁ tāva bhattassa kālo bhavissatī”ti.
[¶14] “Enough, brahmin, I’ve finished eating for today. I shall be at the root of that tree there for the day’s meditation. Come see me there.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, brāhmaṇa. Kataṁ me ajja bhattakiccaṁ. Amukasmiṁ me rukkhamūle divāvihāro bhavissati. Tattha āgaccheyyāsī”ti.
[¶15] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Dhanañjāni.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosi.
[¶16] When Dhanañjāni had finished breakfast he went to Sāriputta and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Sāriputta said to him, “I hope you’re diligent, Dhanañjāni?”
> Pali: Atha kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo pacchābhattaṁ bhuttapātarāso yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā sāriputtena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho dhanañjāniṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca: “kaccāsi, dhanañjāni, appamatto”ti?
[¶17] “How can I possibly be diligent, worthy Sāriputta? I have to provide for my mother and father, my wives and children, and my bondservants and workers. And I have to make the proper offerings to friends and colleagues, relatives and kin, guests, ancestors, deities, and king. And then this body must also be fattened and built up.”
> Pali: “Kuto, bho sāriputta, amhākaṁ appamādo yesaṁ no mātāpitaro posetabbā, puttadāro posetabbo, dāsakammakarā posetabbā, mittāmaccānaṁ mittāmaccakaraṇīyaṁ kātabbaṁ, ñātisālohitānaṁ ñātisālohitakaraṇīyaṁ kātabbaṁ, atithīnaṁ atithikaraṇīyaṁ kātabbaṁ, pubbapetānaṁ pubbapetakaraṇīyaṁ kātabbaṁ, devatānaṁ devatākaraṇīyaṁ kātabbaṁ, rañño rājakaraṇīyaṁ kātabbaṁ, ayampi kāyo pīṇetabbo brūhetabbo”ti?
[¶18] “What do you think, Dhanañjāni? Suppose someone was to behave in an unprincipled and immoral way for the sake of their parents. Because of this the wardens of hell would drag them to hell. Could they get out of being dragged to hell by pleading that they had acted for the sake of their parents? Or could their parents save them by pleading that the acts had been done for their sake?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco mātāpitūnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho mātāpitūnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, mātāpitaro vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti?
[¶19] “No, worthy Sāriputta. Rather, even as they were wailing the wardens of hell would cast them down into hell.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”.
[¶20] “What do you think, Dhanañjāni? Suppose someone was to behave in an unprincipled and immoral way for the sake of their wives and children … bondservants and workers … friends and colleagues … relatives and kin … guests … ancestors … deities … king … fattening and building up their body. Because of this the wardens of hell would drag them to hell. Could they get out of being dragged to hell by pleading that they had acted for the sake of fattening and building up their body? Or could anyone else save them by pleading that the acts had been done for that reason?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco puttadārassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho puttadārassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, puttadāro vā panassa labheyya ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco dāsakammakaraporisassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho dāsakammakaraporisassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, dāsakammakaraporisā vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco mittāmaccānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho mittāmaccānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, mittāmaccā vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco ñātisālohitānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho ñātisālohitānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, ñātisālohitā vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco atithīnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho atithīnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, atithī vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco pubbapetānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho pubbapetānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, pubbapetā vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco devatānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho devatānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, devatā vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco rañño hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho rañño hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, rājā vā panassa labheyya ‘eso kho amhākaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti? “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, idhekacco kāyassa pīṇanāhetu brūhanāhetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, tamenaṁ adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu nirayaṁ nirayapālā upakaḍḍheyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so ‘ahaṁ kho kāyassa pīṇanāhetu brūhanāhetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosiṁ, mā maṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’ti, pare vā panassa labheyyuṁ ‘eso kho kāyassa pīṇanāhetu brūhanāhetu adhammacārī visamacārī ahosi, mā naṁ nirayaṁ nirayapālā’”ti?
[¶21] “No, worthy Sāriputta. Rather, even as they were wailing the wardens of hell would cast them down into hell.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho sāriputta. Atha kho naṁ vikkandantaṁyeva niraye nirayapālā pakkhipeyyuṁ”.
[¶22] “Who do you think is better, Dhanañjāni? Someone who, for the sake of their parents, behaves in an unprincipled and immoral manner, or someone who behaves in a principled and moral manner?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā mātāpitūnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā mātāpitūnaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti?
[¶23] “Someone who behaves in a principled and moral manner for the sake of their parents. For principled and moral conduct is better than unprincipled and immoral conduct.”
> Pali: “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, mātāpitūnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, mātāpitūnaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti.
[¶24] “Dhanañjāni, others have livelihoods that are both profitable and legitimate. By means of these it’s possible to provide for your parents, avoid bad deeds, and practice the path of goodness.
> Pali: “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā mātāpitaro ceva posetuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ.
[¶25] Who do you think is better, Dhanañjāni? Someone who, for the sake of their wives and children … bondservants and workers … friends and colleagues … relatives and kin … guests … ancestors … deities … king … fattening and building up their body, behaves in an unprincipled and immoral manner, or someone who behaves in a principled and moral manner?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā puttadārassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā puttadārassa hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, puttadārassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, puttadārassa hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā yehi sakkā puttadārañceva posetuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā dāsakammakaraporisassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā dāsakammakaraporisassa hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, dāsakammakaraporisassa hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, dāsakammakaraporisassa hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā dāsakammakaraporise ceva posetuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā mittāmaccānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā mittāmaccānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, mittāmaccānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, mittāmaccānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā mittāmaccānañceva mittāmaccakaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā ñātisālohitānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā ñātisālohitānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, ñātisālohitānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, ñātisālohitānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā ñātisālohitānañceva ñātisālohitakaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā atithīnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā atithīnaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, atithīnaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, atithīnaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā atithīnañceva atithikaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā pubbapetānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā pubbapetānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, pubbapetānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, pubbapetānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā pubbapetānañceva pubbapetakaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā devatānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā devatānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, devatānaṁ hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, devatānaṁ hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā devatānañceva devatākaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā rañño hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā rañño hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti? “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, rañño hetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, rañño hetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti. “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā rañño ceva rājakaraṇīyaṁ kātuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjituṁ. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, yo vā kāyassa pīṇanāhetu brūhanāhetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, yo vā kāyassa pīṇanāhetu brūhanāhetu dhammacārī samacārī assa; katamaṁ seyyo”ti?
[¶26] “Someone who behaves in a principled and moral manner. For principled and moral conduct is better than unprincipled and immoral conduct.”
> Pali: “Yo hi, bho sāriputta, kāyassa pīṇanāhetu brūhanāhetu adhammacārī visamacārī assa, na taṁ seyyo; yo ca kho, bho sāriputta, kāyassa pīṇanāhetu brūhanāhetu dhammacārī samacārī assa, tadevettha seyyo. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhi, bho sāriputta, dhammacariyāsamacariyā seyyo”ti.
[¶27] “Dhanañjāni, others have livelihoods that are both profitable and legitimate. By means of these it’s possible to fatten and build up your body, avoid bad deeds, and practice the path of goodness.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, dhanañjāni, aññesaṁ hetukā dhammikā kammantā, yehi sakkā kāyañceva pīṇetuṁ brūhetuṁ, na ca pāpakammaṁ kātuṁ, puññañca paṭipadaṁ paṭipajjitun”ti.
[¶28] Then Dhanañjāni the brahmin, having approved and agreed with what Venerable Sāriputta said, rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶29] Some time later Dhanañjāni became sick, suffering, gravely ill. Then he addressed a man, “Please, my man, go to the Buddha, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Say to him: ‘Sir, the brahmin Dhanañjāni is sick, suffering, gravely ill. He bows with his head to your feet.’ Then go to Venerable Sāriputta, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Say to him: ‘Sir, the brahmin Dhanañjāni is sick, suffering, gravely ill. He bows with his head to your feet.’ And then say: ‘Sir, please visit Dhanañjāni at his home out of sympathy.’”
> Pali: Atha kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo aparena samayena ābādhiko ahosi dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. Atha kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi: ‘dhanañjāni, bhante, brāhmaṇo ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’ti. Yena cāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena āyasmato sāriputtassa pāde sirasā vandāhi: ‘dhanañjāni, bhante, brāhmaṇo ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So āyasmato sāriputtassa pāde sirasā vandatī’ti. Evañca vadehi: ‘sādhu kira, bhante, āyasmā sāriputto yena dhanañjānissa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti.
[¶30] “Yes, sir,” that man replied. He did as Dhanañjāni asked. Sāriputta consented with silence.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so puriso dhanañjānissa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so puriso bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “dhanañjāni, bhante, brāhmaṇo ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”ti. Yena cāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so puriso āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “dhanañjāni, bhante, brāhmaṇo ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So āyasmato sāriputtassa pāde sirasā vandati, evañca vadeti: ‘sādhu kira, bhante, āyasmā sāriputto yena dhanañjānissa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti. Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā sāriputto tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶31] He robed up, and, taking his bowl and robe, went to Dhanañjāni’s home, where he sat down on the seat spread out and said to Dhanañjāni, “I hope you’re keeping well, Dhanañjāni, I hope you’re all right. I hope your pain is fading, not growing; that its fading is evident, not its growing.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena dhanañjānissa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho āyasmā sāriputto dhanañjāniṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “kacci te, dhanañjāni, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ? Kacci dukkhā vedanā paṭikkamanti, no abhikkamanti? Paṭikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no abhikkamo”ti?
[¶32] “I’m not keeping well, Mister Sāriputta, I’m not getting by. My pain is terrible and growing, not fading; its growing is evident, not its fading. The winds piercing my head are so severe, it feels like a strong man drilling into my head with a sharp point. I’m not keeping well. The pain in my head is so severe, it feels like a strong man tightening a strong leather strap around my head. I’m not keeping well. The winds slicing my belly are so severe, like a deft butcher or their apprentice were slicing open a cow’s belly with a sharp meat cleaver. I’m not keeping well. The burning in my body is so severe, it feels like two strong men grabbing a weaker man by the arms to burn and scorch him on a pit of glowing coals. I’m not keeping well, Mister Sāriputta, I’m not getting by. My pain is terrible and growing, not fading; its growing is evident, not its fading.”
> Pali: “Na me, bho sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti. Abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bho sāriputta, balavā puriso tiṇhena sikharena muddhani abhimattheyya; evameva kho, bho sāriputta, adhimattā vātā muddhani ca ūhananti. Na me, bho sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ, na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti. Abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bho sāriputta, balavā puriso daḷhena varattakkhaṇḍena sīse sīsaveṭhaṁ dadeyya; evameva kho, bho sāriputta, adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā. Na me, bho sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti. Abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bho sāriputta, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā tiṇhena govikantanena kucchiṁ parikanteyya; evameva kho, bho sāriputta, adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Na me, bho sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ, na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti. Abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bho sāriputta, dve balavanto purisā dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuyā santāpeyyuṁ samparitāpeyyuṁ; evameva kho, bho sāriputta, adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho. Na me, bho sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti. Abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo”ti.
[¶33] “Dhanañjāni, which do you think is better: hell or the animal realm?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— nirayo vā tiracchānayoni vā”ti?
[¶34] “The animal realm is better.”
> Pali: “Nirayā, bho sāriputta, tiracchānayoni seyyo”ti.
[¶35] “Which do you think is better: the animal realm or the ghost realm?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— tiracchānayoni vā pettivisayo vā”ti?
[¶36] “The ghost realm is better.”
> Pali: “Tiracchānayoniyā, bho sāriputta, pettivisayo seyyo”ti.
[¶37] “Which do you think is better: the ghost realm or human life?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— pettivisayo vā manussā vā”ti?
[¶38] “Human life is better.”
> Pali: “Pettivisayā, bho sāriputta, manussā seyyo”ti.
[¶39] “Which do you think is better: human life or as one of the gods of the four great kings?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— manussā vā cātumahārājikā vā devā”ti?
[¶40] “The gods of the four great kings.”
> Pali: “Manussehi, bho sāriputta, cātumahārājikā devā seyyo”ti.
[¶41] “Which do you think is better: the gods of the four great kings or the gods of the thirty-three?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— cātumahārājikā vā devā tāvatiṁsā vā devā”ti?
[¶42] “The gods of the thirty-three.”
> Pali: “Cātumahārājikehi, bho sāriputta, devehi tāvatiṁsā devā seyyo”ti.
[¶43] “Which do you think is better: the gods of the thirty-three or the gods of Yama?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— tāvatiṁsā vā devā yāmā vā devā”ti?
[¶44] “The gods of Yama.”
> Pali: “Tāvatiṁsehi, bho sāriputta, devehi yāmā devā seyyo”ti.
[¶45] “Which do you think is better: the gods of Yama or the joyful gods?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— yāmā vā devā tusitā vā devā”ti?
[¶46] “The joyful gods.”
> Pali: “Yāmehi, bho sāriputta, devehi tusitā devā seyyo”ti.
[¶47] “Which do you think is better: the joyful gods or the gods who love to create?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— tusitā vā devā nimmānaratī vā devā”ti?
[¶48] “The gods who love to create.”
> Pali: “Tusitehi, bho sāriputta, devehi nimmānaratī devā seyyo”ti.
[¶49] “Which do you think is better: the gods who love to create or the gods who control what is created by others?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo— nimmānaratī vā devā paranimmitavasavattī vā devā”ti?
[¶50] “The gods who control what is created by others.”
> Pali: “Nimmānaratīhi, bho sāriputta, devehi paranimmitavasavattī devā seyyo”ti.
[¶51] “Which do you think is better: the gods who control what is created by others or the realm of divinity?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, dhanañjāni, katamaṁ seyyo paranimmitavasavattī vā devā brahmaloko vā”ti?
[¶52] “Worthy Sāriputta speaks of the realm of divinity! Worthy Sāriputta speaks of the realm of divinity!”
> Pali: “‘Brahmaloko’ti—bhavaṁ sāriputto āha; ‘brahmaloko’ti—bhavaṁ sāriputto āhā”ti.
[¶53] Then Sāriputta thought:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato sāriputtassa etadahosi:
[¶54] “These brahmins are devoted to the realm of divinity. Why don’t I teach him a path to the company of Divinity?”
> Pali: “ime kho brāhmaṇā brahmalokādhimuttā. Yannūnāhaṁ dhanañjānissa brāhmaṇassa brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ deseyyan”ti.
[¶55] “Dhanañjāni, I shall teach you a path to the company of Divinity. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Brahmānaṁ te, dhanañjāni, sahabyatāya maggaṁ desessāmi; taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶56] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Dhanañjāni. Venerable Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosi. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶57] “And what is a path to company with Divinity? Firstly, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. This is a path to company with Divinity.
> Pali: “katamo ca, dhanañjāni, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo? Idha, dhanañjāni, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Ayaṁ kho, dhanañjāni, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo.
[¶58] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of compassion …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, dhanañjāni, bhikkhu karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶59] They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing …
> Pali: muditāsahagatena cetasā …
[¶60] They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. This is a path to company with Divinity.”
> Pali: upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Ayaṁ kho, dhanañjāni, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo”ti.
[¶61] “Well then, Mister Sāriputta, in my name bow with your head to the Buddha’s feet. Say to him: ‘Sir, the brahmin Dhanañjāni is sick, suffering, gravely ill. He bows with his head to your feet.’” Then Sāriputta, after establishing Dhanañjāni in the inferior realm of divinity, rose from his seat and left while there was still more left to do. Not long after Sāriputta had left, Dhanañjāni passed away and was reborn in the realm of divinity.
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho sāriputta, mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi: ‘dhanañjāni, bhante, brāhmaṇo ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’”ti. Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto dhanañjāniṁ brāhmaṇaṁ sati uttarikaraṇīye hīne brahmaloke patiṭṭhāpetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Atha kho dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo acirapakkante āyasmante sāriputte kālamakāsi, brahmalokañca upapajji.
[¶62] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants, “Mendicants, Sāriputta, after establishing Dhanañjāni in the inferior realm of divinity, rose from his seat and left while there was still more left to do.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “eso, bhikkhave, sāriputto dhanañjāniṁ brāhmaṇaṁ sati uttarikaraṇīye hīne brahmaloke patiṭṭhāpetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto”ti.
[¶63] Then Sāriputta went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said, “Sir, the brahmin Dhanañjāni is sick, suffering, gravely ill. He bows with his head to your feet.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi, ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “dhanañjāni, bhante, brāhmaṇo ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno, so bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”ti.
[¶64] “But Sāriputta, after establishing Dhanañjāni in the inferior realm of divinity, why did you get up from your seat and leave while there was still more left to do?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, sāriputta, dhanañjāniṁ brāhmaṇaṁ sati uttarikaraṇīye hīne brahmaloke patiṭṭhāpetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto”ti?
[¶65] “Sir, I thought: ‘These brahmins are devoted to the realm of divinity. Why don’t I teach him a path to the company of Divinity?’”
> Pali: “Mayhaṁ kho, bhante, evaṁ ahosi: ‘ime kho brāhmaṇā brahmalokādhimuttā, yannūnāhaṁ dhanañjānissa brāhmaṇassa brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ deseyyan’”ti.
[¶66] “And Sāriputta, the brahmin Dhanañjāni has passed away and been reborn in the realm of divinity.”
> Pali: “Kālaṅkato ca, sāriputta, dhanañjāni brāhmaṇo, brahmalokañca upapanno”ti.
[¶67] > Pali: Dhanañjānisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 107. MN 98 · With Vāseṭṭha
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/107/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/107/#p-N
[¶0] MN 98 · With Vāseṭṭha
> Pali: MN 98 · Vāseṭṭhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in a forest near Icchānaṅgala.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā icchānaṅgale viharati icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍe.
[¶2] Now at that time several very well-known well-to-do brahmins were residing in Icchānaṅgala. They included the brahmins Caṅkī, Tārukkha, Pokkharasāti, Jānussoṇi, Todeyya, and others.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā abhiññātā abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā icchānaṅgale paṭivasanti, seyyathidaṁ— caṅkī brāhmaṇo, tārukkho brāhmaṇo, pokkharasāti brāhmaṇo, jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo, todeyyo brāhmaṇo, aññe ca abhiññātā abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā.
[¶3] Then as the students Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja were going for a walk they began to discuss the question: “How do you become a brahmin?”
> Pali: Atha kho vāseṭṭhabhāradvājānaṁ māṇavānaṁ jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamantānaṁ anuvicarantānaṁ ayamantarākathā udapādi: “kathaṁ, bho, brāhmaṇo hotī”ti?
[¶4] Bhāradvāja said this: “When you’re well born on both your mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation— then you’re a brahmin.”
> Pali: Bhāradvājo māṇavo evamāha: “yato kho, bho, ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena— ettāvatā kho, bho, brāhmaṇo hotī”ti.
[¶5] Vāseṭṭha said this: “When you’re ethical and accomplished in doing your duties— then you’re a brahmin.”
> Pali: Vāseṭṭho māṇavo evamāha: “yato kho, bho, sīlavā ca hoti vattasampanno ca— ettāvatā kho, bho, brāhmaṇo hotī”ti.
[¶6] But neither was able to persuade the other.
> Pali: Neva kho asakkhi bhāradvājo māṇavo vāseṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ saññāpetuṁ, na pana asakkhi vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhāradvājaṁ māṇavaṁ saññāpetuṁ.
[¶7] So Vāseṭṭha said to Bhāradvāja, “Worthy Bhāradvāja, the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—is staying in a forest near Icchānaṅgala. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ Come, let’s go to see him and ask him about this matter. As he answers, so we’ll remember it.”
> Pali: Atha kho vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhāradvājaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: “ayaṁ kho, bho bhāradvāja, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito icchānaṅgale viharati icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍe. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Āyāma, bho bhāradvāja, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkamissāma; upasaṅkamitvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ etamatthaṁ pucchissāma. Yathā no samaṇo gotamo byākarissati tathā naṁ dhāressāmā”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Bhāradvāja.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho bhāradvājo māṇavo vāseṭṭhassa māṇavassa paccassosi.
[¶9] So they went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side, and Vāseṭṭha addressed the Buddha in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā māṇavā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhagavantaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶10] “We’re both authorized masters
of the three Vedas.
I’m a student of Pokkharasāti,
and he of Tārukkha.
> Pali: “Anuññātapaṭiññātā,
tevijjā mayamasmubho;
Ahaṁ pokkharasātissa,
tārukkhassāyaṁ māṇavo.
[¶11] We’re fully qualified
in all the Vedic experts teach.
As philologists and grammarians,
we match our tutors in recitation.
We have a dispute
regarding genealogy.
> Pali: Tevijjānaṁ yadakkhātaṁ,
tatra kevalinosmase;
Padakasmā veyyākaraṇā,
jappe ācariyasādisā;
Tesaṁ no jātivādasmiṁ,
vivādo atthi gotama.
[¶12] For Bhāradvāja says that
one is a brahmin due to birth,
but I declare it’s because of one’s deeds.
Oh Clear-eyed One, know this as our debate.
> Pali: Jātiyā brāhmaṇo hoti,
bhāradvājo iti bhāsati;
Ahañca kammunā brūmi,
evaṁ jānāhi cakkhuma.
[¶13] Since neither of us was able
to convince the other,
we’ve come to ask you, sir,
renowned as the awakened one.
> Pali: Te na sakkoma ñāpetuṁ,
aññamaññaṁ mayaṁ ubho;
Bhavantaṁ puṭṭhumāgamā,
sambuddhaṁ iti vissutaṁ.
[¶14] As people honor with cupped palms
the moon on the cusp of waxing,
bowing, they revere
Gotama in the world.
> Pali: Candaṁ yathā khayātītaṁ,
pecca pañjalikā janā;
Vandamānā namassanti,
lokasmiṁ gotamaṁ.
[¶15] We ask this of Gotama,
the Eye arisen in the world:
is one a brahmin due to birth,
or else because of deeds?
We don’t know, please tell us,
so we can recognize a brahmin.”
> Pali: Cakkhuṁ loke samuppannaṁ,
mayaṁ pucchāma gotamaṁ;
Jātiyā brāhmaṇo hoti,
udāhu bhavati kammunā;
Ajānataṁ no pabrūhi,
yathā jānemu brāhmaṇan”ti.
[¶16] “I shall explain to you,”
said the Buddha,
“accurately and in sequence,
the taxonomy of living creatures,
for species are indeed diverse.
> Pali: “Tesaṁ vo ahaṁ byakkhissaṁ,
(vāseṭṭhāti bhagavā)
Anupubbaṁ yathātathaṁ;
Jātivibhaṅgaṁ pāṇānaṁ,
Aññamaññāhi jātiyo.
[¶17] Know the grass and trees,
though they lack self-awareness.
They’re defined by birth,
for species are indeed diverse.
> Pali: Tiṇarukkhepi jānātha,
na cāpi paṭijānare;
Liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ tesaṁ,
aññamaññā hi jātiyo.
[¶18] Next there are bugs that crawl or fly,
and so on, to ants and termites.
They’re defined by birth,
for species are indeed diverse.
> Pali: Tato kīṭe paṭaṅge ca,
yāva kunthakipillike;
Liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ tesaṁ,
aññamaññā hi jātiyo.
[¶19] Know the quadrupeds, too,
both small and large.
They’re defined by birth,
for species are indeed diverse.
> Pali: Catuppadepi jānātha,
khuddake ca mahallake;
Liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ tesaṁ,
aññamaññā hi jātiyo.
[¶20] Know, too, the long-backed snakes,
crawling on their bellies.
They’re defined by birth,
for species are indeed diverse.
> Pali: Pādudarepi jānātha,
urage dīghapiṭṭhike;
Liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ tesaṁ,
aññamaññā hi jātiyo.
[¶21] Next know the fish,
whose habitat is the water.
They’re defined by birth,
for species are indeed diverse.
> Pali: Tato macchepi jānātha,
udake vārigocare;
Liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ tesaṁ,
aññamaññā hi jātiyo.
[¶22] Next know the birds,
winged chariots in flight.
They’re defined by birth,
for species are indeed diverse.
> Pali: Tato pakkhīpi jānātha,
pattayāne vihaṅgame;
Liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ tesaṁ,
aññamaññā hi jātiyo.
[¶23] While the differences between these species
are defined by birth,
the differences between humans
are not defined by birth.
> Pali: Yathā etāsu jātīsu,
liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ puthu;
Evaṁ natthi manussesu,
liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ puthu.
[¶24] Not by hair nor by head,
not by ear nor by eye,
not by mouth nor by nose,
not by lips nor by eyebrow,
> Pali: Na kesehi na sīsehi,
na kaṇṇehi na akkhīhi;
Na mukhena na nāsāya,
na oṭṭhehi bhamūhi vā.
[¶25] not by shoulder nor by neck,
not by belly nor by back,
not by buttocks nor by breast,
not by groin nor by genitals,
> Pali: Na gīvāya na aṁsehi,
na udarena na piṭṭhiyā;
Na soṇiyā na urasā,
na sambādhe na methune.
[¶26] not by hands nor by feet,
not by fingers nor by nails,
not by knees nor by thighs,
not by color nor by voice:
none of these are defined by birth
as it is for other species.
> Pali: Na hatthehi na pādehi,
naṅgulīhi nakhehi vā;
Na jaṅghāhi na ūrūhi,
na vaṇṇena sarena vā;
Liṅgaṁ jātimayaṁ neva,
yathā aññāsu jātisu.
[¶27] In specific human bodies
you can’t find such distinctions.
The distinctions among humans
are spoken of by convention.
> Pali: Paccattañca sarīresu,
manussesvetaṁ na vijjati;
Vokārañca manussesu,
samaññāya pavuccati.
[¶28] Anyone among humans
who lives off keeping cattle:
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a farmer, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
gorakkhaṁ upajīvati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
kassako so na brāhmaṇo.
[¶29] Anyone among humans
who lives off various professions:
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a professional, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
puthusippena jīvati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
sippiko so na brāhmaṇo.
[¶30] Anyone among humans
who lives off trade:
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a trader, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
vohāraṁ upajīvati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
vāṇijo so na brāhmaṇo.
[¶31] Anyone among humans
who lives off serving others:
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a servant, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
parapessena jīvati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
pessako so na brāhmaṇo.
[¶32] Anyone among humans
who lives off stealing:
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a bandit, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
adinnaṁ upajīvati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
coro eso na brāhmaṇo.
[¶33] Anyone among humans
who lives off archery:
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a warrior, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
issatthaṁ upajīvati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
yodhājīvo na brāhmaṇo.
[¶34] Anyone among humans
who lives off priesthood:
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a sacrificer, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
porohiccena jīvati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
yājako so na brāhmaṇo.
[¶35] Anyone among humans
who taxes village and nation,
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as a ruler, not a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo hi koci manussesu,
gāmaṁ raṭṭhañca bhuñjati;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
rājā eso na brāhmaṇo.
[¶36] I don’t call someone a brahmin
after the mother’s womb they’re born from.
If they still have attachments,
they’re just someone who says ‘worthy’.
Having nothing, taking nothing:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Na cāhaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ brūmi,
yonijaṁ mattisambhavaṁ;
Bhovādi nāma so hoti,
sace hoti sakiñcano;
Akiñcanaṁ anādānaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶37] Having cut off all fetters
they have no anxiety;
they’ve slipped their chains and are detached:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Sabbasaṁyojanaṁ chetvā,
yo ve na paritassati;
Saṅgātigaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶38] They’ve cut the strap and harness,
the halter and bridle too;
with cross-bar lifted, they’re awakened:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Chetvā naddhiṁ varattañca,
sandānaṁ sahanukkamaṁ;
Ukkhittapalighaṁ buddhaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶39] Abuse, killing, caging:
they endure these without anger.
Patience is their powerful army:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Akkosaṁ vadhabandhañca,
aduṭṭho yo titikkhati;
Khantībalaṁ balānīkaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶40] Not irritable or pretentious,
dutiful in precepts and observances,
tamed, bearing their final body:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Akkodhanaṁ vatavantaṁ,
sīlavantaṁ anussadaṁ;
Dantaṁ antimasārīraṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶41] Like water from a lotus leaf,
like a mustard seed off the point of a pin,
sensual pleasures slip off them:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Vāripokkharapatteva,
āraggeriva sāsapo;
Yo na limpati kāmesu,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶42] They understand for themselves
the end of suffering in this life;
with burden put down, detached:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo dukkhassa pajānāti,
idheva khayamattano;
Pannabhāraṁ visaṁyuttaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶43] Deep in wisdom, intelligent,
expert in the path and what is not the path;
arrived at the highest goal:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Gambhīrapaññaṁ medhāviṁ,
maggāmaggassa kovidaṁ;
Uttamatthamanuppattaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶44] Mixing with neither
householders nor the homeless;
a migrant with no bastion, few in wishes:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Asaṁsaṭṭhaṁ gahaṭṭhehi,
anāgārehi cūbhayaṁ;
Anokasārimappicchaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶45] They’ve laid aside violence
against creatures firm and frail;
not killing or making others kill:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Nidhāya daṇḍaṁ bhūtesu,
tasesu thāvaresu ca;
Yo na hanti na ghāteti,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶46] Not fighting among those who fight,
quenched among those who have taken up arms,
not grasping among those who grasp:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Aviruddhaṁ viruddhesu,
attadaṇḍesu nibbutaṁ;
Sādānesu anādānaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶47] They’ve discarded greed and hate,
along with conceit and contempt,
like a mustard seed off the point of a pin:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yassa rāgo ca doso ca,
māno makkho ca ohito;
Sāsaporiva āraggā,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶48] The words they utter
are polished, informative, and true,
and don’t offend anyone:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Akakkasaṁ viññāpaniṁ,
giraṁ saccaṁ udīraye;
Yāya nābhisajje kiñci,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶49] They don’t steal anything in the world,
long or short,
tiny or huge, beautiful or ugly:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo ca dīghaṁ va rassaṁ vā,
aṇuṁ thūlaṁ subhāsubhaṁ;
Loke adinnaṁ nādeti,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶50] They have no hope
for this world or the next;
with no need for hope, detached:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Āsā yassa na vijjanti,
asmiṁ loke paramhi ca;
Nirāsāsaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶51] They have no clinging,
knowledge has freed them of indecision,
they’ve arrived at the objective of freedom from death:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yassālayā na vijjanti,
aññāya akathaṅkathiṁ;
Amatogadhaṁ anuppattaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶52] They’ve escaped the chain
of both good and bad deeds;
sorrowless, stainless, pure:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yodhapuññañca pāpañca,
ubho saṅgaṁ upaccagā;
Asokaṁ virajaṁ suddhaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶53] Pure as the spotless moon,
clear and unclouded,
they’ve ended relish for rebirth:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Candaṁ va vimalaṁ suddhaṁ,
vippasannaṁ anāvilaṁ;
Nandībhavaparikkhīṇaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶54] They’ve got past this grueling swamp
of delusion, transmigration.
Meditating in stillness, free of indecision,
they have crossed over to the far shore.
They’re quenched by not grasping:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yo imaṁ palipathaṁ duggaṁ,
saṁsāraṁ mohamaccagā;
Tiṇṇo pāraṅgato jhāyī,
anejo akathaṅkathī;
Anupādāya nibbuto,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶55] They’ve given up sensual pleasures,
and have gone forth from lay life;
they’ve ended rebirth in the sensual realm:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yodhakāme pahantvāna,
anāgāro paribbaje;
Kāmabhavaparikkhīṇaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶56] They’ve given up craving,
and have gone forth from lay life;
they’ve ended craving to be reborn:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yodhataṇhaṁ pahantvāna,
anāgāro paribbaje;
Taṇhābhavaparikkhīṇaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶57] They’ve thrown off the human yoke,
and slipped out of the heavenly yoke;
unyoked from all yokes:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Hitvā mānusakaṁ yogaṁ,
dibbaṁ yogaṁ upaccagā;
Sabbayogavisaṁyuttaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶58] Giving up desire and discontent,
they’re cooled and free of attachments;
a hero, master of the whole world:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Hitvā ratiñca aratiṁ,
sītībhūtaṁ nirūpadhiṁ;
Sabbalokābhibhuṁ vīraṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶59] They know the passing away
and rebirth of all beings;
unattached, holy, awakened:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Cutiṁ yo vedi sattānaṁ,
upapattiñca sabbaso;
Asattaṁ sugataṁ buddhaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶60] Gods, centaurs, and humans
don’t know their destiny;
the perfected ones with defilements ended:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yassa gatiṁ na jānanti,
devā gandhabbamānusā;
Khīṇāsavaṁ arahantaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶61] They have nothing before or after,
or even in between.
Having nothing, taking nothing:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Yassa pure ca pacchā ca,
majjhe ca natthi kiñcanaṁ;
Akiñcanaṁ anādānaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶62] Captain of the herd, excellent hero,
great seer and victor;
unstirred, washed, awakened:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Usabhaṁ pavaraṁ vīraṁ,
mahesiṁ vijitāvinaṁ;
Anejaṁ nhātakaṁ buddhaṁ,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶63] They who know their past lives,
see heaven and places of loss,
and have attained the end of rebirth:
that’s who I declare a brahmin.
> Pali: Pubbenivāsaṁ yo vedi,
saggāpāyañca passati;
Atho jātikkhayaṁ patto,
tamahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ.
[¶64] For name and clan are formulated
as mere convention in the world.
Produced by mutual agreement,
they’re formulated in each case.
> Pali: Samaññā hesā lokasmiṁ,
nāmagottaṁ pakappitaṁ;
Sammuccā samudāgataṁ,
tattha tattha pakappitaṁ.
[¶65] For a long time this misconception
has prejudiced those who don’t understand.
Ignorant, they declare
that one is a brahmin by birth.
> Pali: Dīgharattānusayitaṁ,
diṭṭhigatamajānataṁ;
Ajānantā no pabrunti,
jātiyā hoti brāhmaṇo.
[¶66] You’re not a brahmin by birth,
nor by birth a non-brahmin.
You’re a brahmin by your deeds,
and by deeds a non-brahmin.
> Pali: Na jaccā brāhmaṇo hoti,
na jaccā hoti abrāhmaṇo;
Kammunā brāhmaṇo hoti,
kammunā hoti abrāhmaṇo.
[¶67] You’re a farmer by your deeds,
by deeds you’re a professional;
you’re a trader by your deeds,
by deeds are you a servant;
> Pali: Kassako kammunā hoti,
sippiko hoti kammunā;
Vāṇijo kammunā hoti,
pessako hoti kammunā.
[¶68] you’re a bandit by your deeds,
by deeds you’re a warrior;
you’re a sacrificer by your deeds,
by deeds you’re a ruler.
> Pali: Coropi kammunā hoti,
yodhājīvopi kammunā;
Yājako kammunā hoti,
rājāpi hoti kammunā.
[¶69] In this way the astute regard deeds
in accord with truth.
Seeing dependent origination,
they’re expert in deeds and their results.
> Pali: Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ,
kammaṁ passanti paṇḍitā;
Paṭiccasamuppādadassā,
kammavipākakovidā.
[¶70] Deeds make the world go on,
deeds make people go on;
sentient beings are bound by deeds,
like a moving chariot’s linchpin.
> Pali: Kammunā vattati loko,
kammunā vattati pajā;
Kammanibandhanā sattā,
rathassāṇīva yāyato.
[¶71] By fervor and spiritual practice,
by restraint and by self-control:
that’s how to become a brahmin,
this is the supreme brahmin.
> Pali: Tapena brahmacariyena,
saṁyamena damena ca;
Etena brāhmaṇo hoti,
etaṁ brāhmaṇamuttamaṁ.
[¶72] Accomplished in the three knowledges,
peaceful, with rebirth ended,
know them, Vāseṭṭha,
as the Divinity and Sakka to the wise.”
> Pali: Tīhi vijjāhi sampanno,
santo khīṇapunabbhavo;
Evaṁ vāseṭṭha jānāhi,
brahmā sakko vijānatan”ti.
[¶73] When he had spoken, Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja said to him, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. We go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember us as lay followers who have gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā māṇavā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsake no bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gate”ti.
[¶74] > Pali: Vāseṭṭhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 108. MN 99 · With Subha
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/108/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/108/#p-N
[¶0] MN 99 · With Subha
> Pali: MN 99 · Subhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the student Subha, Todeyya’s son, was residing in Sāvatthī at a certain householder’s home on some business. Then Subha said to that householder, “Householder, I have heard that Sāvatthī does not lack for perfected ones. What ascetic or brahmin might we pay homage to today?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena subho māṇavo todeyyaputto sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasati aññatarassa gahapatissa nivesane kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto yassa gahapatissa nivesane paṭivasati taṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, gahapati: ‘avivittā sāvatthī arahantehī’ti. Kaṁ nu khvajja samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā payirupāseyyāmā”ti?
[¶3] “Sir, the Buddha is staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. You can pay homage to him.”
> Pali: “Ayaṁ, bhante, bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Taṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ payirupāsassū”ti.
[¶4] Acknowledging that householder, Subha went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto tassa gahapatissa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶5] “Worthy Gotama, the brahmins say: ‘Laypeople succeed in the system of the skillful teaching, not renunciates.’ What do you say about this?”
> Pali: “brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, evamāhaṁsu: ‘gahaṭṭho ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ, na pabbajito ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan’ti. Idha bhavaṁ gotamo kimāhā”ti?
[¶6] “On this point, student, I speak after analyzing the question, not one-sidedly. I don’t praise wrong practice for either laypeople or renunciates. Because of wrong practice, neither laypeople nor renunciates succeed in the system of the skillful teaching. I praise right practice for both laypeople and renunciates. Because of right practice, both laypeople and renunciates succeed in the system of the skillful teaching.”
> Pali: “Vibhajjavādo kho ahamettha, māṇava; nāhamettha ekaṁsavādo. Gihissa vāhaṁ, māṇava, pabbajitassa vā micchāpaṭipattiṁ na vaṇṇemi. Gihī vā hi, māṇava, pabbajito vā micchāpaṭipanno micchāpaṭipattādhikaraṇahetu na ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalaṁ. Gihissa vāhaṁ, māṇava, pabbajitassa vā sammāpaṭipattiṁ vaṇṇemi. Gihī vā hi, māṇava, pabbajito vā sammāpaṭipanno sammāpaṭipattādhikaraṇahetu ārādhako hoti ñāyaṁ dhammaṁ kusalan”ti.
[¶7] “Worthy Gotama, the brahmins say: ‘Since the work of the lay life has many obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings it is very fruitful. But since the work of the renunciate has few obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings it is not very fruitful.’ What do you say about this?”
> Pali: “Brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, evamāhaṁsu: ‘mahaṭṭhamidaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti; appaṭṭhamidaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ pabbajjā kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaphalaṁ hotī’ti. Idha bhavaṁ gotamo kimāhā”ti.
[¶8] “On this point, too, I speak after analyzing the question, not one-sidedly. Some work has many obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it fails it’s not very fruitful. Some work has many obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it succeeds it is very fruitful. Some work has few obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it fails it’s not very fruitful. Some work has few obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it succeeds it is very fruitful.
> Pali: “Etthāpi kho ahaṁ, māṇava, vibhajjavādo; nāhamettha ekaṁsavādo. Atthi, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ, vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti; atthi, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ, sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti; atthi, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ, vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti; atthi, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti.
[¶9] And what work has many obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it fails it’s not very fruitful? Farming. And what work has many obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it succeeds it is very fruitful? Again, it is farming. And what work has few obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it fails it’s not very fruitful? Trade. And what work has few obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and when it succeeds it is very fruitful? Again, it’s trade.
> Pali: Katamañca, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti? Kasi kho, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti. Katamañca, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti? Kasiyeva kho, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti. Katamañca, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti? Vaṇijjā kho, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti. Katamañca, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti? Vaṇijjāyeva kho, māṇava, kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti.
[¶10] The lay life is like farming in that it’s work with many obligations and when it fails it’s not very fruitful; but when it succeeds it is very fruitful. The renunciate life is like trade in that it’s work with few obligations and when it fails it’s not very fruitful; but when it succeeds it is very fruitful.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, kasi kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti; evameva kho, māṇava, gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, kasiyeva kammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti; evameva kho, māṇava, gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānaṁ mahaṭṭhaṁ mahākiccaṁ mahādhikaraṇaṁ mahāsamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, vaṇijjā kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti; evameva kho, māṇava, pabbajjā kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ vipajjamānaṁ appaphalaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, vaṇijjāyeva kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hoti; evameva kho, māṇava, pabbajjā kammaṭṭhānaṁ appaṭṭhaṁ appakiccaṁ appādhikaraṇaṁ appasamārambhaṁ sampajjamānaṁ mahapphalaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶11] “Worthy Gotama, the brahmins prescribe five things for making merit and succeeding in the skillful.”
> Pali: “Brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāyā”ti.
[¶12] > Pali: “Ye te, māṇava, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāya—
[¶13] “If you don’t mind, please explain these in this assembly.”
> Pali: sace te agaru— sādhu te pañca dhamme imasmiṁ parisati bhāsassū”ti.
[¶14] “It’s no trouble when good fellows such as yourself are sitting here.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, bho gotama, garu yatthassu bhavanto vā nisinno bhavantarūpo vā”ti.
[¶15] “Well, speak then, student.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, māṇava, bhāsassū”ti.
[¶16] “Worthy Gotama, truth is the first thing. Fervor is the second thing. Chastity is the third thing. Recitation is the fourth thing. Generosity is the fifth thing. These are the five things that the brahmins prescribe for making merit and succeeding in the skillful. What do you say about this?”
> Pali: “Saccaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāya. Tapaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā dutiyaṁ dhammaṁ paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāya. Brahmacariyaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā tatiyaṁ dhammaṁ paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāya. Ajjhenaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā catutthaṁ dhammaṁ paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāya. Cāgaṁ kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā pañcamaṁ dhammaṁ paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāya. Brāhmaṇā, bho gotama, ime pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya, kusalassa ārādhanāyāti. Idha bhavaṁ gotamo kimāhā”ti?
[¶17] “Well, student, is there even a single one of the brahmins who says this: ‘I declare the result of these five things after realizing it with my own insight’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, māṇava, atthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekabrāhmaṇopi yo evamāha: ‘ahaṁ imesaṁ pañcannaṁ dhammānaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā vipākaṁ pavedemī’”ti?
[¶18] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶19] “Well, is there even a single tutor of the brahmins, or a tutor’s tutor, or anyone back to the seventh generation of tutors, who says this: ‘I declare the result of these five things after realizing it with my own insight’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, māṇava, atthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyopi ekācariyapācariyopi yāva sattamā ācariyamahayugāpi yo evamāha: ‘ahaṁ imesaṁ pañcannaṁ dhammānaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā vipākaṁ pavedemī’”ti?
[¶20] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶21] “Well, what of the ancient seers of the brahmins, namely Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamadaggi, Aṅgīrasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, and Bhagu? They were the authors and propagators of the hymns. Their hymnal was sung and propagated and compiled in ancient times; and these days, brahmins continue to sing and chant it, chanting what was chanted and teaching what was taught. Did even they say: ‘We declare the result of these five things after realizing it with our own insight’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, māṇava, yepi te brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti bhāsitamanubhāsanti vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, tepi evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayaṁ imesaṁ pañcannaṁ dhammānaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā vipākaṁ pavedemā’”ti?
[¶22] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶23] “So, student, it seems that there is not a single one of the brahmins, not even anyone back to the seventh generation of tutors, nor even the ancient seers of the brahmins who says: ‘We declare the result of these five things after realizing it with our own insight.’
> Pali: “Iti kira, māṇava, natthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekabrāhmaṇopi yo evamāha: ‘ahaṁ imesaṁ pañcannaṁ dhammānaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā vipākaṁ pavedemī’ti; natthi koci brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyopi ekācariyapācariyopi yāva sattamā ācariyamahayugāpi yo evamāha: ‘ahaṁ imesaṁ pañcannaṁ dhammānaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā vipākaṁ pavedemī’ti; yepi te brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti bhāsitamanubhāsanti vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu. Tepi na evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayaṁ imesaṁ pañcannaṁ dhammānaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā vipākaṁ pavedemā’ti.
[¶24] Suppose there was a queue of blind men, each holding the one in front: the first one does not see, the middle one does not see, and the last one does not see. In the same way, it seems to me that the brahmins’ statement turns out to be comparable to a queue of blind men: the first one does not see, the middle one does not see, and the last one does not see.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, andhaveṇi paramparāsaṁsattā purimopi na passati majjhimopi na passati pacchimopi na passati; evameva kho, māṇava, andhaveṇūpamaṁ maññe brāhmaṇānaṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjati—purimopi na passati majjhimopi na passati pacchimopi na passatī”ti.
[¶25] When he said this, Subha became angry and upset with the Buddha because of the simile of the queue of blind men. He even attacked and badmouthed the Buddha himself, saying, “The ascetic Gotama will be worsted!” He said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavatā andhaveṇūpamena vuccamāno kupito anattamano bhagavantaṁyeva khuṁsento bhagavantaṁyeva vambhento bhagavantaṁyeva vadamāno: “samaṇo gotamo pāpito bhavissatī”ti bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶26] “Worthy Gotama, the brahmin Pokkharasāti Upamañña of the Subhaga Forest says: ‘This is exactly what happens with some ascetics and brahmins. They claim to have a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones. But their statement turns out to be a joke—mere words, vacuous and hollow. For how on earth can a human being know or see or realize a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones? That is not possible.’”
> Pali: “brāhmaṇo, bho gotama, pokkharasāti opamañño subhagavaniko evamāha: ‘evameva panidhekacce samaṇabrāhmaṇā uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ paṭijānanti. Tesamidaṁ bhāsitaṁ hassakaṁyeva sampajjati, nāmakaṁyeva sampajjati, rittakaṁyeva sampajjati, tucchakaṁyeva sampajjati. Kathañhi nāma manussabhūto uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ ñassati vā dakkhati vā sacchi vā karissatīti— netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’”ti?
[¶27] “But student, does Pokkharasāti understand the minds of all these ascetics and brahmins, having encompassed them with his mind?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, māṇava, brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti opamañño subhagavaniko sabbesaṁyeva samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānātī”ti?
[¶28] “Worthy Gotama, Pokkharasāti doesn’t even understand the mind of his own bonded maid Puṇṇikā, so how could he know all those ascetics and brahmins?”
> Pali: “Sakāyapi hi, bho gotama, puṇṇikāya dāsiyā brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti opamañño subhagavaniko cetasā ceto paricca na pajānāti, kuto pana sabbesaṁyeva samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānissatī”ti?
[¶29] “Suppose there was a person blind from birth. They couldn’t see sights that are dark or bright, or blue, yellow, red, or magenta. They couldn’t see even and uneven ground, or the stars, or the moon and sun. They’d say: ‘There’s no such thing as dark and bright sights, and no one who sees them. There’s no such thing as blue, yellow, red, magenta, even and uneven ground, stars, moon and sun, and no one who sees these things. I don’t know it or see it, therefore it doesn’t exist.’ Would they be speaking rightly?”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, māṇava, jaccandho puriso na passeyya kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, na passeyya nīlakāni rūpāni, na passeyya pītakāni rūpāni, na passeyya lohitakāni rūpāni, na passeyya mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, na passeyya samavisamaṁ, na passeyya tārakarūpāni, na passeyya candimasūriye. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘natthi kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, natthi kaṇhasukkānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; natthi nīlakāni rūpāni, natthi nīlakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; natthi pītakāni rūpāni, natthi pītakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; natthi lohitakāni rūpāni, natthi lohitakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; natthi mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, natthi mañjiṭṭhakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; natthi samavisamaṁ, natthi samavisamassa dassāvī; natthi tārakarūpāni, natthi tārakarūpānaṁ dassāvī; natthi candimasūriyā, natthi candimasūriyānaṁ dassāvī. Ahametaṁ na jānāmi, ahametaṁ na passāmi; tasmā taṁ natthī’ti. Sammā nu kho so, māṇava, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶30] “No, worthy Gotama. There are such things as dark and bright sights, and one who sees them. There is blue, yellow, red, magenta, even and uneven ground, stars, moon and sun, and one who sees these things. So it’s not right to say this: ‘I don’t know it or see it, therefore it doesn’t exist.’”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Atthi kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, atthi kaṇhasukkānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; atthi nīlakāni rūpāni, atthi nīlakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; atthi pītakāni rūpāni, atthi pītakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; atthi lohitakāni rūpāni, atthi lohitakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; atthi mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, atthi mañjiṭṭhakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī; atthi samavisamaṁ, atthi samavisamassa dassāvī; atthi tārakarūpāni, atthi tārakarūpānaṁ dassāvī; atthi candimasūriyā, atthi candimasūriyānaṁ dassāvī. ‘Ahametaṁ na jānāmi, ahametaṁ na passāmi; tasmā taṁ natthī’ti; na hi so, bho gotama, sammā vadamāno vadeyyā”ti.
[¶31] “In the same way, Pokkharasāti is blind and sightless. It is quite impossible for him to know or see or realize a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, māṇava, brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti opamañño subhagavaniko andho acakkhuko. So vata uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ ñassati vā dakkhati vā sacchi vā karissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶32] What do you think, student? There are well-to-do brahmins of Kosala such as the brahmins Caṅkī, Tārukkha, Pokkharasāti, Jānussoṇi, and your father Todeyya. What’s better for them: that their speech agrees or disagrees with the consensus of opinion?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māṇava, ye te kosalakā brāhmaṇamahāsālā, seyyathidaṁ— caṅkī brāhmaṇo tārukkho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti brāhmaṇo jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo pitā ca te todeyyo, katamā nesaṁ seyyo, yaṁ vā te sammuccā vācaṁ bhāseyyuṁ yaṁ vā asammuccā”ti?
[¶33] “That it agrees, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Sammuccā, bho gotama”.
[¶34] “What’s better for them: that their speech is thoughtful or thoughtless?”
> Pali: “Katamā nesaṁ seyyo, yaṁ vā te mantā vācaṁ bhāseyyuṁ yaṁ vā amantā”ti?
[¶35] “That it is thoughtful.”
> Pali: “Mantā, bho gotama”.
[¶36] “What’s better for them: that their speech follows reflection or is unreflective?”
> Pali: “Katamā nesaṁ seyyo, yaṁ vā te paṭisaṅkhāya vācaṁ bhāseyyuṁ yaṁ vā appaṭisaṅkhāyā”ti?
[¶37] “That it follows reflection.”
> Pali: “Paṭisaṅkhāya, bho gotama”.
[¶38] “What’s better for them: that their speech is beneficial or worthless?”
> Pali: “Katamā nesaṁ seyyo, yaṁ vā te atthasaṁhitaṁ vācaṁ bhāseyyuṁ yaṁ vā anatthasaṁhitan”ti?
[¶39] “That it’s beneficial.”
> Pali: “Atthasaṁhitaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶40] “What do you think, student? If this is so, does Pokkharasāti’s speech agree or disagree with the consensus of opinion?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māṇava, yadi evaṁ sante, brāhmaṇena pokkharasātinā opamaññena subhagavanikena sammuccā vācā bhāsitā asammuccā”ti?
[¶41] “It disagrees, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Asammuccā, bho gotama”.
[¶42] “Is it thoughtful or thoughtless?”
> Pali: “Mantā vācā bhāsitā amantā vā”ti?
[¶43] “Thoughtless.”
> Pali: “Amantā, bho gotama”.
[¶44] “Is it reflective or unreflective?”
> Pali: “Paṭisaṅkhāya vācā bhāsitā appaṭisaṅkhāyā”ti?
[¶45] “Unreflective.”
> Pali: “Appaṭisaṅkhāya, bho gotama”.
[¶46] “Is it beneficial or worthless?”
> Pali: “Atthasaṁhitā vācā bhāsitā anatthasaṁhitā”ti?
[¶47] “Worthless.”
> Pali: “Anatthasaṁhitā, bho gotama”.
[¶48] “Student, there are these five hindrances. What five? The hindrances of sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt. These are the five hindrances. Pokkharasāti is obstructed, hindered, engulfed, and enveloped by these five hindrances. It is quite impossible for him to know or see or realize a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones.
> Pali: “Pañca kho ime, māṇava, nīvaraṇā. Katame pañca? Kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṁ, byāpādanīvaraṇaṁ, thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṁ uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṁ, vicikicchānīvaraṇaṁ— ime kho, māṇava, pañca nīvaraṇā. Imehi kho, māṇava, pañcahi nīvaraṇehi brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti opamañño subhagavaniko āvuto nivuto ophuṭo pariyonaddho. So vata uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ ñassati vā dakkhati vā sacchi vā karissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶49] There are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? There are sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. There are sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Pañca kho ime, māṇava, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā; sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhā viññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, māṇava, pañca kāmaguṇā.
[¶50] Pokkharasāti enjoys these five kinds of sensual stimulation, tied, infatuated, attached, blind to the drawbacks, and not understanding the escape. It is quite impossible for him to know or see or realize a superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones.
> Pali: Imehi kho, māṇava, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti opamañño subhagavaniko gathito mucchito ajjhopanno anādīnavadassāvī anissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati. So vata uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ ñassati vā dakkhati vā sacchi vā karissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶51] What do you think, student? Which would have better flames, color, and radiance: a fire that depends on grass and logs as fuel, or one that does not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māṇava, yaṁ vā tiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṁ paṭicca aggiṁ jāleyya yaṁ vā nissaṭṭhatiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṁ aggiṁ jāleyya, katamo nu khvāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro cā”ti?
[¶52] “If it were possible for a fire to burn without depending on grass and logs as fuel, that would have better flames, color, and radiance.”
> Pali: “Sace taṁ, bho gotama, ṭhānaṁ nissaṭṭhatiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṁ aggiṁ jāletuṁ, svāssa aggi accimā ceva vaṇṇavā ca pabhassaro cā”ti.
[¶53] “But it isn’t possible, except by psychic power. Rapture that depends on the five kinds of sensual stimulation is like a fire that depends on grass and logs as fuel. Rapture that’s apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities is like a fire that doesn’t depend on grass and logs as fuel.
> Pali: “Aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ, māṇava, anavakāso yaṁ nissaṭṭhatiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṁ aggiṁ jāleyya aññatra iddhimatā. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, tiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṁ paṭicca aggi jalati tathūpamāhaṁ, māṇava, imaṁ pītiṁ vadāmi yāyaṁ pīti pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, nissaṭṭhatiṇakaṭṭhupādāno aggi jalati tathūpamāhaṁ, māṇava, imaṁ pītiṁ vadāmi yāyaṁ pīti aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi.
[¶54] And what is rapture that’s apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is rapture that’s apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities.
> Pali: Katamā ca, māṇava, pīti aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi? Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, māṇava, pīti aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi.
[¶55] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This too is rapture that’s apart from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, māṇava, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā … dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, māṇava, pīti aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehi.
[¶56] Of the five things that the brahmins prescribe for making merit and succeeding in the skillful, which do they say is the most fruitful?”
> Pali: Ye te, māṇava, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya, katamettha brāhmaṇā dhammaṁ mahapphalataraṁ paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāyā”ti?
[¶57] “Generosity.”
> Pali: “Yeme, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya, cāgamettha brāhmaṇā dhammaṁ mahapphalataraṁ paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāyā”ti.
[¶58] “What do you think, student? Suppose a brahmin was setting up a grand sacrifice. Then two brahmins came along, thinking, ‘We shall participate in the grand sacrifice of the brahmin named so-and-so.’ Then one of those brahmins thought: ‘Oh, I hope that I alone get the best seat, the best drink, and the best almsfood in the refectory, not some other brahmin.’ But it’s possible that some other brahmin gets the best seat, the best drink, and the best almsfood in the refectory. Thinking, ‘Some other brahmin has got the best seat, the best drink, the best almsfood,’ they get angry and upset. What do the brahmins say is the result of this?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māṇava, idha aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyañño paccupaṭṭhito assa. Atha dve brāhmaṇā āgaccheyyuṁ: ‘itthannāmassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyaññaṁ anubhavissāmā’ti. Tatrekassa brāhmaṇassa evamassa: ‘aho vata ahameva labheyyaṁ bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ, na añño brāhmaṇo labheyya bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍan’ti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, māṇava, vijjati yaṁ añño brāhmaṇo labheyya bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ, na so brāhmaṇo labheyya bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ. ‘Añño brāhmaṇo labhati bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍaṁ, nāhaṁ labhāmi bhattagge aggāsanaṁ aggodakaṁ aggapiṇḍan’ti— iti so kupito hoti anattamano. Imassa pana, māṇava, brāhmaṇā kiṁ vipākaṁ paññapentī”ti?
[¶59] “Worthy Gotama, brahmins don’t give gifts so that others will get angry and upset. Rather, they only give gifts that are born from sympathy.”
> Pali: “Na khvettha, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā evaṁ dānaṁ denti: ‘iminā paro kupito hotu anattamano’ti. Atha khvettha brāhmaṇā anukampājātikaṁyeva dānaṁ dentī”ti.
[¶60] “In that case, isn’t this a sixth ground for making merit, namely, being born from sympathy?”
> Pali: “Evaṁ sante kho, māṇava, brāhmaṇānaṁ idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ puññakiriyavatthu hoti— yadidaṁ anukampājātikan”ti.
[¶61] “In that case, this is a sixth ground for making merit, namely, being born from sympathy.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ sante, bho gotama, brāhmaṇānaṁ idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ puññakiriyavatthu hoti— yadidaṁ anukampājātikan”ti.
[¶62] “Of the five things that the brahmins prescribe for making merit and succeeding in the skillful, where do you usually find them: among laypeople or renunciates?”
> Pali: “Ye te, māṇava, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya, ime tvaṁ pañca dhamme kattha bahulaṁ samanupassasi— gahaṭṭhesu vā pabbajitesu vā”ti?
[¶63] “Mostly among renunciates, and less so among lay people. For a layperson has many obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and they can’t always tell the truth, be fervent, be chaste, rehearse a lot, or be very generous. But a renunciate has few obligations, duties, issues, and undertakings, and they can always tell the truth, be fervent, be chaste, rehearse a lot, and be very generous. Of the five things that the brahmins prescribe for making merit and succeeding in the skillful, I usually find them among renunciates, and less so among laypeople.”
> Pali: “Yeme, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya, imāhaṁ pañca dhamme pabbajitesu bahulaṁ samanupassāmi appaṁ gahaṭṭhesu. Gahaṭṭho hi, bho gotama, mahaṭṭho mahākicco mahādhikaraṇo mahāsamārambho, na satataṁ samitaṁ saccavādī hoti; pabbajito kho pana, bho gotama, appaṭṭho appakicco appādhikaraṇo appasamārambho, satataṁ samitaṁ saccavādī hoti. Gahaṭṭho hi, bho gotama, mahaṭṭho mahākicco mahādhikaraṇo mahāsamārambho na satataṁ samitaṁ tapassī hoti … brahmacārī hoti … sajjhāyabahulo hoti … cāgabahulo hoti; pabbajito kho pana, bho gotama, appaṭṭho appakicco appādhikaraṇo appasamārambho satataṁ samitaṁ tapassī hoti … brahmacārī hoti … sajjhāyabahulo hoti … cāgabahulo hoti. Yeme, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya, imāhaṁ pañca dhamme pabbajitesu bahulaṁ samanupassāmi appaṁ gahaṭṭhesū”ti.
[¶64] “I say that the five things prescribed by the brahmins for making merit are prerequisites of the mind for developing a mind free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: “Ye te, māṇava, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya cittassāhaṁ ete parikkhāre vadāmi— yadidaṁ cittaṁ averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ tassa bhāvanāya.
[¶65] Take a mendicant who speaks the truth. Thinking, ‘I’m truthful,’ they find inspiration in the meaning and the teaching, and find joy connected with the teaching. And I say that joy connected with the skillful is a prerequisite of the mind for developing a mind free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu saccavādī hoti. So ‘saccavādīmhī’ti labhati atthavedaṁ, labhati dhammavedaṁ, labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ. Yaṁ taṁ kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ, cittassāhaṁ etaṁ parikkhāraṁ vadāmi— yadidaṁ cittaṁ averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ tassa bhāvanāya.
[¶66] Take a mendicant who is fervent … is chaste … rehearses a lot … and is very generous. Thinking, ‘I’m very generous,’ they find inspiration in the meaning and the teaching, and find joy connected with the teaching. And I say that joy connected with the skillful is a prerequisite of the mind for developing a mind free of enmity and ill will. I say that these five things prescribed by the brahmins for making merit are prerequisites of the mind for developing a mind free of enmity and ill will.”
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu tapassī hoti …pe… brahmacārī hoti …pe… sajjhāyabahulo hoti …pe… cāgabahulo hoti. So ‘cāgabahulomhī’ti labhati atthavedaṁ, labhati dhammavedaṁ, labhati dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ. Yaṁ taṁ kusalūpasaṁhitaṁ pāmojjaṁ, cittassāhaṁ etaṁ parikkhāraṁ vadāmi— yadidaṁ cittaṁ averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ tassa bhāvanāya. Ye te, māṇava, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya, cittassāhaṁ ete parikkhāre vadāmi— yadidaṁ cittaṁ averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ tassa bhāvanāyā”ti.
[¶67] When he had spoken, Subha said to him, “Worthy Gotama, I have heard that the ascetic Gotama knows a path to company with divinity.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama: ‘samaṇo gotamo brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ jānātī’”ti.
[¶68] “What do you think, student? Is the village of Naḷakāra nearby?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, māṇava, āsanne ito naḷakāragāmo, na yito dūre naḷakāragāmo”ti?
[¶69] “Yes it is, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho, āsanne ito naḷakāragāmo, na yito dūre naḷakāragāmo”ti.
[¶70] “What do you think, student? Suppose a person was born and raised in Naḷakāra. And as soon as they left the town some people asked them for the road to Naḷakāra. Would they be slow or hesitant to answer?”
> Pali: “Taṁ, kiṁ maññasi, māṇava, idhassa puriso naḷakāragāme jātavaddho; tamenaṁ naḷakāragāmato tāvadeva avasaṭaṁ naḷakāragāmassa maggaṁ puccheyyuṁ; siyā nu kho, māṇava, tassa purisassa naḷakāragāme jātavaddhassa naḷakāragāmassa maggaṁ puṭṭhassa dandhāyitattaṁ vā vitthāyitattaṁ vā”ti?
[¶71] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because they were born and raised in Naḷakāra. They’re well acquainted with all the roads to the village.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amu hi, bho gotama, puriso naḷakāragāme jātavaddho. Tassa sabbāneva naḷakāragāmassa maggāni suviditānī”ti.
[¶72] “Still, it’s possible they might be slow or hesitant to answer. But the Realized One is never slow or hesitant when questioned about the realm of divinity or the practice that leads to the realm of divinity. I understand the Divinity, the realm of divinity, and the practice that leads to the realm of divinity, practicing in accordance with which one is reborn in the realm of divinity.”
> Pali: “Siyā nu kho, māṇava, tassa purisassa naḷakāragāme jātavaddhassa naḷakāragāmassa maggaṁ puṭṭhassa dandhāyitattaṁ vā vitthāyitattaṁ vāti, na tveva tathāgatassa brahmalokaṁ vā brahmalokagāminiṁ vā paṭipadaṁ puṭṭhassa dandhāyitattaṁ vā vitthāyitattaṁ vā. Brahmānañcāhaṁ, māṇava, pajānāmi brahmalokañca brahmalokagāminiñca paṭipadaṁ; yathāpaṭipanno ca brahmalokaṁ upapanno tañca pajānāmī”ti.
[¶73] “Worthy Gotama, I have heard that the ascetic Gotama teaches a path to company with divinity. Please teach me that path.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama: ‘samaṇo gotamo brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ desetī’ti. Sādhu me bhavaṁ gotamo brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ desetū”ti.
[¶74] “Well then, student, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, māṇava, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶75] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Subha. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶76] “And what is a path to company with divinity? Firstly, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. When the heart’s release by love has been developed like this, any limited deeds they’ve done don’t remain or persist there. Suppose there was a powerful horn blower. They’d easily make themselves heard in the four quarters. In the same way, when the heart’s release by love has been developed like this, any limited deeds they’ve done don’t remain or persist there. This is a path to company with divinity.
> Pali: “Katamo ca, māṇava, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo? Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Evaṁ bhāvitāya kho, māṇava, mettāya cetovimuttiyā yaṁ pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ na taṁ tatrāvasissati, na taṁ tatrāvatiṭṭhati. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, balavā saṅkhadhamo appakasireneva cātuddisā viññāpeyya; evameva kho, māṇava …pe… evaṁ bhāvitāya kho, māṇava, mettāya cetovimuttiyā yaṁ pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ na taṁ tatrāvasissati, na taṁ tatrāvatiṭṭhati. Ayampi kho, māṇava, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo.
[¶77] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of compassion …
> Pali: “Puna caparaṁ, māṇava, bhikkhu karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶78] They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing …
> Pali: muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶79] They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. When the heart’s release by equanimity has been developed and cultivated like this, any limited deeds they’ve done don’t remain or persist there. Suppose there was a powerful horn blower. They’d easily make themselves heard in the four quarters. In the same way, when the heart’s release by equanimity has been developed and cultivated like this, any limited deeds they’ve done don’t remain or persist there. This too is a path to company with divinity.”
> Pali: upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Evaṁ bhāvitāya kho, māṇava, upekkhāya cetovimuttiyā yaṁ pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ na taṁ tatrāvasissati, na taṁ tatrāvatiṭṭhati. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, balavā saṅkhadhamo appakasireneva cātuddisā viññāpeyya; evameva kho, māṇava …pe… evaṁ bhāvitāya kho, māṇava, upekkhāya cetovimuttiyā yaṁ pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ na taṁ tatrāvasissati, na taṁ tatrāvatiṭṭhati. Ayampi kho, māṇava, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo”ti.
[¶80] When he had spoken, Subha said to him, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life. Well, now, worthy Gotama, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bho gotama, gacchāma; bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶81] “Please, student, go at your convenience.” And then Subha approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. He got up from his seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, māṇava, kālaṁ maññasī”ti. Atha kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶82] Now at that time the brahmin Jānussoṇi drove out from Sāvatthī in the middle of the day in an all-white chariot drawn by mares. He saw the student Subha coming off in the distance, and said to him, “So, worthy Bhāradvāja, where are you coming from in the middle of the day?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo sabbasetena vaḷavābhirathena sāvatthiyā niyyāti divā divassa. Addasā kho jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo subhaṁ māṇavaṁ todeyyaputtaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna subhaṁ māṇavaṁ todeyyaputtaṁ etadavoca: “handa kuto nu bhavaṁ bhāradvājo āgacchati divā divassā”ti?
[¶83] “Just now, good fellow, I’ve come from the presence of the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: “Ito hi kho ahaṁ, bho, āgacchāmi samaṇassa gotamassa santikā”ti.
[¶84] “What do you think of the ascetic Gotama’s lucidity of wisdom? Do you think he’s astute?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhavaṁ bhāradvājo samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṁ paṇḍito maññeti”?
[¶85] “Worthy sir, who am I to judge the ascetic Gotama’s lucidity of wisdom? You’d really have to be on the same level to judge his lucidity of wisdom.”
> Pali: “Ko cāhaṁ, bho, ko ca samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṁ jānissāmi? Sopi nūnassa tādisova yo samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṁ jāneyyā”ti.
[¶86] “Worthy Bhāradvāja praises the ascetic Gotama with high praise indeed.”
> Pali: “Uḷārāya khalu bhavaṁ bhāradvājo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pasaṁsāya pasaṁsatī”ti.
[¶87] “Who am I to praise the ascetic Gotama? He is praised by the praised as the best among gods and humans. The five things that the brahmins prescribe for making merit and succeeding in the skillful he says are prerequisites of the mind for developing a mind free of enmity and ill will.”
> Pali: “Ko cāhaṁ, bho, ko ca samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pasaṁsissāmi? Pasatthapasatthova so bhavaṁ gotamo seṭṭho devamanussānaṁ. Ye cime, bho, brāhmaṇā pañca dhamme paññapenti puññassa kiriyāya kusalassa ārādhanāya; cittassete samaṇo gotamo parikkhāre vadeti— yadidaṁ cittaṁ averaṁ abyābajjhaṁ tassa bhāvanāyā”ti.
[¶88] When he had spoken, Jānussoṇi got down from his chariot, arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and expressed this heartfelt sentiment three times, “King Pasenadi of Kosala is lucky, so very lucky that the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha is living in his realm!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, jāṇussoṇi brāhmaṇo sabbasetā vaḷavābhirathā orohitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā udānaṁ udānesi: “lābhā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa, suladdhalābhā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa yassa vijite tathāgato viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti.
[¶89] > Pali: Subhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 109. MN 100 · With Saṅgārava · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/109/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/109/#p-N
[¶0] MN 100 · With Saṅgārava
> Pali: MN 100 · Saṅgāravasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. Now at that time a brahmin lady named Dhanañjānī was residing at Caṇḍalakappa. She was devoted to the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha. Once, she tripped and expressed this heartfelt sentiment three times:
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ carati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ. Tena kho pana samayena dhanañjānī nāma brāhmaṇī cañcalikappe paṭivasati abhippasannā buddhe ca dhamme ca saṅghe ca. Atha kho dhanañjānī brāhmaṇī upakkhalitvā tikkhattuṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶2] “Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: “Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶3] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶4] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!”
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassā”ti.
[¶5] Now at that time the student Saṅgārava was residing in Caṇḍalakappa. He was young, newly tonsured; he was sixteen years old. He had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena saṅgāravo nāma māṇavo cañcalikappe paṭivasati tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo.
[¶6] Hearing Dhanañjānī’s exclamation, he said to her, “The brahmin lady Dhanañjānī is a disgrace! Though brahmins proficient in the three Vedas are found, she will praise that shaveling, that fake ascetic.”
> Pali: Assosi kho saṅgāravo māṇavo dhanañjāniyā brāhmaṇiyā evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsamānāya. Sutvā dhanañjāniṁ brāhmaṇiṁ etadavoca: “avabhūtāva ayaṁ dhanañjānī brāhmaṇī, parabhūtāva ayaṁ dhanañjānī brāhmaṇī, vijjamānānaṁ tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ, atha ca pana tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsissatī”ti.
[¶7] “But dearest boy, you don’t understand the Buddha’s ethics and wisdom. If you did, you’d never think of abusing or insulting him.”
> Pali: “Na hi pana tvaṁ, tāta bhadramukha, tassa bhagavato sīlapaññāṇaṁ jānāsi. Sace tvaṁ, tāta bhadramukha, tassa bhagavato sīlapaññāṇaṁ jāneyyāsi, na tvaṁ, tāta bhadramukha, taṁ bhagavantaṁ akkositabbaṁ paribhāsitabbaṁ maññeyyāsī”ti.
[¶8] “Well then, ma’am, let me know when the Buddha arrives in Caṇḍalakappa.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhoti, yadā samaṇo gotamo cañcalikappaṁ anuppatto hoti atha me āroceyyāsī”ti.
[¶9] “I will, dearest,” she replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhadramukhā”ti kho dhanañjānī brāhmaṇī saṅgāravassa māṇavassa paccassosi.
[¶10] And then the Buddha, traveling stage by stage in the Kosalan lands, arrived at Caṇḍalakappa, where he stayed in the mango grove of the Todeyya brahmins.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā kosalesu anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena cañcalikappaṁ tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā cañcalikappe viharati todeyyānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ambavane.
[¶11] Dhanañjānī heard that he had arrived. So she went to Saṅgārava and told him, adding, “Please, dearest boy, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: Assosi kho dhanañjānī brāhmaṇī: “bhagavā kira cañcalikappaṁ anuppatto, cañcalikappe viharati todeyyānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ambavane”ti. Atha kho dhanañjānī brāhmaṇī yena saṅgāravo māṇavo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā saṅgāravaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, tāta bhadramukha, so bhagavā cañcalikappaṁ anuppatto, cañcalikappe viharati todeyyānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ambavane. Yassadāni, tāta bhadramukha, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶12] “Yes, ma’am,” replied Saṅgārava. He went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho saṅgāravo māṇavo dhanañjāniyā brāhmaṇiyā paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho saṅgāravo māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶13] “Worthy Gotama, there are some ascetics and brahmins who claim to have mastered the fundamentals of the spiritual life having attained perfection and consummation of insight in this life. Where do you stand regarding these?”
> Pali: “Santi kho, bho gotama, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattā, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānanti. Tatra, bho gotama, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattā, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānanti, tesaṁ bhavaṁ gotamo katamo”ti?
[¶14] “I say there is a disparity among those who claim to have mastered the fundamentals of the spiritual life having attained perfection and consummation of insight in this life. There are some ascetics and brahmins who are oral transmitters. Through oral transmission they claim to have mastered the fundamentals of the spiritual life. For example, the brahmins who are proficient in the three Vedas. There are some ascetics and brahmins who solely by mere faith claim to have mastered the fundamentals of the spiritual life. For example, those who rely on logic and inquiry. There are some ascetics and brahmins who, having directly known for themselves the principle regarding teachings not learned before from another, claim to have mastered the fundamentals of the spiritual life. I am one of those. And here’s a way to understand that I am one of them.
> Pali: “Diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattānaṁ, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānantānampi kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, vemattaṁ vadāmi. Santi, bhāradvāja, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā anussavikā. Te anussavena diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattā, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānanti; seyyathāpi brāhmaṇā tevijjā. Santi pana, bhāradvāja, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattā, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānanti; seyyathāpi takkī vīmaṁsī. Santi, bhāradvāja, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṁyeva dhammaṁ abhiññāya diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattā, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānanti. Tatra, bhāradvāja, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṁyeva dhammaṁ abhiññāya diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattā, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānanti, tesāhamasmi. Tadamināpetaṁ, bhāradvāja, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṁyeva dhammaṁ abhiññāya diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattā, ādibrahmacariyaṁ paṭijānanti, tesāhamasmi.
[¶15] Before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I thought: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ Some time later, while still with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life—though my mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces—I shaved off my hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Idha me, bhāradvāja, pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato etadahosi: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajāpatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, aparena samayena daharova samāno susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajiṁ.
[¶16] Once I had gone forth I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso kālāma, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶17] Āḷāra Kālāma replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhāradvāja, āḷāro kālāmo maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā. Tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶18] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ‘ñāṇavādañca vadāmi, theravādañca jānāmi, passāmī’ti ca paṭijānāmi, ahañceva aññe ca.
[¶19] Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Āḷāra Kālāma declares: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditates knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti; addhā āḷāro kālāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ viharatī’ti.
[¶20] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him: ‘Reverend Kālāma, to what extent do you say you’ve realized this teaching with your own insight?’ When I said this, he declared the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhāradvāja, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhāradvāja, āḷāro kālāmo ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶21] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Āḷāra Kālāma who has faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Āḷāra Kālāma says he has realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho āḷārasseva kālāmassa atthi vīriyaṁ …pe… sati … samādhi … paññā, mayhampatthi paññā. Yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ āḷāro kālāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedeti tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶22] So I approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, ‘Reverend Kālāma, is it up to this point that you realized this teaching with your own insight, and declare having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhāradvāja, yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘ettāvatā no, āvuso kālāma, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶23] ‘I have, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho ahaṁ, āvuso, imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemī’ti.
[¶24] ‘I too have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶25] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, I’ve realized with my own insight, and declare having achieved it. So the teaching that I know, you know, and the teaching you know, I know. I am like you and you are like me. Come now, reverend! We should both lead this community together.’
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi tamahaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedemi. Iti yāhaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi, yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi tamahaṁ dhammaṁ jānāmi. Iti yādiso ahaṁ tādiso tuvaṁ, yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso ahaṁ. Ehi dāni, āvuso, ubhova santā imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharāmā’ti.
[¶26] And that is how my tutor Āḷāra Kālāma placed me, his pupil, on the same position as him, and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhāradvāja, āḷāro kālāmo ācariyo me samāno attano antevāsiṁ maṁ samānaṁ attanā samasamaṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶27] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of nothingness.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva ākiñcaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶28] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, I wish to lead the spiritual life in this teaching and training.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, āvuso, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye brahmacariyaṁ caritun’ti.
[¶29] Uddaka replied, ‘Stay, venerable. This teaching is such that a sensible person can soon realize their own denomination with their own insight and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhāradvāja, udako rāmaputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘viharatāyasmā. Tādiso ayaṁ dhammo yattha viññū puriso nacirasseva sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyā’ti.
[¶30] I quickly memorized that teaching. As far as lip-recital and verbal repetition went, I spoke the doctrine of knowledge, the elder doctrine. I claimed to know and see, and so did others.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ pariyāpuṇiṁ. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, tāvatakeneva oṭṭhapahatamattena lapitalāpanamattena ‘ñāṇavādañca vadāmi, theravādañca jānāmi, passāmī’ti ca paṭijānāmi, ahañceva aññe ca.
[¶31] Then it occurred to me, ‘It is not solely by mere faith that Rāma declared: “I realize this teaching with my own insight, and live having achieved it.” Surely he meditated knowing and seeing this teaching.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ kevalaṁ saddhāmattakena sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesi; addhā rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ vihāsī’ti.
[¶32] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, to what extent did Rāma say he’d realized this teaching with his own insight?’ When I said this, Uddaka son of Rāma declared the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhāradvāja, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kittāvatā no, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, bhāradvāja, udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ pavedesi.
[¶33] Then it occurred to me, ‘It’s not just Rāma who had faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom; I too have these things. Why don’t I make an effort to realize the same teaching that Rāma said he had realized with his own insight?’ I quickly realized that teaching with my own insight, and lived having achieved it.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘na kho rāmasseva ahosi saddhā, mayhampatthi saddhā; na kho rāmasseva ahosi vīriyaṁ …pe… sati … samādhi … paññā, mayhampatthi paññā. Yannūnāhaṁ yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmīti pavedesi tassa dhammassa sacchikiriyāya padaheyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, nacirasseva khippameva taṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶34] So I approached Uddaka son of Rāma and said to him, ‘Reverend, had Rāma realized this teaching with his own insight up to this point, and declared having achieved it?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhāradvāja, yena udako rāmaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā udakaṁ rāmaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘ettāvatā no, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti?
[¶35] ‘He had, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘Ettāvatā kho, āvuso, rāmo imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesī’ti.
[¶36] ‘I too have realized this teaching with my own insight up to this point, and live having achieved it.’
> Pali: ‘Ahampi kho, āvuso, ettāvatā imaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmī’ti.
[¶37] ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions! So the teaching that Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it, you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it. The teaching that you’ve realized with your own insight, and dwell having achieved it, Rāma had realized with his own insight, and declared having achieved it. So the teaching that Rāma directly knew, you know, and the teaching you know, Rāma directly knew. Rāma was like you and you are like Rāma. Come now, reverend! You should lead this community.’ And that is how my spiritual companion Uddaka son of Rāma placed me in the position of a tutor and honored me with high praise.
> Pali: ‘Lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi; yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharasi taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja pavedesi. Iti yaṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi taṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi, yaṁ tvaṁ dhammaṁ jānāsi taṁ dhammaṁ rāmo abhiññāsi. Iti yādiso rāmo ahosi tādiso tuvaṁ, yādiso tuvaṁ tādiso rāmo ahosi. Ehi dāni, āvuso, tuvaṁ imaṁ gaṇaṁ pariharā’ti. Iti kho, bhāradvāja, udako rāmaputto sabrahmacārī me samāno ācariyaṭṭhāne maṁ ṭhapesi, uḷārāya ca maṁ pūjāya pūjesi.
[¶38] Then it occurred to me, ‘This teaching doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ Realizing that this teaching was inadequate, I left disappointed.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘nāyaṁ dhammo nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpapattiyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, taṁ dhammaṁ analaṅkaritvā tasmā dhammā nibbijja apakkamiṁ.
[¶39] I set out to discover what is skillful, seeking the supreme state of sublime peace. Traveling stage by stage in the Magadhan lands, I arrived at the town of Senā in Uruvelā. There I saw a delightful park, a lovely grove with a flowing river that was clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby was a village to resort to for alms. Then it occurred to me, ‘This park is truly delightful, a lovely grove with a flowing river that’s clean and charming, with smooth banks. And nearby there’s a village to resort to for alms. This is good enough for striving for a gentleman wanting to strive.’ So I sat down right there, thinking: ‘This is good enough for striving.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, kiṅkusalagavesī anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ pariyesamāno magadhesu anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena uruvelā senānigamo tadavasariṁ. Tatthaddasaṁ ramaṇīyaṁ bhūmibhāgaṁ, pāsādikañca vanasaṇḍaṁ, nadiñca sandantiṁ setakaṁ supatitthaṁ ramaṇīyaṁ, samantā ca gocaragāmaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘ramaṇīyo vata bho bhūmibhāgo, pāsādiko ca vanasaṇḍo, nadī ca sandati setakā supatitthā ramaṇīyā, samantā ca gocaragāmo. Alaṁ vatidaṁ kulaputtassa padhānatthikassa padhānāyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, tattheva nisīdiṁ: ‘alamidaṁ padhānāyā’ti.
[¶40] And then these three similes, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, occurred to me. Suppose there was a green, sappy log, and it was lying in water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Bhāradvāja? By drilling the stick against that green, sappy log lying in water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, bhāradvāja, tisso upamā paṭibhaṁsu anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ udake nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhāradvāja, api nu so puriso amuṁ allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ udake nikkhittaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶41] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because it’s a green, sappy log, and it’s lying in the water. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aduñhi, bho gotama, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ, tañca pana udake nikkhittaṁ; yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti.
[¶42] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who don’t live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. They haven’t internally given up or stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are incapable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the first example that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhāradvāja, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi avūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho so ca ajjhattaṁ na suppahīno hoti na suppaṭippassaddho, opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, bhāradvāja, paṭhamā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶43] Then a second example occurred to me. Suppose there was a green, sappy log, and it was lying on dry land far from the water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Bhāradvāja? By drilling the stick against that green, sappy log on dry land far from water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Aparāpi kho maṁ, bhāradvāja, dutiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhāradvāja, api nu so puriso amuṁ allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶44] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because it’s still a green, sappy log, despite the fact that it’s lying on dry land far from water. That person will eventually get weary and frustrated.” “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. But they haven’t internally given up or stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are incapable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the second example that occurred to me.
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aduñhi, bho gotama, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ, kiñcāpi ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ; yāvadeva ca pana so puriso kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā”ti. “Evameva kho, bhāradvāja, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi vūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho so ca ajjhattaṁ na suppahīno hoti na suppaṭippassaddho, opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, abhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, bhāradvāja, dutiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
[¶45] Then a third example occurred to me. Suppose there was a dried up, withered log, and it was lying on dry land far from the water. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat. What do you think, Bhāradvāja? By drilling the stick against that dried up, withered log on dry land far from water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Aparāpi kho maṁ, bhāradvāja, tatiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, bhāradvāja, api nu so puriso amuṁ sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ ārakā udakā thale nikkhittaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶46] “Yes, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because it’s a dried up, withered log, and it’s lying on dry land far from water.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aduñhi, bho gotama, sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ, tañca pana ārakā udakā thale nikkhittan”ti.
[¶47] “In the same way, there are ascetics and brahmins who live withdrawn in body and mind from sensual pleasures. And they have internally given up and stilled desire, affection, infatuation, thirst, and passion for sensual pleasures. Regardless of whether or not they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion, they are capable of knowledge and vision, of supreme awakening. This was the third example that occurred to me. These are the three similes, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, that occurred to me.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhāradvāja, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā kāyena ceva cittena ca kāmehi vūpakaṭṭhā viharanti, yo ca nesaṁ kāmesu kāmacchando kāmasneho kāmamucchā kāmapipāsā kāmapariḷāho so ca ajjhattaṁ suppahīno hoti suppaṭippassaddho, opakkamikā cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, bhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. No cepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, bhabbāva te ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāya. Ayaṁ kho maṁ, bhāradvāja, tatiyā upamā paṭibhāsi anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā. Imā kho maṁ, bhāradvāja, tisso upamā paṭibhaṁsu anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā.
## 110. MN 100 · With Saṅgārava · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/110/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/110/#p-N
[¶0] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I, with teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of my mouth, squeeze, squash, and scorch mind with mind?’ So that’s what I did, until sweat ran from my armpits. It was like when a strong man grabs a weaker man by the head or throat or shoulder and squeezes, squashes, and crushes them. In the same way, with teeth clenched and tongue pressed against the roof of my mouth, I squeezed, squashed, and crushed mind with mind until sweat ran from my armpits. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇheyyaṁ abhinippīḷeyyaṁ abhisantāpeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhāmi abhinippīḷemi abhisantāpemi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato kacchehi sedā muccanti. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, balavā puriso dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ sīse vā gahetvā khandhe vā gahetvā abhiniggaṇheyya abhinippīḷeyya abhisantāpeyya; evameva kho me, bhāradvāja, dantebhidantamādhāya, jivhāya tāluṁ āhacca, cetasā cittaṁ abhiniggaṇhato abhinippīḷayato abhisantāpayato kacchehi sedā muccanti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, bhāradvāja, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā; sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶1] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I practice the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose. But then winds came out my ears making a severe noise, like the puffing of a blacksmith’s bellows. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu kaṇṇasotehi vātānaṁ nikkhamantānaṁ adhimatto saddo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya adhimatto saddo hoti; evameva kho me, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu kaṇṇasotehi vātānaṁ nikkhamantānaṁ adhimatto saddo hoti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, bhāradvāja, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā; sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶2] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then severe winds ground my head, like a strong man was drilling into my head with a sharp point. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, balavā puriso, tiṇhena sikharena muddhani abhimattheyya; evameva kho me, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, bhāradvāja, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā; sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶3] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then I got a severe headache, like a strong man was tightening a strong leather strap around my head. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā honti. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, balavā puriso daḷhena varattakkhaṇḍena sīse sīsaveṭhaṁ dadeyya; evameva kho, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā honti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, bhāradvāja, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā; sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶4] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then severe winds carved up my belly, like a deft butcher or their apprentice was slicing my belly open with a sharp meat cleaver. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā tiṇhena govikantanena kucchiṁ parikanteyya; evameva kho me, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, bhāradvāja, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā; sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶5] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I keep practicing the breathless absorption?’ So I cut off my breathing through my mouth and nose and ears. But then there was a severe burning in my body, like two strong men grabbing a weaker man by the arms to burn and scorch him on a pit of glowing coals. My energy was roused up and unflagging, and my mindfulness was established and lucid, but my body was disturbed, not tranquil, because I’d pushed too hard with that painful striving.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ appāṇakaṁyeva jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāse uparundhiṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhāradvāja, dve balavanto purisā dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuyā santāpeyyuṁ samparitāpeyyuṁ; evameva kho me, bhāradvāja, mukhato ca nāsato ca kaṇṇato ca assāsapassāsesu uparuddhesu adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho hoti. Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, bhāradvāja, vīriyaṁ hoti asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, sāraddho ca pana me kāyo hoti appaṭippassaddho, teneva dukkhappadhānena padhānābhitunnassa sato.
[¶6] Then some deities saw me and said, ‘The ascetic Gotama is dead.’ Others said, ‘He’s not dead, but he’s dying.’ Others said, ‘He’s not dead or dying. The ascetic Gotama is a perfected one, for that is how the perfected ones live.’
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, bhāradvāja, devatā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekaccā devatā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo, api ca kālaṁ karotī’ti. Ekaccā devatā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo, nāpi kālaṁ karoti; arahaṁ samaṇo gotamo, vihāro tveva so arahato evarūpo hotī’ti.
[¶7] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I practice completely cutting off food?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajjeyyan’ti.
[¶8] But deities came to me and said, ‘Good fellow, don’t practice totally cutting off food. If you do, we’ll infuse heavenly nectar into your pores and you will live on that.’
> Pali: Atha kho maṁ, bhāradvāja, devatā upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘mā kho tvaṁ, mārisa, sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajji. Sace kho tvaṁ, mārisa, sabbaso āhārupacchedāya paṭipajjissasi, tassa te mayaṁ dibbaṁ ojaṁ lomakūpehi ajjhohāressāma. Tāya tvaṁ yāpessasī’ti.
[¶9] Then it occurred to me, ‘If I claim to be completely fasting while these deities are infusing heavenly nectar in my pores, that would be a lie on my part.’ So I refused those deities, saying, ‘There’s no need.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘ahañceva kho pana sabbaso ajajjitaṁ paṭijāneyyaṁ, imā ca me devatā dibbaṁ ojaṁ lomakūpehi ajjhohāreyyuṁ, tāya cāhaṁ yāpeyyaṁ. Taṁ mamassa musā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, tā devatā paccācikkhāmi, ‘halan’ti vadāmi.
[¶10] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why don’t I just take a little bit of food each time, a handful of broth made from mung beans, horse gram, chickpeas, or green gram?’ So that’s what I did, until my body became severely emaciated. Due to eating so little, my major and minor limbs became like the joints of an eighty-year-old or a dying man, my bottom became like a camel’s hoof, my vertebrae stuck out like beads on a string, and my ribs were as gaunt as the broken-down rafters on an old barn. Due to eating so little, the gleam of my eyes sank deep in their sockets, like the gleam of water sunk deep down a well. Due to eating so little, my scalp shriveled and withered like a green bitter-gourd in the wind and sun. Due to eating so little, the skin of my belly stuck to my backbone, so that when I tried to rub the skin of my belly I grabbed my backbone, and when I tried to rub my backbone I rubbed the skin of my belly. Due to eating so little, when I tried to urinate or defecate I fell face down right there. Due to eating so little, when I tried to relieve my body by rubbing my limbs with my hands, the hair, rotted at its roots, fell out.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhāreyyaṁ pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ, yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ, yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ, yadi vā hareṇukayūsan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ, yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ, yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ, yadi vā hareṇukayūsaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, thokaṁ thokaṁ āhāraṁ āhārayato pasataṁ pasataṁ, yadi vā muggayūsaṁ, yadi vā kulatthayūsaṁ, yadi vā kaḷāyayūsaṁ, yadi vā hareṇukayūsaṁ, adhimattakasimānaṁ patto kāyo hoti. Seyyathāpi nāma āsītikapabbāni vā kāḷapabbāni vā; evamevassu me aṅgapaccaṅgāni bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma oṭṭhapadaṁ; evamevassu me ānisadaṁ hoti tāyevappāhāratāya; seyyathāpi nāma vaṭṭanāvaḷī; evamevassu me piṭṭhikaṇṭako uṇṇatāvanato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma jarasālāya gopānasiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti; evamevassu me phāsuḷiyo oluggaviluggā bhavanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma gambhīre udapāne udakatārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti; evamevassu me akkhikūpesu akkhitārakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā dissanti tāyevappāhāratāya. Seyyathāpi nāma tittakālābu āmakacchinno vātātapena samphuṭito hoti sammilāto; evamevassu me sīsacchavi samphuṭitā hoti sammilātā tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, ‘udaracchaviṁ parimasissāmī’ti piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi, ‘piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ parimasissāmī’ti udaracchaviṁyeva pariggaṇhāmi; yāvassu me, bhāradvāja, udaracchavi piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṁ allīnā hoti tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, ‘vaccaṁ vā muttaṁ vā karissāmī’ti tattheva avakujjo papatāmi tāyevappāhāratāya. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, imameva kāyaṁ assāsento pāṇinā gattāni anumajjāmi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, pāṇinā gattāni anumajjato pūtimūlāni lomāni kāyasmā papatanti tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶11] Then some people saw me and said: ‘The ascetic Gotama is black.’ Some said: ‘He’s not black, he’s brown.’ Some said: ‘He’s neither black nor brown. The ascetic Gotama has dingy skin.’ That’s how far the pure, bright complexion of my skin had been ruined by taking so little food.
> Pali: Apissu maṁ, bhāradvāja, manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘kāḷo samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekacce manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kāḷo samaṇo gotamo, sāmo samaṇo gotamo’ti. Ekacce manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘na kāḷo samaṇo gotamo napi sāmo, maṅguracchavi samaṇo gotamo’ti; yāvassu me, bhāradvāja, tāva parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto upahato hoti tāyevappāhāratāya.
[¶12] Then it occurred to me, ‘Whatever ascetics and brahmins have experienced painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion—whether in the past, future, or present—this is as far as it goes, no-one has done more than this. But I have not achieved any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones by this severe, grueling work. Could there be another path to awakening?’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘ye kho keci atītamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayiṁsu, etāvaparamaṁ, nayito bhiyyo; yepi hi keci anāgatamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayissanti, etāvaparamaṁ, nayito bhiyyo; yepi hi keci etarahi samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedayanti, etāvaparamaṁ, nayito bhiyyo. Na kho panāhaṁ imāya kaṭukāya dukkarakārikāya adhigacchāmi uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṁ. Siyā nu kho añño maggo bodhāyā’ti?
[¶13] Then it occurred to me, ‘I recall sitting in the cool shade of a black plum tree while my father the Sakyan was off working. Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. Could that be the path to awakening?’ Stemming from that memory came the understanding: ‘That is the path to awakening!’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ pitu sakkassa kammante sītāya jambucchāyāya nisinno vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharitā. Siyā nu kho eso maggo bodhāyā’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, satānusāri viññāṇaṁ ahosi: ‘eseva maggo bodhāyā’ti.
[¶14] Then it occurred to me, ‘Why am I afraid of that pleasure, for it has nothing to do with sensual pleasures or unskillful qualities?’ Then it occurred to me, ‘I’m not afraid of that pleasure, for it has nothing to do with sensual pleasures or unskillful qualities.’
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ tassa sukhassa bhāyāmi yaṁ taṁ sukhaṁ aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehī’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘na kho ahaṁ tassa sukhassa bhāyāmi yaṁ taṁ sukhaṁ aññatreva kāmehi aññatra akusalehi dhammehī’ti.
[¶15] Then it occurred to me, ‘I can’t achieve that pleasure with a body so severely emaciated. Why don’t I eat some solid food, some rice and porridge?’ So I ate some solid food.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhāradvāja, etadahosi: ‘na kho taṁ sukaraṁ sukhaṁ adhigantuṁ evaṁ adhimattakasimānaṁ pattakāyena. Yannūnāhaṁ oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāreyyaṁ odanakummāsan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ odanakummāsaṁ.
[¶16] Now at that time the group of five mendicants were attending on me, thinking, ‘The ascetic Gotama will tell us of any truth that he realizes.’ But when I ate some solid food, they left disappointed in me, saying, ‘The ascetic Gotama has become indulgent; he has strayed from the struggle and returned to indulgence.’
> Pali: Tena kho pana maṁ, bhāradvāja, samayena pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū paccupaṭṭhitā honti: ‘yaṁ kho samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ adhigamissati taṁ no ārocessatī’ti. Yato kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāresiṁ odanakummāsaṁ, atha me te pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū nibbijja pakkamiṁsu: ‘bāhulliko samaṇo gotamo padhānavibbhanto āvatto bāhullāyā’ti.
[¶17] After eating solid food and gathering my strength, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption … As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected were stilled, I entered and remained in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, bhāradvāja, oḷārikaṁ āhāraṁ āhāretvā balaṁ gahetvā vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶18] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward recollection of past lives. I recollected many past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. And so I recollected my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
[¶19] This was the first knowledge, which I achieved in the first watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, bhāradvāja, rattiyā paṭhame yāme paṭhamā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶20] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I saw sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understood how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi …pe…
[¶21] This was the second knowledge, which I achieved in the middle watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.
> Pali: ayaṁ kho me, bhāradvāja, rattiyā majjhime yāme dutiyā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.
[¶22] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. I truly understood: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ I truly understood: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ; ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶23] Knowing and seeing like this, my mind was freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When it was freed, I knew it was freed.
> Pali: Tassa me evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ ahosi.
[¶24] I understood: ‘Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶25] This was the third knowledge, which I achieved in the last watch of the night. Ignorance was banished and knowledge arose; darkness was banished and light arose, as happens for a meditator who is diligent, keen, and resolute.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho me, bhāradvāja, rattiyā pacchime yāme tatiyā vijjā adhigatā, avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā; tamo vihato, āloko uppanno; yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato”ti.
[¶26] When he had spoken, Saṅgārava said to the Buddha, “The striving of the worthy Gotama was indeed assiduous and that of a true person, since he is a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha. But worthy Gotama, do gods survive?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, saṅgāravo māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “aṭṭhitavataṁ bhoto gotamassa padhānaṁ ahosi, sappurisavataṁ bhoto gotamassa padhānaṁ ahosi; yathā taṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa. Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, atthi devā”ti?
[¶27] “I’ve understood about gods in terms of causes.”
> Pali: “Ṭhānaso metaṁ, bhāradvāja, viditaṁ yadidaṁ— adhidevā”ti.
[¶28] “But worthy Gotama, when asked ‘Do gods survive?’ why did you say that you have understood about gods in terms of causes? That being so, is it not hollow and false?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, bho gotama, ‘atthi devā’ti puṭṭho samāno ‘ṭhānaso metaṁ, bhāradvāja, viditaṁ yadidaṁ adhidevā’ti vadesi. Nanu, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tucchā musā hotī”ti?
[¶29] “When asked ‘Do gods survive’, whether you reply ‘Gods survive’ or ‘I’ve understood in terms of causes’ a sensible person would come to the categorical conclusion in this matter that gods survive.”
> Pali: “‘Atthi devā’ti, bhāradvāja, puṭṭho samāno ‘atthi devā’ti yo vadeyya, ‘ṭhānaso me viditā’ti yo vadeyya; atha khvettha viññunā purisena ekaṁsena niṭṭhaṁ gantabbaṁ yadidaṁ: ‘atthi devā’”ti.
[¶30] “But why didn’t you say that in the first place?”
> Pali: “Kissa pana me bhavaṁ gotamo ādikeneva na byākāsī”ti?
[¶31] “It is agreed by the eminent in the world that gods survive.”
> Pali: “Uccena sammataṁ kho etaṁ, bhāradvāja, lokasmiṁ yadidaṁ: ‘atthi devā’”ti.
[¶32] When he had spoken, Saṅgārava said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, saṅgāravo māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶33] > Pali: Saṅgāravasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶34] > Pali: Brāhmaṇavaggo niṭṭhito pañcamo.
[¶35] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶36] > Pali: Brahmāyu selassalāyano,
ghoṭamukho ca brāhmaṇo;
Caṅkī esu dhanañjāni,
vāseṭṭho subhagāravoti.
[¶37] > Pali: Idaṁ vaggānamuddānaṁ
[¶38] > Pali: Vaggo gahapati bhikkhu,
paribbājakanāmako;
Rājavaggo brāhmaṇoti,
pañca majjhimaāgame.
[¶39] > Pali: Majjhimapaṇṇāsakaṁ samattaṁ.
## 111. MN 101 · At Devadaha · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/111/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/111/#p-N
[¶0] MN 101 · At Devadaha
> Pali: MN 101 · Devadahasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, near the Sakyan town named Devadaha. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati devadahaṁ nāma sakyānaṁ nigamo. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘Everything this individual person experiences—pleasurable, painful, or neutral—is because of past deeds. So, due to eliminating past deeds by fervent mortification, and not doing any new deeds, there’s nothing to come up in the future. With no future consequence, deeds end. With the ending of deeds, suffering ends. With the ending of suffering, feeling ends. And with the ending of feeling, all suffering will have been worn away.’ Such is the doctrine of the Jain ascetics.
> Pali: “santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evaṁvādino, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā.
[¶4] I’ve gone up to the Jain ascetics who say this and said, ‘Is it really true that this is the venerables’ view?’ They admitted that it is.
> Pali: Evaṁvādāhaṁ, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhe upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino— yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti? Te ca me, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā evaṁ puṭṭhā ‘āmā’ti paṭijānanti.
[¶5] I said to them, ‘But reverends, do you know for sure that you existed in the past, and it is not the case that you did not exist?’
> Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— ahuvamheva mayaṁ pubbe, na nāhuvamhā’ti?
[¶6] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶7] ‘But reverends, do you know for sure that you did bad deeds in the past?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— akaramheva mayaṁ pubbe pāpakammaṁ, na nākaramhā’ti?
[¶8] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶9] ‘But reverends, do you know that you did bad deeds of this type or that?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— evarūpaṁ vā evarūpaṁ vā pāpakammaṁ akaramhā’ti?
[¶10] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶11] ‘But reverends, do you know that so much suffering has already been worn away? Or that so much suffering still remains to be worn away? Or that when so much suffering is worn away all suffering will have been worn away?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ, ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjīretabbaṁ, ettakamhi vā dukkhe nijjiṇṇe sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti?
[¶12] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶13] ‘But reverends, do you know about giving up unskillful qualities in this very life and embracing skillful qualities?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jānātha— diṭṭheva dhamme akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadan’ti?
[¶14] ‘No we don’t, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶15] ‘So it seems that you don’t know any of these things. In that case, it’s not appropriate for the Jain venerables to declare this.
> Pali: ‘Iti kira tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, na jānātha— ahuvamheva mayaṁ pubbe, na nāhuvamhāti, na jānātha— akaramheva mayaṁ pubbe pāpakammaṁ, na nākaramhāti, na jānātha— evarūpaṁ vā evarūpaṁ vā pāpakammaṁ akaramhāti, na jānātha— ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ, ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjīretabbaṁ, ettakamhi vā dukkhe nijjiṇṇe sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatīti, na jānātha— diṭṭheva dhamme akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadaṁ; evaṁ sante āyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ na kallamassa veyyākaraṇāya: “yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”ti.
[¶16] Now, supposing you did know these things. In that case, it would be appropriate for the Jain venerables to declare this.
> Pali: Sace pana tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, jāneyyātha— ahuvamheva mayaṁ pubbe, na nāhuvamhāti, jāneyyātha— akaramheva mayaṁ pubbe pāpakammaṁ, na nākaramhāti, jāneyyātha— evarūpaṁ vā evarūpaṁ vā pāpakammaṁ akaramhāti, jāneyyātha— ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ, ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjīretabbaṁ, ettakamhi vā dukkhe nijjiṇṇe sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatīti, jāneyyātha— diṭṭheva dhamme akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadaṁ; evaṁ sante āyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ kallamassa veyyākaraṇāya: “yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”ti.
[¶17] Suppose a man was struck by an arrow thickly smeared with poison, causing painful feelings, sharp and severe. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat them. The surgeon would cut open the wound with a scalpel, causing painful feelings, sharp and severe. They’d probe for the arrow, causing painful feelings, sharp and severe. They’d extract the arrow, causing painful feelings, sharp and severe. They’d apply cauterizing medicine to the wound, causing painful feelings, sharp and severe. After some time that wound would be healed and the skin regrown. They’d be healthy, happy, autonomous, master of themselves, able to go where they wanted.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, puriso sallena viddho assa savisena gāḷhūpalepanena; so sallassapi vedhanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyeyya. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto satthena vaṇamukhaṁ parikanteyya; so satthenapi vaṇamukhassa parikantanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyeyya. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto esaniyā sallaṁ eseyya; so esaniyāpi sallassa esanāhetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyeyya. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto sallaṁ abbuheyya; so sallassapi abbuhanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyeyya. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto agadaṅgāraṁ vaṇamukhe odaheyya; so agadaṅgārassapi vaṇamukhe odahanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyeyya. So aparena samayena rūḷhena vaṇena sañchavinā arogo assa sukhī serī sayaṁvasī yena kāmaṅgamo.
[¶18] They’d think, “Earlier I was struck by an arrow thickly smeared with poison, causing painful feelings, sharp and severe. My friends and colleagues, relatives and kin got a surgeon to treat me. At each step, the treatment was painful. But these days that wound is healed and the skin regrown. I’m healthy, happy, autonomous, my own master, able to go where I want.”
> Pali: Tassa evamassa: “ahaṁ kho pubbe sallena viddho ahosiṁ savisena gāḷhūpalepanena. Sohaṁ sallassapi vedhanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyiṁ. Tassa me mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhapesuṁ. Tassa me so bhisakko sallakatto satthena vaṇamukhaṁ parikanti; sohaṁ satthenapi vaṇamukhassa parikantanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyiṁ. Tassa me so bhisakko sallakatto esaniyā sallaṁ esi; so ahaṁ esaniyāpi sallassa esanāhetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyiṁ. Tassa me so bhisakko sallakatto sallaṁ abbuhi; sohaṁ sallassapi abbuhanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyiṁ. Tassa me so bhisakko sallakatto agadaṅgāraṁ vaṇamukhe odahi; sohaṁ agadaṅgārassapi vaṇamukhe odahanahetu dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyiṁ. Somhi etarahi rūḷhena vaṇena sañchavinā arogo sukhī serī sayaṁvasī yena kāmaṅgamo”ti.
[¶19] In the same way, reverends, if you knew about these things, it would be appropriate for the Jain venerables to declare this.
> Pali: Evameva kho, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, sace tumhe jāneyyātha— ahuvamheva mayaṁ pubbe, na nāhuvamhāti, jāneyyātha— akaramheva mayaṁ pubbe pāpakammaṁ, na nākaramhāti, jāneyyātha— evarūpaṁ vā evarūpaṁ vā pāpakammaṁ akaramhāti, jāneyyātha— ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ, ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjīretabbaṁ, ettakamhi vā dukkhe nijjiṇṇe sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatīti, jāneyyātha— diṭṭheva dhamme akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadaṁ; evaṁ sante āyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ kallamassa veyyākaraṇāya: “yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”ti.
[¶20] But since you don’t know any of these things, it’s not appropriate for the Jain venerables to declare this.’
> Pali: Yasmā ca kho tumhe, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, na jānātha— ahuvamheva mayaṁ pubbe, na nāhuvamhāti, na jānātha— akaramheva mayaṁ pubbe pāpakammaṁ, na nākaramhāti, na jānātha— evarūpaṁ vā evarūpaṁ vā pāpakammaṁ akaramhāti, na jānātha— ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ, ettakaṁ vā dukkhaṁ nijjīretabbaṁ, ettakamhi vā dukkhe nijjiṇṇe sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatīti, na jānātha— diṭṭheva dhamme akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānaṁ, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadaṁ; tasmā āyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ na kallamassa veyyākaraṇāya: “yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”’ti.
[¶21] When I said this, those Jain ascetics said to me, ‘Reverend, the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan claims to be all-knowing and all-seeing, to know and see everything without exception, thus: “Knowledge and vision are constantly and continually present to me, while walking, standing, sleeping, and waking.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, te nigaṇṭhā maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘nigaṇṭho, āvuso, nāṭaputto sabbaññū sabbadassāvī, aparisesaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paṭijānāti. “Carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṁ samitaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paccupaṭṭhitan”ti.
[¶22] He says: “O reverend Jain ascetics, you have done bad deeds in a past life. Wear them away with these severe and grueling austerities. And when in the present you are restrained in body, speech, and mind, you’re not doing any bad deeds for the future. So, due to eliminating past deeds by fervent mortification, and not doing any new deeds, there’s nothing to come up in the future. With no future consequence, deeds end. With the ending of deeds, suffering ends. With the ending of suffering, feeling ends. And with the ending of feeling, all suffering will have been worn away.” We endorse and accept this, and we are satisfied with it.’
> Pali: So evamāha: “atthi kho vo, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, pubbeva pāpakammaṁ kataṁ, taṁ imāya kaṭukāya dukkarakārikāya nijjīretha, yaṁ panettha etarahi kāyena saṁvutā vācāya saṁvutā manasā saṁvutā taṁ āyatiṁ pāpakammassa akaraṇaṁ. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”ti. Tañca panamhākaṁ ruccati ceva khamati ca, tena camhā attamanā’ti.
[¶23] When they said this, I said to them, ‘These five things can be seen to turn out in two different ways in this very life. What five? Faith, endorsement, oral transmission, reasoned train of thought, and acceptance of a view after deliberation. These are the five things that can be seen to turn out in two different ways in this very life. In this case, what faith in your teacher do you have when it comes to the past? What endorsement, oral transmission, reasoned train of thought, or acceptance of a view after deliberation?’ When I said this, I did not see any legitimate defense of their doctrine from the Jains.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhikkhave, te nigaṇṭhe etadavocaṁ: ‘pañca kho ime, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, dhammā diṭṭheva dhamme dvidhāvipākā. Katame pañca? Saddhā, ruci, anussavo, ākāraparivitakko, diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti— ime kho, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, pañca dhammā diṭṭheva dhamme dvidhāvipākā. Tatrāyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ kā atītaṁse satthari saddhā, kā ruci, ko anussavo, ko ākāraparivitakko, kā diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantī’ti. Evaṁvādī kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhesu na kañci sahadhammikaṁ vādapaṭihāraṁ samanupassāmi.
[¶24] Furthermore, I said to those Jain ascetics, ‘What do you think, reverends? At a time of intense exertion and striving do you suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion? Whereas at a time without intense exertion and striving do you not suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings due to exertion?’
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bhikkhave, te nigaṇṭhe evaṁ vadāmi: ‘taṁ kiṁ maññatha, āvuso nigaṇṭhā. Yasmiṁ vo samaye tibbo upakkamo hoti tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyetha; yasmiṁ pana vo samaye na tibbo upakkamo hoti na tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, na tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyethā’ti?
[¶25] ‘Reverend Gotama, at a time of intense exertion we suffer painful, sharp feelings due to exertion, not without intense exertion.’
> Pali: ‘Yasmiṁ no, āvuso gotama, samaye tibbo upakkamo hoti tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyāma; yasmiṁ pana no samaye na tibbo upakkamo hoti na tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, na tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyāmā’ti.
[¶26] ‘So it seems that only at a time of intense exertion do you suffer painful, sharp feelings due to exertion, not without intense exertion. In that case, it’s not appropriate for the Jain venerables to declare: “Everything this individual person experiences—pleasurable, painful, or neutral—is because of past deeds. …”
> Pali: ‘Iti kira, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, yasmiṁ vo samaye tibbo upakkamo hoti tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyetha; yasmiṁ pana vo samaye na tibbo upakkamo hoti na tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, na tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyetha. Evaṁ sante āyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ na kallamassa veyyākaraṇāya: “yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”ti.
[¶27] If at a time of intense exertion you did not suffer painful, sharp feelings due to exertion, and if without intense exertion you did experience such feelings, it would be appropriate for the Jain venerables to declare this.
> Pali: Sace, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, yasmiṁ vo samaye tibbo upakkamo hoti tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, na tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyetha; yasmiṁ pana vo samaye na tibbo upakkamo hoti na tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyetha; evaṁ sante āyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ kallamassa veyyākaraṇāya: “yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”ti.
[¶28] But since this is not the case, aren’t you experiencing painful, sharp feelings due only to your own exertion, which out of ignorance, unknowing, and confusion you misconstrue to imply: “Everything this individual person experiences—pleasurable, painful, or neutral—is because of past deeds. …”?’ When I said this, I did not see any legitimate defense of their doctrine from the Jains.
> Pali: Yasmā ca kho, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, yasmiṁ vo samaye tibbo upakkamo hoti tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyetha; yasmiṁ pana vo samaye na tibbo upakkamo hoti na tibbaṁ padhānaṁ, na tibbā tasmiṁ samaye opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyetha; te tumhe sāmaṁyeva opakkamikā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vedayamānā avijjā aññāṇā sammohā vipaccetha: “yaṁ kiñcāyaṁ purisapuggalo paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ pubbekatahetu. Iti purāṇānaṁ kammānaṁ tapasā byantībhāvā, navānaṁ kammānaṁ akaraṇā, āyatiṁ anavassavo; āyatiṁ anavassavā kammakkhayo; kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo; dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo; vedanākkhayā sabbaṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ bhavissatī”’ti. Evaṁvādīpi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhesu na kañci sahadhammikaṁ vādapaṭihāraṁ samanupassāmi.
[¶29] Furthermore, I said to those Jain ascetics, ‘What do you think, reverends? If a deed is to be experienced in this life, can exertion make it be experienced in lives to come?’
> Pali: Puna caparāhaṁ, bhikkhave, te nigaṇṭhe evaṁ vadāmi: ‘taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā samparāyavedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶30] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶31] ‘But if a deed is to be experienced in lives to come, can exertion make it be experienced in this life?’
> Pali: ‘Yaṁ panidaṁ kammaṁ samparāyavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶32] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶33] ‘What do you think, reverends? If a deed is to be experienced as pleasant, can exertion make it be experienced as painful?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ sukhavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā dukkhavedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶34] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶35] ‘But if a deed is to be experienced as painful, can exertion make it be experienced as pleasant?’
> Pali: ‘Yaṁ panidaṁ kammaṁ dukkhavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā sukhavedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶36] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶37] ‘What do you think, reverends? If a deed is to be experienced when ripe, can exertion make it be experienced when unripe?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ paripakkavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā aparipakkavedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶38] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶39] ‘But if a deed is to be experienced when unripe, can exertion make it be experienced when ripe?’
> Pali: ‘Yaṁ panidaṁ kammaṁ aparipakkavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā paripakkavedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶40] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶41] ‘What do you think, reverends? If a deed is to be experienced a lot, can exertion make it be experienced a little?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ bahuvedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā appavedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶42] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶43] ‘But if a deed is to be experienced a little, can exertion make it be experienced a lot?’
> Pali: ‘Yaṁ panidaṁ kammaṁ appavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā bahuvedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶44] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶45] ‘What do you think, reverends? If a deed is to be experienced, can exertion make it not be experienced?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññathāvuso nigaṇṭhā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ savedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā avedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶46] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶47] ‘But if a deed is not to be experienced, can exertion make it be experienced?’
> Pali: ‘Yaṁ panidaṁ kammaṁ avedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā savedanīyaṁ hotūti labbhametan’ti?
[¶48] ‘No, reverend.’
> Pali: ‘No hidaṁ, āvuso’.
[¶49] ‘So it seems that exertion cannot change the way deeds are experienced in any of these ways. This being so, your exertion and striving are fruitless.’
> Pali: ‘Iti kira, āvuso nigaṇṭhā, yamidaṁ kammaṁ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā samparāyavedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yaṁ panidaṁ kammaṁ samparāyavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ sukhavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā dukkhavedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ dukkhavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā sukhavedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ paripakkavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā aparipakkavedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ aparipakkavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā paripakkavedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ bahuvedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā appavedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ appavedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā bahuvedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ savedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā avedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ, yamidaṁ kammaṁ avedanīyaṁ taṁ upakkamena vā padhānena vā savedanīyaṁ hotūti alabbhametaṁ; evaṁ sante āyasmantānaṁ nigaṇṭhānaṁ aphalo upakkamo hoti, aphalaṁ padhānaṁ’.
[¶50] Such is the doctrine of the Jain ascetics. Saying this, the Jain ascetics deserve rebuttal and criticism on ten legitimate grounds.
> Pali: Evaṁvādī, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā. Evaṁvādīnaṁ, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhānaṁ dasa sahadhammikā vādānuvādā gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchanti.
[¶51] If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of past deeds, clearly the Jains have done bad deeds in the past, since they now experience such intense pain. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of God Almighty’s creation, clearly the Jains were created by a bad God, since they now experience such intense pain. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of circumstance and nature, clearly the Jains arise from bad circumstances, since they now experience such intense pain. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of the class of rebirth, clearly the Jains have been reborn in a bad class, since they now experience such intense pain. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of exertion in this life, clearly the Jains exert themselves badly in this life, since they now experience such intense pain.
> Pali: Sace, bhikkhave, sattā pubbekatahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā pubbe dukkaṭakammakārino yaṁ etarahi evarūpā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyanti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā issaranimmānahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā pāpakena issarena nimmitā yaṁ etarahi evarūpā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyanti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā saṅgatibhāvahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā pāpasaṅgatikā yaṁ etarahi evarūpā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyanti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā abhijātihetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā pāpābhijātikā yaṁ etarahi evarūpā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyanti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā diṭṭhadhammūpakkamahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā evarūpā diṭṭhadhammūpakkamā yaṁ etarahi evarūpā dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā vediyanti.
[¶52] The Jains deserve criticism whether or not sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of past deeds, or God Almighty’s creation, or circumstance and nature, or class of rebirth, or exertion in this life. Such is the doctrine of the Jain ascetics. The Jain ascetics who say this deserve rebuttal and criticism on these ten legitimate grounds. That’s how exertion and striving is fruitless.
> Pali: Sace, bhikkhave, sattā pubbekatahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā; no ce sattā pubbekatahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā issaranimmānahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā; no ce sattā issaranimmānahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā saṅgatibhāvahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā; no ce sattā saṅgatibhāvahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā abhijātihetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā; no ce sattā abhijātihetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā diṭṭhadhammūpakkamahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā; no ce sattā diṭṭhadhammūpakkamahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, gārayhā nigaṇṭhā. Evaṁvādī, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā. Evaṁvādīnaṁ, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhānaṁ ime dasa sahadhammikā vādānuvādā gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchanti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, aphalo upakkamo hoti, aphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶53] And how is exertion and striving fruitful? It’s when a mendicant does not bring suffering upon themselves; and they don’t forsake legitimate pleasure, but they’re not besotted with that pleasure. They understand: ‘When I actively strive I become dispassionate toward this source of suffering. But when I develop equanimity I become dispassionate toward this other source of suffering.’ So they either actively strive or develop equanimity as appropriate. Through active striving they become dispassionate toward that specific source of suffering, and so that suffering is worn away. Through developing equanimity they become dispassionate toward that other source of suffering, and so that suffering is worn away.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na heva anaddhabhūtaṁ attānaṁ dukkhena addhabhāveti, dhammikañca sukhaṁ na pariccajati, tasmiñca sukhe anadhimucchito hoti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘imassa kho me dukkhanidānassa saṅkhāraṁ padahato saṅkhārappadhānā virāgo hoti, imassa pana me dukkhanidānassa ajjhupekkhato upekkhaṁ bhāvayato virāgo hotī’ti. So yassa hi khvāssa dukkhanidānassa saṅkhāraṁ padahato saṅkhārappadhānā virāgo hoti, saṅkhāraṁ tattha padahati. Yassa panassa dukkhanidānassa ajjhupekkhato upekkhaṁ bhāvayato virāgo hoti, upekkhaṁ tattha bhāveti. Tassa tassa dukkhanidānassa saṅkhāraṁ padahato saṅkhārappadhānā virāgo hoti— evampissa taṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ hoti. Tassa tassa dukkhanidānassa ajjhupekkhato upekkhaṁ bhāvayato virāgo hoti— evampissa taṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ hoti.
## 112. MN 101 · At Devadaha · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/112/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/112/#p-N
[¶0] Suppose a man is in love with a woman, full of intense desire and lust. Then he sees her standing together with another man, chatting, giggling, and laughing.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso itthiyā sāratto paṭibaddhacitto tibbacchando tibbāpekkho. So taṁ itthiṁ passeyya aññena purisena saddhiṁ santiṭṭhantiṁ sallapantiṁ sañjagghantiṁ saṁhasantiṁ.
[¶1] What do you think, mendicants? Would that give rise to sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress for him?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu tassa purisassa amuṁ itthiṁ disvā aññena purisena saddhiṁ santiṭṭhantiṁ sallapantiṁ sañjagghantiṁ saṁhasantiṁ uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā”ti?
[¶2] “Yes, sir. Why is that? Because that man is in love with that woman, full of intense desire and lust.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amu hi, bhante, puriso amussā itthiyā sāratto paṭibaddhacitto tibbacchando tibbāpekkho. Tasmā taṁ itthiṁ disvā aññena purisena saddhiṁ santiṭṭhantiṁ sallapantiṁ sañjagghantiṁ saṁhasantiṁ uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā”ti.
[¶3] “Then that man might think: ‘I’m in love with that woman, full of intense desire and lust. When I saw her standing together with another man, chatting, giggling, and laughing, it gave rise to sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress for me. Why don’t I give up that desire and lust for that woman?’ So that’s what he did. Some time later he sees her again standing together with another man, chatting, giggling, and laughing.
> Pali: “Atha kho, bhikkhave, tassa purisassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho amussā itthiyā sāratto paṭibaddhacitto tibbacchando tibbāpekkho. Tassa me amuṁ itthiṁ disvā aññena purisena saddhiṁ santiṭṭhantiṁ sallapantiṁ sañjagghantiṁ saṁhasantiṁ uppajjanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā. Yannūnāhaṁ yo me amussā itthiyā chandarāgo taṁ pajaheyyan’ti. So yo amussā itthiyā chandarāgo taṁ pajaheyya. So taṁ itthiṁ passeyya aparena samayena aññena purisena saddhiṁ santiṭṭhantiṁ sallapantiṁ sañjagghantiṁ saṁhasantiṁ.
[¶4] What do you think, mendicants? Would that give rise to sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress for him?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu tassa purisassa amuṁ itthiṁ disvā aññena purisena saddhiṁ santiṭṭhantiṁ sallapantiṁ sañjagghantiṁ saṁhasantiṁ uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā”ti?
[¶5] “No, sir. Why is that? Because he no longer desires that woman.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amu hi, bhante, puriso amussā itthiyā virāgo. Tasmā taṁ itthiṁ disvā aññena purisena saddhiṁ santiṭṭhantiṁ sallapantiṁ sañjagghantiṁ saṁhasantiṁ na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā”ti.
[¶6] “In the same way, a mendicant does not bring suffering upon themselves; and they don’t forsake legitimate pleasure, but they’re not besotted with that pleasure. They understand: ‘When I actively strive I become dispassionate toward this source of suffering. But when I develop equanimity I become dispassionate toward this other source of suffering.’ So they either actively strive or develop equanimity as appropriate. Through active striving they become dispassionate toward that specific source of suffering, and so that suffering is worn away. Through developing equanimity they become dispassionate toward that other source of suffering, and so that suffering is worn away. That’s how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na heva anaddhabhūtaṁ attānaṁ dukkhena addhabhāveti, dhammikañca sukhaṁ na pariccajati, tasmiñca sukhe anadhimucchito hoti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘imassa kho me dukkhanidānassa saṅkhāraṁ padahato saṅkhārappadhānā virāgo hoti, imassa pana me dukkhanidānassa ajjhupekkhato upekkhaṁ bhāvayato virāgo hotī’ti. So yassa hi khvāssa dukkhanidānassa saṅkhāraṁ padahato saṅkhārappadhānā virāgo hoti, saṅkhāraṁ tattha padahati; yassa panassa dukkhanidānassa ajjhupekkhato upekkhaṁ bhāvayato virāgo hoti, upekkhaṁ tattha bhāveti. Tassa tassa dukkhanidānassa saṅkhāraṁ padahato saṅkhārappadhānā virāgo hoti— evampissa taṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ hoti. Tassa tassa dukkhanidānassa ajjhupekkhato upekkhaṁ bhāvayato virāgo hoti— evampissa taṁ dukkhaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ hoti. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶7] Furthermore, a mendicant reflects: ‘When I live as I please, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline. But when I strive painfully, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow. Why don’t I strive painfully?’ So that’s what they do, and as they do so unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow. After some time, they no longer strive painfully. Why is that? Because they have accomplished the goal for which they strived painfully.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yathāsukhaṁ kho me viharato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti; dukkhāya pana me attānaṁ padahato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Yannūnāhaṁ dukkhāya attānaṁ padaheyyan’ti. So dukkhāya attānaṁ padahati. Tassa dukkhāya attānaṁ padahato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. So na aparena samayena dukkhāya attānaṁ padahati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yassa hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu atthāya dukkhāya attānaṁ padaheyya svāssa attho abhinipphanno hoti. Tasmā na aparena samayena dukkhāya attānaṁ padahati.
[¶8] Suppose a fletcher was heating an arrow shaft between two firebrands, making it straight and fit for use. After it’s been made straight and fit for use, they’d no longer heat it to make it straight and fit for use. Why is that? Because they have accomplished the goal for which they heated it.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, usukāro tejanaṁ dvīsu alātesu ātāpeti paritāpeti ujuṁ karoti kammaniyaṁ. Yato kho, bhikkhave, usukārassa tejanaṁ dvīsu alātesu ātāpitaṁ hoti paritāpitaṁ ujuṁ kataṁ kammaniyaṁ, na so taṁ aparena samayena usukāro tejanaṁ dvīsu alātesu ātāpeti paritāpeti ujuṁ karoti kammaniyaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yassa hi so, bhikkhave, atthāya usukāro tejanaṁ dvīsu alātesu ātāpeyya paritāpeyya ujuṁ kareyya kammaniyaṁ svāssa attho abhinipphanno hoti. Tasmā na aparena samayena usukāro tejanaṁ dvīsu alātesu ātāpeti paritāpeti ujuṁ karoti kammaniyaṁ.
[¶9] In the same way, a mendicant reflects: ‘When I live as I please, unskillful qualities grow and skillful qualities decline. But when I strive painfully, unskillful qualities decline and skillful qualities grow. Why don’t I strive painfully?’ … After some time, they no longer strive painfully. That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘yathāsukhaṁ kho me viharato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti; dukkhāya pana me attānaṁ padahato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. Yannūnāhaṁ dukkhāya attānaṁ padaheyyan’ti. So dukkhāya attānaṁ padahati. Tassa dukkhāya attānaṁ padahato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. So na aparena samayena dukkhāya attānaṁ padahati. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yassa hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu atthāya dukkhāya attānaṁ padaheyya svāssa attho abhinipphanno hoti. Tasmā na aparena samayena dukkhāya attānaṁ padahati. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶10] Furthermore, a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, idha tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.
[¶11] A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One, and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajāpatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati.
[¶12] Once they’ve gone forth, they take up the training and livelihood of the mendicants. They give up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving. They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex. They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words. They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people. They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music. They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. They refrain from high and luxurious beds. They refrain from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land. They refrain from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence.
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati. Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā. Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa. Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya—iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ. So bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti. Ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā. Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. Kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti. Tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti. Ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti. Chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
[¶13] They’re content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves.
> Pali: So santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. Seyyathāpi nāma pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena; so yena yeneva pakkamati samādāyeva pakkamati. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶14] When they see a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶15] They act with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: So abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.
[¶16] When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble contentment, this noble sense restraint, and this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.
[¶17] Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti. Byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti. Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti. Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti. Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶18] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶19] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶20] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti. Yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶21] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶22] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶23] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understood how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Evampi, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ.
[¶24] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’ They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti; ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶25] Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶26] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’ That too is how exertion and striving is fruitful. Such is the doctrine of the Realized One. Saying this, the Realized One deserves praise on ten legitimate grounds.
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Evampi kho, bhikkhave, saphalo upakkamo hoti, saphalaṁ padhānaṁ. Evaṁvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgatā. Evaṁvādīnaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgatānaṁ dasa sahadhammikā pāsaṁsaṭṭhānā āgacchanti.
[¶27] If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of past deeds, clearly the Realized One has done good deeds in the past, since he now experiences such undefiled pleasure. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of God Almighty’s creation, clearly the Realized One was created by a good God, since he now experiences such undefiled pleasure. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of circumstance and nature, clearly the Realized One arises from good circumstances, since he now experiences such undefiled pleasure. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of the class of rebirth, clearly the Realized One was reborn in a good class, since he now experiences such undefiled pleasure. If sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of exertion in this life, clearly the Realized One exerts himself well in this life, since he now experiences such undefiled pleasure.
> Pali: Sace, bhikkhave, sattā pubbekatahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, tathāgato pubbe sukatakammakārī yaṁ etarahi evarūpā anāsavā sukhā vedanā vedeti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā issaranimmānahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, tathāgato bhaddakena issarena nimmito yaṁ etarahi evarūpā anāsavā sukhā vedanā vedeti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā saṅgatibhāvahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, tathāgato kalyāṇasaṅgatiko yaṁ etarahi evarūpā anāsavā sukhā vedanā vedeti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā abhijātihetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, tathāgato kalyāṇābhijātiko yaṁ etarahi evarūpā anāsavā sukhā vedanā vedeti. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā diṭṭhadhammūpakkamahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti; addhā, bhikkhave, tathāgato kalyāṇadiṭṭhadhammūpakkamo yaṁ etarahi evarūpā anāsavā sukhā vedanā vedeti.
[¶28] The Realized One deserves praise whether or not sentient beings experience pleasure and pain because of past deeds, or God Almighty’s creation, or circumstance and nature, or class of rebirth, or exertion in this life. Such is the doctrine of the Realized One. Saying this, the Realized One deserves praise on these ten legitimate grounds.”
> Pali: Sace, bhikkhave, sattā pubbekatahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato; no ce sattā pubbekatahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā issaranimmānahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato; no ce sattā issaranimmānahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā saṅgatibhāvahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato; no ce sattā saṅgatibhāvahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā abhijātihetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato; no ce sattā abhijātihetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato. Sace, bhikkhave, sattā diṭṭhadhammūpakkamahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato; no ce sattā diṭṭhadhammūpakkamahetu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, pāsaṁso tathāgato. Evaṁvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgatā. Evaṁvādīnaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgatānaṁ ime dasa sahadhammikā pāsaṁsaṭṭhānā āgacchantī”ti.
[¶29] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶30] > Pali: Devadahasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 113. MN 102 · The Five and Three
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/113/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/113/#p-N
[¶0] MN 102 · The Five and Three
> Pali: MN 102 · Pañcattayasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, there are some ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the final end, and propose various hypotheses concerning the final end. Some propose this: ‘The self is percipient and healthy after death.’ Some propose this: ‘The self is non-percipient and healthy after death.’ Some propose this: ‘The self is neither percipient nor non-percipient and healthy after death.’ But some assert the annihilation, eradication, and nonexistence of an existing being, while others propose extinguishment in this life. Thus they assert an existent self that is healthy after death; or they assert the annihilation of an existing being; while some propose extinguishment in this life. In this way five become three, and three become five. This is the summary recital of the five and three.
> Pali: “santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhivuttipadāni abhivadanti. ‘Saññī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā’ti— ittheke abhivadanti; ‘asaññī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā’ti— ittheke abhivadanti; ‘nevasaññīnāsaññī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā’ti— ittheke abhivadanti; sato vā pana sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ vā paneke abhivadanti. Iti santaṁ vā attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, sato vā pana sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ vā paneke abhivadanti. Iti imāni pañca hutvā tīṇi honti, tīṇi hutvā pañca honti— ayamuddeso pañcattayassa.
[¶4] Now, the ascetics and brahmins who propose a self that is percipient and healthy after death describe it as formed, or formless, or both formed and formless, or neither formed nor formless. Or they propose a self of unified perception, or of diverse perception, or of limited perception, or of limitless perception. Or some among those who go beyond this propose universal consciousness, limitless and imperturbable.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, arūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiñca arūpiñca vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nevarūpiṁ nārūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, ekattasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nānattasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, parittasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, appamāṇasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, etaṁ vā panekesaṁ upātivattataṁ viññāṇakasiṇameke abhivadanti appamāṇaṁ āneñjaṁ.
[¶5] The Realized One understands this as follows. There are ascetics and brahmins who assert a self that is percipient and healthy after death, describing it as formed, or formless, or both formed and formless, or neither formed nor formless. Or they describe it as of unified perception, or of diverse perception, or of limited perception, or of limitless perception. Or some, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, propose the dimension of nothingness, limitless and imperturbable. They declare that this is the purest, highest, best, and supreme of all those perceptions, whether of form or of formlessness or of unity or of diversity. ‘That much is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti. Ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, arūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiñca arūpiñca vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nevarūpiṁ nārūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, ekattasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nānattasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, parittasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, appamāṇasaññiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, yā vā panetāsaṁ saññānaṁ parisuddhā paramā aggā anuttariyā akkhāyati— yadi rūpasaññānaṁ yadi arūpasaññānaṁ yadi ekattasaññānaṁ yadi nānattasaññānaṁ. ‘Natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanameke abhivadanti appamāṇaṁ āneñjaṁ. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶6] Now, the ascetics and brahmins who assert a self that is non-percipient and healthy after death describe it as formed, or formless, or both formed and formless, or neither formed nor formless.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, arūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiñca arūpiñca vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nevarūpiṁ nārūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā.
[¶7] So they reject those who assert a self that is percipient and healthy after death. Why is that? Because they believe that perception is a disease, a boil, a dart, and that the state of non-perception is peaceful and sublime.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā tesamete paṭikkosanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Saññā rogo saññā gaṇḍo saññā sallaṁ, etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ: ‘asaññan’ti.
[¶8] The Realized One understands this as follows. There are ascetics and brahmins who assert a self that is non-percipient and healthy after death, describing it as formed, or formless, or both formed and formless, or neither formed nor formless. But if any ascetic or brahmin should say this: ‘Apart from form, feeling, perception, and choices, I will describe the coming and going of consciousness, its passing away and reappearing, its growth, increase, and maturity.’ That is not possible. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, arūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiñca arūpiñca vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nevarūpiṁ nārūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahamaññatra rūpā, aññatra vedanāya, aññatra saññāya, aññatra saṅkhārehi, viññāṇassa āgatiṁ vā gatiṁ vā cutiṁ vā upapattiṁ vā vuddhiṁ vā virūḷhiṁ vā vepullaṁ vā paññapessāmī’ti— netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶9] Now, the ascetics and brahmins who assert a self that is neither percipient nor non-percipient and healthy after death describe it as formed, or formless, or both formed and formless, or neither formed nor formless.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, arūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiñca arūpiñca vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nevarūpiṁ nārūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā.
[¶10] So they reject those who assert a self that is percipient and healthy after death, as well as those who assert a self that is non-percipient and healthy after death. Why is that? Because they believe that perception is a disease, a boil, a dart; that non-perception is a stupor; and that the state of neither perception nor non-perception is peaceful and sublime.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā tesamete paṭikkosanti, yepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā tesamete paṭikkosanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Saññā rogo saññā gaṇḍo saññā sallaṁ, asaññā sammoho, etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ: ‘nevasaññānāsaññan’ti.
[¶11] The Realized One understands this as follows. There are ascetics and brahmins who assert a self that is neither percipient nor non-percipient and healthy after death, describing it as formed, or formless, or both formed and formless, or neither formed nor formless. Some ascetics or brahmins assert the embracing of that dimension merely through the conditioned phenomena of what ought be seen, heard, thought, and known. But that is said to be a disastrous approach. For that dimension is said to be not attainable by means of conditioned phenomena, but only with a residue of conditioned phenomena. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti. Ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, arūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, rūpiñca arūpiñca vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā, nevarūpiṁ nārūpiṁ vā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātabbasaṅkhāramattena etassa āyatanassa upasampadaṁ paññapenti, byasanañhetaṁ, bhikkhave, akkhāyati etassa āyatanassa upasampadāya. Na hetaṁ, bhikkhave, āyatanaṁ saṅkhārasamāpattipattabbamakkhāyati; saṅkhārāvasesasamāpattipattabbametaṁ, bhikkhave, āyatanamakkhāyati. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶12] Now, the ascetics and brahmins who assert the annihilation, eradication, and nonexistence of an existing being reject those who assert a self that is healthy after death, whether percipient or non-percipient or neither percipient nor non-percipient. Why is that? Because they think: ‘All of those ascetics and brahmins only propose their attachment to heading upstream: “After death we shall be like this! After death we shall be like that!”
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti, tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā tesamete paṭikkosanti, yepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā tesamete paṭikkosanti, yepi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti arogaṁ paraṁ maraṇā tesamete paṭikkosanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Sabbepime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhaṁ saraṁ āsattiṁyeva abhivadanti: ‘iti pecca bhavissāma, iti pecca bhavissāmā’ti.
[¶13] Suppose a trader was going to market, thinking: “With this, that shall be mine! This way, I shall get that!” In the same way, those ascetics and brahmins seem to be like traders when they say: “After death we shall be like this! After death we shall be like that!”’ The Realized One understands this as follows. The ascetics and brahmins who assert the annihilation, eradication, and nonexistence of an existing being; from fear and disgust with substantial reality, they just keep running and circling around substantial reality. Suppose a mutt on a leash was tethered to a strong post or pillar. It would just keeping running and circling around that post or pillar. In the same way, those ascetics and brahmins, from fear and disgust with substantial reality, just keep running and circling around substantial reality. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi nāma vāṇijassa vāṇijjāya gacchato evaṁ hoti: ‘ito me idaṁ bhavissati, iminā idaṁ lacchāmī’ti; evamevime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā vāṇijūpamā maññe paṭibhanti: ‘iti pecca bhavissāma, iti pecca bhavissāmā’ti. Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti. Ye kho te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti te sakkāyabhayā sakkāyaparijegucchā sakkāyaññeva anuparidhāvanti anuparivattanti. Seyyathāpi nāma sā gaddulabaddho daḷhe thambhe vā khile vā upanibaddho, tameva thambhaṁ vā khilaṁ vā anuparidhāvati anuparivattati; evamevime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sakkāyabhayā sakkāyaparijegucchā sakkāyaññeva anuparidhāvanti anuparivattanti. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶14] Whatever ascetics and brahmins speculate and theorize about the final end, and propose various hypotheses concerning the final end, all of them propose one or other of these five topics.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhivuttipadāni abhivadanti, sabbe te imāneva pañcāyatanāni abhivadanti etesaṁ vā aññataraṁ.
[¶15] There are some ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning, and propose various hypotheses concerning the first beginning. They propose the following, each insisting that theirs is the only truth and that everything else is wrong. ‘The self and the cosmos are eternal.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are not eternal.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are both eternal and not eternal.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are neither eternal nor not eternal.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are finite.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are infinite.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are both finite and infinite.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are neither finite nor infinite.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are unified in perception.’ ‘The self and the cosmos are diverse in perception.’ ‘The self and the cosmos have limited perception.’ ‘The self and the cosmos have limitless perception.’ ‘The self and the cosmos experience nothing but happiness.’ ‘The self and the cosmos experience absolute suffering.’ ‘The self and the cosmos experience both happiness and suffering.’ ‘The self and the cosmos experience neither happiness nor suffering.’
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino pubbantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhivuttipadāni abhivadanti. ‘Sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘asassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘sassato ca asassato ca attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘nevasassato nāsassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘antavā attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘anantavā attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘antavā ca anantavā ca attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘nevantavā nānantavā attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘ekattasaññī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘nānattasaññī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘parittasaññī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘appamāṇasaññī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘ekantasukhī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘ekantadukkhī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘sukhadukkhī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti, ‘adukkhamasukhī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti— ittheke abhivadanti.
[¶16] Now, consider the ascetics and brahmins whose view is as follows. ‘The self and the cosmos are eternal. This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ It’s simply not possible for them to have personal knowledge of this that is pure and bright, apart from faith, endorsement, oral transmission, reasoned train of thought, or acceptance of a view after deliberation. But in the absence of personal knowledge that is pure and bright, even the portion of knowledge they illuminate is said to be grasping on their part. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti, tesaṁ vata aññatreva saddhāya aññatra ruciyā aññatra anussavā aññatra ākāraparivitakkā aññatra diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā paccattaṁyeva ñāṇaṁ bhavissati parisuddhaṁ pariyodātanti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Paccattaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, ñāṇe asati parisuddhe pariyodāte yadapi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā tattha ñāṇabhāgamattameva pariyodapenti tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ upādānamakkhāyati. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶17] Now, consider the ascetics and brahmins whose view is as follows. The self and the cosmos are not eternal, or both eternal and not eternal, or neither eternal nor not-eternal, or finite, or infinite, or both finite and infinite, or neither finite nor infinite, or of unified perception, or of diverse perception, or of limited perception, or of limitless perception, or experience nothing but happiness, or experience absolute suffering, or experience both happiness and suffering, or experience neither happiness nor suffering. It’s simply not possible for them to have personal knowledge of this that is pure and bright, apart from faith, endorsement, oral transmission, reasoned train of thought, or acceptance of a view after deliberation. But in the absence of personal knowledge that is pure and bright, even the portion of knowledge they illuminate is said to be grasping on their part. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘asassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti …pe… sassato ca asassato ca attā ca loko ca … nevasassato nāsassato attā ca loko ca … antavā attā ca loko ca … anantavā attā ca loko ca … antavā ca anantavā ca attā ca loko ca … nevantavā nānantavā attā ca loko ca … ekattasaññī attā ca loko ca … nānattasaññī attā ca loko ca … parittasaññī attā ca loko ca … appamāṇasaññī attā ca loko ca … ekantasukhī attā ca loko ca … ekantadukkhī attā ca loko ca … sukhadukkhī attā ca loko ca … adukkhamasukhī attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññanti, tesaṁ vata aññatreva saddhāya aññatra ruciyā aññatra anussavā aññatra ākāraparivitakkā aññatra diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā paccattaṁyeva ñāṇaṁ bhavissati parisuddhaṁ pariyodātanti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Paccattaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, ñāṇe asati parisuddhe pariyodāte yadapi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā tattha ñāṇabhāgamattameva pariyodapenti tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ upādānamakkhāyati. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶18] Now, some ascetics and brahmins, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, enter and remain in the rapture of seclusion: ‘This is peaceful, this is sublime, that is, entering and remaining in the rapture of seclusion.’ But that rapture of seclusion of theirs ceases. When the rapture of seclusion ceases, sadness arises; and when sadness ceases, the rapture of seclusion arises.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekaṁ pītiṁ upasampajja viharati: ‘etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ pavivekaṁ pītiṁ upasampajja viharāmī’ti. Tassa sā pavivekā pīti nirujjhati. Pavivekāya pītiyā nirodhā uppajjati domanassaṁ, domanassassa nirodhā uppajjati pavivekā pīti.
[¶19] It’s like how the sunlight fills the space when the shadow leaves, or the shadow fills the space when the sunshine leaves. In the same way, when the rapture of seclusion ceases, sadness arises; and when sadness ceases, the rapture of seclusion arises. The Realized One understands this as follows. This good ascetic or brahmin, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, enters and remains in the rapture of seclusion: ‘This is peaceful, this is sublime, that is, entering and remaining in the rapture of seclusion.’ But that rapture of seclusion of theirs ceases. When the rapture of seclusion ceases, sadness arises; and when sadness ceases, the rapture of seclusion arises. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yaṁ chāyā jahati taṁ ātapo pharati, yaṁ ātapo jahati taṁ chāyā pharati; evameva kho, bhikkhave, pavivekāya pītiyā nirodhā uppajjati domanassaṁ, domanassassa nirodhā uppajjati pavivekā pīti. Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti. Ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekaṁ pītiṁ upasampajja viharati: ‘etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ pavivekaṁ pītiṁ upasampajja viharāmī’ti. Tassa sā pavivekā pīti nirujjhati. Pavivekāya pītiyā nirodhā uppajjati domanassaṁ, domanassassa nirodhā uppajjati pavivekā pīti. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶20] Now, some ascetics and brahmins, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, going beyond the rapture of seclusion, enter and remain in pleasure not of the flesh. ‘This is peaceful, this is sublime, that is, entering and remaining in pleasure not of the flesh.’ But that pleasure not of the flesh of theirs ceases. When pleasure not of the flesh ceases, the rapture of seclusion arises; and when the rapture of seclusion ceases, pleasure not of the flesh arises.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekāya pītiyā samatikkamā nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ upasampajja viharati: ‘etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ upasampajja viharāmī’ti. Tassa taṁ nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ nirujjhati. Nirāmisassa sukhassa nirodhā uppajjati pavivekā pīti, pavivekāya pītiyā nirodhā uppajjati nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ.
[¶21] It’s like how the sunlight fills the space when the shadow leaves, or the shadow fills the space when the sunshine leaves. … The Realized One understands this as follows. This good ascetic or brahmin, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, going beyond the rapture of seclusion, enters and remains in pleasure not of the flesh. ‘This is peaceful, this is sublime, that is, entering and remaining in pleasure not of the flesh.’ But that pleasure not of the flesh of theirs ceases. When pleasure not of the flesh ceases, the rapture of seclusion arises; and when the rapture of seclusion ceases, pleasure not of the flesh arises. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yaṁ chāyā jahati taṁ ātapo pharati, yaṁ ātapo jahati taṁ chāyā pharati; evameva kho, bhikkhave, nirāmisassa sukhassa nirodhā uppajjati pavivekā pīti, pavivekāya pītiyā nirodhā uppajjati nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ. Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti. Ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekāya pītiyā samatikkamā, nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ upasampajja viharati: ‘etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ upasampajja viharāmī’ti. Tassa taṁ nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ nirujjhati. Nirāmisassa sukhassa nirodhā uppajjati pavivekā pīti, pavivekāya pītiyā nirodhā uppajjati nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶22] Now, some ascetics and brahmins, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, going beyond the rapture of seclusion and pleasure not of the flesh, enter and remain in neutral feeling. ‘This is peaceful, this is sublime, that is, entering and remaining in neutral feeling.’ Then that neutral feeling ceases. When neutral feeling ceases, pleasure not of the flesh arises; and when pleasure not of the flesh ceases, neutral feeling arises.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekāya pītiyā samatikkamā, nirāmisassa sukhassa samatikkamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharati: ‘etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharāmī’ti. Tassa sā adukkhamasukhā vedanā nirujjhati. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ, nirāmisassa sukhassa nirodhā uppajjati adukkhamasukhā vedanā.
[¶23] It’s like how the sunlight fills the space when the shadow leaves, or the shadow fills the space when the sunshine leaves. … The Realized One understands this as follows. This good ascetic or brahmin, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, going beyond the rapture of seclusion and pleasure not of the flesh, enters and remains in neutral feeling. ‘This is peaceful, this is sublime, that is, entering and remaining in neutral feeling.’ Then that neutral feeling ceases. When neutral feeling ceases, pleasure not of the flesh arises; and when pleasure not of the flesh ceases, neutral feeling arises. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yaṁ chāyā jahati taṁ ātapo pharati, yaṁ ātapo jahati taṁ chāyā pharati; evameva kho, bhikkhave, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ, nirāmisassa sukhassa nirodhā uppajjati adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti. Ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekāya pītiyā samatikkamā, nirāmisassa sukhassa samatikkamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharati: ‘etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ upasampajja viharāmī’ti. Tassa sā adukkhamasukhā vedanā nirujjhati. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ, nirāmisassa sukhassa nirodhā uppajjati adukkhamasukhā vedanā. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶24] Now, some ascetics and brahmins, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, go beyond the rapture of seclusion, pleasure not of the flesh, and neutral feeling. They regard themselves like this: ‘I am at peace; I am quenched; I am free of grasping.’
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekāya pītiyā samatikkamā, nirāmisassa sukhassa samatikkamā, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya samatikkamā: ‘santohamasmi, nibbutohamasmi, anupādānohamasmī’ti samanupassati.
[¶25] The Realized One understands this as follows. This good ascetic or brahmin, letting go of theories about the first beginning and the final end, not fixating on the fetters of sensuality, goes beyond the rapture of seclusion, pleasure not of the flesh, and neutral feeling. They regard themselves like this: ‘I am at peace; I am quenched; I am free of grasping.’ Clearly this venerable speaks of a practice that’s conducive to extinguishment. Nevertheless, they still grasp at theories about the first beginning or the final end, or the fetters of sensuality, or the rapture of seclusion, or pleasure not of the flesh, or neutral feeling. And when they regard themselves like this: ‘I am at peace; I am quenched; I am free of grasping,’ that’s also said to be grasping on their part. ‘All that is conditioned and crude. But there is the cessation of conditions—that is real.’ Understanding this and seeing the escape from it, the Realized One has gone beyond all that.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato abhijānāti. Ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, aparantānudiṭṭhīnañca paṭinissaggā, sabbaso kāmasaṁyojanānaṁ anadhiṭṭhānā, pavivekāya pītiyā samatikkamā, nirāmisassa sukhassa samatikkamā, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya samatikkamā: ‘santohamasmi, nibbutohamasmi, anupādānohamasmī’ti samanupassati; addhā ayamāyasmā nibbānasappāyaṁyeva paṭipadaṁ abhivadati. Atha ca panāyaṁ bhavaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pubbantānudiṭṭhiṁ vā upādiyamāno upādiyati, aparantānudiṭṭhiṁ vā upādiyamāno upādiyati, kāmasaṁyojanaṁ vā upādiyamāno upādiyati, pavivekaṁ vā pītiṁ upādiyamāno upādiyati, nirāmisaṁ vā sukhaṁ upādiyamāno upādiyati, adukkhamasukhaṁ vā vedanaṁ upādiyamāno upādiyati. Yañca kho ayamāyasmā: ‘santohamasmi, nibbutohamasmi, anupādānohamasmī’ti samanupassati tadapi imassa bhoto samaṇassa brāhmaṇassa upādānamakkhāyati. ‘Tayidaṁ saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṁ nirodho atthetan’ti— iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto.
[¶26] But the Realized One has awakened to the supreme state of sublime peace, that is, liberation by not grasping after truly understanding the six fields of contact’s origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape.”
> Pali: Idaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, tathāgatena anuttaraṁ santivarapadaṁ abhisambuddhaṁ yadidaṁ— channaṁ phassāyatanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā anupādāvimokkho”ti.
[¶27] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶28] > Pali: Pañcattayasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 114. MN 103 · Is This What You Think Of Me?
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/114/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/114/#p-N
[¶0] MN 103 · Is This What You Think Of Me?
> Pali: MN 103 · Kintisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Kusinārā in the Forest of Offerings. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā pisinārāyaṁ viharati baliharaṇe vanasaṇḍe. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, is this what you think of me? ‘The ascetic Gotama teaches the Dhamma for the sake of robes, almsfood, lodgings, or rebirth in this or that state.’”
> Pali: “kinti vo, bhikkhave, mayi hoti: ‘cīvarahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti, piṇḍapātahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti, senāsanahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti, itibhavābhavahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ desetī’”ti?
[¶4] “No sir, we don’t think of you that way.”
> Pali: “Na kho no, bhante, bhagavati evaṁ hoti: ‘cīvarahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti, piṇḍapātahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti, senāsanahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti, itibhavābhavahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ desetī’”ti.
[¶5] “If you don’t think of me that way, what then do you think of me?”
> Pali: “Na ca kira vo, bhikkhave, mayi evaṁ hoti: ‘cīvarahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ deseti …pe… itibhavābhavahetu vā samaṇo gotamo dhammaṁ desetī’ti; atha kinti carahi vo, bhikkhave, mayi hotī”ti?
[¶6] “We think of you this way: ‘The Buddha is sympathetic and wants what’s best for us. He teaches out of sympathy.’”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho no, bhante, bhagavati hoti: ‘anukampako bhagavā hitesī; anukampaṁ upādāya dhammaṁ desetī’”ti.
[¶7] “So it seems you think that I teach out of sympathy.
> Pali: “Evañca kira vo, bhikkhave, mayi hoti: ‘anukampako bhagavā hitesī; anukampaṁ upādāya dhammaṁ desetī’ti.
[¶8] In that case, each and every one of you should train in the things I have taught from my direct knowledge, that is: the four kinds of mindfulness meditation, the four right efforts, the four bases of psychic power, the five faculties, the five powers, the seven awakening factors, and the noble eightfold path. You should train in these things in harmony, appreciating each other, without dispute.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ye vo mayā dhammā abhiññā desitā, seyyathidaṁ— cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cattāro sammappadhānā cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅgā ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, tattha sabbeheva samaggehi sammodamānehi avivadamānehi sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶9] As you do so, it may happen that two mendicants disagree about the teaching.
> Pali: Tesañca vo, bhikkhave, samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ siyaṁsu dve bhikkhū abhidhamme nānāvādā.
[¶10] Now, you might think, ‘These two venerables disagree on both the meaning and the phrasing.’ So you should approach whichever mendicant you think is most amenable and say to them: ‘The venerables disagree on the meaning and the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how such disagreement on the meaning and the phrasing comes to be. Please don’t get into a dispute about this.’ Then you should approach whichever mendicant they think is most amenable among those who side with the other party and say to them: ‘The venerables disagree on the meaning and the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how such disagreement on the meaning and the phrasing comes to be. Please don’t get into a dispute about this.’ So you should remember what has been incorrectly memorized as incorrectly memorized and what has been correctly memorized as correctly memorized. Remembering this, you should speak on the teaching and the training.
> Pali: Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘imesaṁ kho āyasmantānaṁ atthato ceva nānaṁ byañjanato ca nānan’ti, tattha yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato ceva nānaṁ, byañjanato ca nānaṁ. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato ceva nānaṁ, byañjanato ca nānaṁ. Māyasmanto vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato ceva nānaṁ, byañjanato ca nānaṁ. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato ceva nānaṁ, byañjanato ca nānaṁ. Māyasmanto vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Iti duggahitaṁ duggahitato dhāretabbaṁ, suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretabbaṁ. Duggahitaṁ duggahitato dhāretvā suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretvā yo dhammo yo vinayo so bhāsitabbo.
[¶11] Now, you might think, ‘These two venerables disagree on the meaning but agree on the phrasing.’ So you should approach whichever mendicant you think is most amenable and say to them: ‘The venerables disagree on the meaning but agree on the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how such disagreement on the meaning and agreement on the phrasing comes to be. Please don’t get into a dispute about this.’ Then you should approach whichever mendicant they think is most amenable among those who side with the other party and say to them: ‘The venerables disagree on the meaning but agree on the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how such disagreement on the meaning and agreement on the phrasing comes to be. Please don’t get into a dispute about this.’ So you should remember what has been incorrectly memorized as incorrectly memorized and what has been correctly memorized as correctly memorized. Remembering this, you should speak on the teaching and the training.
> Pali: Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘imesaṁ kho āyasmantānaṁ atthato hi kho nānaṁ, byañjanato sametī’ti, tattha yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato hi nānaṁ, byañjanato sameti. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato hi kho nānaṁ, byañjanato sameti. Māyasmanto vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato hi kho nānaṁ, byañjanato sameti. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato hi kho nānaṁ, byañjanato sameti. Māyasmanto vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Iti duggahitaṁ duggahitato dhāretabbaṁ, suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretabbaṁ. Duggahitaṁ duggahitato dhāretvā suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretvā yo dhammo yo vinayo so bhāsitabbo.
[¶12] Now, you might think, ‘These two venerables agree on the meaning but disagree on the phrasing.’ So you should approach whichever mendicant you think is most amenable and say to them: ‘The venerables agree on the meaning but disagree on the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how such agreement on the meaning and disagreement on the phrasing comes to be. But the phrasing is a minor matter. Please don’t get into a dispute about something so minor.’ Then you should approach whichever mendicant they think is most amenable among those who side with the other party and say to them: ‘The venerables agree on the meaning but disagree on the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how such agreement on the meaning and disagreement on the phrasing comes to be. But the phrasing is a minor matter. Please don’t get into a dispute about something so minor.’ So you should remember what has been correctly memorized as correctly memorized and what has been incorrectly memorized as incorrectly memorized. Remembering this, you should speak on the teaching and the training.
> Pali: Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘imesaṁ kho āyasmantānaṁ atthato hi kho sameti, byañjanato nānan’ti, tattha yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato hi sameti, byañjanato nānaṁ. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato hi kho sameti, byañjanato nānaṁ. Appamattakaṁ kho panetaṁ yadidaṁ—byañjanaṁ. Māyasmanto appamattake vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato hi sameti, byañjanato nānaṁ. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato hi kho sameti, byañjanato nānaṁ. Appamattakaṁ kho panetaṁ yadidaṁ—byañjanaṁ. Māyasmanto appamattake vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Iti suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretabbaṁ, duggahitaṁ duggahitato dhāretabbaṁ. Suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretvā duggahitaṁ duggahitato dhāretvā yo dhammo yo vinayo so bhāsitabbo.
[¶13] Now, you might think, ‘These two venerables agree on both the meaning and the phrasing.’ So you should approach whichever mendicant you think is most amenable and say to them: ‘The venerables agree on both the meaning and the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how they come to agree on the meaning and the phrasing. Please don’t get into a dispute about this.’ Then you should approach whichever mendicant they think is most amenable among those who side with the other party and say to them: ‘The venerables agree on both the meaning and the phrasing. But the venerables should know that this is how they come to agree on the meaning and the phrasing. Please don’t get into a dispute about this.’ So you should remember what has been correctly memorized as correctly memorized. Remembering this, you should speak on the teaching and the training.
> Pali: Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘imesaṁ kho āyasmantānaṁ atthato ceva sameti byañjanato ca sametī’ti, tattha yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato ceva sameti, byañjanato ca sameti. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato ceva sameti byañjanato ca sameti. Māyasmanto vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘āyasmantānaṁ kho atthato ceva sameti byañjanato ca sameti. Tadamināpetaṁ āyasmanto jānātha— yathā atthato ceva sameti byañjanato ca sameti. Māyasmanto vivādaṁ āpajjitthā’ti. Iti suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretabbaṁ. Suggahitaṁ suggahitato dhāretvā yo dhammo yo vinayo so bhāsitabbo.
[¶14] As you train in harmony, appreciating each other, without dispute, one of the mendicants might commit an offense or transgression. In such a case, you should not be in a hurry to accuse them. The individual should be examined like this: ‘I won’t be troubled and the other individual won’t be hurt, for they’re not irritable and acrimonious. They don’t hold fast to their views, but let them go easily. I can draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful.’ If that’s what you think, then it’s appropriate to speak to them.
> Pali: Tesañca vo, bhikkhave, samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ siyā aññatarassa bhikkhuno āpatti siyā vītikkamo, tatra, bhikkhave, na codanāya taritabbaṁ. Puggalo upaparikkhitabbo: ‘iti mayhañca avihesā bhavissati parassa ca puggalassa anupaghāto, paro hi puggalo akkodhano anupanāhī adaḷhadiṭṭhī suppaṭinissaggī, sakkomi cāhaṁ etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetun’ti. Sace, bhikkhave, evamassa, kallaṁ vacanāya.
[¶15] But suppose you think this: ‘I will be troubled and the other individual will be hurt, for they’re irritable and acrimonious. However, they don’t hold fast to their views, but let them go easily. I can draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful. But for the other individual to get hurt is a minor matter. It’s more important that I can draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful.’ If that’s what you think, then it’s appropriate to speak to them.
> Pali: Sace pana, bhikkhave, evamassa: ‘mayhaṁ kho avihesā bhavissati parassa ca puggalassa upaghāto, paro hi puggalo kodhano upanāhī adaḷhadiṭṭhī suppaṭinissaggī, sakkomi cāhaṁ etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetuṁ. Appamattakaṁ kho panetaṁ yadidaṁ—parassa puggalassa upaghāto. Atha kho etadeva bahutaraṁ— svāhaṁ sakkomi etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetun’ti. Sace, bhikkhave, evamassa, kallaṁ vacanāya.
[¶16] But suppose you think this: ‘I will be troubled but the other individual won’t be hurt, for they’re not irritable and acrimonious. However, they hold fast to their views, refusing to let go. Nevertheless, I can draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful. But for me to be troubled is a minor matter. It’s more important that I can draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful.’ If that’s what you think, then it’s appropriate to speak to them.
> Pali: Sace pana, bhikkhave, evamassa: ‘mayhaṁ kho vihesā bhavissati parassa ca puggalassa anupaghāto. Paro hi puggalo akkodhano anupanāhī daḷhadiṭṭhī duppaṭinissaggī, sakkomi cāhaṁ etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetuṁ. Appamattakaṁ kho panetaṁ yadidaṁ—mayhaṁ vihesā. Atha kho etadeva bahutaraṁ— svāhaṁ sakkomi etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetun’ti. Sace, bhikkhave, evamassa, kallaṁ vacanāya.
[¶17] But suppose you think this: ‘I will be troubled and the other individual will be hurt, for they’re irritable and acrimonious. And they hold fast to their views, refusing to let go. Nevertheless, I can draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful. But for me to be troubled and the other individual to get hurt is a minor matter. It’s more important that I can draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful.’ If that’s what you think, then it’s appropriate to speak to them.
> Pali: Sace pana, bhikkhave, evamassa: ‘mayhañca kho vihesā bhavissati parassa ca puggalassa upaghāto. Paro hi puggalo kodhano upanāhī daḷhadiṭṭhī duppaṭinissaggī, sakkomi cāhaṁ etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetuṁ. Appamattakaṁ kho panetaṁ yadidaṁ—mayhañca vihesā bhavissati parassa ca puggalassa upaghāto. Atha kho etadeva bahutaraṁ— svāhaṁ sakkomi etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetun’ti. Sace, bhikkhave, evamassa, kallaṁ vacanāya.
[¶18] But suppose you think this: ‘I will be troubled and the other individual will be hurt, for they’re irritable and acrimonious. And they hold fast to their views, refusing to let go. I cannot draw them away from the unskillful and establish them in the skillful.’ Don’t underestimate the value of equanimity regarding such an individual.
> Pali: Sace pana, bhikkhave, evamassa: ‘mayhañca kho vihesā bhavissati parassa ca puggalassa upaghāto. Paro hi puggalo kodhano upanāhī daḷhadiṭṭhī duppaṭinissaggī, na cāhaṁ sakkomi etaṁ puggalaṁ akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpetun’ti. Evarūpe, bhikkhave, puggale upekkhā nātimaññitabbā.
[¶19] As you train in harmony, appreciating each other, without quarreling, the sides might continue to bring up settled issues with each other, with contempt for each other’s views, resentful, bitter, and exasperated. In this case you should approach whichever mendicant you think is most amenable among those who side with one party and say to them: ‘Reverend, as we were training, the sides continued to bring up settled issues with each other. If the Ascetic knew about this, would he criticize it?’ Answering rightly, the mendicant should say: ‘Yes, reverend, he would.’ ‘But without giving that up, reverend, can one realize extinguishment?’ Answering rightly, the mendicant should say: ‘No, reverend, one cannot.’
> Pali: Tesañca vo, bhikkhave, samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ aññamaññassa vacīsaṁhāro uppajjeyya diṭṭhipaḷāso cetaso āghāto appaccayo anabhiraddhi. Tattha ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘yaṁ no, āvuso, amhākaṁ samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ aññamaññassa vacīsaṁhāro uppanno diṭṭhipaḷāso cetaso āghāto appaccayo anabhiraddhi, taṁ jānamāno samaṇo garaheyyā’ti. Sammā byākaramāno, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ byākareyya: ‘yaṁ no, āvuso, amhākaṁ samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ aññamaññassa vacīsaṁhāro uppanno diṭṭhipaḷāso cetaso āghāto appaccayo anabhiraddhi, taṁ jānamāno samaṇo garaheyyāti. Etaṁ panāvuso, dhammaṁ appahāya nibbānaṁ sacchikareyyā’ti. Sammā byākaramāno, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ byākareyya: ‘etaṁ, āvuso, dhammaṁ appahāya na nibbānaṁ sacchikareyyā’ti.
[¶20] Then you should approach whichever mendicant they think is most amenable among those who side with the other party and say to them: ‘Reverend, as we were training, the sides continued to bring up settled issues with each other. If the Ascetic knew about this, would he criticize it?’ Answering rightly, the mendicant should say: ‘Yes, reverend, he would.’ ‘But without giving that up, reverend, can one realize extinguishment?’ Answering rightly, the mendicant should say: ‘No, reverend, one cannot.’
> Pali: Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ yaṁ bhikkhuṁ suvacataraṁ maññeyyātha, so upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘yaṁ no, āvuso, amhākaṁ samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ aññamaññassa vacīsaṁhāro uppanno diṭṭhipaḷāso cetaso āghāto appaccayo anabhiraddhi, taṁ jānamāno samaṇo garaheyyā’ti. Sammā byākaramāno, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ byākareyya: ‘yaṁ no, āvuso, amhākaṁ samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ aññamaññassa vacīsaṁhāro uppanno diṭṭhipaḷāso cetaso āghāto appaccayo anabhiraddhi taṁ jānamāno samaṇo garaheyyāti. Etaṁ panāvuso, dhammaṁ appahāya nibbānaṁ sacchikareyyā’ti. Sammā byākaramāno, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ byākareyya: ‘etaṁ kho, āvuso, dhammaṁ appahāya na nibbānaṁ sacchikareyyā’ti.
[¶21] If others should ask that mendicant: ‘Were you the venerable who drew those mendicants away from the unskillful and established them in the skillful?’ Answering rightly, the mendicant should say: ‘Well, reverends, I approached the Buddha. He taught me the Dhamma. After hearing that teaching I explained it to those mendicants. When those mendicants heard that teaching they were drawn away from the unskillful and established in the skillful.’ Answering in this way, that mendicant doesn’t glorify themselves or put others down. They answer in line with the teaching, with no legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism.”
> Pali: Tañce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṁ pare evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘āyasmatā no ete bhikkhū akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpitā’ti? Sammā byākaramāno, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ byākareyya: ‘idhāhaṁ, āvuso, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁ, tassa me bhagavā dhammaṁ desesi, tāhaṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ abhāsiṁ. Taṁ te bhikkhū dhammaṁ sutvā akusalā vuṭṭhahiṁsu, kusale patiṭṭhahiṁsū’ti. Evaṁ byākaramāno kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na ceva attānaṁ ukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaroti, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchatī”ti.
[¶22] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶23] > Pali: Kintisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 115. MN 104 · At Sāmagāma
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/115/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/115/#p-N
[¶0] MN 104 · At Sāmagāma
> Pali: MN 104 · Sāmagāmasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans near the village of Sāma.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati sāmagāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan had recently passed away at Pāvā. With his passing the Jain ascetics split, dividing into two factions, fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words: “You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!” You’d think there was nothing but slaughter going on among the Jain ascetics. And the Jain Ñātika’s white-clothed lay disciples were disillusioned, dismayed, and disappointed in the Jain ascetics. They were equally disappointed with a teaching and training so poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha, with broken monument and without a refuge.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato hoti. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti: “na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi. Kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi. Micchāpaṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammāpaṭipanno. Sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te. Purevacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchāvacanīyaṁ pure avaca. Adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ. Āropito te vādo. Niggahitosi, cara vādappamokkhāya; nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosī”ti. Vadhoyeva kho maññe nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu vattati. Yepi nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa sāvakā gihī odātavasanā tepi nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu nibbinnarūpā virattarūpā paṭivānarūpā yathā taṁ durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe.
[¶3] And then, after completing the rainy season residence near Pāvā, the novice Cunda went to see Venerable Ānanda at Sāma village. He bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Atha kho cundo samaṇuddeso pāvāyaṁ vassaṁvuṭṭho yena sāmagāmo yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho cundo samaṇuddeso āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “nigaṇṭho, bhante, nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā …pe… bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe”ti.
[¶4] Ānanda said to him, “Reverend Cunda, we should see the Buddha about this matter. Come, let’s go to the Buddha and inform him about this.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando cundaṁ samaṇuddesaṁ etadavoca: “atthi kho idaṁ, āvuso cunda, kathāpābhataṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Āyāma, āvuso cunda, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamissāma; upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ bhagavato ārocessāmā”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, sir,” replied Cunda.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho cundo samaṇuddeso āyasmato ānandassa paccassosi.
[¶6] Then Ānanda and Cunda went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and Ānanda informed him of what Cunda had said. He went on to say, “Sir, it occurs to me: ‘When the Buddha has passed away, let no dispute arise in the Saṅgha. For such a dispute would be for the detriment and unhappiness of the people, against the people, for the harm, detriment, and suffering of gods and humans.’”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca ānando cundo ca samaṇuddeso yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, cundo samaṇuddeso evamāha: ‘nigaṇṭho, bhante, nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā …pe… bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘mā heva bhagavato accayena saṅghe vivādo uppajji; svāssa vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānan’”ti.
[¶7] “What do you think, Ānanda? Do you see even two mendicants whose opinion differs regarding the things I have taught from my direct knowledge, that is, the four kinds of mindfulness meditation, the four right efforts, the four bases of psychic power, the five faculties, the five powers, the seven awakening factors, and the noble eightfold path?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ānanda, ye vo mayā dhammā abhiññā desitā, seyyathidaṁ— cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cattāro sammappadhānā cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅgā ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, passasi no tvaṁ, ānanda, imesu dhammesu dvepi bhikkhū nānāvāde”ti?
[¶8] “No, sir, I do not. Nevertheless, there are some individuals who appear to live obedient to the Buddha, but when the Buddha has passed away they might create a dispute in the Saṅgha regarding livelihood or the monastic code. Such a dispute would be for the detriment and unhappiness of the people, against the people, for the harm, detriment, and suffering of gods and humans.”
> Pali: “Ye me, bhante, dhammā bhagavatā abhiññā desitā, seyyathidaṁ— cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cattāro sammappadhānā cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅgā ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, nāhaṁ passāmi imesu dhammesu dvepi bhikkhū nānāvāde. Ye ca kho, bhante, puggalā bhagavantaṁ patissayamānarūpā viharanti tepi bhagavato accayena saṅghe vivādaṁ janeyyuṁ ajjhājīve vā adhipātimokkhe vā. Svāssa vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānan”ti.
[¶9] “Ānanda, dispute about livelihood or the monastic code is a minor matter. But should a dispute arise in the Saṅgha concerning the path or the practice, that would be for the detriment and unhappiness of the people, against the people, for the harm, detriment, and suffering of gods and humans.
> Pali: “Appamattako so, ānanda, vivādo yadidaṁ—ajjhājīve vā adhipātimokkhe vā. Magge vā hi, ānanda, paṭipadāya vā saṅghe vivādo uppajjamāno uppajjeyya; svāssa vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶10] Ānanda, there are these six roots of dispute. What six? Firstly, a mendicant is irritable and acrimonious. Such a mendicant lacks respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and they don’t fulfill the training. They create a dispute in the Saṅgha, which is for the detriment and unhappiness of the people, against the people, for the harm, detriment, and suffering of gods and humans. If you see such a root of dispute in yourselves or others, you should try to give up this bad thing. If you don’t see it, you should practice so that it doesn’t come up in the future. That’s how to give up this bad root of dispute, so it doesn’t come up in the future.
> Pali: Chayimāni, ānanda, vivādamūlāni. Katamāni cha? Idhānanda, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī. Yo so, ānanda, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti. Yo so, ānanda, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhamme … saṅghe agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāya na paripūrakārī hoti, so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti; yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya, bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ. Evarūpañce tumhe, ānanda, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, ānanda, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha. Evarūpañce tumhe, ānanda, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, ānanda, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti, evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.
[¶11] Furthermore, a mendicant is offensive and contemptuous … They’re jealous and stingy … They’re devious and deceitful … They have corrupt wishes and wrong view … They’re attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go. Such a mendicant lacks respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and they don’t fulfill the training. They create a dispute in the Saṅgha, which is for the detriment and unhappiness of the people, against the people, for the harm, detriment, and suffering of gods and humans. If you see such a root of dispute in yourselves or others, you should try to give up this bad thing. If you don’t see it, you should practice so that it doesn’t come up in the future. That’s how to give up this bad root of dispute, so it doesn’t come up in the future. These are the six roots of dispute.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu makkhī hoti paḷāsī …pe… issukī hoti maccharī …pe… saṭho hoti māyāvī …pe… pāpiccho hoti micchādiṭṭhi …pe… sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī. Yo so, ānanda, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti. Yo so, ānanda, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhamme … saṅghe … sikkhāya na paripūrakārī hoti so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti; yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya, bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ. Evarūpañce tumhe, ānanda, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, ānanda, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha. Evarūpañce tumhe, ānanda, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, ānanda, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti, evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti. Imāni kho, ānanda, cha vivādamūlāni.
[¶12] There are four kinds of disciplinary issues. What four? Disciplinary issues due to disputes, accusations, offenses, or business. These are the four kinds of disciplinary issues. There are these seven means of settling any disciplinary issues that might arise. Resolution face-to-face to be applied. Resolution through recollection to be granted. Resolution because of past insanity to be granted. Acting according to what has been admitted. Majority decision. Further penalty. Covering over as if with grass.
> Pali: Cattārimāni, ānanda, adhikaraṇāni. Katamāni cattāri? Vivādādhikaraṇaṁ, anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ, āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, kiccādhikaraṇaṁ— imāni kho, ānanda, cattāri adhikaraṇāni. Satta kho panime, ānanda, adhikaraṇasamathā uppannuppannānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ samathāya vūpasamāya— sammukhāvinayo dātabbo, sativinayo dātabbo, amūḷhavinayo dātabbo, paṭiññāya kāretabbaṁ, yebhuyyasikā, tassapāpiyasikā, tiṇavatthārako.
[¶13] And how is there resolution face-to-face? It’s when mendicants are disputing: ‘This is the teaching,’ ‘This is not the teaching,’ ‘This is the monastic law,’ ‘This is not the monastic law.’ Those mendicants should all sit together in harmony and thoroughly go over the guidelines of the teaching. They should settle that disciplinary issue in agreement with the guidelines. That’s how there is resolution face-to-face. And that’s how certain disciplinary issues are settled, that is, by resolution face-to-face.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, sammukhāvinayo hoti? Idhānanda, bhikkhū vivadanti dhammoti vā adhammoti vā vinayoti vā avinayoti vā. Tehānanda, bhikkhūhi sabbeheva samaggehi sannipatitabbaṁ. Sannipatitvā dhammanetti samanumajjitabbā. Dhammanettiṁ samanumajjitvā yathā tattha sameti tathā taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametabbaṁ. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, sammukhāvinayo hoti; evañca panidhekaccānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ vūpasamo hoti yadidaṁ— sammukhāvinayena.
[¶14] And how is there majority decision? If those mendicants are not able to settle that issue in that monastery, they should go to another monastery with more mendicants. There they should all sit together in harmony and thoroughly go over the guidelines of the teaching. They should settle that disciplinary issue in agreement with the guidelines. That’s how there is majority decision. And that’s how certain disciplinary issues are settled, that is, by majority decision.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, yebhuyyasikā hoti? Te ce, ānanda, bhikkhū na sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ tasmiṁ āvāse vūpasametuṁ. Tehānanda, bhikkhūhi yasmiṁ āvāse bahutarā bhikkhū so āvāso gantabbo. Tattha sabbeheva samaggehi sannipatitabbaṁ. Sannipatitvā dhammanetti samanumajjitabbā. Dhammanettiṁ samanumajjitvā yathā tattha sameti tathā taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametabbaṁ. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, yebhuyyasikā hoti, evañca panidhekaccānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ vūpasamo hoti yadidaṁ— yebhuyyasikāya.
[¶15] And how is there resolution through recollection? It’s when a mendicant accuses a mendicant of a heavy offense; one entailing expulsion, or close to it: ‘Venerable, do you recall committing the kind of serious offense that entails expulsion or close to it?’ They say: ‘No, reverend, I don’t recall committing such an offense.’ The resolution through recollection should be granted to them. That’s how there is the resolution through recollection. And that’s how certain disciplinary issues are settled, that is, by resolution through recollection.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, sativinayo hoti? Idhānanda, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ evarūpāya garukāya āpattiyā codenti pārājikena vā pārājikasāmantena vā: ‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti? So evamāha: ‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti. Tassa kho, ānanda, bhikkhuno sativinayo dātabbo. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, sativinayo hoti, evañca panidhekaccānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ vūpasamo hoti yadidaṁ— sativinayena.
[¶16] And how is there resolution because of past insanity? It’s when a mendicant accuses a mendicant of the kind of serious offense that entails expulsion, or close to it: ‘Venerable, do you recall committing the kind of serious offense that entails expulsion or close to it?’ They say: ‘No, reverend, I don’t recall committing such an offense.’ But though they try to get out of it, the mendicant pursues the issue: ‘Surely the venerable must know perfectly well if you recall committing an offense that entails expulsion or close to it!’ They say: ‘Reverend, I had gone mad, I was out of my mind. And while I was mad I did and said many things that are not proper for an ascetic. I don’t remember any of that, I was mad when I did it.’ The resolution because of past insanity should be granted to them. That’s how there is resolution because of past insanity. And that’s how certain disciplinary issues are settled, that is, by resolution because of past insanity.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, amūḷhavinayo hoti? Idhānanda, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ evarūpāya garukāya āpattiyā codenti pārājikena vā pārājikasāmantena vā: ‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti? So evamāha: ‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti. Tamenaṁ so nibbeṭhentaṁ ativeṭheti: ‘iṅghāyasmā sādhukameva jānāhi yadi sarasi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti. So evamāha: ‘ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummādaṁ pāpuṇiṁ cetaso vipariyāsaṁ. Tena me ummattakena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ. Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi. Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan’ti. Tassa kho, ānanda, bhikkhuno amūḷhavinayo dātabbo. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, amūḷhavinayo hoti, evañca panidhekaccānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ vūpasamo hoti yadidaṁ— amūḷhavinayena.
[¶17] And how is there acting according to what has been admitted? It’s when a mendicant, whether accused or not, recalls an offense and clarifies it and reveals it. After approaching a more senior mendicant, that mendicant should arrange his robe over one shoulder, bow to that mendicant’s feet, squat on their heels, raise their cupped palms, and say: ‘Sir, I have fallen into such-and-such an offense. I confess it.’ The senior mendicant says: ‘Do you see it?’ ‘Yes, I see it.’ ‘Then restrain yourself in future.’ ‘I shall restrain myself.’ That’s how there is acting according to what has been admitted. And that’s how certain disciplinary issues are settled, that is, by acting according to what has been admitted.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ hoti? Idhānanda, bhikkhu codito vā acodito vā āpattiṁ sarati, vivarati uttānīkaroti. Tena, ānanda, bhikkhunā vuḍḍhataraṁ bhikkhuṁ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṁ nisīditvā añjaliṁ paggahetvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘ahaṁ, bhante, itthannāmaṁ āpattiṁ āpanno, taṁ paṭidesemī’ti. So evamāha: ‘passasī’ti? ‘Āma passāmī’ti. ‘Āyatiṁ saṁvareyyāsī’ti. ‘Saṁvarissāmī’ti. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ hoti, evañca panidhekaccānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ vūpasamo hoti yadidaṁ— paṭiññātakaraṇena.
[¶18] And how is there a verdict of further penalty? It’s when a mendicant accuses a mendicant of the kind of heavy offense that entails expulsion, or close to it: ‘Venerable, do you recall committing the kind of heavy offense that entails expulsion or close to it?’ They say: ‘No, reverend, I don’t recall committing such an offense.’ But though they try to get out of it, the mendicant pursues the issue: ‘Surely the venerable must know perfectly well if you recall committing an offense that entails expulsion or close to it!’ They say: ‘Reverend, I don’t recall committing a heavy offense of that nature. But I do recall committing a light offense.’ But though they try to get out of it, the mendicant pursues the issue: ‘Surely the venerable must know perfectly well if you recall committing an offense that entails expulsion or close to it!’ They say: ‘Reverend, I’ll go so far as to admit this light offense even when not asked. Why wouldn’t I admit a heavy offense when asked?’ They say: ‘You wouldn’t have admitted that light offense without being asked, so why would you admit a heavy offense? Surely the venerable must know perfectly well if you recall committing an offense that entails expulsion or close to it!’ They say: ‘Reverend, I do recall committing the kind of heavy offense that entails expulsion or close to it. I spoke too hastily when I said that I didn’t recall it.’ That’s how there is further penalty. And that’s how certain disciplinary issues are settled, that is, by further penalty.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, tassapāpiyasikā hoti? Idhānanda, bhikkhu bhikkhuṁ evarūpāya garukāya āpattiyā codeti pārājikena vā pārājikasāmantena vā: ‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti? So evamāha: ‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti. Tamenaṁ so nibbeṭhentaṁ ativeṭheti: ‘iṅghāyasmā sādhukameva jānāhi yadi sarasi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti. So evamāha: ‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā; sarāmi ca kho ahaṁ, āvuso, evarūpiṁ appamattikaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti. Tamenaṁ so nibbeṭhentaṁ ativeṭheti: ‘iṅghāyasmā sādhukameva jānāhi yadi sarasi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti? So evamāha: ‘imañhi nāmāhaṁ, āvuso, appamattikaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā apuṭṭho paṭijānissāmi. Kiṁ panāhaṁ evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā puṭṭho na paṭijānissāmī’ti? So evamāha: ‘imañhi nāma tvaṁ, āvuso, appamattikaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā apuṭṭho na paṭijānissasi, kiṁ pana tvaṁ evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā puṭṭho paṭijānissasi? Iṅghāyasmā sādhukameva jānāhi yadi sarasi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti. So evamāha: ‘sarāmi kho ahaṁ, āvuso, evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā. Davā me etaṁ vuttaṁ, ravā me etaṁ vuttaṁ— nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, tassapāpiyasikā hoti, evañca panidhekaccānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ vūpasamo hoti yadidaṁ— tassapāpiyasikāya.
[¶19] And how is there the covering over as if with grass? It’s when the mendicants continually fight, quarrel, and dispute, doing and saying many things that are not proper for an ascetic. Those mendicants should all sit together in harmony. A competent mendicant of one party, having risen from their seat, arranged their robe over one shoulder, and raised their cupped palms, should inform the Saṅgha:
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, tiṇavatthārako hoti? Idhānanda, bhikkhūnaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ. Tehānanda, bhikkhūhi sabbeheva samaggehi sannipatitabbaṁ. Sannipatitvā ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā añjaliṁ paṇāmetvā saṅgho ñāpetabbo—
[¶20] ‘Sir, let the Saṅgha listen to me. We have been continually fighting, quarreling, and disputing, doing and saying many things that are not proper for an ascetic. If it seems appropriate to the Saṅgha, then—for the benefit of these venerables and myself—I disclose in the middle of the Saṅgha by means of covering over as if with grass any offenses committed by these venerables and by myself, excepting only those that are gravely blameworthy and those connected with laypeople.’
> Pali: Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho. Idaṁ amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ ṭhapetvā gihipaṭisaṁyuttan’ti.
[¶21] Then a competent mendicant of the other party, having risen from their seat, arranged their robe over one shoulder, and raising their cupped palms, should inform the Saṅgha:
> Pali: Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā añjaliṁ paṇāmetvā saṅgho ñāpetabbo:
[¶22] ‘Sir, let the Saṅgha listen to me. We have been continually fighting, quarreling, and disputing, doing and saying many things that are not proper for an ascetic. If it seems appropriate to the Saṅgha, then—for the benefit of these venerables and myself—I disclose in the middle of the Saṅgha by means of covering over as if with grass any offenses committed by these venerables and by myself, excepting only those that are gravely blameworthy and those connected with laypeople.’
> Pali: ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho. Idaṁ amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ ṭhapetvā gihipaṭisaṁyuttan’ti.
[¶23] That’s how there is the covering over as if with grass. And that’s how certain disciplinary issues are settled, that is, by covering over as if with grass.
> Pali: Evaṁ kho, ānanda, tiṇavatthārako hoti, evañca panidhekaccānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ vūpasamo hoti yadidaṁ— tiṇavatthārakena.
[¶24] Ānanda, these six warm-hearted qualities make for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling. What six? Firstly, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with bodily kindness, both in public and in private. This warm-hearted quality makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without dispute.
> Pali: Chayime, ānanda, dhammā sāraṇīyā piyakaraṇā garukaraṇā saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattanti. Katame cha? Idhānanda, bhikkhuno mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶25] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with verbal kindness … This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶26] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with mental kindness … This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶27] Furthermore, a mendicant shares without reservation any material things they have gained by legitimate means, even the food placed in the alms-bowl, using them in common with their ethical spiritual companions. This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu—ye te lābhā dhammikā dhammaladdhā antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampi tathārūpehi lābhehi—apaṭivibhattabhogī hoti, sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶28] Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the precepts shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. Those precepts are intact, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion. This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu—yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṁvattanikāni tathārūpesu sīlesu—sīlasāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶29] Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the view shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. That view is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu—yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā—diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶30] These six warm-hearted qualities make for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without dispute.
> Pali: Ime kho, ānanda, cha sāraṇīyā dhammā piyakaraṇā garukaraṇā saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattanti.
[¶31] If you should proceed having undertaken these six warm-hearted qualities, do you see any criticism, large or small, that you could not endure?”
> Pali: Ime ce tumhe, ānanda, cha sāraṇīye dhamme samādāya vatteyyātha, passatha no tumhe, ānanda, taṁ vacanapathaṁ aṇuṁ vā thūlaṁ vā yaṁ tumhe nādhivāseyyāthā”ti?
[¶32] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶33] “That’s why, Ānanda, you should proceed having undertaken these six warm-hearted qualities. That will be for your lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, ime cha sāraṇīye dhamme samādāya vattatha. Taṁ vo bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶34] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶35] > Pali: Sāmagāmasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 116. MN 105 · With Sunakkhatta
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/116/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/116/#p-N
[¶0] MN 105 · With Sunakkhatta
> Pali: MN 105 · Sunakkhattasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ.
[¶2] Now at that time several mendicants had declared their enlightenment in the Buddha’s presence:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulehi bhikkhūhi bhagavato santike aññā byākatā hoti:
[¶3] “We understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’”
> Pali: “‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāmā”ti.
[¶4] Sunakkhatta the Licchavi heard about this.
> Pali: Assosi kho sunakkhatto licchaviputto: “sambahulehi kira bhikkhūhi bhagavato santike aññā byākatā hoti: ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāmā’”ti.
[¶5] He went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, I have heard that several mendicants have declared their enlightenment in the Buddha’s presence. I trust they did so rightly—or are there some who declared enlightenment out of overestimation?”
> Pali: Atha kho sunakkhatto licchaviputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho sunakkhatto licchaviputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘sambahulehi kira bhikkhūhi bhagavato santike aññā byākatā— khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāmā’ti. Ye te, bhante, bhikkhū bhagavato santike aññaṁ byākaṁsu: ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāmā’ti, kacci te, bhante, bhikkhū sammadeva aññaṁ byākaṁsu udāhu santetthekacce bhikkhū adhimānena aññaṁ byākaṁsū”ti?
[¶6] “Some of them did so rightly, Sunakkhatta, while others did so out of overestimation. Now, when mendicants declare enlightenment rightly, that is their truth. But when mendicants declare enlightenment out of overestimation, the Realized One thinks: ‘I should teach them the Dhamma.’ If the Realized One thinks he should teach them the Dhamma, but then certain futile men, having carefully planned a question, approach the Realized One and ask it, then the Realized One changes his mind.”
> Pali: “Ye te, sunakkhatta, bhikkhū mama santike aññaṁ byākaṁsu: ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāmā’ti. Santetthekacce bhikkhū sammadeva aññaṁ byākaṁsu, santi panidhekacce bhikkhū adhimānenapi aññaṁ byākaṁsu. Tatra, sunakkhatta, ye te bhikkhū sammadeva aññaṁ byākaṁsu tesaṁ taṁ tatheva hoti; ye pana te bhikkhū adhimānena aññaṁ byākaṁsu tatra, sunakkhatta, tathāgatassa evaṁ hoti: ‘dhammaṁ nesaṁ desessan’ti. Evañcettha, sunakkhatta, tathāgatassa hoti: ‘dhammaṁ nesaṁ desessan’ti. Atha ca panidhekacce moghapurisā pañhaṁ abhisaṅkharitvā abhisaṅkharitvā tathāgataṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchanti. Tatra, sunakkhatta, yampi tathāgatassa evaṁ hoti: ‘dhammaṁ nesaṁ desessan’ti tassapi hoti aññathattan”ti.
[¶7] “Now is the time, Blessed One! Now is the time, Holy One! Let the Buddha teach the Dhamma. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Etassa bhagavā kālo, etassa sugata kālo, yaṁ bhagavā dhammaṁ deseyya. Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶8] “Well then, Sunakkhatta, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, sunakkhatta, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶9] “Yes, sir,” replied Sunakkhatta. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho sunakkhatto licchaviputto bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca—
[¶10] “Sunakkhatta, there are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Pañca kho ime, sunakkhatta, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, sunakkhatta, pañca kāmaguṇā.
[¶11] It’s possible that a certain individual person may be intent on worldly pleasures of the flesh. Such an individual engages in pertinent conversation, thinking and considering in line with that. They associate with that kind of person, and they find it rewarding. But when talk connected with the imperturbable is going on they don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They don’t associate with that kind of person, and they don’t find it rewarding.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco purisapuggalo lokāmisādhimutto assa. Lokāmisādhimuttassa kho, sunakkhatta, purisapuggalassa tappatirūpī ceva kathā saṇṭhāti, tadanudhammañca anuvitakketi, anuvicāreti, tañca purisaṁ bhajati, tena ca vittiṁ āpajjati; āneñjapaṭisaṁyuttāya ca pana kathāya kacchamānāya na sussūsati, na sotaṁ odahati, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, na ca taṁ purisaṁ bhajati, na ca tena vittiṁ āpajjati.
[¶12] Suppose a person had left their own village or town long ago, and they saw another person who had only recently left there. They would ask about whether their village was safe, with plenty of food and little disease, and the other person would tell them the news. What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Would that person want to listen to that other person? Would they actively listen and try to understand? Would they associate with that person, and find it rewarding?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, puriso sakamhā gāmā vā nigamā vā ciravippavuttho assa. So aññataraṁ purisaṁ passeyya tamhā gāmā vā nigamā vā acirapakkantaṁ. So taṁ purisaṁ tassa gāmassa vā nigamassa vā khematañca subhikkhatañca appābādhatañca puccheyya; tassa so puriso tassa gāmassa vā nigamassa vā khematañca subhikkhatañca appābādhatañca saṁseyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, api nu so puriso tassa purisassa sussūseyya, sotaṁ odaheyya, aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyya, tañca purisaṁ bhajeyya, tena ca vittiṁ āpajjeyyā”ti?
[¶13] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶14] “In the same way, it’s possible that a certain individual may be intent on worldly pleasures of the flesh. Such an individual engages in pertinent conversation, thinking and considering in line with that. They associate with that kind of person, and they find it rewarding. But when talk connected with the imperturbable is going on they don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They don’t associate with that kind of person, and they don’t find it rewarding. You should know of them: ‘That individual is intent on pleasures of the flesh, for they’re detached from things connected with the imperturbable.’
> Pali: “Evameva kho, sunakkhatta, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ idhekacco purisapuggalo lokāmisādhimutto assa. Lokāmisādhimuttassa kho, sunakkhatta, purisapuggalassa tappatirūpī ceva kathā saṇṭhāti, tadanudhammañca anuvitakketi, anuvicāreti, tañca purisaṁ bhajati, tena ca vittiṁ āpajjati; āneñjapaṭisaṁyuttāya ca pana kathāya kacchamānāya na sussūsati, na sotaṁ odahati, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, na ca taṁ purisaṁ bhajati, na ca tena vittiṁ āpajjati. So evamassa veditabbo: ‘āneñjasaṁyojanena hi kho visaṁyutto lokāmisādhimutto purisapuggalo’ti.
[¶15] It’s possible that a certain individual person may be intent on the imperturbable. Such an individual engages in pertinent conversation, thinking and considering in line with that. They associate with that kind of person, and they find it rewarding. But when talk connected with worldly pleasures of the flesh is going on they don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They don’t associate with that kind of person, and they don’t find it rewarding.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco purisapuggalo āneñjādhimutto assa. Āneñjādhimuttassa kho, sunakkhatta, purisapuggalassa tappatirūpī ceva kathā saṇṭhāti, tadanudhammañca anuvitakketi, anuvicāreti, tañca purisaṁ bhajati, tena ca vittiṁ āpajjati; lokāmisapaṭisaṁyuttāya ca pana kathāya kacchamānāya na sussūsati, na sotaṁ odahati, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, na ca taṁ purisaṁ bhajati, na ca tena vittiṁ āpajjati.
[¶16] Suppose there was a fallen, withered leaf. It’s incapable of becoming green again. In the same way, an individual intent on the imperturbable has dropped the connection with worldly pleasures of the flesh. You should know of them: ‘That individual is intent on the imperturbable, for they’re detached from things connected with pleasures of the flesh.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto abhabbo haritattāya; evameva kho, sunakkhatta, āneñjādhimuttassa purisapuggalassa ye lokāmisasaṁyojane se pavutte. So evamassa veditabbo: ‘lokāmisasaṁyojanena hi kho visaṁyutto āneñjādhimutto purisapuggalo’ti.
[¶17] It’s possible that a certain individual person may be intent on the dimension of nothingness. Such an individual engages in pertinent conversation, thinking and considering in line with that. They associate with that kind of person, and they find it rewarding. But when talk connected with the imperturbable is going on they don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They don’t associate with that kind of person, and they don’t find it rewarding.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco purisapuggalo ākiñcaññāyatanādhimutto assa. Ākiñcaññāyatanādhimuttassa kho, sunakkhatta, purisapuggalassa tappatirūpī ceva kathā saṇṭhāti, tadanudhammañca anuvitakketi, anuvicāreti, tañca purisaṁ bhajati, tena ca vittiṁ āpajjati; āneñjapaṭisaṁyuttāya ca pana kathāya kacchamānāya na sussūsati, na sotaṁ odahati, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, na ca taṁ purisaṁ bhajati, na ca tena vittiṁ āpajjati.
[¶18] Suppose there was a broad rock that had been broken in half, so that it could not be put back together again. In the same way, an individual intent on the dimension of nothingness has broken the connection with the imperturbable. You should know of them: ‘That individual is intent on the dimension of nothingness, for they’re detached from things connected with the imperturbable.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, puthusilā dvedhābhinnā appaṭisandhikā hoti; evameva kho, sunakkhatta, ākiñcaññāyatanādhimuttassa purisapuggalassa ye āneñjasaṁyojane se bhinne. So evamassa veditabbo: ‘āneñjasaṁyojanena hi kho visaṁyutto ākiñcaññāyatanādhimutto purisapuggalo’ti.
[¶19] It’s possible that a certain individual person may be intent on the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Such an individual engages in pertinent conversation, thinking and considering in line with that. They associate with that kind of person, and they find it rewarding. But when talk connected with the dimension of nothingness is going on they don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They don’t associate with that kind of person, and they don’t find it rewarding.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco purisapuggalo nevasaññānāsaññāyatanādhimutto assa. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanādhimuttassa kho, sunakkhatta, purisapuggalassa tappatirūpī ceva kathā saṇṭhāti, tadanudhammañca anuvitakketi, anuvicāreti, tañca purisaṁ bhajati, tena ca vittiṁ āpajjati; ākiñcaññāyatanapaṭisaṁyuttāya ca pana kathāya kacchamānāya na sussūsati, na sotaṁ odahati, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, na ca taṁ purisaṁ bhajati, na ca tena vittiṁ āpajjati.
[¶20] Suppose someone had eaten some satisfying food and thrown it up. What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Would that person want to eat that food again?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, puriso manuññabhojanaṁ bhuttāvī chaḍḍeyya. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, api nu tassa purisassa tasmiṁ bhatte puna bhottukamyatā assā”ti?
[¶21] “No, sir. Why is that? Because that food is deemed repulsive.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Aduñhi, bhante, bhattaṁ paṭikūlasammatan”ti.
[¶22] “In the same way, an individual intent on the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception has vomited the connection with the dimension of nothingness. You should know of them: ‘That individual is intent on the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, for they’re detached from things connected with the dimension of nothingness.’
> Pali: “Evameva kho, sunakkhatta, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanādhimuttassa purisapuggalassa ye ākiñcaññāyatanasaṁyojane se vante. So evamassa veditabbo: ‘ākiñcaññāyatanasaṁyojanena hi kho visaṁyutto nevasaññānāsaññāyatanādhimutto purisapuggalo’ti.
[¶23] It’s possible that a certain individual person may be rightly intent on extinguishment. Such an individual engages in pertinent conversation, thinking and considering in line with that. They associate with that kind of person, and they find it rewarding. But when talk connected with the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception is going on they don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They don’t associate with that kind of person, and they don’t find it rewarding.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco purisapuggalo sammā nibbānādhimutto assa. Sammā nibbānādhimuttassa kho, sunakkhatta, purisapuggalassa tappatirūpī ceva kathā saṇṭhāti, tadanudhammañca anuvitakketi, anuvicāreti, tañca purisaṁ bhajati, tena ca vittiṁ āpajjati; nevasaññānāsaññāyatanapaṭisaṁyuttāya ca pana kathāya kacchamānāya na sussūsati, na sotaṁ odahati, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, na ca taṁ purisaṁ bhajati, na ca tena vittiṁ āpajjati.
[¶24] Suppose there was a palm tree with its crown cut off. It’s incapable of further growth. In the same way, an individual rightly intent on extinguishment has cut off the connection with the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception at the root, made it like a palm stump, obliterated it, so it’s unable to arise in the future. You should know of them: ‘That individual is rightly intent on extinguishment, for they’re detached from things connected with the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, tālo matthakacchinno abhabbo puna viruḷhiyā; evameva kho, sunakkhatta, sammā nibbānādhimuttassa purisapuggalassa ye nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaṁyojane se ucchinnamūle tālāvatthukate anabhāvaṅkate āyatiṁ anuppādadhamme. So evamassa veditabbo: ‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaṁyojanena hi kho visaṁyutto sammā nibbānādhimutto purisapuggalo’ti.
[¶25] It’s possible that a certain mendicant might think: ‘The Ascetic has said that craving is a dart; and that the poison of ignorance is inflicted by desire and ill will. I have given up the dart of craving and expelled the poison of ignorance; I am rightly intent on extinguishment.’ Having such conceit, though it’s not based in fact, they would engage in things unconducive to extinguishment: unsuitable sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. Doing so, lust infects their mind, resulting in death or deadly pain.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evamassa: ‘taṇhā kho sallaṁ samaṇena vuttaṁ, avijjāvisadoso, chandarāgabyāpādena ruppati. Taṁ me taṇhāsallaṁ pahīnaṁ, apanīto avijjāvisadoso, sammā nibbānādhimuttohamasmī’ti. Evaṁmāni assa atathaṁ samānaṁ. So yāni sammā nibbānādhimuttassa asappāyāni tāni anuyuñjeyya; asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ anuyuñjeyya. Tassa asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ anuyuttassa rāgo cittaṁ anuddhaṁseyya. So rāgānuddhaṁsitena cittena maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.
[¶26] Suppose a man was struck by an arrow thickly smeared with poison. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat them. The surgeon would cut open the wound with a scalpel, probe for the arrow, extract it, and expel the poison, leaving some residue behind. Imagining that no residue remained, the surgeon would say: ‘My man, the dart has been extracted and the poison expelled without residue. It is still capable of harming you. Eat only suitable food. Don’t eat unsuitable food, or else the wound may get infected. Regularly wash the wound and anoint the opening, or else it’ll get covered with pus and blood. Don’t walk too much in the wind and sun, or else dust and dirt will infect the wound. Take care of the wound, my man, heal it.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, puriso sallena viddho assa savisena gāḷhūpalepanena. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto satthena vaṇamukhaṁ parikanteyya. Satthena vaṇamukhaṁ parikantitvā esaniyā sallaṁ eseyya. Esaniyā sallaṁ esitvā sallaṁ abbuheyya, apaneyya visadosaṁ saupādisesaṁ. Saupādisesoti jānamāno so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ambho purisa, ubbhataṁ kho te sallaṁ, apanīto visadoso saupādiseso. Analañca te antarāyāya. Sappāyāni ceva bhojanāni bhuñjeyyāsi, mā te asappāyāni bhojanāni bhuñjato vaṇo assāvī assa. Kālena kālañca vaṇaṁ dhoveyyāsi, kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpeyyāsi, mā te na kālena kālaṁ vaṇaṁ dhovato na kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpato pubbalohitaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ pariyonandhi. Mā ca vātātape cārittaṁ anuyuñji, mā te vātātape cārittaṁ anuyuttassa rajosūkaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ anuddhaṁsesi. Vaṇānurakkhī ca, ambho purisa, vihareyyāsi vaṇasāropī’ti.
[¶27] They’d think: ‘The dart has been extracted and the poison expelled with no residue. It’s not capable of harming me.’ They’d eat unsuitable food, and the wound would get infected. And they wouldn’t regularly wash and anoint the opening, so it would get covered in pus and blood. And they’d walk too much in the wind and sun, so dust and dirt infected the wound. And they wouldn’t take care of the wound or heal it. Then both because they did what was unsuitable, and because of the residue of unclean poison, the wound would expand, resulting in death or deadly pain.
> Pali: Tassa evamassa: ‘ubbhataṁ kho me sallaṁ, apanīto visadoso anupādiseso. Analañca me antarāyāyā’ti. So asappāyāni ceva bhojanāni bhuñjeyya. Tassa asappāyāni bhojanāni bhuñjato vaṇo assāvī assa. Na ca kālena kālaṁ vaṇaṁ dhoveyya, na ca kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpeyya. Tassa na kālena kālaṁ vaṇaṁ dhovato, na kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpato pubbalohitaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ pariyonandheyya. Vātātape ca cārittaṁ anuyuñjeyya. Tassa vātātape cārittaṁ anuyuttassa rajosūkaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ anuddhaṁseyya. Na ca vaṇānurakkhī vihareyya na vaṇasāropī. Tassa imissā ca asappāyakiriyāya, asuci visadoso apanīto saupādiseso tadubhayena vaṇo puthuttaṁ gaccheyya. So puthuttaṁ gatena vaṇena maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.
[¶28] In the same way, it’s possible that a certain mendicant might think: ‘The Ascetic has said that craving is a dart; and that the poison of ignorance is inflicted by desire and ill will. I have given up the dart of craving and expelled the poison of ignorance; I am rightly intent on extinguishment.’ Having such conceit, though it’s not based in fact, they would engage in things unconducive to extinguishment: unsuitable sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. Doing so, lust infects their mind, resulting in death or deadly pain.
> Pali: Evameva kho, sunakkhatta, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evamassa: ‘taṇhā kho sallaṁ samaṇena vuttaṁ, avijjāvisadoso chandarāgabyāpādena ruppati. Taṁ me taṇhāsallaṁ pahīnaṁ, apanīto avijjāvisadoso, sammā nibbānādhimuttohamasmī’ti. Evaṁmāni assa atathaṁ samānaṁ. So yāni sammā nibbānādhimuttassa asappāyāni tāni anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ anuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ anuyuñjeyya. Tassa asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ anuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ anuyuttassa rāgo cittaṁ anuddhaṁseyya. So rāgānuddhaṁsitena cittena maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.
[¶29] For it is death in the training of the Noble One to resign the training and return to a lesser life. And it is deadly pain to commit one of the corrupt offenses.
> Pali: Maraṇañhetaṁ, sunakkhatta, ariyassa vinaye yo sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati; maraṇamattañhetaṁ, sunakkhatta, dukkhaṁ yaṁ aññataraṁ saṅkiliṭṭhaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjati.
[¶30] It’s possible that a certain mendicant might think: ‘The Ascetic has said that craving is a dart; and that the poison of ignorance is inflicted by desire and ill will. I have given up the dart of craving and expelled the poison of ignorance; I am rightly intent on extinguishment.’ Being rightly intent on extinguishment, they wouldn’t engage in things unconducive to extinguishment: unsuitable sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. Doing so, lust wouldn’t infect their mind, so no death or deadly pain would result.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evamassa: ‘taṇhā kho sallaṁ samaṇena vuttaṁ, avijjāvisadoso chandarāgabyāpādena ruppati. Taṁ me taṇhāsallaṁ pahīnaṁ, apanīto avijjāvisadoso, sammā nibbānādhimuttohamasmī’ti. Sammā nibbānādhimuttasseva sato so yāni sammā nibbānādhimuttassa asappāyāni tāni nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ nānuyuñjeyya. Tassa asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ nānuyuttassa rāgo cittaṁ nānuddhaṁseyya. So na rāgānuddhaṁsitena cittena neva maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya na maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.
[¶31] Suppose a man was struck by an arrow thickly smeared with poison. Their friends and colleagues, relatives and kin would get a surgeon to treat them. The surgeon would cut open the wound with a scalpel, probe for the arrow, extract it, and expel the poison, leaving no residue behind. Knowing that no residue remained, the surgeon would say: ‘My man, the dart has been extracted and the poison expelled with no residue. It’s not capable of harming you. Eat only suitable food. Don’t eat unsuitable food, or else the wound may get infected. Regularly wash the wound and anoint the opening, or else it’ll get covered with pus and blood. Don’t walk too much in the wind and sun, or else dust and dirt will infect the wound. Take care of the wound, my man, heal it.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, puriso sallena viddho assa savisena gāḷhūpalepanena. Tassa mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā bhisakkaṁ sallakattaṁ upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ. Tassa so bhisakko sallakatto satthena vaṇamukhaṁ parikanteyya. Satthena vaṇamukhaṁ parikantitvā esaniyā sallaṁ eseyya. Esaniyā sallaṁ esitvā sallaṁ abbuheyya, apaneyya visadosaṁ anupādisesaṁ. Anupādisesoti jānamāno so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ambho purisa, ubbhataṁ kho te sallaṁ, apanīto visadoso anupādiseso. Analañca te antarāyāya. Sappāyāni ceva bhojanāni bhuñjeyyāsi, mā te asappāyāni bhojanāni bhuñjato vaṇo assāvī assa. Kālena kālañca vaṇaṁ dhoveyyāsi, kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpeyyāsi. Mā te na kālena kālaṁ vaṇaṁ dhovato na kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpato pubbalohitaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ pariyonandhi. Mā ca vātātape cārittaṁ anuyuñji, mā te vātātape cārittaṁ anuyuttassa rajosūkaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ anuddhaṁsesi. Vaṇānurakkhī ca, ambho purisa, vihareyyāsi vaṇasāropī’ti.
[¶32] They’d think: ‘The dart has been extracted and the poison expelled with no residue. It’s not capable of harming me.’ They’d eat suitable food, and the wound wouldn’t get infected. And they’d regularly wash and anoint the opening, so it wouldn’t get covered in pus and blood. And they wouldn’t walk too much in the wind and sun, so dust and dirt wouldn’t infect the wound. And they’d take care of the wound and heal it. Then both because they did what was suitable, and the unclean poison had left no residue, the wound would heal, and no death or deadly pain would result.
> Pali: Tassa evamassa: ‘ubbhataṁ kho me sallaṁ, apanīto visadoso anupādiseso. Analañca me antarāyāyā’ti. So sappāyāni ceva bhojanāni bhuñjeyya. Tassa sappāyāni bhojanāni bhuñjato vaṇo na assāvī assa. Kālena kālañca vaṇaṁ dhoveyya, kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpeyya. Tassa kālena kālaṁ vaṇaṁ dhovato kālena kālaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ ālimpato na pubbalohitaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ pariyonandheyya. Na ca vātātape cārittaṁ anuyuñjeyya. Tassa vātātape cārittaṁ ananuyuttassa rajosūkaṁ vaṇamukhaṁ nānuddhaṁseyya. Vaṇānurakkhī ca vihareyya vaṇasāropī. Tassa imissā ca sappāyakiriyāya asu ca visadoso apanīto anupādiseso tadubhayena vaṇo viruheyya. So ruḷhena vaṇena sañchavinā neva maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya na maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.
[¶33] In the same way, it’s possible that a certain mendicant might think: ‘The Ascetic has said that craving is a dart; and that the poison of ignorance is inflicted by desire and ill will. I have given up the dart of craving and expelled the poison of ignorance; I am rightly intent on extinguishment.’ Being rightly intent on extinguishment, they wouldn’t engage in things unconducive to extinguishment: unsuitable sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. Doing so, lust wouldn’t infect their mind, so no death or deadly pain would result.
> Pali: Evameva kho, sunakkhatta, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ idhekaccassa bhikkhuno evamassa: ‘taṇhā kho sallaṁ samaṇena vuttaṁ, avijjāvisadoso chandarāgabyāpādena ruppati. Taṁ me taṇhāsallaṁ pahīnaṁ, apanīto avijjāvisadoso, sammā nibbānādhimuttohamasmī’ti. Sammā nibbānādhimuttasseva sato so yāni sammā nibbānādhimuttassa asappāyāni tāni nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ nānuyuñjeyya, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ nānuyuñjeyya. Tassa asappāyaṁ cakkhunā rūpadassanaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ sotena saddaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ ghānena gandhaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ jivhāya rasaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ nānuyuttassa, asappāyaṁ manasā dhammaṁ nānuyuttassa, rāgo cittaṁ nānuddhaṁseyya. So na rāgānuddhaṁsitena cittena neva maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya na maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.
[¶34] I’ve made up this simile to make a point. And this is the point: ‘Wound’ is a term for the six interior sense fields. ‘Poison’ is a term for ignorance. ‘Dart’ is a term for craving. ‘Probing’ is a term for mindfulness. ‘Scalpel’ is a term for noble wisdom. ‘Surgeon’ is a term for the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Upamā kho me ayaṁ, sunakkhatta, katā atthassa viññāpanāya. Ayaṁyevettha attho— vaṇoti kho, sunakkhatta, channetaṁ ajjhattikānaṁ āyatanānaṁ adhivacanaṁ; visadosoti kho, sunakkhatta, avijjāyetaṁ adhivacanaṁ; sallanti kho, sunakkhatta, taṇhāyetaṁ adhivacanaṁ; esanīti kho, sunakkhatta, satiyāyetaṁ adhivacanaṁ; satthanti kho, sunakkhatta, ariyāyetaṁ paññāya adhivacanaṁ; bhisakko sallakattoti kho, sunakkhatta, tathāgatassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶35] Truly, Sunakkhatta, that mendicant practices restraint regarding the six fields of contact. Understanding that attachment is the root of suffering, they are freed with the ending of attachments. It’s not possible that they would apply their body or interest their mind in any attachment.
> Pali: So vata, sunakkhatta, bhikkhu chasu phassāyatanesu saṁvutakārī. ‘Upadhi dukkhassa mūlan’ti—iti viditvā nirupadhi upadhisaṅkhaye vimutto upadhismiṁ vā kāyaṁ upasaṁharissati cittaṁ vā uppādessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶36] Suppose there was a bronze goblet of beverage that had a nice color, aroma, and flavor. But it was mixed with poison. Then a person would come along who wants to live and doesn’t want to die, who wants to be happy and recoils from pain. What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Would that person drink that beverage if they knew that it would result in death or deadly suffering?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, āpānīyakaṁso vaṇṇasampanno gandhasampanno rasasampanno; so ca kho visena saṁsaṭṭho. Atha puriso āgaccheyya jīvitukāmo amaritukāmo sukhakāmo dukkhapaṭikūlo. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, api nu so puriso amuṁ āpānīyakaṁsaṁ piveyya yaṁ jaññā: ‘imāhaṁ pivitvā maraṇaṁ vā nigacchāmi maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan’”ti?
[¶37] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶38] “In the same way, Sunakkhatta, that mendicant practices restraint regarding the six fields of contact. Understanding that attachment is the root of suffering, they are freed with the ending of attachments. It’s not possible that they would apply their body or interest their mind in any attachment.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, sunakkhatta, so vata bhikkhu chasu phassāyatanesu saṁvutakārī. ‘Upadhi dukkhassa mūlan’ti—iti viditvā nirupadhi upadhisaṅkhaye vimutto upadhismiṁ vā kāyaṁ upasaṁharissati cittaṁ vā uppādessatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶39] Suppose there was a lethal viper. Then a person would come along who wants to live and doesn’t want to die, who wants to be happy and recoils from pain. What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Would that person give that lethal viper their hand or finger if they knew that it would result in death or deadly suffering?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, sunakkhatta, āsīviso ghoraviso. Atha puriso āgaccheyya jīvitukāmo amaritukāmo sukhakāmo dukkhapaṭikūlo. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, api nu so puriso amussa āsīvisassa ghoravisassa hatthaṁ vā aṅguṭṭhaṁ vā dajjā yaṁ jaññā: ‘imināhaṁ daṭṭho maraṇaṁ vā nigacchāmi maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhan’”ti?
[¶40] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶41] “In the same way, Sunakkhatta, that mendicant practices restraint regarding the six fields of contact. Understanding that attachment is the root of suffering, they are freed with the ending of attachments. It’s not possible that they would apply their body or interest their mind in any attachment.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, sunakkhatta, so vata bhikkhu chasu phassāyatanesu saṁvutakārī. ‘Upadhi dukkhassa mūlan’ti—iti viditvā nirupadhi upadhisaṅkhaye vimutto upadhismiṁ vā kāyaṁ upasaṁharissati cittaṁ vā uppādessatīti— netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī”ti.
[¶42] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Sunakkhatta of the Licchavi clan approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano sunakkhatto licchaviputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶43] > Pali: Sunakkhattasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 117. MN 106 · Conducive to the Imperturbable
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/117/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/117/#p-N
[¶0] MN 106 · Conducive to the Imperturbable
> Pali: MN 106 · Āneñjasappāyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Kurus, near the Kuru town named Kammāsadamma. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kurūsu viharati kammāsadhammaṁ nāma kurūnaṁ nigamo. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, sensual pleasures are impermanent, hollow, false, and deceptive. This is made by illusion, mendicants, lamented by fools. Sensual pleasures in this life and in lives to come, sensual perceptions in this life and in lives to come; both of these are Māra’s dominion, Māra’s domain, Māra’s lair, and Māra’s range. They conduce to bad, unskillful notions such as desire, ill will, and aggression. And they create an obstacle for a noble disciple training here.
> Pali: “Aniccā, bhikkhave, kāmā tucchā musā mosadhammā. Māyākatametaṁ, bhikkhave, bālalāpanaṁ. Ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā, ye ca samparāyikā kāmā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā kāmasaññā— ubhayametaṁ māradheyyaṁ, mārassesa visayo, mārassesa nivāpo, mārassesa gocaro. Etthete pāpakā akusalā mānasā abhijjhāpi byāpādāpi sārambhāpi saṁvattanti. Teva ariyasāvakassa idhamanusikkhato antarāyāya sambhavanti.
[¶4] A noble disciple reflects on this: ‘Sensual pleasures in this life and in lives to come, sensual perceptions in this life and in lives to come; both of these are Māra’s dominion, Māra’s domain, Māra’s lair, and Māra’s range. They conduce to bad, unskillful notions such as desire, ill will, and aggression. And they create an obstacle for a noble disciple training here. Why don’t I meditate with an abundant, expansive heart, having mastered the world and stabilized the mind? Then I will have no more bad, unskillful notions such as desire, ill will, and aggression. And by giving them up my mind, no longer limited, will become limitless and well developed.’
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā, ye ca samparāyikā kāmā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā kāmasaññā— ubhayametaṁ māradheyyaṁ, mārassesa visayo, mārassesa nivāpo, mārassesa gocaro. Etthete pāpakā akusalā mānasā abhijjhāpi byāpādāpi sārambhāpi saṁvattanti, teva ariyasāvakassa idhamanusikkhato antarāyāya sambhavanti. Yannūnāhaṁ vipulena mahaggatena cetasā vihareyyaṁ abhibhuyya lokaṁ adhiṭṭhāya manasā. Vipulena hi me mahaggatena cetasā viharato abhibhuyya lokaṁ adhiṭṭhāya manasā ye pāpakā akusalā mānasā abhijjhāpi byāpādāpi sārambhāpi te na bhavissanti. Tesaṁ pahānā aparittañca me cittaṁ bhavissati appamāṇaṁ subhāvitan’ti.
[¶5] Practicing in this way and meditating on it often their mind becomes confident in this dimension. Being confident, they either attain the imperturbable now, or are freed by wisdom. When their body breaks up, after death, it’s possible that that conducive consciousness will be reborn in the imperturbable. This is said to be the first way of practice suitable for attaining the imperturbable.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁpaṭipannassa tabbahulavihārino āyatane cittaṁ pasīdati. Sampasāde sati etarahi vā āneñjaṁ samāpajjati paññāya vā adhimuccati. Kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ taṁsaṁvattanikaṁ viññāṇaṁ assa āneñjūpagaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamā āneñjasappāyā paṭipadā akkhāyati.
[¶6] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects: ‘Sensual pleasures in this life and in lives to come, sensual perceptions in this life and in lives to come; whatever form there is, all form is the four principal states, or form derived from the four principal states.’ Practicing in this way and meditating on it often their mind becomes confident in this dimension. Being confident, they either attain the imperturbable now, or are freed by wisdom. When their body breaks up, after death, it’s possible that that conducive consciousness will be reborn in the imperturbable. This is said to be the second way of practice suitable for attaining the imperturbable.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā, ye ca samparāyikā kāmā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā kāmasaññā; yaṁ kiñci rūpaṁ sabbaṁ rūpaṁ cattāri ca mahābhūtāni, catunnañca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāyarūpan’ti. Tassa evaṁpaṭipannassa tabbahulavihārino āyatane cittaṁ pasīdati. Sampasāde sati etarahi vā āneñjaṁ samāpajjati paññāya vā adhimuccati. Kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ taṁsaṁvattanikaṁ viññāṇaṁ assa āneñjūpagaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyā āneñjasappāyā paṭipadā akkhāyati.
[¶7] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects: ‘Sensual pleasures in this life and in lives to come, sensual perceptions in this life and in lives to come, visions in this life and in lives to come, perceptions of visions in this life and in lives to come; all of these are impermanent. And what’s impermanent is not worth approving, welcoming, or clinging to.’ Practicing in this way and meditating on it often their mind becomes confident in this dimension. Being confident, they either attain the imperturbable now, or are freed by wisdom. When their body breaks up, after death, it’s possible that that conducive consciousness will be reborn in the imperturbable. This is said to be the third way of practice suitable for attaining the imperturbable.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā, ye ca samparāyikā kāmā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā kāmasaññā; ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpā, ye ca samparāyikā rūpā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā rūpasaññā— ubhayametaṁ aniccaṁ. Yadaniccaṁ taṁ nālaṁ abhinandituṁ, nālaṁ abhivadituṁ, nālaṁ ajjhositun’ti. Tassa evaṁpaṭipannassa tabbahulavihārino āyatane cittaṁ pasīdati. Sampasāde sati etarahi vā āneñjaṁ samāpajjati paññāya vā adhimuccati. Kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ taṁsaṁvattanikaṁ viññāṇaṁ assa āneñjūpagaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyā āneñjasappāyā paṭipadā akkhāyati.
[¶8] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects: ‘Sensual pleasures in this life and in lives to come, sensual perceptions in this life and in lives to come, visions in this life and in lives to come, perceptions of visions in this life and in lives to come, and perceptions of the imperturbable; all are perceptions. Where they cease without remainder, that is peaceful, that is sublime, namely the dimension of nothingness.’ Practicing in this way and meditating on it often their mind becomes confident in this dimension. Being confident, they either attain the dimension of nothingness now, or are freed by wisdom. When their body breaks up, after death, it’s possible that that conducive consciousness will be reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is said to be the first way of practice suitable for attaining the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā, ye ca samparāyikā kāmā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā kāmasaññā; ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpā, ye ca samparāyikā rūpā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā rūpasaññā; yā ca āneñjasaññā— sabbā saññā. Yatthetā aparisesā nirujjhanti etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ— yadidaṁ ākiñcaññāyatanan’ti. Tassa evaṁpaṭipannassa tabbahulavihārino āyatane cittaṁ pasīdati. Sampasāde sati etarahi vā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpajjati paññāya vā adhimuccati. Kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ taṁsaṁvattanikaṁ viññāṇaṁ assa ākiñcaññāyatanūpagaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamā ākiñcaññāyatanasappāyā paṭipadā akkhāyati.
[¶9] Furthermore, a noble disciple has gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut, and reflects like this: ‘This is empty of a self or what belongs to a self.’ Practicing in this way and meditating on it often their mind becomes confident in this dimension. Being confident, they either attain the dimension of nothingness now, or are freed by wisdom. When their body breaks up, after death, it’s possible that that conducive consciousness will be reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is said to be the second way of practice suitable for attaining the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘suññamidaṁ attena vā attaniyena vā’ti. Tassa evaṁpaṭipannassa tabbahulavihārino āyatane cittaṁ pasīdati. Sampasāde sati etarahi vā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpajjati paññāya vā adhimuccati. Kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ taṁsaṁvattanikaṁ viññāṇaṁ assa ākiñcaññāyatanūpagaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyā ākiñcaññāyatanasappāyā paṭipadā akkhāyati.
[¶10] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects: ‘I don’t belong to anyone anywhere! And nothing belongs to me anywhere!’ Practicing in this way and meditating on it often their mind becomes confident in this dimension. Being confident, they either attain the dimension of nothingness now, or are freed by wisdom. When their body breaks up, after death, it’s possible that that conducive consciousness will be reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is said to be the third way of practice suitable for attaining the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘nāhaṁ kvacani kassaci kiñcanatasmiṁ, na ca mama kvacani kismiñci kiñcanaṁ natthī’ti. Tassa evaṁpaṭipannassa tabbahulavihārino āyatane cittaṁ pasīdati. Sampasāde sati etarahi vā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpajjati paññāya vā adhimuccati. Kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ taṁsaṁvattanikaṁ viññāṇaṁ assa ākiñcaññāyatanūpagaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyā ākiñcaññāyatanasappāyā paṭipadā akkhāyati.
[¶11] Furthermore, a noble disciple reflects: ‘Sensual pleasures in this life and in lives to come, sensual perceptions in this life and in lives to come, visions in this life and in lives to come, perceptions of visions in this life and in lives to come, perceptions of the imperturbable, and perceptions of the dimension of nothingness; all are perceptions. Where they cease without remainder, that is peaceful, that is sublime, namely the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ Practicing in this way and meditating on it often their mind becomes confident in this dimension. Being confident, they either attain the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception now, or are freed by wisdom. When their body breaks up, after death, it’s possible that that conducive consciousness will be reborn in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is said to be the way of practice suitable for attaining the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā, ye ca samparāyikā kāmā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā kāmasaññā; ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpā, ye ca samparāyikā rūpā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā rūpasaññā; yā ca āneñjasaññā, yā ca ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā— sabbā saññā. Yatthetā aparisesā nirujjhanti etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ— yadidaṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanan’ti. Tassa evaṁpaṭipannassa tabbahulavihārino āyatane cittaṁ pasīdati. Sampasāde sati etarahi vā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpajjati paññāya vā adhimuccati. Kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati yaṁ taṁsaṁvattanikaṁ viññāṇaṁ assa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagaṁ. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasappāyā paṭipadā akkhāyatī”ti.
[¶12] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha: “Sir, take a mendicant who practices like this: ‘It might not be, and it might not be mine. It will not be, and it will not be mine. I am giving up what exists, what has come to be.’ In this way they gain equanimity. Would that mendicant become extinguished or not?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idha, bhante, bhikkhu evaṁ paṭipanno hoti: ‘no cassa, no ca me siyā; na bhavissati, na me bhavissati; yadatthi yaṁ, bhūtaṁ—taṁ pajahāmī’ti. Evaṁ upekkhaṁ paṭilabhati. Parinibbāyeyya nu kho so, bhante, bhikkhu na vā parinibbāyeyyā”ti?
[¶13] “One such mendicant might become extinguished, Ānanda, while another might not.”
> Pali: “Apetthekacco, ānanda, bhikkhu parinibbāyeyya, apetthekacco bhikkhu na parinibbāyeyyā”ti.
[¶14] “What is the cause, sir, what is the reason for this?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu ko paccayo yenapetthekacco bhikkhu parinibbāyeyya, apetthekacco bhikkhu na parinibbāyeyyā”ti?
[¶15] “Ānanda, take a mendicant who practices like this: ‘It might not be, and it might not be mine. It will not be, and it will not be mine. I am giving up what exists, what has come to be.’ In this way they gain equanimity. They approve, welcome, and keep clinging to that equanimity. Their consciousness has that as support and fuel for grasping. A mendicant with fuel for grasping does not become extinguished.”
> Pali: “Idhānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ paṭipanno hoti: ‘no cassa, no ca me siyā; na bhavissati, na me bhavissati; yadatthi, yaṁ bhūtaṁ—taṁ pajahāmī’ti. Evaṁ upekkhaṁ paṭilabhati. So taṁ upekkhaṁ abhinandati, abhivadati, ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ upekkhaṁ abhinandato abhivadato ajjhosāya tiṭṭhato tannissitaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ tadupādānaṁ. Saupādāno, ānanda, bhikkhu na parinibbāyatī”ti.
[¶16] “But sir, what is that mendicant grasping?”
> Pali: “Kahaṁ pana so, bhante, bhikkhu upādiyamāno upādiyatī”ti?
[¶17] “The dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.”
> Pali: “Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ, ānandā”ti.
[¶18] “Sir, it seems that mendicant is grasping the best thing to grasp!”
> Pali: “Upādānaseṭṭhaṁ kira so, bhante, bhikkhu upādiyamāno upādiyatī”ti?
[¶19] “Indeed, Ānanda. For the best thing to grasp is the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: “Upādānaseṭṭhañhi so, ānanda, bhikkhu upādiyamāno upādiyati. Upādānaseṭṭhañhetaṁ, ānanda, yadidaṁ— nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ.
[¶20] Take a mendicant who practices like this: ‘It might not be, and it might not be mine. It will not be, and it will not be mine. I am giving up what exists, what has come to be.’ In this way they gain equanimity. They don’t approve, welcome, or keep clinging to that equanimity. So their consciousness doesn’t have that as support and fuel for grasping. A mendicant free of grasping becomes extinguished.”
> Pali: Idhānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ paṭipanno hoti: ‘no cassa, no ca me siyā; na bhavissati, na me bhavissati; yadatthi, yaṁ bhūtaṁ—taṁ pajahāmī’ti. Evaṁ upekkhaṁ paṭilabhati. So taṁ upekkhaṁ nābhinandati, nābhivadati, na ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ upekkhaṁ anabhinandato anabhivadato anajjhosāya tiṭṭhato na tannissitaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ na tadupādānaṁ. Anupādāno, ānanda, bhikkhu parinibbāyatī”ti.
[¶21] “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! It seems the Buddha has explained to us how to cross over the flood by relying on one support or another. But sir, what is noble liberation?”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Nissāya nissāya kira no, bhante, bhagavatā oghassa nittharaṇā akkhātā. Katamo pana, bhante, ariyo vimokkho”ti?
[¶22] “Ānanda, it’s when a noble disciple reflects like this: ‘Sensual pleasures in this life and in lives to come, sensual perceptions in this life and in lives to come, visions in this life and in lives to come, perceptions of visions in this life and in lives to come, perceptions of the imperturbable, perceptions of the dimension of nothingness, perceptions of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception; that is substantial reality as far as substantial reality extends. But this is freedom from death, namely the liberation of the mind by not grasping.’
> Pali: “Idhānanda, bhikkhu ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā, ye ca samparāyikā kāmā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā kāmasaññā; ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpā, ye ca samparāyikā rūpā; yā ca diṭṭhadhammikā rūpasaññā, yā ca samparāyikā rūpasaññā; yā ca āneñjasaññā, yā ca ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā, yā ca nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññā— esa sakkāyo yāvatā sakkāyo. Etaṁ amataṁ yadidaṁ anupādā cittassa vimokkho.
[¶23] So, Ānanda, I have taught the ways of practice suitable for attaining the imperturbable, the dimension of nothingness, and the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. I have taught how to cross the flood by relying on one support or another, and I have taught noble liberation.
> Pali: Iti, kho, ānanda, desitā mayā āneñjasappāyā paṭipadā, desitā ākiñcaññāyatanasappāyā paṭipadā, desitā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasappāyā paṭipadā, desitā nissāya nissāya oghassa nittharaṇā, desito ariyo vimokkho.
[¶24] Out of sympathy, I’ve done what a teacher should do who wants what’s best for their disciples. Here are these roots of trees, and here are these empty huts. Practice absorption, Ānanda! Don’t be negligent! Don’t regret it later! This is my instruction to you.”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho, ānanda, satthārā karaṇīyaṁ sāvakānaṁ hitesinā anukampakena anukampaṁ upādāya, kataṁ vo taṁ mayā. Etāni, ānanda, rukkhamūlāni, etāni suññāgārāni. Jhāyathānanda, mā pamādattha, mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha. Ayaṁ vo amhākaṁ anusāsanī’”ti.
[¶25] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶26] > Pali: Āneñjasappāyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 118. MN 107 · With Moggallāna the Accountant
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/118/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/118/#p-N
[¶0] MN 107 · With Moggallāna the Accountant
> Pali: MN 107 · Gaṇakamoggallānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery. Then the brahmin Moggallāna the Accountant went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde. Atha kho gaṇakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho gaṇakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶2] “Worthy Gotama, in this stilt longhouse we can see gradual training, gradual progress, and gradual practice down to the last step of the staircase. Among the brahmins we can see gradual training, gradual progress, and gradual practice in recitation. Among archers we can see gradual training, gradual progress, and gradual practice in archery. Among us accountants, who earn a living by accounting, we can see gradual training, gradual progress, and gradual practice in mathematics. For when we get an apprentice we first make them count: ‘One one, two twos, three threes, four fours, five fives, six sixes, seven sevens, eight eights, nine nines, ten tens.’ We even make them count up to a hundred. Is it possible to similarly describe a gradual training, gradual progress, and gradual practice in this teaching and training?”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, imassa migāramātupāsādassa dissati anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā yadidaṁ— yāva pacchimasopānakaḷevarā; imesampi hi, bho gotama, brāhmaṇānaṁ dissati anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā yadidaṁ— ajjhene; imesampi hi, bho gotama, issāsānaṁ dissati anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā yadidaṁ— issatthe. Amhākampi hi, bho gotama, gaṇakānaṁ gaṇanājīvānaṁ dissati anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā yadidaṁ— saṅkhāne. Mayañhi, bho gotama, antevāsiṁ labhitvā paṭhamaṁ evaṁ gaṇāpema: ‘ekaṁ ekakaṁ, dve dukā, tīṇi tikā, cattāri catukkā, pañca pañcakā, cha chakkā, satta sattakā, aṭṭha aṭṭhakā, nava navakā, dasa dasakā’ti; satampi mayaṁ, bho gotama, gaṇāpema, bhiyyopi gaṇāpema. Sakkā nu kho, bho gotama, imasmimpi dhammavinaye evameva anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā paññapetun”ti?
[¶3] “It is possible, brahmin. Suppose a deft horse trainer were to obtain a fine thoroughbred. First of all he’d make it get used to wearing the bit. In the same way, when the Realized One gets a person fit for training they first guide them like this: ‘Come, mendicant, be ethical and restrained in the monastic code, conducting yourself well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, keep the rules you’ve undertaken.’
> Pali: “Sakkā, brāhmaṇa, imasmimpi dhammavinaye anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā paññapetuṁ. Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, dakkho assadammako bhaddaṁ assājānīyaṁ labhitvā paṭhameneva mukhādhāne kāraṇaṁ kāreti, atha uttariṁ kāraṇaṁ kāreti; evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato purisadammaṁ labhitvā paṭhamaṁ evaṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, sīlavā hohi, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharāhi ācāragocarasampanno aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhassu sikkhāpadesū’ti.
[¶4] When they have ethical conduct, the Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, guard your sense doors. When you see a sight with your eyes, don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, practice restraint, protect the faculty of sight, and achieve its restraint. When you hear a sound with your ears … When you smell an odor with your nose … When you taste a flavor with your tongue … When you feel a touch with your body … When you know an idea with your mind, don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, practice restraint, protect the faculty of mind, and achieve its restraint.’
> Pali: Yato kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, indriyesu guttadvāro hohi, cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā mā nimittaggāhī hohi mānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjāhi; rakkhāhi cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjāhi. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya mā nimittaggāhī hohi mānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjāhi; rakkhāhi manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjāhī’ti.
[¶5] When they guard their sense doors, the Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, eat in moderation. Reflect rationally on the food that you eat: “Not for fun, indulgence, adornment, or decoration, but only to sustain this body, to avoid harm, and to support spiritual practice. In this way, I shall put an end to old discomfort and not give rise to new discomfort, and I will have the means to keep going, blamelessness, and a comfortable abiding.”’
> Pali: Yato kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti, tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhojane mattaññū hohi. Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṁ āhāreyyāsi— neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya, yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya vihiṁsūparatiyā brahmacariyānuggahāya—iti purāṇañca vedanaṁ paṭihaṅkhāmi, navañca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cā’ti.
[¶6] When they eat in moderation, the Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, be committed to wakefulness. Practice walking and sitting meditation by day, purifying your mind from obstacles. In the first watch of the night, continue to practice walking and sitting meditation. In the middle watch, lie down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware, and focused on the time of getting up. In the last watch, get up and continue to practice walking and sitting meditation, purifying your mind from obstacles.’
> Pali: Yato kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu bhojane mattaññū hoti, tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, jāgariyaṁ anuyutto viharāhi, divasaṁ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodhehi, rattiyā paṭhamaṁ yāmaṁ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodhehi, rattiyā majjhimaṁ yāmaṁ dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappeyyāsi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya sato sampajāno uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasikaritvā, rattiyā pacchimaṁ yāmaṁ paccuṭṭhāya caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṁ parisodhehī’ti.
[¶7] When they are committed to wakefulness, the Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, have mindfulness and situational awareness. Act with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.’
> Pali: Yato kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu jāgariyaṁ anuyutto hoti, tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, satisampajaññena samannāgato hohi, abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī’ti.
[¶8] When they have mindfulness and situational awareness, the Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw.’ And they do so.
> Pali: Yato kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti, tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajāhi araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjan’ti. So vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ.
[¶9] After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present. Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti; byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti; thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti; uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti; vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶10] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶11] That’s how I instruct the mendicants who are trainees—who haven’t achieved their heart’s desire, but live aspiring to the supreme sanctuary from the yoke. But for those mendicants who are perfected—who have ended the defilements, completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and are rightly freed through enlightenment—these things lead to blissful meditation in this life, and to mindfulness and awareness.”
> Pali: Ye kho te, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhū sekkhā apattamānasā anuttaraṁ yogakkhemaṁ patthayamānā viharanti tesu me ayaṁ evarūpī anusāsanī hoti. Ye pana te bhikkhū arahanto khīṇāsavā vusitavanto katakaraṇīyā ohitabhārā anuppattasadatthā parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanā sammadaññāvimuttā tesaṁ ime dhammā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya ceva saṁvattanti, satisampajaññāya cā”ti.
[¶12] When he had spoken, Moggallāna the Accountant said to the Buddha, “When his disciples are instructed and advised like this by the worthy Gotama, do all of them achieve the ultimate goal, extinguishment, or do some of them fail?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, gaṇakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kiṁ nu kho bhoto gotamassa sāvakā bhotā gotamena evaṁ ovadīyamānā evaṁ anusāsīyamānā sabbe accantaṁ niṭṭhaṁ nibbānaṁ ārādhenti udāhu ekacce nārādhentī”ti?
[¶13] “Some succeed, while others fail.”
> Pali: “Appekacce kho, brāhmaṇa, mama sāvakā mayā evaṁ ovadīyamānā evaṁ anusāsīyamānā accantaṁ niṭṭhaṁ nibbānaṁ ārādhenti, ekacce nārādhentī”ti.
[¶14] “What is the cause, worthy Gotama, what is the reason why, though extinguishment is present, the path leading to extinguishment is present, and the worthy Gotama is present to encourage them, still some succeed while others fail?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo yaṁ tiṭṭhateva nibbānaṁ, tiṭṭhati nibbānagāmī maggo, tiṭṭhati bhavaṁ gotamo samādapetā; atha ca pana bhoto gotamassa sāvakā bhotā gotamena evaṁ ovadīyamānā evaṁ anusāsīyamānā appekacce accantaṁ niṭṭhaṁ nibbānaṁ ārādhenti, ekacce nārādhentī”ti?
[¶15] “Well then, brahmin, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, brahmin? Are you skilled in the road to Rājagaha?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, taṁyevettha paṭipucchissāmi. Yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, brāhmaṇa, kusalo tvaṁ rājagahagāmissa maggassā”ti?
[¶16] “Yes, I am.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho, kusalo ahaṁ rājagahagāmissa maggassā”ti.
[¶17] “What do you think, brahmin? Suppose a person was to come along who wanted to go to Rājagaha. He’d approach you and say: ‘Sir, I wish to go to Rājagaha. Please point out the road to Rājagaha.’ You’d say to them: ‘Here, my man, this road goes to Rājagaha. Go along it for an hour, and you’ll see a certain village. Go along an hour further, and you’ll see a certain town. Go along an hour further and you’ll see Rājagaha with its delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds.’ Instructed like this by you, they might still take the wrong road, heading west. But a second person might come with the same question and receive the same instructions. Instructed by you, they might safely arrive at Rājagaha. What is the cause, brahmin, what is the reason why, though Rājagaha is present, the path leading to Rājagaha is present, and you are there to encourage them, one person takes the wrong path and heads west, while another arrives safely at Rājagaha?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, brāhmaṇa, idha puriso āgaccheyya rājagahaṁ gantukāmo. So taṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bhante, rājagahaṁ gantuṁ; tassa me rājagahassa maggaṁ upadisā’ti. Tamenaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘ehambho purisa, ayaṁ maggo rājagahaṁ gacchati. Tena muhuttaṁ gaccha, tena muhuttaṁ gantvā dakkhissasi amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ, tena muhuttaṁ gaccha, tena muhuttaṁ gantvā dakkhissasi amukaṁ nāma nigamaṁ; tena muhuttaṁ gaccha, tena muhuttaṁ gantvā dakkhissasi rājagahassa ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan’ti. So tayā evaṁ ovadīyamāno evaṁ anusāsīyamāno ummaggaṁ gahetvā pacchāmukho gaccheyya. Atha dutiyo puriso āgaccheyya rājagahaṁ gantukāmo. So taṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bhante, rājagahaṁ gantuṁ; tassa me rājagahassa maggaṁ upadisā’ti. Tamenaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘ehambho purisa, ayaṁ maggo rājagahaṁ gacchati. Tena muhuttaṁ gaccha, tena muhuttaṁ gantvā dakkhissasi amukaṁ nāma gāmaṁ; tena muhuttaṁ gaccha, tena muhuttaṁ gantvā dakkhissasi amukaṁ nāma nigamaṁ; tena muhuttaṁ gaccha, tena muhuttaṁ gantvā dakkhissasi rājagahassa ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan’ti. So tayā evaṁ ovadīyamāno evaṁ anusāsīyamāno sotthinā rājagahaṁ gaccheyya. Ko nu kho, brāhmaṇa, hetu ko paccayo yaṁ tiṭṭhateva rājagahaṁ, tiṭṭhati rājagahagāmī maggo, tiṭṭhasi tvaṁ samādapetā; atha ca pana tayā evaṁ ovadīyamāno evaṁ anusāsīyamāno eko puriso ummaggaṁ gahetvā pacchāmukho gaccheyya, eko sotthinā rājagahaṁ gaccheyyā”ti?
[¶18] “What can I do about that, worthy Gotama? I am the one who shows the way.”
> Pali: “Ettha kyāhaṁ, bho gotama, karomi? Maggakkhāyīhaṁ, bho gotamā”ti.
[¶19] “In the same way, though extinguishment is present, the path leading to extinguishment is present, and I am present to encourage them, still some of my disciples, instructed and advised like this, achieve the ultimate goal, extinguishment, while some of them fail. What can I do about that, brahmin? The Realized One is the one who shows the way.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, tiṭṭhateva nibbānaṁ, tiṭṭhati nibbānagāmī maggo, tiṭṭhāmahaṁ samādapetā; atha ca pana mama sāvakā mayā evaṁ ovadīyamānā evaṁ anusāsīyamānā appekacce accantaṁ niṭṭhaṁ nibbānaṁ ārādhenti, ekacce nārādhenti. Ettha kyāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, karomi? Maggakkhāyīhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato”ti.
[¶20] When he had spoken, Moggallāna the Accountant said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, there are those faithless individuals who went forth from the lay life to homelessness not out of faith but to earn a livelihood. They’re devious, deceitful, and sneaky. They’re haughty, insolent, fickle, scurrilous, and loose-tongued. They do not guard their sense doors or eat in moderation, and they are not committed to wakefulness. They don’t care about the ascetic life, and don’t keenly respect the training. They’re indulgent and slack, leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion, lazy, and lacking energy. They’re unmindful, lacking situational awareness and immersion, with straying minds, witless and idiotic. The worthy Gotama does not live together with these.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, gaṇakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yeme, bho gotama, puggalā assaddhā jīvikatthā na saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā saṭhā māyāvino ketabino uddhatā unnaḷā capalā mukharā vikiṇṇavācā indriyesu aguttadvārā bhojane amattaññuno jāgariyaṁ ananuyuttā sāmaññe anapekkhavanto sikkhāya na tibbagāravā bāhulikā sāthalikā okkamane pubbaṅgamā paviveke nikkhittadhurā kusītā hīnavīriyā muṭṭhassatino asampajānā asamāhitā vibbhantacittā duppaññā eḷamūgā, na tehi bhavaṁ gotamo saddhiṁ saṁvasati.
[¶21] But there are those gentlemen who went forth from the lay life to homelessness out of faith. They’re not devious, deceitful, and sneaky. They’re not haughty, insolent, fickle, scurrilous, and loose-tongued. They guard their sense doors and eat in moderation, and they are committed to wakefulness. They care about the ascetic life, and keenly respect the training. They’re not indulgent or slack, nor are they leaders in backsliding, neglecting seclusion. They’re energetic and determined. They’re mindful, with situational awareness, immersion, and unified minds; wise and clever. The worthy Gotama does live together with these.
> Pali: Ye pana te kulaputtā saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā asaṭhā amāyāvino aketabino anuddhatā anunnaḷā acapalā amukharā avikiṇṇavācā indriyesu guttadvārā bhojane mattaññuno jāgariyaṁ anuyuttā sāmaññe apekkhavanto sikkhāya tibbagāravā nabāhulikā nasāthalikā okkamane nikkhittadhurā paviveke pubbaṅgamā āraddhavīriyā pahitattā upaṭṭhitassatino sampajānā samāhitā ekaggacittā paññavanto aneḷamūgā, tehi bhavaṁ gotamo saddhiṁ saṁvasati.
[¶22] Of all kinds of fragrant root, spikenard is said to be the best. Of all kinds of fragrant heartwood, red sandalwood is said to be the best. Of all kinds of fragrant flower, jasmine is said to be the best. In the same way, worthy Gotama’s advice is the best of contemporary teachings.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, ye keci mūlagandhā, kālānusāri tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati; ye keci sāragandhā, lohitacandanaṁ tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati; ye keci pupphagandhā, vassikaṁ tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati; evameva bhoto gotamassa ovādo paramajjadhammesu.
[¶23] Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶24] > Pali: Gaṇakamoggallānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 119. MN 108 · With Moggallāna the Guardian
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/119/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/119/#p-N
[¶0] MN 108 · With Moggallāna the Guardian
> Pali: MN 108 · Gopakamoggallānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Ānanda was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground. It was not long after the Buddha had become fully quenched.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā ānando rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe aciraparinibbute bhagavati.
[¶2] Now at that time King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, being suspicious of King Pajjota, was having Rājagaha fortified.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto rājagahaṁ paṭisaṅkhārāpeti rañño pajjotassa āsaṅkamāno.
[¶3] Then Venerable Ānanda robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Rājagaha for alms.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.
[¶4] Then it occurred to him, “It’s too early to wander for alms in Rājagaha. Why don’t I go to see the brahmin Moggallāna the Guardian at his place of work?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “atippago kho tāva rājagahe piṇḍāya carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ yena gopakamoggallānassa brāhmaṇassa kammanto, yena gopakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti.
[¶5] So that’s what he did. Moggallāna the Guardian saw Ānanda coming off in the distance and said to him, “Come, worthy Ānanda! Welcome, worthy Ānanda! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please, sir, sit down, here, a seat is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena gopakamoggallānassa brāhmaṇassa kammanto, yena gopakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami. Addasā kho gopakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho bhavaṁ ānando. Svāgataṁ bhoto ānandassa. Cirassaṁ kho bhavaṁ ānando imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu bhavaṁ ānando, idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti.
[¶6] Ānanda sat down on the seat spread out, while Moggallāna took a low seat and sat to one side. Then he said to Ānanda, “Worthy Ānanda, is there even a single mendicant who has all the same qualities in each and every way as possessed by the worthy Gotama, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: Nisīdi kho āyasmā ānando paññatte āsane. Gopakamoggallānopi kho brāhmaṇo aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho gopakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “atthi nu kho, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi tehi dhammehi sabbenasabbaṁ sabbathāsabbaṁ samannāgato yehi dhammehi samannāgato so bhavaṁ gotamo ahosi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti?
[¶7] “No, brahmin, there is not. For the Blessed One gave rise to the unarisen path, gave birth to the unborn path, and explained the unexplained path. He is the knower of the path, the discoverer of the path, the expert on the path. And now the disciples live following the path; they acquire it later.”
> Pali: “Natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi tehi dhammehi sabbenasabbaṁ sabbathāsabbaṁ samannāgato yehi dhammehi samannāgato so bhagavā ahosi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. So hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa maggassa sañjanetā, anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā, maggaññū, maggavidū, maggakovido; maggānugā ca pana etarahi sāvakā viharanti pacchā samannāgatā”ti.
[¶8] But this conversation between Ānanda and Moggallāna the Guardian was left unfinished.
> Pali: Ayañca hidaṁ āyasmato ānandassa gopakamoggallānena brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ antarākathā vippakatā ahosi.
[¶9] For just then the brahmin Vassakāra, a chief minister of Magadha, while supervising the work at Rājagaha, approached Ānanda at Moggallāna’s place of work and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Ānanda, “Worthy Ānanda, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto rājagahe kammante anusaññāyamāno yena gopakamoggallānassa brāhmaṇassa kammanto, yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “kāya nuttha, bho ānanda, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶10] So Ānanda told him of the conversation that they were having when Vassakāra arrived. Vassakāra said:
> Pali: “Idha maṁ, brāhmaṇa, gopakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘atthi nu kho, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi tehi dhammehi sabbenasabbaṁ sabbathāsabbaṁ samannāgato yehi dhammehi samannāgato so bhavaṁ gotamo ahosi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho’ti. Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, gopakamoggallānaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi tehi dhammehi sabbenasabbaṁ sabbathāsabbaṁ samannāgato yehi dhammehi samannāgato so bhagavā ahosi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. So hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa maggassa sañjanetā, anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā, maggaññū, maggavidū, maggakovido; maggānugā ca pana etarahi sāvakā viharanti pacchā samannāgatā’ti. Ayaṁ kho no, brāhmaṇa, gopakamoggallānena brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ antarākathā vippakatā. Atha tvaṁ anuppatto”ti.
[¶11] “Worthy Ānanda, is there even a single mendicant who was appointed by the worthy Gotama, saying: ‘This one will be your refuge when I have passed away,’ to whom you would now turn?”
> Pali: “Atthi nu kho, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi tena bhotā gotamena ṭhapito: ‘ayaṁ vo mamaccayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti, yaṁ tumhe etarahi paṭipādeyyāthā”ti?
[¶12] “No, there is not.”
> Pali: “Natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ṭhapito: ‘ayaṁ vo mamaccayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti, yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi paṭipādeyyāmā”ti.
[¶13] “But is there even a single mendicant who has been elected to such a position by the Saṅgha and appointed by several senior mendicants?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi saṅghena sammato, sambahulehi therehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapito: ‘ayaṁ no bhagavato accayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti, yaṁ tumhe etarahi paṭipādeyyāthā”ti?
[¶14] “No, there is not.”
> Pali: “Natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi saṅghena sammato, sambahulehi therehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapito: ‘ayaṁ no bhagavato accayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti, yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi paṭipādeyyāmā”ti.
[¶15] “But since you lack a refuge, worthy Ānanda, what’s the reason for your harmony?”
> Pali: “Evaṁ appaṭisaraṇe ca pana, bho ānanda, ko hetu sāmaggiyā”ti?
[¶16] “We don’t lack a refuge, brahmin, we have a refuge. The teaching is our refuge.”
> Pali: “Na kho mayaṁ, brāhmaṇa, appaṭisaraṇā; sappaṭisaraṇā mayaṁ, brāhmaṇa; dhammappaṭisaraṇā”ti.
[¶17] “But Worthy Ānanda, when asked whether there was even a single mendicant—either appointed by the worthy Gotama, or elected by the Saṅgha and appointed by several senior mendicants— who serves as your refuge after the Buddha passed away, to whom you now turn, you replied, ‘No, there is not.’ But you say that the reason for your harmony is that you have the teaching as a refuge. How should I see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: “‘Atthi nu kho, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi tena bhotā gotamena ṭhapito— ayaṁ vo mamaccayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti, yaṁ tumhe etarahi paṭipādeyyāthā’ti— iti puṭṭho samāno ‘natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ṭhapito— ayaṁ vo mamaccayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti, yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi paṭipādeyyāmā’ti vadesi; ‘atthi pana, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi saṅghena sammato, sambahulehi therehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapito— ayaṁ no bhagavato accayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti, yaṁ tumhe etarahi paṭipādeyyāthā’ti— iti puṭṭho samāno ‘natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi saṅghena sammato, sambahulehi therehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapito— ayaṁ no bhagavato accayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti, yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi paṭipādeyyāmā’ti— vadesi; ‘evaṁ appaṭisaraṇe ca pana, bho ānanda, ko hetu sāmaggiyā’ti iti puṭṭho samāno ‘na kho mayaṁ, brāhmaṇa, appaṭisaraṇā; sappaṭisaraṇā mayaṁ, brāhmaṇa; dhammappaṭisaraṇā’ti vadesi. Imassa pana, bho ānanda, bhāsitassa kathaṁ attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶18] “The Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha laid down training rules and recited the monastic code for the mendicants. On the day of the sabbath all of us who live in dependence on one village district gather together as one. We invite one who transmits the code to recite it. If anyone remembers an offense or transgression while they’re reciting, we make them act in line with the teaching and in line with the instructions. It’s not the good fellows who make us act, it’s the teaching that makes us act.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ, pātimokkhaṁ uddiṭṭhaṁ. Te mayaṁ tadahuposathe yāvatikā ekaṁ gāmakhettaṁ upanissāya viharāma te sabbe ekajjhaṁ sannipatāma; sannipatitvā yassa taṁ pavattati taṁ ajjhesāma. Tasmiñce bhaññamāne hoti bhikkhussa āpatti hoti vītikkamo taṁ mayaṁ yathādhammaṁ yathānusiṭṭhaṁ kāremāti. Na kira no bhavanto kārenti; dhammo no kāreti”.
[¶19] “Worthy Ānanda, is there even a single mendicant who you honor, respect, revere, venerate, and rely on?”
> Pali: “Atthi nu kho, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi yaṁ tumhe etarahi sakkarotha garuṁ karotha mānetha pūjetha; sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharathā”ti?
[¶20] “There is not, brahmin.”
> Pali: “Natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi sakkaroma garuṁ karoma mānema pūjema; sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharāmā”ti.
[¶21] “Worthy Ānanda, when asked whether there was even a single mendicant—either appointed by the worthy Gotama, or elected by the Saṅgha and appointed by several senior mendicants— who serves as your refuge after the Buddha passed away, to whom you now turn, you replied, ‘No, there is not.’ And when asked whether there is even a single mendicant who you honor, respect, revere, venerate, and rely on, you replied, ‘There is not.’ How should I see the meaning of this statement?”
> Pali: “‘Atthi nu kho, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi tena bhotā gotamena ṭhapito— ayaṁ vo mamaccayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti yaṁ tumhe etarahi paṭipādeyyāthā’ti— iti puṭṭho samāno ‘natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena ṭhapito— ayaṁ vo mamaccayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi paṭipādeyyāmā’ti vadesi; ‘atthi pana, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi saṅghena sammato, sambahulehi therehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapito— ayaṁ no bhagavato accayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti yaṁ tumhe etarahi paṭipādeyyāthā’ti— iti puṭṭho samāno ‘natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi saṅghena sammato, sambahulehi therehi bhikkhūhi ṭhapito— ayaṁ no bhagavato accayena paṭisaraṇaṁ bhavissatīti yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi paṭipādeyyāmā’ti vadesi; ‘atthi nu kho, bho ānanda, ekabhikkhupi yaṁ tumhe etarahi sakkarotha garuṁ karotha mānetha pūjetha; sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharathā’ti— iti puṭṭho samāno ‘natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi yaṁ mayaṁ etarahi sakkaroma garuṁ karoma mānema pūjema; sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharāmā’ti vadesi. Imassa pana, bho ānanda, bhāsitassa kathaṁ attho daṭṭhabbo”ti?
[¶22] “There are ten inspiring things explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. We honor anyone in whom these things are found. What ten?
> Pali: “Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dasa pasādanīyā dhammā akkhātā. Yasmiṁ no ime dhammā saṁvijjanti taṁ mayaṁ etarahi sakkaroma garuṁ karoma mānema pūjema; sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharāma. Katame dasa?
[¶23] It’s when a mendicant is ethical, restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken.
> Pali: Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu.
[¶24] They’re very learned, remembering and keeping what they’ve learned. These teachings are good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased, describing a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. They are very learned in such teachings, remembering them, rehearsing them, mentally scrutinizing them, and penetrating them theoretically.
> Pali: Bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo. Ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā, majjhekalyāṇā, pariyosānakalyāṇā, sātthaṁ, sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā.
[¶25] They’re content with robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick.
> Pali: Santuṭṭho hoti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi.
[¶26] They get the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when they want, without trouble or difficulty.
> Pali: Catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī.
[¶27] They wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful. They control the body as far as the realm of divinity.
> Pali: Anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati, seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti, seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati, seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati, seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parimasati parimajjati, yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.
[¶28] With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far.
> Pali: Dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti—dibbe ca mānuse ca, ye dūre santike ca.
[¶29] They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. They understand mind with greed as ‘mind with greed’, and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed’. They understand mind with hate … mind without hate … mind with delusion … mind without delusion … constricted mind … scattered mind … expansive mind … unexpansive mind … mind that is not supreme … mind that is supreme … mind immersed in samādhi … mind not immersed in samādhi … freed mind … They understand unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind’.
> Pali: Parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti. Sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.
[¶30] They recollect many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: Anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattārīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶31] With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: Dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶32] They realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati.
[¶33] These are the ten inspiring things explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. We honor anyone in whom these things are found, and rely on them.”
> Pali: Ime kho, brāhmaṇa, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dasa pasādanīyā dhammā akkhātā. Yasmiṁ no ime dhammā saṁvijjanti taṁ mayaṁ etarahi sakkaroma garuṁ karoma mānema pūjema; sakkatvā garuṁ katvā upanissāya viharāmā”ti.
[¶34] When he had spoken, Vassakāra addressed General Upananda, “What do you think, general? Do these venerables honor, respect, revere, and venerate those who are worthy?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto upanandaṁ senāpatiṁ āmantesi: “Taṁ kiṁ maññati bhavaṁ senāpati yadime bhonto sakkātabbaṁ sakkaronti, garuṁ kātabbaṁ garuṁ karonti, mānetabbaṁ mānenti, pūjetabbaṁ pūjenti”?
[¶35] “Indeed they do. For if these venerables were not to honor, respect, revere, and venerate them, who then would they honor?”
> Pali: “Tagghime bhonto sakkātabbaṁ sakkaronti, garuṁ kātabbaṁ garuṁ karonti, mānetabbaṁ mānenti, pūjetabbaṁ pūjenti. Imañca hi te bhonto na sakkareyyuṁ na garuṁ kareyyuṁ na māneyyuṁ na pūjeyyuṁ; atha kiñcarahi te bhonto sakkareyyuṁ garuṁ kareyyuṁ māneyyuṁ pūjeyyuṁ, sakkatvā garuṁ katvā mānetvā pūjetvā upanissāya vihareyyun”ti?
[¶36] Then Vassakāra said to Ānanda, “Where are you staying at present?”
> Pali: Atha kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “kahaṁ pana bhavaṁ ānando etarahi viharatī”ti?
[¶37] “In the Bamboo Grove, brahmin.”
> Pali: “Veḷuvane khohaṁ, brāhmaṇa, etarahi viharāmī”ti.
[¶38] “I hope the Bamboo Grove is delightful, quiet and still, far from the madding crowd, remote from human settlements, and fit for retreat?”
> Pali: “Kacci pana, bho ānanda, veḷuvanaṁ ramaṇīyañceva appasaddañca appanigghosañca vijanavātaṁ manussarāhasseyyakaṁ paṭisallānasāruppan”ti?
[¶39] “Indeed it is, brahmin. And it is like that owing to such protectors and guardians as yourself.”
> Pali: “Taggha, brāhmaṇa, veḷuvanaṁ ramaṇīyañceva appasaddañca appanigghosañca vijanavātaṁ manussarāhasseyyakaṁ paṭisallānasāruppaṁ, yathā taṁ tumhādisehi rakkhakehi gopakehī”ti.
[¶40] “Surely, worthy Ānanda, it is owing to the good fellows who meditate, making a habit of meditating. For the good fellows do in fact meditate and make a habit of meditating.
> Pali: “Taggha, bho ānanda, veḷuvanaṁ ramaṇīyañceva appasaddañca appanigghosañca vijanavātaṁ manussarāhasseyyakaṁ paṭisallānasāruppaṁ, yathā taṁ bhavantehi jhāyīhi jhānasīlīhi. Jhāyino ceva bhavanto jhānasīlino ca.
[¶41] This one time, worthy Ānanda, worthy Gotama was staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof. So I went there to see him. And there he spoke about meditation in many ways. He meditated, and made a habit of meditating. And he praised all kinds of meditation.”
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bho ānanda, samayaṁ so bhavaṁ gotamo vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ. Atha khvāhaṁ, bho ānanda, yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā yena so bhavaṁ gotamo tenupasaṅkamiṁ. Tatra ca pana so bhavaṁ gotamo anekapariyāyena jhānakathaṁ kathesi. Jhāyī ceva so bhavaṁ gotamo ahosi jhānasīlī ca. Sabbañca pana so bhavaṁ gotamo jhānaṁ vaṇṇesī”ti.
[¶42] “No, brahmin, the Buddha did not praise all kinds of meditation, nor did he dispraise all kinds of meditation. And what kind of meditation did he not praise? It’s when someone’s heart is overcome and mired in sensual desire, and they don’t truly understand the escape from sensual desire that has arisen. Hiding sensual desire within, they meditate and concentrate and contemplate and ruminate. Their heart is overcome and mired in ill will … dullness and drowsiness … restlessness and remorse … doubt, and they don’t truly know and see the escape from doubt that has arisen. Hiding doubt within, they meditate and concentrate and contemplate and ruminate. The Buddha didn’t praise this kind of meditation.
> Pali: “Na ca kho, brāhmaṇa, so bhagavā sabbaṁ jhānaṁ vaṇṇesi, napi so bhagavā sabbaṁ jhānaṁ na vaṇṇesīti. Kathaṁ rūpañca, brāhmaṇa, so bhagavā jhānaṁ na vaṇṇesi? Idha, brāhmaṇa, ekacco kāmarāgapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati kāmarāgaparetena, uppannassa ca kāmarāgassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti; so kāmarāgaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati. Byāpādapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati byāpādaparetena, uppannassa ca byāpādassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti; so byāpādaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati. Thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati thinamiddhaparetena, uppannassa ca thinamiddhassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti; so thinamiddhaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati. Uddhaccakukkuccapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati uddhaccakukkuccaparetena, uppannassa ca uddhaccakukkuccassa nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti; so uddhaccakukkuccaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati. Vicikicchāpariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati vicikicchāparetena, uppannāya ca vicikicchāya nissaraṇaṁ yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti; so vicikicchaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā jhāyati pajjhāyati nijjhāyati apajjhāyati. Evarūpaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, so bhagavā jhānaṁ na vaṇṇesi.
[¶43] And what kind of meditation did he praise? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. The Buddha praised this kind of meditation.”
> Pali: Kathaṁ rūpañca, brāhmaṇa, so bhagavā jhānaṁ vaṇṇesi? Idha, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evarūpaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, so bhagavā jhānaṁ vaṇṇesī”ti.
[¶44] “Well, worthy Ānanda, it seems that worthy Gotama criticized the kind of meditation that deserves criticism and praised that deserving of praise. Well, now, worthy Ānanda, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: “Gārayhaṁ kira, bho ānanda, so bhavaṁ gotamo jhānaṁ garahi, pāsaṁsaṁ pasaṁsi. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bho ānanda, gacchāma; bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶45] “Please, brahmin, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶46] Then Vassakāra the brahmin, having approved and agreed with what Venerable Ānanda said, rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto āyasmato ānandassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶47] Soon after he had left, Moggallāna the Guardian said to Ānanda, “Worthy Ānanda, you still haven’t answered my question.”
> Pali: Atha kho gopakamoggallāno brāhmaṇo acirapakkante vassakāre brāhmaṇe magadhamahāmatte āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “yaṁ no mayaṁ bhavantaṁ ānandaṁ apucchimhā taṁ no bhavaṁ ānando na byākāsī”ti.
[¶48] “But brahmin, didn’t I say: ‘There is no single mendicant who has all the same qualities in each and every way as possessed by the worthy Gotama, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For the Blessed One gave rise to the unarisen path, gave birth to the unborn path, and explained the unexplained path. He is the knower of the path, the discoverer of the path, the expert on the path. And now the disciples live following the path; they acquire it later.’”
> Pali: “Nanu te, brāhmaṇa, avocumhā: ‘natthi kho, brāhmaṇa, ekabhikkhupi tehi dhammehi sabbenasabbaṁ sabbathāsabbaṁ samannāgato yehi dhammehi samannāgato so bhagavā ahosi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. So hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa maggassa sañjanetā, anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā, maggaññū, maggavidū, maggakovido. Maggānugā ca pana etarahi sāvakā viharanti pacchā samannāgatā’”ti.
[¶49] > Pali: Gopakamoggallānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 120. MN 109 · The Longer Discourse on the Full-Moon Night
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/120/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/120/#p-N
[¶0] MN 109 · The Longer Discourse on the Full-Moon Night
> Pali: MN 109 · Mahāpuṇṇamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde.
[¶2] Now, at that time it was the sabbath—the full moon on the fifteenth day—and the Buddha was sitting in the open surrounded by the Saṅgha of monks.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto abbhokāse nisinno hoti.
[¶3] Then one of the monks rose from his seat, arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha, and said, “Sir, I’d like to ask the Buddha about a certain point, if you’d take the time to answer.”
> Pali: Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “Puccheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ kiñcideva desaṁ, sace me bhagavā okāsaṁ karoti pañhassa veyyākaraṇāyā”ti.
[¶4] “Well then, monk, take your own seat and ask what you wish.”
> Pali: “Tena hi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, sake āsane nisīditvā puccha yadākaṅkhasī”ti.
[¶5] That monk took his seat and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho so bhikkhu sake āsane nisīditvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶6] “Sir, are these the five grasping aggregates: form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness?”
> Pali: “ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā, seyyathidaṁ— rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho”ti?
[¶7] “Yes, they are,” replied the Buddha.
> Pali: “Ime kho, bhikkhu, pañcupādānakkhandhā, seyyathidaṁ— rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho”ti.
[¶8] Saying “Good, sir”, that monk approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. Then he asked another question:
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ uttariṁ pañhaṁ pucchi:
[¶9] “But sir, what is the root of these five grasping aggregates?”
> Pali: “ime pana, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā kiṁmūlakā”ti?
[¶10] “These five grasping aggregates are rooted in desire.”
> Pali: “Ime kho, bhikkhu, pañcupādānakkhandhā chandamūlakā”ti.
[¶11] “But sir, is that grasping the exact same thing as the five grasping aggregates? Or is grasping one thing and the five grasping aggregates another?”
> Pali: “Taṁyeva nu kho, bhante, upādānaṁ te pañcupādānakkhandhā, udāhu aññatra pañcahupādānakkhandhehi upādānan”ti?
[¶12] “Neither. The desire and greed for the five grasping aggregates is the grasping there.”
> Pali: “Na kho, bhikkhu, taṁyeva upādānaṁ te pañcupādānakkhandhā, nāpi aññatra pañcahupādānakkhandhehi upādānaṁ. Yo kho, bhikkhu, pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taṁ tattha upādānan”ti.
[¶13] “But sir, can there be disparity in desire and greed for the five grasping aggregates?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgavemattatā”ti?
[¶14] “There can,” said the Buddha. “It’s when someone thinks: ‘In the future, may I be of such form, such feeling, such perception, such choices, and such consciousness!’ That’s how there can be disparity in desire and greed for the five grasping aggregates.”
> Pali: “Siyā, bhikkhū”ti bhagavā avoca “idha, bhikkhu, ekaccassa evaṁ hoti: ‘evaṁrūpo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, evaṁvedano siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, evaṁsañño siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, evaṁsaṅkhāro siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, evaṁviññāṇo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānan’ti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, siyā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgavemattatā”ti.
[¶15] “Sir, what is the scope of the term ‘aggregates’ as applied to the aggregates?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, khandhānaṁ khandhādhivacanaṁ hotī”ti?
[¶16] “Any kind of form at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: this is called the aggregate of form. Any kind of feeling at all … Any kind of perception at all … Any kind of choices at all … Any kind of consciousness at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: this is called the aggregate of consciousness. That’s the scope of the term ‘aggregates’ as applied to the aggregates.”
> Pali: “Yaṁ kiñci, bhikkhu, rūpaṁ—atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā, oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā, hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā, yaṁ dūre santike vā—ayaṁ rūpakkhandho. Yā kāci vedanā—atītānāgatapaccuppannā ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā, oḷārikā vā sukhumā vā, hīnā vā paṇītā vā, yā dūre santike vā—ayaṁ vedanākkhandho. Yā kāci saññā—atītānāgatapaccuppannā …pe… yā dūre santike vā—ayaṁ saññākkhandho. Ye keci saṅkhārā—atītānāgatapaccuppannā ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā, oḷārikā vā sukhumā vā, hīnā vā paṇītā vā, ye dūre santike vā—ayaṁ saṅkhārakkhandho. Yaṁ kiñci viññāṇaṁ—atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā, oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā, hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā, yaṁ dūre santike vā—ayaṁ viññāṇakkhandho. Ettāvatā kho, bhikkhu, khandhānaṁ khandhādhivacanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶17] “What is the cause, sir, what is the reason why the aggregate of form is found? What is the cause, what is the reason why the aggregate of feeling … perception … choices … consciousness is found?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu ko paccayo rūpakkhandhassa paññāpanāya? Ko hetu ko paccayo vedanākkhandhassa paññāpanāya? Ko hetu ko paccayo saññākkhandhassa paññāpanāya? Ko hetu ko paccayo saṅkhārakkhandhassa paññāpanāya? Ko hetu ko paccayo viññāṇakkhandhassa paññāpanāyā”ti?
[¶18] “The four principal states are the reason why the aggregate of form is found. Contact is the reason why the aggregates of feeling, perception, and choices are found. Name and form are the reasons why the aggregate of consciousness is found.”
> Pali: “Cattāro kho, bhikkhu, mahābhūtā hetu, cattāro mahābhūtā paccayo rūpakkhandhassa paññāpanāya. Phasso hetu, phasso paccayo vedanākkhandhassa paññāpanāya. Phasso hetu, phasso paccayo saññākkhandhassa paññāpanāya. Phasso hetu, phasso paccayo saṅkhārakkhandhassa paññāpanāya. Nāmarūpaṁ kho, bhikkhu, hetu, nāmarūpaṁ paccayo viññāṇakkhandhassa paññāpanāyā”ti.
[¶19] “But sir, how does substantialist view come about?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante, sakkāyadiṭṭhi hotī”ti?
[¶20] “It’s when an unlearned ordinary person has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. They regard feeling as self, self as having feeling, feeling in self, or self in feeling. They regard perception as self, self as having perception, perception in self, or self in perception. They regard choices as self, self as having choices, choices in self, or self in choices. They regard consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. That’s how substantialist view comes about.”
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhu, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṁ attato samanupassati rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā rūpaṁ rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ; vedanaṁ attato samanupassati vedanāvantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā vedanaṁ vedanāya vā attānaṁ; saññaṁ attato samanupassati saññāvantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā saññaṁ saññāya vā attānaṁ; saṅkhāre attato samanupassati saṅkhāravantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā saṅkhāre saṅkhāresu vā attānaṁ; viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā viññāṇaṁ viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, sakkāyadiṭṭhi hotī”ti.
[¶21] “But sir, how does substantialist view not come about?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante, sakkāyadiṭṭhi na hotī”ti?
[¶22] “It’s when a learned noble disciple has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. They don’t regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. They don’t regard feeling as self, self as having feeling, feeling in self, or self in feeling. They don’t regard perception as self, self as having perception, perception in self, or self in perception. They don’t regard choices as self, self as having choices, choices in self, or self in choices. They don’t regard consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. That’s how substantialist view does not come about.”
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhu, sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na rūpaṁ attato samanupassati na rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ na attani vā rūpaṁ na rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ; na vedanaṁ attato samanupassati na vedanāvantaṁ vā attānaṁ na attani vā vedanaṁ na vedanāya vā attānaṁ; na saññaṁ attato samanupassati na saññāvantaṁ vā attānaṁ na attani vā saññaṁ na saññāya vā attānaṁ; na saṅkhāre attato samanupassati na saṅkhāravantaṁ vā attānaṁ na attani vā saṅkhāre na saṅkhāresu vā attānaṁ; na viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati na viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ na attani vā viññāṇaṁ na viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, sakkāyadiṭṭhi na hotī”ti.
[¶23] “Sir, what’s the gratification, the drawback, and the escape when it comes to form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhante, rūpe assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Ko vedanāya assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Ko saññāya assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Ko saṅkhāresu assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇaṁ? Ko viññāṇe assādo, ko ādīnavo, kiṁ nissaraṇan”ti?
[¶24] “The pleasure and happiness that arise from form: this is its gratification. That form is impermanent, suffering, and perishable: this is its drawback. Removing and giving up desire and greed for form: this is its escape. The pleasure and happiness that arise from feeling … perception … choices … consciousness: this is its gratification. That consciousness is impermanent, suffering, and perishable: this is its drawback. Removing and giving up desire and greed for consciousness: this is its escape.”
> Pali: “Yaṁ kho, bhikkhu, rūpaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ, ayaṁ rūpe assādo. Yaṁ rūpaṁ aniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, ayaṁ rūpe ādīnavo. Yo rūpe chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṁ, idaṁ rūpe nissaraṇaṁ. Yaṁ kho, bhikkhu, vedanaṁ paṭicca … saññaṁ paṭicca … saṅkhāre paṭicca … viññāṇaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ, ayaṁ viññāṇe assādo. Yaṁ viññāṇaṁ aniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, ayaṁ viññāṇe ādīnavo. Yo viññāṇe chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṁ, idaṁ viññāṇe nissaraṇan”ti.
[¶25] “Sir, how does one know and see so that there’s no I-making, mine-making, or underlying tendency to conceit for this conscious body and externally for all signs?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante, jānato kathaṁ passato imasmiñca saviññāṇake kāye bahiddhā ca sabbanimittesu ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānānusayā na hontī”ti?
[¶26] “One truly sees any kind of form at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all form—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ One truly sees any kind of feeling … perception … choices … consciousness at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all consciousness—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ That’s how to know and see so that there’s no I-making, mine-making, or underlying tendency to conceit for this conscious body and externally for all signs.”
> Pali: “Yaṁ kiñci, bhikkhu, rūpaṁ—atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā—sabbaṁ rūpaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passati. Yā kāci vedanā … yā kāci saññā … ye keci saṅkhārā … yaṁ kiñci viññāṇaṁ—atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā—sabbaṁ viññāṇaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passati. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, jānato evaṁ passato imasmiñca saviññāṇake kāye bahiddhā ca sabbanimittesu ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānānusayā na hontī”ti.
[¶27] Now at that time one of the monks had the thought, “So it seems, worthy sir, that form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are not-self. Then how will the deeds done by not-self affect the self?”
> Pali: Atha kho aññatarassa bhikkhuno evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: “iti kira, bho, rūpaṁ anattā, vedanā anattā, saññā anattā, saṅkhārā anattā, viññāṇaṁ anattā; anattakatāni kammāni kamattānaṁ phusissantī”ti?
[¶28] But the Buddha, knowing that monk’s train of thought, addressed the monks: “It’s possible that some futile person here—unknowing and ignorant, his mind dominated by craving—thinks he can overstep the Teacher’s instructions. He thinks: ‘So it seems, worthy sir, that form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness are not-self. Then how will the deeds done by not-self affect the self?’ Now, monks, you have been educated by me in questioning with regard to all these things in all such cases.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tassa bhikkhuno cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya bhikkhū āmantesi: “ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco moghapuriso avidvā avijjāgato taṇhādhipateyyena cetasā satthu sāsanaṁ atidhāvitabbaṁ maññeyya: ‘iti kira, bho, rūpaṁ anattā, vedanā anattā, saññā anattā, saṅkhārā anattā, viññāṇaṁ anattā; anattakatāni kammāni kamattānaṁ phusissantī’ti. Paṭivinītā kho me tumhe, bhikkhave, tatra tatra dhammesu.
[¶29] What do you think, monks? Is form permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶30] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶31] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶32] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶33] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶34] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶35] “What do you think, monks? Is feeling … perception … choices … consciousness permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, vedanā … saññā … saṅkhārā … viññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶36] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶37] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶38] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶39] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶40] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶41] “So you should truly see any kind of form at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all form—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’
> Pali: “Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, yaṁ kiñci rūpaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā sabbaṁ rūpaṁ: ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ.
[¶42] You should truly see any kind of feeling … perception … choices … consciousness at all—past, future, or present; internal or external; solid or subtle; inferior or superior; far or near: all consciousness—with right understanding: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’
> Pali: Yā kāci vedanā … yā kāci saññā … ye keci saṅkhārā … yaṁ kiñci viññāṇaṁ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṁ vā sukhumaṁ vā hīnaṁ vā paṇītaṁ vā yaṁ dūre santike vā sabbaṁ viññāṇaṁ: ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ.
[¶43] Seeing this, a learned noble disciple grows disillusioned with form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness.
> Pali: Evaṁ passaṁ, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvako rūpasmimpi nibbindati, vedanāyapi nibbindati, saññāyapi nibbindati, saṅkhāresupi nibbindati, viññāṇasmimpi nibbindati;
[¶44] Being disillusioned, desire fades away. When desire fades away they’re freed. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: nibbindaṁ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶45] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī”ti.
[¶46] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the monks approved what the Buddha said. And while this discourse was being spoken, the minds of sixty monks were freed from defilements by not grasping.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti. Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasmiṁ bhaññamāne saṭṭhimattānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṁsūti.
[¶47] > Pali: Mahāpuṇṇamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 121. MN 110 · The Shorter Discourse on the Full-Moon Night
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/121/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/121/#p-N
[¶0] MN 110 · The Shorter Discourse on the Full-Moon Night
> Pali: MN 110 · Cūḷapuṇṇamasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde.
[¶2] Now, at that time it was the sabbath—the full moon on the fifteenth day—and the Buddha was sitting in the open surrounded by the Saṅgha of monks. Then the Buddha looked around the Saṅgha of monks, who were so very silent. He addressed them, “Monks, could an untrue person know of an untrue person: ‘This worthy one is an untrue person’?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto abbhokāse nisinno hoti. Atha kho bhagavā tuṇhībhūtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anuviloketvā bhikkhū āmantesi: “jāneyya nu kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisaṁ: ‘asappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’”ti?
[¶3] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶4] “Good, monks! It’s impossible, it can’t happen, that an untrue person could know of an untrue person: ‘This worthy one is an untrue person.’ But could an untrue person know of a true person: ‘This worthy one is a true person’?”
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave; aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṁ asappuriso asappurisaṁ jāneyya: ‘asappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’ti. Jāneyya pana, bhikkhave, asappuriso sappurisaṁ: ‘sappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’”ti?
[¶5] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶6] “Good, monks! That too is impossible. An untrue person has bad qualities, is devoted to untrue persons, and has the intentions, counsel, speech, actions, views, and giving of an untrue person.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave; etampi kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭhānaṁ anavakāso yaṁ asappuriso sappurisaṁ jāneyya: ‘sappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’ti. Asappuriso, bhikkhave, assaddhammasamannāgato hoti, asappurisabhatti hoti, asappurisacintī hoti, asappurisamantī hoti, asappurisavāco hoti, asappurisakammanto hoti, asappurisadiṭṭhi hoti; asappurisadānaṁ deti.
[¶7] And how does an untrue person have bad qualities? It’s when an untrue person is faithless, shameless, imprudent, unlearned, lazy, unmindful, and witless. That’s how an untrue person has bad qualities.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso assaddhammasamannāgato hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso assaddho hoti, ahiriko hoti, anottappī hoti, appassuto hoti, kusīto hoti, muṭṭhassati hoti, duppañño hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso assaddhammasamannāgato hoti.
[¶8] And how is an untrue person devoted to untrue persons? It’s when an untrue person is a friend and companion of ascetics and brahmins who are faithless, shameless, imprudent, unlearned, lazy, unmindful, and witless. That’s how an untrue person is devoted to untrue persons.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisabhatti hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappurisassa ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā assaddhā ahirikā anottappino appassutā kusītā muṭṭhassatino duppaññā tyāssa mittā honti te sahāyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisabhatti hoti.
[¶9] And how does an untrue person have the intentions of an untrue person? It’s when an untrue person intends to hurt themselves, hurt others, and hurt both. That’s how an untrue person has the intentions of an untrue person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisacintī hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāyapi ceteti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisacintī hoti.
[¶10] And how does an untrue person offer the counsel of an untrue person? It’s when an untrue person offers counsel that hurts themselves, hurts others, and hurts both. That’s how an untrue person offers the counsel of an untrue person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisamantī hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso attabyābādhāyapi manteti, parabyābādhāyapi manteti, ubhayabyābādhāyapi manteti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisamantī hoti.
[¶11] And how does an untrue person have the speech of an untrue person? It’s when an untrue person uses speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, and nonsensical. That’s how an untrue person has the speech of an untrue person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisavāco hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso musāvādī hoti, pisuṇavāco hoti, pharusavāco hoti, samphappalāpī hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisavāco hoti.
[¶12] And how does an untrue person have the action of an untrue person? It’s when an untrue person kills living creatures, steals, and commits sexual misconduct. That’s how an untrue person has the actions of an untrue person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisakammanto hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso pāṇātipātī hoti, adinnādāyī hoti, kāmesumicchācārī hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisakammanto hoti.
[¶13] And how does an untrue person have the view of an untrue person? It’s when an untrue person has such a view: ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ That’s how an untrue person has the view of an untrue person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisadiṭṭhi hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso evaṁdiṭṭhi hoti: ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā, ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisadiṭṭhi hoti.
[¶14] And how does an untrue person give the gifts of an untrue person? It’s when an untrue person gives a gift carelessly, not with their own hand, and thoughtlessly. They give the dregs, and they give without consideration for consequences. That’s how an untrue person gives the gifts of an untrue person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisadānaṁ deti? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ deti, asahatthā dānaṁ deti, acittīkatvā dānaṁ deti, apaviṭṭhaṁ dānaṁ deti anāgamanadiṭṭhiko dānaṁ deti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, asappuriso asappurisadānaṁ deti.
[¶15] That untrue person—who has such bad qualities, is devoted to untrue persons, and has the intentions, counsel, speech, actions, views, and giving of an untrue person— when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in the place where untrue persons are reborn. And what is the place where untrue persons are reborn? Hell or the animal realm.
> Pali: So, bhikkhave, asappuriso evaṁ assaddhammasamannāgato, evaṁ asappurisabhatti, evaṁ asappurisacintī, evaṁ asappurisamantī, evaṁ asappurisavāco, evaṁ asappurisakammanto, evaṁ asappurisadiṭṭhi; evaṁ asappurisadānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā yā asappurisānaṁ gati tattha upapajjati. Kā ca, bhikkhave, asappurisānaṁ gati? Nirayo vā tiracchānayoni vā.
[¶16] Monks, could a true person know of a true person: ‘This worthy one is a true person’?”
> Pali: Jāneyya nu kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisaṁ: ‘sappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’”ti?
[¶17] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶18] “Good, monks! It is possible that a true person could know of a true person: ‘This worthy one is a true person.’ But could a true person know of an untrue person: ‘This worthy one is an untrue person’?”
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave; ṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati yaṁ sappuriso sappurisaṁ jāneyya: ‘sappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’ti. Jāneyya pana, bhikkhave, sappuriso asappurisaṁ: ‘asappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’”ti?
[¶19] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶20] “Good, monks! That too is possible. A true person has good qualities, is devoted to true persons, and has the intentions, counsel, speech, actions, views, and giving of a true person.
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhikkhave; etampi kho, bhikkhave, ṭhānaṁ vijjati yaṁ sappuriso asappurisaṁ jāneyya: ‘asappuriso ayaṁ bhavan’ti. Sappuriso, bhikkhave, saddhammasamannāgato hoti, sappurisabhatti hoti, sappurisacintī hoti, sappurisamantī hoti, sappurisavāco hoti, sappurisakammanto hoti, sappurisadiṭṭhi hoti; sappurisadānaṁ deti.
[¶21] And how does a true person have good qualities? It’s when a true person is faithful, conscientious, prudent, learned, energetic, mindful, and wise. That’s how a true person has good qualities.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso saddhammasamannāgato hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappuriso saddho hoti, hirimā hoti, ottappī hoti, bahussuto hoti, āraddhavīriyo hoti, upaṭṭhitassati hoti, paññavā hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso saddhammasamannāgato hoti.
[¶22] And how is a true person devoted to true persons? It’s when a true person is a friend and companion of ascetics and brahmins who are faithful, conscientious, prudent, learned, energetic, mindful, and wise. That’s how a true person is devoted to true persons.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisabhatti hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappurisassa ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhā hirimanto ottappino bahussutā āraddhavīriyā upaṭṭhitassatino paññavanto tyāssa mittā honti, te sahāyā. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisabhatti hoti.
[¶23] And how does a true person have the intentions of a true person? It’s when a true person doesn’t intend to hurt themselves, hurt others, and hurt both. That’s how a true person has the intentions of a true person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisacintī hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappuriso nevattabyābādhāya ceteti, na parabyābādhāya ceteti, na ubhayabyābādhāya ceteti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisacintī hoti.
[¶24] And how does a true person offer the counsel of a true person? It’s when a true person offers counsel that doesn’t hurt themselves, hurt others, and hurt both. That’s how a true person offers the counsel of a true person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisamantī hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappuriso nevattabyābādhāya manteti, na parabyābādhāya manteti, na ubhayabyābādhāya manteti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisamantī hoti.
[¶25] And how does a true person have the speech of a true person? It’s when a true person refrains from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. That’s how a true person has the speech of a true person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisavāco hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappuriso musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisavāco hoti.
[¶26] And how does a true person have the action of a true person? It’s when a true person refrains from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. That’s how a true person has the action of a true person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisakammanto hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappuriso pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisakammanto hoti.
[¶27] And how does a true person have the view of a true person? It’s when a true person has such a view: ‘There is meaning in giving, sacrifice, and offerings. There are fruits and results of good and bad deeds. There is an afterlife. There are such things as mother and father, and beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there are ascetics and brahmins who are rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describe the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ That’s how a true person has the view of a true person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisadiṭṭhi hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappuriso evaṁdiṭṭhi hoti: ‘atthi dinnaṁ, atthi yiṭṭhaṁ, atthi hutaṁ, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, atthi ayaṁ loko, atthi paro loko, atthi mātā, atthi pitā, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisadiṭṭhi hoti.
[¶28] And how does a true person give the gifts of a true person? It’s when a true person gives a gift carefully, with their own hand, and thoughtfully. They don’t give the dregs, and they give with consideration for consequences. That’s how a true person gives the gifts of a true person.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisadānaṁ deti? Idha, bhikkhave, sappuriso sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ deti, sahatthā dānaṁ deti, cittīkatvā dānaṁ deti, anapaviṭṭhaṁ dānaṁ deti, āgamanadiṭṭhiko dānaṁ deti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sappuriso sappurisadānaṁ deti.
[¶29] That true person—who has such good qualities, is devoted to true persons, and has the intentions, counsel, speech, actions, views, and giving of a true person— when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in the place where true persons are reborn. And what is the place where true persons are reborn? A state of greatness among gods or humans.”
> Pali: So, bhikkhave, sappuriso evaṁ saddhammasamannāgato, evaṁ sappurisabhatti, evaṁ sappurisacintī, evaṁ sappurisamantī, evaṁ sappurisavāco, evaṁ sappurisakammanto, evaṁ sappurisadiṭṭhi; evaṁ sappurisadānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā yā sappurisānaṁ gati tattha upapajjati. Kā ca, bhikkhave, sappurisānaṁ gati? Devamahattatā vā manussamahattatā vā”ti.
[¶30] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the monks approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶31] > Pali: Cūḷapuṇṇamasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶32] > Pali: Devadahavaggo niṭṭhito paṭhamo.
[¶33] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶34] > Pali: Devadahaṁ pañcattayaṁ,
Kinti sāma sunakkhattaṁ;
Sappāya gaṇa gopaka—
Mahāpuṇṇa cūḷapuṇṇañcāti.
## 122. MN 111 · One by One
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/122/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/122/#p-N
[¶0] MN 111 · One by One
> Pali: MN 111 · Anupadasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Sāriputta is astute, mendicants. He has great wisdom, widespread wisdom, laughing wisdom, swift wisdom, sharp wisdom, and penetrating wisdom. For a fortnight he practiced discernment of phenomena one by one. And this is how he did it.
> Pali: “Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, sāriputto; mahāpañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto; puthupañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto; hāsapañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto; javanapañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto; tikkhapañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto; nibbedhikapañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto; sāriputto, bhikkhave, aḍḍhamāsaṁ anupadadhammavipassanaṁ vipassati. Tatridaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputtassa anupadadhammavipassanāya hoti.
[¶4] Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, he entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. And he distinguished the phenomena of the first absorption one by one: placing and keeping and rapture and bliss and unification of mind; contact, feeling, perception, intention, mind, enthusiasm, decision, energy, mindfulness, equanimity, and application of mind. He knew those phenomena as they arose, as they remained, and as they went away. He understood: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, sāriputto vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ye ca paṭhame jhāne dhammā vitakko ca vicāro ca pīti ca sukhañca cittekaggatā ca, phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittaṁ chando adhimokkho vīriyaṁ sati upekkhā manasikāro—tyāssa dhammā anupadavavatthitā honti. Tyāssa dhammā viditā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶5] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected were stilled, he entered and remained in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶6] And he distinguished the phenomena of the second absorption one by one: internal confidence and rapture and bliss and unification of mind; contact, feeling, perception, intention, mind, enthusiasm, decision, energy, mindfulness, equanimity, and application of mind. He knew those phenomena as they arose, as they remained, and as they went away. He understood: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: Ye ca dutiye jhāne dhammā—ajjhattaṁ sampasādo ca pīti ca sukhañca cittekaggatā ca, phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittaṁ chando adhimokkho vīriyaṁ sati upekkhā manasikāro—tyāssa dhammā anupadavavatthitā honti. Tyāssa dhammā viditā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶7] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, he entered and remained in the third absorption, where he meditated with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti. Yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶8] And he distinguished the phenomena of the third absorption one by one: bliss and mindfulness and awareness and unification of mind; contact, feeling, perception, intention, mind, enthusiasm, decision, energy, mindfulness, equanimity, and application of mind. He knew those phenomena as they arose, as they remained, and as they went away. He understood: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: Ye ca tatiye jhāne dhammā—sukhañca sati ca sampajaññañca cittekaggatā ca, phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittaṁ chando adhimokkho vīriyaṁ sati upekkhā manasikāro— tyāssa dhammā anupadavavatthitā honti, tyāssa dhammā viditā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶9] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain, and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, he entered and remained in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶10] And he distinguished the phenomena of the fourth absorption one by one: equanimity and neutral feeling and mental unconcern due to tranquility and pure mindfulness and unification of mind; contact, feeling, perception, intention, mind, enthusiasm, decision, energy, mindfulness, equanimity, and application of mind. He knew those phenomena as they arose, as they remained, and as they went away. He understood: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, his mind without boundaries. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: Ye ca catutthe jhāne dhammā—upekkhā adukkhamasukhā vedanā passaddhattā cetaso anābhogo satipārisuddhi cittekaggatā ca, phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittaṁ chando adhimokkho vīriyaṁ sati upekkhā manasikāro—tyāssa dhammā anupadavavatthitā honti. Tyāssa dhammā viditā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶11] Furthermore, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, he entered and remained in the dimension of infinite space.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶12] And he distinguished the phenomena of the dimension of infinite space one by one: the perception of the dimension of infinite space and unification of mind; contact, feeling, perception, intention, mind, enthusiasm, decision, energy, mindfulness, equanimity, and application of mind. He knew those phenomena as they arose, as they remained, and as they went away. He understood: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: Ye ca ākāsānañcāyatane dhammā—ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā ca cittekaggatā ca phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittaṁ chando adhimokkho vīriyaṁ sati upekkhā manasikāro—tyāssa dhammā anupadavavatthitā honti. Tyāssa dhammā viditā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶13] Furthermore, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, he entered and remained in the dimension of infinite consciousness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶14] And he distinguished the phenomena of the dimension of infinite consciousness one by one: the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness and unification of mind; contact, feeling, perception, intention, mind, enthusiasm, decision, energy, mindfulness, equanimity, and application of mind. He knew those phenomena as they arose, as they remained, and as they went away. He understood: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, his mind free of limits. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: Ye ca viññāṇañcāyatane dhammā—viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā ca cittekaggatā ca, phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittaṁ chando adhimokkho vīriyaṁ sati upekkhā manasikāro—tyāssa dhammā anupadavavatthitā honti. Tyāssa dhammā viditā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶15] Furthermore, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, he entered and remained in the dimension of nothingness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶16] And he distinguished the phenomena of the dimension of nothingness one by one: the perception of the dimension of nothingness and unification of mind; contact, feeling, perception, intention, mind, enthusiasm, decision, energy, mindfulness, equanimity, and application of mind. He knew those phenomena as they arose, as they remained, and as they went away. He understood: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: Ye ca ākiñcaññāyatane dhammā—ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā ca cittekaggatā ca, phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittaṁ chando adhimokkho vīriyaṁ sati upekkhā manasikāro—tyāssa dhammā anupadavavatthitā honti. Tyāssa dhammā viditā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶17] Furthermore, going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, he entered and remained in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶18] And he emerged from that attainment with mindfulness. Then he contemplated the phenomena of that attainment that had passed, ceased, and perished: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, his mind without boundaries. He understood: ‘There is an escape beyond.’ Repeated practice of that confirmed this for him.
> Pali: So tāya samāpattiyā sato vuṭṭhahati. So tāya samāpattiyā sato vuṭṭhahitvā ye dhammā atītā niruddhā vipariṇatā te dhamme samanupassati: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘atthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā atthitvevassa hoti.
[¶19] Furthermore, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, he entered and remained in the cessation of perception and feeling. And, having seen with wisdom, his defilements came to an end.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sāriputto sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati. Paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti.
[¶20] And he emerged from that attainment with mindfulness. Then he contemplated the phenomena of that attainment that had passed, ceased, and perished: ‘So it seems that these phenomena, not having been, come to be; and having come to be, they flit away.’ Regarding those phenomena, he meditated without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. He understood: ‘There is no escape beyond.’ By cultivating that he confirmed that there is not.
> Pali: So tāya samāpattiyā sato vuṭṭhahati. So tāya samāpattiyā sato vuṭṭhahitvā ye dhammā atītā niruddhā vipariṇatā te dhamme samanupassati: ‘evaṁ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’ti. So tesu dhammesu anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharati. So ‘natthi uttari nissaraṇan’ti pajānāti. Tabbahulīkārā natthi tvevassa hoti.
[¶21] And if there’s anyone of whom it may be rightly said that they have attained mastery and perfection in noble ethics, immersion, wisdom, and freedom, it’s Sāriputta.
> Pali: Yaṁ kho taṁ, bhikkhave, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘vasippatto pāramippatto ariyasmiṁ sīlasmiṁ, vasippatto pāramippatto ariyasmiṁ samādhismiṁ, vasippatto pāramippatto ariyāya paññāya, vasippatto pāramippatto ariyāya vimuttiyā’ti, sāriputtameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘vasippatto pāramippatto ariyasmiṁ sīlasmiṁ, vasippatto pāramippatto ariyasmiṁ samādhismiṁ, vasippatto pāramippatto ariyāya paññāya, vasippatto pāramippatto ariyāya vimuttiyā’ti.
[¶22] And if there’s anyone of whom it may be rightly said that they’re the Buddha’s bosom son, born from his mouth, born of the teaching, created by the teaching, heir in the teaching, not in things of the flesh, it’s Sāriputta.
> Pali: Yaṁ kho taṁ, bhikkhave, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘bhagavato putto oraso mukhato jāto dhammajo dhammanimmito dhammadāyādo no āmisadāyādo’ti, sāriputtameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘bhagavato putto oraso mukhato jāto dhammajo dhammanimmito dhammadāyādo no āmisadāyādo’ti.
[¶23] Sāriputta rightly keeps rolling the supreme Wheel of Dhamma that was rolled forth by the Realized One.”
> Pali: Sāriputto, bhikkhave, tathāgatena anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitaṁ sammadeva anuppavattetī”ti.
[¶24] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶25] > Pali: Anupadasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 123. MN 112 · The Sixfold Purification
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/123/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/123/#p-N
[¶0] MN 112 · The Sixfold Purification
> Pali: MN 112 · Chabbisodhanasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Take a mendicant who declares enlightenment: ‘I understand: “Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.”’
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu aññaṁ byākaroti: ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāmī’ti.
[¶4] You should neither approve nor reject that mendicant’s statement. Rather, you should question them: ‘Reverend, these four kinds of expression have been rightly explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. What four? Saying you’ve seen, heard, thought, or known something, and you have. These are the four kinds of expression rightly explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. How does the venerable know and see regarding these four kinds of expression so that your mind is freed from defilements by not grasping?’
> Pali: Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā pañho pucchitabbo: ‘cattārome, āvuso, vohārā tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātā. Katame cattāro? Diṭṭhe diṭṭhavāditā, sute sutavāditā, mute mutavāditā, viññāte viññātavāditā— ime kho, āvuso, cattāro vohārā tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātā. Kathaṁ jānato panāyasmato, kathaṁ passato imesu catūsu vohāresu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti?
[¶5] For a mendicant with defilements ended—who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—it is in line with the teaching to answer: ‘Regarding what is seen, reverends, I live without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. Regarding what is heard … thought … or known, I live without getting involved or shying away, independent, untied, liberated, detached, with mind free of boundaries. That is how I know and see regarding these four kinds of expression so that my mind is freed from defilements by not grasping.’
> Pali: Khīṇāsavassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno vusitavato katakaraṇīyassa ohitabhārassa anuppattasadatthassa parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanassa sammadaññāvimuttassa ayamanudhammo hoti veyyākaraṇāya: ‘diṭṭhe kho ahaṁ, āvuso, anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharāmi. Sute kho ahaṁ, āvuso …pe… mute kho ahaṁ, āvuso … viññāte kho ahaṁ, āvuso, anupāyo anapāyo anissito appaṭibaddho vippamutto visaṁyutto vimariyādīkatena cetasā viharāmi. Evaṁ kho me, āvuso, jānato evaṁ passato imesu catūsu vohāresu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti.
[¶6] Saying ‘Good!’ you should applaud and cheer that mendicant’s statement, then ask a further question:
> Pali: Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditabbaṁ anumoditabbaṁ. ‘Sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uttariṁ pañho pucchitabbo.
[¶7] ‘Reverend, these five grasping aggregates have been rightly explained by the Buddha. What five? That is: the grasping aggregates of form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. These are the five grasping aggregates that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. How does the venerable know and see regarding these five grasping aggregates so that your mind is freed from defilements by not grasping?’
> Pali: ‘Pañcime, āvuso, upādānakkhandhā tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātā. Katame pañca? Seyyathidaṁ—rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho— ime kho, āvuso, pañcupādānakkhandhā tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātā. Kathaṁ jānato panāyasmato, kathaṁ passato imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti?
[¶8] For a mendicant with defilements ended it is in line with the teaching to answer: ‘Reverends, knowing that form is powerless, faded, and unreliable, I understand that my mind is freed through the ending, fading away, cessation, giving away, and letting go of attraction, grasping, mental fixation, insistence, and underlying tendency for form. Knowing that feeling … perception … choices … consciousness is powerless, faded, and unreliable, I understand that my mind is freed through the ending, fading away, cessation, giving away, and letting go of attraction, grasping, mental fixation, insistence, and underlying tendency for consciousness. That is how I know and see regarding these five grasping aggregates so that my mind is freed from defilements by not grasping.’
> Pali: Khīṇāsavassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno vusitavato katakaraṇīyassa ohitabhārassa anuppattasadatthassa parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanassa sammadaññāvimuttassa ayamanudhammo hoti veyyākaraṇāya: ‘rūpaṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso, abalaṁ virāgunaṁ anassāsikanti viditvā ye rūpe upāyūpādānā cetaso adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā tesaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā vimuttaṁ me cittanti pajānāmi. Vedanaṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso …pe… saññaṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso … saṅkhāre kho ahaṁ, āvuso … viññāṇaṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso, abalaṁ virāgunaṁ anassāsikanti viditvā ye viññāṇe upāyūpādānā cetaso adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā tesaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā vimuttaṁ me cittanti pajānāmi. Evaṁ kho me, āvuso, jānato evaṁ passato imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti.
[¶9] Saying ‘Good!’ you should applaud and cheer that mendicant’s statement, then ask a further question:
> Pali: Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditabbaṁ, anumoditabbaṁ. ‘Sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uttariṁ pañho pucchitabbo.
[¶10] ‘Reverend, these six elements have been rightly explained by the Buddha. What six? The elements of earth, water, fire, air, space, and consciousness. These are the six elements that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. How does the venerable know and see regarding these six elements so that your mind is freed from defilements by not grasping?’
> Pali: ‘Chayimā, āvuso, dhātuyo tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātā. Katamā cha? Pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu— imā kho, āvuso, cha dhātuyo tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātā. Kathaṁ jānato panāyasmato, kathaṁ passato imāsu chasu dhātūsu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti?
[¶11] For a mendicant with defilements ended it is in line with the teaching to answer: ‘Reverends, I’ve not taken the earth element as self, nor is there a self based on the earth element. And I understand that my mind is freed through the ending, fading away, cessation, giving away, and letting go of attraction, grasping, mental fixation, insistence, and underlying tendency based on the earth element. I’ve not taken the water element … fire element … air element … space element … consciousness element as self, nor is there a self based on the consciousness element. And I understand that my mind is freed through the ending of attraction based on the consciousness element. That is how I know and see regarding these six elements so that my mind is freed from defilements by not grasping.’
> Pali: Khīṇāsavassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno vusitavato katakaraṇīyassa ohitabhārassa anuppattasadatthassa parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanassa sammadaññāvimuttassa ayamanudhammo hoti veyyākaraṇāya: ‘pathavīdhātuṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso, na attato upagacchiṁ, na ca pathavīdhātunissitaṁ attānaṁ. Ye ca pathavīdhātunissitā upāyūpādānā cetaso adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā tesaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā vimuttaṁ me cittanti pajānāmi. Āpodhātuṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso …pe… tejodhātuṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso … vāyodhātuṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso … ākāsadhātuṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso … viññāṇadhātuṁ kho ahaṁ, āvuso, na attato upagacchiṁ, na ca viññāṇadhātunissitaṁ attānaṁ. Ye ca viññāṇadhātunissitā upāyūpādānā cetaso adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā tesaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā vimuttaṁ me cittanti pajānāmi. Evaṁ kho me, āvuso, jānato, evaṁ passato imāsu chasu dhātūsu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti.
[¶12] Saying ‘Good!’ you should applaud and cheer that mendicant’s statement, then ask a further question:
> Pali: Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditabbaṁ, anumoditabbaṁ. ‘Sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uttariṁ pañho pucchitabbo.
[¶13] ‘Reverend, these six interior and exterior sense fields have been rightly explained by the Buddha. What six? The eye and sights, the ear and sounds, the nose and smells, the tongue and tastes, the body and touches, and the mind and ideas. These are the six interior and exterior sense fields that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. How does the venerable know and see regarding these six interior and exterior sense fields so that your mind is freed from defilements by not grasping?’
> Pali: ‘Cha kho panimāni, āvuso, ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātāni. Katamāni cha? Cakkhu ceva rūpā ca, sotañca saddā ca, ghānañca gandhā ca, jivhā ca rasā ca, kāyo ca phoṭṭhabbā ca, mano ca dhammā ca— imāni kho, āvuso, cha ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sammadakkhātāni. Kathaṁ jānato panāyasmato, kathaṁ passato imesu chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti?
[¶14] For a mendicant with defilements ended it is in line with the teaching to answer: ‘I understand that my mind is freed through the ending, fading away, cessation, giving away, and letting go of desire and greed and relishing and craving; attraction, grasping, mental fixation, insistence, and underlying tendency for the eye, sights, eye consciousness, and things knowable by eye consciousness. I understand that my mind is freed through the ending of desire for the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, ideas, mind consciousness, and things knowable by mind consciousness. That is how I know and see regarding these six interior and exterior sense fields so that my mind is freed from defilements by not grasping.’
> Pali: Khīṇāsavassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno vusitavato katakaraṇīyassa ohitabhārassa anuppattasadatthassa parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanassa sammadaññāvimuttassa ayamanudhammo hoti veyyākaraṇāya: ‘cakkhusmiṁ, āvuso, rūpe cakkhuviññāṇe cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbesu dhammesu yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā ye ca upāyūpādānā cetaso adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā tesaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā vimuttaṁ me cittanti pajānāmi. Sotasmiṁ, āvuso, sadde sotaviññāṇe …pe… ghānasmiṁ, āvuso, gandhe ghānaviññāṇe … jivhāya, āvuso, rase jivhāviññāṇe … kāyasmiṁ, āvuso, phoṭṭhabbe kāyaviññāṇe … manasmiṁ, āvuso, dhamme manoviññāṇe manoviññāṇaviññātabbesu dhammesu yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā ye ca upāyūpādānā cetaso adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā tesaṁ khayā virāgā nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā vimuttaṁ me cittanti pajānāmi. Evaṁ kho me, āvuso, jānato evaṁ passato imesu chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuttan’ti.
[¶15] Saying ‘Good!’ you should applaud and cheer that mendicant’s statement, then ask a further question:
> Pali: Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditabbaṁ anumoditabbaṁ. ‘Sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uttariṁ pañho pucchitabbo.
[¶16] ‘Sir, how does the venerable know and see so that he has eradicated I-making, mine-making, and the underlying tendency to conceit for this conscious body and externally for all signs?’
> Pali: ‘Kathaṁ jānato panāyasmato, kathaṁ passato imasmiñca saviññāṇake kāye bahiddhā ca sabbanimittesu ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānānusayā samūhatā’ti?
[¶17] For a mendicant with defilements ended it is in line with the teaching to answer: ‘Formerly, reverends, when I was still a layperson, I was ignorant. Then the Realized One or one of his disciples taught me the Dhamma. I gained faith in the Realized One, and reflected:
> Pali: Khīṇāsavassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno vusitavato katakaraṇīyassa ohitabhārassa anuppattasadatthassa parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanassa sammadaññāvimuttassa ayamanudhammo hoti veyyākaraṇāya: ‘pubbe kho ahaṁ, āvuso, agāriyabhūto samāno aviddasu ahosiṁ. Tassa me tathāgato vā tathāgatasāvako vā dhammaṁ desesi. Tāhaṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhiṁ. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhiṁ:
[¶18] “Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from lay life to homelessness?”
> Pali: “sambādho gharāvāso rajāpatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan”ti.
[¶19] After some time I gave up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. I shaved off hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. Once I had gone forth, I took up the training and livelihood of the mendicants. I gave up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. I was scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. I gave up stealing. I took only what’s given, and expected only what’s given. I kept myself clean by not thieving. I gave up unchastity. I became chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex. I gave up lying. I spoke the truth and stuck to the truth. I was honest and dependable, not tricking the world with my words. I gave up backbiting. I didn’t repeat in one place what I heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, I reconciled those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. I gave up harsh speech. I spoke in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people. I gave up talking nonsense. My words were timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. I said things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, āvuso, aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajiṁ. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato ahosiṁ nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī vihāsiṁ. Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato ahosiṁ dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā vihāsiṁ. Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī ahosiṁ ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā. Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato ahosiṁ saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa. Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato ahosiṁ, ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya; iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā ahosiṁ. Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato ahosiṁ; yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā ahosiṁ. Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato ahosiṁ; kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā ahosiṁ kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ.
[¶20] I refrained from injuring plants and seeds. I ate in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. I refrained from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music. I refrained from attiring and adorning myself with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. I refrained from high and luxurious beds. I refrained from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chicken and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land. I refrained from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence.
> Pali: So bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, ekabhattiko ahosiṁ rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā. Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato ahosiṁ. Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato ahosiṁ. Uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato ahosiṁ. Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ; itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato ahosiṁ. Dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, kayavikkayā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato ahosiṁ, chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato ahosiṁ.
[¶21] I became content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever I went, I set out taking only these things. Like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, I became content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever I went, I set out taking only these things. When I had this spectrum of noble ethics, I experienced a blameless happiness inside myself.
> Pali: So santuṭṭho ahosiṁ kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamiṁ samādāyeva pakkamiṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva kho ahaṁ, āvuso; santuṭṭho ahosiṁ kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamiṁ samādāyeva pakkamiṁ. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedesiṁ.
[¶22] When I saw a sight with my eyes, I didn’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, I practiced restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When I heard a sound with my ears … When I smelled an odor with my nose … When I tasted a flavor with my tongue … When I felt a touch with my body … When I knew an idea with my mind, I didn’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of the mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, I practiced restraint, protecting the faculty of the mind, and achieving its restraint. When I had this noble sense restraint, I experienced an unsullied bliss inside myself.
> Pali: So cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī ahosiṁ nānubyañjanaggāhī; yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjiṁ; rakkhiṁ cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjiṁ. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī ahosiṁ nānubyañjanaggāhī; yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjiṁ; rakkhiṁ manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjiṁ. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedesiṁ.
[¶23] I acted with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: So abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī ahosiṁ, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī ahosiṁ, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī ahosiṁ, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī ahosiṁ, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī ahosiṁ, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī ahosiṁ, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī ahosiṁ.
[¶24] When I had this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble contentment, this noble sense restraint, and this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, I frequented a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. After the meal, I returned from almsround, sat down cross-legged, set my body straight, and brought mindfulness to the present.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajiṁ araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdiṁ pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.
[¶25] Giving up covetousness for the world, I meditated with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, I meditated with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, I meditated with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, I meditated without restlessness, my mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, I meditated having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā vihāsiṁ, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodhesiṁ. Byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto vihāsiṁ sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodhesiṁ. Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho vihāsiṁ ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodhesiṁ. Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato vihāsiṁ ajjhattaṁ, vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodhesiṁ. Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho vihāsiṁ akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodhesiṁ.
[¶26] I gave up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected were stilled, I entered and remained in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.
[¶27] When my mind had immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—I extended it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. I truly understood: “This is suffering” … “This is the origin of suffering” … “This is the cessation of suffering” … “This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering”. I truly understood: “These are defilements” … “This is the origin of defilements” … “This is the cessation of defilements” … “This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements”.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ. So idaṁ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ; ime āsavāti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ayaṁ āsavasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ayaṁ āsavanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ.
[¶28] Knowing and seeing like this, my mind was freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When it was freed, I knew it was freed. I understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” That is how I know and see so that I have eradicated I-making, mine-making, and the underlying tendency to conceit for this conscious body and externally for all signs.’
> Pali: Tassa me evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ ahosi. Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyāti abbhaññāsiṁ. Evaṁ kho me, āvuso, jānato evaṁ passato imasmiñca saviññāṇake kāye bahiddhā ca sabbanimittesu ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānānusayā samūhatā’ti.
[¶29] Saying ‘Good!’ you should applaud and cheer that mendicant’s statement, and then say to them: ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself as one of our spiritual companions!’”
> Pali: Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ‘sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditabbaṁ anumoditabbaṁ. ‘Sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā evamassa vacanīyo: ‘lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ samanupassāmā’”ti.
[¶30] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶31] > Pali: Chabbisodhanasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 124. MN 113 · A True Person
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/124/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/124/#p-N
[¶0] MN 113 · A True Person
> Pali: MN 113 · Sappurisasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I will teach you the qualities of a true person and the qualities of an untrue person. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “sappurisadhammañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi asappurisadhammañca. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “And what is a quality of an untrue person? Take an untrue person who has gone forth from an eminent family. They reflect: ‘I have gone forth from an eminent family, unlike these other mendicants.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘It’s not because of one’s eminent family that thoughts of greed, hate, or delusion come to an end. Even if someone has not gone forth from an eminent family, if they practice in line with the teaching, practice properly, and live in line with the teaching, they are worthy of honor and praise for that.’ Keeping the practice to themselves, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their eminent family. This is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: “Katamo ca, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo? Idha, bhikkhave, asappuriso uccākulā pabbajito hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi uccākulā pabbajito, ime panaññe bhikkhū na uccākulā pabbajitā’ti. So tāya uccākulīnatāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho uccākulīnatāya lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi uccākulā pabbajito hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya uccākulīnatāya nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶6] Furthermore, take an untrue person who has gone forth from a great family … from a wealthy family … from an exceptionally wealthy family. They reflect: ‘I have gone forth from an exceptionally wealthy family, unlike these other mendicants.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘It’s not because of one’s exceptionally wealthy family that thoughts of greed, hate, or delusion come to an end. Even if someone has not gone forth from an exceptionally wealthy family, if they practice in line with the teaching, practice properly, and live in line with the teaching, they are worthy of honor and praise for that.’ Keeping the practice to themselves, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their exceptionally wealthy family. This too is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso mahākulā pabbajito hoti …pe… mahābhogakulā pabbajito hoti …pe… uḷārabhogakulā pabbajito hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi uḷārabhogakulā pabbajito, ime panaññe bhikkhū na uḷārabhogakulā pabbajitā’ti. So tāya uḷārabhogatāya attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho uḷārabhogatāya lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi uḷārabhogakulā pabbajito hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya uḷārabhogatāya nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶7] Furthermore, take an untrue person who is well-known and famous. They reflect: ‘I’m well-known and famous. These other mendicants are obscure and insignificant.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘It’s not because of one’s fame that thoughts of greed, hate, or delusion come to an end. Even if someone is not well-known and famous, if they practice in line with the teaching, practice properly, and live in line with the teaching, they are worthy of honor and praise for that.’ Keeping the practice to themselves, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their fame. This too is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso ñāto hoti yasassī. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi ñāto yasassī, ime panaññe bhikkhū appaññātā appesakkhā’ti. So tena ñattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho ñattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi ñāto hoti yasassī; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena ñattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶8] Furthermore, take an untrue person who receives robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. They reflect: ‘I receive robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick, unlike these other mendicants.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘It’s not because of one’s material things that thoughts of greed, hate, or delusion come to an end. Even if someone doesn’t receive robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick, if they practice in line with the teaching, practice properly, and live in line with the teaching, they are worthy of honor and praise for that.’ Keeping the practice to themselves, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their material things. This too is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso lābhī hoti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṁ. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṁ, ime panaññe bhikkhū na lābhino cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānan’ti. So tena lābhena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho lābhena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi lābhī hoti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṁ; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena lābhena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶9] Furthermore, take an untrue person who is very learned … who is an expert in the monastic law … who is a Dhamma teacher … who dwells in the wilderness … who is a rag robe wearer … who eats only almsfood … who stays at the root of a tree … who stays in a charnel ground … who stays in the open air … who never lies down … who sleeps wherever they lay their mat … who eats in one sitting per day. They reflect: ‘I eat in one sitting per day, unlike these other mendicants.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘It’s not because of eating in one sitting per day that thoughts of greed, hate, or delusion come to an end. Even if someone eats in more than one sitting per day, if they practice in line with the teaching, practice properly, and live in line with the teaching, they are worthy of honor and praise for that.’ Keeping the practice to themselves, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their eating in one sitting per day. This too is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso bahussuto hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi bahussuto, ime panaññe bhikkhū na bahussutā’ti. So tena bāhusaccena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho bāhusaccena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi bahussuto hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena bāhusaccena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso vinayadharo hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi vinayadharo, ime panaññe bhikkhū na vinayadharā’ti. So tena vinayadharattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho vinayadharattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi vinayadharo hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena vinayadharattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso dhammakathiko hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi dhammakathiko, ime panaññe bhikkhū na dhammakathikā’ti. So tena dhammakathikattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho dhammakathikattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi dhammakathiko hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena dhammakathikattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso āraññiko hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi āraññiko ime panaññe bhikkhū na āraññikā’ti. So tena āraññikattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho āraññikattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi āraññiko hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena āraññikattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso paṁsukūliko hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi paṁsukūliko, ime panaññe bhikkhū na paṁsukūlikā’ti. So tena paṁsukūlikattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho paṁsukūlikattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi paṁsukūliko hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena paṁsukūlikattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso piṇḍapātiko hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi piṇḍapātiko, ime panaññe bhikkhū na piṇḍapātikā’ti. So tena piṇḍapātikattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho piṇḍapātikattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi piṇḍapātiko hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena piṇḍapātikattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso rukkhamūliko hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi rukkhamūliko, ime panaññe bhikkhū na rukkhamūlikā’ti. So tena rukkhamūlikattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho rukkhamūlikattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi rukkhamūliko hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena rukkhamūlikattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso sosāniko hoti …pe… abbhokāsiko hoti … nesajjiko hoti …pe… yathāsanthatiko hoti …pe… ekāsaniko hoti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi ekāsaniko, ime panaññe bhikkhū na ekāsanikā’ti. So tena ekāsanikattena attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘na kho ekāsanikattena lobhadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, dosadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti, mohadhammā vā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. No cepi ekāsaniko hoti; so ca hoti dhammānudhammappaṭipanno sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tattha pujjo, so tattha pāsaṁso’ti. So paṭipadaṁyeva antaraṁ karitvā tena ekāsanikattena nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶10] Furthermore, take an untrue person who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They reflect: ‘I have attained the first absorption, unlike these other mendicants.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘The Buddha has spoken of not being determined even by the attainment of the first absorption. For however they imagine it, it turns out to be something else.’ Keeping to themselves the fact that they are not determined by that, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their attainment of the first absorption. This too is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiyā lābhī, ime panaññe bhikkhū paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiyā na lābhino’ti. So tāya paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiyāpi kho atammayatā vuttā bhagavatā. Yena yena hi maññanti tato taṁ hoti aññathā’ti. So atammayataññeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶11] Furthermore, take an untrue person who, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, enters and remains in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. They reflect: ‘I have attained the fourth absorption, unlike these other mendicants.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘The Buddha has spoken of not being determined even by the attainment of the fourth absorption. For however they imagine it, it turns out to be something else.’ Keeping to themselves the fact that they are not determined by that, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their attainment of the fourth absorption. This too is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi catutthajjhānasamāpattiyā lābhī, ime panaññe bhikkhū catutthajjhānasamāpattiyā na lābhino’ti. So tāya catutthajjhānasamāpattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘catutthajjhānasamāpattiyāpi kho atammayatā vuttā bhagavatā. Yena yena hi maññanti tato taṁ hoti aññathā’ti. So atammayataññeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya catutthajjhānasamāpattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶12] Furthermore, take an untrue person who, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. They reflect: ‘I have attained the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, unlike these other mendicants.’ And they glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a quality of an untrue person. A true person reflects: ‘The Buddha has spoken of not being determined even by the attainment of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. For however they imagine it, it turns out to be something else.’ Keeping to themselves the fact that they are not determined by that, they don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of their attainment of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This too is a quality of a true person.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā lābhī, ime panaññe bhikkhū ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā na lābhino’ti. So tāya ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyāpi kho atammayatā vuttā bhagavatā. Yena yena hi maññanti tato taṁ hoti aññathā’ti. So atammayataññeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā lābhī, ime panaññe bhikkhū viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā na lābhino’ti. So tāya viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyāpi kho atammayatā vuttā bhagavatā. Yena yena hi maññanti tato taṁ hoti aññathā’ti. So atammayataññeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā lābhī, ime panaññe bhikkhū ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā na lābhino’ti. So tāya ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyāpi kho atammayatā vuttā bhagavatā. Yena yena hi maññanti tato taṁ hoti aññathā’ti. So atammayataññeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, asappuriso sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. So iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘ahaṁ khomhi nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā lābhī, ime panaññe bhikkhū nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā na lābhino’ti. So tāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā attānukkaṁseti, paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, asappurisadhammo. Sappuriso ca kho, bhikkhave, iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyāpi kho atammayatā vuttā bhagavatā. Yena yena hi maññanti tato taṁ hoti aññathā’ti. So atammayataññeva antaraṁ karitvā tāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā nevattānukkaṁseti, na paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi, bhikkhave, sappurisadhammo.
[¶13] Furthermore, take a true person who, going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, enters and remains in the cessation of perception and feeling. And, having seen with wisdom, their defilements come to an end. This is a mendicant who does not conceive with anything, does not conceive regarding anything, does not conceive through anything.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, sappuriso sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati. Paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na kiñci maññati, na kuhiñci maññati, na kenaci maññatī”ti.
[¶14] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶15] > Pali: Sappurisasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 125. MN 114 · What Should and Should Not Be Cultivated · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/125/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/125/#p-N
[¶0] MN 114 · What Should and Should Not Be Cultivated
> Pali: MN 114 · Sevitabbāsevitabbasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I will teach you an exposition of the teaching on what should and should not be cultivated. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “sevitabbāsevitabbaṁ vo, bhikkhave, dhammapariyāyaṁ desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “I say that there are two kinds of bodily behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of bodily behavior.
> Pali: “Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ kāyasamācāraṁ.
[¶6] I say that there are two kinds of verbal behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of verbal behavior.
> Pali: Vacīsamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ vacīsamācāraṁ.
[¶7] I say that there are two kinds of mental behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of mental behavior.
> Pali: Manosamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ manosamācāraṁ.
[¶8] I say that there are two arisings of thought: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an arising of thought.
> Pali: Cittuppādampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ cittuppādaṁ.
[¶9] I say that there are two acquisitions of perception: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an acquisition of perception.
> Pali: Saññāpaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ saññāpaṭilābhaṁ.
[¶10] I say that there are two acquisitions of views: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an acquisition of views.
> Pali: Diṭṭhipaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ diṭṭhipaṭilābhaṁ.
[¶11] I say that there are two kinds of incarnation: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And these are equally incarnation.”
> Pali: Attabhāvapaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhan”ti.
[¶12] When he said this, Venerable Sāriputta said to the Buddha, “Sir, this is how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “imassa kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi.
[¶13] ‘I say that there are two kinds of bodily behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of bodily behavior.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the kind of bodily behavior which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of bodily behavior which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: ‘Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ kāyasamācāran’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, evarūpo kāyasamācāro na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, evarūpo kāyasamācāro sevitabbo.
[¶14] And what kind of bodily behavior causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline? It’s when someone kills living creatures. They’re violent, bloody-handed, a hardened killer, merciless to living beings. They steal. With the intention to commit theft, they take the wealth or belongings of others from village or wilderness. They commit sexual misconduct. They have relations with women who have their mother, father, both mother and father, brother, sister, relatives, or clan as guardian. They have relations with a woman who is protected on principle, or who has a husband, or whose violation is punishable by law, or even one who has been garlanded as a token of betrothal. That kind of bodily behavior causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco pāṇātipātī hoti luddo lohitapāṇi hatappahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu; adinnādāyī kho pana hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ gāmagataṁ vā araññagataṁ vā taṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādātā hoti; kāmesumicchācārī kho pana hoti, yā tā māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sassāmikā saparidaṇḍā antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittāpi tathārūpāsu cārittaṁ āpajjitā hoti— evarūpaṁ, bhante, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti.
[¶15] And what kind of bodily behavior causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow? It’s when someone gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. They give up stealing. They don’t, with the intention to commit theft, take the wealth or belongings of others from village or wilderness. They give up sexual misconduct. They don’t have relations with women who have their mother, father, both mother and father, brother, sister, relatives, or clan as guardian. They don’t have relations with a woman who is protected on principle, or who has a husband, or whose violation is punishable by law, or even one who has been garlanded as a token of betrothal. That kind of bodily behavior causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two kinds of bodily behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of bodily behavior.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati; adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ gāmagataṁ vā araññagataṁ vā taṁ nādinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādātā hoti; kāmesumicchācāraṁ pahāya kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, yā tā māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sassāmikā saparidaṇḍā antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittāpi tathārūpāsu na cārittaṁ āpajjitā hoti— evarūpaṁ, bhante, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ kāyasamācāran’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶16] ‘I say that there are two kinds of verbal behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of verbal behavior.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the kind of verbal behavior which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of verbal behavior which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: ‘Vacīsamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ vacīsamācāran’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, evarūpo vacīsamācāro na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpo vacīsamācāro sevitabbo.
[¶17] And what kind of verbal behavior causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline? It’s when someone lies. They’re summoned to a council, an assembly, a family meeting, a guild, or to the royal court, and asked to bear witness: ‘Please, my man, say what you know.’ Not knowing, they say ‘I know.’ Knowing, they say ‘I don’t know.’ Not seeing, they say ‘I see.’ And seeing, they say ‘I don’t see.’ So they deliberately lie for the sake of themselves or another, or for some trivial worldly reason. They backbite. They repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. And so they divide those who are harmonious, supporting division, delighting in division, loving division, speaking words that promote division. They speak harshly. They use the kinds of words that are cruel, nasty, hurtful, offensive, bordering on anger, not leading to immersion. They talk nonsense. Their speech is untimely, and is neither factual nor beneficial. It has nothing to do with the teaching or the training. Their words have no value, and are untimely, unreasonable, rambling, and pointless. That kind of verbal behavior causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco musāvādī hoti. Sabhāgato vā parisāgato vā ñātimajjhagato vā pūgamajjhagato vā rājakulamajjhagato vā abhinīto sakkhipuṭṭho: ‘ehambho purisa, yaṁ jānāsi taṁ vadehī’ti so ajānaṁ vā āha: ‘jānāmī’ti, jānaṁ vā āha: ‘na jānāmī’ti; apassaṁ vā āha: ‘passāmī’ti, passaṁ vā āha: ‘na passāmī’ti—iti attahetu vā parahetu vā āmisakiñcikkhahetu vā sampajānamusā bhāsitā hoti; pisuṇavāco kho pana hoti, ito sutvā amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya—iti samaggānaṁ vā bhettā, bhinnānaṁ vā anuppadātā, vaggārāmo, vaggarato, vagganandī, vaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti; pharusavāco kho pana hoti, yā sā vācā kaṇḍakā kakkasā pharusā parakaṭukā parābhisajjanī kodhasāmantā asamādhisaṁvattanikā, tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti; samphappalāpī kho pana hoti akālavādī abhūtavādī anatthavādī adhammavādī avinayavādī, anidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti akālena anapadesaṁ apariyantavatiṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ— evarūpaṁ, bhante, vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti.
[¶18] And what kind of verbal behavior causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow? It’s when someone gives up lying. They’re summoned to a council, an assembly, a family meeting, a guild, or to the royal court, and asked to bear witness: ‘Please, my friend, say what you know.’ Not knowing, they say ‘I don’t know.’ Knowing, they say ‘I know.’ Not seeing, they say ‘I don’t see.’ And seeing, they say ‘I see.’ So they don’t deliberately lie for the sake of themselves or another, or for some trivial worldly reason. They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people. They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. That kind of verbal behavior causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two kinds of verbal behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of verbal behavior.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti sabhāgato vā parisāgato vā ñātimajjhagato vā pūgamajjhagato vā rājakulamajjhagato vā abhinīto sakkhipuṭṭho: ‘ehambho purisa, yaṁ jānāsi taṁ vadehī’ti so ajānaṁ vā āha: ‘na jānāmī’ti, jānaṁ vā āha: ‘jānāmī’ti, apassaṁ vā āha: ‘na passāmī’ti, passaṁ vā āha: ‘passāmī’ti—iti attahetu vā parahetu vā āmisakiñcikkhahetu vā na sampajānamusā bhāsitā hoti; pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya—iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti; pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti; samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ— evarūpaṁ, bhante, vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Vacīsamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ vacīsamācāran’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶19] ‘I say that there are two kinds of mental behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of mental behavior.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the kind of mental behavior which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of mental behavior which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: ‘Manosamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ manosamācāran’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, manosamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo manosamācāro na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, manosamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpo manosamācāro sevitabbo.
[¶20] And what kind of mental behavior causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline? It’s when someone is covetous. They covet the wealth and belongings of others: ‘Oh, if only their belongings were mine!’ They have ill will and malicious intentions: ‘May these sentient beings be killed, slaughtered, slain, destroyed, or annihilated!’ That kind of mental behavior causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, manosamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco abhijjhālu hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ taṁ abhijjhātā hoti: ‘aho vata yaṁ parassa taṁ mamassā’ti; byāpannacitto kho pana hoti paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo: ‘ime sattā haññantu vā vajjhantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā vā ahesun’ti— evarūpaṁ, bhante, manosamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti.
[¶21] And what kind of mental behavior causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow? It’s when someone is content. They don’t covet the wealth and belongings of others: ‘Oh, if only their belongings were mine!’ They have a kind heart and loving intentions: ‘May these sentient beings live free of enmity and ill will, untroubled and happy!’ That kind of mental behavior causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two kinds of mental behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is a kind of mental behavior.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, manosamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco anabhijjhālu hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ taṁ nābhijjhātā hoti: ‘aho vata yaṁ parassa taṁ mamassā’ti; abyāpannacitto kho pana hoti appaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo: ‘ime sattā averā abyābajjhā anīghā sukhī attānaṁ pariharantū’ti— evarūpaṁ, bhante, manosamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Manosamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ manosamācāran’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶22] ‘I say that there are two arisings of thought: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an arising of thought.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the arising of thought which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the arising of thought which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: ‘Cittuppādampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ cittuppādan’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, cittuppādaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo cittuppādo na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, cittuppādaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpo cittuppādo sevitabbo.
[¶23] And what arising of thought causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline? It’s when someone is covetous, and lives with their heart full of covetousness. They are malicious, and live with their heart full of ill will. They’re hurtful, and live with their heart intent on harm. That arising of thought causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, cittuppādaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco abhijjhālu hoti, abhijjhāsahagatena cetasā viharati; byāpādavā hoti, byāpādasahagatena cetasā viharati; vihesavā hoti, vihesāsahagatena cetasā viharati— evarūpaṁ, bhante, cittuppādaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti.
[¶24] And what arising of thought causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow? It’s when someone is content, and lives with their heart full of contentment. They have good will, and live with their heart full of good will. They’re kind, and live with their heart full of kindness. That arising of thought causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two arisings of thought: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an arising of thought.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, cittuppādaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco anabhijjhālu hoti, anabhijjhāsahagatena cetasā viharati; abyāpādavā hoti, abyāpādasahagatena cetasā viharati; avihesavā hoti, avihesāsahagatena cetasā viharati— evarūpaṁ, bhante, cittuppādaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Cittuppādampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ cittuppādan’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶25] ‘I say that there are two acquisitions of perception: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an acquisition of perception.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the acquisition of perception which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the acquisition of perception which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: ‘Saññāpaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ saññāpaṭilābhan’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, saññāpaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo saññāpaṭilābho na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, saññāpaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpo saññāpaṭilābho sevitabbo.
[¶26] And what acquisition of perception causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline? It’s when someone is covetous, and lives with their perception full of covetousness. They are malicious, and live with their perception full of ill will. They’re hurtful, and live with their perception intent on harm. That acquisition of perception causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, saññāpaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco abhijjhālu hoti, abhijjhāsahagatāya saññāya viharati; byāpādavā hoti, byāpādasahagatāya saññāya viharati; vihesavā hoti, vihesāsahagatāya saññāya viharati— evarūpaṁ, bhante, saññāpaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti.
[¶27] And what acquisition of perception causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow? It’s when someone is content, and lives with their perception full of contentment. They have good will, and live with their perception full of good will. They’re kind, and live with their perception full of kindness. That acquisition of perception causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two acquisitions of perception: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an acquisition of perception.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, saññāpaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco anabhijjhālu hoti, anabhijjhāsahagatāya saññāya viharati; abyāpādavā hoti, abyāpādasahagatāya saññāya viharati; avihesavā hoti, avihesāsahagatāya saññāya viharati— evarūpaṁ, bhante, saññāpaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Saññāpaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ saññāpaṭilābhan’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶28] ‘I say that there are two acquisitions of views: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an acquisition of views.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the acquisition of views which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the acquisition of views which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: ‘Diṭṭhipaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ diṭṭhipaṭilābhan’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, diṭṭhipaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo diṭṭhipaṭilābho na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, diṭṭhipaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti—evarūpo diṭṭhipaṭilābho sevitabbo.
[¶29] And what acquisition of views causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline? It’s when someone has such a view: ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ That acquisition of views causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, diṭṭhipaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco evaṁdiṭṭhiko hoti: ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti— evarūpaṁ, bhante, diṭṭhipaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti.
[¶30] And what acquisition of views causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow? It’s when someone has such a view: ‘There is meaning in giving, sacrifice, and offerings. There are fruits and results of good and bad deeds. There is an afterlife. There are such things as mother and father, and beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there are ascetics and brahmins who are rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describe the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ That acquisition of views causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two acquisitions of views: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And each of these is an acquisition of views.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, diṭṭhipaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti? Idha, bhante, ekacco evaṁdiṭṭhiko hoti: ‘atthi dinnaṁ, atthi yiṭṭhaṁ, atthi hutaṁ, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, atthi ayaṁ loko, atthi paro loko, atthi mātā, atthi pitā, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti— evarūpaṁ, bhante, diṭṭhipaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Diṭṭhipaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ diṭṭhipaṭilābhan’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶31] ‘I say that there are two kinds of incarnation: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And these are equally incarnation.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the kind of incarnation that causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. You should cultivate the kind of incarnation that causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: ‘Attabhāvapaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhan’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti— evarūpo attabhāvapaṭilābho na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti— evarūpo attabhāvapaṭilābho sevitabbo.
## 126. MN 114 · What Should and Should Not Be Cultivated · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/126/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/126/#p-N
[¶0] And what kind of incarnation causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline? For one who generates a hurtful incarnation not for the sake of the state of perfection, unskillful qualities grow while skillful qualities decline. And what kind of incarnation causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow? For one who generates a pleasing incarnation for the sake of the state of perfection, unskillful qualities decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two kinds of incarnation: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. And these are equally incarnation.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, bhante, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Sabyābajjhaṁ, bhante, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ abhinibbattayato apariniṭṭhitabhāvāya akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti; abyābajjhaṁ, bhante, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ abhinibbattayato pariniṭṭhitabhāvāya akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Attabhāvapaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhan’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶1] Sir, that’s how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement.”
> Pali: Imassa kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmī”ti.
[¶2] “Good, good, Sāriputta! It’s good that you understand the detailed meaning of my brief statement in this way.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta. Sādhu kho tvaṁ, sāriputta, imassa mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāsi.
[¶3] And the Buddha went on to repeat and endorse Venerable Sāriputta’s explanation in full. Then he went on to explain further:
> Pali: ‘Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ kāyasamācāran’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ mayā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, sāriputta, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo kāyasamācāro na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, sāriputta, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti— evarūpo kāyasamācāro sevitabbo.
[¶4] > Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, sāriputta, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Idha, sāriputta, ekacco pāṇātipātī hoti luddo lohitapāṇi hatappahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu; adinnādāyī kho pana hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ gāmagataṁ vā araññagataṁ vā taṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādātā hoti; kāmesumicchācārī kho pana hoti, yā tā māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sassāmikā saparidaṇḍā antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittāpi tathārūpāsu cārittaṁ āpajjitā hoti— evarūpaṁ, sāriputta, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti.
[¶5] > Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, sāriputta, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti? Idha, sāriputta, ekacco pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati; adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, yaṁ taṁ parassa paravittūpakaraṇaṁ gāmagataṁ vā araññagataṁ vā taṁ nādinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādātā hoti; kāmesumicchācāraṁ pahāya kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, yā tā māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sassāmikā saparidaṇḍā antamaso mālāguḷaparikkhittāpi tathārūpāsu na cārittaṁ āpajjitā hoti— evarūpaṁ, sāriputta, kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ kāyasamācāran’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ mayā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶6] > Pali: Vacīsamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi …pe… manosamācārampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi …pe… cittuppādampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi …pe… saññāpaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi …pe… diṭṭhipaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi …pe….
[¶7] > Pali: ‘Attabhāvapaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhan’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ mayā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, sāriputta, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo attabhāvapaṭilābho na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, sāriputta, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti— evarūpo attabhāvapaṭilābho sevitabbo.
[¶8] > Pali: Kathaṁrūpaṁ, sāriputta, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti? Sabyābajjhaṁ, sāriputta, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ abhinibbattayato apariniṭṭhitabhāvāya akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti; abyābajjhaṁ, sāriputta, attabhāvapaṭilābhaṁ abhinibbattayato pariniṭṭhitabhāvāya akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti. ‘Attabhāvapaṭilābhampāhaṁ, bhikkhave, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; tañca aññamaññaṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhan’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ mayā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Imassa kho, sāriputta, mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena attho daṭṭhabbo.
[¶9] “I say that there are two kinds of sight known by the eye: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. I say that there are two kinds of sound known by the ear … two kinds of smell known by the nose … two kinds of taste known by the tongue … two kinds of touch known by the body … two kinds of idea known by the mind: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.”
> Pali: Cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; sotaviññeyyaṁ saddampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi asevitabbampi; ghānaviññeyyaṁ gandhampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; jivhāviññeyyaṁ rasampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; kāyaviññeyyaṁ phoṭṭhabbampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi; manoviññeyyaṁ dhammampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī”ti.
[¶10] When he said this, Venerable Sāriputta said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶11] “Sir, this is how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement.
> Pali: “imassa kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi.
[¶12] ‘I say that there are two kinds of sight known by the eye: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the kind of sight known by the eye which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of sight known by the eye which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two kinds of sight known by the eye: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: ‘Cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpaṁ cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ na sevitabbaṁ; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpaṁ cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevitabbaṁ. ‘Cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶13] ‘I say that there are two kinds of sound known by the ear … two kinds of smell known by the nose … two kinds of taste known by the tongue … two kinds of touch known by the body … two kinds of idea known by the mind: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it?
> Pali: Sotaviññeyyaṁ saddampāhaṁ, sāriputta …pe… evarūpo sotaviññeyyo saddo na sevitabbo … evarūpo sotaviññeyyo saddo sevitabbo … evarūpo ghānaviññeyyo gandho na sevitabbo … evarūpo ghānaviññeyyo gandho sevitabbo … evarūpo jivhāviññeyyo raso na sevitabbo … evarūpo jivhāviññeyyo raso sevitabbo … kāyaviññeyyaṁ phoṭṭhabbampāhaṁ, sāriputta … evarūpo kāyaviññeyyo phoṭṭhabbo na sevitabbo … evarūpo kāyaviññeyyo phoṭṭhabbo sevitabbo. ‘Manoviññeyyaṁ dhammampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ?
[¶14] You should not cultivate the kind of idea known by the mind which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of idea known by the mind which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two kinds of idea known by the mind: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it. Sir, that’s how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement.”
> Pali: Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, manoviññeyyaṁ dhammaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo manoviññeyyo dhammo na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, manoviññeyyaṁ dhammaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpo manoviññeyyo dhammo sevitabbo. ‘Manoviññeyyaṁ dhammampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Imassa kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmī”ti.
[¶15] “Good, good, Sāriputta! It’s good that you understand the detailed meaning of my brief statement in this way.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta. Sādhu kho tvaṁ, sāriputta, imassa mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāsi.
[¶16] And the Buddha went on to repeat and endorse Venerable Sāriputta’s explanation in full. Then he went on to explain further:
> Pali: ‘Cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ mayā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, sāriputta, cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpaṁ cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ na sevitabbaṁ; yathārūpañca kho, sāriputta, cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpaṁ cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevitabbaṁ. ‘Cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ mayā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶17] > Pali: Sotaviññeyyaṁ saddampāhaṁ, sāriputta …pe… evarūpo sotaviññeyyo saddo na sevitabbo … evarūpo sotaviññeyyo saddo sevitabbo … evarūpo ghānaviññeyyo gandho na sevitabbo … evarūpo ghānaviññeyyo gandho sevitabbo … evarūpo jivhāviññeyyo raso na sevitabbo … evarūpo jivhāviññeyyo raso sevitabbo … evarūpo kāyaviññeyyo phoṭṭhabbo na sevitabbo … evarūpo kāyaviññeyyo phoṭṭhabbo sevitabbo.
[¶18] > Pali: Manoviññeyyaṁ dhammampāhaṁ, sāriputta …pe… evarūpo manoviññeyyo dhammo na sevitabbo … evarūpo manoviññeyyo dhammo sevitabbo. ‘Manoviññeyyaṁ dhammampāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ mayā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Imassa kho, sāriputta, mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena attho daṭṭhabbo.
[¶19] “I say that there are two kinds of robes: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. I say that there are two kinds of almsfood … lodging … village … town … city … country … individual: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.”
> Pali: Cīvaraṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi …pe… piṇḍapātaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta … senāsanaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta … gāmampāhaṁ, sāriputta … nigamampāhaṁ, sāriputta … nagarampāhaṁ, sāriputta … janapadampāhaṁ, sāriputta … puggalaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī”ti.
[¶20] When he said this, Venerable Sāriputta said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶21] “Sir, this is how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement. ‘I say that there are two kinds of robes … almsfood … lodging … village … town … city … country … individual: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.’ That’s what the Buddha said, but why did he say it? You should not cultivate the kind of individual who causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of individual who causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. ‘I say that there are two kinds of individual: those who you should cultivate, and those who you should not cultivate.’ That’s what the Buddha said, and this is why he said it.
> Pali: “imassa kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa, evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi. ‘Cīvaraṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, cīvaraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpaṁ cīvaraṁ na sevitabbaṁ; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, cīvaraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpaṁ cīvaraṁ sevitabbaṁ. ‘Cīvaraṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Piṇḍapātaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta …pe… evarūpo piṇḍapāto na sevitabbo … evarūpo piṇḍapāto sevitabbo … senāsanaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta …pe… evarūpaṁ senāsanaṁ na sevitabbaṁ … evarūpaṁ senāsanaṁ sevitabbaṁ … gāmampāhaṁ, sāriputta …pe… evarūpo gāmo na sevitabbo … evarūpo gāmo sevitabbo … evarūpo nigamo na sevitabbo … evarūpo nigamo sevitabbo … evarūpaṁ nagaraṁ na sevitabbaṁ … evarūpaṁ nagaraṁ sevitabbaṁ … evarūpo janapado na sevitabbo … evarūpo janapado sevitabbo. ‘Puggalaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, puggalaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo puggalo na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, bhante, puggalaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpo puggalo sevitabbo. ‘Puggalaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ bhagavatā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttanti.
[¶22] Sir, that’s how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement.”
> Pali: Imassa kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmī”ti.
[¶23] “Good, good, Sāriputta! It’s good that you understand the detailed meaning of my brief statement in this way.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta. Sādhu kho tvaṁ, sāriputta, imassa mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa, vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāsi.
[¶24] And the Buddha went on to repeat and endorse Venerable Sāriputta’s explanation in full. Then he added:
> Pali: ‘Cīvaraṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ mayā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, sāriputta, cīvaraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpaṁ cīvaraṁ na sevitabbaṁ; yathārūpañca kho, sāriputta, cīvaraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpaṁ cīvaraṁ sevitabbaṁ. ‘Cīvaraṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ mayā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶25] > Pali: (Yathā paṭhamaṁ tathā vitthāretabbaṁ) Evarūpo piṇḍapāto … evarūpaṁ senāsanaṁ … evarūpo gāmo … evarūpo nigamo … evarūpaṁ nagaraṁ … evarūpo janapado.
[¶26] > Pali: ‘Puggalaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ mayā. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yathārūpaṁ, sāriputta, puggalaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti evarūpo puggalo na sevitabbo; yathārūpañca kho, sāriputta, puggalaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti evarūpo puggalo sevitabbo. ‘Puggalaṁpāhaṁ, sāriputta, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ mayā idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Imassa kho, sāriputta, mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena attho daṭṭhabbo.
[¶27] “If all the aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials were to understand the detailed meaning of my brief statement in this way, it would be for their lasting welfare and happiness. If the whole world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—was to understand the detailed meaning of my brief statement in this way, it would be for the whole world’s lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: Sabbepi ce, sāriputta, khattiyā imassa mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājāneyyuṁ, sabbesānampissa khattiyānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Sabbepi ce, sāriputta, brāhmaṇā …pe… sabbepi ce, sāriputta, vessā … sabbepi ce, sāriputta, suddā imassa mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājāneyyuṁ, sabbesānampissa suddānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Sadevakopi ce, sāriputta, loko samārako sabrahmako sassamaṇabrāhmaṇī pajā sadevamanussā imassa mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājāneyya, sadevakassapissa lokassa samārakassa sabrahmakassa sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶28] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Sāriputta approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶29] > Pali: Sevitabbāsevitabbasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 127. MN 115 · Many Elements
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/127/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/127/#p-N
[¶0] MN 115 · Many Elements
> Pali: MN 115 · Bahudhātukasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Whatever dangers there are, all come from the foolish, not from the astute. Whatever perils there are, all come from the foolish, not from the astute. Whatever hazards there are, all come from the foolish, not from the astute. It’s like a fire that spreads from a hut made of reeds or grass, and burns down even a bungalow, plastered inside and out, draft-free, with doors fastened and windows shuttered. In the same way, whatever dangers there are, all come from the foolish, not from the astute. Whatever perils there are, all come from the foolish, not from the astute. Whatever hazards there are, all come from the foolish, not from the astute. So, the fool is dangerous, but the astute person is safe. The fool is perilous, but the astute person is not. The fool is hazardous, but the astute person is not. There’s no danger, peril, or hazard that comes from the astute. So you should train like this: ‘We shall be astute, we shall be inquirers.’”
> Pali: “Yāni kānici, bhikkhave, bhayāni uppajjanti sabbāni tāni bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato; ye keci upaddavā uppajjanti sabbe te bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato; ye keci upasaggā uppajjanti sabbe te bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, naḷāgārā vā tiṇāgārā vā aggi mutto kūṭāgārānipi dahati ullittāvalittāni nivātāni phusitaggaḷāni pihitavātapānāni; evameva kho, bhikkhave, yāni kānici bhayāni uppajjanti sabbāni tāni bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato; ye keci upaddavā uppajjanti sabbe te bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato; ye keci upasaggā uppajjanti sabbe te bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato. Iti kho, bhikkhave, sappaṭibhayo bālo, appaṭibhayo paṇḍito; saupaddavo bālo, anupaddavo paṇḍito; saupasaggo bālo, anupasaggo paṇḍito. Natthi, bhikkhave, paṇḍitato bhayaṁ, natthi paṇḍitato upaddavo, natthi paṇḍitato upasaggo. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ‘paṇḍitā bhavissāma vīmaṁsakā’ti— evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabban”ti.
[¶4] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Sir, how is a mendicant qualified to be called ‘astute, an inquirer’?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, paṇḍito bhikkhu ‘vīmaṁsako’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶5] “Ānanda, it’s when a mendicant is skilled in the elements, in the sense fields, in dependent origination, and in the possible and the impossible. That’s how a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘astute, an inquirer’.”
> Pali: “Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hoti, āyatanakusalo ca hoti, paṭiccasamuppādakusalo ca hoti, ṭhānāṭhānakusalo ca hoti— ettāvatā kho, ānanda, paṇḍito bhikkhu ‘vīmaṁsako’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶6] “But sir, how is a mendicant qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶7] “There are, Ānanda, these eighteen elements. The eye element, sight element, and eye consciousness element. The ear element, sound element, and ear consciousness element. The nose element, smell element, and nose consciousness element. The tongue element, taste element, and tongue consciousness element. The body element, touch element, and body consciousness element. The mind element, ideas element, and mind consciousness element. When a mendicant knows and sees these eighteen elements, they’re qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’.”
> Pali: “Aṭṭhārasa kho imā, ānanda, dhātuyo— cakkhudhātu, rūpadhātu, cakkhuviññāṇadhātu; sotadhātu, saddadhātu, sotaviññāṇadhātu; ghānadhātu, gandhadhātu, ghānaviññāṇadhātu; jivhādhātu, rasadhātu, jivhāviññāṇadhātu; kāyadhātu, phoṭṭhabbadhātu, kāyaviññāṇadhātu; manodhātu, dhammadhātu, manoviññāṇadhātu. Imā kho, ānanda, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo yato jānāti passati— ettāvatāpi kho, ānanda, ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶8] “But sir, could there be another way in which a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, aññopi pariyāyo, yathā ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶9] “There could, Ānanda. There are these six elements: the elements of earth, water, fire, air, space, and consciousness. When a mendicant knows and sees these six elements, they’re qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’.”
> Pali: “Siyā, ānanda. Chayimā, ānanda, dhātuyo— pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu. Imā kho, ānanda, cha dhātuyo yato jānāti passati— ettāvatāpi kho, ānanda, ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶10] “But sir, could there be another way in which a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, aññopi pariyāyo, yathā ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶11] “There could, Ānanda. There are these six elements: the elements of pleasure, pain, happiness, sadness, equanimity, and ignorance. When a mendicant knows and sees these six elements, they’re qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’.”
> Pali: “Siyā, ānanda. Chayimā, ānanda, dhātuyo— sukhadhātu, dukkhadhātu, somanassadhātu, domanassadhātu, upekkhādhātu, avijjādhātu. Imā kho, ānanda, cha dhātuyo yato jānāti passati— ettāvatāpi kho, ānanda, ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶12] “But sir, could there be another way in which a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, aññopi pariyāyo, yathā ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶13] “There could, Ānanda. There are these six elements: the elements of sensuality and renunciation, malice and good will, and cruelty and harmlessness. When a mendicant knows and sees these six elements, they’re qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’.”
> Pali: “Siyā, ānanda. Chayimā, ānanda, dhātuyo— kāmadhātu, nekkhammadhātu, byāpādadhātu, abyāpādadhātu, vihiṁsādhātu, avihiṁsādhātu. Imā kho, ānanda, cha dhātuyo yato jānāti passati— ettāvatāpi kho, ānanda, ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶14] “But sir, could there be another way in which a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, aññopi pariyāyo, yathā ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶15] “There could, Ānanda. There are these three elements: the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm. When a mendicant knows and sees these three elements, they’re qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’.”
> Pali: “Siyā, ānanda. Tisso imā, ānanda, dhātuyo— kāmadhātu, rūpadhātu, arūpadhātu. Imā kho, ānanda, tisso dhātuyo yato jānāti passati— ettāvatāpi kho, ānanda, ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶16] “But sir, could there be another way in which a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’?”
> Pali: “Siyā pana, bhante, aññopi pariyāyo, yathā ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶17] “There could, Ānanda. There are these two elements: the conditioned element and the unconditioned element. When a mendicant knows and sees these two elements, they’re qualified to be called ‘skilled in the elements’.”
> Pali: “Siyā, ānanda. Dve imā, ānanda, dhātuyo— saṅkhatādhātu, asaṅkhatādhātu. Imā kho, ānanda, dve dhātuyo yato jānāti passati— ettāvatāpi kho, ānanda, ‘dhātukusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶18] “But sir, how is a mendicant qualified to be called ‘skilled in the sense fields’?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, ‘āyatanakusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶19] “There are these six interior and exterior sense fields: the eye and sights, the ear and sounds, the nose and smells, the tongue and tastes, the body and touches, and the mind and ideas. When a mendicant knows and sees these six interior and exterior sense fields, they’re qualified to be called ‘skilled in the sense fields’.”
> Pali: “Cha kho panimāni, ānanda, ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni— cakkhu ceva rūpā ca sotañca saddā ca ghānañca gandhā ca jivhā ca rasā ca kāyo ca phoṭṭhabbā ca mano ca dhammā ca. Imāni kho, ānanda, cha ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni yato jānāti passati— ettāvatā kho, ānanda, ‘āyatanakusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶20] “But sir, how is a mendicant qualified to be called ‘skilled in dependent origination’?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, ‘paṭiccasamuppādakusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶21] “It’s when a mendicant understands: ‘When this exists, this comes to be; due to the arising of this, this arises. When this doesn’t exist, this doesn’t come to be; due to the cessation of this, this ceases. That is: ignorance is a requirement for choices. Choices are a condition for consciousness. Consciousness is a requirement for name and form. Name and form are requirements for the six sense fields. The six sense fields are requirements for contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Feeling is a requirement for craving. Craving is a requirement for grasping. Grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates. When ignorance fades away and ceases no residue left behind, choices cease. When choices cease, consciousness ceases. When consciousness ceases, name and form cease. When name and form cease, the six sense fields cease. When the six sense fields cease, contact ceases. When contact ceases, feeling ceases. When feeling ceases, craving ceases. When craving ceases, grasping ceases. When grasping ceases, continued existence ceases. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases. When rebirth ceases, old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress cease. That is how this entire mass of suffering ceases.’ That’s how a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘skilled in dependent origination’.”
> Pali: “Idhānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘imasmiṁ sati idaṁ hoti, imassuppādā idaṁ uppajjati, imasmiṁ asati idaṁ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṁ nirujjhati, yadidaṁ— avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṁ, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṁ, saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ, upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti. Avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho, nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodho, saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodho, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho, vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodho, taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā nirujjhanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti’. Ettāvatā kho, ānanda, ‘paṭiccasamuppādakusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶22] “But sir, how is a mendicant qualified to be called ‘skilled in the possible and impossible’?”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, ‘ṭhānāṭhānakusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti?
[¶23] “It’s when a mendicant understands: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to take any condition as permanent. That is not possible. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to take some condition as permanent. That is possible.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to take any condition as pleasant. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to take some condition as pleasant.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to take anything as self. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to take something as self.’
> Pali: “Idhānanda, bhikkhu ‘aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṁ niccato upagaccheyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puthujjano kañci saṅkhāraṁ niccato upagaccheyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṁ sukhato upagaccheyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puthujjano kañci saṅkhāraṁ sukhato upagaccheyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci dhammaṁ attato upagaccheyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti, ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puthujjano kañci dhammaṁ attato upagaccheyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶24] They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to murder their mother. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to murder their mother.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to murder their father … or murder a perfected one. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to murder their father … or murder a perfected one.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to injure a Realized One with malicious intent. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to injure a Realized One with malicious intent.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to cause a schism in the Saṅgha. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to cause a schism in the Saṅgha.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an individual accomplished in view to dedicate themselves to another teacher. But it’s possible for an ordinary person to dedicate themselves to another teacher.’
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo mātaraṁ jīvitā voropeyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puthujjano mātaraṁ jīvitā voropeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo pitaraṁ jīvitā voropeyya …pe… arahantaṁ jīvitā voropeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo duṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṁ uppādeyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puthujjano duṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṁ uppādeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo saṅghaṁ bhindeyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puthujjano saṅghaṁ bhindeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo aññaṁ satthāraṁ uddiseyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puthujjano aññaṁ satthāraṁ uddiseyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶25] They understand: ‘It’s impossible for two perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas to arise in the same solar system at the same time. But it is possible for just one perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, to arise in one solar system.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for two wheel-turning monarchs to arise in the same solar system at the same time. But it is possible for just one wheel-turning monarch to arise in one solar system.’
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā apubbaṁ acarimaṁ uppajjeyyuṁ, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ ekissā lokadhātuyā eko arahaṁ sammāsambuddho uppajjeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve rājāno cakkavattino apubbaṁ acarimaṁ uppajjeyyuṁ, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ ekissā lokadhātuyā eko rājā cakkavattī uppajjeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶26] They understand: ‘It’s impossible for a woman to be a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha. But it is possible for a man to be a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for a woman to be a wheel-turning monarch. But it is possible for a man to be a wheel-turning monarch.’ They understand: ‘It’s impossible for a woman to perform the role of Sakka, Māra, or the Divinity. But it is possible for a man to perform the role of Sakka, Māra, or the Divinity.’
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ itthī arahaṁ assa sammāsambuddho, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puriso arahaṁ assa sammāsambuddho, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ itthī rājā assa cakkavattī, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puriso rājā assa cakkavattī, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ itthī sakkattaṁ kareyya … mārattaṁ kareyya … brahmattaṁ kareyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ puriso sakkattaṁ kareyya … mārattaṁ kareyya … brahmattaṁ kareyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶27] They understand: ‘It’s impossible for a likable, desirable, agreeable result to come from bad conduct of body, speech, and mind. But it is possible for an unlikable, undesirable, disagreeable result to come from bad conduct of body, speech, and mind.’
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ kāyaduccaritassa iṭṭho kanto manāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ kāyaduccaritassa aniṭṭho akanto amanāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ vacīduccaritassa …pe… yaṁ manoduccaritassa iṭṭho kanto manāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ vacīduccaritassa …pe… yaṁ manoduccaritassa aniṭṭho akanto amanāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatīti pajānāti.
[¶28] They understand: ‘It’s impossible for an unlikable, undesirable, disagreeable result to come from good conduct of body, speech, and mind. But it is possible for a likable, desirable, agreeable result to come from good conduct of body, speech, and mind.’
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ kāyasucaritassa aniṭṭho akanto amanāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ kāyasucaritassa iṭṭho kanto manāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ vacīsucaritassa …pe… yaṁ manosucaritassa aniṭṭho akanto amanāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ vacīsucaritassa …pe… yaṁ manosucaritassa iṭṭho kanto manāpo vipāko nibbatteyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶29] They understand: ‘It’s impossible that someone who has engaged in bad conduct of body, speech, and mind, could for that reason alone, when their body breaks up, after death, be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. But it is possible that someone who has engaged in bad conduct of body, speech, and mind could, for that reason alone, when their body breaks up, after death, be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.’
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ kāyaduccaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ kāyaduccaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶30] They understand: ‘It’s impossible that someone who has engaged in good conduct of body, speech, and mind could, for that reason alone, when their body breaks up, after death, be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. But it is possible that someone who has engaged in good conduct of body, speech, and mind could, for that reason alone, when their body breaks up, after death, be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ That’s how a mendicant is qualified to be called ‘skilled in the possible and impossible’.”
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ vacīduccaritasamaṅgī …pe… yaṁ manoduccaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ vacīduccaritasamaṅgī …pe… yaṁ manoduccaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ kāyasucaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ kāyasucaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. ‘Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ vacīsucaritasamaṅgī …pe… yaṁ manosucaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti; ‘ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ vacīsucaritasamaṅgī …pe… yaṁ manosucaritasamaṅgī taṁnidānā tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyya, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī’ti pajānāti. Ettāvatā kho, ānanda, ‘ṭhānāṭhānakusalo bhikkhū’ti alaṁvacanāyā”ti.
[¶31] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! What is the name of this exposition of the teaching?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Konāmo ayaṁ, bhante, dhammapariyāyo”ti?
[¶32] “Well then, Ānanda, you may remember this exposition of the teaching as ‘The Many Elements’, or else ‘The Four Rounds’, or else ‘The Mirror of the Teaching’, or else ‘The Drum of Freedom From Death’, or else ‘The Supreme Victory in Battle’.”
> Pali: “Tasmātiha tvaṁ, ānanda, imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ ‘bahudhātuko’tipi naṁ dhārehi, ‘catuparivaṭṭo’tipi naṁ dhārehi, ‘dhammādāso’tipi naṁ dhārehi, ‘amatadundubhī’tipi naṁ dhārehi, ‘anuttaro saṅgāmavijayo’tipi naṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶33] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶34] > Pali: Bahudhātukasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 128. MN 116 · At Isigili
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/128/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/128/#p-N
[¶0] MN 116 · At Isigili
> Pali: MN 116 · Isigilisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha, on the Isigili Mountain. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati isigilismiṁ pabbate. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, do you see that Mount Vebhāra?”
> Pali: “Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, etaṁ vebhāraṁ pabbatan”ti?
[¶4] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶5] “It used to have a different label and description. Do you see that Mount Paṇḍava?”
> Pali: “Etassapi kho, bhikkhave, vebhārassa pabbatassa aññāva samaññā ahosi aññā paññatti. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, etaṁ paṇḍavaṁ pabbatan”ti?
[¶6] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶7] “It too used to have a different label and description. Do you see that Mount Vepulla?”
> Pali: “Etassapi kho, bhikkhave, paṇḍavassa pabbatassa aññāva samaññā ahosi aññā paññatti. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, etaṁ vepullaṁ pabbatan”ti?
[¶8] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶9] “It too used to have a different label and description. Do you see that Mount Vulture’s Peak?”
> Pali: “Etassapi kho, bhikkhave, vepullassa pabbatassa aññāva samaññā ahosi aññā paññatti. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, etaṁ gijjhakūṭaṁ pabbatan”ti?
[¶10] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶11] “It too used to have a different label and description. Do you see that Mount Isigili?”
> Pali: “Etassapi kho, bhikkhave, gijjhakūṭassa pabbatassa aññāva samaññā ahosi aññā paññatti. Passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, imaṁ isigiliṁ pabbatan”ti?
[¶12] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶13] “It used to have exactly the same label and description.
> Pali: “Imassa kho pana, bhikkhave, isigilissa pabbatassa esāva samaññā ahosi esā paññatti.
[¶14] Once upon a time, five hundred independent Buddhas dwelt for a long time on this Isigili. They were seen entering the mountain, but after entering were seen no more. When people noticed this they said: ‘That mountain swallows these seers!’ That’s how it came to be known as Isigili, the “seer-swallower”.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, pañca paccekabuddhasatāni imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsino ahesuṁ. Te imaṁ pabbataṁ pavisantā dissanti, paviṭṭhā na dissanti. Tamenaṁ manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ayaṁ pabbato ime isī gilatī’ti; ‘isigili isigili’ tveva samaññā udapādi.
[¶15] I shall declare the names of the independent Buddhas; I shall extol the names of the independent Buddhas; I shall teach the names of the independent Buddhas. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: Ācikkhissāmi, bhikkhave, paccekabuddhānaṁ nāmāni; kittayissāmi, bhikkhave, paccekabuddhānaṁ nāmāni; desessāmi, bhikkhave, paccekabuddhānaṁ nāmāni. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶16] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶17] “The independent Buddhas who dwelt for a long time on this Isigili were named Ariṭṭha, Upariṭṭha, Tagarasikhī, Yasassin, Sudassana, Piyadassin, Gandhāra, Piṇḍola, Upāsabha, Nīta, Tatha, Sutavā, and Bhāvitatta.
> Pali: “Ariṭṭho nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; upariṭṭho nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; tagarasikhī nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; yasassī nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; sudassano nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; piyadassī nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; gandhāro nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; piṇḍolo nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; upāsabho nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; nīto nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; tatho nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi, sutavā nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi; bhāvitatto nāma, bhikkhave, paccekasambuddho imasmiṁ isigilismiṁ pabbate ciranivāsī ahosi.
[¶18] Those saintly beings, untroubled, with no need for hope,
who each achieved awakening independently;
hear me extol their names,
the supreme men, free of thorns.
> Pali: Ye sattasārā anīghā nirāsā,
Paccekamevajjhagamaṁsu bodhiṁ;
Tesaṁ visallāna naruttamānaṁ,
Nāmāni me kittayato suṇātha.
[¶19] Ariṭṭha, Upariṭṭha, Tagarasikhī, Yasassin,
Sudassana, and Piyadassin the awakened;
Gandhāra, Piṇḍola, and Upāsabha,
Nīta, Tatha, Sutavā, and Bhāvitatta.
> Pali: Ariṭṭho upariṭṭho tagarasikhī yasassī,
Sudassano piyadassī ca susambuddho;
Gandhāro piṇḍolo upāsabho ca,
Nīto tatho sutavā bhāvitatto.
[¶20] Sumbha, Subha, Methula, and Aṭṭhama,
then Assumegha, Anīgha, and Sudāṭha,
Independent Buddhas, enders of the leash to existence;
and Hiṅgū and Hiṅga the mighty.
> Pali: Sumbho subho matulo aṭṭhamo ca,
Athassumegho anīgho sudāṭho;
Paccekabuddhā bhavanettikhīṇā,
Hiṅgū ca hiṅgo ca mahānubhāvā.
[¶21] Two sages named Jāli, and Aṭṭhaka;
then the awakened one Kosala, then Subāhu;
Upanemi, Nemi, and Santacitta,
right and true, stainless and astute.
> Pali: Dve jālino munino aṭṭhako ca,
Atha kosallo buddho atho subāhu;
Upanemiso nemiso santacitto,
Sacco tatho virajo paṇḍito ca.
[¶22] Kāḷa and Upakāḷa, Vijita and Jita,
Aṅga and Paṅga, and Guttijita too;
Passin gave up attachment, suffering’s root,
while Aparājita defeated Māra’s power.
> Pali: Kāḷūpakāḷā vijito jito ca,
Aṅgo ca paṅgo ca guttijito ca;
Passi jahi upadhidukkhamūlaṁ,
Aparājito mārabalaṁ ajesi.
[¶23] Satthar, Pavattar, Sarabhaṅga, Lomahaṁsa,
Uccaṅgamāya, Asita, Anāsava,
Manomaya, and Bandhumā the cutter of conceit,
then Adhimutta, and Ketumā the immaculate.
> Pali: Satthā pavattā sarabhaṅgo lomahaṁso,
Uccaṅgamāyo asito anāsavo;
Manomayo mānacchido ca bandhumā,
Tadādhimutto vimalo ca ketumā.
[¶24] Ketumbharāga, Mātaṅga, and Ariya,
then Accuta, Accutagāma, and Byāmaka,
Sumaṅgala, Dabbila, Supatiṭṭhita,
Asayha, Khemābhirata, and Sorata.
> Pali: Ketumbharāgo ca mātaṅgo ariyo,
Athaccuto accutagāmabyāmako;
Sumaṅgalo dabbilo supatiṭṭhito,
Asayho khemābhirato ca sorato.
[¶25] Durannaya, Saṅgha, and also Ujjaya,
another sage, Sayha of peerless effort.
There are twelve Ānandas, Nandas, and Upanandas,
and Bhāradvāja, bearing his final body.
> Pali: Durannayo saṅgho athopi ujjayo,
Aparo muni sayho anomanikkamo;
Ānando nando upanando dvādasa,
Bhāradvājo antimadehadhārī.
[¶26] Bodhi, Mahānāma, and also Uttara,
Kesī, Sikhī, Sundara, and Bhāradvāja,
Tissa and Upatissa, who’ve both cut the bonds to rebirth,
Upasīdarī and Sīdarī, who’ve both cut off craving.
> Pali: Bodhi mahānāmo athopi uttaro,
Kesī sikhī sundaro dvārabhājo;
Tissūpatissā bhavabandhanacchidā,
Upasikhi taṇhacchido ca sikhari.
[¶27] Maṅgala was awakened, free of greed,
Usabha cut the net, the root of suffering,
Upanīta who attained the state of peace,
Uposatha, Sundara, and Saccanāma.
> Pali: Buddho ahu maṅgalo vītarāgo,
Usabhacchidā jāliniṁ dukkhamūlaṁ;
Santaṁ padaṁ ajjhagamopanīto,
Uposatho sundaro saccanāmo.
[¶28] Jeta, Jayanta, Paduma, and Uppala;
Padumuttara, Rakkhita, and Pabbata,
Mānatthaddha, beautiful and free of greed,
and the Buddha Kaṇha, his mind well freed.
> Pali: Jeto jayanto padumo uppalo ca,
Padumuttaro rakkhito pabbato ca;
Mānatthaddho sobhito vītarāgo,
Kaṇho ca buddho suvimuttacitto.
[¶29] These and other mighty ones awakened independently,
enders of the leash to existence—
honor these great seers who have slipped all chains,
fully quenched, limitless.”
> Pali: Ete ca aññe ca mahānubhāvā,
Paccekabuddhā bhavanettikhīṇā;
Te sabbasaṅgātigate mahesī,
Parinibbute vandatha appameyye”ti.
[¶30] > Pali: Isigilisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 129. MN 117 · The Great Forty
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/129/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/129/#p-N
[¶0] MN 117 · The Great Forty
> Pali: MN 117 · Mahācattārīsakasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I will teach you noble right immersion with its vital conditions and its prerequisites. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “ariyaṁ vo, bhikkhave, sammāsamādhiṁ desessāmi saupanisaṁ saparikkhāraṁ. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “And what is noble right immersion with its vital conditions and its prerequisites? They are: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, and right mindfulness. Unification of mind with these seven factors as prerequisites is called noble right immersion ‘with its vital conditions’ and also ‘with its prerequisites’.
> Pali: “Katamo ca, bhikkhave, ariyo sammāsamādhi saupaniso saparikkhāro? Seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati; yā kho, bhikkhave, imehi sattahaṅgehi cittassa ekaggatā parikkhatā— ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, ariyo sammāsamādhi saupaniso itipi, saparikkhāro itipi.
[¶6] In this context, right view comes first. And how does right view come first? When you understand wrong view as wrong view and right view as right view, that’s your right view.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti. Kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti? Micchādiṭṭhiṁ ‘micchādiṭṭhī’ti pajānāti, sammādiṭṭhiṁ ‘sammādiṭṭhī’ti pajānāti—sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi.
[¶7] And what is wrong view? ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ This is wrong view.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi? ‘Natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi.
[¶8] And what is right view? Right view is twofold, I say. There is right view that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments. And there is right view that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi? Sammādiṭṭhimpahaṁ, bhikkhave, dvāyaṁ vadāmi— atthi, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi sāsavā puññabhāgiyā upadhivepakkā; atthi, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi ariyā anāsavā lokuttarā maggaṅgā.
[¶9] And what is right view that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments? ‘There is meaning in giving, sacrifice, and offerings. There are fruits and results of good and bad deeds. There is an afterlife. There are such things as mother and father, and beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there are ascetics and brahmins who are rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describe the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ This is right view that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi sāsavā puññabhāgiyā upadhivepakkā? ‘Atthi dinnaṁ, atthi yiṭṭhaṁ, atthi hutaṁ, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, atthi ayaṁ loko, atthi paro loko, atthi mātā, atthi pitā, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi sāsavā puññabhāgiyā upadhivepakkā.
[¶10] And what is right view that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path? It’s the wisdom—the faculty of wisdom, the power of wisdom, the awakening factor of investigation of principles, and right view as a factor of the path—in one intent on the noble, intent on the undefiled, who possesses the noble path and develops the noble path. This is called right view that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi ariyā anāsavā lokuttarā maggaṅgā? Yā kho, bhikkhave, ariyacittassa anāsavacittassa ariyamaggasamaṅgino ariyamaggaṁ bhāvayato paññā paññindriyaṁ paññābalaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo sammādiṭṭhi maggaṅgaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi ariyā anāsavā lokuttarā maggaṅgā.
[¶11] They make an effort to give up wrong view and embrace right view: that’s their right effort. Mindfully they give up wrong view and embrace right view: that’s their right mindfulness. So these three things keep running and circling around right view, namely: right view, right effort, and right mindfulness.
> Pali: So micchādiṭṭhiyā pahānāya vāyamati, sammādiṭṭhiyā, upasampadāya, svāssa hoti sammāvāyāmo. So sato micchādiṭṭhiṁ pajahati, sato sammādiṭṭhiṁ upasampajja viharati, sāssa hoti sammāsati. Itiyime tayo dhammā sammādiṭṭhiṁ anuparidhāvanti anuparivattanti, seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati.
[¶12] In this context, right view comes first. And how does right view come first? When you understand wrong purpose as wrong purpose and right purpose as right purpose, that’s your right view.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti. Kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti? Micchāsaṅkappaṁ ‘micchāsaṅkappo’ti pajānāti, sammāsaṅkappaṁ ‘sammāsaṅkappo’ti pajānāti, sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi.
[¶13] And what is wrong purpose? Purposes of sensuality, of malice, and of cruelty. This is wrong purpose.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, micchāsaṅkappo? Kāmasaṅkappo, byāpādasaṅkappo, vihiṁsāsaṅkappo— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, micchāsaṅkappo.
[¶14] And what is right purpose? Right purpose is twofold, I say. There is right purpose that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments. And there is right purpose that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo? Sammāsaṅkappampahaṁ, bhikkhave, dvāyaṁ vadāmi— atthi, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko; atthi, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo.
[¶15] And what is right purpose that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments? Purposes of renunciation, good will, and harmlessness. This is right purpose that is accompanied by defilements.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko? Nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo, avihiṁsāsaṅkappo: ‘ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko’.
[¶16] And what is right purpose that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path? It’s the thinking—the placing of the mind, thought, planting, implanting, embedding of the mind, verbal process—in one intent on the noble, intent on the undefiled, who possesses the noble path and develops the noble path. This is right purpose that is noble.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo? Yo kho, bhikkhave, ariyacittassa anāsavacittassa ariyamaggasamaṅgino ariyamaggaṁ bhāvayato takko vitakko saṅkappo appanā byappanā cetaso abhiniropanā vacīsaṅkhāro— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo.
[¶17] They make an effort to give up wrong purpose and embrace right purpose: that’s their right effort. Mindfully they give up wrong purpose and take up right purpose: that’s their right mindfulness. So these three things keep running and circling around right purpose, namely: right view, right effort, and right mindfulness.
> Pali: So micchāsaṅkappassa pahānāya vāyamati, sammāsaṅkappassa upasampadāya, svāssa hoti sammāvāyāmo. So sato micchāsaṅkappaṁ pajahati, sato sammāsaṅkappaṁ upasampajja viharati; sāssa hoti sammāsati. Itiyime tayo dhammā sammāsaṅkappaṁ anuparidhāvanti anuparivattanti, seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati.
[¶18] In this context, right view comes first. And how does right view come first? When you understand wrong speech as wrong speech and right speech as right speech, that’s your right view.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti. Kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti? Micchāvācaṁ ‘micchāvācā’ti pajānāti, sammāvācaṁ ‘sammāvācā’ti pajānāti; sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi.
[¶19] And what is wrong speech? Speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. This is wrong speech.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, micchāvācā? Musāvādo, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpo— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, micchāvācā.
[¶20] And what is right speech? Right speech is twofold, I say. There is right speech that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments. And there is right speech that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammāvācā? Sammāvācampahaṁ, bhikkhave, dvāyaṁ vadāmi— atthi, bhikkhave, sammāvācā sāsavā puññabhāgiyā upadhivepakkā; atthi, bhikkhave, sammāvācā ariyā anāsavā lokuttarā maggaṅgā.
[¶21] And what is right speech that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments? Refraining from lying, divisive speech, harsh speech, and talking nonsense. This is right speech that is accompanied by defilements.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammāvācā sāsavā puññabhāgiyā upadhivepakkā? Musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammāvācā sāsavā puññabhāgiyā upadhivepakkā.
[¶22] And what is right speech that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path? It’s the desisting, abstaining, abstinence, and refraining from the four kinds of bad verbal conduct in one intent on the noble, intent on the undefiled, who possesses the noble path and develops the noble path. This is right speech that is noble.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammāvācā ariyā anāsavā lokuttarā maggaṅgā? Yā kho, bhikkhave, ariyacittassa anāsavacittassa ariyamaggasamaṅgino ariyamaggaṁ bhāvayato catūhi vacīduccaritehi ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammāvācā ariyā anāsavā lokuttarā maggaṅgā.
[¶23] They make an effort to give up wrong speech and embrace right speech: that’s their right effort. Mindfully they give up wrong speech and take up right speech: that’s their right mindfulness. So these three things keep running and circling around right speech, namely: right view, right effort, and right mindfulness.
> Pali: So micchāvācāya pahānāya vāyamati, sammāvācāya upasampadāya; svāssa hoti sammāvāyāmo. So sato micchāvācaṁ pajahati, sato sammāvācaṁ upasampajja viharati; sāssa hoti sammāsati. Itiyime tayo dhammā sammāvācaṁ anuparidhāvanti anuparivattanti, seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati.
[¶24] In this context, right view comes first. And how does right view come first? When you understand wrong action as wrong action and right action as right action, that’s your right view.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti. Kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti? Micchākammantaṁ ‘micchākammanto’ti pajānāti, sammākammantaṁ ‘sammākammanto’ti pajānāti; sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi.
[¶25] And what is wrong action? Killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. This is wrong action.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, micchākammanto? Pāṇātipāto, adinnādānaṁ, kāmesumicchācāro— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, micchākammanto.
[¶26] And what is right action? Right action is twofold, I say. There is right action that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments. And there is right action that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammākammanto? Sammākammantampahaṁ, bhikkhave, dvāyaṁ vadāmi— atthi, bhikkhave, sammākammanto sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko; atthi, bhikkhave, sammākammanto ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo.
[¶27] And what is right action that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments? Refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. This is right action that is accompanied by defilements.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammākammanto sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammākammanto sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko.
[¶28] And what is right action that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path? It’s the desisting, abstaining, abstinence, and refraining from the three kinds of bad bodily conduct in one intent on the noble, intent on the undefiled, who possesses the noble path and develops the noble path. This is right action that is noble.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammākammanto ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo? Yā kho, bhikkhave, ariyacittassa anāsavacittassa ariyamaggasamaṅgino ariyamaggaṁ bhāvayato tīhi kāyaduccaritehi ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammākammanto ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo.
[¶29] They make an effort to give up wrong action and embrace right action: that’s their right effort. Mindfully they give up wrong action and take up right action: that’s their right mindfulness. So these three things keep running and circling around right action, namely: right view, right effort, and right mindfulness.
> Pali: So micchākammantassa pahānāya vāyamati, sammākammantassa upasampadāya; svāssa hoti sammāvāyāmo. So sato micchākammantaṁ pajahati, sato sammākammantaṁ upasampajja viharati; sāssa hoti sammāsati. Itiyime tayo dhammā sammākammantaṁ anuparidhāvanti anuparivattanti, seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati.
[¶30] In this context, right view comes first. And how does right view come first? When you understand wrong livelihood as wrong livelihood and right livelihood as right livelihood, that’s your right view.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti. Kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti? Micchāājīvaṁ ‘micchāājīvo’ti pajānāti, sammāājīvaṁ ‘sammāājīvo’ti pajānāti; sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi.
[¶31] And what is wrong livelihood? Fawning, flattery, hinting, and belittling, and using material things to chase after other material things. This is wrong livelihood.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, micchāājīvo? Kuhanā, lapanā, nemittikatā, nippesikatā, lābhena lābhaṁ nijigīsanatā— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, micchāājīvo.
[¶32] And what is right livelihood? Right livelihood is twofold, I say. There is right livelihood that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments. And there is right livelihood that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo? Sammāājīvampahaṁ, bhikkhave, dvāyaṁ vadāmi— atthi, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko; atthi, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo.
[¶33] And what is right livelihood that is accompanied by defilements, partakes of good deeds, and ripens in attachments? It’s when a noble disciple gives up wrong livelihood and earns a living by right livelihood. This is right livelihood that is accompanied by defilements.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko? Idha, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako micchāājīvaṁ pahāya sammāājīvena jīvikaṁ kappeti— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo sāsavo puññabhāgiyo upadhivepakko.
[¶34] And what is right livelihood that is noble, undefiled, transcendent, a factor of the path? It’s the desisting, abstaining, abstinence, and refraining from wrong livelihood in one intent on the noble, intent on the undefiled, who possesses the noble path and develops the noble path. This is right livelihood that is noble.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo? Yā kho, bhikkhave, ariyacittassa anāsavacittassa ariyamaggasamaṅgino ariyamaggaṁ bhāvayato micchāājīvā ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo ariyo anāsavo lokuttaro maggaṅgo.
[¶35] They make an effort to give up wrong livelihood and embrace right livelihood: that’s their right effort. Mindfully they give up wrong livelihood and take up right livelihood: that’s their right mindfulness. So these three things keep running and circling around right livelihood, namely: right view, right effort, and right mindfulness.
> Pali: So micchāājīvassa pahānāya vāyamati, sammāājīvassa upasampadāya; svāssa hoti sammāvāyāmo. So sato micchāājīvaṁ pajahati, sato sammāājīvaṁ upasampajja viharati; sāssa hoti sammāsati. Itiyime tayo dhammā sammāājīvaṁ anuparidhāvanti anuparivattanti, seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati.
[¶36] In this context, right view comes first. And how does right view come first? Right view produces right purpose. Right purpose produces right speech. Right speech produces right action. Right action produces right livelihood. Right livelihood produces right effort. Right effort produces right mindfulness. Right mindfulness produces right immersion. Right immersion produces right knowledge. Right knowledge produces right freedom. So the trainee has eight factors, while the perfected one has ten factors. And here too, the eradication of many bad, unskillful qualities is fully developed due to right knowledge.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti. Kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti? Sammādiṭṭhissa, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo pahoti, sammāsaṅkappassa sammāvācā pahoti, sammāvācassa sammākammanto pahoti, sammākammantassa sammāājīvo pahoti, sammāājīvassa sammāvāyāmo pahoti, sammāvāyāmassa sammāsati pahoti, sammāsatissa sammāsamādhi pahoti, sammāsamādhissa sammāñāṇaṁ pahoti, sammāñāṇassa sammāvimutti pahoti. Iti kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato sekkho, dasaṅgasamannāgato arahā hoti. Tatrapi sammāñāṇena aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā vigatā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti.
[¶37] In this context, right view comes first. And how does right view come first? For one of right view, wrong view is worn away. And the many bad, unskillful qualities that arise because of wrong view are worn away. And because of right view, many skillful qualities are fully developed. For one of right purpose, wrong purpose is worn away. … For one of right speech, wrong speech is worn away. … For one of right action, wrong action is worn away. … For one of right livelihood, wrong livelihood is worn away. … For one of right effort, wrong effort is worn away. … For one of right mindfulness, wrong mindfulness is worn away. … For one of right immersion, wrong immersion is worn away. … For one of right knowledge, wrong knowledge is worn away. … For one of right freedom, wrong freedom is worn away. And the many bad, unskillful qualities that arise because of wrong freedom are worn away. And because of right freedom, many skillful qualities are fully developed.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti. Kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti? Sammādiṭṭhissa, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti. Sammādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti. Sammāsaṅkappassa, bhikkhave, micchāsaṅkappo nijjiṇṇo hoti …pe… sammāvācassa, bhikkhave, micchāvācā nijjiṇṇā hoti … sammākammantassa, bhikkhave, micchākammanto nijjiṇṇo hoti … sammāājīvassa, bhikkhave, micchāājīvo nijjiṇṇo hoti … sammāvāyāmassa, bhikkhave, micchāvāyāmo nijjiṇṇo hoti … sammāsatissa, bhikkhave, micchāsati nijjiṇṇā hoti … sammāsamādhissa, bhikkhave, micchāsamādhi nijjiṇṇo hoti … sammāñāṇassa, bhikkhave, micchāñāṇaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ hoti … sammāvimuttassa, bhikkhave, micchāvimutti nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvimuttipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti. Sammāvimuttipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti.
[¶38] So there are twenty on the side of the skillful, and twenty on the side of the unskillful. This exposition of the teaching on the Great Forty has been rolled forth. And it cannot be rolled back by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, vīsati kusalapakkhā, vīsati akusalapakkhā— mahācattārīsako dhammapariyāyo pavattito appaṭivattiyo samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ.
[¶39] If any ascetic or brahmin imagines they can criticize and reject the exposition of the teaching on the Great Forty, they deserve rebuttal and criticism on ten legitimate grounds in this very life. If such a gentleman criticizes right view, they praise and honor the ascetics and brahmins who have wrong view. If they criticize right purpose … right speech … right action … right livelihood … right effort … right mindfulness … right immersion … right knowledge … right freedom, they praise and honor the ascetics and brahmins who have wrong freedom. If any ascetic or brahmin imagines they can criticize and reject the exposition of the teaching on the Great Forty, they deserve rebuttal and criticism on these ten legitimate grounds in this very life.
> Pali: Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā imaṁ mahācattārīsakaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ garahitabbaṁ paṭikkositabbaṁ maññeyya tassa diṭṭheva dhamme dasasahadhammikā vādānuvādā gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchanti— sammādiṭṭhiñce bhavaṁ garahati, ye ca micchādiṭṭhī samaṇabrāhmaṇā te bhoto pujjā, te bhoto pāsaṁsā; sammāsaṅkappañce bhavaṁ garahati, ye ca micchāsaṅkappā samaṇabrāhmaṇā te bhoto pujjā, te bhoto pāsaṁsā; sammāvācañce bhavaṁ garahati …pe… sammākammantañce bhavaṁ garahati … sammāājīvañce bhavaṁ garahati … sammāvāyāmañce bhavaṁ garahati … sammāsatiñce bhavaṁ garahati … sammāsamādhiñce bhavaṁ garahati … sammāñāṇañce bhavaṁ garahati … sammāvimuttiñce bhavaṁ garahati, ye ca micchāvimuttī samaṇabrāhmaṇā te bhoto pujjā, te bhoto pāsaṁsā. Yo koci, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā imaṁ mahācattārīsakaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ garahitabbaṁ paṭikkositabbaṁ maññeyya tassa diṭṭheva dhamme ime dasasahadhammikā vādānuvādā gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchanti.
[¶40] Even those who were loud and bold advocates of the doctrines of no-cause, inaction, and nihilism, didn’t imagine that the Great Forty should be criticized or rejected. Why is that? For fear of being blamed, provoked, and faulted.”
> Pali: Yepi te, bhikkhave, ahesuṁ okkalā vassabhaññā ahetuvādā akiriyavādā natthikavādā tepi mahācattārīsakaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ na garahitabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ amaññiṁsu. Taṁ kissa hetu? Nindābyārosaupārambhabhayā”ti.
[¶41] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶42] > Pali: Mahācattārīsakasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 130. MN 118 · Mindfulness of Breathing
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/130/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/130/#p-N
[¶0] MN 118 · Mindfulness of Breathing
> Pali: MN 118 · Ānāpānassatisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery, together with several well-known senior disciples, such as the venerables Sāriputta, Mahāmoggallāna, Mahākassapa, Mahākaccāna, Mahākoṭṭhita, Mahākappina, Mahācunda, Anuruddha, Revata, Ānanda, and others.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde sambahulehi abhiññātehi abhiññātehi therehi sāvakehi saddhiṁ— āyasmatā ca sāriputtena āyasmatā ca mahāmoggallānena āyasmatā ca mahākassapena āyasmatā ca mahākaccāyanena āyasmatā ca mahākoṭṭhikena āyasmatā ca mahākappinena āyasmatā ca mahācundena āyasmatā ca anuruddhena āyasmatā ca revatena āyasmatā ca ānandena, aññehi ca abhiññātehi abhiññātehi therehi sāvakehi saddhiṁ.
[¶2] Now at that time the senior monks were advising and instructing the junior monks. Some senior monks instructed ten monks, while some instructed twenty, thirty, or forty. Being instructed by the senior monks, the junior monks realized a higher distinction than they had before.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena therā bhikkhū nave bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti. Appekacce therā bhikkhū dasapi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti, appekacce therā bhikkhū vīsampi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti, appekacce therā bhikkhū tiṁsampi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti, appekacce therā bhikkhū cattārīsampi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti. Te ca navā bhikkhū therehi bhikkhūhi ovadiyamānā anusāsiyamānā uḷāraṁ pubbenāparaṁ visesaṁ jānanti.
[¶3] Now, at that time it was the sabbath—the full moon on the fifteenth day—and the Buddha was sitting surrounded by the Saṅgha of monks for the invitation to admonish. Then the Buddha looked around the Saṅgha of monks, who were so very silent. He addressed them:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā tadahuposathe pannarase pavāraṇāya puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto abbhokāse nisinno hoti. Atha kho bhagavā tuṇhībhūtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anuviloketvā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶4] “I am satisfied, monks, with this practice. My heart is satisfied with this practice. So you should rouse up even more energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. I will wait here in Sāvatthī for the Komudī full moon of the fourth month.”
> Pali: “āraddhosmi, bhikkhave, imāya paṭipadāya; āraddhacittosmi, bhikkhave, imāya paṭipadāya. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, bhiyyoso mattāya vīriyaṁ ārabhatha appattassa pattiyā, anadhigatassa adhigamāya, asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idhevāhaṁ sāvatthiyaṁ komudiṁ cātumāsiniṁ āgamessāmī”ti.
[¶5] Mendicants from around the country heard about this, and came down to Sāvatthī to see the Buddha.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho jānapadā bhikkhū: “bhagavā kira tattheva sāvatthiyaṁ komudiṁ cātumāsiniṁ āgamessatī”ti. Te jānapadā bhikkhū sāvatthiṁ osaranti bhagavantaṁ dassanāya.
[¶6] And those senior monks instructed the junior monks even more. Some senior monks instructed ten monks, while some instructed twenty, thirty, or forty. Being instructed by the senior monks, the junior monks realized a higher distinction than they had before.
> Pali: Te ca kho therā bhikkhū bhiyyoso mattāya nave bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti. Appekacce therā bhikkhū dasapi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti, appekacce therā bhikkhū vīsampi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti, appekacce therā bhikkhū tiṁsampi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti, appekacce therā bhikkhū cattārīsampi bhikkhū ovadanti anusāsanti. Te ca navā bhikkhū therehi bhikkhūhi ovadiyamānā anusāsiyamānā uḷāraṁ pubbenāparaṁ visesaṁ jānanti.
[¶7] Now, at that time it was the sabbath—the Komudī full moon on the fifteenth day of the fourth month—and the Buddha was sitting in the open surrounded by the Saṅgha of monks. Then the Buddha looked around the Saṅgha of monks, who were so very silent. He addressed them:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā tadahuposathe pannarase komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto abbhokāse nisinno hoti. Atha kho bhagavā tuṇhībhūtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anuviloketvā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶8] “This assembly has no chaff, monks, it is free of chaff, pure, and consolidated in the core. Such is this Saṅgha of monks, such is this assembly! An assembly such as this is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of greeting with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world. Such is this Saṅgha of monks, such is this assembly! For an assembly such as this, giving little becomes much, while giving much becomes even more. Such is this Saṅgha of monks, such is this assembly! An assembly such as this is rarely seen in the world. Such is this Saṅgha of monks, such is this assembly! An assembly such as this is worth traveling many leagues to see, even if you have to carry your own provisions in a knapsack.
> Pali: “Apalāpāyaṁ, bhikkhave, parisā; nippalāpāyaṁ, bhikkhave, parisā; suddhā sāre patiṭṭhitā. Tathārūpo ayaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhusaṅgho; tathārūpā ayaṁ, bhikkhave, parisā yathārūpā parisā āhuneyyā pāhuneyyā dakkhiṇeyyā añjalikaraṇīyā anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassa. Tathārūpo ayaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhusaṅgho; tathārūpā ayaṁ, bhikkhave, parisā yathārūpāya parisāya appaṁ dinnaṁ bahu hoti, bahu dinnaṁ bahutaraṁ. Tathārūpo ayaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhusaṅgho; tathārūpā ayaṁ, bhikkhave, parisā yathārūpā parisā dullabhā dassanāya lokassa. Tathārūpo ayaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhusaṅgho; tathārūpā ayaṁ, bhikkhave, parisā yathārūpaṁ parisaṁ alaṁ yojanagaṇanāni dassanāya gantuṁ puṭosenāpi.
[¶9] For in this Saṅgha there are perfected mendicants who have ended the defilements, completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and are rightly freed through enlightenment. There are such mendicants in this Saṅgha.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe arahanto khīṇāsavā vusitavanto katakaraṇīyā ohitabhārā anuppattasadatthā parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojanā sammadaññāvimuttā— evarūpāpi, bhikkhave, santi bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe.
[¶10] In this Saṅgha there are mendicants who, with the ending of the five lower fetters are reborn spontaneously. They are extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world. There are such mendicants in this Saṅgha.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā— evarūpāpi, bhikkhave, santi bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe.
[¶11] In this Saṅgha there are mendicants who, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, are once-returners. They come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering. There are such mendicants in this Saṅgha.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti— evarūpāpi, bhikkhave, santi bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe.
[¶12] In this Saṅgha there are mendicants who, with the ending of three fetters are stream-enterers, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening. There are such mendicants in this Saṅgha.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyanā— evarūpāpi, bhikkhave, santi bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe.
[¶13] In this Saṅgha there are mendicants who are committed to developing the four kinds of mindfulness meditation … the four right efforts … the four bases of psychic power … the five faculties … the five powers … the seven awakening factors … the noble eightfold path. There are such mendicants in this Saṅgha. In this Saṅgha there are mendicants who are committed to developing the meditation on love … compassion … rejoicing … equanimity … ugliness … impermanence. There are such mendicants in this Saṅgha. In this Saṅgha there are mendicants who are committed to developing the meditation on mindfulness of breathing.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe catunnaṁ satipaṭṭhānānaṁ bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti— evarūpāpi, bhikkhave, santi bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe. Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe catunnaṁ sammappadhānānaṁ bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti …pe… catunnaṁ iddhipādānaṁ … pañcannaṁ indriyānaṁ … pañcannaṁ balānaṁ … sattannaṁ bojjhaṅgānaṁ … ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti— evarūpāpi, bhikkhave, santi bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe. Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe mettābhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti … karuṇābhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti … muditābhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti … upekkhābhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti … asubhabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti … aniccasaññābhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti— evarūpāpi, bhikkhave, santi bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe. Santi, bhikkhave, bhikkhū imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe ānāpānassatibhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti.
[¶14] Mendicants, when mindfulness of breathing is developed and cultivated it is very fruitful and beneficial. Mindfulness of breathing, when developed and cultivated, fulfills the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. The four kinds of mindfulness meditation, when developed and cultivated, fulfill the seven awakening factors. And the seven awakening factors, when developed and cultivated, fulfill knowledge and freedom.
> Pali: Ānāpānassati, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Ānāpānassati, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti. Satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṁ paripūrenti.
[¶15] And how is mindfulness of breathing developed and cultivated to be very fruitful and beneficial?
> Pali: Kathaṁ bhāvitā ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassati kathaṁ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā?
[¶16] It’s when a mendicant—gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut—sits down cross-legged, sets their body straight, and brings mindfulness to the present. Just mindful, they breathe in. Mindful, they breathe out.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So satova assasati satova passasati.
[¶17] Breathing in heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing in heavily.’ Breathing out heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing out heavily.’ Breathing in lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing in lightly.’ Breathing out lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing out lightly.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in stilling the physical process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out stilling the physical process.’
> Pali: Dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶18] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing rapture.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing rapture.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing bliss.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing bliss.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the mental process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the mental process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in stilling the mental process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out stilling the mental process.’
> Pali: ‘Pītipaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘pītipaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘sukhapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sukhapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ cittasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ cittasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶19] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in gladdening the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out gladdening the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in immersing the mind in samādhi.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out immersing the mind in samādhi.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in freeing the mind.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out freeing the mind.’
> Pali: ‘Cittapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘cittapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘abhippamodayaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘abhippamodayaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘samādahaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘samādahaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘vimocayaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘vimocayaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶20] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing impermanence.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing impermanence.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing fading away.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing fading away.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing cessation.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing cessation.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in observing letting go.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out observing letting go.’
> Pali: ‘Aniccānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘aniccānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘virāgānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘virāgānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘nirodhānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘nirodhānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘paṭinissaggānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶21] Mindfulness of breathing, when developed and cultivated in this way, is very fruitful and beneficial.
> Pali: Evaṁ bhāvitā kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassati evaṁ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.
[¶22] And how is mindfulness of breathing developed and cultivated so as to fulfill the four kinds of mindfulness meditation?
> Pali: Kathaṁ bhāvitā ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassati kathaṁ bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti?
[¶23] Whenever a mendicant knows that they breathe heavily, or lightly, or experiencing the whole body, or stilling the physical process— at that time they’re meditating by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. For I say that the in-breaths and out-breaths are an aspect of the body. That’s why at that time a mendicant is meditating by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; kāye kāyānupassī, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Kāyesu kāyaññatarāhaṁ, bhikkhave, evaṁ vadāmi yadidaṁ—assāsapassāsā. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, kāye kāyānupassī tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶24] Whenever a mendicant practices breathing while experiencing rapture, or experiencing bliss, or experiencing the mental process, or stilling the mental process— at that time they meditate observing an aspect of feelings—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. For I say that careful application of mind to the in-breaths and out-breaths is an aspect of feelings. That’s why at that time a mendicant is meditating by observing an aspect of feelings—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘pītipaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘pītipaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘sukhapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sukhapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ cittasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ cittasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; vedanāsu vedanānupassī, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu vedanāññatarāhaṁ, bhikkhave, evaṁ vadāmi yadidaṁ—assāsapassāsānaṁ sādhukaṁ manasikāraṁ. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, vedanāsu vedanānupassī tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶25] Whenever a mendicant practices breathing while experiencing the mind, or gladdening the mind, or immersing the mind in samādhi, or freeing the mind— at that time they meditate observing an aspect of the mind—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. There is no development of mindfulness of breathing for someone who is unmindful and lacks awareness, I say. That’s why at that time a mendicant is meditating by observing an aspect of the mind—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘cittapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘cittapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘abhippamodayaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘abhippamodayaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘samādahaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘samādahaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘vimocayaṁ cittaṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘vimocayaṁ cittaṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; citte cittānupassī, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhassatissa asampajānassa ānāpānassatiṁ vadāmi. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, citte cittānupassī tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶26] Whenever a mendicant practices breathing while observing impermanence, or observing fading away, or observing cessation, or observing letting go— at that time they meditate observing an aspect of principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. Having seen with wisdom the giving up of covetousness and displeasure, they watch over closely with equanimity. That’s why at that time a mendicant is meditating by observing an aspect of principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘aniccānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘aniccānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘virāgānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘virāgānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘nirodhānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘nirodhānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘paṭinissaggānupassī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; dhammesu dhammānupassī, bhikkhave, tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. So yaṁ taṁ abhijjhādomanassānaṁ pahānaṁ taṁ paññāya disvā sādhukaṁ ajjhupekkhitā hoti. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, dhammesu dhammānupassī tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶27] That’s how mindfulness of breathing, when developed and cultivated, fulfills the four kinds of mindfulness meditation.
> Pali: Evaṁ bhāvitā kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassati evaṁ bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti.
[¶28] And how are the four kinds of mindfulness meditation developed and cultivated so as to fulfill the seven awakening factors?
> Pali: Kathaṁ bhāvitā ca, bhikkhave, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā kathaṁ bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti?
[¶29] Whenever a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body, at that time their mindfulness is established and lucid. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of mindfulness; they develop it and perfect it.
> Pali: Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ, upaṭṭhitāssa tasmiṁ samaye sati hoti asammuṭṭhā. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno upaṭṭhitā sati hoti asammuṭṭhā, satisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti. Satisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, satisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶30] As they live mindfully in this way they investigate, explore, and inquire into that principle with wisdom. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of investigation of principles; they develop it and perfect it.
> Pali: So tathāsato viharanto taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinati pavicayati parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjati. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tathāsato viharanto taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinati pavicayati parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjati, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶31] As they investigate principles with wisdom in this way their energy is roused up and unflagging. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of energy; they develop it and perfect it.
> Pali: Tassa taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinato pavicayato parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjato āraddhaṁ hoti vīriyaṁ asallīnaṁ. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinato pavicayato parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjato āraddhaṁ hoti vīriyaṁ asallīnaṁ, vīriyasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, vīriyasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶32] When they’re energetic, rapture not of the flesh arises. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of rapture; they develop it and perfect it.
> Pali: Āraddhavīriyassa uppajjati pīti nirāmisā. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno āraddhavīriyassa uppajjati pīti nirāmisā, pītisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, pītisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶33] When the mind is full of rapture, the body and mind become tranquil. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of tranquility; they develop it and perfect it.
> Pali: Pītimanassa kāyopi passambhati, cittampi passambhati. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pītimanassa kāyopi passambhati, cittampi passambhati, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶34] When the body is tranquil and they feel bliss, the mind becomes immersed in samādhi. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of immersion; they develop it and perfect it.
> Pali: Passaddhakāyassa sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno passaddhakāyassa sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati, samādhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, samādhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶35] They closely watch over that mind immersed in samādhi. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of equanimity; they develop it and perfect it.
> Pali: So tathāsamāhitaṁ cittaṁ sādhukaṁ ajjhupekkhitā hoti. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tathāsamāhitaṁ cittaṁ sādhukaṁ ajjhupekkhitā hoti, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶36] Whenever a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles, at that time their mindfulness is established and lucid. At such a time, a mendicant has initiated the awakening factor of mindfulness … investigation of principles … energy … rapture … tranquility … immersion … equanimity.
> Pali: Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vedanāsu …pe… citte … dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ, upaṭṭhitāssa tasmiṁ samaye sati hoti asammuṭṭhā. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno upaṭṭhitā sati hoti asammuṭṭhā, satisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, satisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, satisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati. So tathāsato viharanto taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinati pavicayati parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjati. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tathāsato viharanto taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinati pavicayati parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjati, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati. Tassa taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinato pavicayato parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjato āraddhaṁ hoti vīriyaṁ asallīnaṁ. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṁ dhammaṁ paññāya pavicinato pavicayato parivīmaṁsaṁ āpajjato āraddhaṁ hoti vīriyaṁ asallīnaṁ, vīriyasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, vīriyasambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati. Āraddhavīriyassa uppajjati pīti nirāmisā. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno āraddhavīriyassa uppajjati pīti nirāmisā, pītisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, pītisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati. Pītimanassa kāyopi passambhati, cittampi passambhati. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pītimanassa kāyopi passambhati, cittampi passambhati, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati. Passaddhakāyassa sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno passaddhakāyassa sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati, samādhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, samādhisambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati. So tathāsamāhitaṁ cittaṁ sādhukaṁ ajjhupekkhitā hoti. Yasmiṁ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tathāsamāhitaṁ cittaṁ sādhukaṁ ajjhupekkhitā hoti, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno āraddho hoti, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhu bhāveti, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo tasmiṁ samaye bhikkhuno bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶37] That’s how the four kinds of mindfulness meditation, when developed and cultivated, fulfill the seven awakening factors.
> Pali: Evaṁ bhāvitā kho, bhikkhave, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā evaṁ bahulīkatā satta sambojjhaṅge paripūrenti.
[¶38] And how are the seven awakening factors developed and cultivated so as to fulfill knowledge and freedom?
> Pali: Kathaṁ bhāvitā ca, bhikkhave, satta bojjhaṅgā kathaṁ bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṁ paripūrenti?
[¶39] It’s when a mendicant develops the awakening factors of mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion,
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …pe… vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …
[¶40] and equanimity, which rely on seclusion, fading away, and cessation, and ripen as letting go.
> Pali: upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ.
[¶41] That’s how the seven awakening factors, when developed and cultivated, fulfill knowledge and freedom.”
> Pali: Evaṁ bhāvitā kho, bhikkhave, satta bojjhaṅgā evaṁ bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṁ paripūrentī”ti.
[¶42] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the monks approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶43] > Pali: Ānāpānassatisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 131. MN 119 · Mindfulness of the Body
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/131/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/131/#p-N
[¶0] MN 119 · Mindfulness of the Body
> Pali: MN 119 · Kāyagatāsatisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then after the meal, on return from almsround, several mendicants sat together in the assembly hall and this discussion came up among them.
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantānaṁ upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayamantarākathā udapādi:
[¶3] “It’s incredible, reverends, it’s amazing, how the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha has said that mindfulness of the body, when developed and cultivated, is very fruitful and beneficial.”
> Pali: “acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso. Yāvañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā mahapphalā vuttā mahānisaṁsā”ti.
[¶4] But their conversation was left unfinished. Then the Buddha came out of retreat and went to the assembly hall. He sat down on the seat spread out and addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Ayañca hidaṁ tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ antarākathā vippakatā hoti, atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena upaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶5] So the mendicants told him what they had been talking about. The Buddha said:
> Pali: “Idha, bhante, amhākaṁ pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantānaṁ upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayamantarākathā udapādi: ‘acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso. Yāvañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā mahapphalā vuttā mahānisaṁsā’ti. Ayaṁ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā, atha bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶6] “And how, mendicants, is mindfulness of the body developed and cultivated to be very fruitful and beneficial?
> Pali: “Kathaṁ bhāvitā ca, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati kathaṁ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā?
[¶7] It’s when a mendicant—gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut—sits down cross-legged, sets their body straight, and brings mindfulness to the present. Just mindful, they breathe in. Mindful, they breathe out. Breathing in heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing in heavily.’ Breathing out heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing out heavily.’ Breathing in lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing in lightly.’ Breathing out lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing out lightly.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in stilling the physical process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out stilling the physical process.’ As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to domestic life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That’s how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So satova assasati satova passasati; dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti; ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati; ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato ye gehasitā sarasaṅkappā te pahīyanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Evaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶8] Furthermore, when a mendicant is walking they know: ‘I am walking.’ When standing they know: ‘I am standing.’ When sitting they know: ‘I am sitting.’ And when lying down they know: ‘I am lying down.’ Whatever posture their body is in, they know it. As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to domestic life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gacchanto vā ‘gacchāmī’ti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ‘ṭhitomhī’ti pajānāti, nisinno vā ‘nisinnomhī’ti pajānāti, sayāno vā ‘sayānomhī’ti pajānāti. Yathā yathā vā panassa kāyo paṇihito hoti tathā tathā naṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato ye gehasitā sarasaṅkappā te pahīyanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶9] Furthermore, a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent. As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to domestic life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato ye gehasitā sarasaṅkappā te pahīyanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶10] Furthermore, a mendicant examines their own body, up from the soles of the feet and down from the tips of the hairs, wrapped in skin and full of many kinds of filth. ‘In this body there is head hair, body hair, nails, teeth, skin, flesh, sinews, bones, bone marrow, kidneys, heart, liver, diaphragm, spleen, lungs, intestines, mesentery, undigested food, feces, bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat, tears, grease, saliva, snot, synovial fluid, urine.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttan’ti.
[¶11] It’s as if there were a bag with openings at both ends, filled with various kinds of grains, such as fine rice, wheat, mung beans, peas, sesame, and ordinary rice. And a person with clear eyes were to open it and examine the contents: ‘These grains are fine rice, these are wheat, these are mung beans, these are peas, these are sesame, and these are ordinary rice.’ In the same way, a mendicant examines their own body, up from the soles of the feet and down from the tips of the hairs, wrapped in skin and full of many kinds of filth. … As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to domestic life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ubhatomukhā putoḷi pūrā nānāvihitassa dhaññassa, seyyathidaṁ— sālīnaṁ vīhīnaṁ muggānaṁ māsānaṁ tilānaṁ taṇḍulānaṁ, tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso muñcitvā paccavekkheyya: ‘ime sālī ime vīhī ime muggā ime māsā ime tilā ime taṇḍulā’ti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttan’ti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato ye gehasitā sarasaṅkappā te pahīyanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶12] Furthermore, a mendicant examines their own body, whatever its placement or posture, according to the elements: ‘In this body there is the earth element, the water element, the fire element, and the air element.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ yathāṭhitaṁ yathāpaṇihitaṁ dhātuso paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti.
[¶13] It’s as if a deft butcher or butcher’s apprentice were to kill a cow and sit down at the crossroads with the meat cut into chops. In the same way, a mendicant examines their own body, whatever its placement or posture, according to the elements: ‘In this body there is the earth element, the water element, the fire element, and the air element.’ As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to domestic life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā gāviṁ vadhitvā catumahāpathe bilaso vibhajitvā nisinno assa; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ yathāṭhitaṁ yathāpaṇihitaṁ dhātuso paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato ye gehasitā sarasaṅkappā te pahīyanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶14] Furthermore, suppose a mendicant were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground. And it had been dead for one, two, or three days, bloated, livid, and festering. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to domestic life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ ekāhamataṁ vā dvīhamataṁ vā tīhamataṁ vā uddhumātakaṁ vinīlakaṁ vipubbakajātaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato ye gehasitā sarasaṅkappā te pahīyanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶15] Or suppose they were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground being devoured by crows, hawks, vultures, herons, hounds, tigers, leopards, jackals, and many kinds of little creatures. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ kākehi vā khajjamānaṁ kulalehi vā khajjamānaṁ gijjhehi vā khajjamānaṁ kaṅkehi vā khajjamānaṁ sunakhehi vā khajjamānaṁ byagghehi vā khajjamānaṁ dīpīhi vā khajjamānaṁ siṅgālehi vā khajjamānaṁ vividhehi vā pāṇakajātehi khajjamānaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa …pe… evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶16] Furthermore, suppose they were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground, a skeleton with flesh and blood, held together by sinews … A skeleton without flesh but smeared with blood, and held together by sinews … A skeleton rid of flesh and blood, held together by sinews … Bones rid of sinews scattered in every direction. Here a hand-bone, there a foot-bone, here an ankle bone, there a shin-bone, here a thigh-bone, there a hip-bone, here a rib-bone, there a back-bone, here an arm-bone, there a neck-bone, here a jaw-bone, there a tooth, here the skull. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ samaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe… aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ nimmaṁsalohitamakkhitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe… aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ apagatamaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe… aṭṭhikāni apagatasambandhāni disāvidisāvikkhittāni aññena hatthaṭṭhikaṁ aññena pādaṭṭhikaṁ aññena gopphakaṭṭhikaṁ aññena jaṅghaṭṭhikaṁ aññena ūruṭṭhikaṁ aññena kaṭiṭṭhikaṁ aññena phāsukaṭṭhikaṁ aññena piṭṭhiṭṭhikaṁ aññena khandhaṭṭhikaṁ aññena gīvaṭṭhikaṁ aññena hanukaṭṭhikaṁ aññena dantaṭṭhikaṁ aññena sīsakaṭāhaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa …pe… evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶17] White bones, the color of shells … Decrepit bones, heaped in a pile … Bones rotted and crumbled to powder. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to lay life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ— aṭṭhikāni setāni saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgāni …pe… aṭṭhikāni puñjakitāni terovassikāni …pe… aṭṭhikāni pūtīni cuṇṇakajātāni. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa … pe… evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶18] Furthermore, a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. It’s like when a deft bathroom attendant or their apprentice pours bath powder into a bronze dish, sprinkling it little by little with water. They knead it until the ball of bath powder is soaked and saturated with moisture, spread through inside and out; yet no moisture oozes out. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads their body with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to lay life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho nhāpako vā nhāpakantevāsī vā kaṁsathāle nhānīyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ sanneyya, sāyaṁ nhānīyapiṇḍi snehānugatā snehaparetā santarabāhirā phuṭā snehena na ca pagghariṇī; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati; nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa … pe… evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶19] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. It’s like a deep lake fed by spring water. There’s no inlet to the east, west, north, or south, and the heavens would not properly bestow showers from time to time. But the stream of cool water welling up in the lake drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads throughout the lake. There’s no part of the lake that’s not spread through with cool water. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati; nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, udakarahado gambhīro ubbhidodako. Tassa nevassa puratthimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ na pacchimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ na uttarāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ na dakkhiṇāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ; devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammā dhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya; atha kho tamhāva udakarahadā sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā tameva udakarahadaṁ sītena vārinā abhisandeyya parisandeyya paripūreyya paripphareyya, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato udakarahadassa sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa …pe… evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶20] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption. They meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. From the tip to the root they’re drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with cool water. There’s no part of them that’s not soaked with cool water. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni yāva caggā yāva ca mūlā sītena vārinā abhisannāni parisannāni paripūrāni paripphuṭāni, nāssa kiñci sabbāvataṁ uppalānaṁ vā padumānaṁ vā puṇḍarīkānaṁ vā sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa …pe… evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶21] Furthermore, giving up pleasure and pain, and ending former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. They sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. It’s like someone sitting wrapped from head to foot with white cloth. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread over with white cloth. In the same way, they sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. As they meditate like this—diligent, keen, and resolute—memories and thoughts tied to domestic life are given up. Their mind becomes stilled internally; it settles, unifies, and becomes immersed in samādhi. That too is how a mendicant develops mindfulness of the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti; nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso odātena vatthena sasīsaṁ pārupitvā nisinno assa, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena apphuṭaṁ assa; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato ye gehasitā sarasaṅkappā te pahīyanti. Tesaṁ pahānā ajjhattameva cittaṁ santiṭṭhati, sannisīdati ekodi hoti samādhiyati. Evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāyagatāsatiṁ bhāveti.
[¶22] Anyone who has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body includes all of the skillful qualities that play a part in realization. Anyone who brings into their mind the great ocean includes all of the streams that run down into it. In the same way, anyone who has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body includes all of the skillful qualities that play a part in realization.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, antogadhāvāssa kusalā dhammā ye keci vijjābhāgiyā. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci mahāsamuddo cetasā phuṭo, antogadhāvāssa kunnadiyo yā kāci samuddaṅgamā; evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, antogadhāvāssa kusalā dhammā ye keci vijjābhāgiyā.
[¶23] When a mendicant has not developed or cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra finds a vulnerability and gets an opportunity. Suppose a person were to throw a heavy stone ball at a mound of wet clay.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati abhāvitā abahulīkatā, labhati tassa māro otāraṁ, labhati tassa māro ārammaṇaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso garukaṁ silāguḷaṁ allamattikāpuñje pakkhipeyya.
[¶24] What do you think, mendicants? Would that heavy stone ball find an entry into that mound of wet clay?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu taṁ garukaṁ silāguḷaṁ allamattikāpuñje labhetha otāran”ti?
[¶25] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶26] “In the same way, when a mendicant has not developed or cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra finds a vulnerability and gets an opportunity.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati abhāvitā abahulīkatā, labhati tassa māro otāraṁ, labhati tassa māro ārammaṇaṁ.
[¶27] Suppose there was a dried up, withered log. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ; atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti.
[¶28] What do you think, mendicants? By drilling the stick against that dried up, withered log, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso amuṁ sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶29] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶30] “In the same way, when a mendicant has not developed or cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra finds a vulnerability and gets an opportunity.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati abhāvitā abahulīkatā, labhati tassa māro otāraṁ, labhati tassa māro ārammaṇaṁ.
[¶31] Suppose a water jar was placed on a stand, empty and hollow. Then a person comes along with a load of water.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, udakamaṇiko ritto tuccho ādhāre ṭhapito; atha puriso āgaccheyya udakabhāraṁ ādāya.
[¶32] What do you think, mendicants? Could that person pour water into the jar?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso labhetha udakassa nikkhepanan”ti?
[¶33] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶34] “In the same way, when a mendicant has not developed or cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra finds a vulnerability and gets an opportunity.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati abhāvitā abahulīkatā, labhati tassa māro otāraṁ, labhati tassa māro ārammaṇaṁ.
[¶35] When a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra cannot find a vulnerability and doesn’t get an opportunity.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, na tassa labhati māro otāraṁ, na tassa labhati māro ārammaṇaṁ.
[¶36] Suppose a person were to throw a light ball of string at a door-panel made entirely of hardwood.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso lahukaṁ suttaguḷaṁ sabbasāramaye aggaḷaphalake pakkhipeyya.
[¶37] What do you think, mendicants? Would that light ball of string find an entry into that door-panel made entirely of hardwood?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso taṁ lahukaṁ suttaguḷaṁ sabbasāramaye aggaḷaphalake labhetha otāran”ti?
[¶38] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶39] “In the same way, when a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra cannot find a vulnerability and doesn’t get an opportunity.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, na tassa labhati māro otāraṁ, na tassa labhati māro ārammaṇaṁ.
[¶40] Suppose there was a green, sappy log. Then a person comes along with a drill-stick, thinking to light a fire and produce heat.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ; atha puriso āgaccheyya uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya: ‘aggiṁ abhinibbattessāmi, tejo pātukarissāmī’ti.
[¶41] What do you think, mendicants? By drilling the stick against that green, sappy log on dry land far from water, could they light a fire and produce heat?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso amuṁ allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimanthento aggiṁ abhinibbatteyya, tejo pātukareyyā”ti?
[¶42] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶43] “In the same way, when a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra cannot find a vulnerability and doesn’t get an opportunity. Suppose a water jar was placed on a stand, full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. Then a person comes along with a load of water.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, na tassa labhati māro otāraṁ, na tassa labhati māro ārammaṇaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, udakamaṇiko pūro udakassa samatittiko kākapeyyo ādhāre ṭhapito; atha puriso āgaccheyya udakabhāraṁ ādāya.
[¶44] What do you think, mendicants? Could that person pour water into the jar?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso labhetha udakassa nikkhepanan”ti?
[¶45] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶46] “In the same way, when a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, Māra cannot find a vulnerability and doesn’t get an opportunity.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, na tassa labhati māro otāraṁ, na tassa labhati māro ārammaṇaṁ.
[¶47] When a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, they extend the mind to realize by insight each and every thing that can be realized by insight; and they are capable of realizing those things, since each and every one is within range.
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, so yassa yassa abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṁ abhininnāmeti abhiññāsacchikiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane.
[¶48] Suppose a water jar was placed on a stand, full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. If a strong man was to pour it on any side, would water pour out?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, udakamaṇiko pūro udakassa samatittiko kākapeyyo ādhāre ṭhapito. Tamenaṁ balavā puriso yato yato āviñcheyya, āgaccheyya udakan”ti?
[¶49] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶50] “In the same way, when a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, they extend the mind to realize by insight each and every thing that can be realized by insight; and they are capable of realizing those things, since each and every one is within range.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā so, yassa yassa abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṁ abhininnāmeti abhiññāsacchikiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane.
[¶51] Suppose there was a square, walled lotus pond on level ground, full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. If a strong man was to open the wall on any side, would water pour out?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, same bhūmibhāge caturassā pokkharaṇī assa āḷibandhā pūrā udakassa samatittikā kākapeyyā. Tamenaṁ balavā puriso yato yato āḷiṁ muñceyya āgaccheyya udakan”ti?
[¶52] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶53] “In the same way, when a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, they extend the mind to realize by insight each and every thing that can be realized by insight; and they are capable of realizing those things, since each and every one is within range. Suppose a chariot stood harnessed to thoroughbreds at a level crossroads, with a goad ready. A deft horse trainer, a master charioteer, might mount the chariot, taking the reins in his right hand and goad in the left. He’d drive out and back wherever he wishes, whenever he wishes. In the same way, when a mendicant has developed and cultivated mindfulness of the body, they extend the mind to realize by insight each and every thing that can be realized by insight; and they are capable of realizing those things, since each and every one is within range.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, so yassa yassa abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṁ abhininnāmeti abhiññāsacchikiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, subhūmiyaṁ catumahāpathe ājaññaratho yutto assa ṭhito odhastapatodo; tamenaṁ dakkho yoggācariyo assadammasārathi abhiruhitvā vāmena hatthena rasmiyo gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena patodaṁ gahetvā yenicchakaṁ yadicchakaṁ sāreyyāpi paccāsāreyyāpi; evameva kho, bhikkhave, yassa kassaci kāyagatāsati bhāvitā bahulīkatā, so yassa yassa abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṁ abhininnāmeti abhiññāsacchikiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṁ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane.
[¶54] You can expect ten benefits when mindfulness of the body has been cultivated, developed, and practiced, made a vehicle and a basis, kept up, consolidated, and properly implemented.
> Pali: Kāyagatāya, bhikkhave, satiyā āsevitāya bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya dasānisaṁsā pāṭikaṅkhā.
[¶55] They prevail over desire and discontent, and live having mastered desire and discontent whenever they arose.
> Pali: Aratiratisaho hoti, na ca taṁ arati sahati, uppannaṁ aratiṁ abhibhuyya viharati.
[¶56] They prevail over fear and dread, and live having mastered fear and dread whenever they arose.
> Pali: Bhayabheravasaho hoti, na ca taṁ bhayabheravaṁ sahati, uppannaṁ bhayabheravaṁ abhibhuyya viharati.
[¶57] They endure cold, heat, hunger, and thirst; the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles; rude and unwelcome criticism; and put up with physical pain—sharp, severe, acute, unpleasant, disagreeable, and life-threatening.
> Pali: Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa jighacchāya pipāsāya ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassānaṁ duruttānaṁ durāgatānaṁ vacanapathānaṁ, uppannānaṁ sārīrikānaṁ vedanānaṁ dukkhānaṁ tibbānaṁ kharānaṁ kaṭukānaṁ asātānaṁ amanāpānaṁ pāṇaharānaṁ adhivāsakajātiko hoti.
[¶58] They get the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when they want, without trouble or difficulty.
> Pali: Catunnaṁ jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī.
[¶59] They wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again … They control the body as far as the realm of divinity.
> Pali: So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccānubhoti. Ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti, āvibhāvaṁ …pe… yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.
[¶60] With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. …
> Pali: Dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca, ye dūre santike ca …pe….
[¶61] They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. …
> Pali: Parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti. Sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ …pe… sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ … vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ … samohaṁ vā cittaṁ … vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ … saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ … vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ … mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ … amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ … sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ … anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ … samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ … asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ … vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ … avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.
[¶62] They recollect many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶63] With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: Dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶64] They realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati.
[¶65] You can expect these ten benefits when mindfulness of the body has been cultivated, developed, and practiced, made a vehicle and a basis, kept up, consolidated, and properly implemented.”
> Pali: Kāyagatāya, bhikkhave, satiyā āsevitāya bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya ime dasānisaṁsā pāṭikaṅkhā”ti.
[¶66] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶67] > Pali: Kāyagatāsatisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 132. MN 120 · Rebirth by Choice
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/132/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/132/#p-N
[¶0] MN 120 · Rebirth by Choice
> Pali: MN 120 · Saṅkhārupapattisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “I shall teach you rebirth by choice. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “saṅkhārupapattiṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of well-to-do aristocrats!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena samannāgato hoti, sutena samannāgato hoti, cāgena samannāgato hoti, paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā khattiyamahāsālānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶6] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of well-to-do brahmins … well-to-do householders!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena samannāgato hoti, sutena samannāgato hoti, cāgena samannāgato hoti, paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brāhmaṇamahāsālānaṁ …pe… gahapatimahāsālānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶7] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. And they’ve heard: ‘The gods of the four great kings are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods of the four great kings!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena samannāgato hoti, sutena samannāgato hoti, cāgena samannāgato hoti, paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘cātumahārājikā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶8] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. And they’ve heard: ‘The gods of the thirty-three … the gods of Yama … the joyful gods … the gods who love to create … the gods who control what is created by others are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods who control what is created by others!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena samannāgato hoti, sutena samannāgato hoti, cāgena samannāgato hoti, paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti— tāvatiṁsā devā …pe… yāmā devā … tusitā devā … nimmānaratī devā … paranimmitavasavattī devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā paranimmitavasavattīnaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶9] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. And they’ve heard: ‘The Divinity of a thousand is long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ Now the Divinity of a thousand meditates focused on pervading a thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. As a person with clear eyes might pick up a gallnut in their hand and examine it, so too the Divinity of a thousand meditates focused on pervading a thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the Divinity of a thousand!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena samannāgato hoti, sutena samannāgato hoti, cāgena samannāgato hoti, paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘sahasso brahmā dīghāyuko vaṇṇavā sukhabahulo’ti. Sahasso, bhikkhave, brahmā sahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, cakkhumā puriso ekaṁ āmaṇḍaṁ hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, sahasso brahmā sahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sahassassa brahmuno sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶10] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. And they’ve heard: ‘The Divinity of two thousand … the Divinity of three thousand … the Divinity of four thousand … the Divinity of five thousand is long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ Now the Divinity of five thousand meditates focused on pervading a five-thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. As a person with clear eyes might pick up five gallnuts in their hand and examine them, so too the Divinity of five thousand meditates focused on pervading a five-thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the Divinity of five thousand!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena samannāgato hoti, sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti— dvisahasso brahmā …pe… tisahasso brahmā … catusahasso brahmā … pañcasahasso brahmā dīghāyuko vaṇṇavā sukhabahuloti. Pañcasahasso, bhikkhave, brahmā pañcasahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, cakkhumā puriso pañca āmaṇḍāni hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, pañcasahasso brahmā pañcasahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā pañcasahassassa brahmuno sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶11] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. And they’ve heard: ‘The Divinity of ten thousand is long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ Now the Divinity of ten thousand meditates focused on pervading a ten-thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked. When placed on a cream rug it would shine and glow and dazzle. In the same way the Divinity of ten thousand meditates focused on pervading a ten-thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the Divinity of ten thousand!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena samannāgato hoti, sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘dasasahasso brahmā dīghāyuko vaṇṇavā sukhabahulo’ti. Dasasahasso, bhikkhave, brahmā dasasahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato paṇḍukambale nikkhitto bhāsate ca tapate ca virocati ca; evameva kho, bhikkhave, dasasahasso brahmā dasasahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā dasasahassassa brahmuno sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶12] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. And they’ve heard: ‘The Divinity of a hundred thousand is long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ Now the Divinity of a hundred thousand meditates focused on pervading a hundred-thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. Suppose there was a pendant of Black Plum River gold, fashioned by a deft smith, well wrought in the forge. When placed on a cream rug it would shine and glow and dazzle. In the same way the Divinity of a hundred thousand meditates focused on pervading a hundred-thousandfold galaxy, as well as the sentient beings reborn there. They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the Divinity of a hundred thousand!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘satasahasso brahmā dīghāyuko vaṇṇavā sukhabahulo’ti. Satasahasso, bhikkhave, brahmā satasahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, nikkhaṁ jambonadaṁ dakkhakammāraputtaukkāmukhasukusalasampahaṭṭhaṁ paṇḍukambale nikkhittaṁ bhāsate ca tapate ca virocati ca; evameva kho, bhikkhave, satasahasso brahmā satasahassilokadhātuṁ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā satasahassassa brahmuno sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶13] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. And they’ve heard: ‘The radiant gods … the gods of limited luminosity … the gods of limitless luminosity … the gods of sublime luminosity … the gods of limited beauty … the gods of limitless beauty … the gods of universal beauty … the gods of abundant fruit … the gods of Aviha … the gods of Atappa … the gods fair to see … the fair seeing gods … the gods of Akaniṭṭha … the gods of the dimension of infinite space … the gods of the dimension of infinite consciousness … the gods of the dimension of nothingness … the gods of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception are long-lived, long-lasting, and very happy.’ They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. Those choices and meditations of theirs, developed and cultivated like this, lead to rebirth there. This is the path and the practice that leads to rebirth there.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti— ābhā devā …pe… parittābhā devā … appamāṇābhā devā … ābhassarā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā ābhassarānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti— parittasubhā devā …pe… appamāṇasubhā devā … subhakiṇhā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā subhakiṇhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti— vehapphalā devā …pe… avihā devā … atappā devā … sudassā devā … sudassī devā … akaniṭṭhā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā akaniṭṭhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā devā dīghāyukā ciraṭṭhitikā sukhabahulā’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā devā dīghāyukā ciraṭṭhitikā sukhabahulā’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā viññāṇañcāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati. Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa sutaṁ hoti— ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā devā …pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagā devā dīghāyukā ciraṭṭhitikā sukhabahulāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Tassa te saṅkhārā ca vihārā ca evaṁ bhāvitā evaṁ bahulīkatā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattanti. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā tatrupapattiyā saṁvattati.
[¶14] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. They think: ‘If only I might realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with my own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements!’ They realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. And, mendicants, that mendicant is not reborn anywhere.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saddhāya samannāgato hoti, sīlena … sutena … cāgena … paññāya samannāgato hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihareyyan’ti. So āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na katthaci upapajjatī”ti.
[¶15] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶16] > Pali: Saṅkhārupapattisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶17] > Pali: Anupadavaggo niṭṭhito dutiyo.
[¶18] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶19] > Pali: Anupada sodhana porisadhammo,
Sevitabba bahudhātu vibhatti;
Buddhassa kittināma cattārīsena,
Ānāpāno kāyagato upapatti.
## 133. MN 121 · The Shorter Discourse on Emptiness
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/133/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/133/#p-N
[¶0] MN 121 · The Shorter Discourse on Emptiness
> Pali: MN 121 · Cūḷasuññatasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde.
[¶2] Then in the late afternoon, Venerable Ānanda came out of retreat and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Sir, this one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans where they have a town named Townsville. There I heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Ānanda, these days I usually practice the meditation on emptiness.’ I trust I properly heard, learned, applied the mind, and remembered that from the Buddha?”
> Pali: “Ekamidaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati nagarakaṁ nāma sakyānaṁ nigamo. Tattha me, bhante, bhagavato sammukhā sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘suññatāvihārenāhaṁ, ānanda, etarahi bahulaṁ viharāmī’ti. Kacci metaṁ, bhante, sussutaṁ suggahitaṁ sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritan”ti?
[¶4] “Indeed, Ānanda, you properly heard, learned, applied the mind, and remembered that. Now, as before, I usually practice the meditation on emptiness.
> Pali: “Taggha te etaṁ, ānanda, sussutaṁ suggahitaṁ sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ. Pubbepāhaṁ, ānanda, etarahipi suññatāvihārena bahulaṁ viharāmi.
[¶5] Consider this stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother. It’s empty of elephants, cows, horses, and mares; of gold and silver; and of gatherings of men and women. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely, the oneness dependent on the mendicant Saṅgha. In the same way, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of the village and the perception of people—focuses on the oneness dependent on the perception of wilderness. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that perception of wilderness. They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the perception of village or the perception of people. There is only this modicum of stress, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of wilderness.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of the village. It is empty of the perception of people. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of wilderness.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, and pure.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, ānanda, ayaṁ migāramātupāsādo suñño hatthigavassavaḷavena, suñño jātarūparajatena, suñño itthipurisasannipātena atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṭicca ekattaṁ; evameva kho, ānanda, bhikkhu amanasikaritvā gāmasaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā manussasaññaṁ, araññasaññaṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa araññasaññāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā gāmasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā manussasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— araññasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ gāmasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ manussasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— araññasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶6] Furthermore, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of people and the perception of wilderness—focuses on the oneness dependent on the perception of earth. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that perception of earth. As a bull’s hide is rid of folds when fully stretched out by a hundred pegs, so too, ignoring the hilly terrain, inaccessible riverlands, stumps and thorns, and rugged mountains, they focus on the oneness dependent on the perception of earth. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that perception of earth. They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the perception of people or the perception of wilderness. There is only this modicum of stress, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of earth.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of people. It is empty of the perception of wilderness. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of earth.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, and pure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu amanasikaritvā manussasaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā araññasaññaṁ, pathavīsaññaṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa pathavīsaññāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, āsabhacammaṁ saṅkusatena suvihataṁ vigatavalikaṁ; evameva kho, ānanda, bhikkhu yaṁ imissā pathaviyā ukkūlavikkūlaṁ nadīviduggaṁ khāṇukaṇṭakaṭṭhānaṁ pabbatavisamaṁ taṁ sabbaṁ amanasikaritvā pathavīsaññaṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa pathavīsaññāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā manussasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā araññasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— pathavīsaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ manussasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ araññasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— pathavīsaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶7] Furthermore, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of wilderness and the perception of earth—focuses on the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of infinite space. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that perception of the dimension of infinite space. They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the perception of wilderness or the perception of earth. There is only this modicum of stress, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of infinite space.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of wilderness. It is empty of the perception of earth. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of infinite space.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, and pure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu amanasikaritvā araññasaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā pathavīsaññaṁ, ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā araññasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā pathavīsaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ araññasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ pathavīsaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶8] Furthermore, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of earth and the perception of the dimension of infinite space—focuses on the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness. They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the perception of earth or the perception of the dimension of infinite space. There is only this modicum of stress, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of earth. It is empty of the perception of the dimension of infinite space. There is only this modicum of stress, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, and pure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu amanasikaritvā pathavīsaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṁ, viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa viññāṇañcāyatanasaññāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā pathavīsaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ pathavīsaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶9] Furthermore, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of the dimension of infinite space and the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness—focuses on the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of nothingness. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that perception of the dimension of nothingness. They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the perception of the dimension of infinite space or the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness. There is only this modicum of stress, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of nothingness.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of the dimension of infinite space. It is empty of the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of nothingness.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, and pure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu amanasikaritvā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṁ, ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa ākiñcaññāyatanasaññāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ viññāṇañcāyatanasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶10] Furthermore, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness and the perception of the dimension of nothingness—focuses on the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness or the perception of the dimension of nothingness. There is only this modicum of stress, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness. It is empty of the perception of the dimension of nothingness. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely the oneness dependent on the perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, and pure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda bhikkhu amanasikaritvā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ viññāṇañcāyatanasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ ākiñcaññāyatanasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca ekattan’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶11] Furthermore, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of the dimension of nothingness and the perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception—focuses on the oneness dependent on the signless immersion of the heart. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that signless immersion of the heart. They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the perception of the dimension of nothingness or the perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. There is only this modicum of stress, namely that related to the six sense fields dependent on this body and conditioned by life.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of the dimension of nothingness. It is empty of the perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely that related to the six sense fields dependent on this body and conditioned by life.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, and pure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu amanasikaritvā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṁ, animittaṁ cetosamādhiṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa animitte cetosamādhimhi cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— imameva kāyaṁ paṭicca saḷāyatanikaṁ jīvitapaccayā’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ ākiñcaññāyatanasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññāyā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— imameva kāyaṁ paṭicca saḷāyatanikaṁ jīvitapaccayā’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶12] Furthermore, a mendicant—ignoring the perception of the dimension of nothingness and the perception of the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception—focuses on the oneness dependent on the signless immersion of the heart. Their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided in that signless immersion of the heart. They understand: ‘Even this signless immersion of the heart is produced by choices and intentions.’ They understand: ‘But whatever is produced by choices and intentions is impermanent and liable to cessation.’ Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu amanasikaritvā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṁ, amanasikaritvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṁ, animittaṁ cetosamādhiṁ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattaṁ. Tassa animitte cetosamādhimhi cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati adhimuccati. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ayampi kho animitto cetosamādhi abhisaṅkhato abhisañcetayito’. ‘Yaṁ kho pana kiñci abhisaṅkhataṁ abhisañcetayitaṁ tadaniccaṁ nirodhadhamman’ti pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶13] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶14] They understand: ‘Here there is no stress due to the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, or ignorance. There is only this modicum of stress, namely that related to the six sense fields dependent on this body and conditioned by life.’ They understand: ‘This field of perception is empty of the perception of the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. There is only this that is not emptiness, namely that related to the six sense fields dependent on this body and conditioned by life.’ And so they regard it as empty of what is not there, but as to what remains they understand that it is present. That’s how emptiness manifests in them—genuine, undistorted, pure, and supreme.
> Pali: So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ye assu darathā kāmāsavaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā bhavāsavaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, ye assu darathā avijjāsavaṁ paṭicca tedha na santi, atthi cevāyaṁ darathamattā yadidaṁ— imameva kāyaṁ paṭicca saḷāyatanikaṁ jīvitapaccayā’ti. So ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ kāmāsavenā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ bhavāsavenā’ti pajānāti, ‘suññamidaṁ saññāgataṁ avijjāsavenā’ti pajānāti, ‘atthi cevidaṁ asuññataṁ yadidaṁ— imameva kāyaṁ paṭicca saḷāyatanikaṁ jīvitapaccayā’ti. Iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti tena taṁ suññaṁ samanupassati, yaṁ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṁ hoti taṁ ‘santamidaṁ atthī’ti pajānāti. Evampissa esā, ānanda, yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā paramānuttarā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.
[¶15] Whatever ascetics and brahmins enter and remain in the pure, ultimate, supreme emptiness—whether in the past, future, or present—all of them enter and remain in this same pure, ultimate, supreme emptiness. So, Ānanda, you should train like this: ‘We will enter and remain in the pure, ultimate, supreme emptiness.’ That’s how you should train.”
> Pali: Yepi hi keci, ānanda, atītamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā parisuddhaṁ paramānuttaraṁ suññataṁ upasampajja vihariṁsu, sabbe te imaṁyeva parisuddhaṁ paramānuttaraṁ suññataṁ upasampajja vihariṁsu. Yepi hi keci, ānanda, anāgatamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā parisuddhaṁ paramānuttaraṁ suññataṁ upasampajja viharissanti, sabbe te imaṁyeva parisuddhaṁ paramānuttaraṁ suññataṁ upasampajja viharissanti. Yepi hi keci, ānanda, etarahi samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā parisuddhaṁ paramānuttaraṁ suññataṁ upasampajja viharanti, sabbe te imaṁyeva parisuddhaṁ paramānuttaraṁ suññataṁ upasampajja viharanti. Tasmātiha, ānanda, ‘parisuddhaṁ paramānuttaraṁ suññataṁ upasampajja viharissāmā’ti— evañhi vo, ānanda, sikkhitabban”ti.
[¶16] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶17] > Pali: Cūḷasuññatasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 134. MN 122 · The Longer Discourse on Emptiness
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/134/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/134/#p-N
[¶0] MN 122 · The Longer Discourse on Emptiness
> Pali: MN 122 · Mahāsuññatasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, near Kapilavatthu in the Banyan Tree Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ nigrodhārāme.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Kapilavatthu for alms. He wandered for alms in Kapilavatthu. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to the lodge of the Sakyan Khemaka the Dark for the day’s meditation.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya kapilavatthuṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Kapilavatthusmiṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena kāḷakhemakassa sakkassa vihāro tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya.
[¶3] Now at that time many resting places had been spread out at the lodge of Khemaka the Dark. The Buddha saw this, and wondered, “Many resting places have been spread out; are there many mendicants living here?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kāḷakhemakassa sakkassa vihāre sambahulāni senāsanāni paññattāni honti. Addasā kho bhagavā kāḷakhemakassa sakkassa vihāre sambahulāni senāsanāni paññattāni. Disvāna bhagavato etadahosi: “sambahulāni kho kāḷakhemakassa sakkassa vihāre senāsanāni paññattāni. Sambahulā nu kho idha bhikkhū viharantī”ti.
[¶4] Now at that time Venerable Ānanda, together with many other mendicants, was making robes at the lodge of the Sakyan Ghaṭā. Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat and went to Ghaṭā’s lodge, where he sat down on the seat spread out and said to Venerable Ānanda, “Many resting places have been spread out at the lodge of Khemaka the Dark; are many mendicants living there?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ānando sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ ghaṭāya sakkassa vihāre cīvarakammaṁ karoti. Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena ghaṭāya sakkassa vihāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “sambahulāni kho, ānanda, kāḷakhemakassa sakkassa vihāre senāsanāni paññattāni. Sambahulā nu kho ettha bhikkhū viharantī”ti?
[¶5] > Pali: “Sambahulāni, bhante, kāḷakhemakassa sakkassa vihāre senāsanāni paññattāni.
[¶6] “Indeed there are, sir. It’s currently the time for making robes.”
> Pali: Sambahulā bhikkhū ettha viharanti. Cīvarakārasamayo no, bhante, vattatī”ti.
[¶7] “Ānanda, a mendicant doesn’t shine who enjoys company and groups, who loves them and likes to enjoy them. It is quite impossible that such a mendicant will get the pleasure of renunciation, the pleasure of seclusion, the pleasure of peace, the pleasure of awakening when they want, without trouble or difficulty. But you should expect that a mendicant who lives alone, withdrawn from the group, will get the pleasure of renunciation, the pleasure of seclusion, the pleasure of peace, the pleasure of awakening when they want, without trouble or difficulty. That is possible.
> Pali: “Na kho, ānanda, bhikkhu sobhati saṅgaṇikārāmo saṅgaṇikarato saṅgaṇikārāmataṁ anuyutto gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇasammudito. So vatānanda, bhikkhu saṅgaṇikārāmo saṅgaṇikarato saṅgaṇikārāmataṁ anuyutto gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇasammudito yaṁ taṁ nekkhammasukhaṁ pavivekasukhaṁ upasamasukhaṁ sambodhisukhaṁ tassa sukhassa nikāmalābhī bhavissati akicchalābhī akasiralābhīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Yo ca kho so, ānanda, bhikkhu eko gaṇasmā vūpakaṭṭho viharati tassetaṁ bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṁ yaṁ taṁ nekkhammasukhaṁ pavivekasukhaṁ upasamasukhaṁ sambodhisukhaṁ tassa sukhassa nikāmalābhī bhavissati akicchalābhī akasiralābhīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶8] Indeed, Ānanda, it is quite impossible that a mendicant who enjoys company will enter and remain in the freedom of heart—either that which is temporary and pleasant, or that which is irreversible and unshakable. But it is possible that a mendicant who lives alone, withdrawn from the group will enter and remain in the freedom of heart—either that which is temporary and pleasant, or that which is irreversible and unshakable.
> Pali: So vatānanda, bhikkhu saṅgaṇikārāmo saṅgaṇikarato saṅgaṇikārāmataṁ anuyutto gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇasammudito sāmāyikaṁ vā kantaṁ cetovimuttiṁ upasampajja viharissati asāmāyikaṁ vā akuppanti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Yo ca kho so, ānanda, bhikkhu eko gaṇasmā vūpakaṭṭho viharati tassetaṁ bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṁ sāmāyikaṁ vā kantaṁ cetovimuttiṁ upasampajja viharissati asāmāyikaṁ vā akuppanti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶9] Ānanda, I do not see even a single sight which, with its decay and perishing, would not give rise to sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress in someone who has desire and lust for it.
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, ānanda, ekaṁ rūpampi samanupassāmi yattha rattassa yathābhiratassa rūpassa vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā na uppajjeyyuṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassūpāyāsā.
[¶10] But this meditation has been understood by the Realized One, namely to enter and remain in emptiness internally by not focusing on any signs. Now, suppose that while the Realized One is practicing this meditation, monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, rulers and their chief ministers, monastics of other religions and their disciples go to visit him. In that case, with a mind slanting, sloping, and inclining to seclusion, withdrawn, and loving renunciation, having totally eliminated defiling influences, he invariably gives a talk concerned only with sending them away.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho panānanda, vihāro tathāgatena abhisambuddho yadidaṁ— sabbanimittānaṁ amanasikārā ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ upasampajja viharituṁ. Tatra ce, ānanda, tathāgataṁ iminā vihārena viharantaṁ bhavanti upasaṅkamitāro bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo rājāno rājamahāmattā titthiyā titthiyasāvakā. Tatrānanda, tathāgato vivekaninneneva cittena vivekapoṇena vivekapabbhārena vūpakaṭṭhena nekkhammābhiratena byantībhūtena sabbaso āsavaṭṭhānīyehi dhammehi aññadatthu uyyojanikapaṭisaṁyuttaṁyeva kathaṁ kattā hoti.
[¶11] Therefore, if a mendicant should wish, ‘May I enter and remain in emptiness internally!’ then they should still, settle, unify, and immerse their mind in samādhi internally.
> Pali: Tasmātihānanda, bhikkhu cepi ākaṅkheyya: ‘ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ upasampajja vihareyyan’ti, tenānanda, bhikkhunā ajjhattameva cittaṁ saṇṭhapetabbaṁ sannisādetabbaṁ ekodi kātabbaṁ samādahātabbaṁ.
[¶12] And how does a mendicant still, settle, unify, and immerse their mind in samādhi internally?
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, bhikkhu ajjhattameva cittaṁ saṇṭhapeti sannisādeti ekodiṁ karoti samādahati?
[¶13] It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. That’s how a mendicant stills, settles, unifies, and immerses their mind in samādhi internally.
> Pali: Idhānanda, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, bhikkhu ajjhattameva cittaṁ saṇṭhapeti sannisādeti ekodiṁ karoti samādahati.
[¶14] They focus on emptiness internally, but their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided. In that case, they understand: ‘I am focusing on emptiness internally, but my mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. They focus on emptiness externally … They focus on emptiness internally and externally … They focus on the imperturbable, but their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided. In that case, they understand: ‘I am focusing on the imperturbable internally, but my mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided.’ In this way they are aware of the situation.
> Pali: So ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ manasi karoti. Tassa ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ manasikaroto suññatāya cittaṁ na pakkhandati nappasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Evaṁ santametaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ kho me manasikaroto ajjhattaṁ suññatāya cittaṁ na pakkhandati nappasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccatī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. So bahiddhā suññataṁ manasi karoti …pe… so ajjhattabahiddhā suññataṁ manasi karoti …pe… so āneñjaṁ manasi karoti. Tassa āneñjaṁ manasikaroto āneñjāya cittaṁ na pakkhandati nappasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Evaṁ santametaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘āneñjaṁ kho me manasikaroto āneñjāya cittaṁ na pakkhandati nappasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccatī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
[¶15] Then that mendicant should still, settle, unify, and immerse their mind in samādhi internally in the same meditation subject as a basis of immersion as before. They focus on emptiness internally, and their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided. In that case, they understand: ‘I am focusing on emptiness internally, and my mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. They focus on emptiness externally … They focus on emptiness internally and externally … They focus on the imperturbable, and their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided. In that case, they understand: ‘I am focusing on the imperturbable, and my mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided.’ In this way they are aware of the situation.
> Pali: Tenānanda, bhikkhunā tasmiṁyeva purimasmiṁ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṁ saṇṭhapetabbaṁ sannisādetabbaṁ ekodi kātabbaṁ samādahātabbaṁ. So ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ manasi karoti. Tassa ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ manasikaroto ajjhattaṁ suññatāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Evaṁ santametaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ kho me manasikaroto ajjhattaṁ suññatāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccatī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. So bahiddhā suññataṁ manasi karoti …pe… so ajjhattabahiddhā suññataṁ manasi karoti …pe… so āneñjaṁ manasi karoti. Tassa āneñjaṁ manasikaroto āneñjāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Evaṁ santametaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘āneñjaṁ kho me manasikaroto āneñjāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccatī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
[¶16] While a mendicant is practicing such a meditation, if their mind inclines to walking, they walk, thinking: ‘While I’m walking, bad, unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure will not overwhelm me.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. While a mendicant is practicing such a meditation, if their mind inclines to standing, they stand, thinking: ‘While I’m standing, bad, unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure will not overwhelm me.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. While a mendicant is practicing such a meditation, if their mind inclines to sitting, they sit, thinking: ‘While I’m sitting, bad, unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure will not overwhelm me.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. While a mendicant is practicing such a meditation, if their mind inclines to lying down, they lie down, thinking: ‘While I’m lying down, bad, unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure will not overwhelm me.’ In this way they are aware of the situation.
> Pali: Tassa ce, ānanda, bhikkhuno iminā vihārena viharato caṅkamāya cittaṁ namati, so caṅkamati: ‘evaṁ maṁ caṅkamantaṁ nābhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Tassa ce, ānanda, bhikkhuno iminā vihārena viharato ṭhānāya cittaṁ namati, so tiṭṭhati: ‘evaṁ maṁ ṭhitaṁ nābhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Tassa ce, ānanda, bhikkhuno iminā vihārena viharato nisajjāya cittaṁ namati, so nisīdati: ‘evaṁ maṁ nisinnaṁ nābhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Tassa ce, ānanda, bhikkhuno iminā vihārena viharato sayanāya cittaṁ namati, so sayati: ‘evaṁ maṁ sayantaṁ nābhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssavissantī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
[¶17] While a mendicant is practicing such a meditation, if their mind inclines to talking, they think: ‘I will not engage in the kind of speech that is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. Such speech doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. Namely: talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that state of existence.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. ‘But I will take part in talk about self-effacement that helps open the heart and leads solely to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That is, talk about fewness of wishes, contentment, seclusion, aloofness, arousing energy, ethics, immersion, wisdom, freedom, and the knowledge and vision of freedom.’ In this way they are aware of the situation.
> Pali: Tassa ce, ānanda, bhikkhuno iminā vihārena viharato kathāya cittaṁ namati, so: ‘yāyaṁ kathā hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasaṁhitā na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, seyyathidaṁ—rājakathā corakathā mahāmattakathā senākathā bhayakathā yuddhakathā annakathā pānakathā vatthakathā sayanakathā mālākathā gandhakathā ñātikathā yānakathā gāmakathā nigamakathā nagarakathā janapadakathā itthikathā surākathā visikhākathā kumbhaṭṭhānakathā pubbapetakathā nānattakathā lokakkhāyikā samuddakkhāyikā itibhavābhavakathā iti vā iti—evarūpiṁ kathaṁ na kathessāmī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Yā ca kho ayaṁ, ānanda, kathā abhisallekhikā cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati, seyyathidaṁ—appicchakathā santuṭṭhikathā pavivekakathā asaṁsaggakathā vīriyārambhakathā sīlakathā samādhikathā paññākathā vimuttikathā vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā iti: ‘evarūpiṁ kathaṁ kathessāmī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
[¶18] While a mendicant is practicing such a meditation, if their mind inclines to thinking, they think: ‘I will not think the kind of thought that is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. Such thoughts don’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That is, sensual, malicious, or cruel thoughts.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. ‘But I will think the kind of thought that is noble and emancipating, and brings one who practices it to the complete ending of suffering. That is, thoughts of renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.’ In this way they are aware of the situation.
> Pali: Tassa ce, ānanda, bhikkhuno iminā vihārena viharato vitakkāya cittaṁ namati, so: ‘ye te vitakkā hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasaṁhitā na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattanti, seyyathidaṁ—kāmavitakko byāpādavitakko vihiṁsāvitakko iti evarūpe vitakke na vitakkessāmī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Ye ca kho ime, ānanda, vitakkā ariyā niyyānikā niyyanti takkarassa sammādukkhakkhayāya, seyyathidaṁ—nekkhammavitakko abyāpādavitakko avihiṁsāvitakko iti: ‘evarūpe vitakke vitakkessāmī’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
[¶19] There are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Pañca kho ime, ānanda, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā … ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, ānanda, pañca kāmaguṇā.
[¶20] So a mendicant should regularly check their own mind: ‘Does my mind take an interest in any of these five kinds of sensual stimulation?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows this: ‘My mind does take an interest.’ In that case, they understand: ‘I have not given up desire and greed for the five kinds of sensual stimulation.’ In this way they are aware of the situation. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows this: ‘My mind does not take an interest.’ In that case, they understand: ‘I have given up desire and greed for the five kinds of sensual stimulation.’ In this way they are aware of the situation.
> Pali: Yattha bhikkhunā abhikkhaṇaṁ sakaṁ cittaṁ paccavekkhitabbaṁ: ‘atthi nu kho me imesu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu aññatarasmiṁ vā aññatarasmiṁ vā āyatane uppajjati cetaso samudācāro’ti? Sace, ānanda, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ pajānāti: ‘atthi kho me imesu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu aññatarasmiṁ vā aññatarasmiṁ vā āyatane uppajjati cetaso samudācāro’ti, evaṁ santametaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yo kho imesu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo so me nappahīno’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Sace panānanda, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ pajānāti: ‘natthi kho me imesu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu aññatarasmiṁ vā aññatarasmiṁ vā āyatane uppajjati cetaso samudācāro’ti, evaṁ santametaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yo kho imesu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo so me pahīno’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
[¶21] A mendicant should meditate observing rise and fall in these five grasping aggregates: ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form. Such is feeling … Such is perception … Such are choices … Such is consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’
> Pali: Pañca kho ime, ānanda, upādānakkhandhā yattha bhikkhunā udayabbayānupassinā vihātabbaṁ: ‘iti rūpaṁ iti rūpassa samudayo iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo, iti vedanā … iti saññā … iti saṅkhārā … iti viññāṇaṁ iti viññāṇassa samudayo iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo’ti.
[¶22] As they do so, they give up the conceit ‘I am’ regarding the five grasping aggregates. In that case, they understand: ‘I have given up the conceit “I am” regarding the five grasping aggregates.’ In this way they are aware of the situation.
> Pali: Tassa imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu udayabbayānupassino viharato yo pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu asmimāno so pahīyati. Evaṁ santametaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhu evaṁ pajānāti: ‘yo kho imesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu asmimāno so me pahīno’ti. Itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
[¶23] These principles are entirely skillful, with skillful outcomes; they are noble, transcendent, and inaccessible to the Wicked One.
> Pali: Ime kho te, ānanda, dhammā ekantakusalā kusalāyātikā ariyā lokuttarā anavakkantā pāpimatā.
[¶24] What do you think, Ānanda? For what reason would a disciple deem it worthwhile to follow the Teacher, even if driven away?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ānanda, kaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno arahati sāvako satthāraṁ anubandhituṁ api paṇujjamāno”ti?
[¶25] “Our teachings are rooted in the Buddha. He is our guide and our refuge. Sir, may the Buddha himself please clarify the meaning of this. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Bhagavaṁmūlakā no, bhante, dhammā bhagavaṁnettikā bhagavaṁpaṭisaraṇā. Sādhu vata, bhante, bhagavantaṁyeva paṭibhātu etassa bhāsitassa attho. Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶26] “A disciple would not deem it worthwhile to follow the Teacher for the sake of this, namely statements, mixed prose & verse, or discussions. Why is that? Because for a long time you have learned the teachings, remembering them, rehearsing them, mentally scrutinizing them, and penetrating them theoretically. But a disciple would deem it worthwhile to follow the Teacher, even if driven away, for the sake of talk about self-effacement that helps open the heart and leads solely to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That is, talk about fewness of wishes, contentment, seclusion, aloofness, arousing energy, ethics, immersion, wisdom, freedom, and the knowledge and vision of freedom.
> Pali: “Na kho, ānanda, arahati sāvako satthāraṁ anubandhituṁ, yadidaṁ suttaṁ geyyaṁ veyyākaraṇaṁ tassa hetu. Taṁ kissa hetu? Dīgharattassa hi te, ānanda, dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā. Yā ca kho ayaṁ, ānanda, kathā abhisallekhikā cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati, seyyathidaṁ—appicchakathā santuṭṭhikathā pavivekakathā asaṁsaggakathā vīriyārambhakathā sīlakathā samādhikathā paññākathā vimuttikathā vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā—evarūpiyā kho, ānanda, kathāya hetu arahati sāvako satthāraṁ anubandhituṁ api paṇujjamāno.
[¶27] This being so, Ānanda, there is a peril for the tutor, a peril for the pupil, and a peril for a spiritual practitioner.
> Pali: Evaṁ sante kho, ānanda, ācariyūpaddavo hoti, evaṁ sante antevāsūpaddavo hoti, evaṁ sante brahmacārūpaddavo hoti.
[¶28] And how is there a peril for the tutor? It’s when some teacher frequents a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. While meditating withdrawn, they’re visited by a stream of brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. When this happens, they enjoy infatuation, fall into greed, and return to indulgence. This is said to be the tutor’s peril. They’re ruined by bad, unskillful qualities that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. That’s how there is a peril for the tutor.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, ācariyūpaddavo hoti? Idhānanda, ekacco satthā vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Tassa tathāvūpakaṭṭhassa viharato anvāvattanti brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. So anvāvattantesu brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca mucchaṁ nikāmayati, gedhaṁ āpajjati, āvattati bāhullāya. Ayaṁ vuccatānanda, upaddavo ācariyo. Ācariyūpaddavena avadhiṁsu naṁ pāpakā akusalā dhammā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, ācariyūpaddavo hoti.
[¶29] And how is there a peril for the pupil? It’s when the disciple of a teacher, emulating their teacher’s fostering of seclusion, frequents a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. While meditating withdrawn, they’re visited by a stream of brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. When this happens, they enjoy infatuation, fall into greed, and return to indulgence. This is said to be the pupil’s peril. They’re ruined by bad, unskillful qualities that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. That’s how there is a peril for the pupil.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, antevāsūpaddavo hoti? Tasseva kho panānanda, satthu sāvako tassa satthu vivekamanubrūhayamāno vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Tassa tathāvūpakaṭṭhassa viharato anvāvattanti brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. So anvāvattantesu brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca mucchaṁ nikāmayati, gedhaṁ āpajjati, āvattati bāhullāya. Ayaṁ vuccatānanda, upaddavo antevāsī. Antevāsūpaddavena avadhiṁsu naṁ pāpakā akusalā dhammā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, antevāsūpaddavo hoti.
[¶30] And how is there a peril for a spiritual practitioner? It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He frequents a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. While meditating withdrawn, he’s visited by a stream of brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. When this happens, he doesn’t enjoy infatuation, fall into greed, and return to indulgence. But a disciple of this teacher, emulating their teacher’s fostering of seclusion, frequents a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. While meditating withdrawn, they’re visited by a stream of brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. When this happens, they enjoy infatuation, fall into greed, and return to indulgence. This is said to be the spiritual practitioner’s peril. They’re ruined by bad, unskillful qualities that are corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. That’s how there is a peril for the spiritual practitioner.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, brahmacārūpaddavo hoti? Idhānanda, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Tassa tathāvūpakaṭṭhassa viharato anvāvattanti brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. So anvāvattantesu brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca na mucchaṁ nikāmayati, na gedhaṁ āpajjati, na āvattati bāhullāya. Tasseva kho panānanda, satthu sāvako tassa satthu vivekamanubrūhayamāno vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. Tassa tathāvūpakaṭṭhassa viharato anvāvattanti brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. So anvāvattantesu brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva jānapadesu ca mucchaṁ nikāmayati, gedhaṁ āpajjati, āvattati bāhullāya. Ayaṁ vuccatānanda, upaddavo brahmacārī. Brahmacārūpaddavena avadhiṁsu naṁ pāpakā akusalā dhammā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, brahmacārūpaddavo hoti.
[¶31] And in this context, Ānanda, as compared to the peril of the tutor or the pupil, the peril of the spiritual practitioner has more painful, bitter results, and even leads to the underworld.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yo cevāyaṁ ācariyūpaddavo, yo ca antevāsūpaddavo ayaṁ tehi brahmacārūpaddavo dukkhavipākataro ceva kaṭukavipākataro ca, api ca vinipātāya saṁvattati.
[¶32] So, Ānanda, treat me as a friend, not as an enemy. That will be for your lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: Tasmātiha maṁ, ānanda, mittavatāya samudācaratha, mā sapattavatāya. Taṁ vo bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya.
[¶33] And how do disciples treat their Teacher as an enemy, not a friend? It’s when the Teacher teaches Dhamma to his disciples out of kindness and sympathy: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ But their disciples don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They proceed having turned away from the Teacher’s instruction. That’s how the disciples treat their Teacher as an enemy, not a friend.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, satthāraṁ sāvakā sapattavatāya samudācaranti, no mittavatāya? Idhānanda, satthā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṁ upādāya: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṁ odahanti, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, satthāraṁ sāvakā sapattavatāya samudācaranti, no mittavatāya.
[¶34] And how do disciples treat their Teacher as a friend, not an enemy? It’s when the Teacher teaches Dhamma to his disciples out of kindness and sympathy: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ And their disciples want to listen. They actively listen and try to understand. They don’t proceed having turned away from the Teacher’s instruction. That’s how the disciples treat their Teacher as a friend, not an enemy.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, satthāraṁ sāvakā mittavatāya samudācaranti, no sapattavatāya? Idhānanda, satthā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṁ upādāya: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā sussūsanti, sotaṁ odahanti, aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, satthāraṁ sāvakā mittavatāya samudācaranti, no sapattavatāya.
[¶35] So, Ānanda, treat me as a friend, not as an enemy. That will be for your lasting welfare and happiness. I shall not mollycoddle you like a potter with their damp, unfired pots. I shall speak, curbing you again and again, pressing you again and again. The core will stand the test.”
> Pali: Tasmātiha maṁ, ānanda, mittavatāya samudācaratha, mā sapattavatāya. Taṁ vo bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. Na vo ahaṁ, ānanda, tathā parakkamissāmi yathā kumbhakāro āmake āmakamatte. Niggayha niggayhāhaṁ, ānanda, vakkhāmi; pavayha pavayha, ānanda, vakkhāmi. Yo sāro so ṭhassatī”ti.
[¶36] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶37] > Pali: Mahāsuññatasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 135. MN 123 · Incredible and Amazing
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/135/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/135/#p-N
[¶0] MN 123 · Incredible and Amazing
> Pali: MN 123 · Acchariyaabbhutasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then after the meal, on return from almsround, several mendicants sat together in the assembly hall and this discussion came up among them:
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantānaṁ upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayamantarākathā udapādi:
[¶3] “It’s incredible, reverends, it’s amazing! The Realized One has such psychic power and might! For he is able to know the Buddhas of the past who have become completely quenched, cut off proliferation, cut off the course, finished off the cycle, and passed beyond all suffering: ‘Such is the birth, names, clans, conduct, teachings, wisdom, meditation, and freedom of those Blessed Ones.’
> Pali: “acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso. Tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā, yatra hi nāma tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jānissati: ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi, ‘evaṁnāmā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi, ‘evaṅgottā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi, ‘evaṁsīlā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi, ‘evaṁdhammā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi, ‘evaṁpaññā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi, ‘evaṁvihārī te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi, ‘evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipī”ti.
[¶4] When they said this, Venerable Ānanda said, “The Realized Ones are incredible, reverends, and they have incredible qualities. They’re amazing, and they have amazing qualities.” But this conversation among those mendicants was left unfinished.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando te bhikkhū etadavoca: “acchariyā ceva, āvuso, tathāgatā acchariyadhammasamannāgatā ca; abbhutā ceva, āvuso, tathāgatā abbhutadhammasamannāgatā cā”ti. Ayañca hidaṁ tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ antarākathā vippakatā hoti.
[¶5] Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat, went to the assembly hall, sat down on the seat spread out, and addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenupaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶6] So the mendicants told him what they had been talking about. The Buddha said, “Well then, Ānanda, say some more about the incredible and amazing qualities of the Realized One.”
> Pali: “Idha, bhante, amhākaṁ pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantānaṁ upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayamantarākathā udapādi: ‘acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso, tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā, yatra hi nāma tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jānissati— evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā … evaṅgottā … evaṁsīlā … evaṁdhammā … evaṁpaññā … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’ti. Evaṁ vutte, bhante, āyasmā ānando amhe etadavoca: ‘acchariyā ceva, āvuso, tathāgatā acchariyadhammasamannāgatā ca; abbhutā ceva, āvuso, tathāgatā abbhutadhammasamannāgatā cā’ti. Ayaṁ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā; atha bhagavā anuppatto”ti. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “tasmātiha taṁ, ānanda, bhiyyoso mattāya paṭibhantu tathāgatassa acchariyā abbhutadhammā”ti.
[¶7] “Sir, I have heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Mindful and aware, the being intent on awakening was reborn in the host of joyful gods.’ This I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: “Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘sato sampajāno, ānanda, bodhisatto tusitaṁ kāyaṁ upapajjī’ti. Yampi, bhante, sato sampajāno bodhisatto tusitaṁ kāyaṁ upapajji idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶8] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Mindful and aware, the being intent on awakening remained in the host of joyful gods.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘sato sampajāno, ānanda, bodhisatto tusite kāye aṭṭhāsī’ti. Yampi, bhante, sato sampajāno bodhisatto tusite kāye aṭṭhāsi idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶9] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘For the whole of that life, the being intent on awakening remained in the host of joyful gods.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yāvatāyukaṁ, ānanda, bodhisatto tusite kāye aṭṭhāsī’ti. Yampi, bhante, yāvatāyukaṁ bodhisatto tusite kāye aṭṭhāsi idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶10] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Mindful and aware, the being intent on awakening passed away from the host of joyful gods and was conceived in his mother’s womb.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘sato sampajāno, ānanda, bodhisatto tusitā, kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṁ okkamī’ti. Yampi, bhante, sato sampajāno bodhisatto tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṁ okkami idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶11] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening passes away from the host of joyful gods, he is conceived in his mother’s womb. And then—in this world with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. Even in the boundless gloom of interstellar space—so utterly dark that even the luminosity of the moon and the sun, so mighty and powerful, makes no impression—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. And even the sentient beings reborn there recognize each other by that light: “So, it seems other sentient beings have been reborn here!” And this ten-thousandfold galaxy shakes and rocks and trembles. And an immeasurable, magnificent light appears in the world, surpassing the glory of the gods.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṁ okkamati, atha sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yāpi tā lokantarikā aghā asaṁvutā andhakārā andhakāratimisā, yatthapime candimasūriyā evaṁmahiddhikā evaṁmahānubhāvā ābhāya nānubhonti tatthapi appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi tenobhāsena aññamaññaṁ sañjānanti—aññepi kira, bho, santi sattā idhūpapannāti. Ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati appamāṇo ca uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvan’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶12] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, four godlings approach to guard the four quarters, so that no human or non-human or anyone at all shall harm the being intent on awakening or his mother.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, cattāro devaputtā catuddisaṁ ārakkhāya upagacchanti—mā naṁ bodhisattaṁ vā bodhisattamātaraṁ vā manusso vā amanusso vā koci vā viheṭhesī’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶13] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, she becomes naturally ethical. She refrains from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and beer, wine, and liquor intoxicants.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, pakatiyā sīlavatī bodhisattamātā hoti viratā pāṇātipātā viratā adinnādānā viratā kāmesumicchācārā viratā musāvādā viratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶14] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, she no longer thinks of men in a sexual way, and she cannot be violated by a man of lustful intent.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, na bodhisattamātu purisesu mānasaṁ uppajjati kāmaguṇūpasaṁhitaṁ, anatikkamanīyā ca bodhisattamātā hoti kenaci purisena rattacittenā’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶15] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, she obtains the five kinds of sensual stimulation and amuses herself, supplied and provided with them.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, lābhinī bodhisattamātā hoti pañcannaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ. Sā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricāretī’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶16] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, no afflictions beset her. She’s happy and free of bodily fatigue. And she sees the being intent on awakening in her womb, whole in his major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked. And it was strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown. And a person with clear eyes were to take it in their hand and examine it: “This beryl gem is naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked. And it’s strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown.”
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, na bodhisattamātu kocideva ābādho uppajjati; sukhinī bodhisattamātā hoti akilantakāyā; bodhisattañca bodhisattamātā tirokucchigataṁ passati sabbaṅgapaccaṅgaṁ ahīnindriyaṁ. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato. Tatrāssa suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya—ayaṁ kho maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato, tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vāti.
[¶17] In the same way, when the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, no afflictions beset her. She’s happy and free of bodily fatigue. And she sees the being intent on awakening in her womb, whole in his major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Evameva kho, ānanda, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, na bodhisattamātu kocideva ābādho uppajjati; sukhinī bodhisattamātā hoti akilantakāyā; bodhisattañca bodhisattamātā tirokucchigataṁ passati sabbaṅgapaccaṅgaṁ ahīnindriyan’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶18] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Seven days after the being intent on awakening is born, his mother passes away and is reborn in the host of joyful gods.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘sattāhajāte, ānanda, bodhisatte bodhisattamātā kālaṁ karoti, tusitaṁ kāyaṁ upapajjatī’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶19] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Other women carry the infant in the womb for nine or ten months before giving birth. Not so the mother of the being intent on awakening. She gives birth after exactly ten months.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yathā kho panānanda, aññā itthikā nava vā dasa vā māse gabbhaṁ kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyanti, na hevaṁ bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā vijāyati. Daseva māsāni bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyatī’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶20] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Other women give birth while sitting or lying down. Not so the mother of the being intent on awakening. She only gives birth standing up.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yathā kho panānanda, aññā itthikā nisinnā vā nipannā vā vijāyanti, na hevaṁ bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā vijāyati. Ṭhitāva bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā vijāyatī’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶21] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, gods receive him first, then humans.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, devā naṁ paṭhamaṁ paṭiggaṇhanti pacchā manussā’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶22] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, before he reaches the ground, four godlings receive him and place him before his mother, saying: “Rejoice, O Queen! An illustrious son is born to you.”’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, appattova bodhisatto pathaviṁ hoti, cattāro naṁ devaputtā paṭiggahetvā mātu purato ṭhapenti—attamanā, devi, hohi; mahesakkho te putto uppanno’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶23] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, he emerges already clean, unsoiled by waters, mucus, blood, or any other kind of impurity, pure and clean. Suppose a jewel-treasure was placed on a cloth from Kāsi. The jewel would not soil the cloth, nor would the cloth soil the jewel. Why is that? Because of the cleanliness of them both.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, visadova nikkhamati amakkhito udena amakkhito semhena amakkhito ruhirena amakkhito kenaci asucinā suddho visado. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, maṇiratanaṁ kāsike vatthe nikkhittaṁ neva maṇiratanaṁ kāsikaṁ vatthaṁ makkheti nāpi kāsikaṁ vatthaṁ maṇiratanaṁ makkheti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ubhinnaṁ suddhattā.
[¶24] In the same way, when the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, he emerges already clean, unsoiled by waters, mucus, blood, or any other kind of impurity, pure and clean.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Evameva kho, ānanda, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, visadova nikkhamati amakkhito udena amakkhito semhena amakkhito ruhirena amakkhito kenaci asucinā suddho visado’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶25] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, two showers of water appear from the sky, one cool, one warm, for bathing the being intent on awakening and his mother.’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, dve udakassa dhārā antalikkhā pātubhavanti—ekā sītassa, ekā uṇhassa; yena bodhisattassa udakakiccaṁ karonti mātu cā’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶26] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘As soon as he’s born, the being intent on awakening stands firm with his own feet on the ground. Facing north, he takes seven strides with a white parasol held above him, surveys all quarters, and makes this dramatic proclamation: “I am the foremost in the world! I am the eldest in the world! I am the first in the world! This is my last rebirth; now there’ll be no more future lives.”’ This too I remember as an incredible quality of the Buddha.
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi pathaviyaṁ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati, setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne, sabbā ca disā viloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṁ bhāsati—aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremi.
[¶27] I have learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘When the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, then—in this world with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. Even in the boundless gloom of interstellar space—so utterly dark that even the luminosity of the moon and the sun, so mighty and powerful, makes no impression—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. And the sentient beings reborn there recognize each other by that light: “So, it seems other sentient beings have been reborn here!” And this ten-thousandfold galaxy shakes and rocks and trembles. And an immeasurable, magnificent light appears in the world, surpassing the glory of the gods.’ This too I remember as an incredible and amazing quality of the Buddha.”
> Pali: Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā, ānanda, bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, atha sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yāpi tā lokantarikā aghā asaṁvutā andhakārā andhakāratimisā yatthapime candimasūriyā evaṁmahiddhikā evaṁmahānubhāvā ābhāya nānubhonti tatthapi appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā tepi tenobhāsena aññamaññaṁ sañjānanti—aññepi kira, bho, santi sattā idhūpapannāti. Ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati, appamāṇo ca uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvan’ti. Yampi, bhante …pe… idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremī”ti.
[¶28] “Well then, Ānanda, you should also remember this as an incredible and amazing quality of the Realized One. It’s that the Realized One knows feelings as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. He knows perceptions as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. He knows thoughts as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. This too you should remember as an incredible and amazing quality of the Realized One.”
> Pali: “Tasmātiha tvaṁ, ānanda, idampi tathāgatassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārehi. Idhānanda, tathāgatassa viditā vedanā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti; viditā saññā uppajjanti …pe… viditā vitakkā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Idampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶29] “Sir, the Buddha knows feelings as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. He knows perceptions as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. He knows thoughts as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. This too I remember as an incredible and amazing quality of the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Yampi, bhante, bhagavato viditā vedanā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti; viditā saññā … viditā vitakkā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Idampāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremī”ti.
[¶30] That is what Venerable Ānanda said, and the Teacher concurred. Satisfied, those mendicants approved what Venerable Ānanda said.
> Pali: Idamavoca āyasmā ānando. Samanuñño satthā ahosi; attamanā ca te bhikkhū āyasmato ānandassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶31] > Pali: Acchariyaabbhutasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 136. MN 124 · With Bakkula
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/136/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/136/#p-N
[¶0] MN 124 · With Bakkula
> Pali: MN 124 · Bākulasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Bakkula was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā bākulo rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Then the naked ascetic Kassapa, an old friend of Bakkula in the lay life, approached him, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Venerable Bakkula, “Reverend Bakkula, how long has it been since you went forth?”
> Pali: Atha kho acelakassapo āyasmato bākulassa purāṇagihisahāyo yenāyasmā bākulo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā bākulena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho acelakassapo āyasmantaṁ bākulaṁ etadavoca: “Kīvaciraṁ pabbajitosi, āvuso bākulā”ti?
[¶3] “It has been eighty years, reverend.”
> Pali: “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassā”ti.
[¶4] “But in these eighty years, how many times have you had sex?”
> Pali: “Imehi pana te, āvuso bākula, asītiyā vassehi katikkhattuṁ methuno dhammo paṭisevito”ti?
[¶5] “You shouldn’t ask me such a question. Rather, you should ask me this: ‘But in these eighty years, how many times have sensual perceptions ever arisen in you?’”
> Pali: “Na kho maṁ, āvuso kassapa, evaṁ pucchitabbaṁ: ‘imehi pana te, āvuso bākula, asītiyā vassehi katikkhattuṁ methuno dhammo paṭisevito’ti. Evañca kho maṁ, āvuso kassapa, pucchitabbaṁ: ‘imehi pana te, āvuso bākula, asītiyā vassehi katikkhattuṁ kāmasaññā uppannapubbā’”ti?
[¶6] “But in these eighty years, how many times have sensual perceptions ever arisen in you?”
> Pali: (…)
[¶7] “In these eighty years, I don’t recall that any sensual perception has ever arisen in me.”
> Pali: “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi kāmasaññaṁ uppannapubbaṁ”.
[¶8] This we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: “Yampāyasmā bākulo asītiyā vassehi nābhijānāti kāmasaññaṁ uppannapubbaṁ idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema”.
[¶9] “In these eighty years, I don’t recall that any perception of ill will … or cruelty has ever arisen in me.”
> Pali: “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi byāpādasaññaṁ …pe… vihiṁsāsaññaṁ uppannapubbaṁ”.
[¶10] This too we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: “Yampāyasmā bākulo asītiyā vassehi nābhijānāti vihiṁsāsaññaṁ uppannapubbaṁ, idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema”.
[¶11] “In these eighty years, I don’t recall that any thought of sensuality … ill will … or cruelty has ever arisen in me.”
> Pali: “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi kāmavitakkaṁ uppannapubbaṁ”. “Yampāyasmā bākulo asītiyā vassehi nābhijānāti kāmavitakkaṁ uppannapubbaṁ, idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema”. “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi byāpādavitakkaṁ …pe… vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ uppannapubbaṁ”.
[¶12] This too we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: “Yampāyasmā bākulo asītiyā vassehi nābhijānāti vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ uppannapubbaṁ, idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema”.
[¶13] “In these eighty years, I don’t recall accepting a robe from a householder … cutting a robe with a knife … sewing a robe with a needle … dying a robe … sewing a robe during the robe-making ceremony … wandering to look for robe material for my companions in the spiritual life when they are making robes … accepting an invitation … having such a thought: ‘If only someone would invite me!’ … sitting down inside a house … eating inside a house … getting caught up in the features by way of the details of a lady’s appearance … teaching a lady, even so much as a four line verse … going to the nuns’ quarters … teaching the nuns … teaching the trainee nuns … teaching the novice nuns … giving the going forth … giving the ordination … giving dependence … being attended by a novice … bathing in the sauna … bathing with bath powder … looking for a massage from my spiritual companions … being ill, even for as long as it takes to pull a cow’s udder … being presented with medicine, even as much as a bit of yellow myrobalan … leaning on a leaning-board … preparing a cot …”
> Pali: “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi gahapaticīvaraṁ sāditā”. “Yampāyasmā bākulo asītiyā vassehi nābhijānāti gahapaticīvaraṁ sāditā, idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema”. “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi satthena cīvaraṁ chinditā”. “Yampāyasmā bākulo asītiyā vassehi nābhijānāti satthena cīvaraṁ chinditā …pe… dhārema”. “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi sūciyā cīvaraṁ sibbitā …pe… nābhijānāmi rajanena cīvaraṁ rajitā … nābhijānāmi kathine cīvaraṁ sibbitā … nābhijānāmi sabrahmacārīnaṁ cīvarakamme vicāritā … nābhijānāmi nimantanaṁ sāditā … nābhijānāmi evarūpaṁ cittaṁ uppannapubbaṁ: ‘aho vata maṁ koci nimanteyyā’ti … nābhijānāmi antaraghare nisīditā … nābhijānāmi antaraghare bhuñjitā … nābhijānāmi mātugāmassa anubyañjanaso nimittaṁ gahetā … nābhijānāmi mātugāmassa dhammaṁ desitā antamaso catuppadampi gāthaṁ … nābhijānāmi bhikkhunupassayaṁ upasaṅkamitā … nābhijānāmi bhikkhuniyā dhammaṁ desitā … nābhijānāmi sikkhamānāya dhammaṁ desitā … nābhijānāmi sāmaṇeriyā dhammaṁ desitā … nābhijānāmi pabbājetā … nābhijānāmi upasampādetā … nābhijānāmi nissayaṁ dātā … nābhijānāmi sāmaṇeraṁ upaṭṭhāpetā … nābhijānāmi jantāghare nhāyitā … nābhijānāmi cuṇṇena nhāyitā … nābhijānāmi sabrahmacārīgattaparikamme vicāritā … nābhijānāmi ābādhaṁ uppannapubbaṁ, antamaso gaddūhanamattampi … nābhijānāmi bhesajjaṁ upaharitā, antamaso haritakikhaṇḍampi … nābhijānāmi apassenakaṁ apassayitā … nābhijānāmi seyyaṁ kappetā”.
[¶14] This too we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: “Yampāyasmā …pe… dhārema”.
[¶15] “In these eighty years, I don’t recall commencing the rainy season residence within a village.”
> Pali: “Asīti me, āvuso, vassāni pabbajitassa nābhijānāmi gāmantasenāsane vassaṁ upagantā”.
[¶16] This too we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: “Yampāyasmā bākulo asītiyā vassehi nābhijānāti gāmantasenāsane vassaṁ upagantā, idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema”.
[¶17] “Reverend, for seven days I ate the nation’s almsfood as a debtor. Then on the eighth day I became enlightened.”
> Pali: “Sattāhameva kho ahaṁ, āvuso, saraṇo raṭṭhapiṇḍaṁ bhuñjiṁ; atha aṭṭhamiyaṁ aññā udapādi.
[¶18] This too we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: Yampāyasmā bākulo sattāhameva saraṇo raṭṭhapiṇḍaṁ bhuñji; atha aṭṭhamiyaṁ aññā udapādi idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema.
[¶19] “Reverend Bakkula, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in this teaching and training?” And the naked ascetic Kassapa received the going forth, the ordination in this teaching and training.
> Pali: Labheyyāhaṁ, āvuso bākula, imasmiṁ dhammavinaye pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti. Alattha kho acelakassapo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ.
[¶20] Not long after his ordination, Venerable Kassapa, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Acirūpasampanno panāyasmā kassapo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶21] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Kassapa became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā kassapo arahataṁ ahosi.
[¶22] Then some time later Venerable Bakkula, taking a latchkey, went from dwelling to dwelling, saying, “Come forth, venerables, come forth! Today will be my full extinguishment.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā bākulo aparena samayena avāpuraṇaṁ ādāya vihārena vihāraṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: “abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto. Ajja me parinibbānaṁ bhavissatī”ti.
[¶23] This too we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: “Yampāyasmā bākulo avāpuraṇaṁ ādāya vihārena vihāraṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto; ajja me parinibbānaṁ bhavissatī’ti, idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhārema”.
[¶24] And Venerable Bakkula became fully extinguished while seated right in the middle of the Saṅgha.
> Pali: Āyasmā bākulo majjhe bhikkhusaṅghassa nisinnakova parinibbāyi.
[¶25] This too we remember as an incredible and amazing quality of Venerable Bakkula.
> Pali: “Yampāyasmā bākulo majjhe bhikkhusaṅghassa nisinnakova parinibbāyi, idampi mayaṁ āyasmato bākulassa acchariyaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ dhāremā”ti.
[¶26] > Pali: Bākulasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 137. MN 125 · The Level of the Tamed
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/137/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/137/#p-N
[¶0] MN 125 · The Level of the Tamed
> Pali: MN 125 · Dantabhūmisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Now at that time the novice Aciravata was staying in a wilderness hut. Then as Prince Jayasena was going for a walk he approached Aciravata, and exchanged greetings with him.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena aciravato samaṇuddeso araññakuṭikāyaṁ viharati. Atha kho jayaseno rājakumāro jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yena aciravato samaṇuddeso tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā aciravatena samaṇuddesena saddhiṁ sammodi.
[¶3] When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Aciravata, “Worthy Aggivessana, I have heard that a mendicant who meditates diligently, keenly, and resolutely can experience unification of mind.”
> Pali: Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jayaseno rājakumāro aciravataṁ samaṇuddesaṁ etadavoca: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bho aggivessana: ‘idha bhikkhu appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto phuseyya cittassa ekaggatan’”ti.
[¶4] “That’s so true, Prince! That’s so true! A mendicant who meditates diligently, keenly, and resolutely can experience unification of mind.”
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, rājakumāra, evametaṁ, rājakumāra. Idha bhikkhu appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto phuseyya cittassa ekaggatan”ti.
[¶5] “Worthy Aggivessana, please teach me the Dhamma as you have learned and memorized it.”
> Pali: “Sādhu me bhavaṁ aggivessano yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ desetū”ti.
[¶6] “I’m not competent to do so, Prince. For if I were to teach you the Dhamma as I have learned and memorized it, you might not understand the meaning, which would be wearying and troublesome for me.”
> Pali: “Na kho te ahaṁ, rājakumāra, sakkomi yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ desetuṁ. Ahañca hi te, rājakumāra, yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, tvañca me bhāsitassa atthaṁ na ājāneyyāsi; so mamassa kilamatho, sā mamassa vihesā”ti.
[¶7] “Worthy Aggivessana, please teach me the Dhamma as you have learned and memorized it. Hopefully I will understand the meaning of what you say.”
> Pali: “Desetu me bhavaṁ aggivessano yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ. Appevanāmāhaṁ bhoto aggivessanassa bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājāneyyan”ti.
[¶8] “I shall teach you. If you understand the meaning of what I say, that’s good. If not, then leave each to his own, and do not question me about it further.”
> Pali: “Deseyyaṁ kho te ahaṁ, rājakumāra, yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ. Sace me tvaṁ bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājāneyyāsi, iccetaṁ kusalaṁ; no ce me tvaṁ bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājāneyyāsi, yathāsake tiṭṭheyyāsi, na maṁ tattha uttariṁ paṭipuccheyyāsī”ti.
[¶9] “Worthy Aggivessana, please teach me the Dhamma as you have learned and memorized it. If I understand the meaning of what you say, that’s good. If not, then I will leave each to his own, and not question you about it further.”
> Pali: “Desetu me bhavaṁ aggivessano yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ. Sace ahaṁ bhoto aggivessanassa bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānissāmi, iccetaṁ kusalaṁ; no ce ahaṁ bhoto aggivessanassa bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānissāmi, yathāsake tiṭṭhissāmi, nāhaṁ tattha bhavantaṁ aggivessanaṁ uttariṁ paṭipucchissāmī”ti.
[¶10] Then the novice Aciravata taught Prince Jayasena the Dhamma as he had learned and memorized it. When he had spoken, Jayasena said to him, “It is impossible, worthy Aggivessana, it cannot happen that a mendicant who meditates diligently, keenly, and resolutely can experience unification of mind.” Having declared that this was impossible, Jayasena rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho aciravato samaṇuddeso jayasenassa rājakumārassa yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ desesi. Evaṁ vutte, jayaseno rājakumāro aciravataṁ samaṇuddesaṁ etadavoca: “aṭṭhānametaṁ, bho aggivessana, anavakāso yaṁ bhikkhu appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto phuseyya cittassa ekaggatan”ti. Atha kho jayaseno rājakumāro aciravatassa samaṇuddesassa aṭṭhānatañca anavakāsatañca pavedetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶11] Not long after he had left, Aciravata went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and informed the Buddha of all they had discussed.
> Pali: Atha kho aciravato samaṇuddeso acirapakkante jayasene rājakumāre yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho aciravato samaṇuddeso yāvatako ahosi jayasenena rājakumārena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ bhagavato ārocesi.
[¶12] When he had spoken, the Buddha said to him,
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā aciravataṁ samaṇuddesaṁ etadavoca:
[¶13] “How could it possibly be otherwise, Aggivessana? Prince Jayasena dwells in the midst of sensual pleasures, enjoying them, consumed by thoughts of them, burning with fever for them, and eagerly seeking more. It’s simply impossible for him to know or see or realize what can only be known, seen, and realized by renunciation.
> Pali: “‘taṁ kutettha, aggivessana, labbhā. Yaṁ taṁ nekkhammena ñātabbaṁ nekkhammena daṭṭhabbaṁ nekkhammena pattabbaṁ nekkhammena sacchikātabbaṁ taṁ vata jayaseno rājakumāro kāmamajjhe vasanto kāme paribhuñjanto kāmavitakkehi khajjamāno kāmapariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno kāmapariyesanāya ussuko ñassati vā dakkhati vā sacchi vā karissatī’ti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶14] Suppose there was a pair of elephants or horse or oxen in training who were well tamed and well trained. And there was a pair who were not tamed or trained. What do you think, Aggivessana? Wouldn’t the pair that was well tamed and well trained perform the tasks of the tamed and reach the level of the tamed?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpissu, aggivessana, dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā sudantā suvinītā, dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā adantā avinītā. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, aggivessana, ye te dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā sudantā suvinītā, api nu te dantāva dantakāraṇaṁ gaccheyyuṁ, dantāva dantabhūmiṁ sampāpuṇeyyun”ti?
[¶15] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶16] “But would the pair that was not tamed and trained perform the tasks of the tamed and reach the level of the tamed, just like the tamed pair?”
> Pali: “Ye pana te dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā adantā avinītā, api nu te adantāva dantakāraṇaṁ gaccheyyuṁ, adantāva dantabhūmiṁ sampāpuṇeyyuṁ, seyyathāpi te dve hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vā sudantā suvinītā”ti?
[¶17] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶18] “In the same way, Prince Jayasena dwells in the midst of sensual pleasures, enjoying them, consumed by thoughts of them, burning with fever for them, and eagerly seeking more. It’s simply impossible for him to know or see or realize what can only be known, seen, and realized by renunciation.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, aggivessana, ‘yaṁ taṁ nekkhammena ñātabbaṁ nekkhammena daṭṭhabbaṁ nekkhammena pattabbaṁ nekkhammena sacchikātabbaṁ taṁ vata jayaseno rājakumāro kāmamajjhe vasanto kāme paribhuñjanto kāmavitakkehi khajjamāno kāmapariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno kāmapariyesanāya ussuko ñassati vā dakkhati vā sacchi vā karissatī’ti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶19] Suppose there was a big mountain not far from a town or village. And two friends set out from that village or town, lending each other a hand up to the mountain. Once there, one friend would remain at the foot of the mountain, while the other would climb to the peak. The one standing at the foot would say to the one at the peak, ‘My dear, what do you see, standing there at the peak?’ They’d reply, ‘Standing at the peak, I see delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds!’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre mahāpabbato. Tamenaṁ dve sahāyakā tamhā gāmā vā nigamā vā nikkhamitvā hatthavilaṅghakena yena so pabbato tenupasaṅkameyyuṁ; upasaṅkamitvā eko sahāyako heṭṭhā pabbatapāde tiṭṭheyya, eko sahāyako uparipabbataṁ āroheyya. Tamenaṁ heṭṭhā pabbatapāde ṭhito sahāyako uparipabbate ṭhitaṁ sahāyakaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yaṁ, samma, kiṁ tvaṁ passasi uparipabbate ṭhito’ti? So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘passāmi kho ahaṁ, samma, uparipabbate ṭhito ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan’ti.
[¶20] But the other would say, ‘It’s impossible, it cannot happen that, standing at the peak, you can see delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds.’ So their friend would come down from the peak, take their friend by the arm, and make them climb to the peak. After giving them a while to catch their breath, they’d say, ‘My dear, what do you see, standing here at the peak?’ They’d reply, ‘Standing at the peak, I see delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds!’
> Pali: So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ, samma, anavakāso yaṁ tvaṁ uparipabbate ṭhito passeyyāsi ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan’ti. Tamenaṁ uparipabbate ṭhito sahāyako heṭṭhimapabbatapādaṁ orohitvā taṁ sahāyakaṁ bāhāyaṁ gahetvā uparipabbataṁ āropetvā muhuttaṁ assāsetvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘yaṁ, samma, kiṁ tvaṁ passasi uparipabbate ṭhito’ti? So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘passāmi kho ahaṁ, samma, uparipabbate ṭhito ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan’ti.
[¶21] They’d say, ‘Just now I understood you to say: “It’s impossible, it cannot happen that, standing at the peak, you can see delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds.” But now you say: “Standing at the peak, I see delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds!”’ They’d say, ‘But my dear, it was because I was obstructed by this big mountain that I didn’t see what could be seen.’
> Pali: So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘idāneva kho te, samma, bhāsitaṁ—mayaṁ evaṁ ājānāma— aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ samma, anavakāso yaṁ tvaṁ uparipabbate ṭhito passeyyāsi ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan’ti. Idāneva ca pana te bhāsitaṁ mayaṁ evaṁ ājānāma: ‘passāmi kho ahaṁ, samma, uparipabbate ṭhito ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan’ti. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathā hi panāhaṁ, samma, iminā mahatā pabbatena āvuto daṭṭheyyaṁ nāddasan’ti.
[¶22] But bigger than that is the mass of ignorance by which Prince Jayasena is obstructed, hindered, engulfed, and enveloped. Prince Jayasena dwells in the midst of sensual pleasures, enjoying them, consumed by thoughts of them, burning with fever for them, and eagerly seeking more. It is quite impossible for him to know or see or realize what can only be known, seen, and realized by renunciation. It would be no wonder if, had these two similes occurred to you, Prince Jayasena would have gained confidence in you and shown his confidence.”
> Pali: Ato mahantatarena, aggivessana, ‘avijjākhandhena jayaseno rājakumāro āvuto nivuto ophuṭo pariyonaddho. So vata yaṁ taṁ nekkhammena ñātabbaṁ nekkhammena daṭṭhabbaṁ nekkhammena pattabbaṁ nekkhammena sacchikātabbaṁ taṁ vata jayaseno rājakumāro kāmamajjhe vasanto kāme paribhuñjanto kāmavitakkehi khajjamāno kāmapariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno kāmapariyesanāya ussuko ñassati vā dakkhati vā sacchi vā karissatī’ti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Sace kho taṁ, aggivessana, jayasenassa rājakumārassa imā dve upamā paṭibhāyeyyuṁ, anacchariyaṁ te jayaseno rājakumāro pasīdeyya, pasanno ca te pasannākāraṁ kareyyā”ti.
[¶23] “But sir, how could these two similes have occurred to me as they did to the Buddha, since they were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past?”
> Pali: “Kuto pana maṁ, bhante, jayasenassa rājakumārassa imā dve upamā paṭibhāyissanti anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā, seyyathāpi bhagavantan”ti?
[¶24] “Suppose, Aggivessana, an anointed aristocratic king was to address his elephant tracker, ‘Please, my good elephant tracker, mount the royal bull elephant and enter the elephant wood. When you see a wild bull elephant, tether it by the neck to the royal elephant.’ ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the elephant tracker, and did as he was asked. The royal elephant leads the wild elephant out into the open; and it’s only then that it comes out into the open, for a wild bull elephant clings to the elephant wood. The elephant tracker informs the king, ‘Your Majesty, the wild elephant has come out into the open.’ Then the king addresses his elephant trainer, ‘Please, dear elephant trainer, tame the wild bull elephant. Subdue its wild behaviors, its wild memories and thoughts, and its wild stress, weariness, and fever. Make it happy to be within a village, and instill behaviors congenial to humans.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto nāgavanikaṁ āmanteti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, samma nāgavanika, rañño nāgaṁ abhiruhitvā nāgavanaṁ pavisitvā āraññakaṁ nāgaṁ atipassitvā rañño nāgassa gīvāyaṁ upanibandhāhī’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, aggivessana, nāgavaniko rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa paṭissutvā rañño nāgaṁ abhiruhitvā nāgavanaṁ pavisitvā āraññakaṁ nāgaṁ atipassitvā rañño nāgassa gīvāyaṁ upanibandhati. Tamenaṁ rañño nāgo abbhokāsaṁ nīharati. Ettāvatā kho, aggivessana, āraññako nāgo abbhokāsaṁ gato hoti. Etthagedhā hi, aggivessana, āraññakā nāgā yadidaṁ—nāgavanaṁ. Tamenaṁ nāgavaniko rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa ārocesi: ‘abbhokāsagato kho, deva, āraññako nāgo’ti. Atha kho aggivessana, tamenaṁ rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto hatthidamakaṁ āmantesi: ‘ehi tvaṁ, samma hatthidamaka, āraññakaṁ nāgaṁ damayāhi āraññakānañceva sīlānaṁ abhinimmadanāya āraññakānañceva sarasaṅkappānaṁ abhinimmadanāya āraññakānañceva darathakilamathapariḷāhānaṁ abhinimmadanāya gāmante abhiramāpanāya manussakantesu sīlesu samādapanāyā’ti.
[¶25] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the elephant trainer. He dug a large post into the earth and tethered the elephant to it by the neck, so as to subdue its wild behaviors, its wild memories and thoughts, and its wild stress, weariness, and fever, and to make it happy to be within a village, and instill behaviors congenial to humans. He spoke in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people. Spoken to in such a way by the elephant trainer, the wild elephant wanted to listen. It actively listened and tried to understand. So the elephant trainer rewards it with grass, fodder, and water.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, aggivessana, hatthidamako rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa paṭissutvā mahantaṁ thambhaṁ pathaviyaṁ nikhaṇitvā āraññakassa nāgassa gīvāyaṁ upanibandhati āraññakānañceva sīlānaṁ abhinimmadanāya āraññakānañceva sarasaṅkappānaṁ abhinimmadanāya āraññakānañceva darathakilamathapariḷāhānaṁ abhinimmadanāya gāmante abhiramāpanāya manussakantesu sīlesu samādapanāya. Tamenaṁ hatthidamako yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpāhi vācāhi samudācarati. Yato kho, aggivessana, āraññako nāgo hatthidamakassa yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpāhi vācāhi samudācariyamāno sussūsati, sotaṁ odahati, aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti; tamenaṁ hatthidamako uttari tiṇaghāsodakaṁ anuppavecchati.
[¶26] When the wild elephant accepts the grass, fodder, and water, the trainer knows, ‘Now the wild elephant will survive!’ He sets it a further task: ‘Pick it up, worthy sir! Put it down, worthy sir!’ When the wild elephant picks up and puts down when the trainer says, following instructions, the trainer sets it a further task: ‘Forward, worthy sir! Back, worthy sir!’ When the wild elephant goes forward and back when the trainer says, following instructions, the trainer sets it a further task: ‘Stand, worthy sir! Sit, worthy sir!’
> Pali: Yato kho, aggivessana, āraññako nāgo hatthidamakassa tiṇaghāsodakaṁ paṭiggaṇhāti, tatra hatthidamakassa evaṁ hoti: ‘jīvissati kho dāni āraññako nāgo’ti. Tamenaṁ hatthidamako uttari kāraṇaṁ kāreti: ‘ādiya, bho, nikkhipa, bho’ti. Yato kho, aggivessana, āraññako nāgo hatthidamakassa ādānanikkhepe vacanakaro hoti ovādappaṭikaro, tamenaṁ hatthidamako uttari kāraṇaṁ kāreti: ‘abhikkama, bho, paṭikkama, bho’ti. Yato kho, aggivessana, āraññako nāgo hatthidamakassa abhikkamapaṭikkamavacanakaro hoti ovādappaṭikaro, tamenaṁ hatthidamako uttari kāraṇaṁ kāreti: ‘uṭṭhaha, bho, nisīda, bho’ti.
[¶27] When the wild elephant stands and sits when the trainer says, following instructions, the trainer sets the task called imperturbability. He fastens a large plank to its trunk; a lancer sits on its neck; other lancers surround it on all sides; and the trainer himself stands in front with a long lance. While practicing this task, it doesn’t budge its fore-feet or hind-feet, its fore-quarters or hind-quarters, its head, ears, tusks, tail, or trunk. The wild bull elephant endures being struck by spears, swords, arrows, and axes; it endures the thunder of the drums, kettledrums, pipes, horns, and tom-toms. Rid of all crooks and flaws, and purged of defects, it is worthy of a king, fit to serve a king, and reckoned a factor of kingship.
> Pali: Yato kho, aggivessana, āraññako nāgo hatthidamakassa uṭṭhānanisajjāya vacanakaro hoti ovādappaṭikaro, tamenaṁ hatthidamako uttari āneñjaṁ nāma kāraṇaṁ kāreti, mahantassa phalakaṁ soṇḍāya upanibandhati, tomarahattho ca puriso uparigīvāya nisinno hoti, samantato ca tomarahatthā purisā parivāretvā ṭhitā honti, hatthidamako ca dīghatomarayaṭṭhiṁ gahetvā purato ṭhito hoti. So āneñjaṁ kāraṇaṁ kāriyamāno neva purime pāde copeti na pacchime pāde copeti, na purimakāyaṁ copeti na pacchimakāyaṁ copeti, na sīsaṁ copeti, na kaṇṇe copeti, na dante copeti, na naṅguṭṭhaṁ copeti, na soṇḍaṁ copeti. So hoti āraññako nāgo khamo sattippahārānaṁ asippahārānaṁ usuppahārānaṁ sarapattappahārānaṁ bheripaṇavavaṁsasaṅkhaḍiṇḍimaninnādasaddānaṁ sabbavaṅkadosanihitaninnītakasāvo rājāraho rājabhoggo rañño aṅganteva saṅkhaṁ gacchati.
[¶28] In the same way, Aggivessana, a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He realizes with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure.
> Pali: Evameva kho, aggivessana, idha tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.
[¶29] A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’
> Pali: Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajāpatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti.
[¶30] After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. And it’s only then that a noble disciple comes out into the open, for gods and humans cling to the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Ettāvatā kho, aggivessana, ariyasāvako abbhokāsagato hoti. Etthagedhā hi, aggivessana, devamanussā yadidaṁ—pañca kāmaguṇā.
[¶31] The Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, be ethical and restrained in the monastic code, conducting yourself well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, keep the rules you’ve undertaken.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, sīlavā hohi, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharāhi ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhassu sikkhāpadesū’ti.
[¶32] When they have ethical conduct, the Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, guard your sense doors. When you see a sight with your eyes, don’t get caught up in the features and details. …
> Pali: Yato kho, aggivessana, ariyasāvako sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, indriyesu guttadvāro hohi, cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā mā nimittaggāhī …pe…
[¶33] (Tell in full as in MN 107, the Discourse with Moggallāna the Accountant.)
> Pali: (yathā gaṇakamoggallānasuttante, evaṁ vitthāretabbāni.)
[¶34] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then they meditate observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶35] They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. It’s like when the elephant trainer dug a large post into the earth and tethered the elephant to it by the neck, so as to subdue its wild behaviors, its wild memories and thoughts, and its wild stress, weariness, and fever, and to make it happy to be within a village, and instill behaviors congenial to humans. In the same way, a noble disciple has these four kinds of mindfulness meditation as tethers for the mind so as to subdue behaviors tied to domestic life, memories and thoughts tied to domestic life, stress, weariness, and fever tied to domestic life, to discover the system, and to realize extinguishment.
> Pali: Vedanāsu …pe… citte … dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Seyyathāpi, aggivessana, hatthidamako mahantaṁ thambhaṁ pathaviyaṁ nikhaṇitvā āraññakassa nāgassa gīvāyaṁ upanibandhati āraññakānañceva sīlānaṁ abhinimmadanāya āraññakānañceva sarasaṅkappānaṁ abhinimmadanāya āraññakānañceva darathakilamathapariḷāhānaṁ abhinimmadanāya gāmante abhiramāpanāya manussakantesu sīlesu samādapanāya; evameva kho, aggivessana, ariyasāvakassa ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cetaso upanibandhanā honti gehasitānañceva sīlānaṁ abhinimmadanāya gehasitānañceva sarasaṅkappānaṁ abhinimmadanāya gehasitānañceva darathakilamathapariḷāhānaṁ abhinimmadanāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya.
[¶36] The Realized One guides them further: ‘Come, mendicant, meditate observing an aspect of the body, but don’t think thoughts connected with sensual pleasures. Meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles, but don’t think thoughts connected with sensual pleasures.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ tathāgato uttariṁ vineti: ‘ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, kāye kāyānupassī viharāhi, mā ca kāmūpasaṁhitaṁ vitakkaṁ vitakkesi. Vedanāsu … citte … dhammesu dhammānupassī viharāhi, mā ca kāmūpasaṁhitaṁ vitakkaṁ vitakkesī’ti.
[¶37] As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption.
> Pali: So vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶38] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶39] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate …pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶40] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’. Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmeti. So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti; ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶41] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶42] Such a mendicant endures cold, heat, hunger, and thirst; the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles; rude and unwelcome criticism; and puts up with physical pain—sharp, severe, acute, unpleasant, disagreeable, and life-threatening. Rid of all greed, hate, and delusion, and purged of defects, they are worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of greeting with cupped palms, and are the supreme field of merit for the world.
> Pali: So hoti bhikkhu khamo sītassa uṇhassa jighacchāya pipāsāya ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassānaṁ duruttānaṁ durāgatānaṁ vacanapathānaṁ, uppannānaṁ sārīrikānaṁ vedanānaṁ dukkhānaṁ tibbānaṁ kharānaṁ kaṭukānaṁ asātānaṁ amanāpānaṁ pāṇaharānaṁ adhivāsakajātiko hoti sabbarāgadosamohanihitaninnītakasāvo āhuneyyo pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassa.
[¶43] If a royal bull elephant—whether elderly, middle aged, or youthful—passes away untamed and untrained, they’re reckoned a royal bull elephant who passed away untamed. In the same way, if a mendicant—whether senior, middle, or junior—passes away without having ended the defilements, they’re reckoned a mendicant who passed away untamed.
> Pali: Mahallako cepi, aggivessana, rañño nāgo adanto avinīto kālaṁ karoti, ‘adantamaraṇaṁ mahallako rañño nāgo kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati; majjhimo cepi, aggivessana, rañño nāgo. Daharo cepi, aggivessana, rañño nāgo adanto avinīto kālaṁ karoti, ‘adantamaraṇaṁ daharo rañño nāgo kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati; evameva kho, aggivessana, thero cepi bhikkhu akhīṇāsavo kālaṁ karoti, ‘adantamaraṇaṁ thero bhikkhu kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati; majjhimo cepi, aggivessana, bhikkhu. Navo cepi, aggivessana, bhikkhu akhīṇāsavo kālaṁ karoti, ‘adantamaraṇaṁ navo bhikkhu kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati.
[¶44] If a royal bull elephant—whether elderly, middle aged, or youthful—passes away tamed and trained, they’re reckoned a royal bull elephant who passed away tamed. In the same way, if a mendicant—whether senior, middle, or junior—passes away having ended the defilements, they’re reckoned a mendicant who passed away tamed.”
> Pali: Mahallako cepi, aggivessana, rañño nāgo sudanto suvinīto kālaṁ karoti, ‘dantamaraṇaṁ mahallako rañño nāgo kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati; majjhimo cepi, aggivessana, rañño nāgo … daharo cepi, aggivessana, rañño nāgo sudanto suvinīto kālaṁ karoti, ‘dantamaraṇaṁ daharo rañño nāgo kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati; evameva kho, aggivessana, thero cepi bhikkhu khīṇāsavo kālaṁ karoti, ‘dantamaraṇaṁ thero bhikkhu kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati; majjhimo cepi, aggivessana, bhikkhu. Navo cepi, aggivessana, bhikkhu khīṇāsavo kālaṁ karoti, ‘dantamaraṇaṁ navo bhikkhu kālaṅkato’tveva saṅkhaṁ gacchatī”ti.
[¶45] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the novice Aciravata approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano aciravato samaṇuddeso bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶46] > Pali: Dantabhūmisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 138. MN 126 · With Bhūmija
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/138/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/138/#p-N
[¶0] MN 126 · With Bhūmija
> Pali: MN 126 · Bhūmijasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Then Venerable Bhūmija robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the home of Prince Jayasena, where he sat down on the seat spread out.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā bhūmijo pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena jayasenassa rājakumārassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.
[¶3] Then Jayasena approached and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Bhūmija:
> Pali: Atha kho jayaseno rājakumāro yenāyasmā bhūmijo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā bhūmijena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jayaseno rājakumāro āyasmantaṁ bhūmijaṁ etadavoca:
[¶4] “Worthy Bhūmija, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘If you make a wish and lead the spiritual life, you can’t win the fruit. If you don’t make a wish and lead the spiritual life, you can’t win the fruit. If you both make a wish and don’t make a wish and lead the spiritual life, you can’t win the fruit. If you neither make a wish nor don’t make a wish and lead the spiritual life, you can’t win the fruit.’ What does the worthy Bhūmija’s Teacher say about this? How does he explain it?”
> Pali: “santi, bho bhūmija, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāyā’ti. Idha bhoto bhūmijassa satthā kiṁvādī kimakkhāyī”ti?
[¶5] “Prince, I haven’t heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha. But it’s possible that he might explain it like this: ‘If you lead the spiritual life irrationally, you can’t win the fruit, regardless of whether you make a wish, you don’t make a wish, you both do and do not make a wish, or you neither do nor don’t make a wish. But if you lead the spiritual life rationally, you can win the fruit, regardless of whether you make a wish, you don’t make a wish, you both do and do not make a wish, or you neither do nor don’t make a wish.’ I haven’t heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha. But it’s possible that he might explain it like that.”
> Pali: “Na kho metaṁ, rājakumāra, bhagavato sammukhā sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ bhagavā evaṁ byākareyya: ‘āsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Āsañcepi karitvā yoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā yoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā yoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā yoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāyā’ti. Na kho me taṁ, rājakumāra, bhagavato sammukhā sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ bhagavā evaṁ byākareyyā”ti.
[¶6] “If that’s what your teacher says, worthy Bhūmija, he clearly stands head and shoulders above all the various other ascetics and brahmins.” Then Prince Jayasena served Venerable Bhūmija from his own dish.
> Pali: “Sace kho bhoto bhūmijassa satthā evaṁvādī evamakkhāyī, addhā bhoto bhūmijassa satthā sabbesaṁyeva puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ muddhānaṁ maññe āhacca tiṭṭhatī”ti. Atha kho jayaseno rājakumāro āyasmantaṁ bhūmijaṁ sakeneva thālipākena parivisi.
[¶7] Then after the meal, on his return from almsround, Bhūmija went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him all that had happened, adding: “Answering this way, I trust that I repeated what the Buddha has said, and didn’t misrepresent him with an untruth. I trust my explanation was in line with the teaching, and that there are no legitimate grounds for rebuttal or criticism.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā bhūmijo pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā bhūmijo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idhāhaṁ, bhante, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena jayasenassa rājakumārassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdiṁ. Atha kho, bhante, jayaseno rājakumāro yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mayā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, bhante, jayaseno rājakumāro maṁ etadavoca: ‘santi, bho bhūmija, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino— āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāyā’ti. ‘Idha bhoto bhūmijassa satthā kiṁvādī kimakkhāyī’ti? Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, jayasenaṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘na kho me taṁ, rājakumāra, bhagavato sammukhā sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ bhagavā evaṁ byākareyya— āsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā ayoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Āsañcepi karitvā yoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā yoniso brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāyāti. Na kho me taṁ, rājakumāra, bhagavato sammukhā sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ. Ṭhānañca kho etaṁ vijjati yaṁ bhagavā evaṁ byākareyyā’ti. ‘Sace bhoto bhūmijassa satthā evaṁvādī evamakkhāyī, addhā bhoto bhūmijassa satthā sabbesaṁyeva puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ muddhānaṁ maññe āhacca tiṭṭhatī’ti. ‘Kaccāhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaramāno vuttavādī ceva bhagavato homi, na ca bhagavantaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhāmi, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaromi, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchatī’”ti?
[¶8] “Indeed, Bhūmija, in answering this way you repeated what I’ve said, and didn’t misrepresent me with an untruth. Your explanation was in line with the teaching, and there are no legitimate grounds for rebuttal or criticism.
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, bhūmija, evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaramāno vuttavādī ceva me hosi, na ca maṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhasi, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākarosi, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchati.
[¶9] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion. If they lead the spiritual life, they can’t win the fruit, regardless of whether they make a wish, they don’t make a wish, they both do and do not make a wish, or they neither do nor don’t make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s an irrational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhūmija, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā micchādiṭṭhino micchāsaṅkappā micchāvācā micchākammantā micchāājīvā micchāvāyāmā micchāsatī micchāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶10] Suppose there was a person in need of oil. While wandering in search of oil, they tried heaping sand in a bucket, sprinkling it little by little with water, and pressing it out. But by doing this, they couldn’t extract any oil, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s an irrational way to extract oil.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso telatthiko telagavesī telapariyesanaṁ caramāno vālikaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya. Āsañcepi karitvā vālikaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya, abhabbo telassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā vālikaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya, abhabbo telassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā vālikaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya, abhabbo telassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā vālikaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya, abhabbo telassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, telassa adhigamāya.
[¶11] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion. If they lead the spiritual life, they can’t win the fruit, regardless of whether or not they make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s an irrational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā micchādiṭṭhino micchāsaṅkappā micchāvācā micchākammantā micchāājīvā micchāvāyāmā micchāsatī micchāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶12] Suppose there was a person in need of milk. While wandering in search of milk, they tried pulling the horn of a newly-calved cow. But by doing this, they couldn’t get any milk, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s an irrational way to get milk.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso khīratthiko khīragavesī khīrapariyesanaṁ caramāno gāviṁ taruṇavacchaṁ visāṇato āviñcheyya. Āsañcepi karitvā gāviṁ taruṇavacchaṁ visāṇato āviñcheyya, abhabbo khīrassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā gāviṁ taruṇavacchaṁ visāṇato āviñcheyya, abhabbo khīrassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, khīrassa adhigamāya.
[¶13] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have wrong view … Because that’s an irrational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā micchādiṭṭhino …pe… micchāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶14] Suppose there was a person in need of butter. While wandering in search of butter, they tried pouring water into a pot and churning it with a stick. But by doing this, they couldn’t produce any butter, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s an irrational way to produce butter.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso navanītatthiko navanītagavesī navanītapariyesanaṁ caramāno udakaṁ kalase āsiñcitvā matthena āviñcheyya. Āsañcepi karitvā udakaṁ kalase āsiñcitvā matthena āviñcheyya, abhabbo navanītassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā udakaṁ kalase āsiñcitvā matthena āviñcheyya, abhabbo navanītassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, navanītassa adhigamāya.
[¶15] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have wrong view … Because that’s an irrational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā micchādiṭṭhino …pe… micchāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶16] Suppose there was a person in need of fire. While wandering in search of fire, they tried drilling a green, sappy log with a drill-stick. But by doing this, they couldn’t start a fire, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s an irrational way to start a fire.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso aggitthiko aggigavesī aggipariyesanaṁ caramāno allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimantheyya. Āsañcepi karitvā allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimantheyya, abhabbo aggissa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā allaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ sasnehaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimantheyya, abhabbo aggissa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, aggissa adhigamāya.
[¶17] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have wrong view … Because that’s an irrational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā micchādiṭṭhino …pe… micchāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, abhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ayoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶18] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. If they lead the spiritual life, they can win the fruit, regardless of whether they make a wish, they don’t make a wish, they both do and do not make a wish, or they neither do nor do not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s a rational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhūmija, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sammādiṭṭhino sammāsaṅkappā sammāvācā sammākammantā sammāājīvā sammāvāyāmā sammāsatī sammāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶19] Suppose there was a person in need of oil. While wandering in search of oil, they tried heaping sesame flour in a bucket, sprinkling it little by little with water, and pressing it out. By doing this, they could extract oil, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s a rational way to extract oil.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso telatthiko telagavesī telapariyesanaṁ caramāno tilapiṭṭhaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya. Āsañcepi karitvā tilapiṭṭhaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya, bhabbo telassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā tilapiṭṭhaṁ doṇiyā ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ pīḷeyya, bhabbo telassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, telassa adhigamāya.
[¶20] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have right view … Because that’s a rational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sammādiṭṭhino …pe… sammāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶21] Suppose there was a person in need of milk. While wandering in search of milk, they tried pulling the udder of a newly-calved cow. By doing this, they could get milk, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s a rational way to get milk.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso khīratthiko khīragavesī khīrapariyesanaṁ caramāno gāviṁ taruṇavacchaṁ thanato āviñcheyya. Āsañcepi karitvā gāviṁ taruṇavacchaṁ thanato āviñcheyya, bhabbo khīrassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā gāviṁ taruṇavacchaṁ thanato āviñcheyya, bhabbo khīrassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, khīrassa adhigamāya.
[¶22] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have right view … Because that’s a rational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sammādiṭṭhino …pe… sammāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā …pe… anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā …pe… nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶23] Suppose there was a person in need of butter. While wandering in search of butter, they tried pouring curds into a pot and churning them with a stick. By doing this, they could produce butter, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s a rational way to produce butter.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso navanītatthiko navanītagavesī navanītapariyesanaṁ caramāno dadhiṁ kalase āsiñcitvā matthena āviñcheyya. Āsañcepi karitvā dadhiṁ kalase āsiñcitvā matthena āviñcheyya, bhabbo navanītassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā … āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā … nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā dadhiṁ kalase āsiñcitvā matthena āviñcheyya, bhabbo navanītassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, navanītassa adhigamāya.
[¶24] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have right view … Because that’s a rational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sammādiṭṭhino …pe… sammāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā … āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā … nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶25] Suppose there was a person in need of fire. While wandering in search of fire, they tried drilling a dried up, withered log with a drill-stick. By doing this, they could start a fire, regardless of whether they made a wish, didn’t make a wish, both did and did not make a wish, or neither did nor did not make a wish. Why is that? Because that’s a rational way to start a fire.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhūmija, puriso aggitthiko aggigavesī aggipariyesanaṁ caramāno sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimantheyya; (…) āsañcepi karitvā … anāsañcepi karitvā … āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā … nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā sukkhaṁ kaṭṭhaṁ koḷāpaṁ uttarāraṇiṁ ādāya abhimantheyya, bhabbo aggissa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, aggissa adhigamāya.
[¶26] And so it is for any ascetics and brahmins who have right view … Because that’s a rational way to win the fruit.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhūmija, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sammādiṭṭhino …pe… sammāsamādhino te āsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; āsañca anāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya; nevāsaṁ nānāsañcepi karitvā brahmacariyaṁ caranti, bhabbā phalassa adhigamāya. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yoni hesā, bhūmija, phalassa adhigamāya.
[¶27] Bhūmija, it would be no wonder if, had these four similes occurred to you, Prince Jayasena would have gained confidence in you and shown his confidence.”
> Pali: Sace kho taṁ, bhūmija, jayasenassa rājakumārassa imā catasso upamā paṭibhāyeyyuṁ anacchariyaṁ te jayaseno rājakumāro pasīdeyya, pasanno ca te pasannākāraṁ kareyyā”ti.
[¶28] “But sir, how could these four similes have occurred to me as they did to the Buddha, since they were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past?”
> Pali: “Kuto pana maṁ, bhante, jayasenassa rājakumārassa imā catasso upamā paṭibhāyissanti anacchariyā pubbe assutapubbā, seyyathāpi bhagavantan”ti?
[¶29] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Bhūmija approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā bhūmijo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶30] > Pali: Bhūmijasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 139. MN 127 · With Anuruddha
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/139/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/139/#p-N
[¶0] MN 127 · With Anuruddha
> Pali: MN 127 · Anuruddhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] And then the chamberlain Pañcakaṅga addressed a man, “Please, my man, go to Venerable Anuruddha, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Say to him, ‘Sir, the chamberlain Pañcakaṅga bows with his head to your feet.’ And then ask him whether he would please accept tomorrow’s meal from Pañcakaṅga together with the mendicant Saṅgha. And ask whether he might please come earlier than usual, for Pañcakaṅga has many duties, and much work to do for the king.”
> Pali: Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, yenāyasmā anuruddho tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena āyasmato anuruddhassa pāde sirasā vandāhi: ‘pañcakaṅgo, bhante, thapati āyasmato anuruddhassa pāde sirasā vandatī’ti; evañca vadehi: ‘adhivāsetu kira, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho pañcakaṅgassa thapatissa svātanāya attacatuttho bhattaṁ; yena ca kira, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho pagevataraṁ āgaccheyya; pañcakaṅgo, bhante, thapati bahukicco bahukaraṇīyo rājakaraṇīyenā’”ti.
[¶3] “Yes, sir,” that man replied. He did as Pañcakaṅga asked, and Venerable Anuruddha consented with silence.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so puriso pañcakaṅgassa thapatissa paṭissutvā yenāyasmā anuruddho tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so puriso āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavoca: “pañcakaṅgo, bhante, thapati āyasmato anuruddhassa pāde sirasā vandati, evañca vadeti: ‘adhivāsetu kira, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho pañcakaṅgassa thapatissa svātanāya attacatuttho bhattaṁ; yena ca kira, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho pagevataraṁ āgaccheyya; pañcakaṅgo, bhante, thapati bahukicco bahukaraṇīyo rājakaraṇīyenā’”ti. Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā anuruddho tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶4] Then when the night had passed, Anuruddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to Pañcakaṅga’s home, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Then Pañcakaṅga served and satisfied Anuruddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. When Anuruddha had eaten and washed his hands and bowl, Pañcakaṅga took a low seat, sat to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho tassā rattiyā accayena pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena pañcakaṅgassa thapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi. Atha kho pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho pañcakaṅgo thapati āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavoca:
[¶5] “Sir, some senior mendicants have come to me and said, ‘Householder, develop the limitless release of the heart.’ Others have said, ‘Householder, develop the expansive release of the heart.’ Now, the limitless release of the heart and the expansive release of the heart: do these things differ in both meaning and phrasing? Or do they mean the same thing, and differ only in the phrasing?”
> Pali: “Idha maṁ, bhante, therā bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘appamāṇaṁ, gahapati, cetovimuttiṁ bhāvehī’ti. Ekacce therā evamāhaṁsu: ‘mahaggataṁ, gahapati, cetovimuttiṁ bhāvehī’ti. Yā cāyaṁ, bhante, appamāṇā cetovimutti yā ca mahaggatā cetovimutti— ime dhammā nānatthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca, udāhu ekatthā byañjanameva nānan”ti?
[¶6] “Well then, householder, let me know what you think about this. Afterwards, it’s a sure bet that you’ll get it.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, gahapati, taṁyevettha paṭibhātu, apaṇṇakante ito bhavissatī”ti.
[¶7] “Sir, this is what I think. The limitless release of the heart and the expansive release of the heart mean the same thing, and differ only in the phrasing.”
> Pali: “Mayhaṁ kho, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘yā cāyaṁ appamāṇā cetovimutti yā ca mahaggatā cetovimutti ime dhammā ekatthā byañjanameva nānan’”ti.
[¶8] “The limitless release of the heart and the expansive release of the heart differ in both meaning and phrasing. This is a way to understand how these things differ in both meaning and phrasing.
> Pali: “Yā cāyaṁ, gahapati, appamāṇā cetovimutti yā ca mahaggatā cetovimutti ime dhammā nānatthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca. Tadamināpetaṁ, gahapati, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ime dhammā nānatthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca.
[¶9] And what is the limitless release of the heart? It’s when a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion … They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing … They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. This is called the limitless release of the heart.
> Pali: Katamā ca, gahapati, appamāṇā cetovimutti? Idha, gahapati, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ tathā tatiyaṁ tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā … muditāsahagatena cetasā … upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ tathā tatiyaṁ tathā catutthaṁ; iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyābajjhena pharitvā viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, gahapati, appamāṇā cetovimutti.
[¶10] And what is the expansive release of the heart? It’s when a mendicant meditates focused on pervading the extent of a single tree root as expansive. This is called the expansive release of the heart. Also, a mendicant meditates focused on pervading the extent of two or three tree roots … a single village district … two or three village districts … a single kingdom … two or three kingdoms … this land surrounded by ocean. This too is called the expansive release of the heart. This is a way to understand how these things differ in both meaning and phrasing.
> Pali: Katamā ca, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti? Idha, gahapati, bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti. Idha pana, gahapati, bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā rukkhamūlāni mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Ayampi vuccati, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti. Idha pana, gahapati, bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ gāmakkhettaṁ mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Ayampi vuccati, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti. Idha pana, gahapati, bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā gāmakkhettāni mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Ayampi vuccati, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti. Idha pana, gahapati, bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ mahārajjaṁ mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Ayampi vuccati, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti. Idha pana, gahapati, bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā mahārajjāni mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Ayampi vuccati, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti. Idha pana, gahapati, bhikkhu yāvatā samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Ayampi vuccati, gahapati, mahaggatā cetovimutti. Iminā kho etaṁ, gahapati, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā ime dhammā nānatthā ceva nānābyañjanā ca.
[¶11] Householder, there are these four kinds of rebirth in a future life. What four? Take someone who meditates focused on pervading ‘limited luminosity’. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of the gods of limited luminosity. Next, take someone who meditates focused on pervading ‘limitless luminosity’. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of the gods of limitless luminosity. Next, take someone who meditates focused on pervading ‘corrupted radiance’. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of the gods of corrupted luminosity. Next, take someone who meditates focused on pervading ‘pure radiance’. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of the gods of pure luminosity. These are the four kinds of rebirth in a future life.
> Pali: Catasso kho imā gahapati, bhavūpapattiyo. Katamā catasso? Idha, gahapati, ekacco ‘parittābhā’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā parittābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati. Idha pana, gahapati, ekacco ‘appamāṇābhā’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā appamāṇābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati. Idha pana, gahapati, ekacco ‘saṅkiliṭṭhābhā’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā saṅkiliṭṭhābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati. Idha pana, gahapati, ekacco ‘parisuddhābhā’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā parisuddhābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati. Imā kho, gahapati, catasso bhavūpapattiyo.
[¶12] There comes a time, householder, when the deities gather together as one. When they do so, a difference in their color is evident, but not in their luminosity. It’s like when a person brings several oil lamps into one house. You can detect a difference in their flames, but not in their radiance. In the same way, when the deities gather together as one, a difference in their color is evident, but not in their luminosity.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, gahapati, samayo, yā tā devatā ekajjhaṁ sannipatanti, tāsaṁ ekajjhaṁ sannipatitānaṁ vaṇṇanānattañhi kho paññāyati no ca ābhānānattaṁ. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso sambahulāni telappadīpāni ekaṁ gharaṁ paveseyya. Tesaṁ ekaṁ gharaṁ pavesitānaṁ accinānattañhi kho paññāyetha, no ca ābhānānattaṁ; evameva kho, gahapati, hoti kho so samayo, yā tā devatā ekajjhaṁ sannipatanti tāsaṁ ekajjhaṁ sannipatitānaṁ vaṇṇanānattañhi kho paññāyati, no ca ābhānānattaṁ.
[¶13] There comes a time when those deities go their separate ways. When they do so, a difference both in their color and also in their luminosity is evident. It’s like when a person takes those several oil lamps out of that house. You can detect a difference both in their flames and also in their radiance. In the same way, when the deities go their separate ways, a difference both in their color and also in their luminosity is evident.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, gahapati, samayo, yā tā devatā tato vipakkamanti, tāsaṁ tato vipakkamantīnaṁ vaṇṇanānattañceva paññāyati ābhānānattañca. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso tāni sambahulāni telappadīpāni tamhā gharā nīhareyya. Tesaṁ tato nīhatānaṁ accinānattañceva paññāyetha ābhānānattañca; evameva kho, gahapati, hoti kho so samayo, yā tā devatā tato vipakkamanti, tāsaṁ tato vipakkamantīnaṁ vaṇṇanānattañceva paññāyati ābhānānattañca.
[¶14] It’s not that those deities think, ‘What we have is permanent, lasting, and eternal.’ Rather, wherever those deities cling, that’s where they take pleasure. It’s like when flies are being carried along on a carrying-pole or basket. It’s not that they think, ‘What we have is permanent, lasting, and eternal.’ Rather, wherever those flies cling, that’s where they take pleasure. In the same way, it’s not that those deities think, ‘What we have is permanent, lasting, and eternal.’ Rather, wherever those deities cling, that’s where they take pleasure.”
> Pali: Na kho, gahapati, tāsaṁ devatānaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘idaṁ amhākaṁ niccanti vā dhuvanti vā sassatanti vā’, api ca yattha yattheva tā devatā abhinivisanti tattha tattheva tā devatā abhiramanti. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, makkhikānaṁ kājena vā piṭakena vā harīyamānānaṁ na evaṁ hoti: ‘idaṁ amhākaṁ niccanti vā dhuvanti vā sassatanti vā’, api ca yattha yattheva tā makkhikā abhinivisanti tattha tattheva tā makkhikā abhiramanti; evameva kho, gahapati, tāsaṁ devatānaṁ na evaṁ hoti: ‘idaṁ amhākaṁ niccanti vā dhuvanti vā sassatanti vā’, api ca yattha yattheva tā devatā abhinivisanti tattha tattheva tā devatā abhiramantī”ti.
[¶15] When he had spoken, Venerable Sabhiya Kaccāna said to Venerable Anuruddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sabhiyo kaccāno āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavoca:
[¶16] “Good, Honorable Anuruddha! I have a further question about this. Do all the radiant deities have limited luminosity, or do some there have limitless luminosity?”
> Pali: “sādhu, bhante anuruddha. Atthi ca me ettha uttariṁ paṭipucchitabbaṁ. Yā tā, bhante, devatā ābhā sabbā tā parittābhā udāhu santettha ekaccā devatā appamāṇābhā”ti?
[¶17] “In that respect, Reverend Kaccāna, some deities there have limited luminosity, while some have limitless luminosity.”
> Pali: “Tadaṅgena kho, āvuso kaccāna, santettha ekaccā devatā parittābhā, santi panettha ekaccā devatā appamāṇābhā”ti.
[¶18] “What is the cause, Honorable Anuruddha, what is the reason why, when those deities have been reborn in a single order of gods, some deities there have limited luminosity, while some have limitless luminosity?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhante anuruddha, hetu ko paccayo yena tāsaṁ devatānaṁ ekaṁ devanikāyaṁ upapannānaṁ santettha ekaccā devatā parittābhā, santi panettha ekaccā devatā appamāṇābhā”ti?
[¶19] “Well then, Reverend Kaccāna, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, Reverend Kaccāna? Which of these two kinds of mental development is more expansive: when a mendicant meditates focused on pervading as expansive the extent of a single tree root, or two or three tree roots?”
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso kaccāna, taṁyevettha paṭipucchissāmi. Yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, āvuso kaccāna, yvāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā rukkhamūlāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ katamā cittabhāvanā mahaggatatarā”ti?
[¶20] “When a mendicant meditates on two or three tree roots.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā rukkhamūlāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— ayaṁ imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ mahaggatatarā”ti.
[¶21] “What do you think, Reverend Kaccāna? Which of these two kinds of mental development is more expansive: when a mendicant meditates focused on pervading as expansive the extent of two or three tree roots, or a single village district … two or three village districts … a single kingdom … two or three kingdoms … this land surrounded by ocean?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, āvuso kaccāna, yvāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā rukkhamūlāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ gāmakkhettaṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ katamā cittabhāvanā mahaggatatarā”ti? “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ gāmakkhettaṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— ayaṁ imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ mahaggatatarā”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, āvuso kaccāna, yvāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ gāmakkhettaṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā gāmakkhettāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ katamā cittabhāvanā mahaggatatarā”ti? “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā gāmakkhettāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— ayaṁ imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ mahaggatatarā”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, āvuso kaccāna, yvāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā gāmakkhettāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ mahārajjaṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ katamā cittabhāvanā mahaggatatarā”ti? “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ mahārajjaṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— ayaṁ imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ mahaggatatarā”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, āvuso kaccāna, yvāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā ekaṁ mahārajjaṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā mahārajjāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ katamā cittabhāvanā mahaggatatarā”ti? “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā mahārajjāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— ayaṁ imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ mahaggatatarā”ti. “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, āvuso kaccāna, yvāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā dve vā tīṇi vā mahārajjāni ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati, yo cāyaṁ bhikkhu yāvatā samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ katamā cittabhāvanā mahaggatatarā”ti?
[¶22] “When a mendicant meditates on this land surrounded by ocean.”
> Pali: “Yvāyaṁ, bhante, bhikkhu yāvatā samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ ‘mahaggatan’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati— ayaṁ imāsaṁ ubhinnaṁ cittabhāvanānaṁ mahaggatatarā”ti?
[¶23] “This is the cause, Reverend Kaccāna, this is the reason why, when those deities have been reborn in a single order of gods, some deities there have limited luminosity, while some have limitless luminosity.”
> Pali: “Ayaṁ kho, āvuso kaccāna, hetu ayaṁ paccayo, yena tāsaṁ devatānaṁ ekaṁ devanikāyaṁ upapannānaṁ santettha ekaccā devatā parittābhā, santi panettha ekaccā devatā appamāṇābhā”ti.
[¶24] “Good, Honorable Anuruddha! I have a further question about this. Do all the radiant deities have corrupted radiance, or do some there have pure radiance?”
> Pali: “Sādhu, bhante anuruddha. Atthi ca me ettha uttariṁ paṭipucchitabbaṁ. Yāvatā, bhante, devatā ābhā sabbā tā saṅkiliṭṭhābhā udāhu santettha ekaccā devatā parisuddhābhā”ti?
[¶25] “In that respect, Reverend Kaccāna, some deities there have corrupted radiance, while some have pure radiance.”
> Pali: “Tadaṅgena kho, āvuso kaccāna, santettha ekaccā devatā saṅkiliṭṭhābhā, santi panettha ekaccā devatā parisuddhābhā”ti.
[¶26] “What is the cause, Honorable Anuruddha, what is the reason why, when those deities have been reborn in a single order of gods, some deities there have corrupted radiance, while some have pure radiance?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhante, anuruddha, hetu ko paccayo, yena tāsaṁ devatānaṁ ekaṁ devanikāyaṁ upapannānaṁ santettha ekaccā devatā saṅkiliṭṭhābhā, santi panettha ekaccā devatā parisuddhābhā”ti?
[¶27] “Well then, Reverend Kaccāna, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said. Suppose an oil lamp was burning with impure oil and impure wick. Because of the impurity of the oil and the wick it burns dimly, as it were.
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso kaccāna, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāyapidhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti. Seyyathāpi, āvuso kaccāna, telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi aparisuddhaṁ vaṭṭipi aparisuddhā. So telassapi aparisuddhattā vaṭṭiyāpi aparisuddhattā andhandhaṁ viya jhāyati;
[¶28] In the same way, take some mendicant who meditates focused on pervading ‘corrupted radiance’. Their physical discomfort is not completely settled, their dullness and drowsiness is not completely eradicated, and their restlessness and remorse are not completely eliminated. Because of this they practice absorption dimly, as it were. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of the gods of corrupted luminosity.
> Pali: evameva kho, āvuso kaccāna, idhekacco bhikkhu ‘saṅkiliṭṭhābhā’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati, tassa kāyaduṭṭhullampi na suppaṭippassaddhaṁ hoti, thinamiddhampi na susamūhataṁ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccampi na suppaṭivinītaṁ hoti. So kāyaduṭṭhullassapi na suppaṭippassaddhattā thinamiddhassapi na susamūhatattā uddhaccakukkuccassapi na suppaṭivinītattā andhandhaṁ viya jhāyati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā saṅkiliṭṭhābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati.
[¶29] Suppose an oil lamp was burning with pure oil and pure wick. Because of the purity of the oil and the wick it doesn’t burn dimly, as it were.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, āvuso kaccāna, telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi parisuddhaṁ vaṭṭipi parisuddhā. So telassapi parisuddhattā vaṭṭiyāpi parisuddhattā na andhandhaṁ viya jhāyati;
[¶30] In the same way, take some mendicant who meditates focused on pervading ‘pure radiance’. Their physical discomfort is completely settled, their dullness and drowsiness is completely eradicated, and their restlessness and remorse is completely eliminated. Because of this they don’t practice absorption dimly, as it were. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in the company of the gods of pure luminosity.
> Pali: evameva kho, āvuso kaccāna, idhekacco bhikkhu ‘parisuddhābhā’ti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Tassa kāyaduṭṭhullampi suppaṭippassaddhaṁ hoti, thinamiddhampi susamūhataṁ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccampi suppaṭivinītaṁ hoti. So kāyaduṭṭhullassapi suppaṭippassaddhattā thinamiddhassapi susamūhatattā uddhaccakukkuccassapi suppaṭivinītattā na andhandhaṁ viya jhāyati. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā parisuddhābhānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati.
[¶31] This is the cause, Reverend Kaccāna, this is the reason why, when those deities have been reborn in a single order of gods, some deities there have corrupted radiance, while some have pure radiance.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, āvuso kaccāna, hetu ayaṁ paccayo yena tāsaṁ devatānaṁ ekaṁ devanikāyaṁ upapannānaṁ santettha ekaccā devatā saṅkiliṭṭhābhā, santi panettha ekaccā devatā parisuddhābhā”ti.
[¶32] When he had spoken, Venerable Sabhiya Kaccāna said to Venerable Anuruddha, “Good, Honorable Anuruddha!
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sabhiyo kaccāno āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavoca: “sādhu, bhante anuruddha.
[¶33] Venerable Anuruddha, you don’t say, ‘So I have heard’ or ‘It ought to be like this.’ Rather, you say: ‘These deities are like this, those deities are like that.’ Sir, it occurs to me, ‘Clearly, Venerable Anuruddha has previously lived together with those deities, conversed, and engaged in discussion.’”
> Pali: Na, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho evamāha: ‘evaṁ me sutan’ti vā ‘evaṁ arahati bhavitun’ti vā; atha ca pana, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho ‘evampi tā devatā, itipi tā devatā’tveva bhāsati. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘addhā āyasmatā anuruddhena tāhi devatāhi saddhiṁ sannivutthapubbañceva sallapitapubbañca sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā’”ti.
[¶34] “Your words are clearly invasive and intrusive, Reverend Kaccāna. Nevertheless, I will answer you. For a long time I have previously lived together with those deities, conversed, and engaged in discussion.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho ayaṁ, āvuso kaccāna, āsajja upanīya vācā bhāsitā, api ca te ahaṁ byākarissāmi: ‘dīgharattaṁ kho me, āvuso kaccāna, tāhi devatāhi saddhiṁ sannivutthapubbañceva sallapitapubbañca sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā’”ti.
[¶35] When he had spoken, Venerable Sabhiya Kaccāna said to Pañcakaṅga the chamberlain, “You’re fortunate, householder, so very fortunate, to have given up your state of uncertainty, and to have got the chance to listen to this exposition of the teaching.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā sabhiyo kaccāno pañcakaṅgaṁ thapatiṁ etadavoca: “lābhā te, gahapati, suladdhaṁ te, gahapati, yaṁ tvañceva taṁ kaṅkhādhammaṁ pahāsi, mayañcimaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ alatthamhā savanāyā”ti.
[¶36] > Pali: Anuruddhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 140. MN 128 · Corruptions
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/140/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/140/#p-N
[¶0] MN 128 · Corruptions
> Pali: MN 128 · Upakkilesasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Kosambī in Ghosita’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosambiyaṁ viharati ghositārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the mendicants of Kosambī were fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kosambiyaṁ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti.
[¶3] Then a mendicant went up to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and told him what was happening, adding: “Please, sir go to those mendicants out of sympathy.” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Atha kho aññataro bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idha, bhante, kosambiyaṁ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti. Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶4] Then the Buddha went up to those mendicants and said, “Enough, mendicants! Stop fighting, quarreling, and disputing.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “alaṁ, bhikkhave, mā bhaṇḍanaṁ, mā kalahaṁ, mā viggahaṁ, mā vivādan”ti.
[¶5] When he said this, one of the mendicants said to the Buddha, “Wait, sir! Let the Buddha, the Lord of the Dhamma, remain passive, dwelling in blissful meditation in this life. We will be known for this fighting, quarreling, arguing, and disputing.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “āgametu, bhante. Bhagavā dhammassāmī; appossukko, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ anuyutto viharatu; mayametena bhaṇḍanena kalahena viggahena vivādena paññāyissāmā”ti.
[¶6] For a second time … and a third time the Buddha said to those mendicants, “Enough, mendicants! Stop fighting, quarreling, and disputing.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho bhagavā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “alaṁ, bhikkhave, mā bhaṇḍanaṁ, mā kalahaṁ, mā viggahaṁ, mā vivādan”ti. Dutiyampi kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “āgametu, bhante. Bhagavā dhammassāmī; appossukko, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ anuyutto viharatu; mayametena bhaṇḍanena kalahena viggahena vivādena paññāyissāmā”ti. Tatiyampi kho bhagavā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “alaṁ, bhikkhave, mā bhaṇḍanaṁ, mā kalahaṁ, mā viggahaṁ, mā vivādan”ti.
[¶7] For a third time, that mendicant said to the Buddha, “Wait, sir! Let the Buddha, the Lord of the Dhamma, remain passive, dwelling in blissful meditation in this life. We will be known for this fighting, quarreling, arguing, and disputing.”
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “āgametu, bhante. Bhagavā dhammassāmī; appossukko, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ anuyutto viharatu; mayametena bhaṇḍanena kalahena viggahena vivādena paññāyissāmā”ti.
[¶8] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Kosambī for alms. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he set his lodgings in order. Taking his bowl and robe, he recited these verses while standing right there:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya kosambiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Kosambiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya ṭhitakova imā gāthā abhāsi:
[¶9] “Many voices shout at once,
yet no one thinks that they’re the fool.
Even as the Saṅgha splits,
they think no better of the other.
> Pali: “Puthusaddo samajano,
na bālo koci maññatha;
Saṅghasmiṁ bhijjamānasmiṁ,
nāññaṁ bhiyyo amaññaruṁ.
[¶10] Dolts pretending to be astute,
they talk, their words out of bounds.
They blab at will, their mouths agape,
and not one knows what leads them on.
> Pali: Parimuṭṭhā paṇḍitābhāsā,
vācāgocarabhāṇino;
Yāvicchanti mukhāyāmaṁ,
yena nītā na taṁ vidū.
[¶11] ‘They abused me, they hit me!
They beat me, they robbed me!’
For those bearing such a grudge,
hatred is never laid to rest.
> Pali: Akkocchi maṁ avadhi maṁ,
ajini maṁ ahāsi me;
Ye ca taṁ upanayhanti,
veraṁ tesaṁ na sammati.
[¶12] ‘They abused me, they hit me!
They beat me, they robbed me!’
For those who bear no such grudge,
hatred is laid to rest.
> Pali: Akkocchi maṁ avadhi maṁ,
ajini maṁ ahāsi me;
Ye ca taṁ nupanayhanti,
veraṁ tesūpasammati.
[¶13] For never is hatred
laid to rest by hate,
it’s laid to rest by love:
this is an ancient teaching.
> Pali: Na hi verena verāni,
sammantīdha kudācanaṁ;
Averena ca sammanti,
esa dhammo sanantano.
[¶14] When others do not understand,
let us, who do understand this,
restrain ourselves in this regard;
for that is how conflicts are laid to rest.
> Pali: Pare ca na vijānanti,
mayamettha yamāmase;
Ye ca tattha vijānanti,
tato sammanti medhagā.
[¶15] Breakers of bones and takers of life,
thieves of cattle, horses, wealth,
those who plunder the nation:
even they can come together,
so why can’t you?
> Pali: Aṭṭhicchinnā pāṇaharā,
gavassadhanahārino;
Raṭṭhaṁ vilumpamānānaṁ,
tesampi hoti saṅgati;
Kasmā tumhākaṁ no siyā.
[¶16] If you find an alert companion,
an attentive friend to live happily together,
then, overcoming all adversities,
wander with them, joyful and mindful.
> Pali: Sace labhetha nipakaṁ sahāyaṁ,
Saddhiṁ caraṁ sādhuvihāri dhīraṁ;
Abhibhuyya sabbāni parissayāni,
Careyya tenattamano satīmā.
[¶17] If you find no alert companion,
no attentive friend to live happily together,
then, like a king who flees his conquered realm,
wander alone like a tusker in the wilds.
> Pali: No ce labhetha nipakaṁ sahāyaṁ,
Saddhiṁ caraṁ sādhuvihāri dhīraṁ;
Rājāva raṭṭhaṁ vijitaṁ pahāya,
Eko care mātaṅgaraññeva nāgo.
[¶18] It’s better to wander alone,
there’s no fellowship with fools.
Wander alone and do no wrong,
at ease like a tusker in the wilds.”
> Pali: Ekassa caritaṁ seyyo,
Natthi bāle sahāyatā;
Eko care na ca pāpāni kayirā,
Appossukko mātaṅgaraññeva nāgo”ti.
[¶19] After speaking these verses while standing, the Buddha went to the village of the child salt-miners, where Venerable Bhagu was staying at the time. Bhagu saw the Buddha coming off in the distance, so he spread out a seat and placed water for washing the feet. The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, and washed his feet. Bhagu bowed to the Buddha and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ṭhitakova imā gāthā bhāsitvā yena bālakaloṇakāragāmo tenupasaṅkami. Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā bhagu bālakaloṇakāragāme viharati. Addasā kho āyasmā bhagu bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna āsanaṁ paññapesi udakañca pādānaṁ dhovanaṁ. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Nisajja pāde pakkhālesi. Āyasmāpi kho bhagu bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶20] The Buddha said to him, “I hope you’re keeping well, mendicant, I hope you’re all right. And I hope you’re having no trouble getting almsfood.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ bhaguṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “kacci, bhikkhu, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ, kacci piṇḍakena na kilamasī”ti?
[¶21] “I’m keeping well, Blessed One, I’m all right. And I’m having no trouble getting almsfood.”
> Pali: “Khamanīyaṁ bhagavā, yāpanīyaṁ bhagavā, na cāhaṁ, bhante, piṇḍakena kilamāmī”ti.
[¶22] Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired Bhagu with a Dhamma talk, after which he rose from his seat and set out for the Park of the East-Raftered Hall.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ bhaguṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena pācīnavaṁsadāyo tenupasaṅkami.
[¶23] Now at that time the venerables Anuruddha, Nandiya, and Kimbila were staying in the Park of the East-Raftered Hall. The park keeper saw the Buddha coming off in the distance and said to the Buddha, “Don’t come into this park, ascetic. There are three gentlemen staying here whose nature is to desire self-knowledge. Do not disturb them.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo pācīnavaṁsadāye viharanti. Addasā kho dāyapālo bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mā, mahāsamaṇa, etaṁ dāyaṁ pāvisi. Santettha tayo kulaputtā attakāmarūpā viharanti. Mā tesaṁ aphāsumakāsī”ti.
[¶24] Anuruddha heard the park keeper conversing with the Buddha, and said to him, “Don’t keep the Buddha out, good park keeper! Our Teacher, the Blessed One, has arrived.”
> Pali: Assosi kho āyasmā anuruddho dāyapālassa bhagavatā saddhiṁ mantayamānassa. Sutvāna dāyapālaṁ etadavoca: “mā, āvuso dāyapāla, bhagavantaṁ vāresi. Satthā no bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶25] Then Anuruddha went to Nandiya and Kimbila, and said to them, “Come forth, venerables, come forth! Our Teacher, the Blessed One, has arrived!”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho yenāyasmā ca nandiyo yenāyasmā ca kimilo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantañca nandiyaṁ āyasmantañca kimilaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto, satthā no bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶26] Then Anuruddha, Nandiya, and Kimbila came out to greet the Buddha. One received his bowl and robe, one spread out a seat, and one set out water for washing his feet. The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, and washed his feet. Those venerables bowed and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca nandiyo āyasmā ca kimilo bhagavantaṁ paccuggantvā eko bhagavato pattacīvaraṁ paṭiggahesi, eko āsanaṁ paññapesi, eko pādodakaṁ upaṭṭhapesi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Nisajja pāde pakkhālesi. Tepi kho āyasmanto bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶27] The Buddha said to Anuruddha, “I hope you’re keeping well, Anuruddha and friends, I hope you’re all right. And I hope you’re having no trouble getting almsfood.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “kacci vo, anuruddhā, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ, kacci piṇḍakena na kilamathā”ti?
[¶28] “We’re keeping well, Blessed One, we’re getting by. And we have no trouble getting almsfood.”
> Pali: “Khamanīyaṁ bhagavā, yāpanīyaṁ bhagavā, na ca mayaṁ, bhante, piṇḍakena kilamāmā”ti.
[¶29] “I hope you’re living in harmony, appreciating each other, without quarreling, blending like milk and water, and regarding each other with kindly eyes?”
> Pali: “Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharathā”ti?
[¶30] “Indeed, sir, we live in harmony as you say.”
> Pali: “Taggha mayaṁ, bhante, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharāmā”ti.
[¶31] “But how do you live this way?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana tumhe, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharathā”ti?
[¶32] “In this case, sir, I think: ‘I’m fortunate, so very fortunate, to live together with spiritual companions such as these.’ I consistently treat these venerables with kindness by way of body, speech, and mind, both in public and in private. I think: ‘Why don’t I set aside my own ideas and just go along with these venerables’ ideas?’ And that’s what I do. Though we’re different in body, sir, we’re one in mind, it seems to me.”
> Pali: “Idha mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me yohaṁ evarūpehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṁ viharāmī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, imesu āyasmantesu mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca, mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca, mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca. Tassa, mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘yannūnāhaṁ sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vatteyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vattāmi. Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyā, ekañca pana maññe cittan”ti.
[¶33] And the venerables Nandiya and Kimbila spoke likewise, and they added: “That’s how we live in harmony, appreciating each other, without dispute, blending like milk and water, and regarding each other with kindly eyes.”
> Pali: Āyasmāpi kho nandiyo …pe… āyasmāpi kho kimilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mayhampi kho, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṁ vata me yohaṁ evarūpehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṁ viharāmī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, imesu āyasmantesu mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca, mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca, mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ āvi ceva raho ca. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ hoti: ‘yannūnāhaṁ sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vatteyyan’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, sakaṁ cittaṁ nikkhipitvā imesaṁyeva āyasmantānaṁ cittassa vasena vattāmi. Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyā, ekañca pana maññe cittanti. Evaṁ kho mayaṁ, bhante, samaggā sammodamānā avivadamānā khīrodakībhūtā aññamaññaṁ piyacakkhūhi sampassantā viharāmā”ti.
[¶34] “Good, good, Anuruddha and friends! But I hope you’re living diligently, keen, and resolute?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharathā”ti?
[¶35] “Indeed, sir, we live diligently.”
> Pali: “Taggha mayaṁ, bhante, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharāmā”ti.
[¶36] “But how do you live this way?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana tumhe, anuruddhā, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharathā”ti?
[¶37] “In this case, sir, whoever returns first from almsround prepares the seats, and puts out the drinking water and the rubbish bin. If there’s remainder, whoever returns last eats it if they like. Otherwise they throw it out where there is little that grows, or drop it into water that has no living creatures. Then they put away the seats, drinking water, and rubbish bin, and sweep the refectory. If someone sees that the pot of water for washing, drinking, or the toilet is empty they set it up. If he can’t do it, he summons another with a wave of the hand, and they set it up by lending each other a hand to lift. But we don’t break into speech for that reason. And every five days we sit together for the whole night and discuss the teachings. That’s how we live diligently, keen, and resolute.”
> Pali: “Idha, bhante, amhākaṁ yo paṭhamaṁ gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamati, so āsanāni paññapeti, pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti, avakkārapātiṁ upaṭṭhāpeti. Yo pacchā gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamati—sace hoti bhuttāvaseso, sace ākaṅkhati, bhuñjati; no ce ākaṅkhati, appaharite vā chaḍḍeti apāṇake vā udake opilāpeti— so āsanāni paṭisāmeti, pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ paṭisāmeti, avakkārapātiṁ dhovitvā paṭisāmeti, bhattaggaṁ sammajjati. Yo passati pānīyaghaṭaṁ vā paribhojanīyaghaṭaṁ vā vaccaghaṭaṁ vā rittaṁ tucchaṁ so upaṭṭhāpeti. Sacassa hoti avisayhaṁ, hatthavikārena dutiyaṁ āmantetvā hatthavilaṅghakena upaṭṭhāpema, na tveva mayaṁ, bhante, tappaccayā vācaṁ bhindāma. Pañcāhikaṁ kho pana mayaṁ, bhante, sabbarattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sannisīdāma. Evaṁ kho mayaṁ, bhante, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharāmā”ti.
[¶38] “Good, good, Anuruddha and friends! But as you live diligently like this, have you achieved any superhuman distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble ones, a comfortable meditation?”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, anuruddhā. Atthi pana vo, anuruddhā, evaṁ appamattānaṁ ātāpīnaṁ pahitattānaṁ viharataṁ uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro”ti?
[¶39] “Well, sir, while meditating diligent, keen, and resolute, we perceive both light and vision of forms. But before long the light and the vision of forms vanish. We haven’t worked out the basis of that.”
> Pali: “Idha mayaṁ, bhante, appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharantā obhāsañceva sañjānāma dassanañca rūpānaṁ. So kho pana no obhāso nacirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ; tañca nimittaṁ nappaṭivijjhāmā”ti.
[¶40] “Well, you should work out the basis of that. Before my awakening—when I was still unawakened but intent on awakening—I too perceived light and vision of forms. But before long my light and vision of forms vanished. It occurred to me: ‘What’s the cause, what’s the reason why my light and vision of forms vanish?’ It occurred to me: ‘Doubt arose in me, and because of that my immersion fell away. When immersion falls away, the light and vision of forms vanish. I’ll make sure that doubt will not arise in me again.’
> Pali: “Taṁ kho pana vo, anuruddhā, nimittaṁ paṭivijjhitabbaṁ. Ahampi sudaṁ, anuruddhā, pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddho bodhisattova samāno obhāsañceva sañjānāmi dassanañca rūpānaṁ. So kho pana me obhāso nacirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘ko nu kho hetu ko paccayo yena me obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānan’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘vicikicchā kho me udapādi, vicikicchādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissatī’ti.
[¶41] While meditating diligent, keen, and resolute, I perceived light and vision of forms. But before long my light and vision of forms vanished. It occurred to me: ‘What’s the cause, what’s the reason why my light and vision of forms vanish?’ It occurred to me: ‘Loss of focus arose in me, and because of that my immersion fell away. When immersion falls away, the light and vision of forms vanish. I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā, appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto obhāsañceva sañjānāmi dassanañca rūpānaṁ. So kho pana me obhāso nacirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘ko nu kho hetu ko paccayo yena me obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānan’ti? Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘amanasikāro kho me udapādi, amanasikārādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro’ti.
[¶42] While meditating … ‘Dullness and drowsiness arose in me … I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘thinamiddhaṁ kho me udapādi, thinamiddhādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhan’ti.
[¶43] While meditating … ‘Terror arose in me, and because of that my immersion fell away. When immersion falls away, the light and vision of forms vanish. Suppose a person was traveling along a road, and killers were to spring out at them from both sides. They’d feel terrified because of that. In the same way, terror arose in me … I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘chambhitattaṁ kho me udapādi, chambhitattādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, anuruddhā, puriso addhānamaggappaṭipanno, tassa ubhatopasse vaṭṭakā uppateyyuṁ, tassa tatonidānaṁ chambhitattaṁ uppajjeyya; evameva kho me, anuruddhā, chambhitattaṁ udapādi, chambhitattādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattan’ti.
[¶44] While meditating … ‘Elation arose in me, and because of that my immersion fell away. When immersion falls away, the light and vision of forms vanish. Suppose a person was looking for the entrance to a treasure trove. And all at once they’d come across five entrances! They’d feel excited because of that. In the same way, elation arose in me … I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror nor elation will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘uppilaṁ kho me udapādi, uppilādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, anuruddhā, puriso ekaṁ nidhimukhaṁ gavesanto sakideva pañcanidhimukhāni adhigaccheyya, tassa tatonidānaṁ uppilaṁ uppajjeyya; evameva kho me, anuruddhā, uppilaṁ udapādi, uppilādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattaṁ, na uppilan’ti.
[¶45] While meditating … ‘Discomfort arose in me … I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror nor elation nor discomfort will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘duṭṭhullaṁ kho me udapādi, duṭṭhullādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattaṁ, na uppilaṁ, na duṭṭhullan’ti.
[¶46] While meditating … ‘Excessive energy arose in me, and because of that my immersion fell away. When immersion falls away, the light and vision of forms vanish. Suppose a person was to grip a quail too tightly in their hands—it would die right there. I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror nor elation nor discomfort nor excessive energy will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘accāraddhavīriyaṁ kho me udapādi, accāraddhavīriyādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, anuruddhā, puriso ubhohi hatthehi vaṭṭakaṁ gāḷhaṁ gaṇheyya, so tattheva patameyya; evameva kho me, anuruddhā, accāraddhavīriyaṁ udapādi, accāraddhavīriyādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattaṁ, na uppilaṁ, na duṭṭhullaṁ, na accāraddhavīriyan’ti.
[¶47] While meditating … ‘Overly lax energy arose in me, and because of that my immersion fell away. When immersion falls away, the light and vision of forms vanish. Suppose a person was to grip a quail too loosely—it would fly out of their hands. I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror nor elation nor discomfort nor excessive energy nor overly lax energy will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘atilīnavīriyaṁ kho me udapādi, atilīnavīriyādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Seyyathāpi, anuruddhā, puriso vaṭṭakaṁ sithilaṁ gaṇheyya, so tassa hatthato uppateyya; evameva kho me, anuruddhā, atilīnavīriyaṁ udapādi, atilīnavīriyādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattaṁ, na uppilaṁ, na duṭṭhullaṁ, na accāraddhavīriyaṁ, na atilīnavīriyan’ti.
[¶48] While meditating … ‘Longing arose in me … I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror nor elation nor discomfort nor excessive energy nor overly lax energy nor longing will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘abhijappā kho me udapādi, abhijappādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattaṁ, na uppilaṁ, na duṭṭhullaṁ, na accāraddhavīriyaṁ, na atilīnavīriyaṁ, na abhijappā’ti.
[¶49] While meditating … ‘Perceptions of diversity arose in me … I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror nor elation nor discomfort nor excessive energy nor overly lax energy nor longing nor perception of diversity will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā …pe… tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘nānattasaññā kho me udapādi, nānattasaññādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattaṁ, na uppilaṁ, na duṭṭhullaṁ, na accāraddhavīriyaṁ, na atilīnavīriyaṁ, na abhijappā, na nānattasaññā’ti.
[¶50] While meditating diligent, keen, and resolute, I perceived light and vision of forms. But before long my light and vision of forms vanished. It occurred to me: ‘What’s the cause, what’s the reason why my light and vision of forms vanish?’ It occurred to me: ‘Excessive concentration on forms arose in me, and because of that my immersion fell away. When immersion falls away, the light and vision of forms vanish. I’ll make sure that neither doubt nor loss of focus nor dullness and drowsiness nor terror nor elation nor discomfort nor excessive energy nor overly lax energy nor longing nor perception of diversity nor excessive concentration on forms will arise in me again.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā, appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto obhāsañceva sañjānāmi dassanañca rūpānaṁ. So kho pana me obhāso nacirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Tassa mayhaṁ anuruddhā etadahosi: ‘ko nu kho hetu ko paccayo yena me obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānan’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘atinijjhāyitattaṁ kho me rūpānaṁ udapādi, atinijjhāyitattādhikaraṇañca pana me rūpānaṁ samādhi cavi. Samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṁ. Sohaṁ tathā karissāmi yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati, na amanasikāro, na thinamiddhaṁ, na chambhitattaṁ, na uppilaṁ, na duṭṭhullaṁ, na accāraddhavīriyaṁ, na atilīnavīriyaṁ, na abhijappā, na nānattasaññā, na atinijjhāyitattaṁ rūpānan’ti.
[¶51] When I understood that doubt is a corruption of the mind, I gave it up. When I understood that loss of focus, dullness and drowsiness, terror, elation, discomfort, excessive energy, overly lax energy, longing, perception of diversity, and excessive concentration on forms are corruptions of the mind, I gave them up.
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā, ‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā vicikicchaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘amanasikāro cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā amanasikāraṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘thinamiddhaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā thinamiddhaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘chambhitattaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā chambhitattaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘uppilaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā uppilaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘duṭṭhullaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā duṭṭhullaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘accāraddhavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā accāraddhavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘atilīnavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā atilīnavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘abhijappā cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā abhijappaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘nānattasaññā cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā nānattasaññaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ, ‘atinijjhāyitattaṁ rūpānaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā atinijjhāyitattaṁ rūpānaṁ cittassa upakkilesaṁ pajahiṁ.
[¶52] While meditating diligent, keen, and resolute, I perceived light but did not see forms, or I saw forms, but did not see light. And this went on for a whole night, a whole day, even a whole night and day. I thought: ‘What is the cause, what is the reason for this?’ It occurred to me: ‘When I don’t focus on the basis of the forms, but focus on the basis of the light, then I perceive light and do not see forms. But when I don’t focus on the basis of the light, but focus on the basis of the forms, then I see forms and do not perceive light. And this goes on for a whole night, a whole day, even a whole night and day.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā, appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto obhāsañhi kho sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi; rūpāni hi kho passāmi, na ca obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi: ‘kevalampi rattiṁ, kevalampi divaṁ, kevalampi rattindivaṁ’. Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘ko nu kho hetu ko paccayo yvāhaṁ obhāsañhi kho sañjānāmi na ca rūpāni passāmi; rūpāni hi kho passāmi na ca obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi— kevalampi rattiṁ, kevalampi divaṁ, kevalampi rattindivan’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘yasmiñhi kho ahaṁ samaye rūpanimittaṁ amanasikaritvā obhāsanimittaṁ manasi karomi, obhāsañhi kho tasmiṁ samaye sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi. Yasmiṁ panāhaṁ samaye obhāsanimittaṁ amanasikaritvā rūpanimittaṁ manasi karomi, rūpāni hi kho tasmiṁ samaye passāmi na ca obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi— kevalampi rattiṁ, kevalampi divaṁ, kevalampi rattindivan’ti.
[¶53] While meditating diligent, keen, and resolute, I perceived limited light and saw limited forms, or I perceived limitless light and saw limitless forms. And this went on for a whole night, a whole day, even a whole night and day. I thought: ‘What is the cause, what is the reason for this?’ It occurred to me: ‘When my immersion is limited, then my vision is limited, and with limited vision I perceive limited light and see limited forms. But when my immersion is limitless, then my vision is limitless, and with limitless vision I perceive limitless light and see limitless forms. And this goes on for a whole night, a whole day, even a whole night and day.’
> Pali: So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā, appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto parittañceva obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi, parittāni ca rūpāni passāmi; appamāṇañceva obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi, appamāṇāni ca rūpāni passāmi: ‘kevalampi rattiṁ, kevalampi divaṁ, kevalampi rattindivaṁ’. Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘ko nu kho hetu ko paccayo yvāhaṁ parittañceva obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi, parittāni ca rūpāni passāmi; appamāṇañceva obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi, appamāṇāni ca rūpāni passāmi— kevalampi rattiṁ, kevalampi divaṁ, kevalampi rattindivan’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘yasmiṁ kho me samaye paritto samādhi hoti, parittaṁ me tasmiṁ samaye cakkhu hoti. Sohaṁ parittena cakkhunā parittañceva obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi, parittāni ca rūpāni passāmi. Yasmiṁ pana me samaye appamāṇo samādhi hoti, appamāṇaṁ me tasmiṁ samaye cakkhu hoti. Sohaṁ appamāṇena cakkhunā appamāṇañceva obhāsaṁ sañjānāmi, appamāṇāni ca rūpāni passāmi— kevalampi rattiṁ, kevalampi divaṁ, kevalampi rattindivan’ti.
[¶54] After understanding that doubt, loss of focus, dullness and drowsiness, terror, excitement, discomfort, excessive energy, overly lax energy, longing, perception of diversity, and excessive concentration on forms are corruptions of the mind, I had given them up.
> Pali: Yato kho me, anuruddhā, ‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā vicikicchā cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘amanasikāro cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā amanasikāro cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘thinamiddhaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā thinamiddhaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘chambhitattaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā chambhitattaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘uppilaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā uppilaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘duṭṭhullaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā duṭṭhullaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘accāraddhavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā accāraddhavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘atilīnavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā atilīnavīriyaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘abhijappā cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā abhijappā cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘nānattasaññā cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā nānattasaññā cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi, ‘atinijjhāyitattaṁ rūpānaṁ cittassa upakkileso’ti—iti viditvā atinijjhāyitattaṁ rūpānaṁ cittassa upakkileso pahīno ahosi.
[¶55] I thought: ‘I’ve given up my mental corruptions. Now let me develop immersion in three ways.’ I developed immersion while placing the mind and keeping it connected; without placing the mind, merely keeping it connected; without placing the mind or keeping it connected; with rapture; without rapture; with pleasure; with equanimity.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, anuruddhā, etadahosi: ‘ye kho me cittassa upakkilesā te me pahīnā. Handa dānāhaṁ tividhena samādhiṁ bhāvemī’ti. So kho ahaṁ, anuruddhā, savitakkampi savicāraṁ samādhiṁ bhāvesiṁ, avitakkampi vicāramattaṁ samādhiṁ bhāvesiṁ, avitakkampi avicāraṁ samādhiṁ bhāvesiṁ, sappītikampi samādhiṁ bhāvesiṁ, nippītikampi samādhiṁ bhāvesiṁ, sātasahagatampi samādhiṁ bhāvesiṁ, upekkhāsahagatampi samādhiṁ bhāvesiṁ.
[¶56] When I had developed immersion in these ways, the knowledge and vision arose in me: ‘My freedom is unshakable; this is my last rebirth; now there’ll be no more future lives.’”
> Pali: Yato kho me, anuruddhā, savitakkopi savicāro samādhi bhāvito ahosi, avitakkopi vicāramatto samādhi bhāvito ahosi, avitakkopi avicāro samādhi bhāvito ahosi, sappītikopi samādhi bhāvito ahosi, nippītikopi samādhi bhāvito ahosi, sātasahagatopi samādhi bhāvito ahosi, upekkhāsahagatopi samādhi bhāvito ahosi. Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṁ udapādi, akuppā me cetovimutti. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.
[¶57] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Anuruddha approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā anuruddho bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶58] > Pali: Upakkilesasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 141. MN 129 · The Foolish and the Astute · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/141/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/141/#p-N
[¶0] MN 129 · The Foolish and the Astute
> Pali: MN 129 · Bālapaṇḍitasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “These are the three characteristics, signs, and manifestations of a fool. What three? A fool thinks poorly, speaks poorly, and acts poorly. If a fool didn’t think poorly, speak poorly, and act poorly, then how would the astute know of them, ‘This worthy one is a fool, an untrue person’? But since a fool does think poorly, speak poorly, and act poorly, then the astute do know of them, ‘This worthy one is a fool, an untrue person’.
> Pali: “Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni bālanimittāni bālāpadānāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Idha, bhikkhave, bālo duccintitacintī ca hoti dubbhāsitabhāsī ca dukkaṭakammakārī ca. No cetaṁ, bhikkhave, bālo duccintitacintī ca abhavissa dubbhāsitabhāsī ca dukkaṭakammakārī ca kena naṁ paṇḍitā jāneyyuṁ: ‘bālo ayaṁ bhavaṁ asappuriso’ti? Yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, bālo duccintitacintī ca hoti dubbhāsitabhāsī ca dukkaṭakammakārī ca tasmā naṁ paṇḍitā jānanti: ‘bālo ayaṁ bhavaṁ asappuriso’ti.
[¶4] A fool experiences three kinds of suffering and sadness in this very life.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo tividhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶5] Suppose a fool is sitting in a council hall, a street, or a crossroad, where people are discussing what is proper and fitting. And suppose that fool is someone who kills living creatures, steals, commits sexual misconduct, lies, and consumes intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor. Then that fool thinks, ‘These people are discussing what is proper and fitting. But those bad things are found in me and I exhibit them!’ This is the first kind of suffering and sadness that a fool experiences in this very life.
> Pali: Sace, bhikkhave, bālo sabhāyaṁ vā nisinno hoti, rathikāya vā nisinno hoti, siṅghāṭake vā nisinno hoti; tatra ce jano tajjaṁ tassāruppaṁ kathaṁ manteti. Sace, bhikkhave, bālo pāṇātipātī hoti, adinnādāyī hoti, kāmesumicchācārī hoti, musāvādī hoti, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhāyī hoti. Tatra, bhikkhave, bālassa evaṁ hoti: ‘yaṁ kho jano tajjaṁ tassāruppaṁ kathaṁ manteti, saṁvijjanteva te dhammā mayi, ahañca tesu dhammesu sandissāmī’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, bālo paṭhamaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶6] Furthermore, a fool sees that the kings have arrested a bandit, a criminal, and subjected them to various punishments— whipping, caning, and clubbing; cutting off hands or feet, or both; cutting off ears or nose, or both; the ‘porridge pot’, the ‘shell-shave’, the ‘Rāhu’s mouth’, the ‘garland of fire’, the ‘burning hand’, the ‘bulrush twist’, the ‘bark dress’, the ‘antelope’, the ‘meat hook’, the ‘coins’, the ‘caustic pickle’, the ‘twisting bar’, the ‘straw mat’; being splashed with hot oil, being fed to the hounds, being impaled alive, and being beheaded. Then that fool thinks, ‘The kinds of deeds for which the kings inflict such punishments— those things are found in me and I exhibit them! If the kings find out about me, they will inflict the same kinds of punishments on me!’ This is the second kind of suffering and sadness that a fool experiences in this very life.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bālo passati rājāno coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārente— kasāhipi tāḷente vettehipi tāḷente addhadaṇḍakehipi tāḷente hatthampi chindante pādampi chindante hatthapādampi chindante kaṇṇampi chindante nāsampi chindante kaṇṇanāsampi chindante bilaṅgathālikampi karonte saṅkhamuṇḍikampi karonte rāhumukhampi karonte jotimālikampi karonte hatthapajjotikampi karonte erakavattikampi karonte cīrakavāsikampi karonte eṇeyyakampi karonte baḷisamaṁsikampi karonte kahāpaṇikampi karonte khārāpatacchikampi karonte palighaparivattikampi karonte palālapīṭhakampi karonte tattenapi telena osiñcante sunakhehipi khādāpente jīvantampi sūle uttāsente asināpi sīsaṁ chindante. Tatra, bhikkhave, bālassa evaṁ hoti: ‘yathārūpānaṁ kho pāpakānaṁ kammānaṁ hetu rājāno coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti— kasāhipi tāḷenti …pe… asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti; saṁvijjanteva te dhammā mayi, ahañca tesu dhammesu sandissāmi. Mañcepi rājāno jāneyyuṁ, mampi rājāno gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kāreyyuṁ— kasāhipi tāḷeyyuṁ …pe… jīvantampi sūle uttāseyyuṁ, asināpi sīsaṁ chindeyyun’ti. Idampi, bhikkhave, bālo dutiyaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶7] Furthermore, when a fool is resting on a chair or a bed or on the ground, their past bad deeds—misconduct of body, speech, and mind—settle down upon them, rest down upon them, and lay down upon them. It is like the shadow of a great mountain peak in the evening as it settles down, rests down, and lays down upon the earth. In the same way, when a fool is resting on a chair or a bed or on the ground, their past bad deeds—misconduct of body, speech, and mind—settle down upon them, rest down upon them, and lay down upon them. Then that fool thinks, ‘Alas, I haven’t done good and skillful things that keep me safe. And I have done bad things, violence and sin. When I depart, I’ll go to the place where people who’ve done such things go.’ They sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breasts and falling into confusion. This is the third kind of suffering and sadness that a fool experiences in this very life.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bālaṁ pīṭhasamārūḷhaṁ vā mañcasamārūḷhaṁ vā chamāyaṁ vā semānaṁ, yānissa pubbe pāpakāni kammāni katāni kāyena duccaritāni vācāya duccaritāni manasā duccaritāni tānissa tamhi samaye olambanti ajjholambanti abhippalambanti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahataṁ pabbatakūṭānaṁ chāyā sāyanhasamayaṁ pathaviyā olambanti ajjholambanti abhippalambanti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bālaṁ pīṭhasamārūḷhaṁ vā mañcasamārūḷhaṁ vā chamāyaṁ vā semānaṁ, yānissa pubbe pāpakāni kammāni katāni kāyena duccaritāni vācāya duccaritāni manasā duccaritāni tānissa tamhi samaye olambanti ajjholambanti abhippalambanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, bālassa evaṁ hoti: ‘akataṁ vata me kalyāṇaṁ, akataṁ kusalaṁ, akataṁ bhīruttāṇaṁ; kataṁ pāpaṁ, kataṁ luddaṁ, kataṁ kibbisaṁ. Yāvatā, bho, akatakalyāṇānaṁ akatakusalānaṁ akatabhīruttāṇānaṁ katapāpānaṁ kataluddānaṁ katakibbisānaṁ gati taṁ gatiṁ pecca gacchāmī’ti. So socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati. Idampi, bhikkhave, bālo tatiyaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶8] Having done bad things by way of body, speech, and mind, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.
[¶9] And if there’s anything of which it may be rightly said that it is utterly unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable, it is of hell that this should be said. So much so that it’s not easy to give a simile for how painful hell is.”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho taṁ, bhikkhave, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘ekantaṁ aniṭṭhaṁ ekantaṁ akantaṁ ekantaṁ amanāpan’ti, nirayameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘ekantaṁ aniṭṭhaṁ ekantaṁ akantaṁ ekantaṁ amanāpan’ti. Yāvañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, upamāpi na sukarā yāva dukkhā nirayā”ti.
[¶10] When he said this, one of the mendicants said to the Buddha, “But sir, is it possible to give a simile?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sakkā pana, bhante, upamaṁ kātun”ti?
[¶11] “It’s possible,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Sakkā, bhikkhū”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶12] “Suppose they arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to the king, saying, ‘Your Majesty, this is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ The king would say, ‘Go, my men, and strike this man in the morning with a hundred spears!’ The king’s men did as they were told. Then at midday the king would say, ‘Look here, how is that man?’ ‘He’s still alive, Your Majesty.’ The king would say, ‘Go, my men, and strike this man in the midday with a hundred spears!’ The king’s men did as they were told. Then late in the afternoon the king would say, ‘Look here, how is that man?’ ‘He’s still alive, Your Majesty.’ The king would say, ‘Go, my men, and strike this man in the late afternoon with a hundred spears!’ The king’s men did as they were told.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā rañño dasseyyuṁ: ‘ayaṁ kho, deva, coro āgucārī, imassa yaṁ icchasi taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Tamenaṁ rājā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘gacchatha, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ pubbaṇhasamayaṁ sattisatena hanathā’ti. Tamenaṁ pubbaṇhasamayaṁ sattisatena haneyyuṁ. Atha rājā majjhanhikasamayaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ambho, kathaṁ so puriso’ti? ‘Tatheva, deva, jīvatī’ti. Tamenaṁ rājā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘gacchatha, bho, taṁ purisaṁ majjhanhikasamayaṁ sattisatena hanathā’ti. Tamenaṁ majjhanhikasamayaṁ sattisatena haneyyuṁ. Atha rājā sāyanhasamayaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ambho, kathaṁ so puriso’ti? ‘Tatheva, deva, jīvatī’ti. Tamenaṁ rājā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘gacchatha, bho, taṁ purisaṁ sāyanhasamayaṁ sattisatena hanathā’ti. Tamenaṁ sāyanhasamayaṁ sattisatena haneyyuṁ.
[¶13] What do you think, mendicants? Would that man experience pain and distress from being struck with three hundred spears?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so puriso tīhi sattisatehi haññamāno tatonidānaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvediyethā”ti?
[¶14] “Sir, that man would experience pain and distress from being struck with one spear, let alone three hundred spears!”
> Pali: “Ekissāpi, bhante, sattiyā haññamāno so puriso tatonidānaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvediyetha, ko pana vādo tīhi sattisatehī”ti?
[¶15] Then the Buddha, picking up a stone the size of his palm, addressed the mendicants, “What do you think, mendicants? Which is bigger: the stone the size of my palm that I’ve picked up, or the Himalayas, the king of mountains?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā parittaṁ pāṇimattaṁ pāsāṇaṁ gahetvā bhikkhū āmantesi: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamo nu kho mahantataro—yo cāyaṁ mayā paritto pāṇimatto pāsāṇo gahito, yo ca himavā pabbatarājā”ti?
[¶16] “Sir, the stone you’ve picked up is tiny. Compared to the Himalayas, it doesn’t count, it’s not worth a fraction, there’s no comparison.”
> Pali: “Appamattako ayaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā paritto pāṇimatto pāsāṇo gahito, himavantaṁ pabbatarājānaṁ upanidhāya saṅkhampi na upeti, kalabhāgampi na upeti, upanidhampi na upe”ti.
[¶17] “In the same way, compared to the suffering in hell, the pain and distress experienced by that man due to being struck with three hundred spears doesn’t count, it’s not worth a fraction, there’s no comparison.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṁ so puriso tīhi sattisatehi haññamāno tatonidānaṁ dukkhaṁ domanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti taṁ nirayakassa dukkhassa upanidhāya saṅkhampi na upeti, kalabhāgampi na upeti, upanidhampi na upeti.
[¶18] The wardens of hell punish them with the five-fold crucifixion. They drive red-hot stakes through the hands and feet, and another in the middle of the chest. And there they feel painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā pañcavidhabandhanaṁ nāma kammakāraṇaṁ karonti— tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ hatthe gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ dutiye hatthe gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ pāde gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ dutiye pāde gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ majjhe urasmiṁ gamenti. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶19] The wardens of hell throw them down and hack them with axes. …
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā saṁvesetvā kuṭhārīhi tacchanti. So tattha dukkhā tibbā …pe… byantīhoti.
[¶20] They hang them upside-down and hack them with hatchets. …
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā uddhampādaṁ adhosiraṁ gahetvā vāsīhi tacchanti. So tattha dukkhā tibbā …pe… byantīhoti.
[¶21] They harness them to a chariot, and drive them back and forth across burning ground, blazing and glowing. …
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā rathe yojetvā ādittāya pathaviyā sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya sārentipi paccāsārentipi. So tattha dukkhā tibbā …pe… byantīhoti.
[¶22] They make them climb up and down a big mountain of burning coals, blazing and glowing. …
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā mahantaṁ aṅgārapabbataṁ ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ āropentipi oropentipi. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶23] The wardens of hell turn them upside down and throw them into a red-hot copper pot, burning, blazing, and glowing. There they’re seared in boiling scum, and they’re swept up and down and round and round. And there they feel painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā uddhampādaṁ adhosiraṁ gahetvā tattāya lohakumbhiyā pakkhipanti ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya. So tattha pheṇuddehakaṁ paccati. So tattha pheṇuddehakaṁ paccamāno sakimpi uddhaṁ gacchati, sakimpi adho gacchati, sakimpi tiriyaṁ gacchati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶24] The wardens of hell toss them in the Great Hell. Now, about that Great Hell:
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā mahāniraye pakkhipanti. So kho pana, bhikkhave, mahānirayo—
[¶25] ‘Four are its corners, four its doors,
neatly divided section by section.
Surrounded by an iron wall,
of iron is its roof.
> Pali: Catukkaṇṇo catudvāro,
vibhatto bhāgaso mito;
Ayopākārapariyanto,
ayasā paṭikujjito.
[¶26] The ground is even made of iron,
it burns with fierce fire.
The heat forever radiates
a hundred leagues around.’
> Pali: Tassa ayomayā bhūmi,
jalitā tejasā yutā;
Samantā yojanasataṁ,
pharitvā tiṭṭhati sabbadā.
[¶27] I could tell you many different things about hell. So much so that it’s not easy to completely describe the suffering in hell.
> Pali: Anekapariyāyenapi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayakathaṁ katheyyaṁ; yāvañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, na sukarā akkhānena pāpuṇituṁ yāva dukkhā nirayā.
[¶28] There are, mendicants, animals that feed on grass. They eat by cropping fresh or dried grass with their teeth. And what animals feed on grass? Elephants, horses, cattle, donkeys, goats, deer, and various others. A fool who used to be a glutton here and did bad deeds here, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in the company of those sentient beings who feed on grass.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā. Te allānipi tiṇāni sukkhānipi tiṇāni dantullehakaṁ khādanti. Katame ca, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā? Hatthī assā goṇā gadrabhā ajā migā, ye vā panaññepi keci tiracchānagatā pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo idha pubbe rasādo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tesaṁ sattānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati ye te sattā tiṇabhakkhā.
[¶29] There are animals that feed on dung. When they catch a whiff of dung they run to it, thinking, ‘There we’ll eat! There we’ll eat!’ It’s like when brahmins smell a burnt offering, they run to it, thinking, ‘There we’ll eat! There we’ll eat!’ In the same way, there are animals that feed on dung. When they catch a whiff of dung they run to it, thinking, ‘There we’ll eat! There we’ll eat!’ And what animals feed on dung? Chickens, pigs, hounds, jackals, and various others. A fool who used to be a glutton here and did bad deeds here, after death is reborn in the company of those sentient beings who feed on dung.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā gūthabhakkhā. Te dūratova gūthagandhaṁ ghāyitvā dhāvanti: ‘ettha bhuñjissāma, ettha bhuñjissāmā’ti. Seyyathāpi nāma brāhmaṇā āhutigandhena dhāvanti: ‘ettha bhuñjissāma, ettha bhuñjissāmā’ti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, santi tiracchānagatā pāṇā gūthabhakkhā, te dūratova gūthagandhaṁ ghāyitvā dhāvanti: ‘ettha bhuñjissāma, ettha bhuñjissāmā’ti. Katame ca, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā gūthabhakkhā? Kukkuṭā sūkarā soṇā siṅgālā, ye vā panaññepi keci tiracchānagatā pāṇā gūthabhakkhā. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo idha pubbe rasādo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tesaṁ sattānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati ye te sattā gūthabhakkhā.
[¶30] There are animals who are born, live, and die in darkness. And what animals are born, live, and die in darkness? Moths, maggots, earthworms, and various others. A fool who used to be a glutton here and did bad deeds here, after death is reborn in the company of those sentient beings who are born, live, and die in darkness.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā andhakāre jāyanti andhakāre jīyanti andhakāre mīyanti. Katame ca, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā andhakāre jāyanti andhakāre jīyanti andhakāre mīyanti? Kīṭā puḷavā gaṇḍuppādā, ye vā panaññepi keci tiracchānagatā pāṇā andhakāre jāyanti andhakāre jīyanti andhakāre mīyanti. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo idha pubbe rasādo, idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tesaṁ sattānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati ye te sattā andhakāre jāyanti andhakāre jīyanti andhakāre mīyanti.
[¶31] There are animals who are born, live, and die in water. And what animals are born, live, and die in water? Fish, turtles, dolphins, and various others. A fool who used to be a glutton here and did bad deeds here, after death is reborn in the company of those sentient beings who are born, live, and die in water.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā udakasmiṁ jāyanti udakasmiṁ jīyanti udakasmiṁ mīyanti. Katame ca, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā udakasmiṁ jāyanti udakasmiṁ jīyanti udakasmiṁ mīyanti? Macchā kacchapā susumārā, ye vā panaññepi keci tiracchānagatā pāṇā udakasmiṁ jāyanti udakasmiṁ jīyanti udakasmiṁ mīyanti. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo idha pubbe rasādo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tesaṁ sattānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati ye te sattā udakasmiṁ jāyanti udakasmiṁ jīyanti udakasmiṁ mīyanti.
[¶32] There are animals who are born, live, and die in filth. And what animals are born, live, and die in filth? Those animals that are born, live, and die in a rotten fish, a rotten carcass, rotten porridge, a cesspool, or a sump. A fool who used to be a glutton here and did bad deeds here, after death is reborn in the company of those sentient beings who are born, live, and die in filth.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā asucismiṁ jāyanti asucismiṁ jīyanti asucismiṁ mīyanti. Katame ca, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā asucismiṁ jāyanti asucismiṁ jīyanti asucismiṁ mīyanti? Ye te, bhikkhave, sattā pūtimacche vā jāyanti pūtimacche vā jīyanti pūtimacche vā mīyanti pūtikuṇape vā …pe… pūtikummāse vā … candanikāya vā … oligalle vā jāyanti, ye vā panaññepi keci tiracchānagatā pāṇā asucismiṁ jāyanti asucismiṁ jīyanti asucismiṁ mīyanti. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo idha pubbe rasādo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tesaṁ sattānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjati ye te sattā asucismiṁ jāyanti asucismiṁ jīyanti asucismiṁ mīyanti.
[¶33] I could tell you many different things about the animal realm. So much so that it’s not easy to completely describe the suffering in the animal realm.
> Pali: Anekapariyāyenapi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, tiracchānayonikathaṁ katheyyaṁ; yāvañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, na sukaraṁ akkhānena pāpuṇituṁ yāva dukkhā tiracchānayoni.
[¶34] Mendicants, suppose a person were to throw a yoke with a single hole into the ocean. The east wind wafts it west; the west wind wafts it east; the north wind wafts it south; and the south wind wafts it north. And there was a one-eyed turtle who popped up once every hundred years.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso ekacchiggalaṁ yugaṁ mahāsamudde pakkhipeyya. Tamenaṁ puratthimo vāto pacchimena saṁhareyya, pacchimo vāto puratthimena saṁhareyya, uttaro vāto dakkhiṇena saṁhareyya, dakkhiṇo vāto uttarena saṁhareyya. Tatrāssa kāṇo kacchapo, so vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena sakiṁ ummujjeyya.
[¶35] What do you think, mendicants? Would that one-eyed turtle still poke its neck through the hole in that yoke?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu so kāṇo kacchapo amusmiṁ ekacchiggale yuge gīvaṁ paveseyyā”ti?
[¶36] “No, sir. Only after a very long time, sir, if ever.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Yadi pana, bhante, kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayenā”ti.
[¶37] “That one-eyed turtle would poke its neck through the hole in that yoke sooner than a fool who has fallen to the underworld would be reborn as a human being, I say. Why is that? Because in that place there’s no principled or moral conduct, and no doing what is good and skillful. There they just prey on each other, preying on the weak.
> Pali: “Khippataraṁ kho so, bhikkhave, kāṇo kacchapo amusmiṁ ekacchiggale yuge gīvaṁ paveseyya, ato dullabhatarāhaṁ, bhikkhave, manussattaṁ vadāmi sakiṁ vinipātagatena bālena. Taṁ kissa hetu? Na hettha, bhikkhave, atthi dhammacariyā samacariyā kusalakiriyā puññakiriyā. Aññamaññakhādikā ettha, bhikkhave, vattati dubbalakhādikā.
[¶38] And suppose that fool, after a very long time, returned to the human realm. They’d be reborn in a low class family—a family of corpse-workers, hunters, bamboo-workers, chariot-makers, or scavengers. Such families are poor, with little to eat or drink, where life is tough, and food and shelter are hard to find. And they’d be ugly, unsightly, deformed, sickly—one-eyed, crippled, lame, or half-paralyzed. They don’t get to have food, drink, clothes, and vehicles; garlands, fragrance, and makeup; or bed, house, and lighting. And they do bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, bālo sace kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena manussattaṁ āgacchati, yāni tāni nīcakulāni— caṇḍālakulaṁ vā nesādakulaṁ vā venakulaṁ vā rathakārakulaṁ vā pukkusakulaṁ vā. Tathārūpe kule paccājāyati dalidde appannapānabhojane kasiravuttike, yattha kasirena ghāsacchādo labbhati. So ca hoti dubbaṇṇo duddasiko okoṭimako bavhābādho kāṇo vā kuṇī vā khujjo vā pakkhahato vā na lābhī annassa pānassa vatthassa yānassa mālāgandhavilepanassa seyyāvasathapadīpeyyassa. So kāyena duccaritaṁ carati vācāya duccaritaṁ carati manasā duccaritaṁ carati. So kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.
[¶39] Suppose a gambler were to lose his wife and child, all his property, and then get thrown in jail with his first losing hand. Such a losing hand is trivial compared to the losing hand whereby a fool, having done bad things by way of body, speech, and mind, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is the total fulfillment of the fool’s level.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, akkhadhutto paṭhameneva kaliggahena puttampi jīyetha, dārampi jīyetha, sabbaṁ sāpateyyampi jīyetha, uttaripi adhibandhaṁ nigaccheyya. Appamattako so, bhikkhave, kaliggaho yaṁ so akkhadhutto paṭhameneva kaliggahena puttampi jīyetha, dārampi jīyetha, sabbaṁ sāpateyyampi jīyetha, uttaripi adhibandhaṁ nigaccheyya. Atha kho ayameva tato mahantataro kaliggaho yaṁ so bālo kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, kevalā paripūrā bālabhūmīti.
[¶40] There are these three characteristics, signs, and manifestations of an astute person. What three? An astute person thinks well, speaks well, and acts well. If an astute person didn’t think well, speak well, and act well, then how would the astute know of them, ‘This worthy one is astute, a true person’?
> Pali: Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇāni paṇḍitanimittāni paṇḍitāpadānāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Idha, bhikkhave, paṇḍito sucintitacintī ca hoti subhāsitabhāsī ca sukatakammakārī ca. No cetaṁ, bhikkhave, paṇḍito sucintitacintī ca abhavissa subhāsitabhāsī ca sukatakammakārī ca, kena naṁ paṇḍitā jāneyyuṁ: ‘paṇḍito ayaṁ bhavaṁ sappuriso’ti?
[¶41] But since an astute person does think well, speak well, and act well, then the astute do know of them, ‘This worthy one is astute, a true person’. An astute person experiences three kinds of pleasure and happiness in this very life. Suppose an astute person is sitting in a council hall, a street, or a crossroad, where people are discussing about what is proper and fitting. And suppose that astute person is someone who refrains from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor. Then that astute person thinks, ‘These people are discussing what is proper and fitting. And those good things are found in me and I exhibit them.’ This is the first kind of pleasure and happiness that an astute person experiences in this very life.
> Pali: Yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, paṇḍito sucintitacintī ca hoti subhāsitabhāsī ca sukatakammakārī ca tasmā naṁ paṇḍitā jānanti: ‘paṇḍito ayaṁ bhavaṁ sappuriso’ti. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito tividhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Sace, bhikkhave, paṇḍito sabhāyaṁ vā nisinno hoti, rathikāya vā nisinno hoti, siṅghāṭake vā nisinno hoti; tatra ce jano tajjaṁ tassāruppaṁ kathaṁ manteti. Sace, bhikkhave, paṇḍito pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti; tatra, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa evaṁ hoti: ‘yaṁ kho jano tajjaṁ tassāruppaṁ kathaṁ manteti; saṁvijjanteva te dhammā mayi, ahañca tesu dhammesu sandissāmī’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṇḍito paṭhamaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶42] Furthermore, an astute person sees that the kings have arrested a bandit, a criminal, and subjected them to various punishments— whipping, caning, and clubbing; cutting off hands or feet, or both; cutting off ears or nose, or both; the ‘porridge pot’, the ‘shell-shave’, the ‘Rāhu’s mouth’, the ‘garland of fire’, the ‘burning hand’, the ‘bulrush twist’, the ‘bark dress’, the ‘antelope’, the ‘meat hook’, the ‘coins’, the ‘caustic pickle’, the ‘twisting bar’, the ‘straw mat’; being splashed with hot oil, being fed to the hounds, being impaled alive, and being beheaded. Then that astute person thinks, ‘The kinds of deeds for which the kings inflict such punishments—those things are not found in me and I do not exhibit them!’ This is the second kind of pleasure and happiness that an astute person experiences in this very life.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, paṇḍito passati rājāno coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārente— kasāhipi tāḷente vettehipi tāḷente addhadaṇḍakehipi tāḷente hatthampi chindante pādampi chindante hatthapādampi chindante kaṇṇampi chindante nāsampi chindante kaṇṇanāsampi chindante bilaṅgathālikampi karonte saṅkhamuṇḍikampi karonte rāhumukhampi karonte jotimālikampi karonte hatthapajjotikampi karonte erakavattikampi karonte cīrakavāsikampi karonte eṇeyyakampi karonte balisamaṁsikampi karonte kahāpaṇikampi karonte khārāpatacchikampi karonte palighaparivattikampi karonte palālapīṭhakampi karonte tattenapi telena osiñcante sunakhehipi khādāpente jīvantampi sūle uttāsente asināpi sīsaṁ chindante. Tatra, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa evaṁ hoti: ‘yathārūpānaṁ kho pāpakānaṁ kammānaṁ hetu rājāno coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti kasāhipi tāḷenti, vettehipi tāḷenti, addhadaṇḍakehipi tāḷenti, hatthampi chindanti, pādampi chindanti, hatthapādampi chindanti, kaṇṇampi chindanti, nāsampi chindanti, kaṇṇanāsampi chindanti, bilaṅgathālikampi karonti, saṅkhamuṇḍikampi karonti, rāhumukhampi karonti, jotimālikampi karonti, hatthapajjotikampi karonti, erakavattikampi karonti, cīrakavāsikampi karonti, eṇeyyakampi karonti, balisamaṁsikampi karonti, kahāpaṇikampi karonti, khārāpatacchikampi karonti, palighaparivattikampi karonti, palālapīṭhakampi karonti, tattenapi telena osiñcanti, sunakhehipi khādāpenti, jīvantampi sūle uttāsenti, asināpi sīsaṁ chindanti, na te dhammā mayi saṁvijjanti, ahañca na tesu dhammesu sandissāmī’ti. Idampi, bhikkhave, paṇḍito dutiyaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
## 142. MN 129 · The Foolish and the Astute · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/142/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/142/#p-N
[¶0] Furthermore, when an astute person is resting on a chair or a bed or on the ground, their past good deeds—good conduct of body, speech, and mind—settle down upon them, rest down upon them, and lay down upon them. It is like the shadow of a great mountain peak in the evening as it settles down, rests down, and lays down upon the earth. In the same way, when an astute person is resting on a chair or a bed or on the ground, their past good deeds—good conduct of body, speech, and mind—settle down upon them, rest down upon them, and lay down upon them. Then that astute person thinks, ‘Well, I haven’t done bad things, violence and sin. And I have done good and skillful deeds that keep me safe. When I pass away, I’ll go to the place where people who’ve done such things go.’ So they don’t sorrow and wail and lament, beating their breast and falling into confusion. This is the third kind of pleasure and happiness that an astute person experiences in this very life.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, paṇḍitaṁ pīṭhasamārūḷhaṁ vā mañcasamārūḷhaṁ vā chamāyaṁ vā semānaṁ, yānissa pubbe kalyāṇāni kammāni katāni kāyena sucaritāni vācāya sucaritāni manasā sucaritāni tānissa tamhi samaye olambanti …pe… seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahataṁ pabbatakūṭānaṁ chāyā sāyanhasamayaṁ pathaviyā olambanti ajjholambanti abhippalambanti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, paṇḍitaṁ pīṭhasamārūḷhaṁ vā mañcasamārūḷhaṁ vā chamāyaṁ vā semānaṁ yānissa pubbe kalyāṇāni kammāni katāni kāyena sucaritāni vācāya sucaritāni manasā sucaritāni tānissa tamhi samaye olambanti ajjholambanti abhippalambanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa evaṁ hoti: ‘akataṁ vata me pāpaṁ, akataṁ luddaṁ, akataṁ kibbisaṁ; kataṁ kalyāṇaṁ, kataṁ kusalaṁ, kataṁ bhīruttāṇaṁ. Yāvatā, bho, akatapāpānaṁ akataluddānaṁ akatakibbisānaṁ katakalyāṇānaṁ katakusalānaṁ katabhīruttāṇānaṁ gati taṁ gatiṁ pecca gacchāmī’ti. So na socati, na kilamati, na paridevati, na urattāḷiṁ kandati, na sammohaṁ āpajjati. Idampi, bhikkhave, paṇḍito tatiyaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶1] When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito kāyena sucaritaṁ caritvā vācāya sucaritaṁ caritvā manasā sucaritaṁ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.
[¶2] And if there’s anything of which it may be rightly said that it is utterly likable, desirable, and agreeable, it is of heaven that this should be said. So much so that it’s not easy to give a simile for how pleasurable heaven is.”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho taṁ, bhikkhave, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘ekantaṁ iṭṭhaṁ ekantaṁ kantaṁ ekantaṁ manāpan’ti, saggameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘ekantaṁ iṭṭhaṁ ekantaṁ kantaṁ ekantaṁ manāpan’ti. Yāvañcidaṁ, bhikkhave, upamāpi na sukarā yāva sukhā saggā”ti.
[¶3] When he said this, one of the mendicants said to the Buddha, “But sir, is it possible to give a simile?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sakkā pana, bhante, upamaṁ kātun”ti?
[¶4] “It’s possible,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Sakkā, bhikkhū”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶5] “Suppose there was a king, a wheel-turning monarch who possessed seven treasures and four blessings, and experienced pleasure and happiness because of them.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī sattahi ratanehi samannāgato catūhi ca iddhīhi tatonidānaṁ sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶6] What seven? It’s when, on the fifteenth day sabbath, an anointed aristocratic king has bathed his head and gone upstairs in the royal longhouse to observe the sabbath. And the heavenly wheel-treasure appears to him, with a thousand spokes, with rim and hub, complete in every detail. Seeing this, the king thinks, ‘I have heard that when the heavenly wheel-treasure appears to a king in this way, he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. Am I then a wheel-turning monarch?’
> Pali: Katamehi sattahi? Idha, bhikkhave, rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhātassa uposathikassa uparipāsādavaragatassa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pātubhavati sahassāraṁ sanemikaṁ sanābhikaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ. Taṁ disvāna rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa evaṁ hoti: ‘sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ yassa rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhātassa uposathikassa uparipāsādavaragatassa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pātubhavati sahassāraṁ sanemikaṁ sanābhikaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ, so hoti rājā cakkavattīti. Assaṁ nu kho ahaṁ rājā cakkavattī’ti?
[¶7] Then the anointed aristocratic king, taking a ceremonial vase in his left hand, besprinkled the wheel-treasure with his right hand, saying, ‘Roll forth, O wheel-treasure! Triumph, O wheel-treasure!’ Then the wheel-treasure rolls toward the east. And the king follows it together with his army of four divisions. In whatever place the wheel-treasure stands still, there the king comes to stay together with his army. And any opposing rulers of the eastern quarter come to the wheel-turning monarch and say, ‘Come, Great King! Welcome, Great King! We are yours, Great King, instruct us.’ The wheel-turning monarch says, ‘Do not kill living creatures. Do not steal. Do not commit sexual misconduct. Do not lie. Do not drink liquor. Maintain the current level of taxation.’ And so the opposing rulers of the eastern quarter become his vassals.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto vāmena hatthena bhiṅkāraṁ gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena cakkaratanaṁ abbhukkirati: ‘pavattatu bhavaṁ cakkaratanaṁ, abhivijinātu bhavaṁ cakkaratanan’ti. Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṁ puratthimaṁ disaṁ pavattati. Anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, padese cakkaratanaṁ patiṭṭhāti tattha rājā cakkavattī vāsaṁ upeti saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno te rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja. Svāgataṁ te, mahārāja. Sakaṁ te, mahārāja. Anusāsa, mahārājā’ti. Rājā cakkavattī evamāha: ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṁ nādātabbaṁ, kāmesumicchā na caritabbā, musā na bhāsitabbā, majjaṁ na pātabbaṁ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno te rañño cakkavattissa anuyantā bhavanti.
[¶8] Then the wheel-treasure, having plunged into the eastern ocean and emerged again, rolls toward the south. … Having plunged into the southern ocean and emerged again, it rolls toward the west. … Having plunged into the western ocean and emerged again, it rolls toward the north, followed by the king together with his army of four divisions. In whatever place the wheel-treasure stands still, there the king comes to stay together with his army.
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṁ puratthimaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ pavattati …pe… dakkhiṇaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā pacchimaṁ disaṁ pavattati …pe… pacchimaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā uttaraṁ disaṁ pavattati anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, padese cakkaratanaṁ patiṭṭhāti tattha rājā cakkavattī vāsaṁ upeti saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya.
[¶9] And any opposing rulers of the northern quarter come to the wheel-turning monarch and say, ‘Come, Great King! Welcome, Great King! We are yours, Great King, instruct us.’ The wheel-turning monarch says, ‘Do not kill living creatures. Do not steal. Do not commit sexual misconduct. Do not lie. Do not drink liquor. Maintain the current level of taxation.’ And so the opposing rulers of the eastern quarter become his vassals.
> Pali: Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, uttarāya disāya paṭirājāno te rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja. Svāgataṁ te, mahārāja. Sakaṁ te, mahārāja. Anusāsa, mahārājā’ti. Rājā cakkavattī evamāha: ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṁ nādātabbaṁ, kāmesumicchā na caritabbā, musā na bhāsitabbā, majjaṁ na pātabbaṁ; yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, uttarāya disāya paṭirājāno te rañño cakkavattissa anuyantā bhavanti.
[¶10] And then the wheel-treasure, having triumphed over this land surrounded by ocean, returns to the royal capital. There it stands still at the gate to the royal compound as if fixed to an axle, illuminating the royal compound. Such is the wheel-treasure that appears to the wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṁ samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ abhivijinitvā tameva rājadhāniṁ paccāgantvā rañño cakkavattissa antepuradvāre akkhāhataṁ maññe tiṭṭhati rañño cakkavattissa antepuradvāraṁ upasobhayamānaṁ. Rañño, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa evarūpaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pātubhavati.
[¶11] Next, the elephant-treasure appears to the wheel-turning monarch. It was an all-white sky-walker with psychic power, touching the ground in seven places, a king of elephants named Sabbath. Seeing him, the king was impressed, ‘This would truly be a fine elephant vehicle, if he would submit to taming.’ Then the elephant-treasure submitted to taming, as if he were a fine thoroughbred elephant that had been tamed for a long time. Once it so happened that the wheel-turning monarch, testing that same elephant-treasure, mounted him in the morning and traversed the land surrounded by ocean before returning to the royal capital in time for breakfast. Such is the elephant-treasure that appears to the wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa hatthiratanaṁ pātubhavati— sabbaseto sattappatiṭṭho iddhimā vehāsaṅgamo uposatho nāma nāgarājā. Taṁ disvāna rañño cakkavattissa cittaṁ pasīdati: ‘bhaddakaṁ vata bho hatthiyānaṁ, sace damathaṁ upeyyā’ti. Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, hatthiratanaṁ seyyathāpi nāma bhaddo hatthājānīyo dīgharattaṁ suparidanto evameva damathaṁ upeti. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī tameva hatthiratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno pubbaṇhasamayaṁ abhiruhitvā samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ anusaṁyāyitvā tameva rājadhāniṁ paccāgantvā pātarāsamakāsi. Rañño, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa evarūpaṁ hatthiratanaṁ pātubhavati.
[¶12] Next, the horse-treasure appears to the wheel-turning monarch. It was an all-white sky-walker with psychic power, with head of black and mane like woven reeds, a royal steed named Thundercloud. Seeing him, the king was impressed, ‘This would truly be a fine horse vehicle, if he would submit to taming.’ Then the horse-treasure submitted to taming, as if he were a fine thoroughbred horse that had been tamed for a long time. Once it so happened that the wheel-turning monarch, testing that same horse-treasure, mounted him in the morning and traversed the land surrounded by ocean before returning to the royal capital in time for breakfast. Such is the horse-treasure that appears to the wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa assaratanaṁ pātubhavati— sabbaseto kāḷasīso muñjakeso iddhimā vehāsaṅgamo valāhako nāma assarājā. Taṁ disvāna rañño cakkavattissa cittaṁ pasīdati: ‘bhaddakaṁ vata bho assayānaṁ, sace damathaṁ upeyyā’ti. Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, assaratanaṁ seyyathāpi nāma bhaddo assājānīyo dīgharattaṁ suparidanto evameva damathaṁ upeti. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī tameva assaratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno pubbaṇhasamayaṁ abhiruhitvā samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ anusaṁyāyitvā tameva rājadhāniṁ paccāgantvā pātarāsamakāsi. Rañño, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa evarūpaṁ assaratanaṁ pātubhavati.
[¶13] Next, the jewel-treasure appears to the wheel-turning monarch. It is a beryl gem that’s naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked. And the radiance of that jewel spreads all-round for a league. Once it so happened that the wheel-turning monarch, testing that same jewel-treasure, mobilized his army of four divisions and, with the jewel hoisted on his banner, set out in the dark of the night. Then the villagers around them set off to work, thinking that it was day. Such is the jewel-treasure that appears to the wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa maṇiratanaṁ pātubhavati. So hoti maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato. Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, maṇiratanassa ābhā samantā yojanaṁ phuṭā hoti. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī tameva maṇiratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannayhitvā maṇiṁ dhajaggaṁ āropetvā rattandhakāratimisāya pāyāsi. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, samantā gāmā ahesuṁ te tenobhāsena kammante payojesuṁ ‘divā’ti maññamānā. Rañño, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa evarūpaṁ maṇiratanaṁ pātubhavati.
[¶14] Next, the woman-treasure appears to the wheel-turning monarch. She is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. She’s neither too tall nor too short; neither too thin nor too fat; neither too dark nor too light. She outdoes human beauty without reaching heavenly beauty. And her touch is like a tuft of cotton-wool or kapok. When it’s cool her limbs are warm, and when it’s warm her limbs are cool. The fragrance of sandal floats from her body, and lotus from her mouth. She gets up before the king and goes to bed after him, and is obliging, behaving nicely and speaking politely. The woman-treasure does not betray the wheel-turning monarch even in thought, still less in deed. Such is the woman-treasure who appears to the wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa itthiratanaṁ pātubhavati. Sā abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷikā nāccodātā, atikkantā mānusaṁ vaṇṇaṁ, appattā dibbaṁ vaṇṇaṁ. Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, itthiratanassa evarūpo kāyasamphasso hoti, seyyathāpi nāma tūlapicuno vā kappāsapicuno vā. Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, itthiratanassa sīte uṇhāni gattāni honti, uṇhe sītāni gattāni honti. Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, itthiratanassa kāyato candanagandho vāyati, mukhato uppalagandho vāyati. Taṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, itthiratanaṁ rañño cakkavattissa pubbuṭṭhāyinī hoti pacchānipātinī kiṅkārapaṭissāvinī manāpacārinī piyavādinī. Taṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, itthiratanaṁ rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ manasāpi no aticarati, kuto pana kāyena? Rañño, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa evarūpaṁ itthiratanaṁ pātubhavati.
[¶15] Next, the householder-treasure appears to the wheel-turning monarch. The power of clairvoyance manifests in him as a result of past deeds, by which he sees treasure troves, both owned and ownerless. He approaches the wheel-turning monarch and says, ‘Relax, Your Majesty. I will take care of the treasury.’ Once it so happened that the wheel-turning monarch, testing that same householder-treasure, boarded a boat and sailed to the middle of the Ganges River. Then he said to the householder-treasure, ‘Householder, I need gold, both coined and uncoined.’ ‘Well then, Great King, draw the boat up to one shore.’ ‘It’s right here, householder, that I need gold, both coined and uncoined.’ Then that householder-treasure, immersing both hands in the water, pulled up a pot full of gold, both coined and uncoined, and said to the king, ‘Is this sufficient, Great King? Has enough been done, Great King, enough offered?’ The wheel-turning monarch said, ‘That is sufficient, householder. Enough has been done, enough offered.’ Such is the householder-treasure that appears to the wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa gahapatiratanaṁ pātubhavati. Tassa kammavipākajaṁ dibbacakkhu pātubhavati, yena nidhiṁ passati sassāmikampi assāmikampi. So rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘appossukko tvaṁ, deva, hohi. Ahaṁ te dhanena dhanakaraṇīyaṁ karissāmī’ti. Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī tameva gahapatiratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno nāvaṁ abhiruhitvā majjhe gaṅgāya nadiyā sotaṁ ogāhitvā gahapatiratanaṁ etadavoca: ‘attho me, gahapati, hiraññasuvaṇṇenā’ti. ‘Tena hi, mahārāja, ekaṁ tīraṁ nāvā upetū’ti. ‘Idheva me, gahapati, attho hiraññasuvaṇṇenā’ti. Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, gahapatiratanaṁ ubhohi hatthehi udake omasitvā pūraṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇassa kumbhiṁ uddharitvā rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ etadavoca: ‘alamettāvatā, mahārāja. Katamettāvatā, mahārāja. Pūjitamettāvatā, mahārājā’ti. Rājā cakkavattī evamāha: ‘alamettāvatā, gahapati. Katamettāvatā, gahapati. Pūjitamettāvatā, gahapatī’ti. Rañño, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa evarūpaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pātubhavati.
[¶16] Next, the commander-treasure appears to the wheel-turning monarch. He is astute, competent, intelligent, and capable regarding who should be ushered in to the king’s presence, who should be ushered out, and who should be kept by his side. He approaches the wheel-turning monarch and says, ‘Relax, Your Majesty. I shall issue instructions.’ Such is the commander-treasure that appears to the wheel-turning monarch. These are the seven treasures possessed by a wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa pariṇāyakaratanaṁ pātubhavati— paṇḍito byatto medhāvī paṭibalo rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upayāpetabbaṁ upayāpetuṁ apayāpetabbaṁ apayāpetuṁ ṭhapetabbaṁ ṭhapetuṁ. So rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘appossukko tvaṁ, deva, hohi. Ahamanusāsissāmī’ti. Rañño, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa evarūpaṁ pariṇāyakaratanaṁ pātubhavati. Rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī imehi sattahi ratanehi samannāgato hoti.
[¶17] And what are the four blessings?
> Pali: Katamāhi catūhi iddhīhi?
[¶18] A wheel-turning monarch is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty, more so than other humans. This is the first blessing.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī abhirūpo hoti dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato ativiya aññehi manussehi. Rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī imāya paṭhamāya iddhiyā samannāgato hoti.
[¶19] Furthermore, he is long-lived, more so than other humans. This is the second blessing.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī dīghāyuko hoti ciraṭṭhitiko ativiya aññehi manussehi. Rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī imāya dutiyāya iddhiyā samannāgato hoti.
[¶20] Furthermore, he is rarely ill or unwell, and his stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold, more so than other humans. This is the third blessing.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī appābādho hoti appātaṅko samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya ativiya aññehi manussehi. Rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī imāya tatiyāya iddhiyā samannāgato hoti.
[¶21] Furthermore, a wheel-turning monarch is as dear and beloved to the brahmins and householders as a father is to his children. And the brahmins and householders are as dear to the wheel-turning monarch as children are to their father.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṁ piyo hoti manāpo. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, pitā puttānaṁ piyo hoti manāpo; evameva kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṁ piyo hoti manāpo. Raññopi, bhikkhave, cakkavattissa brāhmaṇagahapatikā piyā honti manāpā. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, pitu puttā piyā honti manāpā; evameva kho, bhikkhave, raññopi cakkavattissa brāhmaṇagahapatikā piyā honti manāpā.
[¶22] Once it so happened that a wheel-turning monarch went with his army of four divisions to visit a park. Then the brahmins and householders went up to him and said, ‘Slow down, Your Majesty, so we may see you longer!’ And the king addressed his charioteer, ‘Drive slowly, charioteer, so I can see the brahmins and householders longer!’ This is the fourth blessing.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī caturaṅginiyā senāya uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyāsi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇagahapatikā rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ataramāno, deva, yāhi yathā taṁ mayaṁ cirataraṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Rājāpi, bhikkhave, cakkavattī sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘ataramāno, sārathi, pesehi yathā maṁ brāhmaṇagahapatikā cirataraṁ passeyyun’ti. Rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī imāya catutthāya iddhiyā samannāgato hoti.
[¶23] These are the four blessings possessed by a wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī imāhi catūhi iddhīhi samannāgato hoti.
[¶24] What do you think, mendicants? Would a wheel-turning monarch who possessed these seven treasures and these four blessings experience pleasure and happiness because of them?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu kho rājā cakkavattī imehi sattahi ratanehi samannāgato imāhi catūhi ca iddhīhi tatonidānaṁ sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvediyethā”ti?
[¶25] “Sir, a wheel-turning monarch who possessed even a single one of these treasures would experience pleasure and happiness because of that, let alone all seven treasures and four blessings!”
> Pali: “Ekamekenapi, bhante, ratanena samannāgato rājā cakkavattī tatonidānaṁ sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvediyetha, ko pana vādo sattahi ratanehi catūhi ca iddhīhī”ti?
[¶26] Then the Buddha, picking up a stone the size of his palm, addressed the mendicants, “What do you think, mendicants? Which is bigger: the stone the size of my palm that I’ve picked up, or the Himalayas, the king of mountains?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā parittaṁ pāṇimattaṁ pāsāṇaṁ gahetvā bhikkhū āmantesi: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamo nu kho mahantataro—yo cāyaṁ mayā paritto pāṇimatto pāsāṇo gahito yo ca himavā pabbatarājā”ti?
[¶27] “Sir, the stone you’ve picked up is tiny. Compared to the Himalayas, it doesn’t count, it’s not worth a fraction, there’s no comparison.”
> Pali: “Appamattako ayaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā paritto pāṇimatto pāsāṇo gahito; himavantaṁ pabbatarājānaṁ upanidhāya saṅkhampi na upeti; kalabhāgampi na upeti; upanidhampi na upetī”ti.
[¶28] “In the same way, compared to the happiness of heaven, the pleasure and happiness experienced by a wheel-turning monarch due to those seven treasures and those four blessings doesn’t even count, it’s not even a fraction, there’s no comparison.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṁ rājā cakkavattī sattahi ratanehi samannāgato catūhi ca iddhīhi tatonidānaṁ sukhaṁ somanassaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti taṁ dibbassa sukhassa upanidhāya saṅkhampi na upeti; kalabhāgampi na upeti; upanidhampi na upeti.
[¶29] And suppose that astute person, after a very long time, returned to the human realm. They’d be reborn in a well-to-do family of aristocrats, brahmins, or householders—rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, and lots of money and grain. And they’d be attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. They’d get to have food, drink, clothes, and vehicles; garlands, fragrance, and makeup; and a bed, house, and lighting. And they do good things by way of body, speech, and mind. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Sa kho so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito sace kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena manussattaṁ āgacchati, yāni tāni uccākulāni— khattiyamahāsālakulaṁ vā brāhmaṇamahāsālakulaṁ vā gahapatimahāsālakulaṁ vā tathārūpe kule paccājāyati aḍḍhe mahaddhane mahābhoge pahūtajātarūparajate pahūtavittūpakaraṇe pahūtadhanadhaññe. So ca hoti abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato, lābhī annassa pānassa vatthassa yānassa mālāgandhavilepanassa seyyāvasathapadīpeyyassa. So kāyena sucaritaṁ carati, vācāya sucaritaṁ carati, manasā sucaritaṁ carati. So kāyena sucaritaṁ caritvā, vācāya sucaritaṁ caritvā, manasā sucaritaṁ caritvā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.
[¶30] Suppose a gambler was to win a big pile of money with the first winning hand. Such a winning hand is trivial compared to the winning hand whereby an astute person, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. This is the total fulfillment of the astute person’s level.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, akkhadhutto paṭhameneva kaṭaggahena mahantaṁ bhogakkhandhaṁ adhigaccheyya; appamattako so, bhikkhave, kaṭaggaho yaṁ so akkhadhutto paṭhameneva kaṭaggahena mahantaṁ bhogakkhandhaṁ adhigaccheyya. Atha kho ayameva tato mahantataro kaṭaggaho yaṁ so paṇḍito kāyena sucaritaṁ caritvā, vācāya sucaritaṁ caritvā, manasā sucaritaṁ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Ayaṁ, bhikkhave, kevalā paripūrā paṇḍitabhūmī”ti.
[¶31] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶32] > Pali: Bālapaṇḍitasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 143. MN 130 · Messengers of the Gods
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/143/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/143/#p-N
[¶0] MN 130 · Messengers of the Gods
> Pali: MN 130 · Devadūtasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, suppose there were two houses with doors. A person with clear eyes standing in between them would see humans entering and leaving a house and wandering to and fro.
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dve agārā sadvārā, tattha cakkhumā puriso majjhe ṭhito passeyya manusse gehaṁ pavisantepi nikkhamantepi anucaṅkamantepi anuvicarantepi;
[¶4] In the same way, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. I understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm, or among humans. These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in the ghost realm, the animal realm, or in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.’
> Pali: evameva kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe, sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā; te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā; te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā manussesu upapannā. Ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā; te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā pettivisayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā; te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā tiracchānayoniṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā; te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā’ti.
[¶5] The wardens of hell take them by the arms and present them to King Yama, saying, ‘Your Majesty, this person did not pay due respect to their mother and father, ascetics and brahmins, or honor the elders in the family. May Your Majesty punish them!’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā nānābāhāsu gahetvā yamassa rañño dassenti: ‘ayaṁ, deva, puriso amatteyyo apetteyyo asāmañño abrāhmañño, na kule jeṭṭhāpacāyī. Imassa devo daṇḍaṁ paṇetū’ti.
[¶6] King Yama pursues, presses, and grills them about the first messenger of the gods: ‘My man, did you not see the first messenger of the gods that appeared among human beings?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā paṭhamaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjati samanugāhati samanubhāsati: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu paṭhamaṁ devadūtaṁ pātubhūtan’ti?
[¶7] He says, ‘I saw nothing, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāddasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶8] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did you not see among human beings a little baby collapsed in their own urine and feces?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu daharaṁ kumāraṁ mandaṁ uttānaseyyakaṁ sake muttakarīse palipannaṁ semānan’ti?
[¶9] He says, ‘I saw that, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘addasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶10] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did it not occur to you—being sensible and mature— “I, too, am liable to be born. I’m not exempt from rebirth. I’d better do good by way of body, speech, and mind”?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, tassa te viññussa sato mahallakassa na etadahosi— ahampi khomhi jātidhammo, jātiṁ anatīto. Handāhaṁ kalyāṇaṁ karomi kāyena vācāya manasā’ti?
[¶11] He says, ‘I couldn’t, sir. I was negligent.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāsakkhissaṁ, bhante, pamādassaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶12] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, because you were negligent, you didn’t do good by way of body, speech, and mind. Well, they’ll definitely punish you to fit your negligence. That bad deed wasn’t done by your mother, father, brother, or sister. It wasn’t done by friends and colleagues, by relatives and kin, by ascetics and brahmins, or by the deities. That bad deed was done by you alone, and you alone will experience the result.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, pamādavatāya na kalyāṇamakāsi kāyena vācāya manasā. Taggha tvaṁ, ambho purisa, tathā karissanti yathā taṁ pamattaṁ. Taṁ kho pana te etaṁ pāpakammaṁ neva mātarā kataṁ na pitarā kataṁ na bhātarā kataṁ na bhaginiyā kataṁ na mittāmaccehi kataṁ na ñātisālohitehi kataṁ na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṁ na devatāhi kataṁ, tayāvetaṁ pāpakammaṁ kataṁ, tvaññevetassa vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedissasī’ti.
[¶13] Then King Yama grills them about the second messenger of the gods: ‘My man, did you not see the second messenger of the gods that appeared among human beings?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā paṭhamaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjitvā samanugāhitvā samanubhāsitvā dutiyaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjati samanugāhati samanubhāsati: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu dutiyaṁ devadūtaṁ pātubhūtan’ti?
[¶14] He says, ‘I saw nothing, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāddasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶15] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did you not see among human beings an elderly woman or a man—eighty, ninety, or a hundred years old—bent double, crooked, leaning on a staff, trembling as they walk, ailing, past their prime, with teeth broken, hair grey and scanty or bald, skin wrinkled, and limbs blotchy?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu itthiṁ vā purisaṁ vā (…) jiṇṇaṁ gopānasivaṅkaṁ bhoggaṁ daṇḍaparāyanaṁ pavedhamānaṁ gacchantaṁ āturaṁ gatayobbanaṁ khaṇḍadantaṁ palitakesaṁ vilūnaṁ khalitasiraṁ valinaṁ tilakāhatagattan’ti?
[¶16] He says, ‘I saw that, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘addasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶17] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did it not occur to you—being sensible and mature— “I, too, am liable to grow old. I’m not exempt from old age. I’d better do good by way of body, speech, and mind”?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, tassa te viññussa sato mahallakassa na etadahosi— ahampi khomhi jarādhammo, jaraṁ anatīto. Handāhaṁ kalyāṇaṁ karomi kāyena vācāya manasā’ti?
[¶18] He says, ‘I couldn’t, sir. I was negligent.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāsakkhissaṁ, bhante, pamādassaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶19] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, because you were negligent, you didn’t do good by way of body, speech, and mind. Well, they’ll definitely punish you to fit your negligence. That bad deed wasn’t done by your mother, father, brother, or sister. It wasn’t done by friends and colleagues, by relatives and kin, by ascetics and brahmins, or by the deities. That bad deed was done by you alone, and you alone will experience the result.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, pamādavatāya na kalyāṇamakāsi kāyena vācāya manasā. Taggha tvaṁ, ambho purisa, tathā karissanti yathā taṁ pamattaṁ. Taṁ kho pana te etaṁ pāpakammaṁ neva mātarā kataṁ na pitarā kataṁ na bhātarā kataṁ na bhaginiyā kataṁ na mittāmaccehi kataṁ na ñātisālohitehi kataṁ na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṁ na devatāhi kataṁ, tayāvetaṁ pāpakammaṁ kataṁ, tvaññevetassa vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedissasī’ti.
[¶20] Then King Yama grills them about the third messenger of the gods: ‘My man, did you not see the third messenger of the gods that appeared among human beings?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā dutiyaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjitvā samanugāhitvā samanubhāsitvā tatiyaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjati samanugāhati samanubhāsati: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu tatiyaṁ devadūtaṁ pātubhūtan’ti?
[¶21] He says, ‘I saw nothing, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāddasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶22] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did you not see among human beings a woman or a man, sick, suffering, gravely ill, collapsed in their own urine and feces, being picked up by some and put down by others?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu itthiṁ vā purisaṁ vā ābādhikaṁ dukkhitaṁ bāḷhagilānaṁ sake muttakarīse palipannaṁ semānaṁ aññehi vuṭṭhāpiyamānaṁ aññehi saṁvesiyamānan’ti?
[¶23] He says, ‘I saw that, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘addasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶24] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did it not occur to you—being sensible and mature— “I, too, am liable to become sick. I’m not exempt from sickness. I’d better do good by way of body, speech, and mind”?’ He says, ‘I couldn’t, sir. I was negligent.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, tassa te viññussa sato mahallakassa na etadahosi— ahampi khomhi byādhidhammo, byādhiṁ anatīto. Handāhaṁ kalyāṇaṁ karomi kāyena vācāya manasā’ti? So evamāha: ‘nāsakkhissaṁ, bhante, pamādassaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶25] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, because you were negligent, you didn’t do good by way of body, speech, and mind. Well, they’ll definitely punish you to fit your negligence. That bad deed wasn’t done by your mother, father, brother, or sister. It wasn’t done by friends and colleagues, by relatives and kin, by ascetics and brahmins, or by the deities. That bad deed was done by you alone, and you alone will experience the result.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, pamādavatāya na kalyāṇamakāsi kāyena vācāya manasā. Taggha tvaṁ, ambho purisa, tathā karissanti yathā taṁ pamattaṁ. Taṁ kho pana te etaṁ pāpakammaṁ neva mātarā kataṁ na pitarā kataṁ na bhātarā kataṁ na bhaginiyā kataṁ na mittāmaccehi kataṁ na ñātisālohitehi kataṁ na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṁ na devatāhi kataṁ, tayāvetaṁ pāpakammaṁ kataṁ, tvaññevetassa vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedissasī’ti.
[¶26] Then King Yama grills them about the fourth messenger of the gods: ‘My man, did you not see the fourth messenger of the gods that appeared among human beings?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā tatiyaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjitvā samanugāhitvā samanubhāsitvā catutthaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjati samanugāhati samanubhāsati: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu catutthaṁ devadūtaṁ pātubhūtan’ti?
[¶27] He says, ‘I saw nothing, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāddasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶28] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did you not see among human beings when the rulers arrested a bandit, a criminal, and subjected them to various punishments— whipping, caning, and clubbing; cutting off hands or feet, or both; cutting off ears or nose, or both; the ‘porridge pot’, the ‘shell-shave’, the ‘Rāhu’s mouth’, the ‘garland of fire’, the ‘burning hand’, the ‘bulrush twist’, the ‘bark dress’, the ‘antelope’, the ‘meat hook’, the ‘coins’, the ‘caustic pickle’, the ‘twisting bar’, the ‘straw mat’; being splashed with hot oil, being fed to the hounds, being impaled alive, and being beheaded?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu rājāno coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārente— kasāhipi tāḷente vettehipi tāḷente addhadaṇḍakehipi tāḷente hatthampi chindante pādampi chindante hatthapādampi chindante kaṇṇampi chindante nāsampi chindante kaṇṇanāsampi chindante bilaṅgathālikampi karonte saṅkhamuṇḍikampi karonte rāhumukhampi karonte jotimālikampi karonte hatthapajjotikampi karonte erakavattikampi karonte cīrakavāsikampi karonte eṇeyyakampi karonte baḷisamaṁsikampi karonte kahāpaṇikampi karonte khārāpatacchikampi karonte palighaparivattikampi karonte palālapīṭhakampi karonte tattenapi telena osiñcante sunakhehipi khādāpente jīvantampi sūle uttāsente asināpi sīsaṁ chindante’ti?
[¶29] He says, ‘I saw that, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘addasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶30] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did it not occur to you—being sensible and mature— “It seems that one who does bad deeds receives such punishment in this very life. What must happen to them in the next? I’d better do good by way of body, speech, and mind”?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, tassa te viññussa sato mahallakassa na etadahosi— ye kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni karonti te diṭṭheva dhamme evarūpā vividhā kammakāraṇā karīyanti, kimaṅgaṁ pana parattha. Handāhaṁ kalyāṇaṁ karomi kāyena vācāya manasā’ti?
[¶31] He says, ‘I couldn’t, sir. I was negligent.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāsakkhissaṁ, bhante, pamādassaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶32] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, because you were negligent, you didn’t do good by way of body, speech, and mind. Well, they’ll definitely punish you to fit your negligence. That bad deed wasn’t done by your mother, father, brother, or sister. It wasn’t done by friends and colleagues, by relatives and kin, by ascetics and brahmins, or by the deities. That bad deed was done by you alone, and you alone will experience the result.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, pamādavatāya na kalyāṇamakāsi kāyena vācāya manasā. Taggha tvaṁ, ambho purisa, tathā karissanti yathā taṁ pamattaṁ. Taṁ kho pana te etaṁ pāpakammaṁ neva mātarā kataṁ na pitarā kataṁ na bhātarā kataṁ na bhaginiyā kataṁ na mittāmaccehi kataṁ na ñātisālohitehi kataṁ na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṁ na devatāhi kataṁ, tayāvetaṁ pāpakammaṁ kataṁ, tvaññevetassa vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedissasī’ti.
[¶33] Then King Yama grills them about the fifth messenger of the gods: ‘My man, did you not see the fifth messenger of the gods that appeared among human beings?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā catutthaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjitvā samanugāhitvā samanubhāsitvā pañcamaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjati samanugāhati samanubhāsati: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu pañcamaṁ devadūtaṁ pātubhūtan’ti?
[¶34] He says, ‘I saw nothing, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāddasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶35] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did you not see among human beings a woman or a man, dead for one, two, or three days, bloated, livid, and festering?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, na tvaṁ addasa manussesu itthiṁ vā purisaṁ vā ekāhamataṁ vā dvīhamataṁ vā tīhamataṁ vā uddhumātakaṁ vinīlakaṁ vipubbakajātan’ti?
[¶36] He says, ‘I saw that, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘addasaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶37] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, did it not occur to you—being sensible and mature— “I, too, am liable to die. I’m not exempt from death. I’d better do good by way of body, speech, and mind”?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, tassa te viññussa sato mahallakassa na etadahosi— ahampi khomhi maraṇadhammo, maraṇaṁ anatīto. Handāhaṁ kalyāṇaṁ karomi kāyena vācāya manasā’ti?
[¶38] He says, ‘I couldn’t, sir. I was negligent.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘nāsakkhissaṁ, bhante, pamādassaṁ, bhante’ti.
[¶39] King Yama says to them, ‘My man, because you were negligent, you didn’t do good by way of body, speech, and mind. Well, they’ll definitely punish you to fit your negligence. That bad deed wasn’t done by your mother, father, brother, or sister. It wasn’t done by friends and colleagues, by relatives and kin, by ascetics and brahmins, or by the deities. That bad deed was done by you alone, and you alone will experience the result.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā evamāha: ‘ambho purisa, pamādavatāya na kalyāṇamakāsi kāyena vācāya manasā. Taggha tvaṁ, ambho purisa, tathā karissanti yathā taṁ pamattaṁ. Taṁ kho pana te etaṁ pāpakammaṁ neva mātarā kataṁ na pitarā kataṁ na bhātarā kataṁ na bhaginiyā kataṁ na mittāmaccehi kataṁ na ñātisālohitehi kataṁ na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṁ na devatāhi kataṁ, tayāvetaṁ pāpakammaṁ kataṁ, tvaññevetassa vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedissasī’ti.
[¶40] After grilling them about the fifth messenger of the gods, King Yama falls silent.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, yamo rājā pañcamaṁ devadūtaṁ samanuyuñjitvā samanugāhitvā samanubhāsitvā tuṇhī hoti.
[¶41] The wardens of hell punish them with the five-fold crucifixion. They drive red-hot stakes through the hands and feet, and another in the middle of the chest. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā pañcavidhabandhanaṁ nāma kammakāraṇaṁ karonti— tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ hatthe gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ dutiye hatthe gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ pāde gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ dutiye pāde gamenti, tattaṁ ayokhilaṁ majjheurasmiṁ gamenti. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶42] The wardens of hell throw them down and hack them with axes. …
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā saṁvesetvā kuṭhārīhi tacchanti …pe…
[¶43] They hang them upside-down and hack them with hatchets. …
> Pali: tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā uddhampādaṁ adhosiraṁ gahetvā vāsīhi tacchanti …pe…
[¶44] They harness them to a chariot, and drive them back and forth across burning ground, blazing and glowing. …
> Pali: tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā rathe yojetvā ādittāya pathaviyā sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya sārentipi, paccāsārentipi …pe…
[¶45] They make them climb up and down a big mountain of burning coals, blazing and glowing. …
> Pali: tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā mahantaṁ aṅgārapabbataṁ ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ āropentipi oropentipi …pe…
[¶46] The wardens of hell turn them upside down and throw them in a red-hot copper pot, burning, blazing, and glowing. There they’re seared in boiling scum, and they’re swept up and down and round and round. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā uddhampādaṁ adhosiraṁ gahetvā tattāya lohakumbhiyā pakkhipanti ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya. So tattha pheṇuddehakaṁ paccati. So tattha pheṇuddehakaṁ paccamāno sakimpi uddhaṁ gacchati, sakimpi adho gacchati, sakimpi tiriyaṁ gacchati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶47] The wardens of hell toss them into the Great Hell. Now, about that Great Hell:
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā mahāniraye pakkhipanti. So kho pana, bhikkhave, mahānirayo—
[¶48] ‘Four are its corners, four its doors,
neatly divided section by section.
Surrounded by an iron wall,
of iron is its roof.
> Pali: Catukkaṇṇo catudvāro,
vibhatto bhāgaso mito;
Ayopākārapariyanto,
ayasā paṭikujjito.
[¶49] The ground is even made of iron,
it burns with fierce fire.
The heat forever radiates
a hundred leagues around.’
> Pali: Tassa ayomayā bhūmi,
jalitā tejasāyutā;
Samantā yojanasataṁ,
pharitvā tiṭṭhati sabbadā.
[¶50] Now in the Great Hell, flames surge out of the walls and crash into the opposite wall: from east to west, from west to east, from north to south, from south to north, from bottom to top, from top to bottom. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, mahānirayassa puratthimāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhahitvā pacchimāya bhittiyā paṭihaññati, pacchimāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhahitvā puratthimāya bhittiyā paṭihaññati, uttarāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇāya bhittiyā paṭihaññati, dakkhiṇāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhahitvā uttarāya bhittiyā paṭihaññati, heṭṭhā acci uṭṭhahitvā upari paṭihaññati, uparito acci uṭṭhahitvā heṭṭhā paṭihaññati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶51] There comes a time when, after a very long period has passed, the eastern gate of the Great Hell is opened. So they run there as fast as they can. And as they run, their outer skin, inner skin, flesh, and sinews burn and even their bones smoke. Such is their escape; but when they’ve managed to make it most of the way, the gate is slammed shut. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, bhikkhave, samayo yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena tassa mahānirayassa puratthimaṁ dvāraṁ apāpurīyati. So tattha sīghena javena dhāvati. Tassa sīghena javena dhāvato chavimpi ḍayhati, cammampi ḍayhati, maṁsampi ḍayhati, nhārumpi ḍayhati, aṭṭhīnipi sampadhūpāyanti, ubbhataṁ tādisameva hoti. Yato ca kho so, bhikkhave, bahusampatto hoti, atha taṁ dvāraṁ pidhīyati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶52] There comes a time when, after a very long period has passed, the western gate … northern gate … southern gate of the Great Hell is opened. So they run there as fast as they can. And as they run, their outer skin, inner skin, flesh, and sinews burn and even their bones smoke. Such is their escape; but when they’ve managed to make it most of the way, the gate is slammed shut. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, bhikkhave, samayo yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena tassa mahānirayassa pacchimaṁ dvāraṁ apāpurīyati …pe… uttaraṁ dvāraṁ apāpurīyati …pe… dakkhiṇaṁ dvāraṁ apāpurīyati. So tattha sīghena javena dhāvati. Tassa sīghena javena dhāvato chavimpi ḍayhati, cammampi ḍayhati, maṁsampi ḍayhati, nhārumpi ḍayhati, aṭṭhīnipi sampadhūpāyanti, ubbhataṁ tādisameva hoti. Yato ca kho so, bhikkhave, bahusampatto hoti, atha taṁ dvāraṁ pidhīyati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶53] There comes a time when, after a very long period has passed, the eastern gate of the Great Hell is opened. So they run there as fast as they can. And as they run, their outer skin, inner skin, flesh, and sinews burn and even their bones smoke. Such is their escape; and they make it out that door.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, bhikkhave, samayo yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena tassa mahānirayassa puratthimaṁ dvāraṁ apāpurīyati. So tattha sīghena javena dhāvati. Tassa sīghena javena dhāvato chavimpi ḍayhati, cammampi ḍayhati, maṁsampi ḍayhati, nhārumpi ḍayhati, aṭṭhīnipi sampadhūpāyanti, ubbhataṁ tādisameva hoti. So tena dvārena nikkhamati.
[¶54] Immediately adjacent to the Great Hell is the vast Dung Hell. And that’s where they fall. In that Dung Hell there are needle-mouthed creatures that bore through the outer skin, the inner skin, the flesh, sinews, and bones, until they reach the marrow and devour it. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, mahānirayassa samanantarā sahitameva mahanto gūthanirayo. So tattha patati. Tasmiṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, gūthaniraye sūcimukhā pāṇā chaviṁ chindanti, chaviṁ chetvā cammaṁ chindanti, cammaṁ chetvā maṁsaṁ chindanti, maṁsaṁ chetvā nhāruṁ chindanti, nhāruṁ chetvā aṭṭhiṁ chindanti, aṭṭhiṁ chetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṁ khādanti. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶55] Immediately adjacent to the Dung Hell is the vast Hell of Burning Chaff. And that’s where they fall. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, gūthanirayassa samanantarā sahitameva mahanto kukkulanirayo. So tattha patati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶56] Immediately adjacent to the Hell of Burning Chaff is the vast Red Silk-Cotton Forest. It’s a league high, full of sixteen-inch thorns, burning, blazing, and glowing. And there they make them climb up and down. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, kukkulanirayassa samanantarā sahitameva mahantaṁ simbalivanaṁ uddhaṁ yojanamuggataṁ soḷasaṅgulakaṇṭakaṁ ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ. Tattha āropentipi oropentipi. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶57] Immediately adjacent to the Red Silk-Cotton Forest is the vast Sword-Leaf Forest. They enter that. There the fallen leaves blown by the wind cut their hands, feet, both hands and feet; they cut their ears, nose, both ears and nose. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, simbalivanassa samanantarā sahitameva mahantaṁ asipattavanaṁ. So tattha pavisati. Tassa vāteritāni pattāni patitāni hatthampi chindanti, pādampi chindanti, hatthapādampi chindanti, kaṇṇampi chindanti, nāsampi chindanti, kaṇṇanāsampi chindanti. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶58] Immediately adjacent to the Sword-Leaf Forest is the vast Acid River. And that’s where they fall. There they are swept upstream, swept downstream, and swept both up and down stream. And there they suffer painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tassa kho pana, bhikkhave, asipattavanassa samanantarā sahitameva mahatī khārodakā nadī. So tattha patati. So tattha anusotampi vuyhati, paṭisotampi vuyhati, anusotapaṭisotampi vuyhati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶59] The wardens of hell pull them out with a hook and place them on solid ground, and say, ‘My man, what do you want?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā balisena uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpetvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ambho purisa, kiṁ icchasī’ti?
[¶60] They say, ‘I’m hungry, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘jighacchitosmi, bhante’ti.
[¶61] The wardens of hell force open their mouth with a hot iron spike—burning, blazing, and glowing—and shove in a red-hot copper ball, burning, blazing, and glowing. It burns their lips, mouth, tongue, throat, and stomach before coming out below dragging their entrails. And there they feel painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā tattena ayosaṅkunā mukhaṁ vivaritvā ādittena sampajjalitena sajotibhūtena tattaṁ lohaguḷaṁ mukhe pakkhipanti ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ. So tassa oṭṭhampi dahati, mukhampi dahati, kaṇṭhampi dahati, urampi dahati, antampi antaguṇampi ādāya adhobhāgā nikkhamati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶62] The wardens of hell say, ‘My man, what do you want?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ambho purisa, kiṁ icchasī’ti?
[¶63] They say, ‘I’m thirsty, sir.’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘pipāsitosmi, bhante’ti.
[¶64] The wardens of hell force open their mouth with a hot iron spike—burning, blazing, and glowing—and pour in molten copper, burning, blazing, and glowing. It burns their lips, mouth, tongue, throat, and stomach before coming out below dragging their entrails. And there they feel painful, sharp, severe, acute feelings—but they don’t die until that bad deed is eliminated.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā tattena ayosaṅkunā mukhaṁ vivaritvā ādittena sampajjalitena sajotibhūtena tattaṁ tambalohaṁ mukhe āsiñcanti ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ. Taṁ tassa oṭṭhampi dahati, mukhampi dahati, kaṇṭhampi dahati, urampi dahati, antampi antaguṇampi ādāya adhobhāgā nikkhamati. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā vedeti, na ca tāva kālaṁ karoti, yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ byantīhoti.
[¶65] The wardens of hell toss them back in the Great Hell.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā puna mahāniraye pakkhipanti.
[¶66] Once upon a time, King Yama thought: ‘Those who do such bad deeds in the world receive these many different punishments. Oh, I hope I may be reborn as a human being! And that a Realized One—a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha—arises in the world! And that I may pay homage to the Buddha! Let that Buddha teach me Dhamma, so that I may understand his teaching!’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, yamassa rañño etadahosi: ‘ye kira, bho, loke pāpakāni akusalāni kammāni karonti te evarūpā vividhā kammakāraṇā karīyanti. Aho vatāhaṁ manussattaṁ labheyyaṁ. Tathāgato ca loke uppajjeyya arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. Tañcāhaṁ bhagavantaṁ payirupāseyyaṁ. So ca me bhagavā dhammaṁ deseyya. Tassa cāhaṁ bhagavato dhammaṁ ājāneyyan’ti.
[¶67] Now, I don’t say this because I’ve heard it from some other ascetic or brahmin. I only say it because I’ve known, seen, and realized it for myself.”
> Pali: Taṁ kho panāhaṁ, bhikkhave, nāññassa samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā sutvā vadāmi, api ca yadeva sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadevāhaṁ vadāmī”ti.
[¶68] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶69] “When warned by the gods’ messengers,
those sons of Manu who are negligent
sorrow for a long time
when they go to that wretched place.
> Pali: “Coditā devadūtehi,
ye pamajjanti māṇavā;
Te dīgharattaṁ socanti,
hīnakāyūpagā narā.
[¶70] When warned by the gods’ messengers,
the good and true persons here
never neglect
the teaching of the Noble One.
> Pali: Ye ca kho devadūtehi,
santo sappurisā idha;
Coditā nappamajjanti,
ariyadhamme kudācanaṁ.
[¶71] Seeing the danger in grasping,
the origin of birth and death,
the unattached are freed
with the ending of birth and death.
> Pali: Upādāne bhayaṁ disvā,
jātimaraṇasambhave;
Anupādā vimuccanti,
jātimaraṇasaṅkhaye.
[¶72] Happy, they’ve come to a safe place,
quenched in this very life.
They’ve gone beyond all enmities and fears,
and risen above all suffering.”
> Pali: Te khemappattā sukhino,
diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutā;
Sabbaverabhayātītā,
sabbadukkhaṁ upaccagun”ti.
[¶73] > Pali: Devadūtasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶74] > Pali: Suññatavaggo niṭṭhito tatiyo.
[¶75] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶76] > Pali: Dvidhāva suññatā hoti,
Abbhutadhammabākulaṁ;
Aciravatabhūmijanāmo,
Anuruddhupakkilesaṁ;
Bālapaṇḍito devadūtañca te dasāti.
## 144. MN 131 · One Fine Night
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/144/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/144/#p-N
[¶0] MN 131 · One Fine Night
> Pali: MN 131 · Bhaddekarattasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “I shall teach you the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “bhaddekarattassa vo, bhikkhave, uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Don’t run back to the past,
don’t anticipate the future.
What’s past is left behind,
the future has not arrived;
> Pali: “Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶6] and any present phenomenon
you clearly discern in every case.
The unfaltering, the unshakable:
having known that, foster it.
> Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
Tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
Taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶7] Today’s the day to keenly work—
who knows, tomorrow may bring death!
For there is no bargain to be struck
with Death and his mighty horde.
> Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶8] One who keenly meditates like this,
tireless all night and day:
that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.
> Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate muni.
[¶9] And how do you run back to the past? You muster delight there, thinking: ‘I had such form in the past.’ … ‘I had such feeling … perception … choice … consciousness in the past.’ That’s how you run back to the past.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, atītaṁ anvāgameti? ‘Evaṁrūpo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, ‘evaṁvedano ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, ‘evaṁsañño ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, ‘evaṁsaṅkhāro ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, ‘evaṁviññāṇo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, atītaṁ anvāgameti.
[¶10] And how do you not run back to the past? You don’t muster delight there, thinking: ‘I had such form in the past.’ … ‘I had such feeling … perception … choice … consciousness in the past.’ That’s how you don’t run back to the past.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, atītaṁ nānvāgameti? ‘Evaṁrūpo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṁvedano ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṁsañño ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṁsaṅkhāro ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṁviññāṇo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, atītaṁ nānvāgameti.
[¶11] And how do you anticipate the future? You muster delight there, thinking: ‘May I have such form in the future.’ … ‘May I have such feeling … perception … choice … consciousness in the future.’ That’s how you anticipate the future.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati? ‘Evaṁrūpo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, evaṁvedano siyaṁ …pe… evaṁsañño siyaṁ … evaṁsaṅkhāro siyaṁ … evaṁviññāṇo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati.
[¶12] And how do you not anticipate the future? You don’t muster delight there, thinking: ‘May I have such form in the future.’ … ‘May I have such feeling … perception … choice … consciousness in the future.’ That’s how you don’t anticipate the future.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati? ‘Evaṁrūpo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, evaṁvedano siyaṁ … evaṁsañño siyaṁ … evaṁsaṅkhāro siyaṁ … ‘evaṁviññāṇo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānan’ti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati.
[¶13] And how do you falter amid presently arisen phenomena? It’s when an unlearned ordinary person has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. They regard feeling … perception … choices … consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. That’s how you falter amid presently arisen phenomena.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati? Idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṁ attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, attani vā rūpaṁ, rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ; vedanaṁ …pe… saññaṁ … saṅkhāre … viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati, viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ— evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati.
[¶14] And how do you not falter amid presently arisen phenomena? It’s when a learned noble disciple has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. They don’t regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. They don’t regard feeling … perception … choices … consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. That’s how you don’t falter amid presently arisen phenomena.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati? Idha, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na rūpaṁ attato samanupassati, na rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, na attani vā rūpaṁ, na rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ; na vedanaṁ … na saññaṁ … na saṅkhāre … na viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati, na viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, na attani vā viññāṇaṁ, na viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ— evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati.
[¶15] ‘Don’t run back to the past,
don’t anticipate the future.
What’s past is left behind,
the future has not arrived;
> Pali: Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶16] and any present phenomenon
you clearly discern in every case.
The unfaltering, the unshakable:
having known that, foster it.
> Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶17] Today’s the day to keenly work—
who knows, tomorrow may bring death!
For there is no bargain to be struck
with Death and his mighty horde.
> Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶18] One who keenly meditates like this,
tireless all night and day:
that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.’
> Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munīti.
[¶19] And that’s what I meant when I said: ‘I shall teach you the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night.’”
> Pali: ‘Bhaddekarattassa vo, bhikkhave, uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desessāmī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttan”ti.
[¶20] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶21] > Pali: Bhaddekarattasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 145. MN 132 · Ānanda and One Fine Night
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/145/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/145/#p-N
[¶0] MN 132 · Ānanda and One Fine Night
> Pali: MN 132 · Ānandabhaddekarattasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time Venerable Ānanda was educating, encouraging, firing up, and inspiring the mendicants in the assembly hall with a Dhamma talk on the topic of the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ānando upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṁseti, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca bhāsati.
[¶3] Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat, went to the assembly hall, where he sat down on the seat spread out, and addressed the mendicants: “Who was inspiring the mendicants with a talk on the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenupaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “ko nu kho, bhikkhave, upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsī”ti?
[¶4] “It was Venerable Ānanda, sir.”
> Pali: “Āyasmā, bhante, ānando upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsī”ti.
[¶5] Then the Buddha said to Venerable Ānanda, “But in what way were you inspiring the mendicants with a talk on the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “yathā kathaṁ pana tvaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsī”ti?
[¶6] “I was doing so in this way, sir,” replied Ānanda.
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesiṁ samādapesiṁ samuttejesiṁ sampahaṁsesiṁ, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsiṁ—
[¶7] “Don’t run back to the past,
don’t anticipate the future.
What’s past is left behind,
the future has not arrived;
> Pali: Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶8] and any present phenomenon
you clearly discern in every case.
The unfaltering, the unshakable:
having known that, foster it.
> Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶9] Today’s the day to keenly work—
who knows, tomorrow may bring death!
For there is no bargain to be struck
with Death and his mighty horde.
> Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶10] One who keenly meditates like this,
tireless all night and day:
that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.
> Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate muni.
[¶11] And how do you run back to the past? …
> Pali: ‘Kathañca, āvuso, atītaṁ anvāgameti? Evaṁrūpo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, evaṁvedano ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, evaṁsañño ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, evaṁsaṅkhāro ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, evaṁviññāṇo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, āvuso, atītaṁ anvāgameti.
[¶12] And how do you not run back to the past? …
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, atītaṁ nānvāgameti? Evaṁrūpo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, evaṁvedano ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, evaṁsañño ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, evaṁsaṅkhāro ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, evaṁviññāṇo ahosiṁ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, āvuso, atītaṁ nānvāgameti.
[¶13] And how do you anticipate the future? …
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati? Evaṁrūpo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti, evaṁvedano siyaṁ …pe… evaṁsañño siyaṁ … evaṁsaṅkhāro siyaṁ … evaṁviññāṇo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, āvuso, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati.
[¶14] And how do you not anticipate the future? …
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati? Evaṁrūpo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti, evaṁvedano siyaṁ …pe… evaṁsañño siyaṁ … evaṁsaṅkhāro siyaṁ … evaṁviññāṇo siyaṁ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṁ na samanvāneti— evaṁ kho, āvuso, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati.
[¶15] And how do you falter amid presently arisen phenomena? …
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati? Idha, āvuso, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṁ attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, attani vā rūpaṁ, rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ; vedanaṁ … saññaṁ … saṅkhāre … viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati, viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, attani vā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ— evaṁ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati.
[¶16] And how do you not falter amid presently arisen phenomena? … That’s how you don’t falter amid presently arisen phenomena.
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati? Idha, āvuso, sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na rūpaṁ attato samanupassati, na rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, na attani vā rūpaṁ, na rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ; na vedanaṁ … na saññaṁ … na saṅkhāre … na viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati, na viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ, na attani vā viññāṇaṁ, na viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ— evaṁ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati.
[¶17] ‘Don’t run back to the past,
don’t anticipate the future. …
> Pali: Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶18] > Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶19] > Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶20] that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.’
> Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶21] That’s how I was inspiring the mendicants with a talk on the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night.”
> Pali: Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesiṁ samādapesiṁ samuttejesiṁ sampahaṁsesiṁ, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsin”ti.
[¶22] “Good, good, Ānanda. It’s good that you were inspiring the mendicants with a talk on the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, ānanda. Sādhu kho tvaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi:
[¶23] > Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶24] And the Buddha repeated the verses and analysis once more.
> Pali: Kathañca, ānanda, atītaṁ anvāgameti …pe… evaṁ kho, ānanda, atītaṁ anvāgameti. Kathañca, ānanda, atītaṁ nānvāgameti …pe… evaṁ kho, ānanda, atītaṁ nānvāgameti. Kathañca, ānanda, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati …pe… evaṁ kho, ānanda, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati. Kathañca, ānanda, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati …pe… evaṁ kho, ānanda, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati. Kathañca, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati …pe… evaṁ kho, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati. Kathañca, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati …pe… evaṁ kho, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati.
[¶25] > Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’”ti.
[¶26] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶27] > Pali: Ānandabhaddekarattasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 146. MN 133 · Mahākaccāna and One Fine Night
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/146/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/146/#p-N
[¶0] MN 133 · Mahākaccāna and One Fine Night
> Pali: MN 133 · Mahākaccānabhaddekarattasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Hot Springs Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati tapodārāme.
[¶2] Then Venerable Samiddhi rose at the crack of dawn and went to the hot springs to bathe. When he had bathed and emerged from the water he stood in one robe drying his limbs.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā samiddhi rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya yena tapodo tenupasaṅkami gattāni parisiñcituṁ. Tapode gattāni parisiñcitvā paccuttaritvā ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsi gattāni pubbāpayamāno.
[¶3] Then, late at night, a glorious deity, lighting up the entire hot springs, went up to Samiddhi, stood to one side, and said to Samiddhi:
> Pali: Atha kho aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṁ tapodaṁ obhāsetvā yenāyasmā samiddhi tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho sā devatā āyasmantaṁ samiddhiṁ etadavoca:
[¶4] “Mendicant, do you remember the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night?”
> Pali: “dhāresi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā”ti?
[¶5] “No, reverend, I do not. Do you?”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā”ti?
[¶6] “I also do not. But do you remember just the verses on the one who has one fine night?”
> Pali: “Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā”ti?
[¶7] “I do not. Do you?”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā”ti?
[¶8] “I also do not. Learn the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night, mendicant, memorize it, and remember it. It is beneficial and relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life.”
> Pali: “Ahampi kho, bhikkhu na dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṁhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako”ti.
[¶9] That is what that deity said, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Idamavoca sā devatā. Idaṁ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
[¶10] Then, when the night had passed, Samiddhi went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened. Then he added:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā samiddhi tassā rattiyā accayena yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā samiddhi bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶11] > Pali: “Idhāhaṁ, bhante, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya yena tapodo tenupasaṅkamiṁ gattāni parisiñcituṁ. Tapode gattāni parisiñcitvā paccuttaritvā ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsiṁ gattāni pubbāpayamāno. Atha kho bhante, aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṁ tapodaṁ obhāsetvā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho sā devatā maṁ etadavoca: ‘dhāresi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’ti?
[¶12] > Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, taṁ devataṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’ti? ‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṁhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako’ti.
[¶13] “Sir, please teach me the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night.”
> Pali: Idamavoca, bhante, sā devatā. Idaṁ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi. Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desetū”ti.
[¶14] “Well then, mendicant, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhikkhu, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶15] “Yes, sir,” Samiddhi replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā samiddhi bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶16] “Don’t run back to the past,
don’t anticipate the future.
What’s past is left behind,
the future has not arrived;
> Pali: “Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶17] and any present phenomenon
you clearly discern in every case.
The unfaltering, the unshakable:
having known that, foster it.
> Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶18] Today’s the day to keenly work—
who knows, tomorrow may bring death!
For there is no bargain to be struck
with Death and his mighty horde.
> Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶19] One who keenly meditates like this,
tireless all night and day:
that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.”
> Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī”ti.
[¶20] That is what the Buddha said. When he had spoken, the Holy One rose from his seat and entered his dwelling.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā; idaṁ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.
[¶21] Soon after the Buddha left, those mendicants considered, “The Buddha gave this brief summary recital, then entered his dwelling without explaining the meaning in detail. …
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi: “idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho:
[¶22] > Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶23] > Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶24] > Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶25] > Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶26] Who can explain in detail the meaning of this brief summary given by the Buddha?”
> Pali: Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyā”ti?
[¶27] Then those mendicants thought:
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi:
[¶28] “This Venerable Mahākaccāna is praised by the Buddha and esteemed by his sensible spiritual companions. He is capable of explaining in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha. Let’s go to him, and ask him about this matter.”
> Pali: “ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ; pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā”ti.
[¶29] Then those mendicants went to Mahākaccāna, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side. They told him what had happened, and said:
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā mahākaccānena saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idaṁ kho no, āvuso kaccāna, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho:
[¶30] > Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶31] > Pali: Tesaṁ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṁ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi— idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho:
[¶32] > Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶33] “May Venerable Mahākaccāna please explain this.”
> Pali: Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyāti? Tesaṁ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṁ etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno”ti.
[¶34] “Reverends, suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But he’d pass over the roots and trunk, imagining that the heartwood should be sought in the branches and leaves. Such is the consequence for the venerables. Though you were face to face with the Buddha, you bypassed him, imagining that you should ask me about this matter. For he is the Buddha, the one who knows and sees. He is vision, he is knowledge, he is the manifestation of principle, he is the manifestation of divinity. He is the preacher, the proclaimer, the elucidator of meaning, the bestower of freedom from death, the lord of truth, the Realized One. That was the time to approach the Buddha and ask about this matter. You should have remembered it in line with the Buddha’s answer.”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, āvuso, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva mūlaṁ atikkamma khandhaṁ sākhāpalāse sāraṁ pariyesitabbaṁ maññeyya; evaṁsampadamidaṁ āyasmantānaṁ satthari sammukhībhūte taṁ bhagavantaṁ atisitvā amhe etamatthaṁ paṭipucchitabbaṁ maññatha. So hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti, passaṁ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṁ bhagavantaṁyeva etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha, yathā vo bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṁ dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶35] “Certainly he is the Buddha, the one who knows and sees. He is vision, he is knowledge, he is the manifestation of principle, he is the manifestation of divinity. He is the preacher, the proclaimer, the elucidator of meaning, the bestower of freedom from death, the lord of truth, the Realized One. That was the time to approach the Buddha and ask about this matter. We should have remembered it in line with the Buddha’s answer. Still, Venerable Mahākaccāna is praised by the Buddha and esteemed by his sensible spiritual companions. He is capable of explaining in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha. Please explain this, if it’s no trouble.”
> Pali: “Addhāvuso kaccāna, bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti, passaṁ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṁ bhagavantaṁyeva etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāma; yathā no bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṁ dhāreyyāma. Api cāyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ; pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno agaruṁ karitvā”ti.
[¶36] “Well then, reverends, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶37] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Venerable Mahākaccāna said this:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā mahākaccāno etadavoca:
[¶38] “Reverends, the Buddha gave this brief summary recital, then entered his dwelling without explaining the meaning in detail:
> Pali: “Yaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho:
[¶39] ‘Don’t run back to the past …
that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.’
> Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶40] And this is how I understand the detailed meaning of this summary recital.
> Pali: Imassa kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi—
[¶41] And how do you run back to the past? Consciousness gets tied up there with desire and lust, thinking: ‘In the past I had such eyes and such sights.’ So you take pleasure in that, and that’s when you run back to the past.
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, atītaṁ anvāgameti? Iti me cakkhu ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti rūpāti— tattha chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto atītaṁ anvāgameti.
[¶42] Consciousness gets tied up there with desire and lust, thinking: ‘In the past I had such ears and such sounds … such a nose and such smells … such a tongue and such tastes … such a body and such touches … such a mind and such ideas.’ So you take pleasure in that, and that’s when you run back to the past. That’s how you run back to the past.
> Pali: Iti me sotaṁ ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti saddāti …pe… iti me ghānaṁ ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti gandhāti … iti me jivhā ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti rasāti … iti me kāyo ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti phoṭṭhabbāti … iti me mano ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti dhammāti— tattha chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto atītaṁ anvāgameti— evaṁ kho, āvuso, atītaṁ anvāgameti.
[¶43] And how do you not run back to the past? Consciousness doesn’t get tied up there with desire and lust, thinking: ‘In the past I had such eyes and such sights.’ So you don’t take pleasure in that, and that’s when you no longer run back to the past.
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, atītaṁ nānvāgameti? Iti me cakkhu ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti rūpāti— tattha na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto atītaṁ nānvāgameti.
[¶44] Consciousness doesn’t get tied up there with desire and lust, thinking: ‘In the past I had such ears and such sounds … such a nose and such smells … such a tongue and such tastes … such a body and such touches … such a mind and such ideas.’ So you don’t take pleasure in that, and that’s when you no longer run back to the past. That’s how you don’t run back to the past.
> Pali: Iti me sotaṁ ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti saddāti …pe… iti me ghānaṁ ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti gandhāti … iti me jivhā ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti rasāti … iti me kāyo ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti phoṭṭhabbāti … iti me mano ahosi atītamaddhānaṁ iti dhammāti— tattha na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa, na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto atītaṁ nānvāgameti— evaṁ kho, āvuso, atītaṁ nānvāgameti.
[¶45] And how do you anticipate the future? The heart is set on getting what it does not have, thinking: ‘May I have such eyes and such sights in the future.’ So you take pleasure in that, and that’s when you anticipate the future. The heart is set on getting what it does not have, thinking: ‘May I have such ears and such sounds … such a nose and such smells … such a tongue and such tastes … such a body and such touches … such a mind and such ideas in the future.’ So you take pleasure in that, and that’s when you anticipate the future. That’s how you anticipate the future.
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati? Iti me cakkhu siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti rūpāti— appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṁ paṇidahati, cetaso paṇidhānapaccayā tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati. Iti me sotaṁ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti saddāti …pe… iti me ghānaṁ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti gandhāti … iti me jivhā siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti rasāti … iti me kāyo siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti phoṭṭhabbāti … iti me mano siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti dhammāti— appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṁ paṇidahati, cetaso paṇidhānapaccayā tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati— evaṁ kho, āvuso, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati.
[¶46] And how do you not anticipate the future? The heart is not set on getting what it does not have, thinking: ‘May I have such eyes and such sights in the future.’ So you don’t take pleasure in that, and that’s when you no longer anticipate the future. The heart is not set on getting what it does not have, thinking: ‘May I have such ears and such sounds … such a nose and such smells … such a tongue and such tastes … such a body and such touches … such a mind and such ideas in the future.’ So you don’t take pleasure in that, and that’s when you no longer anticipate the future. That’s how you don’t anticipate the future.
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati? Iti me cakkhu siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti rūpāti— appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṁ nappaṇidahati, cetaso appaṇidhānapaccayā na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati. Iti me sotaṁ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti saddāti …pe… iti me ghānaṁ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti gandhāti … iti me jivhā siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti rasāti … iti me kāyo siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti phoṭṭhabbāti … iti me mano siyā anāgatamaddhānaṁ iti dhammāti— appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṁ nappaṇidahati, cetaso appaṇidhānapaccayā na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati— evaṁ kho, āvuso, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati.
[¶47] And how do you falter amid presently arisen phenomena? Both the eye and sights are presently arisen. If consciousness gets tied up there in the present with desire and lust, you take pleasure in that, and that’s when you falter amid presently arisen phenomena. Both the ear and sounds … nose and smells … tongue and tastes … body and touches … mind and ideas are presently arisen. If consciousness gets tied up there in the present with desire and lust, you take pleasure in that, and that’s when you falter amid presently arisen phenomena. That’s how you falter amid presently arisen phenomena.
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati? Yañcāvuso, cakkhu ye ca rūpā— ubhayametaṁ paccuppannaṁ. Tasmiñce paccuppanne chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati. Yañcāvuso, sotaṁ ye ca saddā …pe… yañcāvuso, ghānaṁ ye ca gandhā … yā cāvuso, jivhā ye ca rasā … yo cāvuso, kāyo ye ca phoṭṭhabbā … yo cāvuso, mano ye ca dhammā— ubhayametaṁ paccuppannaṁ. Tasmiñce paccuppanne chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati— evaṁ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati.
[¶48] And how do you not falter amid presently arisen phenomena? Both the eye and sights are presently arisen. If consciousness doesn’t get tied up there in the present with desire and lust, you don’t take pleasure in that, and that’s when you no longer falter amid presently arisen phenomena. Both the ear and sounds … nose and smells … tongue and tastes … body and touches … mind and ideas are presently arisen. If consciousness doesn’t get tied up there in the present with desire and lust, you don’t take pleasure in that, and that’s when you no longer falter amid presently arisen phenomena. That’s how you don’t falter amid presently arisen phenomena.
> Pali: Kathañca, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati? Yañcāvuso, cakkhu ye ca rūpā— ubhayametaṁ paccuppannaṁ. Tasmiñce paccuppanne na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati. Yañcāvuso, sotaṁ ye ca saddā …pe… yañcāvuso, ghānaṁ ye ca gandhā … yā cāvuso, jivhā ye ca rasā … yo cāvuso, kāyo ye ca phoṭṭhabbā … yo cāvuso, mano ye ca dhammā— ubhayametaṁ paccuppannaṁ. Tasmiñce paccuppanne na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṁ hoti viññāṇaṁ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati— evaṁ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati.
[¶49] This is how I understand the detailed meaning of that brief summary recital given by the Buddha.
> Pali: Yaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho:
[¶50] > Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶51] If you wish, you may go to the Buddha and ask him about this. You should remember it in line with the Buddha’s answer.”
> Pali: Imassa kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi. Ākaṅkhamānā ca pana tumhe āyasmanto bhagavantaṁyeva upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha, yathā vo bhagavā byākaroti tathā naṁ dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶52] Then those mendicants, approving and agreeing with what Mahākaccāna said, rose from their seats and went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened, adding:
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “yaṁ kho no, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho:
[¶53] > Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶54] > Pali: Tesaṁ no, bhante, amhākaṁ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi: ‘idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho:
[¶55] > Pali: “Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶56] > Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶57] > Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶58] > Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī”ti.
[¶59] “Mahākaccāna clearly explained the meaning to us in this manner, with these words and phrases.”
> Pali: Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyā’ti? Tesaṁ no, bhante, amhākaṁ etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti. Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipucchimha. Tesaṁ no, bhante, āyasmatā mahākaccānena imehi ākārehi imehi padehi imehi byañjanehi attho vibhatto”ti.
[¶60] “Mahākaccāna is astute, mendicants, he has great wisdom. If you came to me and asked this question, I would answer it in exactly the same way as Mahākaccāna. That is what it means, and that’s how you should remember it.”
> Pali: “Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno; mahāpañño, bhikkhave mahākaccāno. Mañcepi tumhe, bhikkhave, etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha, ahampi taṁ evamevaṁ byākareyyaṁ yathā taṁ mahākaccānena byākataṁ. Eso cevetassa attho. Evañca naṁ dhārethā”ti.
[¶61] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶62] > Pali: Mahākaccānabhaddekarattasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 147. MN 134 · Lomasakaṅgiya and One Fine Night
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/147/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/147/#p-N
[¶0] MN 134 · Lomasakaṅgiya and One Fine Night
> Pali: MN 134 · Lomasakaṅgiyabhaddekarattasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time Venerable Lomasakaṅgiya was staying in the Sakyan country at Kapilavatthu in the Banyan Tree Monastery.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ nigrodhārāme.
[¶3] Then, late at night, the glorious godling Candana, lighting up the entire Banyan Tree Monastery, went up to the Venerable Lomasakaṅgiya, and stood to one side. Standing to one side, he said to Lomasakaṅgiya:
> Pali: Atha kho candano devaputto abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇo kevalakappaṁ nigrodhārāmaṁ obhāsetvā yenāyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho candano devaputto āyasmantaṁ lomasakaṅgiyaṁ etadavoca:
[¶4] “Mendicant, do you remember the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night?”
> Pali: “dhāresi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā”ti?
[¶5] “No, reverend, I do not. Do you?”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā”ti?
[¶6] “I also do not. But do you remember just the verses on the one who has one fine night?”
> Pali: “Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā”ti?
[¶7] “I do not. Do you?”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā”ti?
[¶8] “I do.”
> Pali: “Dhāremi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā”ti.
[¶9] “How do you remember the verses on the one who has one fine night?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana tvaṁ, āvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā”ti?
[¶10] “This one time, the Buddha was staying among the gods of the thirty-three at the root of the Orchid Tree on the stone spread with a cream rug. There he taught the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night to the gods of the thirty-three:
> Pali: “Ekamidaṁ, bhikkhu, samayaṁ bhagavā devesu tāvatiṁsesu viharati pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṁ. Tatra bhagavā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi:
[¶11] ‘Don’t run back to the past,
don’t anticipate the future.
What’s past is left behind,
the future has not arrived;
> Pali: ‘Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶12] and any present phenomenon
you clearly discern in every case.
The unfaltering, the unshakable:
having known that, foster it.
> Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶13] Today’s the day to keenly work—
who knows, tomorrow may bring death!
For there is no bargain to be struck
with Death and his mighty horde.
> Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶14] One who keenly meditates like this,
tireless all night and day:
that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.’
> Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī’ti.
[¶15] That’s how I remember the verses of the one who has one fine night. Learn the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night, mendicant, memorize it, and remember it. It is beneficial and relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhu, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṁhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako”ti.
[¶16] That is what the godling Candana said before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Idamavoca candano devaputto. Idaṁ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
[¶17] Then Lomasakaṅgiya set his lodgings in order and, taking his bowl and robe, set out for Sāvatthī. Eventually he came to Sāvatthī and Jeta’s Grove. He went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened. Then he added:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo tassā rattiyā accayena senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi jetavanaṁ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶18] > Pali: “Ekamidāhaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ sakkesu viharāmi kapilavatthusmiṁ nigrodhārāme. Atha kho, bhante, aññataro devaputto abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇo kevalakappaṁ nigrodhārāmaṁ obhāsetvā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, bhante, so devaputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘dhāresi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’ti? Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhante, taṁ devaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’ti? ‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Tvaṁ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Dhāremi kho ahaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti. ‘Yathā kathaṁ pana tvaṁ, āvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Ekamidaṁ, bhikkhu, samayaṁ bhagavā devesu tāvatiṁsesu viharati pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṁ. Tatra kho bhagavā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi:
[¶19] > Pali: “Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
…pe…
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī”ti.
[¶20] > Pali: Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhu, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṁhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako’ti.
[¶21] “Sir, please teach me the summary recital and the analysis of the one who has one fine night.”
> Pali: Idamavoca, bhante, so devaputto. Idaṁ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi. Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desetū”ti.
[¶22] “But mendicant, do you know that god?”
> Pali: “Jānāsi pana tvaṁ, bhikkhu, taṁ devaputtan”ti?
[¶23] “I do not, sir.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, bhante, jānāmi taṁ devaputtan”ti.
[¶24] “That godling was named Candana. Candana pays attention, applies the mind, concentrates wholeheartedly, and actively listens to the teaching. Well then, mendicant, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Candano nāma so, bhikkhu, devaputto. Candano, bhikkhu, devaputto aṭṭhiṁ katvā manasikatvā sabbacetasā samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṁ suṇāti. Tena hi, bhikkhu, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶25] “Yes, sir,” Lomasakaṅgiya replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶26] “Don’t run back to the past,
don’t anticipate the future.
What’s past is left behind,
the future has not arrived;
> Pali: “Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶27] and any present phenomenon
you clearly discern in every case.
The unfaltering, the unshakable:
having known that, foster it.
> Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶28] Today’s the day to keenly work—
who knows, tomorrow may bring death!
For there is no bargain to be struck
with Death and his mighty horde.
> Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶29] One who keenly meditates like this,
tireless all night and day:
that’s who has one fine night—
so declares the peaceful sage.
> Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate muni.
[¶30] And how do you run back to the past? …”
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhu, atītaṁ anvāgameti …pe…
[¶31] > Pali: evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, atītaṁ anvāgameti.
[¶32] > Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhu, atītaṁ nānvāgameti …pe…
[¶33] > Pali: evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, atītaṁ nānvāgameti.
[¶34] > Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhu, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati …pe…
[¶35] > Pali: evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, anāgataṁ paṭikaṅkhati.
[¶36] > Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhu, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati …pe…
[¶37] > Pali: evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, anāgataṁ nappaṭikaṅkhati.
[¶38] > Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati …pe…
[¶39] > Pali: evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṁhīrati.
[¶40] > Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati …pe…
[¶41] > Pali: evaṁ kho, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṁhīrati.
[¶42] > Pali: Atītaṁ nānvāgameyya,
nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṁ;
Yadatītaṁ pahīnaṁ taṁ,
appattañca anāgataṁ.
[¶43] > Pali: Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṁ,
tattha tattha vipassati;
Asaṁhīraṁ asaṅkuppaṁ,
taṁ vidvā manubrūhaye.
[¶44] > Pali: Ajjeva kiccamātappaṁ,
ko jaññā maraṇaṁ suve;
Na hi no saṅgaraṁ tena,
mahāsenena maccunā.
[¶45] > Pali: Evaṁvihāriṁ ātāpiṁ,
ahorattamatanditaṁ;
Taṁ ve bhaddekarattoti,
santo ācikkhate munī”ti.
[¶46] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Lomasakaṅgiya approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶47] > Pali: Lomasakaṅgiyabhaddekarattasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 148. MN 135 · The Shorter Analysis of Deeds
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/148/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/148/#p-N
[¶0] MN 135 · The Shorter Analysis of Deeds
> Pali: MN 135 · Cūḷakammavibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane, anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then the student Subha, Todeyya’s son, approached the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “What is the cause, worthy Gotama, what is the reason why even among those who are human beings some are seen to be inferior and superior? For people are seen who are short-lived and long-lived, sickly and healthy, ugly and beautiful, insignificant and illustrious, poor and rich, from low and eminent families, witless and wise. What is the reason why even among those who are human beings some are seen to be inferior and superior?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo yena manussānaṁyeva sataṁ manussabhūtānaṁ dissanti hīnappaṇītatā? Dissanti hi, bho gotama, manussā appāyukā, dissanti dīghāyukā; dissanti bavhābādhā, dissanti appābādhā; dissanti dubbaṇṇā, dissanti vaṇṇavanto; dissanti appesakkhā, dissanti mahesakkhā; dissanti appabhogā, dissanti mahābhogā; dissanti nīcakulīnā, dissanti uccākulīnā; dissanti duppaññā, dissanti paññavanto. Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo yena manussānaṁyeva sataṁ manussabhūtānaṁ dissanti hīnappaṇītatā”ti?
[¶4] “Student, sentient beings are the owners of their deeds and heir to their deeds. Deeds are their womb, their relative, and their refuge. It is deeds that divide beings into inferior and superior.”
> Pali: “Kammassakā, māṇava, sattā kammadāyādā kammayonī kammabandhū kammappaṭisaraṇā. Kammaṁ satte vibhajati yadidaṁ— hīnappaṇītatāyā”ti.
[¶5] “I don’t understand the meaning of what the worthy Gotama has said in brief, without explaining the details. Worthy Gotama, please teach me this matter in detail so I can understand the meaning.”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ imassa bhoto gotamassa saṅkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi. Sādhu me bhavaṁ gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetu yathā ahaṁ imassa bhoto gotamassa saṅkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ ājāneyyan”ti.
[¶6] “Well then, student, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, māṇava, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Subha. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶8] “Take some woman or man who kills living creatures. They’re violent, bloody-handed, a hardened killer, merciless to living beings. Because of undertaking such deeds, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. If they’re not reborn in a place of loss, but return to the human realm, then wherever they’re reborn they’re short-lived. For killing living creatures is the path leading to a short lifespan.
> Pali: “Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā pāṇātipātī hoti luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appāyuko hoti. Appāyukasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— pāṇātipātī hoti luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu.
[¶9] But take some woman or man who gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. Because of undertaking such deeds, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. If they’re not reborn in a heavenly realm, but return to the human realm, then wherever they’re reborn they’re long-lived. For not killing living creatures is the path leading to a long lifespan.
> Pali: Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati dīghāyuko hoti. Dīghāyukasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
[¶10] Take some woman or man who habitually hurts living creatures with a fist, stone, rod, or sword. Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a place of loss … or if they return to the human realm, they’re sickly …
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā sattānaṁ viheṭhakajātiko hoti, pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati bavhābādho hoti. Bavhābādhasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— sattānaṁ viheṭhakajātiko hoti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā.
[¶11] But take some woman or man who would never hurt living creatures with a fist, stone, rod, or sword. Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a heavenly realm … or if they return to the human realm, they’re healthy …
> Pali: Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā sattānaṁ aviheṭhakajātiko hoti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appābādho hoti. Appābādhasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— sattānaṁ aviheṭhakajātiko hoti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā.
[¶12] Take some woman or man who is irritable and bad-tempered. Even when lightly criticized they lose their temper, becoming annoyed, hostile, and hard-hearted, and displaying annoyance, hate, and bitterness. Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a place of loss … or if they return to the human realm, they’re ugly …
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā kodhano hoti upāyāsabahulo. Appampi vutto samāno abhisajjati kuppati byāpajjati patiṭṭhīyati kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati dubbaṇṇo hoti. Dubbaṇṇasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— kodhano hoti upāyāsabahulo; appampi vutto samāno abhisajjati kuppati byāpajjati patiṭṭhīyati kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti.
[¶13] But take some woman or man who isn’t irritable and bad-tempered. Even when heavily criticized, they don’t lose their temper, become annoyed, hostile, and hard-hearted, or display annoyance, hate, and bitterness. Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a heavenly realm … or if they return to the human realm, they’re lovely …
> Pali: Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā akkodhano hoti anupāyāsabahulo; bahumpi vutto samāno nābhisajjati na kuppati na byāpajjati na patiṭṭhīyati na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati pāsādiko hoti. Pāsādikasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— akkodhano hoti anupāyāsabahulo; bahumpi vutto samāno nābhisajjati na kuppati na byāpajjati na patiṭṭhīyati na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti.
[¶14] Take some woman or man who is jealous. They envy, resent, and begrudge the possessions, honor, respect, reverence, homage, and veneration given to others. Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a place of loss … or if they return to the human realm, they’re insignificant …
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā issāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu issati upadussati issaṁ bandhati. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appesakkho hoti. Appesakkhasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— issāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu issati upadussati issaṁ bandhati.
[¶15] But take some woman or man who is not jealous … Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a heavenly realm … or if they return to the human realm, they’re illustrious …
> Pali: Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā anissāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu na issati na upadussati na issaṁ bandhati. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati mahesakkho hoti. Mahesakkhasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— anissāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu na issati na upadussati na issaṁ bandhati.
[¶16] Take some woman or man who doesn’t give to ascetics or brahmins such things as food, drink, clothing, vehicles; garlands, fragrance, and makeup; and bed, house, and lighting. Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a place of loss … or if they return to the human realm, they’re poor …
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā na dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appabhogo hoti. Appabhogasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— na dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ.
[¶17] But take some woman or man who does give to ascetics or brahmins … Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a heavenly realm … or if they return to the human realm, they’re rich …
> Pali: Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati mahābhogo hoti. Mahābhogasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ.
[¶18] Take some woman or man who is obstinate and arrogant. They don’t bow to those they should bow to. They don’t rise up for them, offer them a seat, make way for them, or honor, respect, esteem, or venerate those who are worthy of such. Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a place of loss … or if they return to the human realm, they’re reborn in a low class family …
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā thaddho hoti atimānī— abhivādetabbaṁ na abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṁ na paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa na āsanaṁ deti, maggārahassa na maggaṁ deti, sakkātabbaṁ na sakkaroti, garukātabbaṁ na garukaroti, mānetabbaṁ na māneti, pūjetabbaṁ na pūjeti. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati nīcakulīno hoti. Nīcakulīnasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— thaddho hoti atimānī; abhivādetabbaṁ na abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṁ na paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa na āsanaṁ deti, maggārahassa na maggaṁ deti, sakkātabbaṁ na sakkaroti, garukātabbaṁ na garukaroti, mānetabbaṁ na māneti, pūjetabbaṁ na pūjeti.
[¶19] But take some woman or man who is not obstinate and arrogant … Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a heavenly realm … or if they return to the human realm, they’re reborn in an eminent family …
> Pali: Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā atthaddho hoti anatimānī; abhivādetabbaṁ abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṁ paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa āsanaṁ deti, maggārahassa maggaṁ deti, sakkātabbaṁ sakkaroti, garukātabbaṁ garukaroti, mānetabbaṁ māneti, pūjetabbaṁ pūjeti. So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati uccākulīno hoti. Uccākulīnasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— atthaddho hoti anatimānī; abhivādetabbaṁ abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṁ paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa āsanaṁ deti, maggārahassa maggaṁ deti, sakkātabbaṁ sakkaroti, garukātabbaṁ garukaroti, mānetabbaṁ māneti, pūjetabbaṁ pūjeti.
[¶20] Take some woman or man who doesn’t approach an ascetic or brahmin to ask: ‘Sir, what is skillful and what is unskillful? What is blameworthy and what is blameless? What should be cultivated and what should not be cultivated? What kind of action will lead to my lasting harm and suffering? Or what kind of action will lead to my lasting welfare and happiness?’ Because of undertaking such deeds, after death they’re reborn in a place of loss … or if they return to the human realm, they’re witless …
> Pali: Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā upasaṅkamitvā na paripucchitā hoti: ‘kiṁ, bhante, kusalaṁ, kiṁ akusalaṁ; kiṁ sāvajjaṁ, kiṁ anavajjaṁ; kiṁ sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ na sevitabbaṁ; kiṁ me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṁ vā pana me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya hotī’ti? So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati duppañño hoti. Duppaññasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā upasaṅkamitvā na paripucchitā hoti: ‘kiṁ, bhante, kusalaṁ, kiṁ akusalaṁ; kiṁ sāvajjaṁ, kiṁ anavajjaṁ; kiṁ sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ na sevitabbaṁ; kiṁ me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṁ vā pana me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya hotī’ti?
[¶21] But take some woman or man who does approach an ascetic or brahmin to ask: ‘Sir, what is skillful and what is unskillful? What is blameworthy and what is blameless? What should be cultivated and what should not be cultivated? What kind of action will lead to my lasting harm and suffering? Or what kind of action will lead to my lasting welfare and happiness?’ Because of undertaking such deeds, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. If they’re not reborn in a heavenly realm, but return to the human realm, then wherever they’re reborn they’re very wise. For asking questions of ascetics or brahmins is the path leading to wisdom.
> Pali: Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā upasaṅkamitvā paripucchitā hoti: ‘kiṁ, bhante, kusalaṁ, kiṁ akusalaṁ; kiṁ sāvajjaṁ, kiṁ anavajjaṁ; kiṁ sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ na sevitabbaṁ; kiṁ me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṁ vā pana me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya hotī’ti? So tena kammena evaṁ samattena evaṁ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, sace manussattaṁ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati mahāpañño hoti. Mahāpaññasaṁvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṁ— samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā upasaṅkamitvā paripucchitā hoti: ‘kiṁ, bhante, kusalaṁ, kiṁ akusalaṁ; kiṁ sāvajjaṁ, kiṁ anavajjaṁ; kiṁ sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ na sevitabbaṁ; kiṁ me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṁ vā pana me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya hotī’ti?
[¶22] So it is the way people live that makes them how they are, whether short-lived or long-lived, sickly or healthy, ugly or lovely, insignificant or illustrious, poor or rich, in a low class or eminent family, or witless or wise.
> Pali: Iti kho, māṇava, appāyukasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā appāyukattaṁ upaneti, dīghāyukasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā dīghāyukattaṁ upaneti; bavhābādhasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā bavhābādhattaṁ upaneti, appābādhasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā appābādhattaṁ upaneti; dubbaṇṇasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā dubbaṇṇattaṁ upaneti, pāsādikasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā pāsādikattaṁ upaneti; appesakkhasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā appesakkhattaṁ upaneti, mahesakkhasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā mahesakkhattaṁ upaneti; appabhogasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā appabhogattaṁ upaneti, mahābhogasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā mahābhogattaṁ upaneti; nīcakulīnasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā nīcakulīnattaṁ upaneti, uccākulīnasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā uccākulīnattaṁ upaneti; duppaññasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā duppaññattaṁ upaneti, mahāpaññasaṁvattanikā paṭipadā mahāpaññattaṁ upaneti.
[¶23] Sentient beings are the owners of their deeds and heir to their deeds. Deeds are their womb, their relative, and their refuge. It is deeds that divide beings into inferior and superior.”
> Pali: Kammassakā, māṇava, sattā kammadāyādā kammayonī kammabandhū kammappaṭisaraṇā. Kammaṁ satte vibhajati yadidaṁ— hīnappaṇītatāyā”ti.
[¶24] When he had spoken, Subha said to him, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶25] > Pali: Cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 149. MN 136 · The Longer Analysis of Deeds
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/149/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/149/#p-N
[¶0] MN 136 · The Longer Analysis of Deeds
> Pali: MN 136 · Mahākammavibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Now at that time Venerable Samiddhi was staying in a wilderness hut. Then as the wanderer Potaliputta was going for a walk he came up to Venerable Samiddhi and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to him:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā samiddhi araññakuṭikāyaṁ viharati. Atha kho potaliputto paribbājako jaṅghāvihāraṁ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yenāyasmā samiddhi tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā samiddhinā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho potaliputto paribbājako āyasmantaṁ samiddhiṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Reverend Samiddhi, I have heard and learned this in the presence of the ascetic Gotama: ‘Deeds by way of body and speech are done in vain. Only mental deeds are real.’ And: ‘There is such an attainment where the one who enters it does not feel anything at all.’”
> Pali: “sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso samiddhi, samaṇassa gotamassa sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘moghaṁ kāyakammaṁ moghaṁ vacīkammaṁ, manokammameva saccan’ti. Atthi ca sā samāpatti yaṁ samāpattiṁ samāpanno na kiñci vediyatī”ti?
[¶4] “Don’t say that, Reverend Potaliputta, don’t say that! Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say this: ‘Deeds by way of body and speech are done in vain. Only mental deeds are real.’ But, reverend, there is such an attainment where the one who enters it does not feel anything at all.”
> Pali: “Mā hevaṁ, āvuso potaliputta, avaca; mā hevaṁ, āvuso potaliputta, avaca; mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi. Na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ. Na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘moghaṁ kāyakammaṁ moghaṁ vacīkammaṁ, manokammameva saccan’ti. ‘Atthi ca kho sā, āvuso, samāpatti yaṁ samāpattiṁ samāpanno na kiñci vediyatī’”ti.
[¶5] “Reverend Samiddhi, how long has it been since you went forth?”
> Pali: “Kīvaciraṁ pabbajitosi, āvuso samiddhī”ti?
[¶6] “Not long, reverend: three years.”
> Pali: “Na ciraṁ, āvuso, tīṇi vassānī”ti.
[¶7] “Well now, what are we to say to the senior mendicants, when even such a junior mendicant imagines their Teacher needs defending? After doing an intentional deed by way of body, speech, or mind, reverend, what does one feel?”
> Pali: “Ettha dāni mayaṁ there bhikkhū kiṁ vakkhāma, yatra hi nāma evaṁnavo bhikkhu satthāraṁ parirakkhitabbaṁ maññissati. Sañcetanikaṁ, āvuso samiddhi, kammaṁ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā kiṁ so vediyatī”ti?
[¶8] “After doing an intentional deed by way of body, speech, or mind, reverend, one feels suffering.” Then, neither approving nor rejecting Samiddhi’s statement, Potaliputta rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: “Sañcetanikaṁ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṁ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā dukkhaṁ so vediyatī”ti. Atha kho potaliputto paribbājako āyasmato samiddhissa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandi nappaṭikkosi; anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶9] Soon after he had left, Venerable Samiddhi went to Venerable Ānanda, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and informed Ānanda of all they had discussed.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā samiddhi acirapakkante potaliputte paribbājake yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā samiddhi yāvatako ahosi potaliputtena paribbājakena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ āyasmato ānandassa ārocesi.
[¶10] When he had spoken, Ānanda said to him, “Reverend Samiddhi, we should see the Buddha about this matter. Come, let’s go to the Buddha and inform him about this. As he answers, so we’ll remember it.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando āyasmantaṁ samiddhiṁ etadavoca: “atthi kho idaṁ, āvuso samiddhi, kathāpābhataṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Āyāmāvuso samiddhi, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamissāma; upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ bhagavato ārocessāma. Yathā no bhagavā byākarissati tathā naṁ dhāressāmā”ti.
[¶11] “Yes, reverend,” Samiddhi replied.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā samiddhi āyasmato ānandassa paccassosi.
[¶12] Then Ānanda and Samiddhi went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca ānando āyasmā ca samiddhi yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando yāvatako ahosi āyasmato samiddhissa potaliputtena paribbājakena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo taṁ sabbaṁ bhagavato ārocesi.
[¶13] When they had spoken, the Buddha said to Ānanda, “I don’t recall even seeing the wanderer Potaliputta, Ānanda, so how could we have had such a discussion? The wanderer Potaliputta’s question should have been answered after analyzing it, but this futile man answered categorically.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “dassanampi kho ahaṁ, ānanda, potaliputtassa paribbājakassa nābhijānāmi, kuto panevarūpaṁ kathāsallāpaṁ? Iminā ca, ānanda, samiddhinā moghapurisena potaliputtassa paribbājakassa vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo pañho ekaṁsena byākato”ti.
[¶14] When he said this, Venerable Udāyī said to him, “But perhaps, sir, Venerable Samiddhi spoke in reference to the statement: ‘Suffering includes whatever is felt.’”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā udāyī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sace pana, bhante, āyasmatā samiddhinā idaṁ sandhāya bhāsitaṁ— yaṁ kiñci vedayitaṁ taṁ dukkhasmin”ti.
[¶15] But the Buddha said to Venerable Ānanda, “See what this futile man Udāyī comes up with? I knew that he was coming up with something irrational. Right from the start Potaliputta asked about the three feelings. Suppose the futile man Samiddhi had answered the wanderer Potaliputta’s question like this: ‘After doing an intentional deed to be experienced as pleasant by way of body, speech, or mind, one feels pleasure. After doing an intentional deed to be experienced as painful by way of body, speech, or mind, one feels pain. After doing an intentional deed to be experienced as neutral by way of body, speech, or mind, one feels neutral.’ Answering in this way, Samiddhi would have rightly answered Potaliputta.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “passasi no tvaṁ, ānanda, imassa udāyissa moghapurisassa ummaṅgaṁ? Aññāsiṁ kho ahaṁ, ānanda: ‘idānevāyaṁ udāyī moghapuriso ummujjamāno ayoniso ummujjissatī’ti. Ādiṁyeva, ānanda, potaliputtena paribbājakena tisso vedanā pucchitā. Sacāyaṁ, ānanda, samiddhi moghapuriso potaliputtassa paribbājakassa evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākareyya: ‘sañcetanikaṁ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṁ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā sukhavedanīyaṁ sukhaṁ so vedayati; sañcetanikaṁ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṁ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā dukkhavedanīyaṁ dukkhaṁ so vedayati; sañcetanikaṁ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṁ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā adukkhamasukhavedanīyaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ so vedayatī’ti. Evaṁ byākaramāno kho, ānanda, samiddhi moghapuriso potaliputtassa paribbājakassa sammā byākaramāno byākareyya.
[¶16] Still, who are those foolish and incompetent wanderers of other religions to understand the Realized One’s great analysis of deeds? If you would all listen, Ānanda, I will explain the Realized One’s great analysis of deeds.”
> Pali: Api ca, ānanda, ke ca aññatitthiyā paribbājakā bālā abyattā ke ca tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅgaṁ jānissanti? Sace tumhe, ānanda, suṇeyyātha tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅgaṁ vibhajantassā”ti.
[¶17] “Now is the time, Blessed One! Now is the time, Holy One! Let the Buddha explain the great analysis of deeds. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Etassa, bhagavā, kālo, etassa, sugata, kālo yaṁ bhagavā mahākammavibhaṅgaṁ vibhajeyya. Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶18] “Well then, Ānanda, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hānanda, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶19] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶20] “Ānanda, these four individuals are found in the world. What four? It’s when an individual here kills living creatures, steals, and commits sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, and have wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: “Cattārome, ānanda, puggalā santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ. Katame cattāro? Idhānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātī hoti, adinnādāyī hoti, kāmesumicchācārī hoti, musāvādī hoti, pisuṇavāco hoti, pharusavāco hoti, samphappalāpī hoti, abhijjhālu hoti, byāpannacitto hoti, micchādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.
[¶21] But some other individual here kills living creatures, steals, and commits sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, and have wrong view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Idha panānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātī hoti, adinnādāyī hoti, kāmesumicchācārī hoti, musāvādī hoti, pisuṇavāco hoti, pharusavāco hoti, samphappalāpī hoti, abhijjhālu hoti, byāpannacitto hoti, micchādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.
[¶22] But some other individual here refrains from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, or using speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re contented, kind-hearted, with right view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Idhānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, anabhijjhālu hoti, abyāpannacitto hoti, sammādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.
[¶23] But some other individual here refrains from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, or using speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re contented, kind-hearted, with right view. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: Idha panānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, anabhijjhālu hoti, abyāpannacitto hoti, sammādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.
[¶24] Now, some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that it gives rise to clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman. With that clairvoyance they see that individual here who killed living creatures, stole, and committed sexual misconduct; who used speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and who was covetous, malicious, and had wrong view. And they see that, when their body breaks up, after death, they are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. They say: ‘It seems, worthy sir, that there is such a thing as bad deeds, and the result of bad conduct. For I have seen a individual here who killed living creatures … and had wrong view. And when their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.’ They say: ‘It seems that everyone who kills living creatures … and has wrong view is reborn in hell. Those whose notion is this have the right notion. Those whose notion is otherwise have a wrong notion.’ And so they obstinately stick to what they have known, seen, and understood for themselves, insisting that: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’
> Pali: Idhānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṁ puggalaṁ passati— idha pāṇātipātiṁ adinnādāyiṁ kāmesumicchācāriṁ musāvādiṁ pisuṇavācaṁ pharusavācaṁ samphappalāpiṁ abhijjhāluṁ byāpannacittaṁ micchādiṭṭhiṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passati apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannaṁ. So evamāha: ‘atthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, atthi duccaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ idha pāṇātipātiṁ adinnādāyiṁ …pe… micchādiṭṭhiṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannan’ti. So evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Ye evaṁ jānanti, te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti. Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti.
[¶25] But some other ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that it gives rise to clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman. With that clairvoyance they see that individual here who killed living creatures … and had wrong view. And they see that they are reborn in a heavenly realm. They say: ‘It seems that there is no such thing as bad deeds, and the result of bad conduct. For I have seen an individual here who killed living creatures … and had wrong view. And I saw that they were reborn in a heavenly realm.’ They say: ‘It seems that everyone who kills living creatures … and has wrong view is reborn in a heavenly realm. Those whose notion is this have the right notion. Those whose notion is otherwise have a wrong notion.’ And so they obstinately stick to what they have known, seen, and understood for themselves, insisting that: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’
> Pali: Idha panānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṁ puggalaṁ passati— idha pāṇātipātiṁ adinnādāyiṁ …pe… micchādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passati sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ. So evamāha: ‘natthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, natthi duccaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ—idha pāṇātipātiṁ adinnādāyiṁ …pe… micchādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannan’ti. So evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Ye evaṁ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti. Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti.
[¶26] Take some ascetic or brahmin who with clairvoyance sees an individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view. And they see that they are reborn in a heavenly realm. They say: ‘It seems that there is such a thing as good deeds, and the result of good conduct. For I have seen an individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view. And I saw that they were reborn in a heavenly realm.’ They say: ‘It seems that everyone who refrains from killing living creatures … and has right view is reborn in a heavenly realm. Those whose notion is this have the right notion. Those whose notion is otherwise have a wrong notion.’ And so they obstinately stick to what they have known, seen, and understood for themselves, insisting that: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’
> Pali: Idhānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṁ puggalaṁ passati— idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṁ adinnādānā paṭivirataṁ kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirataṁ musāvādā paṭivirataṁ pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirataṁ pharusāya vācāya paṭivirataṁ samphappalāpā paṭivirataṁ anabhijjhāluṁ abyāpannacittaṁ sammādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passati sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ. So evamāha: ‘atthi kira, bho, kalyāṇāni kammāni, atthi sucaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ—idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṁ adinnādānā paṭivirataṁ …pe… sammādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannan’ti. So evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Ye evaṁ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti. Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti.
[¶27] Take some ascetic or brahmin who with clairvoyance sees an individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view. And they see that they are reborn in hell. They say: ‘It seems that there is no such thing as good deeds, and the result of good conduct. For I have seen an individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view. And I saw that they were reborn in hell.’ They say: ‘It seems that everyone who refrains from killing living creatures … and has right view is reborn in hell. Those whose notion is this have the right notion. Those whose notion is otherwise have a wrong notion.’ And so they obstinately stick to what they have known, seen, and understood for themselves, insisting that: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’
> Pali: Idha panānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṁ puggalaṁ passati—idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṁ …pe… sammādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passati apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannaṁ. So evamāha: ‘natthi kira, bho, kalyāṇāni kammāni, natthi sucaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ— idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṁ adinnādānā paṭivirataṁ …pe… sammādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannan’ti. So evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Ye evaṁ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti. Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti.
[¶28] In this case, when an ascetic or brahmin says this: ‘It seems that there is such a thing as bad deeds, and the result of bad conduct,’ I grant them that. And when they say: ‘I have seen an individual here who killed living creatures … and had wrong view. And after death, they were reborn in hell,’ I also grant them that. But when they say: ‘It seems that everyone who kills living creatures … and has wrong view is reborn in hell,’ I don’t grant them that. And when they say: ‘Those whose notion is this have the right notion. Those whose notion is otherwise have a wrong notion.’ I also don’t grant them that. And when they obstinately stick to what they have known, seen, and understood for themselves, insisting that: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile,’ I also don’t grant them that. Why is that? Because the Realized One’s knowledge of the great analysis of deeds is otherwise.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha: ‘atthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, atthi duccaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa anujānāmi; yampi so evamāha: ‘amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ—idha pāṇātipātiṁ adinnādāyiṁ …pe… micchādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannan’ti idampissa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yampi so evamāha: ‘ye evaṁ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶29] In this case, when an ascetic or brahmin says this: ‘It seems that there is no such thing as bad deeds, and the result of bad conduct,’ I don’t grant them that. But when they say: ‘I have seen an individual here who killed living creatures … and had wrong view. And I saw that they were reborn in a heavenly realm,’ I grant them that. But when they say: ‘It seems that everyone who kills living creatures … and has wrong view is reborn in a heavenly realm,’ I don’t grant them that. … Because the Realized One’s knowledge of the great analysis of deeds is otherwise.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha: ‘natthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, natthi duccaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha: ‘amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ—idha pāṇātipātiṁ adinnādāyiṁ …pe… micchādiṭṭhiṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannan’ti idamassa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yampi so evamāha: ‘ye evaṁ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶30] In this case, when an ascetic or brahmin says this: ‘It seems that there is such a thing as good deeds, and the result of good conduct,’ I grant them that. And when they say: ‘I have seen an individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view. And I saw that they were reborn in a heavenly realm,’ I also grant them that. But when they say: ‘It seems that everyone who refrains from killing living creatures … and has right view is reborn in a heavenly realm,’ I don’t grant them that. … Because the Realized One’s knowledge of the great analysis of deeds is otherwise.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha: ‘atthi kira, bho, kalyāṇāni kammāni, atthi sucaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa anujānāmi; yampi so evamāha: ‘amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ—idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṁ adinnādānā paṭivirataṁ …pe… sammādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannan’ti idampissa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yampi so evamāha: ‘ye evaṁ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶31] In this case, when an ascetic or brahmin says this: ‘It seems that there is no such thing as good deeds, and the result of good conduct,’ I don’t grant them that. But when they say: ‘I have seen an individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view. And after death, they were reborn in hell,’ I grant them that. But when they say: ‘It seems that everyone who refrains from killing living creatures … and has right view is reborn in hell,’ I don’t grant them that. But when they say: ‘Those whose notion is this have the right notion. Those whose notion is otherwise have a wrong notion,’ I also don’t grant them that. And when they obstinately stick to what they have known, seen, and understood for themselves, insisting that: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile,’ I also don’t grant them that. Why is that? Because the Realized One’s knowledge of the great analysis of deeds is otherwise.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha: ‘natthi kira, bho, kalyāṇāni kammāni, natthi sucaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha: ‘amāhaṁ puggalaṁ addasaṁ—idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṁ adinnādānā paṭivirataṁ …pe… sammādiṭṭhiṁ, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannan’ti idamassa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha: ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha: ‘ye evaṁ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṁ ñāṇan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṁ ñātaṁ sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ sāmaṁ viditaṁ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶32] Now, Ānanda, take the case of the individual here who killed living creatures … and had wrong view, and who, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. That bad deed of theirs that is to be experienced as painful was either done previously, or later, or else at the time of death they undertook wrong view. And that’s why, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. But anyone here who kills living creatures … and has wrong view experiences the result of that in this very life, or in the next life, or in some subsequent period.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ puggalo idha pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti pāpakammaṁ dukkhavedanīyaṁ, pacchā vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti pāpakammaṁ dukkhavedanīyaṁ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātī hoti adinnādāyī hoti …pe… micchādiṭṭhi hoti tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
[¶33] Now, Ānanda, take the case of the individual here who killed living creatures … and had wrong view, and who is reborn in a heavenly realm. That good deed of theirs that is to be experienced as pleasurable was either done previously, or later, or else at the time of death they undertook right view. And that’s why, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. But anyone here who kills living creatures … and has wrong view experiences the result of that in this very life, or in the next life, or in some subsequent period.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ puggalo idha pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī …pe… micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti kalyāṇakammaṁ sukhavedanīyaṁ, pacchā vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti kalyāṇakammaṁ sukhavedanīyaṁ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātī hoti adinnādāyī hoti …pe… micchādiṭṭhi hoti tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
[¶34] Now, Ānanda, take the case of the individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view, and who is reborn in a heavenly realm. That good deed of theirs that is to be experienced as pleasurable was either done previously, or later, or else at the time of death they undertook right view. And that’s why, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. But anyone here who refrains from killing living creatures … and has right view experiences the result of that in this very life, or in the next life, or in some subsequent period.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti kalyāṇakammaṁ sukhavedanīyaṁ, pacchā vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti kalyāṇakammaṁ sukhavedanīyaṁ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
[¶35] Now, Ānanda, take the case of the individual here who refrained from killing living creatures … and had right view, and who is reborn in hell. That bad deed of theirs that is to be experienced as painful was either done previously, or later, or else at the time of death they undertook wrong view. And that’s why, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. But anyone here who refrains from killing living creatures … and has right view experiences the result of that in this very life, or in the next life, or in some subsequent period.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yvāyaṁ puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato …pe… sammādiṭṭhi, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti pāpakammaṁ dukkhavedanīyaṁ, pacchā vāssa taṁ kataṁ hoti pāpakammaṁ dukkhavedanīyaṁ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti …pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
[¶36] So, Ānanda, there are deeds that are ineffective and appear ineffective. There are deeds that are ineffective but appear effective. There are deeds that are effective and appear effective. And there are deeds that are effective but appear ineffective.”
> Pali: Iti kho, ānanda, atthi kammaṁ abhabbaṁ abhabbābhāsaṁ, atthi kammaṁ abhabbaṁ bhabbābhāsaṁ, atthi kammaṁ bhabbañceva bhabbābhāsañca, atthi kammaṁ bhabbaṁ abhabbābhāsan”ti.
[¶37] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶38] > Pali: Mahākammavibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 150. MN 137 · The Analysis of the Six Sense Fields
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/150/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/150/#p-N
[¶0] MN 137 · The Analysis of the Six Sense Fields
> Pali: MN 137 · Saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I shall teach you the analysis of the six sense fields. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “saḷāyatanavibhaṅgaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “‘The six interior sense fields should be understood. The six exterior sense fields should be understood. The six classes of consciousness should be understood. The six classes of contact should be understood. The eighteen mental preoccupations should be understood. The thirty-six positions of sentient beings should be understood. Therein, relying on this, give up that. The Noble One cultivates the establishment of mindfulness in three cases, by virtue of which they are a Teacher worthy to instruct a group. Of all meditation tutors, it is he that is called the supreme guide for those fit for training.’ This is the summary recital for the analysis of the six sense fields.
> Pali: “‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbāni, cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbāni, cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā, cha phassakāyā veditabbā, aṭṭhārasa manopavicārā veditabbā, chattiṁsa sattapadā veditabbā, tatra idaṁ nissāya idaṁ pajahatha, tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati, so vuccati yoggācariyānaṁ anuttaro purisadammasārathī’ti— ayamuddeso saḷāyatanavibhaṅgassa.
[¶6] ‘The six interior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are the sense fields of the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. ‘The six interior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? ‘Cakkhāyatanaṁ sotāyatanaṁ ghānāyatanaṁ jivhāyatanaṁ kāyāyatanaṁ manāyatanaṁ— cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶7] ‘The six exterior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are the sense fields of sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. ‘The six exterior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? ‘Rūpāyatanaṁ saddāyatanaṁ gandhāyatanaṁ rasāyatanaṁ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṁ dhammāyatanaṁ— cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶8] ‘The six classes of consciousness should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind consciousness. ‘The six classes of consciousness should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? ‘Cakkhuviññāṇaṁ sotaviññāṇaṁ ghānaviññāṇaṁ jivhāviññāṇaṁ kāyaviññāṇaṁ manoviññāṇaṁ— cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶9] ‘The six classes of contact should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There is contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. ‘The six classes of contact should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Cha phassakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? ‘Cakkhusamphasso sotasamphasso ghānasamphasso jivhāsamphasso kāyasamphasso manosamphasso— cha phassakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶10] ‘The eighteen mental preoccupations should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for happiness or sadness or equanimity. Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhārasa manopavicārā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? ‘Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā somanassaṭṭhānīyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhānīyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati, upekkhāṭṭhānīyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …
[¶11] Encountering a touch with their body … Becoming conscious of an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for happiness or sadness or equanimity. So there are six preoccupations with happiness, six preoccupations with sadness, and six preoccupations with equanimity. ‘The eighteen mental preoccupations should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya somanassaṭṭhānīyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhānīyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati, upekkhāṭṭhānīyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati. Iti cha somanassūpavicārā, cha domanassūpavicārā, cha upekkhūpavicārā, aṭṭhārasa manopavicārā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶12] ‘The thirty-six positions of sentient beings should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are six kinds of domestic happiness and six kinds of renunciate happiness. There are six kinds of domestic sadness and six kinds of renunciate sadness. There are six kinds of domestic equanimity and six kinds of renunciate equanimity.
> Pali: ‘Chattiṁsa sattapadā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cha gehasitāni somanassāni, cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni, cha gehasitāni domanassāni, cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni, cha gehasitā upekkhā, cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā.
[¶13] And in this context what are the six kinds of domestic happiness? There are sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasing, connected with the worldly pleasures of the flesh. Happiness arises when you regard it as a gain to obtain such sights, or when you recollect sights you formerly obtained that have passed, ceased, and perished. Such happiness is called domestic happiness. There are sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body … Ideas known by the mind, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasing, connected with the worldly pleasures of the flesh. Happiness arises when you regard it as a gain to obtain such ideas, or when you recollect ideas you formerly obtained that have passed, ceased, and perished. Such happiness is called domestic happiness. These are the six kinds of domestic happiness.
> Pali: Tattha katamāni cha gehasitāni somanassāni? Cakkhuviññeyyānaṁ rūpānaṁ iṭṭhānaṁ kantānaṁ manāpānaṁ manoramānaṁ lokāmisapaṭisaṁyuttānaṁ paṭilābhaṁ vā paṭilābhato samanupassato pubbe vā paṭiladdhapubbaṁ atītaṁ niruddhaṁ vipariṇataṁ samanussarato uppajjati somanassaṁ. Yaṁ evarūpaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati gehasitaṁ somanassaṁ. Sotaviññeyyānaṁ saddānaṁ … ghānaviññeyyānaṁ gandhānaṁ … jivhāviññeyyānaṁ rasānaṁ … kāyaviññeyyānaṁ phoṭṭhabbānaṁ … manoviññeyyānaṁ dhammānaṁ iṭṭhānaṁ kantānaṁ manāpānaṁ …pe… somanassaṁ. Yaṁ evarūpaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati gehasitaṁ somanassaṁ. Imāni cha gehasitāni somanassāni.
[¶14] And in this context what are the six kinds of renunciate happiness? When you’ve understood the impermanence of sights—their perishing, fading away, and cessation—happiness arises as you truly understand through right understanding that both formerly and now all those sights are impermanent, suffering, and perishable. Such happiness is called renunciate happiness. When you’ve understood the impermanence of sounds … smells … tastes … touches … ideas—their perishing, fading away, and cessation—happiness arises as you truly understand through right understanding that both formerly and now all those ideas are impermanent, suffering, and perishable. Such happiness is called renunciate happiness. These are the six kinds of renunciate happiness.
> Pali: Tattha katamāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni? Rūpānaṁ tveva aniccataṁ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṁ, ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca sabbe te rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati somanassaṁ. Yaṁ evarūpaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati nekkhammasitaṁ somanassaṁ. Saddānaṁ tveva … gandhānaṁ tveva … rasānaṁ tveva … phoṭṭhabbānaṁ tveva … dhammānaṁ tveva aniccataṁ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṁ, ‘pubbe ceva dhammā etarahi ca sabbe te dhammā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati somanassaṁ. Yaṁ evarūpaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati nekkhammasitaṁ somanassaṁ. Imāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni.
[¶15] And in this context what are the six kinds of domestic sadness? There are sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasing, connected with the worldly pleasures of the flesh. Sadness arises when you regard it as a loss to lose such sights, or when you recollect sights you formerly lost that have passed, ceased, and perished. Such sadness is called domestic sadness. There are sounds known by the ear … There are smells known by the nose … There are tastes known by the tongue … There are touches known by the body … There are ideas known by the mind, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasing, connected with the worldly pleasures of the flesh. Sadness arises when you regard it as a loss to lose such ideas, or when you recollect ideas you formerly lost that have passed, ceased, and perished. Such sadness is called domestic sadness. These are the six kinds of domestic sadness.
> Pali: Tattha katamāni cha gehasitāni domanassāni? Cakkhuviññeyyānaṁ rūpānaṁ … pe… sotaviññeyyānaṁ saddānaṁ … ghānaviññeyyānaṁ gandhānaṁ … jivhāviññeyyānaṁ rasānaṁ … kāyaviññeyyānaṁ phoṭṭhabbānaṁ … manoviññeyyānaṁ dhammānaṁ iṭṭhānaṁ kantānaṁ manāpānaṁ manoramānaṁ lokāmisapaṭisaṁyuttānaṁ appaṭilābhaṁ vā appaṭilābhato samanupassato pubbe vā appaṭiladdhapubbaṁ atītaṁ niruddhaṁ vipariṇataṁ samanussarato uppajjati domanassaṁ. Yaṁ evarūpaṁ domanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati gehasitaṁ domanassaṁ. Imāni cha gehasitāni domanassāni.
[¶16] And in this context what are the six kinds of renunciate sadness? When you’ve understood the impermanence of sights—their perishing, fading away, and cessation—you truly understand through right understanding that both formerly and now all those sights are impermanent, suffering, and perishable. Upon seeing this, you give rise to longing for the supreme liberations: ‘Oh, when will I enter and remain in the same dimension that the noble ones enter and remain in today?’ When you give rise to longing for the supreme liberations like this, sadness arises because of the longing. Such sadness is called renunciate sadness. When you’ve understood the impermanence of sounds … smells … tastes … touches … ideas—their perishing, fading away, and cessation—you truly understand through right understanding that both formerly and now all those ideas are impermanent, suffering, and perishable. Upon seeing this, you give rise to longing for the supreme liberations: ‘Oh, when will I enter and remain in the same dimension that the noble ones enter and remain in today?’ When you give rise to longing for the supreme liberations like this, sadness arises because of the longing. Such sadness is called renunciate sadness. These are the six kinds of renunciate sadness.
> Pali: Tattha katamāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni? Rūpānaṁ tveva aniccataṁ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṁ, ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca sabbe te rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti: ‘kudāssu nāmāhaṁ tadāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharissāmi yadariyā etarahi āyatanaṁ upasampajja viharantī’ti iti anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṁ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati pihapaccayā domanassaṁ. Yaṁ evarūpaṁ domanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati nekkhammasitaṁ domanassaṁ. Saddānaṁ tveva …pe… gandhānaṁ tveva … rasānaṁ tveva … phoṭṭhabbānaṁ tveva … dhammānaṁ tveva aniccataṁ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṁ, ‘pubbe ceva dhammā etarahi ca sabbe te dhammā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṁ upaṭṭhāpeti: ‘kudāssu nāmāhaṁ tadāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharissāmi yadariyā etarahi āyatanaṁ upasampajja viharantī’ti iti anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṁ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati pihapaccayā domanassaṁ. Yaṁ evarūpaṁ domanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati nekkhammasitaṁ domanassaṁ. Imāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni.
[¶17] And in this context what are the six kinds of domestic equanimity? When seeing a sight with their eyes, equanimity arises for the unlearned ordinary person—a foolish ordinary person who has not overcome their limitations and the results of deeds, and is blind to the drawbacks. Such equanimity does not transcend the sight. That’s why it’s called domestic equanimity. When hearing a sound with their ears … When smelling an odor with their nose … When tasting a flavor with their tongue … When encountering a touch with their body … When knowing an idea with their mind, equanimity arises for the unlearned ordinary person—a foolish ordinary person who has not overcome their limitations and the results of deeds, and is blind to the drawbacks. Such equanimity does not transcend the idea. That’s why it’s called domestic equanimity. These are the six kinds of domestic equanimity.
> Pali: Tattha katamā cha gehasitā upekkhā? Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassa anodhijinassa avipākajinassa anādīnavadassāvino assutavato puthujjanassa. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, rūpaṁ sā nātivattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘gehasitā’ti vuccati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā … ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassa anodhijinassa avipākajinassa anādīnavadassāvino assutavato puthujjanassa. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, dhammaṁ sā nātivattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘gehasitā’ti vuccati. Imā cha gehasitā upekkhā.
[¶18] And in this context what are the six kinds of renunciate equanimity? When you’ve understood the impermanence of sights—their perishing, fading away, and cessation—equanimity arises as you truly understand through right understanding that both formerly and now all those sights are impermanent, suffering, and perishable. Such equanimity transcends the sight. That’s why it’s called renunciate equanimity. When you’ve understood the impermanence of sounds … smells … tastes … touches … ideas—their perishing, fading away, and cessation—equanimity arises as you truly understand through right understanding that both formerly and now all those ideas are impermanent, suffering, and perishable. Such equanimity transcends the idea. That’s why it’s called renunciate equanimity. These are the six kinds of renunciate equanimity. ‘The thirty-six positions of sentient beings should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: Tattha katamā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā? Rūpānaṁ tveva aniccataṁ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṁ, ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca sabbe te rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati upekkhā. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, rūpaṁ sā ativattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘nekkhammasitā’ti vuccati. Saddānaṁ tveva … gandhānaṁ tveva … rasānaṁ tveva … phoṭṭhabbānaṁ tveva … dhammānaṁ tveva aniccataṁ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṁ, ‘pubbe ceva dhammā etarahi ca sabbe te dhammā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati upekkhā. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, dhammaṁ sā ativattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘nekkhammasitā’ti vuccati. Imā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā. ‘Chattiṁsa sattapadā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶19] ‘Therein, relying on this, give up that.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it?
> Pali: ‘Tatra idaṁ nissāya idaṁ pajahathā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ?
[¶20] Therein, by relying and depending on the six kinds of renunciate happiness, give up and go beyond the six kinds of domestic happiness. That’s how they are given up.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni tāni nissāya tāni āgamma yāni cha gehasitāni somanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametesaṁ samatikkamo hoti.
[¶21] Therein, by relying on the six kinds of renunciate sadness, give up the six kinds of domestic sadness. That’s how they are given up.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni tāni nissāya tāni āgamma yāni cha gehasitāni domanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametesaṁ samatikkamo hoti.
[¶22] Therein, by relying on the six kinds of renunciate equanimity, give up the six kinds of domestic equanimity. That’s how they are given up.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā tā nissāya tā āgamma, yā cha gehasitā upekkhā tā pajahatha tā samatikkamatha. Evametāsaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametāsaṁ samatikkamo hoti.
[¶23] Therein, by relying on the six kinds of renunciate happiness, give up the six kinds of renunciate sadness. That’s how they are given up.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni tāni nissāya tāni āgamma yāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametesaṁ samatikkamo hoti.
[¶24] Therein, by relying on the six kinds of renunciate equanimity, give up the six kinds of renunciate happiness. That’s how they are given up.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā tā nissāya tā āgamma yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṁ pahānaṁ hoti, evametesaṁ samatikkamo hoti.
[¶25] There is equanimity that is diversified, based on diversity, and equanimity that is unified, based on unity.
> Pali: Atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā, atthi upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā.
[¶26] And what is equanimity based on diversity? There is equanimity toward sights, sounds, smells, tastes, and touches. This is equanimity based on diversity.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā? Atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhā rūpesu, atthi saddesu, atthi gandhesu, atthi rasesu, atthi phoṭṭhabbesu— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā.
[¶27] And what is equanimity based on unity? There is equanimity based on the dimensions of infinite space, infinite consciousness, nothingness, and neither perception nor non-perception. This is equanimity based on unity.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā? Atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhā ākāsānañcāyatananissitā, atthi viññāṇañcāyatananissitā, atthi ākiñcaññāyatananissitā, atthi nevasaññānāsaññāyatananissitā— ayaṁ, bhikkhave, upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā.
[¶28] Therein, relying on equanimity based on unity, give up equanimity based on diversity. That’s how it is given up.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṁ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā taṁ nissāya taṁ āgamma yāyaṁ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā taṁ pajahatha, taṁ samatikkamatha. Evametissā pahānaṁ hoti, evametissā samatikkamo hoti.
[¶29] Relying on not being determined by that, give up equanimity based on unity. That’s how it is given up. ‘Therein, relying on this, give up that.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: Atammayataṁ, bhikkhave, nissāya atammayataṁ āgamma yāyaṁ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā taṁ pajahatha, taṁ samatikkamatha. Evametissā pahānaṁ hoti, evametissā samatikkamo hoti. ‘Tatra idaṁ nissāya idaṁ pajahathā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶30] ‘The Noble One cultivates the establishment of mindfulness in three cases, by virtue of which they are a Teacher worthy to instruct a group.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it?
> Pali: ‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ?
[¶31] The first case is when the Teacher teaches Dhamma to his disciples out of kindness and sympathy: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ But their disciples don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They proceed having turned away from the Teacher’s instruction. In this case the Realized One is not unhappy, he does not feel unhappiness. He remains unfestering, mindful and aware. This is the first case in which the Noble One cultivates the establishment of mindfulness.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṁ upādāya: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṁ odahanti, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṁ paṭisaṁvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ satipaṭṭhānaṁ yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati.
[¶32] The next case is when the Teacher teaches Dhamma to his disciples out of kindness and sympathy: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ And some of their disciples don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They proceed having turned away from the Teacher’s instruction. But some of their disciples do want to listen. They actively listen and try to understand. They don’t proceed having turned away from the Teacher’s instruction. In this case the Realized One is not unhappy, nor is he happy. Shunning both unhappiness and happiness, he remains equanimous, mindful and aware. This is the second case in which the Noble One cultivates the establishment of mindfulness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṁ upādāya: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa ekacce sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṁ odahanti, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti; ekacce sāvakā sussūsanti, sotaṁ odahanti, aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṁ paṭisaṁvedeti; na ca attamano hoti, na ca attamanataṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Anattamanatā ca attamanatā ca— tadubhayaṁ abhinivajjetvā upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ satipaṭṭhānaṁ yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati.
[¶33] The next case is when the Teacher teaches Dhamma to his disciples out of kindness and sympathy: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ And their disciples want to listen. They actively listen and try to understand. They don’t proceed having turned away from the Teacher’s instruction. In this case the Realized One is happy, he does feel happiness. He remains unfestering, mindful and aware. This is the third case in which the Noble One cultivates the establishment of mindfulness. ‘The Noble One cultivates the establishment of mindfulness in three cases, by virtue of which they are a Teacher worthy to instruct a group.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṁ upādāya: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā sussūsanti, sotaṁ odahanti, aññācittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato attamano ceva hoti, attamanatañca paṭisaṁvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, tatiyaṁ satipaṭṭhānaṁ yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati. ‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶34] ‘Of all meditation tutors, it is he that is called the supreme guide for those fit for training.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Driven by an elephant trainer, an elephant in training proceeds in just one direction: east, west, north, or south.
> Pali: ‘So vuccati yoggācariyānaṁ anuttaro purisadammasārathī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Hatthidamakena, bhikkhave, hatthidammo sārito ekaṁyeva disaṁ dhāvati— puratthimaṁ vā pacchimaṁ vā uttaraṁ vā dakkhiṇaṁ vā.
[¶35] Driven by a horse trainer, a horse in training proceeds in just one direction: east, west, north, or south. Driven by an ox trainer, an ox in training proceeds in just one direction: east, west, north, or south. But driven by the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, a person in training proceeds in eight directions:
> Pali: Assadamakena, bhikkhave, assadammo sārito ekaññeva disaṁ dhāvati— puratthimaṁ vā pacchimaṁ vā uttaraṁ vā dakkhiṇaṁ vā. Godamakena, bhikkhave, godammo sārito ekaññeva disaṁ dhāvati— puratthimaṁ vā pacchimaṁ vā uttaraṁ vā dakkhiṇaṁ vā. Tathāgatena hi, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena purisadammo sārito aṭṭha disā vidhāvati.
[¶36] Having physical form, they see forms. This is the first direction. Not perceiving physical form internally, they see forms externally. This is the second direction. They’re focused only on beauty. This is the third direction. Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fourth direction. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the fifth direction. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. This is the sixth direction. Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the seventh direction. Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is the eighth direction. Driven by the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, a person in training proceeds in these eight directions.
> Pali: Rūpī rūpāni passati— ayaṁ ekā disā; ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati— ayaṁ dutiyā disā; subhantveva adhimutto hoti— ayaṁ tatiyā disā; sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati— ayaṁ catutthī disā; sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati— ayaṁ pañcamī disā; sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati— ayaṁ chaṭṭhī disā; sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati— ayaṁ sattamī disā; sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati— ayaṁ aṭṭhamī disā. Tathāgatena, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena purisadammo sārito imā aṭṭha disā vidhāvati.
[¶37] ‘Of all meditation tutors, it is he that is called the supreme guide for those fit for training.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.”
> Pali: So vuccati: ‘yoggācariyānaṁ anuttaro purisadammasārathī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttan”ti.
[¶38] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶39] > Pali: Saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 151. MN 138 · A Summary Recital and its Analysis
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/151/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/151/#p-N
[¶0] MN 138 · A Summary Recital and its Analysis
> Pali: MN 138 · Uddesavibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I shall teach you a summary recital and its analysis. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “uddesavibhaṅgaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “A mendicant should examine in whatever way such that, while examining, consciousness would neither be scattered nor diffused externally, nor stuck internally, and they would not be anxious because of grasping. When consciousness is neither scattered nor diffused externally, nor stuck internally, and they are not anxious because of grasping, there is no coming to be of the origin of suffering—of rebirth, old age, and death in the future.”
> Pali: “Tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī”ti.
[¶6] That is what the Buddha said. When he had spoken, the Holy One rose from his seat and entered his dwelling.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.
[¶7] Soon after the Buddha left, those mendicants considered, “The Buddha gave this brief summary recital, then entered his dwelling without explaining the meaning in detail. Who can explain in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha?”
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi: “idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyā”ti?
[¶8] Then those mendicants thought, “This Venerable Mahākaccāna is praised by the Buddha and esteemed by his sensible spiritual companions. He is capable of explaining in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha. Let’s go to him, and ask him about this matter.”
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ; pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā”ti.
[¶9] Then those mendicants went to Mahākaccāna, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side. They told him what had happened, and said, “May Venerable Mahākaccāna please explain this.”
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā mahākaccānena saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etadavocuṁ: “Idaṁ kho no, āvuso kaccāna, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Tesaṁ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṁ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi: ‘idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: “tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya, yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī”ti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyā’ti. Tesaṁ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṁ etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito, sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti— vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno”ti.
[¶10] “Reverends, suppose there was a person in need of heartwood. And while wandering in search of heartwood he’d come across a large tree standing with heartwood. But he’d pass over the roots and trunk, imagining that the heartwood should be sought in the branches and leaves. Such is the consequence for the venerables. Though you were face to face with the Buddha, you bypassed him, imagining that you should ask me about this matter. For he is the Buddha, the one who knows and sees. He is vision, he is knowledge, he is the manifestation of principle, he is the manifestation of divinity. He is the preacher, the proclaimer, the elucidator of meaning, the bestower of freedom from death, the lord of truth, the Realized One. That was the time to approach the Buddha and ask about this matter. You should have remembered it in line with the Buddha’s answer.”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, āvuso, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṁ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva mūlaṁ atikkamma khandhaṁ sākhāpalāse sāraṁ pariyesitabbaṁ maññeyya, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ āyasmantānaṁ satthari sammukhībhūte taṁ bhagavantaṁ atisitvā amhe etamatthaṁ paṭipucchitabbaṁ maññatha. So hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti, passaṁ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṁ bhagavantaṁyeva etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha; yathā vo bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṁ dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶11] “Certainly he is the Buddha, the one who knows and sees. He is vision, he is knowledge, he is the manifestation of principle, he is the manifestation of divinity. He is the preacher, the proclaimer, the elucidator of meaning, the bestower of freedom from death, the lord of truth, the Realized One. That was the time to approach the Buddha and ask about this matter. We should have remembered it in line with the Buddha’s answer. Still, Venerable Mahākaccāna is praised by the Buddha and esteemed by his sensible spiritual companions. He is capable of explaining in detail the meaning of this brief summary recital given by the Buddha. Please explain this, if it’s no trouble.”
> Pali: “Addhāvuso kaccāna, bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti, passaṁ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṁ bhagavantaṁyeva etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāma; yathā no bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṁ dhāreyyāma. Api cāyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno agaruṁ karitvā”ti.
[¶12] “Well then, reverends, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶13] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. Venerable Mahākaccāna said this:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā mahākaccāno etadavoca:
[¶14] “Reverends, the Buddha gave this brief summary recital, then entered his dwelling without explaining the meaning in detail: ‘A mendicant should examine in whatever way such that, while examining, consciousness would neither be scattered nor diffused externally, nor stuck internally, and they would not be anxious because of grasping. When consciousness is neither scattered nor diffused externally, nor stuck internally, and they are not anxious because of grasping, there is no coming to be of the origin of suffering—of rebirth, old age, and death in the future.’ This is how I understand the detailed meaning of this summary recital.
> Pali: “Yaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya, yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya, bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Imassa kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi.
[¶15] How is consciousness said to be scattered and diffused externally? In this case, when a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, and consciousness follows after the features of that sight—tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in its features—consciousness is said to be scattered and diffused externally. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, and consciousness follows after the features of that idea—tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in its features—consciousness is said to be scattered and diffused externally. That’s how consciousness is said to be scattered and diffused externally.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ vikkhittaṁ visaṭanti vuccati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā rūpanimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti rūpanimittassādagadhitaṁ rūpanimittassādavinibandhaṁ rūpanimittassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ vikkhittaṁ visaṭanti vuccati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya dhammanimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti; dhammanimittassādagadhitaṁ dhammanimittassādavinibandhaṁ dhammanimittassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ vikkhittaṁ visaṭanti vuccati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ vikkhittaṁ visaṭanti vuccati.
[¶16] And how is consciousness said to be not scattered and diffused externally? In this case, when a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, but consciousness does not follow after the features of that sight—not tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in its features—consciousness is said to be not scattered and diffused externally. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, but consciousness does not follow after the features of that idea—not tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in its features—consciousness is said to be not scattered and diffused externally. That’s how consciousness is said to be not scattered and diffused externally.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭanti vuccati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na rūpanimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti, na rūpanimittassādagadhitaṁ na rūpanimittassādavinibandhaṁ na rūpanimittassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭanti vuccati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na dhammanimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti na dhammanimittassādagadhitaṁ na dhammanimittassādavinibandhaṁ na dhammanimittassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭanti vuccati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭanti vuccati.
[¶17] And how is it said to be stuck internally? Take a mendicant who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. When consciousness follows after that rapture and bliss born of seclusion—tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that rapture and bliss born of seclusion—the mind is said to be stuck internally.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, ajjhattaṁ saṇṭhitanti vuccati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa vivekajapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti vivekajapītisukhassādagadhitaṁ vivekajapītisukhassādavinibandhaṁ vivekajapītisukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶18] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. When consciousness follows after that rapture and bliss born of immersion—tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that rapture and bliss born of immersion—the mind is said to be stuck internally.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa samādhijapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti samādhijapītisukhassādagadhitaṁ samādhijapītisukhassādavinibandhaṁ samādhijapītisukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶19] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ When consciousness follows after that equanimity—tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that bliss with equanimity—the mind is said to be stuck internally.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa upekkhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti upekkhāsukhassādagadhitaṁ upekkhāsukhassādavinibandhaṁ upekkhāsukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶20] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. When consciousness follows after that neutral feeling—tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that neutral feeling—the mind is said to be stuck internally. That’s how it is said to be stuck internally.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa adukkhamasukhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti adukkhamasukhassādagadhitaṁ adukkhamasukhassādavinibandhaṁ adukkhamasukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, ajjhattaṁ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶21] And how is it said to be not stuck internally? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. When consciousness does not follow after that rapture and bliss born of seclusion—not tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that rapture and bliss born of seclusion—the mind is said to be not stuck internally.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na vivekajapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti na vivekajapītisukhassādagadhitaṁ na vivekajapītisukhassādavinibandhaṁ na vivekajapītisukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶22] Furthermore, they enter the second absorption … When consciousness does not follow after that rapture and bliss born of immersion—not tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that rapture and bliss born of immersion—the mind is said to be not stuck internally.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na samādhijapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti na samādhijapītisukhassādagadhitaṁ na samādhijapītisukhassādavinibandhaṁ na samādhijapītisukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶23] Furthermore, they enter and remain in the third absorption … When consciousness does not follow after that equanimity—not tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that bliss with equanimity—the mind is said to be not stuck internally.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na upekkhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti na upekkhāsukhassādagadhitaṁ na upekkhāsukhassādavinibandhaṁ na upekkhāsukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶24] Furthermore, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption … When consciousness does not follow after that neutral feeling—not tied, attached, and fettered to gratification in that neutral feeling—the mind is said to be not stuck internally. That’s how it is said to be not stuck internally.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na adukkhamasukhānusāri viññāṇaṁ hoti na adukkhamasukhassādagadhitaṁ na adukkhamasukhassādavinibandhaṁ na adukkhamasukhassādasaṁyojanasaṁyuttaṁ ajjhattaṁ cittaṁ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati.
[¶25] And how is it anxious because of grasping? It’s when an unlearned ordinary person has not seen the noble ones, and is neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve not seen true persons, and are neither skilled nor trained in the teaching of the true persons. They regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. But that form decays and perishes, and consciousness latches on to the perishing of form. Anxieties occupy the mind, born of latching on to the perishing of form, and originating in accordance with natural principles. So it becomes frightened, worried, concerned, and anxious because of grasping. They regard feeling … perception … choices … consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. But that consciousness decays and perishes, and consciousness latches on to the perishing of consciousness. Anxieties occupy the mind, born of latching on to the perishing of consciousness, and originating in accordance with natural principles. So it becomes frightened, worried, concerned, and anxious because of grasping. That’s how it is anxious because of grasping.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, anupādā paritassanā hoti? Idhāvuso, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṁ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto sappurisānaṁ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṁ attato samanupassati rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā rūpaṁ rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Tassa taṁ rūpaṁ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa rūpavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā rūpavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṁ hoti. Tassa rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā uttāsavā ca hoti vighātavā ca apekkhavā ca anupādāya ca paritassati. Vedanaṁ …pe… saññaṁ … saṅkhāre … viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ attani vā viññāṇaṁ viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Tassa taṁ viññāṇaṁ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa viññāṇavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṁ hoti. Tassa viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā uttāsavā ca hoti vighātavā ca apekkhavā ca anupādāya ca paritassati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, anupādā paritassanā hoti.
[¶26] And how is it not anxious because of grasping? It’s when a learned noble disciple has seen the noble ones, and is skilled and trained in the teaching of the noble ones. They’ve seen true persons, and are skilled and trained in the teaching of the true persons. They don’t regard form as self, self as having form, form in self, or self in form. When that form decays and perishes, consciousness doesn’t latch on to the perishing of form. Anxieties—born of latching on to the perishing of form and originating in accordance with natural principles—don’t occupy the mind. So it does not become frightened, worried, concerned, or anxious because of grasping. They don’t regard feeling … perception … choices … consciousness as self, self as having consciousness, consciousness in self, or self in consciousness. When that consciousness decays and perishes, consciousness doesn’t latch on to the perishing of consciousness. Anxieties—born of latching on to the perishing of consciousness and originating in accordance with natural principles—don’t occupy the mind. So it does not become frightened, worried, concerned, or anxious because of grasping. That’s how it is not anxious because of grasping.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, anupādānā aparitassanā hoti? Idhāvuso, sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṁ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto sappurisānaṁ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na rūpaṁ attato samanupassati na rūpavantaṁ vā attānaṁ na attani vā rūpaṁ na rūpasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Tassa taṁ rūpaṁ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa rūpavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā na ca rūpavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṁ hoti. Tassa na rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā na cevuttāsavā hoti na ca vighātavā na ca apekkhavā anupādāya ca na paritassati. Na vedanaṁ … na saññaṁ … na saṅkhāre … na viññāṇaṁ attato samanupassati na viññāṇavantaṁ vā attānaṁ na attani vā viññāṇaṁ na viññāṇasmiṁ vā attānaṁ. Tassa taṁ viññāṇaṁ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa viññāṇavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā na ca viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṁ hoti. Tassa na viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā na cevuttāsavā hoti na ca vighātavā na ca apekkhavā, anupādāya ca na paritassati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, anupādā aparitassanā hoti.
[¶27] The Buddha gave this brief summary recital, then entered his dwelling without explaining the meaning in detail: ‘A mendicant should examine in whatever way such that, while examining, consciousness would neither be scattered nor diffused externally, nor stuck internally, and they would not be anxious because of grasping. When consciousness is neither scattered nor diffused externally, nor stuck internally, and they are not anxious because of grasping, there is no coming to be of the origin of suffering—of rebirth, old age, and death in the future.’ And this is how I understand the detailed meaning of this summary recital. If you wish, you may go to the Buddha and ask him about this. You should remember it in line with the Buddha’s answer.”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Imassa kho ahaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi. Ākaṅkhamānā ca pana tumhe āyasmanto bhagavantaṁyeva upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha; yathā vo bhagavā byākaroti tathā naṁ dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶28] Then those mendicants, approving and agreeing with what Mahākaccāna said, rose from their seats and went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened, adding:
> Pali: Atha kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ:
[¶29] > Pali: “Yaṁ kho no, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho: ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti.
[¶30] > Pali: Tesaṁ no, bhante, amhākaṁ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi: ‘idaṁ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṅkhittena uddesaṁ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṁ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ paviṭṭho— tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya, yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṁ avikkhittaṁ avisaṭaṁ, ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhitaṁ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṁ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotīti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajeyyā’ti? Tesaṁ no, bhante, amhākaṁ etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṁvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṁ sabrahmacārīnaṁ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṅkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṁ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṁ vibhajituṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti.
[¶31] “Mahākaccāna clearly explained the meaning to us in this manner, with these words and phrases.”
> Pali: Atha kho mayaṁ, bhante, yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahākaccānaṁ etamatthaṁ paṭipucchimha. Tesaṁ no, bhante, āyasmatā mahākaccānena imehi ākārehi imehi padehi imehi byañjanehi attho vibhatto”ti.
[¶32] “Mahākaccāna is astute, mendicants, he has great wisdom. If you came to me and asked this question, I would answer it in exactly the same way as Mahākaccāna. That is what it means, and that’s how you should remember it.”
> Pali: “Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno; mahāpañño, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno. Mañcepi tumhe, bhikkhave, etamatthaṁ paṭipuccheyyātha, ahampi evamevaṁ byākareyyaṁ yathā taṁ mahākaccānena byākataṁ. Eso cevetassa attho. Evañca naṁ dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶33] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶34] > Pali: Uddesavibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 152. MN 139 · The Analysis of No Strife
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/152/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/152/#p-N
[¶0] MN 139 · The Analysis of No Strife
> Pali: MN 139 · Araṇavibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I shall teach you the analysis of no strife. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “araṇavibhaṅgaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Don’t indulge in sensual pleasure, which is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. And don’t indulge in self-mortification, which is painful, ignoble, and pointless. Avoiding these two extremes, the Realized One understood the middle way of practice, which gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment. Know what it means to flatter and to rebuke. Knowing these, avoid them, and just teach Dhamma. Know how to evaluate different kinds of pleasure. Knowing this, pursue inner pleasure. Don’t talk behind people’s backs, and don’t speak sharply in their presence. Don’t speak hurriedly. Don’t insist on popular definitions and don’t overstep normal labels. This is the summary recital for the analysis of no strife.
> Pali: “Na kāmasukhamanuyuñjeyya hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, na ca attakilamathānuyogamanuyuñjeyya dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ. Ete kho, bhikkhave, ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati. Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā; ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya, na apasādeyya, dhammameva deseyya. Sukhavinicchayaṁ jaññā; sukhavinicchayaṁ ñatvā ajjhattaṁ sukhamanuyuñjeyya. Rahovādaṁ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṁ bhaṇe. Ataramānova bhāseyya, no taramāno. Janapadaniruttiṁ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṁ nātidhāveyyāti— ayamuddeso araṇavibhaṅgassa.
[¶6] ‘Don’t indulge in sensual pleasure, which is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. And don’t indulge in self-mortification, which is painful, ignoble, and pointless.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Indulging in the happiness of the pleasure linked to sensuality is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. It is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. Breaking off such indulgence is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. Indulging in self-mortification is painful, ignoble, and pointless. It is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. Breaking off such indulgence is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. ‘Don’t indulge in sensual pleasure, which is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. And don’t indulge in self-mortification, which is painful, ignoble, and pointless.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Na kāmasukhamanuyuñjeyya hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, na ca attakilamathānuyogamanuyuñjeyya dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitan’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ; Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogo hīno gammo pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṁ ananuyogo hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Yo attakilamathānuyogo dukkho anariyo anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Yo attakilamathānuyogaṁ ananuyogo dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. ‘Na kāmasukhamanuyuñjeyya hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, na ca attakilamathānuyogaṁ anuyuñjeyya dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitan’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶7] ‘Avoiding these two extremes, the Realized One understood the middle way of practice, which gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. ‘Avoiding these two extremes, the Realized One understood the middle way of practice, which gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Ete kho ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattatī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi. ‘Ete kho ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattatī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶8] ‘Know what it means to flatter and to rebuke. Knowing these, avoid them, and just teach Dhamma.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it?
> Pali: ‘Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā; ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya, na apasādeyya, dhammameva deseyyā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ?
[¶9] And how is there flattering and rebuking without teaching Dhamma? ‘All those who indulge in the happiness of the pleasure linked to sensuality—low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless—are beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the wrong way.’ In speaking like this, one rebukes some here.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, ussādanā ca hoti apasādanā ca, no ca dhammadesanā? ‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṁ anuyuttā hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti— iti vadaṁ ittheke apasādeti.
[¶10] ‘All those who have broken off indulging in the happiness of the pleasure linked to sensuality are free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the right way.’ In speaking like this, one flatters some here.
> Pali: ‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṁ ananuyuttā hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti— iti vadaṁ ittheke ussādeti.
[¶11] ‘All those who indulge in self-mortification—painful, ignoble, and pointless—are beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the wrong way.’ In speaking like this, one rebukes some here.
> Pali: ‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṁ anuyuttā dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti— iti vadaṁ ittheke apasādeti.
[¶12] ‘All those who have broken off indulging in self-mortification are free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the right way.’ In speaking like this, one flatters some here.
> Pali: ‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṁ ananuyuttā dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti— iti vadaṁ ittheke ussādeti.
[¶13] ‘All those who have not given up the fetter of continued existence are beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the wrong way.’ In speaking like this, one rebukes some here.
> Pali: ‘Yesaṁ kesañci bhavasaṁyojanaṁ appahīnaṁ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti— iti vadaṁ ittheke apasādeti.
[¶14] ‘All those who have given up the fetter of continued existence are free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the right way.’ In speaking like this, one flatters some here. That’s how there is flattering and rebuking without teaching Dhamma.
> Pali: ‘Yesaṁ kesañci bhavasaṁyojanaṁ pahīnaṁ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti— iti vadaṁ ittheke ussādeti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, ussādanā ca hoti apasādanā ca, no ca dhammadesanā.
[¶15] And how is there neither flattering nor rebuking, and just teaching Dhamma? You don’t say: ‘All those who indulge in the happiness of the pleasure linked to sensuality—low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless—are beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the wrong way.’ Rather, by saying this you just teach Dhamma: ‘The indulgence is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way.’
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, nevussādanā hoti na apasādanā, dhammadesanā ca? ‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṁ anuyuttā hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti— na evamāha. ‘Anuyogo ca kho sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā’ti— iti vadaṁ dhammameva deseti.
[¶16] You don’t say: ‘All those who have broken off indulging in the happiness of the pleasure linked to sensuality are free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the right way.’ Rather, by saying this you just teach Dhamma: ‘Breaking off the indulgence is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way.’
> Pali: ‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṁ ananuyuttā hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti— na evamāha. ‘Ananuyogo ca kho adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā’ti— iti vadaṁ dhammameva deseti.
[¶17] You don’t say: ‘All those who indulge in self-mortification—painful, ignoble, and pointless—are beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the wrong way.’ Rather, by saying this you just teach Dhamma: ‘The indulgence is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way.’
> Pali: ‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṁ anuyuttā dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti— na evamāha. ‘Anuyogo ca kho sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā’ti— iti vadaṁ dhammameva deseti.
[¶18] You don’t say: ‘All those who have broken off indulging in self-mortification are free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the right way.’ Rather, by saying this you just teach Dhamma: ‘Breaking off the indulgence is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way.’
> Pali: ‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṁ ananuyuttā dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti— na evamāha. ‘Ananuyogo ca kho adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā’ti— iti vadaṁ dhammameva deseti.
[¶19] You don’t say: ‘All those who have not given up the fetter of continued existence are beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the wrong way.’ Rather, by saying this you just teach Dhamma: ‘When the fetter of continued existence is not given up, continued existence is also not given up.’
> Pali: ‘Yesaṁ kesañci bhavasaṁyojanaṁ appahīnaṁ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti— na evamāha. ‘Bhavasaṁyojane ca kho appahīne bhavopi appahīno hotī’ti— iti vadaṁ dhammameva deseti.
[¶20] You don’t say: ‘All those who have given up the fetter of continued existence are free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and they are practicing the right way.’ Rather, by saying this you just teach Dhamma: ‘When the fetter of continued existence is given up, continued existence is also given up.’ That’s how there is neither flattering nor rebuking, and just teaching Dhamma. ‘Know what it means to flatter and to rebuke. Knowing these, avoid them, and just teach Dhamma.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Yesaṁ kesañci bhavasaṁyojanaṁ pahīnaṁ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti— na evamāha. ‘Bhavasaṁyojane ca kho pahīne bhavopi pahīno hotī’ti— iti vadaṁ dhammameva deseti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, nevussādanā hoti na apasādanā, dhammadesanā ca. ‘Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā; ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya, na apasādeyya, dhammameva deseyyā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶21] ‘Know how to evaluate different kinds of pleasure. Knowing this, pursue inner pleasure.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are these five kinds of sensual stimulation. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation. The pleasure and happiness that arise from these five kinds of sensual stimulation is called sensual pleasure—a filthy, common, ignoble pleasure. Such pleasure should not be cultivated or developed, but should be feared, I say. Now, take a mendicant who, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. This is called the pleasure of renunciation, the pleasure of seclusion, the pleasure of peace, the pleasure of awakening. Such pleasure should be cultivated and developed, and should not be feared, I say. ‘Know how to evaluate different kinds of pleasure. Knowing this, pursue inner pleasure.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Sukhavinicchayaṁ jaññā; sukhavinicchayaṁ ñatvā ajjhattaṁ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Pañcime, bhikkhave, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā … ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā— ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca kāmaguṇā. Yaṁ kho, bhikkhave, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati kāmasukhaṁ mīḷhasukhaṁ puthujjanasukhaṁ anariyasukhaṁ. ‘Na āsevitabbaṁ, na bhāvetabbaṁ, na bahulīkātabbaṁ, bhāyitabbaṁ etassa sukhassā’ti—vadāmi. Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ vuccati nekkhammasukhaṁ pavivekasukhaṁ upasamasukhaṁ sambodhisukhaṁ. ‘Āsevitabbaṁ, bhāvetabbaṁ, bahulīkātabbaṁ, na bhāyitabbaṁ etassa sukhassā’ti—vadāmi. ‘Sukhavinicchayaṁ jaññā; sukhavinicchayaṁ ñatvā ajjhattaṁ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶22] ‘Don’t talk behind people’s backs, and don’t speak sharply in their presence.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? When you know that what you say behind someone’s back is untrue, false, and pointless, then to the best of your ability you should not speak. When you know that what you say behind someone’s back is true and correct, but pointless, then you should train yourself not to speak. When you know that what you say behind someone’s back is true, correct, and beneficial, then you should know the right time to speak. When you know that your sharp words in someone’s presence are untrue, false, and pointless, then to the best of your ability you should not speak. When you know that your sharp words in someone’s presence are true and correct, but pointless, then you should train yourself not to speak. When you know that your sharp words in someone’s presence are true, correct, and beneficial, then you should know the right time to speak. ‘Don’t talk behind people’s backs, and don’t speak sharply in their presence.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Rahovādaṁ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṁ bhaṇe’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tatra, bhikkhave, yaṁ jaññā rahovādaṁ abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ sasakkaṁ taṁ rahovādaṁ na bhāseyya. Yampi jaññā rahovādaṁ bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ tassapi sikkheyya avacanāya. Yañca kho jaññā rahovādaṁ bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ tatra kālaññū assa tassa rahovādassa vacanāya. Tatra, bhikkhave, yaṁ jaññā sammukhā khīṇavādaṁ abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ sasakkaṁ taṁ sammukhā khīṇavādaṁ na bhāseyya. Yampi jaññā sammukhā khīṇavādaṁ bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ tassapi sikkheyya avacanāya. Yañca kho jaññā sammukhā khīṇavādaṁ bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ tatra kālaññū assa tassa sammukhā khīṇavādassa vacanāya. ‘Rahovādaṁ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṁ bhaṇe’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶23] ‘Don’t speak hurriedly.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? When speaking hurriedly, your body gets tired, your mind gets stressed, your voice gets stressed, your throat gets sore, and your words become unclear and hard to understand. When not speaking hurriedly, your body doesn’t get tired, your mind doesn’t get stressed, your voice doesn’t get stressed, your throat doesn’t get sore, and your words are clear and easy to understand. ‘Don’t speak hurriedly.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Ataramānova bhāseyya no taramāno’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tatra, bhikkhave, taramānassa bhāsato kāyopi kilamati, cittampi upahaññati, saropi upahaññati, kaṇṭhopi āturīyati, avisaṭṭhampi hoti aviññeyyaṁ taramānassa bhāsitaṁ. Tatra, bhikkhave, ataramānassa bhāsato kāyopi na kilamati, cittampi na upahaññati, saropi na upahaññati, kaṇṭhopi na āturīyati, visaṭṭhampi hoti viññeyyaṁ ataramānassa bhāsitaṁ. ‘Ataramānova bhāseyya, no taramāno’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶24] ‘Don’t insist on popular definitions and don’t overstep normal labels.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? And how do you insist on popular definitions and overstep normal labels? It’s when among different populations they label the same thing as a ‘cup’, a ‘bowl’, a ‘jar’, a ‘scoop’, a ‘vessel’, a ‘dish’, or a ‘plate’. And however it is known among those various populations, you speak accordingly, obstinately sticking to that and insisting: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ That’s how you insist on popular definitions and overstep normal labels.
> Pali: ‘Janapadaniruttiṁ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṁ nātidhāveyyā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Kathañca, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca abhiniveso hoti samaññāya ca atisāro? Idha, bhikkhave, tadevekaccesu janapadesu ‘pātī’ti sañjānanti, ‘pattan’ti sañjānanti, ‘vittan’ti sañjānanti, ‘sarāvan’ti sañjānanti ‘dhāropan’ti sañjānanti, ‘poṇan’ti sañjānanti, ‘pisīlavan’ti sañjānanti. Iti yathā yathā naṁ tesu tesu janapadesu sañjānanti tathā tathā thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati: ‘idameva saccaṁ, moghamaññan’ti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca abhiniveso hoti samaññāya ca atisāro.
[¶25] And how do you not insist on popular definitions and overstep normal labels? It’s when among different populations they label the same thing as a ‘cup’, a ‘bowl’, a ‘jar’, a ‘scoop’, a ‘vessel’, a ‘dish’, or a ‘plate’. And however it is known among those various populations, you speak accordingly, thinking: ‘It seems that the venerables are referring to this.’ That’s how you don’t insist on popular definitions and don’t overstep normal labels. ‘Don’t insist on popular definitions and don’t overstep normal labels.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso hoti samaññāya ca anatisāro? Idha, bhikkhave, tadevekaccesu janapadesu ‘pātī’ti sañjānanti, ‘pattan’ti sañjānanti, ‘vittan’ti sañjānanti, ‘sarāvan’ti sañjānanti, ‘dhāropan’ti sañjānanti, ‘poṇan’ti sañjānanti, ‘pisīlavan’ti sañjānanti. Iti yathā yathā naṁ tesu tesu janapadesu sañjānanti ‘idaṁ kira me āyasmanto sandhāya voharantī’ti tathā tathā voharati aparāmasaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso hoti, samaññāya ca anatisāro. ‘Janapadaniruttiṁ nābhiniveseyya samaññaṁ nātidhāveyyā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶26] Now, mendicants, indulging in the happiness of the pleasure linked to sensuality is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. It is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Breaking off such indulgence is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogo hīno gammo pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṁ ananuyogo hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶27] Indulging in self-mortification is painful, ignoble, and pointless. It is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Breaking off such indulgence is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yo attakilamathānuyogo dukkho anariyo anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yo attakilamathānuyogaṁ ananuyogo dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶28] The middle way of practice that was understood by the Realized One gives vision and knowledge, and leads to peace, direct knowledge, awakening, and extinguishment. It is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṁ majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶29] Flattering and rebuking without teaching Dhamma is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Neither flattering nor rebuking, and just teaching Dhamma is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṁ ussādanā ca apasādanā ca no ca dhammadesanā, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṁ nevussādanā ca na apasādanā ca dhammadesanā ca, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶30] Sensual pleasure—a filthy, common, ignoble pleasure—is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. The pleasure of renunciation, the pleasure of seclusion, the pleasure of peace, the pleasure of awakening is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ kāmasukhaṁ mīḷhasukhaṁ pothujjanasukhaṁ anariyasukhaṁ, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ nekkhammasukhaṁ pavivekasukhaṁ upasamasukhaṁ sambodhisukhaṁ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶31] Saying untrue, false, and pointless things behind someone’s back is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Saying true and correct, but pointless things behind someone’s back is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Saying true, correct, and beneficial things behind someone’s back is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ rahovādo abhūto ataccho anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ rahovādo bhūto taccho anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ rahovādo bhūto taccho atthasaṁhito, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶32] Saying untrue, false, and pointless things in someone’s presence is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Saying true and correct, but pointless things in someone’s presence is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Saying true, correct, and beneficial things in someone’s presence is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ sammukhā khīṇavādo abhūto ataccho anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ sammukhā khīṇavādo bhūto taccho anatthasaṁhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ sammukhā khīṇavādo bhūto taccho atthasaṁhito, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶33] Speaking hurriedly is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Speaking unhurriedly is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ taramānassa bhāsitaṁ, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṁ ataramānassa bhāsitaṁ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶34] Insisting on popular definitions and overriding common usage is a principle beset by pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the wrong way. That’s why this is a principle beset by strife. Not insisting on popular definitions and not overriding common usage is a principle free of pain, harm, stress, and fever, and it is the right way. That’s why this is a principle free of strife.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ janapadaniruttiyā ca abhiniveso samaññāya ca atisāro, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṁ janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso samaññāya ca anatisāro, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
[¶35] So you should train like this: ‘We shall know the principles beset by strife and the principles free of strife. Knowing this, we will practice the way free of strife.’
> Pali: Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ‘saraṇañca dhammaṁ jānissāma, araṇañca dhammaṁ jānissāma; saraṇañca dhammaṁ ñatvā araṇañca dhammaṁ ñatvā araṇapaṭipadaṁ paṭipajjissāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶36] And, mendicants, the gentleman Subhūti practices the way free of strife.”
> Pali: Subhūti ca pana, bhikkhave, kulaputto araṇapaṭipadaṁ paṭipanno”ti.
[¶37] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶38] > Pali: Araṇavibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 153. MN 140 · The Analysis of the Elements
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/153/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/153/#p-N
[¶0] MN 140 · The Analysis of the Elements
> Pali: MN 140 · Dhātuvibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the Magadhan lands when he arrived at Rājagaha. He went to see Bhaggava the potter, and said, “Bhaggava, if it is no trouble, I’d like to spend a single night in your workshop.”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno yena rājagahaṁ tadavasari; yena bhaggavo kumbhakāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhaggavaṁ kumbhakāraṁ etadavoca: “sace te, bhaggava, agaru viharemu āvesane ekarattan”ti.
[¶2] “It’s no trouble, sir. But there’s a renunciate already staying there. If he allows it, sir, you may stay as long as you please.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, bhante, garu. Atthi cettha pabbajito paṭhamaṁ vāsūpagato. Sace so anujānāti, viharatha, bhante, yathāsukhan”ti.
[¶3] Now at that time a gentleman named Pukkusāti had gone forth out of faith from the lay life to homelessness in the Buddha’s name. And it was he who had first taken up residence in the workshop. Then the Buddha approached Venerable Pukkusāti and said, “Mendicant, if it is no trouble, I’d like to spend a single night in the workshop.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena pukkusāti nāma kulaputto bhagavantaṁ uddissa saddhāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. So tasmiṁ kumbhakārāvesane paṭhamaṁ vāsūpagato hoti. Atha kho bhagavā yenāyasmā pukkusāti tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ pukkusātiṁ etadavoca: “sace te, bhikkhu, agaru viharemu āvesane ekarattan”ti.
[¶4] “The potter’s workshop is spacious, reverend. Stay as long as you please.”
> Pali: “Urundaṁ, āvuso, kumbhakārāvesanaṁ. Viharatāyasmā yathāsukhan”ti.
[¶5] Then the Buddha entered the workshop and spread out a grass mat to one side. He sat down cross-legged, set his body straight, and brought mindfulness to the present. He spent much of the night sitting in meditation, and so did Pukkusāti.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā kumbhakārāvesanaṁ pavisitvā ekamantaṁ tiṇasanthārakaṁ paññāpetvā nisīdi pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. Atha kho bhagavā bahudeva rattiṁ nisajjāya vītināmesi. Āyasmāpi kho pukkusāti bahudeva rattiṁ nisajjāya vītināmesi.
[¶6] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “This gentleman’s behavior is impressive. Why don’t I question him?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “pāsādikaṁ kho ayaṁ kulaputto iriyati. Yannūnāhaṁ puccheyyan”ti.
[¶7] So the Buddha said to Pukkusāti, “In whose name have you gone forth, mendicant? Who is your Teacher? Whose teaching do you believe in?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ pukkusātiṁ etadavoca: “kaṁsi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, uddissa pabbajito? Ko vā te satthā? Kassa vā tvaṁ dhammaṁ rocesī”ti?
[¶8] “Reverend, there is the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ I’ve gone forth in his name. That Blessed One is my Teacher, and I believe in his teaching.”
> Pali: “Atthāvuso, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito. Taṁ kho pana bhagavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Tāhaṁ bhagavantaṁ uddissa pabbajito. So ca me bhagavā satthā. Tassa cāhaṁ bhagavato dhammaṁ rocemī”ti.
[¶9] “But mendicant, where is the Blessed One at present, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: “Kahaṁ pana, bhikkhu, etarahi so bhagavā viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti.
[¶10] “In the northern lands there is a city named Sāvatthī. There the Blessed One is now staying, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha.”
> Pali: “Atthāvuso, uttaresu janapadesu sāvatthi nāma nagaraṁ. Tattha so bhagavā etarahi viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti.
[¶11] “But have you ever seen that Buddha? Would you recognize him if you saw him?”
> Pali: “Diṭṭhapubbo pana te, bhikkhu, so bhagavā; disvā ca pana jāneyyāsī”ti?
[¶12] “No, I’ve never seen him, and I wouldn’t recognize him if I did.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, āvuso, diṭṭhapubbo so bhagavā; disvā cāhaṁ na jāneyyan”ti.
[¶13] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “This gentleman has gone forth in my name. Why don’t I teach him the Dhamma?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “mamañca khvāyaṁ kulaputto uddissa pabbajito. Yannūnassāhaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyan”ti.
[¶14] So the Buddha said to Pukkusāti, “Mendicant, I shall teach you the Dhamma. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ pukkusātiṁ āmantesi: “dhammaṁ te, bhikkhu, desessāmi. Taṁ suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶15] “Yes, reverend,” replied Pukkusāti. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā pukkusāti bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶16] “‘This person has six elements, six fields of contact, eighteen mental preoccupations, and four foundations. Where they stand, the streams of conceiving do not flow. And where the streams of conceiving do not flow, they are called a sage at peace. Do not neglect wisdom; preserve truth; foster generosity; and train only for peace.’ This is the summary recital for the analysis of the elements.
> Pali: “‘Cha dhāturo ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso cha phassāyatano aṭṭhārasa manopavicāro caturādhiṭṭhāno; yattha ṭhitaṁ maññassavā nappavattanti, maññassave kho pana nappavattamāne muni santoti vuccati. Paññaṁ nappamajjeyya, saccamanurakkheyya, cāgamanubrūheyya, santimeva so sikkheyyā’ti— ayamuddeso dhātuvibhaṅgassa.
[¶17] ‘This person has six elements.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are these six elements: the elements of earth, water, fire, air, space, and consciousness. ‘This person has six elements.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Cha dhāturo ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Chayimā, bhikkhu, dhātuyo— pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu. ‘Cha dhāturo ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶18] ‘This person has six fields of contact.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? The fields of contact of the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. ‘This person has six fields of contact.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Cha phassāyatano ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cakkhusamphassāyatanaṁ, sotasamphassāyatanaṁ, ghānasamphassāyatanaṁ, jivhāsamphassāyatanaṁ, kāyasamphassāyatanaṁ, manosamphassāyatanaṁ. ‘Cha phassāyatano ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶19] ‘This person has eighteen mental preoccupations.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for happiness or sadness or equanimity. Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: ‘Aṭṭhārasa manopavicāro ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati, upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati; sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …
[¶20] Encountering a touch with their body … Becoming conscious of an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for happiness or sadness or equanimity. So there are six preoccupations with happiness, six preoccupations with sadness, and six preoccupations with equanimity. ‘This person has eighteen mental preoccupations.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya somanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati, upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati— iti cha somanassupavicārā, cha domanassupavicārā, cha upekkhupavicārā. ‘Aṭṭhārasa manopavicāro ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶21] ‘This person has four foundations.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? The foundations of wisdom, truth, generosity, and peace. ‘This person has four foundations.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Caturādhiṭṭhāno ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Paññādhiṭṭhāno, saccādhiṭṭhāno, cāgādhiṭṭhāno, upasamādhiṭṭhāno. ‘Caturādhiṭṭhāno ayaṁ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶22] ‘Do not neglect wisdom; preserve truth; foster generosity; and train only for peace.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it?
> Pali: ‘Paññaṁ nappamajjeyya, saccamanurakkheyya, cāgamanubrūheyya, santimeva so sikkheyyā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ?
[¶23] And how does one not neglect wisdom? There are these six elements: the elements of earth, water, fire, air, space, and consciousness.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhu, paññaṁ nappamajjati? Chayimā, bhikkhu, dhātuyo— pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu.
[¶24] And what is the earth element? The earth element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior earth element? Anything internal, personal, that’s hard, solid, and appropriated. This includes: head hair, body hair, nails, teeth, skin, flesh, sinews, bones, bone marrow, kidneys, heart, liver, diaphragm, spleen, lungs, intestines, mesentery, undigested food, feces, or anything else internal, personal, that’s hard, solid, and appropriated. This is called the interior earth element. The interior earth element and the exterior earth element are just the earth element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the earth element, detaching the mind from the earth element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhu, pathavīdhātu? Pathavīdhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ kakkhaḷaṁ kharigataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ kakkhaḷaṁ kharigataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātu pathavīdhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama nesohamasmi na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā pathavīdhātuyā nibbindati, pathavīdhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶25] And what is the water element? The water element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior water element? Anything internal, personal, that’s water, watery, and appropriated. This includes: bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat, tears, grease, saliva, snot, synovial fluid, urine, or anything else internal, personal, that’s water, watery, and appropriated. This is called the interior water element. The interior water element and the exterior water element are just the water element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the water element, detaching the mind from the water element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhu, āpodhātu? Āpodhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā āpodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ āpo āpogataṁ upādinnaṁ seyyathidaṁ— pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttaṁ, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ āpo āpogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā āpodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā āpodhātu yā ca bāhirā āpodhātu āpodhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā āpodhātuyā nibbindati, āpodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶26] And what is the fire element? The fire element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior fire element? Anything internal, personal, that’s fire, fiery, and appropriated. This includes: that which warms, that which ages, that which heats you up when feverish, that which properly digests food and drink; or anything else internal, personal, that’s fire, fiery, and appropriated. This is called the interior fire element. The interior fire element and the exterior fire element are just the fire element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the fire element, detaching the mind from the fire element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhu, tejodhātu? Tejodhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā tejodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ tejo tejogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— yena ca santappati, yena ca jīrīyati, yena ca pariḍayhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ tejo tejogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā tejodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā tejodhātu yā ca bāhirā tejodhātu tejodhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā tejodhātuyā nibbindati, tejodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶27] And what is the air element? The air element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior air element? Anything internal, personal, that’s air, airy, and appropriated. This includes: winds that go up or down, winds in the belly or the bowels, winds that flow through the limbs, in-breaths and out-breaths; or anything else internal, personal, that’s air, airy, and appropriated. This is called the interior air element. The interior air element and the exterior air element are just the air element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the air element, detaching the mind from the air element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhu, vāyodhātu? Vāyodhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ vāyo vāyogataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— uddhaṅgamā vātā adhogamā vātā kucchisayā vātā koṭṭhāsayā vātā aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā assāso passāso iti, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ vāyo vāyogataṁ upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā vāyodhātu yā ca bāhirā vāyodhātu vāyodhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā vāyodhātuyā nibbindati, vāyodhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶28] And what is the space element? The space element may be interior or exterior. And what is the interior space element? Anything internal, personal, that’s space, spacious, and appropriated. This includes: the ear canals, nostrils, and mouth; and the space for swallowing what is eaten and drunk, the space where it stays, and the space for excreting it from the nether regions; or anything else internal, personal, that’s space, spacious, and appropriated. This is called the interior space element. The interior space element and the exterior space element are just the space element. This should be truly seen with right understanding like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ When you truly see with right understanding, you grow disillusioned with the space element, detaching the mind from the space element.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ākāsadhātu? Ākāsadhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu? Yaṁ ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ ākāsaṁ ākāsagataṁ upādinnaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— kaṇṇacchiddaṁ nāsacchiddaṁ mukhadvāraṁ yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ ajjhoharati, yattha ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ santiṭṭhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ adhobhāgaṁ nikkhamati, yaṁ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṁ paccattaṁ ākāsaṁ ākāsagataṁ aghaṁ aghagataṁ vivaraṁ vivaragataṁ asamphuṭṭhaṁ maṁsalohitehi upādinnaṁ— ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu yā ca bāhirā ākāsadhātu ākāsadhāturevesā. ‘Taṁ netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti—evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṁ. Evametaṁ yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya disvā ākāsadhātuyā nibbindati, ākāsadhātuyā cittaṁ virājeti.
[¶29] What remains is sheer consciousness, pure and bright. And what does that consciousness know? It cognizes ‘pleasure’ and ‘pain’ and ‘neutral’. Pleasant feeling arises dependent on a contact to be experienced as pleasant. When they feel a pleasant feeling, they know: ‘I feel a pleasant feeling.’ They know: ‘With the cessation of that contact to be experienced as pleasant, the corresponding pleasant feeling ceases and stops.’
> Pali: Athāparaṁ viññāṇaṁyeva avasissati parisuddhaṁ pariyodātaṁ. Tena ca viññāṇena kiṁ vijānāti? ‘Sukhan’tipi vijānāti, ‘dukkhan’tipi vijānāti, ‘adukkhamasukhan’tipi vijānāti. Sukhavedaniyaṁ, bhikkhu, phassaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhā vedanā. So sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva sukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṁ tajjaṁ vedayitaṁ sukhavedaniyaṁ phassaṁ paṭicca uppannā sukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶30] Painful feeling arises dependent on a contact to be experienced as painful. When they feel a painful feeling, they know: ‘I feel a painful feeling.’ They know: ‘With the cessation of that contact to be experienced as painful, the corresponding painful feeling ceases and stops.’
> Pali: Dukkhavedaniyaṁ, bhikkhu, phassaṁ paṭicca uppajjati dukkhā vedanā. So dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva dukkhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṁ tajjaṁ vedayitaṁ dukkhavedaniyaṁ phassaṁ paṭicca uppannā dukkhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶31] Neutral feeling arises dependent on a contact to be experienced as neutral. When they feel a neutral feeling, they know: ‘I feel a neutral feeling.’ They know: ‘With the cessation of that contact to be experienced as neutral, the corresponding neutral feeling ceases and stops.’
> Pali: Adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṁ, bhikkhu, phassaṁ paṭicca uppajjati adukkhamasukhā vedanā. So adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva adukkhamasukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṁ tajjaṁ vedayitaṁ adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṁ phassaṁ paṭicca uppannā adukkhamasukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶32] When you rub two sticks together, heat is generated and fire is produced. But when you part the sticks and lay them aside, any corresponding heat ceases and stops. In the same way, pleasant feeling arises dependent on a contact to be experienced as pleasant. …
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, dvinnaṁ kaṭṭhānaṁ saṅghaṭṭā samodhānā usmā jāyati, tejo abhinibbattati, tesaṁyeva dvinnaṁ kaṭṭhānaṁ nānābhāvā vinikkhepā yā tajjā usmā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammati; evameva kho, bhikkhu, sukhavedaniyaṁ phassaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhā vedanā. So sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva sukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṁ tajjaṁ vedayitaṁ sukhavedaniyaṁ phassaṁ paṭicca uppannā sukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶33] > Pali: Dukkhavedaniyaṁ, bhikkhu, phassaṁ paṭicca uppajjati dukkhā vedanā. So dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva dukkhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṁ tajjaṁ vedayitaṁ dukkhavedaniyaṁ phassaṁ paṭicca uppannā dukkhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶34] They know: ‘With the cessation of that contact to be experienced as neutral, the corresponding neutral feeling ceases and stops.’
> Pali: Adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṁ, bhikkhu, phassaṁ paṭicca uppajjati adukkhamasukhā vedanā. So adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva adukkhamasukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṁ tajjaṁ vedayitaṁ adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṁ phassaṁ paṭicca uppannā adukkhamasukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
[¶35] There remains only equanimity, pure, bright, pliable, workable, and radiant. It’s like when a deft goldsmith or a goldsmith’s apprentice prepares a forge, fires the crucible, picks up some native gold with tongs and puts it in the crucible. From time to time they fan it, from time to time they sprinkle water on it, and from time to time they just watch over it. That native gold becomes pliable, workable, and radiant, not brittle, and is ready to be worked. Then the goldsmith can successfully create any kind of ornament they want, whether a bracelet, earrings, a necklace, or a golden garland. In the same way, there remains only equanimity, pure, bright, pliable, workable, and radiant.
> Pali: Athāparaṁ upekkhāyeva avasissati parisuddhā pariyodātā mudu ca kammaññā ca pabhassarā ca. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, dakkho suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkaṁ bandheyya, ukkaṁ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṁ ālimpeyya, ukkāmukhaṁ ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṁ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipeyya, tamenaṁ kālena kālaṁ abhidhameyya, kālena kālaṁ udakena paripphoseyya, kālena kālaṁ ajjhupekkheyya, taṁ hoti jātarūpaṁ sudhantaṁ niddhantaṁ nīhaṭaṁ ninnītakasāvaṁ mudu ca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, yassā yassā ca piḷandhanavikatiyā ākaṅkhati—yadi paṭṭikāya yadi kuṇḍalāya yadi gīveyyakāya yadi suvaṇṇamālāya tañcassa atthaṁ anubhoti; evameva kho, bhikkhu, athāparaṁ upekkhāyeva avasissati parisuddhā pariyodātā mudu ca kammaññā ca pabhassarā ca.
[¶36] They understand: ‘If I were to apply this equanimity, so pure and bright, to the dimension of infinite space, and develop my mind accordingly, this equanimity of mine, relying on that and grasping it, would remain for a very long time. If I were to apply this equanimity, so pure and bright, to the dimension of infinite consciousness, and develop my mind accordingly, this equanimity of mine, relying on that and grasping it, would remain for a very long time. If I were to apply this equanimity, so pure and bright, to the dimension of nothingness, and develop my mind accordingly, this equanimity of mine, relying on that and grasping it, would remain for a very long time. If I were to apply this equanimity, so pure and bright, to the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, and develop my mind accordingly, this equanimity of mine, relying on that and grasping it, would remain for a very long time.’
> Pali: So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ. Evaṁ me ayaṁ upekkhā tannissitā tadupādānā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭheyya. Imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ. Evaṁ me ayaṁ upekkhā tannissitā tadupādānā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭheyya. Imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ. Evaṁ me ayaṁ upekkhā tannissitā tadupādānā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭheyya. Imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ. Evaṁ me ayaṁ upekkhā tannissitā tadupādānā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭheyyā’ti.
[¶37] They understand: ‘If I were to apply this equanimity, so pure and bright, to the dimension of infinite space, my mind would develop accordingly. But that is conditioned. If I were to apply this equanimity, so pure and bright, to the dimension of infinite consciousness … nothingness … neither perception nor non-perception, my mind would develop accordingly. But that is conditioned.’
> Pali: So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ; saṅkhatametaṁ. Imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ; saṅkhatametaṁ. Imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ; saṅkhatametaṁ. Imañce ahaṁ upekkhaṁ evaṁ parisuddhaṁ evaṁ pariyodātaṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasaṁhareyyaṁ, tadanudhammañca cittaṁ bhāveyyaṁ; saṅkhatametan’ti.
[¶38] They neither make a choice nor form an intention for existence or nonexistence. Because of this, they don’t grasp at anything in the world. Not grasping, they’re not anxious. Not being anxious, they personally become extinguished.
> Pali: So neva taṁ abhisaṅkharoti, na abhisañcetayati bhavāya vā vibhavāya vā. So anabhisaṅkharonto anabhisañcetayanto bhavāya vā vibhavāya vā na kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṁ na paritassati, aparitassaṁ paccattaṁyeva parinibbāyati.
[¶39] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶40] If they feel a pleasant feeling, they understand that it’s impermanent, that they’re not attached to it, and that they don’t take pleasure in it. If they feel a painful feeling, they understand that it’s impermanent, that they’re not attached to it, and that they don’t take pleasure in it. If they feel a neutral feeling, they understand that it’s impermanent, that they’re not attached to it, and that they don’t take pleasure in it.
> Pali: So sukhañce vedanaṁ vedeti, ‘sā aniccā’ti pajānāti, ‘anajjhositā’ti pajānāti, ‘anabhinanditā’ti pajānāti. Dukkhañce vedanaṁ vedeti, ‘sā aniccā’ti pajānāti, ‘anajjhositā’ti pajānāti, ‘anabhinanditā’ti pajānāti. Adukkhamasukhañce vedanaṁ vedeti, ‘sā aniccā’ti pajānāti, ‘anajjhositā’ti pajānāti, ‘anabhinanditā’ti pajānāti.
[¶41] If they feel a pleasant feeling, they feel it detached. If they feel a painful feeling, they feel it detached. If they feel a neutral feeling, they feel it detached. Feeling the end of the body draw close, they understand: ‘I feel the end of the body draw close.’ Feeling the end of life draw close, they understand: ‘I feel the end of life draw close.’ They understand: ‘When my body breaks up and my life has come to an end, everything that’s felt, since I no longer take pleasure in it, will become cool right here.’
> Pali: So sukhañce vedanaṁ vedeti, visaṁyutto naṁ vedeti; dukkhañce vedanaṁ vedeti, visaṁyutto naṁ vedeti; adukkhamasukhañce vedanaṁ vedeti, visaṁyutto naṁ vedeti. So kāyapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘kāyapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, jīvitapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘jīvitapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, ‘kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā uddhaṁ jīvitapariyādānā idheva sabbavedayitāni anabhinanditāni sītībhavissantī’ti pajānāti.
[¶42] Suppose an oil lamp depended on oil and a wick to burn. As the oil and the wick are used up, it would be extinguished due to not being fed. In the same way, feeling the end of the body draw close, they understand: ‘I feel the end of the body draw close.’ Feeling the end of life draw close, they understand: ‘I feel the end of life draw close.’ They understand: ‘When my body breaks up and my life has come to an end, everything that’s felt, since I no longer take pleasure in it, will become cool right here.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, telañca paṭicca vaṭṭiñca paṭicca telappadīpo jhāyati; tasseva telassa ca vaṭṭiyā ca pariyādānā aññassa ca anupahārā anāhāro nibbāyati; evameva kho, bhikkhu, kāyapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘kāyapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, jīvitapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘jīvitapariyantikaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, ‘kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā uddhaṁ jīvitapariyādānā idheva sabbavedayitāni anabhinanditāni sītībhavissantī’ti pajānāti.
[¶43] Therefore a mendicant thus endowed is endowed with the ultimate foundation of wisdom. For this is the ultimate noble wisdom, namely, the knowledge of the ending of all suffering.
> Pali: Tasmā evaṁ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena paññādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Esā hi, bhikkhu, paramā ariyā paññā yadidaṁ— sabbadukkhakkhaye ñāṇaṁ.
[¶44] Their freedom, being founded on truth, is unshakable. For that which is false has a deceptive nature, while that which is true has an undeceptive nature—extinguishment. Therefore a mendicant thus endowed is endowed with the ultimate foundation of truth. For this is the ultimate noble truth, namely, that which has an undeceptive nature—extinguishment.
> Pali: Tassa sā vimutti sacce ṭhitā akuppā hoti. Tañhi, bhikkhu, musā yaṁ mosadhammaṁ, taṁ saccaṁ yaṁ amosadhammaṁ nibbānaṁ. Tasmā evaṁ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena saccādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Etañhi, bhikkhu, paramaṁ ariyasaccaṁ yadidaṁ— amosadhammaṁ nibbānaṁ.
[¶45] In their ignorance, they used to acquire attachments. Those have been cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated so they are unable to arise in the future. Therefore a mendicant thus endowed is endowed with the ultimate foundation of generosity. For this is the ultimate noble generosity, namely, letting go of all attachments.
> Pali: Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno upadhī honti samattā samādinnā. Tyāssa pahīnā honti ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā. Tasmā evaṁ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena cāgādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Eso hi, bhikkhu, paramo ariyo cāgo yadidaṁ— sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo.
[¶46] In their ignorance, they used to be covetous, full of desire and lust. That has been cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated so it’s unable to arise in the future. In their ignorance, they used to be contemptuous, full of ill will and malevolence. That has been cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated so it’s unable to arise in the future. In their ignorance, they used to be ignorant, full of delusion. That has been cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, obliterated so it’s unable to arise in the future. Therefore a mendicant thus endowed is endowed with the ultimate foundation of peace. For this is the ultimate noble peace, namely, the pacification of greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno abhijjhā hoti chando sārāgo. Svāssa pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno āghāto hoti byāpādo sampadoso. Svāssa pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno avijjā hoti sammoho. Svāssa pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Tasmā evaṁ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena upasamādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Eso hi, bhikkhu, paramo ariyo upasamo yadidaṁ— rāgadosamohānaṁ upasamo.
[¶47] ‘Do not neglect wisdom; preserve truth; foster generosity; and train only for peace.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.
> Pali: ‘Paññaṁ nappamajjeyya, saccamanurakkheyya, cāgamanubrūheyya, santimeva so sikkheyyā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶48] ‘Where they stand, the streams of conceiving do not flow. And where the streams of conceiving do not flow, they are called a sage at peace.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it?
> Pali: ‘Yattha ṭhitaṁ maññassavā nappavattanti, maññassave kho pana nappavattamāne muni santoti vuccatī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ?
[¶49] These are all forms of conceiving: ‘I am’, ‘I am this’, ‘I will be’, ‘I will not be’, ‘I will have form’, ‘I will be formless’, ‘I will be percipient’, ‘I will be non-percipient’, ‘I will be neither percipient nor non-percipient.’ Conceiving is a disease, a boil, a dart. Having gone beyond all conceiving, one is called a sage at peace. The sage at peace is not reborn, does not grow old, and does not die. They are not shaken, and do not yearn. For they have nothing which would cause them to be reborn. Not being reborn, how could they grow old? Not growing old, how could they die? Not dying, how could they be shaken? Not shaking, for what could they yearn?
> Pali: ‘Asmī’ti, bhikkhu, maññitametaṁ, ‘ayamahamasmī’ti maññitametaṁ, ‘bhavissan’ti maññitametaṁ, ‘na bhavissan’ti maññitametaṁ, ‘rūpī bhavissan’ti maññitametaṁ, ‘arūpī bhavissan’ti maññitametaṁ, ‘saññī bhavissan’ti maññitametaṁ, ‘asaññī bhavissan’ti maññitametaṁ, ‘nevasaññīnāsaññī bhavissan’ti maññitametaṁ. Maññitaṁ, bhikkhu, rogo maññitaṁ gaṇḍo maññitaṁ sallaṁ. Sabbamaññitānaṁ tveva, bhikkhu, samatikkamā muni santoti vuccati. Muni kho pana, bhikkhu, santo na jāyati, na jīyati, na mīyati, na kuppati, na piheti. Tañhissa, bhikkhu, natthi yena jāyetha, ajāyamāno kiṁ jīyissati, ajīyamāno kiṁ mīyissati, amīyamāno kiṁ kuppissati, akuppamāno kissa pihessati?
[¶50] ‘Where they stand, the streams of conceiving do not flow. And where the streams of conceiving do not flow, they are called a sage at peace.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it. Mendicant, you should remember this brief analysis of the six elements.”
> Pali: ‘Yattha ṭhitaṁ maññassavā nappavattanti, maññassave kho pana nappavattamāne muni santoti vuccatī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Imaṁ kho me tvaṁ, bhikkhu, saṅkhittena chadhātuvibhaṅgaṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶51] Then Venerable Pukkusāti thought, “It seems the Teacher has come to me! The Holy One has come to me! The fully awakened Buddha has come to me!” He got up from his seat, arranged his robe over one shoulder, bowed with his head to the Buddha’s feet, and said, “I made a mistake, sir. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of me to presume to address the Buddha as ‘reverend’. Please, sir, accept my mistake for what it is, so I will restrain myself in future.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā pukkusāti: “satthā kira me anuppatto, sugato kira me anuppatto, sammāsambuddho kira me anuppatto”ti uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “accayo maṁ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yohaṁ bhagavantaṁ āvusovādena samudācaritabbaṁ amaññissaṁ. Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā accayaṁ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṁ saṁvarāyā”ti.
[¶52] “Indeed, mendicant, you made a mistake. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of you to act in that way. But since you have recognized your mistake for what it is, and have dealt with it properly, I accept it. For it is growth in the training of the Noble One to recognize a mistake for what it is, deal with it properly, and commit to restraint in the future.”
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, bhikkhu, accayo accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yaṁ maṁ tvaṁ āvusovādena samudācaritabbaṁ amaññittha. Yato ca kho tvaṁ, bhikkhu, accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikarosi, taṁ te mayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāma. Vuddhihesā, bhikkhu, ariyassa vinaye yo accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikaroti, āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjatī”ti.
[¶53] “Sir, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence?”
> Pali: “Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike upasampadan”ti.
[¶54] “But mendicant, do you have a full set of bowl and robes?”
> Pali: “Paripuṇṇaṁ pana te, bhikkhu, pattacīvaran”ti?
[¶55] “No, sir, I do not.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, bhante, paripuṇṇaṁ pattacīvaran”ti.
[¶56] “The Realized Ones do not ordain those without a full set of bowl and robes.”
> Pali: “Na kho, bhikkhu, tathāgatā aparipuṇṇapattacīvaraṁ upasampādentī”ti.
[¶57] And then Venerable Pukkusāti approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. He got up from his seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā pukkusāti bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pattacīvarapariyesanaṁ pakkāmi.
[¶58] But while he was wandering in search of a bowl and robes, a stray cow took his life.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmantaṁ pukkusātiṁ pattacīvarapariyesanaṁ carantaṁ vibbhantā gāvī jīvitā voropesi.
[¶59] Then several mendicants went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, the gentleman named Pukkusāti, who was advised in brief by the Buddha, has passed away. Where has he been reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “yo so, bhante, pukkusāti nāma kulaputto bhagavatā saṅkhittena ovādena ovadito so kālaṅkato. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶60] “Mendicants, Pukkusāti was astute. He practiced in line with the teaching, and did not trouble me about the teachings. With the ending of the five lower fetters, he’s been reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.”
> Pali: “Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, pukkusāti kulaputto paccapādi dhammassānudhammaṁ, na ca maṁ dhammādhikaraṇaṁ vihesesi. Pukkusāti, bhikkhave, kulaputto pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā”ti.
[¶61] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶62] > Pali: Dhātuvibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
## 154. MN 141 · The Analysis of the Truths
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/154/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/154/#p-N
[¶0] MN 141 · The Analysis of the Truths
> Pali: MN 141 · Saccavibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Varanasi in the deer park at Isipatana. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ viharati isipatane migadāye. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Near Varanasi, in the deer park at Isipatana, the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha rolled forth the supreme Wheel of Dhamma. And that wheel cannot be rolled back by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world. It is the teaching, advocating, establishing, clarifying, analyzing, and revealing of the four noble truths. What four?
> Pali: “Tathāgatena, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṁ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitaṁ appaṭivattiyaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ, yadidaṁ— catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ. Katamesaṁ catunnaṁ?
[¶4] The noble truths of suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ, dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ, dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ.
[¶5] Near Varanasi, in the deer park at Isipatana, the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha rolled forth the supreme Wheel of Dhamma. And that wheel cannot be rolled back by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world. It is the teaching, advocating, establishing, clarifying, analyzing, and revealing of the four noble truths.
> Pali: Tathāgatena, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṁ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitaṁ appaṭivattiyaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ, yadidaṁ— imesaṁ catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ.
[¶6] Mendicants, you should cultivate friendship with Sāriputta and Moggallāna. You should associate with Sāriputta and Moggallāna. They’re astute, and they support their spiritual companions. Sāriputta is like one who gives birth, while Moggallāna is like one who raises the child. Sāriputta guides people to the fruit of stream-entry, Moggallāna to the highest goal. Sāriputta is able to explain, teach, assert, establish, clarify, analyze, and reveal the four noble truths in detail.”
> Pali: Sevatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne; bhajatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne. Paṇḍitā bhikkhū anuggāhakā sabrahmacārīnaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, janetā, evaṁ sāriputto; seyyathāpi jātassa āpādetā, evaṁ moggallāno. Sāriputto, bhikkhave, sotāpattiphale vineti, moggallāno uttamatthe. Sāriputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattāri ariyasaccāni vitthārena ācikkhituṁ desetuṁ paññāpetuṁ paṭṭhapetuṁ vivarituṁ vibhajituṁ uttānīkātun”ti.
[¶7] That is what the Buddha said. When he had spoken, the Holy One rose from his seat and entered his dwelling.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.
[¶8] Then, not long after the Buddha left, Venerable Sāriputta said to the mendicants, “Reverends, mendicants!”
> Pali: Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto acirapakkantassa bhagavato bhikkhū āmantesi: “āvuso bhikkhave”ti.
[¶9] “Reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Āvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶10] “Near Varanasi, in the deer park at Isipatana, the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha rolled forth the supreme Wheel of Dhamma. And that wheel cannot be rolled back by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world. It is the teaching, advocating, establishing, clarifying, analyzing, and revealing of the four noble truths. What four?
> Pali: “Tathāgatena, āvuso, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṁ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitaṁ appaṭivattiyaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ, yadidaṁ— catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ. Katamesaṁ catunnaṁ?
[¶11] The noble truths of suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ, dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ, dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṁ.
[¶12] And what is the noble truth of suffering? Rebirth is suffering; old age is suffering; death is suffering; sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress are suffering; not getting what you wish for is suffering. In brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ? Jātipi dukkhā, jarāpi dukkhā, maraṇampi dukkhaṁ, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā, yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ; saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā.
[¶13] And what is rebirth? The rebirth, inception, conception, regeneration, manifestation of the aggregates, and acquisition of the sense fields of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called rebirth.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, jāti? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṁ paṭilābho, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘jāti’.
[¶14] And what is old age? The old age, decrepitude, broken teeth, grey hair, wrinkly skin, diminished vitality, and failing faculties of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called old age.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, jarā? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṁ pāliccaṁ valittacatā āyuno saṁhāni indriyānaṁ paripāko, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘jarā’.
[¶15] And what is death? The passing away, passing on, disintegration, demise, mortality, death, decease, breaking up of the aggregates, laying to rest of the corpse, and cutting off of the life faculty of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called death.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, maraṇaṁ? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhā tamhā sattanikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṁ maccu maraṇaṁ kālaṅkiriyā khandhānaṁ bhedo kaḷevarassa nikkhepo jīvitindriyassupacchedo, idaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘maraṇaṁ’.
[¶16] And what is sorrow? The sorrow, sorrowing, state of sorrow, inner sorrow, inner deep sorrow in someone who has undergone misfortune, who has experienced suffering. This is called sorrow.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, soko? Yo kho, āvuso, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa soko socanā socitattaṁ antosoko antoparisoko, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘soko’.
[¶17] And what is lamentation? The wail, lament, wailing, lamenting, state of wailing and lamentation in someone who has undergone misfortune, who has experienced suffering. This is called lamentation.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, paridevo? Yo kho, āvuso, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa ādevo paridevo ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṁ paridevitattaṁ, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘paridevo’.
[¶18] And what is pain? Physical pain, physical unpleasantness, the painful, unpleasant feeling that’s born from physical contact. This is called pain.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, dukkhaṁ? Yaṁ kho, āvuso, kāyikaṁ dukkhaṁ kāyikaṁ asātaṁ kāyasamphassajaṁ dukkhaṁ asātaṁ vedayitaṁ, idaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘dukkhaṁ’.
[¶19] And what is sadness? Mental pain, mental displeasure, the painful, unpleasant feeling that’s born from mind contact. This is called sadness.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, domanassaṁ? Yaṁ kho, āvuso, cetasikaṁ dukkhaṁ cetasikaṁ asātaṁ manosamphassajaṁ dukkhaṁ asātaṁ vedayitaṁ, idaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘domanassaṁ’.
[¶20] And what is distress? The stress, distress, state of stress and distress in someone who has undergone misfortune, who has experienced suffering. This is called distress.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, upāyāso? Yo kho, āvuso, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa āyāso upāyāso āyāsitattaṁ upāyāsitattaṁ, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘upāyāso’.
[¶21] And what is ‘not getting what you wish for is suffering’? In sentient beings who are liable to be reborn, such a wish arises: ‘Oh, if only we were not liable to be reborn! If only rebirth would not come to us!’ But you can’t get that by wishing. This is: ‘not getting what you wish for is suffering’. In sentient beings who are liable to grow old … fall ill … die … experience sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress, such a wish arises: ‘Oh, if only we were not liable to experience sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress! If only sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress would not come to us!’ But you can’t get that by wishing. This is: ‘not getting what you wish for is suffering’.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ? Jātidhammānaṁ, āvuso, sattānaṁ evaṁ icchā uppajjati: ‘aho vata mayaṁ na jātidhammā assāma; na ca vata no jāti āgaccheyyā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ icchāya pattabbaṁ. Idampi: ‘yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ’. Jarādhammānaṁ, āvuso, sattānaṁ …pe… byādhidhammānaṁ, āvuso, sattānaṁ … maraṇadhammānaṁ, āvuso, sattānaṁ … sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammānaṁ, āvuso, sattānaṁ evaṁ icchā uppajjati: ‘aho vata mayaṁ na sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammā assāma; na ca vata no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā āgaccheyyun’ti. Na kho panetaṁ icchāya pattabbaṁ. Idampi: ‘yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ’.
[¶22] And what is ‘in brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering’? They are the grasping aggregates that consist of form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. This is called ‘in brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering’. This is called the noble truth of suffering.
> Pali: Katame cāvuso, saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā? Seyyathidaṁ—rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Ime vuccantāvuso: ‘saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’. Idaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ’.
[¶23] And what is the noble truth of the origin of suffering? It’s the craving that leads to future lives, mixed up with relishing and greed, taking pleasure there wherever it alights. That is, craving for sensual pleasures, craving for continued existence, and craving for nonexistence. This is called the noble truth of the origin of suffering.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ? Yāyaṁ taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, seyyathidaṁ— kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā, idaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ’.
[¶24] And what is the noble truth of the cessation of suffering? It’s the fading away and cessation of that very same craving no residue left behind; giving it away, letting it go, releasing it, and not clinging to it. This is called the noble truth of the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ? Yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo, idaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ’.
[¶25] And what is the noble truth of the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi.
[¶26] And what is right view? Knowing about suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering. This is called right view.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, sammādiṭṭhi? Yaṁ kho, āvuso, dukkhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇaṁ, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammādiṭṭhi’.
[¶27] And what is right purpose? Purposes of renunciation, good will, and harmlessness. This is called right purpose.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, sammāsaṅkappo? Nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo, avihiṁsāsaṅkappo, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammāsaṅkappo’.
[¶28] And what is right speech? Refraining from lying, backbiting, harsh speech, and talking nonsense. This is called right speech.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, sammāvācā? Musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammāvācā’.
[¶29] And what is right action? Refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. This is called right action.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, sammākammanto? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammākammanto’.
[¶30] And what is right livelihood? It’s when a noble disciple gives up wrong livelihood and earns a living by right livelihood. This is called right livelihood.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, sammāājīvo? Idhāvuso, ariyasāvako micchāājīvaṁ pahāya sammāājīvena jīvikaṁ kappeti, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammāājīvo’.
[¶31] And what is right effort? It’s when a mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen are given up. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed. This is called right effort.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, sammāvāyāmo? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati, uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati, anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati, uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammāvāyāmo’.
[¶32] And what is right mindfulness? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. This is called right mindfulness.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, sammāsati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati …pe… citte cittānupassī viharati … dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammāsati’.
[¶33] And what is right immersion? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This is called right immersion. This is called the noble truth of the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, sammāsamādhi? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘sammāsamādhi’. Idaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ’.
[¶34] Near Varanasi, in the deer park at Isipatana, the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha rolled forth the supreme Wheel of Dhamma. And that wheel cannot be rolled back by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world. It is the teaching, advocating, establishing, clarifying, analyzing, and revealing of the four noble truths.”
> Pali: Tathāgatenāvuso, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṁ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitaṁ appaṭivattiyaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ, yadidaṁ— imesaṁ catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkamman”ti.
[¶35] That is what Venerable Sāriputta said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what Sāriputta said.
> Pali: Idamavoca āyasmā sāriputto. Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶36] > Pali: Saccavibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ ekādasamaṁ.
## 155. MN 142 · The Analysis of Religious Donations
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/155/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/155/#p-N
[¶0] MN 142 · The Analysis of Religious Donations
> Pali: MN 142 · Dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, near Kapilavatthu in the Banyan Tree Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ nigrodhārāme.
[¶2] Then Mahāpajāpati Gotamī approached the Buddha bringing a new pair of garments. She bowed, sat down to one side, and said to the Buddha, “Sir, I have spun and woven this new pair of garments specially for the Buddha. May the Buddha please accept this from me out of sympathy.”
> Pali: Atha kho mahāpajāpati gotamī navaṁ dussayugaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idaṁ me, bhante, navaṁ dussayugaṁ bhagavantaṁ uddissa sāmaṁ kantaṁ sāmaṁ vāyitaṁ. Taṁ me, bhante, bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.
[¶3] When she said this, the Buddha said to her, “Give it to the Saṅgha, Gotamī. When you give to the Saṅgha, both the Saṅgha and I will be honored.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā mahāpajāpatiṁ gotamiṁ etadavoca: “saṅghe, gotami, dehi. Saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā”ti.
[¶4] For a second time …
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idaṁ me, bhante, navaṁ dussayugaṁ bhagavantaṁ uddissa sāmaṁ kantaṁ sāmaṁ vāyitaṁ. Taṁ me, bhante, bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti. Dutiyampi kho bhagavā mahāpajāpatiṁ gotamiṁ etadavoca: “saṅghe, gotami, dehi. Saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā”ti.
[¶5] For a third time, Mahāpajāpati Gotamī said to the Buddha, “Sir, I have spun and woven this new pair of garments specially for the Buddha. May the Buddha please accept this from me out of sympathy.”
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idaṁ me, bhante, navaṁ dussayugaṁ bhagavantaṁ uddissa sāmaṁ kantaṁ sāmaṁ vāyitaṁ. Taṁ me, bhante, bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.
[¶6] And for a third time, the Buddha said to her, “Give it to the Saṅgha, Gotamī. When you give to the Saṅgha, both the Saṅgha and I will be honored.”
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho bhagavā mahāpajāpatiṁ gotamiṁ etadavoca: “saṅghe, gotami, dehi. Saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā”ti.
[¶7] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Sir, please accept the new pair of garments from Mahāpajāpati Gotamī. Sir, Mahāpajāpati was very helpful to the Buddha. As his aunt, she raised him, nurtured him, and gave him her milk. When the Buddha’s birth mother passed away, she nurtured him at her own breast.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā navaṁ dussayugaṁ. Bahūpakārā, bhante, mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavato mātucchā āpādikā posikā khīrassa dāyikā; bhagavantaṁ janettiyā kālaṅkatāya thaññaṁ pāyesi.
[¶8] And the Buddha has been very helpful to Mahāpajāpati. It is owing to the Buddha that Mahāpajāpati has gone for refuge to the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha. It’s owing to the Buddha that she refrains from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor. It’s owing to the Buddha that she has experiential confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and has the ethics loved by the noble ones. It’s owing to the Buddha that she is free of doubt regarding suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation. The Buddha has been very helpful to Mahāpajāpati.”
> Pali: Bhagavāpi, bhante, bahūpakāro mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā. Bhagavantaṁ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gatā, dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gatā, saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gatā. Bhagavantaṁ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā. Bhagavantaṁ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatā, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgatā, saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgatā ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgatā. Bhagavantaṁ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī dukkhe nikkaṅkhā, dukkhasamudaye nikkaṅkhā, dukkhanirodhe nikkaṅkhā, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya nikkaṅkhā. Bhagavāpi, bhante, bahūpakāro mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā”ti.
[¶9] “That’s so true, Ānanda. When someone has enabled you to go for refuge, it’s not easy to repay them by bowing down to them, rising up for them, greeting them with cupped palms, and observing proper etiquette for them; or by providing them with robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, ānanda. Yaṁ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṁ āgamma buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gato hoti, dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gato hoti, saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gato hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṁ vadāmi, yadidaṁ— abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammacīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
[¶10] When someone has enabled you to refrain from killing, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor, it’s not easy to repay them …
> Pali: Yaṁ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṁ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṁ vadāmi, yadidaṁ— abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammacīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
[¶11] When someone has enabled you to have experiential confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and the ethics loved by the noble ones, it’s not easy to repay them …
> Pali: Yaṁ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṁ āgamma buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti, dhamme … saṅghe … ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṁ vadāmi, yadidaṁ— abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammacīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
[¶12] When someone has enabled you to be free of doubt regarding suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the practice that leads to its cessation, it’s not easy to repay them by bowing down to them, rising up for them, greeting them with cupped palms, and observing proper etiquette for them; or by providing them with robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick.
> Pali: Yaṁ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṁ āgamma dukkhe nikkaṅkho hoti, dukkhasamudaye nikkaṅkho hoti, dukkhanirodhe nikkaṅkho hoti, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya nikkaṅkho hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṁ vadāmi, yadidaṁ— abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammacīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
[¶13] Ānanda, there are these fourteen religious donations to individuals. What fourteen? One gives a gift to the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. This is the first religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to an independent Buddha. This is the second religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to a perfected one. This is the third religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to someone practicing to realize the fruit of perfection. This is the fourth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to a non-returner. This is the fifth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to someone practicing to realize the fruit of non-return. This is the sixth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to a once-returner. This is the seventh religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to someone practicing to realize the fruit of once-return. This is the eighth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to a stream-enterer. This is the ninth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to someone practicing to realize the fruit of stream-entry. This is the tenth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to an outsider who is free of desire for sensual pleasures. This is the eleventh religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to an ordinary person who has good ethical conduct. This is the twelfth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to an ordinary person who has bad ethical conduct. This is the thirteenth religious donation to an individual. One gives a gift to an animal. This is the fourteenth religious donation to an individual.
> Pali: Cuddasa kho panimānanda, pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Katamā cuddasa? Tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ paṭhamā pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Paccekasambuddhe dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ dutiyā pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Tathāgatasāvake arahante dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ tatiyā pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Arahattaphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ catutthī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Anāgāmissa dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ pañcamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ chaṭṭhī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sakadāgāmissa dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ sattamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sakadāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ aṭṭhamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sotāpanne dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ navamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ dasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Bāhirake kāmesu vītarāge dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ ekādasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Puthujjanasīlavante dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ dvādasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Puthujjanadussīle dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ terasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Tiracchānagate dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ cuddasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇāti.
[¶14] Now, Ānanda, gifts to the following persons may be expected to yield the following returns. To an animal, a hundred times. To an unethical ordinary person, a thousand. To an ethical ordinary person, a hundred thousand. To an outsider free of desire for sensual pleasures, 10,000,000,000. But a gift to someone practicing to realize the fruit of stream-entry may be expected to yield incalculable, immeasurable returns. How much more so a gift to a stream-enterer, someone practicing to realize the fruit of once-return, a once-returner, someone practicing to realize the fruit of non-return, a non-returner, someone practicing to realize the fruit of perfection, a perfected one, or an independent Buddha? How much more so a Realized One, a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha?
> Pali: Tatrānanda, tiracchānagate dānaṁ datvā sataguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, puthujjanadussīle dānaṁ datvā sahassaguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, puthujjanasīlavante dānaṁ datvā satasahassaguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, bāhirake kāmesu vītarāge dānaṁ datvā koṭisatasahassaguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṁ datvā asaṅkheyyā appameyyā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, ko pana vādo sotāpanne, ko pana vādo sakadāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne, ko pana vādo sakadāgāmissa, ko pana vādo anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne, ko pana vādo anāgāmissa, ko pana vādo arahattaphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne, ko pana vādo arahante, ko pana vādo paccekasambuddhe, ko pana vādo tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe.
[¶15] But there are, Ānanda, seven religious donations bestowed on a Saṅgha. What seven? One gives a gift to the communities of both monks and nuns headed by the Buddha. This is the first religious donation bestowed on a Saṅgha. One gives a gift to the communities of both monks and nuns after the Buddha has finally become quenched. This is the second religious donation bestowed on a Saṅgha. One gives a gift to the Saṅgha of monks. This is the third religious donation bestowed on a Saṅgha. One gives a gift to the Saṅgha of nuns. This is the fourth religious donation bestowed on a Saṅgha. One gives a gift, thinking: ‘Appoint this many monks and nuns for me from the Saṅgha.’ This is the fifth religious donation bestowed on a Saṅgha. One gives a gift, thinking: ‘Appoint this many monks for me from the Saṅgha.’ This is the sixth religious donation bestowed on a Saṅgha. One gives a gift, thinking: ‘Appoint this many nuns for me from the Saṅgha.’ This is the seventh religious donation bestowed on a Saṅgha.
> Pali: Satta kho panimānanda, saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Katamā satta? Buddhappamukhe ubhatosaṅghe dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ paṭhamā saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Tathāgate parinibbute ubhatosaṅghe dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ dutiyā saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Bhikkhusaṅghe dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ tatiyā saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Bhikkhunisaṅghe dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ catutthī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. ‘Ettakā me bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca saṅghato uddissathā’ti dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ pañcamī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. ‘Ettakā me bhikkhū saṅghato uddissathā’ti dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ chaṭṭhī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. ‘Ettakā me bhikkhuniyo saṅghato uddissathā’ti dānaṁ deti— ayaṁ sattamī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā.
[¶16] In times to come there will be lambs of the flock wearing a scrap of ocher cloth, unethical and of bad character. People will give gifts to those unethical people in the name of the Saṅgha. Then too, I say, a religious donation bestowed on the Saṅgha is incalculable and immeasurable. But in any case, there is no way a personal offering can be more fruitful than one bestowed on a Saṅgha, I say.
> Pali: Bhavissanti kho panānanda, anāgatamaddhānaṁ gotrabhuno kāsāvakaṇṭhā dussīlā pāpadhammā. Tesu dussīlesu saṅghaṁ uddissa dānaṁ dassanti. Tadāpāhaṁ, ānanda, saṅghagataṁ dakkhiṇaṁ asaṅkheyyaṁ appameyyaṁ vadāmi. Na tvevāhaṁ, ānanda, kenaci pariyāyena saṅghagatāya dakkhiṇāya pāṭipuggalikaṁ dānaṁ mahapphalataraṁ vadāmi.
[¶17] Ānanda, there are these four ways of purifying a religious donation. What four? There’s a religious donation that’s purified by the giver, not the recipient. There’s a religious donation that’s purified by the recipient, not the giver. There’s a religious donation that’s purified by neither the giver nor the recipient. There’s a religious donation that’s purified by both the giver and the recipient.
> Pali: Catasso kho imā, ānanda, dakkhiṇā visuddhiyo. Katamā catasso? Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato. Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato. Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato. Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca.
[¶18] And how is a religious donation purified by the giver, not the recipient? It’s when the giver is ethical, of good character, but the recipient is unethical, of bad character.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato? Idhānanda, dāyako hoti sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, paṭiggāhakā honti dussīlā pāpadhammā— evaṁ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato.
[¶19] And how is a religious donation purified by the recipient, not the giver? It’s when the giver is unethical, of bad character, but the recipient is ethical, of good character.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato? Idhānanda, dāyako hoti dussīlo pāpadhammo, paṭiggāhakā honti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā— evaṁ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato.
[¶20] And how is a religious donation purified by neither the giver nor the recipient? It’s when both the giver and the recipient are unethical, of bad character.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato? Idhānanda, dāyako ca hoti dussīlo pāpadhammo, paṭiggāhakā ca honti dussīlā pāpadhammā— evaṁ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato.
[¶21] And how is a religious donation purified by both the giver and the recipient? It’s when both the giver and the recipient are ethical, of good character. These are the four ways of purifying a religious donation.”
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca? Idhānanda, dāyako ca hoti sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, paṭiggāhakā ca honti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā— evaṁ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca. Imā kho, ānanda, catasso dakkhiṇā visuddhiyo”ti.
[¶22] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶23] “When an ethical person with trusting heart
gives a proper gift to unethical persons,
trusting in the ample fruit of deeds,
that offering is purified by the giver.
> Pali: “Yo sīlavā dussīlesu dadāti dānaṁ,
Dhammena laddhaṁ supasannacitto;
Abhisaddahaṁ kammaphalaṁ uḷāraṁ,
Sā dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati.
[¶24] When an unethical and untrusting person,
gives an improper gift to ethical persons,
not trusting in the ample fruit of deeds,
that offering is purified by the receivers.
> Pali: Yo dussīlo sīlavantesu dadāti dānaṁ,
Adhammena laddhaṁ appasannacitto;
Anabhisaddahaṁ kammaphalaṁ uḷāraṁ,
Sā dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati.
[¶25] When an unethical and untrusting person,
gives an improper gift to unethical persons,
not trusting in the ample fruit of deeds,
I declare that gift is not very fruitful.
> Pali: Yo dussīlo dussīlesu dadāti dānaṁ,
Adhammena laddhaṁ appasannacitto;
Anabhisaddahaṁ kammaphalaṁ uḷāraṁ,
Na taṁ dānaṁ vipulapphalanti brūmi.
[¶26] When an ethical person with trusting heart
gives a proper gift to ethical persons,
trusting in the ample fruit of deeds,
I declare that gift is abundantly fruitful.
> Pali: Yo sīlavā sīlavantesu dadāti dānaṁ,
Dhammena laddhaṁ supasannacitto;
Abhisaddahaṁ kammaphalaṁ uḷāraṁ,
Taṁ ve dānaṁ vipulapphalanti brūmi.
[¶27] But when a passionless one gives to the passionless
a proper gift with trusting heart,
trusting in the ample fruit of deeds,
that’s truly the best of material gifts.”
> Pali: Yo vītarāgo vītarāgesu dadāti dānaṁ,
Dhammena laddhaṁ supasannacitto;
Abhisaddahaṁ kammaphalaṁ uḷāraṁ,
Taṁ ve dānaṁ āmisadānānamaggan”ti.
[¶28] > Pali: Dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dvādasamaṁ.
[¶29] > Pali: Vibhaṅgavaggo niṭṭhito catuttho.
[¶30] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶31] > Pali: Bhaddekānandakaccāna,
Lomasakaṅgiyāsubho;
Mahākammasaḷāyatanavibhaṅgā,
Uddesaaraṇā dhātu saccaṁ.
Dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasuttanti.
## 156. MN 143 · Advice to Anāthapiṇḍika
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/156/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/156/#p-N
[¶0] MN 143 · Advice to Anāthapiṇḍika
> Pali: MN 143 · Anāthapiṇḍikovādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time the householder Anāthapiṇḍika was sick, suffering, gravely ill. Then he addressed a man, “Please, my man, go to the Buddha, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Say to him: ‘Sir, the householder Anāthapiṇḍika is sick, suffering, gravely ill. He bows with his head to your feet.’ Then go to Venerable Sāriputta, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Say to him: ‘Sir, the householder Anāthapiṇḍika is sick, suffering, gravely ill. He bows with his head to your feet.’ And then say: ‘Sir, please visit him at his home out of sympathy.’”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati ābādhiko hoti dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. Atha kho anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi: ‘anāthapiṇḍiko, bhante, gahapati ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’ti. Yena cāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena āyasmato sāriputtassa pāde sirasā vandāhi: ‘anāthapiṇḍiko, bhante, gahapati ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So āyasmato sāriputtassa pāde sirasā vandatī’ti. Evañca vadehi: ‘sādhu kira, bhante, āyasmā sāriputto yena anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti.
[¶3] “Yes, sir,” that man replied. He did as Anāthapiṇḍika asked. Sāriputta consented with silence.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so puriso anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatissa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so puriso bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “anāthapiṇḍiko, bhante, gahapati ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”ti. Yena cāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so puriso āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca: “anāthapiṇḍiko, bhante, gahapati ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. So āyasmato sāriputtassa pāde sirasā vandati; evañca vadeti: ‘sādhu kira, bhante, āyasmā sāriputto yena anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti. Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā sāriputto tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶4] Then Venerable Sāriputta robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, went with Venerable Ānanda as his second monk to Anāthapiṇḍika’s home. He sat down on the seat spread out and said to Anāthapiṇḍika, “I hope you’re keeping well, householder, I hope you’re all right. I hope your pain is fading, not growing; that its fading is evident, not its growing.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya āyasmatā ānandena pacchāsamaṇena yena anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho āyasmā sāriputto anāthapiṇḍikaṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “kacci te, gahapati, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ? Kacci te dukkhā vedanā paṭikkamanti, no abhikkamanti; paṭikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no abhikkamo”ti?
[¶5] “I’m not keeping well, Honorable Sāriputta, I’m not getting by. My pain is terrible and growing, not fading; its growing is evident, not its fading. The winds piercing my head are so severe, it feels like a strong man drilling into my head with a sharp point. The pain in my head is so severe, it feels like a strong man tightening a strong leather strap around my head. The winds slicing my belly are so severe, like a deft butcher or their apprentice were slicing open a cow’s belly with a sharp meat cleaver. The burning in my body is so severe, it feels like two strong men grabbing a weaker man by the arms to burn and scorch him on a pit of glowing coals. That’s how severe the burning is in my body. I’m not keeping well, Honorable Sāriputta, I’m not getting by. My pain is terrible and growing, not fading; its growing is evident, not its fading.”
> Pali: “Na me, bhante sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bhante sāriputta, balavā puriso tiṇhena sikharena muddhani abhimattheyya; evameva kho me, bhante sāriputta, adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Na me, bhante sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bhante sāriputta, balavā puriso daḷhena varattakhaṇḍena sīse sīsaveṭhaṁ dadeyya; evameva kho me, bhante sāriputta, adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā. Na me, bhante sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bhante sāriputta, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā tiṇhena govikantanena kucchiṁ parikanteyya; evameva kho me, bhante sāriputta, adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Na me, bhante sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, bhante sāriputta, dve balavanto purisā dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuyā santāpeyyuṁ, samparitāpeyyuṁ; evameva kho me, bhante sāriputta, adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho. Na me, bhante sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo”ti.
[¶6] “That’s why, householder, you should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp the eye, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the eye.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: “Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na cakkhuṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me cakkhunissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶7] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp the ear, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the ear.’ …
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na sotaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me sotanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶8] ‘I shall not grasp the nose, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the nose.’ …
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na ghānaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me ghānanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶9] ‘I shall not grasp the tongue, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the tongue.’ …
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na jivhaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me jivhānissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶10] ‘I shall not grasp the body, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the body.’ …
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na kāyaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me kāyanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶11] ‘I shall not grasp the mind, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the mind.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na manaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me manonissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶12] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp sight, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on sight.’ … ‘I shall not grasp sound … smell … taste … touch … idea, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on idea.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na rūpaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me rūpanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na saddaṁ upādiyissāmi …pe… na gandhaṁ upādiyissāmi … na rasaṁ upādiyissāmi … na phoṭṭhabbaṁ upādiyissāmi … na dhammaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me dhammanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶13] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp eye consciousness, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on eye consciousness.’ … ‘I shall not grasp ear consciousness … nose consciousness … tongue consciousness … body consciousness … mind consciousness, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on mind consciousness.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na cakkhuviññāṇaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me cakkhuviññāṇanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na sotaviññāṇaṁ upādiyissāmi … na ghānaviññāṇaṁ upādiyissāmi … na jivhāviññāṇaṁ upādiyissāmi … na kāyaviññāṇaṁ upādiyissāmi … na manoviññāṇaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me manoviññāṇanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶14] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp eye contact … ear contact … nose contact … tongue contact … body contact … mind contact, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on mind contact.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na cakkhusamphassaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me cakkhusamphassanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na sotasamphassaṁ upādiyissāmi … na ghānasamphassaṁ upādiyissāmi … na jivhāsamphassaṁ upādiyissāmi … na kāyasamphassaṁ upādiyissāmi … na manosamphassaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me manosamphassanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶15] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp feeling born of eye contact … feeling born of ear contact … feeling born of nose contact … feeling born of tongue contact … feeling born of body contact … feeling born of mind contact, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the feeling born of mind contact.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na cakkhusamphassajaṁ vedanaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me cakkhusamphassajāvedanānissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na sotasamphassajaṁ vedanaṁ upādiyissāmi … na ghānasamphassajaṁ vedanaṁ upādiyissāmi … na jivhāsamphassajaṁ vedanaṁ upādiyissāmi … na kāyasamphassajaṁ vedanaṁ upādiyissāmi … na manosamphassajaṁ vedanaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me manosamphassajāvedanānissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶16] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp the earth element … water element … fire element … air element … space element … consciousness element, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the consciousness element.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na pathavīdhātuṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me pathavīdhātunissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na āpodhātuṁ upādiyissāmi … na tejodhātuṁ upādiyissāmi … na vāyodhātuṁ upādiyissāmi … na ākāsadhātuṁ upādiyissāmi … na viññāṇadhātuṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me viññāṇadhātunissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶17] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp form … feeling … perception … choices … consciousness, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on consciousness.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na rūpaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me rūpanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na vedanaṁ upādiyissāmi … na saññaṁ upādiyissāmi … na saṅkhāre upādiyissāmi … na viññāṇaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me viññāṇanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶18] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp the dimension of infinite space … the dimension of infinite consciousness … the dimension of nothingness … the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me ākāsānañcāyatananissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upādiyissāmi … na ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upādiyissāmi … na nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me nevasaññānāsaññāyatananissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶19] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp this world, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on this world.’ That’s how you should train.
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na idhalokaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me idhalokanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ.
[¶20] You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp the other world, and there shall be no consciousness of mine dependent on the other world.’ That’s how you should train. You should train like this: ‘I shall not grasp whatever is seen, heard, thought, known, attained, sought, and explored by my mind, and my consciousness will not have that as support.’ That’s how you should train.”
> Pali: Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘na paralokaṁ upādiyissāmi, na ca me paralokanissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabbaṁ. Tasmātiha te, gahapati, evaṁ sikkhitabbaṁ: ‘yampi me diṭṭhaṁ sutaṁ mutaṁ viññātaṁ pattaṁ pariyesitaṁ anupariyesitaṁ anucaritaṁ manasā tampi na upādiyissāmi, na ca me tannissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Evañhi te, gahapati, sikkhitabban”ti.
[¶21] When he said this, Anāthapiṇḍika cried and burst out in tears. Venerable Ānanda said to him, “Are you failing, householder? Are you fading, householder?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati parodi, assūni pavattesi. Atha kho āyasmā ānando anāthapiṇḍikaṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “olīyasi kho tvaṁ, gahapati, saṁsīdasi kho tvaṁ, gahapatī”ti?
[¶22] “No, Honorable Ānanda. But for a long time I have paid homage to the Buddha and the esteemed mendicants. Yet I have never before heard such a Dhamma talk.”
> Pali: “Nāhaṁ, bhante ānanda, olīyāmi, napi saṁsīdāmi; api ca me dīgharattaṁ satthā payirupāsito manobhāvanīyā ca bhikkhū; na ca me evarūpī dhammī kathā sutapubbā”ti.
[¶23] “Householder, such Dhamma talk does not strike when teaching white-clothed laypeople. Rather, it strikes when teaching those gone forth.”
> Pali: “Na kho, gahapati, gihīnaṁ odātavasanānaṁ evarūpī dhammī kathā paṭibhāti; pabbajitānaṁ kho, gahapati, evarūpī dhammī kathā paṭibhātī”ti.
[¶24] “Well then, Honorable Sāriputta, let such Dhamma talk strike when teaching white-clothed laypeople as well! There are gentlemen with little dust in their eyes. They’re in decline because they haven’t heard the teaching. There will be those who understand the teaching!”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhante sāriputta, gihīnampi odātavasanānaṁ evarūpī dhammī kathā paṭibhātu. Santi hi, bhante, kulaputtā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti; bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro”ti.
[¶25] And when the venerables Sāriputta and Ānanda had given the householder Anāthapiṇḍika this advice they rose from their seats and left. Not long after they had left, Anāthapiṇḍika passed away and was reborn in the host of joyful gods.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca sāriputto āyasmā ca ānando anāthapiṇḍikaṁ gahapatiṁ iminā ovādena ovaditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁsu. Atha kho anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati, acirapakkante āyasmante ca sāriputte āyasmante ca ānande, kālamakāsi tusitaṁ kāyaṁ upapajji.
[¶26] Then, late at night, the glorious godling Anāthapiṇḍika, lighting up the entire Jeta’s Grove, went up to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and addressed the Buddha in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇo kevalakappaṁ jetavanaṁ obhāsetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto bhagavantaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶27] “This is indeed that Jeta’s Grove,
frequented by the Saṅgha of seers,
where the King of Dhamma stayed:
it brings me joy!
> Pali: “Idañhi taṁ jetavanaṁ,
isisaṅghanisevitaṁ;
Āvutthaṁ dhammarājena,
pītisañjananaṁ mama.
[¶28] Deeds, knowledge, and principle;
ethical conduct, an excellent livelihood;
by these are mortals purified,
not by clan or wealth.
> Pali: Kammaṁ vijjā ca dhammo ca,
sīlaṁ jīvitamuttamaṁ;
Etena maccā sujjhanti,
na gottena dhanena vā.
[¶29] That’s why an astute person,
seeing what’s good for themselves,
would examine the teaching rationally,
that’s how they become purified in that.
> Pali: Tasmā hi paṇḍito poso,
sampassaṁ atthamattano;
Yoniso vicine dhammaṁ,
evaṁ tattha visujjhati.
[¶30] Sāriputta is full of wisdom,
ethics, and peace.
Even a mendicant who has crossed over
might at best equal him.”
> Pali: Sāriputtova paññāya,
sīlena upasamena ca;
Yopi pāraṅgato bhikkhu,
etāvaparamo siyā”ti.
[¶31] That is what the godling Anāthapiṇḍika said, and the Teacher concurred. Then the godling Anāthapiṇḍika, knowing that the Teacher concurred, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Idamavoca anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto. Samanuñño satthā ahosi. Atha kho anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto: “samanuñño me satthā”ti bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
[¶32] Then, when the night had passed, the Buddha told the mendicants all that had happened.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tassā rattiyā accayena bhikkhū āmantesi: “imaṁ, bhikkhave, rattiṁ aññataro devaputto abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇo kevalakappaṁ jetavanaṁ obhāsetvā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho so devaputto maṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶33] > Pali: ‘Idañhi taṁ jetavanaṁ,
isisaṅghanisevitaṁ;
Āvutthaṁ dhammarājena,
pītisañjananaṁ mama.
[¶34] > Pali: Kammaṁ vijjā ca dhammo ca,
sīlaṁ jīvitamuttamaṁ;
Etena maccā sujjhanti,
na gottena dhanena vā.
[¶35] > Pali: Tasmā hi paṇḍito poso,
sampassaṁ atthamattano;
Yoniso vicine dhammaṁ,
evaṁ tattha visujjhati.
[¶36] > Pali: Sāriputtova paññāya,
sīlena upasamena ca;
Yopi pāraṅgato bhikkhu,
etāvaparamo siyā’ti.
[¶37] > Pali: Idamavoca, bhikkhave, so devaputto. ‘Samanuñño me satthā’ti maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyī”ti.
[¶38] When he had spoken, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶39] “Sir, that godling must surely have been Anāthapiṇḍika. For the householder Anāthapiṇḍika was devoted to Venerable Sāriputta.”
> Pali: “so hi nūna so, bhante, anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto bhavissati. Anāthapiṇḍiko, bhante, gahapati āyasmante sāriputte abhippasanno ahosī”ti.
[¶40] “Good, good, Ānanda. You’ve reached the logical conclusion, as far as logic goes. For that was indeed the godling Anāthapiṇḍika.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, ānanda. Yāvatakaṁ kho, ānanda, takkāya pattabbaṁ, anuppattaṁ taṁ tayā. Anāthapiṇḍiko so, ānanda, devaputto”ti.
[¶41] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶42] > Pali: Anāthapiṇḍikovādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 157. MN 144 · Advice to Channa
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/157/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/157/#p-N
[¶0] MN 144 · Advice to Channa
> Pali: MN 144 · Channovādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Now at that time the venerables Sāriputta, Mahācunda, and Channa were staying on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ca sāriputto āyasmā ca mahācundo āyasmā ca channo gijjhakūṭe pabbate viharanti.
[¶3] Now at that time Venerable Channa was sick, suffering, gravely ill.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā channo ābādhiko hoti dukkhito bāḷhagilāno.
[¶4] Then in the late afternoon, Venerable Sāriputta came out of retreat, went to Venerable Mahācunda and said to him, “Come, Reverend Cunda, let’s go to see Venerable Channa and ask about his illness.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenāyasmā mahācundo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahācundaṁ etadavoca: “āyāmāvuso cunda, yenāyasmā channo tenupasaṅkamissāma gilānapucchakā”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, reverend,” replied Mahācunda.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā mahācundo āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosi.
[¶6] And then Sāriputta and Mahācunda went to see Channa and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side. Then Sāriputta said to Channa, “I hope you’re keeping well, Reverend Channa, I hope you’re all right. I hope your pain is fading, not growing; that its fading is evident, not its growing.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca sāriputto āyasmā ca mahācundo yenāyasmā channo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā channena saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto āyasmantaṁ channaṁ etadavoca: “kacci te, āvuso channa, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ? Kacci te dukkhā vedanā paṭikkamanti, no abhikkamanti; paṭikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no abhikkamo”ti?
[¶7] “Reverend Sāriputta, I’m not keeping well, I’m not getting by. My pain is terrible and growing, not fading; its growing is evident, not its fading. The winds piercing my head are so severe, it feels like a strong man drilling into my head with a sharp point. The pain in my head is so severe, it feels like a strong man tightening a strong leather strap around my head. The winds slicing my belly are so severe, like a deft butcher or their apprentice were slicing open a cow’s belly with a sharp meat cleaver. The burning in my body is so severe, it feels like two strong men grabbing a weaker man by the arms to burn and scorch him on a pit of glowing coals. I’m not keeping well, I’m not getting by. My pain is terrible and growing, not fading; its growing is evident, not its fading. Reverend Sāriputta, I shall commit suicide. I don’t wish to live.”
> Pali: “Na me, āvuso sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, āvuso sāriputta, balavā puriso tiṇhena sikharena muddhani abhimattheyya; evameva kho me, āvuso sāriputta, adhimattā vātā muddhani ūhananti. Na me, āvuso sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, āvuso sāriputta, balavā puriso daḷhena varattakkhaṇḍena sīse sīsaveṭhaṁ dadeyya; evameva kho me, āvuso sāriputta, adhimattā sīse sīsavedanā. Na me, āvuso sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, āvuso sāriputta, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā tiṇhena govikantanena kucchiṁ parikanteyya; evameva kho me, āvuso sāriputta, adhimattā vātā kucchiṁ parikantanti. Na me, āvuso sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Seyyathāpi, āvuso sāriputta, dve balavanto purisā dubbalataraṁ purisaṁ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuyā santāpeyyuṁ samparitāpeyyuṁ; evameva kho me, āvuso sāriputta, adhimatto kāyasmiṁ ḍāho. Na me, āvuso sāriputta, khamanīyaṁ na yāpanīyaṁ. Bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamanti; abhikkamosānaṁ paññāyati, no paṭikkamo. Satthaṁ, āvuso sāriputta, āharissāmi, nāvakaṅkhāmi jīvitan”ti.
[¶8] “Please don’t commit suicide! Venerable Channa, keep going! We want you to keep going. If you don’t have any suitable food, we’ll find it for you. If you don’t have suitable medicine, we’ll find it for you. If you don’t have a capable carer, we’ll find one for you. Please don’t commit suicide! Venerable Channa, keep going! We want you to keep going.”
> Pali: “Māyasmā channo satthaṁ āharesi. Yāpetāyasmā channo. Yāpentaṁ mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ channaṁ icchāma. Sace āyasmato channassa natthi sappāyāni bhojanāni, ahaṁ āyasmato channassa sappāyāni bhojanāni pariyesissāmi. Sace āyasmato channassa natthi sappāyāni bhesajjāni, ahaṁ āyasmato channassa sappāyāni bhesajjāni pariyesissāmi. Sace āyasmato channassa natthi patirūpā upaṭṭhākā, ahaṁ āyasmantaṁ channaṁ upaṭṭhahissāmi. Māyasmā channo satthaṁ āharesi. Yāpetāyasmā channo. Yāpentaṁ mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ channaṁ icchāmā”ti.
[¶9] “Reverend Sāriputta, it’s not that I don’t have suitable food, or suitable medicine, or a capable carer. Moreover, for a long time now I have served the Teacher with love, not without love. For it is proper for a disciple to serve the Teacher with love, not without love. You should remember this: ‘The mendicant Channa will commit suicide blamelessly.’”
> Pali: “Napi me, āvuso sāriputta, natthi sappāyāni bhojanāni; napi me natthi sappāyāni bhesajjāni; napi me natthi patirūpā upaṭṭhākā; api cāvuso sāriputta, pariciṇṇo me satthā dīgharattaṁ manāpeneva no amanāpena. Etañhi, āvuso sāriputta, sāvakassa patirūpaṁ yaṁ satthāraṁ paricareyya manāpeneva no amanāpena. ‘Anupavajjaṁ channo bhikkhu satthaṁ āharissatī’ti evametaṁ, āvuso sāriputta, dhārehī”ti.
[¶10] “I’d like to ask Venerable Channa about a certain point, if you’d take the time to answer.”
> Pali: “Puccheyyāma mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ channaṁ kañcideva desaṁ, sace āyasmā channo okāsaṁ karoti pañhassa veyyākaraṇāyā”ti.
[¶11] “Ask, Reverend Sāriputta. When I’ve heard it I’ll know.”
> Pali: “Pucchāvuso sāriputta, sutvā vedissāmī”ti.
[¶12] “Reverend Channa, do you regard the eye, eye consciousness, and things knowable by eye consciousness in this way: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’? Do you regard the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, mind consciousness, and things knowable by mind consciousness in this way: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Cakkhuṁ, āvuso channa, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassasi? Sotaṁ, āvuso channa, sotaviññāṇaṁ …pe… ghānaṁ, āvuso channa, ghānaviññāṇaṁ … jivhaṁ, āvuso channa, jivhāviññāṇaṁ … kāyaṁ, āvuso channa, kāyaviññāṇaṁ … manaṁ, āvuso channa, manoviññāṇaṁ manoviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassasī”ti?
[¶13] “Reverend Sāriputta, I regard the eye, eye consciousness, and things knowable by eye consciousness in this way: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ I regard the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, mind consciousness, and things knowable by mind consciousness in this way: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self’.”
> Pali: “Cakkhuṁ, āvuso sāriputta, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassāmi. Sotaṁ, āvuso sāriputta …pe… ghānaṁ, āvuso sāriputta … jivhaṁ, āvuso sāriputta … kāyaṁ, āvuso sāriputta … manaṁ, āvuso sāriputta, manoviññāṇaṁ manoviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶14] “Reverend Channa, what have you seen, what have you directly known in these things that you regard them in this way: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self’?”
> Pali: “Cakkhusmiṁ, āvuso channa, cakkhuviññāṇe cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbesu dhammesu kiṁ disvā kiṁ abhiññāya cakkhuṁ cakkhuviññāṇaṁ cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassasi? Sotasmiṁ, āvuso channa, sotaviññāṇe … ghānasmiṁ, āvuso channa, ghānaviññāṇe … jivhāya, āvuso channa, jivhāviññāṇe … kāyasmiṁ, āvuso channa, kāyaviññāṇe … manasmiṁ, āvuso channa, manoviññāṇe manoviññāṇaviññātabbesu dhammesu kiṁ disvā kiṁ abhiññāya manaṁ manoviññāṇaṁ manoviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassasī”ti?
[¶15] “Reverend Sāriputta, after seeing cessation, after directly knowing cessation in these things I regard them in this way: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self’.”
> Pali: “Cakkhusmiṁ, āvuso sāriputta, cakkhuviññāṇe cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbesu dhammesu nirodhaṁ disvā nirodhaṁ abhiññāya cakkhuṁ cakkhuviññāṇaṁ cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassāmi. Sotasmiṁ, āvuso sāriputta, sotaviññāṇe … ghānasmiṁ, āvuso sāriputta, ghānaviññāṇe … jivhāya, āvuso sāriputta, jivhāviññāṇe … kāyasmiṁ, āvuso sāriputta, kāyaviññāṇe … manasmiṁ, āvuso sāriputta, manoviññāṇe manoviññāṇaviññātabbesu dhammesu nirodhaṁ disvā nirodhaṁ abhiññāya manaṁ manoviññāṇaṁ manoviññāṇaviññātabbe dhamme ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassāmī”ti.
[¶16] When he said this, Venerable Mahācunda said to Venerable Channa:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā mahācundo āyasmantaṁ channaṁ etadavoca:
[¶17] “So, Reverend Channa, you should regularly apply your mind to this instruction of the Buddha: ‘For the dependent there is quivering. For the independent there’s no quivering. When there’s no quivering, there is tranquility. When there is tranquility, there’s no inclination. When there’s no inclination, there’s no coming and going. When there’s no coming and going, there’s no passing away and reappearing. When there’s no passing away and reappearing, there’s no this life or the next or between the two. Just this is the end of suffering.’” And when the venerables Sāriputta and Mahācunda had given Venerable Channa this advice they rose from their seats and left.
> Pali: “tasmātiha, āvuso channa, idampi tassa bhagavato sāsanaṁ, niccakappaṁ manasi kātabbaṁ: ‘nissitassa calitaṁ, anissitassa calitaṁ natthi. Calite asati passaddhi, passaddhiyā sati nati na hoti. Natiyā asati āgatigati na hoti. Āgatigatiyā asati cutūpapāto na hoti. Cutūpapāte asati nevidha na huraṁ na ubhayamantarena. Esevanto dukkhassā’”ti. Atha kho āyasmā ca sāriputto āyasmā ca mahācundo āyasmantaṁ channaṁ iminā ovādena ovaditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶18] Not long after those venerables had left, Venerable Channa committed suicide.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā channo acirapakkante āyasmante ca sāriputte āyasmante ca mahācunde satthaṁ āharesi.
[¶19] Then Sāriputta went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, Venerable Channa has committed suicide. Where has he been reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “āyasmatā, bhante, channena satthaṁ āharitaṁ. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶20] “Sāriputta, didn’t the mendicant Channa declare his blamelessness to you personally?”
> Pali: “Nanu te, sāriputta, channena bhikkhunā sammukhāyeva anupavajjatā byākatā”ti?
[¶21] “Sir, there is a Vajjian village named Pubbajira. There Channa had families who were friendly, intimate, and hospitable.”
> Pali: “Atthi, bhante, pubbajiraṁ nāma vajjigāmo. Tatthāyasmato channassa mittakulāni suhajjakulāni upavajjakulānī”ti.
[¶22] “The mendicant Channa did indeed have such families. But, Sāriputta, this is not enough for me to call someone ‘blameworthy’. When someone lays down this body and takes up another body, I call them ‘blameworthy’. But the mendicant Channa did no such thing. You should remember this: ‘The mendicant Channa committed suicide blamelessly.’”
> Pali: “Honti hete, sāriputta, channassa bhikkhuno mittakulāni suhajjakulāni upavajjakulāni. Nāhaṁ, sāriputta, ettāvatā ‘saupavajjo’ti vadāmi. Yo kho, sāriputta, imañca kāyaṁ nikkhipati aññañca kāyaṁ upādiyati tamahaṁ ‘saupavajjo’ti vadāmi. Taṁ channassa bhikkhuno natthi. ‘Anupavajjo channo bhikkhu satthaṁ āharesī’ti evametaṁ, sāriputta, dhārehī”ti.
[¶23] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Sāriputta approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶24] > Pali: Channovādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 158. MN 145 · Advice to Puṇṇa
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/158/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/158/#p-N
[¶0] MN 145 · Advice to Puṇṇa
> Pali: MN 145 · Puṇṇovādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then in the late afternoon, Venerable Puṇṇa came out of retreat and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down to one side, and said to the Buddha, “Sir, may the Buddha please teach me Dhamma in brief. When I’ve heard it, I’ll live alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā puṇṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sādhu maṁ, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena ovādena ovadatu, yamahaṁ bhagavato dhammaṁ sutvā eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto vihareyyan”ti.
[¶3] “Well then, Puṇṇa, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, puṇṇa, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” replied Puṇṇa. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā puṇṇo bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Puṇṇa, there are sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. If a mendicant approves, welcomes, and keeps clinging to them, this gives rise to relishing. Relishing is the origin of suffering, I say.
> Pali: “Santi kho, puṇṇa, cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Tañce bhikkhu abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ abhinandato abhivadato ajjhosāya tiṭṭhato uppajjati nandī. ‘Nandīsamudayā dukkhasamudayo, puṇṇā’ti vadāmi.
[¶6] There are sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body … ideas known by the mind, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. If a mendicant approves, welcomes, and keeps clinging to them, this gives rise to relishing. Relishing is the origin of suffering, I say.
> Pali: Santi kho, puṇṇa, sotaviññeyyā saddā … ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā … manoviññeyyā dhammā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Tañce bhikkhu abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ abhinandato abhivadato ajjhosāya tiṭṭhato uppajjati nandī. ‘Nandīsamudayā dukkhasamudayo, puṇṇā’ti vadāmi.
[¶7] There are sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. If a mendicant doesn’t approve, welcome, and keep clinging to them, relishing ceases. When relishing ceases, suffering ceases, I say.
> Pali: Santi ca kho, puṇṇa, cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Tañce bhikkhu nābhinandati nābhivadati nājjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ anabhinandato anabhivadato anajjhosāya tiṭṭhato nandī nirujjhati. ‘Nandīnirodhā dukkhanirodho, puṇṇā’ti vadāmi.
[¶8] There are sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body … ideas known by the mind, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. If a mendicant doesn’t approve, welcome, and keep clinging to them, relishing ceases. When relishing ceases, suffering ceases, I say.
> Pali: Santi ca kho, puṇṇa, sotaviññeyyā saddā … ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā … manoviññeyyā dhammā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Tañce bhikkhu nābhinandati nābhivadati nājjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa taṁ anabhinandato anabhivadato anajjhosāya tiṭṭhato nandī nirujjhati. ‘Nandīnirodhā dukkhanirodho, puṇṇā’ti vadāmi.
[¶9] Puṇṇa, now that I’ve given you this brief advice, what country will you live in?”
> Pali: Iminā ca tvaṁ, puṇṇa, mayā saṅkhittena ovādena ovadito katarasmiṁ janapade viharissasī”ti?
[¶10] “Sir, there’s a country named Sunāparanta. I shall live there.”
> Pali: “Imināhaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena ovādena ovadito, atthi sunāparanto nāma janapado, tatthāhaṁ viharissāmī”ti.
[¶11] “The people of Sunāparanta are wild and rough, Puṇṇa. If they abuse and insult you, what will you think of them?”
> Pali: “Caṇḍā kho, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā; pharusā kho, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā. Sace taṁ, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā akkosissanti paribhāsissanti, tattha te, puṇṇa, kinti bhavissatī”ti?
[¶12] “If they abuse and insult me, I will think: ‘These people of Sunāparanta are gracious, truly gracious, since they don’t hit me with their fists.’ That’s what I’ll think, Blessed One. That’s what I’ll think, Holy One.”
> Pali: “Sace maṁ, bhante, sunāparantakā manussā akkosissanti paribhāsissanti, tattha me evaṁ bhavissati: ‘bhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, subhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, yaṁ me nayime pāṇinā pahāraṁ dentī’ti. Evamettha, bhagavā, bhavissati; evamettha, sugata, bhavissatī”ti.
[¶13] “But if they do hit you with their fists, what will you think of them then?”
> Pali: “Sace pana te, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā pāṇinā pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha pana te, puṇṇa, kinti bhavissatī”ti?
[¶14] “If they hit me with their fists, I’ll think: ‘These people of Sunāparanta are gracious, truly gracious, since they don’t throw stones at me.’ That’s what I’ll think, Blessed One. That’s what I’ll think, Holy One.”
> Pali: “Sace me, bhante, sunāparantakā manussā pāṇinā pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha me evaṁ bhavissati: ‘bhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, subhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, yaṁ me nayime leḍḍunā pahāraṁ dentī’ti. Evamettha, bhagavā, bhavissati; evamettha, sugata, bhavissatī”ti.
[¶15] “But if they do throw stones at you, what will you think of them then?”
> Pali: “Sace pana te, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā leḍḍunā pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha pana te, puṇṇa, kinti bhavissatī”ti?
[¶16] “If they throw stones at me, I’ll think: ‘These people of Sunāparanta are gracious, truly gracious, since they don’t beat me with a club.’ That’s what I’ll think, Blessed One. That’s what I’ll think, Holy One.”
> Pali: “Sace me, bhante, sunāparantakā manussā leḍḍunā pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha me evaṁ bhavissati: ‘bhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, subhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, yaṁ me nayime daṇḍena pahāraṁ dentī’ti. Evamettha, bhagavā, bhavissati; evamettha, sugata, bhavissatī”ti.
[¶17] “But if they do beat you with a club, what will you think of them then?”
> Pali: “Sace pana te, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā daṇḍena pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha pana te, puṇṇa, kinti bhavissatī”ti?
[¶18] “If they beat me with a club, I’ll think: ‘These people of Sunāparanta are gracious, truly gracious, since they don’t stab me with a knife.’ That’s what I’ll think, Blessed One. That’s what I’ll think, Holy One.”
> Pali: “Sace me, bhante, sunāparantakā manussā daṇḍena pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha me evaṁ bhavissati: ‘bhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, subhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, yaṁ me nayime satthena pahāraṁ dentī’ti. Evamettha, bhagavā, bhavissati; evamettha, sugata, bhavissatī”ti.
[¶19] “But if they do stab you with a knife, what will you think of them then?”
> Pali: “Sace pana te, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā satthena pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha pana te, puṇṇa, kinti bhavissatī”ti?
[¶20] “If they stab me with a knife, I’ll think: ‘These people of Sunāparanta are gracious, truly gracious, since they don’t take my life with a sharp knife.’ That’s what I’ll think, Blessed One. That’s what I’ll think, Holy One.”
> Pali: “Sace me, bhante, sunāparantakā manussā satthena pahāraṁ dassanti, tattha me evaṁ bhavissati: ‘bhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, subhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, yaṁ maṁ nayime tiṇhena satthena jīvitā voropentī’ti. Evamettha, bhagavā, bhavissati; evamettha, sugata, bhavissatī”ti.
[¶21] “But if they do take your life with a sharp knife, what will you think of them then?”
> Pali: “Sace pana taṁ, puṇṇa, sunāparantakā manussā tiṇhena satthena jīvitā voropessanti, tattha pana te, puṇṇa, kinti bhavissatī”ti?
[¶22] “If they take my life with a sharp knife, I’ll think: ‘There are disciples of the Buddha who looked for a suicide weapon because they were horrified, repelled, and disgusted with the body and with life. And I have found this without looking!’ That’s what I’ll think, Blessed One. That’s what I’ll think, Holy One.”
> Pali: “Sace maṁ, bhante, sunāparantakā manussā tiṇhena satthena jīvitā voropessanti, tattha me evaṁ bhavissati: ‘santi kho bhagavato sāvakā kāye ca jīvite ca aṭṭīyamānā harāyamānā jigucchamānā satthahārakaṁ pariyesanti. Taṁ me idaṁ apariyiṭṭhaṁyeva satthahārakaṁ laddhan’ti. Evamettha, bhagavā, bhavissati; evamettha, sugata, bhavissatī”ti.
[¶23] “Good, good Puṇṇa! Having such self-control and peacefulness, you will be quite capable of living in Sunāparanta. Now, Puṇṇa, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, puṇṇa. Sakkhissasi kho tvaṁ, puṇṇa, iminā damūpasamena samannāgato sunāparantasmiṁ janapade viharituṁ. Yassadāni tvaṁ, puṇṇa, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶24] And then Puṇṇa welcomed and agreed with the Buddha’s words. He got up from his seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right. Then he set his lodgings in order and, taking his bowl and robe, set out for Sunāparanta. Traveling stage by stage, he arrived at Sunāparanta, and stayed there. Within that rainy season he confirmed around five hundred male and five hundred female lay followers. And within that same rainy season he realized the three knowledges. Some time later he became fully extinguished.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sunāparanto janapado tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sunāparanto janapado tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ āyasmā puṇṇo sunāparantasmiṁ janapade viharati. Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo tenevantaravassena pañcamattāni upāsakasatāni paṭivedesi, tenevantaravassena pañcamattāni upāsikasatāni paṭivedesi, tenevantaravassena tisso vijjā sacchākāsi. Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo aparena samayena parinibbāyi.
[¶25] Then several mendicants went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, the gentleman named Puṇṇa, who was advised in brief by the Buddha, has passed away. Where has he been reborn in his next life?”
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “yo so, bhante, puṇṇo nāma kulaputto bhagavatā saṅkhittena ovādena ovadito so kālaṅkato. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶26] “Mendicants, Puṇṇa was astute. He practiced in line with the teaching, and did not trouble me about the teachings. Puṇṇa has become fully quenched.”
> Pali: “Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, puṇṇo kulaputto paccapādi dhammassānudhammaṁ, na ca maṁ dhammādhikaraṇaṁ viheṭhesi. Parinibbuto, bhikkhave, puṇṇo kulaputto”ti.
[¶27] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶28] > Pali: Puṇṇovādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 159. MN 146 · Advice from Nandaka
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/159/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/159/#p-N
[¶0] MN 146 · Advice from Nandaka
> Pali: MN 146 · Nandakovādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then Mahāpajāpati Gotamī together with around five hundred nuns approached the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him, “Sir, may the Buddha please advise and instruct the nuns. Please give the nuns a Dhamma talk.”
> Pali: Atha kho mahāpajāpatigotamī pañcamattehi bhikkhunisatehi saddhiṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho mahāpajāpatigotamī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ovadatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhuniyo; anusāsatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhuniyo; karotu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhunīnaṁ dhammiṁ kathan”ti.
[¶3] Now at that time the senior monks were taking turns to advise the nuns. But Venerable Nandaka didn’t want to take his turn.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena therā bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo ovadanti pariyāyena. Āyasmā nandako na icchati bhikkhuniyo ovadituṁ pariyāyena.
[¶4] Then the Buddha said to Venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, whose turn is it to advise the nuns today?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “kassa nu kho, ānanda, ajja pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovadituṁ pariyāyenā”ti?
[¶5] “It’s Nandaka’s turn, sir, but he doesn’t want to do it.”
> Pali: “Sabbeheva, bhante, kato pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovadituṁ pariyāyena. Ayaṁ, bhante, āyasmā nandako na icchati bhikkhuniyo ovadituṁ pariyāyenā”ti.
[¶6] Then the Buddha said to Nandaka, “Nandaka, please advise and instruct the nuns. Please, brahmin, give the nuns a Dhamma talk.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ āmantesi: “ovada, nandaka, bhikkhuniyo; anusāsa, nandaka, bhikkhuniyo; karohi tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhunīnaṁ dhammiṁ kathan”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, sir,” replied Nandaka. Then, in the morning, he robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms. He wandered for alms in Sāvatthī. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he went to the Royal Monastery with a companion. Those nuns saw him coming off in the distance, so they spread out a seat and placed water for washing the feet. Nandaka sat down on the seat spread out, and washed his feet. Those nuns bowed, and sat down to one side.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā nandako bhagavato paṭissutvā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto attadutiyo yena rājakārāmo tenupasaṅkami. Addasaṁsu kho tā bhikkhuniyo āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna āsanaṁ paññāpesuṁ, udakañca pādānaṁ upaṭṭhapesuṁ. Nisīdi kho āyasmā nandako paññatte āsane. Nisajja pāde pakkhālesi. Tāpi kho bhikkhuniyo āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶8] Nandaka said to them, “Sisters, this talk shall be in the form of questions. When you understand, say so. When you don’t understand, say so. If anyone has a doubt or uncertainty, ask me about it: ‘Why, sir, does it say this? What does that mean?’”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho tā bhikkhuniyo āyasmā nandako etadavoca: “paṭipucchakathā kho, bhaginiyo, bhavissati. Tattha ājānantīhi: ‘ājānāmā’ tissa vacanīyaṁ, na ājānantīhi: ‘na ājānāmā’ tissa vacanīyaṁ. Yassā vā panassa kaṅkhā vā vimati vā ahameva tattha paṭipucchitabbo: ‘idaṁ, bhante, kathaṁ; imassa kvattho’”ti?
[¶9] “We’re already delighted and satisfied with Master Nandaka, since he invites us like this.”
> Pali: “Ettakenapi mayaṁ, bhante, ayyassa nandakassa attamanā abhiraddhā yaṁ no ayyo nandako pavāretī”ti.
[¶10] “What do you think, sisters? Is the eye permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, cakkhu niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶11] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶12] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶13] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶14] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶15] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶16] “What do you think, sisters? Is the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, sotaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante …pe… ghānaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante” … “jivhā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante” … “kāyo nicco vā anicco vā”ti? “Anicco, bhante” … “mano nicco vā anicco vā”ti?
[¶17] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Anicco, bhante”.
[¶18] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶19] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶20] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶21] “No, sir. Why is that? Because we have already truly seen this with right wisdom: ‘So these six interior sense fields are impermanent.’”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Pubbeva no etaṁ, bhante, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ: ‘itipime cha ajjhattikā āyatanā aniccā’”ti.
[¶22] “Good, good, sisters! That’s how it is for a noble disciple who truly sees with right wisdom.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶23] What do you think, sisters? Are sights permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, rūpā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti?
[¶24] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccā, bhante”.
[¶25] “But if they’re impermanent, are they suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶26] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶27] “But if they’re impermanent, suffering, and perishable, are they fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶28] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶29] “What do you think, sisters? Are sounds … smells … tastes … touches … ideas permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, saddā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante …pe… gandhā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante” … “rasā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante” … “phoṭṭhabbā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante” … “dhammā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti?
[¶30] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccā, bhante”.
[¶31] “But if they’re impermanent, are they suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶32] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶33] “But if they’re impermanent, suffering, and perishable, are they fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶34] “No, sir. Why is that? Because we have already truly seen this with right wisdom: ‘So these six exterior sense fields are impermanent.’”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Pubbeva no etaṁ, bhante, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ: ‘itipime cha bāhirā āyatanā aniccā’”ti.
[¶35] “Good, good, sisters! That’s how it is for a noble disciple who truly sees with right wisdom.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶36] What do you think, sisters? Is eye consciousness … ear consciousness … nose consciousness … tongue consciousness … body consciousness … mind consciousness permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti? “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, sotaviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante …pe… ghānaviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante” … “jivhāviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante” … “kāyaviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante” … “manoviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶37] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶38] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vāti”?
[¶39] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶40] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶41] “No, sir. Why is that? Because we have already truly seen this with right wisdom: ‘So these six classes of consciousness are impermanent.’”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Pubbeva no etaṁ, bhante, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ: ‘itipime cha viññāṇakāyā aniccā’”ti.
[¶42] “Good, good, sisters! That’s how it is for a noble disciple who truly sees with right wisdom.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶43] Suppose there was an oil lamp burning. The oil, wick, flame, and light were all impermanent and perishable. Now, suppose someone was to say: ‘While this oil lamp is burning, the oil, the wick, and the flame are all impermanent and perishable. But the light is permanent, lasting, eternal, and imperishable.’ Would they be speaking rightly?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhaginiyo, telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, vaṭṭipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, accipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, ābhāpi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā. Yo nu kho, bhaginiyo, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amussa telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, vaṭṭipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, accipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā; yā ca khvāssa ābhā sā niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶44] “No, sir. Why is that? Because that oil lamp’s oil, wick, and flame are all impermanent and perishable, let alone the light.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amussa hi, bhante, telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, vaṭṭipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, accipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā; pagevassa ābhā aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā”ti.
[¶45] “In the same way, suppose someone was to say: ‘These six interior sense fields are impermanent. But the feeling—whether pleasant, painful, or neutral—that I experience due to these six interior sense fields is permanent, lasting, eternal, and imperishable.’ Would they be speaking rightly?”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhaginiyo, yo nu kho evaṁ vadeyya: ‘cha khome ajjhattikā āyatanā aniccā; yañca kho cha ajjhattike āyatane paṭicca paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā taṁ niccaṁ dhuvaṁ sassataṁ avipariṇāmadhamman’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶46] “No, sir. Why is that? Because each kind of feeling arises dependent on the corresponding condition. When the corresponding condition ceases, the appropriate feeling ceases.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Tajjaṁ tajjaṁ, bhante, paccayaṁ paṭicca tajjā tajjā vedanā uppajjanti. Tajjassa tajjassa paccayassa nirodhā tajjā tajjā vedanā nirujjhantī”ti.
[¶47] “Good, good, sisters! That’s how it is for a noble disciple who truly sees with right wisdom.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶48] Suppose there was a large tree standing with heartwood. The roots, trunk, branches and leaves, and shadow were all impermanent and perishable. Now, suppose someone was to say: ‘There’s a large tree standing with heartwood. The roots, trunk, and branches and leaves are all impermanent and perishable. But the shadow is permanent, lasting, eternal, and imperishable.’ Would they be speaking rightly?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhaginiyo, mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato mūlampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, khandhopi anicco vipariṇāmadhammo, sākhāpalāsampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, chāyāpi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā. Yo nu kho, bhaginiyo, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amussa mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato mūlampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, khandhopi anicco vipariṇāmadhammo, sākhāpalāsampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, yā ca khvāssa chāyā sā niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶49] “No, sir. Why is that? Because that large tree’s roots, trunk, and branches and leaves are all impermanent and perishable, let alone the shadow.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amussa hi, bhante, mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato mūlampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, khandhopi anicco vipariṇāmadhammo, sākhāpalāsampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ; pagevassa chāyā aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā”ti.
[¶50] “In the same way, suppose someone was to say: ‘These six exterior sense fields are impermanent. But the feeling—whether pleasant, painful, or neutral—that I experience due to these six exterior sense fields is permanent, lasting, eternal, and imperishable.’ Would they be speaking rightly?”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, bhaginiyo, yo nu kho evaṁ vadeyya: ‘cha khome bāhirā āyatanā aniccā. Yañca kho cha bāhire āyatane paṭicca paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā taṁ niccaṁ dhuvaṁ sassataṁ avipariṇāmadhamman’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶51] “No, sir. Why is that? Because each kind of feeling arises dependent on the corresponding condition. When the corresponding condition ceases, the appropriate feeling ceases.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Tajjaṁ tajjaṁ, bhante, paccayaṁ paṭicca tajjā tajjā vedanā uppajjanti. Tajjassa tajjassa paccayassa nirodhā tajjā tajjā vedanā nirujjhantī”ti.
[¶52] “Good, good, sisters! That’s how it is for a noble disciple who truly sees with right wisdom.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶53] Suppose a deft butcher or their apprentice, having killed a cow, were to carve it with a sharp meat cleaver, without damaging the flesh inside or the hide outside. They’d cut, carve, sever, and slice through each of the connecting tendons, sinews, and ligaments with a sharp meat cleaver, and then peel off the outer hide. Then they’d wrap that cow up in that very same hide and say: ‘This cow is joined to its hide just like before.’ Would they be speaking rightly?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhaginiyo, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā gāviṁ vadhitvā tiṇhena govikantanena gāviṁ saṅkanteyya anupahacca antaraṁ maṁsakāyaṁ anupahacca bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ. Yaṁ yadeva tattha antarā vilimaṁsaṁ antarā nhāru antarā bandhanaṁ taṁ tadeva tiṇhena govikantanena sañchindeyya saṅkanteyya sampakanteyya samparikanteyya. Sañchinditvā saṅkantitvā sampakantitvā samparikantitvā vidhunitvā bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ teneva cammena taṁ gāviṁ paṭicchādetvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathevāyaṁ gāvī saṁyuttā imināva cammenā’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶54] “No, sir. Why is that? Because even if they wrap that cow up in that very same hide and say: ‘This cow is joined to its hide just like before,’ still that cow is not joined to that hide.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amu hi, bhante, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā gāviṁ vadhitvā tiṇhena govikantanena gāviṁ saṅkanteyya anupahacca antaraṁ maṁsakāyaṁ anupahacca bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ. Yaṁ yadeva tattha antarā vilimaṁsaṁ antarā nhāru antarā bandhanaṁ taṁ tadeva tiṇhena govikantanena sañchindeyya saṅkanteyya sampakanteyya samparikanteyya. Sañchinditvā saṅkantitvā sampakantitvā samparikantitvā vidhunitvā bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ teneva cammena taṁ gāviṁ paṭicchādetvā kiñcāpi so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathevāyaṁ gāvī saṁyuttā imināva cammenā’ti; atha kho sā gāvī visaṁyuttā teneva cammenā”ti.
[¶55] “I’ve made up this simile to make a point. And this is the point. ‘The inner flesh’ is a term for the six interior sense fields. ‘The outer hide’ is a term for the six exterior sense fields. ‘The connecting tendons, sinews, and ligaments’ is a term for greed and relishing. ‘A sharp meat cleaver’ is a term for noble wisdom. And it is that noble wisdom which cuts, carves, severs, and slices the connecting corruption, fetter, and bond.
> Pali: “Upamā kho me ayaṁ, bhaginiyo, katā atthassa viññāpanāya. Ayamevettha attho; ‘antarā maṁsakāyo’ti kho, bhaginiyo, channetaṁ ajjhattikānaṁ āyatanānaṁ adhivacanaṁ; ‘bāhiro cammakāyo’ti kho, bhaginiyo, channetaṁ bāhirānaṁ āyatanānaṁ adhivacanaṁ; ‘antarā vilimaṁsaṁ, antarā nhāru, antarā bandhanan’ti kho, bhaginiyo, nandīrāgassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ; ‘tiṇhaṁ govikantanan’ti kho, bhaginiyo, ariyāyetaṁ paññāya adhivacanaṁ; yāyaṁ ariyā paññā antarā kilesaṁ antarā saṁyojanaṁ antarā bandhanaṁ sañchindati saṅkantati sampakantati samparikantati.
[¶56] Sisters, by developing and cultivating these seven awakening factors, a mendicant realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. What seven? It’s when a mendicant develops the awakening factors of mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity, which rely on seclusion, fading away, and cessation, and ripen as letting go. It is by developing and cultivating these seven awakening factors that a mendicant realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.”
> Pali: Satta kho panime, bhaginiyo, bojjhaṅgā, yesaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Katame satta? Idha, bhaginiyo, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …pe… vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ. Ime kho, bhaginiyo, satta bojjhaṅgā, yesaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharatī”ti.
[¶57] Then after giving this advice to the nuns, Nandaka sent them off, saying, “Go, sisters, it is time.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā nandako tā bhikkhuniyo iminā ovādena ovaditvā uyyojesi: “gacchatha, bhaginiyo; kālo”ti.
[¶58] And then those nuns approved and agreed with what Nandaka had said. They rose from their seats, bowed, and respectfully circled him, keeping him on their right. Then they went up to the Buddha, bowed, and stood to one side. The Buddha said to them, “Go, nuns, it is time.”
> Pali: Atha kho tā bhikkhuniyo āyasmato nandakassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho tā bhikkhuniyo bhagavā etadavoca: “gacchatha, bhikkhuniyo; kālo”ti.
[¶59] Then those nuns bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho tā bhikkhuniyo bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶60] Soon after those nuns had left, the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “Suppose, mendicants, it was the sabbath of the fourteenth day. You wouldn’t get lots of people wondering whether the moon is full or not, since it is obviously not full.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantīsu tāsu bhikkhunīsu bhikkhū āmantesi: “seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe cātuddase na hoti bahuno janassa kaṅkhā vā vimati vā: ‘ūno nu kho cando, puṇṇo nu kho cando’ti, atha kho ūno cando tveva hoti.
[¶61] In the same way, those nuns were uplifted by Nandaka’s Dhamma teaching, but they still haven’t got all they wished for.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, tā bhikkhuniyo nandakassa dhammadesanāya attamanā honti no ca kho paripuṇṇasaṅkappā”ti.
[¶62] Then the Buddha said to Nandaka, “Well then, Nandaka, tomorrow you should give those nuns the same advice again.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ āmantesi: “tena hi tvaṁ, nandaka, svepi tā bhikkhuniyo tenevovādena ovadeyyāsī”ti.
[¶63] “Yes, sir,” Nandaka replied. And the next day he went to those nuns, and all unfolded just like the previous day.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā nandako bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho āyasmā nandako tassā rattiyā accayena pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto attadutiyo yena rājakārāmo tenupasaṅkami. Addasaṁsu kho tā bhikkhuniyo āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvāna āsanaṁ paññāpesuṁ, udakañca pādānaṁ upaṭṭhapesuṁ. Nisīdi kho āyasmā nandako paññatte āsane. Nisajja pāde pakkhālesi. Tāpi kho bhikkhuniyo āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho tā bhikkhuniyo āyasmā nandako etadavoca: “paṭipucchakathā kho, bhaginiyo, bhavissati. Tattha ājānantīhi ‘ājānāmā’ tissa vacanīyaṁ, na ājānantīhi ‘na ājānāmā’ tissa vacanīyaṁ. Yassā vā panassa kaṅkhā vā vimati vā, ahameva tattha paṭipucchitabbo: ‘idaṁ, bhante, kathaṁ; imassa kvattho’”ti. “Ettakenapi mayaṁ, bhante, ayyassa nandakassa attamanā abhiraddhā yaṁ no ayyo nandako pavāretī”ti.
[¶64] > Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, cakkhu niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti? “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, sotaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante …pe… ghānaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante … jivhā … kāyo … mano nicco vā anicco vā”ti? “Anicco, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti? “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Pubbeva no etaṁ, bhante, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ: ‘itipime cha ajjhattikā āyatanā aniccā’”ti. “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶65] > Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, rūpā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti? “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, saddā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante …pe… gandhā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante … rasā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante … phoṭṭhabbā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante … dhammā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti? “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Pubbeva no etaṁ, bhante, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ: ‘itipime cha bāhirā āyatanā aniccā’”ti. “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶66] > Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññatha, bhaginiyo, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante …pe… sotaviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante … ghānaviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante … jivhāviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante … kāyaviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante … manoviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti? “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”. “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Pubbeva no etaṁ, bhante, yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṁ: ‘itipime cha viññāṇakāyā aniccā’”ti. “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶67] > Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhaginiyo, telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, vaṭṭipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, accipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, ābhāpi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā. Yo nu kho, bhaginiyo, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amussa telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, vaṭṭipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, accipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā; yā ca khvāssa ābhā sā niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amussa hi, bhante, telappadīpassa jhāyato telampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, vaṭṭipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā, accipi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā; pagevassa ābhā aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā”ti. “Evameva kho, bhaginiyo, yo nu kho evaṁ vadeyya: ‘cha khome ajjhattikā āyatanā aniccā. Yañca kho cha ajjhattike āyatane paṭicca paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā taṁ niccaṁ dhuvaṁ sassataṁ avipariṇāmadhamman’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Tajjaṁ tajjaṁ, bhante, paccayaṁ paṭicca tajjā tajjā vedanā uppajjanti. Tajjassa tajjassa paccayassa nirodhā tajjā tajjā vedanā nirujjhantī”ti. “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶68] > Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhaginiyo, mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato mūlampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, khandhopi anicco vipariṇāmadhammo, sākhāpalāsampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, chāyāpi aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā. Yo nu kho, bhaginiyo, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amussa mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato mūlampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, khandhopi anicco vipariṇāmadhammo, sākhāpalāsampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ; yā ca khvāssa chāyā sā niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’ti; sammā nu kho so bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amussa hi, bhante, mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato mūlampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, khandhopi anicco vipariṇāmadhammo, sākhāpalāsampi aniccaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ; pagevassa chāyā aniccā vipariṇāmadhammā”ti. “Evameva kho, bhaginiyo, yo nu kho evaṁ vadeyya: ‘cha khome bāhirā āyatanā aniccā. Yañca kho bāhire āyatane paṭicca paṭisaṁvedeti sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā taṁ niccaṁ dhuvaṁ sassataṁ avipariṇāmadhamman’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Tajjaṁ tajjaṁ, bhante, paccayaṁ paṭicca tajjā tajjā vedanā uppajjanti. Tajjassa tajjassa paccayassa nirodhā tajjā tajjā vedanā nirujjhantī”ti. “Sādhu sādhu, bhaginiyo. Evañhetaṁ, bhaginiyo, hoti ariyasāvakassa yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya passato.
[¶69] > Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhaginiyo, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā gāviṁ vadhitvā tiṇhena govikantanena gāviṁ saṅkanteyya anupahacca antaraṁ maṁsakāyaṁ anupahacca bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ. Yaṁ yadeva tattha antarā vilimaṁsaṁ antarā nhāru antarā bandhanaṁ taṁ tadeva tiṇhena govikantanena sañchindeyya saṅkanteyya sampakanteyya samparikanteyya. Sañchinditvā saṅkantitvā sampakantitvā samparikantitvā vidhunitvā bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ teneva cammena taṁ gāviṁ paṭicchādetvā evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathevāyaṁ gāvī saṁyuttā imināva cammenā’ti; sammā nu kho so, bhaginiyo, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amu hi, bhante, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā gāviṁ vadhitvā tiṇhena govikantanena gāviṁ saṅkanteyya anupahacca antaraṁ maṁsakāyaṁ anupahacca bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ. Yaṁ yadeva tattha antarā vilimaṁsaṁ antarā nhāru antarā bandhanaṁ taṁ tadeva tiṇhena govikantanena sañchindeyya saṅkanteyya sampakanteyya samparikanteyya. Sañchinditvā saṅkantitvā sampakantitvā samparikantitvā vidhunitvā bāhiraṁ cammakāyaṁ teneva cammena taṁ gāviṁ paṭicchādetvā kiñcāpi so evaṁ vadeyya: ‘tathevāyaṁ gāvī saṁyuttā imināva cammenā’ti; atha kho sā gāvī visaṁyuttā teneva cammenā”ti.
[¶70] > Pali: “Upamā kho me ayaṁ, bhaginiyo, katā atthassa viññāpanāya ayamevettha attho. ‘Antarā maṁsakāyo’ti kho, bhaginiyo, channetaṁ ajjhattikānaṁ āyatanānaṁ adhivacanaṁ; ‘bāhiro cammakāyo’ti kho, bhaginiyo, channetaṁ bāhirānaṁ āyatanānaṁ adhivacanaṁ; ‘antarā vilimaṁsaṁ antarā nhāru antarā bandhanan’ti kho, bhaginiyo, nandīrāgassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ; ‘tiṇhaṁ govikantanan’ti kho, bhaginiyo, ariyāyetaṁ paññāya adhivacanaṁ; yāyaṁ ariyā paññā antarā kilesaṁ antarā saṁyojanaṁ antarā bandhanaṁ sañchindati saṅkantati sampakantati samparikantati.
[¶71] > Pali: Satta kho panime, bhaginiyo, bojjhaṅgā, yesaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Katame satta? Idha, bhaginiyo, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …pe… vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ. Ime kho, bhaginiyo, satta bojjhaṅgā yesaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharatī”ti.
[¶72] > Pali: Atha kho āyasmā nandako tā bhikkhuniyo iminā ovādena ovaditvā uyyojesi: “gacchatha, bhaginiyo; kālo”ti. Atha kho tā bhikkhuniyo āyasmato nandakassa bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā āyasmantaṁ nandakaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho tā bhikkhuniyo bhagavā etadavoca: “gacchatha, bhikkhuniyo; kālo”ti. Atha kho tā bhikkhuniyo bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶73] Soon after those nuns had left, the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “Suppose, mendicants, it was the sabbath of the fifteenth day. You wouldn’t get lots of people wondering whether the moon is full or not, since it is obviously full. In the same way, those nuns were uplifted by Nandaka’s Dhamma teaching, and they got all they wished for. Even the last of these five hundred nuns is a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantīsu tāsu bhikkhunīsu bhikkhū āmantesi: “seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe pannarase na hoti bahuno janassa kaṅkhā vā vimati vā: ‘ūno nu kho cando, puṇṇo nu kho cando’ti, atha kho puṇṇo cando tveva hoti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, tā bhikkhuniyo nandakassa dhammadesanāya attamanā ceva paripuṇṇasaṅkappā ca. Tāsaṁ, bhikkhave, pañcannaṁ bhikkhunisatānaṁ yā pacchimikā bhikkhunī sā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyanā”ti.
[¶74] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶75] > Pali: Nandakovādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 160. MN 147 · The Shorter Advice to Rāhula
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/160/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/160/#p-N
[¶0] MN 147 · The Shorter Advice to Rāhula
> Pali: MN 147 · Cūḷarāhulovādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶2] Then as he was in private retreat this thought came to his mind, “The qualities that ripen in freedom have ripened in Rāhula. Why don’t I lead him further to the ending of defilements?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: “paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā. Yannūnāhaṁ rāhulaṁ uttariṁ āsavānaṁ khaye vineyyan”ti.
[¶3] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.
[¶4] Then, after the meal, on his return from almsround, he addressed Venerable Rāhula, “Rāhula, get your sitting cloth. Let’s go to the Dark Forest for the day’s meditation.”
> Pali: Sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ āmantesi: “gaṇhāhi, rāhula, nisīdanaṁ; yena andhavanaṁ tenupasaṅkamissāma divāvihārāyā”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, sir,” replied Rāhula. Taking his sitting cloth he followed behind the Buddha.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā rāhulo bhagavato paṭissutvā nisīdanaṁ ādāya bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi.
[¶6] Now at that time many thousands of deities followed the Buddha, thinking, “Today the Buddha will lead Rāhula further to the ending of defilements!”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena anekāni devatāsahassāni bhagavantaṁ anubandhāni honti: “ajja bhagavā āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ uttariṁ āsavānaṁ khaye vinessatī”ti.
[¶7] Then the Buddha plunged deep into the Dark Forest and sat at the root of a tree on the seat spread out. Rāhula bowed to the Buddha and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā andhavanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle paññatte āsane nisīdi. Āyasmāpi kho rāhulo bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ rāhulaṁ bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶8] “What do you think, Rāhula? Is the eye permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rāhula, cakkhu niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶9] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶10] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶11] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶12] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶13] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶14] “What do you think, Rāhula? Are sights permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rāhula, rūpā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti?
[¶15] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccā, bhante”.
[¶16] “But if they’re impermanent, are they suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶17] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶18] “But if they’re impermanent, suffering, and perishable, are they fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶19] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶20] “What do you think, Rāhula? Is eye consciousness permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rāhula, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶21] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶22] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶23] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶24] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶25] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶26] “What do you think, Rāhula? Is eye contact permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rāhula, cakkhusamphasso nicco vā anicco vā”ti?
[¶27] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Anicco, bhante”.
[¶28] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶29] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶30] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶31] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶32] “What do you think, Rāhula? Anything included in feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness that arises dependent on eye contact: is that permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rāhula, yamidaṁ cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ tampi niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶33] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶34] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶35] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶36] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶37] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶38] “What do you think, Rāhula? Is the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi rāhula, sotaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante …pe… ghānaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti? “Aniccaṁ, bhante …pe… jivhā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti? “Aniccā, bhante … kāyo nicco vā anicco vā”ti? “Anicco, bhante … mano nicco vā anicco vā”ti?
[¶39] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Anicco, bhante”.
[¶40] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶41] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶42] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶43] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶44] “What do you think, Rāhula? Are ideas permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi rāhula, dhammā niccā vā aniccā vā”ti?
[¶45] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccā, bhante”.
[¶46] “But if they’re impermanent, are they suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶47] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶48] “But if they’re impermanent, suffering, and perishable, are they fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶49] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶50] “What do you think, Rāhula? Is mind consciousness permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi rāhula, manoviññāṇaṁ niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶51] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶52] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶53] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶54] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶55] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶56] “What do you think, Rāhula? Is mind contact permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi rāhula, manosamphasso nicco vā anicco vā”ti?
[¶57] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Anicco, bhante”.
[¶58] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶59] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶60] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ, kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶61] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶62] “What do you think, Rāhula? Anything included in feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness that arises dependent on mind contact: is that permanent or impermanent?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rāhula, yamidaṁ manosamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ, tampi niccaṁ vā aniccaṁ vā”ti?
[¶63] “Impermanent, sir.”
> Pali: “Aniccaṁ, bhante”.
[¶64] “But if it’s impermanent, is it suffering or happiness?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vā taṁ sukhaṁ vā”ti?
[¶65] “Suffering, sir.”
> Pali: “Dukkhaṁ, bhante”.
[¶66] “But if it’s impermanent, suffering, and perishable, is it fit to be regarded thus: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self’?”
> Pali: “Yaṁ panāniccaṁ dukkhaṁ vipariṇāmadhammaṁ kallaṁ nu taṁ samanupassituṁ: ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’”ti?
[¶67] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶68] “Seeing this, a learned noble disciple grows disillusioned with the eye, sights, eye consciousness, and eye contact. And they grow disillusioned with anything included in feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness that arises dependent on eye contact. They grow disillusioned with the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, ideas, mind consciousness, and mind contact. And they grow disillusioned with anything included in feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness that arises dependent on mind contact. Being disillusioned, desire fades away. When desire fades away they’re freed. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: “Evaṁ passaṁ, rāhula, sutavā ariyasāvako cakkhusmiṁ nibbindati, rūpesu nibbindati, cakkhuviññāṇe nibbindati, cakkhusamphasse nibbindati, yamidaṁ cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ tasmimpi nibbindati. Sotasmiṁ nibbindati, saddesu nibbindati …pe… ghānasmiṁ nibbindati, gandhesu nibbindati … jivhāya nibbindati, rasesu nibbindati … kāyasmiṁ nibbindati, phoṭṭhabbesu nibbindati … manasmiṁ nibbindati, dhammesu nibbindati, manoviññāṇe nibbindati, manosamphasse nibbindati, yamidaṁ manosamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedanāgataṁ saññāgataṁ saṅkhāragataṁ viññāṇagataṁ tasmimpi nibbindati. Nibbindaṁ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶69] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī”ti.
[¶70] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Rāhula approved what the Buddha said. And while this discourse was being spoken, Rāhula’s mind was freed from defilements by not grasping.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā rāhulo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti. Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasmiṁ bhaññamāne āyasmato rāhulassa anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimucci.
[¶71] And the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in those thousands of deities: “Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.”
> Pali: Tāsañca anekānaṁ devatāsahassānaṁ virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.
[¶72] > Pali: Cūḷarāhulovādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 161. MN 148 · Six By Six
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/161/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/161/#p-N
[¶0] MN 148 · Six By Six
> Pali: MN 148 · Chachakkasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I shall teach you the Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And I shall reveal a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure, namely, the six sets of six. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “dhammaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāsessāmi, yadidaṁ— cha chakkāni. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “The six interior sense fields should be understood. The six exterior sense fields should be understood. The six classes of consciousness should be understood. The six classes of contact should be understood. The six classes of feeling should be understood. The six classes of craving should be understood.
> Pali: “Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbāni, cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbāni, cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā, cha phassakāyā veditabbā, cha vedanākāyā veditabbā, cha taṇhākāyā veditabbā.
[¶6] ‘The six interior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are the sense fields of the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. ‘The six interior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it. This is the first set of six.
> Pali: ‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cakkhāyatanaṁ, sotāyatanaṁ, ghānāyatanaṁ, jivhāyatanaṁ, kāyāyatanaṁ, manāyatanaṁ. ‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ chakkaṁ.
[¶7] ‘The six exterior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? There are the sense fields of sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. ‘The six exterior sense fields should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it. This is the second set of six.
> Pali: ‘Cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Rūpāyatanaṁ, saddāyatanaṁ, gandhāyatanaṁ, rasāyatanaṁ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṁ, dhammāyatanaṁ. ‘Cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Idaṁ dutiyaṁ chakkaṁ.
[¶8] ‘The six classes of consciousness should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Eye consciousness arises dependent on the eye and sights. Ear consciousness arises dependent on the ear and sounds. Nose consciousness arises dependent on the nose and smells. Tongue consciousness arises dependent on the tongue and tastes. Body consciousness arises dependent on the body and touches. Mind consciousness arises dependent on the mind and ideas. ‘The six classes of consciousness should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it. This is the third set of six.
> Pali: ‘Cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, sotañca paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati sotaviññāṇaṁ, ghānañca paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati ghānaviññāṇaṁ, jivhañca paṭicca rase ca uppajjati jivhāviññāṇaṁ, kāyañca paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati kāyaviññāṇaṁ, manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇaṁ. ‘Cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Idaṁ tatiyaṁ chakkaṁ.
[¶9] ‘The six classes of contact should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Eye consciousness arises dependent on the eye and sights. The meeting of the three is contact. Ear consciousness arises dependent on the ear and sounds. The meeting of the three is contact. Nose consciousness arises dependent on the nose and smells. The meeting of the three is contact. Tongue consciousness arises dependent on the tongue and tastes. The meeting of the three is contact. Body consciousness arises dependent on the body and touches. The meeting of the three is contact. Mind consciousness arises dependent on the mind and ideas. The meeting of the three is contact. ‘The six classes of contact should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it. This is the fourth set of six.
> Pali: ‘Cha phassakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso; sotañca paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati sotaviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso; ghānañca paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati ghānaviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso; jivhañca paṭicca rase ca uppajjati jivhāviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso; kāyañca paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati kāyaviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso; manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso. ‘Cha phassakāyā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Idaṁ catutthaṁ chakkaṁ.
[¶10] ‘The six classes of feeling should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Eye consciousness arises dependent on the eye and sights. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Ear consciousness arises dependent on the ear and sounds. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Nose consciousness arises dependent on the nose and smells. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Tongue consciousness arises dependent on the tongue and tastes. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Body consciousness arises dependent on the body and touches. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Mind consciousness arises dependent on the mind and ideas. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. ‘The six classes of feeling should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it. This is the fifth set of six.
> Pali: ‘Cha vedanākāyā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā; sotañca paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati sotaviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā; ghānañca paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati ghānaviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā; jivhañca paṭicca rase ca uppajjati jivhāviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā; kāyañca paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati kāyaviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā; manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā. ‘Cha vedanākāyā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Idaṁ pañcamaṁ chakkaṁ.
[¶11] ‘The six classes of craving should be understood.’ That’s what I said, but why did I say it? Eye consciousness arises dependent on the eye and sights. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Feeling is a requirement for craving. Ear consciousness … Nose consciousness … Tongue consciousness … Body consciousness … Mind consciousness arises dependent on the mind and ideas. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Feeling is a requirement for craving. ‘The six classes of craving should be understood.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it. This is the sixth set of six.
> Pali: ‘Cha taṇhākāyā veditabbā’ti— iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ. Kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā; sotañca paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati sotaviññāṇaṁ …pe… ghānañca paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati ghānaviññāṇaṁ … jivhañca paṭicca rase ca uppajjati jivhāviññāṇaṁ … kāyañca paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati kāyaviññāṇaṁ … manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā. ‘Cha taṇhākāyā veditabbā’ti— iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ. Idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ chakkaṁ.
[¶12] If anyone says, ‘the eye is self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of the eye is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that the eye is self. So the eye is not self.
> Pali: ‘Cakkhu attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Cakkhussa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘cakkhu attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti cakkhu anattā.
[¶13] If anyone says, ‘sights are self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of sights is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that sights are self. So the eye is not self and sights are not self.
> Pali: ‘Rūpā attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Rūpānaṁ uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘rūpā attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti cakkhu anattā, rūpā anattā.
[¶14] If anyone says, ‘eye consciousness is self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of eye consciousness is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that eye consciousness is self. So the eye, sights, and eye consciousness are not self.
> Pali: ‘Cakkhuviññāṇaṁ attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Cakkhuviññāṇassa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘cakkhuviññāṇaṁ attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti cakkhu anattā, rūpā anattā, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ anattā.
[¶15] If anyone says, ‘eye contact is self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of eye contact is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that eye contact is self. So the eye, sights, eye consciousness, and eye contact are not self.
> Pali: ‘Cakkhusamphasso attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Cakkhusamphassassa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘cakkhusamphasso attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti cakkhu anattā, rūpā anattā, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ anattā, cakkhusamphasso anattā.
[¶16] If anyone says, ‘feeling is self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of feeling is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that feeling is self. So the eye, sights, eye consciousness, eye contact, and feeling are not self.
> Pali: ‘Vedanā attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Vedanāya uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘vedanā attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti cakkhu anattā, rūpā anattā, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ anattā, cakkhusamphasso anattā, vedanā anattā.
[¶17] If anyone says, ‘craving is self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of craving is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that craving is self. So the eye, sights, eye consciousness, eye contact, feeling, and craving are not self.
> Pali: ‘Taṇhā attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Taṇhāya uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘taṇhā attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti cakkhu anattā, rūpā anattā, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ anattā, cakkhusamphasso anattā, vedanā anattā, taṇhā anattā.
[¶18] If anyone says, ‘the ear is self’ … ‘the nose is self’ … ‘the tongue is self’ … ‘the body is self’ … ‘the mind is self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of the mind is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that the mind is self. So the mind is not self.
> Pali: ‘Sotaṁ attā’ti yo vadeyya …pe… ‘ghānaṁ attā’ti yo vadeyya …pe… ‘jivhā attā’ti yo vadeyya …pe… ‘kāyo attā’ti yo vadeyya …pe… ‘mano attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Manassa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘mano attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti mano anattā.
[¶19] If anyone says, ‘ideas are self’ … ‘mind consciousness is self’ … ‘mind contact is self’ … ‘feeling is self’ … ‘craving is self,’ that is not tenable. The arising and vanishing of craving is evident, so it would follow that one’s self arises and vanishes. That’s why it’s not tenable to claim that craving is self. So the mind, ideas, mind consciousness, mind contact, feeling, and craving are not self.
> Pali: ‘Dhammā attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Dhammānaṁ uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘dhammā attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti mano anattā, dhammā anattā. ‘Manoviññāṇaṁ attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Manoviññāṇassa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘manoviññāṇaṁ attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti mano anattā, dhammā anattā, manoviññāṇaṁ anattā. ‘Manosamphasso attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Manosamphassassa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘manosamphasso attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti mano anattā, dhammā anattā, manoviññāṇaṁ anattā, manosamphasso anattā. ‘Vedanā attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Vedanāya uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘vedanā attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti mano anattā, dhammā anattā, manoviññāṇaṁ anattā, manosamphasso anattā, vedanā anattā. ‘Taṇhā attā’ti yo vadeyya taṁ na upapajjati. Taṇhāya uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ca veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṁ hoti. Tasmā taṁ na upapajjati: ‘taṇhā attā’ti yo vadeyya. Iti mano anattā, dhammā anattā, manoviññāṇaṁ anattā, manosamphasso anattā, vedanā anattā, taṇhā anattā.
[¶20] Now, mendicants, this is the practice that leads to the origin of substantial reality. You regard the eye like this: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self.’
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, sakkāyasamudayagāminī paṭipadā— cakkhuṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati;
[¶21] You regard sights … eye consciousness … eye contact … feeling … craving like this: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self.’ You regard the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind … ideas … mind consciousness … mind contact … feeling … craving like this: ‘This is mine, I am this, this is my self.’
> Pali: rūpe ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; cakkhuviññāṇaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; cakkhusamphassaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; vedanaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; taṇhaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati; sotaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati …pe… ghānaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati …pe… jivhaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati …pe… kāyaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati …pe… manaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati, dhamme ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati, manoviññāṇaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati, manosamphassaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati, vedanaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati, taṇhaṁ ‘etaṁ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati.
[¶22] But this is the practice that leads to the cessation of substantial reality. You regard the eye like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, sakkāyanirodhagāminī paṭipadā— cakkhuṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati.
[¶23] You regard sights … eye consciousness … eye contact … feeling … craving like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ You regard the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’ You regard ideas … mind consciousness … mind contact … feeling … craving like this: ‘This is not mine, I am not this, this is not my self.’
> Pali: Rūpe ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Cakkhuviññāṇaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Cakkhusamphassaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Vedanaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Taṇhaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Sotaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati …pe… ghānaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati …pe… jivhaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati …pe… kāyaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati …pe… manaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Dhamme ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Manoviññāṇaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Manosamphassaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Vedanaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Taṇhaṁ ‘netaṁ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati.
[¶24] Eye consciousness arises dependent on the eye and sights. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for the arising of what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral. When you experience a pleasant feeling, if you approve, welcome, and keep clinging to it, the underlying tendency to greed underlies that. When you experience a painful feeling, if you sorrow and wail and lament, beating your breast and falling into confusion, the underlying tendency to aversion underlies that. When you experience a neutral feeling, if you don’t truly understand that feeling’s origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape, the underlying tendency to ignorance underlies that. Mendicants, without giving up the underlying tendency to greed for pleasant feeling, without dispelling the underlying tendency to aversion toward painful feeling, without eradicating ignorance in the case of neutral feeling, without giving up ignorance and without giving rise to knowledge, it is quite impossible to make an end of suffering in this very life.
> Pali: Cakkhuñca, bhikkhave, paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā. So sukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa rāgānusayo anuseti. Dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati. Tassa paṭighānusayo anuseti. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno tassā vedanāya samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa avijjānusayo anuseti. So vata, bhikkhave, sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayaṁ appahāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayaṁ appaṭivinodetvā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayaṁ asamūhanitvā avijjaṁ appahāya vijjaṁ anuppādetvā diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro bhavissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶25] Ear consciousness … Nose consciousness … Tongue consciousness … Body consciousness … Mind consciousness arises dependent on the mind and ideas. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for the arising of what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral. When you experience a pleasant feeling, if you approve, welcome, and keep clinging to it, the underlying tendency to greed underlies that. When you experience a painful feeling, if you sorrow and wail and lament, beating your breast and falling into confusion, the underlying tendency to aversion underlies that. When you experience a neutral feeling, if you don’t truly understand that feeling’s origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape, the underlying tendency to ignorance underlies that. Mendicants, without giving up the underlying tendency to greed for pleasant feeling, without dispelling the underlying tendency to aversion toward painful feeling, without eradicating ignorance in the case of neutral feeling, without giving up ignorance and without giving rise to knowledge, it is quite impossible to make an end of suffering in this very life.
> Pali: Sotañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati sotaviññāṇaṁ …pe… ghānañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati ghānaviññāṇaṁ …pe… jivhañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca rase ca uppajjati jivhāviññāṇaṁ …pe… kāyañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati kāyaviññāṇaṁ …pe… manañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā. So sukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa rāgānusayo anuseti. Dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno socati kilamati paridevati urattāḷiṁ kandati sammohaṁ āpajjati. Tassa paṭighānusayo anuseti. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno tassā vedanāya samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa avijjānusayo anuseti. So vata, bhikkhave, sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayaṁ appahāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayaṁ appaṭivinodetvā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayaṁ asamūhanitvā avijjaṁ appahāya vijjaṁ anuppādetvā diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro bhavissatīti—netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶26] Eye consciousness arises dependent on the eye and sights. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for the arising of what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral. When you experience a pleasant feeling, if you don’t approve, welcome, and keep clinging to it, the underlying tendency to greed does not underlie that. When you experience a painful feeling, if you don’t sorrow or wail or lament, beating your breast and falling into confusion, the underlying tendency to aversion does not underlie that. When you experience a neutral feeling, if you truly understand that feeling’s origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape, the underlying tendency to ignorance does not underlie that. Mendicants, after giving up the underlying tendency to greed for pleasant feeling, after dispelling the underlying tendency to aversion toward painful feeling, after eradicating ignorance in the case of neutral feeling, after giving up ignorance and giving rise to knowledge, it’s quite possible to make an end of suffering in this very life.
> Pali: Cakkhuñca, bhikkhave, paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā. So sukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno nābhinandati nābhivadati nājjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa rāgānusayo nānuseti. Dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno na socati na kilamati na paridevati na urattāḷiṁ kandati na sammohaṁ āpajjati. Tassa paṭighānusayo nānuseti. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno tassā vedanāya samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa avijjānusayo nānuseti. So vata, bhikkhave, sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayaṁ pahāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayaṁ samūhanitvā avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro bhavissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶27] Ear consciousness …
> Pali: Sotañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca sadde ca uppajjati sotaviññāṇaṁ …pe….
[¶28] Nose consciousness …
> Pali: Ghānañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca gandhe ca uppajjati ghānaviññāṇaṁ …pe….
[¶29] Tongue consciousness …
> Pali: Jivhañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca rase ca uppajjati jivhāviññāṇaṁ …pe….
[¶30] Body consciousness …
> Pali: Kāyañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca phoṭṭhabbe ca uppajjati kāyaviññāṇaṁ …pe….
[¶31] Mind consciousness arises dependent on the mind and ideas. The meeting of the three is contact. Contact is a requirement for what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral. When you experience a pleasant feeling, if you don’t approve, welcome, and keep clinging to it, the underlying tendency to greed does not underlie that. When you experience a painful feeling, if you don’t sorrow or wail or lament, beating your breast and falling into confusion, the underlying tendency to aversion does not underlie that. When you experience a neutral feeling, if you truly understand that feeling’s origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape, the underlying tendency to ignorance does not underlie that. Mendicants, after giving up the underlying tendency to greed for pleasant feeling, after dispelling the underlying tendency to aversion toward painful feeling, after eradicating ignorance in the case of neutral feeling, after giving up ignorance and giving rise to knowledge, it’s quite possible to make an end of suffering in this very life.
> Pali: “Manañca, bhikkhave, paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇaṁ tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā. So sukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno nābhinandati nābhivadati nājjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Tassa rāgānusayo nānuseti. Dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno na socati na kilamati na paridevati na urattāḷiṁ kandati na sammohaṁ āpajjati. Tassa paṭighānusayo nānuseti. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho samāno tassā vedanāya samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa avijjānusayo nānuseti. So vata, bhikkhave, sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayaṁ pahāya dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayaṁ paṭivinodetvā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayaṁ samūhanitvā avijjaṁ pahāya vijjaṁ uppādetvā diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro bhavissatīti—ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶32] Seeing this, a learned noble disciple grows disillusioned with the eye, sights, eye consciousness, eye contact, feeling, and craving.
> Pali: Evaṁ passaṁ, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvako cakkhusmiṁ nibbindati, rūpesu nibbindati, cakkhuviññāṇe nibbindati, cakkhusamphasse nibbindati, vedanāya nibbindati, taṇhāya nibbindati.
[¶33] They grow disillusioned with the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, ideas, mind consciousness, mind contact, feeling, and craving. Being disillusioned, desire fades away. When desire fades away they’re freed. When it is freed, they know it is freed.
> Pali: Sotasmiṁ nibbindati, saddesu nibbindati …pe… ghānasmiṁ nibbindati, gandhesu nibbindati … jivhāya nibbindati, rasesu nibbindati … kāyasmiṁ nibbindati, phoṭṭhabbesu nibbindati … manasmiṁ nibbindati, dhammesu nibbindati, manoviññāṇe nibbindati, manosamphasse nibbindati, vedanāya nibbindati, taṇhāya nibbindati. Nibbindaṁ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati. Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶34] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’”
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī”ti.
[¶35] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said. And while this discourse was being spoken, the minds of sixty mendicants were freed from defilements by not grasping.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti. Imasmiṁ kho pana veyyākaraṇasmiṁ bhaññamāne saṭṭhimattānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṁsūti.
[¶36] > Pali: Chachakkasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 162. MN 149 · The Great Discourse on What Relates to the Six Sense Fields
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/162/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/162/#p-N
[¶0] MN 149 · The Great Discourse on What Relates to the Six Sense Fields
> Pali: MN 149 · Mahāsaḷāyatanikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhadante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, I shall teach you the great discourse on what relates to the six sense fields. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “mahāsaḷāyatanikaṁ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Mendicants, when you don’t truly know and see the eye, sights, eye consciousness, eye contact, and what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral that arises dependent on eye contact, you’re aroused by these things.
> Pali: “Cakkhuṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, rūpe ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, cakkhusamphassaṁ ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, yamidaṁ cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tampi ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, cakkhusmiṁ sārajjati, rūpesu sārajjati, cakkhuviññāṇe sārajjati, cakkhusamphasse sārajjati, yamidaṁ cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tasmimpi sārajjati.
[¶6] Someone who lives aroused like this—fettered, confused, concentrating on gratification—accumulates the five grasping aggregates for themselves in the future. And their craving—which leads to future lives, mixed up with relishing and greed, taking pleasure there wherever it alights—grows. Their physical and mental stress, torment, and fever grow. And they experience physical and mental suffering.
> Pali: Tassa sārattassa saṁyuttassa sammūḷhassa assādānupassino viharato āyatiṁ pañcupādānakkhandhā upacayaṁ gacchanti. Taṇhā cassa ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, sā cassa pavaḍḍhati. Tassa kāyikāpi darathā pavaḍḍhanti, cetasikāpi darathā pavaḍḍhanti; kāyikāpi santāpā pavaḍḍhanti, cetasikāpi santāpā pavaḍḍhanti; kāyikāpi pariḷāhā pavaḍḍhanti, cetasikāpi pariḷāhā pavaḍḍhanti. So kāyadukkhampi cetodukkhampi paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶7] When you don’t truly know and see the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, ideas, mind consciousness, mind contact, and what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral that arises dependent on mind contact, you’re aroused by these things.
> Pali: Sotaṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… ghānaṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… jivhaṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… kāyaṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… manaṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, dhamme, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, manoviññāṇaṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, manosamphassaṁ, bhikkhave, ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, yamidaṁ manosamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tampi ajānaṁ apassaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, manasmiṁ sārajjati, dhammesu sārajjati, manoviññāṇe sārajjati, manosamphasse sārajjati, yamidaṁ manosamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tasmimpi sārajjati.
[¶8] Someone who lives aroused like this—fettered, confused, concentrating on gratification—accumulates the five grasping aggregates for themselves in the future. And their craving—which leads to future lives, mixed up with relishing and greed, taking pleasure there wherever it alights—grows. Their physical and mental stress, torment, and fever grow. And they experience physical and mental suffering.
> Pali: Tassa sārattassa saṁyuttassa sammūḷhassa assādānupassino viharato āyatiṁ pañcupādānakkhandhā upacayaṁ gacchanti. Taṇhā cassa ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, sā cassa pavaḍḍhati. Tassa kāyikāpi darathā pavaḍḍhanti, cetasikāpi darathā pavaḍḍhanti; kāyikāpi santāpā pavaḍḍhanti, cetasikāpi santāpā pavaḍḍhanti; kāyikāpi pariḷāhā pavaḍḍhanti, cetasikāpi pariḷāhā pavaḍḍhanti. So kāyadukkhampi cetodukkhampi paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶9] When you do truly know and see the eye, sights, eye consciousness, eye contact, and what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral that arises dependent on eye contact, you’re not aroused by these things.
> Pali: Cakkhuñca kho, bhikkhave, jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, rūpe jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, cakkhuviññāṇaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, cakkhusamphassaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, yamidaṁ cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tampi jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, cakkhusmiṁ na sārajjati, rūpesu na sārajjati, cakkhuviññāṇe na sārajjati, cakkhusamphasse na sārajjati, yamidaṁ cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tasmimpi na sārajjati.
[¶10] Someone who lives unaroused like this—unfettered, unconfused, concentrating on drawbacks—disperses the five grasping aggregates for themselves in the future. And their craving—which leads to future lives, mixed up with relishing and greed, taking pleasure there wherever it alights—is given up. Their physical and mental stress, torment, and fever are given up. And they experience physical and mental pleasure.
> Pali: Tassa asārattassa asaṁyuttassa asammūḷhassa ādīnavānupassino viharato āyatiṁ pañcupādānakkhandhā apacayaṁ gacchanti. Taṇhā cassa ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, sā cassa pahīyati. Tassa kāyikāpi darathā pahīyanti, cetasikāpi darathā pahīyanti; kāyikāpi santāpā pahīyanti, cetasikāpi santāpā pahīyanti; kāyikāpi pariḷāhā pahīyanti, cetasikāpi pariḷāhā pahīyanti. So kāyasukhampi cetosukhampi paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶11] The view of such a person is right view. Their intention is right intention, their effort is right effort, their mindfulness is right mindfulness, and their immersion is right immersion. And their actions of body and speech, and their livelihood, have already been fully purified before. So this noble eightfold path is fully developed.
> Pali: Yā tathābhūtassa diṭṭhi sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi; yo tathābhūtassa saṅkappo svāssa hoti sammāsaṅkappo; yo tathābhūtassa vāyāmo svāssa hoti sammāvāyāmo; yā tathābhūtassa sati sāssa hoti sammāsati; yo tathābhūtassa samādhi svāssa hoti sammāsamādhi. Pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṁ vacīkammaṁ ājīvo suparisuddho hoti. Evamassāyaṁ ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶12] When the noble eightfold path is developed, the following are fully developed: the four kinds of mindfulness meditation, the four right efforts, the four bases of psychic power, the five faculties, the five powers, and the seven awakening factors.
> Pali: Tassa evaṁ imaṁ ariyaṁ aṭṭhaṅgikaṁ maggaṁ bhāvayato cattāropi satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, cattāropi sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, cattāropi iddhipādā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, pañcapi indriyāni bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, pañcapi balāni bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, sattapi bojjhaṅgā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti.
[¶13] And these two qualities proceed in conjunction: serenity and discernment. They completely understand by direct knowledge those things that should be completely understood by direct knowledge. They give up by direct knowledge those things that should be given up by direct knowledge. They develop by direct knowledge those things that should be developed by direct knowledge. They realize by direct knowledge those things that should be realized by direct knowledge.
> Pali: Tassime dve dhammā yuganandhā vattanti— samatho ca vipassanā ca. So ye dhammā abhiññā pariññeyyā te dhamme abhiññā parijānāti. Ye dhammā abhiññā pahātabbā te dhamme abhiññā pajahati. Ye dhammā abhiññā bhāvetabbā te dhamme abhiññā bhāveti. Ye dhammā abhiññā sacchikātabbā te dhamme abhiññā sacchikaroti.
[¶14] And what are the things that should be completely understood by direct knowledge? You should say: ‘The five grasping aggregates.’ That is: form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. These are the things that should be completely understood by direct knowledge.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā pariññeyyā? ‘Pañcupādānakkhandhā’ tissa vacanīyaṁ, seyyathidaṁ—rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Ime dhammā abhiññā pariññeyyā.
[¶15] And what are the things that should be given up by direct knowledge? Ignorance and craving for continued existence. These are the things that should be given up by direct knowledge.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā pahātabbā? Avijjā ca bhavataṇhā ca— ime dhammā abhiññā pahātabbā.
[¶16] And what are the things that should be developed by direct knowledge? Serenity and discernment. These are the things that should be developed by direct knowledge.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā bhāvetabbā? Samatho ca vipassanā ca— ime dhammā abhiññā bhāvetabbā.
[¶17] And what are the things that should be realized by direct knowledge? Knowledge and freedom. These are the things that should be realized by direct knowledge.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā sacchikātabbā? Vijjā ca vimutti ca— ime dhammā abhiññā sacchikātabbā.
[¶18] When you truly know and see the ear … nose … tongue … body … mind, ideas, mind consciousness, mind contact, and what is felt as pleasant, painful, or neutral that arises dependent on mind contact, you are not aroused by these things. …
> Pali: Sotaṁ, bhikkhave, jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… ghānaṁ bhikkhave, jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… jivhaṁ, bhikkhave, jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… kāyaṁ, bhikkhave, jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ …pe… manaṁ, bhikkhave, jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, dhamme jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, manoviññāṇaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, manosamphassaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, yamidaṁ manosamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tampi jānaṁ passaṁ yathābhūtaṁ, manasmiṁ na sārajjati, dhammesu na sārajjati, manoviññāṇe na sārajjati, manosamphasse na sārajjati, yamidaṁ manosamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṁ sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vā tasmimpi na sārajjati.
[¶19] > Pali: Tassa asārattassa asaṁyuttassa asammūḷhassa ādīnavānupassino viharato āyatiṁ pañcupādānakkhandhā apacayaṁ gacchanti. Taṇhā cassa ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, sā cassa pahīyati. Tassa kāyikāpi darathā pahīyanti, cetasikāpi darathā pahīyanti; kāyikāpi santāpā pahīyanti, cetasikāpi santāpā pahīyanti; kāyikāpi pariḷāhā pahīyanti, cetasikāpi pariḷāhā pahīyanti. So kāyasukhampi cetosukhampi paṭisaṁvedeti.
[¶20] > Pali: Yā tathābhūtassa diṭṭhi sāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi; yo tathābhūtassa saṅkappo svāssa hoti sammāsaṅkappo; yo tathābhūtassa vāyāmo svāssa hoti sammāvāyāmo; yā tathābhūtassa sati sāssa hoti sammāsati; yo tathābhūtassa samādhi svāssa hoti sammāsamādhi. Pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṁ vacīkammaṁ ājīvo suparisuddho hoti. Evamassāyaṁ ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchati.
[¶21] > Pali: Tassa evaṁ imaṁ ariyaṁ aṭṭhaṅgikaṁ maggaṁ bhāvayato cattāropi satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, cattāropi sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, cattāropi iddhipādā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, pañcapi indriyāni bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, pañcapi balāni bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti, sattapi bojjhaṅgā bhāvanāpāripūriṁ gacchanti.
[¶22] > Pali: Tassime dve dhammā yuganandhā vattanti— samatho ca vipassanā ca. So ye dhammā abhiññā pariññeyyā te dhamme abhiññā parijānāti. Ye dhammā abhiññā pahātabbā te dhamme abhiññā pajahati. Ye dhammā abhiññā bhāvetabbā te dhamme abhiññā bhāveti. Ye dhammā abhiññā sacchikātabbā te dhamme abhiññā sacchikaroti.
[¶23] > Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā pariññeyyā? ‘Pañcupādānakkhandhā’ tissa vacanīyaṁ, seyyathidaṁ— rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Ime dhammā abhiññā pariññeyyā.
[¶24] > Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā pahātabbā? Avijjā ca bhavataṇhā ca— ime dhammā abhiññā pahātabbā.
[¶25] > Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā bhāvetabbā? Samatho ca vipassanā ca— ime dhammā abhiññā bhāvetabbā.
[¶26] These are the things that should be realized by direct knowledge.”
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, dhammā abhiññā sacchikātabbā? Vijjā ca vimutti ca— ime dhammā abhiññā sacchikātabbā”ti.
[¶27] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶28] > Pali: Mahāsaḷāyatanikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 163. MN 150 · With the People of Nagaravinda
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/163/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/163/#p-N
[¶0] MN 150 · With the People of Nagaravinda
> Pali: MN 150 · Nagaravindeyyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Kosalan brahmins named Nagaravinda.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena nagaravindaṁ nāma kosalānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ gāmo tadavasari.
[¶2] The brahmins and householders of Nagaravinda heard, “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—while wandering in the land of the Kosalans has arrived at Nagaravinda, together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho nagaravindeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ nagaravindaṁ anuppatto. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶3] Then the brahmins and householders of Nagaravinda went up to the Buddha. Before sitting down to one side, some bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent. The Buddha said to them:
> Pali: Atha kho nagaravindeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu; sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce bhagavato santike nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho nagaravindeyyake brāhmaṇagahapatike bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶4] “Householders, if wanderers who follow another religion were to ask you: ‘What kind of ascetic or brahmin doesn’t deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration?’ You should answer them: ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are not free of greed, hate, and delusion for sights known by the eye, whose minds are not settled internally, and who conduct themselves badly among the good by way of body, speech, and mind. They don’t deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration. Why is that? Because we ourselves are not free of these things, so we do not see that they have any higher good conduct than us. That’s why they don’t deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration. There are ascetics and brahmins who are not free of greed, hate, and delusion for sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body … ideas known by the mind, who are not settled internally, and who conduct themselves badly among the good by way of body, speech, and mind. They don’t deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration. Why is that? Because we ourselves are not free of these things, so we do not see that they have any higher good conduct than us. That’s why they don’t deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration.’ When questioned by wanderers of other religions, that’s how you should answer them.
> Pali: “Sace vo, gahapatayo, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘kathaṁbhūtā, gahapatayo, samaṇabrāhmaṇā na sakkātabbā na garukātabbā na mānetabbā na pūjetabbā’ti? Evaṁ puṭṭhā tumhe, gahapatayo, tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ evaṁ byākareyyātha: ‘ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu avītarāgā avītadosā avītamohā, ajjhattaṁ avūpasantacittā, samavisamaṁ caranti kāyena vācāya manasā, evarūpā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na sakkātabbā na garukātabbā na mānetabbā na pūjetabbā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mayampi hi cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu avītarāgā avītadosā avītamohā, ajjhattaṁ avūpasantacittā, samavisamaṁ carāma kāyena vācāya manasā, tesaṁ no samacariyampi hetaṁ uttari apassataṁ. Tasmā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā na sakkātabbā na garukātabbā na mānetabbā na pūjetabbā. Ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sotaviññeyyesu saddesu … ghānaviññeyyesu gandhesu … jivhāviññeyyesu rasesu … kāyaviññeyyesu phoṭṭhabbesu … manoviññeyyesu dhammesu avītarāgā avītadosā avītamohā, ajjhattaṁ avūpasantacittā, samavisamaṁ caranti kāyena vācāya manasā, evarūpā samaṇabrāhmaṇā na sakkātabbā na garukātabbā na mānetabbā na pūjetabbā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mayampi hi manoviññeyyesu dhammesu avītarāgā avītadosā avītamohā, ajjhattaṁ avūpasantacittā, samavisamaṁ carāma kāyena vācāya manasā, tesaṁ no samacariyampi hetaṁ uttari apassataṁ. Tasmā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā na sakkātabbā na garukātabbā na mānetabbā na pūjetabbā’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭhā tumhe, gahapatayo, tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ evaṁ byākareyyātha.
[¶5] If wanderers of other religions were to ask you: ‘What kind of ascetic or brahmin deserves honor, respect, reverence, and veneration?’ You should answer them: ‘There are ascetics and brahmins who are free of greed, hate, and delusion for sights known by the eye, whose minds are settled internally, and who conduct themselves well by way of body, speech, and mind. They deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration. Why is that? Because we ourselves are not free of these things, but we see that they have a higher good conduct than us. That’s why they deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration. There are ascetics and brahmins who are free of greed, hate, and delusion for sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body … ideas known by the mind, whose minds are settled internally, and who conduct themselves well by way of body, speech, and mind. They deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration. Why is that? Because we ourselves are not free of these things, but we see that they have a higher good conduct than us. That’s why they deserve honor, respect, reverence, and veneration.’ When questioned by wanderers of other religions, that’s how you should answer them.
> Pali: Sace pana vo, gahapatayo, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘kathaṁbhūtā, gahapatayo, samaṇabrāhmaṇā sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā’ti? Evaṁ puṭṭhā tumhe, gahapatayo, tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ evaṁ byākareyyātha: ‘ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu vītarāgā vītadosā vītamohā, ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacittā, samacariyaṁ caranti kāyena vācāya manasā, evarūpā samaṇabrāhmaṇā sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mayampi hi cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu avītarāgā avītadosā avītamohā, ajjhattaṁ avūpasantacittā, samavisamaṁ carāma kāyena vācāya manasā, tesaṁ no samacariyampi hetaṁ uttari passataṁ. Tasmā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā. Ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sotaviññeyyesu saddesu … ghānaviññeyyesu gandhesu … jivhāviññeyyesu rasesu … kāyaviññeyyesu phoṭṭhabbesu … manoviññeyyesu dhammesu vītarāgā vītadosā vītamohā, ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacittā, samacariyaṁ caranti kāyena vācāya manasā, evarūpā samaṇabrāhmaṇā sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mayampi hi manoviññeyyesu dhammesu avītarāgā avītadosā avītamohā ajjhattaṁ avūpasantacittā, samavisamaṁ carāma kāyena vācāya manasā, tesaṁ no samacariyampi hetaṁ uttari passataṁ. Tasmā te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭhā tumhe, gahapatayo, tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ evaṁ byākareyyātha.
[¶6] If wanderers of other religions were to ask you: ‘But what reasons and evidence do you have regarding those venerables that justifies saying, “Clearly those venerables are free of greed, hate, and delusion, or practicing to be free of them”?’ You should answer them: ‘It’s because those venerables frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest. In such places there are no sights known by the eye to see and enjoy, there are no sounds known by the ear to hear and enjoy, no odors known by the nose to smell and enjoy, no flavors known by the tongue to taste and enjoy, and no touches known by the body to feel and enjoy. These are the reasons and evidence that you have regarding those venerables that justifies saying, “Clearly those venerables are free of greed, hate, and delusion, or practicing to be free of them”.’ When questioned by wanderers of other religions, that’s how you should answer them.”
> Pali: Sace pana vo, gahapatayo, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘ke panāyasmantānaṁ ākārā, ke anvayā, yena tumhe āyasmanto evaṁ vadetha? Addhā te āyasmanto vītarāgā vā rāgavinayāya vā paṭipannā, vītadosā vā dosavinayāya vā paṭipannā, vītamohā vā mohavinayāya vā paṭipannā’ti? Evaṁ puṭṭhā tumhe, gahapatayo, tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ evaṁ byākareyyātha: ‘tathā hi te āyasmanto araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti. Natthi kho pana tattha tathārūpā cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā ye disvā disvā abhirameyyuṁ, natthi kho pana tattha tathārūpā sotaviññeyyā saddā ye sutvā sutvā abhirameyyuṁ, natthi kho pana tattha tathārūpā ghānaviññeyyā gandhā ye ghāyitvā ghāyitvā abhirameyyuṁ, natthi kho pana tattha tathārūpā jivhāviññeyyā rasā ye sāyitvā sāyitvā abhirameyyuṁ, natthi kho pana tattha tathārūpā kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā ye phusitvā phusitvā abhirameyyuṁ. Ime kho no, āvuso, ākārā, ime anvayā, yena mayaṁ evaṁ vadema— addhā te āyasmanto vītarāgā vā rāgavinayāya vā paṭipannā, vītadosā vā dosavinayāya vā paṭipannā, vītamohā vā mohavinayāya vā paṭipannā’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭhā tumhe, gahapatayo, tesaṁ aññatitthiyānaṁ paribbājakānaṁ evaṁ byākareyyāthā”ti.
[¶7] When he had spoken, the brahmins and householders of Nagaravinda said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. We go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember us as lay followers who have gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, nagaravindeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsake no bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupete saraṇaṁ gate”ti.
[¶8] > Pali: Nagaravindeyyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 164. MN 151 · The Purification of Alms
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/164/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/164/#p-N
[¶0] MN 151 · The Purification of Alms
> Pali: MN 151 · Piṇḍapātapārisuddhisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
[¶2] Then in the late afternoon, Sāriputta came out of retreat and went to the Buddha. He bowed and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Sāriputta, your faculties are so very clear, and your complexion is pure and bright. What kind of meditation are you usually practicing these days?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “Vippasannāni kho te, sāriputta, indriyāni, parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto. Katamena kho tvaṁ, sāriputta, vihārena etarahi bahulaṁ viharasī”ti?
[¶3] “Sir, these days I usually practice the meditation on emptiness.”
> Pali: “Suññatāvihārena kho ahaṁ, bhante, etarahi bahulaṁ viharāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Good, good, Sāriputta! It seems you usually practice the meditation of a great man. For emptiness is the meditation of a great man.
> Pali: “Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta. Mahāpurisavihārena kira tvaṁ, sāriputta, etarahi bahulaṁ viharasi. Mahāpurisavihāro eso, sāriputta, yadidaṁ— suññatā.
[¶5] Now, a mendicant might wish: ‘May I usually practice the meditation on emptiness.’ So they should reflect: ‘Along the path that I went for alms, or in the place I wandered for alms, or along the path that I returned from alms, was there any desire or greed or hate or delusion or aversion in my heart for sights known by the eye?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that there was such desire or greed or hate or delusion or aversion in their heart, they should make an effort to give up those unskillful qualities. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that there was no such desire or greed or hate or delusion or aversion in their heart, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, sāriputta, bhikkhu sace ākaṅkheyya: ‘suññatāvihārena bahulaṁ vihareyyan’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘yena cāhaṁ maggena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ, yasmiñca padese piṇḍāya acariṁ, yena ca maggena gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamiṁ, atthi nu kho me tattha cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu chando vā rāgo vā doso vā moho vā paṭighaṁ vāpi cetaso’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘yena cāhaṁ maggena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ, yasmiñca padese piṇḍāya acariṁ, yena ca maggena gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamiṁ, atthi me tattha cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu chando vā rāgo vā doso vā moho vā paṭighaṁ vāpi cetaso’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā tesaṁyeva pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘yena cāhaṁ maggena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ, yasmiñca padese piṇḍāya acariṁ, yena ca maggena gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamiṁ, natthi me tattha cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu chando vā rāgo vā doso vā moho vā paṭighaṁ vāpi cetaso’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶6] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Along the path that I went for alms, or in the place I wandered for alms, or along the path that I returned from alms, was there any desire or greed or hate or delusion or repulsion in my heart for sounds known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body … ideas known by the mind?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that there was such desire or greed or hate or delusion or aversion in their heart, they should make an effort to give up those unskillful qualities. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that there was no such desire or greed or hate or delusion or aversion in their heart, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘yena cāhaṁ maggena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ, yasmiñca padese piṇḍāya acariṁ, yena ca maggena gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamiṁ, atthi nu kho me tattha sotaviññeyyesu saddesu …pe… ghānaviññeyyesu gandhesu … jivhāviññeyyesu rasesu … kāyaviññeyyesu phoṭṭhabbesu … manoviññeyyesu dhammesu chando vā rāgo vā doso vā moho vā paṭighaṁ vāpi cetaso’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘yena cāhaṁ maggena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ, yasmiñca padese piṇḍāya acariṁ, yena ca maggena gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamiṁ, atthi me tattha manoviññeyyesu dhammesu chando vā rāgo vā doso vā moho vā paṭighaṁ vāpi cetaso’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā tesaṁyeva pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘yena cāhaṁ maggena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ, yasmiñca padese piṇḍāya acariṁ, yena ca maggena gāmato piṇḍāya paṭikkamiṁ, natthi me tattha manoviññeyyesu dhammesu chando vā rāgo vā doso vā moho vā paṭighaṁ vāpi cetaso’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶7] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Have I given up the five kinds of sensual stimulation?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have not given them up, they should make an effort to do so. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have given them up, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘pahīnā nu kho me pañca kāmaguṇā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘appahīnā kho me pañca kāmaguṇā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā pañcannaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ pahānāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘pahīnā kho me pañca kāmaguṇā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶8] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Have I given up the five hindrances?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have not given them up, they should make an effort to do so. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have given them up, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘pahīnā nu kho me pañca nīvaraṇā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘appahīnā kho me pañca nīvaraṇā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā pañcannaṁ nīvaraṇānaṁ pahānāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘pahīnā kho me pañca nīvaraṇā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶9] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Have I completely understood the five grasping aggregates?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have not completely understood them, they should make an effort to do so. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have completely understood them, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘pariññātā nu kho me pañcupādānakkhandhā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘apariññātā kho me pañcupādānakkhandhā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā pañcannaṁ upādānakkhandhānaṁ pariññāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘pariññātā kho me pañcupādānakkhandhā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶10] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Have I developed the four kinds of mindfulness meditation?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they haven’t developed them, they should make an effort to do so. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have developed them, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvitā nu kho me cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvitā kho me cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā catunnaṁ satipaṭṭhānānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvitā kho me cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶11] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Have I developed the four right efforts … the four bases of psychic power … the five faculties … the five powers … the seven awakening factors … the noble eightfold path?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they haven’t developed it, they should make an effort to do so. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have developed it, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvitā nu kho me cattāro sammappadhānā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvitā kho me cattāro sammappadhānā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā catunnaṁ sammappadhānānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvitā kho me cattāro sammappadhānā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu. Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvitā nu kho me cattāro iddhipādā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvitā kho me cattāro iddhipādā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā catunnaṁ iddhipādānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvitā kho me cattāro iddhipādā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu. Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvitāni nu kho me pañcindriyānī’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvitāni kho me pañcindriyānī’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā pañcannaṁ indriyānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvitāni kho me pañcindriyānī’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu. Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvitāni nu kho me pañca balānī’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvitāni kho me pañca balānī’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā pañcannaṁ balānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvitāni kho me pañca balānī’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu. Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvitā nu kho me satta bojjhaṅgā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvitā kho me satta bojjhaṅgā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā sattannaṁ bojjhaṅgānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvitā kho me satta bojjhaṅgā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu. Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvito nu kho me ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvito kho me ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvito kho me ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶12] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Have I developed serenity and discernment?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they haven’t developed them, they should make an effort to do so. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have developed them, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘bhāvitā nu kho me samatho ca vipassanā cā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘abhāvitā kho me samatho ca vipassanā cā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā samathavipassanānaṁ bhāvanāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘bhāvitā kho me samatho ca vipassanā cā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶13] Furthermore, a mendicant should reflect: ‘Have I realized knowledge and freedom?’ Suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they haven’t realized them, they should make an effort to do so. But suppose that, upon checking, a mendicant knows that they have realized them, they should meditate with rapture and joy, training day and night in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṁ: ‘sacchikatā nu kho me vijjā ca vimutti cā’ti? Sace, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘asacchikatā kho me vijjā ca vimutti cā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā vijjāya vimuttiyā sacchikiriyāya vāyamitabbaṁ. Sace pana, sāriputta, bhikkhu paccavekkhamāno evaṁ jānāti: ‘sacchikatā kho me vijjā ca vimutti cā’ti, tena, sāriputta, bhikkhunā teneva pītipāmojjena vihātabbaṁ ahorattānusikkhinā kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶14] Whether in the past, future, or present, all those who purify their almsfood do so by continually checking in this way. So, Sāriputta, you should all train like this: ‘We shall purify our almsfood by continually checking.’”
> Pali: Ye hi keci, sāriputta, atītamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā piṇḍapātaṁ parisodhesuṁ, sabbe te evameva paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā piṇḍapātaṁ parisodhesuṁ. Yepi hi keci, sāriputta, anāgatamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā piṇḍapātaṁ parisodhessanti, sabbe te evameva paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā piṇḍapātaṁ parisodhessanti. Yepi hi keci, sāriputta, etarahi samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā piṇḍapātaṁ parisodhenti, sabbe te evameva paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā piṇḍapātaṁ parisodhenti. Tasmātiha, sāriputta, ‘paccavekkhitvā paccavekkhitvā piṇḍapātaṁ parisodhessāmā’ti— evañhi vo, sāriputta, sikkhitabban”ti.
[¶15] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Sāriputta approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶16] > Pali: Piṇḍapātapārisuddhisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 165. MN 152 · The Development of the Faculties
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/165/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-majjhima-nikaya/165/#p-N
[¶0] MN 152 · The Development of the Faculties
> Pali: MN 152 · Indriyabhāvanāsutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Kajaṅgalā in a bamboo grove.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā gajaṅgalāyaṁ viharati suveḷuvane.
[¶2] Then the student Uttara, a pupil of the brahmin Pārāsariya, approached the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Uttara, does Pārāsariya teach his disciples the development of the faculties?”
> Pali: Atha kho uttaro māṇavo pārāsiviyantevāsī yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho uttaraṁ māṇavaṁ pārāsiviyantevāsiṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “deseti, uttara, pārāsiviyo brāhmaṇo sāvakānaṁ indriyabhāvanan”ti?
[¶3] “He does, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Deseti, bho gotama, pārāsiviyo brāhmaṇo sāvakānaṁ indriyabhāvanan”ti.
[¶4] “But how does he teach it?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana, uttara, deseti pārāsiviyo brāhmaṇo sāvakānaṁ indriyabhāvanan”ti?
[¶5] “Worthy Gotama, it’s when the eye sees no sight and the ear hears no sound. That’s how Pārāsariya teaches his disciples the development of the faculties.”
> Pali: “Idha, bho gotama, cakkhunā rūpaṁ na passati, sotena saddaṁ na suṇāti— evaṁ kho, bho gotama, deseti pārāsiviyo brāhmaṇo sāvakānaṁ indriyabhāvanan”ti.
[¶6] “In that case, Uttara, a blind person and a deaf person will have developed faculties according to what Pārāsariya says. For a blind person sees no sight with their eyes and a deaf person hears no sound with their ears.” When he said this, Uttara sat silent, dismayed, shoulders drooping, downcast, depressed, with nothing to say.
> Pali: “Evaṁ sante kho, uttara, andho bhāvitindriyo bhavissati, badhiro bhāvitindriyo bhavissati; yathā pārāsiviyassa brāhmaṇassa vacanaṁ. Andho hi, uttara, cakkhunā rūpaṁ na passati, badhiro sotena saddaṁ na suṇātī”ti. Evaṁ vutte, uttaro māṇavo pārāsiviyantevāsī tuṇhībhūto maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho pajjhāyanto appaṭibhāno nisīdi.
[¶7] Knowing this, the Buddha addressed Venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, the development of the faculties taught by Pārāsariya is quite different from the supreme development of the faculties in the training of the Noble One.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā uttaraṁ māṇavaṁ pārāsiviyantevāsiṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ maṅkubhūtaṁ pattakkhandhaṁ adhomukhaṁ pajjhāyantaṁ appaṭibhānaṁ viditvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “aññathā kho, ānanda, deseti pārāsiviyo brāhmaṇo sāvakānaṁ indriyabhāvanaṁ, aññathā ca panānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā hotī”ti.
[¶8] “Now is the time, Blessed One! Now is the time, Holy One. Let the Buddha teach the supreme development of the faculties in the training of the Noble One. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Etassa, bhagavā, kālo; etassa, sugata, kālo yaṁ bhagavā ariyassa vinaye anuttaraṁ indriyabhāvanaṁ deseyya. Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶9] “Well then, Ānanda, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tenahānanda, suṇāhi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶11] “And how, Ānanda, is there the supreme development of the faculties in the training of the Noble One? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, in them arises what is agreeable, what is disagreeable, and what is both agreeable and disagreeable. They understand: ‘What is agreeable, what is disagreeable, and what is both agreeable and disagreeable have arisen in me. That’s conditioned, crude, and dependently originated. But this is peaceful and sublime, namely equanimity.’ Then the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. It’s like how a person with clear eyes might open their eyes then shut them; or might shut their eyes then open them. Such is the speed, the swiftness, the ease with which anything agreeable, disagreeable, and both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. In the training of the Noble One this is called the supreme development of the faculties regarding sights known by the eye.
> Pali: “Kathañcānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā hoti? Idhānanda, bhikkhuno cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘uppannaṁ kho me idaṁ manāpaṁ, uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ, uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ. Tañca kho saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ paṭiccasamuppannaṁ. Etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ— upekkhā’ti. Tassa taṁ uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati; upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, cakkhumā puriso ummīletvā vā nimīleyya, nimīletvā vā ummīleyya; evameva kho, ānanda, yassa kassaci evaṁsīghaṁ evaṁtuvaṭaṁ evaṁappakasirena uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti— ayaṁ vuccatānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu.
[¶12] Furthermore, when a mendicant hears a sound with their ears, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. They understand: ‘What is agreeable, what is disagreeable, and what is both agreeable and disagreeable have arisen in me. That’s conditioned, crude, and dependently originated. But this is peaceful and sublime, namely equanimity.’ Then the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. It’s like how a strong person can effortlessly snap their fingers. Such is the speed, the swiftness, the ease with which anything agreeable, disagreeable, and both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. In the training of the Noble One this is called the supreme development of the faculties regarding sounds known by the ear.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno sotena saddaṁ sutvā uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘uppannaṁ kho me idaṁ manāpaṁ, uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ, uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ. Tañca kho saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ paṭiccasamuppannaṁ. Etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ— upekkhā’ti. Tassa taṁ uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati; upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, balavā puriso appakasireneva accharaṁ pahareyya; evameva kho, ānanda, yassa kassaci evaṁsīghaṁ evaṁtuvaṭaṁ evaṁappakasirena uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti— ayaṁ vuccatānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā sotaviññeyyesu saddesu.
[¶13] Furthermore, when a mendicant smells an odor with their nose, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. They understand: ‘What is agreeable, what is disagreeable, and what is both agreeable and disagreeable have arisen in me. That’s conditioned, crude, and dependently originated. But this is peaceful and sublime, namely equanimity.’ Then the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. It’s like how a drop of water would roll off a gently sloping lotus leaf, and would not stay there. Such is the speed, the swiftness, the ease with which anything agreeable, disagreeable, and both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. In the training of the Noble One this is called the supreme development of the faculties regarding smells known by the nose.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘uppannaṁ kho me idaṁ manāpaṁ, uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ, uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ. Tañca kho saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ paṭiccasamuppannaṁ. Etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ— upekkhā’ti. Tassa taṁ uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati; upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, īsakampoṇe padumapalāse udakaphusitāni pavattanti, na saṇṭhanti; evameva kho, ānanda, yassa kassaci evaṁsīghaṁ evaṁtuvaṭaṁ evaṁappakasirena uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti— ayaṁ vuccatānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā ghānaviññeyyesu gandhesu.
[¶14] Furthermore, when a mendicant tastes a flavor with their tongue, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. They understand: ‘What is agreeable, what is disagreeable, and what is both agreeable and disagreeable have arisen in me. That’s conditioned, crude, and dependently originated. But this is peaceful and sublime, namely equanimity.’ Then the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. It’s like how a strong person who’s formed a glob of spit on the tip of their tongue could easily spit it out. Such is the speed, the swiftness, the ease with which anything agreeable, disagreeable, and both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. In the training of the Noble One this is called the supreme development of the faculties regarding tastes known by the tongue.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘uppannaṁ kho me idaṁ manāpaṁ, uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ, uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ. Tañca kho saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ paṭiccasamuppannaṁ. Etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ— upekkhā’ti. Tassa taṁ uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati; upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, balavā puriso jivhagge kheḷapiṇḍaṁ saṁyūhitvā appakasirena vameyya; evameva kho, ānanda, yassa kassaci evaṁsīghaṁ evaṁtuvaṭaṁ evaṁappakasirena uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti— ayaṁ vuccatānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā jivhāviññeyyesu rasesu.
[¶15] Furthermore, when a mendicant encounters a touch with their body, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. They understand: ‘What is agreeable, what is disagreeable, and what is both agreeable and disagreeable have arisen in me. That’s conditioned, crude, and dependently originated. But this is peaceful and sublime, namely equanimity.’ Then the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. It’s like how a strong person can extend or contract their arm. Such is the speed, the swiftness, the ease with which anything agreeable, disagreeable, and both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. In the training of the Noble One this is called the supreme development of the faculties regarding touches known by the body.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘uppannaṁ kho me idaṁ manāpaṁ, uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ, uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ. Tañca kho saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ paṭiccasamuppannaṁ. Etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ— upekkhā’ti. Tassa taṁ uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati; upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva kho, ānanda, yassa kassaci evaṁsīghaṁ evaṁtuvaṭaṁ evaṁappakasirena uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti— ayaṁ vuccatānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā kāyaviññeyyesu phoṭṭhabbesu.
[¶16] Furthermore, when a mendicant knows a thought with their mind, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. They understand: ‘What is agreeable, what is disagreeable, and what is both agreeable and disagreeable have arisen in me. That’s conditioned, crude, and dependently originated. But this is peaceful and sublime, namely equanimity.’ Then the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. It’s like how a strong person could let two or three drops of water fall onto an iron cauldron that had been heated all day. The drops would be slow to fall, but they’d quickly dry up and evaporate. Such is the speed, the swiftness, the ease with which anything agreeable, disagreeable, and both agreeable and disagreeable that arose in them cease, and equanimity becomes stabilized. In the training of the Noble One this is called the supreme development of the faculties regarding ideas known by the mind. That’s how there is the supreme development of the faculties in the training of the Noble One.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno manasā dhammaṁ viññāya uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘uppannaṁ kho me idaṁ manāpaṁ, uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ, uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ. Tañca kho saṅkhataṁ oḷārikaṁ paṭiccasamuppannaṁ. Etaṁ santaṁ etaṁ paṇītaṁ yadidaṁ— upekkhā’ti. Tassa taṁ uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati; upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, balavā puriso divasaṁsantatte ayokaṭāhe dve vā tīṇi vā udakaphusitāni nipāteyya. Dandho, ānanda, udakaphusitānaṁ nipāto, atha kho naṁ khippameva parikkhayaṁ pariyādānaṁ gaccheyya; evameva kho, ānanda, yassa kassaci evaṁsīghaṁ evaṁtuvaṭaṁ evaṁappakasirena uppannaṁ manāpaṁ uppannaṁ amanāpaṁ uppannaṁ manāpāmanāpaṁ nirujjhati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti— ayaṁ vuccatānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā manoviññeyyesu dhammesu. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā hoti.
[¶17] And how are they a practicing trainee? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. They are horrified, repelled, and disgusted by that. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know a thought with their mind, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. They are horrified, repelled, and disgusted by that. That’s how they are a practicing trainee.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, sekho hoti pāṭipado? Idhānanda, bhikkhuno cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So tena uppannena manāpena uppannena amanāpena uppannena manāpāmanāpena aṭṭīyati harāyati jigucchati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So tena uppannena manāpena uppannena amanāpena uppannena manāpāmanāpena aṭṭīyati harāyati jigucchati. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, sekho hoti pāṭipado.
[¶18] And how are they a noble one with developed faculties? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the unrepulsive in the repulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the repulsive in the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the unrepulsive in the repulsive and the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the repulsive in the unrepulsive and the repulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate staying equanimous, mindful and aware, shunning both the repulsive and the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do.
> Pali: Kathañcānanda, ariyo hoti bhāvitindriyo? Idhānanda, bhikkhuno cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘appaṭikūle paṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūle ca appaṭikūle ca appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘appaṭikūle ca paṭikūle ca paṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūlañca appaṭikūlañca tadubhayaṁ abhinivajjetvā upekkhako vihareyyaṁ sato sampajāno’ti, upekkhako tattha viharati sato sampajāno.
[¶19] When they hear a sound with their ear … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know a thought with their mind, the agreeable, the disagreeable, and the both agreeable and disagreeable arise in them. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the unrepulsive in the repulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the repulsive in the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the unrepulsive in the repulsive and the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the repulsive in the unrepulsive and the repulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate staying equanimous, mindful and aware, shunning both the repulsive and the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. That’s how they are a noble one with developed faculties.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhuno sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya uppajjati manāpaṁ, uppajjati amanāpaṁ, uppajjati manāpāmanāpaṁ. So sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘appaṭikūle paṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūle ca appaṭikūle ca appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘appaṭikūle ca paṭikūle ca paṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūlañca appaṭikūlañca tadubhayampi abhinivajjetvā upekkhako vihareyyaṁ sato sampajāno’ti, upekkhako tattha viharati sato sampajāno. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, ariyo hoti bhāvitindriyo.
[¶20] So, Ānanda, I have taught the supreme development of the faculties in the training of the Noble One, I have taught the practicing trainee, and I have taught the noble one with developed faculties.
> Pali: Iti kho, ānanda, desitā mayā ariyassa vinaye anuttarā indriyabhāvanā, desito sekho pāṭipado, desito ariyo bhāvitindriyo.
[¶21] Out of sympathy, I’ve done what a teacher should do who wants what’s best for their disciples. Here are these roots of trees, and here are these empty huts. Practice absorption, Ānanda! Don’t be negligent! Don’t regret it later! This is my instruction to you.”
> Pali: Yaṁ kho, ānanda, satthārā karaṇīyaṁ sāvakānaṁ hitesinā anukampakena anukampaṁ upādāya, kataṁ vo taṁ mayā. Etāni, ānanda, rukkhamūlāni, etāni suññāgārāni, jhāyathānanda, mā pamādattha, mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha. Ayaṁ vo amhākaṁ anusāsanī”ti.
[¶22] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶23] > Pali: Indriyabhāvanāsuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶24] > Pali: Saḷāyatanavaggo niṭṭhito pañcamo.
[¶25] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶26] > Pali: Anāthapiṇḍiko channo,
puṇṇo nandakarāhulā;
Chachakkaṁ saḷāyatanikaṁ,
nagaravindeyyasuddhikā;
Indriyabhāvanā cāpi,
vaggo ovādapañcamoti.
[¶27] > Pali: Idaṁ vaggānamuddānaṁ
[¶28] > Pali: Devadahonupado ca,
Suññato ca vibhaṅgako;
Saḷāyatanoti vaggā,
Uparipaṇṇāsake ṭhitāti.
[¶29] > Pali: Uparipaṇṇāsakaṁ samattaṁ.
[¶30] > Pali: Tīhi paṇṇāsakehi paṭimaṇḍito sakalo
[¶31] The Middle Discourses are complete.
> Pali: majjhimanikāyo samatto.